TM 5 1300

ARMY TM 5-1300
NAVY NAVFAC P-397

AIR FORCE AFR 88-22
STRUCTURES TO RESIST .
. THE EFFECTS OF ACCIDENTAL
EXPLOSIONS
UApproved for public release; distribution is unlimited"
DEPARTMENTS OF THE ARMY, THE NAVY, AND THE AIR FORCE

NOVEMBER 1990
TN 5-1300/HAVPAC P-397/APR 88-22
FORBIiORD
"8TRUCTlJRB8 TO RBSIST 'l'IIB EFFECTS OF ACCIDEH'I'AL EXPLOSIONS"

Revision 1
Revision 1 is a significant change to this tri-Service manual. It supersedes
Change 1 of 17 March 1971 and provides design critsria for a wide assortment
of construction materials. Blast resistant capacities of selected, preengineered facilities and suppressive shields are now formally recognized.
Significant changes are made in design criteria for stlrrups. Single leg
stirrups with 135 degree bends are permitted for rotations up to eight degrees
for Category 2 protection. Membrane stresses are recognized for the reserve
strength they provide as dynamic rotations increase. <:apacitiesand design
procedures for blast resistant windows are addressed.
,
Many individuals contributed to this manual and all such contributions are
appreciated. Contributions from Mr. Norval Dobbs, Dr. Wilfred Baker and
Dr. Thomas Zaker are particularly worthy of note.
Design procedures in this manual are recognized by DOD 6055.9-STD, "Ammunition
and Explosives Safety Standards" and are intended for use in the design and
analysis of protective constructions intended to contre)l the effects of
accidental explosions.
The design procedures provide
.l
basis for quantitative
protection against propagation of explosions, damage tC) facilities, and loss
of life. Nevertheless, in a work of this magnitude it is expected that there

may be points which require further verification or modification as a result
of future tests and experience. Recommendations for change or comments with
regard to the usefulness of the manual may be submitted to:
Chairman
Department ~f Defense Explosives Safety Board
2461 Eisenhower Avenue
Room 856C, Hoffman Building #1
Alexandria, VA 22331-0600
RBPRODUCTION AUTHORIZATION/RESTRICTIONS
This manual has been prepared by or for the Government and, except to the
extent indicated below, is public property and not subject to copyright.
Reprints or republications of this manual should include a credit substantially as follows: "Joint Departments of the Army, the Navy, and the Air Force,
Structures to Resist the Effects of Accidental Explosions, TM 5-1300/NAVFAC p397/AFR 88-22."
If the reprint or republication contains copyrighted material, the credit
should also state: "Anyone wishing to make further use of copyrighted material, by itself and apart from this text, should seek nec'essary permission
directly from ths proprietors."
'TIl
5-1300
'HAVPAC P,..397
'AFR 88-22
ARMY MANUAL
BBADQUARTBRS
DEPARTMENTS OP THE' ARMY, THE
NAVY, AND THE AIR FORCE' "
WASHINGTON, DC, 19 NOVBKBBR.1990
No. ,5-1300
NAVY MANUAL
NO. NAVPAC P-397
AIR FORCB REGULATION
No. ,88-22
STRUCTURES TO RESIST THE EPFECTS OP ACCIDENTAL EXPLOSIONS

CHAPTER 1. INTRODUCTION
SECTION
Purpose .
1-1
1-2
Objective
1-3
Background
1-4
Scope
1-5
Format
General
1-6
1-7
Safety Factor
1-8
System Components
1-8.1 General
1-8.2 Donor System
1-8.3 Acceptor System
1-9
Protection Categories
1-10 Protective Systems
1-10.1
Protective ,Structures
1-10.2
Containment Type structures
1-10.3
Shelters,
1-10.4
Barriers
1-11 Human Tolerance .
1-11.1
Blast Pressures
1-11.2
Structural Motion
1-11.3
Fragments .
1-12 Equipment Tolerance
1-12.1
Blast Pressures.
1-12.2
Structural Motion and Shock
1-12.3
Fragments
1-13 Tolerance of Explosives . .
1-13.1
General .
1-13.2
Blast Pressures
1-13.3
Structural Motions
1-13.4
Fragments
1-14 Structural Response . .
1-14.1
General
1-14.2
Pressure Design Ranges
1-14.3
Analyzing Blast Environment
APPENDIX lA List of Symbols
APPENDIX IB Bibliography
.'
. .'. .
... ..
"
".
..
,
...
"
- r'
...
"Approved for public release; 'distribut'i:on is unlimited"

'
'This manual supersedes TM 5-1300INAVFAC P397IAFM 8822, dated 15 Jun~ 1969,
. ":
PAGE
.1-1
'1-1
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-4
1-4
1-4
1-4
;. 1-6
1-8
1-9
1-9
1-10
.: 1-11
1-11
1-11
1-11
1-12
1-14
1-14
1-14'
1-15
1-16
, 1-16
1-16
1-16
1-17
1-17
1-29
1-29
1.,.29
1-30
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
CHAPTER 2. BLAST. FRAGMENT. AND SHOCK LOADS

Section
PAGE
2-1
Purpose . .
.. 2-1
Objective .
2-2
2-1
Background
2-3
2-1
Scope' ;
2-4
2-2
2-5 . Format
2-3
General
2-6
. 2-4
Effects of Explosive Output
2-7
2-5
Blast Phenomena . . . . ,
2-8
2-6
2-8.1 General
.
2,6
2-8.2 Explosive Materials
2-6
TNT Equivalency . . . . .
2-9
2-7
2-10 Blast-Loading Categories
2-8
.'
2-10.1
Unconfined Explosion
2-8
2-10.2
Confined Explosion
2-8
.
2-11 Blast Loading Protection
2-9
2-12 Blast-Wave Phenomena
2-10
2-13 Unconfined Explosions . , .
.. 2-11
2-13.1
Free Air Burst
.
2-11
2-13.2
Air Burst . . .
" " 2-12
2-13.3
Surface Burst.
.: 2-13
2-13.4
Multiple Explosions
.2-14
-.
2-14 . Confined Explosions
.
2-15
. 2 -14.1
Effects of Confinement.
2-15
2-14.2
Shock Pressures.
2-17
2-14.3
Gas Pressures . . . . .
2-23
2-14.4
Leakage Pressures . . '.
2-26
2-15 External Blast Loads on Structures
2-29
2-15.1
General
.
2-29 .
2-15.2
Forces Acting on Structure
. ,
'0'
2-30
2-15.3
Above-Ground Rectangular Structure Without Openings
2-31
, 2-15.4
Above Ground Rectangular Structures with Openings.
2-35
2-15.5
Pressure Buildup In Structures.
2-41
.,..
2-287
2-16 General
- 2-287
2-17 Primary Fragments . . . . . . .
2-287
2-17'.1
General . . . . . .
2-17.2
Initial Fragment Velocity
2-288
2-17.3
Fragment Mass Distribution
2-289
2-292
2-17.4
Variation of Fragment Velocity with Distance
2-17.5
Primary Fragments
Shape, Caliber Density a~d Impa~t
Angle .
2-294
2-18 Secondary Fragments
2-296
2-296
2-18.1
General
2-18.2
Velocity of Unconstrained Secondary Fragments
2-297
2-18.3
Velocity of Constr~ined Secondary Fragments
2-300
2-19 Fragment.Trajectories
2-301
-,
"
2-326
2-20 Introduction . . . . .
.2-326
2-21 Ground Shock . . . . .
.'
2-21.1
Introduction
2-326
2-327
2-21.2
Air Blast-Induced Ground Shock
2-329
2-21.3
Direct-Induced Ground Motion
. . . . , ... ,.
2-22 Air Shock
" '. . 2 - 330
2-22.1
Introduction
2-330
2-330
2-22.2
Method of Analysis
.~
11
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR
2 ~ 332,
2-332
2-332
2-333
2-334
2-23
Structure Motions . . . . . .
2-23.1
Introduction
2-23.2
Net Ground Shock
2-23.3
Maximum Structure Motion,
2-24 Shock Response Spectra
2-24.1
'Introduction
2-24.2
Definition of Shock Spectra Grid
2-24.3
Response Spectra
,
APPENDIX 2A Illustrative Examples
APPENDIX 2B List of Symbols
APPENDIX 2C Bibliography
. 2-334~
2-334
2-335
.
,
88~22
"
,', t
.)
. '. "
CHAPTER 3. PRINCIPLES OF DYNAMIC ANALYSIS
'. '
3 -1
Purpose..
3-2
Objective.
,
3-3
Background
3-4
Scope.
3-5
Format
3-6
General
." .
3-7
General
3-8
Introduction
3-9
Ultimate Resistance
3-9.1 General
3-9.2 One-Way Elements
3-9.3 Two-Way Elements
3-9.4 Openings in Two-Way Elements
3-10 Post-Ultimate Resistance . . , . .
3-11 Partial Failure and Ultimate Deflection
3-12 Elasto-P1astic Resistance . . . . . . .
3-13 Elasto-P1astic Stiffnesses and Deflections
3-14 Resistance-Deflection Functions for Design
3-14.1
General
.
: '.
,,3-14.2,
Limited Deflections
3-14.3
Large Deflections
3-15 Support Shears or Reactions
3-16 Introduction . . . . ' . .
3-17 Dynamic Design Factors
3-17.1
Introduction
-. r.~
3-17.2
Load, Mass, and Resistance Factors
3-17.3
Load-Mass Factor . . . . .
3-17.4
Natural Period of Vibration
..' '.
3-18 Introduction . . . . . . , . . . . . .
3-19 Elements Which Respond to Pressure Only and Pressure-Time Relationship.
.,..
.'
3-19.1
General
: .. , .
'.
3-19.2
Analysis by Numerical Methods .'
3-19.3
Design Charts for Idealized Loadings
3- 20 Elements Which Respond to Impulse
, . . . .
3-20.1
,General., . . . . . .
. ....
3-20.2
Determination of Time to Reach Maximum Deflection
APPENqIX 3A ~llustrative Examples
.:
"
-;
iii
3-1
3-1
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-7
3-8
3-8
3-8
3-9
3-13
3-14
'3-14
3-15
'3 -16 '
3-17
3-17
3-18
, 3-18
3-18
3-72
3-73
3-73
3-74
3-77
3-79
3-85
3-85
3-85
3-85
3-90
3-98
3-98
3-101
TH S-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
CHAPTER 4. REINFORCED CONCRETE DESIGN

4 -1
Purpose..
4-1
4-2
Objective.
4-1
4-3
Background
4-1
4-4
Scope.
4-2
4-5
Format
4-3
4-6' General
".,
4-4
4-7
General
4-5
, .
4-8
Modes of Structural Behavior
4-5
'-, , .
4-9
Structural Behavior of Reinforced Concrete
'4-5 '
'
4-9.1 General
.
4-5,
4-9.2 Ductile Mode of Behavior in the Far' Design Range
4-6
4-9.3 Ductile Mode of Behavior in the Close-in Design Range
4-7
4-9.4 Brittle Mode of Behavior
4''7
4-10 Introduction . . . . . . . .
.
4-16
4-11 Stress-Strain Curve . . . . .
4-16.
4-12 Allowable Material Strengths
4-17
.4-12.1
General . . .
'4-17 '
4-12.2
Reinforcement, .
4-17
4-12.3
Concrete . .
4-184-13 Dynamic Design Stresses for Reinforced Concrete
4-18
4-18 c'
4-13.1
General . . . . . . . .
.'
4-13.2
Dynamic Increase Factor
4-18 .
4-13.3
Dynamic Design Stresses
'4-20
4-14 Modulus of Elasticity .
4-27
4-14.1
Concrete
4-27
.' .
4-14.2
Reinforcing Steel
:
-4-27
~-14.3
Modular Ratio
4-27
4-15 Moment of Inertia . . . .
:
:
4-27
.'
4-16 Introduction . . . . . .
, .
, 4-32
4-17 Ultimate Moment Capacity,
4-33
.4-17.1
Cross Section Type I
4-33'
r, .
4-17.2
Cross Section Types II and III
4-34
4-17.3
Minimum Flexural Reinforcement
4-35
4-18 Ultimate. Shear (Diag~nalTension) Capacity
4-35
4-18.1
Ultimate Shear Stress, . . . . .
4-35
4-18.2
Shear Capacity of Unreinforced Concrete
'4-36
4-18.3
Design of Shear Reinforcement
'.
4-37
. 4-18.4
Minimum Shear Reinforcement
',
'4-38
4-19 Direct Shear Capacity. " .: .'. ;
4-39
.'
4-19.1
General
.
'4-39
4-19.2
Direct Shear Capacity of Concrete
4-39
4-19,3
Design'of Diagonal Bars
.
.' 4-40~
4-20 Punching Shear
.
.. 4-40
4-20.1
Ultimate Punching Shear Stress
4-40
4-20.2
Punching Shear Capacity of Concrete
4-40
4-21 Development of Reinforcement.. . . . . . . . .
.\
4-41
4-21.1
General
; . ; '. . '
' ._.
4-41
4-21.2
Provisions for Conventionally Reinforced Concrete Elements
4-41'
4-?1. 3
Provisions for Laced :Reinforced Concrete ,Elements
4-42
4-21.4
Development Length for Reinforcement in Tension . .:
4-43,
4-21.5
Development Length for Reinforcement in Compression
4-43 '
4-21.6
Development Length of Hooked Bars.
; ....
4-44'\"
4-21.7
Lap Splices of Reinforcement
....
'4-44'
4-21.8
Mechanical Splices of Reinforcement
4-45
iv
Or
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
4-22
4-23
4-24
4-25
4-26
4-27
4-28
4-29
4-30
4-31
4-32
4-33'
4-34
4-35
4-36
4-21.9
Welding of Reinforcement
4-21.10.
Bundled Reinforcing Bars
,I
Introduction
. . . . . . . . .
Distribution of Flexural Reinforcement
' ..
4-23.1
General." . '... . . . . . .
4-23.2
Optimum Reinforcement Distribution
4-23.3
Optimum Total Percentage of Reinforcement
Flexural Design for Small Deflections
,. .
Design for Large Deflections
.".
4-25.1
Introduction . . . .
4-25.2
Lateral Restraint . .
4-25.3
Resistance-Deflection Curve
4-25.4
Ultimate Tensile Membrane Capacity
4-25.5
. Flexural Design . . .
. .
Dynamic Analysis . . . . . . . .
' ..
4-26.1
Design for Shock Load
4-26'.2
Design for Rebound
Design for Shear . . . . . . . .
4-27.1
General
.
4-27.2
Ultimate Shear Stress at d. from the Support
4-27.3
.Ultimate Support Shear
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Distribution of Flexural Reinforcement .' .
4-29.1
General . . . . . . . .
4-29.2
Elastic Distribution of Moments According to the ACI
Building Code . . . . . . . .
4-29.3
Design for Small Deflections
4-29.4
Design for Large Deflections
4-29.5
Minimum Reinforcement
'Dynamic Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-30.1
General
.
4-30.2
Ultimate Flexural Resistance
430.3
Ultimate Tension Membrane Capacity
4-30.4
Elastic Deflections
4-30.5
Load-Mass Factors
4-30.6
Dynamic Response
Dynamic Design . . . . . . .
4-31.1
Flexural Capacity
4-~1.2
Shear Capacity
4-31.3
Columns
Introduction
Flexural Design for Large Deflections
4- 33.1
General
. . . . . .
4-33.2
, Impulse Coefficients
4-33.3
Design Equations for Deflections X, and Xu
4- 33.4
Optimum Reinforcement . .'. . . . . . . .' .
4-33.5
Design Equation for Deflections Less than X, or Xu
4-33.6
Design Equations for Unspalled Cross Sections
Flexural Design for Limited Deflections
Design for Shear, . . . . . . . . ..
" .
4- 35.1
General . ~ . . . . . .
. '.
4-35.2
Ultimate Shear Stress.
4-35.3
Ultimate Support Shears.
Composite Construction
4-36.1
General. . . .
.'
v ..
4-45
4-45
4-52
4-53
4-53
4-53
4-54'
4-54
4-55
4-55
4-55
4-56
4-56
4-57
, 4-58
4-58
4-59
4-60
4-60
4-60
4-62
4-69
4-70
4-70
4-70
4-73
4-73
4-74
4-74
4-74
4-75
4-78
4-79
4-80
4-81
4-82
4-82
4-82
4-83
4-94
4-95
4-95
.: 4-96
. 4-99
. 4-99 ,
4-102
4-103
4-103
4-104
4-104
4-105
4-106
4-143 .
4-143
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC
P~397/AFR
88-22
4-36.2
Blast Attenuation Ability of Sand Fill
4-36.3
Procedure for Design of Composite Elements
4-37 Introduction . . . . . . . . . .
4-38 Ultimate Moment Capacity . . . .
4-38.1
Tension Reinforcement Only
4-38.2
Tension and Compression Reinforcement
4-38.3
Minimum Flexural Reinforcement
Ultimate Shear (Diagonal Tension) Capacity
4-39.1.
Ultimate Shear Stress . . . . .
4-39.2
Shear Capacity of Unreinforced Concrete
4-39.3
Design of Shear Reinforcement
4~39.4
Minimum Shear Reinforcement
-,
4-40 Direct Shear . . . . . .
4-41 Ultimate Torsion Capacity . . . . . .
.
4-41.1
General
.
4-41.2
Ultimate Torsional Stress
. " .... ,. .
. 4-41.3
Capacity of Unreinforced Concrete for Co~bined Shear
and Torsion . . . . . . . . . .
Design of Torsion Reinforcement
. 4-41.4
4-41.5
Minimum Torsion Reinforcement
4-42 Flexural Design . : . . . . .
4-42.1
Introduction
4-42.2
Small Deflections
4-42.3
Large Deflections
4-43 Dynamic Analysis . . . , . .
4-43.1
Design for Shock Load
4-43.2
Design for Rebound
4-44 Introduction . . . . . . . . .
4-45 Strength of Compression Members (P-M Curve)
4-45.1
General . . . . .
.
4-45.2
Pure Compression
4-45.3
Pure Flexure
'.' .
4-45.4
Balanced Conditions
4-45.5
Compression Controls
4-45.6
Tension Controls
4-46 Slenderness Effects . .
4-46.1
General . . , . .
. '.
4-46.2
Slenderness Ratio
4-46.3
Moment Magnification
4-47 Dynamic Analysis
4-48 Design of Tied Columns . . . . .
4-48.1
General
.
4-48,.2
Minimum Eccentricity
4-48.3
Longitudinal 'Reinforcement Requirements
.'
4-48.4
Closed Ties Requirements
. .Design of Spiral Columns '. . . .
.1
4-49.1
GEmera1 . . . . . . . . .
4-49.2
Minimum Eccentricity
4-49.3
Longitudinal Reinforcement Requirements
4-49.4,
Spiral Reinforcing Requirements.
'
4-50 Introduction . . . . . . .
4-51 Design of Exterior Columns
4-52 Introduction
453 Direct Spalling
4-54 Scabbing
,
"
vi,
4-143
4-145
4-149 '
4-150
4,-150
4-151
4-152
4-152
4-152
4-153
4-153
4-153
4-154
4-155
4-155
- 4-155
4-156
4-157
4-159
4-160
4-160
4'-160', '
4-160
4-162
4-162
4-163
4-166
4-166
4-166 '
4-166
.4-167
.4-167
4-168
.4169
4-170
:-4-170 .
4-170
4-171
4-173
4-174
4-174
4-175
4-175
4-175
4-176
4-176
4-176
4-1764-176
4-180
4-180
4-181
4-181
4-182
TN 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
4-55
4-56
4-57
4-58,
'J'
4-59
4-60'
4-61
4-62
4-63
4-64
4-65
Prediction of Concrete Spalling . .

Minimization of Effects of Spalling and Scabbing
4-56.1
Design parameters . . .
4-56.2
Composite Construction
4-56.3
Fragment Shields
Post-Failure Concrete Fragments
Post-Failure Impulse Capacity'
4-58.1
General . . . .
4-58.2
Laced Elements
Introduction . . . . . . .
,4-~9.1
Fragment Characteristics
,4-59.2
Velocity and Impact Limitations
.'
Fragment Impact 'on Concrete
.
4-60.1.
General
.
4-60.2
Penetration by Armor-Piercing Fragments
4-60.3
Penetration of Fragments Other than Armor-Piercing
4-60.4
Perforation of Concrete . . . .
'
4-60.5
Spalling due to Fragment Impact
Fragment Impact on Composite Construction
4-61.1
General . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-61.2
Penetration of Composite Barriers
Introduction . . . . .
4-182
4-183
4-184
4-184
4-185
4-187
4-188
4-188
4-188
4-205
4-205
4-205
4-205
4-205
4-206
4-207
4-208
4-209
4-209
4-209
4-210
Concrete
4-219
4-220
4-221
4-221
4-221
4-222
4-222
4-223
4-223
4-224
4-227
4-229
4-230
4-231
-,
Flexural Reinforcement
, '.
Construction Details for "Far Range" Design
4-65.1
General. . . . .
. ....
4-65.2
Elements Designed for Limited Deflections
4-65.3
Elements Designed for Large Deflections.
4-65.4
Column Details
.....
4-66 Construction Details for "Close-In Design"
4-66.1
General
.
4-66.2
Laced Elements
.
4-66.3
Elements Reinforced with Single Leg Stirrups
4-67 Composite Construction . . . . ... '
4-68. Single and Multicubicle Structures
4-69 Sequence of Construction
....
CHAPTER 5. STRUCTURAL STEEL DESIGN

5-1
Purpose..
.'
5-2
Objective.
5-3
Background
5-4
Scope.
5-5
Format
5-6
General
5-7
Differences Between Steel and Concrete Structures in Protective
Design
. . . .
" .' . . J
Economy of Design of Protective 'Structures in the Inelastic Range

5-8
Applications of Steel Elements and Structures In Protective
5-9
'Design
. . . . . . . . . .
5-10 Application of Dynamic Analysis . .
5-11 General . .
. , ....
vii
4-219
5-1
5-1
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-5
5-6
5-6
5-6'
5-8
TK 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88"22

5-12
Mechanical Properties . . . . . .
5"8
5-12.1
Mechanical Properties Under Static Loading. Static
Design Stresses . . .
5-8
'5-12.2
Mechanical Properties Under Dynamic Loading, Dynamic
Increase Factors
5-9
5-13 Recommended Dynamic DesignStresses .
. .
5-10
5-13.1
General . . . . . . .
'.
5-10
5-13.2
Dynamic Design Stress for Ductility Ratio~ s 10.
5-10
5-13.3
Dynamic Design Stress for Ductility Ratio, ~ > 10
5-11
.5-11
5-13.4
Dynamic Design Stress for Shear
.
5-14 Plastic Behavior of Steel Structures
. .. . . . ;'.
5-16
5-15 Re1ationship Between Structure Function and Deformations"
5-16
5-15.1
General . . . . . . . . . .
.
5-16
5-15.2
Acceptor-type Structures in the Low Pressure Ranges
5-16
5-15.3
Acceptor- or Donor-type Structures in the High Pres~
sure Range
. ..
". _"oJ ;."
5-16
5-16- . Deformation Criteria . . . . . . .'. . . .
.- .
5-17
5-16.1
General
.
5-17
Structural Response Quantities
5-17
5-16.2
Ductility Ratio, ~
5-16.3
5-17
5-.16.4
Support Rotation, e . . . . . .
5-18
'.
5-16.5
Limiting Deformations for Beams
5-18
. 5-16.6
Application of Deformation Criteria to a Frame Struc- .
ture
5-18
5-16.7
Limiting Deformations for'Plates
',
5-19
5-17 . Rebound
.
5-20
5-18 Secondary Modes of Failure
. . . .
5-20
-,
5-18.1
General. '. . .
. .....
5-20
5:20
5-18.2
Instability Modes of Failure
5-18.3
Brittle Modes of Failure
5-21
..
.
5-19 General
5-26.
5-20 Dynamic Flexural Capacity
5-26
5-20.1
General . . .
5-26
5-20.2
Moment-curvature Relationship for Beams '..
5-27
5-20.3
Design.Plastic Moment, ~
5-27'
5-21 Resistance and Stiffness Functions
5-28
5-28,
5 - 21. 1
General . . . '. .
5-21.2
Single-span Beams
5-28
5-21.3
Multi_span Beams
5-28
5-22' Design for Flexure . . . .
5-29
5-22.1
General . . . . .
5-29
5-22.2
Response Charts.
5-29
5-22.3
Preliminary Dynamic Load Factors
'.
5-29
5-22.4
Additional Considerations in Flexural Design
5-30
5-23 Design for Shear
5-30
5-24 Local Buckling
5-31
5-25 Web Crippling . .
5-32
5-26 . Lateral Bracing .
5-32
..' 5-32
5-26.1
General
5-26.2
Requirements for Members with ~ s3
5-33
5-26.3
Requirements for Members 'with ~ > 3
. 5-33
5-26.4
Requirements for Elements Subjected to Rebound
: 5-34
5-26.5
Requirements for Bracing Members
:"5-'34
.' ..
5-27 General
.
-. '5-39
, ;5-39
5-28 Dynamic Flexural Capacity. . . . . . . . . .
0"'
viii .'
"
TH5-l300/NAVFAC.P-397/AFR 88-22
Resistance and Stiffness Functions
Design for Flexure
"
Design for Shear
' ..
: ..
Unsymmetrical Bending
5-32.1
General .
. ..",
., . v.
5-32.2
'Elastic and P~astic Section Modulus.
5-32.3
Equivalent Elastic Stiffness . . . .
5-32.4
Lateral Bracing .and Recommended Design -Criteria
5,32.5
Torsion and Unsymmetrical "Bending . . . ."
5-33, Steel Joists and Joist G~rders (Open-web Steel Joists)
5-34 Blast Resistant Design of Cold-Formed Steel Panels
5-34.1
General
.
5-34.2
Resistance in Flexure
.
.EquLvaLerrt; Elastic Deflection
5- 34.3,
5-34.4
Design for. Flexure ., . . . .
5-34.5
Recommended Ductility Ratios
5-34.6
Recommended Support Rotations
5-34.7
Rebound . . .
5-34.8
Resistance in Shear
5-34.9
Web Crippling . . .
5-35 Summary of Deformation Criteria for Structural Elements
. . . . .
5-36 Blast Door Design . .
5-36.1
General . . . . . : .
. ....
5-36.2
Functions and Methods of'Opening
5-36.3
Design Considerations, . . .' . :',
5-36.4
Examples of Blast'Door Designs
5-36.5
,Blast Door Rebound
'
5-36.6
Methods of Design
5-37 Plastic Design Criteria . .
5-37.1
General . . . . .
5-37.2
In-plane Loads
5-37.3
Combined Axial Loads and Biaxial Bending
5,38, Effective Length Ratios for Beam-columns'
5-39' Effective Length Factor, K
.
5 -40 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-41 . Trial Design of Single-Story Rigid Frames
5 -41 ..1
Collapse Mechanisms . . . .' . .
5-41.2
Dynamic Deflections and Rotations
5-41.3
Dynamic Load Factors
5-41.4
Loads in Frame Members
-',"
5-41. 5
Sizing of Frame Members
,'Stiffness! and Deflection
..
5 -41. 6
5-42 Trial Design of. Single-Story Frames with Supplementary Bracing
5 -42.1
General . . . . . .'. .
. . . .
5 -42.2
Collapse Mechanisms . .
....-.
5-42.3
Bracing Ductility Ratio
,5-42.4
Dynamic Load'Factor . .
5.-42.5
Loads in Frame Members
,5-42.6
Stiffness and Deflection
5-42.7,
Slenderness Requirements for Diagonal Braces
5-~2. 8
Sizing of Frame Members
5-43 General
'. .. . . . . '.,
5-44 Types of Connections . ". . . . . . . . .' .
5-45. Requirements for Main Framing Connections
5-46 .Design of Connections . . . .
5-29
5-30
5-31
5-32
ix
5-39
5-40
5-40
5-44
5-44
5-44
5-45
5-45
5-45
5-46
5-48
5-48
5-48
5-50
5-50
5-50
5-51
5-51
5-51
5-52
5-54
5-64
5-64
5-64
5-64
5-66
5-67
5-68
'5-76
5-76
5-76
5-76
5-77
5-78
5- 81 ;
5-82
5-82
5-83
5-83
5-83
5-83
5-84
5-85
5-85
5-85
5-85
5-86
5-86
5-87
5-87
5-87
5-96
5-96
5-97
5-97
TK 5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88 c22

5-47
5-48
5-49
Dynamic Design Stresses for Connections . . . . .

Requirements for Floor and.Wall Panel Connections
Penetration of Fragments into Steel . . . . . . .
..
5-49.1.
Failure Mechanisms . . . . . . . . . .;'.
."
5-49.2
Primary Fragment Penetration.Equations ,
5-49.3
Residual.Velocity After Perforation of Steel Plate
5-50 General
.
551 .Steel Framed Buildings'
. '" .
5-52 Cold-formed, Light Gage Steel Panels .
5-53 Blast Doors . . . . . .
APPENDIX SA Illustrative Examples
.,
. 5-98
. 5-98
5-102
5-102
5-102
5-103
5107
5107
, 5-107
5-108
','
CHAPTER 6. SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS IN EXPLOSIVE FACILITY DESIGN

61
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-5
6-6
67
6-8
6-9
6-10
6-11
6-12
6-13
6-14
6-15
6-16
Purpose . .
Objective .
Background '.'
Scope .
Format
... .
General
Application
Design Criteria for Reinforced Masonry Walls
6-8.1 Static Capacity of Reinforced Masonry Units
6-8.2 Dynamic Strength of Material
.
6-8.3 Ultimate Strength of Reinforced Concrete Masonry Walls
6-8.4 Dynamic Analysis
6-8.5 Rebound . . . . .
Non-Reinforced Masonry Walls
6-9.1 Rigid Supports . . . .
..
6-9.2 Non-rigid Supports'
6-9.3 Simply Supported Walls
,.
Applications . . . . . . . .
Static Strength of Materials
6-11.1
Concrete
6-11.2
Reinforcing Bars
6-11.3
Welded Wire Fabric
6-11.4
Prestressing Tendons
. Dynamic Strength of Materials . .
Ultimate Strength of Precast Elements, ._.
6-13.1
Ultimate Dynamic Moment Capacity of Prestressed Beams
6-13.2
Diagonal Tension and Direct Shear of Pr'es trressed
Elements
Dynamic Analysis
Rebound
6-15.1
Non-prestressed elements
6-15.2
Prestressed elements
Connections
General. '
.
6-16.1
6-16.2
Column-to-Foundation Connection
6-16.3
Roof Slab-to-Girder Connection
6-16.4
Wall Pane1-to-Roof Slab Connection
6-16.5
Wall Pane1-to-Foundation Connection
'6-16.6
Panel Splice
. . . . . .
'
6-1
.6-1
61
62
6-3
6-4
5-5
6-6
6-6
67
6-7
6-9
6-10
6-10
6-10
6-12
6-13
6-26
6-26
6-26
6-26
6-27
6-27
6-27
6-27
6-28
6-31
6-31
6-32
6-32
6-32
6-33
6-33
6-34
6-34
6-34
6-34
6-34
TH 5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
6-16.7
Reinforcement Around Door Openings
General
.
General Layout . . . . .
6-18.1
Structural Steel
6 -18.2
Foundations . .'.
6-18.3
Roof and Walls
6-18.4
Connections for Roof and Wall Coverings
6-19 Preparation of Partial Blast Analysis
6-20 Pre-Engineered Building Design . . . . . ." . . .
6-21 Blast Evaluation of the Structure . . . " . . . . .
6-22 Recommended Specification for Pre-Engineered Buildings
.
.
6-23 General . . . . . . . . .
.
6-24 Application . . . . . . .
6-24.1
Safety Approved Suppressive Shields
6-24.2
New Shield Design
6-25 Design Criteria . ".' \, yo. .". .
6-26 Design Procedures . . . . . . .
6-26.1
Space Requirements.
.
6-26.2
Charge Parameters.
6-26.3
Fragment Parameters
:6 -26.4
Structural Details
6- 26.5
Access .Pene t r at.Lons
6-27 Introduction
. . . .
6-28 ' Background
. . . .
6- 29 - Design Criteria for Glazing
.'
6-29.1
Specified Glazing
." .
'6-29.2
'Design Stresses .
-,
6-29.3
Dynamic Response to Blast Load
6-29.4
Design Charts . . .
,.
6-29.5
Alternate Design Procedure
6-30 Design Criteria for Frames . . . . . .
6-30.1
Sealants, Gaskets, and Beads
.6-30.2
Glazing Setting
6-30.3
Frame Loads
.
6-30.4
Rebound
.
6-31 Acceptance Test Specification
6-31.1
Test Procedure ', Window Assembly Test
6-31.2
Acceptance Criteria . . .
6-31.3
Certification for Rebound
6-32 Installation Inspection . . . . . . .
6-33 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-34 Design Loads for Underground Structures
6-34.1
General . .
6-34.2
Roof Loads
6-34.3
Wall Loads
6-35 Structural Design . . .
6-35.1
Wall and Roof Slabs
6-35.2
Burster Slab
6-36 Structure Motions . . . .
6-36.1
Shock Spectra
6-36.2
Shock Isolation Systems
. . . . . . . '. .
6-37 General
6-38 Description of Earth-Covered Arch-Type Magazines
6-39 Separation Distances of Standard Magazines
.
6-40 Design . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-34
6-42
6-42
6-42
6-43
643
6-43
6-44
6-44
6-45
6-45
6;55
6-55
6:56
6-56
6-57
6-58
6-58
6,58
6-58
6-17
6-18
..
'.
6~59
'
..
xi
.'
6-59
6-73
6-73
6-74
6-74
6-75
.. 6' 75
6-75
6~76
6-78
6-78
6-78
6-78
6-80
6-80
6-80
6',81
6-82
6-82
6-134
6-134
6-134
6-135
6-135
6-136
6-136
6-136
6-137
6-137
6-137
6-142
6-142
6-143
6-143
TH S.:.1300/NAVFAC
6-41
6-42
6-43
P~397/AFR
88-22
Construction .,. . . .
-",
Non-Standard Magazines
General' .
.
.
6-43.1
Applications
6-43.2
Remote-Actuated valves' "
6-43.3
Blast~Actuated Valves '.
6-43.4
Plenums
.
,. 6-43.5
Fragment Protection
6-44 Types of Blast Valves . .
6-44.1
General . . . .
6-44.2
Blast Shield
.. .....
6 -44.3
Sand Filter .' .
6~44.4
Blast ,Resistant Louvers
6-44.5
Poppet Valves
'.
6-45 Introduction
. '.,,'.! -. ,.-.,-, ...
6-46 Objectives
. .... .. .
6-47 Structure Motions
. " ..
6-48,' Shock:To1erance of Personnel and Equipment
6-48.1
Personnel . . .
6-48.2
Equipment . . . . . ,
6-49' Shock Isolation Principles
6-49.1
General Concepts
6-49.2
Single-Mass Dynamic Systems
6-49.3
Shock Isolation Arrangements
6-50 Shock Isolation Devices,
'.'
6-50.1
Introduction. . ".
6-50.2
Helical Coil Springs
"
6-50.3
Torsion Springs.
6-50.4
Pneumatic Springs
6-50.5
Liquid Springs
"
"
6-50.6
Other Devices
6-51 Hardmounted Systems . . .
t ,
6-52 Attachments . . . . . . .
6-52.1
Introduction
6-52.2
Design Loads
, ,
.'
'.
",
~.
'.
.'
~-.:.
"
6-144
6-144'
6-147
6-147
6-147
6-148
6-148
6-149
6-149 ,
6-149
6-149
6-149
,6-150
6-150
6-164
6:164
6-165
6-165
,,6~,165.
"
..
6-165
6-166
6-166
6-167
6-169
6-,173
6-173
'6-174
6-175
". 6-175
'6-176
6-177
, 6-178
6-178
'6-178
6-179
xii
TM
5~1300/NAVFAC
P-397/AFR 88-22
LIST OF' TABLES

TABLE
Blast Effects' in Man Applicable to Fast-Rising Air Blasts of Short
1-1
Duration (3-5 ms.)
"
.
50 Percent Probability of Penetrating Human Skin . . . .
1-2
Threshold of Serious Injury to Personnel Due to Fragment Impact
1-3
Examples of, Equipment Shock Tolerances
1-4
Safe Separation Distance (bulk explosives)
1-5
Safe Separation Distance (munitions)
1-6
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
2.278
2-286
2-321
2-322
Specific Weight and Gurney Energy Constant for Various Explosives

Initial Velocity of primary fragments for various geometries . . .
Mott Scaling Constants for Mild Steel Casings and Various Explosives . . . . "
2-8
2-9
2-10
2-11
~Drag
Coefficient, Co. for various shapes
Steel Toughness . . '.'. . _. . . . . . . .

Mass Density for Typical Soils and Rocks
Typical Seismic Velocities for Soils and Rocks
2-12 ' Coefficient of Friction for Concrete Foundation and Underlying

Soils . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6
3-7
3-8
3-9
3-10
3-11
3-12
3-13
3-14
3-15
3-16
4-1
1-23
1-23
1-24
1.24
1-25
1-26
Heat of Detonation and Heat of Combustion . .

List of Illustrations of Peak Incident Pressure and Impulse
Produced by Surface Detonation of Various Explosives
List of Illustrations for Average Peak Reflected Pressure" and
Scaled Average Unit Reflected Impulse . . . . . . . . . ... .
List of Illustrations for Interior Side Wall Idealized Times T3
~T4
2-5
2-6
2-7
PAGE
2-279
2-285
2-323
2-324
2-325
2.338
2-338
2-339
3-61
Ultimate Unit Resistance for One-Way Elements
Ultimate Unit Resistance for Two-Way Elements (Symmetrical Yield
Lines)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-62
Ultimate Unit Resistance for Two-Way Elements (Unsymmetrical Yield
3-63
'Lines)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-64
'Post Ultimate Unit Resistances for' Two-Way Elements
.
3-65
'General and Ultimate Deflections for One-Way Elements . . . . .
General, Partial Failure, and Ultimate Deflections for Two_Way
3-66
Elements
.
3-67
Elastic and Elasto-Plastic Unit Resistances for One'Way Elements
Elastic, Elasto-Plastic and Equivalent Elastic Stiffnesses for
3-68.
One-Way Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..' . . . . . .
3-69
Support Shears for One-Way Elements . . . . . . . . . . .
Ultimate Support Shears for Two-Way Elements (Symmetrical Yield
370
Lines)
'. . .
Ultimate Support Shears for Two-Way Elements.(Unsymmetrical Yield
3-71
Lines) . . . . . . . .
.
3-83
Transformation Factors for One-Way Elements . . . . . . . .
Load-Mass Factors in the Elastic and Elasto'P1astic Ranges for
3-84
Two-Way Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . '. . . .
Details of, computation by acceleration impulse extrapolation
3-328
method . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure numbers correspondingto.various combinations of C1 and C2 3-329
3-330
Response Chart Interpolation
. . . . . . . . . . . .
Dynamic Increase Factor (DIF) for Design of Reinforced Concrete
Elements . . . .:: . .
. . . . . . . . . . . 4- 25
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR' 88-22
Dynamic Design Stresses for Design of Reinforced Concrete E1e-
4-2
';
4-3
4-4
4-5
4-6
4-7
4-8
4-9
4-10
4-11
4-12
4-13
4-14
4-15
4-16
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-5
5-6
5-7
5-8
5-9
5-12
5-13
5-14
5-15
5-16
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-5
6-6
6-7
.
4-26
. '4-50
Minimum Area of Flexural Reinforcement .:. ;'. . .. '.. . : ' . , .
Minimum Design Shear Stresses for Slabs . . . . . . . . .
4-51
Restraint and Aspect Ratio Requirements of Tension Membrane
4_66
Behavior' . . . . . . . . . . . .
. .. '
.
'U1timate Shear Stress at Distance d. from Face of Support'for OneWay Elements . . . . . . . . .'. . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-67
Ultimate Shear Stress at Distance d. from' Face of Support for TwoWay Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-68
Deflection Coefficients for Interior Panels of Flat Slabs
4-93
Impulse Coefficient C1 for Two-Way Elements,
4-136
4-137
Impulse Coefficient Cu for Two-Way Elements
4,-138
Impulse Coefficient Cu for One-Way Elements
. .
Shear Coefficients for Ultimate Shear Stress"at Distance Jde from
the Support for One-Way' Elements (Cross Section Type II and III)
4-139
Shear Coefficients for Ultimate Shear Stress at Distance de from
the Support for Two-Way Elements (Cross Sections Type II and III) 4-140
Shear Coefficients for Ultimate Shear for 'One-Way Elements (Cross
Section Type II and III)
. . . .
. . . . . . . . 4,141
Shear Coefficients for Ultimate Support Shear for Two-Way Elements
(Cross Section Type II and III)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-142
Relative Penetrability Coefficients for Various Missile Materials 4-218
ments
...
Static Design Stresses for Materials

.
5-14.
5-15
Dynamic Increase Factor, c, for Yield Stress of Structural Steels
Dynamic Increase Factor, c, for Ultimate Stress of Structural
5-15
Steels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
, Preliminary Dynamic Load Factors for Plates . . . . . . . . ,'. .
5-43
Dynamic Design Shear Stress for Webs of Cold-formed Members.(fdo
5-60
.. . . .
44 ksi) . . . . . . . . . .
Dynamic Design Shear Stress for Webs of Cold-formed Members' (fda 5-61
66 ksi) . . . . . . . . . .
.
Dynamic Design Shear Stress for Webs of Cold-formed Members (fda
88 ksi) . . . . . . . . . .
....
...
5-62
5-63
Summary of 'Deformation Criteria . " . .
."
Design Requirements for Sample Blast Doors
c 5-75
5,-80
Effective Length Factors for Columns and Beam-Columns.
Collapse Mechanisms for Rigid Frames with Fixed and Pinned Bases.
5-92
Stiffness Factors for Single Story, ,Hulti-Bay Rigid Frames Sub5-93
jected to Uniform Horizontal Loading
""
.
Collapse Mechanisms for Rigid Frames with' Supplementary Bracing
and Pinned Bases..
'
.
5-94
Collapse Mechanisms for Frames with Supplementary Bracing, 'Nonrigid Girder-to-Column Connections and Pinned Bases.
5-95
Properties of Hollow Masonry Units,
6-24
Deflection Criteria for Masonry Walls
6-24
,.
Moment of Inertia of Masonry Walls
,. . '"'.
6-25
Summary of Suppressive Shield Groups
6-71
Charge Parameters for Safety Approved Shields
6-72
Static Design Strength r u (psi), for Tempered Glass* [a
long
dimension of glass pane' (in.); b ,. short dimension of glass pane
.,6-109
(in. ) 1
.. , . :. .. . .
Minimum Design Thickness, Clearances, and Bite Requirements
.. ,,6-116
~
xiv
TM 5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
-e
6-8
6-9
6-10
6-11
6-12
6-13
Maximum (bit) Ratio for Linear Plate Behavior Under Blast Load and
Coefficients for Resistance and Deflection and Fundamental Period
of Simply Supported Glass ,Plates Based on Small Deflection Theory
(No Tensile Membrane Behavior)
.
Coefficients for Frame Loading . . . . ',' . ..' . . ..... . . .
Statistical Acceptance and Rejection Coefficients.. . . . . . . '.
Fundamental Period of Vibration, Tn' for Monolithic Tempered Glass
Effective Elastic Static Resistance, reff
Blast Valves
. . . . . . . . . . .
.'. ' .
.~
.
J
.. I
xv
6-117
6-118
6-119
6-120
6-127
6-163
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

LIST OF FIGURES
."
FIGURE
Explosive Protection System . . . . . .
1-1
Survival curves for lung damage . . . .
1-2
Human ear damage due to blast pressure
1-3
. '.
Example of safe separation tests . . .
1-4
Safe separation' test shields
1-5
Variation of structural response and blast loads' .
1-6
Parameters defining pressure design ranges
1-7
Design ranges corresponding to location of the structural elements
1-8
relative to an explosion
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-6
Free-field pressure-time variation
Peak incident pressure versus peak dynamic pressure, density of

air behind shock front and particle velocity
Free-air burst environment
.
Pressure-time variation'for a free-air burst
2-45
2-46
2:47
2-7
Peak incident pressure versus the ratio of normal reflected

pressure/incident .pressure for a free air burst . . . . . .
. Positive phase shock wave parameters for a spherical TNT explosion
2-8
Negative.phase shock wave parameters for a spherical TNT explosion
2-9
Variation of reflected pressure as a function of angle of in-
2-10
Variation of scaled reflected impulse as a function of angle of
2-11
incidence . . . . . . .
Air burst environment .
2-14
2-15
2-16
2-17
2-18
2-50
. . . . . . . . . ... . .
cidence
2-12
",
2-51
2-52
2-53
2-54
2-55
2-56
Pressure-time variation for air burst

Scaled height of triple point .
Surface bust blast environment
Positive phase shock wave parameters for a hemispherical TNT
explosion on the surface at sea level . . . . . . . . . . . .
Negative phase shock wave parameters for a hemispherical TNT
explosion on the surface at sea level . . : . . . . . . .
Explosive shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Peak positive incident pressure and scaled impulse for an explo-
2-57
2-58
2-59
.
2-60
2-61
2-62
. . . . . . ' . . . . . . . . ..
2-63
sion on the surface at sea level
2-19
2-48
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
in free air at sea level
2-13
1-34
2-43
2-44
Blast loading categories
PAGE
. 1- 7
1-19
1_20
1-21 .
1-22
1-32
1-33
Peak positive incident pressure and scaled impulse for an explosion on the surface at sea level
2-20 . Peak positive incident pressure and scaled impulse for an explosion on the surface at sea level
2-21
Peak positive incident pressure and scaled impulse for an explosion on the surface at sea level.
2-22
Peak positive incident pressure and scaled impulse for an explo.
2-64
.
Peak positive incident pressure and scaled impulse fo~ an explo-
2-65
2-66
.............'..
2-67
2-23
2-24
2-25
Peak positive incident pressure and scaled impulse for an explo-
2-26
.
xvi
2_68
TN 5-1300/NAVVAC P-397/AFa.88-22
2-27 'Peak
sion
2-28 Peak
sion
2-29 Peak
sion
2-30 Peak
sion
2-31 Peak
sion
2-32 Peak
sion
2-33 Peak
sion
2-34 Peak
sion
2-35 Peak
sion
2-36 Peak
sion
2-37 Peak
, sion
2-38 Peak
sion
2-39 Peak
'sion
2-40 Peak
positive'incident pressure, and

on the surface at sea level
positive incident pressure and
on the surface at'sea level
on the surface at. sea level
positive incident pressure,and'
on the ,surface at sea level
positive incident; pressure and
scaled impulse for an explo-
.'.
'.'
2-70
scaled impulse for an explo2-71
scaled impulsefor an explo2-72
scaled impulse for anexplo2-73

scaled impulse for 'an explo. 2-77

scaled impulse for 'an' explo- ,
.--. .'.
',
2-80
scaled impulse for an explo_.
I-
2-81
2-82
Peak positive incident pressure and scaled impulse for an explo2.-83
Peak positive incident pressure and scaled ,impulse 'for an explo~ion on the surface at sea level
2-84
Peak positive incident pressure and scaled impulse for an explo2-85
2-44 Peak positive incident pressure and scaled impulse for an explo2-86
2-45 Peak positive incident pressure and scaled impulse for an explo-, ~'
sion on the 'surface at sea level
2~87
2-47 Peak positive incident pressure and scaled impulse for an explo- t
2-89
2-49 Peak positive incident pressure and'scaled impulse for' an explo2-91
sion on the 'surface at sea level
. t-,
2-92
2-50 Confined explosion structures
2-93
Barrier
and
cubicle
configurations
and
parameters
2-51
Average
peak
reflected
pressure
(N
1,
P/L
0.10,
h/H
0.10)
2-52
'2- S '.
2-53 Average peak' reflected pressure (N -1, P/L - 0.25 and 0.75, h/H'0.10)
2-95
0.50
,h/H0.10)
2-96
1, P/L
2-54 Average peak reflected pressure (N
2-97
0.10,. h/H - 0.25)
2-55 Average peak reflected pressure (N - 1, P/L
peak
reflected
pressure
0.25
and
0.75,
h/H2-56 Average
(N - 1, P/L
2-98
0.25)
. '.
2-43
..'
scaled impulse for an explo-
2-42
2-79
scaled impulse for an,explo-
2-41
2-69
scaled impulse for an'explo-
xvii
TK 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

Average peak reflected
0.50)
2-60 Average peak reflected
0.75)
273 Average peak reflected
2-78 Average peak refle~ted
0.10)
0.25)
2-86 . Average peak reflected
0.50)
0.75)
0.10)
0.75)
0.25 and 0.75)
0'.75)
2-98 Averagep"eak reflected
0.50)
2-57
2-58
2-59
pressure (N - 1, P/L - 0.50 h/H,- 0.25)

2-99
pressure (N - 1, P/L - 0.10; h/H = 0.50)
2-100
pressure (N - 1, P/L,= 0.25 and 0.75, h/H 2-101
pressure (N - 1, P/L - 0.50, h/H - 0.50)' . 2-102
pressure (N - 1, P/L - 0.10, h/H - 0.75)
2103
pressure (N - 1, P/L - 0.25 and 0.75, h/H 2-104
pressure (N - 1, P/L - 0.50, h/H - 0.75)
2-105
pressure (N - 2, P/L - 0.10, h/H .,. 0.10) .' .2-106
pressure (N - 2, P/L - 0.25, h/H - 0.10),. 2-107
pressure (N - 2, P/L - 0.50, h/H - 0.10)
2-108
pressure (N - 2, P/L - 0.75, h/H - 0.10)
2-109
pressure (N - 2, P/L - 0.10, h/H - 0.25)
2-110
pressure (N - 2, P/L - 0.25, h/H - 0.25)
2-111
pressure (N - 2, P/L - 0.50, h/H - 0.25)
2-112
pressure (N - 2, P/L - 0.75, h/H - 0.25)
2-113
pressure (N - 2, P/L - 0.10, h/H - 0.50)
2-114
pressure (N - 2, P/L - 0.25, h/H - 0.50)'
2-115
pressure (N - 2" P/L - 0.50, h/H - 0.50)
2-116
pressure (N- 2, P/L - 0; 75, h/H - 0.50) .. 2-117
pressure (N - 2, P/L - 0.10, h/H - 0.75)
2-118
pressure (N - 2, P/L - 0.25 ,h/H - 0.75)
2-119
pressure (N - 2, P/L - 0.50, h/H - 0.75)
2120
pressure (N- 2, P/L - 0.75, h/H - 0.75)
2-121
pressure (N - 3, P/L - 0.10, h/H - 0.10)
2.-122
2-124
pressure (N - 3. P/L - 0.50, h/H = 0.10)
2-125
pressure (N - 3, P/L - 0.10, h/H - 0.25)
pressure(N - 3, P/L - 0.50, h/H - 0.25), . 2-127
2-128
pressure (N - 3, P/L = 0.10, h/H = 0.50)
pressure (N - 3, P/L - 0.50, h/H = 0.50) '. 2-130
2-131
pressure (N - 3, P/L - 0.10, h/H - 0.75)
pressure (N - 3. P/L - 0.25 and 0.75, h/H 2-132
2-133
pressure (N - 3. P/L - 0.50, h/H = 0.75)
pressure (N - 4, P/L - 0.10, h/H = 0.10) , 2-134
pressure (N = 4, P/L = 0.25 and 0.75, h/H =
2-135
2-136
pressure '(N - 4, P/L - 0.50, h/H
0.10)
pressure (N = 4, P/L = 0.10, h/H - 0.25 and
2-137
pressure (N - 4, P/L - 0.25 and 0.75, h/H ~
2-138
pressure (N - 4, P/L - 0.50, h/H
0.25 and.
2-139
pressure (N - 4, P/L - 0.10, h/H
0.50)
2-140
pressure (N - 4, P/L - 0.25 and 0.75, h/H =
2-141
2-142
pressure (N - 4, P/L - 0.50, h/H - 0.50)
xviii
TK 5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

2-101 Scaled average unit refiected impulse
0.10)
.
2-102 Scaled average unit reflected impulse
h/H - 0.10) . . . ,
0.10)
.
0.25) . . . . . . .
h/H - 0.25) . . . .
0.25) . . . . '.' .
0.50)
.
i'
.
h/H - 0.50) . . ; .
0.50) . . . . '.' .
2110 Scaled average unit reflected impulse
0.75)
.
h/H - 0.75) . . . .
0.75)
.
0.10)
.
0.10) . . . . '.' .
0.10)
.
0.10)
.
Scaled
average
unit
2-117
reflected-impulse
0.25)
.
0.25)
.
0.25)
.
0.25)
.
0.50) . . . . . , .
0.50)
.
0.50)
.
0.50)
.
0.75)
.
0.75) . . . . . . .
0.75) . . . . . . .
(N - 1, P/L - 0.10, h/H 2'143

(N - l,'P/L - 0.25 and 0.75,
2-144
(N - 1, P/L - 0.50, h/H 2-145
(N - 1, 'P/L - 0.10, h/H 2-146
(N - 1, P/L - 0.25 and 0.75,
2-147
(N'- 1, P/L - 0.50, h/H 2-148
(N. 1, P/L - 0.10, h/H 2-149

(N - 1, P/L - 0.25 and 0.75,
... .........
xix
2150
(N - 1, P/L - 0.50, h/H 2-151

(N - 1, P/L - 0.10, h/H 2-152
(N 1, P/L - 0.25 and 0.75,

2-153
(N - 1, P/L - 0.50, h/H 2-154
(N - 2, P/L - 0.10, h/H 2-155
(N - 2, P/L - 0:25, h/H 2-156
(N - 2. P/L - 0.50, h/H 2-157
(N - 2, P/L - 0.75, h/H2-158
(N - 2, P/L - 0.10, h/H 2-159
(N - 2, P/L - 0.25, h/H 2-160
(N - 2. P/L - 0.50, h/H 2-161
(N - 2, P/L - 0.75, h/H 2-162
(N - 2, P/L - 0.10, h/H 2-163
(N - 2, P/L = 0'.25, h/H
2-164
(N - 2, P/L - 0.50, h/H .'
2-165
(N =2, P/L = 0.75, h/H 2-166
(N - 2, P/L - 0.10, h/H
2-167
(N-~
2, P/L - 0.25, h/H 2-168
(N - 2, P/L
0.50, h/H
2-169
TN 5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

2-128 Scaled average unit reflected impulse (N - 2, P/L - 0.75, h/H ~
0.75)
2-129 Scaled average unit reflected impulse (N - 3, P/L- 0.10, h/H 0.10)
2-130 Scaled average unit reflected impulse (N -,3, P/L - 0.25 and 0.75,
h/H - 0.10)
2-131 Scaled average unit reflected impulse (N -,3, P/L - 0.50, h/H0.10)
2-132 Scaled average unit reflected impulse (N - 3, P/L.~ 0.10, h/H.~
0.25)
2-133 Scaled average unit reflected impulse (N - 3, .P/L -, 0.25 and 0:75,
h/H - 0.25)
2-134 Scaled average unit reflected impulse (N - 3, P/L - 0.50, h/~ 0.25)
.'
.' .
'.
2-135 Scaled average unit reflected impulse (N - 3. P/L = 0.10, h/H 0.50).
.. -':
2-136 Scaled average unit reflected impulse (N -.3, P/L = 0.25 and 0.75.
h/H- 0.50)
2-137 Scaled average unit reflected impulse (N - 3. P/L ~ 0.50, h/H
0.50)
2-138 Scaled average unit reflected impulse (N - 3, P/~ ~ 0.10, h/H
0.75) ,
2-139 Scaled average unit reflected impulse (N - 3, ,P/L ~ 0.25 and 0.75"
h/H - 0.75)
2-140 Scaled average unit reflected impulse (N - 3, P/L - 0.50, h/H 0.75).;
','
2-141 Scaled average unit reflected impulse (N - 4, P/L - 0.10, h/H ~
0.10)
2-142 Scaled average unit reflected impulse (N -.4, P/L = 0.,25 and ,0.75,
h/H - 0.10)
2-143' Scaled average unit reflected impulse (N - 4, P/L ~ 0.50, h/H ,",'
0.10)
2-144 Scaled average unit reflected impulse (N - 4, P/L -O.lO, h/H 0.25 and 0.75)
. '.
2-145 Scaled average unit reflected impulse (N - 4, P/L - 0 ..25 and 0.,75,
h/H - 0.25 and 0.75)
2-146 Scaled average unit reflected impulse (N.- 4, P/L - 0.50, h/H 0.25 and 0.75)
2-147 Scaled average unit reflected impulse (N - 4, P/L- 0.10, h/H0.50)
2-148 Scaled average unit reflected impulse (N - 4, P/L - 0.25 and 0.75,
hili - 0.50)
2-149 Scaled average unit reflected impulse (N - 4, ,P/L - 0.50, h/H 0.50)
2-150 Reflection factor for shock loads on frangible. elements.
2-151 Pressure-time variation for a partially vented explosion.
2-152 Peak gas pressure produced by a TNT detonation in a partially
contained chamber.
2-153 Scaled gas impulse (W/Vt - 0.002, i r /W1 / 3 - 20)
2-154 Scaled gas impulse (W/Vt - 0.002, i r /W 1 / 3 - 100)
2-157 Scaled gas impulse (W/Vt - 0.015, i r /W 1I 3 - 100)
2-158 Scaled gas impulse (W/Vt - 0.015, i r /W 1I 3 - 600)
2-159 Scaled gas impulse (W/Vt - 0.15, i r /W 1I 3 - 20) .
xx
2171
2 .172
2-173
2-174
2-175
2-176
2-177
2178
2-179
2-180
2-181
2-182
2-183
2-184
2-185
2186
2 -187 .
2-188
.'
2189
2-190
2191
2-192
2-193
2-194
2-195
2-196
2-197
2-198
2-199
2200
2201

2-160
2-161
2-162
2-163
2-164
2-165
2-166
2-167
2-168
2-169
2-170
2-171
2-172
2-173
2-174
2-175
2-176
2-177
2-178
2-179
2-180
2-181
2-182
2-183
2-184
2-185
2-186
2-187
2-188
2-189
2-190.
2-191
Scaled gas impulse (W/Yf

0.15, ir/W'/3 - 100)
Scaled gas impulse (W/V f
0.15, i r/W'/ 3 - 600)
Scaled gas impulse (W/V f
1.0, i r / W'13
100)
1.0, ir/W'/3 - 600)
1.0, i r/W'/ 3 - 2000)
Combined shock and gas pressures
.
TNT conversion factor for charges..,
'..
Fully vented three-wall cubicles and direction of blast wave
propagation.
.
Envelope curves for peak positive pressure outside three-wall
cubicles without a roof . . . . . . . . .' . . . . '. . . .'. .
Envelope curves for peak positive pressure outside.three-wall
cubicles with a roof
"
.
Envelope curves for maximum peak pressure outside three-wall
cubicles
. . ". . . . . . . . . . . " . . . " . . . .
Scaled peak positive impulse out the open front of cubic threewall cubicle without a roof .; . -, .'.,.
. '. . . .... . _
Scaled peak positive impulse out the open front of rectangular
three-wall cubicle without a roof -.
. .'. . .
Scaled peak positive impulse behind sidewall of cubic three-wall
cubicle without a roof '. . . ...
. . . . . .
Scaled peak positive impulse behind sidewall of rectangular threewall cubicle without a roof . . . . . ..... . . .
Scaled peak positive impulse behind backwall of cubic three-wall
cubicle without a roof. . . . '.
.
Scaled peak positive impulse behind backwall of rectangular threewall cubicle without a roof . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .
Scaled peak positive impulse out thp ODen front of cubic threewall cubicle with a' roof '. . . . . ... .
. . . . . . . .
Scaled peak positive impulse out the ODen front of rectangular
three-wall cubicle with a. roof
. . . . .
Scaled peak positive impulse behind sidewall of cubic three-wall
cubicle with a roof . ", . . .'.
. , , , . . ,. .
Scaled peak positive impulse behina S1np~~" or rectangular threewall cubicle with a roof . . . . .
.'. .. . . . . . . . . . . .
Scaled peak positive impulse behind backwall or.~uuic three-wall
cubicle with a roof
,_.,',
.
Scaled peak positive impulse behind backwall of rectangular threewall cubicle with a roof . . . . . . . . . .
Four wall cubicle vented through its roof . .
Peak positive pressure outside of a four-wall cubicle vented
through its roof . . . i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scaled positive impulse outside of a four-wall cubicle vented.
through its roof . . . . . . . . . . .
.
Four wall cubicle vented through ~. wall and direction of blast
wave propagation . . . .
.
'
.
Peak positive pressure at the front of a .partially vented fourwall cubicle. . . . . . .
.
Peak positive pressure' at the side. of a partially vented four-wall
cubicle
. . . . ..
.
Peak positive pressure at the back of a partially vented four wall
cubicle
.
Idealized pressure-time variation.
Front wall loading,' . . . . . . . .
'.
xxi
2-202
2-203
2-204
2-205
2-206
2-207
2-208
2-209
2-210
2-211
2-212
2- 213
2-214
2-215
2-216
2-217
2-218
2-219
2-220
2-222
2-223
2-224
2-225
2-226
2-227
2-228
2-229
2-231
2-232
2-233
TH
5:l~OO/NAVFAC
P-397/AFR 88-22
2-192 Velocity of sound in reflected overpressure region versus peak

incident overpressure.
2-193
2-194
2-195
2-196
2-197
2-198
2-199
2-200
2 -201
2-202
2-203
Reflected pressure coefficient versus angle' of incidence,

Reflected scaled impulse versus angle of incidence,
Roof and side wall loading, ,
, .
Peak equivalent uniform roof pressures,
,
.
Scaled rise time of equivalent uniform positive roof pressures.
Scaled duration of equivalent uniform roof pressures
,
Rear wall loading.
., .. ,
.
Idealized structure configuration for interior blast loads.
Idealized interior blast loads.. . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Sub-division of typical front wall with openings . . '. ,
Maximum average pressure on interior face of front wall (W/H 3/4)
,
.
2-204 Maximum average pressure on interior face of front wall (W/H 3/2) . . ,
,
.
2-205 Maximum average pressure on interior face of front wall (W/H 3). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . , . . . . . . .
2-234
2-235
2-236
2-237
2-238
2-239
2,240
2-241
2-242
2-243
2-244
2-245
2-246
2-247
2-206 Maximum average pressure on interior face of front wall (W/H 6).
6)
. ' ..
. .
2-207 Arrival time, Ti

and 3/2)
2-208 Arrival time, Ti
'....
2-248
for interior front wall blast load' (W/H - 3/4 .
for interior front wall blast load (W/H - 3 and
2-249
",
Ti , for interior front wall blast load

2-209 Idealized rise time, T2
(W/H - 3/4 and 3/2) . .
Ti , for interior front wall blast load
2-210 Idealized rise time, T2
(W/H - 3 and 6) ~'.
2-211 Idealized duration, T3 - Ti , for interior front wall blast load
(W/H - 3/4 and 3/2) . . . .
2-212 Idealized duration, T3 - Ti , for interior front wall blast load
(W/H - 3 and 6)
2-213 Idealized times Ti and T2 for interior side wall blast load
2-214 Idealized times T3 and T. for interior side wall blast load (L/H 1, Ii'/H - 3/4)
,
.
2-215 Idealized times.T 3 and T. for interior side wall blast load (L/H1, W/H - 3/2)
.
2-216 Idealized times T3 and T. for interior side wall blast load (L/H ....
I, W/H - 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-217 Idealized times T3 and T. for interior side wall blast load (L/H 1, W/H - 6) . . . . . . , . . . . . .
2-218 Idealized times T3 and T. for interior side wall blast load (L/H 2, W/H - 3/4)
,
,
.
2220 Idealized times T3 and T. for interior side" wall blast load (L/H2, W/H - 3) . . . .. . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-221 Idealized times T3 and T. for interior side wall blast load (L/H 2, W/H - 6) . , . . . , . . . . . . .'. . . . . . . .
,
.
2-223 Idealized times T3 and T. for interior side wall blast load (L/H 4, W/H - 3/2) . ,
, ,
.
2-224 Idealized times T3 and T. for interior side wall blast load (L/H 4, W/H - 3)
,
xxii
2.- 252
2-253
2-254
2-255
2-256
2-257
2-258
2-259
2-260
2-261
2-262
2-263
2-264
2-265
2-266

2-225 Idealized times T3 and T. forinterior side wall blast load (L/H 4,
w/Ii - 6)
2-267
,
'
.
2-227 Idealized times T3 and T. for interior side wall blast load (L/H
8, W/H- 3/2) .'.
.
.
2-228 Idealized times T3 and T. for interior side wall blast load (L/H 8, W/H - 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-229 Idealized times T3 and T. for interior side wall blast load (L/H
8, W/H - 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. ...
2-230 Idealized pressure coefficient for back wall interior blast load
(L/H - 1 and 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-231 Idealized pressure coefficient for back wall interior blast load
(L/H - 4 and 8) .
. . .
'. . .
2-232 Arrival time, Tl , for interior back wall blast load (W/H - 3/4 and
3/2)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .'
2-233 Arrival time, Tl , for interior back wall blast load (W/H - 3 and,
2-268
2-269
2-270
2-271
2-272
2-273
2-274
2-249
2-250
2-251
2-252
2-253
2-254
2-275
., 2-276
2-277
2-304
Initial velocity of primary fragments for various geometries
2-305
MA/B versus cylindrical casing geometry '. .'. .
. . . .
2-306
Design fragment weight versus design confidence level (0.3<C L<1)
2-307
Design fragment weight versus design confidence level (0.986<C L<1) 2-308
B2/NTIW c versus casing geometry . . . . . .
2-309
Equivalent cylindrical explosive casings
2-310
Variation of primary fragment velocity with distance
2-311
Primary fragment shapes . . . . .'. . . . . . . . . .
2-31:0.
Relationship between fragment weight and fragment diameter
2- 313
Interaction of blast wave with an irregular object . . . .
2-314
Idealized pressure-time loading in an irregular ,fragment
2-315
Nondimensional object velocity, V, as a function of pressure and
impulse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-316
Target shape factor for unconstrained fragments . .
2-317
Specific acquired impulse versus.distance . . . . .
2-318
Scaled fragment velocities for constrained fragments
'2-319
Fragment range prediction . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-320
Net ground motions produced by an explosion at the ground purface 2-336
Typical response shock spectra. . . . . .
2-337
3-1
3-2
Typical resistance-deflection for two-~ay element

Idealized yield line locations for several two-way elements
6)
2-234
2-235
2-236
2-237
2-238
2-239
2-240
2-241
2-242
2-243
2-244
2-245
2-246
2-247
2-248
Idealized time T2 and Tl for interior back wall blast load

Leakage pressure coefficient vs. pressure differential
Explosive outer casing separated by incompressible fluid
3-3
Determination -of ultimate unit resistance.
3-4
Location of yield lines for two-way element with two adjacent

edges supported and two edges free (values of x) . . . . . .
Location of .yield lines for two-way element with .two adjacent
edges supported and two edges free (values of y)
.
Location of symmetrical yield lines for two-way element.with three
edges supported and one edge free (values of y) . . . . ' . .
Location of unsymmetrical yield lines for two-way element with
three edges supported' and one edge free (X2 / X l - 0.1)
three edges supported and one edge free (X 2/Xl- 0.3)
3-5
3-6
3-7
3-8
xxiii
3-20
3-21
3-22
3-23
3-24
3-25
3_26
3-27
TK 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
3-9
3-10
3-11
3-12
3-13
3-14
3-15
3-16
3-17
3-18
3-19
3-20
3-21
3-22
3-23
3-24
":3-25
3-26
3-27
3-28
3-29
3-30
3-31
3-32
3-33

three edges supported. and one edge free (xdX, - 0.5)
Location of unsymmetrical yield lines for two-way element with'
three edges supported and one edge free (x2/x, - 0.75)
Location of unsymmetrica1..yie1d lines for two-way element with
three edges supported and one edge ,free (x 2/x , - 1.0)
three edges supported and one edge free (X2/X , - 1,25)
Location of unsymmetrical yie1d1ines for two-way element with
three edges supported and one edge free (X2/X, - 1.5)
three edges supported and one edge free (x2/x ,'- 1.75)
Location of unsymmet,ica1'yie1d lines for two-way element with'
three edges supported and One edge free (x2/x, - 2.0)
Location of unsymmetrical yield lines for 'two-way element with
three edges supported and oneedge free (values' of y) .'
Location of symmetrical yield lines ,for two-way element with four
edges supported
...
four edges supported (values of x,)
.Location of unsymmetrical yield lines for two-way element with
.four edges supported (values of y,)
four edges supported values of x/L and y/H)
Effects of openings on yield lines locations
Deflection of two-way element
Graphical summary of two-way elements
Moment and deflection coefficients for uniformly loaded, two-way
element with two.adjacent edges fixed and two edges free
Moment and deflection coefficients for uniformly loaded, two-way'
element with one edge fixed, an adjacent edge simply supported and
two edges free
. . . ..
. ..
Moment and. deflection coefficients for uniformly loaded, two-way'
element with two adjacent edges simply supported and two edges
free
..
Moment and' deflection coefficients for uniformly loaded, two-way
element with three edges fixed and one edge free
element with two opposite edges fixed, one edge simply supported
and one edge free
element with two opposite edges simply supported, one edge fixed,
and one edge free
..
Moment and deflection coefficients for uniformly loaded; two-way
element with three edges simply supported and one edge free
element with two adjacent edges fixed, one edge simply supported,
and one edge free
.Moment and deflection 'coefficients for uniformly Lo adedv vtwo-way
element with two adjacent edges simply supported, one edge fixed,
and one edge free
'.
. '.
element with all edges fixed.
xxiv
3-28
3-29
3-30
3-31
3-32
3-33
3-34
3-35
3-36
3-37
3.- 38
3-39
3-40
3-41
3-42
3-43
3-44
3-45
3-46
3-47
3-48
3-49
3-50
3-51
3-52
TN 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

3-34
3-35
3-36
3-37
3-38
3-39
3-40
3-41
3-42
3-43
3-44
3-45
3-46
3-47
3-48
3-49
Moment and deflection coefficients for unifomly loaded,' two-way

element with two opposite edges fixed and two edges simply supported . . . . . . . . . . .' . . . .'. . . . ;. . . . . . . . . .
Moment and deflection coefficients for uniformly loaded, two-way.
element with three edges fixed and one edge simply supported
Moment and deflection coefficients for uniformly loaded, two~way
element with all edges simply supported . . . . . . . . . . . . .
element with two adjacent'edges fixed, and two edges simply
supported
.
Moment and deflection coefficients'for uniformly loaded, two-way
element with three edges simply supported and one edge fixed
Resistance-deflection functions for limited deflections
Resistance-deflection functions for large deflections
Determination of ultimate support shear . . .'. . . . .
Typical single-degree-of~freedomsystem
: 0'
Determination' of load-mass factor in the plasttcrange
Load-mass factors in plastic range for two-way elements
Acceleration~impulse extrapolation method. . . . . . .
Discontinuities in the acceleration curve . . . . . . .
Pressure-time function with two different time intervals
A two-degrees-of-freedom system . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-53
3-54
3-55
3-56
3-57
3-58
3-59
3-60
3-80
3-81
3-82
3-102
3-103
3-104
3-105
Maximum.response of.elastic, one-degree-of-freedom system for
triangular load . . '. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-50
Maximum response of elastic, one-degree-of-freedom system for
3-51
Maximum response of elastic, one-degree-of-freedom system for
rectangular load
3-106
3-107
3-108
gradually applied load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maximum response of elastic; one-degree-of-freedom system for'
triangular pulse load . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
3-109
3-53 Maximum response of elastic, one-degree-of-freedom system for
3-110
sinusoidal pulse load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . '"
3-54 Maximum deflection of elasto-plastic, orie-degree-of-freedom system
for triangular load
't ,
.3-111
3-55 Maximum response time of elasto-plastic, one-degree-of-freedom
system for triangular load . . . . . . . . . . '.' . . . .
3-112
3-56 Maximum deflection of elasto-plastic, one-degree-of-freedom system
for rectangular load
'. . 3-113
357 Maximum response time of elasto-plastic, one-degree-of-freedom system
for rectangular load . . . . . . . . . . . . '. '. . . . . .
3 -114
3-58 Maximum deflection of elasto-plastic, one-degree-of-freedom system
for gradually applied load '. . . . .'. . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-115
3-116
system for gradually applied load . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-60 Maximum deflection of elasto-plastic, .one-degree-of-freedom system
3-117
for triangular pulse. load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-118
system for triangular pulse load . . . . . . . . . . .
3-119
3-62 Various bilinear-triangular loads . . . . . . . . . . .
3-63 Regions of figures 3-64 through 3-266, labeling of axis and
3-120
curves .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.'
3-64a Maximum response of elasto-plastic, one-degree-of-freedom system
for bilinear-triangular pulse (C1 - 1.000, C2 - 1.0)
. . . . 3-121
3-64b Maximum. response of elasto-plastic, one-degree-of-freedom system
for bilinear-triangular pulse (C1 - 1.000, C2 - 1.0)
. . . . 3-122
3-52
TH 5-1300jNAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
Maximum response of elasto-plastic, one-degree-of-freedom system

for bilinear-triangular pulse (C1 - 0.681, Cz - 1.7)
3-66 Maximum response of elasto-plastic, one-degree-of-freedom system
for bilinear-triangular pulse (C1 0.464, Cz - 1.7)
3-67 . Maximum response of .elasto-plastic, one-degree-of-freedom system
for bilinear-triangular pulse (C1 - 0.316" Cz - 1.7).
.: .
3-68 Maximum response of elasto-plastic, one"degree-of-freedom system
3-70 Maximum response of elasto-plastic,. one-degree-of-freedom system
3-72 Maximum response of elasto-plastic, one-degree-of-freedom system.
for bilinear-triangular pulse (C1 - 0.032~Cz - 1.7)
for bilinear-triangular pulse (C1 - 0.018, Cz - 1. 7)
Maximum
response of elasto-plastic, one-degree-of-freedom .system
3-75
.'
3-76 Maximum response of elasto-plastic, one-degree-of-freedom'system
.'
3-79 Maximum response of elasto-plastic, one-degree-of-freedom'system
Maximum
response of elasto-plastic, one-degree-of-freedom system
3-81
3-84 Maximum.response of elasto-plastic, one-degree-of-freedom system
for bilinear-triangular pulse (C 1 - 0.750, Cz - 5.5)
3-86 Maximum response of elasto,-plastic, one-degree-of-freedom system
3-88 Maximum response of elasto-plastic,. one-degree-of-freedom system
3-89 Maximum response of elasto-plas tic, one - de g'ree> of _freedom sys tern
for bilinear-triangular pulse (C; - 0.237, Cz -.5.5)
for bilinear-triangular pulse (C1 - 0.178, Cz -'5.5)
for bilinear-triangular pulse (C1 - 0.133, Ci - 5.5)
3-65
xxvi,
3-123
3-124
3-125
3-126
3-127
3-128
3-129 .
3-130
3-131
3-132
3-133
3-134
3-135
3-136
3-137
3-138
3-139
3-140
3-141
3-142
3-143
3-144
3-145
3-146
3-147
3-148
3-149
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
3-92
3-93
3-94
3-95
3-96
3-97
3-98
3-99
3-100
3-101
3-102
3-103
3-104
3-105
3-106
3-107
3-108
3-109
3-110
3-111
3-112
3-113
3-114
3-115
3-116
3-117
3-118
Maximum response ofelasto.plastic, one-degree-of-freedom system

for .bilinear-triangular pulse (C,
0:100, Cz
5.5)
3.-150
Maximum responseof elasto-plastic, one-degree-of-freedom system
for bilinear-triangular pulse (C,
0.068, Cz
5.5)
3-151
0.046, Cz
5.5)
3-152
0.032, Cz
5.5)
3-153
Maximum response of elasto-plastic, one-degree-of-freedom 'system
0.022, Cz
3-154
5.5)
3-155
0.015" Cz - 6.)
Maximum. response." of elasto-plastic, one-degree-of-freedom.system
0.010, Cz
6. )
.3 -156
Maximum response of elasto-plastic, one,degree-of-freedom system
0.750, Cz
10. )
3-157
0.648,. Cz
10. )
3-158
..
for bilinear-triangular pulse' (C,
0.562, Cz
10. )
3-159
Maximum response of elasto-plastic, one -'degree - of - freedom system
0.422, Cz
10.)
3-160
. ..
0.316, Cz
10. )
3-161
Maximum response of elasto-plastic, ,one-degree-of-freedom system
0.237, Cz
10. )
3-162
Maximum ,response of elasto-plastic, one-degree-of-freedom system
O.. 178, Cz
10.)
3-163
Maximum response of elasto-plastic " one-degree-of-freedom system
O.. 133, Cz
10.)
3-164
Maximum response of elast~-plastic, one-degree-of-freedom system
O.. 100, Cz
10. )
3-165
0.068, Cz
10.)
3-166
3-167
0.046, Cz
10.)
Maximum response of elastoplastic, one-degree-of-freedom system
0.032, ,Cz
10.)
. 3-168
'Maximum response' ofelasto-plastic, one -de gree - of - freedom system
for bilinear-triangular pulse, (C,
10. )
0.022, Cz
3-169
Maximum. response of elasto-plastic, one-degree-of-freedom system
0.015, Cz
10. )
3'-170
10. )
0.010, Cz
3-171
Maximum response of elasto-plastic, one-degree-of-freedom system,
0.909, Cz
30.)
3-172
0.866, Cz - 30. )
3-173
Maximum response of elasto-.plastic, one-degree-of-freedom.system
0.825, Cz
30. )
3-174
. .
Maximum response of'elasto-plastic, one-degree-of-freedom system
0.750, Cz -,30. )
..
3-175
30. )
0.715, Cz
3-176
'
xxvii
'
TM
"
5~1300/NAVFAC
P-397/AFR 88-22

for bilinear-triangular pulse (C1 - 0.681, Cz - 30;)
3-177
3-120 Maximum response of e1asto-plastic, one-degree-of-freedom system
3-178
for bilinear-triangular pulse (C1 - 0.648, Cz - 30.)
Maximum r~sponse of e1asto-plastic, one-degree~of-freedom system'
3-179
for bilinear-triangular pulse(C 1 - 0.619, C2 - 30,)
3-122 Maximum response of e1asto-p1astic, .one-degree~of-freedom system
3-180
for bilinear- triangular pulse (C1 .;. 0.562, Cz - 30.)
Maximum.response
of
elasto-plastic,
one-degree-of-freedom
system
3-123
3'-181
3-182
for bilinear-triangular pulse (C1 - 0.464, Cz - 30.) ,
s ystem
3-125 Maximum response of e1asto~plastic,one-degree-of-freedom,
3-183
for bilinear-triangular pulse(C 1 - 0.383, Cz - 30.)
Maximum
response
of
e1asto-plastic,
one-degree-of-freedom.system
3-126
3-184
for bilinear-triangular pulse (C1 - 0.3l6,'Ci - 30.)
.
3-127 Maximum response of elasto-plastic, one-degree-of-freeaom system
3-185
3-128 Maximum' response of elasto-plastic, one-degree-of-freedom syst~m.
3-186
for bilinear-triangular pulse (C 1 - 0.215,' Cz ~ 30.)'
3-129 Maximum response of elasto-plastic, 'one-degree-of -freedom system
3-187
for bilinear-triangular pulse (C 1 - 0.178, Ci -30.)
3-188.
for bilinear - triangular pulse (C1 - 0.147, Cz - 30.)
for bilinear-triangular pulse (C1 - 0.121,C z ~ 30.)
3-189
3-190
for bilinear-triangular pulse (C1 = 0.100, Cz - 30.),
3-191
for bilinear-triangular pulse (C 1 ~ 0.075, Cz - 30.)
3-134 Maximum response of elasto-plastic ,one -degree-bf-'freedom -sys cem
3-192
for .bilinear-triangular pulse (C1 - 0.056, Cz -.30.)
"
3'-193
3-194
for bilinear-triangular pulse (C 1 - 0.032,' Cz - 30.)'
3-137 Maximum response of elasto-plastic, one-degree-of-freedomsystem
,-}'-195
for bilinear-triangular pulse (C 1 - 0.026, Ci - 30.)'
3-196
3-139 Maximum response of elasto-p1astic, one-degree-of-freedom system
for bilinear-triangular pulse. (C 1 - 0.013, Cz - 30.)
3-197
3-140 Maximum 'response of elasto-plastic, one-degree-of-freedom system
..3-198
'for bilinear-triangular pulse, (C 1 - 0.010 ,Ci - 30.)
3-141 Maximum response of elasto-plastic, one-degree-of-freedom systeni
for bilinear-triangular pulse (C 1 - 0.909, Cz -'100.)
3-199
. '.
3-142 Maximum response of elasto-plastic, one-degree~of-freedom system'
for bilinear-triangular pulse (C 1 - 0..866, Cz -100.)
3-200
3-143 Maximum .response of elasto-plastic, one-degree-of-freedom sy~tem
for bilinear-triangular pulse (C1 - 0.825, Cz - .100.)
3-201
3-144 Maximum response of elasto-plastic, one-degree-of-freedomsystem
for bilinear-triangular pulse (C 1 - 0.787, Cz - 100.)' .
3-202
Maximum response of elasto-plastic,' one-degree-of-freedom. system
for bilinear-triangular pulse (C 1 ~ 0.750, Cz - 100.)
3-203
xxviii-
3-146.Maximum response of. elasto~plastic,.one-degree-of-freed~m system

100. ).
3-204
for bilinear:triangular.'pulse (Cl - 0.715, Cz
"
3-147 Maximum response.of ela~to-plastic, one-degree-of-freedom system
for bilinear:triangular pqlse (Cl - 0.681, Cz - 100.)
3-205
3-148 Maximum response of elasto-plastic, one-degree_of-freedom.system
100. )
. for bilinear-triangular pulse (~l - 0.648, Cz
3-206
3-149 Maximum re~pons~ of elasto-plastic, one-degree-of-freedom system
100. )
for bilinear-triangular pulse (Gl . - 0.619, Gz
3-207
3-150 Maximum response ofelasto-plastic, one-degree-of-freedom system
for bilinear-triangular pu~se (Gl - 0.590, Gz
100. )
3-208
3-151 Maxim~ re~p~nse of elastq-plastic, one-degree-of-freedom system
for bilinear:triangular pulse (Cl - 0.562, Cz
100. )
3-209
3-152 Maximum respon~e of elast~-pla~tic, one-degree-of-freedom system
for bilinear-tr~angular pulse. (Cl - 0 ..511 , Gz
100.).
3-210
3-153 Maximum response'o( .elasto-plastic, one-degree-of-freedom .sys t em
for bilinear-triangular pul~e (Cl - 0.464, Gz
100. )
'3-211
. '.
3-154 Maximum.response.of elasto-plastic, one-degree-of:fre~dom system
for bilinear-triangularpulse (Cl - 0.422, Cz - ,100.)
3-212
3-155 Maximum response'of elastq-plastic, one-degree-of-freedom system
for bili~ear-triangular pulse (Cl - 0.365, Gz . - 100. )
3-213
for bilinear-triang~lar pulse (Cl - 0.316, Cz
3-214
WO. )
3-157 Maximum respons.e of elasto-plastic, one-degree-of-free.dom system
,3 - 215
" for bilinear-triangular pulse (Cl - 0.274, C2
100. )
3-158 Maximum.responseof elasto,plastic, one-degree-of-freedom system
for bilinear-triangular pulse (Cl - 0.261, Gz
3-216
100.)
3-159 Maximum re~po~se of elasto-plastic, one-degree-of-freedom system
for bilinear-triangular pulse (Cl - 0.237, Gz = 100. )
3-217
3-160 Maximum resp~nse of elasto-plastic, one-degree-of-freedom system
for bilinear-triangular pu~se (Cl - 0.215, Cz
3-218
100. )
3-161 Maximum response of elasto-plastic, one-.degree -of'- freedom system
for bilinear-triangular pulse (Cl - 0.178, Cz. - 100.) ",;.
3-219
3-162 Maximum response of elasto-plastic; one-degre~-of-freedom system
for bilinear-triangular pulse .(Cl - 0.147, C2 ; - 100. )"
3-220
3-163 Maxim~ response of elasto-plastic, one-degree-of-freedom system
for bilinear-triangular pul~e (Cl - 0.121, Cz -100.)
3-221
3-164 Maxim~ response of elilsto-plastic, one,degree-of-freedom syst~m
for bilinear-triangular pulse (Cl - 0.100, Cz
100. )
3-222
100. )
for bilinear-triangular pulse (Gl - 0.075, Gz
3-223
3-166 Maximum...response of elasto-plastic, on~-degree-of-fr~edom system
for b:l.linear-triangul';:r.pulse (Cl ;. 0.056, Cz-,lOO:)
3-224
3-167 Maximum respons.e of ~elasto-plastic, one-degree-of-fre~~om system
for bilinear-triapgular pulse (Gl - 0.042, Gz
100. )
3-225
3-168 Maximum response of.elasto:plastic, .one-degree-of-freedom system
for bilinear-triangular pulse (C l - 0.032, ,Cz
100. )
3-226
3-169 Maxim~ response: of elas~o,plastic, ,o~e,degree-of,freedomsystem
,'.
for bd l Lnear t r Langu Lar pulse (Cl - 0.026, Gz - 100.)
3-227
3-170 Maximum , response of elasto,plastic, one-degree-of-freedom system
100:)
3-228
for bilinear-triangula~ pulse (Cl - 0.018, Cz
3-171 Maximum response of elasto-plastic, one,degree-of-freedom system
3-229
for bilinear-triangular pu~se (Cl - 0.013, Gz -,100.)
3-172 Maximum response ofelasto_plastic, one-d~gre~-of,freedom syst~m.
3-230
for b Ll.Lnear t r LanguLarvpuLse (Gl - 0.010, Cz ' = ' 100,)
xxix
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
3-173 Maximum resRonse of elasto-plastic,

for bilinear-triangular pulse (Cl 3-174 Maximum response of e}asto-plastic,
for bilinear-triangular pulse (C l 3-175 Maximum response of elasto-plastic,
for bilinear-triangular pulse (C l 3-176 MaximrimresponsJ of elasto-plastic,
for bilinear-tr~angular pulse (Gl 3-177 Maximum response of elasto-p1astic,
for bilinear-triangular pulse (G l 3-178 Maximum response of elasto-plastic,
for bilinear-triangular pulse (C l ' 3-179 Maximum response of elasto-plastic,
for bilinear-triangular pulse. (G l
3-180 Maximum response of elasto-plastic,
for bilinear-triangular pulse (C l 3-181 MaximUm response of e1asto-plastic,
for bilinear-triangular 'pulse (C l 3-182 Maximum response of e1asto-plastic,
for bil inear - tr iangu1ar pulse (C l Maximum response of elasto-plastic,
for bilinear-triangular pulse (C l Maximum response of elasto-plastic,
for bilinear-triangular pulse (C l 3-185 Maximum response of e Las t.ovp l.as t Lc ,
for bilinear-triangular pulse (G l 3~187 Maximum response of elasto-plastic,
for bilinear-triangular pulse (C l 3-189 Maximamresponse of elasto-plastic,
for bilinea!:'-triangu1ar pulse (e l 3-190 Maximum response of elasto-plastic,
for bilinear - triangular pulse' (Cl 3-191 Maximum response of elasto-plastic,
for bilinear- triangular pulse (C l 3-192 Maximum response of elasto-plastic,
for bilinear-triangular pulse (C l .3-193 Maximum resporise of elasto-plastic,
for bilinear-triarigu1ar pulse (Cl 3-194 Maximum response of elasto-plastic,
for bilinear-triangular pulse (Cl 3-195 Maximum response of e1asto-plastic,
for bilinear-triangular pulse (Cl 3-196 Maximum response of elasto:plastic,
for bilinear-triangular pulse (C l 3-197 Maximum response of e1asto-plastic,
for bilinear - triangular pulse' (C l 3-198 Maximum response of e Las co-p Las t Lc ;
for bilinear-triangular pulse(C l 3-199 Maximum response ofelasto-plastic,
for bilinear-triangular pulse (Cl I
one-degree-of-freedom system
0.909, Ci- 300.)" . .
0.866;' Cz - 300.) .
0.825; C z - 300.)< .
one-degreeJof-freedom"system
0.787,' Gz - 300.)
.
one~degree-of-freedom system
0.7sd, Cz - 300.) ' . .
one-degree-of-freedom system0.715, 'Cz -300~)\"
~ 0.681', Gz - 300'.)
3-231
3-232
3-233
3-234
3-235
3-236
3-237
one-degree-of~freedom'system
0.648~' Cz - 300.)
,.
.
0.619, Cz - 300.)'
,
0.590, Cz - 300.)'
.
one-degree-of-f~eedom system
0.562, Cz - 300.)
.
0.536;" Cz - 300.)
.
one-degree-of-'freedom system 0.511, Cz - 300.)
._
0.487, Gz - 300.)".
~.464; Cz - 300.) ,
one-degree-of~freedom system
0.422, Cz - 300.)
0.383, Cz - 300.)
0.365, Cz _. 300.)
one~degree-of-freedom system:
0.348, Cz - 300.)
one-~egree-of-freedom sys;em
0.316, Gz - 300.)
I
3-238
3-239
3-240
3-241
3-242
'3- 243
3-244
3-245
3-246
3-247
3-248
3 - 249
3-250
one-~egree-of-freedomsystem'
0.287, Cz ~ 300.)
one-degree:of-freedom system
0.274,'C z - 300~)
...
0.261, Cz ;"300.)";.
one-degree-of-freedomsystem
0.23i,cz - 300:)
0'.215" Cz .. 300.)
one-degree-of- freedom sys:tem
0.198:, Cz - 300.)
O.17S, Cz - 300. ).,
3-251
3-252
3-253
3-254
3-255
3-256
3 - 257 .
TK'S-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

3-200 Maximum response ,~~ elasto-plastic,'one-degree-of-freedom system
for bilinear-triangular pulse(C , - 0,162, C2 - 300,) , , , , , ,3-258
3-201 Maximum response of"elasto-'plas!:ic, one-degree-of-free'dom 'system "
for bilinear- triangular 'pulse
0,147, C2 - 300,) , , ' : , , , 3 - 259
3-202 Maximum response' of elasto-plastic, one-degree-of-freedom'system
for bilinear-triangular purse' (C, - 0,133,' (;2 - 300,)
, . , . '3-260
3-203 Maximum response o'f ,elasto-plastic, .one-degree-of-freedom system
for bilinear-triangular'pulse (C, -'0:121, C2 - 300.) . : , . . . 3-261
3-204 Maximum' response ofelasto-plastic, one~degree-of-freedom system
for bilinear-triangular pulse (C, - 0.110, C2 - 300.)
':."
3-262
3-205 Maximum response':?f' e Las tio vp Las t.Lc , one!degree-of-'freedom system
for b L'lLnaar t r Langul.ar' pulse (C, - 0.100, C2 ':;' 300.)
': . .", 3-263
3-206 Maxi'mum response"of elasto~plastic, one-'degree-of-freedom system
;for bilinear-triangular pulse (C, - 0.091, C2 - 300.)
. . . . 3-264
3- 207 Maximum response of 'e'Las eo -p Las t Ic", one:degree'-of - freedom system
for bilinear-triangular pulse (C, - 0.083, C2 - 300.) '. . . , . . 3-265
3-208 Maximum response of elasto~plastic, one-degree-of:freedom system
for bilinear-triangular pulse (C, -.0.075, C2 - 300.)
. .', , , 3-266
3-~09 Maximum response of elasto-plastic, one-degree-of-freedom system
for bilinear- triangular pulse (C 1 - 0.068, C2 - 300.)
. , . , ' 3 -267
3-210 Maximum'response of elasto-plastic, one-degree-of-freedom system "
for bilinear-triangular pulse (C, - 0,056, C2 -'300,)
, . . ,', 3-268
3-211 Maximum response' of elasto:p1astic, one-degree-of-freedom system
for bilinear-triangular 'pulse' (C, - 0,046, C2 - 300.)
, , , , 3-269
3-212 Maximum 'response' of e Las t ovp Las t.Lc, one-degree-of-freedom system
for bilinear-triangular'pulse (C 1 - 0.042, C2 - 300,)
~
, , , , 3-270
3 -213 Maximum response' of. e Las'tovp Last fc, ,one-degree-of~'freedom'system
for bilinear-triangular pulse (C, - 0.032, C2 - 300'.)
, ""
3-271,
3-214 ,Maximum response, of elasto-plastic, ,one-degree-of-freedom syste~
for bilinear-triangular pulse (C, - 0.026, C2 - 300,) " . , ,', , 3-272
3-215 Maximum response of elasto-plastic, ~ne-degree-of-freedom'sy~tem
for bilinear-triangular pulse (C, - 0,022, C2 - 300,) ,', , , , " '3-273
3-216 Maximum 'response 0' elasto-plastic, .onE"degr'ee-of''reedom system'
for bilinear-triangular puLs'e (C, -,0,018, C2 -'300,) ,', , , , , 3,274
3-2~7 Maximum response' of elasto-plastic, one-degree-of-freedom'system
for bilinear-triangular 'pulse (C, - 0,015, C2 - 300,)
,'"
3,275
3-218 Maximum response of elasto~plastic, one-degree-of-freedom system
for bilinear-triangular 'pulse (C 1 - 0,013, C2 - 300.>,
, ' , ' 3-276
3-?19 Maximum response ,of elasto~plastic, one-degree-of-freedom system
for bilinear;triangular purse (C,'- 0.010, C2 - 300,)'
,'"
3-277
3-220 Maximum response 'of elasto-plastic, one-degree-of'freedom system
"
for bilinear-triangular pulse (C, - 0,909, 'C2 - 1000,)
,'"
3-278
3-,221,Maximi.un response' of e Las t o-jr'las t.Lc , one-degree-of-freedom system
, for bilinear-triangular 'pulse (C,'-'O,866; C2 - 1000,)
,'"
3-279
3-.222,Maximuni response 'of e Las covp Las t.Lc, one-degree-of-fJ;ee'dom system
'for bi,linear- tri,,:ngular, pulse' (C 1 - ' ~', 825, Ca - 1000',)
:""
3 - 280
3-223 Maximum r asponsevof e Last.o-jiLas t.Lc, onE;-degree-of-freedom system'
."
for bilinear-triangular pulse (C 1 - 0,787, C2 - 1000,)
"",3-281
3,2~4,Maxi\num response of e Las t'o vp Las t Lc , one-degree-of-freedom"system
"
for bilinear-trian'gul'ar' pulse (C, - 0,750, C2 - 1000.)
,,'"
3-282
3-225 ,Maxiinumresiions'e :6 e Las t.o'spLas t Lc', one-degree-of-freedom'system
,
for bilinear-triangular pulse (C, - 0,715, C2 - 1000,)'
. " , 3-283
3-226 Maximum response of elasto-plastic; one-degree-of-freedom system
for bilinear-triangular: pulSe ({;1 - 0.681', C2 - 1000:):
. . . . " 3-28b
;, -
xxxi
TH 5.-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR
;88~22
3-227 Maximum response of e1asto-p1astic, one-degree-of-freedom

for bilinear-triangular pulse (C, ~ 0.648, Cz - 1000.)
3-228 Maximum response of e Las tovp Laatd.c , one,-degree-of-freedom
for bilinear- triangular pulse
O. 6i9, Cz.- 1000.) ,
3-229 Maximum response of ~lasto,p1astic, one-degree-of-freedom
for bilinear-triangular pulse (C, - 0.590, Cz '-.1000.)
3-230 Maximum response of e1a~to-p1astic, one-degree,-of-freedom
for bilinear-triangular pulse (C, - 0.562, Cz -1000.)
for bilinear-triangular' pulse (C, - 0.536, Cz - 1000.)
3-232 Maximum response of e1asto-j,lastic, one-degree-of.-freedom,
for bilinear-triangular ,pulse (C, - 0.511, Cz - lqOO.)
for bilinear-triangular pulse (C, - 0.487, Cz - 1000.)
" for bilinear-triangular pulse (C,. - 0.464, Cz - 1000.) ,
3-235 Maximum response of e1asto-p1astic, one-?egree-of-freedom
3-236 Maximum response of e1asto-plastic, one-degree-of-freedom
bilinear-triangular pulse (C, - 0.383, Cz'- 1000;)
for bilinear-triangular pulse (C, - 0.365, Cz" 1000.)
3-238 Maximum response of elasto-plastic, one-degree-of-freedom
for bilinear-triangular pulse (C, - 0.348, Cz - 1000.')
3-239 Maximum response of elasto-plastic, 'one-degree-of-freedom
,
.for bilinear-triangular pulse (C, - 0.287, Cz - 1000.)'
3-241 Maximum response of elasto-pla~tic, one,degree~of~freedom
for bilinear-triangular pulse (C, - 0.274, Cz - 1000;) .
3-242 Maximum response of elasto-p1astic, one-degree-of-freedom
for bilinear-triangular pulse (C, - 0.26i; Cz - 1000.)
3-243 Maximum response of elasto-plastic, one-degree-of,freedom
for bilinear-triangular pulse (Cl.- 0.237, Cz - 1000.)
for' bilinear-triangular pulse (C ,'- 0.198, C;- 1000.)
for bilinear-triangular 'pulse (C, - 0.178, Cz - 1000.)
'3-247 Maximum response of elasto-plastic, one:degree-of-freedom
,for bilinear-triangular. pulse (C , - 0.162, C~ - 1000.) .
3-249 Maximum response ,of elasto-plastic, one-degree-of-freedom
for bilinear-triangular pulse (C, - 0.133, C~ - 1000.)
3-250 Maximum response of e1asto-plastic, orie-degree-of-'freedom
for. bilinear-triangular pulse (C,'" 0.110, Cz - 1000:)
3- 253 Maximum response of elasto-plastic, one-,degree-of- freedom
for bilinear-triangular pulse (C, - ~.09i, Cz - 1000.)
(;, -
xxxii
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

3-254, Maximum' response of elasto-plastic, one-degree-of-freedom system
for bilinear-triangular pulse (Cl - 0.083,,' C2 - 1000.)
. . , . 3-312
3-255' Maximum response of elasto-plastic, one-degree-of-freedom system
for bilinear-triangular pulse (Cl - 0.075, C2'~ 1000.)
. . . . 3- 313
3-256 Maximum response of elasto-p~astic, one-degree-of-freedom system'
for bilinear- triangular pulse' (Cl - 0.068. C2 -1000.)
. . . . ,3-314
3-257 Maximum response of e Las tiovp Las t Lc , one-degree-of-freedom system
for bilinear-triangular pulse'(C l - 0.056, C2 - 1000.)
. . . . 3-315
3-258 Maximum response of elasto.plastic'; one-degree-of-freedom system
. , for bilinear-triangular pulse (Cl - q,.046 , C2 - 1000.)
. . . , 3-316
3-259 Maximum response'of elasto-plastic,one-degree-of-freedom'system
for bilinear-triangular pulse (Cl - 0,042, C2 - 1000.)
. . . . 3-317
3-260,Maximum response of elastoCplastic, one-degree-of-freedom system
'for b l l i.nearo, triangular pulse' ,(Cl - 0.032,' C2 = 1000.)
., . . " 3.318
3-261 'Maximum 'response of -e Las co vp Las t.Lc , 'one-degree-of-freedom :system
for bilinear-triangular pulse"(C l - 0.026,' C2 - 1000.-)
. . . . 3-319'
3-262 Maximum response of 'elasto-plastic, one-degree-of-freedom system.
for bilinear- triangular pulse (Cl , - 0.022, ,C 2 =' 1000.)
._ ". . 3-320
3-263 Maximum response ,of 'elasto-plastic, one-degree-of-freedom system
for bilinear-triangular pulse (Cl - 0.018, C2 - 1000.)
. . . , 3-321
3-264 Maximum response of e Las tc-pLas t t.c .. one-degree-'of-freedom system
for bilinear-triangular pulse.(C l .. 0'.015, 'C2 - 1000.)
. . . . 3-322
3-26S:Maximum response of
elasto~plastic,
for bilinear'- triangular pulse (Cl - 0.013, C2 - 1000.)

.....
Maximum response:of 'elasto-plastic, one-degree.of-freedom system
for bilinear-triangular pulse (Cl - 0.010, Cz - 1000.)
Graphical interpolation
,
.
Elastic rebound of simple spring-mass system ".'
.
Pressure-time and resistance-.time curves for elements which
respond to impulse . .' . .'. .' . .
..,....
3-266
3-267
3-268
3-'269
4-1
3'324
3-325
3-326
3-'327
Typical,resistance-deflection curve for flexural response'of

'concrete' elements . ".
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-5
4-6
4-7
4-8
4-9
Single leg stirrups . ", . . .

Lacing reinforcement , . . .
Typical ,resistance-deflection ,curve for tension membrane
response
,
of concrete .. . . . . . :'.
Typical laced' wall . . , . '.
Failure of a laced element
Failure of an-unLaced element
Typical stress-strain'curves for concrete and reinforcing steel
Design curve for DIF for ultimate-compressive strength of con-'
4-10
Design'curve for DIF:for yield stress'of ASTM A 615 grade 60,
crete'.
.".:.
. . . .'. .
reinforcing steel."
l'
0"
..
.,..
4-9
4-10
4-11
4-12
4-13
4-14
4-15
4-22
4-23
' . . ': -
4-24
' '.
Coefficient' for moment of inertia of cracked sections'with tension
4-11
~
r e Lnforcement; Drily
. :-.
. .'.
. '. .
.....
4-12
Coefficient for moment 'of inertia of cracked sections with equal' "
4-13
4-14
4-15
4-16
4-17
4-18
Typical reinforced'concrete cross sections .. , . .

Location of, critical sections' for diagonal tension
Angle of inclination of lacing bars . . . .'. . . .
Geometry for standard hooked reinforcement . . . .
Relationship between design parameters for unlaced elements
Idealized resistance-deflection'curve for'large deflections
reinforcement on opposite faces..
3-323
. .
xxxiii,
. . .
. .
. .
"
,.
4-30
4,-31
4-46
4-47
4-48
4-49
4-63
4-64
TK 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
4-19
4-20
4-21
4-22
4-23
4-24
4-25
4-26
4-27
4-28.
4-29
4-30
4-31
'4-32
4-33
Determination of ultimate shears

4-65
Typical flat slab structure
4-8.4
Relationship between design'parameters for flat slabs
4-85
Uni t moments
. . '"
.
.
.. 4-86
Typical resistance-deflection functions .for flat slabs
487
Yield line pattern for multi-panel flat slab
4-88
Quarter panel of flat slab.
,
4-89
Dynamic resistance-deflection curve .'
4-90
,,'
Critical locations for shear stresses
4-91
4-92
Typical column loads
':., .'
Relationship between design parameters for laced elements
4-108
Impulse coefficient C1 for -an element with. ,two adjacent edges
4-109 .
fixed and two edges f r e e .
.
. ", '
Impul~e coefficient C1 for an element with three edges fixed. and,
one edge free : .
. . . , .
4-.110
Impulse coefficient C1 for an element with four. edges fixed ' "
4111
Impulse coefficient Cu for an element with two adjacent edges
4:.112
fixed and two edges free
... .
,...
Impulse coefficient Cu for an 'element with, three edges fixed'and
one edge free
,
.
"
.
4-113
Impulse coefficient Cu for an element with four edges fixed
,4-114
Determination of optimum ratio of PV/PH for,maximum impulse
4-115
capacity
. "'
.' .
..Optimum ratio of PV/PH for maximum capacity at 'partial failure,.
deflection; Xl
' '. !
' '..
4-116.
Optimum "ratio of PV/PH for maximum capac Lty" at incipient failure ,,;
4-117
~
.
.
Vertical shear coefficients for ultimate shear stress at distance
de from the support (cross section type II and III)
..
Horizontah:shear coefficients for ultimate shear stress at distance de from the support (cross section type II and III)
4-119
Vertical shear parameters 'for ultimate shear stress at distance d
e
4-120
from the support (cross section type II and III)
Vertical shear coefficient ratios for ultimate-shear stress at
distance de from the support (cross section type II and III)
Horizontal shear parameters for ultimate shear stress at distance
i
4122
Horizontal shear coefficient ratios for ultimate shear stress at
4-123
Vertical shear parameters for ultimate shear stress at distance-de
4-124,
.. ' '.'
Vertical shear coefficient,ratios for ultimate shear stress at
4-125.
Horizontal shear parameters for ultimate-shear stress at distance
de from the support (cross section type H and III)
Horizontal shear coefficient ratios for ultimate shear stress at
4-127
Vertical shear' parameters ,for ultimate shear stress at distance de
4'-128
...
Vertical shear coefficient ratios for ultimate shear stress at
4-129
distance de. from the support (cross section type II and-Ill)
Horizontal-shear parameters for ultimate .shear stress at distance
4-130
.
Horizontal shear coefficient ratios. for ultimate shear stress at
4-131
distance de from the support ~(cross section type II and III)
4-35
4-36
4-37
4-38
4-40
4-41
4-42
4-43
4-44
4-46
4-47
4-48
4-50
xxxiv
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC
P-~97/AFR
',88-22
Shear coefficients for, ultimate, support shear. (cross section .type

II and III), . ", . . ' . .'. . . . . 4-132
4-54 Shear coefficients for ultimate support shear (cross section type
II and III) . ". . . . . . . . . . . . .
'. . . . . . .,. . . 4-133
4-55 Shear coefficients for ultimate suppoxt vshe ar (cross -section type
II and III)
_
_
. . . . . . . . . . 4-134
4-56 Shear coefficients for ultimate support shear (cross section type"
,4-135
II and III) . . . ,. . . . . . .'. . . . . . . ... . .
....
4-147
4-57 Attenuation of blast ,impulse, in .sand and concrete, w. - 85 pcf .
4-148
4-58 Attenuation of blast impulse in sand and concrete, w. - 100 pcf
4-164
4-59 Relationship between :design parameters for beams
4-165
4-60 Arrangement of reinforcement for combined flexure and torsion
,4-178,
.' .
4-61 Column interaction diagram
4-62 Typical interior column sections
4-179
. 4,192
4-63 Direct spalled element
4-64 Scabbed element . . . . . . . . .
4-193
4-194
4-65 Spall threshold for blast ~aves loading walls
4-195
4-66 Unspalled p~nel of composite panel
4-196
4-67 Shielding systems for protection against concrete fragments
4-197
4-68" Rigid attachment of fragment shield to barrier
4-198
4-69' Failure of an unlaced element . . . . ..'. ." '. .
,4.'.199
4-70 Failure at plastic hinges of laced elements . . .
4-200
4-71 Backwall failure of cubicle with laced reinforcement
4-72 Idealized curves for determination of post-failure fragment
4-201
velocities . . . . . . .' .
..........,
"
4-73 Post-failure coefficient Cf for an element fixed on two adjacent,
edges and two edges free
. , . , . " . . , ..... .
4-202
4-74 Post-failure coefficient Cf for an element fixed,on three edges
4-203
and one edge free . . . , .
.... " . . . . .
4-204
4-75 Post-failure coefficient Cf for an element fixed on four edges
4-76 Perforation and spalling of 'concrete due to primary fragments
4-212
, ','
..
4-77 Shape of standard primary-fragments
4-213
4-78 Concrete penetration chart for armor-piercing steel fragments .
4-214
4-79 Residual fragment velocity upon perforation of concrete barriers
,4-215
(for cases, where x < 2d) . , . . . . " . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-80 Residual fragment velocity upon perforation of: (1) Concrete
,4-216
barriers (for cases where x> 2d) (2) Sand layers . . . . . '.
,4-217
4-81 Depth of penetration into sand by standard primary fragments
4-82 Typical flexural reinforcement splice pattern forclose~in effects . '.' .,. . . . .'. '.' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 4-234
4-83 Typical section through conventionally reinforced concrete ,wall
4-235
4-236
4-84 Floor slab-wall intersections'. . . . . . . . .' . .' '.' '.' .
4-85 Typical horizontal corner details of conventionally reinforced
4-237
concrete walls '. . .
....
. . . . . '"
.
4-86 Preferred location of lap splices for a ,two-way element fixed on
four edges . . . . . . . . . . .
4-238
Splice
locations for multi-span slab
4-87
4-239
4-88 Section thro~gh column,of flat slab
4-240,
4-89 Laced reinforced element
4-241
4-90 Typical lacing bend details . . . .
4 - 242 .
4-91 Typical methods,of lacing . . . . .
4-243
4-92 Typical location of continuous and,discontinuous lacing
4-244
4-93 Typical details for splicing of lacing bars .
4-245
.
4,-246
4-94 Length of"lacing bars
4-95 Reinforcement details of laced concrete walls
4-247
4-53
xxxv "
TN 5-1300/NAVFACP-397/AFR 88-22
4-96
4-97
4-98
4-99
4-100
4-101
4-102
Typical detailat -Lntrer sec t.Lon of two continuous laced walls"" ,',: ~4-248'
Typical detail at intersection of continuous and discontinuous
laced walls , '. , , . , , , , , , , . , , , , , , ,'. , ,.l. . ' ..
4 .. 249
Typical detail at corner of laced, walls , , , . , . , , , , . "
4-250
.~. t
Intersection of' continuous' and discontinuous 'laced wallswithout
wall extensions , , . ; , . , , , "
. . . , . , . .
4-251
Corner details for laced,walls withoutwall extensions' .'
4-252
Element reinforced with single leg stirrups, , . , .', .
4~253
Typical detail at corner for walls reinforced with single leg
stirrups , .. , . ; . , . , " , , . ,', , ,', ,", , , "
4-254
,4- 255 .
Reinforcement detail of wall with single leg stirrups
Typical compos Lt.e: wall details ' ..{':
. , . ,
'4-256" '.
., . ....
Typical single-cell structures
. , , .
4257
1~
Typical multicubic1e structures
.... " ", ,
-4258
" - 4:'259:
'Pouring sequence
. , , " ,
a
4-103
4104
4105
4106
4 -107
.:'
'< : >".
t .""
io
.6
Typical stress-strain curves for steel.

" , ~ .: ,
. 512
Dynamic increase factors for yield stresses at various strain
rates for ASTM A-36 and A-514 steels.'. , . . , . ,
' " 5-13'
5- 3 Member end rotations for beams and frames, ' , ... , .
" , .' 5 ~23
5-4 . Relationships between design.parameters'for beams,
" , . ;.5-245-5' 'Relationships between de s Lgncpar-ame t'e r s for plates ... -.
, .;... ,'5-25'~
Theoretical stress distribution for pure bending at various stages' . ,
5-6
of dynamic loading, , . , . , , . ,', , . , ,', ,', . ,';,. . , . . 5-35
Moment-curvature diagram.for simple-supported, dynamically loaded,
5-7
I shaped beams. . , ,'. , , , . , "
",'
. , " . 5 - 36
5- 8
Val.ues . of E. for use' in equations 520 and 5 - 21. '". ,.... , , .'. , ;' ~'5 - 37
5-9
Typical La t e r a L bracing details:' . , : " ..., ~, . , , , , , .' .>. ':' 5-38
5-10 Moment-curvature diagram for dynamically ~oaded plates and rectan. 'gular cross ~ectionbeams, " . " . " . "
. . , . . " . ','5-41
5-ll"Biaxial bendirig of a doub Lyv symme trr Lc section,
. , . , . . .5-42
5-12 Resistance-deflection curve for a typical cold-formed section', ,',,'~5 -55 .
5-13 Elastic rebound of single-degree-of~freedomsysuem. ,
t : ",556' .
5-14 . Allowable dynamic (design) shear stresses for webs of co1dI
5-57
5-15 'Maximum end support reaction for cold-formed steel sections
5-58
5-16 Maximum interior support reaction for cold-formed steel.. .
'5-59
5-17 1 Gasket detail for blast door,', ,' .. , , . , , .', .', . , , .
5-69
5-18 Built-up double~leaf blast door with frame built into concrete,
5~70 '
5-19 Horizontal sliding blast door, " , . "
. , , , . , " ... 5- 71
5-20 'Single-leaf blast aoor with fragment shield (very high. pressure) , ,'5-71
5- 21' . Single-leaf blast door (high pressure), , , . ,." . , , .'
5 - 73
5-22 'Bilinear blast load and single-degree-of-freedom response for . '
"
determining rebound 'resistance. , " , ; . ,', '. .' , .. ,' ... """
574
5-23 Orientation of roof purlins with respect to blast. load direction' '.
for frame b Las t; loading. .,"",!~,.,.," -, , . ' ,
589
5-24 Estimates of.peak shears and axial loads in rigid frames due to
horizontal loads. . , . .', , , .", , . . " . , ,', , ": , , .
" 5-90
5-25 Estimates of peak shears ,and axial loads in braced frames due to'
horizontal loads, . . , , . . , . .
, , , .. '
''
, 5-91
5-26 . Corner connection behavior. , , . .
, , , , .
5-100
527 . Typical connections for cold-formed steel panels~ .
; ; 5-101
5-28 Steel penetration design chart - AP steet fragments penetrating,
mild steel plates, , . " . , , ' . :
"
. " " " . " , 5104
5-29 'Steel penetration design chart -mild steel fragments. penetrating
mild steel plates, " " " , . "
, , , , .',
, . . , 5-'105
5-1'
5 -2,
'_',J,'"
TK .5-l300/N.AVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
5-30
5-31
Residual fragment velo~ity upon perforation of steel barriers.

Typical framing plan for a single-story blast-resistant steel
5-106
structure.
5-32
5-33
5-34
5-35
5-36
5-37
Typical framing detail at interior Column 2-C. '.'

Typical framing detail' at .end Column I-C . . .
Typical framing deta~l .at side column 2-D.
Typical framing detail ,at corner Column I-D.
Typical details for cold-formed, lightgage steel paneling.
.
Typical welded connections for attaching cold-formed steel panels
to supporting members.
.
Typical bolted'connections ~or attaching cold-formed steel
panels to supporting members
.
Details of typical fa.steners for cold-!~rmed steel panels.
Single-leaf blast qoor installed in a steel structure.
Double-leafblast door. installed in a con~rete structure.
Compression arch and tension-arch blast doors.
5-109
5-110
5-111
5-112
5-113
5-114
5-38
5-39
5-40
5-41
5-42
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-5
6-6
6-7 <
6-8
6-9
6-10
6-11
6-12
. . . .
. . "
. .
. . .
5-115
5-116
5-117
5-118
5-119
5-120
Masonry wall with flexible support

Masonry wall with rigid support . .
Concrete masonry walls . . . . . .'
Typical joint reinforced masonry construction
Special masonry unit for .use with reinforcing bars
6-14
6-15
6-16
6-17
6-18
6-19
6-20
Archfng ao t Lortvo f ~nol},":".reinforced masonry wall

Typical concre~e masonry units . . . . . . .
Connection details for rebound and/or negative overpressures

Deflection of non-reinforced masonry walls . . . .
Structural behavior of non-reinforced solid masonry panel with
-r LgLd supports . . . . . .
.
6-21
Common precast elements . . . . . . . . . ."
6-36
6-22
6-23
Typical stress-strain curve for high strength wire

Roof slab-to-girder connec~ion . . . . . .
6-14 Typical wall panel-to-roof slab .connection
6-15 Wall panel-to foundation connection . . .
6-16 Typical panel splice . . . . . . . . . . .
6-17 General layout of pre-engineered building .
6-18 Recommended pre-engineered building design loads
6-l9a General configuration of suppressive shield groups
6-l9b General configuration of suppressive shield groups (continued)
6-20 Typical utility penetration . . . . . .' . . . . . . . . . .
6-21 Typical location of utility penetration in shield groups 4, '5, and
81 mm
'
.
6-22 Typical location of utility penetrations in shield group 3
6-23 Typical vacuum line penetration
6-24 Sliding personnel door
6-25 Door - group ,3 shield . .
6-26 Rotating product door . .
6-.27 Characteristic Parameters for Glass Pane, Blast Loading, Resistance Function and Respons~ Model .
. . . . .
6-28 Peak Blast Pressure Capacity for Tempered Glass Panes (alb - 1.00,
t - 1/4 and 5/16 in). " . . .' . '. . . . .
. '. . . . . . . . .
6-29 .Peak Blast Pressure Capacity for Temper~d Glass Panes (alb - 1.00,
t - 3/8 and 1/2 in) . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
6-30 'Peak Blast pressure Capacity for Tempered Glass panes (alb - 1.00,
t - 5/8 and 3/4 in) . . . . . . . . . '.'
. .. . . . .
6-13
..
xxxvii
6-37
6-38
6-39
6-40
6-41
6-53
6-54
6-62
6-63
6-64
6-65
6-66
6-67
6-68
6-69
6-70
6-83
6-84
6-85
6-86
TM 5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22 "

Peak Blast Pressure Capacity for Tempered Glass Panes (alb ~ 1.25,'
t - 1/4 and 5/16 in)
. . . .
.
6-87
6-32 . Peak Blast Pressure Capacity for Tempe r ed Glass Panes. (alb - 1.-25,.
t - 3/8 and 1/2 in) . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . 6-88
6-33 Peak Blast Pressure Capacity for'Tempered'Glass Panes (alb - 1.25.
t - 5/8 and 3/4 in) . . . . . . . . . . .
.
'6-89
6-34 Peak Blast Pressure Capacity for Tempered Glass Panes (alb - 1~50;
t - 1/4 and 5/16 in)
: . . ' . . '.
.
6-90
6-35 Peak Blast Pressure Capacity' for Tempered GlassPanes (alb _.1. 50" .
t - 3/8 and 1/2 in) . . . . . . . . . . .
.
6-91
6-36 Peak Blast Pressure Capacity for Tempered Glass Panes (alb ~ 1.50,
t - 5/8 and 3/4 in) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . ..... 6-92
6-37 Peak Blast Pressure Capacity for Tempered Glass Panes "(alb - 1.75.'
t - 1/4 and 5/16 in) .....~. '. . . '.' . . .
6-38 Peak Blast Pressure Capacity for 'Tempered Glass Panes
t - 3/8 and 1/2 in) . . . . . . . . . . .
6-39 Peak Blast Pressure Capacity for Tempered Glass Panes
6-31
'""
5/8 and 3/4 in) . . . . . . .
.~
. ! ",
6-40
Peak Blast Pressure Capacity 'for Tempered Glass Paries

t - 1/4 and 5/16 in) . . . . . . . . . .
t - 3/8 and 1/2 in)'. . . . . . . . . . .
6-42 Peak Blast Pressure Capacity for TemperedGlass Panes
t - 5/8 and 3/4 in) . . . . . . . . .'. !'. . ", -, " .. )
6-43 . Peak Blast Pressure Capacity for Tempered Glass Panes
t - 1/4 and 5/16 in) . . . . . . . . . .
t - 3/8 and 1/2 in) . . . . . . . . . . .
6-45 Peak Blast Pressure Capacity for Tempered Glass Paries
. . . . . . . . . 6-101
t - 5/8 and 3/4 in) . . . . . . . . . . .
6-46 Peak Blast Pressure Capacity for Tempered'Glass'Panes (alb - 4.00,
t - 1/4 and 5/16 in)
. . . . . . 6-102'
6-47 Peak Blast Pressure Capacity for Tempered Glass Panes (alb -4.00. "
','
t - 3/8 and 1/2 in) . . . . . . . . . . .
" . :". . . . 6-103
6-48 Peak Blast Pressure Capacity for Tempered' Glass Panes (alb - 4.00 .
t - 5/8 and 3/4 in)
. . . ..
'6-104
6-49 Nondimensional Static Load-Stress Relationships for Simply Sup-
6-105
ported Tempered Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
6-50
6-51
6-52
6-53
6-54
6-55
6-56
6-57
6-58
6-59
6-60
6-61
6-62
6-63
Nondimensional Static Load-Crater Deflection Relationships 'for

Simply Supported Tempered Glass . . . . . .
. . . .
Edge, Face, and Bite Requirements . . . . .
. ...
Distribution of Lateral Load Transmitted by Glass Pane to the
~indowFrame
. . . . . . . . .
Geometry of a buried structure
..
Typical roof panel load . . '..
Contribution of three pressure waves' on a wall,
Spall plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
...
Typical'eartn-covered steel-arch magazin~ .' J
Minimum separation distances of standard magazine
Sketch of 300 cfm sand filter . . . . . . ..
.'
-.",
Blast-actuated louver . . . . .
Arrangement of multiple louvers for a large volume of air
.
Typical blast-actuated poppet valve
Time delay path . . . . . . . . . .
xxXviii'
6-106
6-107
'6-108
6-138
6-139
6-140 .
6-141
6-Y45
6-146
6-157
6-158
6-159
6-160
6-161
TN 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

6-64
6-65
6-66
6-67
6-68
6-69
6-70
6-71
6-72
Idealized model of shock isolated mass

Shock isolation system . . . . .
Base-mounted isolation systems configuration
Overhead pendulum shock isolation systems using platforms
Helical compression spring mounts . . . . . . .
Typical torsion spring shock isolation system .
Schematic of single and double action pneumatic cylinders
Schematic of liquid springs
Belleville springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xxxix
6-162
6-180
6-181
6-182
6-183
6-184
6-185
6-186
6-187
"STRUCTIJRES TO RESIST THE EFFECTS OF ACCIDENTAL EXPLOSIONS"
CHAPTER 1. INTRODUCTION
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
CHAPTER i
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
.~
1-1. Purpose
The purpose of this manual is ,to present methods of design for protective
construction used in facilities for development, testing, production,.storage,
maintenance, modification, inspection, demilitarization, and disposal of
explosive materials.
.
1-2. Objective
,.
The primary objectives are to establish design procedures and construction

techniques whereby propagation of explosion (from one structure or part of a
structure to another) or mass detonation can be prevented and to provide
protection for personnel and valuable equipment:
The secondary objectives are to:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Establish the blast load parameters required for design of protective structures ..
Provide methods for calculating the dynamic response of structural
elements including reinforced concrete, and structural steel.
Establish construction details and procedures necessary to afford
the required strength to resist the applied blast loads.
Establish guidelines for siting explosive facilities to obtain
maximum cost effectiveness in both the planning and structural
arrangements, providing closures, and preventing damage to interior portions of structures because of structural motion, shock, and
fragment perforation.
1-3. Background
For the first 60 years of the 20th century, criteria and methodsbased upon
results of catastrophic events were used for the design of explosive.facilities~
The criteria and methods did not include a detailed or reliable quantitative basis for assessing the degree of protection afforded by the protective
facility. In the late.1960's quantitative procedures were set forth in the
first edition of the present manual, "Structures. to Resist the Effects of
Accidental Explosions". This manual was based on extensive research and
development programs which permitted a more reliable approach to current and
future design requirements. Since the original publication of this manual,
more extensive testing and development programs.have taken place . .This.
additional research included work' with materials other than reinforced.con-,
crete which was' the principal construction material referenced in the'initial
version of the manual.
Modern methods for .the manufacture and storage of explosive materials, which
include many exotic chemicals, fuels, and propellants, require less space for
a given quantity of explosive material than was ,previously needed. Such,
concentration of explosives increases the possibility of the propagation of
accidental explosions. (One accidental explosion causing the detonation of
1-1
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC'P-397/AFR. 88-22
other explosive materials.) It 'is evident'that,a requirement for more,accurate design techniques is essential. This manual describes rational design
methods .ee prov'ide the required structural protection."
"
These design methods account for the close-in effects of a detonation- including the high pressures and the nonuniformity of blast loading on protective
structures or barriers. These methods also account for intermediate and farrange effects for the design of structures located away from the explosion.
The dynamic response of structures; constructed of various materials, -or
combination of materials, can be calculated,' and, details are g iven.rtn provide" ,

the strength and ductility required by the design. The design approach is
directed primarily toward protective structures subjected-to the effects of a
high explosive detonation. However, this approach is general, and it is
applicable to the design of other explosive environments as well as other"
explosive materials as mentioned above.
, ' ,
,
"-;
The design techniques set forth in this manual are,based upon the results of
numerous full- and small-scale structural response and explosive effects tests
of various materials conducted in conjunction with, the development of this
manual and/or related projects.
~
1-4. Scope
It is not the intent of ' this manual to establish safety criteria. 'Applicable
documents should be consulted for this purpose. ':Response predictions' for
personnel and equipment are included for information.'
In this manual' an effort is
However, sufficient general
been 'included ,in order that
situations other than those
made 'to cover the more-probable design situations.

information on protective design techniques hils,
application of the basic theory can be made to'
which were fully considered.
,
'.
This manual is applicable to the design of protective structures subjected to

the effects associated with high explosive detonations. For these design
situations,' the manual will apply for explosive quantities less than25,OOO ",
pounds for close-in effects.' However, this manual is also applicable to other
situations such as far- or intermediate-range effects. ' For these latter cases
the design procedures are applicable for explosive quantities in the order of
500,000 pounds which is the maximum quantity of 'high ,explosive approved, for,
aboveground s t.or age facilities in the Department of Defense manual, '"Ammun-'"
ition and Explosives Safety Standards", DOD 6055.9-STD.' Since tests were "
primarily directed toward the response of structural steel and reinforced ,
concrete elements to blast overpressures, this.manual.concentrates on aesign
procedures and techniques for these materials. However, this does not imply
that concrete and steel are the only useful materials for ,protective construction. Tests, .cc establish the response of wood" brick, blocks, and p Las t Lcs , as
well as .che blast attenuating' and mass e f f'ec t svo f soil .are contemplated. The
results of'these ce st s may require, at a later date, the' supplementation of'
these design methods for these and other materials.
Other manuals are available to design protective structures against ,the
effects of high explosive or nuclear 'detonations. The procedures in these
manuals will quite' often complement this manual and should be consulted for
~pecific applications.
1-2
''
>".
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC
'P~397/AFR
88-22
Computer programs, which are consistent with procedures and techniques contained in the manual, have been approved by the appropriate representative of
the US Army, the US Navy, the US Air Force and the Department of Defense
Explosives Safety Board (DDESB). These programs are available through the
following repositories: : ' ,
(1)
Department of the Army

Commander and Director
U.S. Army Engineer
Waterways Experiment Station
Post Office Box 631
. Vicksburg, Mississippi 39180-0631
Attn: WESKA
'
(2)
Department of the NavY

Commanding Officer
Naval Civil Engineering Laboratory
Port Hueneme, California 93043
. Attn: Code LSI
, "
(3)
Department of the Air Force

Aerospace Structures
Information and Analysis Center

Wright Patterson Air Force Base
Ohio 45433
Attn: AFFDL/FBR
If any modifications to these programs are required, they will be submitted

for review by DDESB and the above services. Upon concurrence of the revisions, the necessary changes will be made and notification of the changes will
be made by
the individual repositories.
,
'
1-5, Format
This manual is subdivided into six specific chapters.dealing with various

aspects,~f design.
The titles of ' these ~h~pters are~as follows:
Chapter'i
Chapter 2
Chapter 3
Chapter 4
Chapter S
Chapter 6
Intro'duction
Blast, Fragment; and'Shock Loads
Principles of Dyn~ic Analysis
Reinforced Concrete'Design
Structural Steel Design
Special Considerations in Explosive Facility Design
When applicable, illustrative examples are included in the Appendices,

, .
.
~
Commonly accepted symbols 'are' us~d~s' much as possible. However. 'protective

design involves many different scienti'ftc and' engineering' fields,' and" therefore, no attempt is made to standardize completely all the'symbols used. Each
symbol Ls defined where it .Ls first used',' and in the list of symbols at the'
end of each chapter,
,,'
;,'
1-3
TK 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

CHAPTER CONTENTS
1-6. General
This chapter presents a qualitative description of an explosive protective

system, and addresses acceptor system tolerances, and the basis for structural
design.
"
SAFETY FACTOR
1-7. Safety Factor
Simplifications leading to safety conservative structural designs are made in
the design procedures of this manual. However, unknown factors can still
cause an overestimation of a structure's capacity to resist the ef~ects of an
explosion. Unexpected shock wave reflections, construction methods, quality
of construction materials, etc., vary for each facility . . To pompensate for
such unknowns it is recommended that the TNT equivalent weight be increased by
20 percent. This increased charge weight is the "effective charge weight" to
be used for design. Departures from this recommendation must be approved by
the responsible agency.
All charts pertaining to explosive output,;n this manu~i
sea level.
EXPLOSION PROTECTION SYSTEM
a~e
'.
'
for readings at
, '.,
1-8. System Components
.J. . '
1- 8 . 1. General
.
Explosive manufacturing and storage facilities are constructed so that they

provide a predetermined level of protection against the hazards of accidental
explosions. These facilities consist of three components: (1) the donor
'
system (amount, type and loca~ion of, the potential~y detonating explosive)
which produces the damaging output, (2) t!}~ accepto; sy'stem'(personnel,.
equipment, and "acceptor" explosives) which requires protection, and (3) the
protection system (protective structure, structural components or distance)
necessary to shield against.or,~ttenu~t~~he hazardous,~ffects to levels which
are tolerable to the acceptor, ,system. TI:>e flow c1}ar~ in Figure 1-1 briefly
summarizes the protective system and relaFes the Jndiv~dual components to each
other.
1-8.2. Donor System
The donor system includes the type amf amount 'of the' potentially detonating'
explosive 'as well as materials which, due to, their proximity to the explosive,
become part of the damaging output. The output of the donor explosive
' ,
includes blast overpressures (hereafter'r';ferred to .as blast pressures or,' ,
pressures), pr.imary fragments resulting from c!ised:',explos'ives and secondary'
fragments resulting from materials in the immediate vicinity of th~ donor~_
explosive. Other effects from'the donor include ground shock, fire; heat:
dust, electromagnetic pulse, etc, For the quantities of explosives considered
in this manual, blast pressures constitute the principal parameter governing
the design of protective structures. However, in some situations, primary
1-4
TN 5-1300/NAVFAC
P-3~7/AFR
88-22
and/or second~ry fragments and ground shock may assume equal importance in the
planning of .the protection system. The other effects mentioned are usually of
concern in specific types of facilities, and their influenc'f' on the overall
design can usually be met with ~he use of standard engineering design procedures. Except for ,very large quantities of explosiv~s, ground shock'effects
will usually be small and, in most cases, will be of concern when dislodging
of components within the protecti~e structure i~ possible.
The chemical and physical properties of the donor explosive determine the
magnitude of the blast pressures whereas the distribution of the pressure
pattern is, primarily a function of the location of the don~r explosive relative to the,components .of the protective facility. The mass-velocity properties of the primary fragments depend upon the properties of the donor explosive and the explosive casing: while, for'secondary fragments, their massvelocity',properties are functions of the type of fragment materials ,(equipment, frang;ble portions of the structure, etc.), their relative position to
the donor explosive, and the explosive itself.
The explosive properties, including the molecular structure (monomolecular,
bimolecular, etc.) of the explosive, shape and dimensional characteristics,
and the physical makeup (soli~, liquid, gas) of the charge, determine the
limitation of the detonation process .. These limitations result in either a
high- or low-order detonation. . With a high-order detonation,
, the process is
generally complete and results ~n the maximum pressure output for the given
type and amount of material: On the other hand, if the detonation is incomplete with the initial reaction .not proceeding through the material mass, then
a large quantity of the explosive is consumed by deflagr~tion and the blast
pressure is 'reduced.
",~'"
"
,
.,
Primary fragments are produced by the explosion of a cased donor charge. They
result from the shattering of a container which is in direct contact with the
explosive material. The container may be 'the casing of conventional munitions, the kettles, hoppers, and other metal containers used in the manufacture of explosives, the metal housing of rocket engines, etc.' Primary fragments are characterized by very high initial velocities (in the order 'of
thousands of feet per second), large numbers of fragments, and relatively
small sizes. The heavier fragments may penetrate a protective element depending upon its composition and thickness. The lighter fragments seldom achieve
perforation. ,However, in certain ,cases, primary fragments may ricochet into
the protected
'area and cause injury to .
personnel,.
damage to
equipment, or, .
. .
.
propagation ,of acceptor explosives. For protection against primary fragments,
sufficient structural mass 'must'be provided to prevent full penetration, and
the configuration of,thecomponents of the protective facility must prevent
fragments from'ricocheting into protected areas.
Secondary fragments are prcducedby the 'blast wave impacting obj ec es located
in the vicinity of the explosive source. At these,close distances, the
magnitude of the shock load is'very high and objects can be broken up and/or
torn loose from their supports ..
Pieces of machinery, tools, materials such as pipes and lumber, parts of the
structure (donor structure) enclosing the donor explosive, large pieces of
equipment, etc. may be propelled by the blast. Secondary fragments are
characterized by large sizes (up to hundreds of pounds) and comparatively low
velocities (hundreds of feet per second). These fragments may cause the same
1-5

damage as primary fragments, that is, injury to personn~l, damage to equipment
or detonation of acceptor explosives. However, protection against secondary
fragments is slightly different than for primary fragments. While preventing
perforation by primary fragments is important, secondary fragments pose addi"
tional problems due to their increased weight. 'The protective structure must
be capable of resisting the large impact force' (momentum) associated with a
large mass travelling, at a relatively high velocity.
1-8.3. Acceptor System
-.
The acceptor system is composed of the personnel, equipment, or explosives

that require protection. Acceptable injury to personnel or damage to equipment, and sensitivity of the acceptor. explosive(s) , establishes the degree of
protection which must be provided by the protective structure. ' The type and
capacity of the protective structure are selected to produce a balanced design
.with respect to the degree of protection required by the acceptor and the"
'
hazardous output of the donor.
Protection in the immediate vicinity' oLthe donor explosive is difficult
because of high pressures,' ground shock, fire, heat, arid high speed fragments'
generally associated with a detonation. Protection can be afforded through
the use of distance and/or protective structures. Personnel may be subjected
to low blast pressures and/or small ground motions without direct injury.
However, injury can be su~tained by' falling arid impacting hard surfaces.,
In most explosive'processing facilities, 'equipment is :xpendable and does ~ot
require protection. Equipment which is very expensive, difficult to replace
in a reasonable period of time, and/or must remain functional to insure the
continuous operation of a vital service may require protection. The degree of
protection will vary depending upon the type and inherent strength of the
equipment. In geheral, equipment and personnel are protected in a similar
manner. However, equipment can usually sustain higher pressures than person-'
nel, certain types of equipment may be able ,to withstand fragme~t impact
whereas personnel can not, and lastly, equipment can sustain larger shock
loads since ft can be shock isolated and/or secured to the protective struc:
ture.
The degree of protection for acceptor explosives range from full protection to
allowable partial or total collapse of the protective structure. "In order'to
prevent detonation, sensitive acceptor'explosives must be protected from blast'
pressures, fragment impact, and ground shock whereas "in~ensitive" explosives
may be subjected to these effects'in amounts consistent with their to~erance.
The tolerances of explosives to'initial blast pressures, structural motions,
and impact differ for each type of explosive material with pressure being the
lesser cause of initiation. Impact loads are the ,primary causes of initiation
of acceptor explosives. They include primary and secondary fragment 'impact as
well as impact of the explosive against a hard surface in which the explosive
is dislodged from its support by pressure or ground ~hock and/or propelled by
blast pressures.
"
1-6
DONO~
SYSTEM
"
'.
FRAGMENTS
SECONDARY
'
I PRIMARY 1
EMP
BLAST PRESSURE
HIGH
, I ,""
"
PROTECTIVE
STRUCTURE
"
"
CONTAINMENT]
STRUCTURE
.l.
SHELTERS
LOW
'
, ,
'
..
i.
BARRIERS
DISTANCE
.~
OTHER EFFECTS
FIRE, HEAT, DUST
GROUND SHOCK
"
,.
"
EQUIPMENT
PROTECTIVE
STRUCTURE
PERSONNEL
~
RECEIVER
SYSTEM
Figure I-I
Explosive protective system

1-7
ACCEPTOR
CHARGES
TK 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
PROTECTION CATEGORIES
1-9. Protection Categories
For the purpose of analysis, the protection afforded by a facility or its
components can be subdivided into four protection categories as described
below:
1.
Protection Category 1 - Protect personnel against the uncontrolled
release of h~zardous materfals, including toxic chemicals, active radiological
and/or biological materials; attenuate blast pressures and structural motion
to a level consistent with personnel tolerances; and shield personnel from
prima~y and secondary fragments and falling portions of the structure and/or
equipment; .
Protection Category 2 - Protect equipment, supplies and'stored
2..
explosives from fragment impact, blast pressures and structural response;
3.
Protection Category 3 - Prevent co~unication of detonation by
fragments, high-blast pressures, and structural response; and
4.
Protection Category 4 . Prevent mass detonation of explosives as a
result of subsequent detonations produced by communication of detonation
between two adjoining areas and/or structures. This category is similar to
Category 3 except that a controlled communication of .detonation is permitted
between defined areas.
.
1-8
Tn
5~1300/NAVFAC
P-397/AFR 88-22
ACCEPTOR SYSTEMS TOLERANCES

1-10. Protective Systems
1-10.1. Protective Structures
Personnel, equipment or explosives are protected from the 'effects of an
accidental explosion by the following means: (1) sufficient distance between
the donor and acceptor systems to 'attenuate the hazardous effects of the donor
to a level tolerable to the acceptor, (2) a structure to directly protect the
acceptor system from the hazardous output of the donor system, (3) a structure
to fully contain or 'confine 'the hazardous output of the donor system, and (4)
a combination of the above means. While large distances may be used to
protect acceptor systems"a protective facility is the most common method
employed when limited area is ,available. In general, separation distances are
used as a means ,of attenuating the hazardous effects of the donor to a level
which makes the design of a protective facility feasible, practical and cost
effective.
Protective structures can be classified as shelters; barriers 'or containment
structures. Protection is provided by each structure in three distinct
manners. Shelters are structures that' fully enclose the acceptor -sys t.em with
hardened elements. These'elements provide direct protection against the
effects of blast pressures, primary and secondary fragments and ground shock,
Containment structures are buildings which fully or near fully enclose the
donor system with hardened elements. They protect the acceptor system by
confining or limiting the damaging output of the donor system. A barrier acts
as a -shLs Ld between the donor and acceptor systems. They attenuate the
damaging output of the donor system to a level which is tolerable to the
acceptor system.
Shelters are fully'enclosed structures and are used to protect personnel from
injury, prevent damage to valuable equipment, and prevent detonation of sensitive explosives. The exterior of the structure is composed of hardened'
elements which must be designed to resist the effects of blast pressures and
both primary and'secondary fragment impact and the interior must be arranged
to shock isolate the acceptor system. Entrances must be sealed by blast doors,
and depending upon the amount of usage and/or the potential explosive hazard,
may also require blast locks (an entrance containing a blast door followed by
a second blast door; one of which is always closed). Other openings required
for facility operations, such as ventilation passages, equipment access
openings, etc., may be sealed by blast valves or blast shields. Design
criteria for these protective closures are governed by their size and location
and the magnitude of the blast pressure and fragment effects acting on them.
Small openings may be permitted if the magnitude and rate of pressure buildup
within the structure is tolerable to the occupants and contents of the shelter. Specific provisions may also be necessary to insure that partitions,
hung ceilings; lighting fixtures, equipment, mechanical and electrical fixtures, piping, conduits, etc., are not dislodged as a result of structure
motions or leakage pressures and become a hazard to the building's occupants
and contents.
Barriers are generally used to prevent propagation of explosions. They act as
a shield between two or more potentially detonating explosives. Their main
purpose is to stop high speed'fragments from impacting acceptor explosives.
1-9
TK 5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR'88~22
In addition, they reduce secondary. fragments striking the acceptor. They can
also reduce blast prassures in the near range (at a distance up to ten times
barrier height) but have little or no effect on the far range. Barriers can
be either barricades (revetted or'unrevetted earth barricades), simple cantilever walls, etc., .or cubicle-type structures where one or more sides and/or
the roof are open to the atmosphere or enclosed by frangible elements. Igloos
(earth covered magazines), below ground silos, and other similar structures
with open or frangible surfaces can also.be classified as barriers. They are
usually used in storage, manufacturing, 'or processing of explosives or explo-'
sive materials. The explosives are usually located close to the protective
element. Consequently, the barrier is subjected to high intensity blast loads
and the acceptor explosive is subjected. to comparatively,high l~akage pressures.
Containment structures are generally used for high hazard operations and/or
operations involving toxic materials. These operations must be remotely
controlled since operating personnel should not be located within the struc"
ture during'hazardous operation. All entrances must be sealed with blast
doors. Other openings required for facility operations such as ventilation
passages, equipment and/or product access openings, etc. , ,must be sealed by
blast valves or blast.shields. For operations not involving toxic materials;
blast pressures may be released to the'atmosphere. However, this pressure
release must be controlled both in magnitude and direction either by mechanical means (through blast valves or shields) or by limiting the size of the
openings and/or directing the leakage pressures to areas where personnel,
equipment and acceptor explosives will be protected.'
The various components of a protective facility must be designed to resist the
effects of an explosion. The exterior walls and roof are the primaryprotective elements. These elements are said to be "hardened" if they are .designed
to resist all the effects associated with an explosion' (blast pressures,
primary and secondary fragments, structure motions), On the other hand, a
blast resistant element is designed to resist blast pressure only.' While a
blast resistant element is not designed specifically to. resist fragments,' the
element has inherent fragment resistance properties which. increases with
increa~ing blast resistant capabilities.
In many parts of this manual, . the
term "blast resistant" is used synonymously with "hardened."
1-10.2. Containment Type Structures
The first three protection categories can apply to structures classified as
containment structures when these structures are designed to prevent or limit
the release of toxic or other hazardous materials to a level consistent with
the tolerance of personnel. These structures generally are designed as donor
structures and can resist the effects of "close-in" detonations (detonations
occurring close to the protective structures). Added protection is accomplished by minimizing the pressure leakage to the structures exteriors, by
preventing penetration to the exterior of the structure by primary fragments
and/or formation of fragments from the 'structure itself. Quite often, ,containment structures may serveas a shelter as described below. Procedures for'
designing reinforced concrete conta,~nment structures are ~ontained in Chapter
4. A design ratio of weight to volume of W(V < .15 lb/ft is a practical
range for reinforced concrete containment structures.
l-lO
1-10.3. Shelters
The first three protection categories apply to shelters which provide protection for personnel, valuable equipment, and/or extremely' sensitive explosives.
Shelters, which are usually located away from the explosion, accomplish this
protection by minimizing the pressure leakage into a structure; providing
adequate support for the contents of the structure, and preventing penetration
to the interior of the structure by high-speed primary 'fragments, and/or by
the impact of fragments formed by the'breakup of the donor structure. Protection against the uncontrolled spread of hazardous material is provided by
limiting the flow of the dangerous materials into the shelter using blast
valves, filters, and other means. Procedures for designing concrete and
structural steel buildings are contained in Chapters IV and V, respectively.
1-10.4. Barriers
Although the first three protection categories of protection can be achieved
with the use of a shelter, the last two protection categories (para. 1-9)
pertain to the design of barriers where protection of explosives from the
effects of blast pressures and impact by fragments must be provided. For the
third protection category, the 'explosion must be confined to a donor cell,
whereas in the fourth protection category, propagation between two adjoining
areas is permitted. However, the communication of detonation must not extend
to other areas.of the facility. This situation may arise in the event of the
dissimilarity of construction and/or explosive content of adjacent areas.
Procedures for designing reinforced concrete barriers are contained in Chapter
4.
1-11. Human Tolerance

l-ll.l.Blast Pressures
Human tolerance to the blast output of an explosion' is relatively high.
However, the orientation of a person (standing, sitting, prone, face-on or
side-on to the pressure front), relative to the blast front, as well as the
shape of the pressure front (fast or slow rise, stepped loading), are significant factors in determining the amount of injury sustained. Shock tube and
explosive tests have indicated that human blast tolerance varies with both the
magnitude of the shock pressure' as well as the shock duration, i.e., the
pressure' tolerance for short-duration blast loads is significantly higher than
that for long-duration blast loads.
Tests have indicated that the air-containing tissues of the lungs can be
considered as the critical target organ in blast pressure injuries. The
release of air bubbles from disrupted alveoli.of the lungs into the vascular
system probably accounts .for most deaths. Based on present data, a tentative
estimate of man's response to .fast rise pressures of short duration (3 to 5
ms.) is presented in Figure 1-2. The threshold and severe lung-hemorrhage
pressure levels are 30 to 40 psi and above 80 psi, respectively, while the
threshold for lethality due to lung damage is approximately 100 to 120 psi
(Table 1-1) . . On the other hand, the threshold pressure level for petechial
hemorrhage resulting from long-duration loads may be as low as 10 to 15 psi,
or approximately one-third that for short duration blast loads. Since survival is dependent on the mass of the human, the. survival for babies will be
different than the survival for small children which will be different from
1-11

that for women and men. These differences have been depicted in Figure 1-2,
which indicates that the survival scaled impulse depends on the weight of the
human. It is recommended that 11 lb. be used for babies, 55 lb. for ,small
children, 121 lb. for adult women and 154 lb. for adult males.
A direct relationship has been established between the percentage of ruptured
eardrums and maximum pressure" i.e., 50 percent of exposed eardrums rupture at
a pressure of 15 psi for fast rising pressures while the threshold of eardrums
rupture for fast rising pressure is 5 psi .. Temporary hearing loss can occur
at pressure levels less than that which will produce onset of eardrum rupture.
This temporary hearing loss is a function of the pressure and impulse of a
blast wave advancing normal to the eardrum. The curve which represents the
case where 90 percent of those exposed are not likely to suffer an excessive
degree of heating loss, is referred to as the temporary threshold shift. The
pressures referred to above are the maximum effective pressures, that is, the
highest of either the incident pressure, the incident pressure plus the
dynamic pressures, or the reflected pressure. The type of pressure which will
be the maximum effective depends upon the orientation of the individual
relative to the blast as well as the proximity of reflecting surfaces and the
occurrence of jetting effects which will cause pressure amplification as the
blast wave passes through openings. As an example, consider the pressure
level which will cause the onset of lung injury to personnel in various
positions and locations. The threshold would be 30 to 40 psi reflected
pressure for personnel against a reflector '(any position), 30 to 40 psi
incident plus dynamic pressure; 20 to 25 psi would be the incident pressure
plus 10 to 15 psi dynamic pressure for personnel in the open, ,either standing',
or prone-side-on, and 30 to 40 psi incident pressure for personnel in the open
in a prone-end-on position.
However, the above pressure level assumes that an individual is supported and
will not be injured due to being thrown off balance and impacting a hard and
relatively non-yielding surface. In this case, pressure levels which humans,
can withstand are generally much lower than those causing eardrum or lung
damage. For this case, one publication has recommended that tolerable pressure level of humans not exceed 2.3 psi which is higher than cemporary vthreshold shift of temporary hearing loss (Figure 1-3) and probably will cause
personnel, which are located in the open, to be thrown off balance.
Structures can be designed to control the build-up of internal pressure,
however, jetting effect produced by pressure passing through an opening can
result in amplification of the pressures at the interior side of the opening.
The magnitude of this increased pressure can be several times as large as 'the
maximum average pressure acting on the interior of the structure during the
passage of the shockwave. Therefore, openings where jetting will occur
should not be directed into areas where personnel and valuable equipment will
be situated.
1-11.2. Structural Motion
It is necessary that human tolerance to two types of shock exposure be considered:
1.
Impacts causing body acceleration/deceleration, and
1-12
2.
Body vibration as a result of the vibratory motion of the structure.
If a subject is not attached to the structure, he may be vulnerable to impact

resulting from collision with the floor due to the structure dropping out
beneath him and/or the structure rebounding upward towards him. However, the
more plausible means of impact injury results from the subject being thrown
off balance because of the horizontal motions of the structure, causing him to
be thrown bodily against other persons, equipment, walls and other hard
surfaces.
Studies have indicated that a probable safe impact tolerance velocity is 10

fps. At 18 fps there is a 50 percent probability of skull fracture and at 23
fps, the probability is nearly 100 percent. This applies' to impact with hard,
flat surfaces in various body postures . . However , if the line 'of' thrust for
head impact with a hard surface is directly a Long the longitudirial" axis of the
body (a subject falling head first), the above velocity tolerance does not
apply since the head would receive the total kinetic energy of the entire body
mass. Impacts with corners or edges are also extremely critical even at
velocities less than 10 fps. An'impact velocity of 10 fps is ,considered to be
generally safe for personnel who are in a fairly rigid posture; therefore,
greater impact velocities can be tolerated' if the body is in a more flexible
position or if'the area of impact is large.
The effect of horizontal motion on the stability of personnel (throwing them
off balance or hurling them laterally) depends on the body ,stance and position, the'acceleration intensity and duration, and the rate of onset. of the
acceleration. An investigation of data concerning sudden stops in automobiles
and passenger trains indicates that personnel can sustain horizontal accelerations less than 0,44 g without being thrown off ba~ance. These accelerations
have durations of several seconds; hence, the accelerations considered in this
manual required to throw personnel off balance are probably greater because of
their shorter durations. Therefore, the tolerable horizontal acceleration of
0.50 g required to provide protection'against ground-shock effects/resulting
from nuclear detonations should be safe for non-restrained personnel '(standing, sitting, or reclining).
.'
j
If the vertical downward acceleration of the structure is greater than 1 g,

relative movement between the subject and the structure is produced. As the
structure drops beneath him, the subject begins to fall until such time that
the structure slows down and the free falling subject overtakes and impacts
with the structure. The impact velocity is equal to the relative velocity
between the structure and the subject at the time of impact, and to assure
safety, it should not exceed 10 fps.
To illustrate this vertical impact, -a body which free falls for a distance
equal to 1.5 feet has a terminal or impact velocity of approximat~ly 10 fps
against another stationary body, If the impacted body has i downward velocity
of 2 fps at the time of impact, then the impact velocity between the two
bodies would be 8 fps.
Based on the available personnel vibration data, the following vibrational
tolerances for restrained personnel are considered acceptable: 2g for less
than 10 Hz, 5g for 10-20 Hz, 7g for 20-40 Hz; and 109 above 40 Hz'.. However,
the use of acceleration tolerances greater than 2g usually requires restrain-
TN 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
ing devices too elaborate for most explosive manufacturing andtesting facilities.
1-11.3. Fragments
Overall, human tolerance to fragment impact is very low; however, certain
protection can be provided with shelter type structures. Fragments can be
classified based on their size, velocity, material and source, i:e.:
1.
Primary fragments, which are small, high-speed missiles usually

formed from casing and/or equipment located immediately adjacent
to the explosion,and
2.
Secondary fragments, which are generated from the breakup. of the

donor building, equipment contained' within the donor structure
and/or acceptor buildings which are severely damaged by an explosion.
Discussion of human tolerance of both of these types of fragment overlap,

since the basic differences bet~eenthese fragments are' their size and velocity. Impact of primary fragments can be related to an impact by bullets where
the fragment is generally small; usually of metal and traveling at high
velocities. A great deal'of research has been conducted for the military;'
however, most of the data from these tests is not available. Some fragmentveloCity penetration data of humans has been developed for fragment weights
equal to or Le s s than 0.033 pounds, .and indicates that, as the ratio of the
fragment area to weight increases, the velocity which corresponds to a 50
percent probabilitY'of'penetrating human skin will increase. This trend is
illustrated in Table 1-2',where the increase in velocity coincides with the
increase'of area .of t~e fragment.
Secondary fragments, because they have a large mass, will cause more serious
injuries at velocities. significantly less than caused by primary fragments.
Table 1-3 indicates the velocity which corresponds to the threshold .of serious
human injury. ,As mentioned in 1-11.. 2 above, the impact of a ..relatively large
mass with a velocity less than 10 fps against a human can resultin serious
bodily injury. Also, the impact of smaller masses (Table 1-3) with higher
velocities can result in injuries' as severe as those produced by larger
masses. See applicable Safety Manual for fragment criteria.
1-12. Equipment Tolerance
1-12.1. Blast Pressures
Unless the equipment is of the heavy-duty type (motor, generators, air .handlers, etc.), equipment to be protected from blast pressures must be housed in
shelter-type structures similar to those required for the protection of
personneL Under .these circumstances, the equipment will be subjected ,to:
blast pressures which are permitted to leak into the shelter through small
openings. If the magnitUde of these leakage pressures is minimized to a level,
consistent with that required for personnel protection, then in most cases
protection from the direct effects of the pressures is afforded to the equipment. However, in some instances, damage to the equipment supports may occur
which, in turn, can result in damage to the equipment as a result of falling.
Also, if the equipment is located immediately adjacent to the shelter open1-14

ings, the jetting effects of the pressures entering the structure can have
adverse effects on the equipment. In general, equipment should be positioned
away from openings and securely supported. However, in some cases , equipment
such as air handling units must be positioned close to the exterior openings.
In this'event, the equipmerit must be strong enough to sustain the leakage.
pressures (pressures leaking in or out of openings) or protective units such
as blast valves must be installed.
1-12.2. Structural Motion and Shock

Damage to equipment can result in failures which can be, divided into two
classes; temporary and permanent. Temporary failures, often called"malfunctions," are characterized by 'temporary disruption of normal operation .. whereas
permanent failures are associated with breakage, resulting in damage so severe
that the ability of the equipment to perform its intended function is impaired
permanently or at least over a period of time.
:.
The capacity of an item of equipment to withstand shock and vibration is

conventionally expressed in terms of its "fragility level" which is defined as
the magnitude of shock (acceleration) that the equipment can tolerate and
still remain operational. The fragility level for a particular equipment'item
is dependent upon the strength of the item (frame, housing, 'and components)'
and, to some extent, "the nature of the excitation to which it is subjected.
An equipment ,item may sustai~ a single peak acceleration due to a"transient

input load, but may fail under a vibration-type input having the same peak
acceleration amplitude. Also the effects of the occurrence of resonance'may
be detrimental to the item functioning. For these reasons, fragility'data
should be considered in connection with such factors as the natural frequencies and damping characteristics of the equipment and its components, as well
as the characteristics of the input used' to determine the tolerance as compared to the motion of the 'structure which will house the equipment.
The maximum shock tolerances for equipment vary considerably more than those
for personnel. To establish the maximum shock tolerance for a particular
item, it is necessary to perform tests and/or'analyses. Only selected items of
equipment have been tested to determine shock tolerances applicable for
protection from'the damage which may be caused by structural motions.
Most of this data resulted from tests to sustairi.ground-shock motions due to a
nuclear environment, which will have a duration considerably longer than that
associated with a HE explosion. However, the data which are available concerning shock effects indicate strength and ruggedness or sensitivity of
equipment. These data, which are based primarily on transportation and
conventional operational shock requirements, indicate that most commercially
available mechanical and electrical equipment are able to sustain at least
3g's, while fragile equipment (such as electronic components) can sustain
approximately 1. 5g's.
.'
The above tolerances are safe values, and actual tolerances are, in many
cases, higher than 3g's, as indicated in Table 1'4. However, the use of such
acceleration values for particular equipment require verification by shock
testing with the induced motions (input) consistent with expected structural
motions.
C
1-15
The above tolerances are applicable to equipment which is mounted directly to

the sheltering structure. For the equipment to sustain shock accelerations in
the order of magnitude of their tolerances, the equipment item must be "tied"
down to the structure, that is, the equipment stays attached to the structure
and does not impact due to its separation. In most cases, shock isolation
systems will be needed to protect the equipment items. The shock isolation
systems will consist of platforms which are supported by a spring assembly for
large motion and/or cushioning material when the motions are small. These
systems should be designed to attenuate the input accelerations to less than:.
19 in order that separation between the equipment and support system' does not
occur. If the spring systems are designed to be ."soft" (Le ss than 1/2 g)
then, depending on the mass of the equipment, vibratory action of the system
coul~ occur due. to individuals walking on the platforms.
l-12~3. Fragments
Susceptibility of an item of equipment to damage from fragment impact depends
upon the ruggedness of its components, its container, if any, and upon the
size and velocity of the fragment at the time. of impact.
Some heavy eq~ipment (motors, generators, etc.) may sustain malfunctions as a
result of the severing. of electrical or mechanical connections, but seldom are
destroyed by the impact of primary fragments. On the other hand, this heavy
equipment can be rendered useless by secondary. fragment impact. Fragile
equipment (electronic equipment, etc.) will generally be inoperable, after' the
impact of either primary or secondary fragments. The impact force and pene-.
tration capability of light fragments may perforate sensitive portions of
heavy equipment (fuel tank of generators, etc.).. Low-velocity light fragments
seldom result in severe damage. These fragments usually ricochet beyond the
equipment unless the component part of the equipment it strikes is glass or.
other fragile material, in which case, some' damage may be inflicted.
Although the damage to the equipment of a structure can be great as a result
of falling or flying debris, the increased cost. of: strengthening walls and,
other portions of the protective shelter is usually. not warranted unless
personnel or acceptor charge protection is also' required, and/or the cost of
the equipment item lost exceeds the increased construction costs. ~ven in
this latter situation, a probability analysis of the occurrence of an incident
should be made ~rior to incurring additional construction costs.
1-13. Tolerance of Explosives
1-13.1. General
The tolerances of explosives to blast pressure, structural motion, and impact
by fragments differ for each type of explosive material and/or item. Generally, fragment impact is the predominant cause of detonation propagation.
1-13.2. Blast. P~essures
Except in regions of extremely high pressure, mos t; explosive materials are
insensitive to the effects of.blast pressures. In many instances, however,
the secondary effects, such as dislodgement of the explosive from its support
and propulsion of the explosive against hard surfaces, can result in a possible detonation depending upon the tolerance of the explosive to impact.
1-16
Results of several different types of sensitivity tests (drop test, card gap
tests, friction tests, etc.) are presently available which 'will aid in the
establishment of the tolerances of most explosive materials to impact.
1-13.3. Structural Motions
Structural motion effects on explosives are similar ,to the impact effects
produced by blast pressures. The movement of the structure tends to dislodge
the explosive from its support, resulting in an'impact of the. explosive with
the floor or other parts of the structure. The distance the explosive falls
and its sensitivity to impact and friction determine whether or not propagation occurs.
1-13.4. Fragments
Although blast pressures and structural motions can produce explosive propagation, the main source of communication of explosions is by fragments, principally primary fragments from the breakup of the donor charge casing, fragments
produced by the fracture of equipment close to the explosion, disengagement of
interior portions of the structure, and/or failure of the structure proper.
In recent years, an extensive test program has been performed which has
provided a significant amount of information regarding explosive propagation
by primary fragment impact. This program was conducted primarily to determine

safe separation criteria for bulk explosives and munitions, mainly for the
design and operation of conveyance systems. The individual test programs were
predicated upon given manufacturing operations where improved safety criteria
would lessen the probability of a catastrophic event. Individual test programs were performed in two stages, exploratory and confirmatory, where the
safe separation was determined during the exploratory phase and confirmation
was established on a 95 percent confidence level.
A typical test set-up is illustrated in Figure 1-4, while the results of the
various test programs are listed in Table 1-5 for bulk explosives and in Table
1-6 for munitions. These Tables list the bulk explosives and munition types,
the configurations examined and the established safe separation distances.
For all items/configurations examined, unless specified, the test conditions
were: 1) in free air (without tunnels), 2) open spaced (no shields), 3) in a
vertical orientation, and 4) measured edge-to-edge. Inspection of Tables 1-5
and 1-6 reveal that minimum safe separation distances have not been established for some of the items listed. If specific safe 'separation distances
are required, as will be for other items not listed, further tests will be
required. A detailed compilation of the items and test procedures and methods
are listed in the bibliography.
Several testing methods have been developed to de~ermine the sensitivity of
explosives to impact by secondary fragments. In one series of tests which
utilized a catapult method for propelling approximately 70 pounds of concrete
fragments, sand and gravel rubble, against lightly cased Composition B acceptor explosives indicated a boundary velocity on the order of approximately 400
fps. A second series of tests, which propelled concrete fragments as large as
1000 pounds against 155 mm projectiles (thick steel wall projectile), indicated that the projectile would not detonate with striking velocities of 500
fps. This latter test series also included acceptor items consisting of, 155
projectiles with thin wall riser funnels, which detonated upon impact with the
1-17

concrete. Another series of fragment testing included the propelling of large
concrete fragments against thin wall containers with molten explosive simulating typical melt-pour kettles in.a loading plant. In all cases, the contents
of the simulated kettle detonated. Although the results of these test series
indicated that thick wall containers of explosive will prevent propagation,
while thin wall containers will not, the number of tests performed in each
series was relatively few. Additional tests are required to determine the
extent that the variation of container thickness has on the magnitude of the
mass/velocity boundary established to .datie .
,_
',"
-,
-.,.
::.
"
.,
;.
. . -:~
"
1-18
'"Q
:;.
,.
(!sd)d '3l:lnSS3l:ldl:l3AO
Figure 1-2
Survival curves for lung dainage
1-19
IGG
IG
w
a::
:::>
CI)
CI)
w
a::
Q.
G.I.
G.G!
G.I
SPECIFIC IMPULSE, I (psl- ms)
Figure 1-3
HJman ear damage due to blast pressures

1-20
t.G
TK 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
:i r .
.,. ,
."
"
Figur~' 1-4' ExampLe of safe 'separation tests

.."
-,
.!
"
t...
~. ~
o@
t..
TOP VIEW
TOP VIEW
"
i;
...
....
H'
Pushelr Plate
-~
i....
/'
Weld
<,
Steel Cane
50.0 ,x 2 0.0.
x.3in
Weld
CD
St.el Plate
3xl2x28in
I-.
"
'l>.."-~
Steel Cone.
0.5 LO.x61.0.
x 20 jr 0.375 in
..
Steel Bar
.3250xl.o.5in .
f1l
II
~usher P!at.
bl
R Ir
<.
Steel Cone'
5 QO. x. 2:5 0.0.
x3in
Wel'd
,
If-
III ,
14 "
fl
TRANSFER PALLET
Steel Cone
10.5 1.0. x 6 1.0
x 20 x 0.375 in
Bar
1.3750x10.5in
SECTION
b. MSAAP
Steel Plate
Ixl2xl9in
II U . WSteel
Steel Plate
3x12x38in
SECTION
a. VEE. SHIELD
Grenades
Weld
"\
$teel Plate
xl2x28in
I ,....
~V
Lot!:
!_.
0:
V-If
Steel Plate
I x7x37.5 in
Steel V-Shields
2 Pieces Each
,...
--I.
155mm M483
Projec tile Body
9
ile Body
M42 lrenades
CD
PALLET
TH
.'. a .
Table 1-1
5~1300/NAVFAC
P-397/AFR 88-22
-7r
~.'
Blast Effects in Han Applicable to Fast-Rising Air Blasts of Short

. Duration (3-5 ms.)
.
...
~ " ::,
_ t:: .
.Cri~ical_0rgan 'or
.,
..
Maximum Effective
Pressure (psi)*
..
Event
"
Eardrum Rupture
Threshold
, 50 percent
,
Lung Damage:
Threshold
50 peJ;cent
Lethality
Threshold
50 percent
N~ar 100 percent
,
-
,
5 .
15 .
I
'30-40
80 and above,
-,
100-120
130180
200250
..
* Maximum effecti~e pressure is the highest of incident pressure,

incident pressure plus dYnamic pressure, or reflected pressure,
50 Perceni :probability!6f penetratirig Human Skin
,Table 1-2
,
..
. ..
..
.
.. .
., ,
.. I ,.
Threshold
Energy'
'(ft-1b. )
Ratio of 'FragmEm'~ ,
Fragment Are~Based'o~
Velocity
area/weight (ft 2 /lb) 0.033'lb'.' fragiIient weight (ft 2) , . (f'ps )
,
,
0.03
0.10
0.20
0,30
0.40
i
.-
-\'.
.00099
" ,00330
,00660
,'00990
.01320
o'
,
-'
,
.
'
- -..
1-23,
.::-
, -.,:-..
'
("j'"
..
,.
"' .
100'
'165'
250
335
425
,
'
: 5. "
14 .
32
58
93
TK 5-l300/NAVFAC' P-397/AFR 88-22
Threshold of Serious Injury to Personnel DUe to Fragm~nt

Impact
,,
Table 1-3
..
Critical Organ
Fragment
,
Velocity(fps)
Yeight(lbs, )
Energy (ft-lb.)
.
Thorax
>2.5
0'.1
0.001
10
80
,400
4
10
2.5
Abdomen and
"
.Lfmbs
>6.6' ,
0.1
0.001
9
9
,
,
. 10
100
450
>8.0
0.1 "
0.601
Head
"
10
75
550
"
12
16
3
Table 1-4 Examples of Equipment Shock Tolerances

.
..
'
Equipment
'
Peak Acceleration>
,
20 to 30g
Fluorescent light fixtures (with:,lamps)

. .)
",'
.. , .
.
'
Heavy mac~i~ery (motor, generators, . '-,-, ,

transformers, etc. > 4,000 lbs. )
..;
'
. ..
.r
Medium-weight machinery (pumps, condensers,

AC equipment, 1',000 to 4,000 lbs. )
Light machinery (small motors <1,000 lbs. )
.
's ,
1-24
,.
,
10 to 30g
15 to 45g
30 to 70g
'.
TH 5"1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFIl. 88-22
Safe Separation Distance (bulk explosives)
Table 1-5
,.
Bulk
Explosive
Composition
A-5
Explosive
Weight (lbs)
10
15
Composition
B
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
60
60
Composition
C-4
3.5
50
Cyclotol
(75/25)
60
Test Configuration
Safe
Separation (ft)
Rubber buckets in tunnel

Aluminum buckets in tunnel
6.0
20.0
Flake, depth'o~' 15 .inc~ Serp~nt{x

conv:eyor ..
Riser scrap:2 pieces
4 pieces
2 pieces within:funnels
4 piece~ wit~in funnels
Cardboard container in tunnel
_
Plastic buckets
.17'(1)
1.5
3.0
2.0
3.0.
12.0
12.0 (2)
60
Aluminum buckets in tunnel

Aluminum.buckets in tunnel
..
Aluminum box in tunnel & 0.38-1n
Kevlar.shield.
Cardboard box in tunnel.
20
40
80
DOT-2lC-60 Containers with tops on

3.8
4.8
5.5
NitroGuanidine
(Powder)
25
50
450
DOT-2lC-60 Containers with tops.on

DOT-2lC-60'Containers with tops ~n
DOT-2lC-60'Containers with tops'on
5.5
7.0
16.0
TNT, Type 1
Flake
---
Depth on 2-foot Serpentix conveyor
55
168
Cardboard box
Aluminum tote bin,
w/steel fiberglass in tunnel" ..
Aluminum tote bin in wooden cunnaL,
Guanidine
Nitrate
168
'.
" (l
20.0 (2)
25.0 (2)
24.0
18.0
.08 (1)
12.0
60.0
50.0
(l)Depth of material at which propagation is prevented is less than or

equal to the value .shown .
(2)Minimum distance tested. Actual safe separation distance less than
or equal to that indicated. Further tests required to establish minimum safe
separation distance.
l-2~
.. '):able J:6 ..,S!l.fe. S~pa,rat1C?n

...
... ..
.,: .
D~l!ta~ce
,
'
(munitions),
. :r' Safe
Test Configuration
"
Munition
Sei\iration .(ft)
-.
.'
'.
8-inch M106
HE Proj'ectile
Single round ~ith3-inch , __ '

diameter aluminum bar'snield'.
8 inch M509
HE Projectile
Single round ~ith "VEE"'sKleld

.,
Figu~e l-5a)
t.
15.5 mm M107.
HE Projectile
Si~gl; roun4'with 'o~e-inch thick

aluminum or 1/2-inch thick, steel
plate shield
J' .,."
.,
"
1.0
" .t.J .'
'
. "-"'-
24 per palle(.,.
'
155 mm M483
HE Projectile
Single round w.ith.oMS ,shield (Fig, ,1-,5b)
155 mm M795
HE Projectile
(TNT, TYPE 1)
Single round
105 mm Ml
HE Proj ect~le
'.
"
....
..
"
I:'
,~,
';'J
.~ -','
...- ~....
'"
16 per pallet
-.
,-'
,I }
".
r''''
16 pe~'~al~et, with funnel

3/4'- frich thick's teel"piate
'.
"
'.
....
...". -,
'-.'
105 mm ,M456
Primed cartridge
cases
,J
_.
....
HEAT-T Projectile
Single round with 3-inch diameter
aluminum bar shield
.
,
S!~gle,~<i1:'nq, ho,;iz'1rit":i 'with

'
3-inch diameter aluminum bar shield:
81 mm M37!<A2El
HE Cartridge
Single round with 1/4-inch thick Lexan

plate'eitension to 2-inch thick'
,
aluminum brick shield
I
, ,',
_ -J
'
126, '
1.5
TH S-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR
88-22
. .
Table 1-6 (Cont'd.)
Munition
Safe
Separation (ft)
Test Configuration
8lmm M374
HE Projectile
Single round
2.0
Single round with 2-inch thick

0.73 (1)
I
72 per pallet
30 mm XM789
HEDP Projectile
..
30.0
2 .each. PBXN-S pellets
0.08
Shell body with 2 pellets
..
Loaded body assembly
2S mm XM792
HEl-T Cartridge
..
0.08
0.08
Heated loaded body assembly
0.25
Fuzed projectile
0.25
Type I pellets
0.08
Type II pellets
0.04
Loaded body assembly
0.17
Fuzed projectile
0.17
Complete cartridge
0.17
Hemispheres
BLU-63 AlB
Bomblet
0.04
Hemispheres in fixtures
Hemispheres, 16 per tray
Bomblet:
0.17
..
OJ'
1-27
TH 5-130'O/NAVFAC'P-397/AFR 88-22
Table 1-6 (Cont'd.)

.
Munition
Safe _
Separation (ft)
Test Configuration
I----,--'--,----+-;-------:--:---,---:-.,-------I---------j,
BLU-97/B
Submunition
. 16 per pallet with 1/2-inch

thick aluminum plate shield
4.0
16 per pa H.e t; with "airflow" shield.

(1/2-inch thick aluminum plates,.
cut in open "picket fence" design
with one plate's spaces covered by
the second plate's columns).
M42/M46 GP
5.0
, ." '-
. I
Single bomblet with either 100%

or 75% shield (1/2-inch thick
aluminum plate).
0.75
Single grenade
0.17
Grenades,
(w/o fuzes)
64 per tray
.'
7.0
40.0
.,
1.0
768 per carrier, in tunnel

8 per M483 Ring Pack
..,
15 per M509 Ring Pack
1.5
0
32/64 per single/dual

cluster tray
1<.
.~:
Single mine
0.50 (1)
2-mine canister
0.50 (1) .' .
Single mine with 3-inch thick

0.25
"
(1) ._ Minimum distance tested ... Actual safe separation distance..less than or
equal to that indicated. Further tests required to establish minimum
safe separation distance.
1-28
TK
5~1300/NAVFAC.
BASIS FOR STRUCTURAL DESIGN
P-397/AFR 88-22
.'
1-14. Structural Response

,,"."
1-14 ..1. General .
Dynamic response criteria to be used in the design,of a protective structure
and its elements depend on: (1) the properties (type, weight, shape, casing,
etc.) and location of the donor explosive, (2) the sensitivity (tolerance) of,
the acceptor system, and (3) the physical properties and configuration of the
protective .structure. In many situations, the acceptor'system will control
the overall required 'structural response.
J'."
......
1-14.2. Pressure .Design Ranges

"
1'.
1-14.2.1. General
I
An engineering analysis of.the:blast.pressure and fragments ,associated with

high explosive,detonations~actingon protective structures must be made to
describe the response of,theuprotective structures to donor output: The
response to'the .blast.output is expressed in terms of design ranges according
to the pressure intensity, 'namely, (1) high pressure, and (2) low pressure. As
subsequently shown, these design ranges are related to the relative location
of the protective structure to the explosion.
"
1-14.2.2 ..High-Pressure Design Range

,"
At the high-pressure design range, ,the initial pressure ~cting'on the protective structure are extremely high and further 'amplified by their reflections
on the structure. Also the durations of the applied loads are short, particularly where complete venting of the explosion products of the 'detonation'
occurs. These durations are also short in comparison to the response time
(time to reach maximum deflection)-of the individual elements of the structures. Therefore, structures subjected to bl~st.effects in'the.high-pressure
range can, in certain cases, be designed for the impulse (area under the
pressure-time curve, Chapter 2) rather than the peak pressure associated with
longer duration,blas~ pressures. If theacceptor system is comprised exclusively of explosive~, the protective ,donor structure may, be permitted to
exceed incipient failure.and produce ~post failure" fragments .provided that
the fragment,velocities are less than that which will initiate detonation of
acceptor charges .. This latter range of response is referred to as the "brittle mode of failure.
II
... ..
~
In the event personnel and/or expensive'equipment is being.protected or where

containm~nt type structures are providing the protection, then;incipient
failure, design' is I!'l.t permitted. " Here, ,the:.~ffects of the high pressure andthe long <!-uration pressures associated, with-contained- products of the explo- ';
sion mus~be accollnted,for in determining. the protective structure-response .
c
Fragments associated with the high-pressure range usually cons Ls t-vof high.
~eloci~y missil~s associated,wi~htcas~ngbreakup or acceleration of equipment
positioned close to the explosion. For acceptors containing explosives, the
velocities of' primary fragments which penetrate the protective structur~ must
be reduced tOea level below the velocity which will cause detonation of the
acceptor charges. For personnel or expensive, equipment, ~he possibility of
1-29
,.
TH
5~1300/NAVFAC
p C 397/ AFR,88- 22 '
fragment impact on the acceptor must be completely eliminated. Aiso associated with the "close-in" effects of a high-pressure design, range are' the
possible occurrence of spalling of concrete elements. Spalling'is generally
associated ,with the disengagement of the concrete cover over reinforcement at
the acceptor side of a protective element. Spalling can De a hazard to personnel and sometimes to equipment but seldom will result in propagation of
explosion of an acceptor system.
1-14.2.3. Low-Pressure' Design Range
Structures subJected to blast pressures associated with,the low-pressure range
sustain peak pressures of smaller intensity than those,associated'with the
high-pressure range. However, the duration of the load can,even exceed the
response time of the structure. Structural elements designed for ,the ,lowpressure range depend on both pressure and impulse . .
In cases where'the peak pressure is relatively low and the explosive charge is,
very large (several hundred 'thousand pounds of explosive) the duration of
blast pressures will be extremely long in comparison to those of smaller
explosive weights. Here, the structure responds primarily tothe peak pressure
in a manner similar to those structures designed to resist the effects of
nuclear detonations. This latter case, although seldom,encountered; is sometimes referred to as the "very low-pressure range.
II
Since the low-pressure design range is involved in the design of shelter type
structures, donor fragmentation is of concern. 'Secondary fragments formed
from the break-up of donor structures can produce minor damage to a shelter.
These fragments generally have a 'large mass but their velocities are generally
much less than those 'of primary fragments.
1-14.3. Analyzing Blast Environment
. '.'
11.t
Although each design pressure range is distinct, no clear-cut divisions

between the ranges exist; therefore, each protective structure must be analyzed to determine its response:
Structural response depends on design and load: Three possible designs,
resulting in three distinct resistance-time responses are illustrated in
Figure 1-6. Curve ,A represents the resistance-time function of an element
which responds to the impulse;. the time to reach maximum deflection is very
long in comparison to the load duration. The low'pressure range is represented by Curve B where the element's response depends on both pressure and
impulse. Here and dependent on design, the response time of an element can be
less than, .equaL to, or greater than the ,load duration (Figure 1-6)'. Curve C
illustrates the very low-pressure design. range' where the element responds 'to
pressure. The required peak resistance is in theorder 'bf'magnitude of the'
peak pressure, while the duration of the load is extremely long compared to
the time to reach maximum deflection. Although the required maximum resistance will vary in comparison to the peak pressure, the variation will be
slight and, in general, the required maximum resistance of'an element to
resist long duration loads will be only 'slightly ,larger (5 to 10 percent) than
the peak pressure.
Figure 1-7 indicates semi-quantitatively the parameters which' define 'the
design ranges '(including the very low range) of an element, along'with the
1-30
TN ,-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

approximate relationship between the time to reach maximum deflection and the
load duration.
It was indicated earlier that the design range of an element:is related to the
location of the element relative to the explosion. For the quantity of explo.
sives considered in. this manual, ,an,elemene.designed for the highpressure
range is usually situated immediately adjacent to the explosion, and its
exposed surfaces facing the explosion are oriented normal or nearly nO,rmal to
the propagation of the initial pressure wave (Figure 1-8, cases I. through IV).
On the other hand, elements which are located close to the explosion and. are,
positions parallel to 'the path of the wave propagation may respond to the
blast effects associated with the low pressure design range. ,Elements located
close to a detonation seldom respond solely to a p~ak pressure.
'
Certain elements of a protective structure located, a distanc~ from the explosion may respond to the impulse (high'pressure range) even though they are'
located at the low-pressure range while other structures located near 'the.
explosion will respond to the. low-pre'ssure design .renge , In the. former case,
the structure will not. contain personnel or expensive equipment and will"
primarily serve as a barrier structure: In'the'latter'case,'the structure
will serve as a shelter (Case I, Figure 1-8) .
.....
-.
, .
... , .. ~ 'I..
-::1 '
1-31
';"i
j ..
I.lJ
-.' - PRESSURE
.'
RESISTANCE
I-
---
V!
V!
I.lJ
c::
I
I
CX5
DEFL.
"~t"
',.
I.lJ
TIME MAX.
"
Q:
:::::l
V!
V!
I.lJ
c::
a.
TIME
0) VARIABLE
RESISTANCE - TIME CURVES
I.lJ
l-
V!
V!
I.lJ
c::
\
TIME'
b) VARIABLE PRESSURE...,.. TIME CURVES
Figure 1-6
Variation of structural response and blast loads
1-32 .'
::!J
IC
.,c:
(I)
....
I
d'
.,
0
-J
PRESSURE
. /RESISTANCE
j\
(I)
,....,
w
w
(I)
:i'
5'
IC
-e
.iil.,
~
(I)
Q.
:
tm
to
Q.
\ . /RESISTANCE
-J
(I)
RESISTANCE
0
Y
\
....,3
PRESSURE
o.
V"'" l
to 1m
TIME
TIME
0
-J
I
'kESSURE
1m
TIME
to
PRESSURE
DESIGN RANGE
HIGH
LOW
VERY LOW
DESIGN LOAD
iMPULSE
. PRESSURE -TIME
PRESSURE
INCIDENT PRESSURE
< 100psi
IOOpsi
< 10 psi
(I)
.0'
PRES.SURE . DURATION
SHORT
INTERMEDIATE
:::l
.,
0
:::l
IC
(I)
en
LONG- .
RESPONSE TIME
RELATIONSHIP
OF ' m Ito
LONG.
Im/lo
> :3
..
INTERMEDIATE
SHORT
:3
> Im/lo > 0,1
Imlto < OJ
...
pLAN
CUBICLE.
PLAN
SHELTER
CUBICLE
SEQl 9N
CUBICLE
SECTION
'CASE I
CASE
:rr
2
OR
PLAN
CUBICLE
CONTAINMENT
STRUCTURE
, SECTION
.,
:~
CUBICLE
PLAN
SHELTER
,.,
SECTION
CASE :IIr
CASE
:m
LEGEND: . ,
W HIGH-PRESSURE RANGE
W LOW-PRE$SU:RE RANGE
W VERY, LOW~PRESSURE RANGE
Figure 1-8
.:'
Design ranges corresponding to location of the

structural elements relative
to .an explosion
','
"
.'
TN 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
APPENDIX lA
LIST OF SYMBOLS
TK 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
acceleration due to gravity (ft/sec 2)
unit positive" impulse (psi-ms)
i- s
unit scaled impulse for use in figure 1-2 (psi-ms/lb 1 / 3 )
pressure (psi)
tm
time at which maximum deflection occurs (ms)
to
duration of positive phase of blast pressure (ms)
volume of containment structure (ft 3 )
wh
weight of human being (lbs)
charge weight (lbs)
lA-l
TK 51300/NAVrAC P-397/Ara 88-22
APPENDIX 1B
BIBLIOGRAPHY

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Structures to Resist the Effects of Accidental Explosions (with Addenda), Department of the Army Technical Manual (TM5-1300), Department .of
the Navy Publication (NAVFAC P-397), Department of the Air Force Manual
(AFM 88-22), Washington, D.C., June 1969.
Dobbs, N., Structures to Resist the Effects of Accidental Explosions.
Volume I. Introduction, Special Publication ARLCD-SP-84001, Prepared by
Ammann & Whitney Consulting Engineers, New York, N.Y., for U.S. Army
Armament Research, Development and Engineering Center, Armament Engineering Directorate, Picatinny Arsenal, Dover, New Jersey, December
1987.
".
Ayvazyan, H., et al., Structures to Resist the Effects of Accidental
Explosions. Volume iI, Blast. Fragment. and Shock Loads, Special
Publication ARLCD-SP-84001; Prepar~d by Ammann & Whitney Consulting
Engineers, New York, N.Y., in association with Southwest Research
Institute, San Antonio, TX, for U.S. Army Armament Engineering Directorate, Picatinny Arsenal, Dover, New Jersey, December 1986.
Dede, M., et al., Structures 'to Resist the Effects of Accidental'Explosions.Volume III. Principles of Dynamic Analysis, Special Publication
ARLCD-SP-8400l, Prepared by Ammann & Whitney Consulting Engineers, New
York, N.Y., for U.S. Army Armament Research and Development Center,
Large Caliber Weapon systems Laboratory, Dover, New Jersey, June 1984.
Dede, M., and Dobbs, N., Structures to Resist the Effects of Accidental
Explosions, Volume IV. Reinforced Concrete Design, Special Publication
ARLCD-SP-84001, Prepared by Ammann & Whitney Consulting Engineers, New
York, N.Y., for U.S. Army Armament Research, Development and Engineering
Center, Armament Engineering, Directorate, Picatinny Arsenal, Dover, New
Jersey, April 1987.
Kossover, D., and Dobbs, N., Structures to Resist the Effects of
Accidental Explosions. Volume V. Structural Steel Design, Special
PublicationARLCD-SP-8400l, Prepared by Ammann & Whitney Consulting
Engineers, New York, N.Y., for U.S. Army Armament Research, Development
and Engineering Center, Armament Engineering Directorate, Picatinny
Arsenal, Dover, New Jersey, May 1987.
Dede, M., Lipvin-Schramm, S., and Dobbs, N. Structures to Resist the
Effects of Accidental Explosions. Volume VI Special Conditions in
Explosive Facility Design, Special Publication ARLCD-SP-8400l, Prepared
by Ammann & Whitney Consulting Engineers, New York, N.Y. for U.S. Army
Armament Research and Development Center, Large Caliber Weapon System
Laboratory, Dover, New Jersey, April 1985.
Safety Manual, AMC-R 385-100, Department of the Army, Headquarters U.S.
Army Materiel Command, Alexandria, Virginia, August 1985.
A Manual for the Prediction of Blast and Fragment Loadings on Structures, DOE/TIC-112G8, Prepared by Southwest Research Institute, San
Antonio, TX, for U.S. Department of Energy, Albuquerque Operations
Office, Amarillo Area Office, Pantex Plant, Amarillo, Texas, November
1980.
White, C.S., The Scope of Blast and Shock Biology and Problem Areas in
Relating Physical and Biological Parameters, Lovelace Foundation for
Medical Education and Research, Albuquerque, New Mexico, 1968.
Richmond, D.R., et al., The Relationship Between Selected Blast Wave
Parameters and the Response of Mammals Exposed to Air Blast, Lovelace
Foundation for Medical Education and Research, Albuquerque, New Mexico
19G8.
lB-l
TN 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
Hirsch, P;G. , Iff,st, of OyerpressUre on the' Ear -A Reyiew. 'Lovelace

Foundation for Medical Education and Research, Albuquerque, New Mexico,
1968.
Clemedson, C., Hellstrom, G. and Lingren, S., Ihe Relatiye Tolerance of
the Head, Thorax and Abdomen to Blunt Trauma, Defense Medical Board,
Stockholm and Research Institute of National Defense, Sundbyberg,
Sweden; Department of Surgery, University of Uppsala, Uppsala, Sweden;
Department of Neurosurgery, University of Gothenburg, Gothenburg,
Sweden, 1968.
Zaker, T.A., Fragment and Debris Hazards, Technical Paper No. 12,
Department of Defense Explosives Safety Board, July 1975.
Zaker, T.A., Computer Program for Predicting Casualties and Damage from
Accidental Explosions, Technical Paper No. II, Department of Defense
Explosives Safety Board, May 1975.
Cohen, and Dobbs, Prevention of and Protection Against Accidental
Explosion of Munitions, Fuels and Other Hazardous Mixtures, Annals of
the Ne~ York-Academy of Science, October 1968.
Stirrat W., Compilation of Safe Separation Data on Bulk Explosives and
Munitions, Technical Report ARAED-TR-87033, U.S. Army Armament Research,
Development and Engineering Center, Dover, N.J., October, 1987.
-- ,
-,
"
..
lB-2
"STRucrURES TO RESIST THE EFFECfS OF ACCIDENTAL EXPLOSIONS"
CHAPTER 2. BLAST, FRAGMENT, AND SHOCK LOADS
TK S-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

CHAPTER
BLAST. FRAGMENT. AND SHOCK LOADS

",
INTRODUCTION
"
2-1. Purpose
The purpose of 'this manual is to present methods ,of design for protective
construction used in facilities 'for 'development, testing, "production, storage,
maintenance; modification. 'inspection, demilitarization, and disposal of
explosive 'materials,
',"
;
2-2, Objective
techniques whereby 'propagation of explosion (from one structure or 'part of Ii
structure to another)" or""mass' detonation can~be prevented and to provide
protection foi: personnel and valuable equipment,
",
(1)
Establish the blast load parameters required for

tive structures."
(2)
(3)
(4)
des~gn
of protec-
,.

elements including reinforc~d concrete. and'structural steel,
Establish construction details and procedures nec~ssary, to afford
the' required strength to resist' the applied blast'loads,
Establish gUidelines'for siting explosive facilities'to obtain:
maximum cost effectiveness 'in both the planning a~d' stru'ct'ural'
arran5ements. providing closures. and preventing'd8mage to interior portions of structures because of structural motion, shock, and
fragment perforation,"
' "
2-3. Background'
.~ ~
For the first 60 years'of the'20th century, cr~teria and'methods b~sed upon
results of catastrophic ~vents were used for the design of explosive'facilities, The criteria and' matiho'ds did not 'include a detailed' or reliable' quantitative basis for' assessing the degree of protection aff~rde'd by the protective
facility':' 'In the late 1960'squant1tative procedures were set forth in 'the
first edition of' the present manua I'," "Struc eur'es to Resist the Effects of'
development programs ;"hich permitted a more reliable 'approach to current' and
future design xequdrements , Since the original publication' of ,'this manual',
more extensive testing and development prograJiis have 'i:ak~n place: This
additional' research" i'ncluded':work with materlals other than reinforced"concrete which was the principal construction material referenced in the initial
version of the manual,
'
Modern methods 'for the' manufacture and, storage of explosive material's; which
include many exotic chemical-'s, fuels, and propellants, require less space for
a given quantity of explosive material than was previously'needed.' Such
accidental explosions, (One accidental explosion causing the detonation of
2-1'
TK 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR88-22.
other explosive materials.) It is evident that a requirement for more accurate design techniques .Ls essential. This manual describes rational design
methods to provide the required structural protection.
These design methods account for the.close-in effects of a.detonation including the high pressures and the nonuniformity of blast loading on protective
of;struct~res,.constructed.of,various
materials,
The dynamic response
or
combination of mate~ials, can be calculated, and detailsare given to provide

the strength and ductility required by the de s Lgn . The design approach is
directed primarily toward protective ,structures subjected to the, effects.of a
applicable to the design of other explosive environments as well as other
explosive materials as. mentioned above.
The design techniques set forth in this manual are based upon the',results of
numerous full~ and small-scale structural response and explosive:effects. tests
of various materials conducted in conjunction with the develop~ent of this
2-4. Scope
It is not the intent of this manual to establish safety criteria. Applicable
documents should be consulted for this purpose. Response predictions for
personnel and equipment', are included for information:
e
In this manual an effort is

been included in order. that
situations other ~han those
made to cover the more probable design situations.

information on protective, design techniques has
application of the basic theory can be, made to
which were. fully considered.
.J
This manual is applicable to the design of protec~ive.structures subjected to

s Lt.uat Lcns , .the manual.will apply for explosive quantities less than 25,000
pounds for close-in effects. However, this manual is also applicable to other
situations such as far-. or. intermediate-range effects, For these latter cases
500,OOO,pounds which is the maximum quantity
high.explo~ive approved for
aboveground storage facilities in the Department 'of,Defense manual, "Ammunition and Explosives Safety Standards~, DOD 6055.9-5TD. Since tests were
primarily directed toward the response of structural steel and reinforced
concrete el~ments to blast overpressures, this.~anual concentrates on design
procedures and. techniques for these materials. However, this does, not imply
that concrete and. steel are the only useful materials for protective,construction. Tests to establish the response of wood, brick blocks, and plastics, as
well as the blast att~nuating and.mass effects of soil are contemplated. The
results of these tests may require, at a ,later date, the supplementation of
" .
these. design methods' for these and other m;'terials. ,
.. .
0;
Other manuals are available to design protective stru~tures against the

effects of high explosive or nuclear detonations. The procedures in these
manuals will quite often co~plement this' manual and should be consulted for
specific applications.
.
"
2-2
TN 51300/NAVFAC P-397/ArR 8822

following repositories: ,
(1)

U:S. Army Engineer
PostcOffice Box 631
Vicksburg, Mississippi 39180-0631
Attn: , ,WESKA
(2)
Department of the Navy

Commanding Officer
Attn: CodeL51
(3)

Ohio 45433'
Attn: AFFDL/FBR

for review by DDESB and the above services; Upon concurrence of the revisions, the necessary changes will be made and 'notification of the changes will
be made by the individual repositories.
2-5. Format
This manual is subdivided into six specific chapters dealing with various
aspects of design. The titles of these chapters are as follows:
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
I
2
3
4
5
6
'Introduction
Blast, Fragment, and Shock Loads
'Principles of Dynamic Analysis
Reinforced Concrete Design
Special Considerations iri Explosive Facility Design
When applicable, illustrative examples are included in the Appendices.

Commonly accepted symbols are used as much as possible. However, protective
design involves many different scientific and engineering fields, and, therefore, -no attempt is made to s tiandazdLze completely all the symbols used. Each
symbol is defined where it is first used, and in the list of symbols at the
end of each chapter.
23
TM 5-l300;NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88"22
CHAPTER CONTENTS,
,
2-6. General
This chapter contains the procedures for determining explosive output.and
associated structure loadings', fragment effects, and the structural motion
effects associated with accidental explosions: These procedures are contained
in the following sections: Sections 2-8' through 2-15 deals with the loadings
associated with the blast phenomena. These data include, 'in'addition to the
determination of the' effects of the explos Lvevoutput , methods for determining
blast loads 'acting on the exterior of and within structures. Sections'2-16
through 2-19 cover the formation of fragments whichcan'be' projected by an
explosion and include both primary and secondary. fragments effects ..- Sections
2-20 to 2-24 present the method for determining the structural motions, including both ground and air shock effects.
.'
,.,
.
_',1
2-4
.'
EXPLOSION EFFECTS
2-7. Effects of Explosive Output
In the design of protective structures to resist the effects of accidental
explosions, the principal effects of the explosive output to be considered are
blast overpressures (here afcer refe,rred to as b Las t pressures ot;" pras sures )..
fragments generatedb~,~he explosion and the shock, lo.ads produced by the shock
wave transmitted,thr?ugh ,the 'air or,ground. O~,these three parameters, the
blast pressures are usual.Ly, the, governing factor, in the determination of the
structure ,response; However, in some situations, fragments and/or ,shock loads
may be just as "important as' the pressures in de,termining the configuration of
the facility.
'
, .
..
,:
',"
'
Although the quantitative data:presented pertain to the, blast output of bare

trinitrotoluene (,TNT) spherical or' hemispherical charges cons Ldered as point
source explosions, and other explosives which ha~e been specifically t.este~.
These data can be extended 'by appropriate means including testing to include
other potentially mass-detonatipg materials (solid, liquid, orgas) of varying
shape.
,'"
..
..,.
~.
',~
..'
, !.
.}
,.
."
2-5
.'
TH 5~1300/NAVFAC p-397/m 88~22;'

;.<,,~
BtAST LOADS"
2-8. Blast Phenomena
". ';
.~
, "\ '>,. .
';,
2-8.1. General
..
.' , 1
_.:J," . ,'.;....
~.,
.-:. r,
','"
Bare, solid "explosives must detonate to prodtice"any"explosive effect 'other ,:",

than a fire. The term detonation refers' to"a 'Very -rap Ld 'and stable, chemical ",,"',
reaction which 'proceeds through'th.;' explosive: material at a'spe"d; called the.', "
detonation velocity, which is supersonic ,in' the"unreacted,explosive'. Detona'
tion velocities range from 22,000'to '28,000 feet per ,second'for:most,high ,ex.
plosives. The detonation wave ::rapidly, converts' .the 'solid. or -;liquid ;explos,ive
into a very hot, dense, highpressure gas, and the volume of thisgas'which _
had been the explosive material is then the source of strong blast waves in
air. Pre'ssures immediately behind -ehe detonation"front range from 2,700, 000
to 4,900; 000 ps i..:' Only "about one" third of it.he: total 'chemical 'energy avad Lab Le t- .
in most high explosives -Ls released in the 'detonation"process. The ,remaining,
two-thirds is' released more slowly' in explosions 'in air as 'the detonation '.
','f
products mix with'aii and burn. 'This afterburning 'process has ,only a slight
effect on blast wave properties because it is so much slower than detonation: ..
The blast effects of an explosion are in the form of 'a shock wave composed of
a high-intensity shock front ,which expands outward from the surface-of the explosive into the surrounding air. As the wave expands,it decays in strength,
lengthens in duration, and decreases in velocity. This phenomena is caused by
spherical divergence as well as by the fact that the chemical reaction is com
pleted, except for some afterburning associated with the 'hot"explosion products mixing with the surrounding atmosphere,
As the wave expands in air, the front impinges on structures located within
its path and then the entire structure is engulfed by the shock pressures.
The magnitude and distribution of the blast loads on the structure arising
from these pressures are a function of the following factors: (1) explosive
properties, namely type of explosive material, energy output (high or low order detonation), and weight of explosive; (2) the location of the detonation
relative to the protective structures; and (3) the magnitude and reinforcement
of the pressure by its interaction with the ground barrier, or the structure
itself. The first of these three factors are discussed in Sections 2-8.2 and
2-9 below and the latter two factors are discussed throughout the remainder of
this section.
' '
"
,
2-8.2. Explosive Materials
Explosive materials may be classified according to their physical state: solids, liquids, or gases; Solid 'explosives are primarily high explosives; however, other materials such as flammable chemicals and propellants may also be
classified as potentially explosive materials,. Liquid and gaseous explosives
encompass a wide variety of substances used in the manufacture of chemicals,
fuels, and propellants. The blast pressure environment produced will vary not
only among the different materials 'but may also differ for a particular material. Such factors as methods and procedures used in manufacturing, storage,
and handling, in addition to specific individual physical and chemical characteristics, may alter the blast effects of an explosive material.
2-6~

The blast.effects of solid materialsare best known. 'This is particularly
true for high-explosive materials. The blast pressures; impulses, durations,
and other blast effects of an explosion have been well established. These effects are contained in this chapter.
Unlike highcexplosive materials, 'other solid, liquid, and gaseous explosive
materials will exhibit a variation of their blast pressure output. An explosion of these materials is in,many ca~es incomplete" and only a portion of the
total mass of the, explosive (effective charge weight) is involved in, the detonation process. The remainder of the mass is usually consumed by deflagration
resulting in a large amount of the material's chemical energy being dissipated
as thermal energy which, in turn, may cause fires or'.the~al radiation damage.
..
2-9. TNT EqUivalency

The major, quantity of blast effects data presented in thistmanual pertains to
the blast pressures output of bare'spherical TNT'explosive;" These data can be
extended to include other potentially mass-detonating materials (Class, 1. 1) by
relating the explosive energy of the "effective charge weight" of those materials to that of an equivalent weight of TNT. In addition to the energy output, other factors may affect the equivalency of material compared to TNT.
These factors include the material shape (flat,square, round, etc.), the number of explosive items, explosive
~confinement
(casing, containers, etc.), and
the pressure range being considered' (close-in, intermediate or far ranges).

These other factors will, be discussed later _in this manual
-.~
..
"
For blast resistant design, the effects of the energy output on explosive material, of a specific shape, relative to that of TNT, of.. similar ,shape, can be
expressed as function of the heat of detonation of the various materials as
follows:
..
HEXP
2-1
where
effective charge weight
weight of the explosive in question
heat of detonation of explosive in question
...
.:
.,
heat of detonation of TNT

,;.
..
,~
"
The heat.of detonation. of some:of'the.more commonly used explosives are 'listed'

in Table 2-1.
The above equation for the effective charge weight is related primarily to the
blast output associated with the shock effects of unconfined detonations (Section 2-13). The effective charge weight produced by the confinement effects
2-7

of explosions(Section 2:14) will differ ... ' These 'differences will'be'discussed
later in this manual.' ..
' . "
2-10. Blast-Loading Categories
Blast loads 'on 'structures can be divided into'two main groups based: on, the "
confinement of the. explosive charge' (unconfined and confined explosions) and'
can be subdivided based on the blast loading produced within the, donor structure or.acting on acceptor structures~ These blast loadlng~categorles are illustrated in Figure 2,1. Figure.2-1 gives' the six blast'loading categories.
possible. Figure' 2-1 also shows the five possible pressure loads associated.
with the blast load categories, the:location of the explosive charge which
would produce these pressure loads, and the protective structures subjected to
these loads.
.-
The blast load' categories' and the resulting, .pressure. 10ads":listed in Figure 21 are qualitatively.and,.quantitatively defi~ed below and'in'subsequent sec-'
tions
respectively. '.
~.' .
Ji,
, ,
2-10.1. Unconfined Explosion
II
2-10.1:1. Free Air Burst Explosion
" ~ r
; ~
_,'
.'
."
'.'
An explosion, which occurs in.free air.producesanliniti~loutput whose shock'
wave propagates away from the center' 'of the detonation, striking ehe- protec-':
tive structure without intermediate amplification of i~s wave.
"._,'
-,
~.
:.
2-10.1.2. Air.,Burst Explosion"

)
-.
,',
.; J....
J.l ;
~.-r
.,.;",
,~
",.:,11'
~I
An explosion which is located at a distance from and above the protective

structure so that the ground reflections of the initial wave occur prior to
the arrival of the blast wave at the protective structure. As used in this
manual, an air burst is limited to an explosion which occurs at, two to three
times the height of a one or two-story building.
2-10.1.3 . .surface Burst Explosion
A surface burst explosion will occur when the detonation is located close too;
or on the ground so that the initial shock is amplified at the. point of detonC
ation due to the ground reflections.
:':'.'- -',
2-10.2. Confined Explosion
2-10.2.1. Fully Vented Explosion
,
A fully vented explosion will be produced within or immediately adjacent to a
barrier or cubicle type structure ,,!,ith one or more surfaces open to the atmosphere. The initial wave, which is amplified by the nonfrangible p~rtions of
the structure, and the products of detonation are totally.vented to the atmosphere forming .a, shock ~ave .(leakage'pressures) which propagates away from. the
"
structure.
", ..
,
,J
..
. ,.
".'
." -,
2-8 ,,'
"
2-10.2.2. Partially Confined Explosion

A partially confined explosion will be produced within a barrier or cubicle
type structure with limited size openings and/or frangible surfaces, The initial wave. which is amplified by the frangible and nonfrangible portion of the.
structure, and the products of detonation are vented to the atmosphere after a
finite period of time. The confinement of the detonation products, which consist of the accumulation of high temperatures and gaseous products, is associated with a buildup of quasi-static pressure (hereafter referred to as gas
pressure). This pressure has a long duration in comparison to that of the,
shock pressure.
2-10.2.3. Fully Confined Explosions
Full ,confinement of an explosion is associated with either total or near total
containment of the explosion by a barrier structure. Internal blast loads
will consist of unvented shock loads and very long duration gas pressures
which are a function of the degree of containment. The magnitude of the leakage pressures will usually be small and will only affect those facilities immediately outside the containment structure.
,.
2-11. Blast Loading Protection
Protection of personnel and valuable equipment (acceptor system) will usually
involve protective shelters located away from the detonation.: Their design
may involve one or more of the following blast-loading categories: free-air
burst, ai~ burst, surface burst, and exterior or leakage pressures from either
vented or partially confined explosions. These shelters are usually enclosed
bUildings located at pressure ranges of a few hundred pounds per square inch
(psi) or less. Depending on the shelter design pressures, these structures
can be either above, below,. or at ground surface. In this manual, primary
consideration is given to above-ground shelters.
How~ver,
some consideration
is given in Chapter VI regarding shelters positioned at other locations. For

the third type of pressure loading of Figure 2-1 (interior shock pressure),
protection.is required whe~ the shelter is located immediately adjacent to the
explosion. The reflected pressure there may be in thousands of psi, but with
pressure durations usually small. The acceptor portion of such an explosive
system may include other explosive materials and/or personnel . . The structure
associated with the fifth pressure-loading type is a containment type building
and is usually used to prevent escape of toxic chemicals, radiological and/or
biological materials, or to limit blast pressures at the exterior to a level
consistent with personnerprotection.
Of the six categories, those from air bursts are seldom encountered and the
free air burst is the least likely to occur. The possibility of such blast
environments exists where potentially explosive materials ,are stored at
heights adjacent to or away from protective structures such as in manufacturing (process or storage tanks) or missile sites. In the latter,the rocket
propellant would be a source of explosive danger to the ground crew and control facilities.
,.
The other four blast,loading categories ,can occur in most explosive manufacturing and storage facilities. In such installations, transportation of, explosive materials between buildings either by rail, vehicle, orin the case of
2-9
TK 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

liquid or gases, through piping, is a possibility. Also, storage and handling
of explosives within bUildings are common occurrences.
Although the blast-loading categories can be separated and classified 'individua11y, no.clear-cut limits differentiate each category. In most explosive
facilities, the various blast environments will overlap, and judgement should
be used in the application of the following recommendations for determining
the blast parameters consistent with the
various blast-loading
categories.
.
.
2-12. Blast-Wave Phenomena
The violent release of energy from a detonation converts the explosive material into a very high pressure gas at very high temperatures. A pressure front
associated with the high pressure gas propagates radially into the surrounding
atmosphere as a strong shock wave, driven and supported by the hot gases. The
shock front, termed the blast wave, is characterized by an almost instantaneous rise from ambient pressure to a peak incident pressure Pso(Figure 22).
This pressure increase or shock front travels radially from the burst point
with a diminishing shock velocity U which is always in excess of the ~onic velocity of the medium. Gas molecules behind the front move at lower flow.velocities, termed particle velocities u. These latter particle velocities.are
associated with the dynamic pressures, whose maximum values are denoted qo' or
the pressures formed by the winds produced by the passage of the shock front.
As the shock front expands into increasingly larger volumes of the medium, the
peak incident pressures at the fronts decrease and the durations of the pressures increase. Those parameters which vary as the peak incident pressure
varies are presented in' Figure 2-3.
At any point away from the burst, the pressure disturbance has the shape shown
in Figure 2-2, The shock front arrives at a given location at time t A and,
after the rise.to the peak value, Psothe incident pressure decays to the ambient value in time to which is the positive phase duration. lbis is followed
by a negative phase with a duration t o- that is usually much longer than the
positive phase and characterized by a negative pressure (below ambient pressure) haVing a maximum value of Ps o- as well as a reversal of the particle
flow. The negative phase is usually less important in a design than is the
positive phase, and its amplitude Ps- must, in all cases, be less than ambient
atmosphere pressure Po' The incident impulse density associated with the
blast wave is the integrated area under the pressure-time curve and is denoted
as is for the positive phase and i s'- for the negative phase.
An additional parameter of the blast wave, the wave length, is sometimes required in the analysiS of structures. The positive wave length tw+ is that
length at a given distance from the detonation which, at a particular instant
of time, is experiencing positive pressure. The negative wave length tw- is
similarly defined for negative pressures.
The above treatment of the blast wave phenomena is general. In subsequent
sections of this chapter, the magnitude of the various parameters is presented
depending upon the category of the detonation as previously described: free
air burst, surface burst, exterior or leakage pressures, or interior or high
pressure blast loading.
2-10
TM 5-l300/NAVFAC P:397/AFR 88-22
2-13. Unconfined.Explosions
2-13.1. Free Air Burst
When a detonation occurs adjacent to and above a protective structure such
that no amplification of the initial shock wave occurs between the explosive
source and the protective structure, then the blast loads' acting on the structure are free-air.blast pressures (Fig. 2-4).
J
As the incident wave moves' radially -away from the center .of the explosion,. it
will impact with the structure, and, upon impact, the initial wave (pressure
and impulse) is reinforced and reflected (Fig. 2-5). The reflected pressure
pulse of Figure 2-5' is typical for infinite planereflectors.
When the shock wave impinges on a surface oriented sothat a line which describes the path of travel of the wave 'is normal to the'surface, then the
point of initial:contact is said to sustain the. maximum (normal 'reflected)
pressure and impulse. Figure 2-6 presents the ratios of the normal reflected
pressures to the incident pressures asil function of the incident.
pressures.
The peak pressure' and impulse patterns on the structure vary with distance
from a maximumat the normal distance.RA to a minimum (incident pressure)
where the plane. of the structure's surface is perpendicular to the 'shock
front. The positive phase pressures, impulses, durations, 'and other parameters of this 'shock environment for a spherical TNT explosions are given in
Figure 2-7 versus the scaled distance (Z - R/Wl/3).
.
The smallest scaled distance of 0.136 ft/lb l/3 represents the radius of the
spherical TNT explosive and, therefore, represents the surface of the explosive. Some parameters have been extrapolated to the charge surf~ce which are
shown as dashed portions of the curves. These dashed curves represent an upper limit of scatter in experimental data and variation in theoretical predictions, giving for design purposes conserVative limits for these parameters.
.
t:.
r
In some blast loading situations, negative b Las t iwave parameters (Fig. 2-8)
are needed to predict the loading-time function of the blast wave acting on a
structure. This is particularly true in flexible .tYpe protective structures
(usually steel-frame structures) where the overall motion of the structure
will be affected by the' phasing of tqe blast loads'acting on the various
structure surfaces: Th'e effects of the negative. phase parameters are usually
not important for the design 'of the more rigid type structures (reinforced
.~
concrete) .
; ,;
The curves presented in Figures 2-7 and 2-8 which give the blast wave parame-'
ters as a function of scaled distance, extend only to a scaled distance Z 100 ft/lb l/3. For most protective structures, or even light structures; ~am
age is relativelysuperficial beyond this scaled distance, consisting at most
of broken windows or deformation of light panels or'blow-out walls, But, the
curves are also not extended beyond these levels because the blast wave properties start to be seriously .affected by atmospheric conditions so that overpressures are very much less orLvery much more than the "ideal" parameters
transmitted through a homogeneous atmosphere.
2-11
In the low pressure region, the pressure varies as a function o.fsound velocity with altitude above the ground surface. At very far distances from an explosion (Z- 1000 ft/lb l/ 3, the peak press~res (really sound pressures at these
levels) can be ten times greater or more than ten times less than the ideal
pressures for a homogenous atmosphere.
Even with enhancement caused by real atmospheric conditions (also called blast
focusing), the pressures are still quite low and structural'damage should be
superficial. If it is necessary to' predict such low levels, oneshould obtain
and s tudy -more detailed reports listed in the bibliography.
-r, j
The variation of the pressure and impulse patterns on the surface. of a s t ructure between the maximum and minimum yalues is a function of the angle of incidence This angle is formed by the line which defines the normal distance RA
between the point of detonation and the structure, and line R (slant distance)
which defines the path of shock propagation between. the center of the explosion and' any other point in question on the structure. surface (Fig. 2-4).
The effects of the angle of incidence on, the peak reflected pressure Pr a and,
the reflected impulse ira are shown in Figures 2-9 and 2-10, respectively,
The figures are plots of the angle of incidence versus the peak reflected
pressure or the reflected impulse as a function of. the scaled normal distance
between the charge and the surface. in question. The' usual load condition involves the ground surface and, therefore, this normal scaled distance is referred to as the scaled height of'charge above the ground (Hc;Wl/3). Allother blast parameters are obtained from' Figures 2-7' and 2-8 for the .scaled' slant
distance R;Wl/3 to the point in question.
2-13.2. Air Burst
The air burst environment is produced by detonations which occur above the'
ground surface and at a distance away'from the prote~tive structure so that
the initial 'shock wave, propagating away from the explosion, impinges on the
ground surface prior to arrival' at the' structure. As' the shock.wave,cont~nues
to propagate outward along the ground surface, a front known as the Mach front
(Fig. 2-11) is formed by the interaction of the initial.wave (incident wave)
and the reflected wave. This reflected wave is the result of the reinforcement of the incident wave by the ground surface.
Some variation of the pressures . over the height of the Mach, front .occurs , but
for design purposes, this variation can be neglected and the shock considered
as a plane wave'over the full height of the front. The blast parameters in
the Mach front are calculated at the ground surface. The pressure-time variation of the Mach front (Fig. 2-l2a) is similar to that of the incident wave
except that the magnitude of the blast parameters are somewhat larger.
The height of the Mach front increases as the wave propagates away from the
center of the detonation . .This increase in height isreferred.to as the .path
of the triple point and is formed by the iT\tersecticin of .the initial,. reflected, and Mach waves: A protected structure is considered to .be subjected to a
plane wave (uniform pressure) when the height of the triple point exceeds the
height of the structure; The scaled height of the triple point Hr;Wl/3 versus
scaled ground distance ZG and scaled charge height Hc;Wl/3. is plotted in Figure 2-13.
2-12
TN
5~1300fNAVFAC
P-397/AFR 88-22 '
If the height of the triple point does not extend above the, height of the
structure, then the'magnitude'of the applied'loads will vary with the height
of the point being considered. ,Above the triple point, the pressure-time.var-.
iation consists of an interaction of the incident and reflected incident wave
pressures resulting in a pressure-time variation (Fig. 2~12b) different from
that of 'the Mach incident wave pressures. The magnitude of pressures' above
the triple point is smaller than that of the Mach front: In-most practicaldesign situations, the location of the detonation will be far-enough'away from
the structure so as not, to produce this pressure variation: An exception may
exist for multistory buildings even though these'buildings are usually located
at very low-pressure ranges wherethe triple point is high: ~
In determining the magnitude of ,the air blast loads acting on-the surface of
an above-ground protective structure, the' peak incident blast pressures in the
Mach wave acting on the ground surface immediately before the structure are
calculated first. The peak incident pressure Pr a is determined for .this soint
from Figure 2-9 using the scaled height of charge above the ground!Hc;W!/ and
the ~ngle of incidence a.
'
A similar procedure is used with Figure'2-l0 to determine the impulse f r a of
the blast wave acting on the ground surface immediately before-the' structure.
An estimate of the other blast parameters may be obtained from Figures 2-7 and
2-8 by setting the'values of Pr a and ira 'equal to. the values of the.peak incident pressure Ps o and incident impulse is of the mach wave, respectively. The
scaled distances corresponding to Ps o and is are determined from Figure 2-7.
.The scaled ~istance corresponding to Pso' is' used to obtain values' of Pr, Pso -',
tAfWl/3,'U, LwfW l/ 3 and Lw-fWl/3while the scaled distance corresponding to is
ml/3 . .'
,.
- 'i r-' 't ml/3
i s use d to 0 b ta i n va 1ues 0 f i i:: i s"
an d' to - I'"
o / '"
-
~:..
2-13.3. Surface Burst

A charge located on or very.near the ground surface is considered to'be a surface burst: The initial wave of the explosion is reflected and reinforced by"
the ground surface to produce a reflected wave. Unlike the air burst; the re-,
flected wave merges with the incident wave 'at the point of detonation to form
a single' wave,' similar in nature to' the mach waveJof the air burst but essentially hemispherical in shape (Fig. 2-14).
,The positive phase .parameters of 'the surface 'burst environment for hemispheri-'
cal TNT exploSions are given in Figure 2~15 while the negative phase parame-.
ters are given in Figure 2-16. A, comparison of these parameters with 'those of
free-air,explosions (Fig. 2-7 and 2-8) indicate that, at a given"distance from
a detonation of the same weight of explosive. all of the ,parameters of .the .
surface burst environment are larger. than those for ,the free-air' .environment .. '
As for the case of air bursts, protected structures subjected to the explosive
output of a surface burst will usually be located in the pressure range where
the plane wave (Fig. 2-14) concept can be applied .. Therefore, for a surface
burst, the blast loads acting on structure surface are calculated as described
for an air burst except that the incident:pressures.and other positive ,phase
parameters of, the' free-field shock environment are obtained from'Figure 2~15,
and theoretical negative phase blast parameters arevshown in Figure, 2-16 .
'
-.
2-13

As for the case of an air burst, the curves presented in Figures 2-15 and 2-16
which give the blast wave parameters as a function of scaled distance, extend.
only to a scaled distance Z - 100 ft/lb l / 3 (see section 2-13.1).
.,
..
Blast parameters for explosives detonated on the ground surface other rhan. ...
hemispherical TNT are listed in Table 2-2. These explosives,include, both un, '
cased and cased high explosives, propellants and propellingcharges as well as
pyrotechnic mixtures. The variousshapes.of the explosive materials are given.
in Figure 2-1(.. The ,blast parameters for the various ~xplosives are illus,
trated in Figures 2-18 through' 2-49. For each explosive material considered,
the peak incident pressure Ps o and scaled incident. impulse i s ;W1/ 3 i; presente
ed as a function of the scaled ground distance ZG - Re;W1/3 from the point of
detonation. The charge weight W. is equal to the actual. weight of the explosive material under consideration 'increased'by the required factor of safety
(20 percent) . .
, '"
An estimate of the blast parameters other than
pressure and impulse,

may be obtained from Figures 2-15 and 2-16. The scaled ground distance corresponding to the incident ~ressure PS ! is used to obtain the values of Pr, Ps o, Pro, t A;W1/3,'U Lw;Wll and Lw-;W 13 In addition, this scaled groupd distance ZG - Re;W1/3 is used to calculate the equivalent ,TNT design charge
;..'
weight W for pressure using the actual ground distance Re' The absolute val- ,
ues of the scaled blast parameters are obtained by multiplying, the scaled values by the equivalent TNT design charge weight..,
.
inciden~
The scaled ground distance correspondlng tOtne incident~ impulse requires a .

graphical solution. ,The point corresponding to the scaled,incident impulse
and scaled ground distance for the explosive material in question is.plotted
on Figure 2-15. A 45 degree line is drawn through this point. The point
where the line intersects the scaled impulse curve corresponds to the ,scaled
impulse and scaled ground distance for the equivalent TNT charge. This scaled
ground distance is then used, to obtain the values of i r;W1/3.". is - ;WI!3, i r;W1/3, t o;w1/3. and t o-;W1/3 .. In addition, this, scaled ground distance and the
actual ground distance is used to calculate the equivalent TNT design charge
weight for impulse. The. absolute values of the scaled blast parameters are
obtained by multiplying the scaled values by .the equivalent TNT design charge
weight.
It may be noted that the above data for explosives other, than TNT is limited
to surface bursts with container shapes indicated in Figure 2~17. This data
should not be extrapolated for scaled distances less than those indicated on
Figures 2-18 thrpugh 2-49. In addition, the blast pressure and impulse for
propellants and, in particular.- the pyrotechnic mixtures were obtained from
tests which~utilized booster charges to initiate the explosive material.'
Therefore, the blast parameters for both of these materials should be considered as upper limits.
, ,.
2-13.4. MUltiple Explosions
When two or more explosions of similar material occur several milliseconds
apart, the blast wave of the initial explosion' will propagate ahead of the
waves resulting from the subsequent explosions, with the' phasing of the propa.gation of these latter waves being governed by the initiation time and orientation of the individual explosives. If the time delay between explosions is
not too large, the blast waves produced by the subsequent explosions will
2-14
eventually overtake and merge with that of the initial detonation. The distance from the explosion at:which this merger occurs will depend on: (1) the
magnitude of the individual explosions, (2) the time delays between the initiation of the explosions, (3) the separation distances between and orientation
of the explosives, and (4) obstructions between the 'explosives themselves and
other obstructions between the explosives and other parts of,the facility
(buildings, walls, barricades, terrain, etc.) which will distort, hinder, and
generally interfere with wave propagation.
The pressure time relationships associated with the wave propagation'wili depend upon the interaction of'the individual waves themselves: After all' the
waves have merged, the pressures associated'with the common or merged wave
will have a pressure-time relationship which is similar ,to that produced by a
single explosion (Fig., 2-12). However, at closer distances to the explosion;
the pressure-time relationship will be more closely represented bya pressuretime curve with multiple' peak pressures (similar to that occurring above the
triple point (Fig. 2-12~ The multiple'peak pressures represent the ,interaction as the various waves reach the point in question. At distances ~ven
closer to the explosion, the time history of the' pressures acting on the
ground surface may consist of'a 'series of completely separate blast loads:
This loading condition isa result of the arrival of the subsequent blast
waves at a particular point during or after the occurrence of the negative
phase pressures produced by the initial wave at that point.
The latter pressure-time relationship is probably most likely to occur at high

pressures clo~e to the explosions while the multiple peak pressure pulse is
normally associated with ,low pressures at far distances. However, in many instances, the multiple peak pressure pulse will occur at high pressures, in
particular where the individual explosives are positioned close together,
e.g., in a cubicle or other storage facility.
2-14. Confined Explosions
2-14.1. Effects of Confinement
When an explosion occurs within a structure, the peak'pressures associated
with the initial shock front (free-air ,pressures) will be extremely high' and,
in turn, will be amplified by their 'reflections within the structure'. In addition, and depending upon the degree of confinement,. the effects of the high
temperatures and accumulation of gaseous products produced by the chemical
process involved in the explosion wilY exert additional pressures and increase
the load' duration within the -s t ruc ture . The combined effects of these pressures may eventually de~troy the structure unless the structure is designed
to
sustain the effects of the internal pressures. Provisions for venting of

these pressures will reduce, their magnitude as well as their duration.'
The use of cubicle-type structures (Fig. '2-50a) or other similar barriers with
one or; more surfaces either sufficiently frangible or open'to the atmosphere
will provide some degree of venting depending on the opening size. This type
of structure will permit the blast wave from an internal explosion to spill
over onto the surrounding 'ground surface, thereby, significantly reducirig the
magnitude and duration of the internal pressures. The exterior pressures are
quite 'often referred to as "leakage" pressures while the pressures reflected
and reinforced
within-~the
structure are termed Lrrt e r Lor "shock pressures".
The pressures associated with the accumulation of the gaseous products and
2-15
TK 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
temperature rise are identified as "gas" pressures. For the design of most
fully vented cubicle type structures, the.effects of the gas pressure may be
neglected.
Detonation in an enclosed structure with relatively small openings (Fig. 2SOb) is associated with both shock and gas pressures whose magnitudes are a
maximum. The duration of the gas pressure and, therefore, the impulse of the
gas pressure is a function of the size of the opening. It should be noted
....
that the onset of the gas pressure does not necessarily coincide with the onset o~ the shock pressure. Further, it .takes a finite length of time. after
the onset for the gas pressure to reach its maximum. value.
However, .these __'
times are very small and, for design purposes of most confined structures,
they. may be treated as instantaneous.
The term "frangible" pertains to th~se elements of a protective structure
which fail and whose strength and mass are such as to reduce the amplification
of the shock pressures and the confinement of the explosive gases. To reduce
the amplification of the shock pressures, frangible elements must fail so as.
to relieve qUickly the interior pressures acting on those surfaces andmini-.
mize their reflection to the nonfrangible elements of the structure. .Blast
tests of glass panels have shown that'a true frangible material does not exist
and that some reflection of the initial blast pressures may be expected from
very weak and light elements ..Further, the buildup of gas pressures is a-function of the ratio of the weight of the charge to the volume of the confining
structure and the venting area. As stated, this pressure buildup will not begin until sometime after the onset of the shock pressures. Therefore, an element which is not considered frangible for the shock pressure may be frangible
for gas pressures .
In addition to being dependent upon the physical properties of an element,

frangibility will also be a function of the magnitude of the applied blast
loads and, therefore, a function of the quantity of explosive being contained
and the distance from the frangible element. Although frangibility is imperfectly understood and difficult to measure, in general, it can be assumed that
if a closure's resistance to outward motion is equal to or less than 25 pounds
per square foot of surface area, the resistance can be neglected since the
time to reachfailure is practically zero. In this case, frangibility can be
stated solely in terms of the..weight (inertial force) of the vent.area closure. For resistances greater than 25 psf, the evaluation of frangibility
must incluqe the effects of resistance in addition to the weight of. an.element. The combined effects of the inertial force and the resistance can be
accounted for by performing a dynamic analysis and determining the time to
reach failure. However, if the blast pressure is very large in comparison to
the resistance of the element, the effects of the resistance can be neglected
without introducing significant errors. Therefore, it is advantageous to use
vent closures that are light and inherently weak and/or weakly supported; such
as, corrugated metal decking supported on steel joists, metal panels for
walls, plexiglass'or thin fiberglass panels supported by wood or lightweight
steel frames or gypsum board panels.
In the following paragraphs of this section, a. simple cantilever barrier as
well .as cubicle-type and cont~inment type structures will be discussed. The
cubicles are assumed ,to have one' or more surfaces which are open or frangible
while the containment structur~s are either totally enclosed or have small
2-16
TH 5-l300/NAVFAC p 0397/AFR 88-22
size openings. The effects of the inertia of frangible elements of these

structures will be discussed in subsequent sections.
2-14.2. Shock Pressures
2-14.2.1. Blast Loadings
When an explosion occurs within a cubicle or containment-type structure, the
peak pressures as well as the impulse associated with the shock front will be
extremely high and will be amplified by the confining structure. Because of
the close-in effects of the explosion and the reinforcement of blast pressures
due to the reflections within the structure, the distribution of the shock
loads on anyone surface will be nonuniform with the structural surface closest to the explosion subjected to the maximum load.
An approximate method for the calculation of the internal shock pressures has
been developed using theoretical procedures-based on semi-empirical blast data
and on the results of response tests on slabs. The calculated average shock
pressures have been compared with those obtained from the results of tests of
a scale-model steel cubicle and'have shown good agreement for a wide range of
cubicle configurations. This method consists of the determination of the peak
pressures and' impulses acting at'various points of each interior surface and
then integrating to obtain the total shock 'load. In order to simplify the
calculation of the response of a protective structure wall to these applied
loads, the peak pressures and total impulses are assumed to be uniformly distributed on the surface. The peak average pressure and the total average impulse are given for any wall surface. The actual' distribution of the blast
loads is highly irregular, because of the multiple 'reflections and time phasing and results in localized high shear stresses in the element. The use of
the average blast loads, when designing, is predicated on the ability of the
element to transfer these localized loads to regions of lower stress. Reinforced concrete with properly designed shear reinforcement and steel plates
exhibit this characteristic.
The parameters which are necessary to determine the average' shock loads are
the structure's configuration and size, charge weight, and charge location.
Figure 2-51 shows many possible simple barriers, cubicle configurations, and
containment type structures as well as the definition of the various parameters pertaining to each. Surfaces depicted are not frangible for determining
the shock loadings.' The effects of frangibility will be discussed later.
Because of the wide range of required parameters, the procedure for the determination of the shock loads was programmed for solutions on a digital computer. The results of these calculations are presented in Figures 2-52 through
2-100 for the average peak reflected pressures Pr ,and Figures 2-101 through 2149 for the average scaled unit 'impulse i-;W1/3. These shock loads are presented as a function of the parameters defining the configurations' presented in
Figure 2-51. Each illustration is for a particular combination of values of
h/H, l/L, and N reflecting surfaces .adjacent to the surface for which the
shock loads are being calculated. The wall (if any) parallel and opposite to
the surface in question has a negligible contribution to the shock loads for
the range of parame~ers used and was therefore not considered.
The general procedure for use of the above illustrations is as follows:
2-17

1.
From Figure 2-51, select the particular surface of the structure
which conforms to the protective structure given and note N of adjacent reflecting surfaces as indicated in parenthesis.
Determine the values of the parameters indicated for the selected
2.
surface of the structure in Item 1 above and calculate the following quantities:
h/H, IlL, L/H, LIRA' and ZA - R A/W1/ 3 .
3.
Refer to Table 2-3 for the proper peak reflected pressure and impulse charts conforming to the number of adjacent reflected surfaces .and the
values of IlL and h/H of Item 2 above, and enter the charts to determine the
values of Pr and ir/W1/3.
'
,
In most cases, the above procedure will' require interpolation for 'one or more'
of the parameters which define a given situation, ,in order to obtain the correct average reflected pressure and average reflected impulse. Examples of
this interpolation procedure are 'given in Appendix 2A.
Because of the limitations in the range of the test data and the limited number of values of the parameters, given in the above shock load charts, extrapolation of the, data given in Figures 2-52 through' 2-149 may be required for
some of the parameters involved. However, the limiting values as given in the
charts for other parameters will not, require extrapolation. The values of the
average. shock loads corresponding to the values of the parameters, which exceed their limiting values (as defined by the charts), will be 'approximately
equal to those corresponding to the limiting values. The follOWing are recommendedp~ocedures which will be' applicable inm~st, cases' for either extrapola-.
tion or establishing the limits of impulse loads corresponding to values of
the various parameter which exceed the limits of the charts:
1.
To extrapolate beyond the limiting valu~s of ZA' plot a curve of

values of Pr versus ZA for constant values of LIRA' L/H, h/H and
IlL. Extrapolate curve to include the value of Pr corresponding
to the value of ZA required. Repeat similarly for value of
ir/Wl/3.
2-18
TK 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

A computer program isavailable which executes the interpoiation procedure using numerical tables equivalent, to Figure 2-52 through. 2-149. Availability of
this program is listed in Section 2-4.
A protective element subjected. to. high intensity shock pressures may be designed for the impulse rather than the pressure 'pulse only if the, duration of
the applied pressure acting on the 'element is short in comparison to its response time." However, if ..the time. to reach maximum displacement is equal to
or less thanthreetimes the load.duration, then the pressure pulse should be
used for these cases. The actual. pressure-time relationship resulting from, a
pressure distribution on the element is highly irregular because of the multiple reflections and ..time phasing.; For these cases, the pressure- time relationship may be.approximated by a fictitious peak triangular pressure pulse.
The average peak reflected pressure of the pulse is obtained' from Figures 2-52
through 2-100 and the average impulse from Figure 2-101 through 2-149 and a
fictitious duration is established as a function of the reflected pressure Pr
and impulse i r acting.on the element.
.2- 2
to -. .2i r / Pr -::
The above solution for the average shock load does not. account for increased
blast effects produced by contact charges. Therefore, if th~ values of the
average shock loads given in Figures 2-52 through 2-149 are to be applicable,
a separation distance between the element and explosive must be maintained.
This separation is measured between the surface of the element and the surface
of either the actual charge or the spherical equivalent, whichever results in
the larger normal distance between the element's surface and the center of the
explosive (the radius of a spherical TNT charge .is r - 0.136W l/ 3). For the
purposes' of design, the following separation distances 'are:recommended for
various charge weights:
Weight of Explosive (lb)
Separation Distance
up to. 500
501 to 1,000
1,001 to 2,000
2,001 to 3,000
above 3,000
1. 0
1.5
2.0
2.5
3.0
The above separation distances do not apply to ,floor slabs or other. similar
structural elements placed on grade .. 'However, a separation 'distance of at
least'one foot should be'maintained to minimize the size of craters associated
with contact explosions.
i'
It should be noted that these separation distances do not necessarily conform

to those specified by other government regulations; their use in a particular
design must be approved by the cognizant military construction agency.
Average shock loads over'entire wall or roof slabs were discussed above.
An approximate method may be used to calculate shock loads over surfaces other
than an entire wall. These surfaces might include a blast door, panel,
column, or.other such items fou~d inside any shaped structure.'
The method assumes a fictitious strip centered in front of the charge having a
width equal to the normal distance RA and a height equal to that of the struc2-19'
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC.P-397/AFR 88-22,
ture, This is the maximum, 'representative area .rhat; may be considered, Average shock loads can be determined on entire area, or any surface falling within
the boundaries of the representative area,
The procedure for determining the shock loads consists o~ partitioning the
surface under' consideration into subareas. These subareas do not need to be
the same size. The angie of incidence t~ the center of ,each subarea is calculated, The reflected pressure and scaled impulse are determined for each subarea using Figures 2-9 and> 2-10 respectively. >A weighted average with respec~
to area is taken for both pressure and scaled impulse.
Both the pressure and the'impulse are multiplied by a factor of 1.75 to account for secondary shocks, Idealized duration is calculated using Equation
2-2.
"
2-14,2.2'; Frangibility
'
A frangible element, as defined here, is an element that exhibits a resistance

to internal shock loads equal to or less than 25 pounds per square foot and
will undergo significant displacement during the 'loading time of the shock
pressures and, thereby, reduce the'effects of the shock.pressures acting on
both the frangible panel itself and reflections to other elements of the
structure.
The follOWing are design procedures for determining the magnitUde of applied
shock pressures which will contribute to the displacement of the frangible e1-.
emenr ;
,
(1) 'Determine the peak average reflected pressure Pr' and average im-,
pulse i r acting on the frangible element assuming that the element
is rigid (Figures 2-52 through 2-149),
-t
(2)
Calculate the unit weight of the frangible element and divide this
weight by the sixth root of charge weight, wF/W1/ 6 ,
(3)
Determine the fictitious scaled distance Z from Figure 2-7, which

corresponds to the average impulse determined in Step 1,
(4)
Determine the value of the factor f r, of average impulse by using

the value of wF/Wl / 6 'from Step 2 and .the fictitious scaled dis-"
tance of Step 3 and utilizing 'Figure 2-150, contributing ,to 'the'
translation of the frangible element (may require interpolation).
(5)
Calculate the value of the average impulse contributing to the

translation of the frangible element by multiplying the'values of
i r and f r of steps 1 and 4 respectively,
"
(6)
Contribute the value of the peak average pressure to the translation of the frangible element that is assumed to be equal to the
value of Prof Step 1.
"
The step by step procedure for determining the shock loads being reflected
from a frangible element to an adjacent element is to:
,
2-20
"
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC,P-39J/AFR,88-22
,.'
.
~.
(1)
Determine the average. peak r'e f Lec t ed pres~ure Pr.and the, average
ref~ected impulse i
r acting on the element. in qu~stion, assuming.
th~t the adj9ining frangible el~ment will remain in plac~ (figs.
2-52 through 2 - 1 4 9 ) . '
"
(2)
Determine,t~e
(3)
Subtract the average impulse determined. in Step 2 from the average,

impulse determined in Step 1.
<
(4)
Calculate the"unit weight of the frangible element, and qivide this

weight by the sixth rootof the charge weight, .WFfW~/6.
(5)
Calculate the,normal scaled distance Z between the

charge and the surface of the frangible element.
(6)
Utilize Figure 2-150 to determine the value of the fraction f r of

the average impulse reflected to the element in que s t Lon-us Lng the
scaled weight density and scaled distance of Steps 4 and 5; respectively (may require interpolation).
(7)
Determine the magnitude of the impulse, load reflected to .che e Le jment in question from the frangible element by multiplying the
value of the average impulse of Step 3 by the value ,of f r of Step
6. ,
average impulse acting on the element in question

assuming that the' adjoining frangible element is removed (figs ,,252 through 2-149).
,.
-; . .
(8)
. "_. ~~".
i,
cente~
of the
Det",rmine the total imp}l1se load acting.on the el~ment i; question

in Steps 2 and'
7.
bYladding the impulse loads determined
.
.
~'
(9)
I
Calculate
the peak, avera'ge reflected, p reasure 'of .the , ih9,ck.\oads
,.
ac t t.ng ,on, the element
Pr of Step 1.
in,qu~stion
making it equal, to ,the value of
In the' above, procedure, ,it is as.sumed that the .fr angdb Le .e Lament; wil~"remain
intact while being displaced ,away from the,structure. If ,th~ element fails
while beingtr~ns1ated,.then the portion of th", s.h?c)<. pressure, impulse .displacing the element as well as tha~ portion of t~eiimpulse.b,,~ngrefl,ectedto
other elementsiwill be reduce~ because of additional venting area produced by
the element"s "b r e ak up""t ';j '..
2-14.2.3. TNT Equivalency"
,
The shoc~ loa~s presented in.Figure.2-52. through, ~-149 ,p~rtain to.the blast.
effects ofjlare spherical ,T~T explosIves and, must be .extended to Lnc Lude other
potentially ma!,sc~etonati~g,mater.ials" Howeve~,. only a l,imited amount of
testing has been performed to determine the ,TNT eq~iva1ency of cp~fined explosives. Therefore, as an interimproced.ure, .Lt; .is. suggested that "the de cermfnation of, shock pressures for conf.ined explosives., other tha~ TNT utilize equiv;
alencies b!'sed on Equation 2.-1. "
. ,,' ....
.'
The above ,relationship assumes that the ,explosive in question is a,bare charge
and spherical in shape. If the charge. is. not spherical" chen it is suggested
that the explosive be subdivided into several segments which will have approx2-21
TN 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

imatelyequal dimensions and that the reflected impulse for any segment be
calculated, aspreviously discussed . .The reflected impulse of the total
charge is thendetermined by multiplying the impulse of the individual segments by the total number of segments. The peak average reflected pressure is
calculated by assuming the total charge as having a spherical shape. The impulse load for multiple explosives is obtained in a similar manner except that
the locations of the individual charges are considered in calculating their
individual impulse load. The impulse load of the total charge is determined
by adding together the individual impulse loads. The average peak reflected
pressure is calculated using the total weight of the explosive locsted at the
centroid of the individual charges.
The explosive casingwill have an effect on the magnitude of the shock pressures . . These effects are dependent on the properties of the casing such as
material, thickness, shape, etc. A review of a limited amount of surface detonated test data has indicated that the effects of the casing are not severe
and, therefore, for design purposes it'is recommended that casing effects be
neglected.
2-14.2.4. Multiple Explosions

The blast pressures and impulse loads, acting on various elements of cubicle
or other similar structures, which are produced by multiple explosions, will
usually differ from those.produced by a single explosion of the same amount of
explosives.
Although the magnitude .of the total combined impulse produced by the multiple
explosions will usually be larger than that produced by the single explosion,
the damage to a protective element due to the impulse of the multiple detonation may be either greater, equal to, or less than that produced by the impulse of the single explosion. For a given total impulse, the degree of damage to a protective element will be defined by the duration of the entire load
relative to the response time of the element (time to reach maximum deflection).
A minimum amount of theoretical and 'experimental data is available: concerning
the degree'of damage sustained by structural elements due to multiple explosions. However, results of,response tests of reinforced concrete slabs have
indicated that 'if the total combined duration of the blast loads'produced by
simultaneously or near simultaneously exploded charges is equal to o~"less
than one-third the response time (time to reach. maximum deflection) of the element, then the total combined impulse acting on the element can be estimated
by numerically adding the impulse loads produced by the individual explosions.
However, if the total combined duration of the blast loads is greater than
one-third the response.time, the actual pressure-time relationship ofthe combined loads approximatedby'a fictitious peaked triangular pressure pulse
(similar to that of a single explosion) should be considered,- The blast loads
produced by charges that are not simultaneously or 'near simultaneously'exploded may be considered as two or more impulse loads, two, or more pressure-time .
loads, or a combination of impulse' and pressure-time loads depending on the
time delay and the duration of the individual loads compared to the response
time of the element. A load or group of loads should be treated as an impulse
load if the duration (one load or the combined duration of, two or more loads)
of the loading is 'less than one-third the time interval between the on"set of
the load or group of loads and the response time of the member. '
2-22

\
The duration of the blast loads due to multiple explosions may be approximated'
by considering the interrelationship between (a) the time intervals between
individual explosions, (b) arrival times of the blast: waves of the individual
explosions at the element and (c) the fictitious durationof.the pressure load
from individual explosions. Because of the many variablesinvolved, a relationship cannot be given to obtain the' duration. of the blast loads due to multiple explosions. Each situation will require a series of computations involving the time increments ,outlined above.
"
2-14.3. Gas Pressures.
2-14.3.1. Blast Loadings
,
When an explosion occurs within a confined area, . gaseous products willaccumulate and a temperature within the structure will rise, thereby, forming blast
pressures whose magnitude is generally less than that nf the shock pressure
but whose duration is. significantly longer.. The magni,tude of. the gas pressures as well as their durations is a function of the size of. the vent openings in the structure. For very small openings or. no openings at all, the duration of the gas pressures will be very long in comparison to the fundamental
periods of the structure's elements and, therefore, may be considered as a
long duration load similar to that, associated with a'n~clear event.
These conditions usually occur in total or near containment type structures.
In the former, the internal blast pressures must be contained because of .the
presence of toxic or other harmful materials in the structure.
'In near con, '
tainment structures, the leakage of pressure flow out ff the structure usually
must be limited
because of either personnel or frangible;structure
are located
.
I
immediately adj acent to the donor structure. In' otherl cases, however, open"
ings in structures may 'be quite large, thereby minimiZing the products' 'accumI
ulation and limiting the temperature rise, hence producing:.gas. pressures with'
limited duration or no duration at all. The structure's wi\=hout gas pressure,
buildup are referred to as fully ve~ted structures.
inte~ior surface of a partially vented chamber is shown in Figure 2-151. The' nigh peaks are the multi'
pIe reflections associated with shock pressures.' The !gas pressure, denoted as
Pg' is used as the basis for design and is a function ;of the. charge weight and
tfie contained net volume of the chamber.
:, .
A typical pressure-time record at a point on the
. ,
"
Figure 2-152 shows an experimentally fitted curve based upon. test results of
partially vented chambers with small venting areas where the vent properties
,.
ranged between:
2-3
1,
I
The values of A and Vf are the chamber's total vent area and free~volume which
is equal to the total volume minus the volume of all ihterior equipment,
structural elements, etc. The maximum gas. pressure, Pg, is plotted against
the charge weight to free volume ratio.
Figures 2-153 throufh 2-164 providethe relationship of,the gas' pressure

scaled impulseiigfW/3 as a function of the charge weight' to free volume ratio .
I
2-23
TK 5-l300/NAVFAC
P~397/AFR
88-22
W/Vf' scaled value of the vent opening A/Vf2/3, the scaled unit werght of the
cover wf /Wl / 3 over the opening, and the scaled average reflected impulse
i r/Wl/3 of the shock pressures acting on the frangible wall (Section 2-14.2.2)
or a non-frangible wall with a vent opening. (The curves in fi~ujes 2-153
through 2-164 for wF/Wl / 3 - 0 were obtained from data with A/Vf / S 1.0. Extrapolated values, for which there i~ less confidence, are dashed. Curves for
wF/Wl / 3 > 0 are not dashed at A/Vf2/ > 1.0 becausethey are not strongly dependent on the extrapolated portion of the curve for wF/Wl / 3 - O. Even lightweight frangible panels displace slowly enough that the majority of the gas
impulse is developed before significant venting (A/Vf2/3 > 1) can occur.) For
a full containment type structure the impulse of the gas pressure will be infinite in comparison to the response time of the elements (long duration
load). For near containment type structures where venting is permitted
through vent openings without covers, then the impulse loads of the gas pressures are determined using the scaled weight of the cover equal to 'zero. The
impulse loads of the gas pressures corresponding to scaled weight of the cover
greater than zero relates to frangible covers and will be discussed later.
The effects on the gas pressure impulse caused by the shock impulse loads will
vary. The gas impulse loads will have greater variance at lower shock impulse
loads than at higher loads. Interpolation will be required for the variation
of gas impulse as a function of the shock impulse loads. This interpolation
can be performed in a manner similar to the interpolation for the shock pressures.
A computer program is available which executes the interpolation procedure.

Availability of this. program is listed in Section 2-4.
The actual duration and 'the pressure-time variation of the gas pressures is
not requi,ed for the analysis of' most structural elements. Similar to the
shock pressures, the actual pressure-time relationship can be approximated by
a fictitious peak triangular pulse. The peak gas pressure is obtained from
Figure 2-152 and.the.impulse from Figures 2-153 through 2-164 and the fictitious duration is calculated from the following:
2-4
Figure 2-165a illustrates an idealized pressure-time curve considering both
the shock and gas pressures. As the duration of the gas pressures approach
that of the shock pressures, the effects of the gas pressures on the response
of the elements diminishes until the duration of both the shock and gas pressures are equal and the structure is said to be fully vented.
If a chamber is relatively small and/or square in plan area then the magnitude
of the gas pressure acting on an individual element will not vary significantly. For design purposes the gas pressures may be considered to be uniform on
all members. When the chamber is quite long in one direction and the explosion occurs at one end of the structure, the magnitude of the gas pressures
will initially vary along the length of the structure. At the end where the
explosion occurs, the peak gas pressure is Pgl (Fig. 2-165b) which after a finite time decays to Pg2' and finally decays to zero. The gas pressure Pg2 is
based on the total volume of the structure and is obtained from Figure 2-152
while the time for this pressure to decay to zero is calculated from Equation
2-4 where the impulse is obtained from Figures 2-153 through 2-164 again for .
the total volume of the structure. The peak gas pressure Pgl is obtained from
Figure 2-152 based on a ps~udo volume (Fig. 2-165b) whose length is equal to
2-24
TK 5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22 '

its width and the height is the 'actual height of the structure. The time t p
for the gas pressure to decay from Pgl to Pg2 is taken as the actual length of
the structure minus the width divided by the velocity of sound (1.12 fpms).
At the end where the explosion occurs, the peak gas pressures' (Pgl' Figure 2165b) will be a maximum and, after a finite time, they will decay to a value
(P 2' Figure 2-165b) which is consistent with full volume of the structure;
af~er which they will decay to zero. The magnitude of the peak gas pressures
(P gl) may be evaluated by utilizing Figure 2-152 and a pseudo volume whose
length is equal to its width and the height is the actual height of the chamber. The length of time t p between the two peak gas pressures may be taken as
the length minus the width of the structure divided by the velocity of sound
(1 fpms).
"
2-14.3;2. Frangibility
Similar to shock pressures, an 'element can be considered frangible if it is
designed such that its resistance to internal blast forces does not exceed 25
psf and that it will undergo significant displacement during the shock and gas
loading phases. Figures 2-153 through 2-164 present the method for determining the gas pressure impulse acting on the interior surfaces of tpe donor
structure. These impulse loads will vary as, the mass of the cover over the
vent opening varies; that is, the heavier the vent opening cover, the larger
the gas pressure impulse.
Like the vented structures, the internal gas pres-
sure impulse loads produced by a frangible cover must be interpolated as'a

function of the shock pressure impulse loads .. t:
2-14.3.3.
~NT
Equivalency
The data preseritedin Figure 2-152 and Figures 2-153 to 2-164 are for TNT only
and must be extended to include other potentially mass-detonating materials.
Similar to the shock pressures, only a limited amount of data is available regarding the TNT equivalency of confined explosions and in particular 'the effects produced on gas pressures. It has been suggested that the TNT equivalency of explosives relating to gas pressures is a function of both the heat
of detonation as well as the heat of combustion, while for the shock pressures, the TNT/equivalency is a function of the formet only. :A relatlonship'
has been developed based on a limited amount of testirig as' follows:'
,.
.'
d'd
[HINT - HINT] + HTNT

where
'WE
I
- effective charge weight for gas pressure
heat of combustion of TNT

heat of combustion of explosive in question'
"
"
2-25
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

- TNT conversion factor (Figure 2-166)
- heat of detonation of TNT
heat of detonation of explosion in question
Y~p
weight of, explosive in question
Gas pressures will be increased because of casings, in particular, if the casing is combustible. Since only unrelated data are available concerning the
effects on gas pressures by the casing, a method of compensating for ,these effects ,is to adjust the heat of combustion of the given explosive material in
Equation 2-5 to account for the heat of combustion of the casing material.
This adjustment should be made by chemically combining the heat of combustion
of the explosive and casing.

The gas pressure produced by the,release of the gaseous products of multiple
explosions in a confined area may be approximated by considering the explosion
to be produced by a single explosive whose weight is equal to the combined
weights of the individual charges. This approximation is accurate if the individual charges are positioned in the immediate vicinity of one another and
if near simultaneous detonation of the individual charges occurs. If the individual charges are not close to one another and/or positioned at one end
of the structure, the magnitude of the gas pressures will initially vary along
the lengthor'width of the structure. This variation may be determined in a
manner similar to that described in Section 2-14.3.1.
'
2-14.4. Leakage Pressures

2-14.4.1. Introduction
When an explosion occurs inside a vented chamber, shock pressures escape to,
the outside along with venting of the gas pressures. Trailing shocks overrun
and' coalesce with the lead shock at some distance to form a single diverging
shock wave. ,Close to the structure, the blast pressures are affected by the
structure itself as the shock pressures spill around the edges of the structure and form highly turbulent vortices. At further distances, this effect is
no longer present and the shock pressure decreases with increasing distances.
The leakage pressures are enhanced in the direction of venting (front) and reduced to the side and rear. The enhancement of pressures in,the front and reduction of pressures to the side and rear are less extreme as the distance
away from the structure is increased.
The blast environment outside of cubicle containing fully and partially vented
explosions is presented in this section. Pressures and impulses acting on the
ground surface are provided as a function of distance from the explosion, direction (front, side, back) relative to the vent opening in the structure, area of the vent opening and volume of the structure. For design purposes, the
remaining blast parameters corresponding to the pressure and impulse acting on
the ground surface may be obtained from Figure 2-15 and 2-16 in exactly the
same manner as a surface burst of an explosive other than TNT.
2-26
TK'S-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

Explosions in three and four wall cubicles are considered. Three wall cubicles are fully vented structures., ,The ,blast.environment.is furnished for cubicles with or without roofs, Four wall cubicles with a vent opening located
either in the roof or one wall are considered. The size of the vent opening
is varied from that of a fully vented cubicle, through a full range of partially vented structures.
The data presented is based on tests in which the vent openings,were completely open, There were no frangible covers over the vent area which might inhibit, the pressure flow, Vent openings in protectiye structures ,are normally
covered with frangible panels for weatherprotec~ion,:separationof operations, etc. These panels will affect the leakage pressures. 'However, it'is'
assumed that these frangible panels will reduce the shock pressures leaking
through the opening to a greater extent than the'increase in the'inte.rnal gas
pressure buildup. Therefore, use of ,this data will'predict conservative leakage pressures'from cubicles with frangible covers.
2-14,4.2. Fully Vented Three Wall Cubicles

For cubicle-type structures where full venting is provided through the frangible or open portion of the structure, the resulting blast wave exterior of the
cubicle will be appreciably modified as compared to an unbarricaded detonation. As the blast wave propagates out from the center of'the explosion; the
shock front will collide with the interior surfaces of the structure. These
collisionswill reflect and reinforce the Lnf t La], loads (pressure and impulse) .,' Eventually these pressures "will' spillover and around the blast.
walls', and in the event of rapid collapse 'of frangible walls, through the
structure to the. surrounding area. The exterior pressures will not initially
have 'a definite shock front but will, .at; some distance from the structure, .
shock-up with".frontal pressures similar to those produced by a surface burst,
The pressure distance gradients away from the -explosion will vary in all directions. This variation is defined by the configuration (shape, openings,
etc.) of the protective structure containing the explosion.
A series of tests have been performed on three wall cubicle type~tructures
illustrated in Figure 2-167. Cubic and rectangular three wall cubicles with
and without'a roof were tested. The results indicated_that several parameters
were important:
r,
(1)
Direction, Three directions illustrated in Figure 2-167 are considered, -. The direction normal to, the open wall is called the
front. The directions perpendicular to the front normal are
called the sides. , The directi~n opposite ,the normal to the open
wall is called the back. The blast pressures out the front are
greaeer-, than that to the side which, 'in turn, are, greater than
that to the back.
_- (2)
Structure geometry. Differences were found in the blast environment depending upon whether the shape of the structure was cubic
or rectangular, This was true for pressure and impulse measurements to the side- and back, andconky impulse- to the.,front'.. There
were no differences in pressure out the front for the cubicle and
rectangular structures. The difference in pressures to the side
and back occur onlyclose.to the structure. ,Far from the structure, tihe re.tLs no' effect .on- pressure in any direction: due to
2-27

structure shape'. However, impulse does not converge with distance
for differences in cubicle" shape.
(3)
Charge weight to volume ratio YJV and distance. The ratio:YJV

,does not have an effect on the pressure to the front of any cubicle. There is an effect of YJV on pressure to the side and back
of all cubicles, but only close to the structure. For a particular YJV, the pressure'is affected differently for a cubic or rectangular structure. Thus, "the effect on pressure, close in depends
both on structure size and YJV .. But, for. further out, neither af-'
fect the pressures. For all values ,of'Z, there "is a measured effect -of YJV on impulse.
(4)
Venting 'through the roof .. For any direction, cubicle -shape, and
YJV value, .there are differences in blast pressure and impulse
based solely on whether or not venting could occur through the'
roof.
Scaled distance Z. Both blast pressure and scaled impulse are affected by scaled distance from the explosion. This parameter, is
not independent of other factors.
(5)
'.
The pres suze variation in the front, side, and back direction of any three
wall cubicle without' a roof is given in' Figure 2-168 while for a three wall
'cubicle. with a roof the pressure variation is given in Figure 2-169.' Due'to
interferences 'from the side and. back wails which cause complex vortices near
the structure and coalescence of shock waves in close, there is: a maximum
pressure produced in the side and back directions .. These pressures are a
function of the charge weight to cubicle volume ratio, YJV; and the 'configuration of, the cubicle. The maximum peak pressure' in the side or' back direction
of three wall cubicles with or without a roof are'given in Figure 2-170.
!
'.
The scaled peak positive impulse in the front, 'side, and back direction of
three wall cubicles is given in Figures 2-171 through 2-182. The scaled impulse is given as a function of scaled distance from' the explosion for various
values of charge'weight to structure volume ratio. The curves are presented
in two groups; three.wall cubicles without roofs and then ,cubicles ,with roofs.
For each direction, the impulse is given for explosions in cubic and rectangular cubicles, respectively.
".,'
2-14.4.3.;Partially vented four wall'cubicles - vent opening in roof

Four wall 'cubicles with a vent openings located in the-roof will produce blast
pressures on the ground surface which are symmetric about the vent opening.
Leakage pressures were determined for'a below ground cubicle with its roof
flush with the ground surface (Fig. 2-l83a). Figure 2~183b shows the aboveground four wall cubicle. The vent opening was centrally located in the roof,
,and various'vent areas were considered. The,blast pressure was determined to
be a strong function of "the vent area divided by the structure volume to the
two-thirds power (AJV2/3) and the scaled distance"and a very weak function,of
. the charge weight to volume ratio YJV'which ca~ be ignored with negligible er", ror.
-, ~
"
"..
,
The leakage pressures resulting from an explosion in a partially vented belowground cubicle with a vent opening~in its roof: is given 'in Figure 2-184, and
2-28
TN
5-1300/NA~~AC
,
'
P-397/AFR
8~~~2
the impulse is given in Figure 2-185. The scaled ground distance as indicated
in Figure 2-183a is used in these charts for the below-ground structures.
Figures 2-184 and 2-185 may 'also be, used'to d~teimine the, pressure' ~nd impulse
acting on the groun~su~~ace for above-ground four wall ~u.bicles (Fig. 2183b). 'For an above-ground,structure,'the shock front must travel a longer
distance than a below-ground structure. Therefore, the scaled distance that
must be used in Figures 2-184 and 2-185 is approximated by the addition of the
slant and horizontal distances indicated in Figure 2-183b .
.;
. ' . : " ..
' .'
*...
..
The figures 'are' usefui in seiecting the' degree of venting required to"limit
leakage pressur~s ~utside;roof-vented,four wali cubicles to' a 'specified safe
level at .saf~ 'g1v~n distance. From a, knowledge of the pressur'e 'and impul~e on
the ground surface" the blast load acting on a structure may be obtai'ned' from
the pro,ceduresg!."en in this repor,t: Thus, an adjacent' 'structure may be de'
signed to resist 'a" blast load resulting from a given' vent' opening or the vent
opening may be varied to ~uit the ,capacity ~f an adjacent:structure.'
:
.
.,
2-14.4.4. Partialiy, vented four wall cubicle - vent opening through wall
J
~".
.:
Leakage pressures resulting from an explosion in a partially vented four wall

cubicle where the vent opening is,located in a wall (Fig. 2-186) have not been
documented. The~e leakage'pressures have a variation in direction sImilar to
a three wall cubicle'with 'a roof and a variation with vent opening similar 'to 0'
a roof 'vented four wall cubicle., 'Extrapolation of ' the 'data for these 'types of
cubicles ha'v~ resulted in 'Figures 2-187 through 2-189. 'These figures present
a reasonable estimate 'of ,the pressures produced in'the front, side, arid back
direction.. (Fig. 2"186).~ Iri addition to 'direction, these pressures are a
function of scaled distance and the vent area divided by the:volume to the
two-thirds power (AjV**(2/3.
"
J.
' .
".'
,".
2-15. External Blast 'LOads on Structures'

~,,;,
<
2 -15.1. General
-"
,-
,"
..
::;
The blast loading on a structure caus~d bY'a high-explosive~detonationis dependent upon several factors:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
The magnitude of the explosion.

The location of the explosion relative to the structure in qu~s
tion (unconfined or confined) ': ' ,
The geometrical configuf~tion of the structure.
The structure orientation with'respect to the explosion and the
groun~ surface (above, flush with, or ~elow ~he, ground).
The procedures presented here for the determination of the external blast
loads on stru~tures are restricted.to rectangular structures ,positioned above
the grou~q surface where:~he strupture will be subjected'to' a'plane wave shock
front. !he procedures can'be extended to include structures' p~,other shapes
(cylindr!cal,'arch, spherical,' etc.) 'a~'well as structur~s.P?s'itionedat,and
below the ground surface.
"
2-29
~,
TN 5.l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

I
.~'
2-15.2. Forces Acting on Structure

,
,
The forces acting on a structure associated with a plane shock wave are dependent upon both the.peak pressure and the impulse of the in~ident and dynamic
pressures acting in the free-field. The peak pressures and impulses associated with the free-field shock wave have, been presented' for various explosives.
-
For each pressure range there is a particle or wind velocity associated with
the blast wave that causes a dynamic pre~sure on objects in th~ path of the
wave. In the free fi~ld, these dynamic pressures are e,ssentially functions of
the air density and particle velocity. ,For typical conditions, standard re~
lationships have been established between the peak incident pressure (P s o ) ,
the peak dynamic pressure, (qo)" the p~rticle 'velocity, and the air density behind the shock front. ,The magnitude of the dynamic pressures, particle velocity and air density is 'solely a function of the peak incident pressure, and"
therefore, independent 'of the explosion size. Figure 2:3 gives the values of
the parameters versus the peak incident pressure. Of the three parameters,
the dynamic pressure is the'most important for determining the loads on'structures.
For design purposes, it,isnecessary to establish the va~iation or decay of

both the incident and dynamic pressures with time since the effects on the
structure subjected to a blast loading depend upon the intensity-time, history'
of the loading as well as,on the peak,intensity. The'form of the incident
blast wave (Fig. 2-l90)'is characterized ~y an abrupt rise in pressure to a
peak value, a period of decay to ambient pressure and a ,period ,in which the
pressure drops below,~bient (negative pressure phase).
'
The rate of decay of the incident and dynamic pressures, after the passage of
the shock front, is a function of the peak ,pressure (both positive and negative phases) and the size of the detonatiori. For design purposes, the actual
decay of the incidental pressure may be approximated by the rise of an equivalent triangular pressure pulse. The actual positive duration is replaced by a'
fictitious duration which is expressed as.:a function of the total positive impulse and peak pressure:
, 2-6
tof - 2i/p
The above relationship for the equivalent" triangular pulse is applicable to'
the incident as well as the reflected pressures; however, in the case of the
latter, the valu~ of the' pressure and impUlse us~d with Equation'2-G is equivalent to that associated with the reflected wave. The fictitious duration of
the dynamic pressure may be assumed to be equal to that of the incident pres-
sure.
For determ!ning th~ pressure- time' !lata for the ne,g';tive phase" a similar pro- ' ..'
cedure as used in the evaluation of the idealized positive phase 'may, be utilized. The 'equivalent negative ,pressure-time curve will have a time of rise
"
equal to 0.25 to whereas the fictitious duration t~f- is" given by the triangular equivalent pulse equation:
2-7
2-30
8~-22
where i- and p- are the total impulse and peak press~re of the ~egative pulse
of either the incident or 'reflected waves. The effects of the dynamic pressure in the magazine phase region usually may be neglected.
Since the fictitious duration of the positive phase w111 be smaller in magnitude than the actual duration, a time gap"will occur between the fi'ctiti'ous
duration and the onset of the negative phase. This time gap. which is illustrated in Figure 2-190. should be maintained in an analysis for consistency of
the onset.of the various, load phasings.
2-15.3: Abo~e-Ground Reci~ngrilar Structure Without Openings, '
t,
2-15.3.1. ,General
For any given set of fre~~iield inc1de~t and dynamic 'pre~sur~ "pulses, 'the for- "
ces imparted to an above-ground str~ct~re can be ,divided 'in~o four general
components: (a) the force resulting f rom the incident pressure, (b)~~e force
associated with the dynamic pressures, (c) .the force r~sulting, from the reflection of the inc~dent'pressure impinging upon an ,interf~ring ~urface. and
(d) the pressures associated with the negative phase'of the shock wave. The
relative significance of each of these components is dependent upon the geometrical configuration and size of the structure. the orientation of the
structure relative to the shock front, and the design purpose of the blast
loads'.
'
The interaction of the incident b~ast wave with a ,structure is a complicated

process. To reduce the complex problem of blast to reasonable terms. it will
be assumed that (a) the structure is generally rectangular" in shape. (b) the
incident pressure of interest is 200 psi or less, (c) the structure being
loaded is in the region
of
the Mach stem, and (d),"
the
Mach,
stein extends,'above
-,
; . ' .
.
<
.t.he height of the building.
'
2-15.3.2. Front Wall Loads
For a rectangular ~bove-ground structure at low' pressure ranges,:' the variation
with time on the side facing the detonation (front face) when this side is
parallel to the shock front (normal reflection) is illustrated in Figure 2191a. At the moment
the incident shock front strikes the front wall, the
,
pressure immediately rises from zero to the normal reflected pressure, Pro
which is a function of the incident pressure (Fig. 2-15)., The clearing time,
t c' required to relieve the reflected pressure is
represented as:
48
2-8
(1+ R)'Cr"
.:
where
"
'
S -
clearing distance and is equal to H or W/2' '(Fig ...2-191a) whichever

is the smallest
height of the structure
ratio of SIC where G is equal to H or W/2 (Fig: 2-191),whichever

is larger,
,
,
2-31
TK 5-l300/NAVFAC 'P-397/AFR 88-22
Cr -
sound velocity in reflected region (Fig, 2-192)
The pressure acting on the front wall after time t c is the algebraic sum of
the incident pressure Ps and the drag pressure Coq or:
2-9
The drag coefficient Co gives the relationship between the dynamic pressure
and the total translational pressure in the direction of the wind produced by
the dynamic pressure and varies with the Mach number (or:with the Reynold's
number at low incident pressures) and the relative geometry of the structure,
A value of CO-l for the front wall is considered adequate for the pressure
ranges considered in this manua~, At higher pr~ssure ranges, the above procedure may yield a fictitious 'pressure-time curve because of the extremely
short pressure pulse durations involved, Therefore,.the pressure-time curve
constructed must be checked to determine its accuracy, The comparison is made
by constructing a second curve (dotted triangle as indicated in Fig, 2-191a)
using t~e total reflected pre~sure impulse i r from Figure 2-15 for a normal
reflected shock wave (Fig, 2-191a), The fictitious duration trf for the normal reflected wave is calculated-from:
2-10
where Pr.is the peak normal reflected pressure (Fig. 2-15). Whichever curve
(Fig, 2-l91a) give~ the smallest value of the impulse (area under curve), that
c~rve sh~uld be used in calculating the wall loading.
"
If the shock f~ont approaches the structure at an oblique' angle (Fig. 2-i9lb),
then the peak pressure will be a function of the incident pressure and the incident angle between the front and the front wall and is obtained from Figure
2-193.
An equation similar to that used for the manual shock front may be used when
the angle of obliquity is greater than zero as follows:
2-11
trf - 2i r a / P r a
where peak reflected impulse 'ira is obtained from Figure 2-194,
Usually only the positive pulse of the pressure-time relationship of Figure 219lb is utilized for the front wall design since the negative pulse seldom affects the design. For determining the overall motion of the structure, the
effects of negative pressures should be included, The peak negative reflected
pressure (Fig. 2-190) and reflected impulse are obtained from Figure 2-16 and
correspond to the peak incident pressure (Fig. 2-15) acting on the front wall.
The rise time and deqay of the negative. pressuresare similarly calculated as
described in Section 2-15,2.
'
2-15.3.3. Roof and Side Walls
As the shock front traverses a structure a pressure is imparted to the roof
slab, and side walls equal to the incident pressure at a given time at any
specified point reduced by a negative drag pressure. The portion of the sur2-32

face loaded at a particular.time is dependent upon the magnitude of ;the shock
front incident pressure, the location of the shock front and.the wavelength
(Lw and Lw-) of the positive and negative
,.
pulses.
To determine accurately the overall loading on a surface, a step-by-step analysis of the wave propagation across the surface should be made. Thisanalysis
includes an integration of the pressures at various points (Fig. 2-l95a) on
the surface and at various times to determine the equivalent uniform incident
pressure acting on a span L as a -func t Lon of time (Fig. 2-l95b)... Since the
point of inflection of the element will vary as the shock front traverses the
surface, in order to make the:assumption of the ~niform pressure valid, the
reinforcement on both faces must be continuous across ,the span length.
As the shock wave traverses.the roof, the peak value of the incident pressure
decays and the wave length increases. As, illustrated in Figure 2-l95b, the:,
equivalent ,uniform pressure will increase linearly from time tf.when the blast.:
wave reaches the beginning of the element (point f)' to time td when the peak
equivalent uniform pressure is reached when the shock front arrives at point
d. The equivalent uniform pressure will then decrease to zero where the blast
load at point b on the element'decreasesto zero.
To simplify the calculations, ,the equivalent uniform pressure,has been expressed as a function of the .b Las c wave parameters' at point f. The equivalent
load factor CE, the, rise time, and duration of the equivalent. uniform pressure
are ,obtained from Figures 2-196, 2-197, .and 2-198, as a function of the wave
length-span ratio Lwf/,L.
The peak value of the pressure acting on the roof PR is the sum'of
tion of the equivalent uniform pressure and drag pressure:
..
contr~bu
2-12
'
where Ps c f' is the incident pressure occurring'at pointf and qofis the dynamic pressure corresponding,toCEcPsof'
The drag coefficient CD for the roof and side walls is a function of the peak
dynamic pressure. Recommended values ,are as follows:
,.
'
Peak dynamic pressure

0-25 psi
25 -50 ' psi
50~ 130 psi' ;
Drag coefficient
c O. 40
-0.30
.-0.20
<
The data presented above for the equivalent uniform roof and side wall blast
pressures are used principally for. the design of individual elements; For
overall motions of a structure, the effects of.the negative phase pressures
should be included .. The equivalent load factor,C E for the peak equiv~lent uniform negative pressure is obtainedfrom Figure. 2-196 as a function of the
wavelength span ratio Lwf/L. The value ofthe,negative pressure acting on the
roof, PR-. is equal to CE- Psof where the value :,of CE - is a minus. value. The
value of the equivalent negative,pressure duration tof is obtained from Figure
2-198. The value is not a ,function 'of ,the p~ak incident pressure at point f ..
The rise time'of the negative. ph~se is equal to 0.25 tof'
2-33
TK 5-l300fNAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

If a side wall 'is positioned at an' oblique angle to the shock front, then
blast load~ acting on the'side wall are calculated in the same manner as that
described for front walls,
2-15.3.4. Rear Wall
As the shock'front passes over the rear edges of the ,roof and/or side walls
the pressure front will expand, forming secondary waves which propagate over
the rear wall. In the case of long buildings, the secondary wave enveloping
the back wall 'essentially results from the spillover from the roof, and the
side walls. in both cases, the secondary waves are reinforced due to their
impingement with reflecting surfaces, The reinforcement of the spillover wave:
from the roofis produced by ,its reflection from the ground surface at,the
base of the rear wall, and the reinforcement of the secondary waves from the
side walls .is produced by their collision near the center'of ,the wall and/or
their interaction with the wave from the roof, Little information is avaLl
able on the overall effects on the rear wall loading produced by the reflec-,
tions of the
se~~n~ary
waves.
"
In most design cases, the primary reason for determining the blast loads acting on the rear wall is to determine the overall drag effects (both front and
rear wali loadings) on the building. For this purpose, a procedure may be
used where the blast loading on the rear 'wall Figure (2-199a) ,is calculated
using the eq~ivalent uniform method used for computing the blast loads on the
roof and side walls. Here the peak pressure of the equivalent'uniform pressure-time curve (Fig .. 2-199b) is calculated using the peak pressure that ,would,.
accrue at the back edge of the roof slab Psob' The equivalent uniform'load
factors CE and CE- are based on the wave length of the peak pressure above and
the height of the rear wall Hs aS'are the time rises and duration of both,the
positive and negative phases.
'.
Like the roof and side walls, the blast loads acting on the rear wall are a
function of the drag pressures in addition to the incident pressure. The dynamic pressure of the drag corresponds to that associated with the equivalent
pressure CE Psob' while the recommended drag' coefficients are ,the same as used.
for the roof and side walls,
In the event that the back wall is positioned at an oblique angle to the shock
front, peak incident pressure at point b should be calculated at the mid
width,
;:
::
>,
As previously mentioned, the blast loads, produced by'multiple explosions, acting on structures located far from an explosion may consist of a series of
separatrevpreaswre pulses rather than a single, pulse blast load. 'However, ,the
multiple: pressure-pulse loading is usually associated with weights of explo~
sives which'are very small (several pounds) and, therefore, will not be the
usual design situation,' For large charge weights, however, the single
pressure pulse loading with multiple peak pressures'will occur, At the present time no' specific method has been'devised which will enable one to evaluate
this type ,of blast loading, In the interim" it is suggested that> the multiple'
peak pressure type loading be replaced by the'pressure-pulse which is associated-with the merged shock wave: The parameters of this shock wave'and,cor'~
-' .,
2-34
TK
~-1300/NAVFAC
P~397/AFR
88-22
. responding pressures are de,!=ermined assuming a single explosion, the.".explosive

weight ,of which is equal to ~he co~bined weight o~ the individual charges.
,
2-15.4 .. Above Ground Rectangular Structures
with.Opening~.
2-15.4,1. General
Two stru~tural,configurations ar~ usually ,encountered
.
when blast. loads are determined on structures with unsealed or unprotected
openings in its exterior ... The. first configuration includes windows., doors or
.~ther openings' located in both 'the,fr.o.nt and rear walls as weH .as along the
side walls of the structure. The ~econd would i~clude openings located. only
in the front face of the structure. The remaining surfaces are void, of openings." '!;h,e ,second confLgurat Lon ',is the one most likely to be encountered since
interior partitions will reacr tcc the flow of the,blast wave through the
structure. Increased interior blast loads are produced due;to the reflection
of the blast wave on interior components, The blast loads associated with the
~econd configur~tion are,pri~ari~y discussed in this section with comments regarding.!he loads pertaining to the first confi~r~tion.
When a shock front strikes the front wall of a structure, the incident pressu~e is amplified, Mindows ~nd doors will fail almost.immediate~y (approximately one.millisecond) after the' onset of the shock front unless they were
des'igned to re.sist,t:he applied, l'oad, ,fo.s a result, blast pxes sures '.will flow
into the structure through these openings. This sudden release of high pressure will cause a shock front to form inside of.~ach opening, Each individual
front will expand and tend to combine into a single front which will further
expand.throughout,the structurc's i~t~rior. This interior sh~ck is initially
weaker than the incident pres~ure at the building's cxterior. However, thc
interior pressure will,tend to get stronger.due to reflections off interior
building components:'
,
"
...
"
An idealized structure conf~g~ration is shown .in Figure 2-2,00. The. incident

shock front arriving at the front wall of the structure has an incident pres. ,sure Ps o , and wave length,I"w" As ,the shock fro~t,swceps across the. s crueture ,
.blast pressure~ enter thc interior o~ t~e bu~ld~ng throug?the opening in the
front wall', of area Ao' The area.of,multiple openings are added to obtain a
,fi~titious,single .opening ~ocated at t~~ ~enter ~f thefr~nt.wall. The. blast
. pressures ence r Lng the building first load, the interior surface of t~e fzont;
. wall ;',:fol~o~ed by. th~, int~rior surface of 'the '~ide '!Talls and r~of ,ang finally
the interior .sur faceiof the .back walL The idealized pressure-time load cur'ves for these surfaces' are . presented in)igure 2- 20L. The, p rccedures nec.~s
sary to obtain the magnitude of thc parameters given on the idealizcd load
curves ,for.a particular exp los Ion are .presented;,b~ the remainder I ,of' t:,his...s ec'.' tion ... Except for the front. wall, the blast preasures acting 'on the. extedor
of the structure are not affected by the opening and are,determined according
to. the procedures
of the .
previous
section. . ,~ .
.
,
. ' , ' ,
.....
, "
,t
primary purpose of this section ~~ to provide ,the blast loading on the

interior,surface of an exterior wall so that the maximum. outward motion of the
wall may be determined. It is not the intent to use these interior loads to
reduce the exterior positive phase' loading. Except for the front wall,'accurate phasing of the interior and exterior blast loads are not possible.' The
interior loads will always lag the exterior positive phase loading and, due to
reflections off interior components, the duration of the interior load is alTh~
2-35

ways longer. 'For design, the interior blast, loads should be added to the negative phase'exterior loading to obtain the maximum outward motion (negative
response) of a side wall, roof or back wall. The maximum positive response
should be determined for the exterior positive phase loading'without any reductions due to internal pressures. In most instances, interior partitions
are required to withstand the blast pressures leaking into a structure. The
procedures presented in this section may be used to determine the design blast
load acting on these elements. An interior partition located parallel to the
front wall will reflect the shock front and, therefore, is considered as a
back wall" The length of the side wall wo~ld then be taken as ,the distance
betwee~ the front wall and this partition.'An interior partition(s) perpen" dicular to and framing 'into' the front, wall may be considered as a 'side
wall(s). The length of the front wall would then be taken as the' distance between an' interior partition and'a side' wall or between' two'interior partitions. In both cases, only the openings located between these partition'walls
would be considered as thevent opening ..
The procedures presented,in this section to determine interior blast loads acting on a structure with'an opening in the front wall were developed for a
shock front striking the front wall head-on. For the same size opening in a
front wall, this orientation of the approaching shock front 'results in the
most'severe interior shock wave effects .. The use of these procedures for
shock 'fronts approaching'at all other angles will result in conseryative estimates of the' blast loadings acting on ~he interior of ' the structure.
J
~ It'
1-r'
2-15.'4.2. Exterior Front' Vall LOads"
....
The time required for reflected pressures to clear a solid front ~all is expressed in multiples of the 'time necessary for a rarefaction wave to 'sweep the
wall. Yhen walls with openings are considered, clearing takes place ground
the,edges of the opening in addition to the edges of the wall. Depending upon
the size of the overall wall and the openings, the clearing time of the reflected pressures may be s Lgnt Hcant Iy reduced.
..
:<:' ,
,Th~ pressure-time' relationship "of the applied blast load acting on the front
wall.of a structure with openings is the same as that of a solid'front-wall

(Fig. 2-191) except; the clearing time wi1'lbe reduced. Toevahiate' this reduced time, the value of S' 'is introduced into Equation 2 - 8. "This value is
the weighted average distance that the rarefaction wave must travel to cover
the wall as'suming immediate access of the incident shock to the interior of
"the structure. If frangible covers (windows, 'doors) do not fail immediately,
,the clearing ,time should not be reduced .. '"
.
.
,:::
(
:.
:~
:-
>"
-,
The''mediad' for evaluating S' is illust'rated 'In 'Figure 2- 202 'where the ,face of
,the front wall is divided into rectangular'areas. These areas are'determined
",by the locati"on and dimensions of the openings in die wall, and by consideration of the direction along which the reflected pressure clears'around the
.area in the shortest possible time, The' individual areas are labeled dependirig upon the numberand'location of the clearing sides of the individual'
ifeas. Clearing factors 6n are'established for these' areas as 'follows:
.
I~
-,
..
"
2-36
:i".
.....
1M 5-l300/NAVFAC 'P-397/AFR 88-22

Number,of Clearing'Sides
Area'
1
2
3
4
1.0
0.5
1.0
1.0' '
Two, adjacent sides "

Two oppo's Lt.e sides
One side
None
t.
..
The weighted average clearing distance S' is, expressed as:

."
2-13
where
S'
weighted average clearing distance with openings

"
"
.' ..
clearing factor
average, clearing distance
,"
fo~
. .'
individual areas as follows:
'Area 1
Area: 2
width or he Lghc-cf 'area whichever is smaller ...

distance between opposite sides where clearing occurs :.
Area 3
distance between side where clearing occurs and oppos~te side
Area 4
same as Area 1
~ -,area of individual wall 'subdivision

,
"
Af '- net' area of the wall excluding openings , - "
The clearing time t'c for a front wall with opening is ca.LcuLat.ed from Equation 2-8 in which S' is substituted for S or
"
4S'
2-14
t' c .,~
,'''-
where all components of Equation 2-14 have been previously, defined. ,"It should
be realized that the'load acting on the front wall with openings is still the:
same' as that shown in Figure 2-191 except; with the reduced clearing time, t'~.
The curve which represents the wall loading is still the curve' which gives, the
lower impulse.
As previously stated, window breakage will require a finite length of time:
This time may be evaluated using the, resisting functions.of"Chapter VI and ,the
dynamic procedures of.Chapter 3. This time must be accounted forin determining'the window cont r Ibut Lon to the b Las tvpres sur'es acdng .on:the wall.
-
..
'
. ~.
"
2-15.4'.3.- Interior Frontllall Loads
...
"
,
,
The average pressure acting on the interlor face of the front wall will'initially build up in a similar manner as
,>
the average pressure on the exterior back wall of a closed structure, How
ever, vortices are located all around the interior ~dges of all openings in
the, front .wall. -The 'effect of these vortices, whi'ch tend' to' reduce the blast
load, has 'been neglected.
.., .
2.~:n
TK 5-l300/NAVFAC P-397lAFR 88-22

The shock front entering through the opening in the front wall travels along
the interior face of the front wall, thereby subjecting the wall to incident
pressures. When the front reaches~he side wall, it is reflected back. The
length of wall loaded by this reflected wa~e is a function of the wave length,
The average ~ressure acting on the;wall is determined assuming a single
opening of area Ao located at the center of the wal~. In the case of multiple
openings, a single opening equal to the combined area of all openings is located in the center of ~he front wall.
Lw.
The idealized pressure-time blast load acting on theinter~or face of the

front wall is shown in Figure 2-201a. The time at which the shock front arrives at the exterior surface of the front wall is taken as zero (To - 0).
The blast load acting on the wall begins at time Tl. This time represents the
time it takes for the shock front to enter the structure through the opening
Ao' The pressure buildup is linear from time Tl to a maximum pressure Pmax at
time T2, and then it decays linearly to zero at time T3.
The maximum average ,pressure Pmax acting on,the interior f",ce of the front
wall varies as a function of the incident pressure Ps o and the wavelength
corresponding to that pressure" and the geometry of the wall., Figure 2-203
through 2-206 give the maximum pressure Pmax acting on front walls having
width to height ratios (W/H) equal to 3/4, .,3/2, 3 and 6, respectively.
Lw
The idealized times Tl' T2 and T3 are also obtained from plots of front walls
having width to height ratios W/H equal to 3/4, 3/2, 3 and 6. The arrival
time Tl of the load is given in Figures 2-207 and 2-208 as a function of the
incident pressure acting on the exterior surface of the front wall P s o for
various opening to wall area ratios Ao/Aw.,., The rise time of the load, T2 - Tl
is given in Figures 2-209 and 2-210 as a function of Ps o and various wave
length to width of front ratios Lw/W.. ,Fina,lly" the duration of the load. T.3 .Tl is given in Figures 2-211 and 2-212, again as a function of Ps o and Lw/W:
The times T2 and T3 are obtained from subtracting Tl from the rise time and
duration, respectively.
'
Failure of the cover sealing openings in a bUilding (windows, doors) will affect the onset of the blast load acting on the interior surface of the front
wall. ,Due to the time required to cause failure of the covers, the onset of
the,interior pressures may not be in phase ,with the onset of ,the exterio~
blast load. Therefore, care must be ,taken, to arrive at a combined loading for
the structural element.
2-15.4.4. Interior Side Vall and Roof Loads
:.
.-:>
";~
'.
"
:'
:.
~:
The blast pressures entering the interior of ,~he building through the opening
in the front wall (multiple openings are combined,to form 'a single opening)
must travel along the interior face of the front wall ~efore arriving at the
side wall. The incident pressures arriVing at the side wall are increased due
to reflection off the wall itself. The front expands and travels -ac roas the'
side wall until it reaches the back wall. It is then reflected off the back
wall, and the reflected wave travels back across the side wall towards the
front wall. The length of side wall loaded by this reflected wave is a function of the wave length
Lw.
'"
The.idealized pressure-time blast load acting on the interior face 'of the side
wall and roof is shown on Figure 2- 201b. The same assumption is .made for ,the
2-38
TK 5-1300fNAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

side wall and roof as for the interior front wall. That is, the time at which
the shock front arrives at the front wall of the 'structure is taken as zero
(To - 0). The time TI represents the time it takes the shock front to travel
from the opening across the interior face of the front wall to the side wall
(or roof). The pressure build up is linear from time TI to a maximum pressure
Pmax at time T2' remains constant until time T3 and decays linearly to zero at
timeT4. This idealized curve applies to both the side walls and roof. The
structure configuration parameters as given in Figure 2-200 apply for side
wall loadings. However, to determine the roof loading, the structure must be
rotated 90 degrees so that the roof takes the position of a side wall. The
width and heigh~ of the structure must be interchanged. All other parameters
are not effected.
The maximum average pressure Pma acting on the interiorface of the side wall
(or roof) varies as a function o~ the incident pressure Ps o acting on the exterior face 'of'the front wall, the wavelengthLw corresponding to Ps o ' and the
geometry of the .'structure. Since a large number of plots would be required to
describe Pmax for the blast and geometric parameters' involved, an equation has
been developed'. ':The value of Pinax is given by:
Pmax -.K/(Lw /L)
For 6
W/H
2-15
3/2
K - { A + .[ B x (Lw /L) C ],} x 0 x E x Pso 1. 025
2-16
'.
where
A - [0.002 (W/H)1.4467]
0.0213
2-17
B - 2.2075 - [1.902 (W/H):0,085 j
2-18
1.231 + [0.0008 (W/H)2.678 j
2-19
o-
[2.573 (L/H)-0.444] - 0.3911
2-20
E - 0.4221 + [1.241 (Ao/Aw)0.367]
2-21
For W/H - 3/4

K - A x B x CE x FH x P 0.9718
so
2-22
where
A - [0.5422 (Lw/L) 1. 2944] - 0.001829'
2-23
B - [0:654 + 2.616 (Ao/Aw) - 4.928 (Ao/Aw)2]
2-24
[2.209 (L/H)-0.3451 - 0.739]

C-
0.829 + 0.104 (Lw/L)1.6
2-25
+ [0.00124 + 0.00414 (Lw/L)3.334] [L/H]D.
o-
2.579 - 0.0534 (Lw/L)3.891
2-26
2-39
E-
999 (Ao/Aw)9.964
2-27
F -
1.468 - 1.6627 (Ao/Aw)0.7801
2-28
+ [1.8692 _
1.173~ ;(Ao/Aw) -0. 2226] [L,./L]G
G -
0.2979 (Ao/Aw)-1.4872 ~ 0.8351
2-29
H-
(5.425 x 10- 4) + (1.001 x '10- 9) (L/H)9.965
2-30
For 3/2 > W/H > 3/4, graphical interpolation is required to determine Pmax'
Several values of Pmax are determined from Equation 2-15 for values of W/H
equal to 3/4, 3/2, and preferably two values greater than 3/2. A plot of Pmax
versus W/H is prepared and the value of Pmax is read for the required W/H.
The idealized times Tl and T2 are determined from Figure 2-213'. These times
are presented as a function of the 'incident pressure Ps o arriving at the exterior of the building and the width to,height ratio W/H of the front wall.
Since the distance that the shock front must travel across the front wall is
taken from the center of the opening, times Tl and T2 are not a function of
the area of the opening. This assumption will not result in significant
errors since the openings considered are comparatively small.
The idealized times T3 and T4 are determined from Figures 2-214 through 2-229.
Each figure is prepared for a given structure configuration defined by the
length to height ratio of the side w~ll L/H and the width to height ratio of
the front wall W/H. The times T3 and T4 are given on each figure as a func.tion of the incident pressure Pso and various values of the wave length to
side wall length ratio L,./L. As explained above, these times are not a function of the area of the opening. For ease of reference, these figures are
listed in table 2-4 for the various L/H and W/H ratios provided. .In most,
cases, interpolation will be required to obtain the correct values of T3 and
T4.for the given structure configuration.
2-15.4.5. Interior Back Vall
The blast pressures entering the interior of the building through the opening
in the front wall must travel the full length of the building before arriving
at the back wall. The incident pressure arriving at the back wall is essentially uniform over the wall. This pressure is immediately increased to the
normal reflected pressure when it strikes the back wall.
The idealized pressure-time blast load acting on the interior face of the back
wall is shown in Figure 2-201c. Again, the time at which the shock front'arrives at the front wall of the structure is taken as zero (To - 0). The time
Tl represents the time it takes the shock front to travel from the opening to,
the back wall. The pressure buildup is instantaneous to PRI B due to the normal reflection of the shock front and then decays to zero at time T2. This
loading is similar to the loading of an exterior front wall except that clearing is not possible.
The maximum average pressure PRI B acting on the back wall is obtained from
Figures 2-230 and 2-231. Each figure is prepared for a given value of L/H.
The ratio of the maximum average pressure on the bac:< wall to the incident
2-40
TM 5-'1300;NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

pressure PRIB/Pso is given as a function of Ps o for various-values of Ao/Aw'
Interpolation between figures may be necessary for a given structural configuration.
The idealized time II is determined from Figures 2-232 arid 2-233. Each figure
is prepared for a given value of the width to height ratio of the wall W/H.
The time II is given as a function of.the incident pressure Ps~ 'for various
values of the wall length to height ratio-L/H and the ratio'of the opening
area to the wall area Ao/Aw' The duration of the load I2~Il is determined
from Figure 2-234. The time is given'as a function of the incident press~re
Ps o for various values of Ao/Aw' Since-the'back wall'is located at the greatest distance from the front wall; the area of the opening has a significant
effect on these times and must be considered.
2-15.5. Pressure Buildup In Structures
2-15.5.1. General
The procedures in Section 2-15.4 are for determining the net effects of shock
loads entering openings'in structures from windows or doors'which are not designed to withstandthe applied blast loads. In certain cases, structures-may
have closures which are designed to resist the blast loading, but have very
small openings due to vents and ducts, which will not withstand the blast. In
this case, the small opening will not allow the shock front to develop inside
the structure.
However, the structure experiences an
in~rease
in its ambient
pressure (a "filling" pressure) in a time that is a function of the structure

volume, area of the openings, and applied exterior pressure and duration,
Since personnel exhibit a tolerance limit to such pressure increases, a method
of determining the average pressure inside the structure is needed. It should
be noted that the interior pressures immediately adjacent to the openings will
be higher than the average pressure.
2-15.5.2. Method of Calculation
The following procedure is applicable for structures with small area-volume
ratios and applied blast pressures less than 150 psi. The change in pressure
oP i inside the structure within a time interval ot is a function of the pressure difference at the openings, P-P i, and the area-volume ratio, AolVo:
2-31
where
CL
leakage pressure coefficient and a function of the

pressure difference P-P i and is obtained from Figure 2-235
applied exterior pressure
Pi
interior pressure
oP i
interior pressure increment

area of openings
Vo
structure volume
2-41
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR,88-22 ,
6t
- time increment
The interior pressure-time cu~e is calculated as follows:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Determtne the pressure-time history of the applied blast pressures

P acting on the surface surro~nding the opening as presented in
'Section 2-15.3.
Divide the duration to of the applied pressure into n equal inter, vals -(&t), each ,interval b,eingapproximately to/lO to to/20, and
determine the pressures, at the end of each interval.
,
Compute the pressure differential P-P i for each time interval, de- ..
, termine the corresponding. .va Lue !'~ CL ' from Figure:2-235', and cal- .
cuI ate 6P i from Equation 2-31 using the prope~ values of Ao/Vo and
6t. Add 6P i, to Pi for the interval being considered to obtain the
new value of Pi for the next interval.
Repeat for each interval using the proper values of P and Pi'
When P-P i becomes negative during the analysis, the value of CL
must also be taken as negative.
"
The above procedure is most easily accomplished byjrs Lng a tabular arrangement, r
for the required computations. An,Illustrative, example is presented in Appen,.
dix 2A.
.
'
"
"
2-42
'
C
'
t CeII
ontommen
only
NO.1
"*
Barrier
or
Cubicle
1\
{AbOVe Ground
Shelter
r---,
No. 4
5B.6
,~
BLAST
....
-I
LOADING
-
CATEGORY' -
~'
._ I I
LBelow Ground
Shelter
r.
---
'
CATEGORIES
PRESSURE
LOADS
PROTECTIVE
STRUCTURE
a. Unreflected
b. Ref lected
b. Reflected
Shelter
c. Internal Shock
d. Leakage .
Cubicle
5.Portially Confined
c. Internal Shock
e. Internal Gas
d. Leakage
Partial
Containment Cell
or
Suppressive
Shield
6. Fully Confined
c. Internal Shock
e. Internal Gas
Full
Containment
Cell
I. Free Air Burst

2. Air Burst
3. Surface Burst
4.
.e
No.3
lIE
.L_-T-_...J
Confined
Explosions
--Nas.--
Unconfined
Explosions
No. 2
*"
CHARGE
CONFINEMENT
PI:Irtial Containment
Cell,
Suppressive Shield, h
or
Containment Cell
Full y Vented
Figure 2-1 'Blast loading categoriea

2-43
P _,
so
,
POSITIVE SPECIFIC IMPULSE, is
LlJ
a::
:>
en
en
LlJ
a::
..
'
NEGATIVE SPECIFIC
IMPULSE, Ii
0..
_ _ _ _ _ ~ + to + t;
AMBIENT, pO"----_ ....._ _--I

tA
so
"-------
POSITIVE
PHASE
DURATION,
NEGATIVE PHASE
DURATION,
to
to
TIME AFTER EXPLOSION,
Figure 2-2
Free-field pressure-time variation
2-44
1000,
700mt
f+.f: +H44
tH
!500
-..
"'.
......
..Q
Q.
100
10
70
50
-:: ~ :.
I&J
a:
'f
30
20
IL.-
::l
~
U>-
01-
:I:fl)u
fI)
a:
0':
~
I&J
I'"
z E
a:::
C"
..
Q.u
10
1.0
o.J
.7
->
:I:
.5
z
>0
I&JILI
1Il.J
U
.3
-I4(a:
.2
IL.lL
lL
4(
4(
....
".:,t
-
p.-'-'-
I&J
lL
1.0
.10
zl&J
a:4(
o
o
>-z
1-4(
fI)
.7
.07 Z
.5
.05
.3
.03
.2
.02
0.1
1.0
I&J
10
20
30
50 70 100
300 500
.01
1000
PEAK INCIDENT PRESSURE, Pso(psi)
Figure 2-3
Peak incident pressure versus peak dynamic pressure density of air

behind the shock front and particle velocity
2-45
Figure 2-4
Free-air burst blast environment
2-46
-r
"
'REFLECTED,PRESSURE
.,
INCIDENT PRESSURE
TIME
NEGATIVE PHASE
DURATION,t(j
POSITIVE PHASE
_ DURATION, to
Figure -2-5
Pressure-time variation for a free-air burst
2-47
o
~
"-
~
101
0::
::;)
(/)
(/)
12
101
0::.
IL
I-
z:
101
Q
10
U
Z
"~
..,,
0::
IL
co
101
.f-
c.>
101
..J
"-
101
0::
..J
e(
"-
o
c
le(
o
10
,0::
100
PEAK INCIDENT PRESSURE Pao (psi

Figure 2-6
1000
10000
Peak incident pressure versus the ratio of normal reflected pressure/

incident pressure for a free air burst
....
_lit)
..J~
. :r:
.f
0.5
10
SCALlED DISTANCE
OOJocl
Z =1Il/W I1 3
Pso .
= PEAK POSITIVE INCIDENT PRESSURE, psi
Pr
= PEAK POSITIVE NORMAL REFLECTED PRESSURE, ps i
is /W1/3 = SCALED UNIT POSITIVE INCIDENT IMPULSE, ps,o'ms/lb 1/3
i r /w1/3 = SCALED UNIT POSITIVE ~IORMAL REFLECTED IMPULSE, .ps i -ms/lb l/3
fA /w1/3 = SCALED TIME OF ARRIVAL OF BLAST WAVE ,msl Ibl/ 3
t o / w l/ 3 = SCALED POSITIVE DURATION OF POSITIVE PHASE, ms/ l bl/ 3
U
= SHOCK FRONT VELOCITY, ft/ms
W
= CHARGE WEIGHT, Ibs
LwlwI/3 = SCALED WAVE LENGTH OF POSITIVE PHASE, ft I l b l/ 3
Figure 2-7
Positive phase shock wave parameters for a spherical TNT explosion

2-49
100
1,000
50
0.1
0.05
0.5
~)
O..il5
SCALED
10
DISTANCE
Z:: R / 'II 1/3
PliO
:: PEAK NEGATIVE I NCIDENT PRESSURE, psi
PI
::
PEAK
NEG~TIVE
0.01
50" 100
NORMAL REFLECTED PRESSURE, psi
'IS / WI/3-- SCALED UNIT NEGATIVE
INCIDHIT IMPULSE, psi- rns/lb
l/ 3
i,/W1/3 :: SCALED UNIT NEGATIVE NORMAL REFLECTE:D IMPULSE, psi-ms/lbI/3

t / Wl/ 3 :: SCALED DURATION OF NEGATIVE PHASIE, mn/ l b l/3
o
L w/ WI/3:: SCALED WAVE LENGTH OF NEGATIVE PHA$E, ttl Ib 1/3
Figure 2-8
Negative phase shock wave parameters for a spherical TNT explosion

2-50
.," : : ;1,1"
,
Hi ;i'l+
~!:g:l'
:.:
toT
L.
Itt
iCI>
.. _...
JlHlH
r,
;,'
-'1!!
-.,.
-::::;:~i;
:"i:EI,:.,
J:jil'
~1::i:'1
':"1:::::':!
.1
c
III
...
...
U
..J
tI: ! .::: ,
+:. ':*
10
20
so
40
!SO
ANGLE OF INCIDENCE.
Figure 2-9
60
70
1L!!
80
ee , DEGREES
Variation of reflected pressure as a function of angle of incidence
2-51
,
'f, !d'
oJ
,J:!!'1, .. H:.
j;
'-,
'"
';'!l ,l,'-i-): ,I f.
L; :..
~t,,
to!
i"1 .,. -! ;
.t'L!
co,
:, ',.
I, 1'"
i'; ,,;
-',,,
:: :
...
.,Q
:::::
e
,
.....8.
, ..
0'3: "
" s.L1;::
:",
:
,! .
Numbers adjacent to
,
r!'l':: ,noLi.
+I+g .Li'.ok.'d,
::
;'
..
are
-."'~
-" curves
of
. scaled
, ....,~
..
+~:~
.' ~
,_ :iA:+I' .:!H
... :
..
:-."
'-;,
; ..;
' ,
II),
-Tn
'" IlT
.-,.'"'
i I
,"
UJ: I~L"it"
::::
II: :
.,:
:- ; ;; 1': : .
'
::1
f"
"!" I::!'
-E,I
":. ,-,: ,.!
~J;'j
tl:,
t.
''''I
:,',..::. "ii ., :,
I . , ".
,.,"
!.L : 1 , ;
-,
j-!
_
'S
L:,-:.,
.,..
,
.jj}
7'2
9""":
10
.""""'-' ,
':1'f
r; :
_,":.1.,.;::::::::
..:.. :_;t.:.:.:~:
I[ 9" "
20
I: "
:.:::1';'
i: ,"
'I
"!oi
!+i :1.:
...
:,..,
,: , .
i: :N
:. :
,,~
..
30
li:+.t
I:H4 Hi
iH
~,!:::::
~',1'
40
60
70
80
ANGLE OF INCIDENCE, 0( DEGREES
Figure 2-10
Variation of scaled reflected impulse as a function of angle of'

incidence
2-52
ANGLE Of INCIDENCE, IX
INCIDENT WAVE
REFLECTED WAVE
PATH OF TRIPLE POINT
..,,
.r--
'"
""
MACH FRONT
SHELTER
r------,
Figure 2-11
~ II
Air burst blast environment
HT
...
"
W
0::
0::
::::>
en
en
w
::::>
en
~I Ps (MACH INCIDENT)
0::
0::
a-
,,
a0::
.,
,
'"
0::
v.:
Pr (INCIDENT)
Ps (INCIOENT)
., .
TIME
TIME
c
(a)
MACH FRONT
Figure 2-12
(b)
POINT ABOVE TRIPLE POINT
Pressure-time variation for air burst
e'
<
<
Jt=
-=
..
--
--
-+-
- - -
<+1-
- <
Scaled Charge Height.
;:
. .10~
,. <
"
"I~
8I
<-
--
<- -
. -
'",
'"'"
!
~
.......
...
i
...0
~
ii:i
z
Q
.......
.,cu
- _.
Il
"-
_.-"
: <
<_.
.,.. ".. - -
-,..
ill ~ I :fI 1't l l - (

- -t':( -- :i~~ ~ -::.l:t-:-_k~ , -.'- :jJ , "f~:'
__..
"
J < -I;i' '1

-1- .
l' - f!...
'1,
---j-
.]'
- -" -
<
3.5
---
:-
t -~
.L
.... -
..
--
--
"
-. .
o -
10
--
<-
--
-- <
.rr:
- -- I- - <<- <
. --
- -"
-
Scaled height of triple point
14
(ft./lb~lI)
.. _..
.'
--
6
7
--II
--
"r
12
- - - - -. '. - - . - -.
.-
- -
-- L
... -
o_ -_
- -- -
SCALED HORIZONTAL DISTANCE FROM CHARGE. Z.
Figure 2-13
4<
__:: __
-
,,-
- -
- -
- -I'" -: '
"
- :: : - o-:~:__
-
-._,.' :::. -: 0<
--
"."
0-."_--._.
._.
I=-:::,-~:-tt-r:~:~-: _00: 0
-- -
.-
- -
<
-:1=--:
_.__ ._ _ _ _ .. "..,.........L ..
17" 2.5
-
3)
. 2-
- -+ . - -~ - . - --
--
-- -
--
< <
_. - .-
<-
(ftllb /
,,1.5.
<--
_ ..
-"
-.
w~Y.
-+ +H-
"
--
:L -~
- --
.:
.:;.
-!= <:rT
1+
~-
-- -
<-
18
..
",
...
".
REFLECTED WAVE
...
..
'"
'"
"
ASSUMED PLANE
WAVE FRONT
r--~~
Figure 2-14
SHELTER
I
I
GROUND SURFACE
Surface burst blast environment
_.
1,000
to
.--,--'\
...~.
..-
:,.~
I~it.
..J -
I
I
SCAL(.D DI STAMeIIE
Pso
: PEAK POSITIVE INC:IDENT PRESSURE,1Psi
Pr
: PEAK POSITIVE NORMAVREFLECTEDPRESSURE, psi
i s / WI/3 : SCALED UNIT POSITIVE INCIDENIT IMPULSE ,. PSi-ms/lbI/ 3
i r /WI!3: SCALED UNIT POSITIVE NORMAL REFLECTE[) IMPULSE, psi -ms/lb l/3
t A / WI/3 = SCALED TIME OF ARRIVAL OF ~ILAST WAVE, ms/lbl/ 3
l/3
to /W1/ 3 = SCALED POSITIVE DURATION OIF'POSmVE PHASE, mS/lb
U
= SHOCK FRONT VELOCITY, tt /rnll
W
= CHARGE WEIGHT, Ibs
3
L w/W1/3 = SCALED WAVE LENGTH OF POSITIVE PHASE, ft/ 1b l/
Figure 2-15
Positive phase shock wave parameters for a hemispherical TNT

explosion on the surface at sea level
2-57
100
50
10
-)"'I~3'
'_11')
..I~
~I\
..:
CL
0~5
~~
II
IlL
0.05,
0.5
10
50
SCALED
PiO
Pi'
DISTANCE
IOq)
ZG~ReI W l / 3
: PEAK NEGATIVE INCIDENT PRESSURE, psi

: PEAK NEGA-TIVE NORMAL REF.LEeTED PRESSURE, psi
ii/W I/3 = SCALED UNIT NEGATIVE INCIDEINT IMPllLSe;.psi-ms/11b1/3

i r / WI/3 = SCALED UNIT NEGATIVE NORMAL. REfLECTIE:D IMPULSE. PSI-mS/lb
tij/Wl/3
L
Figure 2-16
w/WI!3=
3
'/
SCALED DURATION OF NEGATIVE PHASE, ms/lbl!3

SCALIED WAVE LENGTH OF
NEGJ~TIVE
PHASE. ft/lb l / J
Negative phase shock .wave pa r ame t e r s for a hemispherical TNT

e~losion on the surface at sea level
2-58
~J1
~.
e. CLOSED-TOP HOPPER
J.
o. ORTHORHOMBIC
CYLINDRICAL
o
f. PRESSED BILLETS
o
k. SPHERICAL
b. HEMISPHERICAL
L
g. EXTRUDED ROD
I. CARPET
IN-PROCESS HOPPER
. h. PROJECTILES
d. GRENADES IN-PROCESS
m. BAG
i. BEAKER
Figure 2-17
Explosive shapes
2-59
~
<,
...
E
,
;;
0.
.........
.
.~
0,
Q.
~
~
c,
...
~
0.
C E
-e
.. "..
.. ..
..
U
s:
.
,
0
'"
>
"-
'';
>
o,
~t-=i=+T~~l=alI!Fl=t+!==m
600
"-
'c
::>
..
"0
u
lJ)
4
3
oo[
1\
00 2'
10
600
500'
4001=
300
OO.PSO.--- :;
-
.....--w...
60
40
,---
_.:..... __"'..
1-
600
50
400 I -
,11n11=-1='-
6, I
I-
\l
':~ ifiS~/W~I'/~'~~I~_~~--~-~~
3
"I-j
--
I-- _
:.
--\
- I - -1"1-.1.
--
J ,
-.--~.......
7F=l-=f-H=1=
_: -t-t-t-' .-~~~~
_
:if+~'~I
2 3 4
6
10
20 3040 60
I L---::::i----
--1
-- -
- --
Sec ted Distonce ,Z. =Rr./W'''. tt./lb
0.
Composition A- 3
Rectongular Shape
Figure 2-18
.'!'
20~tt:I--J-J15
L I.
20 ,10
I I.t~_ .._.-
-.-
'-+++-++_-1-
-r- -1-
--- - - ++-l
=r - ::: =-- +-H
- _-
..
_"
. . . .~
- ----
3 4
i-_
- - -'--
20 3040 60
Secreo Distance,z. =RG/W''', ".lIb
b. Composition A- 5
Rectangular Shape
-1-1
"'
I_--l_~
is /WI/'
-- - 1-.
-- -- - - - - -
.'!'
--
,:=:!~,
-.
--'-
--
----
-~=..J=
1- - -
~-
1--- --
---
Ps o
==1= -++
+
1"1
-
,-
-"
2 3 4
6
10
20 3040 60
1I1
'Scaled Oi.tance .z,,~ R./WI/'. ".Ilb.
c, Campositiqn -A - 5
Cylindrical Shape
Peak'posItive incident pressure and scaled impulse for an explosion

-- ---
--:=r_ .
--
f--- --- ..
-~~
.
--
10
3lL-
-H-
I-
6L.
~- -!=h~ =~
=~t~t
~.-- -- _J_ ~ '----5
\.
is /W'/
--
--
4 I
30I l -
I I l\..
20
Psa
")
/00
'-=
--
V1
c-;
1---
'
200 L -
\
--.-.-.-._--J-..:.Ll.
'
+-
i-
300
'--I-: I--H---
_.,.,. .-_1_'
or
~
<,
'"
E
.'"-.. -
600
~
400)
"1
400
3
3,00
2'00
.'"
..'" ..'"
..
- ..,.
.. =.
.. ..
'",
...'"
.. .
..,
..
~
.;,
60
a.
r'i
40
20
-o
u
CO
>
>
a.
~
a. a.
"
iSI W II>
10
t-..
.......
,\l'
I-
'"
"'\
?O
~~I~M~~~ii~~~
:XlI
)()~
200
II
is IWV't'. - ..
I'
---
....
--!-l-
~.
20
.N1I
-t-f-l..j.....!.JJ
1"
~~f='
400
~?'rlt+.+-+-lYIJ
's IW '/ 3 "-
---,
600
s )0
JO
OO.IIPSO
sot-
~.
3~"
'\
1-
i--
PSO
4--
::>
0
"-
10
CO
.'\
40
v
20
1---
60
c.
E
'
00
co.
00
SO
<>
a.
'0:~;~crttH~~~=!lEB~
oo_.~
600
;;
0,
:.(
r==:F
~. t ::I:~.
4
3
-_. .-t..,~.I.-.~_L
Lt.L
....
~-:-_r - 1-.. l' '"
: I-
.q--+--!.
'-j\t-1....L I
::-j-+ lei :. :::.-=.1.-:._

.-J
I
r-'
I-.~
~,1il\-+-+....L! I
1.
\,,+~-'
'=J
I I
~r=$tt _"':.i:-,,:::
=-~ f\ +- :
=:1-..,..4-1:':
._u . ..
.L
.1-.- 1-
;-1
I
2 3 4
6
10
20 3040 60
Sea led Distance. Z.' R,;/W VS, tI./lb.Ys
I
2 3 4
6
10
20 3040 60
Scaled Distance ,le 'R./W V', fl./lb .II 1
I
2 3 4
6
10
20 3040 60
Scaled Distance ,z", RoIw V1, tt'/lb.I/S
o. Composition B
Hemispherical
b. Composition B
Cost Spherical
c. Composition B
Cylindrico I
Figure 2-19
Peak positive incident pressure and scaled impulse for an explosion

~~
!)OO
400
300
.400
300
V)
400
3 JO-
200
200
"J
200
;; ;;
...-. .
0,
...
:!
100
e
ll..
..
-. '"e
-::
s: ..
.,.
C
.e .,.
:JO
60
60
50
40
..,.
20
20
I
Pso
20
I'
I(
40
~,
l-
100
'D
:!?
600
!)OIII
\ . Pso
oo-
'"
TO
Pso
"
.-
~~
!)O 0
"
i'
is/WI/'
I"
/W'/ '"
'",
'"
'"
...
.....
0
.-
0
ll..
ro...
i s / W' /3
Ps o
"0
u
en
-....
I
1-=
I
2 3 4
6
10
20 3040' 60
Scoied Distonce ,ZG;Rs/W VS, flJlbsY'
c. CompositionC' 4
Orthorhombic
Figure 2-20
L-
::>
'D
-+-
,-
I - - .. -
"
"
I
-- --i
I
2 3 4
6
10
20 '3040 60
Scoled Di'tonce.i. =R.,tW V', "Jib .'"
I
2 3 4
6
10
20 3040 60
Scoled Dislonce ,701 = R,.IW V1,_It/lbI V I
b. Composition C 4
Orthorhombic
c.
Guanidin~ Nitrate
Orthorhombic
P~~k positive incident pressure and scaled impulse for an explosion

..
. ..-.............
...". .
.
"
.....
.. 'u.:..
.. ..
.. .
~
<,
0.
,--
600
>3
+-
l!
e,
0.
E- -e
600
5 00
600
:E'=1-=lt.-t=.~b-t.t.m=+=t1f1
4( X l "
3 Xl
200
Xl
2'
--
oo i--
:>0
50
'",
'"
'"
>
.0<
n.
c,
::>
..
"a
V>
.1-
40
40
w-
V'
lEEfff=t=R+m==+=+n:TIJ
3(Xl
f---
200
20
10
--
--
''I.
4
3'
f---
'-
"
Pso
--iH+-I-iLL -
is/W'I'
~~+_-+-l. I
_"it
3il=ttI-+J-UJ
. --+-J-W 1
-J--. Ht
t.;
.. --
20 3040 60
V1
Seo led Distonee.,Z" :R,/W , t!.Ilbs.'!'
I
3 4
6 ' 10
a. Cyclotal 70/30
Orthorhomic
1=]. r- ::t
Figure 2-21
I
2 3 4
6
10
20 3040 60
VI
, Seoled Distonee ,Z. ;R./v.;II', 't.llbs
b. Cyclotal 70/30
Hoppert
~Ef=E~=tR=~=i'=i=8~Etj
o
6
,""
I-
i.
~
I
7
/W ' / 3
'"
..l1-~.'- - - -
.I(
4 )
30
:g[:::
'l
~.;::::
;;;:
10
,/ 3
"
..
p. o
f
100
I
.-
20
is /W
so
60
--
,,-
>
0
Q.
'
50
400
.pso
:! ..
4, Xl
0.
0,
I'"
i--. . - -
,_1- -
-t--j-I+'t.-l--l
1~
c=...,--F - '=i:'-11~~~~~~~~~
.I_L."
I
2 3 4
6
'n
20 3040 60
Seoled Distonee ,Z. :RoIwll5, ft,/lb. V I
c. 64 M42 Grenadea
Tray of 64
Peak positive incident pressure and scaled impulse for,an explosion

..,
~
<,
...... .
600
500
400
300
5
400
3, )
ZOO)
co
~:::-
\:
ZOO
;;
300
Pso
ZOO
"
~
~
Pso
Pso:
DO
100
00
60
60
60
40
40
__ I
.-
40 L
...
3<-
Q.
20
'",
'"
~
~
u
~ E
0
Q.
>
Q.
Q.
:>
..
is /Wl/!,
<Il
I'
I'
<
<
..,
I'\.
"'1\
"
3 4
4
3
I'..
L.
I f--.
ZO 3040 60
'\
10
"
, L-..
"
/Wll'~
i.
IC
is/Wit! '\
"0
ZO
20
"-
"0
....'" ..
..'"
C
.. ..'"
C
.. ..
.. ..
. ..
Q.
.L
600
50 )
400)
3 4
10
ZO 3040 60
3 4
10
ZO 3040 60
sc o rec Distone. ,Zo=R otW'13, ".IlbsY'
Sec led Distone~ ,Z.=Ro/WI!!, ".IlbsY'
Seo I.d Distane. ,Zo= R./W V!
c, HMX
Orthorhombic
b. HMX
Cylindrical
c. M483 155mm ICM Projectile

Single Round
Figure 2-22 -Peak positive incident pressure and scaled impulse for an explosion
on th~ surface at sea level
ft.llb.Y
..,.
.....
E
,
-.
-......
- ....
-~
600
5 '')
e
600
)()
300
500
400
300
5010
400
300
2'00
200
200
)Q
400
Ps~
D.
0
on
0 ....
00 ~
-,
100
V)
100
r-r-'
Cl. ~
:! .~
"
60
60
40
40
:'0(
"E
.'
20'
20
e,
C
:!!
.
't-. ..
s: c'
u
> uE"
'",
e'"
>
...
Cl.
O
a,
U
II)
'10
10
:v
20
I ...
I'
10
f-
is iwl/ ""4
'
is
4
3
/wl/
1'\
3
l'\
10
I
7
I
2 3 4
6
10
20 30'10 60
V1
Scaled Distance, Z.'R,/W , ft./lb.Y'
f-- ..
f- -
I
2 3 4
6
10
20 30'10 60
V1
Scaled Di.tonce ,Zo'R,/W , It./lb
.'!'
Lead Azid,e (dextrinated)
Figure 2-23
b. Lead Styphnate
1"--'
I
2 3 4
6
10
20 3040 60
Scaled Distance ,z,'RI/W 'Il , fl.llb . 11I
-'1-
Q.
1'\
=1
E::
\-f--
<
'q '1
1=
"-
'\
~.
:>
"
Pso
is /wI/3 .....
'-"
Pso
,r
6
c. Lead Styphnate

600
s ;~[
~oo
400
400
400
300
300
300
':>
"E
..- .. .
0
200
200
;;
0.
,,-~
0,
.,
:'\
Ps a
0.
00
600
200
Pso
Pta
100
00
60
60
60
40
40
..
40
IL
...'" " ..
..
'"
..,.
~
O'
.,
IL
C
u
..
S-
I'>
0
'"
'"
c,
20
I'
>
0.
"
IL
...
..
IL
::>
'0
0.
'"
"
.
~
--'
3 4
10
20 3040 60
1-7
1\
"
;\!
..
'I.'
\lo..
1\
il/W'IS
I'
is /W'IS
>
-" s:..
20
II
is /w,!,""l.
O'
'0
20
"1
~t. .
1-=
23 4
10
"
w
20 3040 60
Scaled Oiltonce, Z.:R./W V1 fl./lbs. VI
Scaled Diltonce ,Z. :R./W V1 tt'/lbl. V1
o. LX-14
b. LX-14
I
7
Z3 4
Sco led Diltonce
10
,Z.: Ro/W V1, it./lbiY'
;.
Orthorhombic
Figure 2-24
Pressed billet.s .
C.
LX-14
Orthorhombic
Peak positive incident pressure and scaled impulse for an explosi~n
t:.
20 3040 60
..
,
E
,
600
5, )
400
300
600
5 )
400
300
1'\
........
:!~
:0
60
50
60 L
40
40
..
.-
0,
...-,
.... ..
..
.... s
" ....
,. u
~
:;
~
~
...,
600
5 )
400)
300)
200
2')Q
;;
....
....
" Ps a
00
20
..
:>
!!!
0
u
'"
'\
4
:3 '
Psa
1.\
I
2:3 4
6
10
20 3040 60
Scaled, Distance ,Z,'R./W VI , flJlbs,VI
o. Octal 75/25
Orthorhombic
Figure 2-25
I
2 3 4
6
10
20 3040 60
Scaled Distance ,Z'l./W VI , flJlb .""
Ie
7
b. Octal 75125
Hopper
-'
1--
I
7
is/Will
t;
\.
It
I'
......
20
,is/Will
is/Will "l
,.
20
"
...
II.P s a
00
'"
...~
- s:..,.
... .......
0
Ps a
)Q
L:
200
1
2:3 4
6
10
20 3040 60
Scaled Distan~e ,Z.=R.tW VI , ItJlbe. VI
,~c.
M7181741 RAAM
Pallet of eight round.

'400
2100
2'00
200 -
~~
a. ~
.......
:! ..
... ...
-. -..
,-
f ..
a. :;
c: E
00
c: ..
'0
Po';
60
40
40
..,
20
..,.
t..~
JI/.
..
'"
'"
.. a.
_
a.
:5
'0
se
u
l/l
1
7
,I'
3 4
10
1\
10
-,
20 3040 60
Q.
Nitrocellulose
Cylindrical
Figure 2-26
3 4
10'
i.
/W " "
~
4
3
,,,
-,
::J
Scaled Oiltance ,Z..=Re/W v a , f1./lb . VI
'/ S
r-,
"
2o
T1
,f'
40
30 -
is /wl/'",
10
11
lOL100
20
'\
is/WI-l' "I
60
.~
'';:: .!
'Ii ..
Pso
00
60
:'!
u -c:
...
300
400)
3 00
...........
600
500'r
3,00
..,
600
50 )
......
"
600
50)0 .
400
co
,"-
::J
20 3040 60
.. I
3 4
10
20 3040 60
Scaled Oillonco ,Zs=Re/W VI , f1./lbl.1/1
Scolod Oillonco,z. ;RQ/W,':I, 'll'-/lbl.'!1
b. Nitrocellulose
Dryer bed
c. Nitrocellulose
Orthorhombic
Peak positive incident-pressu~~ and

on the sur~ace at sea level
sca~ed
impulse for.an explosion.

..
.
600
'.>
:t
50 )
400
300
200
<,
;;
.-...
'".
'"
0,
0..
:t
.:'..
~
." ."
~
I:
-"
0..
c
-e
u
'",
."
'"
"> .=u
e" ">
~.
"
0..
0..
V>
~SO
,
,
,I
2')
II ,
d
k?i2 3
i
-,
.10
,~-+-t+:l-l-.Ll
Ps a
-+
-Tt-
1-+-+';-u-
ITR'~1-
\1-
f'\
is/W I />
' '
'
1r:=L
...J
.,
........ ,
1
,v J
10
,I
I I
. _ I ',.'.'.
..L
i
20 3040 60
--
i - r-t- -
3 4
..
I'..
.... iI ,~ ..t~~_'--L
II
,T
'N \
1./w tl
I
I
:\r-l-.
...
L .L
'
-'I
'
1I
'
H- 1
, I' ,
I
3' 4
I!
""H-I
-ll"-
JJ
1': .:==t:::+
' 1- H
I
'
,---r'~
.. ---'
"
I
.'
=1=
IP=:-J'
I,
r-Lr, -j-Nlo.'1,I',-I-+--:'.J
1I
'
I
r-r-r-
t-
_l:::J=\::r-' ~
p. a
I::::j
f---i
Psa~
20 3040 60
I"'\'-+-+-
j---j
200
I'
' _I
100
~,
'-,
600
50 )
400
300
"1
J'
r-,
it i
)r ,
, ,
-+-
f-
) I
/W,/.
j.
j~;.
60
l
4
4)
3J
f---J..
)
'00
6)
;;)
""
0
u
"1
100
50
400
300
200
e_
\-I-
-c "".
):R==P=l=U]JTT,,--rr-r~
600
r-
c,
10
20 3040 60
Sea led Di',!anee .Z,:Ro;!WI/'. 1t.llbsY
Scaled Di.tanee. z,:R,/y,iI/', rt.llb'Y'
Sea led, Distance, ZG: R~/W 1/', n/lb.Y'
a. Nitroglycerine
Cylindr,ical
b. PBXC 203
Cylindrical
c. PBXC-203
Figure 2-27
Extruded rod
Peak positive incident pressure and scaled imputse for an explosion

on t~c surface at sea level
.,. '0o
,.
...
....;,,.
...." .. :?
...
600
5
':>
+-
-I-
400
3 00
2'00
<>
I I\. Pso
<>
0,
00
oo-
60
f- l-f-
-. ..
:!!
u
>
C
:!!
u
..,,
.. =
c. ..
'"0 , e,
0
>
e,
:>
.....
20
is/W'/'
I'
1\
4
3
-t-
'"
ILj
.........
l-
..
I
is/Wl/
i
If=' R,7,
. 'i
,..
3 4 ' 6
RDX Slurry
Cylindrical
10
20 3040 60
.\
b. .RDX 98/2
Orthorhombic
..
I'
I::J
,
2 3""6
10' 20 3040 60
Scoled Di'lon~e, z.,=R,v'w'l5, It./lb.YS
c.' RDX 98/2.

Cylindric:al
Peak ,positive incident pressure and scaled impulse for an,explosion

on the surface at sea'level
r-..:-',1 I'.
...,~:
Figure 2-28
~--+1i++-J
..UJII-1+-" ~U I
i
Sc c ledDrstcnc e ,Zs=Rs/Wl/ s, tl.~lb.ys
,
'0.
3. ~
"3
-r-+-H--LJ I
~
6-
.....
is/W I / ' 'J
'0
is /w'/3 "\
2,
'
30)l.-.
20
I
2 3 4
6
'10
20 3040,60
Scoled Distonce 'Zs=RoIwllS, It./lb.Ys
Pso;Ti-t+
6 I
I
4
1\
4 J Sl
F-!~'Bffifln-'$~E,gt~~
200
"
....
i- -
Pso
I-
'6;
600
50 )
400 300
100
10)
,6
'
20)
."
s0
40,
30
: I--'H
60
-.. ."
1\
.--,
1
100)
+-
I
I
200
;;
600,500
400
300
':>
~
<,
~
;; ;;
. '"
Q.
.-. ,
~
0,
0..
~
~
0..
>
.;;
0
0..
0
....
0.
u
~
'"
."
.!O
0
~
0..
200
~_I
1\' ,
I
'
o~:-t.,-~
-1
-+--+:
II
1,
!~
1.1
. t
is /W I
:-+=-
.
>
0..
'0
::J
-e
s0
u
lit
I
I -J-- I
J.......
~!
.1
Sea
1-:-'
-t-:::::::F :
I.__
""!
7[
.
V>
....J .
",
2.'3 4
6
eo
\:
,Pso
10
20 3040 60
Dis10nce ,Zo:R./WI/!. f,.t./lbl.l/!
.-
..
I
....... ' I
I
Ps o
..1,
I
I 1
,I "'\
-I
I
I
.,
I ! !--i
+1+'e--'
~fr-::-~. Il.
+f'
I
I'
.J.
"'i
,I
'j
I,
.+=~.
n'"I
, I
'
.....
I
--+-t-' ,
i-
I ! II
I I
I '
:.=...::.:.:.--~----t--~
.7 -------'- 2:,:t
,j-4::r
_~ .
2
3 4
-t;-----:--_t_
.
.-
10. 20 3040
60
Scaled Distance ,Zo&RG /W / ! , ff./lbl.1/3
,"
"
a. TNT
Cylindrical
Figure 2-29
=i
"-
3
2
=t:-.
"
~_j_j s IWI!'
1 I
b. TNT
Orthorhombic
I rI
I liT I II
fL-
'=f'
400
rt" ,
6OOF=J=i+Jr=R=l+:rnr=+=:Q+:+=O
n,
,I
Il
500
I It\.
300 i--+-++---\--)
r-RIt'
40 ~
I
30
L ''
20 f--!
I---!
-r-
10
. Ii
I._;,~I
,-1.
t3""l .. rtli--...L- 1
-=r:
60
"
'u
~
e- I-,--",~,- ;
100
o
3
o
~-
,.J
o l i P " ,........iso I
10 f---=-"'
6
500
400
300
2ooL
i
c.L,
4O
~
-e
400
300 ~ . I
)OLcr:=IffEFffftF+PIIIJ
1-1-+
T
600
50
c. TNT
Hopper

I I
..
':>
~
<,
..
e
,
;C;~-f~~-=IE:HtF=t=t::pl=:m
l
'
500
400
300
600
5 10
400
300
200
200
200
;;
e,
0-"
...
:
.
.
oo-
a..
.!!
.,
l!
..
a.. :;
C e
.
. ..
.i-. .
U C
!O
:!?
...
..
f\
I'
20
.....
is /W,/. ~
E~ /W ll ....
,
r:
4
3
."
"
::>
'"
40
.,
20
.. a..
a..
_0
60
Ps a
40
Ps a
'\
s0
60
20
!O
I-
DO
100
""
-e
.......
600
5
400
300 L-
.'
I'.
.~
7[
I
2 3 4
6 . 10
20 3040 60
Scaled Diltanee .z.a~/wVI. fl.llbl.'/'
a. Tetracene
Figure 2-30
I
-r
1=
I-
I
2 3 4
6
10
20 3040 60
I
Sea led Diltaneo .le aRo/WV1 fl.llbs.l/
..
I
2 3 4
6
10
20 3040 60
Scaled Diltanee .ZoaR./w V1 n/lbs. V1
b. Nitrolluonidine
Cylindrical

.
,"..
e
..
'".
'
Q.
~~
e, J:
"
.e.. .-....
...e ..
. e
..." ..,... -.
e
~
600
50 )
400)
3 )
200)
7:
-e
....
....
'"
.E
._
>
:t:
00
.-
40
>r
is/W!l' '\
10
Pso
1'1.
..,
s0
o
...
1'0..\
~~__lllt=m
;=
l~ll'Ii/Eifii
r--e:
6"
......
:>
400
300
..,
+++'
..
Ill\,
-,
",."
I I
.j...j-
j-.i-j-.
1=+ 1 111
I~
100
00.=
I
7
I I
I
2 3 4 6
10
20 3040 60
ll.,
Scaled Distonce ,ZG=R,,/W
ft.llbsY
.7 1
2 3 4 6
10
20 3040 60
ll
Scaled Oiltance ,Z.=FlG/W a, ft./lb. v a
c. a.nite Propellant
b. a.nite Propellant
Orthorhombic
Orthorhombic
Figure 2-31
30
3
..1\
20
2
10
16i4 L.
3
..
is/W I /
l'
Psa
+.
~.
.. I"
l'
.7
..
..
..
..
j-
f-'
-+.1-
_c.,
r'\
1=
..
~~
""''''.-
"
60
Scaled Distance ,Z.=Fl./W Il., tt.llb. V,
c. alack Powder

..... i
v .
440
1\,/
(/j
~-" '
650
'\
..+1-
..
200
I I II I I I
2Ri~t1+1
<Ps'o
20
-'t
"c
""o .-..
I I H-I 11I111
600,50)0
50
.~
..
";
Q.
~-
.l-
600
".
<~
SOC ,
'"
'""-
..
......
200
"
'".
...... ..
..
c:.. "
;:;
..s ".=..
60
!ii
...,
N
",.
:'2
c
'ii
Ii:
..
>
.. .
...e
+-+~4-+'~~-+~-+~'
c, o,
f-
I I +-+-+-M+++++--
':~3t---++--l-.i., lrTN~-~-.l
40
....
30
., I
2 3 4 6
10
20 3040 60
,
I
II!
Sea led Dlltonce ,ZG,R G W , t t. I lb . I/!
a. as-NACO Propellant
Cylindrical
Figure 2-32
....
I
+.-!' ..
'-~+++--.-+--+-+'+'~
.~.
-tt- ,..
-+~L' I.'.,
.,
-l"Fl+'~'j::HJ:1 ~ ..
20
:
.. l--'
.!L,~I.. '" .
J
P
'T
Ps o
... q.:
6 .
4I
I
so
10
Ie
is
lw l/ !
"
.,.._+--
,~L
.l----
.~.L'
r\'
"
(f)
400
300
...
:::>
-e
!!,
600
500
... ,.
.--\!
60
ii\ Pso
1TI\fT
-e
!
M
e,
100
".
<,
. ,J....
.. .1..4...--
) :
0.
0,
"..
.... '1..
,,+; 1 ,
400
300 1....
'J;
o,
TT""T'~"
..
- .
..
....
~
- -_ ..... --::
o
Scaled Dretcnc e ,Zo'R,;/WI!!. l!./lb. V S
b. as-NACO Propellant
Orthorhombic
c. as - NACO Propellant
Hoppers

_"'
.,
'"""
..
<,
;;
.,
0.
. .,
c,
~~
a. 'II:
"
..
:! ,~
.,.
" '"
a.
., ,c.
~
u
'"
'"
'C
s., -e
'u
~ E.,
d:'" ~
. ".
...e
Q.
a.
'c
:::J
-e
!!
o
"
(/)
600
)0 T --"Y""
50 ,......i.. I I L,.+..l..
400
" ..L
300
1-..1
I
200
I~"
,~'''I
~
.....
'50
._._~ _""'~.'.~'~~'~""'~~"'""~_~''''~''''"'-"''''~''.'w'~,"'~,.'
.,."'.,...,_,,L~,,i.~:;:~<:,;<:':,;,::d:V:>::,'~,;;.>:,,;;#"~~~'--,
I~"-
' ,"'T
'JJl
0-. __
...
~'''I~
..
....~=:
. .'
-~
.
...
200
"'f
--+
..
....
f.-..
,-
~ ,"'_~' .L. .
.!!! ,1=
-i-.
~O~. ,,;.+.:1. I TT11+~"'..1

1"<' I....
.... , ..
"i(~rti.. ,.++j~TI
..:'l!,J'"
..
6"
..
4 c...
.. I
3
...
..
..
~. ...~=f
.. :.:~trl:H
II'I
...."T--t.,..+~~J
,~ J
..4
,,-
.+,--1
71--'"
60
Seo led Dis/once ,ZG =R~/Wl/a, 1I./lbl.l/!
a. DIGL- RP I5420 Propel lent

Orthorhombic
Figure 2-33
_,. ,-
20
! 1\ "
"
)'t--"-::~t1~t:k~'Ps"~
F
:.:::
I'
10
Iis/W
<I
..
".
'\
.,.,
. ..
L ..
4
3
"._~:
"-
+.. I'
i.. ,
i,
.7,
I:::: I::
3 4
I;
'\
'~'4;
b. DIGL - RP 15421 Propel lent
Cylindricol
.."
.J+.
_......
-+-
b~""'"
. ..Ll.L ..,
'
q:
L-
I--.l
.._,i--t .++-_U
.1
!
--1'
--
is /wl/""I
"
-1.,:=
._ L'-"'r-f.+ .\1:r
""
"t-.
10
203<
o
Scaled DIStonce ,ZG=RG/WI/!, It/ib,va
"
---,
...t..
4 -"",
L...
3
"""
...
..
..
," Pso
I"
-~"
(3 "\
. ..
30
..
it.
100
),
40
30
tfl='-lttl.i8
'-1'
...+ ..If" \"
6 )L..
_ ..
"i'+++'.1
20<J
....
.._:'\,.
I'.~.-+-'"
300
..
.""
. +' ...
..
.
..~
t ..
.+.
60
'5 /W'";3....
/0 _
11+l=-I::rJiTft1r::=r:::r1 r-r-,...,
;F==f
4C
.+
I\. Pso
'''M~'
600
50
100
30
610..
... _._-
I"
- _ ..
100
600
500
400
300
__,.'.~,<~.,'~ _",..,',.~ ., . M ',_A,',~
,_. _
11 .. !..1.
7l=t:1-'i
1,
..,.
F :f=
""
'r-'0
"...,j
I- ..
. r"
Pso
I
"" +-
.....
...,_
"
II
. _'4 -J
60
Scaled Oi.lance ,ZG.R./W11O, ft./lb. tI!
c. DIGL"" RP I5422 Propellant

Orthorhombic

_.~
600
500
'"
':>
'.."s
,
<,
. "
..;;
......, ...
..
;;
"T" ,
,,,
t"
t'"
"
.---
400
300
"
"
200
"
;;
'"
~~"
"
-~~.
..
000
500
40-1
300
i.
.'
<,
<l
c,
C e
'0
..,
...,
0-
s"
&0
,
-.-
~l ...
~'
10
".. '"
a .'
(),
'iii
"'
:>
..
"
.".
'"
'eft
'0
w
u:'
..., j;.,
f,
"r\"
~
'
" t'
",..
..,
~ ,_,
,.l-...,
t,:!"':
11 pt!"
a. MI Propellont
(Single perforoted)
Figure 2-34
..,
+,
j I ..,
Ps o
,.
3~"+
i)
. , . I,
sc
'"
,'."."
I ...
"
..
.:.::
.,
'-
t ,.
I'.
1\ "-
o. MI Propellant
(Multi .. perforated)
"\'
r:t
I,.. f
20 I .. , I'i~
""
"
'
.... I"
.... j ..
\'
Ps o
is/Wi!' "
6' ..
t-,
.
41.... / ...
"'"
..
:$
I, .
ii
"
I\:
~.
......
10
20 1040 E l
l)
Sled Iue tcuc e ,ZG:R&!Wllj fL/Un,
i . '
I..
.,'.
10
\'" I
I I
I
.. ..
..,
'
..
I..
"
I..
3 4
,...
~()
f" ..
'""'
" I
I,
...
60
1\."
I
I
Ii..
..
'"
..
..
S0 F'i"'"'''
2
4
10
20 :3040
led O"I""c. ,ZG'RG/W'IJ,
......
4f+
40 , ...
"
.;,;~~)~
IS
10
I.. "
'.-.
is /Wl/'
""
"
' f.,.
'n""r~"
ct
! ..
'1
"'t" t;
1-"
I ..
~'--r""
..
200
hi
20 I"!
...
..
'
~.,.
_.
40
" ",
...
, C'
'w~
100
""
..
". '....
60
4('A)
..
I, I , I,
,.
60()
500 I ....
.....
"<"
20 ~'"
100
"
~I.t
:::
"
s..
. 1-'"
so
" P
40
'''I''
. I"
'
"
J;. 'Z;
~:
"
e,
.. '"
...
,.+.
'"'"
.,
., . .
't
"
"
"
200
e,
100
'" -,
..
..
Sc c l ed Dli}fCinc<t
..
~zG;'RG/wVl\
M26 EI Propellant
(Multi .. perforated)
Blender barrel

~I
" :'-
......
60
1, ibl,l/J
._._.~~
_____ .
'600 f
400
300
60;)
M
''::;:
'I:
",M
E
::,'.',
200 "
",
If'
,.,
M
e,
.,
~
-c
u
c;
"
~
..,,
........
>
'"
40 ....... .. ,
20
e.
"" a
c:
;:;)
til
....
li
.....
c'
.... .......
41 .... I
31
,.
..
.i.... i
--',
F
, ....i,
I
40
.:xJt
20
c~::::
"::1':
..
r:':
r:
i ..
I::: .:
l'o..
I.
i\. 1'0
,1\
I
...C..+
,.
',
e. M26 E I Propellant
( Multi, perfora ted)
Orthorhombic dryer bed
Figure 2-35
t ..
r1
Is/w,h
10
"
. ~. ...
,
I:., ..
, ..
.. ,
2 3 4
s 10 2fJ3040 60
Sec led Dtstonc e ,Z R,; / W'/ 3, II, Ib"/>
60
I ...
I::::ii..
.....
.....
2
I
...
L\j'.J
I..
I: I.. ,
.,
,.
}.
,,"
-.
-._~
L~"
...
..
,...... ,......
~.
3
f I
s/W '/
.. ...
:::..
'c
"u0
r:
' i I ""1
:.
I, ....
";:;"
"
,~
~~
3(
....
,.,.
I,
....
1\ Ps o
!~..
,
-
~_
c
'"
'---,
60
l'
IOC ~'~'.'~.' I ..
....
... ~ ..
fC
......
.'. , ,...
~-~,
.. ,
~~"_,~~,~.~V'>_~..... '. ~.~'_..... ..,;~~.. ~,.. ,.,,~,~~"""~;;.r~<'X~'Q;;;<:.);.':.':'4:;;:

,,;s,,;;:0,';;X;;;;;:;" ~" " " ' "
Scciec Dlti100te ;Z,,=RGlW V $ ,
246
HH1,il:S
b. M26 E I Propellont
( Multi - perforated)
Orthorhombic drop buggy
j
;.,)C\JHH
c. M26 EI Propellant
(Multi - perforated)
Cylindricol

~hp Atlrface at sea level
nn
204000
II"' 1/:$
I""'"
D
I ' Z GO:: R8i1,,,,,,l!S
J1Sunv%")
n
jtt++~
.+ ++ttttt++ +-++
::,
'.." 2Oij,tH++ H4n.I ::::t .t:

.
"-
!l00~.+
"j'
u c,
.
0,
..
~
?/.:
... ....
..
;;,
I00
f:':'!:!' 1i:.\r..~~1'
60 ..
t'
l!
a
..
....
co
>
Ij
l-
0.
..e
>
n,
61..
, ....
.tf~'~.
..... _.
..
I"
t-:
"'""\
It
is /W'/3
-r-t-'...
I,
f.
...
...
..
...
l-
I'"
--.""
41 I
..
t-
.'\1\
..... ~ ..
21""
-o
I I I
!!!
o
u
co
I .....
I-
X.,.,L.,,,.., ,,L;,-L.. ,,
.... ...
I _..
, .. _~'*_'
*.
..,.l__.J.-:.
2. !l 4
6
10
20 !lO40 60
Scu Ied DlStone. ,ZG'RG!WI/ 3 It./lb,V3
u. M30 AI Propellant
(Single perforoted)
Cylindrical
Figure 2-36
[-:
'50l'li! !jj\ttHIt
. I t I r-....
j
..
I~
"I--.
4(X)
300
.....
.,. ..
I'
1'.
f'\t.. ,...
II
3,
I"
21
, ..
",,"
:::r.:
:::
._ ....
60
,-,"-
40 ....
I'
,ZG'RG/WI/$, ft.llb,.'/3
.---
1--
_._-
I .
.~
1-
I
f
...... I
..
I
!
1\
,
. ..
...
,.
I"
. ..
, ..
....
.....
..: .. . .
"'\ r-... ..
.... ..
,+
....
.........
.+
..
...
.... I-
2 ..... ...
III
6()
f .
Pso
.....
....
1::+
b. M30AI Propellont
(Multi perforated)
Cylindricol
10
4 ..
3
["
'.
"--"
;~ /'w i73'\;,
I
1 . : ' 1 : I+t'::.'~:j
jl:"+::l:~!'i[ut: ..::].'1.:. ;.. -t~.:
.7;:
Sea led
......
6.. ....
.y
...
.... I...
\.
I
.) " , t
. .. "
it
w~_
100 .......
zo .....
is /w
1 "" t ..
L'TT
T:::F:f"j.il.I~.: J 11F[f':1
1.. I:: I_
f ' '..
. ..
200
,73\1
10j..
1 .
1::::.
..-r--'''
..,.~."
I .. I"
I .. ,.
1_' 1 " 1 ' 1 '
"',"
1:::1"j.+.. j:.:j:
,7L~."._ .. _._*.-
.:
\1'
.~
I..
..
1\' .. " 1
1\ Pso
!)
'I
::J
JI
601!
401
t
't ..
I ..
lOOt::::
t:::
\-....
I'
I..
2et
I I I '\.t
.~
zoot-
. r'"
I I'\.
'0
.. ..
".. "
0
.I
"E'"
-.
.. '"
'"ue
..
40..--t-
:it r H~' ' ' + ''I.' ' .' I'' j~,.-. t: ,-
'i
~,
600 .........
soo
...
I ..
.. :....... -t-'i .. -t-.

.r
... .....
2
(;
H:
.rr:
10
~
.
.....
f\
....
S."I
. ...
20 3040 6(
Sc c led DIStance ,ZG'R./w'13, tt.llb,.
c. M30 AI Propellont
(Single perforated)
Ortharhombic dryer bed

"
J;
<,
-_
n
"E
;;
"-
-"..,
0
Q.;
3:
"
~
, .!!
...". .,
~
<L
"".... c!
c,
...
..,....r
EO
"
..
"0
> e:
..
~
0.
..
>
..... 0.;;...
600
50lO..T
tc .
'.-lr+t++Jrn1t
~-
400
.,
300
c''''
200 ,.-",
f.. f
Xl
100
o ,',:::'::':
"
.... j-
"
'
.,.
'.~I-- ,.
'
Po0
,,-
~-
",.,I.."L.I
-HIIIII
1001.:::::1"460
'.
.. h-c
''1 ,,- ,- ,
4\(
'"
2l
3
~. f...
,I.,,,.
N.
",.L",L.L~'"
)_
'
:"
'" F f"
""11 tt:j'+
"I
._,+-,,~,I
i. /w l / ....
40
3 ,,-
6 ,,_ ,."., '

I
3
2 i"'
<J)
-~"
i '
'" ""
"
I" ",,'J.
'
"
11+
" . ' '"

\- :
".,..,
I"". "','
"l,
f.,
"1\
Pso
60 ".. ,
40
30 '""
'-l=l~r1:~
L LI
,.
I i i (J 1\1
20
i. /wl/.
l-l
r--rT-1'~'n~--I"
-"
'"
'~;i~
wil' ,.i'tt~tf'
,,,
.,.
".
+i
400"-"
300
t"
.'1"'"+1-++1
"
f;:" ":,
."",
,'" ,,+ f:
I
6OOF."
T"''T'T'T'T'TTT''''-r-,
500",,, ,,H,I"
::::' ::.',1. I,:

".,
:>
...
4- ..
I,I}.",.,
"~o
,-,,,,,,.
.',
."
'
".
\ P
'
r:
~A
'
oo
"',
,,+1
I,
II,,,
I,
~ ,.,.""1
20,.,
0.
I:~
'
"." ,,,"
IHI III
+, ".. ,
200t=J
.,-..
.:'::1.,L"
::1:.:
" t+,",,,',I...L.J
,,:.,,'.
~ l ~f =m H=m+;l:l'l .++++++--1
nr: t:t:t:t:
.._-
_._._~
'iT..::,:I:
3 4
10
,f-::
20 3040 60
Sc oled Distance ,ZG:;RG/wt/~, tt/lbl"l!5
c. M30 A I Propellant
( Multi perforated)
Orthor hombic dryer" bed
Figure 2-37
. Ll.J
b. M31 AI EI Slotted Stick Propellant

Orthorhombic
(Short Side)
c. M31 AI EI Slotted Stick Propellant

Orthorhombic
(Long Side)

'::,
!1:
"m
E
.. ;;
;;,
a...
..
..a.. ..,
..
s:" "
.. 'u.=..
-.
';;
If. ~
o,
m
b
-e
.,,
'"
0
c,
"!'
!iOO
500
I I I II
'1 I 11111
400
300
.~
I I
II I I
" i t , I
200
. .;.. ..
I I\
So
__--t~'""~-
....
3)
a. a.
'c
I"
:>
"
t-
, .. 1'
"
<f)
.,
3'
co
.~
Figure 2-38
psol.,..-"t'.t!+.+J.J
tI
~.~..
.:
..:l 'i"
I.+
t
'J.
.Lll L
....
..
i
l- .,._.,. I
.
"
is IWIl3"""
..
t} I
'-1.<...4.., f..j.j.
43
I..
J.-.
".
.,
P
'-J
b. M31AIEI Slotted Stick Propellant

Orthorhombic
(Long Side)
.' .. L'J.
I
,,3 4 6
10
20 3040 60
Scaled Distance ,ZG'Re/W Il I, n/lb.V 1
a. M31AIEI Slotted Stick Propellont

Orttwhombic
(Short Side)
6 4~
I'\.
2 L
10
'l
.. .1
t.L.).
.!.
430
41-- 1
3
100
',0
r
is IW Il
.x
f..
)QL~
6
40"
T\
)1-
,~
:i ..1.,..
2)
';;
o
-e
I
f....
400
300t::::::H .+
.,.1,:.:1.
200
.~.+~t't'm-FR~DT1
i
'T:
!iOO ..
500)1--....1-
. f.....
_.- .-
Pso
c,
..
4 )1..
+.. ..
'\
100)
j~' .\"..
s0
jl\'p
ci
-e
400 I..
300
.. t--+~
200
>
""
!iOO
500
7
1
I
'\
\.N1-
......,
3 4
6
10
20 3040 60
Scoled Distance, ZG;Re/W II 3, If./lb. V 1
c. N5 Propellant
Shipping (lIItainers

..
50 0 l--
,3:.
3 0
..... .
600
600
50 )
400)
0.
2~
3:
CL
"
.....". ....
.. !i"
~ .~
CL
-e
. ....
't." .
'u
E
....
00
0.
~ E
.. '""
e, c.
.t:
"
( j')
,-- .
""
::
~-
"
.-""
4",
3 - - , t.,
c""
-t-r-
"
'"
., i,+
~"
,J
"
,,~;f='
r'
4,,,,
"
..
Figure 2-39
"
_.,-<
. . _.. . ~ ... ::J
_..
1--., .
1--'
'"
';~~.
~.-
~,-
~..
1--'
"-- l'\
'"
'"
~.~~.
t-=
"
1--'
..
_.
.... I,
"
Scaled Distance
-'.,-
,Zo'Ro
b. N5 Propellant
Charge buckets
20 3040 !60
/,(;113, 1t./lb.V 3
10
--
Ps o
..
is /W'/3
"l.
'"
,,"
_._-
I ........ f' ' ..
... ~...~e.+-_
..
':":_
"
.7
"',
"
~+
..
. ::=
....l--.
4 ..' C ' ' '
K:'
,.,._~_
..
'-!
. ..
"- :i::J
60
Sc o led Dislonco ,ZG'''o/wl/', 1I/IbI,lI.
c. N5 Propellant
Conveyor belt configurotion
Peak positive incident pressure'and scaled impulse for an explosion

......
,-
-,
...
to 1----
..
"
.-..
1""-2 ,,,.. ...
"
. ..
I-
C"
1--'
. '"
20 -,
"
r'.
"
60
Scaled Distonce ,ZG,R G/W V3, Itllb,V3
o. N5 Propellant
Corpet rolls
,.
."
l"".
--
is / W' 13 "-
~:..
;=,
60 L..
'
._.-
+-
00
'"
J _.- --
.....
Pso
_....
_.
200
r'
is /W 1/ 3
Ie
.r
. .
20
.-
Of-.-
::>
-e
-~
r-
Pso
;;
0.
3, )
2 0
600 50 )
400
300 ' -
..
..
31;
<,
;; ;;
c,
". ..
,,... 3:
0,
"
....~ .~..
f .
~
-. "
e,
c
-e
.. .....
...
!a
'",
'"
'"
c,
'i;;
n.
..
<l.
."2
-c..
>
.;;
o
e,
. . ... .- .-
~E--
400-"- .
300 ... j---.
-_.,.
.
~
If.'
200 1------+---!+++H++1+
....
-e
0
I I II I I I
+..+.+.++-.
_.-t-
.. " .._..-t-..
" LLL..LL
"'t
. +*--++-1J.Hl_.
.l...
--+.~---
60 - - ... ,.
40
"f"'Iiil
... -.
301--+-'.'
I---tt-. .
2O~-.U .-
tit... :. "_.'. -
is /W'/' .
~~
1001-_L . . . ...1
~::_+--::
l='"
60f....1...
40 :,.......:....
'-......
." .
....f....
lI..
.~
20"-'::'::-:.J
'l'*f:f:....
\~' .
600
50 )
400
300
200
_.
00 -:'
c ..
... .... I...+.,

. -
~+It+t
.. . -.... "..;jjj
. . . +--++
I+HHH~~ ..~
;.~
..
,0
~_.-
~o
-~".-
4r-r
:5~=+=r
Shipping drums
Figure 2-40
_..
+_ .
-_..
1l;:=~.:ci:::j::t:=:t:-..t:l:t:Ui.::-:::+:
i,"
.~
..
- -
60
b. M6 Propellant
Closed hopper
- -
+..
-- .
..~"
Pso
is/WI!'
_..
r-...\
- .1-....
..
...
2:5 4
I .... ..
,to =Ro,!W V' . tt'/lb.Ys
1...-
...
i==Ct.
Seo led Distonee.
o. M6 Propellant
I,...
4
3 -_... ,-....-
.7t:-J':::t.:t:=ttt::
I
2 3 'I- 6
10
20 3040
<J)
::._.~
.,...
...
~-- .
rvr-
6r---+~"-~
+H+lH.
~-~"
:0
Ps o
-_.-
C'
-~-- ~
Pso
'c
::>
10
"
" ...,
20 3040 60
Sec ted D,s/once ,ZooR./W V' , tt'/Ib .'/s
c. M6 Propellant
Open hopper

__.
'"..
'J:
<,
E
,
...
..;,
;
600
5 ~:=.400
300)!-,.
00
2'
'". - .
0.
0,
....".. ...
.. ..
'I--- ...
1-- I- .1--. - I--
" .
,_. ...
..' I"
" . . ' f
'..+-1-+i~IJ
60~:I-t:!-~,:':j.~..~.. ~~~t'~'F'~~~t~~t1$:$H
ESt:: . " - .-- ': .>7::. I-
00
... .
. -I-.
..-+-11I
:g.
.
4003001-- , .- .'
,....
-.. "
c
-e
0.
.
.
"
...,
s
.."c
>
...
CD
'::
'<:;
..
.." ..
.;
~ >
~
e,
0.
e:
:>
..
"
0
f-- ...
20
-1-1-
PSQ
. _ ' ._
'
f':: :.
I"""
. 1\ .Pso
l-
is/Wi!',
'.
< ._.
31-- .
; I-
~ ,..
,. ~.f--.
"'. - ....-".!-.
t::.~.ri: "
...- ::.'
,,"",,-
'4""1"
....J1..,~..~.:l++1Il.'
:::':": "~ ',s w.. ~.
6
--'
1/3
::]:r.1:1..
,,,,,,,+"~,,,+",,,,,,t~
fl....
... .
~"-:.
6601-
40C
430
30
!+
",
".
..
t !'ttt+f
..'~r ,
.l::IlJ.A.'
'lY
f..
_. I " .
PSQ
I " ' .
,,,. _.
1.-..
..
leI-- _ is /w1/
._
EI--
-..I.'
.... ,.....
..
.. f-
l-
"iH' W,.J
,... ..
,31--..
.- "
..
,.....
- J":: :.
4f--"1,,.
_" I
I-
-+. 1'-
"
"'.
1--.
:"I
-~to-+ ...... '
, ...
1"'I. .
r'l"J."-
I-.. r+ I
7F::.J:J:t++
...
f--
,,,._..;-L
L.L.:*)..
II
2 3 4
6
'0
20 3040 00
SeQI.d Oistone. ,ZG=R"IWI!$. n/lboYS
Figure 2-41
200
D1
I:\.
1'\
.t .....l_F' ...
I'~
+
I
2 3 4 e
10
20 3040 00
Sea I.d Distcnc e ,ZG =Ro /W'!', tt.!'b. V $
a. 2.75 in. Racket Grain

MK 43-'
-_.- _...
\..H-
..:::-::, -
600
50)01--+., .
400
300
oof---..
'00
1--.._ .1-=
!-.+.....,.,+
'."
6 ~_.
"1
..-i-
...
_........- .. H'iji-l+--4- 'H+A-.+-I
I'
<C
.i.
. \-.
--.- . -t-+I++,lliLL-._ -'-".....+,1:_1
u
<J)
.~
, 1----...
--i-.
...
.-1,.
~..-l
40l-'--,r
t..
2001-" -. -
", ...,
.~~..~._.~.~., . ~".~AA . .MJW'_"~~'-""'." . ."~'.'.,_:"CCA,~"';~,;,:~,;:~;vX2;<:;:;~<:L:>~;";:':;':"'"
b. WC844 Ball Powder

Orthorhombic
c. WC844 Ball Powder

Cylindrical

600 _..
500
400
'"
:>
-T~"
...
.
'.."
<,
"c,
"0.,,,~ "
1\
~
~
I..
,~
60
40
""e
c, '"
:.P::l
-c
'"
'",
.,.
0>
"
s" u'"
'0
.'"> c:
.
o
Ok
>
"'" Q"
o.
s:
::)
-o
"
u
c
if'
."
,"",+
c,
"".. . ... --... t':.
'""""+"._.
~ "'.~
'---
100
2or, ..".
'.
tI:_-.
'\.
P$0
.,
""
C""
If ""_:.++ i I t
c:' .
tL~:..
"
."
XM37 RAP Propellant

(Single forward groin)
Figure 2-42
I:
j"~
I.""
l\
. .c
.
,
"
..
..
't""
""
--." i.. --
"
""
I I . .'
is /wl/
'"'1
l\l--- -" "
4""""
1.. _
""" "X
~c.:c
FC":
--+ . "
~~j..
c-t "It"ttft"" " t""
i-
~c
..,
-"" .
,1,
" """"" """
r-rc.:.t: .
"7.""""".~L"t::J,","r.b """
.:.
i=
,"".
:t'+l ".,
f-"-" I --
JrI
+Htt'"~ETlfJf
'-""--"","'
,ti"""" '"_ ..
"+++ t:r
+'-++'f+
..
.".
..~
"'i'i++++++tt"""t+i+i'
.
2OOtJ--
"-
p$Q
"
10
t" .. __
GO
Sea led Distance, Zo=R o !Wl/ I, ft./tb,.t/:J
u,
,.
500
400 "
300
_."
.--f\"u
20 1"""_ 1-
I
71+
r::
40
'"
'.'.:':~: : .
~ ".----+
I"" I'
I-
""~
3
r
- - "tt':t:j~x",l.:
21---,
-"'t\
r,
so F"f
--"""
".
'""'
2 oo
6OO,",-,-,T,.rrr,","".
....,...,..,
:c
"~-~
I""
,,~"
,.-."." 1"-
I"'
3 oo
:XJ tIl:: I::.:
. I"'+-+IH-
""f)
. /W I / 3
tl
4 oo
1'1'
"""++++'1 I
'"",."" .
.+ --+
600
5 )0
flr,,'1 1'1\",+1"""+''
1-.. I",
10
r""'"" "". ""
t"" t
1\
.... _.
.
"~
200 , ... ~""
<IIl;_
CL
3(XJ
t,
.""
"'\
, i .t
'-:
Ed
,0
Sea led DIStance. ZG'RO!Wl/, fI'/lb.,'/'
b. XM37 RAP Propellant

(Forward groins)
Extruded billet
c. XM37 RAP Propellant

(Forward groins)
Ra Con shipping containers

e
.
~
<,
E
,
.-....
600
5
400
400
300
" "
2' 00
40
40
20
-e
I~
. c.
~
0..
....
>
";;
0..
L
j~=;. +-.
PSIO
200
00
1H-++~W1Tr!
P
T
!
. rr
.
.-.-J-'~T--'t:
:t-..-+ =-.-.i~:--I-
so
60
40
-.n
";;
0
0..
20
"\I
is /Wl / S
':~m~i!i~/W~I!/S!"~" "Il\~i~~~~
6
4
"3
3HtttHt~dffi
":>r:
....
!!
0
U>
"'
3 4
10
20 3040 60
Scalod 'Oil'on.co Z.'R" /W
Q.
VI,
XM37 RAP Propellant

(Single aft grain)
Figure. 2-43
Il.llb!."1
--
~~-'~~
I
3 4
Scaled Oillonu
10
20 3040 60
.z."", /W VI, ".Ilb. " 1
b. XM37 RAP Propellant

(Aft grain)
Extruded billef.
--;
.. ..
-f. ~=..
u
,!;.
00
II\. ml
OO~";
\ Psa
300
-1-
200
f--
60
'"
600
60
:!
0>
I.,
'":::il
'1~B[fE1;=fm:n==r:]-=o)O~ttttmm=attEB
!=t=t=t:idm:r-=
.
...
t= :.. -
600
5 ~o
4'00
3 00
0,
..,,
..,
.... ..
0..
'. tw'"
. -
=s=i
--+ .. --.~-.
==~~~:.(
r
_
.
7 '
f.-h-f' +-
F: ~~~i:
....-J'
:_
=t l
1--1'1 ...),.
' .
-t
-rl-'!I \; ..-~
~t- . _--'~-
+__
__.'---- ""1'
.:It.- 'i-r:;-l=-'--
I
2 3 4
6
10
20 3040 60
S
Scaled Oil'onco ,Zo'R,,'/wI/ , ft-llb'VS
. c. XM37 RAP Propellant

(Aft gra In'-)
~a Can .hipp!n~ contalnere'
Peak positive incident. pressure and scaled impulse for an explosion

'"
~
<,
..
..
".
-'",
0
..
0.
a..
..
.." ..
.
a.. ,
~
..
Q.
C E
.
.
"
'u
,.
...'", -.. ..,.
'"
e
..
u
E.
600
500
400
~
200
f.-
00
---
60
::>
..
0
u
<Il
I'
--f-
---
_..
- - ---
...
1\
)
100
1---
--
--
6 )1--
l-
. ,
t---t++-l-'+-l,.J
is/W '/' "
'0
ll'
is /W .
'l1i..:
is/Wi"
_.
l....j ....
is/Wi"
[\
2,D
_l~
I ._-,-..+-
==1
'I!r"-+-W
_ tt.
- - , -t-H-ll
. '---I--1:
H
7-_
-IT-t:+t++~4--l..xl.._-
=_--._'-
4
- 3--
.- -
__+_L...l1
--
.:..$- -~-
I
2 3 4
6
10
20 3040 60
Scaled Distance ,Zo'Re/W Il I ftJlb ."1
1
2 3 4
6
10
20 3040 60
I
SeQ led 'Oi.tonee .Ze' R,/Wl/ flJlb .""
o. JA-2 (L!54601 Propellant

Cylindrical
b. JA-2 (L5460) Propellant

Orthorhombic
---
-...-~+:::::--
01--
..
.._-. ..
--- I
t - -- ... -- ..
... 1-' .. . ... -
is /W'
r__
j..
I-- --
--- -
- - -
2I--,-I---1-'--I--j-- .
-_.. _----
1 ---1-
-I-
::
_
-
I'\..-"t-. - 1-"."'~- - --of-. ,
41-- -
..
__
6 -
'-
--1\ -1'\ -- ..
-- -
..
-- .. ..
fA-I-
_-~--
-_. t-c' - - ---~
'::'-.=F::
,-_ =: ~6: .i10::':'1.::20:: :30=-40'-.L60
.7,
2 3 4
. 'Scaled Distcnc e
.z, =Re!W I/ J,
c. 'M 10 Propellant
Or.thorhombic
(H/W >1)

.._-
_.-
-- -_...
-t- -of II - - 1-- - . ~ -
1---r--hH--+....t'!I
_j-,
..- -11-+-+--1
-- 1,-"
30)
r-r-I--w'U
\.
_.
--
Ps o
I - - .. --
Figure 2-44
--
2101__ .-
r...
Ps o "'l
-- :
so
4)
30
20
\ P
200
40
.-
"
'c
--
60
40
I'
-,-
r--: ---
400
300
_ ___ \\-,_LL~lIl
)
100
.!:
.;;
0
a.. a..
"
- _.",_..
200
Pso
600
500
300
<,
.'!!
600
5 >0
400
300
I 1
tI./lbl. /

.,
,.
.,
e
<,
..'". .,"'".
:1:>
4.
..... ...
"
C
.. e.
... C..
.. ..:11
.. ..
f.
... ..
.
~
::;
400 1-
300
I--
600
50 )
.... '.1.-
I-- --
2)
.!<
4.
:. ...: l-
l-
c
:::>
..
"
0
'"
-r
...
3
. - .
1'0
'"
34
10
20 3040 60
-~ -f-" - -
H=t=-!::pm
-~
'l'
Ir-:.-i~FI.r~~~ :: := :.':1= =,=
~ __'. _: 'I:=l:= .. . . ~ ~--t-12-T"
~::J-,
_"-.1.. _1
2
3 4
t-r-t-rt--'-'
10
20 304060
Scaled Di.tonce ,.Zo.R./w ll ' -. ft.!lbl.1/1
.... MIO Propellant

Orthorhombic
b.
Figure 2-45
--". -- --.,.- --- +--
ao
I'\.
I05mm M314-A3
Illuminated Compolilion
(Cylindricol)
.. i. /W'/3
3-
-j
t-t-t--i
f--: .
__t
I"
'"
-.. "," --- -- - . -
=i=- ~=;.:; =. ~
t-
_.;--.j
.--f- -j
I-+-l-++-+-~*f"
L- .. ___. _ ~. -I-
..-.-
__ . .
2o
... l-r-
.f--!-
,.
'r-
.......
T:---
-_ .. T ' - -
t-~ ~f ~.
-u:
J=,-,~
=~ =.. -.. --- -':I-f- .--,--'5:, _ .. " :t -
Scaled Di.lonce .lo"Ro/W 'Il , II./Ibo.'"
(H~W<I)'
j~-
---- -I'i- --
la/ w' / 3 .
31--1
-+-1-
) , - -. \.
60
I
4D3'o
.- - .. j--f-
-+-~--
100
0,-- _
'-
51--;.-- I-- - __,!'od:.]-.
--
,I--
_...:j- ' - - . -_. I -.1

1 .f.--t:i:
..
-i
,;::=1
.
-r-~~
I
---
4.
)1--
i73
I. /W
I-- -1-
- - ... - ...
200
f:=r..__-\..- ~ P.ao+- -_... ,=-1--.

J\
..._-._.
"-" -- .. -.-- -
.. .-........
--1-
400 . _ f 300 I-- -
60
) - 1 - ..
4
._- .
R-*~ ~..
600
50 )
-~-'H'""",,--,
):=::::!~
100
CD
. .
3o
--- .
-,
4)
200
p......
I"":""
-/--+.
400 ~t300
c,
...,
...
"
)Q
100
..
.-1 ..
200
.~
4.
600
50
,.
; .....
1
2 3 4 6
'0
;,0 3040 60
. Sc o te c Ol,tance IZe~R./WI~I, ff./lb ..~/I
'C.
I05mm M314-A3
Iliuminoted Compolilion
,( Cylindrjc;ll)

'.>
~-
600
5 )0
50 )
~
<,
4' )()
3 oo
400
400
300
300
2')()
200
200
)0
100
oo
:;0
60
..40
40
~
20
20
;;
" ".
.~
0,
,,~
....'" .
.,
.. ...
.. '"
. -..
" ..
..... ...
~
e,
c,
"i
:!! "i
u
'",
'"
'"
>
~
u
~
0
50
40
~,
20
~-
Pso
Ie
-...
Ir
"
0
Pso
I
.....
4
3
..
3 4
10
is/WV'
20 3040 60
Scoled Di,Ionco .Zo.R. /W V1, ".Ilb'Y'
o. Hl59 Igniter Mixture

. ,
. Cylinder
Figure 2-46
.~
Is /W'! ....
\.
i 5 / W'1!.
\. P 50
I'..
c.
u

0
~ l-
Do.
!:
600
500
,
I"\.'
'I
I~c
'i1
'10.
Ps o"
IL-
--1=
3 4
10
20 3040 60
Scoled Dislonco .Zo-R./W lll , ".Ilb . 1/ 1
.' b. I559 Igniter Mixture

Cylinder
3 4
Scoled Distonce
10
20 3040 60
.i~'R./Witl, ".Ilb . 1/ 1
c. I560 Subignlter Mixture

Cylinder I

..
"
~
<,
-... .
--E
0,
a.
4, )()
3,)()
2' )()
.;,
)0
-e
10
::'
e,
0.
.. ..
-.
..
0
e,
>~
20 L-
L....
""\
p so
5>
6
.
c,
::J
0
u
III
I" \.
.7
>on
'"
-\-1
-I
3 4
10
20 3040 60
=+-=J :
20
"
1\
I'
i; /w I 13
l::r-:-t-t--+
'" -1-+--..1-
I
is /w,/3
f--- 1I
........ - .
Pso
,.::::i---
'
.,
6~
3
. J-,
-..r
"
"""
60
40
t\. Is/W Il S ~-
-e
!!
00
40
20
-r
:.,;o~~. IIPSOI I
~O
n,
r-
200)
2'
50
~
~
1-- ..
..
600
5 )
400)
3 )
..- ..
.
..,..
..,
>
600
5
400
3
00
0.
0.
Q)
J:R1ffl!3Blf=R=l:r=u::
600
5 )0
;;
'",
'"
.~I- f-.
____.+--j=t:'.. -
I Fi-==l
7
--<::r--
......1:
--
Sea I~d Distance ,Z,=RO /WIlS,ft.llb'Y'
I
2 .3 4
6
,10
20 3040 '60
I 5
Scaled Distance ,ZO =RG/Wl/" ft./lbl. /
1
2 3 4
6
10
20 3040 60
Scaled Distance ,ZoaR.,IW Il S, tt.llb . IIS
o. 1560 Subigniter Mixture

Cylinder
b. R284 Tracer Mixture

Cylinder
c. R284 Tracer Mixture

Cylinder
Figure 2-47

on the surface at sea
~evel
. --
&00)...
~
~
<,
50 )L..
400
300
200
... ....
.......
ft
0 ....
lL
. ..
e .
.
,
'"
0
...E
:>
=.. ."2..
=.
40
o
301
30
20
20
'"
>
e,
..
>
';;
e
e,
.~
::>
4
3
III
30
1O
i. /W'/3 ,
6 .
l.-
"
"'
i1'
is' /W1/3 "'l
4L-
f"\
I
2 3 4
6, 10.
20 3040 60
Seo led Oistonee ,Ze =Re/W '/! , fl.llb. V !
410
...
I
'"
"C
sc
4
3
2o
6~
ps o
6 l
1\ ,pso
I\.
1'0
.. -
is /WI/
10
4)
.;;
200
100
lO
.100
60
."
U
f-
6)
lL
300
PS.
100)
:!
..
2
400
200
;; ;;
600
50lOL.
500
400
300
L- .,
""
I
2 3 4
6
10
20 3040 60
Scaled Oi,IOnce ,Ze=Ra/WI/ I, ft.llblyl,
I
7=.'
I
2 3 4' 6
Sco 'edOl.tance
10
20 304060
.z, =Ra /wl/ I , ,'.1.1 Ibl.,111
r
Q.
M314-A3 Firet Fire Corripositio'n

Orthorhombic
.
b. M314-A3 Firet Fire Composition
Cylinder.',."
c. M49-AI Trip Flare Compoeitlon

Cylinder
,
Figure 2-48

~~
!t
.....
..
.. ..-
...-.
lb
T"1
!i00
400
300
200
60
r! ..
2~
ft,)
'"
I
...
~~
l.
.!:
ue
......
"!!...::>
en
200
200
100
- - ...
=
...
... C
600
.!i )
400
300
.......
C
!iOO
400
300
Pso_
100
~.
.....'" --..
- .'"
: -
I'
60
60
40
40
20
20
~ is/W'I' l-
4
3
3 4
Scoled Distonce.
10
20 3040 60
Z.'Re/WV1 ,
tt'/lb.Y'
o. M49-AI Trip Flare Composition

Cylindrical
Figure 2-49
3 4
10
20 3040 60
3 4
10
20 3040 60
Scaled Di.lOncl. Z.'RG/W V1 , ft./lblyl
Scaled Dislance, Z.'~WVI, tt'/lbl. V1
b.
c.

CIt
.o
..
.
c:
c:
Q,
.c:
~~
.
Ui
-:..
~
:I
' ..''''t
.!!
U
c:
1&.1
III
g
tIII
....III
o
~
~
'"
........~
c:
8
o
U'l
..
~
....t7>
.....
...
:I
:II
C/)
...
:a:II
.U
,;
2-92
'"
-a,
ffi
I.. -tf. I.. .' ,
!!!!!!
CANTU..EVER WALL
!!!!!!
BACk WALL IN-21
SIDE WALL IN'21
@.
SECTI(lMM. pt.....
,
...,
'"
N
"
.,
,
-..L U"ZI:
.~
.~
sa:
!!:!!
8M:K' WlIlU. (N"3)
",
51)[ .....L
BICk ....L"t.... 3}
.@
....
,
,.
IN-l)
.
.'
~
E!S'"
-a.
U..
@f!J'~' @~J@!t!:J~
.,. ~~...,.,
.
~
'
!!!!!!
"",
!!!,!.J
,~
THREE
TWO WALL CUBICLE, .
..
!:!.!!!
~'
.~ .~
~:'E1E].)@
@ffJ
~~
BolOl WALL INoI}
"8E:Jl..
SD:TIllNot.L
.tJ8
1'1.-....
au
Ra-. ....
'"""'"
@,
"~
.
..
,,-
BACK WALL IN-!I
........
~.~
TWO WlU.L CU8lQ.. wrTH ROOF
.J
~.......
..
"~ ~1#.' t.. .~

,
'"'DO
SIlE -u. (N-!I
FOUR WALL 'C\8ICLE
@"'\;.
Q8ICLE
"
WiIl...l.
~'41
-.:nllIIM. .....
SlCTtlRU. . . . . ;
"
......
..u.
........
.... ...-..11
BICIl.
~e~E]'~
,L
...-
i.'4) ~ sloE' WAU. (N~4)
FOlJtw~08Q.E
TIRE WALL CI.IICL wmt IDOF
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
"
"
.:...
j'.
B denotes Back Wall, S denotes Side Wall and R denotes Roof.
",
'Numbers in parent hese s indicate numb~r. N, of_.reftecting-: s.urface~ adjacent
. to surface" in que at i on ,
. ' .'
" . -'.
h Ls , always .'measured to the nearest reflecting sur face ,
J is -a l vays meas ure d to the, ne ar-e s t; r e f I'ec t Lng sur f ace except for the
cantilever wall where it,is measured'to the neare sr free edge.
'lFor~,vai~es of' ave rage peak pressur~s for .barr Le r and' -cubict~ a r r angemen ts
sho,wn,see Figures2~52 to 2-100.
,
,"
-:. ,:;'
-.~'
For respective scaled average ,reflected impulses, see Figures z-Io i to 2"149.
Fo~ reference list'of ~bove Figures for particular v~lues of required
parameters in Note 6, see Figure 2-3.
Required parameters. N. ilL, h/H, L/H, LIRA' lA = RA/W V3
Figure 2-:51
Barrier and
cubicle.:,conf~gurations.::andh..,param.eters
....
W!nt.ROOF
...
Notes:
RC_
.~ '4Jg::::JIJ .~
SIlIE -..L eM-3)
"
- L
,~
I!!I
..- --
BIrO(
'
','
",
.
..
L!B = . 1.250,
L/B =;,'0.625
L/B ~ :2.500
111
L/B = 5.000
":".1'1,
10'
.
HI'
1>:1
Eo:1
r...
.1>:1
II:;
..."".po
:.:
1>:1
p.
1>:1
Cl
..:
..:
II:;
--.
....
OJ
c..
'-'
..
c..
-,
111
ZA
~0:25
1>:1"
0.50
II:;
::J
rn
tn
1"-
111
1>:1
II:;
P.
1.00
HI'
mil ~ZA
ZA
0.25
m
,,'
0.50
1.00
ZA
0.25
0.25
1"-
0.50
0.50
1.00
,.
.......
.
2.00
'.
2.00
..
2.00
-.
4.00 Id
4.00
...
"'
iii
2.0C
ld
Ht
~I.OO
......
1>:1
>
..:
4.00
. 4.00
:n
I II
let 1
10 .
;L/~ ..
OIB
L/R..
10
..
L/R..
10
LIRA""
.. _....
-,
., .
. Figure 2-52'
Average,peak
reflected pr~s~~re'(N
= 1,
\
.'
..
,
"
'
t '
/L
= 0.10, , h/H
0.10)
let .
L/H"; 0.625
Hi
10'
....:I
rz.
.....
'"
Po
'-'
...
Po
:.:
'"
ll.
l?
...:
p;:
p;:
:::J
fIJ
fIJ
-,
..
10'
ZA
0.25
0.25
...:
0.50 10'
"
0.50
0.50
1.00
1.00
1.00
'\
Ht
1.00
p;:
2.00
2.00
ll.
2.00
2.00
Hi
~~
4.00
- . HI
..
-.
02B
0.25
-,
;1,
0.50
Ht
ZA
0.25
Z
A
ZA
..
:>-
mmBII
- -
,-...
.....,,
p;:
...:
Hi
10'
~.
L/H = 5.000
h.
Eo-
L/H = 2.500
L/H = 1.250
.,
LIRA
10.
Figure 2-53
<:
~
..
1
4.00
. .
-
,
,
.
.
. 10-
- .
LIRA .
Average peak reflected pressure (N =1,

h/H = 0.10)
.. . .
LIRA
10
4.00 1d
-
4:00
.
- r:
/L = 0.25 and 0.75,
.
10 ,
LIRA'
.1(1'
L/H = 0.625
. HI
Ht
<,
u
ril
...:l
'",
'"
'"
Po
..
Il:
Po
Il:
0
ril
"-
10'
<
I
"-
Hi
ril
r::::
l-c,
ZA
..00
1.00
Il:
c,
11112.001
111
ZA--L
r'\:
11/
1.00
111
I'I'
"""I"""I'"
2.00
2.00
ld
HI 1
4.00
LIRA
10 ..
lIt
4.00
II
4.0C
I II
Figure 2-54
0.50
03B.
0.25
ril
rn
t/H = 5.000
lIt
ril
:>
L/H = 2.500
0.25
ffl
:.:
<
ril
o
<
Il:
. ,.
.~
'-'
0;
= '1".250
.......
rz..
ril
II
ril
E-<
L/H
III
1
LIR
10
-.
10 .
LIRA
Average peak' reflected pressure (N
1,
IL
= 0.50,
h/H
= 0.10)
10
LIRA
HI
L/H = 1.250
L/H = 0.625
Hi
L:::,.
Ht
0
...o
.--.
...:l
r.,.
Q,
.......
.,
...,
....
'"
r.:l
...
Q,
:.:
r.:l
-0:
r.:l
p.,.
r.:l
-0:
-0:
I'
"
"
tn
r.:l
~
p.,
f-'-
.ZA
. Z","
ZA
II
025
0.25
0.25
0.50
-;
0.50
10-
~0.50
10'
1.00
0.50
..
Ht
10'
ZA.
0.25
II
ft
::J
1'\
"
r.:l
::-
.~
Hi
L/H = 5.000
L/H = 2.500
10'
r.:l
r.:l
1.00
1'\ ,"'
--..
1.00
I,
Hf
1.00
2.00
2.00
Hi
2.00
2.00
-,
4.00
4.00
ld
4.00
4.00
Hi
04B
I II
...1
1
LIRA
Figure 2-55
10
LIRA
10 .
Average peak reflected pressure (N
LIRA
= 1,
IL
10
= 0.10,
1;/R A
h/H
= 0.25)
10- .
1(f
L/H = 0:625
lit
10'
<,
L/H
= 1.250
L/H = 2.500
*l1
L/H = 5.000
"-
ZA
...U
.r..
'",
'"
0>
r.:l
....
,-..
lJ.
..
'-'
.lJ.
r.:l
r.:l
::J
.p..
r.:l
o
-.:
p::
10'
1IIIii
p::
p..
-.:
Hf 1
1.00
<,
-,
..
"-
"OO
2.00
2.00
4,00
4.00
~.OO
~.
I I
.
lIf
2.00
4.0C
05B
1.00
. 2.00
10'
10'
1.00
-,
10'
0.50
0.50
0.50
r.:l
::-
1'-
0.50
p::
fIl
tr:
0.25
0.25
-, ZA
0.25
Ul
p::
-.:
,ZA
Hf
~0.25
ZA
r.:l
r.:l
...:I
Hf
ml
..10
LIRA'
Figure 2-56
10
LIRA'
Average peak reflected pressure

(N = 1. ~L = 0.25 and 0.75. h/H
10 ,
LIRA'
= 0,25)
10'
~
lef .
10
LIRA
L/H = 0.6Z5
L/H = Z.500
L/H = 1.250
L/H = 5.000
Ht
I
<,
llt
Cl
ill
f-<
ill
...:I
r..
'P."
.
P.
ill
,-
:.::
ill
ill
::J
ill
tn
..:
c,
..:
0::
..:
"\
10'
0.50
0.50
"-
HI
ill
02 5
ZA
0.25
ZA
0.50
.I ......
c50
-~
~I.O 0
1.00
1.00
1"'\
1.00
0::
p..
.
~2.00
~2.00
lIf
HI
2.00
2.00
1d
llt
0.25
0.25
.,~
ill
:>
0::
rn
ZA
ZA
.~
'"
'"
0::
mmli
--.
'-'
111
".00
4.00
...00
Id
4.00
1ft 1
06B
Figure 2-57
I II
LIRA
10
LIRA
10
= 1,
LIRA
/L
10
= 0.50,
h/H
= 0.25)
LIRA
10
111
L/H = 2.500
L,/H = 1.250
L/H = 0.625
L/H = 5.000
Ht
10'
~
<,
10'
Zi.
ctil
~
U
til
...l
1<.
til
,
'"
....
0
0
t:t:
:.:
..:
til
0..
til
t.:l
..:
t:t:
Ul
P.
-,
10'
0.25
ZA
0.50
til
tn
..:
0.50
0.50
P.
tn
0.50
I,
0.25
.~
t:t:
::J
0.25
ZA
.~
,.
Hf
1.00
<,
2.00
1Ilmm.
t:t:
0..
LOa
I"-
1.00
til
10'
1.00
10'
2.00
2.00
til
>
0.25
ZA
--.
10'
-,
2.00
Hi
4.00
4.0 a
b Hi
4.00
4.0C
1d
07B
I '
1
LIRA
Figure 2-58
10
10
LIRA
LIRA
= 1,
~/L
10
= 0.10,
h/H
= 0.50)
LIRA
10
1d
. ...
;:
L/H
Hi
'rLI
U
'rLI
....:I
~
..,,
...
...
0
rLI
P:::
~
<
rLI
c,
'rLI
<
P:::
---0.
, L/H = 1.250
0.625
0.
rLI
P:::
::J
(/J
tn
<
0,50
-,
HI
0.25
1.00
0.50
r-,
1.00
rLI
~ 0.25
0.50
"-.,
1.00
'I'illIII
~
,r;/R..
Figure 2-59
2.00
HI
'==
~"
4.00
4.00
I I
,:10
, 4.00
2.00
HI 1
1.00
+--
2.00
Hi
HI
i=
2.00
t:t::
p..
4.00
oaB
10'
O. 50
rLI
:>
O. 25
-, ZA
0.25
=IIIIIIIZA
Hi'
E
r-
ZA
Ul
5.000
mm
ZA
10'
L/H =
.~
'-""
L/H = 2.500
mm
10'
<-<
Illill
II1I1I111
1
,. 10__:__ .:
,10
LIRA

h/H = 0.50)
L/R.. '
1,
~/L
0.25 and 0.75,
L/R ..
.
10
1d
Hi'
LIB = 0.625
LIB = 1.250
LIB = 2.500
LIB = 5.000
H/
H/
ZA
ZA
0.25
ZA
0.25
0.50
<,
0.50
0.50
1.00
'.
1.00
If
2.00
2.00
?OO
09B
" 2.00 HI
..
4.00
4.00
~4.0 0
H/
} 10
LIRA
'r
10
1
"
LIRA
- ,.
10
LIRA '.
.,
Figure 2-60
b ld
4.0C
I I
Ht
1.00
1.00
0.25
0.25
0.50
<,
HI'
'ZA"
Average peak reflected pressure (N = l,./L =.0.50, h/H = 0.50)
.L/R A
10
HI
L/8 =. 0.625
HI
Ht
cr.:l
~
U
r.:l
...:l
..
a.
:.:
r.:l
r.:l
::J
r>..
p:;
<
0..
r.:l
c;
<
p:;
r-,
I,
1"-
'ut
r.:l
p:;
0..
ZA
0.25
ZA
0.25
ZA
0.25
Ii
EZA
. 0.50
"
HI'
~1.00
0.50
1.00'
. "-
1.00
<,
~I.OC
.t' .
<,
2.00
!fml
HI
2.00
r.:l
>
<
10'
0.50
ut
L/8 = 5.000
L/8 = 2.500
~~
p:;
rn
rn
= 1.250
HI
ltl
a.
'-'
L/8
,.....
....
r.:l
...
...
...
........ I ,,-,
2.00
Id
4.00
4.0C
Id
4.00
..
4.00
1"cf
lOB
1I
1
.t, 'L/R~
'1""; ~
10
"1
.-
-1
10
-L/RA. .
LIRA.;
LIRA.
J
Figure 2-61
1, /L
0.10, h/H
10
= 0.75)
1ft
L/H = 0.625
L/H = 1.250
L/H = 2.500
Ht
<,
~
.~
<Il
r...
o-l
~
0.
::>
<
0..
tr:
<
P::
P::
0..
-,
Hi
0.50
0.50
10'
1.00
-,
2.00
2.00
HI
2.00
2.00
1d
~ ~0.25
1.00
>
<
<,
10'
1.00
<,
1.00
ZA
0.25
0.50
li
0.50
ZA
!mil
ZA
025
P::
fIl
t.:l
ZA
0.25
0.
P::
"
Hi
..."",
10'
~~I
10'
E-o
L/H = 5.000
4.00
4.00
1d
.00
4.00
10' 1
llB
LIRA
Figure 2-62
10
. 1
LIRA
10

h/H = 0.75)
LIRA
1,.I! /L
10
0.25 and 0.75,
LIRA
10
10'
. L/H = 0.625
L/H = 1.250
HI
10'
Ht
t$
Cl
r.:I
E-
rn
r.:I
-<
0..
~
-<
~
.~
'-"
1m
1.00
2.00
Ii
mill
2.00
A.OO
1d
4.00
4.00
12B
LIRA
Figure 2-63
10'
2.00
2.00
.
10
Ht
~1.00
4.00
Hf I
.50
<,
1.00
I.OC
Hi
0.25
0.50
-,
0..
10'
0.25
0.50
tn
ZA
,ZA
0.50
Hf
ZA
0.25
" 0.25
r.:I
>
-<
ZA
HI
r.:I
L/H = 5.000
L/H = 2.500
LIRA
10
L/R.
l,~ /L
10
= 0.50,
h/H
LIRA
= 0.75)
,
10
10'
L/H = 0.625
L/H = 1.250
L/H = 2.500
L/H = 5.000
HI
1lBi1lf
~
h.
10'
0
...:l
r...
13::
::.::
<
~
....
0
'"
0.
o
<
13::
ZA
,.....
ZA
.~
rtl
Co
I"
Hi
::>
rn
rn
Ht
13::
0.
0.25
"-
.50
I.OO~
I.00
t
2.00
2.00
2.00
4. 00
-
...
LIRA'
Figure 2-64
4.00b-ld
.00
I I
10
le!
2.00
4.00
13B
.50~1O'
I'.
1.00
I.00
Id
Ht
0.25
0.25
0.50
-,
>
<
~ !Ii
0.50
13::
r-,
ZA
0.25
JIM
Co
10'
=ZA
10
10
LIRA
'J!! "'''1I11l
10
LIRA
LIRA
.e /L =
0.10. h/H
= 0.10)
I! I' lcf
L/H = 0.625
Ht
L/H = 1.250
L/H = 2.500
L/H
= 5.000
Ht
Ht
10'
i>l
f-l
...l
r...
'",
....
....
0
.~
rn
0-
'--'
P:
...
0-
i>l
<
c,
i>l
<
P:
-,
10'
rn
ZA
"
uruuu-,
P:
2.00
Hf
1.00
2.00
1m
.2.00
...... l ll >,
2.00
4.00
Ii
4.00
4.0C ld
4.00
I
1
LIRA
14B
Figure 2-65
10
LIRA
10
HI
HI
1.00
c..
0.50
'<,
I.oe
I.oe
'\
i>l
Hi
Ii
0.50
Hf
0.25
0.50
i>l
>
<
tttf't;tl:::::j 0.2 5
0.25
I~
0.25
P:
tn
~ZA
ZA
i>l
i>l
ZA
LIRA
10
i.
Average peak reflected pressure (N = 2, R/L = 0.25,' h/H = 0.10)
L/R..
10
H/
L/H = 0.625
L/H = 1.250
L/H = 2.500
L/H = 5.000
lit
lit
I.....
lit
r.:I
E-<
U
r.:I
..J
r.:I
ll::
......
::.d
CD
Po.
r.:I
<
r.:I
o
<
ll::
r.:I
::<
,....
ZA
.,
.~
Po
'-'
'\
10'
tn
"-
10'
r.:I
ll::
~~
e,
0.50
b 10'
1.00
I.oe
1.00
1.00
11/
II
2.oe
2.00
2.00
2.00
10'
-,
~4.00
4.00
4.00
I 11
lit 1
15B
.......
0.50
0.50
r.:I
ll::
tn
0.25
-,
I .......
~0.:5
0.50
0.25
Po"
::J
0.25
.......
ZA
~~
~ ZA
lit
Z .
LIRA
Figure 2-66
10
LIRo.
10
LIRA
10
Average peak reflected pressure (N = 2,.t /L = 0.50, h/H = 0.10)
LIRo.
4.oe 10'
10
1Ii
~;.
L/H = 0.625
HI
I\.
HI'
L/H = 1.250
L/H = 5.000
L/H = 2.500
10'
Ii
1m
"-
10'
~
Cl
rz:l
E-o
CJ
rz:l
...l
.~
Q,
r..
'-'
...
Q,
rz:l
'"
rz:l
....,
rz:l
-e
Po.
rz:l
e
<
~
ZA
""'
OJ
tn
<
1---
'11111
rz:l
Po.
Hi
0.50 10'
1---
0.50
0.50
-, .
1.00
_0.50
1.0
1.00
Hi
2.00
.,
'111111.00
t
2.00
2.00
2.00-
4.00 1d
ttWII
~~.m-
4.9,~
HI1
16B
.:\1'
0.25
f----
Hi
rz:l
:>
ZA
0 25
P::
::>
rn
\.
Hi
~4.00
-LIRA
10
Figure 2-67
ZA
.0.25
'II
-
10
LIRA:
10
LIRA .
2, .elL
= 0.75,
.
:
h/H
LIRA
= 0.10)
10
10'
L/H = 0.625
L/H = 1.250
L/H = 5.000
L/H = 2.500
10'
Hi'
-,
10'
r.:!
f-
<
It
ZA!,
.~
Po
......-
r.:!
,......
r..
Hi
f':
ZA
0.25
0, 25 1
0.50
'\
0.50
10'
1.00
1.00
I.oe
10'
0.25
2.00
2.00"
2.00
ZA
''''''''''\.
2.00
.4.00
~.oo
HI
Id
4.00
4.0C
, I
, Id
1
17B
10
,
10'
L/R A
LIRA
, 1
,i.
10,
.
'L!R A :
10'
LIRA.
'-' ~
,,'.
Figure 2-68
Average peak reflected pressure (N = 2,.R. /L = 0.10, h/H = 0.25)
Id
L/H = 0.625
L/H = 1.250
L/H = 2.500
I
o
r.:I
E--
{J
r.:I
...:I
~
~
~
~
.~
rn
Po
rz..
'-"
P::
Po
r.:I
r.:I
<
r.:I
Jl.
r.:I
to'
<
P::
Hi.
I'
uu ::u '\
i :"
1d
11lc"=II
~s_
!"<-- ,ZA
11
..
...
F='
P::
Jl.
1.00 .
10'
0.25
, O.5C
10'
I.OC
1.00
r-
~t:t
~R2. 00
tm
a.oo
ZA
~.50
~ 2.00
r.:I
ZA
10'
'.
<,
1 '1
:I;:: 50
IDO
10'
0.25
0.25
P::
rn
rn
tIm
L/H = 5.000
E=
ZA
0 25
.
0.50
r.:I
>
<
III
IE
=l=t=l=
r-,
I'HE!
t=:
4.0<
4.00
4.00
1d
2.0<
10'
!E!fI4.00
l - r-
Hi'1
18B
I! 1'1 11111111,LIR
.u
Figure 2-69
II
111111 IIII
I I II
1
LIRA
10
LIRA
2,
~/L
10
= 0.25,
LIRA
h/H = 0.25)
10
10'
L/H = 0.625
L/H = 2.500
L/H = 1.250
L/H = 5.000
Hi
10'
<,
10'
Cl
r.:I
<--
U
r.:I
o-l
...
r.:I
p::
...,
......
...
.~
"'p,
'-'
...
p,
f>l
f>l
=>
tr:
..:
fl.
f>l
o
..:
p::
.LD
-, ZA
0.25
10'
ZA
0.25
ZA
0.25:
I
"-
0.50
o.so
~0_25
0.50
---
1.00
I\.
2.00
p::
fl.
2.00
10'
.2.00
2.00
Hi
10'
1.00
1.00
10'
1.00
-,
10'
f>l
>
..:
.50
p::
tn
ZA
4.0C
4.00
1d
4.00
4.00
uf
19B
I I
1
LIRA
10
Figure 2-70
LIRA
10
LIRA
10
-10
LIRA
Average peak reflected pressure (N = 2, /L = 0.50, h/H = 0.25)
lIf
L/H = 0.625
L/H = 2.500
r../H = 1.250
L/H = 5.000
Hi
Hi
"
10'
...u
(LI
(LI
...:l
~
(LI
p::
...,
......
w
.~
p.
~
...
c,
(LI
(LI
;:l
0(LI
p::
ZA
. 025
rn
(LI
p::
ZA
0.2 5
"
"-
\.
10'
~~
. _1.00
0-
2.00
H/
I.OC
f=
I\.
10'
~2.0(
~!=
'
2.00
2.00
1Ii
1.00
I"
0.50
1.00
lIt
.,
i;:::" 0.2
.50
0.50
(LI
>
0.25
0.50
p::
m
m
-,
1Ii
~5
1==1=
Zi.
Z A5
"'" 4.OC
II
'\ 4.00
ld
4.00
4.00
20B
..
, .
I II
10' 1
LIRA
10
Figure 2-71
LIRA
10
LIRA
= 2,
/L
10
= 0.75,
h/H
-10
LIRA
= 0.25)
10'
L/H = 1.250
L/H = 0.625
L/H = 5.000
L/H = 2.500
Hi
Hf
~
Ht
r.:l
E-<
r.:l
...l
r...
r.:l
.......
'""'
VI
P.....,
.~
P-
:.:
r.:l
r.:l
::;J
ll.
...
r.:l
<
p::
~
-,
tr:
-,
0.50
p::
fIl
ZA
0.25
p::
<
Hi
to--
Hf -,
-,
<
1.00
2.00
2.00
I II
Hf 1
10
LIRA
Figure 2-72
-,
4.00
21B
2.00
1d
-,
2.0C
4.00
490
10'
ld
00
10-
10'
1.00
m&lI
p::
0.50
-,
0.50
1.00
"-
ll.
~0.25
~50
r.:l
:>
-,
1.00
r.:l
10'
0.25
0.25
_ _ ZA
ZA
ZA
10
LIRA
LIRA
2, .tIL
""'
= 0.10, h/H =
10
L/R.
0.50)
Hf
L/H = 0.625
L/H = 1.250
L/H = 2.500
L/H = 5.000
HI
lit
WI
lit
r.<l
r--
r.<l
o-l
Ii<
r.<l
p::
....,
.....
.....
'"
:.:
..:
r.<l
Po.
,......
.~
..
0.25
lfl
Po.
r-,
0.50
1'-
b lit
0.50
1.00
0.50
r.<l
0.25
0.25
p::
..:
ld
r.<l
.00
1.00
-,
I,
p::
-,
1--
1.00
r.<l
>
..:
ZA
Co
ta
p::
HJ'
~ZA
-, ZA
OJ
Co
r.<l
Ii
Cl
.~
~!111~2.00
2.00
2.00
ld
lit
ZA
~0.25
2.00
ld
,-
4.00
4.00
lIT
4.00
4.00
HI1
22B
I II
10
LIRA' .
10
10
LIRA
10-
LIRA
LIRA
...\
Figure 2-73
= 2,
elL
= 0.25,
h/H
= 0.50)
id'
r ,,'
;- -,.,' ,-
"ro""'~_":""
'".
", ...." .
'" ;-,'.
,. ....
L/H = 0.625
lit
U
r.:l
...:I
.....
.....
<7>
.~
p::
Co
r.:l
r.:l
<
c,
r.:l
<
p::
HI
tn
<
HI'
ZA
0.25
ZA
ZA
<,
r.:l
0.25
.50
<,
10'
0.50
1.00
0.50
Ht
bi
0.25
0.50
1.00
1.00
t-,
-,
1.00
2.00
p::
Hi
2.00
p..
2.00
r.:l
>
0.25
p::
tn
ZA
I1l
r..
r.:l
...,
......
Co
~
,
~ SW
Cl
...
mml
L/H = 5.000
I'-..
10'
r.:l
L/H = 2.500
L/H = 1.250
2.00
Hi
4.00
4.0C
Hi
4.00
4.00
lit 1
23B
I I
LIRA
Figure 2-74
10
LIRA
10
LIRA
10
Average peak reflected pressure (N = 2, tIL = 0.50, h/H = 0.50)
LIRA
10
Hi'
L/H = 0.625
L/H
= 1.250
L/H = 5.000
L/H = 2.500
lit
lCf
10'
tmmtm
l'<
E-
::.:
l'<
0..
l'<
P::
ZA
---Co
Ul
...
'\
HI
0.25
l'<
~
tn
1.00
P::
0..
1\
2.00
2.00
Hi
lit
1.00
l'<
2.00
4.00
4.00
LIRA
LIRA
10
LIRA
10
1-
10
LIRA
,- -
"
. ,,"
Figure 2-75
Id
.~.OO
400
10
Ie!
2.00
I I
1
10'
1.00
1.00
-,
lIf
..0.50
<,
. 1f"I.50
.50
P::
ta
<,
.50
24B
0.25
Co
l'<
>
ZA
0.25
.0.251
ZA
.~
~ZA.
10'
.
2,
e n.
.. ,
= 0.75, h/H = 0.50 )
let
L/B = 0.625
L/B
L/B = 2.500
1.250
Id
L/B = 5.000
Id
HI'
Hf
111m
Q
r.:l
Eo<
C,).
r.:l
.......
,
'"
III
c.
::.:
r.:l.
c,
r.:l
t-'
<
p::
...
-,
HI
<
0.25
0.25
p::
.,
Id
r.:l
p::
p..,.
-,
mR
1'\
1.00
i.ool
,i
,,I
-,
1.00
Id
1.00
K
2.00
2.0C
2.00
Id
~.50
.'-
0.50
0.50
0.50
;:l
tn
0.25
'\
0.25
c.
(fJ
ZA
r.:l
:>
ZA'
.~
'-'
<
r.:l
. ZA
,-..
....,.;lr.:l
p::
ZA
I'
2.00
4.00
4.00
Id
Id
4.00
4.00
Id
25B
I I
1
LIRA
Figure 2-76
10
LIRA
10
. - .
10
LIRA
LIRA
10
Id
L/H = 0.625
L/H = 1.250
L/H = 5.000 .
L/H = 2.500
11/
lit
'""'
."
r...
'-"
W
...l
........
'"
'0-"
0-
P::
::J
fFJ
so
"
P::
0..
0..
P::
Ht
-,
10'
ZA
10'
.50
0.25
.0.50
0.50
"-
lIi
1.00
10'
1.0C
_2.00
>
ZA
025
P::
<,
E-<
H/
2.00
1d
1d
4.00
4.0C
lCf 1
26B
LIRA
Figure 2-77
10
I
1
10
LIRA.
Average peak reflected pressure (N = 2,
LIRA
e n.
10
= 0.25, h/H = 0.75)
LIRA
10
H/
L/H = 1.250
L/H = 0.625
L/H
= 2.500
L/H = 5.000
HI
HI
<,
Ht
~
,
r.:l
E-<
r.:l
..-l
f1.
r.:l
....N
0
'""'
rn
a.~
.
a-
r.:l
r.:l
;:l
<
ll.
tn
r.:l
t.:l
.~
<
0.50
r.:l
0.50
<,
1.00
-,
2.00
HI
~1.00
1.00
1.00
HI
~2.00
2.00
r.:l
>
<,
025
0.50
'\
ll.
l:A
Ht
0.25
0.50
0.25
HI
0.25
-, ZA
10'
ZA
rn
ZA
2.00
ld
4.OC
.00
ld
4.00
4.00
Hf1
27B
LIRA
Figure 2-78
10
. LIRA
10
LIRA
10
Average peak reflected pressure (N = 2, ~/L = 0.50, h/H = 0.75)
LIRA
10
Hf
L/H = 0.625
L/H = 1.250
lIl'mmillmD
L/H = 5.000
L/H = 2.500
lit
Hf
HI
A
r.:l
f-<
'"'"
III
...l
Co
r.:l
..,
..,....
....
0
.~
..
r..
'-'
I%:
Co
r.:l
r.:l
r.:l
<
P-
l"il
<
I%:
Id
0.25
~ZA
025
<
Id
0.50
1.0
I I Nlllllilltil 'i'0.50
i.00
1.00
<,
lrf.'sIIIIIIrHIIII
r.:l
I 1.001
2.00
Ht
2.00
I%:
P-
2.00
r.:l
>
0.50
O. 50
I%:
m
m
0.25
ZA
Id _ 2 . 0
. :
~.OO
4.00
Id
4.00
4.001
2.1b
Ht 1
LIRa
Figure 2-79
10
10
L!R ..
10
. 1
..
10
LIRA
LIRA
2, ../L
0.75, h/H
0.75)
Hl'
L/H =
0.625
L/H = 1.250
L/H = 5.000
L/H= 2.500
1I/:
HI
I.,..".. I
III
I I II
r.:I
.f-<
U
r.:I
...l
.r...
r.:I
ll::
'"
'"
en
Co
..
'-'
ll.
. rn
<
ll::
rn
.50
Id
1.00
.[:;:]
iii1IIi
00
1.
"'- ~-'
I"
~0.501
Co
r.:I
ll::
ZA
0.25
Id
HI
ZA
0.25
ZA'I
0.25
ZA
0.25
.~
.<
r.:I
...'"
,.....,
,,
ll.
I 111'411111111\
~0.50~llf.
I
I I 111111111111
s ioo
~ .I.. ~2DO
hd
4.00
Id
r.:I.
>
<
.
'-4.00'
4.00
HI 1
29B
2.00
Id
L/R...
Figure 2-80
10
,.
I! """",,110 1 I" 1'.- '"11

L/R...
Average peak reflected "pr e s su r e (N
I" 'P'" 11'110 I I ! I'

L/R...
= 3,.e. /L =
0.10, h/H
1 ! 1'1' I'11111
10
L/R...
0.10)
I ' I' lO'
. L!H = 0.625
L!H = 1.250 ,
L!H
= 2.500
L!H = 5.000
Hi
11/
let -,
-,
E-
tr:
m
ill
1:1:::
. A.
'_.
~A
,
'- ...
0.25
..
0.25
0:25
-,
">
'0.50
':---
0.50
,",
1.00
. '\~I.OO
Hf
1.00
0.50
Hi., ..
~.ZA
Z
.A
0.50
LaC
..
'r---
Hi.
2.00
2.0C
,.
..
ill
>
0.
ill
:1:1:::
'!l
ill
1ft
2.00
~OO ld
'.
. 1'-
2.00
ld
4:00
-;
4.00
lit 1
30B
l"~
',~
..
,-
" '
.~:-
4.00
L/RA
~;
. ".
"'"
1, .
'_..
>:
;;
'T ;;.".'
10
'e:
. 1"11
, .
'i"
,
:i./R A
10
.
,
-,-,
10
L/RA
,,"',
':'
~:.-.,
'~."
Figure 2-81
-10-'~-~
'L/R A

h/H = 0.10)
3, /L
j~ ~.
\,"
0.25 and 0.75,' .-
11/
L/H = 0.625
L/H
= 1.250
L/H = 2.500'
L/H = 5.000
Hi
Hi
<
Ht
Ht
<,
ZA
I:)
ZA
E-o
...l.
~
~
'"'
Ul
Co
...
-e
P::.
:;:>
Vl
tr:
P::
0.50
-,
Hf
1.00
,.;
Hf
1.00
2.00
P::
p.,
.2.001
2.00
2.00
Hi
10'
1.00
wc
..
::-
0.50
---
0.50
~
~
0.25
r:::::
0.25
---
Co
c,
.'\ . ZA
10'
0.25
0.25
.~
P::
...'"'" .
...
ZA
.. 4:00
""" "I"
..
4 -.0 0
4:00
Hi
4.0C
H1' I,
.' L/R
10;'"
A
3iB
I TI
1
LIRA
.1
10
.. ..
...
LIRA
10
Ht
LIRA.
>'
.\
Figure 2-82
tit
Average peak r.eflectedpressure (N
s,
= 3,
e n.
= 0.50, h/H = 0.10)
. t.
'.
L!H'= 0.625
. Hf
J
.
. ,L/H-~ 2.500 ..
. -- "L/H = 1.250
.L/H = 5.000
Hf
lit
10'
(:)
r<l
E-<
r<l
...:l
Ii<.
r<l
:l:t:
:.:
,
!'>
.....
!'>
'"
r--.
."
({J
c.
...
c.
l:t:
c,
:::>
tn
r<l
tn
L?
.~
- . .
11/
'\.
ZA'
025
.~
-,
-,
-,
-~ 1.00
O. 5C
111111
2.00
-,
2.00
~4.00
lit 1
4.00
..
I I
L/R A
10
;10
LIRA
;
.1
...
:L/R A
:.
.J,..
,.'-,
10'
3, R/L
"
0.10, h/H
,.- ...
-I;
1It
'f'
,.
=
Jo1d
L/R A
-~
>
10
-,
Figure 2-83
10.
.
. 4.0C
4.00
I.OC
2 00
2.00
.-
10'
1.00
p::
ll.
1Ii
. .0.5e
.
. '\.
0.50
1.00
r<l
!ll
32B
-,
0.50
lIf
0.25
025
025
1'- .
r<l
:>
ZA
ZA
r<l
r<l
ZA
.:.:.."
~;'
0.25)
~t
L/H = 0.625
11/
,~
111
L/H = 1.250
L/H = 5.000
L/H = 2.500
Hf
~
HI'
Cl
r:o:l
Eo.
<.
0.,25
"
;1'0.25
ZA
0.25
:;:l
m'
ZA
Zi.
ir/ ,
2,
2.00
4.00
4.00
1d
4.06"
4.00
lIf
.
.. !
.....
Figure
"
"
2-84.~
. 10
LIRA
33B
,.".,
"
...
'~"':- :::-f,:.> '.
LIRA
,
f:-
..
II I
10
10.
cLi'R A .,
,',
...
LIRA,.
~,.e/L
= 0:25 and 0.75,
..
-r:
,;'" ,~ .. , '~ . 3 ~
Average. peak reflected. pressure' (N =

h/H = O. is)
1r/ '
10
.,
.','
L/H = 2.500~
L/H = 1.250
L/H = 0.625'
"L/H = 5.000
10'
1d
,
10'
ILl
.~
U
ILl
...l
r...
ILl
,
....'"
....
'"
r-.
'~
Po
~
~
. ILl
ILl . . lfl
p::
10'
1.00
1.00
1.00
II
ILl
>
~
'\.
..
.. .
&
2.00
200
1d
2.00
2.00
1d
. 10'
050
1.00
ILl
p::
0..
-,
0.50
i __
0.50
..
;:l
0.25
0.50
0.25
;P::
0.. 'ra
"~
-10'
p::
ILl
-, ZA
VI
Po
ZA
0.25
ZA
0.25
10'
.Z"
4.00
4.00
1d
4.00
4.0C
Id
L/R..
34B
10
- -
I I
1
L/R..
10
.;
10
l'
L/R s:
Figure 2-85
= 3, ~/L = 0.50,
h/H
= 0.25)
L/R ..
10
Hf
L/H = 1.250
L/H = 0.625
Hf
~
10'
L/H = 5.000
Ht
iii
II
L/H = 2.500
...l
~
~
ll::.
N
00
.....
0..
~
ll::
ZA
,.-...
'c."
-,
10'
ZA
C.
0.50
ll::
::J
fI)
fI)
Hf
-,
"-
t<l
1.00
0.25
-,
0.25
"
tim
0.50
1.00
Ht
~0.25
.25
-,
0.50
-,
0.50
10'
1.00
1.00
ll::
0..
1"-
~g
200
1a
2 OO
HI
2.00
2.00
Hi
~ ~
Ht 1
35B
ZA
.~
:>
II
ZA
;t
CI
f-<
4.00
"-
I II
LIRA
Figure 2-86
10
LIRA
10
Average peak reflected "pr e s sure (N
Hi
4.00
mE
4.00
4.00
LIRA
3,./L
10
0.10, h/H
LIRA
0.50)
10
HI .
L/H =0.625
L/H = 1.250
L/H = 2.500
L/H = 5.000
1If
Hf
"
to'
ZA
.~
r<.
'-'
Cl:
~.
....
'"
'"
Ul
....l
'",
ZA
..:
~.
P~
o
..:
Cl:
0-
Hi'
-,
..:
0.25
0.25
0-
ta
tr:
-,
t---
1.00
-"I
tu'
1.00
1.00
-,
HI
0.5 0,
<,
0.50
1.00
Cl:
;:J
<,
0.50
0.25
0.25
0.50
2.00
Cl:
P-
2.00
III
tu'
2.00
:>
ZA
ZA
III
to'
2.00
Hi
4.00
..
4.00
td
4.00
4.00
.
.
36B
. .
>
I I
L/R A
10
Figure 2-87
LIRA
10

h/H = 0.50)
LIRA
10
3, -t/L
0.25 and 0.75,
, LIRA
10
11/
."
L/H = 1.250
L/H = 0.625
~~
10' I N I I }IIIII IIII
I I ! II
I I I'NIII}!1 1111
U
r.:I
...:I
.
....
,
...,
o
r...
I I I II
I I I [N~lllt
IIII N III I
.~
I I I I tHllllllll
I ZA
7.
C.
c.
~
;:l
Po.
Ul
r.:I
""'ITTIT I 11'\
0.50
~~g
1.00
r.:I
>
<
1.00
-,
1.00
2.00
2.00
2.0e
lei f
10
LIRA
111,1'111
I! I'
1
10
LIRA
10
LIRA
2.00
4.00
4.00
4.00
ft !Ii
I! 1,,11."1111
37B
1f!
1.00
"-
r.:I
Po.
0.50
0.50
..
~ 10'
0.25
0.25
rn
:':rJ
<
~
0.25
~.
t.:I
I I I
f - W
ZA
ZA
r.:I
<
r.:I
1f!
r.:I
E-<
L/H = 5.000
L/H = 2.500
~~
1f!
.1
10
1f!
b 1d
1f!
LIRA
"r-
Figure 2-88
LIB = 0.625
LIB = 1.250
LIB = 2.500
LIB = 5.000
Hf
lef
~
'\
Ht
H1'
1m
Cl
~
E-<
....
........
,......
"'0.
......
P::
0.
:.:
(I]
Vl
..:
P::
Po.
P::
-,
Hf
ZA
Hi
1.00
1.00
r-,
"-
rm
lIf
~I.oO
_ 1.00
-,
0.50
<,
0.50
0.50
"
-,
0.50
,
0.25
1'\
0.25
0.25
0.25
OOH
P::
;:J
g.
to'
ZA
ZA
.~
...l
r...
ZA
"
2.00
lIi
2.00
>
..:
~
lef 1
38B
-,
2.00
ld
'1,.00
4.00
4.00
I'
L/R..
Id
10
Figure 2-89
~:
L/R..
10
L/R..
Average peak reflected pressure (N = 3,
10
1. /L
10
L/R..
0.10, h/H = O~ 75)
lef
Lin = 0.625
Lin = 1.250
Lin = 5.000
Lin = 2.500
Hi
lIi
lit
0
w
~
o
W
....l
~
....'",
...,
'"
ZA
~
.~
rn
0-
'-'
...
P::
0-
...:
CL.
rn
rn
IiIl
...:
CL.
P::
w
:>
...:
10'
'iA
0.25
.50
0.50
1.00
1.00
<,
-,
1.00
2.00
lIT
2.00
P::
2.00
2.00
Id
lIi 1
4.00
4.00
4.00
I I
L/R...
10
LIRo.
10
LIRo.
Figure 2-90

bIB = 0.75)
= 3,
10
/L
LIRo.
= 0.25
Id
10'
1.00
4.00
39B
10'
~0.25
0.50
<,
0.50
lIf
0.25
0.25
P::
::>
ZA
ZA
and 0.75,
10
Hi
L/H = 0.625
Ht
L/H = 5.000
Hf
<,
lit
L/H = 2.500
L/H = 1.250
mt
~
ZA
...'"u
'"...:lr...
'"l:t:
~
....'"
'"
'"
0
..:
.",
0..
ZA
ZA
~
.~
til
0.
.......
~
0.
'"
l:t:
::J
tn
in
'"o..: '"l:t:0..
l:t:
lit
0.50
0.50
III
1.00
1.00
lit
1.00
-,
1.00
2.00
Ht
2.00
2.00
2.00
ld
4.0C
4.00
4.00
I I
lIf 1
Id
4.00
H
40B
0.50
0.50
0.25
'",
>
..:
0.25
0.25'
0.25
ZA
Ht
Ht
10
LIRo.
Figure 2-91
10
LIRA
. 10
10
LIRA'
LIRA
3, /L
0.50, h/H
0.75)
Ht
II
LIB = 0.625
LIB = 1.250
LIB = 5.000
LIB = 2.500
~miHI
HIli,
Figure 2-92
Average peak reflected pressure (N = 4, tIL
0.10, h/H
0.10)
11
L/H = 0.625
L/H = 5.000
111
1111
HI
L/H = 2.500
L/H = 1.250
<,
10'
10'
ZA
...
ZA
0.25
ril
U
ril
..-l
---0.
ril
r...
"",
.....
w
'"
Ul
0.
ril
ril
;:J
<
Po.
ril
o
<
~
ZA
0.25
.
.~
lri~ZA
0.25
<
Ht
1.0O.
1.00
b 11/
I st I 1IIIImlili r 1.0
ril
lri
0.50
1.00
2.0C
2.00
Po.
2.00
Hi
-,
~ ..
4.00
4.00
~oo,.
H/
42B
0.50
ril
>
:":.,..
-,
)v
~0.50
I I 1'I11111IH1JI 1'0.50
rr.
rn
1--.
025
~
.
L/R A
10
L/R A
10
L/Ri.
10
_f
Figure 2-93
Average peak reflected pressure (N = 4

h/H = 0.10)
.t /L
= 0.25 and 0.75.
4.00 Id
'L/R A
m
10
10'
L/H = 0.625
lIf
II
I,
HI'
L/H = 2.500
L/H = 1.250
L/H = 5.000
10'
-~
00
U
r.:l
...:l
r...
r.:l
...,
0'"
N
Il:
'::':
''':
r.:l
c,
r.:l
o
..:
Il:
10'
ZA
,.....
ZA
.~
'a."
.
a.
10'
'\
025
lil=
Il:
tr:
ill
--
025
..:
-,
0.50
10'
1.00
1.00
1.0C
Hf
_1.00
Il:
0..
0.50
0,50
-,
10'.
r.:l
0,25
0,25
,50
r.:l
::J
ZA
2.00
2.00
2.0(
r.l
>
ZA,
r.:l
!S!Hi
Id
2.00
"-
4.0(
4,OC Id
4.00
4.00
,,
I I
Hi ,
LIRA
43B
'0
Figure 2-94
, '0
LIRA
Average peak reflected pressure (N =
LIRA
4,.e.
'0
LIRA
/L = 0.50, h/H = 0.10)
'0
10'
L/H = 0.625
L/H = 2.500
L/H = 1.250
11/
L/H = 5.000
lit
~
lit
10'
0
f-l
...:I
.,,
.......
...
.--..
OJ
c,
'-'
l:l::
lJ.
..:
p.
l:l::
Hi
0.25
r>l
-,
h.
1.00
IBm!
l:l::
0.25
ZA
.50
l:l::
r>l
p.
I"
llJ'
r>l
::J
tn
rn
'11111
~
2.00
lIi
0.50!
-,
025
.
<,
lU'
~1.0C
1.00
1.00i
2.00
4.0C
-,
.00
4.00
11
44B
L/R~
Figure 2-95
10
L/R~
10
b Hi
.00
.00
lit
0.50
.50
~2.001
r>l
>
..:
025
ZA
.~
....r>l
::.:
..:
r>l
Ii
ZA
r>l
ZA
L/R~
10
Average peak reflected pressure (N ='. 4, i)L = 0.10,

h/H = 0.25 and 0.75)
L/R~
10
Id
H!
L/H = 0.625
L/H = 1.250
L/H;" 2:500
L/H = 5.000
Ht
HI
10'
1m
rLI
E-<
U
rLI
...:I
r..
rLI
P:;
::,,:.
<
,-..,
.~
'0."
'-"
rLI
P:;
::J
'"
rLI
tr:
....
rn
L'l.
rLI
p:;
Il.
<
0.25
<,
0.50
1.00
--.,
".
1.00
Id
1.00
-,
2.00
p:;.
E-
Id
2.00
2.00
2.00
Id
Ht 1
LIRA
10
. 4.00
4.00
4.00
LIRA
10
L/R~
= 4,
i/L
10
= 0.25
Id.
I I
Figure 2-96 Average peak reflected pressure (N

h/H = 0.25 and 0.75)
1.00
Id
0.25
0.50
l~.50
4.00
45B
0.25
.50
rLI
>
<
ZA
ZA
ZA
0.25
II
0.
rLI
c,
Id
,
'"
....
10'
ZA
and 0.75,
LIRA
10
Ht
L/H = 1.250
L/H = 0.625
10'
L/H = 2.500
Ht "
~
...:l
...'",
'"
'"
,-...
rIl
Co
r..
p::
Co
:.::
..:
IJ;l
rn
;:s
Ht
EI1
p::
0..
~ 1.00
:>
..:
'.
I:::::
4.00
ZA'
ZA
0.25
0.25
0.50
0.50
~I.OO
II"'~
2.00
_ld
."
2.00
4.00
10 -
LIRA
10
11
'-"'111,,'1'111
10
LIRA
Figure 2-97
1'-
4.00
10
LIRA
am
1.00
-n
HI 1
4GB
1'-.
2.OC
Ht
1.00
~
t=
mil
~
~ 0.50
p::
i<-'-
0..
..:
Ht
:;J
rfl
0
p::
~
ZA
.1.ffiTTG 0.25
.~
Ht
ta
Cl
_ld'
FfM.o~ofld'
L/H = 5.000
Average peak reflected pressure (N = 4, /L = 0.50,

h/H = 0.25 and 0.75)
LIRA
1". '.
1'1'10-
..
L/H = 0.625
L/H = 2.500
L/H = 1.250
10'
L/H = 5.000
10'
r-:
.
1'-
lit
~
U
r.:I
...:l
r..
r.:I
ll:;
,
....'"
....
0
<
r.:I
P-
r.:I
r.:I
.-..
m
ZA
~ZA
1=
0.25
III
Co
'-'
...
10'
Co
r.:I
ll:;
;:l
m
m
Ht
r.:I
ll:;
< c.
>
<
-,
''\
I,
ZA
~O.25
1.00
"
-,
mt:
0.50
EI3'IH
1.00
1.00
2.00
~I .00
.-._111111111 '\..
"'"
~4.OC
-400
"
10' 1
2.0(
l=-
~2 .00
~
t-
L/R.l.
Figure 2-98
LIRA
10
....00
4.00
mill
1
LIRA
10
= 4, .e IL =
Ht
ts::
0.10. h/H
LIRA
Hi
I I
10
10'
1<=
mf
1d
0.51
'\.
"
0.25
0.50
0.25
10'
ZA
.~
ll:;
r.:I
47B
r-
0.50)
10
10'
. r
Lin = 0.625
Lin = 1.250
1It
II
mmmM
10'
r.l
U
r.l
..:l
r...
r.l
..,,
...""'
""'
p::
:.::
r.l
ll.
r.l
p::
,...,
III
0.
..
0.
10'
rn
rn
r.l
p::
Il.
1\
HI
~
~
48B
b 10'
1.00
1.00
-,
"-
1.00
2.OC
~~
2.00
4.0C
2.00
ld
1It
0.50
<,
0.50
4.00
111'
.1.00
2.00
r.l
>
<,
~.50
m~ 0.50
p:: "
:;J
zA
ZA
0.25
ZA
0.25
ZA
0.25
0.25
r.l
Ht
.~
Lin = 5.000
Lin = 2.500
let
1d
4.00
.00
L/R.
10-
I II
:::
Figure 2-99
,
'0
L/R.
L/R.
Average peak reflected pressure

(N = 4. ~/L = 0.25 and 0.75. h/H
10
= 0.501
L/R.
10
lit
.
L/H = 0.625
L/H = 1.250
L/H = 5.000
L/H = 2.500
let
Hf
Ii
ZA
ZA
\
~
\
0.50
0.25
0.25
0.50
let
1.00
1.00
1.00
'<,
-,
~2.00
1.00
..
2.00
.
4.OC
4.00
4.00
I
. 10
LIRA
LIRA
10
LIRA
10
. 10
LIRA
'.
Figure 2-100
ld
4.00
4gB
let
2.00
2.0C
Hf 1
let
0.25
0.50
0.50
1'- '.
ZA
ZA
0.25
= 4, .elL = 0.50, h/H = 0.50)
let
L/H
L/H =
0.625
1.250
L/H = 2.500
L/H =
5.000
10'
10'
--.c
"
<,
Q
~
Eo-<
<,
,...,
!'>
...
~
8
0-
Z
::J
<,
....:I
<
rn
ZA
UJ
::"
ZA
Eo-<
lit
,~
0::
UJ
....:I
1
.'
10'
H!
rn
....:I
-, ZA
I,
ZA
<,
0.25
0.25
0.50
.50
(0 0
2.00
4.00
ld
::J
c,
::;:
.0.25
0.25
1-
1.00
1-
0.50
0.50
1.00
1.00
2.00
~.O0
2.00
4.00
lit
<,
~4.00
4.00 ld
let,
OlA
i II
'LIRA
'0
10
LIRA
LIRA
10
-,
Figure 2-101
Scaled average unit reflected impulse

(N = 1, ~/L = 0.10, h/H = 0.10)
10
LIRA
lit
L/H = 0.625
L/H
lit
Q
~
..,,
....
~
~
"
.c
<,
Ul
Q
~
...:I
<
00
...."
lit
~~
<,
ZA
1.00
2.00
.00
lIi
:::ll
02A
lit 1
L/R...
10
L/R...
10
0.25
0.25
0.25
g-.50
0..
ZA
0.50
1.00
2.00
4.00
.~
00
...:I
~
~.25
'""N
.50 10'
0.50
1.00
1.00
2.00
2.00
4.00
L/R...
10
4.001-1d
I'
'1'111

(N = l,/L = 0.25 and 0.75, h/H = 0.10)
11
11 1111
L/R...
.' .
Figure 2-102
111'
ZA
ZA
Ul
~!lo'
!=E{
.~
00.
L/H = 5.000
1:\..
ImI
...:I
....
lIi
L/H = 2.500
1m
.-...
."...
= 1.250
10
'l'l'lff
L/H
10'
~
::"
CI
~
E-<
.0
<,
1>..
'",
.....
E-<
.0-
'"
;:J
CI
~
...:I
<
U
in
.~
L/H = 2.500
a.
::"
..
tr:
. t= . ZA
-~
. ZA
r-
0.25
0.50
0.50
1.00
2.00
4.00
Ht
a.
;:;:
= 5.000
..
0.25
...l
;:J
<,
ZA
H/
~
<,
~
L/H
Ul
p::
= 1.250
10'
~m
L/H
Hi
Ul
...:I
= 0.625.
1.00
2.00
4.00
r-
EE
~0.50
~
~
~ ZA
0.25
0.25
I.OC
2.00
II~
4.00
10'
0.50
1(/
1.00
2.00
1= 4.0?~ Id
Id' 1
03A
L/R..
10
Figure 2-103
. L/R..
10
L/R..
10

eN = l,~/L = 0.50, h/H = 0.10)
L/R..
10
Id'
L/H = 0.625
L/H = 1.250
Ht
L/H = 2.500
L/H = 5.000
10'
.-...
"
::.0
I':l
~
..:l
-z
......
0.
"
<,
..:l
<
rn
I':l
UJ
..:l
1I1
0.25
..
f<o-
0.5 0
1.00
2.0 0
4.00
Id
~
Q.,
<,
0.2 5'
0.25
1-....
"-
1---
0.50
0.50
1.00
2.00
1.00
. 2.00
4.00
~4.0(
0.5 OF'Hf
1.00
2.00
1"- 4.00 Id
~
,
Hf
\'1
1
LIRA
10
Figure 2-104
ZA
~ 0~:5
ZA
.~
-"
04A
Hf
.
ZA
III
'.~.
ij
I':l
'"
10'
Hf
.~
I':l
'",
.0
III
U
.I':l
'"p::
-S
<,
LIRA
10
LIRA
10

(N = 1,. /L = 0.10, h/H = 0.25)
LIRA
10
Hf
L/H = 0.625
::;"
.0
<,
,8
E-<
...
~
r.:l
Cl
r.:l
....:l
...:
u
tr:
ll/
Z
. A
"
<,
lli
ZA
0.25
<,
"
.~
..-:i
in
....:l
~
0-
~.
-, ZA
0.25
I,
lli
0.25
f-
0.50
0.50
'1.00
2.00:
4.00
0.50
I:O.C
2.00
0.50 Hf
-
1.00
r-, 2.00
4.00
1.00
-
2.004.00 - 1d
4.00
.
Hf 1
05A
ZA
0.25
.~
0-
HI
I"
10'
'm
~.
5.000
r.:l
-z
,~
E~
L/H
Cl
L/H = 2.500
L/H = 1.250
Hf
....
LIRA
10
. 10
L/'R
.
10
LIRA'
A.
:'
Figure 2-105
.'

(N = 1, ~/L = 0.25 and 0.75, h/H = 0.25)
LIRA
10
HI
L/H
111'
-S
.0
.'--
....
0
".
CD
.::J
Cl
W
...l
.m
mi.
10'
10'
ZA
0.25
0. 25 1
0.50
1.00
'"0-
ZA
-,ft
0.50
1.00
2.00
.~
Hi
::J
Po.
1jjj:
0.25
<,
W
l7l
...l
I .......
Z;"
let
::>1
06A
111'
.~
0::
_~E
3'
L/H = 5.000
L/H = 2.500
'"
rz..
L/H = .1.250
..i'
::;
U
W
...l
...
= 0.625
4.00
Hi 1
10
LIRA
Figure 2-106
.L/R A
-,
ZA
0.25
0.50
1.00
2.0 0
= 4.0 0
<,
1.00
2.00
r-,
4.0
let
2.00
4.00 ld
II
10
10
10
L/R..

(N = 1, ~/L = 0.50, h/H = 0.25)
LIRA
1Ii'
L/H =
10'
::"
.0
<,
Eo<
U
....
.~
'"
......,.
0
'"
P.
"
.~
...:
o
en
tn
...J
1(i
I I
1
L/R~
10'
10
ZA
..
~2.00
4.00
c,
am
ZA
ZA
" 0.50
L/R~
0.50
0.50
1.00
-'2.00
H/
1.00
1.00
2.00
4.00
<,
2.00
4.00 Id
4.00
10
".
+-
L/R~
10
',,'}
!-.:
"<
Figure 2-107
0.25
.......
0.25
0.25
0.50
1.00
:::;;
07A
. .-
0.25
1d
L/H = 5.000
1(/
ZA
..
..
2.500
1(/
<,
...J
..
<,
L/H
IE
Ul
Eo<
-l ~
...J
0:::
1(/
Ul
L/H = 1.250
0.625

(N = I, /L = 0.10, h/H = 0.50)
10
L/R.
Hi
L/H = 0.625
L/H = 2.500
L/H = 1.250
L/H
5.000
ut
10'
or-
';;
.....0
...U
r.<I
<,
Ul
....
'"
0
.......
Z
::J'
C
r.<I
...:l
o<
fIl
Ul
Po
'-'
';;
r-,
lit
~tA'
ZA
..
...:l
1.00
Id
2.00
4.00
::J
0..
....
11/
Q25
. 0.25
" Q50
.
0.50
.50
1.00
2.00
.50
.~
,-
ZA'
0.25
0.25 '
~
<,
r..r
fIl
r-,
ZA
OBA
~~
.~
r.<I'
N
10',
r.<I
...:l
e<:
10'
1.00
1.00
2.00
'"'.00 Id
r-, 2:00
4.00
.00
mm~
-I II
1
LIRA
10
Figure,2-l08
LIRA
10
,- 10
-LIRA

,
(N = l..e/L = 0.25 and 0.75, h/H = 0.50)
uf
LIRA
10
uf
l..
L/H = 0.625
L/H = 2.500
L/H = 1.250
10'
~~
ft
::
Q
r.:l
.0
Eo<
)-
r.:l
...:l
..,,
.....
....
'"
.~
If)
r.:l
Eo<
:::>
Q
r.:l
...:l
o
tr:
to..
~
Hi
0.
ft
-;
-,
I,
1d
ZA
0.25
0.50
.~
rn
...:l
:::>
Hi
4.00
10
LIRA
091.
-~
~.OO
10
'\
.....j-...
I
1
LIRA
~
,,
~
10
LIRA
,.
"
~
Figure 2-109
10'
HI
ZA
0.25
ZA
Q25
r-
IIII~
~.50
-" 0.5C HI
I.OC
2.00
4.00 :- Id
1.00
.00
4.00
1m
..
I II
Hi 1
ZA
0.25
0.50
1.00
2.00
1.00
2.00
0..
:::i1
<,
r.:l
L/H = 5.000

(N = l,R./L = 0.50. h/H = 0.50)
10
LIRA
Ie!
L/H = 0.625
1ft
,-,
"
'-
r.:I
~
U
r.:I
...l
0.
~
<,
Cl
r.:I
...l
...:
o
rn
~
ZA
lrf
ZA
..
..
rJ
rn
...l
ld
ld 1
<,
1.00
~2.00
4.00
Il.
= 5.000
lm
. L/R...:
ZA
ZA
0.25
0.50
1.00
2.00
4.00
1.00
2.00
4.00
,
L/R...
Figure 2-110
10
l'
L!R...
10

(N =.1, R./L = 0.10, h/H = 0.75)
lIf
1.00
2.00
..
r-,
1d
.00
... ,--,..
L/R...
,.
10' .
..
.50
I 1
10
B
=~
0.25
0.50
0.5 0
.~
''-
0.2 5
0.25
;:;1
lOA
DR
Ul
"
L/H
1rf
.~
'-"
'-
L/H = 2.500
.....
I'
~
~
lrf
'8
r..
..,,
.....,
'"
.e
Ul
r.:I
~
<,
L/H = 1.250
10
1d
L/H
10'
0.625
L/H
= 1.250
L/H = 2.500
L/H
5.000
10'
~
~
~
:::
.0
Q
eLI
...u
<,
Ul
,
.....
....
w
...
P.
~
~
Q
eLI
...:I
.~
Ul
<,
HI
ZA
<,
HI
I:l.
~
HI1
llA
10
.50
1.00
2.00
4.00
Figure 2-111
LIRA
.00
L/R~
10

(N = 1, i/L = 0.25 and 0.75, h/H = 0.75)
O.5Ot-
H!
1.00
"
2.00
4.00 Id
fmB ~
4.00
10
LIRA
1.00
<,
0.25
i\..
0.25
.50
.50
1.00
2.00:
4.00
.::>
ZA
0.25
0.25
eLI
Ul
...:I
ZA
Ul
::>
.~
eLI
HI
BIll ~
eLI
...:I
P::
<,
HI
10
LIRA'
lll/
L/H = 0.625
lit
::
.0
r<l
<,
f-<
....,.
'"
r<l
...:I
.j
tn
-,
<,
0.
::"
10'
r-,
<,
lA
0.25
0.50
1.00
2.00
4.0C
<,
.~
'~
tr:
...:I
HI
,~
-"
..
12A
10'
lA'
0.25
Vl
P::
;:J
10'
~-
3:=
-~
,r<l
-z
L/H = 5.000
.f-<
L/H = 2.500
Vl
U
r<l
...:I
...,,
10'
L/H = 1.250
"'
11/ 1
lA
0.25
0.50
1.00
<,
"
2.0 0
4'.00
0.50
0.50
1.00
2.00
4.0 10'
2.00
111
1.00
4.00
I I
LIRA
-,
lA
0.25
10
Figure 2-112
1 '
'10 .
L/R:..
'
LIRA
10

(N = 1,
= 0.50, h/H = 0.75)
e n.
LIRA
10
11/
L/H = 1.250
L/H = 0.625
HI
~-~
~
~
:;-
.0
<,
o
w
....l
r.-
00
f-<
t-'
'"
'"
P::
f-<
Z
.'::>
Cl
....l
..:
.~
Hi
"
L/H = 2.500
<,
~ ~~
.. I
oo
0.
~
~
<,
<,
Ht
..
<,
.~
ta
....l
Id
::>
c,
ZA
r-..
ZA
.~~
"13A
!'>
..
.50
.50
1.00
2.00
4.00
1.00
r-, 2.00
4.00
Hi
~
ZA
ZA
0.25
-, 0.50
0.50
Ht
I
1\-' 0.25
0.25
0.25
,
L/H = 5.000
1.00
1.00
2.00
4.0 0
2.00
4.00
Ht
Id
Wi
H/
.
1 .
..
'
10
LIRA':.
'.
":::'i/R/o
>
Figure 2-113
1
i,
~--
.:~
'''L!R:.:
10';:

(N = 2, ~/L = 0.10, h/H = 0.10)
10 .
.',
.\ -;
LIRA
H/
L/H = 0.625
L/H
10'
L/H
L/H = 2.500
1.250
= 5.000
10'
~
~
c
rLI
~
:::
-S
.0
<,
Ul
rLI
~
....
0
'"
'"
.~
0-
-z ~
<,
::J
<,
.~
rLI
..:I
<
u
sn
Hf
ZA
0.25
"
rJ
tr:
...:I
Hi
::J
-,
.5 OF Ht
0.50
1.00
2.00
4.00
ZA
0.25
f'l25
0.50
0.50
I.oe
2.00
4.oe
Z",
ZA
0.25
Ul
rLI
0::
10'
...:I
...,
.....
10'
I.oe
1.00
2.00
lA.oo
2.00
4.00
"
Id
0..
::g
14A
Hf 1
10
L/R"
, 10
LIRA'
,10
L/R....
LIRA
"
Figure 2-114

(N = 2, ilL = 0.25, h/H = 0.10)
10
1(1'
-:
,T'
L/H = 0.625
L/H = 1.250
Hf
..c
L/H
= 5.000
HI'
1m
00
.-...
L/H = 2.500
"-
Cl
f.Ll
E-<
U
f.Ll
<,
.......
-z
."
III
Po
~
~
E-<
:::
<,
cf.Ll
....:I
<
U
tr:
f.Ll
,
'"
.....
H1'
....:I
""0::
H1'
III
.'
let
<,
ZA
0.25
0.50
1.00
2.00
4.0C
..
.~
f.Ll
u:
....:I
Hi
ZA
ZA
Q25
0.25
0.50
.50
1.00
I'-..
2.00
4.00
<,
ZA
0.25.
-, 0.50
Hi
1.00
1.00
2.00
2.00
'" .00
4.00
ld
Po
::i1
15A
Hf 1
10 ..
..
10
L!R A
L/Ri
10
, L/R...
"
Figure 2-115
1 - '

(N = 2, /L = 0.50, h/H = 0.10)
"
Hf
L/H = 0.625
L/H = 1.250
ut
..L/H
L/H = 2.500
II
.........
ft
....
~
Cl
r.l
Eo-
...,
'"
'"
Cl
,..;j
o<
CIJ
10'
lit
ZA
lJ.
ZA
'-"
....
ft
HI
~
<,
.-.
r.l
CIJ
,..;j
<,
Id
::J
c,
ZA
"-
&E:;;m
::g.
16A
-,
ZA
rtl
r.l.
r.l
-,
.-
r;..
::J
-,
lit
EI
,..;j
.c
5.000
rtl
U
r.l
p::
EoZ
<,
Id
1.
LIRA
10
0.25
0.25
.50
1.00
2.0 0
4.00
..
10
LillA
Figure 2-116
"-
0.50
0.50
1.0C
2.00
4.00
0.25
0.25
1.00
2.00
1.00
<,
2.00
4.00
4.00 Id
ItlWlm
LIRA
10

(N = 2,!l IL = 0.75, h/H = 0.10)
0.50 lit
LIRA
10
Id'
..
'.
LIB = 1.250
LIB = 0.625
1ft
LIB = 2.500
LIB = 5.000
1ft
'
.---..a
r.t:I
<,
...."
E-o
r...
-z
::>,
Q
r.t:I'
....:I
..:'
u
tr:
17A
,
,
Po
"
<,
.......
ZA
<,
1fi
.mml ~
<,
'
r.t:I
tr:
....:I
1fj
::>
Po.
::;:
~ ZA
1ff
10
ZA
rJ)
r.t:I
0:
E-o
Hi
~~
8
....I
....:I
..,'"
1\
10'
rJ)
U
r.t:I
...'"
, 0.50 1fi
0.50
.50
0.50
I.00
2.00
4.001 '
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
'ZA
~I:O0
s~mggr!2.00
1:00
1.00
2.00
4.00
2.00
4.0 0
Hj
4.00
.,
10
I'
LIRA
Figure 2-117
LIRA
.;" 19__
LIRA'

(N = 2. ~ / L = O. 10. h / H = O. 25 )
'--i./RA
10
'
1ft
L/H = 0.625
L/H = 1.250
HI'
L/H = 2.500
L/H = 5.000
HI'
~
~
::
-'"
.0
r-'u
w
<,
...
'"
0
tw
.~
'"0-
~
~
r--
::
::>
<,
.0
,;j

A.
Hi
ZA
0.25
0.50
1.00
2.00
0 .25
0;50
1.00
2.00
~ZA
ZA
0.25
1'\ 0.25
.50
0.50
1.00
2.00
4.00
2.00
.'
4.00
1.00
4.00
4.00
-:::s
,
l8A
10
10
LIRA
Figure 2-118
LIRA
10
LIRA
10
LIRA

(N = 2. P. /L = 0.25. h/H = 0.25)
10'
lIi
10'
L/H
Ht
0.625
L/H =
L/H = 1.250
2.500
L/H
= 5.000
Ht
~
~
E-<
::"
.0
<,
U
W
..'l
....
....'"
p::
E-<
Z
.~
Ul
0.
"'-'
<,
....
..'l
rJ
o<
rn
<,
rn
..'l
Hi
Il.
::;;
19A
I"
ZA
ZA
1'\
0.25
0.25
0.50
1.00
2.00
Cl
<,
H!
ZA
..,
ZA
r...
w
let
Hi
Ul
0.25
0.25
0.50
0.50
0.50
1.00
2.00
4.00
<,
let
1.0o'
1.00
2.00
4.00
2.0C
4.00
..
ld
4.00
,.
H/
10
LIRA
...
L,.:'R"
10
10
.
.L/R~
'..:
~,
-:
Figure 2-119

(N = 2, R..I.L = 0.50, h/H = 0.25)
10
LIRA'
H/
L/H = 0.625
L/H = 1.250
Ht
---
::
-'"
.c
...u
r.J
<,
l>.
'Po"
-...
Z
'"
::J
Q
r.J
...:l
...:
u
tn
'-'
::
-,
.~
r.J
rn
...:l
Hi
<,
::J
0.25
0.50
1.00
2.00
HI 1
10
~.50
1.00
2.00
4.00
4.00
Po.
"-
HI
10-
LIRA
0.50 H/
0.50
~I:OO
1.00
<,
2.00
2.00
4.00
~4.00
Hi
~
1
'L/R A
10

(N = 2, tiL = 0.75, h/H = 0.25)
0.25
0.25
-, ZA
0.25
ZA
Figure 2-120
ZA
LIRA
20A
ZA
H/
lit
.~
r.J
p::
!!
L/H = 5.000
r.J
...:l
,
'"
t-'
'"
HI' I,
L/H = 2.500
. LIRA
10
lit
L/H
= 0.625
L/H
10'
---
"
= 1.250
L/H = 2.500
Eo-
r.:l
.J
'"
....
w
'"
<,
.,
Po
P::
Eo-
Z
::J
<,
r.:l
.J
-eo
rn
'-'
"
1ff '-
..
.~
r.:l
rn
...:l
025
.50
Hf 1
ZA
~~
'1.00
Hi
"
..
2.00
4.00
10
L/R"
Figure 2-121
.~ ~ ~
Ie
1'-'
ZA
::J
p.,
-"
m m
.
m.
.~
r.:l
~ ~
$lR
.,-
<,
10' 1\
'8
r..
Cl
2lA
-.,
.0
r.:l
= 5.000
10'
"-
Cl
L/H
0.25
0.25
0,50
ZA
0.25
.50
9,50
1.00
2.00
4.00
~
ZA
Hi
HI
1.00
1.00
2.00
4.00
. 2.00
4.00
1d
I'll
1 ~
L/R"
10
10
L/R"

(N = 2,1- IL = 0.10, h/H = 0.50)
10
L/R"
1d
L/H =
0.625
L/H
lIfamm
L/H = 2.500
1.250
L/H = 5.000
II
..-..
...
...
......
0
::"
..c
-8
<,
E.-
I
rn
...:l
'"
,....
0
I:l::
..,.'"
E.-
...:l
..:
U
tr:
10'
a.
"
<,
ZA
lIf
ZA
<,
.~
Vi
...:l
1d
0.25
.50
0.50
1.00
2.00
. --
1.00
2.0C
4.00
4.00
: 1
22A
10
i./R~
Figure 2-122
L/R~
10
L/R~
10
1.0C
10

(N = 2, ~/L = 0.25, h/H = 0.50)
111'
1d
::l'l
1d
.50
;Ii
2.0C
4.0C
p..
ZA
0.25
0.25
0.25
.50
1.00
2.00
ZA
.~
.
... ...
~
<,
111'
rn
10'
LIRA
lit
..
L/H = 0.625
10'
t-'
'"
'"
8"'
o-l
'",
.0
r...
rol
p:;
E-o
Z
::J
~
Cl
rol
o-l
o<
til
-'
10'
10'
am
.....I
"'
.0.
'-'
'-
"
.....
lii
~,~O'50
~
1.00
,
10
L/R",
Figure 2-123
1.00
. 2.0 0
<,
4.0 0
2.00
4.00
....
ld' 1
.~
L/R",
. 10
0.25
0.25
0.50
" 0.25
i'
Z"
ZA
Z;'
4.00
c,
OfF
Z~
0.2 5
O.50
I.OC
-, 2.00
.~
rol
.~
HI ,-.
<,
~.
::J
HI
\.
:::il
23A
L/H = 5.000
---
<,
rol'
L/H = 2.500
L/H = i.250
"
::.-
rol
E-o
a~"0.50 HI
~~!
_
.~ 2.00
i ,o o
. _ ' 4 . 0 C ld
.
1
10
. L/R",-

(N = 2. ~/L = 0.50. h/H = 0.50)
'10
L/R",
HI
LIB
~.
LIB
1.Z50
LIB = 5.000
Z.500
--.
"-
"..0
ill
<
U
rtl
E-<
til
.~
til
ill
p::
E-<
Z
....
'"
'"
mml1
~'
...,
-,
'-'
<,
o 1.~-
ill
...:
U
...:I,
...:I
00
00
p.,
::.;
~
left
1
24-A
ZA
11'11111111111
0.25
0.2 50.50
1.00
2.0 O'
0.50
1.00
<,
2.06
4.00
4.0 O'
~
11'1'
10 . __
LIRA
Figure 2-124
-, ZA
0-
i<J
LIRA
10
LIRA
10

(N = 2, llL = 0.75, h/H = 0.50)
1I0
Z
:5
0.50 h
1.00
2.00
, 1 I-_ , I' 1",,"1I1!
LIRA
10
'1'1' 1 d
L/H = 0.625
L/H = 1.250
Ht
L/H
MD
"'""'
~
-S
.0
...o
r.:l
<,
...:I
.....
en
"
Z
::J
0
r.:l
...:I
..:
o
tn
'10'
0-
"
<,
HI
I,
ZA
.~
r.i'
fIl
...:I
0;25
0.2~
<,
Hi -
::J
ll.
Hf 1
<,
L/R...
10
..
?A
OJ
~
-'"
25A
Ht
ZA
.~
r.:l
....
L/H = 5.000
<,
10'
r..
0::
2.500
OJ
r.:l
..,
0.50
.50
0.50
1.00
2.0C
4.00
1.00
2.00
~.
1
~
Figure 2-125
L/R...
..
"
10
L/R...
10

(N = 2. ~/L = 0.10, h/H = 0.75)
I.OC
2.OC
4.001
L/R...
0.25
-,
0.50 1f1
1.00
2.00
4.00 ld
10
H/
L/H = 1.250
L/H = 0.625
Hf
L/H = 2.500
Hf
.....r:
0
rLI
U
rLI
...:l
..0
-S
<,
rn
P::
,~
CXI
::J
0
rLI
...:l
<
u
fIl
ZA
rn
0-
~
~
<,
Hf
ZA
Hi
0.25
0.50
1.00
<,
2.00
<,
.~
'rLI
fIl
...:l
0..
Hf 1
10
LIRA,
Figure 2-126
<,
~OO
::J
::s
26A
Hf
,.
.~
rLI
,
.....
'"
N
-- -
Hf
r..
L/H = 5.000
,LIRA
10
0.25
0.25
0.25
-,
.50
.50
1.00
2.00
4.00
~
1
ZA
ZA
1.00
1.00
2.00
1"'4.00
~
1
LIRA
10
0.50 Hf
2.0C
4.00 ld
~
10
LIRA,

(N = 2, ilL = 0.25, h/H = 0.75)
HI
L/H
HI
0.625
L/H
,...,
ft
0
r><
E-<
o
r><
::
....
JJ
.,
<,
..,'"
P::
E-<
Hf I I } 111111111111
S
.~
0.
'-'
I II
.,I
.......::Ir><
N
~~ .
0.25
::>
<,
0.50
0
r><
.~
rn
..
r><
rn
...::I
1.250
--...----rNTr
2.500
L/H
'1-..IIINJllll'IJ
5.000
Hf
I I} 1IlIHllJIII I I IIIH/
ZA
rO.25
I 1-.......1 II
uux i nx r :
0.50
.50
0.50
2.00
<,
2.00
t4.00
2.00
4.00
4.00
~Hf
1.00
1.00
1.00
4.00
Po.
r"'LT'""T'T'l' rTl"iI""""""
I \l>UII !'illl,-' ZA
0.25 .
2.0C
::>
L/H
r"I:'TTT"""""'
1.00
I<,
Hi
I I'J N 1111111111 I I III . I 1 1>11 \111111111 I I ! II
I. ZA
.....
...::I
+-H
1 1'l111mINJ
H/
II
ft
-,
Id
....'I
Hf I
1
27A
I I "I'!!' 1111
10
LIRA
I I I'
1
Figure 2-127
I I 111'1'1'1111110 I I 1"
LIRA
1111111'11111 I I I II
10
LIRA

(N c 2, ilL = 0.50, h/H = 0.75)
I '1'1'111'1111110 1III'Hf
LIRA
~IlH
L/H
Ht
.
r.:I
~
::"
.0
<,
p::
......,
::J
C
r.:I
...l
u
rn
S
1
.~
rn
r.:I
0-
"
"-
ld
.~
...l
<,
ZA
<,
~~
0.50
Po.
0.25
<,
Ht
r-,
2.00
10
Figure 2-128
10
LIRA
10
LIRA'
0.25
0.50
'.
let
m
1
10
. LIRA'
Scaled average unit reflected impuise

(N = 2, ilL'; 0.75, h/H = 0.75)
Hf
1.00
2.00
4.00
ZA
2.00
.
Hi 1
Wi~
4.00
4.00
Hi
I"
~ ~0.50
1.00
0.50
1.00
1.00
2.00
4.00
ld
ZA
0.25
~0 . 25
LIRA
ZA
1-
::J
ft
.~
u:
L/H = 5.000
r.i
2.500
"<;
:::ll
28A
L/H =
L/H = 1.250
r-,
10'
rn
0.625
.~
U
r.:I
...l
'",
e,
HI
LIB
let
0.625
LIB
L/B= 1.250
2.500
LIB
5.000
11/
,.....
."..
M
.c
....
.,
lil
Eo<
U
lil
..:I
<,
ro-
......
.
..
"
Eo<
....z
!C
0.
g:
,
....
....
11/
.....,I
lil
.
....
let
ZA
0.25
HI
lil
..:I
<
U
(JJ
-..
<,
1.00
lil
2.00
.00
(JJ
..:I
ld
~.50
.50
0.50
0
0
<,
ZA
.0.25
ZA
0.25
E ~I:OO
~1.00
2.00
4.00
.00
4.00
ld
II
0.
HI
)l
29A
let1
LIRA
10
: v-.
Figure 2-129
10
LIRA'
LIRA
10
'-
-:
LIRA
10
let
L/H = 0.625
L/H = 1.250
L/H = 5.000
L/H = 2.500
10'
10'
,-.,
~
Cl
ILl
~
r...
-z
,
........
N
0-
~
~
"-
<,
..-l
...:
o
fIl
r-,
Hi
"
..-l
lei
1.00
2.0 0
<,
4.00
0.25
0.2 5
r-,
0.50
0.50
1.00
1.00
2.00
4.0 0
2.0C
4.0C
lei
L/R~
10
L/R~
10
L/R~
10
L/R A
Figure 2-130
Hi
0~
30A
0.25
0.50
0.50
1.00
2.00
4.00
.~
ILl
ZA
ZA
0.25
ta
ZA
ZA
I1l
c
ILl
Hi
.~
ILl
~
i\
aI
U
ILl
Hi
I1l
..-l
.0
<,

(N = 3, /L = 0.25 and 0.75, h/H = 0.10)
10
lcf
L/H
Itt
= 0.625
L/H
L/H = 2.500
1.250
L/H = 5.000
HI
--
ft
<,
~
<,
E-<
Z
::J
"'0.
'-'
ft
Hi
...:I
-.....
.~
rn
Id
!i
"
.00
::J
0.50
1.00
2.00
4.00
~ ~
0.50
9 50
I.00
~1.0C
2.OC
4.OC
2.00
4.0C
..Hf
.....
31A
-;
10
LiR... __
.J'
..
. ., .
l.~
10
z' L/R:..,
-
1
'jj
'-
..'
10 "
L/'R
'
_
.. A -,oj'"
.-._.... ,
i. \.,
"
Figure 2-131

(N = 3, tiL = 0.50, h/H = 0.10)
Hi
Id
.
r' ,
. .
ZA
0.25
Po.
-"
ZA
0.2 5
t-.....
0.25
0.25
0.50
1:00
2.00
r.i
rn
.ZA
ZA
<,
...:I
...:
III
.~
0
r.<. .
U
10'
....r.<
,
'"
........
w
10'
...:I
tl::
-"'
.0
0
r.<
E-.
r.<
r::t:
.......'",
e-
--z
Eo<
.0
<,
.~
<,
0
r.<
.~
...1
..:
U
tn
ui
r.<
tn
...1
ui
fHJ
~E
ZA
ZA
Zt;
0.25
.0.25
O. 25.
0.50
'" 05~
~ IiJi
0.50
1.0
2.00
4.00
Ht
If!
1"-
0.25
= 5.000
"-
ZA
il=
LIB
t=~
t:""
.~
"
II
<,
= 2.500
u/
"'
S
"'
.0.
LIB
O.50
. I: OC
2.00
r-, 4.00
1.0
-,
2.00 ,
4.0 0
1.00
2.00
4.00
Hi
Hi
i=
c,
;::g
Id'
32A
mf
1
LIRA
10
LIRA
10
...
Figure 2-132
LIRA
10

(N = 3, /L = 0.10, h/H = 0.25)
LIRA
10
Id'
10'_
L/H = 0.625
L/H = 1.250
L/H = 2.500
10'
L/H = 5.000
<,
-.c
t-<
...,
........
'"
<,
III
U
W
...:I
.I
;...
III
0::
t-<
::>
0.
.-
...:I
tn
...:
U
tr:
::s; ~
ZA
-".,
.~IIIIl'\.IJI~
"
<,
<,
...
...:I
::>
c,
::g
1"-
0.25
0.50
m
~
O.50
Figure 2-133
0.50 Hf
1.00
2.00
4.00
..
10
... 'L/R
A
10'
Hi
LiRA
ZA
0.25
ZA
O. 25
2.00
4.OC
2.0C
<,
4.00
Ht~ml
I. 00
1.00
ID
33A
10'~
10. '
LIRA

(N = 3, L/L = 0.25 and 0.75, h/H = 0.25)
10
LiRA
H1'
L/H
= 0.625
10'
--.
Cl
~
E-'
:::
.c
Z
::J
'"
Cl
~
VI
a.
.~
~
<,
r-,
"
...l
ta
Hi
..
0.50'
1.00
2.00
<,
4.00
4.00
::J
ZA
025
'\.
.
0.50
0.50
1.00
2.00
.~
tn
lit
ZA I
0.25
r-, ZA
0.25
<,
...l
-e
Hi
.~
E-'
L/H
= 5.000
Ht
r...
p::
L/H = 2.500
,
....
= 1.250
VI
...l
.....
<,
L/H
10'
ZA
0.25
0.50 Hf
1.00
1.00
2.00
4.00
.00
4.00
Hi
0-
::::s
34-A
Hi 1
LIRA
10
Figure 2-134
LIRA
10
LIRA
10

(N = 3, ilL = 0.50, h/H = 0.25)
LIRA
10
Hf
LIB = 0.625
LIB = 1.250
LIB =
L/H = 2.500
5.000
10'
10'
::"
.0
<,
'""
rtl
...
rtl
0.
C<::
"
<,
<,
....l
>il
in
....l
..:u
tr:
~
.~
ld
::J
~
.
025
ZA
0.25
ZA
0.25
0.50
1.00
2.00
4.00
::J
0
-,
Hi
!!
.~
-'z""
....l
0
--"
'"
.......
10'
\.
0.50
0.50
1.00
2.00
4.00
1.00
2.00
r-,
4.00
'J 10'
'.
1.00f
2.00~
400,
"
35A
LIRA
10
Figure 2-135
ld
Hf 1
0.25
0.50.Ie 10'
c,
ZA
LIRA
10
LIRA

(N = 3, f/L = 0.10, h/H = 0.50)
10
10
LIRA'
J.
Hf
L/H = 0.625
L/H = 1.250
L/H = 2.500
L/H = 5.000
10'
10'
mI
~
~
::
.0
Cl
w
.....
o
w
<,
,
'"
....
.....
co
VI
Po
~
~
::
Cl
W
.~
<
rn
.50
1.00
2.00
.00
tn
..J
1d
0..
;:;J
1.00
2.00
4.00
2.00
4.00
1d
II
10
Figure 2-136
0.50 Hf
0.50
1.00
.50
1.00
2.00
<,
4.00
0.25
0.25
HI 1
LIRA
36A
ZA
.25
0.25
<,
I"-
Hf
ZA
10'
~-ZA
mmi
ZA
.~
..J
mmm
....W
~
VI
..J
.....
10'
10
LIRA
10
LIRA
10
LIRA

(N = 3, LIL = 0.25 and 0.75, h/H = 0.50)
HI
-r:
L/H = 0.625
lit
--.
"~
.0
iLl
<,
f-<
Po
p::
s-
<,
<,
.0
iLl
...l
..:
u
tn
--
"
r-,
Hi
.
."
tn
...l
..
Id
4.0 0
.~
tl.
lit
ZA
ZA
,zA
{OC
. 2.00
4:00
,.
i/R
. A
'0
Figure 2-137
"
'
LIRA
'0
3, ElL
1.00
2.00
4.00
Id
Lilli.
'0
(N
0.50 lit
.50
1.00
2.00
4.00
.
025
0.25
0.25
0.50
025
0.50
I. 00
2.00
-~
iLl
1ft
ZA
:::i1
37A
L/H = 5.000
mt'
."III
iLl
~ ~
SI
.~
'"
Hi
L/H = 2.500
1.250
III
U
iLl
...l
'",
......
. ,
L/H
0.50, h/H
0.50)
, '.
'0LIRA.
,
\ -"',
1fl
L/H
10'
r.:l
~
.0
....ee
0
Ul
'--'
::>
r.:l
...:I
..:
u
tr:
0-
"
:;;
~
'ZA
Hf
..
.~
...:I
lIi
::>
c,
"ll
::.;
11/
.L/R
,
A
38A
ZA
0.25
0.25
-,
0.50
0.50
I.00
r-, 2.0C
4.00
O.50 b lit
1.00
2.00
4.00
1.00
2.00
4.00
1d
II
10
Figure 2-138
ZA
0.25
0.50
1.00
2.00
.4.00
II
ZA
"-
0.25
r.i
II
lit
<,
w'
10'
1\
lit
.~
r.:l
L/H = 5.000
L/H =. 2.500
~. m
sI
~.
P::
= 1.250
Ul
U
r.:l
...:I
..,,
<,
L/H
--
"
:;;
= 0.625
10
LIRA
10
LIRA
11/
10
LIRA

(N = 3, /L = 0.10, h/H = 0.75)
"
L/H;" 0.625
::
~
.0
<,
...:I
I
rn
0-
rz.
..,,
....
....'"
::>
...:I
u
tn
,~
P::
10'
Ii
10'
rn
~
~
<,
Hi
0.25
.~
...:I
0.5 0
1.0
2,0 0
4,00
Hi
::>
0.25
0.25
0.25
ZA
Z;"
ZA
ZA
<,
(fJ
L/H = 5.000
10'
~
~
Cl
L/H = 2.500
L/H = 1.250
H1
-,
0.50
mO. 50
1.00
2.00
-,
4.00
1.00
2.00
1.00
2,OC
<,
0,50 10'
4,OC
4.00
Hi
c,
39A
HI I
L/RA
10
Figure 2-139
L/RA
10,
10 .
L/R A

(N = 3, /L = 0.25 and 0.75, h/H = 0.75)
. L/R A
"
10
lIf
L/H = 0.625
L/H
- HI
.-
U
rLI
L/H = 2.500
1.250
L/H = 5.000
Hi
>
-;
rLI
Cl
Eo<
.0
<,
rn
r..
......,
Eo<
0-
""
Cl
.~
rLI
...:l
r.i
...:I
rn
HI
rn
ld
let1
40A
-7
10
L/Ri._
Figure 2-140
1m ~ == ZA
ZA
0.25
0.25
-,
0.50
1.00
<,
4.00
4.00
LIRA
10
LIRA
10

(N = 3, ~/L = 0.50, h/H = 0.75)
O.5O~ HI
1.00
2.00
4.OC
2.00
2.00
.00
:>
ll.
:::il
ld
e~ 0.50
1.00
0.50
1.00
2.00
<,
ZA
0.25
ZA
0.25
:>
.~
rLI
P::
I ......
I
rn
...:I
Hi
LIRA
10
ld
Hf
L/H = 0.625
Ht"Emm
L/H
.~
= 1.250
L/H = 2.500
L/H
= 5000
.......
-.c....
....
ft
r.:I
Eo<
<,
CJ
r.:I
...:I
r..
r.:I
'",
""
I-'
0>
II:
....ZEo<
~
r.:I
...:I
<
CJ
rn
HI
R=If
ZA
ttl
ttl
Q,
'-'
....
ft
ZA
. ti!
..
<,
r.:I
tn
...:I
~
1.00
1.00
2.00
4.00
1.00
2.0
4.0
. --
Id
0.50~1lJ'
0.50
0.50
0.50
1.00
2.00
0.25
0.25
0.25
025
-~
ZA
ZA
.~
10'
2.00
4.0
tit
Po.
::>l
....
ti! 1
41A
J-J-I
L/R.
10
Figure 2-141
'10'
LtR.
10
LIR,A

(N = 4. ilL = 0.10. h/H = 0.10)
I! 'II" 1111
. 10
L/R.
I'
Ie!
Lin = 0.625
Lin = 1.250
mB
Uf~
Lin = 2.500
Lin = 5.000
IEml Hf
....
ft
or.LI
f-
.c
...
........
..
a1
r.LI
'",
.....
CD
.p.
r...
r.LI
'M
..
.E:
l:l:
f-
...z
.::
;:l
~
........
.J'
r.LI
r.LI
;:l
fll
ll.
...
)!
Idl-'I rx utuu uu
1l~~ld
~ ZA
:1025
1dll
Id'llI.
,."
ullllll'1l
~'n"nt Id
ZA
10
ZA
LIRA
Figure 2-142
_ld
1
.10
LIRA
1.
11
1'111,,'1'1'1
10
10
LIRA'

(N a 4. ilL = 0.25 and 0.75. h/H a 0.10>
LIRA
I 1'1' Id
L/H =
10'
0.625
L/H
1.250
~
~
rLI
Eo-<
::
-"'
.0
<,
co
'"
-z
~
~
Eo-<
::
;:>
<,
.~
rLI
...l
tn
ZA
~.
tn
;:>
Hi
1--
<,
1.0
I.OC
2.0C
4.0C
2.0C
4.00
$'
;:;1.
43A
Hi 1
10
LIRA
lo.so
0.50
0.50.
1.00
2.00
Q.,
0.25
-;
<, 0.25
-,
rLI
..:
Hi
...l
Zp.
025
ZA
.~
"'a.
5.000
10'
.~
lIi
,
'"
.....
-..
<,
L/H =
rLI
...l
rLI
P::
Hi
2.500
L/H =
10
LIRA'
;i
---lllll"lH.I.Ill;0.50
4.00
JI Hi
; LIRA:
HI
10
LIRA
.'
Figure 2-143
(N = 4. /L = 0.50
h/H = 0.10)
Hi
1.00
2.00
~
10
ZA
0.25
L/H = 1.250
L/H = 0.625
. 10'
1m ~
L/H = 2.500
L/H = 5.000
,-...
." .0
r.tl
-8
r..
Ul
10'
1m
<,
...
r.tl
<,
r.tl
.,,
....
""'"
;:l
r.tl
...:I
o<
tn
0-
ft
"-
<,
Hi
.....
<,
r.tl
...:I
;:l
c,
::;;
4-4A
1m
ZA
....I
...:I
.-...
10'
Ul
p::
10'
ld
ZA
z,.
.0.25
0.2 5
_ 0 . 50
I.00
2.00
I
4.00
mm
HI 1
<,
LIRA
Figure 2-144
-,
<,
0.50
1.00
2.00
" 4.00
10
ZA
0.25
0.25
0.50
1'-
0.50
~I.OC
~I.OO
let
2.OC
4.00
2.00
4.0C
ld
mE
1
LIRA
10
LIRA
10

(N = 4, ~/L = 0.10, h/H = 0.25 and 0.75)
LIRA
10
HI
"
L/H = 1.250
,.....
ft
'~
Q
r.:I
Eo<
t.l
....
....
'"
r.:I
Z
::J
Q
r.:I
...:I
t.l
en
Hi
0-
r-,
.-.
<,
Id
0.25
0.25
0.50
1.00
2.00
4.00
<,
~ ZA
0.25
ZA
ZA
ft
rzi'
en
"
1----
0,50
1----
0.50
1.00
2.00
4.00
,,
H/
A
.\'
2.00
4.00
1 1r
Id
::J.
C.
~
lrf,
"11111'11111
1'1'
10
45A
1.00
...:I.
Ht
-,
.-'"
...:I
r...
.,
1\
L/H = 5.000
" <,
r.:I
ll:
Eo<
-'"E
.0
L/H = 2.500
LIRA
LIRA
10
10
.L/R A
-- LIRA
.'
Figure 2-145

(N = 4, /L = 0.25 and 0.75, h/H = 0.25 and 0.75)
10
H!
L/H = 0.625
lit
::"
.0
....u
<,
...l
r>l
'",
.'"
t-'
",
Ct:
-...
Z
::J
Cl
r>l
...l
...:
u
rn
ZA
'-"
"
ZA
11/
<,
"
..
<,
r>l
tn
ld
::J
Il.
'-
L/H
H/ 1
I
10
LIRA
Figure 2-146
~.1!1.0
H
2.00
5.000
10
LIRA
mm
10'
~ZA
0.25
.~
0.50
1-
"- .50
4.00
4.00
i"'=
f==
~ZA
-<,
.~0.50
0.5 0
1.00
2.0 0
.~
...l
2.500
0.25
0.25
1"- 0.25
~I
46A
ft
.~
0-
10'
r>l
L/H
10'
",
.r>l
1.250
L/H =
1.00
1.00
2.00
4.00
10
L/R A .
Scaled average unit reflected impurse

(N = 4, /L = 0.50, h/B = 0.25 and 0.75)
let
2.00
4.0 0
ld
L/R A
10
H/
..
L/H = 0.625
L/H
10'
>
.c
= 1.250
L/H
= 2.500
E-<
<,
III
....:I
Ii..
..
,
'"
'"
III
0-
" .
E-<'
"-
Z
::J
0
<,
<-
....:I
u
en
r-,
Hf
",
en
.50
1.00
2.QO
.00
.~
....:I
ZA
0.25
Hi
::J'
10'
.lA
0.
':41IQ2.00
~"ZA
25
ZA
O.25
.~
0::
HI
10'
II
::
0
L/H = 5.000
, <,
~O.50
I.00
2.00
4.0(:
0.25
mtt'Iti
0.50
<,
.M~'0.501:
Hi
1.00
I.OC
2.00
4.00
4,00
.-
Id
p..
::>J
Hf 1"- .
.....
47A
L/R A
10
L/R..
10
L/R..
10
Figure 2-147

(N = 4,.2 /L = 0.10, h/H = 0.50>
L/R A
10
Id'
LIB = 0.625
LIB = 2.500
LIB = 1.250
LIB = 5.000
Hf
10'
"
-.,
<,
~
~
...
I
'"
Q
~
...:l
.<
u
ZA
.,
0.
'-"
"
-;
Hi
ZA'
<,
<,
r.i
m
...:l
ld
~,
."'- 0.50
<,
4.00
LV.50
l":"'
HI
I.OC
2.00
It!
1.00
2,00
4,00
1.00
2.00
1.00
200
4,00
.~
025
0.25
0,50
" '0,25
0,50
025
ZA
ZA
.~
p:;
HI
.,
r..
Hi
...:l
.0
II
.-...
4.00
ld
p..
'l
Hi1
. 10
LIRA
Figure 2-148
.L/R A
10
10
LIRA

(N = 4, L/L = 0.25 and 0.75, h/H = 0.50)
10
LIRA'
1ft
LIB = 0.625
L/H = 1.250
LIB
= 2.500
LIB = 5.000
10'
10'
,-..
--
"
"-
o.
W
Eo-<
.0
<,
Vl
,...
,-'"
-z
Vl
0.
"
Eo-<
<,
::>
<,
W
>-l
u<
if)
III
-, ZA
Hf
...
.~
r.a
>-l
Hi
4-9A
Hf
.
LIRA
10
Figure 2-149
LIRA
10
.......
0.50
0.50
Hf
1.00
2.00
4.00
I I
'!
.p..
0.25
0.25
1.00
200
4.00
4.00
400
::>
-,
.1 .......
0.50
1.00
2.00
0.50
1.00
200
0.25
0.25
~~ ZA
;ZA
ZA
.~
Il::
10'
8m
>-l
.,,
Hi
ld
!
LIRA
10

(N = 4, /L = 0.50, h/H = 0.50)
'1
LIRA
10
lrf
...:.......-l-
::!
.-t::::........_
-
~~.:+
:-j;"
~~.. t
.
'''-t< .t....
..]....
~~f
"'4,
~::::: ::::::-h"'
=m.:l
.1''''.,.
. '::I;:::t::L:
. .. ::::I::::I::::t:
.......
:;V..
::4"
....1
..../... ........
j
--' : ~:JIl .
::::
n:::::E3!E
.... 1
"'1'"
"
,-. ~j
-.a:
<.J
...,
.-
....
...'"
.,_.-1-
' :'
_
I i+J::~
. ,.
:~:
.-H
'i::!.!
,'"
.
-+-1- .
.....:!c::::".
ilt
!
..
-." ~ :'i: :::: ::; , _.: ":
..: :(~l!
.
em::.
: .:: ::: ;:1: :=
" , , "
t .
.....
........
- ............. 1' .... -
,.;;1 ..
.[._.j .
.:': it::::::
. 1'" .'..~.,'
1.'''' . "'1":1:::1::,
.
1".1[1
Ir,
t,..
1;""" ...-
<.J
sv
: :1T.:I::oor::r:rr:p::.;
.4i!'J : .
.. wr-:I:...VI... ++y
...J
IJ..
W
,~,:
a:
1'\
1_'" ljf.;I::T7T-R"'...
. I!"H ..... t .. -r-t-t-t-t-i-f-t-t-H:
...-r+++1
0.1
-I" ..
. !c-::t::j: .
f'~LILI+j:':
: 'I .. ,
10
WF 1 W1/6 (Ib If1 2 Ilbl/ 6 )

Figure 2-150
Reflection factor for shock loads on frangible elements
100
...
0::
::>
U>
U>
....
...'",
w
'"
.g:
Pg
TIME
Figure 2-"151
-Pr e s su re t Lmervar La t Lon for a .partially vented explosion

r
104
III
Cl.
.-
0,:0-
103
a:::
=>
en
(/)
0::
N
I
~
\0
.po
Q.
en
<l
C)
=>
~
102
<l
~
101
10-3
10- 2
10-1
CHARGE WEIGHT TO FREE VOLUMN,

Figure 2-152
10
W/Vf
(Ibl/cu ft )
Peak gas pressure produced by a TNT detonation in a partially

contained chamber
10'
10000
s-
~ r--....
1000
W,/w'"
:""
"u
e
...
.'
... ""
.... "'"
.-
".
Go
~
~
".J!'
-'
.....
100
100I' 30
' I
r-.~
<,
r-
10
I
3
I
1
1&1
Ul
.J
"
0.3
"\.
:l
Q.
Ul
Q'
1&1
.J
\
\
0.01
0.1
10
SCALED, VENT AREA, :A/Vl/3
Figure 2-153' Scaled gas impulse (W/V
2-195
= 0.002,
i r/Wl/3 = 20)
100 00
::::'"
s-, ......
100 0
Wv,/WI/a
...... .....
.....
.0
..
..,
.....
U
100
r--.
,...
i"'o
"'"
'"
::::
<,
10 0
.............. ....
~
Q.
W
...J
cl:
(.)
"""
(!)
'I
" """'I"
1Il
cl:
10
''"
i"'o
1Il
...J
1Il
30
I
Q.
.J?'
0.'
10
,
-
1\
, 1
0,01
0,1
10
SCA~ED VENT AREA, A/Vt/ 3
Figure 2-154
Scaled gas impulse (W/Vf = 0.002, i r/Wl/3s= 100)
2-196
"0
-.
ci 0 0
-,
,.
.:.
"
f'
'
100 0
...
...
....
.e.
"'u
.
...
"'i'oo
[',"'"' ....
co.
~
~
J1'
100
........ -.... ......
i"...... ,.........
.....
"'P' w
'00
~,.
'.
l&J
Ul
...J
;;;)
e,
"
2i
Ul
<t
(!)
.......
...
r--
..... ....
l&J
...J
<t
U
Ul
10
Ie
I
10
"- ....... ....
\ i\ ~
o.J
'
1\
\
0
,
,, ,'
'
,
0.0 I
0.1
10
SCALED VENT AREf\. A/V,zn
Figure 2-155
/.
Scaled gas impulse (W/Vf ,; 0.002, i r/wl/3 = 600)

2-197
1000 0
~ ......
...
~l' r..
\00 0
jwp/WIII
~
100
..=:
,,\:~
\1\
E
,
...
3~
10-.
......
.....
"'-....""'-
I3
--r-,.....
1\" -
\00
I
1,0
0.3
,
\,
\
10
..
\.
0.01
..
0.\
10
SCALED VENT AREA, A/Vl/!
Figure 2-156
Scaled gas impulse (W/Vf ~ 0.01~. i r/wl/3 = 20)

2-198
'000 0
.
.
~ .....
~f'
100 0
~ I'--
"""'"
Wp/W va
"'"
100
'"
30
,...
:S
......
u
.
.
I
CL
'"
.....
100
._<7'
....
....... ..... ....
~ ....
~
~
I
1
0.3
=>
a.
1\
Ul
Cl:
(!)
,
'"
W
...J
8
Ul
.... It
'"""'-
Ul
...J
-...
.
.10
0.01
0.1
10
SCALED VENT AREA, A/VII!

Figure 2-157
Scaled gas impulse (W/Vf = 0.015, i r/w l/3 =.100)
2-199
\000 0
......
~~
100 0
I"'-
...
~/W 1/1
..0
!o..
.e'".
.....
--
r-,
..
Q.
.....
10 0
l&J
Ul
...J
:::l
0..
~
(!)
""'"
"""
""
~'"
\,
~
i
10
I"'loo..
'"
Ul
et
i"'oo
1'-oooo
"'r-, ,.....
,
1
0.'
1\
l&J
...J
et
U
Ul
.............
.go
100
I
10
.'
,o
.01
e. ,
10
SCALED VENT A~EA,. A/Vl/3

Figure 2-158
Scaled gas impulse (W/Vf' = 0.015, i r/Wl/3 = 600)

2-200
10000
........ ........
:""'-.
..... ....
'::>
:2
"
I'
~
.;I
...
Q.
.....
....
.9'
.....
100
I~
...............
r-,
1\
'::>
100
50
.....u
/'I#W
....'
...... ...
\000
...
........ ......
f0-
I
I
I
~
i
r
0.1
VI
..J
11.
:E
VI
c(
C)
...
g
0
VI
\
'\0
0.01
0.1
10
SCALED VENT AREA, A/Vl/ 5
Figure 2-159' Scaled gas impulse (W/Vf

2-201
= 0.15,
i r/w1/3
= 20)
1000 0
"
....
'"-
:-...... ......... 100-
~""""t-.... ,...
" 100 0
. 1/1
1-"
~
I000o
100
I
I
.lIo..
.0
.
.
.....U
I'
E
I
...........
'"
1'00.....
\"
.....
10 0
I1J
"]0
I
10
~ .......... ~
Q.
.9'
<,
to-.. ~
0.'
"
(/)
...J
::;)
.\
Q.
~
(/)
C)
,
'\
1\
I1J
...J
(/)
10
,
1
o .01
..
0.1
SCALED VENT AREA
Figure 2c160
\0
A/V/ 13
Scaled gas impulse" (W/Vf= 0.15, i r/Wl!3 = 100)
2-202
.'
w;tw,/s
100
~
t'l
~
........
JO
..........
....
I
10
a.
\.."'.
....
'
. ~.,
VI
(!)
c
...J
VI
:
I ,!-;:--+-....-~-4'-+-+-~-----l--+--+-..j..4-+-l-l+--+-:----I----I-.....j.....J-I..J-W
O. t
10
. 1.01
SCALED VENT AREA, A/Vl13

Figure 2-161
Scaled gas impulse (W/Vf
2-203
0.15. i r / Wl / 3 = 600)
100000
,.
.....
.
...
10000
~
~
:""'-0...
e
I
...
. ,
loo..
........
Q.
:'" .......
r-.. ...
......~
~
~
.......
W,/w l13
~
1000
. ,
' ...
~ I"-
.......
..........
<,
..
'\
100
<,
0.01
I
3
I
1
'"\
\
\
0.1
10
SCALED VENT AREA, A/V!/3

Figure 2-162
--
10
I
30
0.1
... 10.
100
Scaled gas impulse (W/Vf = 1.0, i r/Wl/3
2-204
100)
10 0 0 0 0
.
,
:
,
,
...
1000 0
:::,
'"
.c
.
,
.....u
....
Q.
'"
.....
01
'
Wf/W t/3
-~
.""
~ -
~ ..... ~~.,;
,,
..
.... ..........
~ 1'00..
:::,
....
"1000
-,
t-
'-=
.~
100
I
100
I
30
\0
..
.....
"
t--
r-,
,
\
0.3
,
\
0,01
;
10
0,1
10
SCALED VENT AREA, A/Vl/3

Figure 2-163
Scaled gas impulse (W/Vf = 1.0, i r/Wl/3

2-205
600)'
.-
.a
.
.
.....u
E.
o
C.
roo-
100
o.J
o
0.1
SCALED VENT AREA, A/Vt/!

Figure 2-164
Scaled gas impulse (W/Vf = 1.0, i r /W 1/ 3 = 2000)
2-206
l.LI
IDEALIZED SHOCK PRESSURES
01
Pr
a::
:::>
CIl
CIl
IDEALIZED GAS PRESSURES
l.LI
a::
ll.
Pg
" "
Ig
to
TIME
0) SMALL AND/OR SQUARE CHAMBER"
..
I-
I-
TIME
b) LONG RECTANGULAR CHAMBER
Figure 2-165
Combined shock and gas pressures
2-207
W "'
.0-.
~..-~.- .:::.~.~~.__::t=:.:-~ .I".':_:.
__ ,.
: ~':
_ . J-__
L _.. ::.:1 .,~.
,. r .
_... _;
II:
l?c.J
~
z
-:=~.
If)
--- _.
II:
LLl
>
Z
o
o
toZ
to-
..
-~
.0.4
: :::=-r:-: :..
_. - - L:':~::
----.. [:': .
: _. _.+:'f ,. ---_.. . - l.. .,:
=-_.~
- - -----:-'-- ---"lr. - -_, - _

-. ..::::::- - - . " --- t-- -
0.2
-~~-- _:;'~ :: :l
- - - -. -- --"1..'
r--'
0.02
0.04
0.06
0.08
.-
0.10
TNT conversion.factor for charges
2-208
.. -.;
::~
==i- :~::i:-
CHARGE WEIGHT TO FREE VOLUMN RATIO, W/Vf
Figure 2-166
. _ .. t _ ::
-:- - .. ,..
(Ibs/cu ft )
SIDE
j
GROUND
FRONT
.
'< ,-'"";l.,
",'
"
..:
~ECTION
PL~N,,'.
0) CUBIC THREE' WALL CUErCLE WITHOUJ A ROOF

;' SIDE,
"
,,-. ,
."
FRONT~
"
.W
~ BACK
.,)
. ".'"
' PLAN
SECTION,
b) RECTA'NGULAR
THREE WALL CUBICL.E WITHOUT A ROOF
,
,'.
'"'"
FRONT :;. ',' '.'
SiDE
II
,..~..,
BACK
"-,. ....-",.:.J
..
.""
"
SECTION
f>LAN
, '
c) CUBIC 'THREE WALL CUBICLE WITH A ROOF

SIDE
,~
-'-,
,
I
"
,W I
FRONT+--'-.... -J1+---+BACK
I .,);
.... _.J
.",
SECTION
PLAN
d) RECTANGULAR THREE WALL CUBICLE WITH A ROOF

Figure 2-167
Fully vented three-wall cubicles and

d1rection of blast wave propagation
2-209
"
100
....
......
..
a.
10
l1.
LLI
II::
:;)
(f)
(f)
LLI
II::
e,
~
Z
LLI
(3
Z
:ll:
<
LLI
l1.
00111
10
SCALED DISTANCE, Z (ft/l~/3)

Figure 2-168
Envelope-curves for peak .positive pressure

outsidethree-w~ll cubicles without a roof
2-210
100
-...
Q.
10
<II
ll.
.....
a::
~
(J)
(J)
.....
a::
ll.
~
.....
:.
1.0
.....
c,
10
100
l
SCALED DISTANCE, Z (ft/lb / 3 )

Figure 2-169
Envelope curves for peak positive pressure

outside three-wall cubicles with a roof
2-211
-...
-...
Q.
Q.
W
II::
::J- 20
(/)
(/)
..
.
,
t -'
W
II::
Q.
I-
10
z-
w
0
(.)
::J
~.
<
QOOI
0.01
0.10
1.0
CHARGE WEIGHT TO CUBICLE VOLUME, W/V <lblft')

Figure 2-170
Envelope curves for maxium peak pressure

outside three-wall cubicles
-e
"
SCALED
Figure 2-171
~IST~NCE.Z_(ft/lbs~)
Scaled peak positive "impulse' out t he open front .:of

cubic three-wall ,cubicle without a roof
v
:a
'"
<,
'"
E
,
'iii .
. Q.
_
.
......
~
"-
'"
llJ
.Cf)
-.J
::>
ll.
.,,
.,
....
~
I-
llJ
o
o
llJ
..J
<
o
:_t:l:~:
.. ,.
Cf)
SCALED
Figure 2-172
.DIS~ANCEiZ
(fttibs IJ3) , .
Scaled peak positive impulse out the open front of

rectangular three-wall cubicle without a roof
e
.....
s.
.a
......
20
-'R
..
......
10
loJ
en
...J
::J
Q.
...
.......,
'"
loJ
0
-Z
0
0
loJ
...J
4(
en
SCALED
DISTANCE,:Z (ft/lb''I,)
Figure 2-173: Scaled peak positive impulse beh!nd sidewall of

cubic thre.e~",,,ll .c.J1bic;le without a roof
II
j!III!!II'III
I ' II
l l1 j
illllllll!III!lllIlilliillililUI
5 '
"
SCALED
Figure 2cl74
10
t-t-:
r-' ,... t:
'!
. 20'
DISTANCE, Z (ft/lbs Y3)
Scaled peak positive impulse behind sidewall of

50
100
_.-.
~-=+t=
---~-- _.~ =:-~
.-.
.r.
......
E
'iii
...
20
Q,
r-t
18""
iii!
":I!!
-HTT:;:r:-~~I;. ... +....
I III! I iii! ::i!ililiIIIIiIIIlMlIIIIIIJiHllrm':;iiRFAc~RIJRsTG=Ii!!'mEP;i!lllliffilil

I I ':lL:LlS I
jj
II
",,' ',II
"0
~WIV=0.063
0.125
......
.!r!
UJ
en
-'
::;)
11.
~
'",
...'"....
UJ
-00
-z
0
UJ
-'
<
0
en
,; i
11'1
: 'i ~
;,I
I " ; ! ;1;; .'.
I'
__o___-.
...........
I,': .:
SCALED
Figure 2-175
'~
,-.-t-~ :
....0----
, ."
; n.
~t
-.
.~_J-
.... j.,
!
10
DISTANCE, Z (ft/lbs I/ S)
Scaled peak positive impulse behind backwall of

cubic three-wall cubicle without a roof
50
100
~-=--
,-l=-"",fW-fT!'=
-.....
<-+
-.:t.- .
:1
~I
UNCONFINED
SURFACE BURST
IliiiiTltiiiiiitil
0.055
10
SCALED DISTANCE, Z
Figure 2-176
20
(ft/lbs~3)

'
~
.m
.
20.
SCAI..E.o
Figure
2~177
I ":,
t-t.;'.
I I
! i ~' .u- ~ ~ !ili I:

' :1 ut: !'Til'if
50
DISTANC'E. Z (ft/lbs V3) .
Scaled peak positive impulse out the open tront of

cubic.' three-wall cubicle with a roof
100
100
s-.
.
.
.a
......
!SO
Do
......
.J!>
20 [
ILl
.>
.,.,
0
Q.
~
II i i1IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIPI!laIltiIllI: 1111::llIllilll"
ill'lII
'i>cN"N i 11J 10.027
~-+-+-:-+
en'
...J
:::>
10
ILl
-00
Z
0
ILl
...J
~
en
2 ~:B:~
'I
ti,;;;I,:;,
11~
20
2
:.
SCALEDDISTANCE,Z
Figure. 2-178
!So
(ft/lbs~3)
Scaled peakpoSitive'. impulse out the open front of

rectangular.three-wall cubicle with a roof
...
1=
'"
'E"
'"a.
.&J
"
-
20
~
......
'"
UJ
(J)
J
:J
10IU'~T''''''''
-=t ..:
Q.
-:::IE
'",
'"
'"
.....
IZ
IS
UJ
-a
0
a
UJ
<
0
(J)
11
IS
SCALED
Figure 2-179
10
20
DISTANCE. Z (ft/lb. 1t3)
Scaled peak positive impulse behind sidewall of

cubIc three-wall. cubicle with a roof
II!
Itll"!ll!"I!!!!"!!
10
SCALED
Figure.2-180
20
I
DISTANCE, Z (ftllbs V3 )
Scaled peak positive.impulse behind sidewall of

rectan2ular three-wall cubicle with a roof
.Cl,.,t:t:.1JCl::l'li:
s...
c- :.t~...
ffi
.__ 1-_1-_1:-_ -t,
.Q
...
._-<-_t.
~ 1'.IIj;~-H
<,
E
0
in
'"
Do
20
1-, ..
.uHHHf
'::,
<,
III
I I I 1111111111111,,,,,,,,,,,,rf_
1-..0
.:
- ":.:. "
.
Cf)
...J
::>
a.
N
0
N
N
...
-~
~
If
.HH
5o~u~nHt
1111
IJH.h'Il:HHIIHllllHllI 0.125
+- .....-
W
0
0
W
...J
ct
.., T 1:11':1:
::~ct-l:
:"'-;:':-'~T-~
t 1:.111:j1
C
:-1-: J:.:t '.::;'::
h .
-H
::Ff:t r: .-lllffim Hl1

rTl
'I Ill" 1" I ",'''1 . .. 'j,'
1n
I .:,t I If
. , t.
HHIH
'.
t'
--'TTTI""dt
- 1-
r-
I I
.......,
"
~! i.,fit ,~i:':L .
2_ _
Elltillllifr
t--,
j
~ I
0
Cf)
i;; -_:. _-,:;

,It c :.. \. :::. :
...j ..... , ...
.... I
j;
5
10
20
I . ~ ...
50
SCALED' DISTANCE, Z (ft/lbs!t3)

Figure 2-181

cubic three-wall cubicle with a roof
100
"
HI i i if
:!
.
~'"
:',tt-.-,-
,.1'
.a
ii'
:1,
E
f
"E'"
;r~-
t-t-
f.
'"
t-
:::t ....
['W-"".tltl"!.
i: +l- ,
+.
;_+ '.
Ii,
_.l-+'
- .-+- ...
=t~r
i'YR";I;:'~::I:
'''~ tt III
: ... ,!
tt.;.
~I
I .
t+-
rrr
r~
+-++it
ft.
"'"
HIt,
-j-h
,:C:,-:
"Tt';=millifj'
.-+--++-J=t.:t
r-l :t t - .[
UNCONFINED
,SURFACE
BURST,
.
Do
<1:;:
ttffi
tml:!ti
-i.-4-+ :,.
, :1,
Iii
10
4-
UJ
,"
, :-f-
...J
;:)
ll.
-~
IZ
LLl
0
0
Z
'"
'"
..,.
'"
0
!5 ',_
1:
J.
0
W
...J
<
UJ
~t
I I!
I
!!! I ! ! ! I I ! ! ! ! ! [
!! "
!5
20
10
SCALED
i:;II ~
'i"
i:
!I
Figure 2 cl82
'I'
')
DISTANCE t Z
'.
(ft/lbs~3)

rectangular'three-wall cubicle with a roof
50
100
..
::.&:,; :.~:
.'
....
... , ....
.:,.:1
"
VENT
. OF>ENING :--....
.. .....
.~
4
'
Z=
"
."
'
'.
.. .
R
W~3'
.\...
a) BELOW GROUND STRUCTURE WITH ROOF AT GROUND SURFACE
'.
VENT
OPENING
'.,
.. '"""
',,:,;,-
d /
.~
'
"I
.
.
..
'.
.'.
.'-...1'
.\
.. '* ..
','-:
.,
.......... ,
.
.....,
..... 3
'
..... ..........
'
<t .
z=
d, + d'2 + h +d3
,W ~3
~
. b)' ABOVE GROUND STRUCTURE
Figure 2-183
Four wall cubicle vented through its roof
2-225
..... ....
.....,
1000R
0.4
r ::!
l ! ..
1.0
en, ;
0-
~.
w
a::
:::>
II)
II)
w
a::
e,
IZ
W
o
o
Z
:l'
<
W
c,
-~g
0.7~~
O'~I"_
o.I.~~fIII
0.001 .
O.OO~
0.01
0.05
0.1
SCALED VENTING, A/V2/3

Figure 2-184
Peak positive pressure Qutside of a four-wall cubicle vented

th+ouqh its roof
2-226
1.0
301-,'''1~
i: -:~.':'!:I!':! -...
lq~-t: -"'.. =""'::r.::
L+.::!::f.. '~-[-:; r~t:I!t4JITJ~BTIE
: ..-.-_. --..
: :: -: ..
L-..---:: :::::'" : :.:.:L': 11_:*-.,

__ ~ --:_ _ ~~j~ :=~ -.
1-- ..r:::::::t=:r
20 -
- --. ''''
4 :.. .. , ' ,-.---.
.:.- .: .. _::I ; I -":'8":-':: fE-l-j -- .....
-~
--I....
r- .. - -t,+-t-
I.
..,
!H,.
..I
::::
....
.0
......
o
CD
Ul
j.
10i
ii :'.-
_. . I .
; .. "
--1'
-,
__
:-J.
.. =!1~ .
-I,
'
1---
-.---- 1----1--
.-------+------:
------4--.
--::t: .
__
__
_+._
~_~
:;..c;..:--~'''''T.3---EEEiiI
........
.._- - ..
-~: .. :.:::::
Q.
........,
....
...
........
_
~
.--::
M'
...
': .
..-
.._ ... '._
....__ .,._4.' .
7h1illBIf.t~I_'~
30
i:~=~i;:;~~:~
.-'-UJ
ILl
en
.....
..J
'70
::::>
Q.
ILl
.0
-N
ILl
I-
,~
IZ
..,
......
......
......
N
N
20
15
- :Hn~w
Ul
,1",
-,
.-._nO
100
0.71rttlll
ILl
..J
.!i"E~
en
ILl
..J
:~~~"t- 'll2iH@~
~::.:q'tlt~
-------:--~
mh::!
en
"~~
:
0;1
0.001
0.05
.:::::::
0.10
SCALED DEGREE OF VENTING. AW l / 3/V (lb I/ 3/ f t )

Figure 2-185
Scaled positive impulse outside of a four-wall cubicle vented

throuqh its roof
-'
SIDE
VENT
OPENING""""
. I.
FRONT.....
. I'
~J
-- 1
w
!
!
L--.o' BACK
'I...l""
"":' __ JI
,PLAN
VENT
. OPENING
SECTION
Figure 2-186
Four wall cubicle vented through a wall and

direction of blast wave propa~ation
2-228
100
5
6
7
8
9
10
-...
10
lIJ
20.
Do
a.,
30
ILl
0:
::>
40
CJ)
CJ)
ILl
0:
50
a.
60
70
80
90
100
II
0.1
0.001
0.01
1.0
0.1
SCALED VENTING,AIV%
Figure 2-187
Peak positive pressure at the front of

vented four-wall cubicle
2-229
a partially
.I-
0.001
0.()()5
0.01
0.0!5
SCALED VENTING
Figure 2-188
0.1
,AlV 213
Peak positive pressure at the side of a

partially vented four-wall cubicle
2-230
0.!5
1.0
...
100
2
3
4
5
6
--.
10
9
10.
Q.
4-
W
II::
20
::::>
(/)
(/)
II::
4-
30
1.0
40
50
60.
70
80
90
100
QIB
0.001
0.1
SCALED VENTING,A/V2/J
Figure 2-189
Peak positive pressure at the back of a

partially vented four wall cubicle
2-231
1.0
Pso
POSITIVE PHASE P-T
..
PI
~DEALIZED NEGATIVE
tof
PHASE P-T
to .
APt'SIENT,P
PiG
--Ji[,.~_-
------0.25t
of
POSITIVE
PHASE
DURATION,
--
--
t;f
--
NEGATIVE PHASE
DURATION,t
.
TIME AFTER EXPLOSION
Idealized pressure-time variation
2-232
Pi
NEGATIVE PHASE P-T
to
Figure 2-190
---,
--:.-::;::.:::~=--~-r-
r----']
SHOCK
Pr
IL
DIRECT
.JI
W.
025t
O.
NORMAL
TIME
r1
REFLECTION
r----'.]
I
I
I I
L
.J
WS
. . J\.....,...
\
\
'" ,. ,.
",.
,.""""
",,",
t
tof ..
P~
O.25t
rf
b. O.BLlQUE REFLECTION
ELgu t-e. 2-191. Front wall' loading
2-233
TIME
-J
-e.t
2.0
I!
1.8
ILl
II:
::;)
la
ILl
II:
lL
II:
ILl
1.61
'",
...
'"
~
U
ILl
1.4'
.......
oJ
II:
l;
L2
ILl
:>
~0
en
1.0
0
10
20
30
40
60
PEAK INCIDENT OVERPRESSURE. Pso (psi)
Figure 2-192
Velocity of sound in reflected overpressure

region versus peak
50
~ncident
overpressure
70
75
NUMBERS NEXT TO CURVES

INDICATE THE PEAK INCIDENT
OVERPRESSURE Pso (p~i)
l1.
.....
!!
e,
II
II
e.>
fo-
Z
UJ
o
u..
u.
N
...
UJ
0
'"
UJ
a::
~
rn
rn
UJ
a::
l1.
0
UJ
f0-
UJ
...J
UJ
e.>
U.
a::
10
'20
30
40,
50
ANGLE OF INCIDENCE.
Figure 2-193
60
70
80
(DEGREES).
Reflected pressure coefficient versus angle of incidence
90
II
NUMBERS NEXT TO CURVES.
INDICATE THE PEAK INCIDENT
OVERPRESSURE PoD(pol)
7000
;,
"
: I;
.. , : : :
-Ii t-
:::..'"
.Q
3000
'I, !
,:
: I:
.....
..
.
1+1++
!;
; I
i!
+-
700
.: ;
2000"
500
!:
1500
Co
.....
: 1!
1000
700
He
i!
400
70
50
.'.!
200
,;
30 : 1:
20
::~,
:l!
.-.
t:
::
...
: !h..
,.-.
d:
10 f! ,,,,
1;
:l;
., ,
10
7
5
,,,,"
S
2
1.0
"'
0.1_ ",.
... -: it
JJ , ifF
o
...: ::t-
10
1 .-.
ItH 'if
-I.
20
ttr
+-r-
Of
.
!!-
: U
"":'"
:...:..::'
l l
-!:~
"
, L
"1":
::1.-. ,- ~." ..
~.~
30
40
60
70
ANGLE OF INCIDENCE" (DEGREES)
Figure 2-194
Reflected scaled Lmpul se ':Versus angle of incidence
2-236
80
90
SHOCK FRONT
AT TIME t
L
0) SECTION THROUGH STRUCTURE
PR
W
It:
::J
."
.......
."
(/)
(/)
t, +t o+0.25' o,
W
It:
Q.
t,+td
PR~---
-------- ------- ----TIME

b) AVERAGE PRESSURE-.T1ME VARIATION
Figure 2-195
Roof and side wall loading
t, + to + to'
II
III
o
a:
o
~
o
~
9
ILl
(/)
<
::J:
Q.
ILl
>
t:
(/)
oQ.
II
a:
o
~
o
~
<
::J:
Q.
~.
......._+-+-IH,. ..
."
1.011
ILl
>
HumIli1Ell
~ILl
Z
ILl
...........
..............
.... .... .... .
ILl
>
....
: : :!
-i"-'~
(/)
ILl
..J
;:)
I:
: : .:
o<
..J
ILl
..J
'III
1
1
<l:
;:)
.ILl
..
ltt
0.1
0.1
-t
1.0
WAVE LENGTH ISPAN LENGTH, Lwf/L
Figure 2-196
Peak equivalent uniform roof pressures
2-238
10.0
e
FigUreI2-197.
10
Scaled rise time of equivalent uniform positive roof pressures
Pso
~-~
Ql
....E
I-
Ql
..,Ul
.....
~a:
'" '0
Ql
.....
to
->:
1.0-1-
" 8
"16
Ul
-,
0.1 I
0.1
32
1.0
Wave length / Span length. LWf/L
I
10
POSITIVE PRESSURE
- - - NEGATIVE PRESSURE
100
~
~
...
.....
z
0
tc
a:
10
au
..J
c
(,J
(I)
1.0.
0.1
1.0
10
WAVE LENGTH ISPAN LENGTH I Lwf/L
Figure 2-198
Scaled duration of equivalent uniform roof pressures
2-240
SHOCK
FRONT
-b
w
1r
,
...L--, c
Hs
J:
I
--
c)
.r::..... " "
I~
SECTION THROUGH STRUCTURE
......'"'"
CEPsob+
Coqob
CEPsb+Coqb
w
a:
0.25t01
:::l
Ul
Ul
a:
0t ."
~EPSOb
Tb
tb t-td
-- - -- ---
-_ ......_-
..
tb+to+tof
r
tb+tof - - - - - _ . TIME
b) AVERAGE
Figure 2-199
PRESSURE - TIME
Rear wall loading
VARIATION
SHOCK
DIRECTION
Aoo-SHOCK FRONT
PLAN
L w ..
SECTION
NOMENCLATURE:
L, LENGTH OF SIDE WALL
1
W, WIDTH OF BACK WALL AND FRONT WALL
H , HEIGHT OF ALL WALLS
Ao,AREA OF OPENING IN FRONT WALL
Aw,AREA OF BACK WALL
Lw, WAVE LENGTH OF SHOCK WAVE OF INCIDENT PRESSURE, PI o ,
AT EXTERiOR FACE OF FRONT WALL
Figure 2-200
Idealized structure configuration for interior blast loads
2242
TIME
a. INTERIOR FRONT WALL SURFACE
.. -
TIME
.
.
b. INTERIOR SIDE WALL OR ROOF SURFACE
To -
TZ
TIME
c.
INTERIOR BACK WALL SURFACE
Figure 2-201
Idealized interior blast loads
2-243
"
W.
Wn
.I:
---
I
I
I
I
I
-----
I
I
Fi~ure
2-202
II
iI
---"'---
~--------
------I
3' I .
I
/'~
I I
I
'IJ 3
I
!
-----
I
I
I
' I:
Sub-division of typical front wall with
2-244
I
'I
/~~
II
openin~s
L./H
12
~}
1/8
.,~,.,;
.,
'.. Vl! }
'i/4
::l~}
:z:
.....
..
"1/4' . ..
.J
1/1
.01.
'I
EXTERNAL INCIDENT PRIESSURE A~T FRONT FACEOf~BUILDINGtP.o(pan

Figure 2-203
'M):lx1mum averagli'pressure on In teiri or f ace' of front wall (W/H
2-245
= 3/4)
. Ao/A w
Lw/H
1/2
1/4 }
12
;1/2.}
1/4
'1/8
.1/8
1/2 }
,1/4
1/8
3/2
3/4
"-
.1
...
...
3/8
.01.
I
2'
10
30
Pac1 (pai)
EXTERNAL INCIDENTPRES$URE AT FRONT FACE OF eS.UILDING

Figure 2-204
Pia (psi)
Maximum average pressure. on interior face of front wall (W/H
3/2)
'0.000
/---\
)
/
Ao/A w
Lw/H
1/2 }
1/4
'2
1/2 }
'/4
1/8
'/2 }
'/4
1/8
1/8
//2 }
1/4 . .
......
3/2
'/8
..J
IC
:~:;}
.c
3/4
'/8
'/2 }
1/4
1/8
3/8
00,111
I
EXTERNALI.NCIDENT PRESSURE ATFROI~T FACE OF BUILDING,P~(p.i)
Figure 2-205
Maximum average pressure on interior facie of front wall (W/H == 3)
2-247
10,0001111
L./H
12
100
100
10
eo
40
z
......
...
10
III
Ii
G
1/2
10
.-
(-
....,...
1.0
.8
;q
A
.1
0.1
.08
.06
.04
.01
.01
I
EXTERNAL INC1DEN1I" PRESSURE AT FRONT F,'~E OF IIIUILDINI. PIO (p.l)

Figure 2-206
Maximum average pressure on interior face of front wall (W/H

2-248
= 6)
'
I'
\~
-.....=
e
100
W1H =3/2
80
iii
=
.,
=
~
~
~
,!C
Ic
III
&il
:).
0)
(I)
.....
.....
E
20-
III
@I:
~
AoIAw
..J
...
~
Z
0
II:
IL
1/2
Ao/A w
..;J
1/2
1/4
1/4
1/8
118
I
8 10
Pso (psi)
20
30
8 10
PSO (psi)
EXTERNAL INCIDENT PRESSURE AT FRONT FACE OF BUILDING. Pso (psi)

Figure 2-207
Arrival time, TI' for interior front wall blast load

(W/H =3/4 and 3/2)
20
30
-......
100
W/H -3~>,
80
10
Iliilllli!
UJ
~
cd
N
VI
c:(
>
a:::
ft'!
ct
l&J
a:::
::l
(I)
(I)
-.....
I
to="
W/H-6
.
=.
100
~'I
.....
.....E
t=
a::
0-
-l
..J
~
'S
~
Z
0
a::
LL
-21
21
2
8 10
20
30
Pso (psi)
8 10
20
!O
Pso (psi)
EXTERNAL INCIDENT PRESSURE AT FRONT FACE OF BUILDING, Psa (psi)

Figure 2-208
~..
Arrival time. TI. for interior front wall blast load

(W/H = 3 and 6)
~.-
/~
!
)
-
-.=
W/H w 3/4
E
I
t!'
'00
80
100
80
60
60
W/H-3/2
40
1&1
...'"'"
:I:
i=
1&1
fI)
0::
1&1
0::
;:)
fI)
fI)
.!
-....-
....
...."
...."
Lw/H
~3
3/2
1&1
0::
0.
3/4
3/8
..J
..J
Lw/H
~ 3/8
IZ
0::
I&.
8 10
Poo (plil
20
30
,.
,
20
Poo (pli)

Figure 2-209
Idealized rise time, T2 - TI' for interior front wall

blast load (W/H = 3/4 and 3/2)
1lO
-e
-.:
100
W/H-3
100
eo
eo
60
t!'
'"
'"
'"
'"
:IE
l&I
(/)
~
l&I
a:
::;)
(/)
(/)
.Lwl H
40
l&I
i=
-.
E
...-
12
20.
LW/H
>6
3
3/2
.....
0..
..J
..J
I-
a:
II.
.3
.!
...I
.....
3/4
3/8
l&I
a:
W/H-6
3/2
4
~/4
,I
I.
I
Poo (pai)
3/8
Poo (pai)
EXTERNAL INCIDENT PRESSURE AT FRONT FACE OF BUILDING. Pso(psi)

Figure 2-210
Idealized rise time, T2 - Tl' for interior front wall

blast load (W/H = 3 and 6)
-
-
100
80
t=
'"
60
Lw/H
40
12
12
20
Lw/H
'"
'"
'"
W/H =3/2
Z
0
...ct
a::
:>
LLI
a::
:>
..
...-E
.....
3/2
II)
II)
-..
3
I
...-
.....
3/2
10
8
3/4
3/8
LLI
a::
0-
3/4
..J
..J
3/8
...Z
0
t.1.tt:tltlJjjl
a::
1
1
IL
Pao (pa')
8 10
P ao (pail
EXTERNAL INCIDENT PRESSURE AT FRONT FACE OF BUILDING, Pso (psi)

Figure 2-211
Idealized duration.T3 - Tl' for interior front wall

blast load (w/H = 3/4 and 3/2)
20
30
--....e
1000
W/H =6
W/H-3
1000
100
t=
800
600
600
400
400
200
200
'",
...'"'"
le(
It:
;:)
0
11,I
It:
;:)
-.
~
..,.,
.,!'
..
100
80
Lw/H
.:
,
1-"
Lw/H
100
80
12
6
!/)
!/)
80
12
60
It:
Go
40
40
11,I
... m.
...I
...I
20
It:
10
t::4+:t,:~uulnIJlllmIIllIllIlllluIllIlHlllllU 1.4"'f:+-t:tmlt:+mmUm 3/8
:5
I-
312
3/4
..
II
...
10 .
1
'10 (pli I
EXTERNAL INCIDENT PRESSURE AT FRONT FACE OF BUILDING, Pao (pai)

Figure 2-212
Idealized duration, T3 - Tl' for interior front wall

blast load (W/H = 3 and 6)
100
80
60
40
!'>
!'>
'"
""
'NIH
6
.
-.
-.
-t!'.
'NIH
6
20
l&l
l&l
::'i
2:
...
...
3/2
3/4
I
I
8 10
P.., (JIlII)
20
30
10
8
:3
3/2
2_
ItmfR
I
3/4
Poo (pal)
EXTERNAL INCIDENT PRESSURE AT FRONT FACE OF BUILDI NG

Figure 2-213
8 10
1\0
(psi I
Idealized times TI and T2 for interior side wall blast load
20
30
200.
,
,..
.,!'
-t-'!
IJJ
IJJ
I-
I-
'",
....
'"
'"
20
L.,IL
f2
tI~3/2
I
3/4
1/2
3/8
11t-
2.
~ d
j ,'l iH' iH. ~ '"
! t
".
'H
i::::::
:j'D::::::::
::::t::::,
~.:..:-
8 10
PSO (psi)
20
30
8 10
Pso (psi)
EXTERNAL INCIDENT PRESSURE AT FRONT FACE OF BUILDING. Psa (psi)

Figure 2-214
Idealized times T3 and T4 for interior side wall blast load

(L/H = 1, W/H = 3/4)
20
30
1000
800
600
400
200~
-.
-.:!
60
.
...::Ii
t!'
....
;,;;
'",
...,'"
'"
...
....
20
eo
Lw/L
2
3/2
40
3/4
1/2
.3/8
20
LW/L
2
3/2
I
3/4
1/2
3/8
8 10
20
30
Poo(Plil
8 10
Poo (plil
ExtERNAL INCIDENT PRESSURE AT FRONT FACE OF BUILDING J Pso (psi)

Figure
2-21~
(L/H
= 1,
W/H
= 3/2)
20
30
1000
800
1000
600
600
400
400
800
=11
200
100
-t!'.
80
-.
60
40
I.LI
""""
~/2
40
~i
I.LI
:E
"",
LW/L
60
:E
l-
L"IL
20
~/B
I-
00
~12
~4
10
,4
8
6
4
2.
I:.E:tt
I
810
20
P1o(psil
P10(PliJ
EXTERNAL INCIDENT PRESSURE AT FRONT FACE OF BUILOING. PSo (psI)

Figure 2-216
ldeatized times T3 and T4 for t n t e ri.o r side wall b Las t load
(L/H
= 1,
W/H
= 3)
1000
800
600
400
200mmtltml
40
L;vIL
LLI
'",
T'2
I-
20
3/4
'"
'"
'"
! LW/L
60
40
H2
rz
3/4
1/2
3/8
IJJ
::Ii
I-
20
10
a
4
8 10
20
30
PIO(PIO
8 10
P1o(psi)
EXTERNAL INCIDENT PRESSURE AT FRONT FACE OF BUILDING. Pso(psi)

Figure 2-217
(L!H
I, W!H
= 6)
20
30
LW/L
-.e
60
t!'
40
-.
'J'I
i
'Lw/L
2
....,
'"
0
'"
IJ
),3/2
:::lE
l-
-.e
-.!
~
:::lE
:_~
" " ' 3/8
l-
20
Pso (pin
Ii
8 10
20
30
PI O(pli)
EXTERNAL INCIDENT PRESSURE AT FRONT FACEOFBUILDIN~ ,PlIg(pSn

Figure 2-218
Idealized times 13 and T4 for Ln t e rd.o'r sidewall blast load

(L/H = 2, wIn = 314)
n,~,~n~_,~,~~.~,.~".~,"~~,"=~~~",~",=~"~""'~'."'~"
. ~~_~ ~",~.~.~ , ." ", . ",.,... ,."",.~.".,..".,.,.,.,.",,., . . . . . .. .. . . ,.""'." " . ,,"",,"',"',,"',,,."""'''''''"'''V'''K.~ ".,..,'" : ~ .,,' ,~,."-,~~,,,."'..W
.H,"'':.,,..-"''''.-,..:.w,,yvw."'W"v~'"'''''_''''..,~~''"~'''''''A'''~,"''~'''''''
LW/L
..
-.
3/2
I
3/4
1/2
t!'
'",
a....'"
3/8
ILl
:IE
ILW/L
3/2
1
3/4
1/2
3/8
8 10
1"110 (pti)
20
30
1"00 (pti)
EXTERNAL INCIDENT PRESSURE AT FRONT FACE OF BUILDING. PliO (psi)
Figure 2-219

(L/H = 2, W/H = 3/2)
.e
60
t!'
40
-.
N
N
N
'"
-e.. _.
-.-!.
Lwl\..
2
3/2
I
3/4
1/2
3/8
60
,<
2E
t-
Lwl\..
2
3/2
""
::lE
i=
11/4
!(J8
I LilTlT1TIlIUUf
1
8 10
20
30
'00 (p.l)
8 10
1'.0 (p.il
EXTERNAL INCIDENT PRESSURE AT FRONT FACE OF BUILDING 'PIO (psi)
Figure 2-220
(L!ll = 2. Will = 3)
20
30
1000
800
600
400
200
jtliljlttIH1HH1HtIHW!itwH#!tllilHtffHWiffiJffililJl i i f t ,
jiflliUHllllii
iLw/L
,
en
--
6()
-,.!'
..,
..,
'"
'"
en
-..!
40
LWA2
3/2
IJJ
,,~I
I-
~1/2
:>0
.12
3/2
100~
SO :j:
6()
3/4 1/2
3/8
'I
40
lAJ
::E
I-
20
10
S
6
4
8 10
p.o (p.,)
20
30
8 10
p.olp.;)
Figure 2-221

(L/H = 2, W/H = 6)
30
Lw/L
2
3/2
2
3/2
60
40
-.
I
...
-.
:::E
112
3/8
:::E
I-
IIJ
3/4
HHH
100
LwlL
80
1/2
3/8
60
IIJ
l-
Pso(pai)
Pso(pai)
EXTERNAL INCIDENT PRESSURE AT FRONT FACE OF BIJILDING
Figure 2-222
Idealized times T3 and T4 for

(L/~ = 4, W/H = 3/4)
3/4
.
interior side wall blast
Pso ( psi)
load
..
IE
60 litH 1+H til1mIHfRth_ltiffrlilill~ IIHIIHi+H1HlHilii
CTTTrt:!;U:'HT'l:nTtl'ttmmOO:t~rlM;
1 ;;m:'::X-TTJ).-fIlnlTDH1HCllW!L
I/.
'",
::;;;;
,'~lli
,3/2
'"
'"
'"
'i
I'll
'I
3/4
1/2
3/8
II
lS
2:
6
2$0
I;J
10
2()
2:
2~223
(psi)
2030
( pail
Figure
AT
FACE
or
ILOIN<l,

(L/H = 4, W/H = 3/2)
(pSi)
600
400
LW/L
200
IH1HlIllf~lIl11l1l_jHilHlilll_
2
'312
..
,
'"
'"
N
..
fl ;rltlflll
ttlH .
tl t I
--'" 6Ort1
lIlt.JN
~
'3/4
1/2
~~
fllhfflflllUlll-.JIlIIlHtllllllll!I!J!!!!!!!!!!LI1IHIlII!!f1l1l1lllll '3/8
60
LW/L
2
'3/2
~_.
20
I. : '3/4
1/2
'3/8
10
a
6
"
2' LU,UJJ~i:t
'I
8 10
20
30
p.o I pal)
8 10
20
30
p. o (pail
EXTERNAL INCIDENT PRESSURE AT FRONT FACE OF BUILDING, Pso (psi)

Figure 2-224 Idealized times T3 and T4 for interior side wall blast load
.(I,.!H = 4, W/H = 3)
'
'
.__.,M_ . ~~~~.' ~ '.'Hy,~."'~~""

.. "",."'~""'.,~"''VV'.''''''.,.,.,/ '',''./''P>A'C.,... ,.
'"'.,.""";.;.",." :';v.
"'."":,,.y,~,Y
L"'/L
312
I
3/4
1/2
3/1
on
ttl
'"
'"
LW/I.
2
312
,..
3/4
1/2
3/6
"
"
fj
66
(poi)
Idealized ti.mes
(L!H
:m
fj
(poi)
r
2" 225
I"
W!H =
AT
and T4 for interior side wall blast load
(psi
66
1000
800
1000
800
600
600 HH+HHllfliltM fll!f;_ H fiJ !+HIHll!.f!jj1 Lw/L

2
IJilllliW!!!l!!!!!f' H 11 ! I t:llMllil1llll
400 I'll! I mUllIlIliiIlIll!
3/2
I
200 L+:++FHflrtt:HtlHtHU1111W
1Ttmrtttlt.1
'j';;;t++ftiH+4HHtHLw/L
200
3/4
H-H
1/2
3/8
3/2
-.
I
.'"
100
80
60
40
I
3/4
1/2
.".3/8
-t-!
100
80
60
40
l.ll
::e
l-
I-
::e
20
20
10
8
6
4
2 H":'.:+Lf+.I
2H.;+Hii
8 10
20
30
8 10
PSO(psi}
PSO(psi)
EXTERNAl- INCIDENT PRESSURE AT FRONT FACE OF BUll-DING. PSO (pen
Figure 2-226
(L/H
= 8,
W/H
= 3/4)
20
30
1000
soo
!5<)O
L w,
400
400
3/2
L
W/ L
200 t:t+'Fl+f+fHHmlH.J!mwlJI&ll,JHHffi!l!Hff~,++t'+i,t:FfHtrdM
2
314
3/2
1/2
3/l!
.
E
100
3/4
!!O
-..
1/2
3/6
00
''\0
'",
a'"
'"
bJ
~
I"
:::li
20
10
II
I)
I
I
"
E
Figure 2-227
II
to
20
30
(psi)
"
II 10
'21J
( PSi)
AT
OF
LDING,

(L/H = 8, W/H = 3/2)
(PSi)
30
Lwtl
2
3/2
I
3/'1
1/2
3/11
In
E
1""
,
'"
eo
o
'"
'"
"
10
'It)
30
8 10
Poo (psi)
(psi)
'<:
AT FRONT FACE OF BUILDING.

Figure 2-228
Idealized times T3 and 14 for inter10r
(L/R 8, w/R 3)
~ide
Pl;O
wall blast load
(psi)
20
30
1000
SOO
LW/L
2
3/2
1
LW{
2()0
3/4
2
3/2
..
GO
1/2
3/8
..
100
3/4
SO
1/2
3/8
GO
'",
'"
....
'"
4()
~,
20
10
II
"
8 10
20
30
Pso (psi)
S 10
(psi)
EXTERNAL INCIDENT PRESSURE A1 FRONT FACE OF BUILDING,

figure 2-229
Idealized times T3 an~':4 for i~6r side wall b Las t : load
(LIB 8, V/B = 6)
20
(psi)
30
2.0
IZ
llJ
o
LL
LL
llJ
llJ
It:
10
20
40
60
10
20
40
60
80 100
:;)
CIl
CIl
llJ
It:
Q.
o
llJ
I-
'0
llJ
..J
u,
L/H
llJ
It:
.;oJ
=2
4.0:' ...
..J
~
:.:
III
..J
It:
llJ
IZ
0.8 " ,
I
0.4
"0
, I
80 Ion
EXTERNAL INCIDENT PRESSURE AT FRONT FACE OF BUI LDING. Pso (pill)

Figure 2-230
Idealized pressure coefficient..for back wall interior blast load

(L/H = 1 and 2)
2-272
L/H = 4
4.0,
..
? ;
o
Q.'"
"-
III
Q.D:
Z
W
. 0.6 : _ .. '
u::
IL
oo
w
a::
10
20
40
60
80 100
:::>
Ul
Ul
a::
Q.
C
Ul
Ul
...J
IL
Ul
L/H =8
a::
...J
...J
.4.0
ll~ :H'f1ffi
:ll:
2: O'h-!'"
<l:
Iii
...J
<l:
j'
a::
~
.H+W+l1ffi
1'+;
lD
Ul
-I-/-'I+H;+fjfj
) ::JL1..'.
; t+H Hltlff
0.6.,,+
OA
'~Itfu'f:tTltffflf
P10(Pli)
EXTERNAL INCIDENT PRESSURE AT FRONT FACE OF BUilDING t PI O (pin

)".'.lgure 2-231
Idealized pressure coefficient for back wall interior blast- load

(L/H = 4 and 8)
2-273
80.
60
40
-e
-
-
E
...-
t="
20
10
oJ
oJ
J:lI:
c(
III
....
....
Z
PIO(pp
c(
Cl::
u,
:lI:
U
J:
{/)
u,
0
IIJ
i=
oJ
-...-
20
EXTERNAL INCIDENT PRESSU.RE. AT FRONT FACE OF BUILDING. PIO (psi)

Figure 2-232
Arrival time. Tl. for interior back wall blast load

(W/H a 3/4 and 3/2)
2-274
-
E
-e
-
20
..,:-
10
oJ
oJ
,8
:ll:
U
40
,,",
PIO(pli)
' ~ ".
'I-
"
'
:ll:
0
'
:z:
CD,
... "
0
1&.1'
:II
~
,-
oJ
II::
~-
10
20
40
60
80 100
EXTERNAL INCIDENT PRESSURE AT F:RONT F:ACE OF: BUILDING. Pso (psi)

Figure 2-233 Arrival time. Tl. for interior back wall blast load
(W/H = 3 and 6)
2-275
10
40
60
80 100
PRESSURE AT .FRONT FACE OF BUILDI NG , Pao (pail
Figure .2-234 . Idealized time T2 - TI for interior back wall blast load
2-276
,:
f: F
....
U~:
_.:\ ...
..
.. ... ... r
.. .. .. ... .. ... :fJ::' 1:;>;
~gl/ ....
, .... ..
.. .. ,.., li(,i ..
,, ! ....
i
,
i ,I ,
F , ,,,,
1
::
,: ,,,,
,,,,
'I .. ::,, , .. : ....

I , : : , ...!
,c~F ,,
...
: ,,
,,,,
... ::
,
, I
.. .. :..
...
..
.75
,, ,
,
.... , ,..'. , .. ,, , , .. ,, , ,,,, ,,,, ... .. ..
,'I, ,,,, ,
::I' ,,,
..
..
,,,
..
.. i , ,, .. ''I' ..
.... .... : ::: .. ,,, ,, ,,,,,
..::' ..
.. i~~ ... i' C)IH .... ..
,i) , .. ... .. ... ...
tiE .. ... .. .. ...
...
.. ...
: :: ,
.
::
,...... .. ...... j ,...: .. : : :,..:,, : : .. .. .. r.... ;~ z 171:1 .....; ..,.. .. :..:: :i ....
.. ... .. ..i] .. ... ..
V , 'I
.. 1#;
.. .. ..
..
,,,,
..
, .. .. ....
,... ,:..,,,, .... ... .. .... .. .... .. .. l;(
.. ..,,,, ... .. .. ...
..
,: ,, , .. ;::.; ..
, .. ..:,,,
....
..
.. ... ...
..
Ii
"- ...
,
, :' ~~ ...
._. .- ...
... ,
.. : ,..,
'::I'I : .. ... : :: .. ... ..
... ,,, .. .. , ,..
.... .. .. ..
... ..
.... ... .. .. .. .. ::
!?' , .. ... :~ .. .... .. .... .., ..., ..., .... ....
.... .. .. 17' .. ..
.. .. .. :
.. .... .... ... .. .. ... .... .. .. ." ....
,
,
,..
.... ... ...
.. .... iZ .. ... ... ... ,~a:'" .;:: .. .. ... ..
...., .. .. .. ... .. ..:). ... .. .... .... ... .. . ... .... ..
.. .. l:: .... ....
, .. ... ... ... D. .... ... .. : :: .. ... .... .... .. " .... .... ..' , .... .. . I ... ....
!
..
.. :,,
.. ..
.... ..
.. ::
.. .... .. ...
... ....
... .. .... ....
,,
_.
g
,
:!U ...
;::i
.... .... I?: ... .... ... .. .
... .... .. ,,,,
.. ._. .. ...
l'iF.
.. .... .. ... .. .... .. .... ,.. .... .... .... .... .. ....
25 ...., .... : .. .... ....
_
.
... .... ... ... .. ... .... -- _. ... . ... ... I. :;:: .... .... .... ... - .- ... .... -.. ..,..
... .... "I' ... .... ... ... ... .... .-.. ~; .. ... ~~ :m .. .. ... .. , .... :::;: .. .... .. ,.. ,
.. ... .... .... ... .... .. .. .. .... ... ... .... .. . g.. .. iii' _..F..E .. , .- ..- .... ...
,
q ... .... .... ....
.. :1:: .. .. .... ... ;:ii ... .... .... .. !r.~ ::: ,ii'; .... ... ...,
,
;;!i~ ... ... .... _. .... ... .. ._. ..,
.... :=}' :i;: ._. .... @; I ..- I,;;; .... ....
...
I' .... ... ,-.. .. .... _. .... ..- .- ... ~j li~ gg'f~i h~~~~ ...., .. ,... .... .. ...
,
1;=,
_.
_. ... .... ... ... ...... ... .... ...., ... f"-: ... ::.:: ....
... .... .... .... ....._. .. .... ...
,, .... .. .... .... ... ... ....
..
....
.. .... ..- - :::.: .... .... .... .... .... r?~ .... ..- ....
.
..
.
....
.- ar ... .... ;g:g;;
.
- ... ~~,. .... .... _. ... .... ~~~F.~' ..... ... c_.
....
,
~1~:r; .... .... : E"
I::: .. Ii ... .... 1'El~:ii1!ffi .... ....
.... .. . iEiF.'jE .... 1F:1 ....
..
,..
'O
'O
'O
'O 'O
'O
'O
'O 'O
';
'O
:~:
'O
'O
'O
'O
'O.
'O
'O
'O
'O
'O
'O
'"
'O
'O
'O
'O
'O
'O
'O
'O
'O
.'O
'O
'O.
'O
'O
'O
'O
'O
'O
'O
'O
'O
'O
'O
'O
'O
'O
'O
.'
'O 'O
'O
'O
'O
'O,
'O
'O
'O
'O
'O
'O
'O
'
'O
'O
'O
'O.
'O
'O
'O
'O
..,~
"
' 'I
'O
_.
'-'
:~
50
PflESSURE DIFFERENTIAL
Fij1;ure 2-235
100
P-Pi (psi 1
Leakage pressure coefficient vs. pressure differential
2-277
TK 5-1300/NAVrAC P397/Ara 8822
Table 2-1
Heat of Detonation and Heat of Combustion
Explosive
Name
Symbol
Baratol
Boracito1
Composition B
Composition C-4
Cyc1oto1 75/25
BTF
Comp B
Comp C-4
DATB/DATNB
DIPAH
DNPA
EDNP
FEFO
HMX
HNAB
HNS
LX-01
LX-02-1
LX04
LX-07
LX08
LX-09-0
LX-lOO
LX-ll
LX-14
NG
NQ
Octo1 70/30
PBX-9007
PBX-90l0
PBX-90ll
PBX9205
PBX 9404
PBX-9407
PBX-9501
Pentolite 50/50
PETN
RDX
TETRYL
TNETB
TNT
Heat of
Detonation (ft~lb/1b)
1.04 E+06
5.59 E+06
2.37 E+06
2.15 E+06
2.22 E+06
2.20 E+06
1. 76 E+06
1. 89 E+06
1.48 E+06
1.72 E+06
2.03 E+06
2.27E+06
2.06 E+06
1,99 E+06.
2.41 E+06
- 1':99 E+06
1.99 E+06
2.08 E+06
2.77 E+06
-2.24 E+06
2.17 E+06
1. 72 E+06:
2.20 E+06
2.22 E+06
1.49 E+06
.-'2.20 E-t06
2.18 E+06
2.06 E+06
2.14 E+06
2.04 E+06
2.18 E+06 .
2.24 E+06
2.22 E+06
2.14 E+06
2.31 E+06
2.27 E+06
2.11 E+06
2.34 E+06
1. 97 E+06
2-278
Heat of
Combustion (ft-1b/1b)
3.91 E+06
3.68 E+06
4.08 E+06
3.31 E+06
2.26 E+06
2.79 E+06
3.81 E+06
3.31 E+06
2.70 E+06
3.20 E+06
4.08 E+06
5.05 E+06
e
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
Table 2-2
List of Illustrations of Peak Incident Pressure and Impulse Produced by Surface Detonation of Various Explosives
MATERIAL
Composition A-3
FIGURE
DENSITY RANGE
SHAPE
2-18a
1.59 to 1.91
2-17.
L/O/W
LIL'
CONFIGURATIONS
W/W'
BID
RDlARKS
2.0/1.0/2.5
1) 911 RDX, 9% WAX

2) Fiberboard ahippin& containers'
...
2.4/1.0/2.9
1.8/1.0/2.6
COmpoaitlon A-S
Z-18b
Z-18c
1.67 to 1.72
1.67 to 1.72
2-11.
2-17j
2-19.11.
Z-19b
1.65
1.65
1. 65
2-17b
Z-l7k
2-11j
Z-ZOc
1. 52 to 1.61
1. 52 to 1. 61
2-178
2-178
1. 6/1. 0/1. 3
2.5/1.0/2.0
9.0/1.0/9.0
Guanidine Nitrate
2-20c
0.72
2-17.
1.0/1.0/1.0
Cyeletal 70/30
2-21a
1.71
Z-Zlb
1.71
2-17a
2-17c
2.3/1.0/2.8
2.0/1.0/2.5
1.0/2.0/2.0
Composition B
Z-19c
Compos! tioD C-4
2-20.
2.5/1.0/2.0
1,7/1.0
1. 0/2. 0
1. 0/1. 0
1. 0/1. 0
Z-21c
1.2/1.0
..
"
BMX
M483 Projectile
2-22a
2-Z2b
2-22c
1.87
1. 87
2-17a
2-17j
2.0/1.0/3.0
1.0/1.2
2-17h
4.0/1.0
Sinsle Round
2-279
(60/40 percent. respectively)

wi th 11 WAX added, r
powdn
1) Bulk
form
2) Tested in simulated storage bin
configurations
1) Type'II. Class A
2) Used primarily as a munition
filler
3) Fiberboard shipping containers and
hopper
2.5/1.0
1.0/1.0
2-17d
1) Mixture of RDX and TNT
1) 911 RDX, 91 plasticizer

(nonexplosive)
2) Fiberboard shipping container
and H112 extruded demolition
blocks (Fig. 2-20a)
3) Dryer-bed,confisuration (Fig.
2-20b)
'.
H42 Grenades
1) 98.5% RDX. 1.5 ~ 0.5% Stearic Acid

Z) Fiberboard shipping containers
1) Each grenade ia filled with .066

lb .. of Composition AS explosive.
2) A plywood tray~filled with 64 H42
grenades
1) Plywood orthorhombic container
2) Fiberboard cylindrical container
3) Wetted with isopropyl alcohol
1) A single full up H483 wa5 placed
vertically with the nose' pointed
downward
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
Table 2-2
List of Illustrations of Peak Incident. Pressure and Impulse Produced by Sur[ac~ Oetonation of Various Explosive. (Continued)
CONFIGURAtIONS
MATERIAL
FIGURE
DENSITY RANGE
SHAPE
L/B/W
L/L'
W/W'
BID
REHARKS
2-23.
2-171
1) Wet dextrinated
2) Conductive rubber beat.rlbag
Z-23b
2-230
2-171
2-17m
1) Conductive rubber beaker

2} Test wet and dry at.~
2-24.
2-17.
2.8/1.0/2.8
2-24b
2-17f
2-240
2-17.
2.2/1.0/2.2
2-250
2-17.
1.2/1.0/1.2
2-25b
2-11c
2.0/1.0/2.5
1.0/2.0/2.0
2-250
2-17h
2.0/1.0
1) Pallet of eisht projectiles
2-26.
2-17j
1. 3/1. 0
2-26b
2-26c
1. Zll'. 0/1. 2
2-11a 64. c/r. 0/64.0
1) Dehydrated nitrocellulose,
(13;51 nitrosen)'MITL-H-244A.
Grade,C
2) Standard shipping containers
(Fisure 2-26a,b) .
3) Dryerbed (FiS:,2-2~c)
Nitroglycerine
2-278
2-111
1.0/1.0
1)
PBXC-203
2-21b
2-17j
2.0/1.0
20.0/1.0
Le!ld Azide
Lead Styphnate
LX-14
Octol 75/25
H718/741 RAAH
2.0/1.0
1.2/1.0
1) 95.5% HMX, 4.51 eatane

2) Aluminum orthorhomic container
3) Pressed billets
1) 751 BMX, 251 TNT

2) Received in fleke form
3) Fiberboard shipping container
4) Plywood.truncated prism
2.5/1.0
Projectile
Nitrocellulose
2-270
RDX Slurry
2-28a
2-11_
1.6 t 0.5
1.6 to,S
2;..17&
3.7/1.0
2.4/1.0
2-17j
Liquid high explosive in

polymethylpentene plastic
laboratory beakers
1) Granular molding powder

2) Rominal composition by weisht of
911 RDX and 91 ethylenevinyl
acetate copolymer (EVA)
3) Cylindrical fiberboard container
4) Single, double, and triple extrudlld
rods in varying lengths
1) Hixture consisted of RDX in a

solution of 601 acetic acid, 321
water and 21 nitric acid.
2) Encased in polyethylene container
2-280
TK 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
Tebl. 2-2
List of Illustrations of Peak Incident Pressure and Impulse Produced by Surface Detonation of Various Explosive. (Continued)
HATERIAL
RDX 98/2
TNT (Flake)
Tetracene
CONFIGURATIONS
L/L'
W/W'
FIGURE DENSITY RANGE
SHAPE
,L/5M
2-28b
2-17.
1.7/1.0/2.6
Z-28c
2-17j
2-29.
Z-29b
2-17j
2-11.
2-29c
2-17c
?-30a
Z-l?i
BID
1.211.0
0.9/1.0
1.2/1.0/1.2
1.0/2.4/2.0 1.25/1.0
1. 8/1. 0
REMARKS
1) High explosive received t with

isopropyl clcohol
2) Plywood orthorbombic"Kutsche
'container
3) Fib~rb~ard shipping contairiers
1) "Flake TNT bulk form

3) Orthorhombic fiberboard container

4) Hopper constructed trom plywood
2.511.0
1. 0/1. 0
1) A primary explosive, was detonated
in beakers in a dry state and in a

wet state in storage bags
"
Nitroguanidine
2-~Ob
2-17j
1.0/1.0
1) Aluminum storage bin

Bulll: fo~
2)
Benite Propellant
Black Powder
2-31a
2-31b
2-17.
1.4/1.0/1.4
2-17a
1.1/1.0/1.1
2-31c
"0% nitrocellulose, "".3% potassium

nitrate, 6.3% sulfur, 9.4% charcoal
and 0.5% ethyl centralite
2) Container mad. of wood and fiberboard
1)
1) Class I, 4 by'S; CI.s. 6. 20 by
1.0/1.0/1.0
HIL-P-223B Grad. AI, 4 by 8, Grade

A3. 12 by 16; Grad. A-3.
l) rested in loose 'powder fD~
3) Storage bins and tote bins boxe.
w.~e constructed ;from plywood
BS-NACO
Propellant
2-32a
2-32b
2-32c
1.7/1.0
2-17j
2-17a
2-178
1.6/1.0/2.9
2-281
I}Hulti perforated
2) Tested in cardboard
1.0/1.3
d~
{Fig.
2-32.), full-sized metal shipping

containers (Fig, Z-32b) and
aluminum'hoppers (Fig, 2-3Zc)
TK 5-1300jNAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
Table 2-2
List of Illustrations ofPe~ Incident .Pr~ssur8 and Impulse Produced by Surfa~e Detonatlon of VariousExplosives (Continued)
CONFIGURATIONS
" ( MATERIAL
DIGL-RP
FIGURE
DENSITY RANGE
2-338
SHAPE
L'/H/W
2-17a
3.2/1.0/1.5
1.9/1.0/3.2
1.4/1.0/2.2
Propellant
Z-17j
2-178
Z-33b
2-330
L/L'
W!W'
BID
REMARKS
1) Composition of nltrocellu-
1. c/r. 0
2.2/1.0/2.7
lose, "diethyleneglycol dinitrate,

Ak~tite
II Antralite I, magnesium
oxide and graphite
2) Plywood containers (15420 and
~
. 15422)
3) Cylindrical fiberboard container

(15421)
HI Propellant
2-:-31, a
2-17j
Z-34b
2-3411.
2-17j
2-170
2-348
2-34b
~-34b
M26 E1;"
2-34c
2-35a
2-35b
2-35c
M30 Al
2-17e
2-17c
2-17e
1. 7/1.0
1. 7/1.0
3.5/1.'0/3 .5
7.0/1.0
7.011.0
3.4/1. 0/3.4
9.0/1.0
9.0/1.0
1. 0/1. 3
2-17j
2-178 10.5/1.0/60.0
2-17a 2.2/1.0/2.2
2-17j
_.
2-37a
2-17j
2-17j
"2-17a
2-17a
2.4/1.0/12.0
2.4/1.0/12.0
2-37b
2-37c
2-38a
2-38b
2-17a
2-17a
2-17a
2-178
3.1/1.0/1.0
3.1/1.0/1.0
3.8/1.0/2.0
3.8/1.0/2.0
2-368
2-36b
2-36c
M3l AIEL
1.0/1.3
1.0/1.5
1.7/1.0
1.5/1.0
1.5/1.0
1) 84.2%, 13.151 H nitrocellulose;

9.9X"d1nitrotoluene; 4.9% dibutylphthalate; and 1.01 diphenylmDine '
2) Cylindrical drums, open hopper,
closed feed hopper
'.
l)"Hulti perforated propellant

2} Cylindrical fiberboard shipping
containers, dryer bed configur.stions constructed'from'p1ywood~
cylindrical container constructed
from ~tainless ateel (Fig. 2-~5c)
1) Propellant single perforated and
"mUlti perforated
2) Cylindrical ahipping dr~ and
orthorhombic simulated dryers
:1) Triple-base slotted stick propellant
2) Simulated fiberboard carton
3) Simulated wOoden shipping/
'storage container
.4) Short side (L) parallel to shock
front, or
5) Lorig aide (W) parallet to shock
front
'.
,-
..
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
Table 2-2
KATERIAL
HS Propellant
M6 Propellant
2.15 in. Rocket

Grain HI: 43-1
iC 844 Ball
List of Illustrations of Peak Incident Pre. sure and

FIGURE DENSITY RANGE
SHAPE
2-38c
2-398
2-17j
2-17j
2-39b
2-39c
2-17.
2-40.
2-17j
2-11.
LIH/W
~ls.
Produced by Surface Detonation of Various Erplosives (Continued)
CONFIGURATIONS
L/L'
W/W'
BID
1. 5/1. 0
1.0/2.0
1. 0/1. 0
2.0/1.0
1.4/1.0/6.8
1.0/1.7/4.4
1.7/1.0
2.211.0
1. 0/1. 3
Z-40b
2-400
2-17.
2-17c
2-Ua
2-178
Z-Hb
2-17. 16.5/1.0/70.0
3.4/1.0/3.4
5.8/1.0
2-17j
1.1/1. 0
2-U.
2-17j
2-42h
2-42c
2-17&
1.0/1.3
9.0/1.0
Z-43b
2-43c
JA-2 (L5460)
HlO Propellant
2-44.
Z-44b
2-Uc
2-17.
2-17j
2-17&
2-17.
1.0/1.5/1.0
1.0/1.6
10.0/1.0
1.0/1.0
Z-17J
1. 0/2 ,,7/1. 5
1. 0/1. 6/1.1
2-45.
2-17.
1) Double base propellant

2} Dryer bed constructed fram plywood
3) Cylindrical fiberboard container.
1) Consist of nitrocollulose 50%,
nitroglycerine 36.2%, others 13.8%
2} Forward and aft arain. simulated
extruded billet, Ro Con shipping
drum
1.2/1.0/1.2
2-17. 10.0/1.0/10.0
5.0/1.0/5.0
2.S/1.0/2.S
2-17.
1) Multi perforated propellant

2) Cylindrical shipping drum
3) Cloaed' and open'hoppers
1) 65 Propellant
2) Te.ted in shelve. holdina one,
aeven, and nine rocket grai~
2-41c
2-43.
1) Single base propellant

2) Shipping drums with" 10% moisture
3) Carpet rolls cylindrically
shaped
4) N5 was loaded into charging buckets
end conveyor bolt configuration
5.8/1. 0
3.8/1.0/35.0
llIl37 RAP
R>MAllKS
2.1/1.0/1.3
1.5/1. OIl. 2
2-283
"-
1) Double base propellent

2) '0% nitrocellulose, 24.6%
diethylene glycol dinitrate, 15.4%
others
.
4) Orthorhombic fiberboard container
1) 981 nitrocellulose (13.5% R), 1%
potassium sulfate and 1% dipheyla-
min.
2) Single perforated
3) Fiberboard box, metal lined wooden
boxea, orthorhOmbic atainle ste.l
vsnted container
TK 5-1300/NAVFAG P-397/AFR 88-22
Table 2'2
List of Illustrations of Peak Incident Pressure and Impulse Produced by Surface Detonation of Various Explosives (Continued)
MATERIAL
lO5om, H314 A3
Illuminant
FIGURE
DENSITY RANGE
2-45b
Z-45c
,
CONFIGURATIONS
L/B/w"
L/L'
W/W'
SHAPE
:..',
2-17j
2-17j
8/0
1. 0/1."
1.0/6.0
REMARKS
1) 7.71 Luminac 4116 type A, 561 magnesium, 361 sodium nitrate

2) Fiberboard shipping drums
Z-45b)
(Fig~
3) Simulated steel mixer/muller (Fig.

2-45c)
1) 1136 premix(90Z atrontlune nitrate
1559 Igniter
Mixture
2-468
2-46b
2-17j
2-17j
1. 8/1. 0
1. 0/1. 8
1560 Sublgniter
Mixture
2-46c
2-17j
2-47a
2-17j
2.1/1.0
1. 0/1.1
Magnesium/strontium nitrate/
strontium peroxide/pOlyvinyl:
chloride 27.5/27.5/30/151 by weight
respectively
j
2) Rubber (Fig. 2-46c) and aluminum
(Fig. 2-47a) cylinder configurations
.
R284 Tracer
Mixture
2-47b
2-47c
1. 9/1. 0
1.0/1.4
1) Strintium nitrate/pOlyvinyl
K314-A3 First
Fire Composition
2-48a
2-48b
H49A1 Trip
Flare
Composi tion
2-48c
2-49a
2-17j
2-17j ..,
'.'
2-17a
2-17j
"
1.0/1.17/1.0
2-11j
2-17j
"'
,
1.0/1.8
1.0/1.4
1.0/6.0
and 101 calcium reslnute) and a

premix (23.31 lead dioxide and
77.71 magnesium)
2) Rubber and aluminum cylinder
configurations (Fig. 2-468 and
2-46b respectively)
..
1)
ch1oride/(50/100 mesh) magnesium

in 53.7/18.1/28.21 byweight,
respectively
2) Rubber (Fig. 2-47b) and aluminum
(FiS. 2-47c) cylinder confisurations
1) 501 barium nitrate, 51laminac Type
B, 201 silicon. 151 zirconium
. hydrate: 101 tetranitro carbazole
2) Cardboard box (FiS. 2-48a) simulated mix/muller (Fig. 2-48b)
1) Hagnesium 361, sodium nitrate
541, binder 101
2) Shipping drum fiberboard (Fig. 248c), simulated steel mixer/muller
(Fig. 2-49.)
2-284
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
Table 2-3
List of Illustrations for Average Peak Reflected Pressure and

Scaled Average Unit Reflected Impulse
Average Peak
Scaled Average Unit
Reflected Pressure
Reflected Impulse
Number of Adjacent Reflecting Surfaces
One
Two
Three Four
Two
Three Four
One
h/H
IlL
0.10
0.10
0.25
0.50
0.75
2-52
2-53
2-54
2-53
2-64
2-65
0.25
0.10
0.25
0.50
0.75
0.50
0.75
2-67
2-80
2-81
2-82
2-81
2-92
2-93
2-94
2-93
2-101
2-102
2-103,
2-102
2-113
2-114
2-115
2-116
2-129
2-130
2-131
2-130
2-141
2-142
2-143
2-142
2-55
2-56
2-57
2-56
2-68
2-69
2-70
2~ 71
2-83
2-84
2-85
2-84
2-95
2-96
2-97
2-96
2-104,
2-105
2-106
2-105
2-117
2-118
2-119
2-120
2-132
2-133
2-134
2-133
2-144
2-145
2-146
2-145
0.10
0.25
0.50
0.75
2-58
2-59
2-60
2-59
2-72
2-73
2-74
2-75
2-86
2-88
2-87
2-98
2-99
2-100
2-99
2-107
2-108
2-109
2-108
2-121
2-122
2-123
2-124
2-135
2-136
2-137
2-136
2-147
2-148
2-149
2-148
0.10
0.25
0.50
0.75
2-61
2-62
2-63
2-62
2-76
2-77
2-78
2-79
2-89
2-90
2-91
2-90
2-95
2-96
2-97
2-96
2-110
2-111
2-112
2-111
2-125
2-126
2-127
2-128
2-138
2-139
2-140
2-139
2-144
2-145
2-146
2-145
2-~6
2-~7
2-285.
TK 5-l300/NAVFAC r-397/AF& 88-22
.'
Table 2-4
List of Illustrations for Interior Side Wall Idealized Tinies T3

- and T4
L/H
W/H
3/4
3/2
-6
2-214
2-215
2-216
2-217
2-218
2-219
2-220
2-221
,.
4
2-222
2-223
2-224
2-225
2-226
2-227
2-228
2-229
2-286
TK
5-~300/NAVFAC
P-397/A~R,88-22
PRIMARY AND SECONDARY FRAGMENTS

"
2-16. General
~.
Previous sections in this chapter have dis~ussed explosive'accident predictions in reference ..to' studies of blast waves",and their effects. Sign.ificant .'-1
damage from accidental explos~on~ can al\o ,be caused by the impact of fragments or objects which were gener at ed during the explosions and, hurLed ..against
structures or other receivers at high speed
.'
Fragments resulting from accidental explosions can be divided into two categories. The term "primary f,agment"denotes.a ,fragment from a casing.or con-,
tainer of an explosive source or a fragment from an object in contact with an
exp Lqs i.ve . If the source ~s a true high elSplosive, .the container or' casing usually ruptures into a large numbel' of small ,primaryfragments.which can be.
projected at velocities up to several thousa':ld feet per second by the explosion. ,For bomb and shell ~asings, typical.weights 9f:;damaging fragments recovered in field tests are about 0.032 oz; These primary fragments, though
irregular, are usually of "chunky" geometry, i.e. all linear dimensions are
t
of the saJ;lle o rde r ,
. .'
.'
.. ',
Containers or casings which fragment or burst during explosions are not the
only sources of fragments and missiles.
Other potentially damaging objects,
known as "secondary missiles" or "secondary fragments" can also he produced
due.tothe blast wave interaction with objects or structures. located near the
explosive source.
These objects can be torn loose from their moorings, if
they are attached, and accelerated to velocities high enough to cause impact
damage.
The objects could be pieces of machinery, small tools, materials such
as pipes and, lumber, .par t s of but Idtngs or other structures. disrupted by, the
explosions, and large pieces of equipment. Characteristics of both primary
and, seconda~y fragments (often referred. to as secondary "debris" to distinguish them from primary "fragments") will be discussed in this section.
2-17. Primary Fragments

2-17.1. General
The explosion of a cased donor charge results in the formation of primary
fragments which are produced by the shattering of the explosive container.
The container may be the casing of conventional munitions, the kettles,
hoppers, and other metal containers used in the manufacture of explosives,
metal housing of rocket engines.
.
Primary fragments are characterized by very high initial velocities (in the
order of ,thousands of teet per second), a large number of fragments, and relatively small sizes. in comparison to'secondary fragments and concrete fragments
formed due to' partial failure or total collapse of protective elements. The
Lni t La L. velocity and size of the fragments are functions of the thickness .of
the metal container, the shape of the explosive as a whole (spherical, cylindrical, prismatic), and the sections of the container (ends and middle) from
which the fragments are formed. The size and shape of the' fragments will depend greatly on the metallographichistory of the casing, its physical condition(such 'as dents, grooves" bends, or interna~ cracks or flaws), and the
condition of joints, most notably welded joints.'
".
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC
P~397/AFR
88-22
Upon detonation of a cased explosive, the casing'breaks up into fragments with

varying weights and velocities. The destructive potential of these fragments
is a function of their shapes, materials, momentum and kinetic energy distributions. Since only the larger fragments have the momentum necessary to perforate a barrier and/or cause propagation of explosions, they are'usually the
only fragments of concern'in design of a protective system. Therefore,
through testing o'r' analysis, ,the velocity 'and weight of the "worst case", fragment must be determined and used as 's desig~ criterion.
2-17.2, Initial Fragment Velocity

2-17.2.1. Explosives with Uniform Cylindrical 'Containers
The most' common technique for calculating the' initial velocity of fragments In'
contact with an explosive charge is the Gurriey method. The initial velocity
of primary ,fragments resulting from the detonation of a cased explosive is a
function of the explosive output and the ratio of the explosive charge weight
to casing weight.
The initial velocity of primary fragments resulting from a high-order detonation of a cylindrical casing with evenly distributed explosives is expressed
as:
2-32
and, applying a 20 percent factor of safety, the design charge weight is:
W
2-33
where
V
(2E,)1/2
W
initial velocity of fragments

Gurney Energy Constant from 'Table 2-5
design charge weight
Wc - weight of casing
WACT
actual quantity of explosive
The ratio of Gurney energy to the heat of detonation E'/SH; represents the
conversion efficiency of chemical energy to ~Gurney" energy. If E' is unknown
for a particular explosive, and oH is known, E'/OH may be determined for a
similar explosive (i.e., similar heat of detonation) and the value used to estimate the Gurney energy.
2-17.2.2. Explosives with Non-Uniform Cylindrical Containers
Cylinders are the most common shape, of cased explosives. Along the length of
the cylinder, ,there may be a large:variation 1n the thickness of the casing
and its outside diameter. In such cases, the cylinder is divided into a
2-288
TN 5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR'88-22 .
series of equivalent cylinders.
2-17.3.2.
f"
This method is further discussed in Section
Gurney's equations were deyeloped for cased explosives. where the explosive is
in direct contact with the outer metal casing. Several conditions are illustrated in Figure 2-236 where the explosive and outer casing are separated by
an incompressible fluid. The. initial velocity of primary fragments resulting
from the detonation of such items may be approximated by using the Gurney
equations with slight modifications. The actual weight of the explosive is
increased by the required 20 percent factor of safety. The design charge
weight is:
101
2-34
1.2 WACT
and, the weight of the casing is increased to include the weight of the fluid
and the weight of the inner casing which surrounds the explosive, if present,
or:
2-35
where
101
WACT
design charge weight

actual quantity of explosive
Wc
total weight of casing
WCO
weight of outer casing
WCI
weight 'of inner casing
lolA - weight of fluid

2-17.2.3. Explosives with Non-Cylindrical Containers
,
Gurney formulas for some additional geometries are given in Table 2-6. A plot
of velocity versus casing to charge weight ratio for various geometries is
shown in Figure 2-237.
The shapes' considered in Figure 2-237 are .as sumed.rt;o have 'an evenly distributed explosive and a uniform container (casing) or plate thickness. However,
for those cases where the shape is slightly nonuniform, the initial velocity
of the resulting fragments may be estimated by using the average crosssectional dimensions.
2-17.3. Fragment Mass Distribution
2-l7.3.1.Explosives with Uniform Cylindrical Containers
The fragmentation pattern and the weight of the largest fragment resultinv
from the high-order detonation of an evenly-distributed explosiv
drical metal case of uniform thickness have been calculated' according~, c., Ultionships developed on the basis of theoretical 'consideratlons confirmed with
2-289
TH
5~l300/NAVFAC
P-397/AFR 88-22
a large number of tests'. ' The number of f'r agmerrt s produced by a cylindrical
cased
weighing more than a given design fragment is:
7harge
1/2
Nf
awc e
- [, Wf
-.
I MAl
..
':.~
~~
:~
'MA
2-36
. ; ,t
';
-,
'l~
-.
<1"
.-
and
MA
- Btc5/6 d1/3
i (1
'.
+ t c I d i)
where
'.
"
."
l-
2-37
"
Nf
number of fragments with weight greater than Wf
Wc
casing weight
Wf
design fragment weight
MA
fragment distribution factor
explosive constant from Table 2-7
tc
average casing thickness
di
average inside diameter of casing

~
'0
..
,. :'
'
The largest fragment produced by an explosion can be found by setting Nf -1,

Thus, the weight of the largest fragment is given. by:
. 2(aW c
MA )
2",
.',
,I
;.
'
2-38
..
'-
Setting the fragment weight Wf equal to zero, the following expression for the
total number of fragments is obtained:
'.
"
,"
'... ~ l'
_i
where:
".
.,.
NT - total number of fragments
Hence, the average particle weight can be found:

.,
2-40
..
where
.:'
Wf .- -"average fragment weight

2-290. -
.
-r-
',I,
TN '-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

For design purposes, a confidence level CL, where (0 < CL < 1) ,. can be defined
as the probability that the,weight; Wf,'is the largest weight fragment
released. The expression for the design fragment weight corresponding to a
prescribed design confidence level (CL) is given as:
2-41
or rearranging terms:
2-42
Equation 2-42 can then be used to:calculate the design fragment weight for a
prescribed design confidence level. Note that Equation 2-42 uses an infinite
distribution to describe a physical phenomenon which has a finite upper limit.
Equation 2-42 may be used for CL S 0.9999. If CL > 0.9999, use:
2-43
The number of fragments with weight greater than Wf is:
2-44
It should be noted that Equations 2-41 through 2-44 are not app,licable to casings designed to fragment in a specific pattern.
In order to facilitate design calculations, Figure 2-238 is available for determining the quantity MA/B for a given cylindrical casing geometry and
Figures 2-239 and 2-240 provide, the value of Wf/MAcorresponding to a'specified confidence level. Figure 2-239 is applicable for a wide range of confidence levels (0.3 ~ CL < 1.0) ,whereas Figure 2-240 is applicable for high confidence levels (0.986 ~ CL ~ 1).
To calculate the actual number of fragments with a weight greater than the design fragment weight, Equation 2-36 can be applied directly. Alternatively,
Figure 2-241 presents a plot of the quantity B2NT/Wc versus the casing geometry. The number of fragments with weightgreater than Wf can then be calculated from Equation 2-44.
2-17.3.2. Explosives with Non-Uniform Cylindrical Containers
The equations in Section 2-17 .3.1 were developed as'sumfng a uniform cross-section along the axis of the cylinder with evenly distributed explosive in
direct contact with the outer casing. Actual cased explosives' rarely conform
to these. ideal conditions. If there is only slight variation in the casing
thickness and/or casing diameter, the fragment weight may be estimated using
an average casing thickness' and diameter in Equation 2-37. '
If the cross-section varies greatly, the container is treated as'aseries of
equivalent cylinders representing the actual shape as closely as possible
2-291
TK
5~1300/NAVFAC
P-397/AFR
88~22
(Fig. 2'242). Using the average casing thickness and diameter of each
section, the velocity and weight of the design fragment must be determined for
each sec t t on.. The worst case fragment of the equivalent cylinders is then
taken as the design fragment for the entire container.
Cylindrical explosives with steel and hollow cores are shown in table 2-6.
The fragment mass distribution may be estimated for these shapes using the
uniform cylinder equations of Section 2-17.3.1. In applying these equations,
the same procedures as outlined above for nonuniform cylinders are employed,
except that the steel or hollow cores are neglected in the calculations.
Figure 2-236 illustrates the cased explosive where the explosive and outer
casing are separated by an incompressible fluid. The outer casing is much
thicker than the inner casing which encloses the explosive. Here again, the
fragment mass distribution may be estimated using the uniform cylinder equations of Section 2 -17.3.1 except as indicated below. The heaviest ,fragment
will fracture from the outer casing. Thus, Wc should be the weight of the
outer casing only. The thin inner casing is neglected in the calculations.
In addition, since the ratio of explosive weight to casing weight (W/Wc) is
small, the fragment ,distribution factor (MA) should be the larger of that given in Equation 2-36 and Equation 2-44 as follows:
2-45
.:
where
A-
explosive composition constant from table 2-7 and all other terms
'are as previously defined.
2-17.3.3. Explosives with Non-Cylindrical Containers

'.'
Information is not presently available for evaluating the number and weight of
fragments from charges other than those having a cylindrical cas i ng ,
The equations of Section 2-17.3.1 can only be employed to calculate masses of
primary fragments which evolve from accidents involving an explosive detonation within a container of some sort, such as a casing, a storage tank, or a
confining piece ,of machinery such as a centrifuge or press., Weights of fragments created as a result of a given quantity of explosive detonating while
being machined or in an unconfined space must be estimated using other
methods.
2-17.4. Variation of Fragment Velocity with Distance
When an explosion is located close to an object (acceptor'explosive or barrier), the velocity V s at which a fragment strikes the object is ,approximately
equal to the initial velocity v o' However, if. the detonation is located at a
relatively large distance from the object, then the impact or striking velocity of the fragment may be substantially less than its velocity immediately
after the explosion. This variation in velocities, which is primarily a re2-292
TK 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

su1t of air resistance, is also a function of. the physical properties of the
casing and the distance between the donor explosive and the object.
When the protective. barriers are located 20 feet or less from a detonation,
the variation between striking and initial veloci~ies usually may be neglected. On the other hand, for determining the effects of primary fragment
impact on structures further away from a detonation, the variation of fragment
velocity with distance should be included in the design.. The .fragment velocity of major concern is the velocity with. which the "design fragment(s)" (the
worst case fragment(s) which the structure must be designed towithstand)
strikes the protective structure. This striking velocity is expressed.as:
. - [12Yf ]
v s - Vo e
2-46
and
2-47
where
V
fragment velocity at a distance Rf from the center of detonation
Vo
initial (maximum) fragment velocity
Rf
distance from the center of detonation
ky
velocity decay coefficient
presented area of the fragment
Wf - fragment weight
fragment form factor
specific density of air
drag coefficient
The decay coefficient can be evaluated as:
A/Wf - 0.78 /Wfl/3
for a random mild steel fragment
Pa - 0.000n;oz/in 3
CD
0.6 for primary fragments
The resulting expression for the striking velocity is:
Vs
- va e
- [.004R f/W?/3]
2-48
Figure 2-243 shows the variation of primary fragment velocity with distance.
The term initial velocity refers to the maximum fragment velocity as the fragment is ejected from the ~harge. Due to the extremely high rates of fragment
2-293
TM 5-1300/NAVFACP-397/AF& 88-22
acceleration, this velocity is considered to.be attained by the fragment prior
to moving appreciably from its initial pos~tion.
2-17.5. Primary Fragments - Shape, Caliber Density and Impact Angle
2-17.5.1. General
In order to determine the damage potential of primary fragments, it is necessary to evaluate the caliber density, shape and angle of obliquity of the
fragments, and the previously described weight and striking velocity. When a
container fragments, a random distribution of fragment shapes results.
Section 2-17.3 contained a method for determining the weight distribution of

primary fragments. From the weight of the fragment and shape of the containment vessel, one can estimate the size of individual fragments. This section
discusses a method for performing an engineering estimate of a standard design
fragment(s) for use in fragment impact damage.
,
2-17.5.2. Shape of Primary Fragments

Two possible fragment shapes are shown in Figure 2-244 for explosives in contact with the outer casing. The blunt fragment shape in Figure 2-244 is considered as the standard shape inthe design. charts presented in the following
section. While the standard fragment has a milder nose shape than the alternate fragment, the standard fragment is generally considered appropriate for
use in design since (1) only a small number of fragments will strike the
structure nose-on, and (2) only a small fraction of these fragments will have
a more severe nose shape than the standard fragment. In addition, the lengthto-diameter ratio of these fragments is felt to.be more representative of an
average fragment configuration. For convenience, a plot of fragment weight
versus fragment diameter for these two fragment shapes is given in Figure 2245.
There is little data available concerning the shape of a fragment ejected from
a cased explosive where the explosive is not in direct contact with the casing
(Fig. 2-236). Consequently, the worst possible shape is assumed, a thin rectangular or circular rod. The diameter of the cross-section (the thickness of
a rectangular cross-section) is equal to the casing thickness at rupture ..
The fragmentation pattern of this type of cased explosive somewhat resembles
that of a ruptured pressure vessel. The casing diameter typically expands before rupturing and, therefore, to conserve mass, the casing thickness must be
decreased.
.,
It is assumed that the outside diameter expands to 1.5 times the original diameter. Thus, the adjusted inside diameter is:
[ 1.25
2-49
where
d i' - adjusted inside diameter of casing
d i - original inside diameter of casing
2-294
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR88-22
t c - original casing thickness
,.
The adjusted or "necked-down" thickness is:

2-50
where
t c' - adjusted casing .thickness
Assuming a circular cross-section, the length of the fragment is:

2-51
where
Lf - length of the fragment

Wf - weight of the fragment from Section 2-17.3
Pc - density of casing material

~.
Lcyi
length-of the cylinder or equivalent cylinder
If assuming a,circular cross-section, the length Lf calculated is longer than

the length of the cylinder, then a rectangular cross-section is assumed where
the width is equal to:
2-52
where
b f - width of the fragment
2-17.5.3. Caliber Density
The influence of the .. fragment weight:to fragment diameter ratio is expressed
in terms of the caliber density of the fragment which is defined as:
2-53
where
.0
caliber density
fragment diameter
2-17.5.4. Nose Shape Factor

The nose shape factor expresses the influence of the shape of the primary.
fragment' and is defined as:
For.flat-nosed,solid fragments:
"
N - 0.72
2-54
2-295 _
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
For fragments with special nose shapes:

N - 0.72 + 0.25 (n - 0.2)1/2 < 1.17
2-55
where
nose shape factor
caliber radius of the: cangent; ogive of, the assumed fragment nose
2-l7.S.5. Impact Angle

The angle of obliquity r e furs
ie<' :.'''' .. ng,le b e twe.en
and a normal to the surface; thus
obliquity of zero degrees.
the path of' the fragment
,<1
normal impact corresponds to an angle of
~otMal
impact is usually assumed in penetration
c a LcuLat.Lous in order to ccnse rve c Lve l.y design' for the worst case condition.
2-18. Secondary Fragments
..
2-18.1. General
The explosion of HE during some manufacturing or forming process (i.e., nitra-.
tion, centrifuging, pressing, and machining on lathe) can result-in a lar~e
number of secondary fragments which vary greatly in size, shape, initial

velocity, andrange. Each of these parameters affects the damage potential of
an accidental explosion and, therefore, should be considered in the design of
protective structures.
The current state-of-the-art for assessing damage potential requires that the
design engineer estimate the conditions which are likely to exist at the time
of the accident and perform a structural assessment of any equipment which
will be involved. Some of the initial factors to consider are:
(1)
Type and amount of HE.
.;
(2)
Configuration of HE (i.e., sphere, cylinder, cased; uncased) . . ~
(3)
Location of HE (i.e., attached to lathe, -r e s t Lng on' support table, contained in centrifuge, proximity to walls and other.equipment).
(4)
Type of propagation after initiation (i.e., high order, burning, partial

detonation) .
If the fragmentation pattern varies with the initial conditions, the Architectural Engineer must examine several likely scenarios to evaluate the damage
potential.
To estimate the weight, shape, and velocity of fragments' which ,result from.
detonation of an HE during a manufacturing ot forming process, one would perform the following steps:
(1)
Determine distance (R i ) from the center of the explosive to the i t h

point of interest (refer to structural details of the machine and/or architec~ural drawings).
2-296
TK
5~1300/NAVFAC
P-397/AFR 88-22
(2)
Determine the size and shape of the expected fragment (refer to structural details of the machine).
(3)
Determine the fragment velocity (refer to sections 2-18.2 and 2-18.3).
2-18.2. Velocity of Unconstrained Secondary Fragments

To predict vel~cities of objects accelerated by an explosion, the interaction
of blast waves with solid objects must first be considered. Figure 2-246
shows the interaction of a blast wave with an irregular object. The interaction.is shown in three phases as the wave passes over the object. As the wave
first strikes the-object, a portion is reflected from the front face, andthe
remainder diffracts around the object. In the diffraction process, the incident wave front closes in behind the object, greatly weakened locally, and a
pair of trailing vortices is formed. Rarefaction waves sweep.across the front
face, attenuating the initial reflected blast pressure. After passage of the
front, the object is immersed in a 'time-varying flow field; Maximum pressure
on the front face during this "drag" phase of loading is the stagnation pressure.
To predict the effect of a blast wave on the object, it is necessary to examine the net transverse pressure on the object as a function of time.
loading, somewhat idealized, is shown in Figure 2-247.
This
After the ,time arrival
t a . the net transverse pressure rises from zero to a maximum peak reflected
pressure Pr in time (T l - t a).
proaching
~last
For .an object with a flat face nearest the ap-
wave, this time interval is zero.
Pressure then falls linear-
ly to drag pressure in time (T 2 - Tl) and decays more slowly to zero in time
(T 3 - T 2)
The basic assumptions for unconstrained secondary. fragments are (1) the object
behaves as a rigid body, (2) none of,the energy in the blast wave is absorbed
in breaking the object loose from its moorings or deforming it elastically or
plastically, and (3) gravity effects can be ignored during the acceleration
phase of the motion. The equation of motion for the object is:
A p(t) - Ma
2-56
where
A - area of object presented to blast front
p(t) .- pressure-time history of blast wave acting on object
M
mass of object
~
a - acceleration of object
Rearranging terms. and integrating:
'A
2-57
where
2-297
TH 5-l300/NAVFAC p 2397/ AFR 88-22

initial velocity of the object
total drag and diffraction impulse
The integral in Equation 2-57 is the area under the 'curve of pressure-time relationship. Equation 2-57 can be.integrat~d ~xplicitly if ~~e pressure-ti~e
history can be described by suitable mathematical functions or it can be evaluated graphically or .numerically if p(t) .carmo t; be easily written in function
form.
" 1 '.
.
"
For intermediate strength shocks, thesolution of Equation 2-57 can be determined.from a.rather long equation.
For computational ,purposes that
is presented here in graphical form as Figure 2 -248, where'
eq~ati~n
,:'.' .
pso ;. peak incident' overpressure.'
..
Po - atmospheric pressure
Co
drag coefficient
is
incident specific
a~
velocity of sound in air
impuls~
K - constant (4 if object is on the ground or reflecting surface

and 2 if object is in the'air)
H
minimum transverse dimension of th~ mean presented area of object.
X -distance from the front of the obj ec tct;o ~he location of its largest
cross-section normal to the.planeof the shock front.
M
mass of object
mean presented area of object
vo - initial velocity of object
. ;;.
The peak incident pressure Ps and the incident specific impulse is can be determined from Figure 2-7 knowing the scaled distance to the object. Values
for .the drag coefficient CD for several, common shapes are given in Table 2-8.
This analysis is appropriate for objects "far" from the explosive charge;
thus, the object is'not ina high velocity flow field and CD is essentially a
constant. Figure 2-248 can be used in most cases where the distance from the
object to the center of a spherical charge is greater thari 20 charge radii,
which is normally considered to be "far" from the ch&rge. For objects close
to a charge, the initial velocity is a function of the impulse on the target,
and the actual pressure-time variation across the "object is unimportant. For
this close-in range the impulse acting on the object is equal to the applied
momentum.
2-58
i-MV/A'
Thus, the velocity in terms' of the actual target shape is:

2-298': - .,.

2-59
v o - 1000iBA / 12M
where
i-specific acquired impulse
B - target shape factor from Figure 2-249

A - area of the target
M - mass of the target

v o - velocity of the target
To calculate the specific impulse imparted to a close-in target, the following
equations were developed based on experimental data:
For spherical, charges with R/Re S 5,07:
i
[ Re / Rt ]
0 . 158
-
38,000
[J
ReI R
]1.4
2-60
and
R/Re S 5.25:
For cylindrical charges with

i
0 . 158
------ - [ Re / Rt ]
For cylindrical charges with

i
- 46,500 [ Re I R ]
2-62
5.25 < R/Re S 10:
0 . 158
1. 75
2-63
- 161,700 [ Re / R ]
------ - [ Re / Rt ]
and:
0 . 333
Re f f - 0,909 [ le / Re
.]
2-64
Re
where
i-specific acquired impulse
B - nondimensional shape factor of the target from Figure
.e
Re f f - effective radius
Re - radius of the explosive
R - standoff distance
2-299
2~249
TM 5-l300/NAVFAC,P-397/AFR 88-22
Rt
target radius
le
length of cylindrical explosive
The effective radius Re f f is the radius of' an equivalent sphere of explosive

which could be formed from a cylinder of radius Re and length leo
._
'/
The specific impulse imparted to a ta~get,' as given'by Equations 2-60, and'262 and 2-63 for spherical and cylindrical charges, respectively, is plotted in
Figure 2-250. This experimentally derived 'data should not be used beyond the
distances shown in the figure. When these standoff distances are ,exceeded,
the specific acquired impulse may be approximated by using the normal reflected impulse obtained from Figure 2-7.
~
2-18.3. Velocity of Constrained Secondary-Fragments
..
" .
The method used to predict initial velocities of a constrained secondary fragments close to an explosion must ft'rst consider the ,amount of energy applied.
to each fragment as well as the energy consumed in freeing the fragment from
~.'
its support.
This relationship. can be expressed using the conservation of mo-
mentum and allowing the structural constraint to reduce 'the imparted impulse
as follows:
I
c
! .
2-65
1 s t - mV o
where
I
total impulse of the blast applied to the fragment

impulse consumed by the fragment support connection,
,
mass of the fragment

velocity of the fragment after break-away,
The value of 1 s t must be established experimentally. 'Based on tests, an'

empirical expression has been developed fe>r,,:c.a.,ntilever beams subj ected to,
closein effects:
"[~P'f 1
1/ 2
lood
--12
cl
+ C2 i b f 1
where
toughness of material (area under the stress-strain curve), fre>!"

Table 2-9
Pf
mass density of the fragment
Cl
constant equal to -0.2369
C2
constant equal to +0.3931

2- 300 .
2-66
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR i88-22
i
bf
A
unit impulse acting on the member

width of fragment exposed to the blast
cross-sectional area in the plan perpendicular to the long
axis of the fragment
Lf - length of fragment exposed to the blast

Equation 2-66 is adequate for determining the fragment velocity when:
0.602
.-:
2-67
.
:,
When Equation 2-67 is less than 0.602, the'magnitude of 'the velocity is equal
to zero.which indicates that disengagement of the'fragment will not occur.
The constants in Equation'2-66"were derived from'experimental data and can on- .
ly be used fo ricant I Leve red beams 'of steel or aluminum>
An equation similar to that of Equation 2-66 has been developed for clampedclamped: fragments except'that the value of Cl is equal' to "0.6498 and ~2 is
! ..
equal to 0:4358:
plot of Equation 2-66 for both cantilever and clamped-clamped fragments is
presented in Figure 2 - 251.
' "
-.
'
"
2-19. Fragment Trajectories
Once primary fragments or secondary missiles have been formed and accelerated
by an explosion, they will move along a specific'trajectory until' they impact
a target (receiver), or the ground. The forces acting on the fragments and
affecting their trajectories are inertia, gravitation, and fluid dynamic
forces. The fluid dynamic forces are determined by the instantaneous velocity
of the fragment at each instant in time. Generally, 'fragments are quite
irregular in shape and may be tumbling, so a completely accurate description
of the fluid dynamics forces during flight is difficult, if not impossible.
In the trajectory analysis for fragment flight, one usually resorts to some
simplified description of the fluid dynamic forces, and uses the concepts from
aerodynamics of division' of; these' forces into components called drag (along
the trajectory or normal to the gravity vector) and lift (normal to the trajectory or opposing gravity).' Then the for ce'r component.s are given at any instant by:
2-68
and
2-69
where
2-301
FL
lift force
FD
drag force
CL
lift coefficient
CD - drag coefficient
AD
drag a r-ea
density of the medium through which the fragment is traveling
velocity of the fragment
The 'lift and drag coefficients are determined empirically as a function of

shape and orierltation with respect to the velocity vector, and the magnitude
of the velocity v. Fragments discussed in sections 2-17 and 2-18 are generally of chunky shape, so that CD . CL for any flight orientation. Thus., they
are called drag-type fragments. The lift force on drag-type fragments.is very
small and may be neglected.
In a simplified trajectory problef!!, where the fragment is considered to move
in one plane, equations of motion can be written for acceleration in the X and
Y directions.
The acceleration in the X direction (drag only) is:
2-70
and for the Y direction (drag only):

2- 71
where:
acceleration in the X and Y directions, respectively
!lx' ~
Po
th~
fragment travels
velocity in the X and Y directions, respectively
v x' v y
At
mass density of the medium through which
gravity force (32.2 ft./sec. 2 )
mass of the fragment
trajectory angle
0:
2-72
2-302 .
TH 5-l300/NAVFACP-397/AFR 88-22
2-73
where
V
o - initial velocity
Qo
- initial trajectory angle
The equations shown above can be solved simultaneously to eventually determine

the distance traveled by the fragment. These equations are valid for fragment
velocities up to Mach I for standa~d.conditions. Figure 2-252 summarizes the
results of fragment range R for numerous sets of initial conditions for fragments affected only by drag forces. it , should
be noted that, in this curve,
1
several initial trajectory. angles were used in the analysis to obtain the maximum range R for the respective fragments. Thus, one need not know the
initial trajectory angle of a fragment in order to use Figure 2-252.
",:
. ~'
t'
2-303
.<
Wco
WCI
'W
o. CYLINDER OR SPHERE
Wco
WCI
STEEL CORE
b. STEEL CORED CYLINDER
Figure 2-236
Explosive outer casing separated bv incompressible fluid
2-304'
~ 1.6
..:z
r!
Ul
z
o
u
, . :r'
Ul
'> 1.2
.~
'.~
III
Z
It:
,~
Cl
.-,: H
>' 0,8
,~t.
.".::
SPHERE
.':7l
. ". H :
-iii
-tt
-:-Ft
'>
~
~ ,0,4
~
Cl
et
It:
10.
. 'i-:-"
et
~
Z
t+t
~ lgn+~;
_ .~ti- .
oJ
,0
.1
~-,
.2
.7
.4
10.
I.
2;
CASING WEIGHT TO DESIGN CHARGE WEIGHT, We /W
It:
Figure 2-237
Initial velocity of primary fragments for various geometries
2-305
10
-r
10
8
~~
11 1 .......
1.4
'"r-"'
5
4
3
..,,
I'ri:2"l
...l
r------tJ..0"
2
I
0.
0.5
.....
0.9"
I"
...... '-.
LI.3"
..... .....
........ .....
rt81 i"""'- .....
lilT
........
~
...... r-...
i"
.....
t--...
f"'..
.~
.... ~
[Q;!J i"""'- ..... ....
I"
....
.....1-'
.-. j,..oo'" l- I---
r-....
1-....r-
I-
.....
-~
l- _I-'
I-'
I- ~
l- i-"
I--"
:::::-
,......
""'"
l.oo'
t.,....
I---
1-0"'"
...- .... ....~ ~

:- ::::;.... :::. .., L"...I-' ......
~ t:- t;
I-' I....-:'
I.,.....--'"
l;"..
,......
l..o-'" .
"
'.
I-'
I.....-
...... L"...
.....
.'
.-
J..--"'"
l - I.--
...-
L"... l--.
I--
Numbers next to curves

Indlcote CaslnQ Thickness,t c
fOi'1
0.2
.-- ..... .
~ I---'
.....
I.-"
I.-
.....
....
~ r-
~I-'
..... ...... ......
, I-""
l 0.2"
0.1
....1-'
..... I,:.-~
~ I~
10"""'.-.
0..;
0.1
LO~
II
LQ.6" ..... i'-.. 10- """"" ....
10.5" .......
0.3
0.5
34
En 8 'io
2030
INSIDE DIAMETER OF CASING, dj lin.)

Figure 2-238
MA/B versus cylindrical casing geometry.
50"
100
'/
10
/
/
1/
17
/
1.0
/'
,;'
;/
/
/
./
0.1
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
DESIGN CONFIDENCE LEVEL. CL

Figure 2-239
Design fragment weight versus design confidence level

(0. 3$CL
s 1)
2-307
"'~
... '.".
... , ....
'
','
100
80
50
40
'"
o
Q)
Nc( .
~
.....
./
o .
.....
.--"
30
..
e ,.
./
.
'
20
10I
0.986 .
Q98a
0.990
0.992
0.994
0.996
0.998
DESIGN CONFIDENCE LEVEL. CL
Figure 2-240
Design fragment weight versus design confidence level

(0.986$ CL 1)
1.000
100
50
Numbers next to curves

indIcate Casing Thickness, t e
20
10
'"
I-'"
,/
!Q:t
/
2
~
ID
:t
0.5
0.1
0.05
0.02
0.01
100
I-'"
I-'"
/
/'
I-'"
,/
V"
I.;
,..
,/
~~
V~ ~
~
VV
[,;" I......
/"
l/. V
......... 12.0"1
~~
50
.... r-...
l"'- s,
......
......
"' ..0.5
&&:: l"-
O.?" l-
==:: ~
0.8
r-,
~ 110:9"
r-,i', "......
l-
"- 1.0
~ I"'........ . . ['0.. <, <, I'"j]'"
li .6"1-
.:J'.
2' ~ ~~ 1rj2""
............
"
K"'"r'\
~2
I
20
10
5
0.5
INSIDE DIAMETER OF CASING, dj (in)
Figure 2-241
<, ,M
r-.... r..... l' "-
-......... r--.. ........
~~
r;:;"7
.......
.......
tA::....
{Q1 -
..-....-
V V ~~
~ V~
...
...
./ ./
,/
....
./'"
,.. I-'" ~
V -:
/'
0.2
/"
,/
sr
.--,.....
."\ ........"- #r I"\

Ii 14"
0.2
B2N T/Wc versus casing geometry
2-309
0.1
\
( 0)
ACTUAL
CONFIGURATION
"
','
( b)
Figure 2-242
IDEALIZED CONFIGURATION
Equivalent. cylindrical explosive casings
2-310
100.0
80.0
60.0
50.0
40.0
I
I
I
I
.',
,~
.'.
V,
..
.,
~
IJ:
l')
w
~
I-
6.0
5.0
4.0
...
,A.
,.,
)
2.0
/:
1.0
0.8
"
1/
'V
.. ,
J __
0.1
.l.
'/
/
',-
,A.
..
I'
'.','
,
prim~ry
2-311
""'-I
1ir,'I
ct
'''''
. /.;
"
STRIKING ;VELOCITY'I INITIAL
Variation of
t) 'I
"
0.4 <-:0.5
'" ,0.6" '''';' 0.7
Figure 2-243
'I
II
(.
~"
,Y
' 1/"
"
1/
I /
-, I
"'"
~/
i"
0.3
./ -j ,/ 1
~ 4t,/
/
II
II
1/
\
'/
- ."
'j
""
I
I..
'/
,/
I/'
~~
..
/
1/
-:;P'
,,~
r. ,
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.2
tJ>7 .I': I .
,,
,/ I
,
,
'/
r-
'.' ' j
3.0
0.3
.- V
'.
:::i;
<l
0:
u,
1/ / I
l')
J I
"
"'
10.0
8.0
,I
I
II
I
'I
,:~t '
NUMBERS NEXT TO CURVES

INDICATE DISTANCE TRAVELED
BY FRAGMENT (ftl
30.0
20.0
I
I
fVL r
/
/
0.8
Ill"
1j
0.9
1.0
VELOCITY, VsI Vo
fragment.velocity with distance
d
= O.~
N = 0.845
3
Volume =0.654d
Weight =0.654d 3 1 - 0.186d 3
D " 0.186 Ib.lln.'
(a) ,STANDARD' FRAGMENT SHAPE
0.88d
1.12d
n = 1.5
,N = 1:00'
Volume = 1.2d 3
Weight .- 1.2 d3
o = O.34Ib./in. 3
1- .
0.34d
(b) ALTERNATE FRAGMENT SHAPE,

'-
NOTE:
. ,N = NJse shape factor" 0.72 +0.25 v'n - 0.25
-n = Caliber radius of the tangent ogive of the
;fragment nose Rid
o Caliber density Wf Id 3
't"
'
Figure 2-244 "Primary fragment shapes
2-312 .
.!i.
:;.j.,.:j.;;;J:...
IZ
..,,
...'"
'"
'"2
."..
'"
>...'"2
LL
.7
ir
Q.
LL
'"'"
.5
.4
I-
'"Z~
0
.2" ...! .l
j, ,'
.....1
.... 1:"
.4.'.'.
::::-::::1
,::.!' :.
.. 11
1.. I
j ,.' ...
1
1
111'j .
1..... 1._ I_J:..
4
0.01
.02
Il~tii,I":,!1:i~
.03
.04 .05
.07
0.1
.2
FRAGMENT WEIGHT. lb.
Figure 2-245
Relationship between fra.gment weight and fragment diameter
OBJECT EXPOSED
TO BLAST WAVE
REFLECTED
BLAST WAVE
INCIDENT
BLAST. WAVE
DIFFRACTION
OF BLAST WAVE
Figure 2-246
REFORMED
. BLAST WAVE
Interaction of blast wave with an irregular object
2-314
1,"
Pressure'
..
COQ+----I
Time
ta 1j
Figure 2-247
Idealized pressure-time loadirig on an irregular

fragment
,
2-315
10 1-
II
2
10
II
2
10
.....0
2
10- 2
5
2
-10 3'
5
2
10- 4
5
2
10- 5
10- 12
12CO i.eo
1000 Poo(KH+X)
, ,Figure 2-248
Nondime~sional_ object velocity, V,

as a function of pressure and impulse
2-316,
2Re
tJ
CYLINDRICAL
EXPLOSIVE
I' ___'..m
2~~
Ie
- - --IQE=::::JJ-i
----0
-lJ
I
R
(0) EXPOSED FLAT

FACE
(b.) EXPOSED CYLINDRICAL

. SURFACE
f3 = 1.0
f3=Jl4
2R e
CJ
2RJ~.'.
0--'''1
'tE:::JF
W'
Figure ,2-249
(e) EXPOSED SPHERICAL

SURFACE
f3 = ~
SPHERICAL
EXPLOSIVE
(p--~~'''o-----o
Target shape factor for unconstrainedcfragments
100,000
70,000
-r-
50,000
1m
,., 1. ._ .
40,000
"!i
30,000
.E
- ....
I
.WI
....
Q.
,
,
t
10,000
I'
.:.:~
++--=: - .... -::..
-li
_:t-+ -_
7,000
SPHERICAL
CHARGE
5,000
4,000
~:.;-'"
E-t-.. .
- -::
.r . .
3,000
~~
2,000
liiilii.
.
, ,
-::? .... ,.;: 7.:.:
+:;
..--=:::::
+-....
1,000
:i-A :trlAl
, ,
""
_t-'
"
.'
ill III'
,,'
2-250
7 8 9 10
Specific acquired impulse versus distance
2-318
, ,, ,
" .,
R/Re
;F~gure
~_H
-..-.
i-"
-rn
'I'
-:;E ,.
e
3. 5
..
-.
,
....
'"
~
~I
- . --.
.-.
. .
-.
...
.
.".
- . -.
--
I. 5
- - _.
- _.
--
. .
. ..
...
--
. ..
.
...
...
..
-.
- - -- _.'
.- _.
..
. .
-.'
_.
..
- - _.
- - - -.
-"
"-'
-'
. .
. ..
.. .
- - ..' " -
..
- . - .. - ...
..
...
CANTILEVER
..
I.
..'
--
..
".'""
. .
..
".
. .
.. _.
. .
..
..
. ..
. ..
...
2. 0
--
- - --
..
..
. .
. .
...
..
. _ .. -
-- - -
.. _.
. .
.. .
....
..
3. 0
2 5
...
- -" .-
... ...
. . .. _. - .
. - - ..
. .
- -
--
-.
.. .
.
- - - - -
. .
-.
- ... - - ..
CLAMPED - CLAMPED
. .
...
. ..
. ..
..
- - -'
..
- --
..
- ..
- _.
...
..
..
'.
---
..
...
o. 5
- ,. - '
'- -
'.'
- --
...
. .
Ib (2L1blO. 3
A (p, Tl 112
Figure 2-251
Scaled frf.l.gment velocities tor constrained fragments
- _. - --
10
., . 1 :
>
"""'1 TTI"-:T."
.IS'
-,-.-.,-",-"
~.,
j::lEl~lt
....,.".,.
!",','" " , '

~
".=
T=ripT,
~T":T"'Ol.
~ ..
.....j
1.0 ; ::::
::':I:':w:1~q:m
:"'1
...
,I, !Pi 111'11
.1""+1,'''''
I:C1~"I'd';14l"
.,_;,~; "':H~'" .!::":,,,j,,:rIJii
:1<H
i
,~: "ifhtflIJf1
I, :J.! i
.
..,,
o
'"
0::
o
I::E
o
[IIPililll:il!II'
:,'!', !!jijliiflt
Q..0
N
,::1.
"
,: ..
Ff"ilf"
~ '$i1"
i
',.: :I'::::"':I":ULIB,,;:gl:;' ::,; I:IIII~"
_.; :,::t::::I:::Fl:~ffi;:~~I~~j~!~ :.~. :~:! ilii!:i;
; r:
:: .: l"h
I11'~ 1It!1
111':1;1'1
:,::
j 1,i
. , : . .. '" ;;:::!!!i
";L!~t!'
'IT'
'0 ...,
"1:'
:' ji
: 1':
iC
0.01
.01
10
0,1
12POCD ADVO
Mg
Figure 2-252
Fragment range prediction
100
"'T:"-r:'
....
~.:l
....,
1000
TK 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
Table 2-5
Specific Weight and Gurney Energy Constant for Various

Explosives
Explosive
Composition B
Composition C-3
HMX
Nitromethane
PBX-9404
PETN
RDX
TACOT
Tetryl
TNT
Trimonite No. 1
Tritona1
(TNT/A1 - 80/20)
Specific Weight
(lb/in 3)
J 2E'
(ft/sec)
0.0621
0.0578
0.0682
0.0411
0.0664
0.0635
0.0639
,0.0581
0.0585
0.0588
0.0397
0.0621
9100
8800
9750
7900
9500
9600
9600
7000
8200
8000
3400
7600
2-321
~"ble
Typo
Cylinder
Sphere
2-6
w.
v'lF[ '+~~,W.J"
VJ:l!flw
~~
Ired
t')"lindu
'"
'"
'"
'"
Plate
VU'v'2
J-
~-w,.
W,~~W
W'-l':'~-;
'
..,m;
[ I
IV
J'"
c:rlinda'
"
--=-'J'-"
....,
... lUr. _
; ; '[' ,311'
vw'V3'
I
, .\
,
,",--;
[----'1'----.-----'-1'
,
II'
,"
II&ffie
.,+3' (1-,+,')
- n .. esp~ion ."plitt for a rcetanlUtar uplodye IIJId .. iched bet_fleD two metal
, pia"", hAyina the lame .urfaell ."".... the nplOlliye. It ill . .umed that the
J"
mlire .y.tem IIl1U1:pended in free .ir and h. ttUc:lul_ ill 'Rl611 h, COlnplorWoo
to iLl ....rfaep. alT. 10 that lhe relullitll molionll are _ntially DOrma.1 to the
p"~ of the pl.....
,W'I+IV
-W
havill, the
AllhoUa;h an U:P~D 10 predkt the velocity of frqmenLi ill GOt n.uable,

an .upper limit oI:the initial "e1odty may be obtained uain& the up".ioo
for. enlid cylinder .ad lower limit from the tJ[p~k)l1 for .. ,iolle pla~.
The ralJo of the upto.ive "ei,hl to the ~ ..~t (W/H'.) gf the bollo_
eyliDdrial ch..,.. ill u.d in both upr_ioaa.
"m
trp~n .ppli~
for I teet&opla, uplolive in oontad with. metal pia'"

.ur1aec Irh.. It ia _u~d that the entire lyatem ia _~nded
in f"'l! air and ill thkkn_ iI.mlll in I:ompan.oa to i.. ~.ee ~ MI lb.t tbe
"ullinl motiON! In! _ntially oormal to the pla.oe of the pl.....
nit
. -..12' - '-"11' 4W.
v"E'
p~'"
cn-.).
.Mre.-~
l.ed,
it 11".. ,.11"d
&n<:h"k;h
where lJ' t.helcht 01 !.h. a\.eel eeee
'-'W"~tQf
lr
lb.
v'2E"{<3+o)
(3+1lI)M"
j' ,:W__I~~~__
Hollow
2-17.2
H the eteel eol1l maG)' li~ more ma.in than lbe Up!olivf.
upr-iafl
for ~ iDiti&l nloeit)' ,bou.ld be lnOdiSed by IDwuplrm. it by the pp~ioo;
O.02W.
1--IV
~(1 +.)
+~
I+~W.+~IY
s.. paracRpb
v'2K'Vi
V2E' 1+::.
.
"3W.-
,,:." ',:' . W
~tHl
R.mub
Initiallr..,mlAl v"ocil,. ..
C,e-~tional .h.~
II'
"
W,,+2'
..hcre'----
11'.,+~
if W.,_II",,_II".
vw v'3
ti2.!!.:
W
= E:
E~pIOli'i'l
weiQht
Wc'l:C= Casing weight

211'.
1--:-
vn' -II';] "

[
1+6"",
W,Wc,WCO,WCIIWC2 (Ibs.)
d,. d oo (lb.,)
'0'
ffl'
lll./lfe.)
.,
'-
Table 2-7
Mott Scaling;Constants for Mild Steel Casings and Various Explosives
Explosive
. (Ozl/2 in. -3/2)
Baratol
Composition A-3
Composition B
Cyclotol (75/25)
H-6
HBX-l
HBX-3
Pentolite (50/50)
PTX-l
PTX-2
0.214
RDX
0.205
0.265
0'.302
Tetryl
TNT
0.238
.c.
2-323 .'
(Ozl/2 in. -7/6)
0.512
0.220
0.222
0.197
0.276
0.256
0.323
0'.248
0:222
0.227
0.212
0.272
0.312
Table 2-8
Drag Coefficient, CD' for Various Shapes
CIRCULAR CYLINDER
(LONG ROD),
SIDE-ON
F~'
SPHERE
ROD, END-ON
flOW\)
DISC, FACE-ON
CUBE, FACE-ON
CUBE, EDGE-ON
LONG RECTANGULAR
MEMBER, FACE-ON
LONG RECTANGULAR
MEMBER, EDGE-ON
NARROW STRIP, FACE-ON
CD
SKETCH
SHAPE
FLOWO
1.20
0.47
0.82
OR
tl
1.17
FL\JW~
"OW~
FLOW~
~
~
2-324',
1.05
,.
0.80
2.05
1.55
1.98
T~ble
Steel
2-9
Steel Toughness :
Toughness in-lb/cubic in.
ASTM A 36
ASTM A 441
ASrM A514 Grade F
12,000
15,000
19,000
.?
2-325
SHOCK LOADS
2-20.
~ntroduction
The strong air 'blast waves and high speed 'fragments are the primary 'hazards of
accidental explosions.
The exterior of a protective structure is designed
primarily for the.blast pressures,

just
as-
important
as
tective facility.
In some situations, the fragments may be
the pressures in determining the configuration of a pro-
While "t h c contents "o f
the structure are protected froin the
direct effects of b l a's t pr es uure's and fragments by the structure's exterior,

the contents are subject to effects of the building's motion.
These structure
r:U)ti.ollS can cause Luj ury to personnel, damage to equipment as well as
dislodgement of the structure's interior components, "including interior parti-
tions,' hung ceilings, light fixtures, ductwork, piping, and electrical 'lines ,
Structure motions are caused by what is normally termed shock loads.
These
are loads which cause transient or short-duration vibratory motions of the
ground surface and the .s t r uc t ure . "They do not cause significant structural
damage but instead induce motion which, as stated above, can damage the structure's interior contents.
There are two distinct types of shock loads: ground shock and air shock.
Ground shock results from the energy which 'is imparted to the ground by an explosion. Some of this energy is transmitted through the ground as directinduced ground shock. Both of these forms of ground shock when imparted to a
structure will cause the structure to move in both a vertical and horizontal
direction. Air shock results from the blast overpressures striking the building, Vertical, horizontal and overturning motions result f rom the shock
impact.
The vertical and overturning motions are usually not significant and
can be neglected while the horizontal motions must be considered.
Large dis-
placements can result when' a s truc t.ure s'lides relative to .'the ground 'surface.
The net motion .o f the structure is a' comb Inat fon of the motions due to the air
induced and direct-induced ground shock, and the air shock. Curves which describe the ground motion (acceleration versus time, velocity versus time, and
displacement versus time curves)' are not readily calculated. However, these
relationships are not required since the design of protective structures to
resist shock loads is based on the peak values of the induced motion rather
than the' actual mo t.Lonv t Lme relationships.
The procedures presented in this section are applicable for uniform motions.
The shock loads and resulting structure motions apply to rigid concrete structures located at the low- and intermediate-pressure design ranges, At
distances corresponding to these pressures, the shock loads are uniform across
the structure.
A rigid concrete structure acts as a rigid body, that is, all
components of the structure have essentially the same motion. The procedures
can be applied to structures located close to an explosion and to non-rigid
structures. However, the local effects associated with these conditions must
be accounted for in the analysis.
2-21. Ground Shock
2-21.1. Introduction
2-326
1M 5-l300jNAVFAC P-397/AFR'SS-22
When an explosion occurs at or near the ground surface, ground shock results
from the energy imparted to the ground by the explosion. Some of this energy
is transmitted through the air in 'the form of air-induced ground shock and
some is transmitted through the ground as direct-induced ground shock.
Air-induced ground shock results when the air-blast shock wave compresses the
ground surface and sends a stress pulse into the underlying media. The magnitude and duration of the stress pulse in the ground depend on the character of
the air-biast pulse and the ground media.

motions are downward.
Generally,'the air-induced ground
They are maximum at the ground surface and attenuate
with depth. However, the presence of a shallow water table, a' shallow soilrock interface, or:other discontinuities can alter the normal attenuation process. The properties of the incident overpres~ure pulse and 'the surface soil
layer usually determine the character of air-induced,ground shock on'aboveground structures.
Direct-induced ground shock results from the explosive energy being transmitted directly through the ground. This motion includes ,both the true
direct-induced motions and cratering-induced motions~ The:'latter generally
have longer durations and are generated by the crater formation process in
cratering explosions. The induced ground motion'resulting from both types have
a longer duration than air-blast-induced ground shock and the,wave forms tend
to be sinusoidal.
The net ground shock experienced by a point on the ground surface is a combination of the aircblast-induced and direct-induced 'shock .. The relative magnitudes and sequencing of the motions are functions of the media (air and soil)
through which the shock travels and the distance from the point of detonation.
At ranges close to the blast, the highly compressed air'permits the airblast shock front' to propagate at speeds greater than the seismic velocity of
the ground. In this region, 'the super-seismic region, the air blast arrives
at a given point 'before the direct-induced ground shock. As the air-blast
shock front moves farther from the point of detonation, the shock front
velocity decreases, and the direct-induced ground shock catches and "outruns"
the air blast. This latter region is called the outrunning region. Wave
forms in the outrunning region are generally' a comple~ combination of, both
types of induced shock. The-combined motion can be obtained"from consideration of the arrival time of 'each wave'. The arr Ival t Lme of the air blas'tO is
determined from the data presented for unconfined explosions. Whereas, the
arrival time of the direct-induced ground ,shock can be estimated by assuming
that the ground 'shock travels at the seismic velocity of the ground media.
v
The combined ground motion 'in both the superseismic and outrunning~region are
illustrated in Figure 2-253. .
2-21.2. Air Blast-Induced Ground Shock

One-dimensional wave propagation theory is used to estimate air blast-induced
ground shock.
For surface structures located
on
ground media having ~niform
properties, the expressions to define this motion take very simple forms. Using this approach, the maximum vertical velocity at the ground surface, VV'
can be expressed as
2-74
where
2-327
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

Vv
maximum vertical velocity of the .ground surface.
P s o - peak positive incident pressure (Fig. ,2-15)
"-
''.':'.
mass density of th~ so11
cp
compression wave
seismicveloc~ty
in the soil
"
The mass de ns It.y 1 P. for typical. soils and;. rock are presented in.Jable 2-10
"ltd the seismic velocities are presented in ..Tab Le 2~11. .
',."
The maximum v~rtical displacement,
is ~btained by integrating t~~ above
""'"ccssion wi t.h re spe c t to time . . The integral of the pressure with respect to .
1:i.~'le is simply the total po s LcLve phase-impulse so_that:
.
.Pv-
.',
2-75
. ,
",here
Dv
maximum displacement of
th~
ground surface
is - unit positive incident.impulse (Fig, 2-15)

.
The
ma~irnum
vertical acceleration,
~V'
is based on the assumption
9~
linea~
velocity increase during a rise time equal to one millisecond. The resulting
acceleration is increased by 20 percent to account ;or nonlineari~y,d~ring the
rise time. Accelerations are, expr~s~ed in multiples of the gravitational con~\
stant so. that,
.'
...
whe r e
.AV - maximum vertical acceleration of the ground

l
.g
..
.-.
surfac~.
','" ,
gravitati~nal constant equal ~o 32.2. ft/sec 2.

,
"
The above equation is agequate for predicting the. ~c~eleration i~ dry. soil.
Howe~er. the equation underestimates ~he acceleration. in saturate~ s~ils and
rock; To approximate the acceleration"of saturated soils and rock .. Lt : is re.c-.
ommended that the value.of. the acceleration obtained. from the Eq~ation 2-76 be
doubled.
. . '.
~-,
The maximum horizontal ground motions ~F~ expressed in terms of the maximum
vertical motions as a function of the.seismicvelocity of the soil and the
shock wave velocity so that
DH
DV tan [sin- l (C p / 12,000 U
2-77
VH
Vv tan [ ~in-l (C p 01 12,000 U ) 1
2-78
AH - AV tan [sin- l (C p / 12, 000 U
)1
2-79.
where U - shock front velocity (Fig. 2-15).
For (C p / 12 , OOO U) greater than one, horizontal and vertical motions are
approx1mately equal. Therefore, it is recommended that for all values of the
2-328
above function greater than one, the horizontal motion is set equal to the
calculated vertical motion.
The equations which describe the air-induced ground shock are a function of
the density and seismic velocity of the soil. However, a wide range of seismic velocities is given in Table 2-11 for each of the soils listed. In a final design, soil tests are required to accurately determine the density arid
seismic velocity of the p~rticular soil, at the site. - In lieu of tests, the
mass density given in Table 2-10 may be used. However, since the range of
seismic velocities given Table 2-11 is so large, it is recommended that the
lower bound value of the velocity be used to produce a conservative estimate
of the induced motion.
2-21.3. Direct-Induced Ground Hotion
Empirical equations have been developed to predict ~irect-induced ground motions. The equations apply for TNT detonations at or near the ground surface.
Three types of ground media have been considered; dry soil, saturated soil and
rock. The ground shock parameters are expressed in terms of the charge weight
and distance from the explosion.
The maximum vertical displacement
<Dv>
of the ground surface for a rock media
is-given by
2-80
in which
2-81
where
RG - ground distance from the explosion
w-
weight of TNT charge
ZG - scaled distance from the explosion

and the maximum horizontal displacementDH of the ground surface is equal to
one-half of the maximum vertical displacement or
2-82
When the ground media consists of either dry or saturated soil, the maximum
vertical displacement is given by
DV - 0.17 ~1/3 Wl / 3 / ZG 2 . 3
2-83
while the-maximum horizontal displacement DH is equal to the maximum vertical

displacement or,
2-84
The maximum vertical velocity (VV) for all ground media is given by
2-329
1M 5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

Vv - 150 I Zel. 5
2-85
I'
"
and the maximum horizontal velocity (VH) is equal to the maximum vertical velocity for all ground media or
'2- 86
Finally, the maximum vertical acceleration (AV) ofthe.ground surface for a l l '
media is given by
2-87
"
while for dry soil, the maximum horizontal acceleration, AH, is equal to one-
half of the maximum vertical acceleration, or
,2-88
however, fora wet soil or a rock media, the. horizontal and vertical, acceleration is equal,' or
-.
il
,''',:
2-89
2-22. Air Shock
When an air blast strikes an aboveground protective structure, motions are imparted to the building. The most severe' 'motion is due to the response of the
individual elements which make up the exterior. shell of the structure. Procedures for the design of these elements are presented in subsequent chapter of
this manual. This section is concerned with the gross motion of the structure
on its supporting soil due to the impact. of the air blast.' This gross motion
is in addition to the ground induced motions.
'.
Vertical, horizontal and overturning motions are imparted to the structure by

the air blast. However, since the vertical mot Lon of. the 'structure is ..
restricted by the ground which is already compressed due to the dead load of
the structure and its contents, vertica1:motionsmust necessarily be small and'
can be safely neglected. Overturnin gm'otlons. are: also neglected in this section. These motions are most significant in tall structures with small plan
dimensions which are not common in protective construction.
This section is
concerned solely with horizontal. sliding motions which can be quite significant.
Horizontal motion results from 'an unbalanced blast load act~ng on the structure:. The tendency of the structure to slide is resisted by the. friction
forces developed between the foundation and the underlying soil. For structures with deep, foundations, additional resistance to sliding is afforded by
active and passive soil pressures'deve10ped at the leeward side of the .
structure.
2-22.2. Method of Analysis

The gross horizontal motion of a structure is computed in this manual using a
method of numerical integration, namely, the acceleration-impulse extrapo2-330
TM 5-l300/NAVFACP-397/AFR 88-22
lation method. This method of dynamic analysis is comprehensively 'presented
in Chapter 3. Briefly, the equation of motion for a single-degree-of-freedom
system is given as
F - R - D
Ma
2-90
where
F
R
D
M
applied blast load as a function of time

resistance of the system to motion as a function of displacement
damping, force as a function of velocity"
mass of the single-degree-of-freedom system'
acceleration of the- system
The numerical method of solving the, equation of motion involves a step-by-step

integration procedure. The integration is started at time zero' where the displacement and velocity are known to be zero~ . The time scale is divided into
small intervals. The values of F, Rand M (D is not included) are calculated
for each time step. The integration is started by first approximating the acceleration for the first time'interval and progresses by successively calculating the acceleration at each time step. The change in velocity and displacement associated with each incremental acceleration is calculated. The
accumulated velocity and displacement are obtained for each time step until
the maximum values have been obtained.
The first step in the analysis is to describe the' blast loads acting on the
structure. The pressure" time variation of the b l.as t . load is computed as the
shock front sweeps across the structure. The unbalanced load in the horizontal direction is c omput e d as' a function of the' blast loads acting on the front
and back walls (windward and leeward walls), respectively. The average blast
load action of .t he roof of "the structure' is computed as the shock front trave-
rses the bUilding.
The 'procedure used to describe these loading conditions
have been presented in previous' s ec tLo ns of ch Ls chapt.e r .:
The second step in the problem is the determination of the resistance of the
building to horizontal motion. ,The tendency of the base of the structure to
slide is resisted by f,iction forces on the foundation and earth pressure at
the rear (leeward side) or' the structure'. 'For structures with shallow foundations, the resistance to sliding is afforded primarily by friction between the
horizontal surfaces of the concrete foundation and underlying soil. The earth
pressure resistance at the rear of the structure' is small and can be conservatively neglected. For structures with deep foundations, the passive pressure
at the rear of the structure is, signfficant and greatly reduces the displacement of the building.
The friction force developed between the horizontal surfaces of the concrete
foundation and underlying soil is given by
where
Ff
frictional force resisting horizontal motion
I.lcoefficient of friction between concrete and type of

supporting soil ,
2-331
TK 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

FN
vertical load supported by the foundation
The coefficient of friction ~ for the horizontal surface between the concrete
foundation and the underlying soil is given in Table 2-12 for various types of
soil. The coefficient is not a function of time or displacement .. However,
the structure must slide a finite amount before the frictional force is generated. The structure should slide approximately one-quarter of an inch before
the frictional force is taken into sccoune ..
The vertical load FN supported by the foundation' consists of the dead weight
of the structure, the weight of the bUilding's interior contents, and the
blast load acting on the roof of the structure. Since the blast load is a
function of time, the building's resistance to sliding (frictional force F f)
is also a function of time. In addition, the blast load acting'on the roof,
greatly increases the foundation loads, and consequently, significantly increases the building's resistance to sliding.
2-23. Structure Motions:
'.,
The net motion of.a structure is a combinatlon of the motions due to the airinduced and direct-induced ground shock, and the air shock. Since the methods
of analysis described in this section are applicable to rigid concr~te structures
~ocated
at comparatively large distances from an explosion, the strue-.
ture motions are taken equal to the ground motions in the vicinity of the
building. In. the case of air shock, the structure motions are computed
directly.
The motion of structures located at comparatively close distances to an explo~
sion as well as the motion of nonrigid structures may be. determined. However.
the local effects associated with these conditions such as motions due to
cratering, fragment impact, etc. must be accounted for in the determination of
the structure
mot~ons.
2-23.2. Net Ground Shock

The net ground sho~k associated with an accidental explosion is .a combination
of the air-.induced and direct-induced ground shock. The time at which the
shock is felt at adjacent structures and the magnitude and duration of the motion are a function 9f the quantity of' explosives detonating, the absolute
distance b~tween .th~ detonation and adjacent structure and the. soil media at
the site.
The air-induced ground shock is a func t Lor; of the air blast. Consequently,
the arrival time and duration of the ground shock may. be taken equal to the
arrival time t A and duration to of the air blast. For an explosion occurring
at or near the ground surface, the arrival
tim~
and duration are obtained from
Figure 2-15 for the scaled ground distance ZG between the explosion and the
structure. Figure 2-15 provides the blast parameters associated with the detonation of hemispherical TNT charge located on the ground surface.
The direct-induced ground shock is a function of the soil media. The arrival
time of the shock load at the structure is a function of. the seismic velocity
2-332
"
TK 5~1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR88-22
in the soil and the distance from the explosion.
The arrival time is ex-
pressed as
12, 000 RG
I.. Cp
2-92
tAG - arrival time of the ground shock
where
ground distance from the explosion

compression wave seismic velocity in the soil (table 2-11)
As previously explained, the seismic Velocity of the soil should 'be obtained
from soil tests fora final design. In lieu of tests, 'it is recommended that
the entire range of velocities given in table' 2-11 be investigated to determine if the direct-induced ground 'shock can be in phase with' the air-induced
ground -shcck , ' "
" ,
. .:
.I
The actual duration of the shock load is not readily available. However, it
is sufficient to realize that the duration is long, that-is, many times larger
than the duration of the air-induced shock.
The net ground shock is obtained fromconsideration of the arrival time and
duration of each type of induced shock. If t A + to is less than t, the structure is subjected to superseismic 'ground shock (Fig. 2-253). The air induced
ground-shock arrives at the' structure first and is dissipated by the time that
the direct-induced ground shock arrives. The structure feels the effect of .
each shock separately. If t A is greater than tAG' the structure is subjected
to outrunning ground shock (Fig. 2-253). The direct-induced ground shock arrives at the 'structure first and', since its duration is long, the airinduced
ground~hock will arrive 'at the structure while the 'direct-induced ground
shock is still acting. The structure feels the combined effects of the
induced shocks. If t A is slightly less than'tAGand t A + to'is greater than
tAG' the air-induced ground shock will still be acting when the direct-induced
ground shock arrives. For design purposes, this latter case should be treated
as an outrunning ground shock.
2-23.3. Maximum Structure Motion
The design of protective structures to resist the effect of shock loads is
based on the peak values of the induced motion rather than the actual motiontime relationships. In fact, the actual time history of the motion is not
known nor can it be approximated with any degree of accuracy. Consequently,
the phasing of the various shocks cannot be accomplished accurately. Therefore, for design purposes the peak values of the in-phase motions are added.
For the case of air-induced ground shock and'air shock, 'the maximum values of
horizontal displacement, velocity and acceleration are always added. These
shock motions must be in phase since they are caused by the same source, namely, the air blast.
'
In the case of superseismic ground shock where the'air-induced'and directinduced ground shock are completely separated, the maximum motion may be due
to either source. The'maximum value of displacement .. velocity; or acceleration is the numerically larger value regardless of its source.
2-333

In the case of outrunning ground, the structure, motion results from the combined effect of the air-induced and'direct-induced ground shock as well as the
air shock. The maximum motions in the vertical and horizontal direction is
the algebraic sum of the maximum value 'of displacement, velocity, and 'accel'
eration from each source of motion in the vertical and horizontal directions.
2-24, Shock Response Spectra
For the purposes of assessing the e'f f'e c t s of 'shock on structures, one 'of the
simplest interpretations of 'motion 'data involves the concept.of the'response
spectrum. A response spectrum i~ a, plot,' of the maximum response of a simple
linear oscillator subj ected to a ,given input motion against frequency, "Hence.a response spectrum depicts only maximUm resporise~alues, not a time-dependent
history of the motion of the oscillator, ',The US'" of these .maxLmum values' is
sufficient to ensure a r e asonab Le and s'ar'e' de si.gn 'for "shock loads:
2-24.2, Definition of Shock Spectra Grid
Response spectra are constructed from consideration of the response of a simple linear oscillator. For a 'protective 'structure subjected ,to shock loads, a'
piece of equipment or,any interior component can be considered as the mass of
a simple oscillator. The load,deflection properties of the structural system
wh~ch .connects F~e component to the protective" structure. determine the spring
constant of the oscillator.

The maximum displacement of the'mass '(buildi';g component) relative to the.base
(protective structure) is called the spectrum displacement ,(D), and the maximum acceleratio~of the mass, is called the spectrum a~celeration (A). The
maximum velocity of the mass is approximately equal to the ,more useful quantity called the spectrum pseudo-velocity (V) which,is given by
V21TfD
where
f
D
2-93
velocity of the mass

natural frequency of vib~ation of the oscillator
displacement of the mass'
-,
For an undamped system, the displacement and acceleration are related by

A
where
2-94
,
acceleration of the:mass in g's
gravitational constant,
When damping is present, the above relationship between acceleration 'and dis-'
placement is approximate. However, the relationship may still be used to develop shock spectra.
'
' ,
'
"
Plot~ of the three quantities, displacement D, yeloci~y V, and acceleration A,

against frequency f, are then shock spectra. They may b~ plotted indiVidually"
or, more conveniently, on a single plot by means of the type of chart shown in
2-334
Figure 2-254. Any point on this logarithmic grid,represents a simultaneous

solution to Equations 2-93 and 2-~4. The log-log grid must be proportioned to
satisfy the solution of the equations.' The grid is constructed from 'standard
log-log paper on which a second log-log grid is superimposed and-Yo t.a t.ed 45
degrees. The width of a ~og cycle on this rotated ,grid is 0.707 times the
width of a cycle on'the standard grid. '
,,' .
2-24.3. Response
Sp~ctra
A response spectrum is a plot of the maximum response of a single-degree-offreedom system to a given 'input, motion. The given input motions are the air
shock and the air-induced and direct-induced ground shocks. Since the maximum
values of the free-field displacement, velocity, and acceleration (input motion) are used to construct the' spectra, a response spectrum envelope is produced. The spectrum takes a trapezoidal shape and is sho~ in Figure 2-254 by
the lines labeled 0, V and 'A, The three sides of this tr~pezold can be related to the maximum free'field input motion parameters of displacement, velocity, and
accelerati~n.
..
Relationships between the spectrum envelope bounds and the characteristics of

the time dependent free-field input motions (displacements, velocities, and
accelerations) clearly indicate that as the variation of the free-field motion
parameters versus time is defined, the definition of the corresponding spectrum envelope can be refined. However, in the general case of blast-induced
motions, the variation of the input motions with time cannot visually be described in significant detail. Consequently, it is recommended that for the
elastic response of systems, the spectrum be defined by the following three
straight lines as illustrated in Figure 2-254.
(1)
Line "0" is drawn parallel to lines of constant displacement with

a magnitude equal to the maximum freecfield (building) displacement.
(2)
Line "V,i is drawn parallel to lines of constant velocity (actually

pseudo velocity) with a magnitude equal to one and one-half (1.5)
times the maximum free-field (building) velocity.
(3)
Line ,"A" is drawn parallel to lines of constant acceleration with

a magnitude 'equal to two (2) times the maximum free~field (building) acceleration.
A spectrum defined in this ~anner is "clearly an approximation, however, its

accuracy is considered to be consistent with the accuracy of the input freefield (building) motions on which it is based. In those cases where the input
motions can be defined with greater confidence, the spectrum identified above
can be defined to reflect the greater accuracy:
In most cases, interior components ,of the structure and/or equipment and
equipment supports are designed elastically. ,Therefore, the shock spectra described above will suffice. However, when a very large explosion causes large
structure motions, interior systems may require inelastic'$iesigns. These conditions will usuallynotarise'for the charge capacities considered in this
report. Therefore, methods for calculating inelastic shock spectra have not
been presented. It is recommended that the bibliography given at the end of
this chapter be consulted for further data on this subject.
2-335
IU>
<t
...J
m
'":::>
<.J
<.J
'"
:::>
Q
,Z
~. ''''''''''''"
DIRECT'INDUCED
lL
:::>
..'
VERTICAL VELOCITY
(0)
,1_
HORIZONTAL VELOCITY
SUPERSEISMIC
GROUND SHOCK
...J
IU>
<t
...J
m
II:
II:
<t
U>
<t
II:
...J
it._
>-
","
lL
:::>
<t
"
"(~)
t
HORIZONTAL VELOCITY
VERTICAL VELOCITY
Figure 2-253
::IE
0
u,
I-
OUTRUNNING GROUND SHOCK
Net ground motions .pr oduc ed by an explosion

at the ground 8urf~~e
2-336
MAXIMUM DISPLACEMENT. Inch
#
"w
/',/ ""',), 1'\l\N/ ,/ / ,/
DV
,~
,0/
C:J
'V\I
0;.-
'\J
."
e
o
..
u
M~y
...
I'>
w
w
....
';I:,
...J
"J:::d:X~
'">
::E
::>
::E
...x
_. -
v-.
fX//
KX// /IX X'-.IX
/(V
r-..
'}ft,N~
/ , / /IV
T\.')(
::E
,
~
1.0~~~~ID~~
.,
'0
/~'
'0
MAXIMUM ACCELERATION, g
0.1
1.0
10
100
FREQUENCY. cps
Figure 2-254
Typical response shock spectra
1,000
10,000
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
, Mass
Table 2-10
Densit~
for Typical Soils and Rocks '. ,

Mass Density,
(lb-sec 2)/in.
Material
Loose, dry sand
Loose, .saturated sand
Dense', dry sand
Dense, saturated sand
Dry clay
Saturated clay
Dry, sandy silt
Saturated, sandy silt
,Basalt
Granite
'Limestone
Sandstone,
Shale
Concrete
t"
'
1.42 E-04
1:79 E-04
1.65 E-04
2.02 E-04
1.12 E-OI,
1.65 E-04
1. 57 E-04
1. 95 E-04
2.56E-04
2.47 E-04
2.25 E-04
2'.10 E-04
2.l7'E-04
2.25 E-04
-,
,
"
'0
'
>
Table 2-11
.Typical Seismic Velocities, for Soils and Rocks

'
..
Seismic' Velocity
, Material
" in./sec,
7,200
30,000
36,000
36,000
72,000
84,000
120,000
.120,000
:156,000
9,600
24;000
Loose and dry soils

Clay and wet soils
Coarse and compact soils
Sandstone arid cemented,soils
Shale' and marl
"
Limestone-chalk
Metamorphic 'rocks
Volcanic rocks
Sound plutonic, rocks
Jointed granite'
'
Weathered rocks
2-338
to,' 39,600
to 75; 600
to 102,000
to 168,000'
to 210;000
to 252,000,.
to 252,DOO
to 27.0,,000
to 30b, 000
to 180,000
to l20,0~0
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
Coefficient of Friction for Concrete Foundation and Underlying Soils
Table 2-12
Soil Material
Coefficient of
Friction, IJ.
Clean sound rock
0.70
Clean gravel, gravel-sand mixture, coarse sand
0.55 to 0.60
Clean fine to medium sand, silty medium to coarse

sand, silty or clayey gravel
0.45 to 0.55
Clean fine sand, silty or clayey fine to medium sand
0.35 to 0.45
Fine sandy silt, nonplastic silt
0.30 to 0.35
Very stiff and hard residual or preconsolidated clay
0.40 to 0.50
Medium stiff and stiff clay and silty clay
0.30 to0.35
2-339
TN 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
APPENDIX 2A
ILLUSTRATIVE EXAMPLES
TK 5-1300/NAVFAC
Problem,2A-l.
Problem:
P-3~7/AFR
88-22
Free-Air Burst
Determine incident blast wave parameters for ,a ,point of interest

in the air for a free air burst:
.
Procedure:
Step 1.
Determine the charge weight and height of burst Hc'

of interest in the air relative to the charge.
Step 2.
Apply a 20X safety factor to the charge weight.
Step 3.
For the point of interest, calculate slant distance R and scaled

slant distance Z:
Step 4.
Determine incident blast ~aye parameters from Figures 2-7 and 2-8
f?r the.calculated value of the scaled slant distance i:
From Figure 2-7 read:

Peak positive incident pressure Ps o
Shock front velocity U
Scaled unit positive incident impulse i s/Wl/3
Scaled positive phase duration t o/Wl/3
Scaled arrival time t A/Wl/3'"
Scaled wave length of positive phase Lw/Wl/3
From Figure 2-8 Read: ,
Peak negative incident pressure P;o .
Scaled unit negative incident impulse
Scaled negative phase duration
i;
/Wl/3
to /Wl/3
Scaled wave length of negative phase
LW
/Wi/3
Multiply scaled values by Wl/3 to obtain absolute values.
2A-l
Select point
Example 2A-l.
Required:
Free-Air Burst
_to
Incident blast wave parameters Ps~, P;o" U, is' i;, ~o'

tAl L;
at a point 30 ft. below and 45 ft. away in the air from an air
burst of 290 lbs. at a height of burst of 60 ft. above the ground.
W" 350lbs
I
I
-9
L
II
:z:
Step 4.
45'-0"'
__
POINT OF'
INTEREST
Determine incident blast wave parameters for

Z - 7.67 ft./lb l/ 3
2A-2
TM 5-l300/NAVFAC P-39i/AFR 88-22
From Figure 2-7:
,.,
Ps o - 11.2 psi
U - 1.34 ft./ms
.,
7.0 psi-ms/lb l/ 3, is - '7.0 (350)1/3 - 49.3 psi-ms

2.05 ms/lb l/ 3,
,t 0 -
- 3.15 ms/lb l/ 3
2.05 (350)1/3
- 14.45 ms.
3.15 (350)1/3 - 22.2 ms
- 2.0 ft/lb l/3
,r.,. -
14.09 ft
From Figure 2-8:

Ps o - 1.63 psi
i; ;Wl/3_ 7.2 psi-ms/lb l/3, i; - 7.2 (350)1/3_ 50.74 psi-ms
t~ ;Wl/3. 8.4 msjlb l/3,
t~ - 8.4 (350)1/3 --59.20 ms
L; ;Wl/3 - 5.8 ft/lb l/3,
L; - 5.8 (350)1/3 - 40.87 ft.

-'
Problem 2A-2.
Problem:
'Air' Burst
Determine free-field blast wave parameters at a point on the

ground for an air burst.
Procedure:
Step 1.
Select point of interest on the ground relative to'the

,charge. Determine the charge weight, height 'of burst He'
and ground distance RC'
Step 2.
Apply a 20% safety factor to the charge weight.
Step 3.
Calculate scaled height of burst and angle of incidence
2A-3
a:

,
Step 4.
',J.
Determine peak reflected pressure Pr a and scaled unit

positive reflected impulse i r a;Wl/3 in Mach front from
Figures 2-9 and 2-10, respectively, for corresponding scaled
height of burst and angle of incidence a:
'
'Rea'd 'p ra and i
r a;Wli
Multiply scaled value by Wl / 3 to obtain absolute value.

Step 5.
Read scaled distance Z from Figure 2-7 for corresponding

peak incident pressure Ps o -'P r a in the Mach front.
Step 6.
Determine shock front velocity U and scaled'time of arrival

of blast wave, t A;Wl/3 from Figure 2-7 for value Z from step
5, Multiply scaled value of Wl / 3 , t o obtain absolute value.
Step 7.
Read scaled distance Z from Figure 2-7 for corresponding

scaled unit positive ,incident imp~lse i s;Wl/3 ~ ira ;W1T3 in
the Mach front.
'
Step 8.
Determine scaled positive duration of positive phase from

Figure 2-7 for the,value of Z from step'7. Multiply scaled
value of Wl / 3 to obtain'absolute value.
~..
Example 2A-2 .
Required:
. '"
Air Burst
Free-field blast wave parameters Ps o' U, is, to' t A for an air

burst, of 20,800 Ibs. at a ground distance ,of 300 ft. and a height
of burst of 90 ft.
"
Solution:
,Step 1.
"
Given: 'Charge weight
- 20,800 lb.
Step 2.
W - 1.20 (20,800) - 25,000 Ibs.
2A-4
Rc -
300 ft, He - 90 ft.
TH S-1300/NAVFAC
P~397/AFR
88-22
W-25,OOO#
CIl
'Figure 2A-2 .
.'
For point' of interest
Step 3.
,.....[..'l;.]
.
a .. tan~l .
.. Il_
-;;:
,
l[300/90j
-.tan- 73.3~
\ ~
. '
'.
-'.
Determine reflected pressure Pr a and reflected impulse in

the Mach front from Figure 2-9 and 2-10.
Step 4.
Hc/Wl/3 -
3.08 ft/lb l/ 3 and a -
73.3"
Pr a - 10.1 psi
ira
- 9.2 psi-ms/1b l/ 3, ira - 9.2 (25.000)1/3_ 269.0 psi-ms
wl/ 3
Step
5.
Step 6.
Read scaled distance Z from Figure 2-7 corresponding to Ps o

- Pr a - 10.1 psi
Z - 7. ~ ft/1b 1/3'
Determine U and t A/Wl/3 from Figure 2-7 corresponding to Z
- 7.8 ft/1b l/ 3.
U - 1. 38 ft/ms
t
A/W1/3
- 300 ms/1b 1/3, t A - 300 (25.000)1/3 - 8772.05 ms.
2A-S
TIl .5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22'..

Step 7.
Read scaled distance Z from Fig. 2-7 corresponding to

.. 'I. ,'
n3l / 3 _ i
Sf"
n3l / 3
rQ'"
Z - 5.7 ft/lb l/ 3
9.2 psi-ms/lb l/3

..
"
.Determine t~;Wl/3 from Figure 2-7 corresponding t~
Step 8.
Z - -5. 7ft/lb l l.3

t o;Wl/3 - 155 ms/lb l/ 3., ,to' ~ 155 (25.000) 1/3_ 4532.23 ms
Problem 2A-3.
Problem:
Surface Burst"
Determine free-field blast '''!ave parameters for . a'surface burst.
Procedure:
Step 1.
Select point of interest,oni,the ground relative to the

charge. Determine, the charge weight,'and ground distance
~.
Step 4.
..
'
Determine free-field blast wave parameters from Figure 2-15

for corresponding scaled ground distance ZC:
Read:
' '
",
..
Peak positive incident pressure Ps o

"
Shock front velocity U
:0'.
......
Scaled unit positive incide~t impulse i~;Wl/3

Scaled positive phrase duration to/wi/3
,
"
;.
Scaled
arri~~l ~ime
t A;Wl/3
Multiply scaled values by Wl/3 to obtain absolute values.

,.. ,!,.
'\, :
TM
Example 2A-3.
Surface Burst
Required:
a distance ot 530
burst-of.20,8~0 l~s at
'\
r .' I
. l'
Free-field blast,wave parameters Ps a ' U,
Solution:
P-397/AFR 88-22
5-1300/N~VFAC
~A
is'
for a surface
ft.
r,
"',
.:
Step 1:
Given:
Step 2.
\oJ - 1.20 (20,800) - 25,000 lbs.
;; I
"I- - .
I....
Step 3.
.r
'"
530
- 18.1 ft/li,1/3
Step 4.
Determine
(25,000)1/3
..
~~ast,wave.parameters from Figu;~
2-15 for
ZG ~. 18.1 ftil~~/3
:'1
.1.1'
P so -;3 .. 45 p~ ~
u - 1. 22 ft/ms
. r
, . 1s
; ':~l"
'1'"3
.'
. - - .-,.4.7 psi-ms/lb
. Wl/ 3 --
! ,
is - 4.7(25,000)1/3': 137.4 psi-ms
.."
,:,
"
- 10.6 ms/lb 1/3, t A - 10.6(25.000)1/3 - 310 ms

r ,
Problem 2A-4
Problem:
De t e rm i ne the
Shock Loads on Cubicle Walls
averag~.. p~~~ J;~t"lected.
pressure and average scaled'
reflected impulse acting 9n ~he wall.of,a cubicle from an internal

exp Los Lon .. Tile cub i c Le !~. f'ul l.y vented.
-.
," j ..
. .. 1. :',
. ,.
r
. . . .! rJ
2A-7 '.
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

Procedure:
Step 1.
Select from Figure 2-51 the structural configuration which

will define the number N and location of effective reflecting surfaces for the wall of the structure in question.
Determine the charge weight, and, as defined by the structural configuration ,chosen above, the charge location
parameters RA, h, I 'and the. structural ,parameters L" H.

Step 2.
Step,3.
Calculate the chart parameters
h
-'
L
and the scaled'
H L RA
distance ZA'
..
'
Note:
Use of the average pressure and impulse charts may require
interpolation in many cases. Interpolation may be achieved
by inspection for the scaled,distance ZA an9 by a graphical
procedure for the chart parameters L/H, IlL, and h/H using 2
cycle x 2 cycle logarithmic graph paper. The following
procedure will illustrate the interpolation of all three
chart parameters.
'
Step
4.
Step 5.
From table 2-3 determine the appropriate pressure and

impulse charts for the number of adjacent reflecting surfaces N. Determine and tabulate the values of the average
pressure Pr and ~verage scaled impulse ir/W1/3 from these
charts for the required LIRA and ZA and the following
variables:
a.
Prepare four 2 -cycLe log -log charts "wi t.h L/H as the
lower abscissa, IlL as the upper abscissa, and Pr as
the ordinate (one chart for each of the h/H ratios).
On, each chart for constant h/H and ZA' plot i b- versus
L/H for all IlL values.
Repeat with the ordinate labeled as ir/W1/3.
b.
Usinf chart for h/H ~'O.IO. read values of Pr and

ir/W 13 versus IlL for required L/H. Tabulate results.
2A-8
TIl 5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

c.
Repeat step 5b for charts

Tabulate results.
h/H - 0.25, 0.50, and0.75.
d.
On each,h/H chart, plot Pr and i r;Wl/3 versus l/L from

steps 5b and 5c. ' .
,., ;;.
e.
' On each h/H chart, read Pr and i~;Wln,'for required

l/L ratio.
'f.'
On. a fifth chart, plot 'Pr"and' i

r;Wl/3 from step 5e
versus h/H.
Step 6.
For required h/H ratio, read P and i ;Wl/3 from chart of

r
r ..
step' Sf .. :
Step 7.
. Calculate duration of load on element from equation 2 - 2.<
Example 2A-4 (A)

Required:
Average peak reflected pressure and average
s~ed
reflected
impulse on the side wall of a three-wall cubicle from an explosive

charge of 205 lbs. The cubicle is fully vented.
'.
~smE
WAlL
W=245Ibs.
1 '
"
12'
3%
.,
SECTION
PLAN
Figure 2A-3
Solution:
Step 1.
H - 16 ft.
L -
h - 6 ft ~
1 - 12 ft.
32 ft.
2A-9
Charge Weight - 205 lbs.

RA - 5.33 ft.

Note:
For definition of terms, see Figure 2-.51 (side wall of three wall
cubicle, N - 2).
Step 2.
W - 1.20 (205) - 245 lbs .:
Step 3,
h/H - 0.375
L/RA
ZA -
l/L - 0.375
RA
Wl / 3
5.33
.,
6.00.
L/H - 2.00
- 0.85 ft/lb l/3
(245)1/3
.'
...
Interpolation is required for ZA' L/H, l/L, and h/H.

Step 4 ..
Determine and tabulate.the values ofP r and ir/Wl/3 from

pressure and impulse charts (see table 2-3 for N - 2) for:
L/RA - 6.00,
ZA - 0.85
(interpolate by inspection) and for values given for L/H,

l/L and h/H. The results are tabulated in tables 2A-l and
2A-2.
Step 5.
a.
Plot Pr and ir/Wl/3 versus L/H for the values of l/L

and constant h/H (fig. 2A-4 and 2A-5).
b.
Determine Pr and i r/Wl/3 for L/H - 2.00, h/H - 0.10,

and various l/L ratios by entering Figure 2A-4a and
2A-5a with L/H - 2.00
c.
Repeat above step for h/H - 0.25, 0.50, and 0.75 by.
entering Figures 2A-4b through d and 2A-5b through.d
with L/H - 2.00 (tabulation of results not shown).
d.
On each h/H chart, plot Pr and i r/Wl/3 (steps 5b and

5c) versus l/L (upper abscissa of Figures 2A-4a
through d and 2A-5a through d).
e.
Determine P~ and ir/Wl/3 for l/L - 0.375 on each h/H

chart of Figures 2A-4 and 2A-5 with l/L - 0.375 and
reading curves plotted in step 5d.
2A-IO..
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

Table 2A-1
Average Pressure
(Part 1)
0.10
h/H
0.25
11L
0.10
0.25
0.50
0.75
0.10
0.25
0.50
0.75
L/H
0.625
462
569
598
569
533'
665
,701
665
1. 25 .
749
, 932
980
932
943
1178
1238
1178
2.50
1200
1488
1562
1488
1432
1796
1881
1796
5.00
2032
2519
2635
2519
1870
2334
2437
2334
Fig.
2-64,
2-65
,2 - 66
2-67
2-68,
2-69 ,:
2-70 '
2-71
Table 2A-1
Average Pressure
(Part 2)
0.50
h/H
0.75
1/L
0,10
0.25
0.50
0.75
0.10
0.25
0.50
0.75
L/H
0.625
546
681
.' 718
681
533
665
701
665
1017
1267
1333
1267
943
1178
,1238
1178
2.50
1609
2028
2120
2028'
1432
1796
'1881
1796
5.00
1987
,2456
2563 '
2456
2623
3119
3210
3119
Fig.
2-72
2-73
2-74
2-75
2-76
2-77
2-78
2-79
1. 25'
'.
2A-11 '
"
"
TM 5~1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22 ;.

Table 2A-2 ,Average Unit Impulses
'(Part 1),
0:10
h/H
0.10
l/L
0.25
L!H
0.625,
,
73
1. 25
96
92
2.50
126
, 121
5.00
172
164
Fig.
2-113
2:114
0.25
0.50
0.75
,0.10 .
66
70:
71
"
,0.50
0.75
65
i61~..
59
55
90
83
90 '
84'
96
121
III ,
139 .:
164',
153. .'
167
2"-115
0.25 .
2-116
2-117
92
' 131
:
, 129"
120
153
154
143
2-118 .
2-119
2120
Table 2A-2" Average Unit Impulses:

(Part 2)
.,
h/H
l/L
0.25
64
61'
'58,
93.
87,
83
2.50'1
129 . ,
5.00'
Fig.
0.75
0.10
L/H
0.625 '
1. 25
0.50
0.50
0.75
54
76 '
0.10
0.25
0.50
59 '
56
53
87
79,' ,
76 ,
0.75,
, 49
,
,70
95
120
118
109~
117
106
103
186
,168
' 168'
158
201
189
189
.179
2-121
2,-122
2-124
2-125
2-123
2A-12
2 -126 .
2-127
2-128 '
'.
'
e
IIL:Q.375
lIL: 0.375
400
.2
.1
.3
.4.5
.7
1.0
'4
5 6
.1,
. (Iii
h/H:O.IO
L/H
...,
:>
....
w
ZA :,0.8523
h/N-O.D ,
ZA -O,IBZS
ilL- 0.375
l/L-O.375
.,
Q.
OJ
0:
.,.,:::>
1,
OJ
:~':,i; j;"
0:
. ::l'!'H
Q.
:;'Jil",
'jit;
::."
"', ';i; """;::;;;';';;1';;:H'f';,
,;.~:-:~.
.1
.2
.3
.4 .5
.7
L/H
1.0
3,
,4
!l
300
h/H - 0.50
LIN
ZA-'O.8525
, FIGURE
...
.1
2A-4
VN 0.711
ZA o.otID
ilL a 0.3711
l!L =0.375
.2
.3
.4
.5
.7
L/H
"'.
;l>
.,..
1.0
.2
500.,1, '"
.4 .5
.7
ilL a
II 8
h/H '0.25
ZA aO.I!l23
L/H
ilL' 0.375
"
.3
h/H=O.IO
ZA '0.8523
0.375
I':
2001;1.,
i.; ,
'"
IS
100
" I ,"
'"
...
,:i
'"
. , ::::;::. ';:'':::
"::>
~
.....
,;j:.~~
d .. ~Il;,J';
~d!;
.. '!:Im,
I, '.:i",li1iH;''P'
" "'" :I:':,.:;mitilii~,"
3O(l1i i j
.1
i:iUlh'm~~
.2
.3
3
.L/H
h/H' 0.50
ZA a 0.81123
FIGURE
.2
.3
.4 .5
.7
L/H
2A-5
.1.0
5 8
h/H 0.75
ZA a 0.8l12l1
f.
h/H
Pr
ir/Wl/3
o.ro
1550
109
0.25
1660
119
0.50
1860
108
0.75
1880
95
Plot Pr and ir/Wl/3 (step 5e) versus h/H (fig.2A-7).
Step 6.
For h/H - 0.375 read Pr - 1800 psi on Figure 2A-7 and read
ir/Wl/3 - 115 psi_ms/lb l/ 3 on Figure 2A7
Step 7.
Calculate duration of load on wall.
Example.2A-4(B).
Required:
Average peak reflected pressure and average scaled reflected

impulse on-the back wall of a three-wall cubicle from an explosive
charge of 3,750 lbs. The cubicle is .fully vented and shown in
Figure 2A-6.
Solution:
Step 1.
H - 16 ft:
L - 36 ft.
Charge weight - 3,750 lbs.
h - 4 ft.
1 - 9 ft.
RA - 16.5 ft.
Note:
For definition of terms, see Figure 2-51 (back wall of three-wall
cubicle, N - 3).
Step 2.
W - 1.20 (3,750) - 4,500 Ibs.
Step 3.
h/H:- 0.25
l/L - 0.25
2A-15
L/R A - 2.18
L/B - 2.25
/" BACK WALL
-10
on
!!1
..,-
W= 3750 Ibs.
-V
oj:
9'
36'
.1. ,
r,
SECTION
PLAN
FIGURE
2A-6
2A16
,
I
t
,
2000
1800 ~
1500
...
'
'1000
900
800
, i'
. i;
..
: :
:
I
J
!:
',! .
700
.1
.. ""1 ,-,
'T
::::!:;-:
:; ::!: ~ :
..
:I
\::
II
..
,
.2
,I
iT
:
I
I
I
,,
._-._- ..
i:
'-"-
, :
:
H:
'''I' ,
:::i:
:
.5
.6
,
h/H
.. ._._.
,
!,
.375.4
-~
,i
.3
!I
I'
...
I' "
,I
! : ':
,
I
---I
I
i;;H:T
r
! ., I'
. . . .i .. .
... ."i:"
. i .. .
..
"
'," :;;:1::
. ,.:-. ..
-:----t-; - "'--1i ...
; .. '.l'i..
i :
:: :: :
" i:
i
I
,",.,
"'n1!1>
:::::1::
t ,-;
,,
I : :i :
I'
~i+ .. ii
" .'.j. -,......
i~
,.
,!
::":~:'''':'':;;;:;
~'
: :i::
,
..... :
;
- - - ~ ..
.
mrJ
.- c:~
I:
.7
.8
.9
L/H
2.0
",
(a)
::,' , :
I,' "
.~~
.'" -
,.
I,
: :I'
'-I '
115
.1
.2
.3
'
,I
h/H ,
( b)
RIA
L/R
= 4.0
= 6.0
Z/A = 0.85
FIGURE
2A-7
2A-17
III ;
0.375
h/H = 0.375
16.5
1.00 ft/lb l/3
(4,500)1/3
Interpolation is required for
L/H
Step 4.
Determine the values of Pr and i r/Wl/3 from Figures 2-84 and

2-133 (determined from table 2-3 for N - 3, h/H - 0.25, l/L
- 0.25) for L/H ratio; of 0.625, 1.25, 2.50 and 5.00.
Step 5 .
Plot Pr and ir/Wl/3 versus L/H (fig., 2A-8). ,
Step 6.
For L{H'- 2.25 read, Pr - 3700 psi and i r/Wl/3 - 295 psims/lb /3 and on Figure 2A-8.
.
Step 7.
Calculate duration of load on wall (equation 2-2).
Problem 2A-5
Problem:
Effect of Frangibility on Shock Loads
Determine average peak reflected pressure and average reflected

impulse acting on the wall of a cubicle due to an internal explosion. One of the reflection surfaces is a frangible wall.
Procedure:
Step 1.
Determine the average peak reflected pressureP r and the

average reflected impulse acting, on the element in question
according to the procedure in problem 2A-4 assuming that the
adjoining frangible element will remain in place and provide
full reflection.
Step 2.
Determine the average reflected impulse act1ng on the element in question according to the procedure in problem A-4
assuming that the adjoining frangible element is not in
place.
.
Step 3.
Subtract the average impulse determined in step 2 from the

one in step 1. .
2A-18
10,000
7,000
5,000
3,700
3,000
2,000
III
Q.
..c
10..
III
1,000
'0;
Q.
..Q
700
1'-
500
300
295.../
"
"
,
," ,
100
.5
.6
.7.8.9 I
2 2.25
L1H
45678910
L/H
= VL = 0.25
LIRA
= 2.1818
ZA = -1.0
FIGURE
2A-8
2A-19
Step 4.
Calculate unit weight of the frangible element WF and divide

by the sixth root of the charge weight (apply a 20X factor
of safety to the charge weight).
Step 5.
Calculate the normal scaled distance Z between the center of

the charge and the surface of the frangible element.
Step 6.
Determine the reflection factor f r from Figure 2-150 for the

values of wF/W1/ 6 from step 4 and Z from step 5. Interpolate for value of Z if required.
Step 7.
Determine the magnitude of the impulse load reflected from

the frangible element to the element in questio~ by multiplying the value of the average impulse from step'3 and
f r from step 6.
~
Step 8.
a ..
Determine the total impulse load acting on the element

in question by adding the impulse values from steps 2
and 7.
b.
The peak average reflected pressure of the shock load

is equal to the value of Pr in step 1.
c.
Determine the duration of the load from equation 2-2.
Example 2A-5
Required:
Effect of Frangibility on Shock Loads
Average peak reflected pressure and average "reflected "impulse on

the back wall of the cubicle described in example 2A-4B except the
" left side wall is a 10 psf frangible element. The charge weight
is 3,750 1bs (see Figure 2A-6).
Solution:
Step 1.
Assuming the frangible side wall provides full. reflection of

the blast wave, Pr and i r for the back wall according to the
procedure in problem 2A-4 are:
Pr - 3700.0 psi
4870.3 psi-ms
Step 2.
Assuming no" left side wall, the average reflected impulse on

the back wall, according to procedure in problem 2A-4 is:
i r - 3962.3 psi-ms
Step 3.
Calculate the reflected impulse contributed by the left side

wall by subtracting the impulse value of step 2 from step 1.
6i r - 4870.3 - 3962.3 - 908.0 psi-ms
2A-20
Step 4.
a.
WF - 10 lb/ft 2 (given)
b.
c.
Calculate w~/Wl/6 ratio:
3,7 SOx 1. 20 - 4 .. 500 lbs
w~/Wl/6 ~ 10/(4500)1/6 - 2.46
Step 5.
.a.
b.
R - 9.0 feet (see Figure 2A-6)

Calculate normal scale distance Z:
R
Wl / 3
- 0.545 ft/lb l/3
(4500)1/3
Step 6.
From Figure 2-150 where wF/Wl/6 - 2.46 and Z - 0.545 read:

f r - 0.68
Step 7.
Determine the magnitude of the impulse reflected from the

frangible left side wall, using f r - 0.68 and the impulse
from step 3.
i r (left side wall) - 908 (0.68) - 617.4 psi-ms
Step 8.
a.
Calculate total reflected impulse on the back wall by

adding impulse values from steps 2 and 7.
i r (back wall) - 3962.3 + 617.4 - 4579.7

b.
psi~ms
Peak reflected pressure from step 1:
Pr - 3700 psi
c.
Calculate duration of load on wall:

2 (4579.7)
t o -
2:48 ms
. P'r
Problem 2A-6
Problem:
3700
Shock Loads on Frangible Elements
Determine the average peak reflected pressure and average reflected impulse acting on the frangible wall of a cubicle due to
an internal explosion.
2A-2l
Procedure:
Step 1.
Determine the average peak reflected pressure Pr and the

average reflected impulse acting on the 'element in question
according to the procedure'in problem 2A:4, assuming that
the wall will remain intact.
,I
Step 2.
Step 3.
Calculate the unit weight of the frangible element WF and

divide by the'sixth root of the charge weight (apply a 20X
factor of safety to the charge'weight).
From Figure 2-7 determine the fictitious scaled distance Z
which corresponds to the average scaled impulse determined
in step 1.
Step 4.
Using the value of wF/W1/ 6 from step 2 and the Z from step
3. determine the reflection factor f r from Figure 2-150.
Interpolate for value of Z if required.
Step 5.
a.
Calculate the value of the average impuloe contributing to the translation of the frangible element by
multiplying the values of i r and fr'of steps 1 and 4
respectively.
b.
The peak average reflected pressure, of the shock load

is equal to the,value of'P r in step 1.
c.,
Determine 'the duration of the
load~from
equation 2,2.'
Example 2A-6 Shock Loads on Frangible Elements,

Required:
Average peak reflected pressure and average scaled reflected impulse on the back wall of the cubicle described in example 2A-4
except the back wall is a 10 psf frangible wall. The charge
weight is 3,750 Ibs (see Figure 2A-6).
'
.1
Solution:
Step '1.
.'
Pr and i r for the back wall, assuming it is a rigid element,
according to procedure in problem 2A-4 are:
Pr - 3700.0 psi
i r/Wl/3'-
295.0 psi_ms/lb l/3
i r = 4870.3 psi-ms,
2A-22
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
Step 2.
a.
.b.
c.
WF - 10:0 lb/ft 2 (given)

W - 3.750 x 1.20 - 4,500 lbs
~Calculate wF/Wl / 6 ratio:
wF/Wl / 6
Step 3.
- 10/(4500)1/6 - 2.46
Read the fictitious scaled-distance Z corresponding to

ir/Wl/3 -295 from Figure 2-7.
Z - 0: 82ft/lb l/3
Step 4 .
....
From Figure 2-150 where
'l
wF/Wl / 6
- 2.46 and Z - 0.82 read:
f r - 0.74
Step 5.
a.
Calculate reflected Impulse on the frangible back wall

by multiplying the value of impulse from step 1 and f r
- 0.74
,i r. (frangible' back wall) -4870.3 (0.74) - 3604.0 psi-ms

b.
Pr
c.
to
Peak reflected pressure from step 1.

3700 psi
Calculate duration ofload on wall.
2i r
--Pr
,
-
3700
1. 95 ms
,:
Problem:
2 (3604.0)
"Problem 2A-7 Gas Pressure

Determine the gas pressure-time loading inside a cubicle, with a
small vent opening, due to an internal explosion. The vent
opening may be sealed or unsealed with a frangible panel or cover.
Procedure:
Step 1.
Apply a 20% factor of safety to the charge weight.
2A-23
Step 2.
Calculate the free volume .inside the cubicle Vf.
Step 3.
Determine the charge weight to free volume ratio W/Vf.
Step 4.
Determine the peak gas pressure Pg from Figure 2-152 using

the value of W/Vf from step 3.
Step 5.
Determine vent area A.
Step 6.
Determine scaled value,' ofrthe vent area A/V2/3.
Step 7.
a.
Calculate the unit weight of the frangible panel WF,

if any.
b.
Calculate the scaled unit weight of the frangible

panel or cover wF/Wl / 3 . Use wF/Wl / 3 . - 0 for no cover.
Step 8,
Determine the scaled average reflected impulse on the element containing the vent opening with no cover according to
the procedure outlined in Problem 2A-4 or on the frangible
,panel (cover) using the procedure of Problem 2A-6.
Step 9.
Determine the scaled gas impulse from Figures 2-153 to 2164. Use the values of W/Vf from step 3, wF/Wl / 3 from step
7, A/V2/3 from step 6 and i IW1/ 3 from step 8. Interpolate
for values of W/Vf and ir/Wr 13 if required. Multiply by
Wl/ 3 to calculate gas impulse.
Step 10.
Calculate the fictitious gas' duration using equation 2-4 and

values of Pg and i g from steps 4 and 9 respectively.
,
Example 2A-7 (A)

Required:
Gas Pressure (Small Vent Opening) .
Gas pressure-time loading inside a 10' x 10" X 10' cubicle with a

2' x 2' vent opening on the rear.wall. The charge weight is 833.3
pounds.
Solution:
Step 1.
Charge weight:
W - 833.3 x 1.20
Step 2.
1,000 lbs
Free volume inside the structure:

Vf - 10' x 10' x 10' - 1,000 ft 3
2A-24
Step 3.
Charge weight to free volume ratio:

WfV.f
Step 4.
1000.0/1000.0 - 1.0
Read P g
fro~
fig. 2-152 for WfVf - 1.0. "
Pg - 2,650 psi
Step 5.
Vent area of 2' x 2' opening:
A - 2' x 2' '- 4 ft2
Step 6.
Calculate scaled vent area:
Step 7.
a.
Vent has no cover.
b.
Scaled weight of the cover:
Step 8.
Scaled average reflected impulse ,of the rear wall from

procedure outlined in problem 2A-4:
i r/Wl/3 - 1225 psi-ms/lb l/ 3'
Step 9.
Read scaled gas impulse from Figures 2-162 to 2-164 for

AfV2/3 - 0.04 and wF/W1/ 3 - 0.0. Interpolate for scaled
impulse of
i r/Wl/3 - 1225.
i g/Wl/3
7500
psi-ms/lb l/ 3
i g - 7,500 x 1,000 1/3 - 75,000.0 psi-ms

Step 10.
Calculate fictitious duration of gas load from equation 2-4,

2 x 75,000.0
t g -
- 56.6 ms
2,650
2A-25

Example 2A-7 (B)
Required:
Gas Pressure (Frangible Wall)
Gas pressure-time loading inside a 10' x 10' x 10' cubicle with a

frangible wall of 10 psf as the rear wall. The charge weight is
833.3 pounds.
Solution:
Step 1.
Charge weight:
W - 833.3 x 1.2 - 1,000 lbs
Step 2.
Free volume inside the structure:
Vf - 10' x 10' x 10' - 1,000 ft 3

Step 3 ..
Charge weight to free volume ratio:

WfVf - 1000/1000 - 1.0
Step 4.
Read Pg from fig. 2-152 for WfVf
1.0.
Pg - 2650 psi
Step 5.
Vent area of frangible wall.:

A - 10' x 10' - 100 ft 2
Step 6.
Calculate scaled vent area:
AfV2/3 _ 100/1000 2/ 3 _ 1.0 ft 2/ft2

Step 7.
a.
Unit density of the frangible wall:
WF - 10.0 lbs/ft 2 '(given)'

b.
Step 8.
Scaled weight of the frangible wall:
Scaled average reflected impulse of the rear frangible wall

from procedure outlined in problem 2A-6:
2A-26'

,
Step
9.
Read scaled gas impulse from Figures 2-162 to 2-164 for

A/V2/3 ~ 1.0.and WF;Wl/3 - 1.0. Interpolate for scaled impulse of i rfWl/3 - 784.
i g;Wl/3 -'400.0
ig
Step 10.
400.0 x 1000 1/3 - 4000 psi-ms
Calculate fictitious duration of gas load from equation 2-4.
t g -
Problem 2A-8
Problem:
psT-ms/lb l/ 3
2 x 4000
- - - - - - 3.02 ms
2650
Leakage Pressures from Fully Vented
Three Wall Cubicle
Determine free-field blast wave parameters at a distance from a

fully vented explosion inside a three wall cubicle.
Procedure:
Step l.
Determine charge weight, distance in the 'aesired direction
and volume of structure.

Step 2.
Apply a 20X safety factor to the charge weight.
Step 3.
Calculate scaled distance and W/V ratio.
Step 4.
Determine peak positive pressures using Figures 2-168 or 2169.
Step 5.
Determine maximum peak pressure for side and back directions
from Figure 2-170 using W/V ratio.

Step 6.
For W/V ratio determine scaled positive impulses using

Figures 2-171 to 2-182. Multiply by Wl/ 3 to calculate
actual value of impulses.
Step 7.
Determine shock parameters from Figure 2-15 corresponding to

the peak pressure from step 4, except for .the normal reflected impulse'where the scaled impulse from step 6 should
be used.
2A-27
TM
5-l~OO/NAVFAC
Example 2A-8
Required:
P-397/AFR 88-22
Leakage Pressures from Fully
Vente~
Three Vall Cubicle
Blast wave parameters at a distance of 200 ft. from ,an explosion

located at the center of a three wall cubicle with no roof. The
charge weight is 833.3 lbs. and the interior dimensions of the
cubicle are 17.5 ft. x 17.5 ft. x 13 ft. high. Calculate the
parameters at the front, side and back of the cubicle.
Solution:
Step 1.
Given:
a.
Charge weight - 833.3 lbs.
b.
R - 200 ft. in all directions.
c.
v - 17.5
Step 2.
17.5 ,x 13 - 3.980 ft 3 ,
,
Calculate W:
W - 1.20 x'Charge Weight - 1.20 x 833.3 - 1000 ibs.'
Step 3.
a.
Calculate:
~cal~d
distance Z,
Zb.
Wl/ 3
200
- 20 ft/lbs l/ 3
'
..
(1000)1/3
WIV ratio,'
WIV - 1000/3.980 - 0.25 lbs/ft 3
Step 4.
S.tep 5.
Determine peak incident pressure from Figure 2-168:
Ps o (side)
- 4.0 psi
Ps o (back)
- 2.8 psi
For WIV - 0.25" read the maximum peak incident pressures

from Figure 2-170:
(Pso)max (back and side) - 47.0 psi> 4.0 > 2.8
Step 6.
Scaled positive impulse, for Z - 20 ft/lb l/3 and WIV - 0.25

lbs/ft 3
2A-28
r.

i s;Wl/3 (front) - 5.5 psi-ms/lb l/3
is (front) - 5.5 x 1000 1/3
Figure 2 -171
- 55 psi-ms
i s;Wl/3 (side) - 4.5 psi-ms/lb l(3
Figure 2-173
is (side) - 4.5 x 1000 113 - 45.psi-ms

i s;Wl/3 (back) - 3.8 psi-ms/lb l/ 3
Figure 2-175
is (back) - 3.8 x 1000 1/3 - 38 psi-m~

Step
7.
For peak positive pressures ~Pso)read shock parameters from

Figure 2-15 at front, side and back directions.
a.
For Ps o (front) - 5.5 psi (Step 4)

U - 1. 28 ft/ms
t o;Wl/3 - 2.95 ms/lb l/ 3
to - 2.95 x 1000 1/3 - 29.5
IDS
t A;Wl/3 - 7.00 ms/lb l/ 3

. t A - 7.00 x 1000 1/3 - 70.0 ms.
b.
For Ps o (side) - 4.0 psi (Step 4)
2A-29
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
u-
1. 24 ft/ms
t o;W1/3 ~ 3.20 ms/1b 1/3

to - 3.2 x 1000 1/3 - 32.0 ms
t A;W1/3 - 9.30 ms/1b 1/3
t A - "9.3 x 1000 1/3 - 93.0 ms
c.
For Pso (back) - 2.8 ps i
u - 1. 20 ft/ms
t o;W1/3 - 3.45 ms/1b 1/3
to - 3.45
1000 1/3 - 34.5 ms
t A;W1/3 - 12.90 ms/1b 1/3

t A - 12.9 x 1000 1/3 - 129.0 ms
Problem 2A-9
Problem:
Leakage Pressure from Partially Vented

Four Wall Cubicle"
Determine free-field blast wave parameters at a distance from a

partially vented explosion inside a four wall cubicle.
Procedure:
Step 1.
Determine charge weight, distance to point in question, vent

area and volume of structure.
Step 2.
Step 3.
Calculate distance Z, A;V2/3 ratio and AW 1/3;V ratio.
Step 4.
Determine peak positive pressure using Figure 2-184.
Step 5.
Determine scaled positive impulses using Figure 2-185.

Multiply by Wl/ 3 to calculate actual value of impulses.
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88"22

.,
Step
6.,
Determine shock parameters from Figure 2'15. Use the peak

pressure from step 4, except for normal, reflected impulse
where the scaled impulse(s) from step 5'should be used.
Example 2A-9
Required:
Leakage Pressure from Partially Vented

Four Wall Cubicle
Blast wave'parameters at distance of 200 ft. from a charge located

in an above ground four wall cub~cre. The circular vent is
located at the center of the roof and has a diameter of 4 ft. The
'charge is 833.3 Lbs and located at' ,the center'of 17.5' x 17.5' x
13' cubicle. Top of the roof is 15 feet above the ground level.
Solution:
Step 1..
Given (see Figure 2-183b for parameters):
a.
Charge weight -,833.3 Ibs.
b.
R - 200 ft., h - 15 ft. '.

.
1/2
d l - [ (4/2)2 + (15 :'13/2)2 ]
- 8.73 ft.
d 2 - (17.5 - 4)/2 - 6.75 ft.

1/2
d 3 - [ (15)2' + (200 - 4/2 - 6.75 - 15) 2 ]
- 176.89 ft.
c.
R' - d1 + d 2 + h + d 3 =8.73 + 6.75 +15 + 176.89 -207.37 ft.

A - "(2)2 - 12.57 ft 2
d.
V - 17.5 x 17.5 x 13 - 3,980 ft 3

",
Step 2.
W
Step 3.
a.
Calculate W:
1.20,x charge weight - 1.20 x 833.3 - 1000 1bs.
Calculate:
Scaled distance Z.
R'
Z - ---
W1/3
207.37
1000 1/3
2A-31
- 20.7 ft/1b 1/3
TM'5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
b.
A/V2/3 _ 12.57/(3980)2/3 - 0.05
c.
AW1/3/V _ 12.57 (1000) 1/,3 /3.980' - ,0.0316 lb l/3/ft

Peak positive pressure from Figure 2-184 for Z - 20.7 and
Step 4.
"
. . .'P s o - 0.95 psi

,'.
Step 5.
.
,.'~
Peak positive pressure impulse from Figure 2-185 for Z 20.7 and
AW 1/3/V - .0316.
i
s;Wl/3
- 1.80 psi_ms/lb l/ 3
is - 1.8 x 1000 1/3

Step 6.
- 18.0 psi-ms
For peak positive pressure Ps o - .95 psi, read shock parameters from Figure 2-15.
U - 1. 12 ft/ms
t o;Wl/3
- 4.5 ms/lb l/ 3
to - 4.5 x 10001/3 - 45.0 ms

t A;Wl/3 - 35.0 ms/lb l/3
t A - 35.0 x '1000 1/3,- 350,0 ms
Problem 2A-10
Problem:
External Blast Loads on Structures
Determine the pressure-time blast loading curves on a rectangular

structure from an external explosion.
2A'-32'
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC
P-3~7/AFR
88-22
Procedure:
Step 1.
Determine the charge weight, ground distance Re, height of

burst Hc (for air burst) and structure dimensions.
Step 2.
Step 3.
Select several points on the structure (front wall, roof,

rear wall, etc.) and. determine free-field blast wave parameters'for each point. For air burst, follow the procedure
outlined in problem 2A-2; a surface burst, problem 2A-3; and
leakage pressures, problem .2A-8 or 2A-9.'
Step 4 ..
For the front wall:
"
a.
Calculate peak positive refl~cted pressure Pr a - Cr a x Pso'

Read value of Cr a for Ps o ,and a from Figure ,2-193.
b.
Read scaled unit positiv~'reflected impulse irafWl/3 from

Figure 2-194 for Pso"and a. Multiply scaled value by Wl / 3
to obtain absolute value.
Note:
Step 5.
a.
If wave front is not plane, use average values.
Determine positive phase of front wall loading.

..Determine sound velocity in reflected overpressure' region Cr
from Figure 2-192for peak-incident pressure Ps o'
b.
Calculate clearing ,timetc:

4S
t
c - - - - - - - - (ms)
(eq. 2-3)
(1.+ R) Cr
where:
S -
height of front wall or one-half its'width, whichever

is smaller.
maximum of wall height or one-half its width
R
c.
S/G
Calculate fictitious positive phase duration tof:

,
d.
(eq. 2-6)
Determine peak dynamic pressure qo from Figure 2-3 for Ps o'
2A-33
,P,

e.
Calculate Ps o+ CDqo'
Obtain CD from paragraph 2-15.3.2."
f.'
Calculate fictitious duration' trf of the reflected pressure.

(e q . 2:11)
g.
'.
I.
Step 6.
a.
.b ,
c.
Construct the positive pressure-time curve of the front wall

similar to Figure 2-191. The actual loading is the smaller
of the impulse (area under curve) due to reflected pressure
or cleared reflected pressure plus incident pressure.
Determine negative phase of,thefront wall loading.
Read the values of Zfrom Figure 2-15 for the value of Pr a
'from step 4a arid i r a/Wl/3 from step 4b.'
De t.e rmi.ne
. Pra - and ira - /Wl/3, -f rom Figure 2 -16 for' the corresponding values of Z from step 6a. Multiply scaled value of
the negative impulse by Wl / 3 to obtain absolute value.
Calculate the fictitious duration of the negative reflected

pressure.
(eq. 2-7)
d.
Calculate rise time of the negative pressure by multiplying

trf- by 0.27 (Section 2-15.3.2).
e.
Construct the negative pressure-time curve similar to Figure

2-191.
Step 7.
Determine positive phase of side wall loading.
a.
Calculate the wave length to span length ratio Lwf/L at

front of the span.
b.
Read values of CE, t d / wl/3 and t o f/Wl/3 from Figures 2:196,

2-197 and 2-198 respectively.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Determine dynamic pressure qo from Figure 2-3 for PR'

Calculate PR - CEPsof + CDqo '(eq. 2-12).
,paragraph ???
Obtain CD from
Construct positive phase pressure-time curve similar to

Figure 2-195.
'2A- 34
Step 8.
Determine ne$ative phase of side wall loading.
a.
Determine value of CE- and t of-;W1/3 for the value of twf/L

from step 7a from Figures 2-196 and 2-198 respectively.
b.
Calculate Pr
c.
Calculate rise time of negative phase equal to 0.27 tof

(section 2-15.3.2).
d.
Construct the,negative pressure-time curve similar to Figure

2-195.
Step 9.
Determine roof loading. Follow procedure outlined for side

wall loading.
Step 10.
Determine rear wall loading. Follow procedure outlined for

side wall loading. For the purpose of calculations, assume
that the back wall is rotated to a horizontal position (see
Figure 2-199).
Example 2A-10
Required:
External Blast Loads on Structures
Determine pressure-time blast loading curves for the front wall,

roof, rear half of the side walls .and rear wall of the structure
shown in Figure 2A-9 for a surface burst of 5,000 lbs. at a distance ,from the front wall of 155 ft. Structure width is 30 ft.
and the shock front is plane.
Rc -
Step 1.
Given:
Step 2.
w-
Step 3.
Determine free-field blast wave parameters Ps o' t A, tw and

t~ at points 1 through 3 and is at point 1.
Charge weight - 5,000 lbs.,
155 ft.
1.2 (5,000) - 6,000 lbs.
For point 1:
155
a.'
b.
wl/}"
6000 11 3
- 8.53 ft/lb l / 3
Determine free-field blast wave parameters from Figure 2-15

for ZG - 8.53 ft/lb l / 3
Ps o - 12.8 psi
t A;W1/3 - 3.'35 ms/lb l / 3
2A-35
t A - 3.35 (6000)1/ 3 - 60.9 ms
30'
,"
r-----I-:-~.I
I'
R=155'
1
',.r-
I '
,rSOURCE,W
B
~
"
II
I
I,
iL"':' _ _
"
",
',I .,jI
~_-,_.:J
PLAN
;"'.
"
-'
-,
. ., ..
.(.
......\ /.::-."
:~
';
"
~~
~:
,.
:~'
'~
.'
.-
'.
".
"
30"
SECTION A-A
.1
2A36
(\J
~
TH
,S-1300~AVFAC
P~397/AFR
88-22
Lw - 2.10 (60'00)1/3 -38 ~'2 ft

t o;W1/3 -'2.35 ms/1b 1/ 3
c.
Determine incident impulse from Figure 2-15 for Ze - 8.53

ft/1b 1/3.
9.0 psi-m~/ib1/3
d.
.'. t~ ~ 2.35 (6000)1/3 - 42.7 ms
is -
9.0
(6000)1/3 - 163.5 psi-ms
Repeat steps 3a and 3b for points 2 and 3.

tabulated below.
t
Point
No.
1
2
3
(ft)
2.10
2.24
2.35
a.
(psi)
A;W1/3
(ms/1b 1/3)
(ms)
12.8
10.8
9.0
3.35
3.90
4,.60
60.9
70.9
83.6
(ft)
38.2
40.7
42.7
Step 4.
8.53
9.35
10.18
155.0
170.0
185.0
Lw;W1/3
(ft/1b 1/3)
Results are
o;W1/3
(ms/1b 1/3)
(ms)
42.7
45.1
47.6
2.35
2.48
2.62
s;W1/3
(psi-ms/1b 1/3)
9.00
(psi-ms)
163.5
Determine front wall reflected pressure and impulse.

Read Cra for Ps o - 12.8 psi and a - O from Figure 2-193 for
point 1.
Cra - 2,.70 then Pro - Cra x Pso - 2.70 x 12.8 ,- 34.6 ps i
b.
Read i r a;W1/3 for Ps o - 12.8 psi and a 194 for point 1.,
from Figure 2-
i ra;W1/3 - 17.0 then ira - 17.0 (6,000)1/3 - 308.9 psi-ms
2A-37
TM 5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22'

Step 5.
Fr~nt
.'
a.
wall loading, positive phase.
Calculate sound velocity in reflected overpressure region Cr

from Figure 2-192 for,P s o- 12.8 psi.
~r
- 1.325 ft/ms
Calculate clearing time t c from eq. 2-3:
b.
(eq. 2-3)
c - ------
where:
'.
G - 30./2 - 15.0 ft > 12.0 ft.

,R - S/G - 12./15. - .80
"
then:
,-
\.
4 x 12
t"c, ' ----~-'----- ..; 20.1 ms~
(1 + 0.80) 1.325
c.
Calculate tof from eq. 2-11.

.
".
2i s
tof - - - " Pso
"
d.
Use impulse from'step 3c .

25.5 ms
12.8
.\
f' ,',
Determine qo from Figure 2 - 3 for Pso - 12.8 psi.

qo - 3.5 psi
,
e.
"
Calculate Ps o + Coqo:
"
Co - 1.0 from section 2,-15.3.2

I'
t.hen, .
-. .
)
Ps o + Coqo - 12.8 + (1.0 x 3.5) - 16.3 psi

f.
Calculate trf from eq. 2-11 and results of step 4.
t r -
2' x 308:9"
- - - - - - 17.9 ms
34.6
2A-38'
...
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

Construct the pressure time curve.
g.
See Figure 2A-10.
Note: The reflected pressure-time curve is used for design

since the reflected impulse is less than the impulse produced by the clearing time.
Negative phase loading, front wall.
Step 6.
Read the va~ues of Z corresponding to Pr a - 34.6 (step 4a)

and ira/W11
- 17.0 (step 4b) from Figure 2-15.
a.
Pra - 34.6
then,
ira/W1/3 - 17.0
b.
Z (ira/Wl/3) - 10.4
Using the Z values from step 6a and Figure 2-16 determine

values of Pra- and i ra- (Peak pressure and impulse in negative phase).
Z(P r a) - 8.5
then,
Z(i ra/W1/3) - 10.4

and
c.
Z (Pra ) - 8.5
then,
'.
Pr a - 3.25 psi
then,
- 1U1/3
ra
I"
ira - 14.6 x (6,000)1/ 3 - 265.3 psi-ms

f'"
Calculate fictitious duration
trf-
Pra 2 x 265.3
- 163.3 ms
3.25
d.
- 14.6 psi -ms/1bl/~ .'
Calculate negative phase rise time:
2A-39 ..
"
Pr * 34.6
,}
00 r-
20p. o
-+ Coq *16.3
--
..
,
-'
T1ME,m
..
~'::
:;
ci
~.
FIGURE 2A-IO
2A-40
,: "
TM: 5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22 t,
0.27 x trf
e.
- .27 x 163.3 - 44.1 ms
Construct the negative pressure-time curve.

to - 42.7 ms (Point 1, step 3d)
The negative pressure-time curve is plotted in Figure 2A-10.

Step 7.
Side wall loading, positive phase, calculate the loading on

the rear-half of-the wall (Point 2 to 3, Figure 2A-9).
Calculate twf/L ratio:
a.
L - 15.0 ft (Point 2 to 3)
twf - 40.7 ft (step 3d)
then,
twf/L - 40.7 I 15.0
b.
- 2.71
Read C t /"
n3l/3 and t of;W1/3 for twf/L - 2.71 and
E' d
(step 3d" Point 2)
Pso~
CE - .76 fig. 2-196

td;W1/3 - .66 fig. 2-197
t ofj'./1 /3 - 2.47 fig. 2-198
c.
",Calculate.
~EPsof'
td and tof using results of step 7b.
2A-4l
10.8
TN 5~1300fNAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

f
. 66 x (6,000)1/3 - 12.0 ms
,tof - 2.47 x (6,000)1/3 -'44.9ms
d.
Determine qo from Figure 2-3 for.CEP s of- 8.2 psi.

qo - 1. 55 psi
e.
'Calculate peak positive pressure from eq. 2 c12.

CD - -0.40 from section 2-15.3.2
CEXsof + CDqo
f.
- .76x 10.8 + (-0.40 x 1.55) - 7.6 psi
Construct the pressure-time
See Figure 2A-ll below.
100
curv~.
I.
200
,P'=3.0
Figure 2A-ll
Step 8.
Negative phase loading on the rear-half of the side wall.
2A-42
'.
.K.
a.
Read values of CE- and t of-/Wl/3 for twf/L - 2.71 (Step 7a)
from Figures 2-196 and 2-198 respectively.
CE- - .28
t of-/Wl/3 - 10.7
ms/lb l / 3
P.r - - "E
C - x Psof - . 28 x 10.8 - 3.0 psi
tof- - 10.7 x (6,000)1/ 3

c.
- 194.4 ms
Negative phase rise time:

0.27 t of- '~ :27 x 194.4 ~ 52.5 ms
d.
Construct the negative pressure time curve.
to - 45.1 ms (Point 2, step 3d) "

to + 0.27 tof - 45.1 + 52.5 - 97.6 ms
to + tof - 45.1 + 194.4'- 239.5 ms
The negative pressure-time curve is plotted in Figure 2A-ll.
Step 9.
Calculate roof loading.
(Point
1 to 3, Figure 2A-9)
f
r-
a.
Calculate twf/L ratio:

L - 30.0 ft (Point 1 to 3)
twf - 38.2' ft (step 3d) then,
twf/L - 38.2/30.0 - 1.27
2A-43
.'
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

,
b.
Read CE, td;W1/3. and t of;W1/3 f~r twf/ L - 1.27 and Psof 12.8 psi (step 3d, Point 1) then,
CE - .52
fig. 2-196
td;W1/3 - 1.25
fig. 2-197
t of;W1/3 - 3.10
fig. 2-198
. .r '
c.
Ca1cu1ate"C EPs of' td "and tof using results of step 9b.

CEP s of - .52 x
12.8.~
6.66
td - 1.25 x (6,000)1/3 - 22: 7 ms

tof ~ 3.10 ~.(6,OOO)1/3 - ~6.3 ms
d.
Determine qo
fr~m
Figure 2-3 for CEP s of -6.66 psi.
qo - 1.,05 psi
e.
Calculate ,maximum pressure from eq; 2-12:

CD,-
-0:40.~rom s~ction.2-15.3.2
CEP s of + CDqo - .52 x 12.8 + (-0.40 x 1.05) - 6.24 psi

f.
Construct the pressure-time curve.

See Figure 2A-12 below.
g.
Read values of CE- and t of-;W1/3' for twf/L - 1.27 (step 9a)
from Figures 2~196 and 2-198 respectively.
CE- - .26
t Of';W1/3.- 11.7 ms/1b 1/ 3
..
" "
N
N
o~
".
"0
..
....
....
"
~O
r,
'
.....
'\.' P,
&
3.3'
,;
....
N
;"
.!'
"
..
~
N
,;
+
~O
FIGURE
2A-12
2A45 .
P~- ~
CE- x Psof - .26 x 12.8 - 3.33 psi
tof- - 11.7 x (6,000)1/3 - 212.6 ms

i.

0.27 tof- - .27 x 212.6 - 57.4 ms
"j.
Construct the negative pressure-time curve.

to - 42.7 ms (Point 1, step 3d)
to + .27 tof- - 42.7 + 57.4 - 100.1 ms
to + tof- - 42.7 + 212.6 - 255.3 ms
The negative pressure-time curve is plotted in Figure 2A-12
Step 10,.
a.
Calculate rear wall loading (Point 3 to 4, Figure 2A9).

Assume rear wall is rotated, to a horizontal positio~.
.Calculate ~f/L rat~o:
!~
_ 12.0
.''
ft (Point 3 to '4' .o r height of the structure) ..
Lwf - 42.7 ft (step 3d), then,.

'Lwf/L - 42.7 / 12.0
b.
- 3.56
Read CE,td/Wl/3and t ofI m" l / 3 for Lwf/L - 3.56 and Ps ob - 9.0

psi (step 3d, point 3).
.83
fig. 2-196
t d/Wl/3 - .51
fig. 2-197
CE -
2A-46"
fig. 2-198
c.
Calculate CEPsob , t r' and to using results of step lOb.

CEP s ob - .83 x 9.0 - 7.47 psi
td - .51 x (6,000)1/3 - 9.3 ms
','
tof - 2.45 x (6,000)1/3 - 44.5 ms

d.
Determine qo from Figure 2-3 for CEP s ob
7.47 psi
qo - 1. 30 psi
e.
Calculate maximum pressure from eq: 2-12: "

CD - -0.40
f.
from section 2-15.3.2
Construct the pressure- time. curve ..

See Figure 2A-13 below.
Ill'
L
w ...
CIl"
If
10-
'""
;J
......
~
lL
,
. _ , P'=2.57
..... TWlE, ms
.;
~
"
Figure 2A-13
2A-47
g.
Read values of CE- and t of-;Wl/3 for twf/L - 3.56 (step lOa)
from Figures 2-196 and 2-198 respectively.
CE -
- .285
t of-;Wl/3 - 10.5 ms/lb l/ 3
Pr- - CE- x Ps ob - .285 x 9.0 - 2.57 psi

tof- - 10.5 x (6,000)1/3 - 190.8 ms
i.

0.27 tof
j.
- .27 x 190.8 - 5l.5'ms
Construct the negative'pressure-time curve.

t
step 3d) ,
o - 47.6 ms (Point 3,
to + .27 tof -47.6 +. 51. 5

to + tof
- 47.6 + 190.8 -
- 99.1 ms
238,4 ms
The negative pressure-time curve ,is plotted in Figure 2A-13.
Problem 2A-ll
Problem:
Blast Loads on a Structure with Front Wall Openings
Determine the pressure-time loads acting on the exterior front

wall and all interior surfaces of a rectangular structure with
front wall openings due to an external shock load.

Step 1.
Charge weight:
~eight,
a.
Determine TNT equivalent.charge
b.
Increase charge weight by 20% safety

factor, W = 1.20 x W;
,
c.
Determine charge weight scaling. factor, Wl/ 3.
2A-48
W;
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR .88-22 .
Determine free field blast parameters: .
Step 2.
So
For an air burst , .us e 'Problem
2A~2
procedure; for a surface
burst, use Problem 2A-3 procedure; for:leakage pressures,

use Problem 2A-8 or 2A-9 procedures.
b.
Step 3.
A.
Evaluate~the angle of incidence, a. as the angle between the

ground distance from the charge to the center of the front
wall, and the normal distance from the charge to the front
wall.
Front wall idealized pressure-time blast loads:

Exterior Blast Load:
a.
Determine peak positive reflected pressure, Pr l as a
function of Ps o and a, using Figure 2-193.
b.
Determine peak positive .reflected scaled unit impulse.

i r a/(W l/3). as a function of Ps o and a. using Figure
2-194 ..
c.
Determine the absolute positive reflected impulse by

multiplying the scaled unit impulse by (W l/ 3).
d.
Determine the sound velocity of the reflected pressure

wave. Cr' as a function of Ps o' using Figure 2-192.
e.
Determine the reflected pressure clearing time, T'e
from equation 2-14.
B.
f.
Construct .the exterior blast pressure-time load.

Follow the procedure in Problem 2A-IO.
g.
Determine the scaled wave length of the incident wave.

L,./(W l/3) as a function of Ps o' using Figure 2-15.
irrespective of how the .external incident wave was
created. .
h.
Determine the absolute wave length by multiplying the

scaled~wave length by (W l/3).
Interior Blast Load i1
a.
Determine the following parameters: Lw/L. Lw/H, Ao/Aw'

W/H . and .L/H, where Ao is the total area of openings
.in the front wall, and Aw is the area H by W.
2A-49
TM 5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR.88-22
Step.4.
b.
Determine the idealized factored average peak pressure. (P max x (Lw/H. as a function of W/H. Ps o'
Ao/Aw. and ~/H. using Figures 2-203 to 2-206. Calculate Pma x - (P max x Lw/H)/(Lw/H).
c.
Determine the arrival time, Tl as a function of W/H,

p s o and Ao/Aw, using Figures ,2-207 and 2-208.
d.
Determine the rise time. T2 - Tl as a function of

W/H. p s o and, Lw/H, from Figures 2-209 and 2-210.
e.
Determine the duration time, T3 - Tl as a function of

W/H. p s o and Lw/H. from Figures 2-211 and 2-212.
f.
Using times Tl, T2 - Tl,' T3 - Tl andPmax' construct

. the idealized pressure-time blast load. See Figure 2201A for general configuration oLthis blast load.
Side Wall Idealized Interior Pressure-Time Blast Load:

a.
Determine the maximum average sidewall pressure, Pmax '

from equation 2-15.
b.
Determine the idealized times Tl and T2 for W/H, using

Figure 2-213.
c.
Determine the idealized times T'

3 and T4 for W/H. using
Figures 2-214 to 2-229.
d.
Step 5.
Using times Tl T2 T3, T4 and Pmax construct the

idealized pressure-time load.' See Figure 2-20lb for
general configuration of this blast load.
Back Wall Idealized Interior Pressure-Time Blast Load:

a.
Determine' the ,maximum average positive reflected

pr,essure coefficient. ,PRIB/Pso' as a function of L/H.
Ps o' and Ao/Aw. using Figures 2-233 and 2-234.
b.
Determinethe maximum average pressure. PRI B by multiplying the pressure coefficient. PRIB/Pso' by Ps o'
c.
Determine the idealized time Tl as a 'function of W/H.

p s o L/H. and Ao/Aw. using Figure 2-230.
d.
Determine the idealized pressure duration. T2 - Tl as

a function. of p s o and Ao/Aw. using Figure 2-232.
2A-50
TK 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

e.
Step 6.
Roof Idealized Interior Pressure-Time Blast Load:

a~
Determine the W/H ratio for the roof as the inverse of

W/H ratio of the side wall.
b.
Repeat Step 4 using the W/H ratio of the roof.
Example 2A-ll
Required:
Using times Tl, T2 - Tl' and PRI B, construct the

idealized pressure-time blast load. See Figure 2-201c
for general configuration of this blast load.
Blast Loads on a Structure with Front Vall Openings
For the structure and charge as is shown in Figure 2A-14, determine the idealized positive external blast load on the front wall,
and the idealized positive internal blast load on the front wall,
side wall, roof and back wall ..
Step 1.
Charge weight
a.
W- 5000 lbs. TNT
b.
W- 1.20 x 5000 - 6000 lbs. TNT
c.
Vl / 3 _ 18.1712 lbs l/ 3
Step 2.
a.
Free field blast parameters
surface burst
Procedure from Problem 2A-3.

Blast parameters:
- ISS'
Pso' U, is'
t~,
t A, for V - 6000 Lb s , , Re
Ze - Re ;Wl / 3 - 155/18.1712 - 8.53 (say 8.5)
From Figure 2-15 for hemispherical surface burst

Ps o - fl(Ze) - 12.6 psi
U - f 2(Ze) - 1.46 ft/ms
i s;Wl/3 f3(Ze) - 9.0 psi_ms/lb l/ 3, is - 163.54 psi-ms
t o;Wl/3 - f 4(Ze) - 2.40 ms/lb l/3, to - 43.61 ms
. t~1/3 _ f 5(Ze) - 3.40 ms/lb l/ 3, t A - 61.78 ms
b.
. Charge to"wall center ground distance - 155.0'

Charge to wall normal distance - 155.0'
ZA-51.
}~~.I,
15~'-0" '.
'..
<
L, .'~..+-.
-':'-"-"':---10
I
PLAN
.'SOOO"'TNT ..
HEMISPHERICAL
RECTANGULAR
SURFACE STRUCTURE
_-,---==,~HARGE
'
'.:: ..
ELEVATION
A 1'-0" .
~"o
1'-0"
~11
1114
-r- I--
.C/
.'T
.-eD
,
It)
Bt-
"
r0
-~. I--
fi
L.C
"'~
,.,
/'
"
Fo
.- ~
.,
I
"
SECTION A-A
30'-0"
0
eD
!l
"
PLAN
32'-0'
.,
20'-0'
30'- 0"
:0
I--
L.
1,'
'"
I~.'-II
CD
I'-
. ...
-
SECTION B-B
"
i~
.-
-,
I
-I
.-
'," I
I
ELEVATION C-C
FIGURE 2A-14
2A-52
-!!!
~
I
-0)
-\0
I-0
-..,
I
.,.
- I
51-011
---
5~611
r--- 1--' - - - I
I
I Efj ,
I
I
=0
,- 22'-0"
ell
EJ1
El1
,
l
I
! Ei1
EB
I Efj
.EI1
3'-0"
I - - - - -1 - - -
Eij
'
31
-
~ - 0"
---l
I
I
eE7 I
I
I
!
i
..
I
I
I
I
I
ELEVATION
UBIVISION No.
@:
AREA TYPE n
WALL SUB-DIVISiON
NOMENCLATURE
FIGURE
2A - 15
2A-53
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
,e
a - cos- 1 (155/155) - 0'

Front wall idealized pressure-time blast load
Step 3.
A.
Exterior Blast Load
a..
From Figure 2 -193. for
Ps o
10.0
Cra
2.40
Cra - (2.9
- 2.4)
a - 0'. and ,Pso - 12.6. ps L; "deterIl\ine
20.0
12.6
2:90
10.0) / (20.0
x (12.6
- 10.0)
+ 2.40
0.130 + 2.40 - 2.53

31.878 psi, say 31.9 psi
b.
From Figure 2-194, for a ~ 0', read iyq/W1/3 for Ps o - 10

and 20 psi and interpolate for ira/W1
at'P s o - 12.6 psi
i
ra
/W1/3
psi-ms/1b 1/ 3
psi
15.2
10
12.6
20
23
ira/W1/3 - (23.0
(20.0
15.2) x (12.6' - 10.0)/

10.0) + 15.2
2.028
+ 15.2 - 17.221I'psi-;'s/lb1/3
c.
"
Determine absolute Lmpu Lae , .'.

ira - (i r a/W1/3) x (W1/ 3) - 17.228 x 18.1712 - 313.1 psi-ms
-,
d.
For Pso - 12,,6 psi, Cr - 1. 325 ft/ms from Figure' 2 -192." .
2A-54
TII ..5 -1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
e.
Using Figure 2A-15 as the front wa11:sub-divisioning. determine h n Wn on' h'n' "n' nh'n"n' I:nh'n"n' Af S' . S. R.
and T'e.
Subdivision
Type
No.
1.'
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 .. '
n
3
2
1
3
2
3
2
3
'2
,2
1
..J
10
11
Af
h' n
on
ft
5.0
5.0
5.0
4.0
9.0
3.50
3.50
9.0
9.0
5.0
5.0
LO
0.50
1~0
..
,.
1.0
0.50
1.0
0.5Q
1.0
~.
O.~O
0.50
1.0
- (16 X 32)
hn
W' .
ft
4.0
3.0
9.0
4.0
9 "0
4.0
,3.0
9.0
9:.0
7.0
9.0
"n
ft
.,5.0
5.0
.5.0
5.5
'5.5
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
ft 2
20.0
15.0
45.0
22.0
49.50
14.0
10.5
31. 5
27.0
35.0
45.0
nh'n"n
ft 3
100.0
37.50
225.0
88.0
222.750
.49.0
18.375
283.50
121.50
87.50
225.0
(3 x 5.5) - (7.0 x 3.0)
- 512 - 16.5 - 21.0

- 512 - 37.5
- 474.5 ft 2
11
S' - ( I: 0nh'n"n)/Af = 1458.1250/474.5.= 3.073 ft

1
H - 15.0'. W - 20.0'. H < W . . S - H - 15.0', S' < SO. K.
W> H .
G - W - 20.0'
R - S/G -15.0/20.0 - 0.75;,C r - 1.325 ft/ms

t'c - 45'/1 + R) x Cr'>
~c(4'x
3.073)/(1.75 x 1.325)
- 5.301 ms
f.
Following general procedure'prob1em 2A-10, Step.5 required

previously determined values are:
Ps o - 12.6 psi
is - 163.5 psi-ms
2A-55
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88~22

<: .'.
Pr a - 31.9 psi
ira - 313.1 psi-ms
Oetermine
tof - 2i s/Ps o - 2 x 163.5/12.6- 26 ms , Eq. 2-b,

trf - 2i r a/Pr a - 2 x 313.1/31.9 - 19.6 ms, eq. 2-11,
qo - f(P s o) - 3.4 psi, Fig. 2-3
Co - 1.0, Paragraph 2-15.3.2,
P s o + Coqo - 16 psi, Paragraph.2-15.3.2
Construct infinite surface impulse and theoretic bi-1inear
actual surface impulse; Minimum value is design impulse.
Infinite surface fictitious impulse - ira - 313.1 psi-ms
Bi-linear theoretic actual surface impulse is area under
curve Pr a to t'c on line Ps o + Coqo to tof
_ 16.0 < 1 - (5.3/26) > - 12.7 psi

i BL - [<t'c/2>j + <Pt'c>.+ [<tof - t'c><P/2>]
_ [(31.9 - 12.7)(5.3/2)J + (12.7 x,5.3)
+ [<26 - 5.3><12.7/2>J - 50.9 + 67.3 + 131.4
- 250 psi-ms
i
BL
< ira' use bi-1inear pressure-time as design blast load.
See Figure 2A-16

g.
h.
, For Ps o - 12.6 psi, Lw/W1/3 = 2.10 ft/1b 1/3, Fig 2-15

Lw - (Lw/W1/ 3 ) (W1/3) - 2.10 x 18.1712 - 38.16, say 38.2 ft.
B.Interior Blast Load

a.'.
From previous steps:

- 20 ft.
Lw - 38.2 ft, L,- 30 ft, H - 15 ft, W
2A-56
II
FICTICIOUS INFINITE
SURFACE IMPULSE
THEORETIC ACTUAL'
SlJRFACE IMPULSE
,,
,. ,
. ,
I l'
.,,
, , i
,
'-
,I
I.
, ,
,
;
'I
! t
!'
, ',
I I
;' I
,
III
a..
20
(J)
(J)
UJ
lr
a..
,
I
'
I!
:.
"
UJ
lr
::> PSO
I
.'
I i :
i ' -i',
I
I':
. I ..
'
t-
Co C\>
'
'
I
I
PI
I I
10
. I
:
:
I 1
I',
~'C = 5'~
' j 20
. t r f = 19 '6
.
10
TIME (rns)
FIGURE
2A - 16
2A-57
tof
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

A ._ Door opening area + window opening area
o
_ (7 x 3) + (3 x 5:5) - 37.5 ft 2
Aw - H x W- 15 x 20 - 300 ft 2
Ao/Aw - 37.5/300 - 0.125
.Lw/L - 38.2/30 ~ 1.27

Lw/H - 38.2/15 - 2.54
W/H - 20/15 - 1.33
L/H - 30/15
b.
2.00.
For W/H - 1.33, P s o- 12.6 psi, Ao/Aw - 0.125, and Lw/H 2.54 summarize factored maximum average pressure, Pmax x
Lw/H, for W/H and Lw/H equal to .75, 1.5, 3 and 6.
Figure No ..
W/H
2-203
0.750.75
1.50
3.0
6.0
2-204
1. 50' 0.75
1,50
3.0
6.0
15.0
38.5
88.0
190.0
4.70
17.0
55.0
131. 0
2-205
.3.0
0.75
1. 50
3.0
6.0
2.0
7.0
27.0
85.0
2-206
6,0
0.75
LO
1.50
3.20
10.0
35.0
3.0
6.0
2A-58
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
Plot Figure 2A-17 Cal, and interpolate to determine Pmax x lv/H at

lv/H - 2.54 for W/H - .75, 1.5, 3 and 6.
. W/H
.75
1.5'
74
44
19
Pmax x lv/H
7.5
Plot Figure 2A-17 Cb) from above values, and interpo1at~ to

Pmax x lv/H - 48 for W/H - 1.33.
deter~ine
Determine Pmax - CP max x lv/H)/Clv/H) - 48/2.54

c.
18.9 psi.
For Ps o -:12.6 psi and Ao/~ - 1/8, .determine T l for W/H.75, 1.5"and 3. from Figures 2-207 and 2-208
.75
1:25
1.5
1.70
3
2 .26
Plot Figure 2A-18 with above values, and determine T1 - 1.60

for W/H - 1.33.
d.
For Ps o- 12.6 psi, determine T2 - T1 for W/H and lv/H - .75,

1.5, and 3, from Figures 2-209 and 2-210
.75
.75
1.5
1.5
2.07
2.07
.75
1.5
.75
1.5
6.20
7.0
6.50
10.8
15.0
2.07
below.
4.70
Plot Figure 2A-19 with above values, and interpolate to determine

T2 - T1 at Lw/H - 2.54 for W/H - .75, 1.5 and 3, as summarized
.75
2.07
1.5
6.75
14.0
Plot Figure 2A-19 with above values, and determine T2 - Tl ms for W/H - 1.33.
e.
5.80
For Pso- 12.6 psi, determine T3 - T1 for W/H - .75, .1. 5, and
3. and Lw/H - .75, 1.5, and 3, from Figures 2-211 and 2-212,
as summarized below.
2A-59
100
W/H=O.75
NOTE:'
SEE EXAMPLE 2A-II.
STEP 3,PART B. ITEM b
W/H=I.5
80
74
FOR l.w/H =2.54 GRAPHIC

INTERPOLATION YIELDS
Pmox Lw/H = f,( W/H), AS
SUMMARIZED BELOW.
WIH=
qIQ
(\J
44
:x:
.....
40
...J
>C
,.20 19
/H= 6
7.
W/H
P,.oa !.wilt
0.75
. 1.5
74
44
3
6
19
7.5
Lw/H
(0 )
100
"
FOR Lw tH = 2.54, AND

W/H = 1.33, GRAPHIC
INTERPOL ATiONYI ELDS
Pmo x Lw/H =48
....
48
:x:
40
.....
J
>C
><
20
L w/H=2'5
cf
o
'"
: : o<l ,
W/H
(b)
FIGURE 2A-17
2A60
, ,,
, , ,
,
,,
I
,,
I
, ,,,
,
,,
, ,
, I ,I ,
,, ,
,
,
, ,, ,
,,
,,
,,
,
,
,,
I
,I
,
, ,,
,, I
:
, I
,,
,,
,,,
, ,
,
,I ,
,, ,,,
, ,
, , , :, I
,
, I ,
, I ,I
,
, ,, , ,
,,
, ,
,,, ,I I ,
,
,
,
,
,
I ,
I ,
I
,,,
I
I , ,
,
,
I
, ,
,,
I
,,, ,, ,,
3 ,, ,
, , , , .r ,
, ,, : ,
,,
,
, , ,!
,
,,
,I ,I
, ,
,
,',
,, ,, ,
,, ,, ,
,
, ,I , ,
,
,
,,
, ,,
2
, , I , ,,
,
,,
1.6
,I
,
,
,, ,,
,
,
,
, ,, ,I , ,,
,
,.
, ,
,
,
, ,
,
,
,
"
,
,
,,,
, ,,
I , , I
, ,
,
I ,
,,
, I
,,,
,, ,
,
, , ,I ,
,
,,I ,
,
,, ,
!
,,,I
,
, ,,
, ,
" 1
, , ,i ,
, , ,
,
, ,
I
,,
: ",'
, ,r<>
"1
,i
...
, ,
,,
,
, ,
I
i
,
,
,
, ,
,
I I
,
,
, ,,
, ,,
,
,
,,,
,,
,.
, ,
, .
, ,,I ,
,
, ,
= 0.125
,
,, ,I ,
, , ,
, , , ,! :
,
, , , , , ,, , ,:
,,
1 ,
I
I
,I
, ,,
,
,
,,
i
,
,:
,,
,, ,
"
r,
FOR Ao/A w = 0.125; FORW/H = 1.33,

GRAPHIC INTERPOLATION YIELDS T, = 1.60ms
2A-61
,I ,,,
,, ,,,,
, ,,,
,
, , ,,
, , , ,,
, ,
, I , ,I , ,
, , ,,
NOTE:
SEE EXAMPLE 2A-II,:STEP 3,PART B ,ITEM c
2 A-IS
W/H
FIGURE
, , ,,,
,
,
, ,. ,I , ,:
,
,
,
.,
i I !
I
I
, I ,I ,
, , I I -r ,
,
,,
, ,,
,
,,
,I
,
, ,I
, , ,
,,, ,,
,
! I ,
,,, , ,, ,, ,, , ,
,
,I
, : ,
,
, ,
, , ,, ,
,
,
,
, ,I
,
,
,
,
,: I
I
,,:
,
,
,
,
,! ,
, ,
, , ,
I
, ,
, , ,,
,,,
I
,,,
, ,
, ,
, ,
,
, , II
, ,,
I
, ,,
Ao/A w
, ,
,
,,,
, ,: I
,, I
,
,
, ,
i
, , ,,
, , , , , ,, ,
, I
,
,,
,,:
,,
, ,.
,i
.,
! ! I ,
"
,
,
, ,,,
" I ,
,I , ,,
I , ,
, i
,,,
I
I
,
, ,
,
,
,
I
,,,,
,,,,
I
t.
, ,
,,
,,,
, ,.
,,
,,,
, , ,, ,, ,, , ,
,,
,,,
NOTE: .
W/H=3
-,
14.0
~
III
.=I
10
6.75
t\I
..
WIH=I.
l'H=O:TS
,
2.07'
N
. I
SEE EXAMPLE 2A-11

STEP 3, PART B,ITEM d.
FOR LW/H =2.54,GRAPHIC
INCORPORATION YIELDS
T2 - T1 SUMMARIZED
BELOW
WIH
~li
0.715
2.07
'6.75
1.5
3
14.0
,Lw IH
(a)
20
Lw /H=25<l
'iii
F.OR W/H = I. 33
i-=" 10
T2 - TI = 5.8ms
I
t\I
5.8m
,r<>
'"
W/H
~.
(b)
-;
".'.
NOTE:
FIGURE
2A - 19
21\" liZ-

.75
.75
1. 5
5.28.2
.75
10.0
14.5
1.5
1.5
13.5
3'
19.5
.75
18.6
1. 5
24.8
34.8
Plot Figure 2A-20,with above values, and graphically interpolate

to determine T3 - Tl at Lw/H - 2.54 for W/H'- .75, 1.5, and 3, as
summarized below.
,
3
.75
1.5
31.7'
iz .a
17.5
.
Plot Figure 2A-20 with above values, and determine. T3

ms at W/H - 1.33.
Tl -'16.3
T1 - 1. 60 ms
T2
Tl - 5.80 ms
I3
I1 - 16.30 ms
T2 - 5.80 + 1.60
~'7.40 m~~
T3 - 16.30 + 1.60 - 17.9 ms

Plot Figure 2A-23 using above values and Prnax - 18.9 psi.
Step 4.
a.
Sidewall idealized interior pressure-time blast load.

Using equation 215, with Ps o- 12.6 psi; Ao/Aw ~ 1/8, Lw/L1.27, L/H - 2.0, solve for Pmax for. W/H - .75, 1.5. and 3.
Equation 215:
Pmax - K/(Lw/L)
For W/H - .75, K - A x Bx CE x FH x psoO.97l8
where:
A,:" [0.5422 (Lw/L) 1. 2944] - ,0.001829 "' 0.7385':

B - [0.654 + 2.616 (Ao/Aw) - 4.928 (Ao/Aw) )2'
x [2.209 (L/H)-0.34~1 ~. 0.739] - 0.9040
c - [0.829
x [L/H]D - 1.0388
D
+ 0.104 (Lw/L)l'~l + [0. Q0124 + -0_00414 (L",;/L) 3. 334.J
"
2.579 - .0534 (Lw/L)~~9l =2.4428

-.1,
."
,,
40
,
,
,
,
, ,
,
31.7
,, ,
30
,
,,
'"
E
f- 20
17.5
,, ,
, ,
12.8
10
"
,
,
,
,
It:,
, ,
,,
,
,
,
,,
W/H=015
,,
,,
,
,
,
,
,, ,
,
,
, ,,
W/H
T:3-T,
0.75
12.8
17.5
1.5.
, ,
,
,
:3
31.7
56.5
0.75
W/H=I.5
,,
, ,,
,
,
I ,
W/H
=3
' .. ;
,
,
NOTE:
SEE EXAMPLE 2A-II,
STEP 3,PART B. ITEM e.
FOR Lw/H = 2.54 I GRAPHIC
INTERPOLATION YIELDS
T3- TI SUMMARIZED BELOW
,"
40
,,
,,
30
NOTE:
,,
FOR W/H = 1.33

T 3 - T 1z I 6 .3 ms
,'
10
Ir<>
r<>
o
W/H
( b)
FIGURE
2A - 20
2A- 64 .
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
E - 999 (Ao/Aw)9.964 - 0.000001002

F - 1.468 - 1.6627 (Ao/Aw)0.78~1 + [1.8692
1.1735 (Ao/Aw)-0.2226] x [Lw/LjG - 1.1592
G - 0.2979 (Ao/Aw)-1.4872 - 0.8351 - 5.7286
H - (5.425 x 10- 4) + (1.001 x 10- 3) (L/H)9.965 - 0.0005435
K - 0.7385 x 0.9040 x 1.03880.000001002 x 1.15920.0005435

x 12.60.9718 - 7.83
Pmax - 7.83/1.27 z 6.2 psi, for W/H - .75
For 1.5 $ W/H $ 6, K - [A + [8 x (Lw/L)C]] x D x E x pso1.025
A - 0.002 (W/H)1.4467 - 0.0213

8 - 2.2075 - ( 1.902 ( W/H )_0.085)
C - 1.231 + ( 0.0008 ( W/H )2.678 )
D - (2.573 (L/H )-0.444) -0.3911

E - 0.4221 + (1.241 (Ao/Aw )0.367)
,
For W/H - 1.5, 3, and 6, determine values for A to E, and K and
Pmax' as summarized below.
-E
W/H
1.5
,-0.0177
0.3700
1.2334
1.5003
1.0006
-0.0115
0.4751
1.2462
1.5003
1.0006 12.690
2A-65
9.6743
7.60
9.98
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR
88~22
Plot Figure 2A-21 with above values of Pmax vsW/H- - .75,

1.5, and 3, and determine Pmax - 7.30 psi for W/H - 1.33.
b.
For Ps o - 12.6 psi, determine Tl and T2 for'W/H - .75, 1.5,

and 3 from Figure 2-213. as summarized below.
W/H
.75
1.5
1.82
4.95
11.7
3.20
6.50
12.5
Plot Figure 2A-21 using above'values of'Y/H and Tl,and T

2,
and determine Tl - 4.4 ms and T2 - 5.9 ms for W/H - 1.33.
c.
For Ps o - 12.6 psi and'L/H - 2, determine T3 and,T 4 for W/H

- .75, 1.5 and 3 and Lw/L - .75, I, 1.5, and 2, from Figures
2-218 to 2-221, as summarized below:
Plot Figure 2A-21 with above values, and interpolate to
determine T3 and T4, for Lw/L ~ 1.27 for W/H - .75, 1.5, and
,
.!
3, as summarized below .
i
W/H
.75'
1.5
35
18
24
71
71
74.5
Plot Figure 2A-21 with above values, and determine T - 19

3
ms and T4 - 71 ms, for W/H -' 1.33.
d.
Step' 5.
For Pmax - 7.3 psi, Tl - 4.4 ms, T2 - 5.9 ms, T3 - 19 ms and

T4 - 71 ms' plot Figure 2A-23.
, Back wall idealized interior pressure-time blast load.
a.
For L/H,- 2, Ps o - 12.6 psi and Ao/Aw -' 1/8, determine

PRIB/Pso - 0.575 from Figure 2-234.
b.
PRI B - (PRIB/Pso) x Ps o - 0.575 x 12.6
2A-66
-.7.5 psi.
...
15
15
. T2
-;;
0.
.......
7.3
)(
e,
I-
.5 4.4
en
E
.......
. T1
10
5.
Ii<)
i<)
W/H
W/H
(a)
(b)
75 71.0
70
6
100
T4
90
60
5
80 74.
70
~
en
710
E 60
.......
ILl
:::E
I-
W/H=075
W/H=3
240
-so
i<)
:::E
W/H=0.75
50
50
en
4
E
.......
ILl 4
W/H=1.
50
40
W/H=3
I-
}T'
35
3
20
25
180
10 _
W/H=1.5
20
I"N
19.0
15
0
.5
.75
Lw
1.5
.5
1.5
W/H
(c)
(d)
FIGURE
2A-21
2A-67
2.5
c.
For Ps o - 12.6 psi, L/H - 2, and Ao/Aw - 1/8, determine Tl

for W/H - .75, 1.5 and 3 from Figures 2-230 and 2-231, as is
shown below .
. 75
19.0
1. 5
21.5
24.0
Plot Figure 2A-22 using above values, and determine T _

l
21.1 ms for W/H - 1.33.
d.
For Pi o - 12'.6 psi and,Ao/Aw - 1/8, determine T2.- Tl - 2. 35

ms from Figure 2-232.
Determine T2 - (T 2
e.
Step 6.
a.
Tl) :+ Tl - 2.35 ms + 21.1 ms - 23. 5ms.,
Plot Figure 2A-23 using PR1B - 7.5 psi, Tl - 21.1 ms and T

2
- 23.5 ms.
Roof idealized interior pressure-time blast load
Sidewall W/H - 1-1/3 - 4/3
Roof W/H - 1/(4/3) - 3/4
b.
, Repeat Step 4 with W/H - 3/4

"
For W/H - 3/4, L/H - 2.0, Ao/Aw - 1/8, L,.,/L - 1.272 and Ps o-:
12.6,
~
Pmax - 6.2 psi
For W/H
3/4 and Ps o - 12.6 psi
Tl - 1;82 and T2,- 3.20 ms

For W/H - 3/4, Ps o - 12:6 psi, and L,.,/L -1.27
T3 - '35, and T4 ., 65 ms
Plot Figure 2A-23 with above values.
2A-68
25 .
,
,
~
,
I
: ! I
I I
I
21.1
,I
,,
,,
,,
11_.
20
!
1 I
I'
11
I
I
'
I
,,
,
,, , ,, I
,
, , ,
I
,,
,,
,
I
,,
, ,
,,
l"j
.r
,,
, ,,
,,
,,
10
o.
.5
I"
,,
FIGURE
',,'
.. '.,
,;
;
\.:
I I
W/H
.'
'
~'
; i
,oro '
.
l~l
(0) EXTERIOR FRONT WALL
iii 20
Q.
12.7
10
5.3
26 30
40
50
60 '
7.
. 80
ms
(b) INTERIOR FRONT WALL

20
iii 10
Q.
01.6
.410
17.9 20
50
70
ms
(C) INTERIOR SIDE WALL10

7.3
en
Q.
4.4
.9 I
19
ms
71
(d) INTERIOR BACK WALL

10
7.2
en
Q.
-t-
21.1
3.5
ms
(e) INTERIOR ROOF

10
6.2
'0;
Q.
\3.2
1.8
30
35
ms
FIGURE 2A-23 BLAST LOAD SUMMARY

2A- 70 -
Problem 2A-12. Interior

Pressure BUildup in a Structure
-rProblem:
Determine the interior pressure time curve for a structure
with an opening in one of its walls and subjected to an

applied blast pressure.
Procedure:
Step 1.
I
Determine
the pressure;time history of the applied blast
p~essure P acting on the:wall surrounding the opening ,in the
structure as presented in problem 2A~lO. Also the area of

the opening Ao and the v?l~e of the structure Vo must be
. known.
Step
2.
'~
Divide the duration to ~f the applied pressure into n equal

iriterVa~s ct, ~ach interval bei?g ~pproximately t~/lO to,
; t / 20 , and determine the pressures 'at the end of ~ach 'inter, val.
Step 3.
Compute 'the pressure differential P:P i where Pi'is the

interior pressure. Obtain the leakage pressure coefficient
CL for each,P-P i from Fig~re 2-235.
Step 4.
Calculate cP i from
cP i - CL
Ao
at
Vo
using 'the proper values for CL and ct, Add cP i tO'P i for the
interval being considered to obtain the new value of Pi for the
next interval,
Step 5.
Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each interval using the proper

values of P and,P i. Plot curve of pressure buildup.
Note:
When P-P i becomes negative, the value of CL must be taken as
negative also.
Example 2A-12. Interior Pressure Buildup in a Structure

Required:
Interior pressure time curve for a structure with an opening
in one of its walls and subjected to an applied blast pressure.
Solution:
t
e
Step 1.
The curve of the applied blast pressure P for the wall in

question is shown in Figure 2A-24. (Only the positive phase
of the blast wave is considered in this example.)
2A-71
3
APPLIED BLAST PRESSURE ON WALL
C/)
a,
LU
a:
::l
(/)
(/)
LU
a:
c,
INTERIOR PRESSURE
O .
10'
20
30
TI~E (ms)
FIGURE 2 A - 24
2A-72
40
50
60
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
Area of opening
Ao - 3' x 3' - 9 sq ft.
Volume of structure
Va - 10' x 10' x 10'

Va - 1,000 cu ft
Step 2.
to -. 55 ms
Use n - lOot - 5.5 ms

For the first interval, P - 3.5.psi at. t - 0
Pi - 0 for the first interval
Step 3.
. . P - Pi - 3.50 - 0 - 3.50 psi

(fig. 2-235)
(eq. 2-31)
Step 4.
oP i - 8.75 (9.0 / 1000) (5.5) - 0.433 psi
new Pi = 0 + 0.433 = 0.433 psi
The remainder of the analysis is presented in tabular form

below and the pressure buildup within the structure is
plotted in Figure 2A-24.
Step 5.
t(l)
Pi
P-P i
CL
(ms)
(psi)
3.50
3.15
2.80
2.45
2.10
1. 75
1.40
1. 05
0.70
0.35
O.
O.
O.
O.
O.
(psi)
O.
0.433
0.780
1.05
1. 24
1. 36
1.41
1.41
1. 36
1.27
1.14
.97
. 82
.70
.59
.49
(psi)
3.50
2.72
2.02
1.40
0.86
0.39
-0.01
-0.36
-0.66
~O. 92
-1. 14
-0.97
-0.82 .
-0.70
-0.59
-0.49
(psi-ft/ms)
8.75
7.00
5.45
3.78
2.32
1'.05
-0.027
-0.972
-1. 78
-2.48
-3.50
-3.00
-2.50
. -2.25
-2.00
-1.80
o.
5.5
11.0
16.5
22.0
27.5
33.0
38.5
44.0
49.5
55.0
60.5
66.0
71.5
77 .0
82.5
o.
2A-73
oP i
(psi)
0.433
0.347
0.270
0.187
0.115
0.052
-0.0013
-0.048
-0.088
-0.123
-0.173
-0.148
-0.124
-0.111
-0.099
-0.089
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
Pi
P-P i
CL
6P i
(ms)
(psi)
(psi)
(psi)
(psi-ft/ms)
(psi)
88.0
93.5
99.0
104.5
110.0
115.5
121.0
126.5
132.0
O.
O.
O.
O.
O.
O.
O.
O.
O.
.40
.32
.25
.19
.13
.08
.04
.01
- .40
-.32
-.25
-.19
- .13
-.08
- .04
-.01
-1.60
-1.45
-1. 30
-1.15
-1.0
- .85
- .05
- .2
- .079
- .071
- .064
-.056
-.050
- .042
- .025
-.01
O.
O.
O.
(1)
O.
Maximum Pi occurs between t - 27.5 andt - 33.0 ms
Problem 2A-13
Problem:
.'
t(l)
Primary Fragments from Cased Cylindrical Charges
Determine the average fragment weight for a primary fragment

ejected from a uniform cylindrical steel casing; the total number
of fragments, the design fragment weight .arid the number of Er-agments weighing more than the design fragment.
Procedure:
Step 1.
a.
Establish design parameters: ..

type of explosive.
b.' average casing thickness,
e.
c.
average inside diameter of casing, dio
d.
total casing weight, Wc'
e.
confidence level, CL.
Step 2.
Determine the value of the explosive constant B for the

given type of explosive from table 2-6. With this value and
the values of t c and d i from step:1, calculate the fragment
distribution MA from
l
(eq. 2-37)
Step 3.
With the value of MA from step 2, calculate the average

weight of the fragments from
(eq. 2-40)
2A-74
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
Step 4.
Calculate the total number of fragments using the value of

Wc from step 1d and MA from step 2 and equation 2-37.
(eq. 239)
or:
With the values of d i and t c from step 1, enter Figure 2-241 and
determine B2NT/Wc ' From this value, the value of B from step 2
and Wc from step 1 find NT'
Step 5.
Find the design fragment weight for the confidence level CL ,

given in step 1, using the value of MA and
(eq. 2-42)
or equation 2-43 if CL > 0.9999

Step 6.
Using the value of Wc from step 1, MA from step 2 and Wf

from step 5, determine the number of fragments which weigh
more than the design fragment from
(eq. 2-36)
Nf - - - - - - - : : : - - - - - -
M 2
A
or:
Calculate the number of fragments which weigh more than the design
fragment using the confidence level of step 1, the total number of
fragments from step 4 and equation 2-244.
Example 2A-13
Required:
Primary Fragments from Cased Cylindrical Charges
The average fragment weight, the total number of fragments, the

design fragmient weight and the number of fragments weighing more
than the design fragment.
Solution:
Step 1.
Given:
a.
type of explosive:
Comp B
b.
average casing thickness:
c.
average inside diameter of casing:
2A-75
t c - 0.50 inch
d i - 12.0 inches
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
d.
total casing weight:
e.
confidence level:
Step 2.
Wc - 65.0 1bs
CL - 0.95
For Comp B, B - 0.22 (table 2-7)

MA - Btc5/6di1/3(1 + tc/d
i)
(eq. 2-37)
- 0.22 (0.5)5/6 (12)1/3 (1 + 0.5/12) _ 0.294

Step 3.
Average weight of, fragments.

(eq . 2-40)
Step 4.
Total number of fragments.

NT - 8Wc / MA2 - 8 X 65/0.294 2 - 6016 fragments
or:
B2NT
- 0.28
(e q .
239)
(fig. 2-37)
Wc
NT - 0.28 X (65 X 16)/;222 - 6016 fragments
Step 5.
Design fragment weight.

2
Wf - 2MA
1n2(1 - CL) .., 0.294 2 1n 2 (l - 0.95) _ 0.78 oz

(eq , 2-42)
Step 6 ..
Number of fragments weighing more than W - 0.78 oz.

f
(8 X 65) e
. (0.78)1/2/ 0. 294
,Nr- - - - - - - ' - - - - - M 2.
A
- 298 fragments
"'.
(eq. 2-36)
>,
2A-76
TN 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

(eq. 244)
or:
Nf
NT (1 CL) - 6016 (1 0.95) - 301 fragments
Problem 2A-14 Primary Fragment Velocity

Problem:
Determine the initial velocity of a primary fragment and its

striking velocity.
Procedure:
Step 1.
Establish design parameters.
a.
shape of charge
b.
dimensions of charge
c.
type and density of explosive
d.
type and density of casing
e.
distance from center of charge to impact location
f.
weight of fragment
Step 2.
Calculate the total weight of the explosive Wand increase

it 20%. Find the weight of the casing Wc' Also calculate
the ratio of the explosive weight to the casing weight W/Wc'
Step 3.
Determine the Gurney Energy Constant (2E,)1/2 for the explo

sive charge from table 25. With this value and the value
of W/Wc from step 2, calculate the initial Vo of the primary
fragments from the equation chosen from table 26.
or:
Calculate the casing to charge weight ratio Wc/W. With

Wc/W, find the initial velocity from Figure 2237 for proper
shape.
Step 4.
For the distance traveled by the fragment Rf , calculate the

striking velocity V s using the initial velocity from step 3,
the weight of the fragment from step Ig and
(eq. 248)
vs -
2A-77
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
With the fragment weight Wf and striking distance Rf from

step 1, enter Figure 2-243 and find the ratio of the striking velocity to initial velocity. Multiply the ratio by the
initial velocity V o from step 3 to find the striking velocity v s'
or:
Example 2A-14
Required:
Primary Fragment Velocity
The initial velocity and striking velocity of a primary fragment.
Solution:
Step 1.
Given:
a.
spherical charge
b.
inner diameter of charge:
di
average casing thickness:
t c - 0.25 inches
c.
type of explosive TNT

0.0558 Ib/in 3
density of explosive
d.
6 inches
mild steel casing

density of casing - 0.283 1b/in3
e.
striking distance Rf - 35 ft.
f.
weight of fragment, Wf - 2 oz
Step 2.
a.
weight of the explosive

W - 4/3 n (6/2)3
b.
X 0.0558 - 6.31 1bs
Increase weight of explosive 20 percent

W = 1.20 X 6.31 - 7.57 1b
c.
Weight of casing
Wc - 4/3 n (3.5 3 - 3 3)
d.
X 0.283 -
18.82 1b
Explosive weight to casing weight ratio.

W/W c - 7.57/18.82 - 0.402
Step 3.
For TNT, (2E,)1/2 -
8000 (table 2-5)
Initial velocity from table 2-6

2A-78
_ (2E)1/2
1/2
0.40
vo -
(8000) '[
1 + 0.40 (3/5)
1'
4500 ft/sec
18.82/7.57 . 2.49
or:
from Figure 2-237

v o/(2E)1/2- 0.56
v o- 0.56 X 8000 - 4500 ft/sec,
Step 4.
Striking velocity
"s
V
or:
voe
-0.004 Rf/Wfl/3
-0.004 x (35/2)1/3
- 4500 e
(eq. 2-48)
s - 4030 ft/sec
from Figure 2-243
s - 0.895 X 4500 - 4030 ft/sec
Problem 2A-15 , Unconstrained Secondary Fragments "Close" to a Charge

Problem:
Determine the velocity of an unconstrained object close to an

explosive charge and its maximum range.
Procedure:
Ie
2A-79.
Step 1.
Establish design parameters
a.
weight Wand shape of TNT equivalent explosive
b.
radius of explosive Re
c.
shape, dimensions and weight of target
d.
distance from the center of the explosive charge .to the

surface of the target, R
e.
orientation of target with respect to the explosive charge
f.
mass density of air Po
Step 2.
Calculate the ratio of standoff distance to radius of the

explosive R/R e using the values from step 1.
Step 3.
From Figure 2-249; determine target shape factor,
B.
Step 4.
a.
If R/R e is less than or equal to 10 for cylindrical charges,

or less than equal to 5.0 for spherical ,charges, determine
the specific acquired impulse either from Figure 2-250 or
~quations 2-60, ~r 2-61.
b.
If 10 < R/R e 5 20 for a cylindrical charge, or 5 < R/R e 5 20

for a spherical charge, calculate the scaled standoff distance ZA - R/W 1 3 . With that value of ZA' obtain the normal
reflected impulse from Figure 2-7. The normal reflected
impulse is then used as the specific acquired impulse.
Step 5.
Calculate the mean presented area A.of 'the target and the
mass M using the values of step 1.
Step 6.
With .the area and mass from step 4,' the target shape factor
B from step 2 and the impulse from step 3, calculate the
velocity from
1000 ABi
vo -
Step 7.
(eq. 2-59)
12 M
Determine the drag coefficient CD from table 2-8. Using

that value of CD' the area and mass of the target from step
5, the velocity from step 6 and the mass density of air from
step 1f,
evaluate the term:
2A80
With the term calculated in step 7, enter Fig~re 2-252 and

read the value of 12 poCOAOR/M from ~hich the range R is
calculated.
Step 8.
Example 2A-15
Unconstrained Secondary Fragments "Close" to a Charge

".
Required:
':
The velocity and maximum range of a steel tool holder resting on a

lathe when a charge being held by. the lathe explodes.
Solution:
Step 1.
a.
Given:
spherical charge.of TNT
15 Lbs
W-
b.
c.
d.
e.
coo I holder is, resting so Sthat "its longitudinal axis is

perpendicular to the radial line from the charge
f.
mass density of air:
Step 2.
Po - 0.115 Ib - ms 2/in 4
Ratio of standoff.distance to radius of explosive:

R/R e - 1.0/0.33 - 3.03
Step 3.
B -
Step 4.
Target shape factor.
n/4 from Figure 2-512

Oetermine
specific acquired impulse'
,
psi-ms
a.
8000
(fig 2250)
ft
b.
Re f f - Re - 0.33 ft
2A-81'
(eq. 261)
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
c.
i -
"/4 (0.33 ft~ (0.083/0.33)0.158 X 8000 psi-ms/ft
i - 1667 ps L-ms
Step 5.
a.
',Calculate area and jnas s of target:
Mean presented area

.A - 2.0,inX 8.0 in - 16i'n2
b.
Mass
Wt
M- - - - g
Step 6.
7.13 1b
-:-_--;:-
32.2 x 12x10- 6in/ms 2
18,450
in
Find the velocity.

1000 ABi - 1000 X 16 X ("/4) X 1667
V
o -.----
12 M
Vo
Step 7. ,.' "

a,
b.
- 95 ft/sec
...
Evaluate toe term
12 PoCoADvo 2/Mg.
CD - 1.2
12P oCoADVo2
( table 2-8)
0.115
Mg
Step 8.
(eq. 2-59)
12 X 18450
(1. 2) (16) (95)2 12

18450 X 32.2
- 0.40
Calculate the range.
a.
- 0.33
b.
R - 0.33M/(12p oCoAo)
- 0.33 (18450)/[12 (0.115) 1.2 (16)J - 230 ft.
2A-82
(fig. 2-252)
TM 5-J.300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

Problem: 2A-16
Problem:
Unconstrained Secondary Fragments "Far" from a Charge
Determine the velocity of an unconstrained object nfar ll from an

explosive charge.
Procedure:
Step 1.
Establish design parameters;
a.
weight W of TNT equivalent explosive
b.
shape, dimensions and weight of target
c.
distance from the center of explosive charge to surface of
the target
d.
orientation and location of target with respect to the

explosive charge
e.
velocity of sound in air, a o
f.
atmospheric pressure, Po
Step 2.
From
Calculate the scaled standoff distance from:
Figur~
2-7. and the scaled distance find the peak incident
overpressure and the incident specific impllise.
Step 3.
Determine the drag coefficient CD from table 2-8 based on

the shape and orientation of target (step 1).
Step 4.
Calc;"late the mass of the target. Determine the distance

from the front of the target to the location of its largest
cross-sectional area, X. Also, determine the minimum transverse distance of the mean presented area,
H,
and the pre-
sented area.
Step 5.
Determine the constant K, which is equal
is on the ground or reflecting surface.

the air, K is equal to 2.
Step 6.
to 4 if the object
If the target is in
With the peak incident overpressure Pso from step 2 and the
atmospheric pressure Po f r orn step If, find Pso/po'
2A-83
Step 7.
Evaluate the term l2CDisao/lO?[Pso(KH.+ X)] using is and Ps o

from step 2 .. CD from step 3. a o from step Le , K from step 5
and H and X from step 4.
Step 8.
With two terms calculated in steps 6 and 7 enter Figure 2248 and read l44voMao/[106PoA(KH + X)] from which the veloc-.
ity is calculated.
Example 2A-16
Required:
Solution:
Step 1.
Unconstrained'Secondary Fragments "Far" from Charge
The initial velocity of a steel tool holder resting on a nearby

.table, when a charge explodes.,
Given:
.a .
b.
"
weight of explosive:
W:.- l51bs of TNT
Rt
8.0 in
1.0 in
Wt -
7.13 lb
cylindrical target: length
c.
standoff distance:
d.
tool holder is resting on a table so that its longitudinal

axis is perpendicular to the radial line from the charge
e.
velocity of sound in air:
f.
atmospheric pressure:
Step 2.
a o - 1100 ft/sec
Po - 14.7 psi
Find the peak incident overpressure and the' incident specific impulse.
a.
R - 10 ft
r,
,Scaled distance
ZA - R/Wl/3 - 10/(15)1/3 - 4.05 ft/lb l/ 3
b.
Peak incident overpressure.
Ps o - 39 psi
c.
(fig -, 2-7)
Incident specific impulse.'

i s/W l/3 - 12 psi-ms/lb l/ 3
'.
....
is - 12 (15)1/3 - 29.6 psi-ms
2A-84
(fig .. F7)
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
Drag coefficient.
Step 3.
(from table 2-8 for cylinder loaded perpendicular to axis.)
CD - 1
Step 4.
Mass of target.
a.
Wt
7.13 1b
M - _.- - -----.....,.....--_::_
'g
,
b.
18,450
in
Location of largest cross-section.
xc.
32.2 x 12x10- 6 in/ms 2
1 in (radius of object in this case - see fig. 2A-21)
Transverse distance of presented area.
H = 2.0 in
(diameter of object in this case - see fig. 2A25) .
d.
Mean 'presented area..

A - 2 X 8 - 16 in 2
Step 5.
Re f Le c t.Lon constant".
Target is resting on table which is a reflecting surface so:

K -
Step 6.
Evaluate
Pso/po
Pso/po - 39/14.7 - 2.65

Step 7.
12 (1.2) (29.6) (1100)
10 3 (39) (2 X 4 + 1)
Step 8.
- 1.34
Calculate the velocity.

- 6.0
(fig. 2-248)
10 6.(6.0)(14.7)(16)(2 X 4 + 1)
vo -
(144)(18450)(1100)
4.34 ft/sec
2A-85
., .
'j
"
-,
"
FIGURE
2A-25
2A- 86"
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

Problerl. 2A-17
Problem:
Constrained Secondary Fragments
Determine .t.he velocity of a constrained object close to an explod-
ing
charg~.
'~
Procedure:
Step 1.
Establish design parameters:
a.
fra~ment
b.
dim~nsions'~f object.
c.
boundary condition, cantilever or fixed-fixed.
d.
specific impulse imparted,to object.
material.
",.
"
Step 2.
"
Det~rmine the fragment toughness T from table 2-9 and the
fragment mass density Pi:. "

Step 3.
Calculate the loaded area of the object.
Step 4.
Evaluate the term ib (2L/b)O.3/[A(Pf T)O.5] ,using the specific impulse and object dimensions from step 1, the fragment density and toughness from step 2 and the loaded area
from step 3. With this term enter Figure 2-251 and read
the value of l2V/1000 (pf/T)O.5 from which the velocity is
calculated.
I
or:
Using the specific impulse and object dimensions from step
1, the fragment density and toughness from step 2, and the

loaded area from step 3. calculate the velocity of the
object from-equation 2-66.
Example 2A-17 Constrained Secondary Fragments
Required:
The velocity of a cylindrical tool holder after it breaks free of

its moorings.
".,'
'.
Solution:
Step 1.
Given:
a.
fragment material; A36 steel
b.
dimensions of object:
c.
boundary conditions; cantilever
d.
specific impulse: i - 1667 psi~ms (see step 4 of example 2A15).
b
2.0 inches
L - 8.0 inches
2A-87 .
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

Step 2.
Fragment toughness ..
a.
T - 12,000 in-lb/in 3
b.
(table 2-9)
Mass density of steel.
Pf -
32.2 ft/s 2 (12 in/ft) (s2 /10 6ms 2) .
Step 3.
Loaded area.
Step 4.
Calculate the velocity.
734 - - in4 .
"
ib
1667 x 2.0
A(p
. f T)0.5
3.14(734 x 12,000)0,5
- 0.668
from Figure 2-251

"
12/1000
'.
[pf/T J1/2 V - 0.025
so
1000
1000
0.025 - - 12
V -
12
12 000
[ ~34]
1/2
0.025 - 8.4 fps
or from equation 2-66
V -
[~J 1/2
1000
12
Pf
1000
12
[ -.2369
12.000
[
] 1/2
(-.2369 + 0.3931 X 0.668)
734
.
v - 8.6 fps
2A-88
Problem 2A-18
Problem:
GroundShock Load
Determine the air blast and direct induced ground shock parameters.
,
Procedure:
Air blast-induced ground shock.
Step 1.
Determine the charge weight, ground distance R, height of

burst He l if any, and structure dimensions.
Step 2.
Step 3.
Calculate the scaled distance Z.
Read: From fig. 2-15

a.
Peak positive incident pressure Ps o'
b.
Scaled unit positive incident impulse i s;Wl/3.

scaled value by Wl!3 to obtain absolute value.
c.
Shock front velocity U.
Step 4.
a.
Multiply
Determine the maximum vertical ground motions.
Calculate maximum vertical velocity.
(eq. 2-74)
where:
p - Mass density of soil
(table 2-10)
Cp - Compression wave seismic velocity in the soil

.
.'
"
.",
(table 2-11)
b.
Calculate maximum vertical displacement

(eq. 2-74)
1,000 p Cp
2A-89
c. Calculate maximum vertical acceleration of the ground surface.

lOOP s o
AV -
(eq. 2-76)
-----
where:
g - Gravitational constant'equal to 32.2 ft/sec 2
Step 5.
Determine the .maximum horizontal ground motions parameters.
a.
Check Cp/12000 U > .707
b.
Calculate maximum horizontal velocity.

(eq. 2-77)
.c.
Calculate maximum.horizontaldisplacement.
(eq. 2- 78)
d.
Calculate maximum horizontal acceleration~
(eq. 2-79)
Step 6.
a.
Determine arrival time t
and duration to:
Read from fig. 2-15.

t A/W l/ 3 scaled time of arrival of blast wave and,
t ;Wl/3 scaled duration of positive phase.
0
b.
Multiply scaled value by Wl/ 3 to obtain absolute value.
DirectInduced Ground Shock

Step 7.
a.
Determine the maximum vertical ground motions.

Calculate maximum vertical displacement.
2A-90
0.025 Rel/3wl/3
(eq. 2-80, rock media)
Ze1. 3
or
0.17 Rel/3wl/3
(eq. 2-83, dry or saturated soil)
Z 2.3
b.
Calculate the maximum vertical velocity.
vV _ l50/Z e1. 5
c.
(eq. 2-85)
Calculate the maximum vertical acceleration.
(eq. 2-87)
Step 8.
a.
Determine the maximum horizontal ground motion parameters.
Calculate the maximum horizontal displacement.

(eq. 2-82, rock media)
or
(eq. 2_84, dry or saturated soil)
b.
Calculate the maximum horizontal velocity.

(eq. 2-86, all ground media)
c.
Calculate the maximum horizontal acceleration.

(eq. 2-88, dry soil)
(eq. 2-89, wet soil or rock media)
Step 9.
Determine arrival time tAG:
2A-91
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
tAG -. 12000 RG/C p
(eq. 2-92)
Example 2A-18 Ground Shock Loads

Required:
Maximum acceleration, velocity, and displacement at a point 155

ft. away from a surface burst of, 5,000 lbs. Also required are:
times of arrival and duration ofoair-blast induced ground shock.
Solution:
Air blast-induced ground shock.
Step 1.
Given:
Step 2.
w-
Step 3.
Calculate the scaled distance Z.
b.
Step 4.
a.
1.2 (5,000) - 6,000 lbs.
is
9 psi-ms/lb l/3
Wl/3
is -
c.
Charge weight - 5,000 Ibs., R - 155 ft., He - 12 ft.
9 x Wl/ 3 _ 9 x (6,000)1/3
163.54 psi-ms
U - 1. 5 ft/ms
.Determine the maximum vertical ground 'motion.
Vv -
Ps o
(eq. 2-74)
p Cp
13
Vv -
b.
Dv-
1. 65 x 10- 4 x 70,000
- 1. 125 in/sec
is
1,000 p Cp
(eq. 2-75)
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
0.0142 in
(eq. 2-76)
3~44
Step 5.
a.
Determine the maximum horizontal ground motion.
Check Cp/12000 U > .707

70,000/12,000 X 1.5 - 3.89 > .707 .
b.
VH - Vv - 1.125 in/sec
c.
DH - DV - 0.0142 in
d.
AH - AV - 3.44 g
Step 6.
a.
Arrival time
Read from Figure 2-15.

3.35 ms/1b 1/3
to~1/3
b.
- 2.35 ms/1b 1/3
t A ~ 3.35 X W1/3 - 3.35 (6,000)1/3

t A - 60.90 ms
to - 2.35
W1/3 - 2.35 x (6,000)1/3
2A-93
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P,397/AFR 88-22
to - 42.70
IDS
Direct-induced ground shock.

Step 7.
Maximum vertical ground motions.
0.17 RG1/3 W1/ 3
a.
(eq. 2-83)
Z 2.3
G
0.17 (155)1/3 '(6,000)1/3

-
(8.53)2.3
0.1198 in
,.
150/ZGt'5
b.
(eq. 2-85)
150 / 8.531.5
6.020' in/sec
10,000 / W1/3 ZG 2
c.
(eq. 287)
10,000 / [ (6,000)1/3 (8.53)2 1 - 7.56 g

Step 8.
a.
Horizontal ground motions.
DH
D
V
(eq. 2-84)
DH - 0.1198 in.
b.
VH - Vv
vH -
(eq. 2-86)
6.020 in/sec
c.
(eq. 2-88)
J .
2A-94
.'
TM 5"1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22'
AH
0:' 5 (7.56)
3.78 g
Step 9.
'
Arrival time tAG
,
- )..2 ,000 RG/~p - (12,000 x 155) / -r 70;000
. ., .
.;.. 26.6
(eq. 2-92)
ms,
. , Problem 2Ac19
. J'
Problem:
-,
I.
Structure Mot10n
Du~
to 'Air'Shock
. ~l
Determine the maximum horizontal acceleration, displacement and
velocity of an above ground structure subjected to air shock.

Procedure:
Step 1.
Determine external loadings 'acting on 'the roof, front and

rear walls according to the procedure outlined in problem
2A-10.
j',
Step 2.
;,
Construct the horizontal force-time load curve by ~ombining

the frbnt and'vre ar wall loadings from step 1 applied over
the arJa of front and rear walls. Use times of arrival to
phase these two loads.
"
Step 3.
Calculate the dead weight and mass of the structure.
Step 4.
Construct the downward force-time curye by adding the weight

of the structure and total roof load. The roof load is the
pressure time loading from step 1 applied 'over the total
area of the roof.
Step
5.'
Step 6.
Determinethe coefficient of friction between soil and the

structure from table 2-12.
Determine maximum horizontal acceleration, displacement and
velocity using the acceleration impulse extrapolation method
outl t nad-Ln Chapter 3, Ar.t LcLe 3-19.2.1.2 of this manual.
The res~sting force at each time interval is equal to the
value of downward force curve of step 4 multiplied by the
coeffic~ent of friction determined in step 5.
The resisting
force is assumed to be effective when the total horizontal
movement is equal to or larger than 1/4 inch as mentioned in
paragraph
2A'-95 '
M 5-l300/NAVFAC
. :P-397/AFR 88-22
~
Example 2A-19
tequired:
Structure Motion Due to Air Shock
Maximum horizontal acceleration, velocity and displacement of the

square structure shown in Figure 2A-9 from problem 2A-10 for a
surface burst of 5,000 lbs at a distance from the front wall of
155 ft. Assume a coarse and compact soil. Roof, floor slab and
side walls are 1 foot thick reinforced concrete slabs and assume a
50 psf of internal dead load for the structure.
Step 1.
External loadings on the structure are determined according

to the procedure in example .2A-10. See Figures 2A-10. 2A-12
and 2A-13. The arrival time (t A) for these loads are tabulated in step 3d of example 2A-10.
tAf (front wall) - 60.9 ms
tAb .(rear wall) - 83.6 ms
Step 2.
a.
Calculate area of front and rear walls.
Area (front and rea,)

b.
Calculate the time difference between the rear and front

walls from step 1 .
. 'ot - tAb - tAf - 83.6 -60.9
c.
22.7 ms .
. Construct the horizontal force-time load curve by multiplying the values of the front and rear wall curves from step 1
by the area from step 2a. Rear wall load starts at time
equal to ot - 22.7 from step 2b. See' Figure 2A-26.
Step 3.
a.
Calculate dead weight of structure Wd ... Assume concrete

weight is lSO.psf.
Wd - 150 [4 (30 - 1) (12-1) + 2 (30)2]' + 50 (30-2)2 - 500,600 lbs
2A-96
w
u ..
0-
ll::.c
u,
2,000,000
100
~I
~2
14 120
~r-==
~I
-124,921
-3~7.786
1"104711
COMBINED
FIGURE
333
.00
'00
2A -26
2A-97
~I
TIME,ms
Calculate total mass.
b.
wd
500,600 (1000)2
1295.55 x 10 6
mg
Step 4.
a.
32.2 x (12)
in
Cal.culate area of the roof.
Area (roof)
b.
lb ms2
30 2x (12)2
129,600 in 2
Construct the downward force-time curve by multiplying the

values of the roof curve from step 1 by the roof area from
step 4a, and adding, the. dead weight of structure Wd 500,600 Lb s from step 3a. (If the resulting value is negative, assume zero), See Figure 2A-27 below.
'c::.c
"
0"
oIL
sao
600
398,347
100
~I
200
500
....
'"
"
69032
TIME,ms
Fig1.lre 2A-27
Coefficient of friction
Step 5.
from table 2-12 for coarse and
compact soil.
~
. Step 6.
0.60
Using the acceleration impulse extrapolation method from
'Chapter 3 of this manual determine max~murn'horizontal a~del

eration; displacement and velocity of the structure due to
load curve (P)
from,~tep
2c.
Resisting force R is the
friction force produced due to the downward load curve F
from step 4b after an initial lateral translation of 1/4

inch. Use two ms time intervals for extrapolation. The
following are the equations used in the extrapolation shown
in Table 2A-3.
2A-98'
II\, - IJ.Fn
Xu+l - 2Xu - Xu-l + an (ot)2
where
Pn
Load at time of step n (step 2c)
I\,
Resisting Friction Force at time step n
m - Mass from (step 3b)

an
Acceleration at time step n.
IJ. - Friction coefficient (step 5)

force at time step n (step 4b)
Fn - Downward
,
Xu
Deflection at time step n
Vn
Velocity at time step n
The maximum ,motions from Table 2A-3 are:

.00122 in/~s2
.01231 in/ms
101.67 ft/sec 2
3.16 g's
1.026 ft/sec
Dmax - .355 -i n
Problem 2A-20 Shock Response Spectra
Problem:
Construct the elastic shock response spectra for the interior components of an above ground structur; subject to an external explosion.
Procedure:
2A-99
TK 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

Table ZA-3
p.-R"
8 n' '"
(Pn-R.,)/m
a,.,(6t)Z
x..
Xn _ 1
2X.
v,
Vn _1
8 n Gt
p.
R"
ms
lbs
lb.
1.781,208
1,781,208
(.00138)/2
(.00550)/2
1.582,190
1.582,190
.00122
.00489
.00550
.01038
.00244
.00138
1.363,173
I,3B3,I?3
.00107
.00427
,02077.00275.02229
.00214
.00382.00596
1,184,155
1.184,155
.00091
.00366
.04458
.01038
.03766
.00182
.00596
.00778
985,137
985,137
.00076
,00304
.07571
.02229
.05646
.00152
.00178
.00930
10
786,120
786,120
.00061
.00243
.11292
.03786
.07749
.00122
.00930
,01052
12
587,102
587,102
.00045
. 00161
.15497.05646
.10032
.00090
.01052
.01142
14
388,084
388,084
.00030
.00120
.20064
,07749
.12435
.00060
.01142
.01202
16
189,067
189,067
.00015
.00058
.24870.10032
.14896
'.00029
18
::0
.29793
,12435
.17358
10
20
O"'~
,0
.34716
.14896
.19820
'~39640'
.17358
.22282
.
.01231
-50,013'
-.00004
-.00015
.44564
.19820
.24728
-.00008
.01231
.01223
11
22
in/ms z
lbs
0.00275
0
in/lIls
in/ms
in
in
in
in
(.00275)/2
in/ms
0.00138
.00382
.01202. 01231
...
.01231
.01231
.01231
.' .01231
~
.01231
12
24
-50,013
13
26
-126,956
-126,956
-. 00010
-,00039
.49456
.22282'
.27135
-. 00020
.01223
.01203
14
28
-203,890
733,536
-937,426
-.00072
-.00289
.54270
.24728
.29253
-.00142
.012,03
.01061
15
30
-280,843
713,896
-994,739
-. 00077
-.00307
.58505
.27135
.310629
-.00153
. 010~1
.00908
16
32
-357,786
694,256
-1,052,042
-.00081
-.00325
,62126
.29253
.32546,'.,. 00162
.00908
.00746
17
34
-337,457
674,617
-1,012,074
-.00078
-,00312
.65096
.310629
.33721
-,00156
.00746
.00590
18
.36
-317,128
~54,977
-972,1~5
-.00075
-.00300
.6744'1
.32546, .34593
-.00150
.00590
. 00440
19
38
-296,780
635,337
-932,117-
-.00072
-.00288
.69166
.33721
.35177
-.00144
20
40
-276,471
615,697
-892,168
-.00069
-.00275
.70354
.34593
.35466
-.00136
.00296
.00158
21
42
-256,142
596,057
-852,199
-.00066
-,.00263
.70972
.35177
.35532
-.00132
.00158
.00026
22
44
-240,745
555,710
-796,455
-.00061
-.00244
.71064
.35486
.35332
-.00122
. 00026
,00096
23
46
-278,004
504,214
.70664
.35532
24
48
-215,263
452,718
.35332
.T
2A-lOO
.' . 00 Iro 4.
.. 00296
Step 1.
Determine maximwn acce l.e ra t Lon cr ve l.oc Lty and displacement.

due (to ground shock according to procedure outlined in
Pro~lem 2A-18.
Step 2.
Determine maximum acceleration, velocity and displacement
due .t o air shock according to the procedure outlined in

Problems 2A-10 and 2A-19.
Step 3.
Determine if the ground shock is outrunning or superseismic
(paragraph 2-23.2).
For outrunning' ground shock the maximum
values of displacement, velocity and acceleration in hori-
zon~~l and <vertical direction? are the aJgebraic summation

of the maximum motions from .s t ep s. 1. and 2. Otherwise proceed: to step 4 . . .
Step 4.
For Fuperseismic ground shock the maximum values of displacement, velocity and acceleration are the numerically
largkr values of direct-induced groun~ shock or the algebraic'sum of the maximum motions from air'shock and airburst
indu~ed ground shock.
Step 5.
Calculate the magnitude of, acceleration, velocity and dispiacment for r~sponse ~pectra 'in horrzo~tal and vertical
directions by multiplying the maximum values of motions from
step!3 or step 4 by their appropriate factor from paragraph
2-24,3.
~
.'
Step 6.
Draw; the horizontal and vertical shock response spectras.
Example 2A-20
Required:
Shock. response
and 2A~19.r
spec~ra
Shock Response Spectra

for the structure defined in Examples 2A-18
,~
Solution:
Step 1.
Maximum values of motion in vertical and horizontal direc-
tions due to ground shock according to the procedure outlined in Example 2A-18 are:
.
a.
Air blast-induced
3.44 g
1.125 in/sec
.014 in
b.
Direct-induced
2A~lOl
",
- 3.78 g
A'V - 7.56 g
VH -, Vv - 6.02
AH
,,
in/sec
DV ;. :120 'in
DH
Step 2. '. " Maximum horizontal acceleration, velocity and displacement

due to air shock following the'procedure outlined in Examples 2A-lO and 2A-19.
,.
"l"~
'Amax _. 3.16 g
,
Vma" - 12.31' in/sec
"
.... _'
.355 in
a.
Step 3.
'}
Check for, 'outrunning ground shock
From Example 2A-18

TAG - 26.6 ms
TA
60.9 ms
TAG <TA Outrunning ground shock
b ;
Add the values of max Lmueimo tLons f rom-a t.ep l"and step' 2.'
AH max - 3.16 + 3.44 + 3.78 - 10.38 g
VH max - 12.310 + 1.108 + 6.020 - 19.438 in/sec

.355
,+ .014 + .120 -' .489' 'in
and
2A-102 '
..
~. ~
1M 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
AV max -3.44+7.56
- 11.00
"
Vv
max - 1.108 + 6.020 - 7.128 ' in/sec
;
Dv
max
- .014 +
.120 - .134 in
Step 4.
Does not apply, the ground shock is not superseismic.
Step 5.
Magnitude of the motions for response spectra.
AH - 10.38 x 2.0 - 20.76 g,

VH -~9.438 xl,S - 29.157 in/sec'
DH -
.'489 x 1.0 - .489 in
and
~
AV - 11.00 it 2.0 - 22.00 g

Vv - 7.128 x 1.5- 10.692 in/sec
,
DV - .134 x 1.0
Step 6.
- .134
in
See the shock response spectra for the values from step 6 in
Figure: 2A-28 ..
--
2A-103
MAXIMUM VELOCITY, iftch per .econd .
8I
!='-
$
o
~/
X'X""'/,0X'
~'k'
)~,
i".
r-,
"(//V,0X,
'h1'>
'\j<'(
'/.
~~1"(l,"'"
>'\X//I.//><",,- ",IX' .
1,,: ~!lo.. () v:v "',. Ix X>0X(,V -, 1/

~./i'J.A, D{ i(Y A'ii"-~-+-i/h"i,f"-yh,,\r, """",~~i1iO"l'--+-i
/'lI","--Plli'+ll''boI
X :"-: ",:>:'
o ,x'X",' ~': V
",x'
IX,
eX".: X /
'
f"
",
,
>.;I,
iX,
" ' ,
I:
"TI
!:!
G'l
I:
I;
C
::0
'"
-c0
rn
N
l>
r
N
CD
'"r":
'"I:
z
...
",
.
~
",
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
APPENDIX 2B
LIST OF SYMBOLS
TK 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
(1)
(2)
(3)
ao
velocity of sourid in air (ft./sec.)
ax
accelerationinix direction (in./ms 2 )
ay
acceleration in y direction (in./ms 2)
(1)
(2)
area (in. 2 )
explosive composition factor (oz.1/2:i n. -3/2)
Ab
area of diagonal' bars at the support wi thin a width b (in. 2)

1
c
area of reinforc,ing bar (in. 2 )
Ad
(1)
Aa
(2)
acceleration ;(in./ms 2)
depth of equivalent rectangular stress block (in.)
long span of a panel (in.)
door area (1n. 2 )

area of diagonal bars at the support within a width b (in. 2 )
An
drag area (in. 2 )
Af
net area of wall excluding openings (ft. 2)
Ag
area of gross section (in. 2 )
AH
maximum horizontkl acceleration of the ground surface (g's)
Al
area of longitudinal torsion reinforcement (in. 2 )
AL
lift area (in. 2 ) .
(1)
Ao
area of openings (ft. 2 )
~s
area of prestressed reinforcement ':(in. 2)
As
area of tension reinforcement within a width b (in. 2 )
As '
area of compress~on reinforcement within a width b (in. 2)
As -
area of rebound
AsH
area of flexural.reinforcement within a width b in the horizontal

direction on each face (in. 2 )*
Asp
area of spiral reinforceme~t (in. 2)
As t
total area of reinforcing steel (in. 2 )
AsV
area of flexural -reinforcement within a width b in the vertical

direction on each face (in. 2 ) *
(2)
net area of section (in. 2 )

area of individual wall subdivision (ft. 2)
reinforce~ent
See note at end of symbols
(in. 2 )
2B-l
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22'
area of one leg of a closed tie resisting torsion within a distance

s (in,2)
total area of sttrrups or lacing rein~orcement in tension within a
distance, Ss or sl and a width b s or b l (in. 2)
maximum vertical acceleration of the ground surface (g's)

area of wall (ft. 2)
area of sector I and II, respectively (in. 2)
(1) width of compr e s's Lon face of flexural member (in.)
(2) width of concrete strip in which the direct shear stresses at

the supports are resisted by diagonal bars (in.)
(3) short span of a panel (in.)
bf
width of fragment (in.)
width"
concrete strip in which the diagonal tension stresses are
resisted by stirrups of area Ay (in.)
width of concrete strip ih which the diagonal tension stresses are

resisted by lacing of area Ay (in.)
of
bo
failure perimeter for punching shear (in.)
center-to-center dimension of a closed rectangular tie along b (in.)
..
'
explosive constant defined in table 2-7 (oz.1/2 in. -7/6)
(1)
(2)
(3)
distance from the resultant applied load to the axis of rotation

(in. )
damping coefficient
width of column capital (in.)
distance from the resultant applied load to the axis of rotation for
sectors I and II, respectively (in.)
dilatational velocity of concrete' (ft./sec.)
C
(1)
(2)
deflection coefficient for the center of interior panel of flat slab
Ccr
critical damping
Cd
shear coefficient for ultimate shear stress of one-way.elements
Cn
drag coefficient
Cnq
drag pressure (psi)
shear coefficient
deflection coefficient for flat slabs
2B-2
TM 5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88 c22
GDqo
peak drag pressure (psi)
GE
equivalent load factor
Gf
post-failure fragment coefficient (lb. 2_ms4/in. 8)
GH
shear coefficient for ultimate shear stress in horizontal direction

, *
for two-way elements
GL
(1)
(2)
leakage pressure coefficient from Figure 2-235

deflection coefficient for midpoint of long side of interior
(3)
slab panel
lift coeffi9ient
>,'
flat
GM
maximum shear coefficient
Gm
equivalent"moment correction factor
Gp
compression wave seismic velocity in the soil from Table 2-10

(in./sec.)
Gr
sound velocity in, reflected region from Figure 2-192 (ft./ms)
GR
force coefficient for shear at the corners of a window frame
Gra
peak reflected pressure coefficient at angle of incidence a'
Gs
shear coefficient for ultimate support shear for one-way elements
GsH
shear coefficient for ultimate support shear in horizontal direction
I
I
for two-way
elem~nts
."
Gs V
shear coefficient for ultimate support shear in vertical direction

, *
for, two-way elements
Cs
deflection coefficient for midpoint of short 'side of interior flat

slab p'!nel
Gu
impulse coefficient at deflection
(psi-ms2/in.. 2)
Gu '
(psi-ms 2/in}) "-',
Gv
shear coefficient'l.for ultimate shear stress in vertical direction for

two-way elements *
Gx
.I
shear coefficient for the ultimate shear'along the long side of

window frame
Gy
shear coefficient'for the ultimate shear along the short side of

window frame
GL
confidence level
I
2B-3
TK 5-l300/NAVFAC'P-397/AFR88-22
(1)
(2)
impulse coefficient at deflection Xl (psi-ms 2/in. 2 )

ratio of gas load to shock load
Cl '
impulse coefficient at deflection Xm.(PSi-ms 2/in. 2 )
C2
ratio of gas load duration to shock load duration
(1)
d'
",
(2)
distance from extreme compression fiber to. centroid of tension

reinforcement (in.)
diameter (in.)
(3)'
fragmentdiameter.~in.)
distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of'compression

reinforcement (in.)
. ,
.
diameter of reinforcing bar (in.)
de
distance between the centroidsiof:the:compression and tension
reinforcement (in.)
.t
dcH
d co
"';f
i'
distance between the centroids of the horizontal compression and

tension reinforcement (in.)
.,
, .
diameter of steel core (Ln .')
distance between the centroids of.the vertical compression and
tension reinforcement (in,) ,
~
distance f r cm auppo r t i.and equal..;to distance d or ,de (in.)
average inside diameter of
exp~osive
casing (in.)
d'
i
adjusted inside diameter of casing (in.)
dp
distance between center lines of adjacent lacing.bends measured
normal
to flexural ,reinforcement (in.)
distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of prestressed
reinforcement (in.)
+
depth of spalled concrete (in.)
diameter of cylindrical portion. of primary fragment (in.)
D
( 1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
unit flexural rigidity (lb-in.)

location of. shock front for maximum stress (ft.)
minimum magazine separation distance (ft.)
caliber density (lb/in. 3 )
overall diameter of circularsection (in.)
damping force (lb.)
displacement of mass from shock load (in.)
,.
DE
..
equivalent loaded width of structure for non-planar wave front (ft.)

28-4
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P,-397/AFR 88-22
maximum horizontal displacement of the ground surface (in,)

dynamic increase factor
diameter of the circle through centers of reinforcement arranged in a

circular pattern (in.)
diameter of the spiral measured through the centerline of the spiral
"
bar (in.)
I
DLF
dynamic load factor

maximum vertical displacement of the ground surface (in.)
(1)
(2)
(3)
base of natural logarithms and equal to 2.71828 ...

distance from centroid of section to centroid of prestressed
reinforcement (in,)
actual eccentricity of load (in.)
ecce~tricity (Ln . )
eb
balanced
2E,l/2
Gurney Energy\Constant (ft./sec.)
(1)
(2)
Ec
modulus of elasticity of concrete (psi)
Em
modulus of elasticity of masonry units (psi)
Es
modulus of elasticity of reinforcement (psi)
(1)
(2)
fc'
static ultimate compressive strength of concrete at 28 days (psi)
".
modulus of elasticity
internallwork (in.-lbs.)
unit external force (psi)

frequency of vibration (cps)
j
dynamic ultimate compressive strength of concrete (psi)

f
dm
dynamic ultimate compressive strength of masonry units (psi)
f ds
dynamic desig~'stress for reinforcement (a function of f y f u and 8)

(psi)
f du
dynamic ultimate stress of reinforcement (psi)
f dy
dynamic yield stress of reinforcement (psi)
f m'
static,ultimate
compressive
strength
of masonry units (psi)
.
.
.I
.
... .
-
,
natural
,,
freque~cy
of
vibr~tion
(cps)
average stress' in the prestressed ,reinforcement at ultimate load
2B-5
specified tensile strength of prestressing tendon (psi)
yield stress of prestressing tendon corresponding to a1 percent

elongation (psi)
reflection factor
static design stress for reinforcement
~psi)
effective stress in prestressed reinforcement after allowances for

prestress losses (psi)
f
static ultimate stress of reinforcement (psi)
static yield stress of reinforcement (psi)

(1)
(2)
(3)
total external force (lbs.)

coefficient for moment of inertia of cracked section
function of C 2 and Cl for bilinear triangular load
Fo
force in the reinforcing bars (lbs.)
FE
equivalent external force (lbs.)
FD
drag force (lbs.)
FF
frictional force (lbs.)
FL
lift force (lbs.)
FN
vertical load supported by foundation (lbs.)
acceleration due to gravity (32.2 it. /sec. 2).
shear modulus (psi)
(1) charge location parameter (ft.')
(2) height of masonry wall
hn
average clearing distance for individual areas of openings from

Section 2-15.4.2
ht
center-to-center dimension of a closed rectangular tie along h (in.)
h'
clear height between floor slab and roof slab
(1)
(2)
(3)
Hc
span height (in.)*

distance between reflecting'sur~ace(s) and/or free edge(s) in
vertical direction (ft.)
minimum transverse dimension of mean presented area of object
(ft. )
height of charge above ground (ft.)
* See note at end of symbols
28-6
Hs
height of structure (ft.)

height of triple'point (ft.)
height of wall (ft.)
heat of combustion (ft.-lb./lb.)
heat of detonation (ft.-lb./lb.)
unit positive impulse (psi-ms)

sum of blast impulse capacity of the receiver panel and the least
impulse absorbed by the. sand (psi-ms)
blast impulse capacity of receiver panel (psi-ms)
unit negative impulse (psi-ms)

sum of scaled unit blast impulse capacity of receiver panel and scaled
unit blast impulse attenuated through concrete and sand in a composite
element (psi-msl,lb. l/ 3 )
unit blast impulse.(psi-ms)
scaled unit b l.as t impulse (ps Lvmsy Ib -, l / 3
i.
scaled. unit blast. impulse capacity of receiver' panel of composite

element (psi'ms/lb. l/ 3 )
i bd
element
scaled unit blast impulse capacity of donor panel of composite

...
.;.
,,'
'.
(psi-ms/lb. lI;3)
total scaled!unit blast impulse capacity" of' composite element

(psi-ms/lb. l/,3)
impulse
id
capa~ity
of an element (psi-ms)
total.drag.and'diffraction impulse (psiCms)

,,'
unit excess blast impulse (psi-ms)

required
imp~lse'~ capaci ty
of fragment shield' (p's Loms) .
gas'. impulse (psi-ms)

,
unit positive normal reflected impulse (psi-ms)
unit negative normal reflected impulse' (psi-ms)
ira
peak reflected impulse at angle of incidence a (psi-ms)
is
unit positive incident impulse (psi-ms)

2B-7
I.
is
unit negative incident impulse (psi-ms)
impulse consumed by fragment support connection (psi-ms)
st
(1) moment of inertia (in. 4/in. for slabs) (in. 4 for beams)
(2) total impulse applied to fragment
average of gross and cracked moments of inertia

(in. 4 for beams)
(in.4/in~
for slabs)
moment of inertia of cracked concrete section (in. 4/in. for slabs')

(in. 4 for beams)
moment of inertia of cracked concrete section in horizontal direction
(in. 4/in.)*
moment of inertia of
direction (in. 4/in.)*
moment of inertia of
(in. 4 for beams)
cracked concrete section in vertical'
gross
concrete section
. 4/.1.0. for slabs)

( 1.0.
mass moment of inertia (lb.-ms 2-in.)
t'.
In
moment of inertia of net section of masonry unit (tn. 4)
Is
gross moment of inertia'of slab (in. 4/in.)
1s t
impulse consumed by the fragment support connection (psi-ms)
Iw
gross moment of inertia of wall (in. 4/in.)
ratio of distance between centroids of compression and tension forces

to the depth d
(1) constant depending on the. casing metal

(2) effective length factor
kv
(1)
(2)
Ke
KE
KL
unit stiffness (psi/in. for slabs) (lb./in./in. for beams)

(lb./in. for springs)
constant defined ,in paragraph 2-18.2
elastic unit stiffness
,(psi/in.
for slabs)
(lb./in./in. for beams)
elasto-plastic unit stiffness (psi/in. for slabs) (lb./in./in. for

beams)
, '
(1) equivalent elastic unit stiffness (psi/in. for slabs)
(lb./in./ in. for beams)
(2) equivalent spring constant (lb./in.)
load factor
28-8

I"
load-mass. factor
load-mass
fac~or
in the. ultimate range
(KLM)up
load-mass factor in the post-ultimate range
KM
mass factor
KR
resistance factor
KE
kinetic energy
charge location parameter (ft.)
(1)
(2)
Id
basic
Idh
development lepgth of hooked bar (in.)
lc
length of cylindrical explosive (in.)
Ip
spacing of same type of lacing bar (in.)
Is
span of flat slab panel (in.)
(1)
(2)
-,F
length of, the yield line (in.)

width of 1/2 of the column strip (in.)
..
'
devel~pnrent length of reinforcing bar (in'.)

Ii
span length (in.)*

distance between reflecting surface(s) and/or free edge(s) in
horizontal direction (ft.)
length of cylivder (in.)

length of fragment (in.)
,,
clear span in short direction (in.)

length of Lac Lng bar requried in distance s1. (in.)"
clear span in long direction (in.)
embedment length of reinforcing bars (in.)
unsupported
le~gth
of column (in.)
wave length of '":,positive pressure phase (ft.)

wave length of .ne ga t Ive pressure phase (ft . .):
clear span in I'ong direction (in.)
'
'J'
2B-9
....
TM 5-l300/NAVFAG P-397/AFR'88-22
Lwb' Lwd wave length of positive pressure phase' at points b-and d,_
respectively (ft.)
:
.'
..
L
l
total length of sector of element normal to axis of rotation (in.)
(1) unit mass
(psi-ms2/i~. 'fo~
slabs) [beams,
(2) ultimate unit moment (in. -lbs./in.)
(3) mass of fragment (lbs.-ms 2/in.)
(lb.,iin-ms2)/i~.]
"
."
average of the effective elastic and plastic unit masses (psi-ms 2/in.
for slabs) [beams, (lb./in-ms 2)/in]
,
effective unit mass' (psi-ms 2/in.
ms p
for 'slabs) [beams, (lb/in-ms2.)/in]
mass of spalled fragments (psi-ms 2/in.)

effective unit mass in the ultimate range
[beams, (lb/in-ms 21/in.j
. .'
~p
M
(psi-~s2/in.
..
'.
for slabs)
.,
effective unit mass in the post-ultimate'range (psi-ms 2/in.)

(1)
unit bending moment (in. -lbs./in. for slabs)' (in. -lbs ..for
(2)
(3)
total mass (lb.-ms 2/in.)

design moment (in.-lbs.)
beams)
effective totai mass (lb.-ms 2/in.)
Me
~
u l t Lma t e unit :resisting 'moment (in ..-Lbs ./in. for' slabs) (in. -lbs.
for beams)
M
u-
ultimate unit rebound moment (in. -lbs./in. for slabs) (in. -Tbs ,'
for beams)
'.
Mc
moment of concentrated loads about line of rotation of sector

(in.-lbs.)
MA
ME
equivalent total mass (lb. -ms 2/in.') '..
M
HN
ultimate ~n~t ~egative moment capacity in horizontal, directioTI,1

(in. -lbs'./in.)
MHP
u:timate u~it ~ositive moment capacity in horizontal direction

(In.-lbs.jln.)
.... :
' I '.-
MOH,MOL
total panel moment for direction Wand L respectively (in. -lbs.)
MN
ultimate unit negative moment capacity at supports (iri.lbs./in.

for slabs) (in.-lbs. for beams)
Mp
ultimate unit positive moment capacity at midspan (in.-lbs./in.

for slabs) (in.-lbs. for beams)
2B-10
.,
MVN
ultimate unit ~egative moment capacity in vertical direction

(in.-lbs./in.)
MVp
ultimate unit ~ositive moment capacity in vertical direction

(in.-lbs./in.) ,
M1
value of srnalle~ end moment on column
M2
value of larger, end moment on column
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
modular ratio
number of time intervals
number of glass pane tests
caliber radius of the tangent ogive of fragment nose
(1)
(2)
number of adjacent reflecting surfaces

nose shape factor
number of primary fragments larger than Wf

axial load normal to the cross section
total number of: fragments
p
reinforcement ratio equal to Ag/bd or As/bdc
p'
reinforcement ratio equal to As'/bd or As/bd c
Ph
reinforcement ratio producing balanced conditions at ultimate
strength
ambient atmospheric pressure (psi)
prestressed
rei~forcement
ratio equal to
~s/bdp
Pm
mean pressure in a partially vented chamber (psi)
Pmo
peak mean pressure in a partially vented chamber (psi)

average peak reflected pressure (psi)
reinforcement ratio in horizontal direction on each face *
Pr
total reinforcement ratio equal to PH + Pv
Pv
reinforcement r~tio in vertical direction on each face*
p(x)
distributed load per unit length
(1) pressure (p~i)

(2) concentrated load (lbs.)
n~gative
pressure (psi)
critical axial load causing buckling (lbs.)
28-11
1M 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
Pg
maximum gas pressure (psi)'
Pi
interior pressure within structure (psi)
oP
interior pressure increment (psi)
fictitious peak pressure (psi) .
"-;-
maximum average pressure acting on interior face. of wall (psi)

Po
(1)
(2)
(3)
peak pressure (psi)

maximum axial load (lbs.)
atmospheric pressure (psi)
"
peak positive normal reflected pressure (psi)

P r
peak negative normal reflected pressure (psi)

peak reflected pressure at angle of incidence a (psi)
maximum average pressure on backwall (psi)
positive incident pressure (psi)
s b'
Ps e positive incident pressure at points band e, respectively (psi)
Ps o
peak positive incident pressure (psi)
Pso -
peak negative incident pressure .. (psi)
Psob,Psod'
P
peak positive incident pressure at points .b, do and e, respectively
s oe
(psi)
P
ultimate axial load at actual eccentricity c (lbs.)
P
x
ultimate load when eccentricity ex is present (lbs.)
P
y
ultimate load when eccentricity e y is present (lbs.)
dynamic pressure (psi)
qb,qe
dynamic pressure at points band e, respectively (psi)
qo
peak dynamic pressure (psi)
qob' qoe
peak dynamic pressure at points band e " respectively (psi)
(1)
(2)
unit resistance (psi)

radius of spherical TNT [density equals
(3)
radius of gyration of cross section of column (in.)
95 Ib./ft. 3 ] charge
(ft. )
unit rebound resistance (psi, for slabs) (lb./in. for beams)
28-12
dynamic resistance available (psi)
or
change in unit resistance (psi, for slabs) (lb./in. for beams)

radius from center of impulse load to center of door rotation (in.)
uniform dead load (psi)
elastic unit resistance (psi, for slabs) (lb./in. for beams)
rep
elasto-plastic unit resistance (psi, for slabs)
(lb./in. for beams)
rfs
ultimate unit resistance of fragment shield (psi)
rr
tension membrane resistance (psi)
ru
ultimate unit'resistance (psi, for slabs) (lb./in. for beams)

post-ultimate 'unit resistance (psi)
I
radius of hemIspherical portion of primary fragment (in.)

R
(1)
total internal resistance (lbs.)
(2)
slant distance (ft.)

ratio of [SIC
,
standoff distance (ft.)
(3)
(4)
effective radius (ft.)

(1)
(2)
distance ~raveled by primary fragment (ft.)

distance from center of detonation (ft.)
Rg
uplift force at corners of window frame (lbs.)
Rl
radius of lacing bend (in.)
Rt
target radius (ft.)
RA
normal distance (ft.)
RE
equivalent total internal resistance (lbs.)
RC
ground distance (ft.)
,
I
total ultimate 'resistance (lb.)
total internal resistance of sectors I and'II, respectively (lbs.)

s
(1)
(2)
(3)
sample standard deviation

spacing o~ torsion reinforcement in a direction
parallel to the
,
longitudinal reinforcement (in.)
pitch of spiral (in.)
28-13
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22 .
spacing of stirrups in the direction parallel to the longitudinal

reinforcement (in.)
spacing of lacing in the direction parallel to the'longitudinal
reinforcement (in.)
height of front wall or one-half its width, whichever is smaller
(ft. )
S'
weighted average clearing distance with openings (ft.)
SE
strain energy
time (ms)
cSt
time increment (ms)

any time (ms)
tb
tf
time of arrival of blast wave at points b, e, and f, respectively
(ms)
tc
(1)
t c'
(1)
td
rise time (ms)
tE
time to reach maximum elastic. deflection (ms)
tg
fictitious gas duration (ms)
tm
to
duration of positive phase
to
duration of negative phase of blast pressure (ms)
tof
fictitious positive phase pressure duration (ms)
tof
fictitious negative phase pressure duration (ms)
tr
fictitious reflected pressure duration (ms)
tu
time at which ultimate deflection occurs (ms)
ty
time to reach yield (ms)
tA
time of arrival of blast wave (ms).
tAG
time of arrival of ground shock (ms)
(2)
(2)
clearing time for reflected pressures (ms)

average casing thickness of explosive charges (in.)
adjusted casing thickness (in.)
Clearing time for reflected pressures adjusted for wall openings
(ms)
ofblastpressur~
2B-14 .
(ills)
TM
5:~300/NAVFAC
P"397/AFR,88-22
time at which partial failure occurs (ms).

T
(1) duration of equivalent triangul~r loading

(2) thickness of masonry wall (in.)
(3) toughness of material (psi-in./in.)
thickness of glass (in.)
func~ion
(ms)
"
force in the continuous,reinforcement in the short span direction

(lbs.)
angular impulse load (lb.-ms-in.)
force in the continuous reinforcement in the long span direction
(lbs.)
effective natural period of vibration (ms)
minimum thickness of concrete to prevent perforation by a given
fragment (in.)
rise time (ms)
(1) thickness of sand fill (in.)
(2) thickness of slab (in.)
Ts p
minimum concrete thickness to prevent spalling (in.)
Ts
scaled thickness of sand fill (ft./lb. l/ 3)
Tu
total torsional moment at critical section (in.-lbs.)
Tw
thickness of wall (in.)
Ty
force of the continuous reinforcement in the short direction (lbs.)
particle velocity (ft./ms)
ultimate flexural or anchorage bond stress (psi)
shock front velocity (ft./ms)
Us
strain energy
velocity (in./ms)
va
instantaneous velocity at any time (in./ms)
vb
boundary velocity for primary fragments (ft./sec;)
"
Ii ...
. ,
, r
2B-15
r.
TM 5-l300jNAVFAC P-397jAFR 88_22
vf
ultimate shear stress permitted on an unreinforced web '(psi)"
maximum post'failure fragment velocity (in.jms)
vf(avg.) average post-failure fragment velocity (in.jms)

velocity at incipient failure deflection (in.jms)
initial velocity of primary fragment' (ft.jsec.)
residual velocity of primary fragmenL after perfora~i.on (ft./sec.)
striking velocity of primary fragment (ft:jsec.)
maximum torsion capacity of an unreinforced web- (psi)
nominal torsion stress in the direction of
u (psi)
ultimate shear stress (psi)

ultimate shear stress at distance de from the ho r Lz ou t.a l. support
(psi)*
ultimate shear stress at distance de from the vertical support (psi)*
velocity in x direction (in.jms.)
velocity in y direction (in.jms.)
;-
(1) volume-of partially vented chamber (ft. 3)

(2) velocity of compression wave through concrete (in.jsec.)
(3) velocity of mass under shock load (in.jsec.)
Vd
ultimate direct shear capacity of the concrete of
VdH
shear at distance de from the vertical support on a unit width

(lbs.jin.)*
VdV
shear at distance de from the horizontal support on a unit width

(lbs.jin. )*
Vf
free volume (ft. 3)
VH
maximum horizontal velocity of the ground surface (in.jsec.)
Vo
volume of structure (ft. 3)
Vs
shear at the support (lb.jin., for panels) (lbs. for beam)
Vs H
shear at the vertical support on a unit width (lbs./in.)*
VSV
shear at the horizontal support on a unit width (lbs.jin.)*
Vu
total shear on a width b (lbs.)
~idth
b (lbs.)
.,
28-16
maximum vert cal velocity of the ground surface (in./sec.)

unit shear a ong the long side of window frame (lb./in.)
unit shear along the short side of window frame, (lbs./in.)
w
applied uniform load (lbs. -in. 2 )

(1) unit weight (psi, for panels) (lb./in. for beam)
(2) weight density of concrete (lbs ./ft. 3)
weight density of sand (lbs./ft. 3)
(1) design charge weight (lbs.)

(2) external ~ork (in.-lbs.)
(3) width of wall (ft.)
weight of fluid (lbs.)
actual quantity of explosives (lbs.)
total weight of explosive containers (lbs.)
effective charge weight (lbs.)
effective charge weight for gas pressure (lb.)
weight of explosive in question (lbs.)
Wf
,.
weight of primary fragment (oz.)
average fragment weight (oz.)

".
WF
'weight of frangible element (lb./ft. 2)
WCI
weight of inner casing (lbs.)
Wc o
total weight of steel core (lbs.)
Wco
weight of outer casing (lbs.)
WeI' Wc 2 total weight of plates 1 and 2, respectively (lbs.)

Ws
width of structure (ft.)

work
dOIlt
yield line lo~ation in horizontal direction (in,)*
(1)
(2)
deflect.io'n (in.)
distance ~rom front of object to location of largest cross
section t? plane of shock front (ft.)
any deflection: (in.)

I
28-17
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR.88-22
lateral deflection to which. a masonry wall develops no resistance
(in. )
deflection due to dead load (in.)
elastic deflection (in.)
equivalent elastic deflection (in.)
elasto-plastic deflection. (in.)
maximum penetration into concrete of armo r.cp Le rc Lng fragments (in.)
maximum penetration into concrete of. fragments other than
armor-piercing (in.)
maximum transient deflection (in.)
plastic deflection (in.)
Xs
(1)
(2)
ultimate deflection (in.)

(1)
(2)
maximum penetration into sand of armor-piercing fragments (in.)

static deflection (in.)'
partial failure deflection (in.)

deflection at maximum ultimate resistance of masonry wall (in.)
' . -* ."
yield line location in vertical direction (in.)
distance from the top of section to centroid (in. )

scaled slant distance (ft./lb. l/ 3)
scaled normal distance (ft./lb. l/3)

scaled ground distance (ft./lb. l/ 3)
Q'
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
ec
angle formed by the plane of stirrups, lacing, or diagonal

reinforcement and the plane of the longitudinal reinforcement
(deg)
angle of incidence of the pressure front (deg)
acceptance coefficient
trajectory angle (deg.)
ratio of flexural stiffness of exterior wall to flat slab
Q e cH ' Q e cL
..
ratio of flexural stiffness of exterior wall to slab in direc-tion H
and L respectively
;-
"
'.
'.
25-18
,.
(1)
coefficient
for
determining
elastic
and -_elasto -plastic
resist~nces
(2)
(3)
(4)
particJlar support rotation angle (deg) ,

reject~on coefficient
target .shape factor from Figure 2-212
factor equal to 0.85 for concrete strengths ~p to 4,000 psi and is

reduced by 0.05' for each 1,000 psi in excess of 4,000 psi
coefficient for determining elastic and elasto-plastic deflections
factor for type of prestressing tendon
moment magnifier
;
clearing factor
deflection at sector's displacement (in.)
average strain rate for concrete (in./in./ms)

unit strain in'mortar (in./in.)
I
average strain rate for reinforcement (in. lin,. /ms)

rupture strain (in./in./ms)
(1) support rotation angle (deg)

(2) angular acceleration (rad/ms 2 )
maximum support rotation angle (deg)
horizontal rotation angle (deg)*
vertical rotation angle (deg) *
(1) ductility factor

(2) coefficient of friction
v
Poisson's "ratio
(1) mass density (lbs.-ms. 2/in. 4 )

(2) density of air behind shock front (lbs/ft. 3 )
Pa
density of air (oz./in. 3 )
Pc
density of casing (oz./in. 3 )
Pf
mass density of fragment (oz./in. 3 )
Po
mass density of medium (lb.-ms. 2/in. 4)
au
fracture strength of concrete, (psi)
28-19-
TK 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22 '

effective perimeter of reinforcing bars (in.)
~o
summation of moments (in.-lbs.)

sum of the ultimate unit resisting
yield lines (in.-lbs.)
-momerit s
acting along..the negative
sum of the ultimate unit resisting moments acting along the positive
(1)
(2)
(3)
capacity reduction factor

bar diameter (in.)
TNT conversion factor
assumed shape function for concentrated loads
(x)
assumed shape function for distributed loads free edge

simple support
fixed support
xxxxx
either fixed, restrained, or simple support
.: -.
Note.
walls.
This symbol was developed for two-way elements which are used as
When. roof slabs or other horizontal elements are under consideration,
this symbol will also be applicable if the element is treated as being rotated
into a vertical position.
2B-20
TK 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
APPENDIX 2C - BIBLIOGRAPHY
1.
2.
3.
4.
Blast Loads
Armendt, B. R., HipP'ensteel, R. G., Hoffman',' ,A. J., and Keefer, J. H.,
Pro; ect White Tribe:~ Air Blast From :Simulta;"e~usly Detonated Large'Scale Explosive Charges, BRL Report 1145, Aberdeen Proving Ground, "
Maryland, September 1961.
Armendt, B. R., Hippensteel, R. G... Hoffman, A. J., and Kingery, C. N.,
The' Air Blast From Simultaneously Detonated Explosive Spheres, BRL
Report 1294, Aberdeen Proving Ground, Maryland, August 1960.
Armendt, B. R., Hippensteel, R. G., Hoffman, A. J., and Schlueter, S. D. ,
The Air Blast From Simultaneously Detonated Explosive Spheres: Part
II - Optimization, BRL Memorandum Report 1384, Department of the Army
Project No. 503-04-002, Aberdeen Proving Ground, Maryland, January 1962.
Ayvazyan, H.E.
t'
.Dobb s- N., Computer Program.Impres, special publication
ARLCD-SP-8400l, prepared by Ammann and Whitney, New York, New York, for
U.S. Army Armament:Research and Development Center, Large Caliber
5.
.6.
.7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14 .
15.
16.
17.
18.
Weapon Systems Laboratory, Dover, New Jersey.

Baker, W. E., Explosions in Air, University of Texas Press, Austin,
Texas 1973.
Baker, W. E., Prediction and Scaling of Reflected Impulse From Strong
Blast Waves, InternationalJournal of Mechanical Science, 9, 1967, pp.
45-51.
Bleakney, W., The Diffraction of Shock Waves Around Obstacles and the
Transient Loading of Structures, Princeton'University, March 1950,
(Published and Distributed .by the Armed Forces Special Weapons Pr~ject).
Coulter, G.A., Air Shock and Flow in Model Rooms, BRL Memorandum.Report
1987, Aberdeen Proving Ground, Maryland, June 1969.
Coulter, G. A., Air Shock Filling of Model Rooms, BRL Memorandum Report
1916, Aberdeen Proving Ground, Maryland, March 1968.
Coulter, G. A. and Peterson, R.L., Blast Fill Time of a One-Room
! Structure , Operation .Prairie Flat Project Officers Report;. Project LN
111 POR-2l02, Ballistic Research Laboratory, Aberdeen Proving Ground,
Maryland, .November'1964.
Coulter, G. A., Bulmash G., and Kingery C., Feasibility Study of Shock
Wave Modification in the BRL 2.44 m Blast Simulator, Memorandum Report
ARBRL-MR-0339,'prepared by U.S. Army Armament Research and Development
Center, Ballistic Research Laboratory, Aberdeen Proving Ground, Maryland, March 1984. .
.
Cranz, C., Lehrbuchder Ballistik,Springer-Verlag, Berlin, 1926.
Dewey, J.M., Johns 01') , O.T., and Patterson,.. J.D. II, Mechanical Impulse
Measurements Close to Explosive Charges, BRL Report 1182, Aberdeen
Proving Ground, Maryland, November 1962.
. Dobratz, B.M., LLNL Explosives Handbook, Properties. of Chemical Explosives and ,Explosive Simulants, URCL-52997, Lawrence Livermore National
Laboratory;. Li.ve rmor'e , California, March 1981.
Engineering Design Handbook,. Principles of Explosive Behavior, AMCP 706180; Headquarters, U.S. Army Material Command, Washington, D.C., April
1972.
,
Goodman, H. ' j . , Compiled Free Air Blast Data on Bar Spherical Pentolite,
BRL Report 1092, Aberdeen 'Proving Ground, Maryland, 1960.
Granstorm, S. A., Loading Characteristics of Air ~lasts From Detonating
Charges, Transaction~ of the Royal Institute of Techriology, Stockholm,
Sweden, Nr .100, 1956;.
Hokanson, J.q. ,Esparza, E. D., and Wenzel, A. B. ,I Blast Effects of
Simultaneous Multiple-Charge Detonations, Contractor Report ARLCD-CR78032, ARRADCOM, Dover, New Jersey, AD E400232,October 1978.
2C-l
TM 5-t300/NAVFAC
19.
P-397/AF~
88-22
Hokanson, J.C., Esparza, E.D., Baker W.E., Sandoval, N.R. and Anderson,
C.E., Determination of Blast Loads in the Damaged Weapons Facility, Vol
1, -Fd na L Report, Purchase Order ,F09-l3400, SwRl- 65 78" pr ep a r ediby
Southwest Research Institute, San Antonio, Texas, for,Mason and Hanger
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
Silas Mason Company, Inc" Pant ex Plant, Amarillo, Texas, July 1982.
Hokanson, J.' C., Esparza, E. : D" and Wenzel, A. B., Renec ted BIas t
Measurements Around Multiple Detonating Charges,Minutes of the Eighteenth Explosives Safety Seminar, Volume I. September 1978, pp.' 447-471.
Hokanson, J.. C, ,Esparza, E. D", Wenzel, A, ,B. (Southwest Research
Institute). Price, P. D, (ARRADCOM). Blast Effects of Simultaneous
Multiple-Charge Detonations, Contractor Report ARLCD-CR-78032, prepared
by U.S. Army Armament Research and Development Command, ,Large. Caliber
Weapon Systems, Laboratory,. Dover; New Jersey, October 1978.
Hopkinson,' B. British Ordnance Board MinutBs, 13565, 1915.
Iwanski, E. C., et al., Blast Effects on Buildings and Structures
Operation of 6-Foot and 2-Foot Shock Tubes: High Pressure Tests on
Simple Shapes, Report No. 54, Final Test Report No. 10, ARF Project No.
0087, Armour Research Foundation of Illinois Institute of Technology.
Jack,W. H., Jr., Measurements of Normally Reflected Shock Waves From
Explosive Charges, BRL Memorandum Report 1499, Aberdeen'Proving Ground,
Maryland, AD 422886, July 1963.
Jack, W. H., Jr. and Armendt, B. F., Jr" Measurements of Normally
Reflected Shock Parameters Under Simulated High Altitude Conditions, BRL
Report 1280, Aberdeen Proving .Ground, Maryland, AD 469014, April 1965.
Johansson, C. H. and Persson, P.A., .De t on i c s of High Explosives,
Academic Press, London, England, an~ New York, New York, 1970.
Johnson, O.T., Patterson, J.D. II, 'and 01s6n, W.C., A Simple Mechanical
Method for Measuring the Reflected Impulse of Air Blast Waves, BRL
Report 1099, Aberdeen Proving Ground, Maryland, July 1957.
Kaplan, 'K., Lewis, K. S., and Morris, P. J:, Blast Loading' and Response
of Military Eouipment, Draft Final Report URS 7339-6, URS Research
Company, San Mateo, California, Prepared for Ballistic Research Laboraco ry , December 1973.
Kaplan, K. and Price, P.D. s Accidental Explosions and Effects of Blast
Leakage Into Structures', Contractor Report ARLCD-CR- 79009, U. S. Army
ARRADCOM, Dover, New Jersey, AD E400320, June 1979.
Keenan, W.
A., and Tancreto, J.
E .. Blast Environment From Fully and
Partially Vented Explosions in Cubicles, Technical Report R 828,

prepared by Civil Engineering Laboratory, Naval Construction Battalion
31.
Center, Port Hueneme, Galifornia,. sponsored by Department of the Army

,Picatinny Arsenal, November 1975.
Keenan, W., Tancreto, J., Meyers, G., Johnson, F., Hopkins, J.,
Nickerson, H'
32.
33.
arid Armstrong, .W., NCEL Products SUDDorting DOD Revision
of NAVFAC P-397. Program No. Y0995-0l-003-20l, Technical Memorandum

2591TM, sponsored by Naval Facilities Engineering Command, Alexandria,
Virginia, and Naval Civil Engineering Laboratory, Port Hueneme,California, March 1983.
Kingery,. C.N., and Bulmash G., Airblast Parameters from TNT Spherical
Air Burst and Hemispherical Surface Burst, Technical Report ARBRL-TR02555, prepared by U. S. 'Army Armament Research and Development Center,
Ballistic Research Laboratory, .Aberdeen Proving Ground, Maryland, April
1984.
. '
Kingery, C. N. and Coulter G.A., Reflected Overpressure Impulse on a'
Finite Structure, Technical Report ARBRL-TR-02537. prepared by U. S.
2C-2
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

Army Armament Res~arch and Development Center, Ballistic Research
Laboratory, Aberd~en 'Proving Cround Maryland, December 1983.,
34.
35.
36.
37,
38.
Kingery, C. N. and Coulter G. A.; Enhanced Blast as a Function of

Multiple Detonatidns and Shape for Bare Pentolite Charges, Memorandum
Report BRL-MR-353~, prepared by U.S. Army Ballistic Research Laboratory,
Aberdeen Proving Cround, Maryland, July 1986.
Kingery, C. N., B~lmash G., and Muller P., Blast Loading on Above Ground
Barricaded Munition StorageMagazines, Technical Report ARBL-TR-Q2557,
prepared by U.S. ~rmy Armament Research and' Deve~opment Center, Ballistic Research Laboi'atory, Aberdeen Proving Ground,Maryland, May 1984.
Kriebel, A.R., Aip Blast in Tunnels and Chambers, Final Report DASA
1200-11, Suppleme~t I, Prepared for Defense Civil 'Preparedn~ss Agency,
URS Research Company, 'San Mateo, California, September 1972,
Makino, R. The Kirkwood-Brinkley Theory of the Propagation of Spherical
Shock Waves and Its Comparison With Experiment, BRL Report 750, Aberdeen
Proving Ground, Maryland, April 1951.
McIntyre, F. L., iNTEguivalency Test Results of Selected High Explosives, Propellants~, and Pyrotechnics ,in Surface Burst Configurations,
Contractor Report,~ Prepared by Technical Services Laboratory , National
Space Technology Ijaboratories , NSTL MS 39529, for U.,S'.,
Army Research
and Development Engineering Center, Dover, New ,Jersey, Sponsored by U.S.
Army - AMCCOM, July 1986.

Melichar, J. F", :The Propagation of. Blast Waves Into Chambers, BRL
Memorandum Report i920, Aberdeen Proving Ground, Maryland, March 1968.
40.
Olson, W. C., Patt~rson, J. D. II, and Williams, J. S., The Effect of
Atmospheric Pressure on the Reflected Impulse From Blast Waves, BRL
Memorandum Report ~241, Aberdeen Proving Ground, Maryland, January 1960.
41.
Reeves H., arid Rob'Lnson W. T., Hastings Igloo Hazards Tests for Small
Explosive Charges,lMemora~dum Report ARBL-MRo03356, prepared by U. S.
Army ArmamentResearch and Development Center, Ballistic Research'
Laboratory, Aberdeen Proving Ground, Maryland, May 1984.
42.
Reisler, R. E., K~nnedy.,. L. W., and Keefer; J. H., High Explosive
Multi-Burst Air Blast Phenomena (Simultaneous and Non-Simuttaneous
Detonations), BRL Technical Report ARBRL-TR-02142, Aberdeen Proving
Ground, Maryland, February 1979.
43 . . Sachs, R. G., The' Dependence of Blast on Ambient Pressur~ and Temperature, BRL Report 4~6, Aberdeen Proving Ground, Maryland, 1944.
44.
Shear, R. E., Incident and Reflected Blast Pressures for Pentolite, BRL
Report 1262, Aberd~en Prov~ng Ground, Maryland, September 1964.
45.
Shear, R. E. and McCane, P., Normally Reflected Shock Front Parameters,
BRL Memorandum Rep?rt 1273, Aberdeen Proving Ground, Maryland, May 1960.
46.
Swisdak, M.M., Jr., Explosion Effects and Properties: Part I - Explosion Effects in Air, NSWC/WOL/TR 75-116, Naval Surface Weapons Center,
White Oak, Silver ~pring, Maryland, October 1975.
47.
The Effects of Nuclear Weapons, S. Glastone, Editor, U. S. Atomic Energy
Commission, Washington; D."C.; (Revised Edition), 1964.
48.
Voltz, R. 'D., and ~iger; S.. A", An Evaluation of the Separated' Bay
Concept for a Munition Assembly Complex: An Experimental Investigation
of the Department of Energy Building 12-64 Complex, Technical Report SL83-6, prepared by Structures Laboratory; .U,S. Army Engineer Waterways
Experiment Station! Vicksburg, Mississippi, for Department of Energy,
Albuquerque Operattons, Amarillo, Texas, September 1983.
49.
Ward, J. M. (DOD E~plosives Safety Board); Swisdak, M; M., Jr., Peckham
P. J., and Soper '1. G. (NSWC), Lorenz, R. A. . (Boeing Military Air-'
craft Company), Modeling of Debris and Airblast'Effects from Explosions
39.
2C-3.
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P~397/AFR
50.
51.
52,
53.
54,
55,
88-22
inside Scaled Hardened Aircraft Shelters, Final Repor.t NSWC TR 85-.470,

prepared by Naval Surface Weapons, Center, Silver, Spring, Maryland, May
1985.
_
Warnecke, ,C. Data Report: Support TestEvaluation of a Pre "Engineered
Building, TECOM Project No. 2-CO,PIC-004, U.S. Army Dugway Proving
Ground, Dugway, Utah, June 1977.
Wenz~l,
A. B'. and Esp ar z a , E,. D.. Measurements of Pressures and ,_Impulses
at Close Distances From Explosive Charges Buried and in Air, Final

Report on Contract No., DAAK02-71-C-0393 with U,S. Army MERDC,.Fort
Belvoir," Virginia, 1972.
Wilton, C, and Gabrielsen, B, L., Shock Tunnel Tests of Pre loaded ,and
Arched Wall Panels, Final.Report URS 7030~ 10" prepared for Defense Civil
Preparedness Agency, URS Research Company; San Mateo,'California, June
1973.
Wilton, C: and Gabrielsen, B., L., Shock Tunnel Tests of Wall Panels ,"
'Technical Report, Volume I, Test Information and Analysis, URS 7030-7,'
prepared for Def'e ns e Civil Preparedne'ss Agency, URS Research Company,"
San Mateo; California, January 1972,
.
Wilton, C., Kaplan, K" and Gabrielsen, B.L., The Shock Tunnel: History
and Results, Volume II - Loading Studies, Final Report SSI 76l!8~1, ..
prepared for Defense Civil Preparedness Agency, Scientific Service,'
Inc., Redwood City, California, March 1978.
Zaker" T:. A"Blast Pressures From Seguential "Explosions , Phase Report
II, Project J6166,'IIT Research Institute, Chicago, Illinois, March,25,
1969.
Primary.andS~condary Fragments
.'
56.
57,
58,
59,
60.
61.
Amos, C. W.,', Fragment Resistance of Martensitic St'eel Sheets <U), AMRA

TR-64-01, (CONFID~NTIAL), U.S. Army Materials Research Agency,
Watertown, Massachusetts, January 1964.
Apgar, J. W" ,Reactionof,Mild Steel Targets to: Exploding Munitions CU),
U. S ' .. Army Ballistic Research Laboratories, Aberdeen Proving Ground"
Maryland (CONFIDENTIAL), October 1967.
Baker, W, E" Non-Nuclear Weapons Effects on Protective Structures CU),
AFWL,TR,67-133 (SECRET), Mechanics Research, Inc., Houston, Texas, for'
U.S. Air Force Weapons Laboratory, January1969.
'ileth, R, A.,. Final Report on 'Concrete Penetration,. Report No A-388"
National Defense Research Committee, Office:ofScientific Research and
Deve lopment, March 19.46..
Bulmash, G., Kingery C.N., and Coulter;G.A., Velocity Measurements of
Acceptor Wall Fragments From the Mass Detonation of Neighboring'AboveGround Barricaded Munition Storage Magazine Model, Technical Report BRLTR-2719, prepared by U,S. Army Ballistic Research Laboratory, Aberdeen
,Proving Ground, Maryland, March 1986.
Cohen, E. and Dobbs N., Design Procedures and Details for Reinforced
Concrete'Structures Utilized in Explosive. Storage and Manufacturing'
Facilities,. Ammann and Whitney I CorisuLt i.ng Engineers, New York, New
62.
York, :Annals of the New York Academy of Sciences, Conference on Preven- .

tion of and' Protection Against Accidental Explosion of Munitions, Fuels
and Other'Hazardous Mixtures, Vol. 152, Art. I, 1968.
Doyle, J.M" Klein, M.J. and Shah, H., Design of Missile Resistant:
Concrete Panels, Preprints-of the 2nd International Conference
on
'~,
Structural Mechanics in Reactor-Technology, Vol. 4, Commission of the'

European Communf t i.e s , Brus sc Ls 1973, Paper No. J 3/3'.
j
2C-4
TM 5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR' 88-22

63.
64.
65.
66.
67.
68.
69.
70.
Effects of Impact and Explosion, Volume I, Office of Scientific Research

and Development, National Defense Research Committee, Washington, D.C"
1946.
Fundamentals of Protective Design for Conventional Weapons, prepared'by
U.S. Army Engineer Waterways Experiment Station, Vicksburg, Mississippi,
for Office, Chief ~f Engineers,. U.S. Army, Washington, D.C., July 198~.
Gewaltney, R. C., Missile Generation and Protection in Light-Water- ...
Cooled Power Reactor Plants, Nuclear Safety, 10(4):- July-August 1969.
Giere, A. C., Calculating Fragment Penetration and Velocity Data for Use
in Vulnerability Studies, NAVORD Report 6621, U.S. Naval Nuclear
Evaluation Unit, Albuquerque, New Mexico, October 1959.
Gurney, R. W., The Initial Velocities of Fragments from Bombs, Shells
and Grenades, Report No. 405, Ballistic Research Laboratories, Aberdeen
Proving Ground, M~ryland, September 1943.
.
Gurney, R. W., The Mass Distribution of Fragments from Bombs, Shells and
Grenades, Report No. 448, Ballistic Research Laboratories, Aberdeen
Proving Ground, Maryland, February 1944.
Healey, J. J., and Weissman,S., Primary Fragment Characteristics and
Impact Effects in Protective Design, Minutes of the Sixteenth Explosive
Safety Seminar, September 1974.
Hoffman, P. R., McMath, R.R., and Migotsky, E., Projectile Penetration
Studies, AFWL Technical Report No. WL-TR-64-l02, Avco Corporation for
the Air Force Weapons Laboratory, Kirtland Air Force Base, December
71.
72.
73.
74.
75.
76.
77.
78.
79.
80.
1964.
Industrial Engineering Study to Establish Safety Design Criteria for Use
in Engineering of 'Explosive Facilities and Operations; Ammann and
Whitney, Consulting Engineers, New York, New York, Report for Picatinny
Arsenal, Dover, New Jersey, April 1963.
Johnson, C. and Moseley, J.W., Preliminary Warhead Terminal Ballistic
Handbook. Part 1: Terminal Ballistic Effects, NAVWEPS Report No. 7673,
U.S. Naval Weapons Laboratory, Dahlgren, Virginia, March 1964.
Kolsky, H., Stress Waves in Solids, Dover Publications, New York .. New
York, 1963.
Kymer, J.R., Penetration Performance of Arrow Type Projectiles, Report
R-18l4, U.S. Army (Frankford Arsenal, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, May
1966.
Mott, R.I., A Theoretical Formula for the Distribution of Weights of
Fragments, AC-3642 (Britlsh). March 1943.
Mott, R.I., A Theory of Fragmentation,-Army Operational Research Group
Memorandum, l13-AC-6427, Great Britain, 1943.
Non-Nuclear Weapons Effects on Protective Structures (U), Technical
Report No. AFWL-TR-69-57, Air Force Weapons Laboratory, Kirtland Air
Force Base, December 1964.
Non-Nuclear Weapons Effects on Protective Structures (U>, Technical
Report No. AFWL-TR-69-57, (SECRET), Mechanics Research, Inc., for the

Air Force Weapons Laboratory, Kirtland Air Force Base, September 1969.
Recht, R. ,.et al. ,Application of Ballistic Perforation Mechanics to
Target Vulnerability and Weapons Effectiveness Analysis (U), NWC TR 4333
(CONFIDENTIAL), Denver Research Institute for"the Naval Weapons Center,
China Lake, California, October 1967.
Reeves H., and Robinson W. T., Hastings Igloo Hazards Tests for Small
Explosive Charges" Memorandum Report ARBL-MR-03356, prepared by U. S.
Army Armament Research and Development Center, Ballistic Research
Laboratory, Aberdeen Proving Ground, Maryland, May 1984.

2C-5
1M 5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22'

81.
82.
83.
Rinehart, J. S. and Pearson, J., Behavior of Metals Under Impulsive

Loads, The American Society of Metals, Cleveland, Ohio, 1954 . .
Robertson, H. P., Terminal Ballistics, Preliminary Report, Committee on
'Passive Protection Against Bombing, National Research Coun~il, January
1941.
Sterne, T. E., A Note on the Initial Velocities of Fragments from
Warheads, Report No ..648, Ballistic Research Laboratories, Aberdeen
Proving Ground, Maryland, September 1947.
84.
Thomas, L. H., Computing the Effect of Distance on Damage by Fragments,
85,
Report NO .. 468, Ballistic Research,Laboratories, Aberd~e~ Proving

Ground, Maryland, May 1944,
Voltz, R,D,; and Kiger, S. A., An Evaluation of the Separated Bay
Concept for a Munition Assembly' Complex: an Experimental Investigation
86,
of the Department of Energy Building 12-64 Complex, Technical Report SL83-6, prepared by Structures Laboratory, U, S, Army Engineer Waterways
Experiment Station, Vicksburg, Mississippi, for Department of Energy,
Albuquerque Operations, Amarillo, Texas:
Ward, J, M, (DOD Explosives Safety Board), Swisdak, M, M" Jr" Peckham,
P, J .', and Soper, W. G, (NSWC), Lorenz,' R, A, (Boeing Military Aircraft
Company), Modeling of Debris and Airblast Effects from Explosions Inside
Scaled Hardened Aircraft Shelters, Final Report NSWC TR 85-470, prepared
by Naval Surface Weapons Center, Silver Spring, Maryland, May 1985. _
Shock Loads
87.
88.
89.
90.
91.
92.
93.
94.
95.
96.
American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE), A Comparative Studv of

Structural 'Response to Explosion-Induced Ground Motions, ASCE, New ,York,
New York, 1975.
Auld, H. E., A Study of Air-Blast-Induced Ground' Motions , Ph.D. Thesis,
University of Illinois, May 1967.
Baladi, G. Y., and P. F. Hadala, Ground Shock Calculation Parameter
Study Report I Effect of Various Nonlinear Elastic Plastic Model
Formulations, Waterways Experiment Station Technical Report S-7l-4,
April 1971.
Ballard, R. F., R. E. Leach, Middle North Series, Mixed Company
Event, Strong Motion Seismic Measurements, Defense Nuclear Agency Report
POR-6746, July 25,- 1973.
Barkan, D. D., Dynamics of Bases and Foundations,'McGraw Hill Book Co.,
New York, New York 1962.
Baron, M. L., A Summary of Some Analytical Studies on Air Blast Induced
Ground Motions, Defense Atomic Support Agency Report 2634, March 1971.
Baron, M. L., I. Nelson, and I. Sandler, Investigation of Air Induced
Ground Shock Effect Resulting from Various Explosive Sources, Report 2
Influence of Constitutive Models on Ground Motion Predictions,Waterways
Experiments Station Contract Report S-7l-lO, November 1971.
Batchelder, F. E" et al., Hardness Program'- Non-EMP, Hardness Program
Plan for Safeguard Ground Facilities, Vol. 1, Management and Technical
.Plan,U. S. Army Corps of 'Engineers, Huntsville Division, HNDDSP-73l53-ED-R, August 16, 1974.
Carder, D. S., and W. K. Cloud. Surface Motion from Large Underground
Explosions, J. Geophys, Res .. , 64, 1471-1487, 1959.
Carnes, B. L" and J. A. Conway. Mine' Throw I: Cratering Effects of a
Multiton Near Surface Detonation in Desert Alluvium, Waterways Experiment Station Technical Report N-73-3, May 1973.
2C- 6
97.
98.
99.
100.
101.
102.
103.
104.
105.
106.
107.
108.
109.
110.
111.
112.
113.
114.
115.
116.
117.
Christensen, W. J., Air Blast Induced Ground Shock, Navy Bureau of Yards
and Decks Technical Study ,,27, September 1959.
Cooper, H. Jr., and J. L. Bratton, Calculation of Vertical AirblastInduced Grou~d Motions from Nuclear Explosions in Frenchman Flat, Ai~
Force Weapons Laboratory Report AFWL-TR-73-lll, October 1973.
coope r , H. F., Jr., Empirical Studies of Ground Shock and Strong Motions
in Rock, Defens~ Nuclear Agency Report 3245F: October 1973.
Crandell, F. J., Ground Vibrations Due to Blasting and Its Effect Upon
Structures, Journal Boston Soc., Civil Engineers, Vol. 36, p. 245, 1949.
Crandell, F. J., Transmissi~n Coefficient for Ground Vibrations Due to
Explosions, J. Boston Soc. Civil Engineering, 47, 152-168, 1960.
Crawford, R. E., C~ J. Higgins, and E. H. Bultmann., Air Force Manual
for Design and Analysis of, Hardened Structures, Air Force Weapons
Laboratory Report AFWL-TR-74~102, October 1974.
.'
Day, J. D., H. J,. Stout, and D. W. Murrell, Middle Gust Calibration
Shots; Ground Motion Measurements, Wate!ways Experiment Station
Technical Report
N,-75-l,
February.1975.,
.
I;
, Duvall, Wilbur I. andD. E. Fogelson, Review of Criteria for Estimating
Damage to Residenc~s from Blasting Vibrations, Bureau of Mines Report of
Investigation 5968\ 1962. _
.
Dvorak, A.,
Seismic Effects. of Blas'ting on' Brick Houses
Proce
Geofyrikeniha Ustance Ceskoslavenski Akademie, Vol. No. 169,

Geofyskialni Sbornik, pp. 189:202, 1962.
,
Edwards, A.T.' and T. D. Northwood, Experimental Studies of the Effects
of Blasting on Structures, The Engineer, V~ 210, pp. 538-546, September
30; 1960.
Eubanks, R. A. and B. R. Juskie, Shock Hardening of Equipment, Shock and
Vibrations Bulletin, No. 32, Part III, December 1963.
Galbraith, F. W., Operation Distant Plain Final Report Proj, 3,02b Shock
Spectrum Measurements, TRW Systems Group Report 05318-600l-ROOO, January
1968.
Galbraith, F. W. ,.Operation Prairie Flat, Proj. LN-306 Shock Spectrum
Measurements, Defehse Atomic Support,Agency Report POR-2l07, February
1970.
Grubaugh, R. E., and L. E. Elliot, Scaling of Ground Shock Spectra,
Defense Atomic Support Agency Report DASA-192l, February 1967.
Habberjam, G. M. and J. T. Whetton, On the Relationship Between Seismic
and Amplitude and Charge 'of Explosive Fired in Routine Blasting Operations, Geophysics 17. l16~128, January 1952.
Hendron, A. J. Jr., Correlation of Operation Snowball Ground Motions
with"Dynamic Properties of Test Site Soils, Waterways Experiment Station
Miscellaneous Paper 1-745. October 1965.
Hoffman, H. V.', F., M. sa'uer, and B. ,Barclay,
Operation . Prairie Flat,
"
Proj. LN-308 Strong Ground Shock Measurements, Defense Atomic Support
Agency Report POR-2108 '. April 1971.
.,
,
Hudson, D. E., J. L. Al f or d ," and W. 'D. Iwan, Ground Accelerations Caused
by Large Ouarry Bl;'sts, Bull., Seismic Soc.,'A, 51, 191-202, 1961.
Ichiro, ,I., On the'Relationship Between Seismic Ground Amplitude and' the
Ouantity of Explosives in Blasting, Reprint from Memoirs of the Faculty
of Eng Inee r Ing , Kyo t o Tln Lve r s Lt.y , 15, 579-587, 1953.'
Ingram, J. K., Project Officer's Final Report Operation Distant Plain
Events 1. 2A, 3, 4, and 5, Pr'oj. 3.02A Earth Motion and Stress Measurements, Waterways Experiment Station Technical Report N- 7.1-3, May 1971.
Ingram, L. F., Ground Motions from High Explosive Experiments, Waterways
Experiment Station'Miscellaneous Paper N-72-10, December 1972.
2C-7 ,

118.
119.
120.
121.
Jaramillo, E. E., and R. E. Pozega, Middle Gust Free-Field Data Analysis, Air Force Weapons Laboratory Report AFWL-TR-73-25l, April 1974.
Joachim, C. E., Mine Shaft Series, Events Mine Under and Mine Ore:'
Ground Motion and Stress Measurements, ' Waterways ,Experiment Station
Technical Report N-72-l, January 1972.
Kennedy, T. E., In-Structure Motion Measurements, Pro), LN-3l5 Operation Prairie Flat, Waterways Experiment Station Technical Report N-7011, July 1970.
Kochly, J. A., and T. F. Stubbs, Mine Shaft Series, Mineral Rock
Particle Velocity Measurements from' a IOO-ton TNT Detonation on Granite,
122.
123.
124.
125.
126.
127.
128.
129.
130.
131.
132.
133.
134.
135.
136.
137.
138.
Defense Nuclear Agency Report POR-2l62, May 24, 1971.

Lamb, H., On the Propagation of Tremors Over the Surface of an Elastic
Solid, Philosophical Transactions of Royal Society London, Series A.
Volume 203, September 1904.
Langefors, Ulf, B. Kihlstron, and H.' Westerberg, Ground Vibrations in
Blasting, Water Power, pp. 335-338, 390-395, 421-'424, February 1958 ..
Lockard, D. M., Crater Parameters and Material Properties', Air Force
Weapons Laboratory Report AFWL-TR-74-200, October 1974.
Meireis, E. C. and A. R. Wright, Hardness Program - No-EMP, Hardness
Program Plan for Safeguard Ground Facilities, Vol. 2, Safeguard Structures and TSE Description, U.S. Army Corps'of Engineers, Huntsville
Division, HNDDSP-73-l53-ED-R, November 1973.
.
Morris, G., The Reduction of Ground Vibrations' from Blasting Operations,
Engineering, pp. 460-465, April 1957.
Morris, W. E., and others, Operation Jangle Blast and Shock Measurements
I, Armed Forces Special Weapons Project Report WI 366, June 1952.

Murphey, B. F~, Particle Motions Near Explosions in Halite, Journal
of Geophysical Research, Vo. 66, No.3, March 1961, pp. 947-958.
Murrell, D. W., Operation Mine Shaft, Mineral Rock Event, Far-out Ground
Motions From a 100-ton Detonation on Granite, Waterways Experiment
Station Technical Report N-72-6, April 1972.
Murrell, D. OperationSNOWBALL, Project 3.6 - Earth Motion Measurements, Waterways Experiment Station Technical Report TR 1-759. March
1967.
Newmark, N. M., and others, Air Force Design Manual Principles and
Practices for Design of Hardened' Structures" Air Force Special Weapons
Center Report AFSWC-TDR-62-l38, December 1962.
Nicholls, H. R., C. F. Johnson, and W. I. Duvall, Blasting Vibrations
and Their Effects on Structures, Bureau of Mines Bulletin 656, 1971.
Odello, R. and P. 'Price, Ground Shock Effects from Accidental Explosions, Picatinny Arsenal Technical Report 4995 .. November 1976 ..
Palaniswamy, K., and J. L. Merritt', Evaluation of Middle Gust Data:
Acoustic Path Length Scaling of Peak Velocities, Space and Missile
Systems Organization Report 72-006-T4, November 1973.
Parsons, R. M., and others, Guide for the Design of Shock Isolation
Systems for Underground Protective Structures, Air Force Special Weapons
Center Report AFSWC-TDR-62-64, October 1962.
Phillips, B. R., and G. Y. Baladi, Results of Two Free-Field Code
Calculations Versus Fiefd Measurements for the Distant Plain lA Event,
Waterways Experiment Station Miscellaneous,Paper S-73-21, April 1973.
Proceedings of the Mixed Company/Middle Gust Results Meeting 13-15 March
1973. Vol. II. Edited by General Electric-Tempo, Defense Nuclear Agency
Report 3151-P2, May 1973.
Rausch, Maschinenfundamente Und Andere Dynamische Bauaufgaben, Vertrieb
VDE Verlag G.M.B.H., (Berlin), 1943.
2C-8
TIl 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
139.
Reiher, H.
and F.
J.
Meister, Die Empfindlichkeit der Menschen ~e~en

2, No. II, pp.
Erschutterun~en, Forsch. Gebiete In~enieur wesen, Vol.
140.
141.
142.
143.
144.
145.
146.
147.
381-386, 1931.
Richart, F. E. Jr.: J. R. Hall, and R. D. Woods, Vibration of Soils and
Foundations, Prentice-Hall, Inc., Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey, 1970.
Ricker, N., The Form and Nature of Seismic Waves and the Structure of
Seismo~rams, Geophysics, 5, 348-366, 1940.
Sachs, D. C., and C. M. Swift, Small Explosion Tests, Pro;ect Mole,
Armed Forces Special Weapons Project Report 291, Vols. I and II,
December 1955.
Sager, R. A., Concrete Arch Studies Pro;
3,2. Operation Snowball,
Waterways Experime~t Station Miscellaneous Paper 1-736, August 1965.
Sandler, I.S., J. P. Wright, and M. L. Baron, Ground Motion Circulations
for Events II and i l l of the Middle Gust Series, Defense Nuclear Agency
Report DNA 3290T, April 1974.
Steffens, R. J., The Assessment of Vibration Intensity and its Application to the Study 0f Building Vibrations, National Building Studies
Special Report No.'19, Department of Scientific and Industrial Research,
Building Research Station, London, England, 1952.
Sauer, F. M., and C. T. Vincent, Ferris Wheel Series - Flat Top Event
Earth Motion and P~essure Histories, Defense Atomic ,Support Agency
Report Ferris Wheel POR-3002, April 1967.
Sauer, F. M., editor, Nuclear Geoplosics, A Sourcebook of Under~round
Phenomena and Effects of Nuclear Explosions, in 5 parts, Defense Atomic
Support Agency Report DASA-1285, May 1964.

148.
149.
150.
151.
152.
153.
154.
155.
156.
157.
Sauer, F.
M..
S~ary
Report on Distant Plain Events 6 and 18 Ground
Motion Experiments, Defense Atomic Support Agency Report DASA-2587,

October 1970.
Teichmann, G. A. and R. Westwater, Blastin~ and Associated Vibrations,
Engineering, pp. 460-465. April 1957.
Thoenen, J. R., and S. L. Windes, Seismic Effects of Ouarry Blasting,
Bureau of Mines Bulletin, 442, 83, 1942.
URS/John A. Blume, and Associates, Seismic Hazard and Building Structure
Behavior at the Pant ex Facility, April 1976.
Vincent, C. T" Operation Prairie Flat, Pro;. LN-304 Earth Pressure and
Ground Shock Profile Measurements, Defense Atomic Support Agency Report
POR-2ll3, May 1969.
Weidlinger, P., and A. Matthews, A Method for the Prediction of Ground
Shock Phenomena in"Soils, Air Force Special Weapons Center Report AFSWCTDR-6l-66, March 1962.
Westline, P. S., Esparza, E. D., and Wenzel, A. B., Analysis and Testing
of Pipe Response to Buried Explosive Detonations, SwRI Final Report for
American Gas Association, July 1978.
Willis, D. E. and,J. T. Wilson, Maximum Vertical Ground Displacement of
Seismic Waves Generated by Explosive Blasts, Bulletin Seismic Safety of
America, 50, 455-459, 1960.
Zaccor, J. V., Procedures for Prediction of Ground Shock Phenomena Based
on One-Dimensional~Shock Propagation Considerations: Procedures and
Applications, Waterways Experiment Station Contract Report 3-171. April
1967.
Zolasko, J. S., and G. Y. Baladi, Free-Field Code Predictions Versus
Field Measurements: A Comparative Analysis for the Prairie Flat Event,
Waterways Experiment Station Miscellaneous Paper S-7l-6, March 1971.
2C-9
"STRUCTURES TO RESIST THE EFFECTS OF ACCIDENTAL EXPLOSIONS"
CHAPTER 3. PRINCIPLES OF DYNAMIC ANALYSIS
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC
P-397/AF~88-22
CHAPTER 3
PRINCIPLES OF DYNAMIC ANALYSIS
INTRODUCTION
3-1. Purpose
The purpose vf this manual is to present methods of design for protective
construction used in facilities for development,
testing, production, storage,
maintenance, modification, inspection, demilitarization, and

dispo~al
'of
3-2. Objective
techniques whereby propagation of explosion (from one structure or part of a
protection for personnel and valuable equipment.

(1)
Establish the blast load parameters required for design of protective structures.
(2)

elements including reinforcp.d concrete, and structural steel.
(3)
(4)
the required strength to resist the applied blast loads.
maximum cost effectiveness in both 'the planning and structural
arrangements, providing closures, and preventing damage to interior portions of structures because of structural motion, shock, and
3-3. 8ackground
For the first 60 years of the 20th century, criteria and methods based upon
results of catastrophic events were used for the design of explosive facilities. The criteria and~ethods_did not include a detailed or reiiable quantitative basis for assessing the degree of protection afforded by the protective
f"cility. In the late 1960's quantita~ive procedures were set forth'in the
first edition of the present manual, "Structures to Resist -the Eff'e ct s o f
Accidental Explosions.".
This manual was based on extensive' r e s e archvarid
development programs which permitted a more reliable approach to current.and

future design requirements.
Since the'original publication of this manual,
more extensive testing and development programs have taken place. This
additional research included'work with materials other than reinforced concrete which was the principal construction material referenced in the initial
Modern methods for'the manufacture and storage of explosive materials, which

include many exotic chemicals; fuels, and pr~pellants, require less space for
a given quantity of~exp~osive material than was previously needed.
Such
3-1
T~
5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
other explosive materials.)
It is evident th~t a requirement for more. accu-
rate design techniques is essential. This manual describes rational design

These design methods account for the close-in effects of a detonation including the high pressures and the nonuniformity of blast loading on protective
str~ctures or barriers.
These methods also account for intermediate and farrange effects for the design of structures located away from the explosion.
The dynamic response of structures,
construct~d
of various materials, or
combination of materials, can be calculated, and. details are' given to provide

directed primarily toward protective structures subjected to the effects of a
explosive
ma~erials
as mentioned above.
The design techniques set forth in this manual are based upon the results of
numerous ful1- and small-scale structural response and explosive effects tests
of various materials conducted in conjunction with the development of this

3-4. Scope
It is not the intent of this manual to establish safety criteria.
documents should be consulted for this purpose ..
Applicable
Response predictions for
personnel and equipment are included for information.

In this manual an effort is
been included in order that

information on protective design techniques has
application of the basic theory-can be made to
which were fully-considered.
This manual"is appli~~ble to the design of protective structures subjected to

situations,the manual will apply for explosive quantities less than 25,000
pounds for c10se-ineffects. However, this manual is also applicable to other
situations suc~ as far- or intermediate-range effects. For these latter cases
500,000 po~ndswhich is the maximum quantity of high expYosive approved for
aboveground storage facilities in the Department of Defense manual, "Ammunition and Explosives. Safety Standards", DOD 6055.9-STD. Since tests were
concrete elements to blast overpressures, ~his manual concentrates on design
proce~ures and techniques for these materials.
However, this does not imply
that concrete and steel are the only useful materials for protective construction. Tests to establish the response of wood, brickblocks, and plastics, as
well as the blast. attenuating and mass effects of soil are contemplated. The
results of these tests may require, at a later date, the supplementation of
Other manuals are available to design protective structures against the
manuals will quite often. complement this manual and should be consulted for
3-2
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
following repositories:
(1)

U.S. Army Engineer
Post Office Box 631
Attn: WESKA
(2)
"

Commanding Officer
Attn: Code L5l
.'
.,
"
'.'
(3) :. Department of the Air Force


Ohio 45433,
Attn: AFFDL/FBR
for review by DDESB and ,the above services. Upon concurrence of the revisions, the necessary changes will be made and notification of the changes will
3-5. Format
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Introduction

Principles of Dynamic Analysis
3
4
5
6

design involves many different scientific and engineeri.ng fields, and, therefore, no attempt is made to standardize completely all the symbols used.': Each
symbol is defined where it is first used, and in the ll.st of symbols at the
3-3
..
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

CHAPTER CONTENTS
3-6'. General
This chapter contains the procedures for analyzing structural elements subject
to blast overpressures. These procedures are contained in the next eleven
sections; Section 3-7 deals with a simplified discussion of the basic principles of dynamics as well as the procedures for calculating the various
components used to 'perform the dynamic analyses. .Pr e senced in Sections 3-8
through 3-15 are resistance-deflection functions for various elements including both'one- and two-way panels as well as beam elements, These functions
. include the elastic, elasco-plastic, and plastic ranges of response.
In
addition, a discussion 9 dynamic equivalent systems is presented in Sections

3-16, and 3-17. These include single- and multi-degree-of-freedom systems.
Presented in this Section also are methods for calculating load and mass
factors required to perform the dynamic analyses.
Sections 3-18 through 3-20 include both a step-by-step numerical integration

of an element's motion ,under dynamic loads utilizing the Acceleration-Impulse. Extrapolation Method or the Average Acceleration Method and design charts for
idealized loads. Presented also in these Sections are methods for analyzing
elements subjected to impulse type loadings; that is, loadings whose durations
'are short in comparison to the time to reach maximum response of the elements.
3-4
1M 5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR' 88-22.

BASIC PRINCIPLES
3-7, General
The principles used.~n the analysis of structures under' static load will be
reviewed briefly, since the same principles are used in the analysis and
design of struc'tures subjected to dynamic loads: Two different methods are
used either separately or concurrently in static analysis:
one is hased'on
the principle of equilibrium, and the other on work done and internal energy
stored.
Under the application of external loads, a given structure is deformed and

internal forces developed in its members. In order to satisfy static equilibrium, the vector sum of all the external and internal forces acting on any
free body portion of the structure must beequa~to zero, For the equilibrium.
of the structure as a wr.ole,: the vector sum of the external forces and the
rea~tions of the foundation must be equal to 'zero.
The method based on work done and energy considerations is sometimes used when
it is necessary to determine the deformation of a structure.
In this method,
use is made of' the fact that the deformation of the structure causes the point
of application of the external load-to be.displaced.
The'.force then does work
on the structure. Meanwhile, because of the structural deformations, potential energy is stored in the structure in the form of strain-energy. By the
principle of energy conservation, the work done by the external 'force and the
energy stored in the members-must be equal.
In static analysis, simplified
methods such as the methodof.virtual work and the method of the uni't load are
derived from the general principle of energy conservation.
In the analysis of statically indeterminate 'structures, in addition to

satisfying the equations of equilibrium, it is necessary to include a .
calculation of the deformation of the structure in order to arrive at a

complete solution of the internal forces in the structure. The methods based
on energy considerations such as the method of least work and the method based
on Castigliano's theorems are generally used.
For the analysis of structures under dynamic loading, the same two methods are
basically used; but the load changes rapidly with time and the acceleration
velocity and, hence, the inertia force and kinetic energy are of magnitudes
requiring consideration.
Thus, in addition to the internal and external
forces, the equation of equilibrium includes the inertia force and the
equation of dynamic equilibrium takes the form of Newton's equation of motion:
F - R - Ma
3-1
where
total external force as a function of time
total internal force as a function of time
M total mass
a = acceleration of the mass
As for the principle of conservation of energy, the work done must be equal to
the sum of the kinetic energy and the strain energy:
WD - KE + SE
3-2
3-5 .
TM 5-l300/NAVFAC
where WD
KE
SE
P-397/AF~
88-22
work done
kinetic energy
strain energy
and the strain energy includes both reversible elastic strain energy and the
irreversible plastic strain energy . . Thus, the difference between structures
under static and dynamic loads is the presence, of inertial force (Ma) in the,
equation of dynamic equilibrium, and of kinetic energy in the equatio~ of
energy conservation. Both terms are related to the mass of the structure;
hence, the mass of the structure becomes an important consideration in dynamic
analysis.
In the dynamic analysis of structures, both the energy balance equation and
the force balance equation are applied with explicit description of the
external forcing function F, and the internal resisting forcing function R.
The difference between these forcing functions is the inertia force as
described above. The following is a discussion of the details of how these
forces are utilized in the design of structures which respond in the ductile
mode.
In the design of a structure to resist ,the blast from an HE explosion, the

total external force acting on the structure can be obtained by the principles
discussed Chapter 2. The design method also consists of the determination of
the total internal force, i.e. the resistance of the structure required to
limit calculated deflections of the individual members and the structure as a
whole under the external force (blast loading), to within prescribed maximum
values. The determination of the resistance of the individual members of the
structure is presented in Sections 3-8 through 3-17. Subsequent sections of

this manual present the principles and methods of dynamic analysis and
equations, charts, and procedures for design.
3-6'
RESISTANCE - DEFLECTION FUNCTIONS

. 3-8. Introduction'
Under the action of external loads, a structural' element is 'deformed and
internal forces set up. The sum of these internal forces tending to restore
the element to its unloaded static, position is defined as' the 'resistance. The
resistance of a s t ruc tur a I element is a reactive force" associated with the
deflection of the element produced by the -applied 'load. It is'convenient to
consider 'the resistance as "an equ.LvaLe nt; 'load in the same manner as the
applied load, but opposite in direction'.' "I'he 'variation 'of the resistance vs .
displacement is expressed bya resistance-deflection function and may be

represented graphically. ,An idealized resistance-deflection function for an
element spanning~in two directions and'covering .in the complete flexural range
to incipient failure is shown in Figure 3-1.
.
"
As load is applied to a structural element, the element deflects and"at any
instant " exerts a resistance to further deformation, which is a function of
its units stiffness K, until, the ultimate unit resistance ,r u (total resistance
is r u where A is .t.he element area) of the element is reached "at deflection
~.
The initial portion of the'resistance-deflection diagram is composed of the

elastic and elasto-plastic ranges, each with its corresponding stiffness, the
transition from one range to another occurring-as plastic hinges are formed at
po Ln t svo f max Lmum.vs t r e s s (yield .Lf.ne s ). 'The numbe-r of elasto-plastic ranges .
required before the ultimate resistance of 'a paz t Lcu l a r element 'is reached
depends upon the type and number of supports. and the: placement of reinforcing
steel (in the case of reinforced concrete elements).
For example a .beam with
simple supports subjected to uniformly distributed loads needs only one
plastic hinge to develop the ultimate resistance (or full plastic strength) of
the element; whereas for the same beam fixed at both ends, more than one
plastic hinge iscrequired. '
In subsequent paragraphs, various procedures, equations and illustrations are

presented to enable the designer to. determine the resistances of both one- and
two-way 'elements. The procedures outlined apply mainly to reinforced concrete
elements and so do the equations appearing in the text, unless the equations
are given as part of an illustrative example.
However, they can also be used
for structural steel elements as well as other structural elements such as

alwnirturn, plastics,'etc.
Equations have been derived for" specific 'cases mostoften encountered in practice.
These are applicable fio r structural s t ee L'<and
reinforced concrete elements of uniform thickness in both the horizontal and

vertical directions.
Before "the e qua ti.oris and :rfigures c-an be used for reinforced concrete element, however, the reinforcing steel across any yield iine
must have a uniform distribution in both the vertical and horizontal direc~
tions; however, the reinforcement across the positive yield lines can be
different from that across the negative yield lines and the reinforcing'
pattern in the vertical direction different from that in the horizontal
direc ti on .
Regardless "o f whether it is reinforced concrete or structural steel 'e l.emenr ,

any opening in"the element must be compact in shape,and small in area,
compared to the total area of the element.
3-7
3-9. Ultimate Resistance

3- 9.1. General
The ultimate
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
resi~tance
of an element depends upon:
The distribution of. the applied .loads.

The geometry of the element (length and width).
The n~ber and type of supports.
The distribution of the moment capacity or reinforcement in the
case of reinforced concrete elements.
The distribution of the loads depends..upon the design range of the element;
i.e., high, intermediate or low pressure. For intermediate and low pressure
.anges, it can ,be assumed that the pressure is uniform across the surface of
the element although it varies with time. At high pressure ranges, however,
the blast loads are variable across the surface of the element . However, .for
structural steel elements and concrete elements utilizing laced
reinforcem~nt,
or for concrete elements withstandard shear reinforcement which sustain

relatively small deflections, a good estimate of;the resulting deflections can
be made using the resistance functions conforming to those of uniformly loaded
elements.
The other factors that affect the ultimate resistance of an element are predetermined by the requirements of the protective structure (where the element is
used) and the magnitude of the blast output.
'.
3-9.2. One-Way Elements
The ultimate resistance of a. oneway reinforced concrete elemen~ with an
elastic distribution of its reinforcing steel is based on the moment capacity
at first yield since all critical sections yield simultaneously. For one-way
reinforced concrete.elements (such as beams .or slabs) with non-elastic
distribution of reinforcing steel and for structural steel elements, the
ultimate resistance is a function of the moment capacity at the first yield
plus the added moment capacity due to subsequent yielding at other critical
sections.
_.
Values of the ult~mate resistance for one-way elements are shown in Table
where the fo~lowing symbols are used:
3-~
.ultimate negative unit moment capacity at the support.

ultimate positive unit moment capacity at midspan.
length
ultimate unit resistance
total ultimate resistance
Table 3-1 applies to both beams and slabs. However, special attention must be
paid to the units used for the respective element. The moment capacity of a
slab is expressed for a unit strip of the slab (inch-pounds per inch) whereas
the total moment capacity (inch_pounds) is considered fora beam. Consequently, the resistance of a slab is expressed in load per unit area (psi) where',,,
the resistance of a beam is expressed in load per length along the beam
(pounds per inch).
.
3-8
1M 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
3-9.3.
Two-Wa~
Elements
.,
The amount ofdata available on the limit analysis of rectangular steel plates
is very'limited. However, an.elementary approach imagines a' mechanism formed
of straight yield lines " 85-- is customary in reInforced concrete. This
approach for reinforced'concrete elements will be considered appropriate' for

structural steel elements.
In the design of two-way reinforced concrete elements, it is not necessary to

define accurately the stress distribution during the initial and intermediate
stages of loading since the ultimate load capacity can be readily determined
by the use of yield line procedures. The yield line method assumes that after
initial cracking of the concrete at points of maximum moment, yielding spreads
until the full moment capacity is developed along the length of the cracks on
which failure will take place. Several illustrative examples of the simplified yield or crack lines for two-way elements are illustrated in Figure 3-2.
In using the yield line solution, the initial step is to assume a yield line
pattern (as shown in Figure"3-2)" applying the following rul:es:
(1)
To act as plastic hinges of a collapse'mechanism made 'up of plane

segments, yield lines must be straight lines forming axes of
rotation for the movements of the segments.

(2)
The ,supports of the' slabs will act as axes of rotation.
A yield
line may form along a fixed support and an axis of rotation will
pass over a column.
(3)
For compatibility of deformations, a yield line must pass through

the intersection of the axes of rotation of the adjacent slab
segments.
'I
Tests indicate that the actual location and extent of these lines on rein-
forced concrete elements differ only slightly at failure from the theoretical
ones. Use of the idealized yield lines results' in little error in the
determination of the ultrmate resistance and the error is on the side of
safety.
The corner sections of two-way elements are stiff in comparison to the
remainder of the member; therefore, straining of the reinforcement which is
associated with the reduced rotations at these sections will be less.
To
account for the corner effects, the design of anyone particular section of a
two-way element should consider a variation of the moment capacity along the
yield lines rather than a uniform distribution.
.
This variation is approximated by taking the full moment capacity along the
yield lines, except in the corners where two-thirds of the moment capacity
.
..'
over the lengths described in Figure 3-3 are used. The variation applies to
both the negative moments olong the supports and the positive moments at the
interior,The ultimate unit resistance can be determined from the yield line
pattern using either the principle of virtual work or the equations of
equilibrium. Each approach has" its advantages'; in general,' the virtual work
method ,is easier in principle but difficult to manipulate algebraically since
it involves differentiating a usually complex mathemati~al expression for a
minimum value of resistance. The equilibrium method, which is used in this
3-9
manual, also has its disadvantages. Since equilibrium requires that ,the shear
forces acting on each side of a yield line have to be equal and opposite,
correction forces (also known as nodal forces) have to be introduced around
openings in two-way members and at free edges, and~these correction forces may
not be available from simple analysis. However, in three of the six cases
shown in Figure 3-2,
(cases,c, e, f), nodal forces exist; but their effects
are negligible.
In order to calculate the ultimate unit resistance r u of a two~ay element,
for~ed by the yield lines is
expressed in terms of the moments produced by the internaland external
forces. The sum of the resisting mo~ents acting along the yield lines (both
positive and negative) of each sector is equated to the moment produced by the
applied load about the axis of rotation (support of the sector), assuming that
the shear forces are zero along the positive'yield lines.
the equation of equilibrium of each sector
3-3
sum of the ultimate unit resisting moments

acting along the support (negative yield lines)
sum of the ultimate unit resisting moments
acting along the interior failure lines (positive
yie ld lines)
total ultimate resistance of the sector
distance from the centroid of the load to
where
the line of rotation of the sector

ultimate unit resistance of the sector
area of the sector
Once the equations of equilibrium are known for all sectors, the ultimate
resistance is obtained either by solving the equations simultaneously or by a
trial and error procedure noting that the unit resistance of all sectors must
be equal.
To illustrate the above procedure (Equation 3-3), consider the two-way
concrete element shown in Figure 3-3 which is fix~d on three edges and free on
the fourth, and where the nomenclature is as follows:
L
H
length of element
height of element
yield line location in horizontal direction
yield line location in vertical direction
ultimate unit negative moment capacity in
the vertical direction
ultimate unit positive moment capacity
in the vertical direction
ultimate unit neg~tive moment capacity
in the horizontal direction
ultimate unit positive moment capacity
in the horizontal direction
The nomenclature as stated in the paragraph above is strictly applicable to

two-way elements which are used as walls .. However, when roof slabs or other
horizontal elements are under consideration, the preceding nomenclature will
3-10
also be applicable if the element is treated as being rotated into a vertical

position.
The first step in the solution is to assume the location of the yield lines as
defined by the coordinates x and y. It should be noted that in some cases,
because of geometry, the value of x and y will be known and therefore need not
be evaluated. In this example, the negative reinforcement in the horizontal
direction at opposite supports is assumed to be equal; therefore, the vertical
yield line is located at the center of the span and the value of x is numerically equal to L/2 (a, Figure 3-3). However, in other cases, neither the
location of x nor ywill be known, and the solution' will require the determination of both coordinates.
Once the yield lines have been assumed, the distribution of the resisting
moments along the yield lines is determined. In the case at hand, the reduced
moments,' as a result of the increased stiffness at the corners, act over
lengths equal to x/2 and y/2 in the horizontal and vertical directions,
respectively (a, Figure 3-3). The equations'of equilibrium are then written
for each sector with the use of the free body diagrams (b, Figure 3-3). For
the triangular sector I:
.
MVN - (2/3)MVN (L/4 + L/4) + MVN (L/2)
(5/6)MVN L
MVp
3-4
(2/3)MVp (L/4 + L/4) + MVp (L/2)'

- (5/6)MVp L
CI
y/3
RI
( MVN +
3-5
3-6
MVP)/C I
- [5L(MVN + MVp)1/2y
3-7
Ly/2
3-8
RI/A I
[5(MVN + Mv p)1/y2
3-9
For the trapezoidal sector II, a similar procedure gives

MHN
(2/3)MHN (y/2) + MHN (H - y/2)

- MHN (H . y/6)
MHP
3-10
(2/3)MHP (y/2) + MHP (H - y/2)

MHP (H - y/6)
.;
Cn
3-11
(l/3)(L/2)[2(H-y) + Hl/(H + H - y)
"
[L(3H - 2y)]/6(2H
y)
3-11
3-l2
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
- [(6H - y)(2H
y)(MHN + MHP)]/L(3H
2y)
(1/2 ).(L/2) (H + H - y)
AlI
3-14
[L(2H - y) J/4
ru(Sector II)
3-13
RII/A I I
- [4(MHN + MHP)(6H -Y)J/L 2(3H
2y)
3-1?
Equations 3-9 and 3-15 are the equations of equilibrium for the triangular (I)
and the trapezoidal (II) sectors, respectively. As mentioned previously,
these equations can be solved simultaneously or by a trial and error proce-
dure. In the latter method, values of yare substituted into both equations
until r u (sector 1) is equal to r u (sector II).
If a numerical solution based on the above procedure (Equation 3-3)-yields,
negative values for either x, y or r then the assumed yield line location is
wrong. In this example, the only other possible yield line pattern (x ~ L/2)
would be as shown in Figure 3-2c.
,
The solution of Equation 3-3 is universally applicable for any ,two-way
element. If the negative reinforcement in the horizontal direction had been
u~equal at the opposing supports, the value of x - L/2 would have changed, and
all three sectors wold have had to be consider~d to determine x, y and hence,
r u'
Simultaneous solution of Equations 3-9 and 3-15 reveals that the locaticns of
the yield lines are a function of the ratio of the spans L/H and the ra t i,o of
the sum of the unit vertical to horizontal moment capacities as follows:
ru(Sector I) - ru(Sector II)
3-,16
5(MVN + MVp)/y 2 - [4(MHN + MHP)(6H - y)J/L 2 (3H - 2y)

L2(MVN + MVp)/H2(MHN + MIIP) [ 4y2(6
y/H)J/[5H 2(3 - 2y/H)
3-17a
3-17b
,
1/2
(L/H) [(MVN + MVN)/(MIIN +, MHP)J
(y/H)[(4(6
y/H)/5(3 - 2y/H)]1/2
3-17c
Equation 3-17c, which relates the location of the yield lines to the' moment
capacity of the element, is used to plot Figure 3-6. Kno~ing the location of
the.yield lines, the resistance of the two-way element can be ,'obtained from
either Equation 3-9 or 3-15 which are also presented in Table ,3 - 2.
Using the procedure outlined above, the values of the .ultimate unit resistances for several two+way elements with various support c~nditions are given
in Tables 3-2 and 3-3, the nomenclature confirming to that previously listed.
Table 3-2 covers the special cases where opposite supports provide the same
3-12
TIl 5-1300/NAVFAC .p c 397/ AFR 88-22
degree of restraint thus resulting in symmetrical yield line patterns." Table

3-3 deals with the general cases when the yield line patterns are not symmetrical,(that is; when opposite supports provide different restraints).
Yield line location ratios x/L and y/H for the same elements are depicted in
Figures 3-4.through, 3-20.
'.
Figures 3-4 and 3-5 show the location of the yield lines for two-way elements
with two adjacent edges supported and the other two free.
In each of these
figures eight curves are shown which" represent different ratios of the '"
positive to the negative moment capacities in both the vertical and horizontal
directions. Figures 3-6 through 3-16 illustrate the yield line location for
two -way: elements with three edges supported and one edge free. .; Figures 3" 6
and 3-11 covers the case when the yield ,line' pattern is'symmetrical opposite
supports' provide the same degree of restraint). "Figures 3-17 through 3"20
show the yield line location' fo r--two-way elements with four sides supported.
f
" ' . '
Figure 3-17 covers the special case when opposite ,supports provide ,the same
degree of restraint thus resulting in ,a symmetrical yield pattern.' An example
illustrating the use of some of these figures is provided in Appendix A,
t:
3-9.4. Openings in TWO-Way Elements

The use of openings in two -way elements, whether for access as a door' operri.ng
or for visual communication,as in the case of observation ports, is permissible with certain reservations.
It is difficult to state exact rules
concerning openings, but their effect on the design is generally a function of

location, size and shape.
Small compact openings with approximate are a s.. of less than -5 percent of the
panel area and located away from regions of high stress can usually be ignored
in the design~ However, as' in the case of conventional design; reinforcement
at least equal to the amount interrupted should be placed adjacent,to the
opening. For example, in Figure 3-21, the openings shown in (a) and (b) can
be disregaraed. If the opening in, (b) were made more rectangular' as in (c),
then the dekign must be modified'to account for the change in the"yield 1ines
and, hence,' the change in the resistance.
This change in resistance is a
function of both the shape and the location of the opening.

Door openings invariably requireispecial analysis because,of theirsize.~ As
depicted in (d), (e)and (f), Figure 3-21, the presence of door openings
causes gross relocations of the yield lines which generally propagate from the
corners of the openings.
Since the door also su~tains the blast loading,
concentrated line loads are present around the periphery of such openings.
These concentrated loads must be'included in the analysis since they change
the resistance, As previously outlined for solid elements and for this case
also,,'the'yield line'locations are assumed and each sector is individually
analyzed. The presence of line'loads modifies Equation 3-3 to
.
DIN +
- ruAc, +
Me '..,
3,18
where Mc is the moment of the concentrated loads about the line of rotation of
the sector being considered.
Solution of elements with openings is most
easily accomplished through a trial and error procedure by se tt Lng upvt he

simultaneous equations for each sector and
until the
severa~
values of
.T
1assuming
various values of x and y
u agree 'to within a few percent.
3-13
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
3-10. 'Post-Ultimate Resistance

In general, the two-way elements described in this manual exhibit a postultimate resistance after initial failure occurs as indicated in Fig~re 3-1.
Prior to this partial failure, the element is spanning in two directions with
a resistance equal to the ultimate resistance r u'
At a par.ti~ular deflection,
denoted as Xl' failure occurs along one side or two opposite sides, and'the
element then spans in one direction with the reduced post-ultimate unit resistance r u until. complete failure occurs atldeflection
One-way elements do
not exhigit this behavior..
..
. ,
Xu.
TheiLo ca t Lon.ro f the yield lines determines the presence or absence "of this.
range. If the yield lines emanating from the corners of the elements bisect
the 90-degree. corner angle, then all supports fail simultaneously and there is.
no post-ultimate range.
,As previously shown, the location of the yield lines
for a particular element is a function of L/H and the ratio of the unit
vertical to .horizontal momentocapacities.
Post-ultimate resistances for twoway elements are shown in Table .3,4.
;,
3-11. Partial Failure and Ultimate Deflection
Partial failure deflection Xl' for two-way elements and ultimate deflections
~
f o r sbo ch one-way and two-way elements are a function of the angle of
rotation of the element at its. supports. and the geometry of the sectors formed
by the positioh yield lines.
-.
Once the ultimate resistance r u is reached (full moment capacity developed
along the yield ~ines), the structural element becomes a mechanism which
rotates with no further, increase in either .che -mome nt; or curvature between the
hinges. -For one~way elements" the rotation continues and the deflection
increases until ei ther ~ the maximum deflection ~,is reached o r- failure occurs
Xm
at e max, The equations for the maximum deflection

in the range 0 $ X <
for several one-way elements as a function of the'rotation angle e and the
ultimate deflection ~ are given in Table 3-5. when the values for ~ are
based on the,development of a maximum support rotation,
max., prior to,
failure.
Actually, the maximum support rotation will vary with the material type and
geometry of'the element. The criteria for partial and incipient faiiure for
concrete and,structural steel elements can'be fouhd in Chapters 4 and 5
respectively.
For two-way elements, the r o t at Lons.i o f all, the sectors rnus't; be considered. in
order to define the deflections of partial and. incipient failure, Prior to

partial failure (0,$
$ Xl)" the maximum deflection is a function of the.
Xm
larger angle of rotation formed along either the,. vertical. or horizontal sup-
ports, At deflection Xl' this larger angle equals e max, and failure occurs
along this support. Beyond this point, the element spans in one direction
until the angle of rotation at the adjacent supports (in the direction
opposite to that at which failure has already occurred) reaches
time total collapse occurs
(Xm
at 'which
~ ~),
To illustrate the above, consider a two-way'element (Figure 3-22) which is

fully restrained on four edges ,and whose positive yield lines are' defined by
H/2 < x < L/2 and y - H/2. DenotingeH as the angle of rotation in the.
I
3-14
ev
horizontal direction (along vertical supports) and

as the vertical angle of
rotation (along horizontal supports), the maximum deflection ~ at' the center
of the element prior to reaching the deflection Xl is
3-19
and at the partial failure deflection Xl where 8 v max
3-20
Referring to Figure 3-22, the deflected shape at deflection Xl is indicated by
the solid line and 8 H has value B which is defined as
B - tan-l(X1/X~ - tan-l(H tan 8max/2x)
3-21
As the'element continues to deflect the angle of 'rotation 8 H increases; its

magnitude becoming equal to
8H -
A +
3-22
where A is the angular rotation in excess of B, For a two-way element which

undergoes partial failure but does reach incipient failure~rthe maximum
deflection in the range X1S'~ S ~ becomes
~
- x tan 8 H + [(L/2)
When 9 H equal 8 ma x.
~ - x tan
x)] tan (8 H - B)
3-23
the ultimate deflection ~ at incipi~nt failure is
8 ma x +
[(L/2 - x)] tan [8ma x - tan- l (H tan 8max/2x)] 3-24
Equations 3-19 through 3-24 are specifically for two-way elements described in
Figure 3-2 and will vary for other two-way elements with different material
properties and geometry;
The maximum deflection ~ for several

Xl' and Xl < ~ S ~ as a function of
in Table 3-6 along with the values of
deflections, The support which fails
cated,
two-way elements in the ranges 0 S ~ S

the rotation angles 8 H and
are given
partial failure (Xl) and ultimate (~)
at partial deflection Xl is also indi-
ev
3-12, Elasto-Plastic Resistance

As stated in Section 3-8, the initial' portion of the resistance function
(Figure 3-1) generally is, composed of an elastic and one or more elastoplastic ranges.
The elastic unit resistance'~e' is defined as the resistance
~t which f~rst yield oc:urs; simila:ly, the e:asto-plastic unit resistanc: rep
~s
the reslstance at WhlCh second.ylelds subsequently occur:
Where all htnges
form in a member at one time,-r e will be equal to the ultimate unit resistance
r u; where two or more hinges are formed at separate times, the maximum value
of rep will be equal to r u (depending upon the hinges formed,'one or more
values of rep may exist).
These resistances for one-way elements are listed in Table 3-7. ~In' those
cases where the elasto-plastic resistance is equal to the ultimate resistance,
the value can be determined from Table 3 cl,

3-15
The determinatio~ of the elasto-plastic resistances of two-way elements ~is

more complicated than that for one-way elements, since the resistance varies
with the span ratio and, in the case of. reinforced concrete elements, with the
placement of the reinforcement. Data for calculating the resistances of twoway elements during the elasto-plastic ranges (graphically summarized in
Figure 3-23) are presented in Figures 3-24 through 3-38.
Figures 3-24 through 3-26 are for a two-way element support~d'on two 'adjacent
sides and free at the others. Figures 3-27 through 3-32 are for a tW0-way
element supported on three sides and free on the fourth, while Figures 3-33
through 3-~8are for. elements f Ixed. on, four sides. The resistances in each
range can readily be determined using the coef f LcLencs B, .the subscript referring to the points listed in the accompanying illustration.
For example, in Figure 3-27, for an el~ment fixed on three sides and free on
the fourth,
ifth~
ultimate unit resisting moments
Ku
are known for points I,
2 and 3, a resistance r for each point can be calculated from
r -
Ku
/BH 2
3-25
where .the va Lue s of B are found in Figure .3-27. The smallest value of resistance r, (say. at poin~ 2) corresponds to. the first yield and is equal to reo
Next, the moments at the remaining ~wo poi~ts are computed for this value of
reo and the differences between "these and the ultimate values are determined.
These differences represent the remaining moment capacities. available for

additional load. At r e, the elements supports become free, fixed, and simplysupported on opposite.sides. Using the moment differences and entering Figure
3-29 two values of the change in resistance can be calculated as above, the
smaller being dr and therefore:
3-26
.'
In similar fashion, the resistance at the end of each range can be determined
until the ultimate unit resistance r u is reached.
3-13. Elasto-Plastic Stiffnesses and Deflections
The slopes of the elastic and elasto-plastic ranges of the resistance
are defined by the stiffness K of the element:
K - r/X
fu~ction
3-27
where r is the unit resistance and X i s the deflection corresponding to the
value of r. Th~ elastic range stiffness is denoted as Ke , the elasto-plastic

range.as Ke p ' .wh i Le in the plastic ..range the stiffness is zero.
Typical resistance-deflection functions used for design are shown in Figure 339. One- and two-step systems are generally used for one-way elements while
two- and three-step.systems are used for two-way elements. Two.wayelements
fixed on all four s~des will exhibit a four step system. As can be seen from
the figure, the elastic range stiffness
3-28
the elasto-plastic stiffness for a two,step system
3-16
:
TM,5-1300/NAVFAC' P-397/AFR 88-22
3-29
and for a three-step .system, the elasto-plastic s tLff'ne s s e s-
,
and
3-30
n.
~'
3-31
,,'
The elastic and e Laa t o vp Laa t.Lc stiffnesses of one-way. e~em_ents are, 'given" in
Table 3-8 as a function of- the modulus of e Las t Lc Lt.y, E"nioment -o f .Lrie r t La I,
and span length. Knowing" the resistances and t
s, the
i
elastic and elasto-plastic deflections can be computed from the above equas
Lff'ne s
co r
spond
tions.
ng
..."
f'
>
"
'.
The determination of the elasto-plastic stiffnesses and deflections of two-way

elements is more complicated than for one-way elements. s i.nce .ano the r var Lab l.e ,
i
namely,
the a~pect ratio L/H, must he considered.
For two-way elements"
the
deflections at the end of each range of behavior is obtained from the y

coefficients presented in Figures 3-24 through 3-38. The deflection for each
range of behavior is obtained from
'.
, ',':
3-32
XD -
where D, the flexural rigidity of the element is. defined cas

,
".,..,.
,,"'
D ~ EI/(l-~~)
3 -33
E is the modulus of elasticity, 1 is the moment of iner,tia, and v is Poisson's

ratio . .
I~
must-be
~ealized
that except for the elastic'range',
the values ,of X
(the displacement) ,and r in .Equation 3- 32 represent. change.i Ln deflection and

resistance from one r:,,?nge of behavior to ano t.he r..
Therefore, for two-way.'.
members the change ~n deflection and resis~ance (as previou~ly explained) is
obtained from .Figures 3-24 through 3-38 and the stiffnesses are computed from
Equations 3-28 through 3-33.
3-14. Resistance-Deflection Functions for Design
,
3-14.1. General
The r e s t s t ancev de f l.ect Lon function used for design depends' upon the maximum"
permitted deflection according to the design criteria ofrthe 'element .be Lng ,
considered.
This maximum
d e
L e c
i . o r i
can be
g o
L z
e d v a s
either limited
or large. In the limited deflection range"the .maximum deflection of the

system is limited to the elastic, elasto-plastic and plastic r ange s , . When the
maximum deflection falls in the large deflection range, the response of the
system is mainly within the 'plastic range and the elastic ,and elasto-plastic
ranges need not be considered. The error resulting from the omission of the
elasti~ and elasto-plastic portions in this; analysis is negligible.
The support rotation that corresponds .to limited deflection varies for the
different materials used in protection design. "The response criteria for each
material is obtain~d from the chapter that describes the design procedures for
that material,
3-17
TH 5-l300/NAVFAC P-'397/AFR 88-22. - ,
3-14.2. Limited Deflections

When designing for limited deflections, the maximum deflection lSn' of the'
element is kept within the elastic, elasto-plastic, and limited plastic
ranges, and the resistance-deflection function for design takes the form shown
in Figure 3-39 a, -b , and c for a one-step system, a two-step system, and a
three-step system, respectively. The design charts presented in Section 319.3.were established for a one-step system; for two- and three-step systems,
these.charts can be used if the resistance-deflection functions are replaced
with equivalent' elastic resistance-deflection functions defined by KE and XE
as indicatedby,the dotted'lines 'in Figure 3-39. The equivalent elastic
stiffness KE and the equivalent maximum elastic deflection XE are calculated
suchthat.the 'area -unde r thedotted curve is equal to the area" under the solid
curve, thereby'producingthe same' potential energy in each system. The
equivalent maximum elastic deflection XE for the two-step and three-step
systems shown is expressed by Equations 3-34 and 3-35, respectively.

XE .:. Xe' +
,
.... , .
The
X'
E
- xe
equiva~ent
~(l',-,
3-34
re/r u)
(rep/r u) + Xep(l
re/r u) + l)j(l - rep/r u) ,

,
3-35
'
elastic stiffness KE in each case is equal to

3-36
One-way elements exhibit one vvand' two vs t.ep resistance deflection curves
depending on the type of supports. Consequently, the equivalent elastic

stiffness KE is given for one-way elements in Table 3-8. The equivalent
elastic deflection can then be calculated from Equation 3-36. Two-way
elements generally exhibit two-' and three-step resistance-deflection curves
which are a function of not only the type of supports but also of the aspect
ratio L/H of the element." The' equivalent elastic deflection XE of the element
under consideration must be calculated"from Equations' 3-34 and 3-35 for twoand three-step systems, respectively. TIle value of KE for the system can then
be obtained from Equation '3-36.
3-14.3. ,Large Deflections
When designing for a large deflection, it can be assumed without significant
error that the resistance ri'ses instantaneously from zero to its ultimate
value, r u at the onset of the blast loading thus neglecting the elastic and
elasto-plastic ranges. The design resistance function f'or 'one-way elements ,is'
approximated by a constant. plastic range resistance as shown in Figure 3-'40a,
whilefor. two-way elements, the resistance function becomes that shown in
Figure 3-40b i where the ,maximum deflection lSn can be either. smaller or larger
than the partial fail~re deflection
xi.
,.
3-15. Support
~hears
or Reactions
Support shears or reactions are a function the applied load and the maximum
resistance attained by an element, its geometry and yield line location.
However, for short duration blast loads, the support shears can be reasonably
estimated by neglecting,the applied load. Therefore, the, ultimate support

shear can be assumed to be' developed when the resistance reaches' the ultimate
value, r u'
3-18
Equations for the ultimate support shears Vs for one-way elements are given in
Table 3~9.
For those cases where an element does not reach its ultimate
resistance, the support shears are obtained based upon elastic theory for the
actual resista~ce r attained by the element.
For two-way elements, the ultimate shears acting at each section are calculated by use of the "yield line procedure" previously outlined for the
determination of the ultimate resistance r u' The shear along the support is
assumed to vary in the same manner as the mo~ent varies (2/3 V at the corners
and V elsewhere) to account for the higher stiffness of the corners (Figure 341). Since the shear is assumed to be zero along the interior (usually
positive) yield lines, the total shear at any section 'of a sector is equal to
the resistance r u times the area between the
secti~n ~eing
considered and the
positive yield lines. Referring to Figure 3-41, the support shear Vs V for the
triangular sector I is
(2/3)V s V(L/4 + L/4) + VsV(L/2) - r u(Ly/2)
3-37
Vs V - 3r uy/5
3-38
and for the trapezoidal sector II

(2/3)V s H(y/2) + VsH(H
r u(L/2)[(H - y
y/2)
+ H)/2j
3-39
3-40
Values of the ultimate support shears Vs H and Vs V for several two-way elements
derived as above are presented in Tables 3-10 and 3-11.
Table 3-10 gives the
ultimate support shears for the case where opposite supports proyide the same
degree of restraint resulting in symmetrical yield line pattern~: Table 3-11

is for completely general situations where opposing supports provide different
degrees of restraint and result in the formation of unsymmetrical yield lines.
In these cases, the ultimate support shears are not equal at opposing supports.For the situations where the ultimate resistance of an element is not
attained, the support shears are less than the ultimate value. The proportion
of the total load along each support as well as the d~stribution of the shears
along the support is assumed to be the same as previously cited for the
ultimate support shear. Therefore, the support shears. corresponding to the
resistance r of the element is obtained from the equations presented in Tables
3-10 and 3-11 by replacing r u with the actual resistance attained (r e, rep'
etc.).
3-19
ELASTIC RANGE
;{ II
ECASTO-PLASTIC RANGE
PARTIAL FAILURE
FULLY PLASTIC
'u
/-
,AK
w
u
t-
'e
(f)
(f)
w
,
'"
0
a::
'up
ep
INCIPIENT FAILURE
/}e
Xe
.
-
Xp
XI
Xu
DEFLECTION (Xl
Figure 3-1
Typical resistance-deflection function for two-way element
;-""',-. NEGATIVE YIELD LINES - - " ' POSITIVE YIELD LINES
(al
'or
(b)
FOUR EDGES FIXED
. (c)
(d)
THREE EDGES FIXED AND ONE EDGE FREE
(fl
(e]
'TWO ADJACENT EDGES FIXED AND TWO EDGES FREE

)
Fi gure 3- 2
Idealized yield line locations for several two-way elements
3-21
~
~
........
...
, ...'
Ito~
~
ITT
.... '
...
. . J.. ., ..........
I
L-lI. O j-
]I
...
... ......
...
.....
I&ICI)
>1&1
-z
~
,
1--
:I:
Cl Q
<..J
-=. ~~
!;t>=
,....i
.to~
M....
IIII
AT NEGATIVE
YIELD LINES
tMVN
~J.J.J.""""'.u..~L.LJ"""''''
~ Ull
!Myp
AT
POSlTlVE
YIELD
LINES
0) YIELD LINES AND DISTRIBUTION OF MOMENTS
b) FREE - BODY DIAGRAMS FOR INDIVIDUAL SECTORS
Figure 3-3
Determination of ultimate uni.t

3-22
~esistance
1.0
0.9
03
_J
~
----
0.8
0.7
.1
--
0.6
,
,
0.5 x/L
::I
t-
...,,
0.4
: :I
-0
0.3
...,
ec
,
.
r-
1
!'
-"'1"
l-
~:;
;",1
-0'1
0.2
:j:jttumtIll=Itt HtW H-HttrlHHlt1
~-+
-1-
-r-
:J:ft
,,
;i"t
0.1
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8 1.0
'i.:
,Mvp'
1/2
H (MI-4N+MHP):-
..
Figure 3C4
0.1
'
Location of yield lines for two-way element with two adjacent

edges supported and two edges free (values of x)
"
10
10
09'
0.'1"
0.1
06
ts:JTI
<
y
IL
I,
2
r I III Willi 11111 III I ' , , , ,1111111111111111
1'1
, III
y/H
0.5
w
,
""
~
~ ~ri
.. , ~I
02
0.1
MHP :0.25
MHN
. 'H~j
0.125
mm
1'_11~!
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
Figure 3-5
I~:
Locafi~n of yield lines for ~wo-way eiement with two adjacent

edges supp'orted and two edges free (values of y)
10
e
1.0
0.9
-....
0.8
r""'''''''''',
l .. , !Illf1lm
r'
0.6 .
;'
..-A,.... ....
,
'I
_. --
y/H 0.5T "
,I
'
II
I'
I.
0.4;, I
,,
I+H+tt+tttHt+tlttt!+~U:litWllH
,I
0.3\ttHiitlr
0.2
",.
. ..
jI
'"
'"
I
I
:r
0.7
w
,
I~""
0.1 ~;Jl
t ..
Tj .
0,1
0.2
0.4
0.6
0,8
L
1.0
.:
( MVN+M Vp) 1/2
HMHN +MH~
Figure 3-6
Location of symmetrical yield lines for two-way element with three

edges supported and .one edge free' (ve l ues of y)
. . . ..
'.
10
; . t ,t .,
;.
I I"Ii.. ',"':'
'1"" .;:.
-:.....
I "~ i
-r--j:'dh!i::,~; iU::I! r ! 1 ,.
. , .;
1II1
,,:,:."
~=~HN} + MHP11/~ 0.1

XI
LM HNI
~P-i
<Dl
'
t MHP
Il1
of
III'! i i: :
. ,,, .. ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, ..
..
1.0
.. ..
,,,,,, ..... ,, ,,.,.
II rili I';: 'I
\
/
I
, ,
..... , ..
./
.,"";
111111111111111!111111m1l111111111111
0.9
1.000
0.8
I
0.7
; 1
'-'
;v
xl--l
1111Ii1111l111l!
,:::
0.6
I 1. 1 :.
I : .
0.5
I III!: ~',
Co
0.4
I I11: , "
'"
""~'II' .:l:::.":::.:::':":":.:::::i:::!:::::::":.
I d""'l"!"'l''':'''':'''~''
.'."
: '.' "
I "
i .
I
I
0.3 ~
I .: . ,
:~::
0.2
11111111111111
II"
".....
.'
I""
: : ..
, . . '.,
:;:::;:~~
'.
'1"
0.125
~:'; ;;: .;. :-.u': '," '"
~!~
.I :!
oi' - ':
0.1
I"
02"0
..
'.II,I,, ......, .. ,,!,,.:
II'
-- t ' : ' . . . . ,
1'.11''
..
,II,lJ
0.500
'1"
"
'I"
"....
...';-~'"rt r;: , :..,."";::Jr.....
"'::+-'l'"....""""..;
. 0 .I
"II
' .. I. ..., ..;.
' I:-.
0.2
:. '
0.5
0.8 1.0
Figure 3-7
,""
: I' ,~
2
L [
(.
111111:111"" 1
. .;,. .~;
10
20
Mvp' JI/2
~HNltMH~
Location of unsymmetrical yield lines for two-way element

with three edges supported and one edqe free {X?IXl~~.11
~ J!"HN3
XI
~HNI
MHP] 1;2
t MHP
03
P1
P-i
0/
\G)
/
I
\
\
/
I.
_[X
1.011111111111111111111111':11
0.9,__
---_::...=..-
0.8
0.7
0.6
.....
'"
xl..J
0.5
0.4
co
0.3
0.2
0.1
0
0_1
-0;2 -'
2
L [
20
MVp ]1/2'
H I!AHNI+MHPJ
Fi gure 3--8

with three edges .supported and onee dqe f.ree (X2/Xl=O;3)
.1
~ "[M NN}
XI
l '!20.5
J
MNP
lMNNI t MNP
A
\0
(J),
H
,
/
.1
...
LO
0.9
.: F
--r-
0.8 .
0.7
-
-r-
.. +.
0.6
'"
'"
xl..J
0.5
0.4
0.3
<X>
0.2
0.1
0
0.1
0.2
0.5
20
L [
H
Fi gure 3-9
MVI'
JI/2
..
~HNlt"~
Location of'unsymmetrical yield lines for two-way element

with three edges supported and one edqe free (X2/Xl"O.5)
60
80 100
..
e
, ,; I,
,
-Xz= U"'HNl +,
I
I
XI
",li"I'""
-i-'-r
-j-;-rr TITt1
,:'I
, . 1
.,
"'HNI
"'HPJ 1/2= 0.75

.
''''HP
. t
IIrt
I'
j'
0/
\0
1-L-!J1JI
I'
'"
"?
1:11-11 n
.-."
11'4.000
''I '
'j'l
'.
0,1
J:Ll
- 8.000
o. ~ , ,L L.;
,I :""1'
II'i
,,"i'
0.1 l:-,:';::.c-:, -4
-\ ~ : :
\
/
w
,
iWil
o ':: I
-------,
"")'
i.::
0,2
~':'
ifm
'''U:lill;
Iii
;I
I, I
.II!
I " ' T . ' 1'1
!"I'.I'j'f!1I1"I!'!!IIfJ!'1I1
0,5
0.8,1.0
5
, L
H
Fi(lure 3-10
l1J!l11\1
1111, i "I"
r I!' -IT
- ,-
I I I ! ! ! ' Ill!!!I!!!!1
10
20
MVp,':'~: 1/2
MHN1tMHP
"
Location of unsymmetrical yield 1 ines for twc -waye l emen t

with three 'edges supported
and one edge free (X2/Xl=b.7~)
. -'
......
,L
,,:1
<,: I!I~!~
,111~1I1!illlillll.,liltllll!'lli
t~;li ili ~=r!"HN5+MHPJI/2=
1.0
l- :_:_. _'
, .!l :"
j 'j;jl
! , liil: -1--+ . _:.1.:,.
XI ~HNI + MHP '
,
111 'I' ;'111m, 1 I I I lil ,
,"III If,!",
I 111
"I
'I ,11- I I" 'r
j.::III'::
1,j' I
uu- 'i.'i1.
I
"I,,
I I:
,~-;-::
'I';'I;!'I
: II'I' I!I II I!I '"
II' 'I
I : ; I TTTl,
I i II ITT,
'
I
I
ill
'I!I ''IiIi, IIIi1'1' j . II!' I I,
I
i : "
1[Ii I
1"11,, I II I " ,II III1,I1, - I-+ -, I I
-',""','!Ill","';'';'d!r'l
I""
!
I'
'II '" I d;""liI 11 1'11 d'lll
'I
~ ~
'jIll II I I
I
I i I"I
' I, I .II,:. '~)l ~! h
10 :.: ::! Ii ill ,jill L:: !::~.;~I,~i~11 ~i; il:: :i ill:! J-,. L+ t;JJ
III
'I
."
","
t
I
1,1'
lI"l l iI,
""
'II,
dlll l'
"1"'I1
I, , " ,I
'
I!
i!
ill'
'I'j rPII11
Ii
l I
11
I I'
'II
~:
j'
I'
I'
~I
1'1,11:;
unuuuu.rrrriru
II
II I
"
1111
11
/,
,'5'
'1'/1
I..!J
I
nnnuuun
~I
t:\
II!I;!!'!'!
:'01'1'1
"'1"1''''''1'1 )',,11:,1111,,',,:
"'I"'"
',",' II'
'"
'"~
,:",',i,:,I,,"I"'!,,1
I",
,1
":'
"
't"
I!I, I
I-Ii; [: 1
Co>
Co>
'
II t
,.
: ''1-'I' IIII
II I I
it
rr '! :'1' ,r-,I,I
I I
'i' ':1:"iTl'l,I'ii I'I[ Ii''i ir!1I I" i i !I
xl..-J 0,5
li'I', :T1',':ll'l ll li' ill1 ::ir,i~: :J:111,111 l'jnlli"ilillinl'l~f'l;N:- - M '
111 l " 1' " "'I
'"" "',
,
I ,. , ' [ l I~
" I, ", I:"
.
I'll
'
,
0.4 I~"f-:-L'
l
, ' ., I
0.6 -~Lj--",!
I : : i ,j
I ,
0.3
,I
I' ,
+-_
$',ml'
'II' , " .tn 'liit 10' "~ I, I ll,I

! ill:ld'
'li!!Iiillll'
11,lllli! II)
II'
111'lil :
i'" "I'l
['i'Il.:.:.: '
iii'
'1
li'l
! 1'1
',I:
L
..
,
I~' '!~"t~i:':;Ii':' iI'
II,
,!
0.2 '-i"-:---"T~1f
Ill :~~rtt::1
,Iii :ill
"I'
"...,
L.J::
:;'::'1: I 0 ~ooI"
"
I'ii
"
I
111- 2.000 I
1;1
'I '"
_.
1-4.000 ::.
i l ' : 1 "II~
IIi!
"
1 : , ; 1,
0.1
0.2
0.5
0.8 1.0
Itt
II
11
I'
L [
5 8
Mvp "
.10
3~11
ill i
+ttHtt
IItllll
m
I
I
urn
~I
~
",-"..,
l~
20
J1/2 ,
'H ~HNI+MH~
Figure
'II,I'!
III II II III
,':,'
m
2
:1-1- . 1 :
IllHlliL-e.ooo
,
II III! Iii
1 11
, " ,,'
,...-co,
Ili, i:1 :: :i:li':I::III: 1111:1:llli:II':; i,; "'I' IIIIH'I'~!" ".l!I, , ,,'~f:lji~ ~
!:, I! ' I; ',' "''''":: ' ' 1:' ,I!:I, Ii' 11,111, i.i I, : 1
'I, 1'1".11' 'I i,lS', 1tl1, ..d lttH-;Ii"
I'j"!:
"":;:"''''1,,''1'':'''''' I ~'I _. " -"- 1 "-/j. I tr"ft' :-1',l.J ,ttMc'1'''''''''r-+.
'
0.1 --r"t-' i 1-'-It' fTl'i""J;,
" 'r" -'1 --. t t !--'rl,ll "11 ,.- _.-.
r-.I':T.,
.: I
'
l
l
:
I'"
il"'!:';::"';::II",'I,'IIIII",II'"
I
,1'1'1
:
'
1
"1'
;
Ii'
I
'
I
II
~'~r:"
...
tJ.,;LT"t-i-,~
1."1
,I
/'1
,j,1
1111!11
1111"""" 1--,........... ~J, ,
11' ;' I'jil I ill-'l;"''''''''I'"
j!I:!i-III!-"~"- \ill:'I'I::,I.I, j i 1
I:!!,II: 11 11:11'
II 'l:ijj';"111 r-rn
OUI' ",.;,"'I""I""""':II",I:I,:,.. ,!: ,.: i :1i1"I"III:I.l1
ii ;'111':11'
11111'
.t.
I I' ,
<;1._."
1 illl!1'
=::.':- :
II
. - - ,.
q, ',!WII
'III"
ililll !ill!!I!
.. -- --"
I' --I
l- 1.000
II
-'1:1::\
VN2
~I
I.I.!! J i-.; ., !;:: I!,H] I,14~ 1 L O.12~ -r,'l- " .

I"'IIJII lli"i'l
ll :;TI:,I',iI'l i,,:
l iI IIIH ii Tlli O.2~O ~,
I"" i',
',:;' 1'1 11 11:
I
" .. I: I "" :'" 'if' "'i1
11,11,
'"
M'
--..y!...
I'l'
I"
L:..._....
:I,rr:tlilidl II'iI:1:, 1 '~'~It 1

1~lilil !II'I~I 1 '1111'I"I-l-lllfl~'1rrl TI1lrrrrm
1 II'i!
:,',II',i!,",'I: " I1,1','
I :["''''''''''1'1'1' i""I,I:
1'1'1"11'1"11111"1111'1
11"' I'",lill"!II,j'II'I!II!
111"11111"1111,111 '1 [1 'Iii' --'
1'
11/ 11 ;'1,
'~'It
_. . .I
I,
1,,1i
0,9
1
1 ,," 'Iill: :;i:1 1I'::lii,'''I:I:I!!i'J'jll'li',;!II''I'I'! ,.;. 1,1 1- l;j'll!liIJ'I:llil"IIIH'I\'1
'III'
i
1
I
,i
j
1
l 1 -~
1
,1,,1111' II"'" ""I'i
'I' 1I'I"I"I'lij'IJ
I,
~"Ill
1 ' II,I ,~I
'~II
I i
'j '~'IIL'I"
i! !',,': ' :"'II'
l'I'll
i i ' I \"1 Ili'"1I'I'ill!!111111
Ii'1 I
: I:
I"! i,: ;;';','1"
I!,
.
1'1
1
,t
III lIi I !
+i
IHI11!'
I
i111 11'11 ,
0.8
i-ii
:-:1(1 :IF:lli'
i'll' dF~n'; 1';1 ! I] :HTIi', ;I~
r[ -- ~"T~ I II 1'1 I,1i'1111111111111
IHIIII'I'I'1I
I [lil!111 .
11I I I
" ' : 11;
,tlll!!I' 'I dill "ill" II 11'11 i,I"
I ~II 11/1- - iii: 1!!::!!;;iliJ;;~,l ji.ililii i!II).~
111111'1111 i I!IIII,III.:.:'
11, I'
0.7 ',! i::,
1
ll
oI
i: ;;1 1 11 :111 :ii'II:: l ;:i'li!I,II! '1'1:11111 !:!
1'1 I I
I, 1I11 I1 - un
), I
i",'
,~
\!I,
Location of unsymmetrical ..yi.eldl ines for two-way element

with tnree edges supported and one edge free (X2/X~=LO)
50
80100
,I.
~ =~HNS + MHPlI/~
,II'
XI
, , . ,1' ,
-r-r-r- -r-i- -i-qmf
,
"
~HNI
MH;J
1.25
"I
~
\0
\
\
c.,
;-
4,oo~0'11
lin:"
-.
I I I \
~-I 8.000
.j
-~.
til
11. 1
',lmjll,liJJ[\',
"I iill, I
.>
en
i
: .
----_
..,
0.2
80 100
L [
Nvp,
JI/2
Ii ~HNltMH~
Figurk 3-12
,
with three.edges supported and one edge free (X2/X1=1.25)
-Xz= ~MHN3.
XI
MHPJ 1/2
= 15
MHN1 t "'HP
.
' [ CD/'
H
\0
I.
I
I II;: I
0.81 'i
',I
0.7
O.GHI ' Illlllllllilll!dll:I'11l1
W
I
ec
xl..J
! 1 ' :
!
, ,
.,
I , ' II
--
.
I.U
va
-_.-
P ~
1!1!!illl!!!;!!I!!!!I!!!!!!!!! 1I!l1!1I111
. i 1!,"Jl
2
L
,I
" ' Mvp I "'~1/2
~~ MHNltMHP
'
Figure 3-13
.4J:111 Rl!llJ1i11ll
..
toce t ton of unsymmetrical yield lines for two-way element

with. three edges supported and one edge free (X2/11=1.5)
"
u
:tir~f-+
1111 I I
I I jilll
--
- --,
~ JMHN~ + MHPl i/2 = I. 75
LLJ-+
XI
If,IHNI t MHpJ
CD/
\0
/
I
\
/
1.0
0.9
Ii'
0.8
0.7
'",
'"
'"
0.6
, mmf
.runn II
. , iii i
;
X-I-l 0.5 : : . ;
-
__
0.4
0.3
-r
__I_
iii
i,1 II:;
. ll I Ii
--
ILUlUllllllllllilllllWll1II
M vp'
M VN2
0.125
0.2
4,000
I t t ! 1 I I'
011-:1 ' ' " , I
I' , ,
o ui: 1
0.1
Ii
L [
H
Figure 3-14
MVp
20
JI/2
~HNltMH~
Location of unsymmetrical yield line~ for two-way element with

edges supported and one edge free (X2/Xl 1.75)
~hree
50
80 100
ii'
"
jJ
! ~
I'"
I'
, I
I!-'T.'
'1 ,I
I!
I
1.0
I'
I r
II
:I";!,[,, I
il'!
GI
11
,,'1'I"~1 [Ijl!il~;;
I ::1 'II
Ii",
'1
'
JI :[I
,'1"'11'
I, iI III":1'.' I
IIIII, I,I"
Iii
'.'
""I
'1'1,,
1'1'
' Ii
II
IiII'
-X2= ~MHN3 + MHP] 1/2= 20
I', I'
i ;
''
I
1- t I+-~,I Iitil
'
1j
.. ... .
~I
II
XI
MHNI tM HP '
.. . I.
ii' I III1 illl i il ,
/
I
\0
(i) \
,
/
I.
I'
!I~l ~ ~ ~,i I' I~'

I
i jj il j
nili'll i
II
1lllmt~lm
0.9
'0.8
!I111111111111111U1l1l1llt1
0.7
0.6
w
,
w
...
xl.J
0.5
0.4
'1. .,.
0.2
0.5
0.8 1.0
L [
H
Figure 3-15
Mvp
10
20
JI12
~HNltMH~

three edges supported and one edge free (X2/Xj = 2.0)
50
80100
lll~
',. X
-=
L
MHN1 + M HP
l/2
MHN2 + M HP
I+GMHN1 + MHPJ 1/2

M HN2 + M HP
'I
01
/J.-
-: (!) "<,
y
/
1 _LLLLLLLLLLLU_I U.111 LLLLLLJ..LL1_1LLILlUl UlIllIllllI
1.0
O.8
~+l+lliHtHttlttf-fflilil:l:lffit1mtJjmmr
"",
""
'"
>-II
-! .-
O.4ffijt.
0.2FFIIIl1FRIIIIIfIIlIIII FIlTIITIIIflIIlIlIlIlIIIlIIi
"
.02
.05
,~
Figure 3-16
L'
.08.1'
.
.
.5
.2
.
'.,' ~
"
.:' I/~
(M VN3 + MVp)
"
". 1/2'
.
' 1/2
(MHN2+MHP)
qMHNI+MHP),
..
, .'
Location of unsymm~trical yield lines for two-way element with three edges
supported and one edge free (values of y)
,.~.;:
05
~
0.4
,... > ......
.................
I~ ~
-r
0.3,T
,,
02
'"
O. I
T
-t
T;'ld
H1\
04
r---< ".
'"
""
'j'mh:rrmml.mm;~~...J
"!
. ---
Y/
H
w
,
~I','
i
,.. "....... .... ..... ....
0.3
-I
)(/L
il II j , "., J '
+11,1 iI I ~ j \ . , , '
J i; u
t rI . C
ill T~. i :j:. "i_H++++H
I :l , tIl!
nTl
~W-li:
I lfltlfillli
~mmii :1,1:1" i1Wl
I.::
ll,
Wlm~
0.1
0.2
UIlHlIlIlIlHilllj
tttttttttItJrtt
0.2
,:HH!m~_
0.3
0.4
I+H+++ttlill
0,1
.r Illllillftjj
-. ,HHHttHHH
0.6
0.8 1.0
-'=- ( MYN+ Myp)

H
Figure 3-17
1 _
MH~"
.6
10
1/2
MHP
,
Location of symmetrical yield lines for two-way element with four edges
suppqrted
e
0.7
r-:-;--:-;- ::- Til:

"
.. , i I
il l iii"
::.; i i il
0.6
l ii
I"
III ,I II" i I:
i_It!"
~'I
:1'1'1
X,
Ii' Ilil 1I Ifilii'
~J--~~3
-: II
0.5
X2
~
X2 : ,
I:
/ MtlNI + MtlP
MtlN2 t MtlP
i 1Tfi
- .-
0.4 \ '.I "I i
I'
X'/L
MVNlt,MI,'p ..
MVN2tMvp
= -':;'--';:=M=VN='=t:;:;M;::V:=P
". '.,+
03
MVN2tMvp
,., 0.5
:I
,
...,,
...,
1-,
.....
0.2
01
0.1
0.3
0'4
0.5
0.7
1.0'
'~(jMVNI t Mvp. +'/MVN2 t MVP)

.': .' )5 (MtlNI + MtlP). .
Figure 3-18
5678910
.''''
Location of -unsymme t r i ca l yield lines fo r two-way element wHh

four edges supported (values of X))
"
0.7 ,
L
I~CD.=--------'i
"+/
06
"",
[:
I:
Y,
/" j r
W
Y2
0.5
!.!..,
0.4
J MVN2 t Mvp,
IMHNI + MHP
j MHN2+MHP
Hill;+)
'T
II I I 1I ~i1~1 ~I ~il !l!ili~I " " ",I!i ,

II
,II Ii
1'1'1'
!I
T'
0,3
a>
'II
(MVNI + Mvp
Y2
Y'/
'I' I'1IiII'''I''I'I;';'~I;'l'''I'''~':~'''1
':"'Ijl~'
:; : IliII':: :i ,'1 i i: :,: i!': :1:' r j;j,III'
j i.1i
Iii: III I ~I'
i jiill"'" ....,'""
HI I \.VI~
f.\1r.\
::
0.2
jMHNI+MHP,
MHN2 t MHP
[i:.
'1": ;:'.i!,
~ :::i::
::
ill''
. I'
,' I
..: ,HI'[11 If!' , III i~ lf i ~i~~il~~~~~tHm~#H+lH~~

I,
l
; : lill'i I III I :il lili l lilil l ,ih:J,;:t:JH lilillililililillilliii
'ft.,'
II
'
II
'
jt
I
!'
0.1
,
,
,
I
H+++f+T++JH J++f+++H;
-_.'-j
01
0.2
0.3
'0.6
1:....=
H
,
Figure 3-19
0.7
1.0
1< Mv. +
MVP)
MHNI+ MHP T /MHN2
+- MHP

four edges supported (values of VI)
7 8
10
+ MHP
MHN2 + MHP
MHNI
(
'12
~I ' '
11 H+++HHH
:i
.,'1
111
I .
0.6
L
-x
0.5
'",
'"
'"
0.4
111111!]!'IIII
!Ii 'j :fljil;
I.i :Willl'nllllllllllll'I'I'II'I!iiili'~~i':IIII"I!i':'i!I'i'"Iii
-''I'
,
,
1'"
c'ri
I fill 'm;' ,~ ,~
., .. 'I :"11' I'
I'
111 '
illll,,!"'II'
1:lrr.lllf frrrrrrl\\lrrlllll::1 'I.I ,IH:, "
I---:-:-:,:-~LL~;P;-::!!il-:-:';-;-~-H~
':'" r'
r' IHH""I'jIlIT'~"II"'IIII'uSI
~I"II'! JJJ UWllillllj
~ II t ~l !! Il:!lII;~ Il! Ip<'::!'I:~I'
I:::
.
--
.1
'.
.,
"
-ii',
,i
II
'II
. ,'. .
,I
;,,<ill""! .11'1'111.
II " I If I
II
'oil 11'I1"'Ii' 1111:,II
I:
111,11
.-, -.
""I' , :
i
I
0.3
TI
0.2
01
0.2
0.3
0.4
05 0,6
0.8
1.0
.(MVNI + MVp)I/2
MVN2
Figure 3-20
Mvp
Location of unsymmetrical yield lines for two-way element with four edges
supported (values of x/L and Y/H)
10
'!..
H
3-40
....
........
'........
..... .....
,
.....
lA > ->
..:::t
-:::. ,- - - - - - y o
.....
........
L
!,
~
B
ELEVATION
/~
--,.
SECTION A-A
SECTION B-B
PARTIAL FAILURE
- - INCIPIENT FAILURE
Fi gure 3-22
Deflection of two-way element
3-41
1JCJ'
L
FIG. 3-24
.1
FIG. 3-25
FIG. 3-26
FIG. 3-28
FIG. 3-29
.1
FIG. 3-27
.'
L
FIG. 3-30
FIG. 3-32
FIG. 3-31
{JO]l.
I 'L
,1
FfG. 3-33
FIG. 3-,34
FIG. 3-35
FIG. 3-37
FIG. 3-38
xDc:=J
I,
.J
L
FIG. 3-36
LEGEND: EDGE CONDITIONS
r<;"
FREE
Figure 3-23
<
FIXED
Graphical summary of two-way elements

3-42
.................
_-.- -_.
f ..
'-'-'-'--,-1
-: .
......_....:::....: .. ;..;.:..:.::._
........... ......
t.:...:.-==-==-----.-----
.e- .007 r
en. .005
.e.
..
_.-.. _
..;
"
; .........
>
ext
__
. _
. . _.._. '-C-_'_ . ~':-""~-'-'-
.... ;.~:....:..:..:.....:-.:.....:....::....:.:.~,;::~:.:....:::..:;.. .:..~ .. ..:...
.. -.-.
-.-
... --..
__
..
.
.
-._----------------_._-.------... - .
... .....
........... -
,"-
..-,.-'--'--f 1----.----.0007 01
~Hmax
.0005 I...-..:..-{
"
............
M =
XD =
.0003
.0002
t
i-=
.0001
10 7.0 5.0
3.0 2.0
1.0 0.7 0.5
L
0.3 0.2
0.1
H/L
Flgure 3-24
Moment and deflection coefficients for uniformly-loaded,

two-way element withtwo adjacent edges fixed andlwo
edges free
3-43
-:::,:-::::::-,,::::'::::;::::::,;:.~,;:"::;:;::
=
=
M
XD
... ,
:::::::::: :..:
:"':.':
.-_.- :.-...... Ir--_~ ..... :.. -- ..... - - - ._. __ .__ .,......

...... -+
-_ .
-~,-_
~-
, -:::::::::t::::==::::::::::~:~::: ::::: :::::, -' ...:-----~_._.-' - ' .

- '_ :
..e..
>
Q:1.
...
1..
. _...,...
~_
.__.__
. __
..07----- ...".; ..; ...

e . O~ C-: .L:: ..:J':"S2EJI
:z:
<l:1.
.
.:
_.----.---_
.. _.
."
- ..
_:- ....:,;~:;~~~~-'.~:
I
.003 .
~...
. : ...
__
:
._._~---'--
. .:... .
. :_-:-.:...-....:i----.---
.002 ;-
........ .. . i
I
.001 .I'...:
10 7.0 5.0
---'-
....;
3.0 2.0
C,I
H/L
Fig!Jre 3-25
Moment and deflection coefficients for uniformly-loaded;

two-way element with one edge fixed, an adjacent edge.'
simply-supported'and two edges free'
3-44
,.
M
XD
"2
= .B r H 4
= yrt-i
1.0 t:-:-~:Z:'
07 "
.. >.~:ijjji!ii~~IU
~ '.. : .,.e".
i;~.;~.
(:
.... ':,.~.:,.
-:::;:;;:~::;.;;-;: =':.
0.5;,~ ,:;"i::~i::;:f:~:,;
.
at
.
a
E
~~:::::.:::
..
~.3 ~:~~~:~~~~~!llrrr: ~~_=j::: .BH:
0.2 ~;=~ji~~~:ii~;~i:
~._,
--:c_.
a
E
-".
. ,,,~;:.:'::-':-:;:..::
-- "----,.--t---
------r---.
--,~--
0.1 ; - ~i::::::.=--.--'~7--l;~i:
'" .._..._...:......-
. :07"~'
:.....:.:....1:.:
'.. '
..
'
"'''p
.-
--_.
-'-.-.
"____
r__ ".---., ... __
,._.
__... _----..,..-.,--~--,_.
.-'-'- - ..:'::----. C,.'.. - " - ' - ' - - _ ' _
:.._:~. ;;.;;?~~ -~~:'::.~~:

-. ,-._-L"':':~".-"-'---l
.Oll '-:-T~L0
cl
,'~=,;.;,..;..;;;;;;;;;.;;;,;;,;.;.;.;,,;,;.~
..:...L .. ~,_ ...:
......
.. . .
...........
..............
.. _...
.01
.005 ' I
003:I '
__ j, , .. ,_
..,
L.
__ .0
...
--, .. _.
-_ _ -- _ ..-~':.~.-- .-:-~..-:.--....
_-_._-_
_.'
--'
.007 >'
1-":'#"-"- H
'-:--~~-
..
"
'.
--:
'.
~_
- ,..,
-.oo--"---.- - -
.:.::::;..~.:'::_i..:.:.:: .
~--t
.......-.:'-'-'-.-" ~ ....
3.0 2.9-
1.0 0.7 0.5
. -....._.. __ ... ~- .:. ----
0.3 0.2
H/L
F~ure
3-26
Moment and def1 ecti on coeffi ci ents for un i form1 y-1 oaded,
two-way element witn'two adjacent edges simply-supported
and two edges free'
3-45
1.0
,
.
, ., . ,"
.......
_-_....._
......,._-,.,.t-:
0.7
ZI
0.5
0.3
. I
0.2
M
0.1
XD =
'
2
,BrH
yr'H 4
_._-+:..:..,.,.:
L._ _ _.
YI
I',
...
c:Q.
.0003:'
! ,
.._..._.__.__ .. ,.
.0002 ,-' ,C.cc.'-t-r-r-r-t-r-r--]:
+_._.~---
1-:'-:
I:
'
.0001 .'..."'--,
10 7.0 5.0'
-1..
-'
3.02.0
1.0 0.7 0.5
0.3
0.2
,0,1
H/L
'Fi gtl re 3- 27

'two-way element with three'edges fixed and one edge free
346 .
1.0,,""--'--....:.------,.....-,-,...-...,--,-..,....,-7""1
0.7
0.5
0.3
0.2+----:---~--+~j"'==/_:,-:.,."=~7'_'_'__;_j
0.1
.0 2=~, _ __ .
__-t- --------
ext .007 (=-"

.005
'., f-~J~+++,.:-I
HLl-f:Fi c~
1.003
~-=-. ~
.:~ r ' ,
. . .
.0007! .;
.0005
.... :..
._..
/-....;,....L 2.__ ~j._l
---I
--~---.........,._,_----i
.0003 . .
.0002 :
---~L...,
,.j,c.:_L~'."
. . 0.0/.
.0001
1,-0.0_00.
.........
10 7.0 5.0
":.:-: . . :
3.0 2.0
. _ _ 0. _
'_1
I
,:
-,...._ _--.J!
1.0 0.70.5
0.3 0.2
0.1
H/L
Fcigure 3-28
Moment 'and deflection coefficients for uniformly-loaded,

two~way element with two opposite edges fixed, one edge
simply-supported and one edge free
347
1.0,..-..-------..,.-......,."-,....,.--"..-,...,....,.,,,...,..,..,
0.7
~
M =
XD
.05
f' ".. --.: ":"

t"
. - . - -
=
.. ..
"T---~::-
~-,'h~"
.03l~~~~~;~~~:~.. .iLi~"
.02
":::::.::::::=~::::::=:::::
..
.. .
~ .~:~~~~f~j!"~E0~2~~~~lj
.005' ,.. ,>/1-__-"
I
..
. '.
, __ .;.:__
, L.
._'.:,'.: ::::::::::::::;;::"
-. -'._,-.',..
.003 t,:....'. .T ,.. ',:.-
r
:
.002
-:
",_
.... ,.,.
.~~I:Gjjt0t~~c",c-'c-~~,~~~;~ ..:__,:;.
_-_
-_._-._.---_..
"'_'-==
-_.
.001 !~.~-----
'
....
I.
::..:::_'-:..:.',:'. .
__.
..
..:-.- ---- .... --'- .. _-.----;---
~._--
_._-,_._--------_<._-.-'-
.0003
.0002--'-":"'-.-1--=-=-=-'--......--..- - - - - - -..-
.I
I
.000 I 10- .--::-:-:~-L..:-~:=:.:.:.:.:.:.:...:..::..::.:.:.:...:.::........:....:....:....:..:.::........:....:...:......J

705.0 3.0 2.0
1.0 0.70.5
0.3 0.2
0.1
H/L
'Fi gure 3-29
Moment and deflection coefficients for uniformly-Joaded.

two-way element with two opposite edges simply-supported.
one edge fixed. and one edge free
3-48
1.0 r---------.--,....,....,.-,....-.....,.,.-'"""""?---..,
-. '_ ...
.--
10 ~!,~~-,.
_.;'""",-_._,--_._,----...,..~
0.7
0.5
0.3
... -".:~~
...... :-.
0.2+.,...--------+~:c/,~J'--:c:c"""'_~~~
M =
XD_ =
0.1
_--_ ...-.
"--"-'--"~-""--.
....
-.-~
-"-+--;--'----'--'-1
,.... :..~,._~:::. i -: ..; ...
.01
----_.- ' .~._,.....:..;._--_:..-..:._.;.. _---_.
..
,....-,-~.,....---_:.-:-..: _~----
:~: [:~.-;;'-:='+L~~" Ij:: '-.2.--.:.;'-;'"-::.. . . .+;:-'-.-'-.e.:.,- JH--"--'-'--'-,'-.-'---:-:-'.-'-.

...
.
..
.:':
:"
,: , . :
_--_.-.-.....-~--
.003
i .
.002
~,:
r'.
:..:': .. J..
p.8--+--;i-"""S-'- f,-;.c.-;-i-""--'---+--;--;..-+--;.,.,-'-+--;-'---'--'-1
.'
- <>:
. _.
::: ::::::.:':::":::' : .
__
..._ ::::.::::.-c..:-===cc.j
- ._
.. _ _-_._...__._
.001
.0007' .:.-.--.----:.-.. ::
.. . .--:-..,---- .-----.---.-----i .. .....:-.--~-.:-__+'
----..----- .---~-.. --~.0005---- - ..-.-
;0003.
.._----_...
.0002-----'--.-- I--'-='-'-='--
:' .... I
._--_.. _- ..__.-:. ... _...:_----_._-~,
.0 .
.0001
10 7.0 5.0
3.0 2.0
1.0 0.7 0.5
0.3 0.2
H/L
Figure 3c 30
Moment and deflection coefficients for uniformly-loaded.

two-way element with three edges simply-supported and one
.
edge ,free
.005
... ;:::;:
ext'"
.001
.0007
.0005
.0003
.0002
!OOOI
'--;-----.
.00007
.00005
.0002
.000 I
'-"-.'1
"r- .--.'.C
.=------1
::... ::.::::: ..
l:ut----u.C-:~t--~
10 7.0 5.0
3.0 2.0
1.0 0.7 0.5
.00002
u_...._ '1.000
0.3 0.2
I
0
0.1
H/L
Fi,gure 3-31

two-way element with two adjacent edges fixed,
one edge simply-supported, ar.d one edge free
3-50
0.3
~~
0.2+----..,.----E'1
.03
F"'":"2~-:-:';'-:; .02
..
...
.003
~'--"'.~
(~'~'~~E-"EE'~-~-~ .001
.0007
.01..,- .---, '

. . - - - -..- - .
..-f-'c~-.00,7 '-----;-, --I
' --0-;:--
.005 l.::,~, :..,~/-7:..:.. ,i
;.
'. ' : . , . '
-.
.0005
.000,3
.0002
'.'
.0001
.0007", - - , ....----.,(-'+......,... -.-..----~---._---
.oooe
/--- - - - - _ .
:", '.. ' -~_. L.~; ~-,
.0003
.~_."'-'-'-.:_...;._-,' - " - - '

,
.00007
.00005
/, - : '
----:--L:.'.,' :,:...~ .
.00003
.00002.
7.0 5.0
3.0 2.0
0.3 .0.2
\
H/L
Fi gure 3-32
Moment and deflection coefficients for unt f'orml y-Toaded ,

two-way elo.ment with two adjacent edges simply-supported,
one edge f ixed, and one edge free
~
3-51r
e
.003
.002
.007.
.005
.....
. _..
;.c;,,<' '.
_,
::::::::::::
...
...... y.
.0001
>
err0 0 0 7
I,,-PP
.""": '-~-' ...:.:-:
..~-+-P~P-/.00007
,
...
;".::' ',,,::;:: -;' :;:;
..: ','
i .0005'
CQ.
Jbr-'"T'"'-'-'-'-'-'--o--+-';--'-"-'--i-++-'--'~---J.00005
....
h-:.
.0003 .-'-7"-/~~"-=Ib+~~~~~~~C-+-C-+-~~-'-I.00003'
.0002-'- --'-."'"'=~-r:--',=~'-'-'-'-~-7'-~-,;--'-~-7'-'-=.'~~
. .00002
... " . ..
.
.
..
...
_._----_._--_._----_.~~
.00007' _
2
M = .BrH
:XD = )'rH 4
; ..
.00005
~00003
:I:
.00002
....... -............ _---_
.00001
10 7,0 3.0
---
.
3.0 '2.0
_-
( ( l
j.
.,2
t.(((
<
2"-
.,
..LA. 77,,',;,)
'3
1.00.7 0.5
..1
0.3 0.2
H/L
. Figure 3-33
Moment and deflectiori'coeffic~ents for uniformly-loaded,

two-way element w{th,a 11 edges fi xed
. ....
"
..
.00003
.00002 :.
.0003
.00000.3
.0002
,i .00000. 2
.0001
.,
-,
107.05.0
1.0 0.70.5 - 0.3 Q.2
-I
.000001
,0.1,
H/L
fi gure 3-34
Moment "arid 'deflection ccef f ic i en t s for uhiformly-loaded,

two-way element with two opposite -edqe s fixed and two
edges s impl y-supported
. ,
3-53
1.0,.-------,..-,--,----,..,,,......,;.,....--,-...,.,.,--, .0 I
0.7
0.5
T
:I:
.
I
'
XD=
.005 .
M =
.007 .
2...
D H 2..
)" r H'4
}.Jr
.001
"""".......~:.,., .0007
0.1., C._'_''--'-'--'-.'
...... I.
....... :::
."
_ .
.0005
.03
<xl.
.00007
.00005
H/L
Fi gure 3- 35
Moment'and deflection. coefficients for uniform1y-loaded,

two-way element with three edges fixed and ,one edge slmplysupported
..
3-54'
.03
0.1
~:++8++2'+4~4J"F++--hS,2H++C-""8-+-:-H
.003
E~====::=:Ed/,-':-':-::7:-~~~~~~~
.002
,.",....Jrjf.-r.-...,..,-;=-.,.....,.-r--.,........"...........,...~-.-.-,-,
.00 I
'.0007
-:.,;....:..:_._-:-.~-"""~
FHH+-~~.;....-_
.0005
I++-;-'-'.,--,----.-f.-.-.-,.-,.. ----,.----- :
:F2S4
j~ .:: :
.;"...:.. .
:: ;
+'-'-'~-"-+~'P-:
~~:;;-~~:.~::.:~:~::~:.:.:
.. .... --. ~
0003
'T"7'=""",,,.,,..,...L;-,-,-,-,-,--=~~:,-;;.,,,,,,,-",--,-:7'-'.;..,-j
.0002
...
..
------------_
..
.....
,.
_--.---~--
.001
."
.0001
2
M = ,Bri-l
XD = yrH 4
.0007 .
.0005
......
.00005
__ ._-----
. :i" i.;.
.0003, .
!:,;.~ ;;, "
.0002,
~TI
..L
.....................
.00007
QJ
.00003
.00002
'_- _ _ 0 - - - _ . -
.0001
::10 7.0 5.0
3.0 2.0
.00001
1.0.0.7 0.5
0.3 '0.2
0.1
H/L
Fi gure3- 36 '
Moment ahd defl ecti on. coeffi ci ents. for uni formly-l oaded, :two-way
element with all edges simply-supported
3-55
il[J]
I
__
-_.
_-.' __ -.-.- -- ._- - .
~~':''!f~::~=~~:'"~~:~';~~ .002
.
M
0.1
XD
..- -
f32
...
c:o..
<II
c:o..
.0001
>'
.00007
.00005
c:o..
.00003
.00002
:, .
"~'_':''::'_~-~';
3.0 2..0
:...-.:.- ~-:--
1.0 0.70.5
0.3 0.2
H/L
Figure 3-37
Moment and deflection coefficients for uniformly-loaded, two-waj.

element with two, adjacent edges fixed, and two edges simplysupported
3-56
I
M =
0.1
XD =
f3lv,/3 2 .01
.007
2:IJ2III~;j:j===1.005
~i~~~~~a;Pj~~;;;;;~~2~ .003
...
Cl:l..
='="==""":''c'2-j~''E:~Ic~~==~~~~:-:-:-'-J
.002
.001
.0007
--:. !".'
..... ;
, c-_-;
.0005
, - . , ..
c-~~.-~-,;
" ' . : . ' .,:
.. .
. ..
.0003
... . ... . ... .... . ...

..__
...._.4 .. _. _..
_._" ...........
.0002
...
._-~_.~----~--
,~_._.,.;
..-
--.
...._ .._....,...
"~:;==:=2~=::3::::E==8===~
J.
. ---,.. _-.:.:. . - .
.0001
--..- ~:::-.~~_-=_--=:.
-'---'---'----j .00007
.1 _ _
. _.-~--.~
- =---.. -_.-'--;
.OOOO!
............
_---_ .. ------ ,-_

.... . . - .
.oooo:
.ooooa
-
-..
_'
-_ ..
'--_L-J
---J
3.0 2.0
1.0 .0.7 0.5
0.3 0.2
.00001
0./
H/L
Fi gllfe 3- 38
Moment and defl ecti on coeffi ci ents for uniforml y-Lcaded, two-way
element with three edges simply-supported and one edge fixed
3-57
1&1
(,J
cl:
I-
U),
U)
1&1
II:
Xm
Xe
DEFLECTION
(a)
ONE STEP ELASTO-PLASTIC SYSTEM
r.
--:- "I
~k.p
I-
1&1
(,J
Z
cl:
re-
dkE
II
I-
U)
ke
U)
1&1
II:
Xp
Xm
DEFLECTION
(b)
TWO STEP ELASTO-PLASTIC SYSTEM
r.
1&1
(,J
Z
cl:
I-
rep
re
U)
,.
U)
1&1
II:
DEFLECTION
(e)
-Figure 3-39
THREE STEP ELASTO-PLASTIC SYSTEM
Resistance-deflection functions for limited deflections
3-58
..,u
'u
~
en
Hia:
I
I
Xm
DEFLECTION
a)
l&l
ONE-WAY ELEMENT
'u
U
Z
~
en
en
l&l
'up
I
I
a:
- I
I
I
I
I
X'"
DEFLECTION
b) TWO-WAY ELEMENT
Figure 3- 40
Resistance-deflection functions for large
3-59
~eflections
i
~I'"
I
:r
1111111
Figure 3-41
II IIIII
Determination of ultimate support shear
I
3-60
Ultimate Unit Resistances for One-Way Elements
Table 3-1
Ultimate Resistance
Edge Conditions and Loading Diagrams
".
."
L
"
"
j' "
L/2
'Ru
l.!/2
ru
Ru
ru
p'
~w-
t
I
.
~_._-
L/2 '
L/2
".
L
LI2
.
"
..
"'
-.
'
L/3
,
.
_.
..
L2
4(MN+M pl
L
iMN
=7
MN
Ru
R, u.
=~
"
/2
1(2' "'.
" I
L/3
I'
:~
Ll3"
...
"
i'
.'
..
3-61
S(MN .. Mpl
ru
,f
2 (MN" 2M pl
L
.,
.t
4M p
L2
.- ..
-~'~~,
Ru
L/2
-.l
L
4 (MN+ 2M pl
"
"
if
r.I
~
SMp
=7
"~
';
ru
Ultimate Unit Resistances for Two-Way Elements

(Symmetrical Yield Lines)
Table 3-2
Edge
Conditions
" Yield Line

Locations
Ultimate Unit Resistance
Limits
"
'\
Two adjacent
edges supported
and two edges
free
II
Three edges
supported and
one edge free
II
I~
.
.... ...
Four edges
supported
3.
3 <,
L
< - 2
,
y:S H
5 (M VN + Mvp)
y2
OR
6H M HN + (5M HP - MHN)Y
L 2(3H-2y)
5 (M HN + MHP)
. ' II 2
OR
2 MYN(3L-ll) +IOllMyp
H2 (3L -4x)
5(M
vN+M vp)
y2
L--l
'~
, .
6LM vN + (5M vp-M yNh

H2(3L-2x)
.1--4.
::I:
OR
t2-1
'"
y :S H
r!;
co
5(M HN+MHP)
112
"
xIl,;;;,:,:.J 3
I
:S L
OR
4 ( MtiN + MHP)( 6 H - y )
L2 (3H -2y)
~,
3)----<4
II
L
< - 2
5(MHN +MHP)
x2
OR
8 (M VN + M VP )( 3 L -
5( MV'N + M vp )
y2
OR
8(M HN + MHP)(3H .y)
II )
H2(.3L - 4 x)
.8
IGID3
--t-_ .3
:I:
3'4
I L
H
y:S 2"
L2( 3H - 4y\
-----
-~
--
Table 3-3
Yield I=ine
Locotions
Edge
Conditions
Ultimate Unit Resistances for Two-Way Elements

(Unsymmetrical Yield Lines)
Limits
,Two adjacent
,edges supported
and two edges
free
.
. ...
-- -
.-
xS L
Same as In Table 3- 2
~El;.;;,z::~1 !
.'
yS H
..
.. .
...
~.
. ..
..
'
w
,
Pi
H
.r
'"
Three edges
supported and
one edge free
L
x< -'2
t-2--1
{~3<,
ySH
rl,
/3
; 3>----<4
/
2
v r-
L
x<- 2
"
Four edges
supported
IDJ]~
--t-_ .~
3
:I:
X2{3H-2Y)
OR 5(MYN3 + Myp)
y2
I' ,
(5MVp - MVN2) (X, t X2) t 6 MVN2 L

OR
H2 (3L-.2X, - 2 X2)
I MHN I t MHP).(6H- Y)
. ",.-'" 3
51 MHN' t MHPI! OR 5 (MHN3 t MHP)

X,2
X22
!!.
- 2
:r
(MHN2t MHP){6H-Y)
(L-X)2 (3H-2Y) -.,
\
(MVN,tMvp){6L -X, -X2)

(MVN2t Mvp){6L-X,-X2)
y2 (3L- 2X, -2X2)
OR (H-Y)2(3L-2X,-2X2)
5 (MHN' + MHP)
OR
X,2
5
y<
OR
I MVN' t,Mvp)
yr "
OR
5'(MHN2 t MHP)
xl
5( MVN2 + Mvp)
Y2 2
(M HN1+ MHP)(6H -YI -Y2)'

(MHN2 + MHP)(6H-Y,-Y2)
X2(3H-2y,-2Y2)
OR (L-X)2(3H-2y,-2Y2)
Post-Ultimate Unit Resistances for Two-Way Elements
Table 3-4
Edge
Conditions
Yield Line
. Locations
,
Limits
t2--t
,\.
0
'.
'"
~
Three edges
supported and
one edge free ,
- .
'r-'--<
Four edges
, supported
'
Irs:J3
..,....
_.. . .J..._...:.
-'.j
x< H
2 MVN/H
i~
..'
--
..-.
~~._...
.. :
'
)/i:.2 .
... -;_ . . .
8( MHNt MHP) /L2

2 MVN/H 2
~(
x < HI2
.
8 (MHN +Mtip
._.
MVN.t Mvp)
If;2.
"'
..
y < LI2
.
--.
.
2
. 8 (MHNt MHP)/L
x> HI2 .
y> L/2
..
..,
2 MVN/H
..
y> L
_.
2 MHN/L2
-,
~.
.,
:I:
lin-.~r.
.Y < L/2
..
"
,"-
- x>. H
B3
2
- ..
.-
'I. : , y> i./a
--
y< H
r--=-1
.-: I
2MHN/L
, {Lj,;:~i;J~
x> H .
'1 . L; I
-r . '>,.
2 MVN/H 2
"
{t-;;,:,:.J]
.
x < H
E:J
Two adjacent
edges supported
and two edges
free
Unit Resistance
Post - Ultimate
.8 ( MVN +
M~~) /L 2
8 (MH~t
MHP)/H 2
Genera 1. and Ultimate Def1 ecti ons . for One-Wai.El ement s
Table 35
Edge Conditions and LoodinO DiOCJrams

.
f
f
LI2
1
~
f
f
L/2
r
...j
L/2
"2 ton
e max
.
(Ll2) ton e
,
L
"2
(Ll2)tan e max
'2
2" ton
ton e
e max
(Ll2) ton e max
2" ton e max
ton e
(Ll2) ton e
.1..
L/2
. Ultimate
Deflection. Xu
~ tan'e
'
"
Maximum
Deflection, Xm
t
,t,
LI2
L/2
-.
,-
(L/2) ton e
(Ll2) ton e max
-I
L ton e
L ton e max
'I
f/2
L/3
i!'
f/2
L/3:: L/3
"
L ton e
L ton' e max
-
,.
t:
(L/3) ton e
'.
.1
.. -
(Ll3)tane max
3-65
General, Partial Failure, and Ultimate Deflections for

Two-Way Elements
Table 3-6
Edge
Conditions
Yield Line
Locolion
lim!(.
Suppor
Portial
Maximum Detlectl;)n, Xm
..
(O'<Xm<XI)
(X, < Xm < Xu)
Failure
Deflection
Ultimate Deflection I Xu
Failing
O.f1ecti(
X,
X,
.,
EJ~
x ~'H HionSy
Two adjacent
edges supporled
and Iwo edges'
free
f"",
H ton Sy
y ~ L LtonSH
Three edges
supported and
one edge free
E:J
H
{C5J
-'>3
I .: I'
x ~ H H ton Sy
.
'L
y<-2 Yton Sy
L ton SH
2
y~~
H
x';2 x ion SH
~
B3
,
Four edges
supporled
}----< '
y Ion
Ely~ (H
.
xionSH'
-!)
tanlsy- tori '(
..xton Sinax
..
.ylonSmax
I~~~H~
H ton Ely
(~-x) tan[SH -ton'~( !oxn)~r~

L tonSH
2
.
(
to;'SH~
ytonSy'
H-y ) ton, ~Sv-ton-I (2y/L)
H ton Sv
'2
L X ) ton,~SH-ton-I (2x/H)
tonsv~
xionSH'('2-
U::S:J';1
-- B
~--'---~
H tanSmax
. ~:
' . -.(tonsmOx)]
HionSmax xton
maxt(L)t
-x on ~Smax~ton,
x/H
xtonSmax
,,1
"
L tonSmax'
~
',-I( !onSmal)]
LtonSmax y!anSmox+ (.
H:yltan emax- ton
y/L
H tonSmal
.,
L
. ~
_1(IonSmal~
HlonSmax donSmal t('2,xlton
Smox-ton
x/H
L tonSmox
2
ytonSmax
ltonSmax
I
. ~
(!ons max)]
Y.lonSmalt(H-yltan Sma.-ton-i 2y/L
2
H tonSmal
2
xionSmax
HtonSmax .
xionSmal+(L)
'2' x Ion ~Smadon-i(tonSmax~
2x/H
2
L
H
..
--
H
x ,-2
- H lonSy
,2
~~~~Y~
L ton SH
x,;H x ton Sy
w
,
~.
y,;L y Ion Sy
~.
x10;' SH ( L - x! Ion [sw ton-I(

.
{C2J]
I
'"
'"
x'; H xlon SH
'L
y';2 y ton Sy
y,k. Lion SH
"2
2
Lion SH
2
Hy) Ion ~SY'Ionl ( !OnSH~
ylonSy' (22y/L )
ylonSmax
L tonSmal .
2
LlonSmax
mal)]
'2 -yI ton ~Smadon-I (tonS
2y/L
ylonSmal+(H
2
L
H
Table 3-7 Elastic and Elasto-Plastic Unit Resistances for .One-Way Elements.
Edge Conditions ond Loading Diagrams
f
f
L/2
f.
1:
:t
L/2
"
I
~
~
f L/3
.:j
8MN
L2
ru
16MN
3L.
Ru
12MN
2
L
ru
8MN
L
Ru
Ll2 t
~
L/2
ru
f/2 f/2
LI3
--
(
L/2
Ru
L/2
L/3
ru
Elasto - Plastic
Resistance, rep
Elastic
Resistance, re
J:
Ru
Ru
3-67 .
"
--
Table 3-8 Elastic, Elasto-Plastic and Equivalent Elastic Stiffnesses

-for One-Way Elements
Elasto- Plastic Equiv.Elastic
Elastic
Edge Conditions and Loading Diagrams Stiffness,
K. Sti ffness,K ep Stiffness, KE
f
.
:t
L/2
L/2
LI2
L/2
-,
..
-
L/3
fl2
f/2
L/3
L/3
48EI
48EI
t:
185EI
L4
384El
5~
160El"
L4
I07EI
48EI
L3
I06EI"
" 1.3
L/2
384EI
5L4
L}
f
L/2
L:
"
384EI
5L4
384EI
L4
384EI
5L4
307El"
192EI
L3
48El....
L3
192EI"
L3
8El
~
. -
3EI
L3
56.4 EI
L3
* Valid only if MN = Mp
-* Valid only if MN < Mp
3-68
--
SEl
l4
3EI
L.3
56.4El
L3
Table
3~9
Support
S~ears
for One-Way Elements
'I
Edge Conditions arid

, Looding Diagrams
f
f
t'
'I
L/2
Support Reactions. Vs '
L/2
-,
{
,
J:
.'
5ruL
-8-
R. Reaction
3r uL
-8-
1'6
ru L
Ru
ruL
'f
Ru
Ru
16
5 Ru
II Ru
R. Reaction
,
1
,
-
'f/2
L/2
'.
.1
..
L/2
L/2
'
L. Reaction
L. Reaction
II,
L/2
2
Ru
'I
ru L
. fL/3
f/2
Ll3: L/3 t
, 2
..
.
369'
Table 3-10 Ultimate Support Shears for Two-Way Elements (Symmetrical Yield lines)
Edge
Conditions
- Yield Line
Locotions
limits
Horlzontol
sheet, V.H
Vertical shear, V.v
Two adjacent
edges supported
and two edges
free
x S
y S H'
I.
J .
B3
Four edges
supported
'.x <
_L
-
'
-- --.3
{(::},~:J3
I
I
L
(6-!.)
L
3r u y
3ruH(I(3 -
3ruL(2-~).
t)
yS -
.5
3ruH(I-~)
3r ux
3ruL(I-~)
2(3-~)
3r u y
,2(6.~)
.~
'~
,.
~)
..
:r---< ,
{L;,;;~;:;J3
3r ux.
1.
(6-~ )
Pi
Three edges
supported ond
one edge free
yS H
t2-i
.....
....,,
3ruL (2-
It:;;;::,:.J 3
I
..
3ruH (2-
3rux
x S L
2 (3-
3ru y
~)
4;
Table 3-11
: 'Edge
Conditions
Ultimate Support Shears for Two-Way Elements

(Unsymmetrical Yield Lines)
Yield Line
Locations
Vertical shear, VaV
Horizontal shear, VaH
Limits
Two adjacent
edges supported
and two edges'
free'
-'
""
.....
"
Some as inTo..~~ 3-10
Some as in Table 3-10
xIL,,;,;,:JJ
I -, I ._
L
Y.
"" .... 3 < ,
.'
A
-,
I'
"
3>----<4
Four _edges
supported
'Irrm~
':I:
XI
. < L
x2 - 2'
YI
3' 4
L
s 2'
Yz
:s -H2
H
s 2'
3ruH(.2L-XI- X2 )
6L- XI'; x2
3ru x (2H-y) - ....

6H-y
.-
--t-_ .>EI
I-
..
~
5
2'
, -L
t-=-t
>
- -
-I
'2
3xI ru
< L
..
,-
x2-
I[J3.
'
,-
"
H
::r.
s !i
L
XI ~2'
Three edges
,
supported and
one edge free
-;
'I
M
H
r :
\
--
'2
..
..
3rux ( L -'x )(2H -yl

,.:
l'
..
~H-y
.;
3 ru XI
--
_ 5
.
~
3ru y (2L":XI -X2)

6L-x.- x2_
3rux2
3r u (H-y)(2L- XI-X2)
6L-xl -x2
3ru(L- x }(2H-YI-YZ)
6H-YI-Y2
.3ruY
,~
-'-5--
3ru X (2H -YI -Y2)

6H-YI-Y2
,
-,
3ruYI
5
3ruY2

,DYNAMICALLY EQUIVALENT SYSTEMS
3-16, Introduction
In dynamic analysis, there are only three quantities to be considered: (1)
the work done, (2) the strain energy, and(3) the.kinetic energy. To evaluate
the work done, the displacement at any point on'the structure under externally
distributed
concentrated lo~ds must be" known.
The strain energy is equal
to the summation of the! strain energies in all the structural elements which
or
may be
in hending,
involves, the
structure.
tension, compression,-shear or torsion.
e~ergy
The kinetic ene~gy
of translation and rotation' of all the masses of the
The actual evaluation of these quantities for a given
under dynamic load would be complicated.
structur~
However, for practical problems,
this can be avoided by using appropriate assumptions.

;In most cases, a structure can be replaced by an idealized (or dynamically
equivalent) system which behaves. timewise in nearly .the same manner as. the
actual structure. The distributed masses of the given structure are lumped'
together into a number
of
concentrated masses.
The strain energy is assumed
to be stored in several'weightless springs which do not have to behave,

elastically; similarly, the distribJted.load is replaced by a number of
concentrated loads acting o~ the concentrated masses. Therefore, the e--~
quivalent system"consists merely' of a number of concentrated masses joined
together by weightless sprihgs and subjected to concentrated loads whicp vary

with time.
Tpis concentrated mass-spririg-l9ad system is defined as an
equivalent dynamic system.
,Although all structures possess many degrees
of'free~om,
one mode usually
predominates in the response to short duration loads; -chus ,: for all practical
purposes, this one mode may be considered to define the'behavior of the structure and the problem can be simplified by considering a single-degree-offreedom system whose pr6perties are those of the fundamental mode of the
structures. A single-degree-of-freedom system is defined as one in which only
one type of motion is possible 'or, in other words; only one coordinate is
required to define its motion .. Such a system Ls shown in Figure 3-42 which,
consists of a concentrated mass on a fr'ictionless surface attached to a: : -,
weightless spring arid subjected to a concentrated load. A single' displacement

variable x is sufficient_to describe its motion. The' material presented herein will be limited to single-degree-of-freedom systems only.
Many s t ruc ture s, however, exist which can ' not be adequately described by the
first vibration,. particularly when cons i de r a t Lon of dynamic strain is ne~es
sary. For these 'situations, a two- (or-more) -degree-of-freedom analysis may be
required . . Procedures are presented in ,section 3-:19.2 for performing these
'ana Lys e s , .
Two fundamental methods are available for treating 'simple systems subjected'to
dynamic forces. The first of these methods is concerned with
solving the
,
differential equations of the system by either classical, numerical or :,:
graphical means. The second meth~d of analysis 'and chart ;olutions dep~nd on
solutions ~hich have been determined ,by the use of the first method and'ar~
approximate solutions to the problems in hand. There is a .third method which
may also be very useful in vibrational problems; this involves ,the energy
co
equat.Lon .
3-72
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
In the following paragraphs the design factors used to determine the equivalent dynamic system that is used to analyze structural elements are defined
and the methods used to obtain these factors are discussed.
3-17. Dynamic Design Factors

The values of the mass and external force used in the equation of motion
(Equation 3-1) are the actual values only if all the elements of the mass of
as
the structure experience' the same force and, consequently, move

a unit, in
which case, the entire mass may be assumed to be concentrated at its center of
gravity.
In other cases:, the assumption of uniform motion of the .entire mass
cannot.be~made without introducing serious error.' This is true' for members
with uniformly distributed mass which ..bend or rotate under load. In such
cases,
member.
the motion of the par'ticles of mass varies along the length of the
Beams, slabs, etc., with such distributed mass actually have an
infinite number of degrees of freedom; however, such structural elements can
be represented by an equivalent single-degree-of-freedom system.

In order to define an equivalent one-degree system, it is necessary to
evaluate the parameters of that system; namely, the equivalent mass ME' the
equivalent spring constant KE and the equivalent load FE'
The equivalent
system is selected usually so that the deflection of the concentrated mass is
the same as that for a significant point of the structure.
The single-degree-
of-freedom approximation:of the dynamic behavior of the structural element may
be achieved by assuming f defIes ted shape for the element which is usually
taken as the shape resulting from the static application of the dynamic loads.
The assumption of a deflected shape establishes an equation relating the
relative deflection of all points of the element.
The accuracy of th~ comp~ted deformation of the single-degree~of-freedom
system is dependent on the assumed deflected shape and the loading region.
For example, in the impulsive loading realm, if the assumed deformed shape for
a simply supported beam is taken to be a parabola, then the exact solution
will be obtained for the ,deflection of the beam.
In the'quasi-static loading
realm, however, the static deformed shape gives the exact answer.
For blast
resistance design, however, the differences in either a static deformed shape
or a first mode approximation is negligible and thus either way is permissible . . Usually, though, the static deformed shape is easier to use as it
covers both symmetric and asymmetric deformation.
To permit rapid design of structural elements subjected to dynamic loads, it

is convenient to introduce design or transformation factors.
These factors
are used to convert the real system to the equivalent system. -To obtain them,
it is necessary to equate the relations expressing the kinetic energy, strain
and work done on the actual structural element deflecting' according to the
assumed deflected shape, with the corresponding relations for the equivalent
mass and spring system.
3-73
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
3-17.2. Load, Mass, and Resistance Factors

3-17.2.1. Load Factor
The 1oadfactor is the design or transformation factor by which the total load
applied on the structural element is multiplied to obtain the equivalent
concentrated load for the equivalent single-degree-of-freedom system. If the
actual total load on the structure is F and the equivalent load is FE' the
load factorK L is defined by the equation
3-41
The load factor is derived by setting the external work done by the equivalent
load FE on the equivalent system equal to the external work done by the actual
load F on the actual element deflecting to the assumed deflected shape.

For a structure with distributed loads;
L
r p(x)o(x)
where
dx
3-42a
0max - maximum deflection of actual structure
p(x)
O(x)
deflection at any point of actual structure

length of structure
rearranging terms
L
rJ p(x)(x)
3-42b
dx
o
where
(x) -
3-43
O(x)/omax
and is called the shape function.

NOTE. The shape function, (x) is different for the elastic range and the
plastic range andtherefore the load factor, KL, will be different.
For example; the shape factor for a simply supported beam with a uniformly
distributed load, in the elastic. rangers is defined as
3-44a
while for the plastic range
(x) - 2x/L
x < L/2
3-74
3-44b
For a structure with concentrated loads
3-45a
WD -
r-l
r t h concentrated load
where
or -
deflection at load r
i-number of concentrated loads
rearranging terms
i
3-45b
~tF~r
r-l
where the shape factor is defined as
r ~
i
~
3-46
or lOmax
r-l
Again there is a KL for the elastic range and a KL for the plastic range.
However, for a single concentrated load located at the point of maximum
deflection (i.e. the center of a simply supported or fixed-fixed beam, or the

end of a cantilever beam) r is equal to one for both the elastic and plastic
ranges and therefore KL is equal to one for both ranges.
Values for KL for one-way elements are preserited in Table 3-12. Equation 3-41
through 3-46 were used to calculate these values. An example calculating KL
is shown in Appendix A.
3-17.2.2. Mass Factor
The mass factor is the design or transformation factor by which the total
distributed mass of an element is multiplied to obtain the equivalent lumped
mass of the equivalent single-degree-of-freedom system. If the total mass of
the actual element is M and the mass of the equivalent system is ME' the mass
factor KM is defined by'the equation
3-47
KM can be obtained by setting the kinetic energy of the equivalent ~ystem
equal to the kinetic energy of the actual structure as determined from its
deflected shape ..
For a structure with continuous mass
L
1/2f
m(x)[~o(x)J2 dx
3-75
3-48a
TM 5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22 .

natural circular frequency
where
m(x)
distributed mass per unit length
rearranging terms
L
f m(x)2(x)
3-48b
dx
,I ~.
where' the shape function (x) is based on the deflected shape of the element
due to the applied loading and not to the distribution of the mass. Since the
deflected shape of the element is different for the ~lastic and plastic
ranges, (x). and therefore KM. will also be different.
Using Equations 3-47 and 3-48. values for KM were calculated for one-way.
elements with constant mass.
These values are shown in Table 3-12.
For a concentrated mass system,
1/2
where
i
L
r-l
3 -.49a
r t h mass
number of lumped masses
rearranging terms
3-491;>
An example of calculations for finding KM can be found in Appendix A.

3-17.2.3. Resistance Function
Resistance.factor. is the design factor by which the resistance. of. the actual
structural element must be multiplied to obtain the resistimce of the equivalent single-degree-of-freedom system.
To obtain the resistance factor,
it is necessary to equate the strain energy of ~he structural element, as
computed from the assumed deflection shape. and the strain energy of the
equivalent single-degree-of-freedom system. If the computed total resistance
of the structural element is R and the equivalent total resistance of the
equivalent system is RE then the resistance factor is defined by the equation
3-50
3-76
Since the resistance of an element is the internal.force.tending to restore

the element to its unloaded static position, it can be shown that the resistance factor KR must always equal the load factor KL.
3-17.3. Load-Hass Factor
"
The load-mass factor is a factor formed by combining the two,basic transformation factors, KL and KM, It is merely the ratio of the mass factor to the
load factor, and it is convenient since the equation of motion may be written
in terms of that factor alone. The equation of motion of th~ actual system is
given as
3-51
'F-R-Ma
and for the equivalent system,
3-52a
which can be r e-wr t t t en as .
,
or
3-52b
3-52c .'
where
load-mass factor
3-53
and
Me -.effective,total mass of the equivalent system
".
""
when expressed in terms of the unit area of the element, Equation 3-52c can be
written as
Values of load, mass andlload-mass factors are presented in Table 3-12.

Equation 3-53 ,was used ,to calculate the load mass factor.;
Instead -o f., computing. the: several-factors above, the load-mass factors in the
elastic and elasto-plastic ranges can be determined by relating the primary
mode of vibration of the1member to that of an equivalent single-degree-offreedom system. In the plastic range, it can be assumed that neither the
moment .nor the curvat.ure vchanges between the plastic hinges under increasing
deflection. This behavior results 'in a linkage action, consideration of which
can be used to evaluate the effective plastic mass as follows:
In Figure 3-43, a portion of a two:way element bounded.by the support and the
.
'
yield line
is shown.
The equation of angular motion for this section is
.", .
where
en
3-55
summation of moments
1m
mass
mo"~nt
of inertia about the axis of rotation

.3-77
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
e" -
angular 'acceleration
Substituting in equation
3-56a"
where a is the acceleration.
Dividing through by c
3-.56b
Since the second term is the resistance R
3-56c
and the load-mass factor KLM for the sector shown is
3-57
where c is the distance from the resultant applied load to the axis of
rotation. L1 is the total length of the sector normal to the axis of rotation
and M is the tota1.mass of the sector.
When the. element is composed of several sectors, each,sector must be con-
sidered separately and the contributions then summed to determine the 10admass factor for the entire element.
KLM - L(I m /cL 1)/M
3-58
For elements of constant depth and, therefore, 'of constant'unit mass, the
above equation can be written in terms of the area moment of inertia I and the
areas Avof .t.ha "individual sectors.
r.'
3-59
Table 3-13 gives the load-mass factors for the elastic and elasto-plastic
response ranges for various two-way elements. The-values given in the table
apply for two-way elements of uniform thickness and supported as indicated.
Also if there are operri.ngsvLn the element,- .they must be compact in shape and
small in area compared to the total area of the element.
.
Figure 3-44 gives the load-mass factors for the plastic response of various
two-way elements.
The load-mass factors are a junction of support condition

These two-way elements must conform to the following
and-yield line location.

limitations:
'(1)
Element must be of constant thickness.
'(2)
Opposite support must provide the same restraint so that a symmet-
.,
rical yield line pattern occurs.

(3)
Any openings must be compact in shape and small in area compared
to the total area of the element.
3-78
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
3-17.4. Natural Period,of Vibration
by numerical methods or
design charts (both methods are described in Section 3-19), the effective
natural period of vibration is required. This effective natural period of
vibration, when related to the duration of a blast loading of given intensity
To determine the maximUm response of a system either
and a given structural resistance, determines the maximum transient deflection

~
of the structural element.
The effective natural period of vibration is

3-60
the effective unit mass
where
KE
the equivalent unit stiffness of system
The values used for the effective mass and stiffness for a particular element
depends on the allowable maximum deflection.

elastic behavior,
When designing for completely
the elastic stiffness is used.
In all other cases the
equivalent elasto-plas~ic stiffness, KE, is used. The elastic value of the

effective mass is used for the elastic range, while in the elasto-plastic
range the effective mass is the average of the elastic and elasto-plastic
values.
For small plastic deflections (8
2), the value of the effective
mass is equal to the average of the plastic value and the equivalent elastic
value.
The plastfc effective mass is used for large plastic deflections.
3-79
---+~ K,O,V
R=Kx
R .......- -
Figure 3-42
~F
Typical single-degree-of-freedom system
I
3-80
'i
AXIS.OF ROTATION
e.
F
C.g.
AXIS OF ROTATION
'l'IELD LINE
b) SECTION
a) PLAN
Figure 3-43
Determination of load-mass factor in the plastic range
3-81
1.0
0.5
N
d5 0.8
0.4
w
a:
u,
Wo
Ww
a: Il.L.a:
-~
d5ll.
S
~0.6
I-C/l
0.3
a:W
~C)
w
wo
a:w
u.1-a:
d5~
Oll.
W~
I-C/l
a:C/l
Ow
ll.C)
ll.0
ll.0
~W
~W
C/llC/lZ
C/l'lt
C/l,
0.2 wJ:
C) ....
W~ 0.4
C)
0<1:
W..,
0:>0
W ...
,.,~
,.,0
,..J
..J;('
IN
;:;.,j
0.1
;(' 0.2
...0
....I
....
:>0
0.5
0.5
0.6
0.65
0.7
LOAD-MASS
FACTOR KLiol
1
Figure 3-44
Load-mass factors in plastic range for two-way elements
3-82
Table 3-12 Transformation Factors for One-Way Elements

,
Edge Conditions and Loading Diagrams
..
f
t
L/2
"
'I
to
.
L/2
1
~
L/2
L/2
t
1 '
L/2
L/2
.L
!/2 f/2
L/3
L/3' L/3
Load-Mass
Factor
KLM
Elastic
0.64
0.50
0.78
Plastic
0.50
0.33
0.66
Elastic
1.0
0.49
0.49
1.0
0.33
0.33
0.58
0045
0.78
0.64
0.50
0.78
0.50
0.33
0.66
1.0
0.43
0.43
1.0
0.49
0049
0.33
0.33
0.41
0.77
0.64
0.50
0.78
0.50
0.33
0.66
1.0
0.37
0.37
1.0
0.33
0.33
0040
0.26
0.33
0.65
0.66
0.24
0.33
0.24
033
0.52
0.56
0.60
0.56
Elastic
Elasto- .
Plastic
Plastic
Elastic
Elosto .
Plastic
Pla-stic
.
1.0
0.53
"
Elastic
Plastic
-I -
,
Elastic
Plastic
Mass
Factor
KM
Elastic
ElastoPlastic
Plastic
f
L,
Load
Factor
KL'
Plostic
L'
,1
I
..
. Range
af
Behavior
Elastic
Plastic.
"
Elastic
Plastic
'.
3-83
,
0.50
1.0
.1.0
0.87
1.0
Table 3-13 Load-Mass Factors in the Elastic and Elasto-Plastic Ranges for Two-Way
Elements
Elastic and Elasto - Plastic Ranges (Support Conditions
'Value
of L/H
Support Conditions
Two adjacent
edges supported
and two edges
free
OJ
I
I
On. Support Simpl. Two Support. Simple Thre. Support. Simple

All Support. FId Other
Supports Fiud Other Support. Fiud Other Supports FI..d All S~pporll Simple
.-
.ALL
0.65
"
0.66
--
...
0.66
.
.'
e.
.-
-lIti <0.5
ex>
.".
Three edges
supported and
one edge free
OJ
I. I .
L
Four edges
supported
03
I
I
L
'.
0.71
0.77
0.79
.
L
L
.5s.L/HS2 0.65 -0.16 ( 2H-1) 0.66 ;O.l44(i"H-I) 0.65 -Q186(2H -I)
LlH~2
0.65
0.66
.
0.65
L/H=I
0.61
0.61
0.62.
L
,ISL/HS2 0.61+0.16 (H-I)
LlH
0.61+0.16(~
0.71
0.77
--
0;79
--
L
0.66-0.175 (H-I)
--
: 0:66
0.63
0.63
I-
-I) 0.62+0.16 (
0.78
~"I )
,
L
0.63 +0.16 ( H -II 0.63+0.i6
0.79
(~ -I)
0.79
1M
5-l~OQI.NAV.FAC
P-397/AFR 88;22
DYNAMIC ANALYSIS
3-18. Introduction
iJ~.
,
'
I)
", ., ,:;
1."1
,.,
I .
..
.,
"
.:
Structural-elements must develop an internal resistance. sufficient to maintain
all motion 'within th~' limits of deflection':prescrl.bed' for 'the pa'rtic\ha~' ,

design. The load capacity of the member depends on the peak strength d~v~l '
oped by the specific member (see Chapters 4 and 5) and on the ability of the
member to sustain its resistance for a specific .though r e La t i.ve Ly s ho r t i pe r Lod
of time. This section describes the methods used for the analysis of structural elements subj e,cted, to dynamic. loads "a!,d,'1::h,e,s,e elements are d Lv Lded into
three groups, namely: (l)f~lements,wh~ch"respondto,~he pressure o~ly (low
pressure range), (2) eJem~I\ts,whi ch. r,espond, to" pressure - time relationship
(intermediate-pressure design range) 'and (3) elements which respond to the
impulse which corresponds to the high pressure design range.
,,
The method of analysi~,is~~dit.fere!'tfor the groups of elements. Those
elements that respond to pressure'only (this is still a pressure-time rela-,
tion) and those that respond to pressure-time relationship may be analyz~d'
using either numerical methods or design charts,
~hile
elements that respond
to the impulse are analyzed using either design charts for large deflection or
an impulse method for designs with limited deflectip,ns.
The method of analysis employing numerical teph~iques provjdes a solution .that

is obtained by a step-by-step integration, and is generally applicable 'for any
type of load and resistan~,e function. This method, of analysis i.s presented in
this section. Also presented is the result of a systematic' analysis of
single-degree dynamis ~yste~s ~o, ,several idealized loadings plotted in nondimensional design charts.
3-19. Elements Which Respond to Press~re Only and Pressure-Time Relationship.

3-19.1. General
To analyze these" elements ,I the true magnitudes for the .,pressure-time relationship of the applied blast' ~loads"must' be known, The de ce rmj.nat Lon of the-
dynamic response of these systems is accomplished using numerical techniques

or design charts which relate the dynamic properties of the element (natural
period of vibration, resistance, and deflection) to those of the blast
overpressures.
~l
3-19.2. Analysis by Numerical Methods

The numerical method of'a~alysi~involve~:~:tep~by-ste~'integrationprocedure, starting at zero time, when displacement and the velocity of the system
are presumably known.
The time scale is divided into
sever~l.:discrete
intervals, and one progresses by successively extrapolating the displacement

from one., time st a t i cn to, tp~ next. As the time interval in, the sequence of
time is reduced.. _i.e., aSjt~he number of;discrete.'.intervals,.~s increased, the
accuracy of the numerical method is improved.
3-85
'.
TK 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88"22
3-19.2.1. Sing1e-Degree-Of-Freedom Systems

As stated previously, a single degree of freedom system is one in which only
one coordinate is essential to define its motion. The equation of motion for
the single-degree-of-freedom system shown'in Figure 3-42 can be expressed as:
'I',
3-61
'F-kx-'"cv-Ma
when c - damping constant
,
There are several methods that can be used to nUmerically integrate Equation
3-61, but the two procedures applied to this problem will be the average
acceleration,' and the acceleration- impulse extrapolation methods.
'.',.:
3-19.2.1.1. Average Acceleration Method

at any time
In the average acceleration method, the velocity and displacement
,
t are expressed
~s
v t, - vt_l + 1/2 (at +
at_l)~t
3-62
~t
, 3-63
x - xt_l + 1/2 (v t + vt_l)
Substituting Equation 3-62 into Equation

3-63,
, -
': .
x - xt_l + vt_l ~t + 1/4 (at + '~t-l) ~t2
3-64
Substituting Equations 3-62 and 3-63 into 'Equation '3-61, we have

t
F - k [xt_l + 1/2(vt + vt_l).Hl
c[vt_l + 1/2 (at +
at_l)~t]
- Ma 3-65
Equation 3-65 can be simplified to

1
a m + (1/2)c
~t
+ (1/4)k H 2-
- c (vt_l + 1/2 at_l
~[
F' - k ~Xt_l + vt-l
~t
+ 1/4a t_l ~t2)

3-66
~t)l
The integrating procedure can be summarized as follows:

Step 1.
At t - 0: Compute: a o using Equation 3-61 and specified values

'
for xo(t - 0); vo(t-- 0), and F(t -'0),
Step 2.
Increment time:
Step 3.
At-t
t +
63.
Step 4.
~t)
+ At:
t - t +
~t
Compute aCt
"t
+ .dt) using Equation 3-66, v (t
using Equation 3-62 and x (t - t +
~t)
using Equation 3-
Repeat steps 2 and 3 until some specified time or until the

maximum displacement is
rea~hed.
3-86
1M 5-l300/NAVFAC,P-397/AFR 88-22
It should be noted that it x (t - 0) and v (t - 0) are zero, then the system

will not move as long as F (t - 0) is zero; however, if F (t - 0) is not zero,
Equation 3-66 will give an acceleration and motion will start.' Thus the
system of equation is self'starting and requires no special starting provisions.
:.
I
The procedure outlined above for an elastic single-degree-of-freedom system"

can be easily extended to I accommodate elasticplastic behavior.
To do so,
Equation 3-61 is re-writt~n'to include the restoring force R which replaces

the spring restoring force, -kx , Equation' 3-61 becomes
F
R - cv - ma
3-67
Substituting Equations 3-62 and 3-63 into Equation 3-67, the following
equation for acceleration \S obtained:
1
m + (cAt)/2
t.,.
0
[,"
""1 / 2]J
3-68
"
Unlike Equation' 3 - 66,' Equation 3-68 has a non- l'inear term

the displacement x at time -to
Therefore,
R: 'and
it depends on
instead of using the direct integra-
tion approach as in the previous case; a predictor-corrector method is

utilized. Briefly, the displacement x at time t is estimated (predicted) and
then corrected and convergence of this procedure can be obtained in a single
iteration if the yaLue of At is' small enough. The step-by-step procedure is
outlined as follows:
I
Step 1.
At t - 0: Compute at (t - to) from Equation 3-67 and the' initial

conditions.
Step 2.
Increment time:
Step 3.
At t - t + At:
Step 4.
Compute vt and xt from Equations 3-62 and
Step 5.
Compute R,
Step 6.
Compute at from Equation 3-68
Step 7.
If you are in th~ predicting pass, return to Step 4, i f in the ..

correcting pas s vse t xt-l - xt, vt-l - vt, at - at-l and go to Step
,
t - t + At
Set at - at-l (t
1 - 0; initially)
"
'3~63
2.
3-19.2.1.2. Acceleration Impulse Extrapolation Method

Suppose the acceleration of the system is defined by Figure 3-45a. The
acceleration impulse extr~polation method assumes thatthe actual acceleration
curve can be replaced by a series of equally spaced impulses occurring at to,
tl' t2' . . ., tn' as shown in Figure 3-45b.
The magnitude of the acceleration impulse at tl} is given by
3-87
3-69.
.
where t- tl', - to -,' tz - tl - ,
, - t n - tn_l' This is shown in Figure ,3 - .t.
45b, Since an impulse is app Lt.ed-at; -. t n" there is a discontinuity in the value
of velocity at tn' In the time interval from t to tn_i' the velocity is
constant and the displacement varies linearly with time. The velocity and
displacement thus obtained are .shovn in f~gures 3-45c and 3-45d.
,
"
"
Suppose ,tn-and t n + indicate the time immediately before.and after the

application of the impulse at tn' and let v n- and ~n+ ind~cate respectively,.
the velocity at t n and t n+; these two velocities are related by the following
equation:
3 - 70, ~
The relationship between xn_l and x n and between x n and xn+l are given by:
~ - ~_lvn-(At)
)- 7la
~+l - ~
3-71b
vn+(At)
Combining Equations 3 - 70 and 3 - 7.1 .the three successive dd sp Lacemenus., are ..

r e La t ed by.; '.
r
l~
I
..
'
'.
. ',~+l -.Zxn,- ~-l + an(At)Z
3-72
.....
This i~ the basic Irec.urrence . . f ormula fo r .the acceleration impulse ex t r apo La- .
tion method. Once the values of x at tn_l and t n are known, the value at tn+l
can be directly computed without resorting to a trial and error procedure.
"'
ij
It i~ necessary, however, to use a special procedure in the first time
interval because. at t - O. no value of xn_l is available. Two different

procedures may be used. The first assumes the acceleration varies linearly up
to the first time station. in which case. the displacement of the system at
that time can be expressed as:
3-73
The second procedure assumes that the acceleration is constant during. the
first time interval and is equal to the initial value. This assumption
results in the following expression for Xl:
3-74
It should be noted that Equation 3-73 has to be solved by trial and error
since al depends on Xl' This trial-and-error procedure can be avoided by
taking the .value of al to be f(t)/m instead of the exact value of [f(tl) R(tl) lIm. In Figure 3-46a if a o' - O. a o is equal to a o'/6 and in Figure 3-.
46b if a o and al .are appro~imately equal to each other. the value ao'/Z may be""
used for a O " .The recurrence formula is directly applicable for the evaluation
of x2' x3' <:: ~n+l wheneve r the acceleration is a continuous .function. ,When
there is a discontinuity in the acceleration,' this equation can still be used
I
but not before some modifications are made to reflect this discontinuity.
In
Figure 3-46a there is a discontinuity at t 4 which occurs at the end of'the ."'
time interval At. Under this condition. the value of an used in the numerical
3-88 .
procedure is the average value at discontinuity, namely l/Z (a4' + a4") for
The
a4'
In Figure 3-46b the discontinuity occurs within time interval, t.
correct value for a3 in this procedure is:
3-75
When there are more than"two discontinuities, this procedur~ becomes cumbersome and it is more convenient to replace the given acceleration by a smooth
curve. Equation 3-73 must be used if there is zero force (and hence zero
acceleration) at zero time, for in no other way can xl be determined. If
acceleration at t
is~not
zero,' Equation 3-74"may be used without appreci-
able error, provided the force does not change greatly.in the first interval.
The tedious method of numerical analysis is made somewhat easier if the
computation procedure is set up as shown in Table 3-14.
In the first time
interval, the value used for the acceleration, a o' -depends on the forcing
function.
If the value
the forcing func~ion is zero at time zero, then a o
of
is taken as one-sixth of ai, 'where a, is the ratio of the value of the forcing
function at t, to the mass of the system tao - f(tl)/6m]. When the value of
the forcing function is not zero at time zero, and if the values of the
forcing function at times t-O and t-t l are approximately equal, then a o may be
taken as (Po-Ro)/Z. The recurrence formula (Equation 3-7Z) is used in the
other intervals.
It may be necessary during the computational procedure, to increase the value
of t so as to reduce the number of time intervals. In Figure 3-47, for
example, the forcing function varies linearly after time j. For the next time
station (j + l)st,the value of ~t, can be increased (~tz - Z~tl for example)
without introducing any errors in the computations.
In such cases, caution
has to be exercised when using the recurrence formula. In Table 3-14, the
value of ~t changes after the jth step, to ~tz - Z~tl" In the (j + l)st step,
xn_l should be the value of x for the (j-l)nd step and x n will be the value of
xn+l for the (j-l)st step.
3-19.2.2. A Two-Degree-of-Freedom"System
~i
A two-degree-of-freedom ~ystem 'is shown in Figure. 3-48 where the coordinates

defining the configuration of. the system are Xl and X2. The equation of
motion for each of the two masses can be expressed as follows:
Fl + RZ
Rl - Mlal
3;76a
FZ
MZaZ
3-76b
RZ
Equation 3-76 can be rewrittenras:

al
Fl/M l + RZ/M l -'Rl/M l
3-77a
aZ
FZ/MZ
R2/M2
3-77b
The integration procedures described for a single-degree-of-freedom system can

also be applied to two-degrees-of-freedom systems. In the average accel.eration procedure, if the equations are placed in the same form as Equation 3-61,
i.e., if the acceleration at time t are written in terms of displacements and
velocities at time t -
~t,
then two equations are obtained which must be.

3-89
TH 5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22 .
solved simultaneously for aland a2' In the other numerical integration

procedure, the recurrence formula (Equation 3-72) applies to each of the two
displacements independently.
,.
3-19.2.3. Damping
The effects of damping are hardly ever considered in blast design because of
the following reasons:
(1).
(2)
(3)
Damping has very little effect on, the first peak of response which, .
is usually the.only cycle of responsethat is of interest.
The energy dissipated' through plastic'deformation is_much greater
than that dissipated by normal structural damping.
Ignoring damping is a conservative approach.
If damping has to be considered in

pres~ed
analysis, however, it should be ex-
~n
as some percentage of critical damping.
For free vibration, this is
the amount of damping that would remove all vibration from the system and
allow it to return to'. its neutral position. Critical damping is expressed as
..
2kM
where
-r :
stiffness of the system
mass of system
3-78
1,-
The damping coefficient, c , in Equations 3-61 and 3-67 is expressed as a

'.percentage of critical damping, Cc r' For steel structures, c should be taken
as 0.05C c r and O.Ol'C e r for reinforced concrete structures.
3-19.3. Design Charts for Idealized Loadings
,"
3-19.3.1. General
The response of single-degree-of-freedom systems subjected to idealized blast
loadings is presented in the form of non-dimensional curves. In order to
utilize these.response charts,. both the blast loads (pressure - time history)
and the resistance-deflection curve of the structural system are idealized to
linear or bilinear functions. Methods for computing these idealized blast
loads are given in Chapter 2 while the methods for computing the resistancedeflection functions as well as converting the actual system to an elastic or
elasto-plastic single-degree-of-freedom system have been presented in previous
sections of this chapter.
The response of a structural system subjected to a dynamic load is defined in
terms of its maximum deflection Xm and the time tm to reach this maximum
deflection. The dynamic load is defined by its peak value P and duration T
while the single-degree-of-freedom system is defined in terms of its ultimate
resistance r u' elastic deflection XE and natural period TN. Response charts
relate the dynamic properties of the blast load (P and T) to those of the
element (r , X, TN)' that is, Xm/X E and tm/T are plotted as aTunc t Lon of. ru/P
and T/TN.
Response charts have been.prepared for simplified loads as well as for the
more complex bilinear loadings. The simplified loadings include triangular,
3-90
rectangular"step load wit,h finite rise ,time, ~riangular with rise time and
sinusoidal pulse. The id~alized triangular loading is utilized in the
analyses of acceptor structures. These structures are subjected to the
effects of unconfined explosions, such as free-air or surface bursts or
partially confined explosions in donor structures which are fully vented. On

the other hand, idealized instantaneouslY applied or gradually applied flat
top loads are usually encountered in the design of roof elements of acceptor
structures. : These structures,are subjected.to
v~ry
long duration loads
produced by,Nery large.explosive quantitie~. The t!iangular loading with a

rise time is similar to the previously mentioned triangular load except that
it is an equivalent loading produced by the blast traversing an element. The
sinusoidal loadings is usually associated with the vibrational type of load
rather than ,blast induced,input. The bilinear loading is utilized in the
analysis of containment structures which allow partial venting of an explosion
and in the analysis of, acceptor structures where.reflected pressures clear
rapidly around the structure.
~'.
The effectsiof damping have not been included in the preparation of the
response charts.
In the design of the blast resistant structures, the first
peak of response is usua l-l.y the only cycle .of response that is of interest
since the maximum resistance and deflection is;attained in that cycle.
Damping has very little effect on this first peak and consequently, neglecting
damping has negligible effects on maximum response calculations.'
3-19.3.2. Maximum Response Of Linear Elastic System To Simplified Loads
To obtain t~e response of a linear elastic system, it is convenient to
consider the concept of the dynamic load factor. ,This factor ,is defined as
the ratio of the maximum dynamic deflection to the deflection which would have
resulted fr~m the static application of the peak load P, which is used in
specifying the load-time variation. Thus the dynamic load factor (DLF) is,
given by:
DLF
3-79a
,I
where
static ;deflection or, in other words, the displacement
produced in the system when the peak load is applied statically.

'J
maximum dynamic deflection

Since deflections"spring ,forces, and stresses in an
elasti~
sy?tem are all
proportional, the dynamic load factor may be applied to any of these to determine the ratioof dynamic to static effects. Therefore, the dynamic load
factor may~e considered, as the. ratio of the maximum resistance attained to
the peak load or:
DLF
where
3-79b
lr
maximum dynami~ resistance,

p ,- "peak load used in specifying, the load-,time variation.
For a linear elastic system subjected to a simplified dynamic load, the

maximum response is defi~ed by the dynamic load' factor, DLF and maximum
response time, t m. The dynamic load factor and time ratio tmlT are plotted
3-91
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

versus the time ratio T/TN for a 'triangular load, rectangular load, step load
with finite rise time (T r), triangular load with rise time, and sinusoidal
pulse in Figures 3-49 through 3-53 .
In many structural problems only the maximum value of the DLF is of'interest.
For the most prevalent load case, namely, the triangular load as well as the
rectangular and step load with rise time, the maximum value of theDLF is 2.
This immediately indicates that all maximum displacements, forces,'and
stresses due to the dynamic load are twice the value that would be obtained
from a static analysis for the maximum load P.
The above response charts apply for elastic systems.
However, the charts can
be applied to the entire elasto-plastic range if the actual resistancedeflection curve ,(two step system, three step system, etc.) is replaced by the
equivalent elastic system where tne equivalent elastic stiffness KE and the '
equivalent elastic deflection XE are obtained according to previously ,explained procedures.
In a typical design example, the pressure-time loading is calculated and
idealized to one of the simplified loads defined by P and T or Tr, "Astruc"
tural member is assumed and its corresponding dynamic properties are calcu-
lated. For a completely elastic response, the'values of r e and TN are

calculated while for a response in the elasto-plastic range, r u' XE and TN are
obtained. It should be noted that for a response in the elasto-plastic range,
the value of TN is calculated using the' effective 'mass which is an average of
the elastic and elasto-plastic values. Knowing the ratio of T/TN the dynamic
load factor (DLF) and the time ratio can be read from the appropriate figures.
The maximum resistance r attained by the structural member ,is calculated from
the DLF and the response time is obtained from the time ratio. If the
resistance r is greater than r e for a completely elastic response in 'the
elasto-plastic range, then the analysis'is not valid and the 'procedure is
repeated.
The maximum deflection is obtained from the resistance r- and the
stiffness Ke or KE.
3-19.3.3. Maximum Plastic Response Of An Elasto-Plastic System To Simplified
Loads
An elasto-plastic system may have an elastic or plastic response depending
upon the magnitude of the blast load. If the response is elastic, that is,
the member attains a resistance 'r which is less than its ultimate resistance
r u' then the charts of the preceding section are used. The response charts
presented in this 'section are only for the plastic response of members where
the ultimate resistance r u is attained.
'
The maximum plastic response of an elasto-plastic system subjected to a blast
load is defined by the maximum deflection, ~ it attains and the time, t m it
takes to reach this deflection. The blast load is defined by its peak value P
and duration T while the singe-degree-of-freedom system is defined by its
ultimate resistance r u' elastic deflection XE and natural period TN' A nondimensional response chart is constructed 'by plotting the ductility ratio
~/XE and the time ratio tm/T as a function of ru/P and T/T N. Response charts
are given for a triangular load, rectangular load, step load with finite rise
time Tr and triangular load with 'rise 'time in Figures 3-54 through 3-61, It
should be noted that for the'step load with finite rise time, the load is
3-92
TK 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397!AFR 88-22
defined by the rise time ;Tr and, ,consequently, the response curves are plotted
using Ti rather than T. "
- If 1
In a typical example, the pressure-time loading is calculated and idealized to

one of the simplified loads defined by either P and T ~r P and Tr, A structural member is assumed and is.. corresponding dynamic properties .(ru' XE, TN)
are calculated. Knowing.:the ratios of, ru/P and T/TN (or Tr/TN), the ductility
ratio Xm/XEand the time'ratio tm/T can be read from the appropriate figures.
The maxim4,deflection X]j, and ,response time tm can readily be cal<;ula~ed., If
the ductility ratio'Xm/X E or the maximum deflection Xm and corresponding
response time t are uns~tisfactory, the procedure is repeated.
'It should be noted that the value of the natural period of vibration TN,used
in conjunction.with the "response .charts varies according to_the magnitude of
the ductility ratio K,n/XE. For .sma Ll, plastic deformations ,(Xm/XE less than
5), the.calculation~,of TN is based on an average of the equivalent elastic
and plastic masses., Whe"eas,' for larger plastic, deformations (Xm/X E greater
than 5), the equivalent plastic mass is used to, obtain TN'
,"
.~
3-19.3.4. ~aximum Plastic Response Of,An Elasto-Plastic System to Idealized

Bilinear Leads
r
Response charts have been prepared for bilinear loads in much the same manner
as for simplified loads "1 However,' four parameters are required to define the
bilinear loading rather than two parameters which are required for the simplified loads: These a~ditional parameters greatly increase the number of charts
required for therap~d prediction of the dynamic response of an elasto-plastic
system.
However"
the computational procedures remain comparatively simple.
A bilineartload" is illustrated,in Figure 3-62c.

to define this load shape" namely:
Four parameters. are required
peak pressure of shock load (primary pulse)
peak pressure of gas load (secondary pulse)

duration of shock load
C2T
duration of gas load
It can be kee? from Figure 3-62c that the value of Cl will always be less than
1 while th~ value of C2 will always be greater than 1.
Response charts for the bilinear load are prepared in, the same way as the
simplified, loads except ,that, each chart is prepaied:for a given value of Cl
and C2. The ductility ratio Xm/XEversus T/T N is plotted on each chart for
various values of P/r u' tm/T N and tE/T (where t E is the time to reach the
maximum elastic defle<;tion xE)' Therefore, each chart contains three families
of curves. In addition, each chart contains one, two or three boundaries
which are formed by symbols. These boundaries delineate regions of each chart
where certain approximations'are preferable to chart interpolation .., These
approximations involve
modificati~n
of the
bili~ear
load for the various
regions. The loads considered for each of the regions are given in Figure 362 while the boundary for the various r~gions are defined in Figure 3-63.
3-93' ,
TM 5"1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

Numerous response charts are required for bilinear loads. Table 3-15 lists
the figure numbers of the response charts prepared for the selected'values of
Cl and C2. These response charts are presented in Figures 3-64 through 3-266.
To use the response charts, the first step is to enter Table 3-15 with the
required values of Cl and C2 . Locate the points in the table with coordinates
Cl and C2. The number in the box containing the point 'is the appropriate.
figure' number to use to solve the problem. ' If the point is not located in a
box having a number, the two or, more frequently, four numbers bracketing the
point are the appropriate figure numbers to use. "Interpolation for the; .
required values of Cl' and C2 must be 'performed. A graphical and mathematical
interpolation procedure .is presented in subsequent sections.
In a typical design, a structural member is assumed and the1idealized resistancefunction defined by r u' XE and K E can be 'determined along wi'th the
natural period. As previously explained for simplified loads; the equivalerit

mass used to calculated TN varies according to the amount of plastic deformation. Knowing the ratio of P/r u and T/TN, note'if the intersection point
corresponding'to these parameters, is located in.region A,B,C or D on the
response chart(s) for the required values of Cl and C2. The 'boundaries for
these regions are represented by a line of asterisks, solid circles, and solid
squares, as illustrated in Figure 3-63.

The final step in obtaining the solution depends on which, region of the
response chart(s) is applicable. These regions were established to reduce the
amount of calculations required for a solution by eliminating, where possible,
interpolation between charts.
Except for
one
of- the four regions ,:- the actual
bilinear blast load is replaced by a simplified load. Solution of the

response for these simplified loads will predict a solution which is within 10
percent of the' exact solution. Of course, the ,exact solution of the response
for the structural member in these three regions can 'be obtained by using 'the
required response charts and interpolating, where required, between charts.
3-19.3.4.1. Region A
This region is defined as the area to the left of the solid circles on the
response charts. If a chart does not have a line of solid circles, then
region A does not exist. Figures 3-221, 3-222 and 3-223 'illustrate this case.
In region A the maximum dynamic response depends primarily upon the total
impulse in the blast loading (area under the pressure-time curve). The actual
pressure-time distribution does not significantly affect the maximum dynamic
response because in these regions the durations T and C2T are small in
comparison to the response time, t m of the structural member. In this region
the response charts are not used and a solution is obtained by considering the
modified loading shown in Figure 3-62a: This, load shape yields the following
equations:
2
1
+
2
[:,][:01 '
3-94
3 - 80.
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
and
[-;-j ,[ :U ][ :n]
3-81
where,
3-82
3-19.3.4.2. Region B
This region is defined as the area in the chart to the' left of the asterisks.
If a chart has no line of .asterisks, then region B does not exist. Figure 365 illustrates the case :where region B does not exist.
In region B the maximum dynamic respo~se depends primarily upon. the gas load
which is, described by GlP and G2T. The shock load described by P and T is
neglected. This load condition is shown in Figure 3-62b. Therefore the
solution is obtained from consideration of a s LngLe i.t r Langu.Laz load. The
dynamic response is obtained from Figure 3-64 which like Figures 3-54 and 3-55
is for a ,triangular load, and will yield the same results. When using Figure
3-64 it must be realized that the P and T used in the chart are actually G1P
and G2T, respectively. I~ a typical design, enter Figure 3-64 with the
normalized parameters, GlP/r u and G2T/T N, and read the solution, Xm/X E, tm/T N,
and t E/G2T.
Figure 3-63 depicts region.B as .the area between the line of solid circles and
the line of asterisks. It should be understood' that the solution technique
associated with region B ,(i.e., neglect the shock load and use Figure 3-64)
applies everywhere to the left of the line of asterisks, including region A.
In other words, two solution techniques are available in region A.
3-19.3.4.3. Region D
'
This region is defined.as the area in the charts to the right of the line of
solid squares.. If a chart has no line of solid squares, then region D does
not exist. Figure 3-69 illustrates the case where regionD does not exist.
region D the maximum dynamic response depends primarily upon the shock load
which is described by P an~ T. The gas load described by G1P and G2T is
neglected. This load,condition is shown in Figure 3-62d. Therefore, the
solution is obtained from qonsid~ration of a single triangular load. Similar
to region B, the dynamic: response is obtained from Figure 3- 64 which is for a
triangular Load . Unlike!'region B, the parameters, P and T which describe the
load are .usedin the figure. Therefore, in a, typical design, enter Figure 364 with ,the normalized parameters P/r u and T/TN, ,and read.the solution, Xm/X E,
tm/T N and t E/ T.
~n
3-19.3.4.4. Region C
This is the region.in the charts which do not meet the definitions of regions
A, Band D. In most charts, region G is the area to the left of the line of
3-95
TM5--13ooiNAVFACP-397/AFR1 88-22 .
solid squares and to the right of the line of asterisks, as illustrated in

Figure 3-63. Region C does not exist in ,some charts, such as Figure 3-97
which have over lapping regions A and D.
In region C, both the shock and gas load 'must be,considered. Replacement of
the actual bilinear load with a simplified load, as done for the other
regions, will yield an incorrect solution. Therefore, in this region the
response charts must be used. If the required values of Cl and/or C2 do not
correspond to the response chart values,: interpolation "between response charts
wHl be required to obtain a solution.
In a- few cases one 'or two response
charts are needed, however, in general four-response charts are required for a
solution.
3-19.3.4.5, Response Chart Interpolation

Interpolation between'four response, charts will usually be required for region
For regions A, B, or D, if conditions warrant 'an exact solution rather
than the approximate solution usually used in these regions, interpolation
between charts,may,be required: Eitner a graphical of mathematical interpolation procedure may be employed. The'method selected ~epends upon personal
choice. A brief description of each procedure Lsip r e senced below and an '
C.
example of each is
giv~n
in Appendix A.
. '
'
Graphical interpolation requires asheet of log-log, graph paper. A convenient

size is 2 x 1 cycle with the single-cycle axis representing Cl and C2, and the'
two-cycle axis 'representing the, desired parameter(~/XE' tm/T N or tE/T) ,
called Y for ease of presentation. The appropriate figures to be used for a
solution are obtained form Table 3-15 for the required values of Cl and C2.
The procedure will illustrate the interpolation between four figures since
this is by 'far the usual case. For ,the values of P/r u and T/TN corresponding
to the structural system selected, determine the desired parameter Y for each
of the four figures. Organize a table in the same format as Table 3-16 and
enter each figure number and corresponding value of Cl, C2 and Y.
In the table, Cll and C21 are the values of Cl and C2' respectively, from
Figure 1. Likewise, C12 and C22 are the values of Cl and C2' respectivelj
from Figure 2, etc. The symbol Yl, is the desired parameter, such as ~/AE'
which is read from Figure 1. The symbol Y2 is the value read'from Figure 2,
etc. The interpolation is first performed for the required value of rand
then for the required'valueof C2\' That is, with C21 constant: grapl:.cally
interpolate on the log-log paper between points (Yl' Cll) and (Y2, C12) to
find Ya corresponding to Cl'and C21' as shown on Figure 3-267: Similarly,
with C23constaht; graphically 'interpolate between (Yi, C13) and (Y4 , C14) to
find Ybcorresponding to Cl and C23' also shown in Figure 3-267. The values
of Ya and:Yb are recorded in Table 3-16. Ei.nal'Ly , wHh Cl constant; graphically interpolate on the log-log paper between (Ya, C2l ) and \Yb,"C 23) to find
Y corresponding to the required Cl and C2' as shown on 'Figure 3-267. The
values of,Y is the solution.' Since there are three parameters to define the
response of-a structural, namely, ~/XE' tm/T N and tE/T; the 'interpolation
procedure is repeated three times, once for each parameter.
'
Mathematical interpolation requires the same initial steps as graphical

interpolation. That is, the appropriate figures to be used for a solution are
obtained from Table.3-15 and the required parameters 'are determined and"
3-96
entered into Table 3,16. Logar Lthmi.c equations are used to' obtain the values
of Ya Yb and Y. The value of~nYa is obtained from:
In('Y 2 /Yl ) In(
ci
ICll)
3-83
In( C12 I Cll)

and the value of lnYb is obtainedfrom:
lnY 3 4-
In( Y4 /Y3 ) In( Cl IC 13)
Using the values of lnY a' and lnYb; the value

_,r
lnY
lnY~
4-
3-84
In( C14 I CU)'

~f
lnY is obtained from:
(lnYb - lnY a) In( C2 IC 2l)
3-85
In( C 23 I CZ1)-
The desired parameter Y is then obtained from:

Y
e l nY
3-86a
The above equations us'e ' natural logarithms. Common logarithms can be used to
solve the above equation~ and then solve for Y using:'
Y
1010gY
3-86b
It should be noted that 'if C2 is represented by a response chart, then only

t",o charts will' be invor'ved', and only Equation 3 - 83 will app Ly.
3 -19.3.4'.6, Accuracy
The prediction error is less than 10 percent for the approximate solutions
obtained in regions A, B' and D. This'is true provided the recommended procedures are employed, that is, the actual load is replaced by the approximate
loads as shown on Figure 3-62 and the solution is obtained using the equations
provided for region A and using Figure 3-64 for regions B and Dc
Exact solutions are obtained from' the response charts if the required values
of Cl and C2 -cor r e spond to those given in the charts. This' is' t rue for all
four regions. Errors result from interpolation between'the'response charts.
The prediction error in ~/XE for region C, where interpolation between charts
is required, is less than 10 percent provided response charts bounded by the
dashed or solid lines on Table 3-15 are not used. The prediction error in
~/XE will range from 55 to 100 percent for solutions in region C, if the
point (C l, C2 ) lies in the area bounded by the solid line in Table 3-15, and
will
range from 10 to 55 percent or the area bounded by the dashed line. If the
solution involves charts from both sides of either, the dashed or solid lines.
the prediction error will range from 10 to 55 percent. The large interpolation error for these charts result from the big change in ~/XE for a small
change in P/r u which is peculiar to this chart,
3-97
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
It should be noted that the large errors descr~b~d above will always be on the
high side, that is, the predicted value of Xm/X E will always be greater than
the exact value.
Hence, a conservative design will always result.
In
addition, it should be noted that the prediction error in tm/T N is about half
the error in Xm/X E. .
"
While the errors produced from interpolation between the charts in Table 3-15
bounded by the dashed and solid lines is large, ,the .area in which they apply
is small.
As can be seen, region C is rather small on these charts.
for points in this small area where
interpol~tion.must be
performed.
It is
For the
remaining areas (A, B and D). the approximate solutions may be used rather
than interpolation. These

less than 10 percent.
approximat~
solutions will result in a error of
Solutions involving 0.920 < CI < 1.00 and C2 ~ 100 can result in very large
errors if interpolating procedures are employed. In this region, the dynamic
response is primarily due to the gas load. Therefore, Figure 3-64 ,is used to
obtain Xm/X E for the gas load. However, this,value is too low and should be
increased by 20 percent. The value of tm/T N corresponding to the increased,
value of ~/XE is then obtained from Figure 3-64.
3-19.3.5. Determination of Rebound
In the design of elements which, respond to,' the
p~essure
only and pressure-time
relationship, the element must he designed to resist the negative deflection

or rebound which can occur after maximum positive deflection has been reached.
The ratio of the required unit rebound resistance to the ultimate unit
resistance r/r u' such that the element will remain elastic during rebound is
presented in Figure 3-268 for a single:degree-of-freedom ~ystem subjected to a
triangular loading function. Entering with ratios ~/XE and t/T N previously
determined for design, the required unit rebound resistance r- can be read in
terms of the originally designed ultimate unit resistance r u' .To, obtain: the
rebound resistance for an element subjected to another form of load other than
the triangular loading fun~tion, a time-his~ory analysis such as the one
described in Section 3-19 has to be performed.,
It may be. noted that if' the loading is applied in a relatively short time
compared to the natural period of vibration of the system, the required
rebound resistance can be equal to the resistance in the initial design
direction. When the loading is applied for a re La t Ive Ly long time, the
maximum deflection is reached when the positive forces are still large and the
rebound resistance is reduced.
3-20. Elements Which Respoud to Impulse
-.".
3-20.1. General
When an element responds to the impulse, the maximum response depends upon the
area under the pressure time curve, (impulse of blast loading). The magnitude
and time variation of the pressure; are. no t. -important. The response charts
presented in Section 3-19, ,which are based on pressure-time relationship are
therefore not r~quired for these problems.
Instead, the element resistance
required to limit the maximum deflection to a specific value is obtained

through the use of a semigraphical method of analysis.
3-98

!
Consider the pressure-time and resistancetime functions shown in Figure 3-
269. The resistance curve depicted is for a two-way element with a resistancedeflection function having'a post-ultimate range.
From Newton's equation of
motion it can be shown that the summation of the areas (considering area A as
positive and area B as negative) under the load-time curves up to any time t a
divided by the cor r e sponddng effective masses is equal to the instantaneous
velocity of that time:
('
va
0
(f-r) dt
3-87
me
The displacement at time t a is found by multiplying each differential area

divided by the appropriate effective mass by its distance to ta'and summing
the values algebraically:
1'"
Xa
(f-r)
t] dt
[t a
3-88
me
In each range the mass is the'effective plastic mass :.

Time Interval
Effective Mass
Resistance
' ru
O:S t :S tl
tl :S t :S t m
.~
r up
- [KLM
~p-
J ~
[KLM:] ~p
Time tl is. the time at which. the partial failure deflection Xl occurs. and
time t m is the time at which maximum deflection
is reached
~).
Xm
For an element to be in equilibriwn at its maximum
(Xm<
deflectio~l
its impulse
capacity must be numerically equal to the impulse of the ~pplied blast load.
With the use of the foregoing equations, the expressions yhich define the
motion and capacity of elements subjected to impulse type loads, ~an be
defined. These expressions are presented for both large and limited deflectioncriteria. This criteria varies forthe.different materials. used in
protective .des Lgn . The.! criteria for each material is obtained from the
chapter that descri!?es the design procedures for that material.
Case 1 - large deflections. Utilizing Equation 3-88 and by taking moments of.
the areas under the pressure-time"and resistance-time curves (Figure 3-269)
about time t m assuming! that the unit blast impulse i b is applied ins tan.,
taneously at time t-O. and' that, time to reach yield t y is also close to zero.
the expression for the maximum deflection is
"
3-99
I
!
il
,.
"
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

: ib
JSn
r u tl [tm-tll 2]
-----
3-89
In,1
If moments of the areas are taken;aboutt l, then the deflection at partial

failure Xl' is
r u t12
3-90
Using' Equation 3-87 and summing the areas of t m and recognizing that the .
instantaneous velocity at t m equals zero ..
3-91
- 0
.~
Solution of the above three simultaneous equations is accomplished by solving

Equation 3-91 for t m and substituting this expression into Equation 3-89, and
solving Equation 3-90 for tl and substituting this expression into the
modified Equation 3-89. After continuing and rearranging terms, the general
response equation becomes
3-92
The left side of this equation is simply the initial kinetic energy resulting
from the applied blast impulse and the right side is the modified potential
energy of the element. The modification is required since the above.analysis
requires the use of two equivalent dynamic systems (before and after time tl)'
The modification factor ~/~ equates the two dynamic systems. If the'effective mass in each range was t~e same, ~/~p would equal one and the right
side of the expression would be ruJSn which is the potential energy .
.For one-way elements which do not exhibit the post-ultimate resistance range,
'or for two-way panels where the maximum deflection JSn is less than Xl'
Equation 3-92 becomes
3-93,
..
The above solutions are'valid only for what is considered large deflection
design since the variation of resistance with deflection in the elasto-plastic
range has been ignored. This limitation is based on the assumption that the"
time t~ reach yield t y and the .duration of the impulse to are small in
.comparlson to t rn .
4.
'
Case 2 - limited deflections. For elements which respond to the impulse with
limited deflections where the time to'reach maximum deflection tm'is greater
than three times the duration to of the load, but where the support rotations
are equal to or less than the established criteria, the elasto-plasticrange,
behavior of the element must be accounted for in determining the overall
3-100
1M S-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
response of the element to the applied blast load.

92 becomes
. 2
'b
For this case, Equation 3-
3-94
where rna is the average of the effective elastic and plastic masses and XE the
equivalent deflection.
When the response time.t m of an element is less than three times the load
duration to' the element will respond to the pressure pulse rather than to the
impulse alone. In this case the response of the element may be obtained
through the use of a r~sponse ~hart considering a fictitious pressure pulse as
outlined in Chapter 2. However, if the element's maximum. defleption is
greater than given in the response charts (ductility ratio ~/XE greater than
100), the response of the element may be obtained through use.of the semigraphical method of analysis as outlined in this paragraph considering the
fictitious pressure pulse. It should be noted that the resistance time
relationship uSed in the analysis to express the element's response should
include the elasto-plastic region.
3-20.2. Determination of Time to Reach Maximum Deflection

The time t m for each of thecases covered previously can be determined by
applying Equations 3-87 and 3-88 to the particular problem. The resulting
equations are as follows:
Case 1 - large deflections.
A.
Xl <
~$
ib
tm -
B.
~$
ru
~p
+ [
~rup
, ]
- ---- [i b
ru
2~rUXl] 'I'
3-95
Xl
Case 2 - limited deflections.

Since the variation of resistance with time is not known in the elasto-plastic
range, t m can only be determined approximately by assuming a linear variation
of resistance with time.
3-97
3-101
--
--
f /)
CI
&.l
f/)
oJ
:J
I(ln)
Q.
~
Q:
0
l-
&.l
oJ:
I(ln-I)
ce
IAl
Q:'
IAl
ce
oJ
..
IAl
tn-I
tA
U
U
ce
tn+1
tn-I
v:
IoJ
>
~
V;.l
I-
IAl
~
v~
IAl
->C
~~
>-
tn+1
(b) ACCELERATION PULSES

TO REPLACE THE GIVEN
ACCELERATION CURVE
(a) GIVEN ACCELERATION CURVE
:-
tn
TIMEO)
TIME 0)
'--
(In+l)
&.l
Xn-I
ce
oJ
Q.
VI
tn +1
TIME (t)
TIME (t)
(d) DISPLACEMENT
(e) VELOCITY
I
Figure 3-45
Acceleration-impulse extrapolation method

3 -102.
00
Z
0
...
Q:
III
..J
III
u
u
At I At
-e
tl
to
At
At
',-
tz
'.
t3
t4
,
0
TIME
--
( 0,)
00
...
0
03
At'
Q:
III
..J
III
u
u
At
At
to
tl
t
tz
t3
t4
TIME
(b)
Figure 3-46
Discontinuities in the acceleration curve
3-103
... .
. " .'
'
-...
,
,
,
tj
,tj OI
, TIME
Jjo2
tj+3
(tl:>
,<
Figure 3-47
Pressure-time function w1th two different time intervals
3-104
~'X"OI.VI
RZ=KzlXz-xI) ,......:..-...
toll
Figure 3-48
A two-degrees-of-freedom system
;.
3-105'
'.
2.0,....,....,........,....---..,.-....,....-...,--..,.-.,---....,........,........,...-..,._ _-...,
::r:::::':
. '1:
::
.... ..
.. r
.............!...
.. .
-.
::,1.:
.:::::: :::r
...o
.. ...
.... 1
.. t
..
::::r
If
-,:,
. . .1i.:... .:.:..:.i.:.:.:.I..
:. I. . :.. . .... :... .
~....
o
o
..J
.2
... :.:: :,"
...t....
:::\::::1-/:._::: :::.1
::
::::::;.;r::: .:.:: ::: :::: T
rI:::: :::::::::1::
::1::: .:::::. rrr
::r:"
:i:
.. [ :
"1. . . .
.. . .
; .. ,.
j_ .
:: ::::::. : : :::1:::: .
...
::tr~ :: L: ::::1:::: ::::~:t:.:::: .::: :::: .... =t

--: ":l' --+-L:::: - :::;:::: :::::~t:::: :::: :::. ~t
~:[:i ~.:'.
:::1:::. ....+- ::::::::t:f
_ j....;... -. t..; ..,.. ,1 +.+-
0.5 ..::
o_
0.05
.__..... - - ..
~
0.1
.-!
0.2
+.-:...
0.5
10
T/TN
(0)
Xm
tm
Displacement
Function
Triangular
Load
1.5
..
,i . .:: .r
.. ':
. ~ ..
.~
0.: ~::: . t!:.:t-ttl..::~T:.jti},
;.j.
"i'
0.05
0.1
0.2
0.5
TlTN
. . . . I ...
10
(b)
Figure 3-49
Maximum response of elastic one-degree-of-freedom system for

t ri angu 1ar load
3-106
..
2.0
r----------...."...---,--,---,--.....,..-.....,.......,..---,
, : ,.I.r
~rliTI
.II/:.!, .
:Ji.;~ .. 1: .
l
'0
.~
'0
~
o
o
..J
E
o
1.0 1'
\! .. 1,
!
I
; .. ': ' 1'" i'

! . Iti ?.. _ ,
,:L!:;:,li
..........+
.:...........
IL+
,IL
.2
II
1 .. .,. .. t..
i,: It. ... ...t~..-:.

.,./
..
. .... 1.
I,
L:'7!; . ... t+-~=J.;'. ,- J

.... 1r:.1~
......1--
: /.:'
I'
........; 1....
.... i:..;
I
1.......... i :
.;
; j..:..-. ... . !,. ~
.-
0.5
.. :
!..._....
I
, :.LL
'1 "'-"-" ... J....i-;...............
~'VFE" '1
-,
........' ...;.1 1.. +; ,
......,.!.j
-lj 11:
C.~::
.. :
c
,..
..
.; .....:::).:.- ......t+
..
~ ':i+', ::::" ' .::; .t ,..+- .::: :::T~
o =~ ~rf:f.
0.05
i:<: I: . ;:::L~. tfl
O.L
', !
, 2
0.5
0.2
10
T/TN
(0 I
:::::::t::.
,..1
.."'1"".-
.,!, ..
p l - - -....
"1"
2.5
T
I-
......
E 2.0
tm
Rectangular
Load
-I""
1.5
:I.
1 .
:! ..
:
1.0
.,
I
0T:r--t7n7:t~t~~~~: :1
0.5
0.05
0.1'
..
.. ' f '
0.2
0.5
Displacement
Function
,i
.,
2
10
TIT N
(b)
Fi gure 3- 50
. Maximum' response of e l a s t i c, one-'degr;:;e... of-freedom 'system for

rec t anqul a r load
' . :
3-107
2.0~------""'-""""""",,""'---r----:--------.,
....
.,
o
<>
If
...o
E
.0
c
--71
p-
1.6
. :
:.:" ..
"::.:::::: .. ::: .r., ~ :;~: ~ ~ ~;
...,.._._. _.. _._.',-+~-':' ..

..
Xm .
..
1.4.
...
o
Gradually
Applied Load
I
I
:1:::.:
.3
.!:!
Displacement
Function
.. i":
. ::"
1.2
1.0'--
....x_ ___'__
__'_..x.~
5.01"'".~-...,.....---....,.......,...--...,.........,......,..........--~-------.......,
._ _. __ __ _.__~~_-:...i.._ .._ .,__.. :. . .:.:.

4.0
..
.....
-.- -
-,
.......... :
3.0
...,.
.~_._.:.....~
.:
.._.._
--.c---,----c-- .. -.,
i_._....;.... ~.i_ .. ;~.~._._.:
~ __ :
. .... -... _-_.:.... _--_.:,_ .. -......
2.0
1.0L
_ _:::::::'-L_:::::::::::-JC:::::::===::::=o..c===-l
2
Tr'/TN
(b)
Figure 3-,51
Maximum response of elastic, one-degree-of-r'reedom system for

graduillY'applied l~ad
.
3-108
~i'?i;
1.5
'.
.J.:';
.... '
'.';.'
.1.
"
~.
..
,
,
.-
.~.~
.--
.. ..
~
" ..
.. ..
..
I
....
f -
.2
1.0,
u
.
,--I
,
If
- - - -.
.~
./ ~
,....
w
,
o
E
o
c
>.
Cl
...J
..
..
..
..
'.
..
..
- -
-,
.....
;
.....
'"
't:J
o
o
'.
.-
/1
-."
.- .
..
.,
"
t
'.
..
,
0,
~.
T/TN
Figure 3-52
Maximum response of elastic one-degree-of-freedom system for triangular

pulse'load
..
2.0
..
r-,
1.6
..
0
0
0
u,
1.2
L-
1\
. I .~
""- i
____
'tJ
w
,
,....
,....
0
. .
'-'
- t-
:.-1
0
>.
.8
II
.
.4; II - - - ..
'
.
I
,..
.
.
T /TN
Figure3-53
Maximum response of elastic one-degree-of-freedom system for sinusoidal

pulse load
0.5
0.2
10
20
0.7
0.8
40
1.0
10
5
llJ
X
.....
0.2
T
TrIangular
Load
0.1
0.1
. 0.2
0.5
XE
tm
ResIstance
Function
o rsplacement
FunctIon
10
20
40
TITN
Figure 3- 54
Maximum deflection of elasto-plastic. one-degree-of 7freedom system

triangular load
3-111
.,,
il
fo~
0.2
0.5
10
20
40
10
2
I .
2.0
0.02
T
Trlan9ular
Load
f:
Resistance
Function
1m
Orsplacement
Function
0.01
0.1
Figure 3-55
0.2
0.5
10
20
40
Maximum response time of elasto-plastic, one-degree-of-freedom system

for triangular load
3-112
-,
02
01
tJ:
05
'._
fU
20
10
40
cf-o.
/P =0.20
0.40
.0.60'
.,
50 ~>-"
~u,.EHJ'_
,. '.
EE:i~~
..~ .....
l~
.
_.
1.00
6.80
,~~q:.....::.
._ ,r"
'
..
r ~ __ ';r.
:::::
-."
"
/P '1.02~
fU
20
"1
~.
.'
+
.
"
- 1.05::
10
10:
ILl
,. "
'/'., .... ',.~ ........ 1+,

_I'..f :... -::-, ~;
... - -"
life ,Ii,
:liW
1+t
to_
~":"I.;::~
::'::..:::.:: I. 10.,'
..:~'"
~
....: "IF-" ".Ii ...
--
X
.....
:-::::-:i,;.1.20 .
l~~~~~:;t1.30~
i=
"
.:::;;;::::"
1.40~
';';
1.60:';
"
Ill!=
ffiE
.--
0.5
t=,
'-1-'-.
~., ~
,-!=C., ...
'n
T
Rectangular
Laa~
0.1
0.1
Figure 3-56
0.2
1.80
Elastlc:::C 2.00'
I'
n:
rul-~
L/!
xE
tm
Resistance
Functl~n
0.5
xm----lJ
Displacement
Function
10
20
40
Maximum deflection of elasto-plastic, one-degree-of-freedom

for rectangular load
3-113
s~s~~m
20
IOilll
O~.I_~!!
0.2
0.5
10
40
,r'
0,50
tilt"
0.60
1I11':HL.!1
0.80
1.00,
, 1.0,1
I-
......
..
E
0.2
l~ Il ................
"i
"
0.05
.,':
"10001=-,,
----
1,40,
,., '"I,,
~ I. 60 !
.2.00'
ReclanQular
Laad
1.15
'11.20 '
'Q
0.02
1m
Resistance
Funcllan
ur
Displacement
Function
~~
0.01
0.1
0.2
0.5
T/TN
Figure 3-57
1,10
0.1
10
20
40
"
Maximum response time of elasto-plastic, one-degree-of-freedom for

rectangular load
I
3-114
02
.
01
WI
I
20
10
B
<,
r
:
1.10
1.20
't---1,
w 2
.....
1.30 I-l'"'"
,...
1.50
-J
'-2.00
1\
..
0.5
~r-.
./
t--
V;
Tr
O. I
0.1
0.2
0.5
I--
l-
I
I
--
f-- f--
/\
:, --, <,
I~ I:'"
Xn 1-
f--,-ru/P=
1.02 I - 1.10 ,...1.20

1.50 r-
c-
71
"
2.00J==
1
:
I
I--T-
tm
Displacement
function
O.B I
"
I .
_I- -I .
:XE
Resistance
function
,
,
111
Gradually applie~
load
I '
ru I--'
Pt---
I
I
ll-
71\
./
"
~
/~
......... 1'\1\ l\ /;}~.
r-, r\'1\
1\1\
---t--
"
,,'
1\ I~
......
0.8
0.2
I
.f - - J. -'
r'\.
r-....
t- ~
1.80
"
.;- ~
20
I,
'I'
I
I~
I---L- ~-1- -- K-I---I- - - t - - _...1_ -- -- ~- ,-.I
1
I
'
I
,
I
I
....
1.05
I
'
II
ru/P = 1.02
I
10
f---l-I
I
I
8 10
20
Tr/TN
Figure 3- 58
Maximum deflection of elasto-plastic.

for gradually applied load
3-115
02
01
100
80
0.5
0.8 I
-
'\.
50
I
"
""Z_I
I'\+~o'
I,
'N2
~~-
1\
I"\..:
I
I
-, ~<'!
"Ir-,
I---l--I
'\.~/o
"",'(
, I
1--1--
I '
"!:
I"'\
i r-, \
*-"
1.0
1
I
I-I-
--1-"
I-- I-- 1-
,
I
1\
1\
,I
1\ f\ f--l\I\ I-,.r-
. I
1,u / P: I.Ol - I -I-
~f'-~.
~,~
1/1.05~\.
1\
~~l\
N
..
:
--+-I
I
f---t'u / P'
l.OO-,--
, I
I
I
0.5 f-~
'u
T/i
'-
'0.2 ' -
0.1
0.1
XE
Tr
f-
Gradually applied
load
I
0.2
Xm
[7
I, .
0.5
"71
:
f--.1I
tm
Resistcnce
function
'
i
I----:-r-
1\
1'.. "
~:+,'
I"
, I
-,
!
,,
'I
0.8
i
I,
"
I"
,-
1
_-:t-- -r
1--- -
i- i - ,
10
20
--1-- -1- -- .- . "
: i ' l\-
20
;
;
i
1
.0
~---.:..~<-:,,<>- , -I -11--
..:
.....
8 10
'\.
Displacement
1---+-
fundion
0.8 I
I
I
8 10
20
Tr/TN
..'
Figure 3-59
,.
Maximum response time ofelasto-plastic, one-degree-of-freedom system

for gradually appiied load
3-116
02
05
08 I
20
8 10
0.7.
T
1
II
II
II
1A
I
I
IJ
I .
1/
LtJ
X
.....
X
e
,
I
-II
I.00T.....
,/
/'/
0.5 /
1/
1/ /
//VI
"//V~
0.2
V~~t
I
V I
t--+-f-+
I
.I"
0.2
Figure 3-60
__
1.20
r-,
:
'V\ tL
, '" ~ ~y
rC-
I
I
-_
t n.-2.
Xm - - - -
0.5
Resistance
'lunClion'
0.8 I
Maximum ~flection of elasto-plastic,

triangular pulse load
3-117
T-
,
I
00
XE .
Triangularpulse,
I Ipa~ , , I .
1.60
I
I ,
ru -
~l/....+...
-+--
1m
Displacement
. 'I
. lunClion
8 10
r--
t-I
I
20
one-degree~of-treedom system
for
05
.
Q2
01
10
8
T
I
Q8 I
~
~ ~ r-;;:: . - -
..=
.....
1-- j-- l-
1.0
1-
0.8
0.2 l1,.'
'Vi<
i
I
.- .-
+- ~-
1
I
,--1-,-
I-
0.4
O.~
'u
I .
I .'
I'
; .
"71
fUlnelicn
"
~I
I
I .
XE
0.8
I-
~esislcnee
""
0.5
2.0
Xm
0.8-+=
1.0
Id
0.2
0.3
2.0~
Tricngulcr pulseiccd
. 0.1
0.1
'- '- I-
" ;:::~
l-
..
;
;
_:1_
0.6
I
I
0.5
. r ..
"r
I-
~ ~I--.
I
I
~.~+-- -1"-
~ .....
20
8 10
'u / P'
I .
.'.
L_
! ... .~
1m
Dis~lcepment funeticn
S'
1-':"'-
8 10
~-
i'
20 .
td /TN
Figure 3-61
Maximum response time of elasto~plastic, one-degree-of-freedom system

for triangular pulse.. load
I
3-118
P ,-_SHOCK LOAD
GAS LOAD
CZT
T CZT
REGION A: NEGLECT CHARTS
USE EQUATIONS 3-80 AND 3-81
REGION B: .NEGLECT. SHOCK LOAD

USE FIGURE 3-64
SHOCK LOAD
SHOCK LOAD
p
GAS LOAD
REGION C: BOTH SHOCK AND GAS
REGION 0: NEGLECT GAS LOAD
LOADS ARE SIGNIFICANT USE
USE FIGURE 3-64
APPROPRIATE FIGURES AND

INTERPOLATE.
Figure 3-62
..
Various billnear triangular loads
3-119
IE
T
Xm
XE
w
,
ReglonB
....
o
'"
Region 0
1m
Tn
T/Tn -
Figure \3-63
Regions of figures 3-G4 through 3-266. labeling of axis and curves.
e
Ir/r
flME or YIELD TO LOAD DURA nON:

':'"
aO
V"
~
S"
'7
-:" --:
0
--:
v"
'cP
'J'O'
-oJ'""po.P'
....,..
......
0 d' 0
V'
.,....,
0'
.~
.~
v'-
.....
:-\
....
1.1'
'....
.....
v'....
'0'0'0'0
J) fIJ
_1
d"
0 0
0
0
'0
1.1'
0'0'0'0
... V" V"
t-J
0 1.1' 0
If\
0
t'..)
P.PIl\ff\
r \
(
,.,
&
f\
u
><
'AI~
><
'"
W
S
'J'
Ill,
0
f-
U.
-'
u,
'I.
\.111'...111\/
L.J
~NJ
-'
L.J
>0
rZ
i=
u
I-I
'6'
w
:>:
~K~~
":0
.f. s
cf-
~'6
a
t:
o
..1
<.J
1.7
-MX,:T,,",'iI:r"AI,,~;I!"
1.5
_. I. J
:>:
=>
:>:
><
:>:
~u~~!um
o.71~;F~[;'-~
r>
/I/I/I/V
o. ~
.00 I
.002.00.1 .005
.01
.02
.0.1
.05 .07.1
, /H//.Y//V
.2.3.5.7
235
LOAD DURATION TO rUNDAMENTAL PERIOD, TIT N
Figure 3-64a
'"
Y'
<.0
-'
c-
-'
f-
:::DX
W'
....
....
'"
.,.,
6'
Q.
...,,
<,
...E
->
<,
2
f-
Maximum response of elasto-plastic, one-degree-of-freedom

system for bilinear-triangular pulse (Cl 1.000, C2 1.0)
10
1.1
0.93
0.81
0.70
0.61
'0.53
-c
z
=>
o
2
-'
c-
w
0
:>:
=>
:>:
><
:>:
u,
w
:>:
c:
TIME or YIELD TO LOAD DURA TlON.

000
000
000
'IT
o
0
0
0
o
o
__
_ """"<nUl.
'"
., I 1/1--. 11/ IN,r II /IN. lilA"
o
o
o
o
o
o
c-:
...z
<,
'::.
><
<,
E
>< roo
<>:
n,
z
o
-'
...z
;::
Ll
-'
L.
C\
,..,
'"
'"
.....
.
fit
e_J
<.>
:::t
'If
O.
Z
::J
u,
...oz
O. 6
Co
O. 5
o
f-.
t:
Ll
...J
u,
c:
... ~_.t,..._\.
tin.
:::t
~~>_._
::J
::f
sc
<i
::J
-R
:::t
sc
I\ - \
:::t
....
U./~
1\
0:J.o~~ ~ .~ ~
:::t
,J
0.7
;::
r==-. --'--- =f-=1=-f-=aE=~=1=Ww~t==I=$m

-
1 - - ----_..-
.-j--jc-+-J-.-
0.5
\0
20
'0
~o
10
100
200
JOD
~oo
700
1000
2000
JOOO
~ooo
LOAD DURATION TO rUNDAMENTAL PERIOD, T/T N
Figure 3-64b
Maximum response of elasto-iJlastic. one-degree-of-freedom

system for bilinear-triangular pulse (tl. ~ 1.000.'CZ ~ 1.0) (cant.)
toeoe
--
or
TiME
v
u'
'":'
<1'
V'
,.,
<1'
.'":'
YIELD TO LOAD DURATiON,

0
0
.~
'"0
'&
..
<1'
u:,
..
.'":'
'":'
U'
'IT
0
/
e-
S0<X:
SOD
200
w
.'-..
>(
z
0
100
'S!ll'\'!,' . y' ,,'

X A
\ I
.1'ir.L.L\,. .11/\ I v I
~I\'"
ell J
V W!K.l
' /, I Y.
II
1/\ OJi'"1Y'~I\ " , / / \/ \ IV
1,/1\ _V /1/1)1
1'\ ....'ljil. ..f\Jti:' tIl', . 1\/ l.L\ /\ /
~j
L\ f\
. \ 1\ 1/\ ,~L
II \
fI
II'
1\ V
IV 1.!' \ K'
J IV XLI\
I/IV
I/\lt':i: IV 'IVI,'II
.
~.
10
lJ
50
.0
....
w
'"
:\T\ . ["1\j)( I--'b"

'.x 11'\ 1\ .;
SO
I,L~
,~
20
,.0'"
z
0
;=
lJ
321,\',1<;.' ~'
L~l ,Y X
\0
~;
::>
"
::>
Yo if t
1\ 11\
1\
-VI\
,.
~..l,...L.::>..1'.
'
V- ill
\1
IN.V \/ \
'\
/ If ~
. ~V
'l:>.L
"N' :
bt
V'
~r--xf1l)r',vll
~ r"'\ \i "
[ \1
t:::!....
IX.
'!~
.>
C\
'1
6;~
S:,j-
l"X .
t"I"""
IX
KK
f'...
\>(
.... K <,
0:.....X.~ I'\f'.~
I
0:6'
r- - . . t'-!V
I) '):
1" V
\.1\
'!'Z'"IV
LX
~~ Y[L<; z
0.)
\/"--}'"
!\
4W y.."" .
\I,..lX Y. rx '>
ix bll2(Avlx /
J' 'Vt--.tliY'" ,Ytyf.l'/J 1'\
0.1
'1' ,
'~~
J/
/17"
.r~.LJL~
.._ j 'lL
,001
.002.003
.005
~lC~~ I)<K
L\ "\
~ II
Ifu I'\'-
r-
0: 0
J. s
I'
.f
r-
t\!bb(\ r\.Kv
Q -:;: >Q
K f>
Q<
P-L/:7f.r;
.0.
.02
//1/
03 .. 05.07.1
//Y/
.xl""'"
15
./
,)-<
1.3
I.'
I \
~1<t:1-. \~\
~
~~
'
J.7
X T"-
:t:x:)(~><\~~kC
~=!"'<t=H
I'L
p/ ru -
'"
,2.3.5.7
_ LOAD DURA'TiON TOTUNOAM[NTAL /,-[RIOD,
Fi gure 3-65
~'6
~'.J
J..
1'9
....2
<,
...E
0
0
oe
W
0.
AI X1/\ r-\r',J
J
JI,
1/-)
~O
..:', \ .\ \
>(
-c
:y--'tf
'" '" '"0

'"
~ X" \1\
~ \L~ V"\
,
<1'
:>c
::J
/\ 1
'"
0
<1'
0
0'
A I
J\.""
IV J IL\.. .il\ rJ't>.
I LY,
.\
A 'X
\.-'
--'
L.
W
-,
.\r,
.--'
L,
W
:.J'~
I'
;=
-0
u'
2.l
ITN
.: Maxi mum response' .of.e.1 as to-p 1as ti c , .one-deqree-o t-f reedom

system forbilinear-triangular'pulse (Cl = 0.681, ,C2'= 1.7)
.0
0.93
0.81
0.70
0.61
0.53
--'
....
L.
....0
z
;::
.j
L.
::>
::J
:::
><
<i
:::
4-
w
:::
.;::
'ciT
TIME or YIELD TO lOAD DURA nON,
,J
,., ,.,
V'
-:V'
,.,
0
.V'
V'
.J
"'0
V'
,.,v
0
"'0
-0
/
0'
u"
<i'
0.;.
0
V'
0
0
.... ....V'
Z
f-
<,
....E
a
.,.,
6'
'"
n,
...J

~,
r
2
"
r ,
CJ
ofZ
;::
u
f---
...J
"W
--'
,~
C\
::>
:>c
::>
y
:oF
><
><
<i
"-
:i
w
:oF
c:
..LJ....-L
__L-I.L-.L.JC_..-:"J
_ILl_JJ~-A
"~7LJLY+:J4-A4~
r
Jf//V/Y/
....
.002.00;
.005
.0 ,
/1"
.02
/l
0;
/1
~_I~J---l----.J
1/1
.05 .07
.,
.2
.;
.5
.7
.5
lOAD DURATION TO rUNDAMCNTAl PCRIOD, TIT N
Fi gure 3-66

system for bilinear-triangular pulse ICI = O.464,C2 = 1.7}
10
.-
,.,
v
v
,., ,.,
<1'
T1~(,O~ YI(,.~D !O'LOXD
.',
'0
"'<1' "',.,
'"0
.~.
0,.,
'oj'
oj'
c:
oj'
'dr,
DURAnON,
0
o'
'S
',j'
0
''''0
.0
/
e-
".r
-0
d'
e>'
oj'
'0
<1'
V'
'0
N
U'
0
N
0
Z
f-
<,
IWI
~/\
1~1
I \I I 1lLLJ..1
V'~
iT
z
a
..J
l_
W
.....
'"
'"
>-
'"
-s
'J"
...".
,-
-J
'"
:>'
'"
...'"
o
Cl
Z
--t't--,1'I+--\f-T\~lS
A----l\--
f-
,.a
z
a
Q.
lD
'"
w
X I XIX"r c:tl' 1\
30
Cl
'0
f-
-cr
6'
IJ'...
"f:'
u
a
a..J
...E
IV
10
f:'
Ll
IX
X IX I V X /
..J
l_
W
w
u,
.-J
"
:>'
'"
...o'"
:>'
=>
:>'
;(
~~n~~{-Ai~
:>'
sc
:>'
'"
:>'
:>'
i=
o 7 . G!--7f::lfV:t/~"
~'I;-'
0.5 . '
.
DO I
.002.003005
Figure 3-67
11~~7'
7f;LV-II
/f"._.A-.
A-,f--H-Yb.L,.LY'744L?h
/,V
10
TIME or YIELD TO 'LOAD DURA nON,

p
'",
59 0
oo-
'"
.V'
,.,
'0
'.1'
'",
0
'J .
'"
0
'&
0
p
.1'
0
..
'S
0
v'
0
'",
'",
tclT
0
0-
>v'
0
/
'"
0
".J.
'0
'0
'0
0
.1'
0
'" '"'" '"
V'
J 0 rNI~:>A-~d."kfl-::dA!=f~8td='lo!+
Lon
J
"E
"z
d'
'"
'/
10 0
..-- . . -
70
Ai7\.
;:::
U
LJ
L.
II'! I
V I V I V<W'..s
1\
Cl
W
a'"
...
-- ...
7J
'of
':6'
':0
.t
1<
~-J\-'J'
>.
1'-
I-
-J
).7
'~
L.
1.5
1.3
1.1
0,93
0.81
0.70
0.61
nlU
0.53
"Wtl4lq
W
Q
:,;
::>
:,;
><
""
::f
...
.05 .07
.\
.2
.3
LOAD DURA nON TO rUNDAMENTAL PERIOD.
Figure 3-68
.5
':7
TIT N

system for bilinear-triangular pulse (Cl = 1.215, C2 = 1.7)
w
::f

::f
><
4:
::f
L.
:::f.
c:
TIME OF YIELD TO LOAD DURATlON,

0-
"r-J
..r
.v'
,., ,.,
.p
'0
"'.p "',.,
'0
'...>
'"0
.p
'p
'0-
.p
-::,
.,.,
0
v'
0
.~
"0'
'ciT
0
"v'
'0
c1'
O.
0
0'
.p
0
v'
.p
0
0-
....
:.~t%tM*=*-fA--~J!.
.... 0....0
'"
.,.,
d'
f-
<,
--'
...E
6'
'/
><
<,
Cl
m~AJL-AJ ~
E
><
',,>
.s
:.:1
,-:::
-'
, ",'\ \1 IVlvoS'.7\3W
,~
w
0
ca
,...
...'"
..r,
a
>--
.=
10
u
w
'V 1\/ 1\ I
-'
L
W
:>:
~l
X,I:Ki11 J
1,7
15
1.3
::J
:>:
><
:
01
.02C)505 .07
,/ ..r/LV--L"'Y
,I
. 2 ' ,3
.5'.7
LOAD DURATION TO FUNDAMENTAL PERIOD. T/T N
Figure 3-69
Cl
<0
....~,~fh-i~~
1~7r/'
~O'
<'Ii
<.j
I\A

system for bilinear-triangular pulse (C1 = 0.147, C2 = 1.7)
5'
10
jo
<,
..J
:
:
::>
I. " '
:>:
0.93
0.8'
0.70
0,61
<
:>:
:>:
riME or YIELD TO LOAD DURATION,
..
v'
'",
soo
v'
'" '"
'!'
'0
',p
"'",
W";T',/"--lK--' '''I. -'.\ ..J...
,cW'( ", ..
SOO, ''\")
.;(
)
z
o
c"
if..'
'"
.....
..
v:.
'&
,p
0
u'
,-v' .... ~
\~.'
..'-'f':l'~'
\ /1\
'V
rxrx 1\
I' It;;
/1\1
'X'!' I~
I)(
\/
.li
100\J:~~\~- J\i\: ~-/ ~ ;, '/I~

so
'"
'"
r'
i..
z
o
....
u
w
W
',.,0
'0
0
/
'"
.~
'0
'0
rJJ
~tx
~I;
I~II
'"
.....
V'
.....
'"
'0
.....
0
~'T')
~Y\"
rJJ
'"
-'
/
~~
'".,
.
'6'
10~::
, j-
1\ I f.
'A~
K-Mro
-':0
~l<
..
;)J\\[V
~I
<.f>
<..1
)<
I.,
1.5
1.3
2
't'"':~:::-
o.s
!4-~~/1/
!~--,~
.001
.002.003 .OOS
.0,1
It
, ..........-
p/r" = 0;J>q
tm
~.Y./"""
.0203 . . OS .07.1
.. 2 . 3
,5 .. 7
TIT N
Maximum. response of elasto-plastic. one-degree-of-freedom
system for bilinear-triangular pulse (C1 = 0.100. C2 = 1.7)
. lOAD DURATiON TO rUNDAMENTAl PERIOD,
Figure 3-70
'"u,
....-c
zw
....0
"
\/1\11\ f.
'I-.A-
.1. 0
><
::l'
J:,s
~.
::>
::l'
:>
<.0
'yrv
....Z
<,
..:
u.
W
'0
0
,p
0
'..f
1Y~~I1\
'0
.t.
~/\1~
-'
'",
\l.'t-."''X=~~\~r:- ':/\ PI " / 1 / .

'\~.f\. k-\ 1-"",
.. f--\I
\~X -~P-\;r\-f, -~ .' . \71D1\'7.q,A~1 ",II
70
50
c.,
o
o
'"'
'...>
200 ,V\ _..J,,\\ '\ I " .L /..',.1/
. ,.J
W
\~'''t'!'
iciT
10
1.1
0.93
0.81
0.70
0.6\
0.53
L..
i=
u
w
L..
o.
~
:>
x
..:
~
L..
i=
TIME or YIELD ro lOAD DURA TlON.

"r-J
'v'
V'O
'J'
c:'~
'?""
0..
t?v" <?v>OOV'V'-lO
P"v"r.:l~//
C?s>
't-l
']%=-W-W---V-fV1 ,'"...
.. I
~
',.,.. ',.,0
''0'
'ciT
.~
'0
"'0
"':7YJ:YlY I A\
'0.
'0
'0
'0
..o
'"o
'--V+/..1 /
or
,.,
o,..,
,..,
'"
~"'/:'\
F\\bt=t~ft~.f=cF#=f:*=jj
I
>--
'"
<,
->'
VI\
'"E
'-.
~X
><
'/
V\J !'U IV
6'
',0
s.
o
u
W
-i
\I\l-}\h'YnTI \II\7l\'1~7\.. 1/
u.
W
,
....
'"
'0
30
',f
.. ~~~
>-
'6'
-'

_J
>-
'"
I-
o
W
...E
L-
20
-'fs;A'\=i'1~tlE'tt5~M~
,-o
z
o
>--
u
w
--'
. MJ>:"_A 'V \v\M..V
r..
w
1\1
\V 1 A
A
Ii\
'11\11/\/1\/1\
I/\j
I-
I~
11 Y
o
u
i=
Y \ noV-I X"!.'/'('-J I WI/,
LW
::f
::>
::f
=>
><
<
<(,
::f
L-
::f
w
::f
i=
0,5
.oo i
1,/
1/
.002.003 ,005
-1tt7'7Hn%lL
.01
,02
.03
.05,07
~
,I
,2.3
,5.7
LOAD DURATION TO rUNDAMENTAl PERIOD, T/T N
Figure 3-71

system for bilinear-triangular polse (Cl = 0.056, C2 = 1.7)
10
TIME or YIELD TO LOAO DURATlON .. ldT.
',..,
500
2 aa
J-
. 50
>-'
\0
.....
'"
0
'.,&-
,0
It \ 1/
\1\ AX ~,1\
~l1'
',..,
v"
0
1\
,x
)f
-.I
~ dl
\
/
I\,T
n:
'\
II
\ I 1\ X \
'\
,/-\ /,-,>
\'1
-V
V\ IY
1\
L 1 J ""
y
1/
v"
'0
<P
0
..J
I~IYII
y.\
~~ V
1\
~.
.....
'0
.....
<J'
'0
.....
0
v-
f\l.J\:rIV1 'I
d'
.,..,
~
-I
I)
'",
1\1
.,..,
l'Y~/lYoc-ru\
Ar~v
.t.
K A\.IX\ \K '''~
~r"Vkl<
, VO'
\:
<'6
f6tjz---J:4-L~
.002.003 .005
.0'
.02
.03
.2
... 3
'.5
.7
I.J
I. I
0.93
0.81
0.70
0.61
0.53
LOAD DURA TlON TO rUNDAMENTAL PERIOD, TIT N
Figure 3-72
-)

system for bilinear-triangular pulse {Cl = 0.032, C2 = 1.7}
L-
a
fz
a
;:::
t.7
1:5
'"
::>
~y
.05.07.\
u
w
1\
<.J
<,0
..J
./.0
r-Ir'
1'-
'""-w
~o
J
, \'IV
.,..IS'
;;:

'"
<,
1\ 1 f':I N 1Ai7't--
L..
:;
"\f-I-.,{j 1
J
'0
v'
.I 'JI IV IV I If\:
f-
~~
.
.. ~. "~i~~
1\11
r11\~%X=t~~\I'\~1r=K~l\;t'~c\~/~I\=X:1~V~"/~~~~J~lJ
iA '1r V i ' X J\ II /\ I 7'
,~/
'"
'\-
....
0
~
l~
1/\ 1\7[\
/\1'< , '1*'0)(
V\ !l\ V,\ l' \V VhI
K-J\-'I 1'1:
IJ
o.
''t,
X.X.7\ 71
A If\:: A~,-
'v
/\
f-
70 ;-f\,v
50"
IV \
',..,
'",
,I;:W'\:;>/
'\/ \
.-
.\V.
100
::
t;;.
'0
'"
~T~-\~,"'r:'V-'~- rr'\
1\7 IT T\:
~ 'f/1 a'X ,;-17
- 1\ / \1\; \V
1\
:::;
o
w:J
'1.1'
v"
s0Q.( ~
~
<,
,.., ,..,
v"
10
..J
L-
::>
:2'
:2'
L-
w
:2'
;:::
"NIL
p'vy.Jy.J
.~ 'v'
,..,,,,,.
'tJ; 'y.J
''!''o
~oo
f\ I
VI
.\
or YIELD
TO
LOAD DURAnON.
.~
'"p'
,v
IX I V
'",
'"
. $I'"
J'
'v'
\r
.~. ~
><
.x V\I /\1 / [\
100
f-
W
..J
L..
1 \L
IV A
y ... 1\/
f-
I /
It-
/1\
1)\
r-'
VI
ii'
lEV' ;\~]lQv
R'txff~-
0-,
L./
r\rrtj
~y
....
<
~
"'0
.~ 0.53
"f / y;,,v
:.:.j~~l7f~::-::
:::Y}'lXI~_
.001
.002 003
.OO~
.01
.. 02
.03
.05.07.\
.2.3.5.7
LOAD DURAnON,TO rUNDAMENT AL 'PERIOD. T/T N '
Figure 3-73
Maximum response of elasto-plastic. one-degree-of-freedom

system for bilinear-triangular pulse (Cl = 0.018, C2 = 1.7)
\0
..J

1.7
'.5
1.3
I. I
0.93
0.81
0.70
0.61
-
a
z
a
rv- ~l.,7t 1,-\1l<

/
T'j
7' / \ f"-.. ,
I/~ Y\"'/){ ~
-0.
_lI-l
t-J
lJ\
llv ,x
t..J
VVN !\
r\
,0
,V"
,0
IY
..J
I Y I
'0
..
_Vy
W
0
1\
'0
t.1'
r\1
IAlL .1\ I/tfKR"Ji\
~TArl
'0
'0
~. ~
1/\ \1/11
.A
f-
!I[
A >- f\
'0
1J
v'"
V\ /1\
z
a
'","
....
....
'""
'?
..,
.~
7\"
\II IVb( 1\11 I'll
..,
...
200
"-
'IT
0000000000
.ltK
><
=
..J
L..
w
0
::f
::>
~
=
TO LOAD DURA TiON, lEfT
TiME or YIELD
p
,00
,., ,.,
v'
',J
'v'
'..,..
"'..J' "',.,
'0
'"
"'';?t. \ I,.'o/,_!'S>L
zoo '\l\ _lL~~/-Y

<,
><
z
a
10 [)
1\
!\IX
j-,\-,I '\=ll"..--x--'
70
j\
t:
~\C
I,
,0
i.,
...,,
....
...,
N
'-'
,"
JO
;;::
20
1\
10
,X
\'1
1/
v \
\11
:>:
:J
:>:
><
'"
:>:
t'l
t\ f
1\
11\ 1\~/r.i II
0.5
.00 I
,..,
V'
..J'
N'
0
N
0
T,,:-rJ,C'CI''''''
f /
~ 'f\:j- ../ '\

f\-..J
I ~ I' ~
,.,.,
d'
V "f..../ \ i "-.-',.'vl+-lI-fHHA-\I
Z
0-
<,
"\ ;\J> ,.,.,

/
-'
'"
6'
co
l>:
~I
/ 1/
K,.
0J. J. /\t / (-~

\ Ii
Y X- ~ -,(1\
X 7'\
~N(
3\/
of
'J-
rv-: \
YI'-.j \,\ 1\
'9,\
1\7 "X/f-..Y
ltv'
\j::J .I
Y\
:;--1.
/\
~If
fl
~IK
X.
17
~ X\I Y
IX "II'
'6'
1'\
L\1'1 \/I\,d
/
1')\ M
'\ "
\5
,\,
I'-
II
'I
.f
11\ 1\ ,y
,f
IV hi /';10. D<
~[)<t?Qr>b<kJ>
~,L.'7-
.002 DO.! .005
A f
,f
c-.
'Ai
. f\
--..
.'~
oJ IX' "
' XiYl
..J: o
<'6 _
<s
rg; ~r>
~./
J);,;"I><' ~.x
1'\
~ X p<y ~k: ><;
/.5
",/
, I.j
r---\.<
[);~~.\ 1\
~1xZ
~~
p / 'r
.\
I. !
0.95
0.8 I
~f-1.:I
D,:;l.
V /
.01
/ /
.02
/'.-;
.05
.05.07
/ /. '/ '/y' /
.1
.2
.3
LOAD DURATION TO rUNDAMENTAL PERIOD.
Figure 3-74
1'-1)
)/
~
.5
,7
TIT N
Maximum response of el~sto-plastic. one-degree-of-freedom

system for bilinear-triangular pulse (Cl - 0.010, C2 - 1.7)
~
<[
1.7
-,
..J: s
,\ .
-c
0-
':0
20 '
7"7
"':11:"
1,'/ V V'){I'\
I~~ ~ 0<l!'''
"7
\I \
IX
\1
,X\ X" V ,'V l'vf\~~hl

~--'o lX V\ [>( I>: V f\ \I{ ~/\I/) ,I[\,
0.7
IA
'0
7\Y...:y "A
~z.~
'\
A;" /
".J.
~
X 'IV\. \I./!
\0 ~ IX ~.
r,
0
..J'
0
X I/'
,A,~Z[=:X y.
11\ 1/\ \ / II ~
A X 1\ j V /
X
,1\ 1/\ j\j I
':
d'
1\.
"-
-JIYs
7\
,
"<f' "V' ' 0

"
1\1/ 1\/ IV
j\
j\
-I
17\ k;i' \; 'I.
,0
r-.
/ \ /./ oJ"
1\ ' X , r ' \ 'I'
a
L
~r-\'
\l ,
1\...>/
YY.7\ 7 .
<: V\ I--
',., .,.,
0
V'
1\ 1/\ 1\ J '
SOCK
f\
,'T:',r \.
11;'1 W "'Y.\I/
~.'~
.'~
~-xC', Till'\; - " . "
><'"
'...>
10
0.70
0.61
0.55
=> .
o0Z
a
t:
u
w
...J
u,
W
co
:>:
:J
:>:
><
<[
:>:
k
a
w
:::E
;::.:
TIME or YIELD fa LOAD DURA TlON,

p
'",
'"'v- '"a
v'
u'
'v-
.-'.
,j)
'",
'vv-
;00
"c;-',--r J\
A - /,
~,,;~ \~\ (
X \j\
JOD
.,
~
II \ I \ J
/\ /
f-\-_",II \
200 .'~ . -A,(Xi~
~A -'x'l-~
-c
100
Z
0
70
t:
u
...,
r...,
...,
w
--'
w
.0
--'
'"
w
;::-
20
10
7
w
0
:}'
"
"
.l
><

'0
II'-.
./-"7 lLI-lr'
17
.002 ODS .005
a'
U'
'0
V'
0
r"
1\
i\i/
jl--lk
'"
/ r'.
~.
'" '" '"

U'
~.
II
V\'I)\
J.
'\
/\
<,
t---u
82
....E
tl
7.1
62
w
n,
3.,!
--J
II
'"
-., t-J\ I ')rl\
~/ \~V~ ~~
1\'
1\1);
I ~ ~ 'f...'1 ~
<: IV -s: X
y 'Nif~~'\
.~
ri
I'-,(.
~'6
1':---...
~ ~ ~I
:..:
' . -.-
-----.:
17'"
r-...;:
"
_~
r-;
v-
I)VI')( rJ( r"'V
_
.0 I
.03
~ .6
I--'
~~~? ~/(
/////
.02
'X: ()
') \ /(t--J
N)
~ ,,~ ,X'...: ~:.L 1\
. 'X \)'-.. V vl,(
RSit><:t><:;~I}
f\ 1')<
r-
,.
t-.~
I. I
0.93
_\ 1\
'\
KS~ pjr u = ()~."Ft#d
I//'
.05 .07
.t
.2 . . l
.5.7
2.,!
1.3
\ I~ ~ - v
I\cx
.l

\0
::E
t---
T"I:j-!>..N
',,)(1' ----A
\1
<, I/1'\
-J;b?~K ><N~
/
0
~
.- -
::J.
iZ~
./IY
I)
'..,
l'l\
X /\
IXlL,
1\/ )
I=~f\ '\ '\ X II ~ - y, \.' V
l\ f ..f.. 1./
~ IrI t\I' r 7 rr 6
1\-'" r\ k-7'
V\' rv \ 1\ I~ rX'IJ',< ):r-I'\
./, 17 I X
'",
'\7' "'I-..J.
r;f..,'
. IV
.~IL
./\ x
/ \11 V
g,j
,,\
1:'1
X-
, - I
'",
tclf
1..1
'J ' J
v'
17
T 7\1 f
-X~L7~IVf\VI\ -- y~ ~>
J(
w
--'
::J
:Y1~1:;xp..:17\
SO
f--
X)
kt: .l1S:.X K17.

00 It--\--lh,X f\-!l\ .
I-s..j: IF\V'\lf-I\lf
0
Z
0
)III
.r
],17
Ix' ,JI~ ~I\ M~ _ 1/ _f/ IX / X
IX
<,
WI
..
o
....
z
~
....
o
w
~
w
Cl
::E
::J
::E
><
~
0 -.8 I
0.70'
0.6 ,
L...
0.53
;::
w
::E
,
TIME or YIELD TO LOAD DURA nos, iciT
. ':"
. v"
r'
500
12/
Or
.-',j' .-',-'
r'
r'
',j'
'
L\
IJ\
2 (J 0
W
><
i\-~
Iy
><
z
0
70
I,
50
.~
t.,
w
0
.....
,
.....
.....
~
30
C\
-'
w
-
20
l~
,.
z
0
,.U
w
. 7
5
-'
:l'
::>
::!:
><
<.
::i'
.l
.2
V\,
-Y?' I
1/'\
'J
I\f
:7'"
~'
0.5
.001
1\
'r'
.'(1'
/1\\
II \
I'
1/
I
'
l/\. '''\: V
l I rN\X....., r"\
f\
'
II
II ,XI I
N.1'7
I'x'VX XI/ I\;

V"vrvrx /rvl\
l<5<tx~lX[)~
/ / /
/1/
.02
/
/
.0.1
/\t-0
. I r- IX\.-.
1\/ V' V 1/\
.01
I/\'~' IA\
/>
)1\. /"
I)(
U'
9 S
l---
J / J'-.
8:<
[)'-..
..:v 1\1 \') . .:::I-~

K'''K t-.
McI-"OI\-OO, .>-/
<,
t'-.,(
1'- \--.
."
6'
oS.
r-,
r-,
K.
1)1 r-,
~_
f-
'J'
or
F\:
-J.'ll
\'... f\ .'
,,1/
f7'\:i< XNt':\ f--.)"

k') ~ ~l/\ 1/
~ "'\; f4. P< P( I;'
~ K:2lYKts
v.; "\
r-,
I'- ~
~ )?
.'l
D?
5:S~
.2
.. 1 . 5 . 7
s
.f o
<.J
1.7
1.5
1.3
t-
I.'
0'-.
='nO;;J"~~
.I
Maximum response of elasto-plastic. one'degree~of-freedom

system for bilinear-triangular pulse lei 0.464, (2 3.0)
"0
0
ir
0-
.,..-'
r:/C;:' L>.....
.05.07.1
':0
<'6
rt
:f
.1
\ . Y \
<,
'6'
~I 1:---'
I"'--
z
f-
f-
(7 ' "
LOAD DURA nON TO rUNDAMENTAL PERIOD, TIT N
Figure 376
'" '" '"

'"
002.00.1 .005
..,.
..,.
lJ'
<.0
IIY
II
'0
0
dJ
0
1111"'\'- n
VII" ') _t\h

. / V K1I1\
~\
11 - N
hit-- VI
rI..
I '"1 L\
1/\7 --\,( IV IXl'>
j;A;
f'...
I Xi\'
'1'\
',..
XI/l\f'-
1)\ I ~ T
,\1
.-
v-
I /
{/
b'1- '
1/
IX
/~
tx'
1/\
/1/177
_)(
1/
Y\
II~ ~~I'>
1~k:K2t><t'-I/
I-~'I,.L ,
1/
II
/
1/\ \1/ \ II l/ f,(

I~ IVI V IVI)
'
""
'r'
'XII'Jj 111\ f:}7Nl/\Jl-l'/1'\v

I
~ I tv 1\7"--..
tv<.. '"
IX' 11\1 \: I \
f.I
r~f\I--...VI'V'l\
"/\
1\ II \I
r--Alo/t'-/~b(\I/i'-
\11
.' " \
'IX
.~*~**~;j>:1,
, IV V 1\/1\
..L
0.7
/'
\
1
rv
0
v'
IX
r'\'L'\ 1/\ IX IV
t \ \ ,\
1
,j'
'. ~:IV
1:37 -\ 1l..L 1 'i

.
!J \ '1<-17
lA'-, I -XI-\; --,IX
10
IX
I.
k~\~~~il-IX
1/\ If.;;
I.
1..1
I\<f
0
p
'IV 1/\ I / - , \
l/-\~\IAI~ -.JX.
1\
100
',j'
,j'
lJ.~~
,
. 'II \; b(
~~\Y ,.!r\, IX _ k~fl-V
"<,
'J
"'0
'
''\.,W\'xX V
JOO
10
0.93
0.8 I
0.70
0.61
0.53
<
...
::>
f-
z
0
t:
w
-'
L.w
0
:f
::>
:f
X
.,..
:f
L.-
w
::f
t:
,
v
,>
if
'",
'"
.r
v'
f1ME or YIELD ro LOAD DURA nON,

~
'.r
',~
.r
.r
.~
'"0
..
.r
"
....
U'
tEif
0
-a-
'",
0
~
IJ'.U"~t-.l
IS'
0~'7'.,.-. fr" J..-.. ~/- ... -IT.\1.1/ 1-1

)
'\=' r\ /\ 1/ IX' rl\
\OQ' ~
:,CV\~7 y
nVIAI
/
'~~~~fhP~N
<1'
'0
v'
OOt-JU\O
'"
;0
/I
'l_~t7
{ , 200
"
.Q
.~
,
,....
w
'"
~CO
,~'
100
"'
.::-;::
',,\,l\~)
J\.:>;:
2;0-
(-".1./.\1101-/
'Sl.
..:\.-
-'
'"
'"
10
_
1/ .\ll A. A
.'\; . E
IY'
r.;
.. 0 ' . " 1/\
' ' ' ' ..7, . .
,-/....
5 IXd'-"
I' '\0 T\
.\
3.X
J
2
o7
1:
~-~
- ...
K',,!\ A KI)<
.t/'StI1?<'
1\1
f\,
YI
:J
u.. '..LhJ..l,L.l::l
n
.......
Qj/I'..4....I'YIIYY
1/
1--.'(" '/\
i'\l\i'\ ,Y,
1/
IN '\
,IV
. ~r\ V:l~v l/
.. X Ix" -./ / IX 1)1.
117'-. l/
.tl\- 11\
""X
'x1">}\i'4I_~
--.,<.,~ /
,)\1,(
J..
I ,f I.
I"'""t'"...
.01
/_!A
.. ;1.
/'
I
.02
.OJ
AI
AI
/
.
y~!X cltl\
~VIVV-~I). ,
V
I
.05 .07.1
LOAD'DURA'nON TO
Figure 3-77
fZ
;:~
~ .~
~
...lJ.lhl...lL :::bllLlJ
_
'"
.. :--
r--\-<
rUN~AM[NfAL PERIOD,
I'" J
.2
J
1
1.3
1.1
0.93
?) )?~u ~\
, , ,
.2.3.~.7
'"
I.S
"1
~:~6
"
~~j)~p{>~'(' txl:)rc2<k'l><~I;l'.~tx'~r;Z~v rs<~.P/ru" ~

j':T'r7
~~:
.,,-. -/- ~~'7_
~.L
VL-17 V'
0.;" X:
.001" c.002 OOJ -:005
YI
<t
I'Z
L.
..
'
_
'IVI
W
0..
w
::t:
<t
a
z
\ /' ,
,
o.
'"
~J:'
.AI/"
1\..
'
r. iY "';r
1\.
"""
.....E
.t.
X!
17 . . - -/if'I;'
Z
I-
<,
."
IS'
__;:;..
..
\ I'
_j\-X
"
'J
~',.-['!'Y.'II~~I\I~ JJ ~OC~
00 A-I-\-- :)E ;-1-1-\1/ ... i)\-r-~ . A 1
!\ ;,
~''X.:V\- :1\ .;' / /y j( I }
JOJ\~~IV\:'I\
i/ l\
17\ ~ 1 . . \ I , m
.
',:7\ -f
:"
I~~~~i~~,:.:)~~~
'j.
~.
I /
70
o
"
z
o
,~.
T/T N

system for bilinear-triangular pulse (Cl = 0.316. C2 = 3.0)
.~
0.61
0.53
I J
7
'10
t:
w
~
L.
W
::t:
:J.
::t:
::t:
L.
::t:
i=
TIME
,....,...~rl
().~
C>
'..j.'
'
~."
.U"
t.po
'''"''
or YIELD TO lOAD DURA TlON,
o' J
o
oJ)
.0
!J'
'1"'.'v"
<1'
<1'
v"
,.
50~'Vc;r1.7\11<:1-'-r;~~~
.~
""6-
.~
"
_J\. I XI AI /
., '''''' X I XI / \1 / .
I/\I~.
.~
tilT
00
01
G'
ol..f\
'00'0'00
~
VI
t-J t--l
.l,J'
OOt-JlJ'O
---
VI:! )f..\. /r~J /

--
<\'(-=-~\A~J"
W
...J
....
..,
'"
,-u.r
.s.
l>:
W
c,
..J
'"
.-t
fZ
'0'
,.
'"
,:':
:z:
n
...J
,.,
::>
'"
>--
>--
'z
,u
W
...J
L
W
rv
~ -r,
::f
::>
::f
:Ii
><
.,2
K
\J3;
~p
0.5
.00 I
1---..t'--j
/1
/
7'
.002.00.5 .005
1/
LlL
/1/ l /
.01
.02
/1/
.03
.05.07.1
.2
.3.
~
/ r. u = O1"!H Jl ~
~
.5',.7
'>.5
lOAD DURATION TO rUNDAMENTAl PERIOD. T/T N
Figure 3-78
o
.;=
u
,.
,-lb'1f'<--1f"'f+-lI++"~
::>
-~-y'=tt
of-
W
..J
L
W
:f
...E
o
6'
.
..,,
Z
f-
<,
'Maximum response of elasto-plastic. one-degree-of-freedom

system for bilinear-triangular pulse (C1 = 1,215~ C2 = 3.0)
,.
s,.
,.
;:=
'J'
'po
'v"
"v"
oO\J'lf';...J,O
".p
"-I.
.~
...
'~
>
d"
.",
v"
o
''0
'0
._._...UJA I\
/\1
~rl\~
20a
'0
'"o '"'"
'0-'0
~
00
'"
V'
...
'0
...
'"
I-L \V ~ A\'1..I
fl lt4Y
1\
I I),) X I \
\/1\1 "
, 1/1\1 I /\ 11\1
I'll
'--\-,<,--~tl='Il='"~.,
fj I
500
tdT
TIME cr YIELD TO LOAD DURA TlON,
1m
IX
d'
."
<,
...;
'i
o;.J
-. S
. v'
f~
\.)
""
-. V
'6'
w
::F
..<:
':0
L-
.f
f..-
-'
'.i
oJ
--'
f..-
,-,.,'"-'"'
'-'
W
0;
L..
O.
I"'
100
'/
>(
<,
--'
'"
1-
,..
I~'\ji/
r-.
'L
'Z
;::
U
...c
--'
L..
cJ
<'6'
<.J
<.0
.:it
'"""
1 1.1
15
I.J
1. ,
::>
~
!kf\hf-N''-I-oAl ~!f?~~WE~!W~I\
<f
-fr''v4~-.f.
1/
o5
.001
.002.00.> .005
.0'
'7t7
.02
.03
/1/
~iru='~
.05.07.1
.2.3.5.7
LOAD DURA TlON TO rUNDAMENTAL PERIOD,
Figure 3-79
TIT N

"10
"
a
;::
u
w
--'
Lw
.,.::>a
:t:
;(
0.93
<:
O.B 1
...0
0.70
0.6:
0.53
,.
;:::
rlM(
p',-J
......
.....,.
~ ~
'oJ' '0
'J'
.~
....\.
or YI(LD
0
'
TO LOAD DURA TiON, '(IT
0
.
~":t~
'v
~.'~
..
0
.~
-;,
<i'
Cl'
'"
500
'0
'0.
'"
..
00
....
V'
....
'"
>-
<,
><
<,
E
100
><
'z
>-
W
_J
1\
70
~
,A,\
50
1<l1
.,..,
6'
)1
p,
/\
";:-1,J.1(
..J
<::
>-
II
w
::f
-0:
,~
()
:::J
.~
.....
w
>-
00
'"w
Q.
I/~
L-
>-
t:
;:::
u
W
u
w
..J
LW
__ \ II \I 1\ 1/\
-'
....,
A 11\ I Y
L-
::f
:::J
:::J
~
::f
L-
><
..:
:>:
::f
w
::f
;:::
0.7
"II/IV~
1.1
0.5
.001
.002.003 .005
.01
.02
.03
1/
.05.. 07.1
~
.2.3.5.7
, I
LOAD DURATiON TO rUNDAM(NTAL PERIOD, TIT N
Figure 3-80

, , I
'0
tdT
T1t"EOr YIELOTO LOAD DURATION,

'r'v"yJ~
"t-l
500
'1.1'
'v'
'J\
"
't->
'<..1'
'0
I~
r\ II
0.0000
'09
.~
-If'
'..
.~
00
lJ' .. 1.1'
,~()~
! -, lli
500'
~ \1 .\ "/\ W 1\ 1\
200
IV..'l :'
\
<,
E
x
100
'z
c:
u
w
70
L~
,
....
w
W
'C
Cl
--'
w
>-
t:
--Vt\- 1\"'1
kf~ I I '.1\
50
[I\: f,r
IA
10
::E
5
.!
4:
::E
.r.
l/
IXII
.......
I \
..
V::S
Y J
III
17
\III
fx' \
\1
\.
X I I\,~I
V 11\ 1\ II.
I.
\/IY IY rv
1\
'v
II
1\ .
II
m "\
V V\ .'X -. I ~
I{) J/ ll~J r--, ~ IAlJ
l/lyt-
IA/j.,V
P\- hl/l\
1\
~J'I i1\
-r
~7' D"- ',(lJ .
"
IV
\ I
J. \
.... 0....
V'
.....
'"
U l/ 1'--..1\
t\-)i l\711
II
'
K.
',.,
d'
li"-\i ~ 1"1\' ,.
~ll ~\\ v
-'
."
.'"
6'
X X Y41iVIYIJ
f\
'\
\fo~) .Jb(I'>
IX IX V./ J<1Il\
txtx~Rb<D
' nl~
I'"
/ '"
V I;\~i-.)(
rv/i~1\(
~I)
JI
Ii \\ (\.
1\01 \J l/
M'M'
\l . 1/
ll(
1'\
V .
.'-. Y
ij; "\
k)<~~~~~rs
/
.0.
/
.02
.03
/1/.1/
.05 ,07.1
'/
~/I"/./V
,7
cc
W
c,
--'
4:
9: 0
a
z
<'6
::
4:
::>
u,
a
fz
o
i=
u
W
<,
1.7
"!-.. V
/.5
I,J
1.1
0,9.!
0,81
0,70
0.61
t--.\.<Il
.\.:j;::.l'.
K-s~ p/r u = ~:N4.I

2
<s
<0
.2.3.5
.J: o
'6'
.J: s
i'..".
\l
Z
f-.
<,
f-
1)(
Ix'\ 1/.
1\
f(l/. ~ ~.~ .\
O<V ~LlR<r;,.1)
Figure 3-81
'J'
'\\ 1\
' / 1/
.002.00.! .005
s.
X""
~I/
-/1,\
Y 1X--lX. "".
.....
I i'J"-Il('
IX b( 1)<1/1\
1~k:1X~t><81/
00 I
IV
''\:1-'1'
IL\
'0
1"Y--
1\
r/\
'0
<1'
"""
1\ 1/ J~ ~
[J
'0
'0
Cf'
""l
v I\: 1\
IX
~;;
0.5
V'I
'\
IIX
"em '\ 1\
7\ 11 /\ X
~<,r\ r, r\ 1)\
dJ
0
1\
..
0.7
'0
.0
/ ~I
J \ 1/
II
'''!...
-!J\ 1/\ 1/
1\
l/
CS'
I\ 'v
II \ \;A
l6.1)\ 1/
1~1"
::E
:::J
V\ II
o
>
.".
o.
IV
[\ I"
V\
',.J
po
1\1.
20 ~d \1/\1/\1\
--'
',.J
I\ I \ Y. \ 1"/
11\ I I I J 1\
1\ I
I~
u,
'-11 ~
h\
\1/ \1/\
1\
1\ 1\
,-0
0
X -~~1-
\ I
'v"
50
--'
W
'0
,I
IX
TIT N
Maximum response of elasto-plastic, one-degree-oT-freeaom

\0
0.5J
..J
u,
::
::>
::E
4:
::
u,
::
s:
TIME or YIELD TO 'LOAD DURA TlON,t!T
.-,.,
v'
v'
,"<1'
,.,
0
'-'
0
-- --',., '"
'<1'
'0
500
".-
.~ <1'
'S
'r'
v'
0
'r'
0
..,
-:;.
e-
<1'
<1'
'0
0
<1'
0
''0
.-0
'0
....<J'
v'
....
'"0
,,
ilo>,ll4;7'''l=r~Rt='t='
Z
f-
"t+f--'<;++-'\f--l,"",~..fo.A-.l.Q
:"
-:
100
70
50
l __
w
Cl
w
Cl
s0
".
'"
,~
>.
20
Q
1- .
1.
10
1-
~:,j
c:
::>:
=>
"
><
..;
\/1
,rt
'tl,-r.t'D: .~6~ 1\l\!I-';;~f '-: ,.
'[\-\
.
,-
'11:-\-t'lf:V1
<,
A\ ie-I I H
V"J:Z:sl-X-
;,fj-f'.J..
.
u'
'-r::::iAtt'l-bt--t---\cH--'\A-\f-hPifiR
,.
~ W-X:
."
,n
'-!j
l-m~I,3:-~.
: '~1'S7\'iX
--"','4-:::;"
h
'~':~-, -x v
Y
::>
u.
~'.J.\/
\OIfe--Y
I\t
I \
H/~...l.Jal...ffi..LlL U.
rJ'-o.".l
~ _ IV 1"OlL'l I W
'
,'\.y
V '1;---1\
Vif\rx--.x
D.S 'r
.00 I
'Y/iT
1/ Y
--I,L.
r#r/..L
-V--y
.002.003 .005
717
JI'
.01
.02
.J3
..ll.LU.Jl.::bLJLl..J
. , , IXV7)?;~
i
'"
I'
.05.07:'
, j
1'1
.:1
..:j.
j"
TIT N
Maximum response of elasto-plastic, one-degree-of-rreedom

system for bilinear-triangular pulse (CI = 0.032, C2 = 3.0)
, ,
10
..J
u,
W
Cl
::f
::>
II
'"~
053
;:::
Ll
13
~:~~
;:~
g:7
\UJ
-\.
.2.3.5.7
<0
t<-f+-
~~ p/r u ~ ~
--.L..L '.LLL
<.J
"rr- :/
17!71:;.r-1~
LOAD DU.RA nON TO rUNDAMENTAL PERIOD,
Figure 3-82
I \ ""
t-,
f-YI/0/>.\
--.
/ 1/
vv -+rf7!I'J....,
,
,
w;
. [r/"t
~~~~K, M><~2~Q~ 0<~?2)~~~
I /
~!lx)~~\, ~ ~ jS
l::tX.~ ~~ ,iJX b('/\ )</I\<
of-
1\17"'>'-.
I'f N';
<::
<::
1\/
...J
o
z
F\ I n-n+-i-.I....:.. \ I I
.I \
Q.
::f
rvl
\ ~-~4t~-1 '/,"YIXV4Io/,;11
. K*X\ {\ G'<~~ .IiV\. ~ f~ h(ll
11\.IX-'1f
"J
-1--"
-'
'"
z
f'siI~~t~\V\I)I:it:
. .fN-i~~--Pt'-fl-...j,C
~I/ \/fz~~
L6.".L
f-
.,.ijL
~
-I'
07f
'"."
;'Yrtsu~~~
'.~.
Cl
\1>
1\
ii\="
. -4+-+\i-A
i\..J\f;!~~~ It - IX ~ I'\J I v ,-,,,'''1.~7,(1)11\ III ~
r1\-lYr \'\1-' '/ j)' .~(f]ll:SJZ:
f
'V YI A ~/
.::U~
<,
::f
l..
w
::f
t:
..
00000000
'\$1
.~
"""
'po
'v'
....,..
OOi.J't.1'~o
.~
..
e,
I 1\ f l ( \
X
<,
I IIX \ II
.~
oz
'0
.'0
.~
'0
<Jl
1\ J
1'\hT7\ ....
11\
II
IY I 1\ I 1\1
1\1
\If
~,
\17
<Y
..
0
'0
V'
<Y
'"<Y
t.l
0
....
0
""",'
r'
...
./
."
70
-t,r
50 V"",--j"l
w
,
......,.
....
30
~~
20
>-
II
,"L
t:
J..
~IV
'\/1\71\ 1\
c:w
~IM;I, W'\-l U" \'L IV'
II X 'V \V\U},I
::i
:>
-...,
of
::i
.....
Z
7
1_.
. - . _-- ./'_L.
l~dzj;fj
I YI I/l V /17l7
o.5 .!.'
--t-""t-"'"t...,....,...-,.
07-,
. . 001
_.
--
.002.003 .005
.0'
.~
.-----.---.---,.
:02 03
.....
~
I
.05.07.1
- . ~. I . 1""'
.23.5.7
LOAD DURA nON TO rUNOAMENTAL PERIOD, r
Fi gure 3-83
"
i'
ITN
Maximum response of elasto-plastic. one-dellr~e-of-freedGm

0
f-
Z
0
;:::
u
w
1.1
::f
<..J
<0
.7177
i
1.3
I. I
0.93
0.81
0.70
0.61
053
'"
a
z
=>
"-
1.5
::i
--J
~o
<'6
.w
,J~ 0
10 tr"4~='1Y"""
'"
0-
0'
of
v'~_~
>z
_I
o
c.
6'
_ .
L_
>.,-
-'
I-f'H-Ij>,f-
.. 1
<Jl
11\1'1 IT
x'=-~~~~g~~i~M:~~~~
~
E
. ~ ~ . ....
.>(
100
,-
... ~J .....
"
tclT
TIME or YIELD TO LOAD DURA nON,

.. .r~rl/"
'r-l 'v' 'U'" 0
\1' '-rl
10
-J
c,
::f
=>
::f
x-c
::f
"0
w
:2
rr
TIME or YIELD TO LOAD DURA TlON,

1i"v"~~""''''
',.,) ', 'V"o
'\1' ',-J
k#~~\1Jf
000,0,0000
'J)
'J
'.,j'
'..
'v"
'v"
.~
.~
tdT
0"
'0
'0
IS'
o
01'
o
'0
v'
'0
0
....
~~~UuslJill~~'00
iJ't1'J
...
.",
Cf'
'""
v"
. >0
d'
o..I'
....
01'
0
....
'A I !\IF==l'FI'IIr.=;f\:#
,.,
...
d'
200
w
><
1/\
\ /1 \
'/
.x V\I /\1 / 1\
<,
sc
1\1~'f II'
y. I /\17
'<f
Q:
-'
..:
I-
u
w
-+--'1~r--I+f-t<-l"
-'
LW
':6'
':0
-'
..t:
...;
,.
....
tf
z
0
j::
I"
'\/1\/1\ AI
-'
r,
~"
W
Q
::>
sc
.J. O
I-
<'6
<.,J
~O
1\
::E
~~P/ru
,002.003 .005
Figure 3-84
/1/17/1/
..~LOAD
,01
.02 .03
::>
L-
-Ndf~i<:
..
::E
::E
Cl
::E
'..:
0
Q.
f=
...
Cl
.,.,
6'
1\
....
I-
O;f'tlH~
1.7
1.5
1.3
I. 1
0.93
0.81
0.70
0.61
0.53
z
f=
u
w
-'
L-
Cl
::E
::>
::E
s
:f
L-
:::Ii
;::
V/Yff//
.05 .07.1
.2
.3
DURA TlON TO rUNDAMENTAL PERIOD,
_I
.5.7
10
TIT N

_I
TIME OF YIELD TO LOAD DURA TlON,

~
',..,
v'
'v'
,..,
'",
,..,
~.
',..,
'",
'0
''''0
....),
'oJ'
.J<
tclT
C?
vi.
o
f? '?
C?
~o
.~
C?
....
O"IJ'I
~~;
-CJDCfl
00Ul
U'l
..
lJoI,
OONUla
._~~-
.~._~.
_1-4._L..U _ _
l-111f=t\t=l=~~=14""l~
E
x
100
PI
,u
W
-.J
u,
W
......
w
f-
<,
...E
tvmi
<,
A\
VI
1\
Cl
...
Ct:
II
II \
ll.
...J
". -
1/1
f-
j\d,j
W
~
D'-
Cl
~
L..
>-
C1
-.J
f-
o
,-
~ K1<\~~
f=
s:
u
W
...J
u,
W
-.J
"W
C!>
::::>
::f
::::>
:::f
~~
~cl~
:::f
L..
:::f
t=
0.7
j,Lc=:L1::;:+-
0.5'
.001
71~
.002.003 .005
.01
~
.02
.03
.05 :07.1
---.2.3.5.7
"
LOAD DURATION TO FUNDAMENTAL PERIOD, T/T N
Fi gure 3-85
Maximum response of elasto-plastfc, one-degree-of-freedom

10
TIME or YIELD
C)
'P"
'r>
v"
'v'
rJ
to'
'0.1'
'0
'oJ'
u>
.~
TO LOAD DURA TlON, lEfT
.~
.~
.~
.~
0
.~
't--!
Ii"'
.~
oocoooo
-UlO'lU'l""lJolNN
o
OU'l
OONV'lO
.........
C1'
ul
l'lIl'X
~IIIH
f-
1--- .1/
L0 0
i.--P!~f--'1'"'\i'.t
<,
E
x
17
100
,.Jl-:
>-'
.....,...,.
o
-/I
'"
f'\71~L
L,
>-
20.~
f=
~I/
Q:
.
~
1/
z:
..J
o
r-,
z
o
,.
'6'
I""--'
o
W
II
'J..
..,
/1 Y. I Y.
<,
'0
1/
.J. S
/
r---.1\7'
o
:>:
:>:
:oJ
!~~i~I~~~;~
x
q
':>:
07
0,5
tg--7!7v
.00 I
,002.003 ,005
~A/
.0.
.02
.Q3
TO rUNDAMENTAL PERIOD, T/T N

Maximum response of e l es to-p l as t i c , one-degree-of-freedom
system for h;l;n~,~-t~;.nQular pulse (CI = 0.562. C2 = 5.5)
LOAD DURATION
Fi gure 3-86
.2.3.5.7'1
4:
:oJ
L..
t:
..J
L..
:>:
::>
:>:
0.93
0.81
0.70
1.1
0.61
a
w
~~=N~ 0.53
s:
f7F
.05 .07.1
:>:
1.7
1.5
1.3
~'6
..J
4:
f-
of-
<0
..J
.J. O
:?,]
i .,
Q.
10
:>:
L..
:>:
tdT
TIME or YIELD TO LOAD DURA TlDN,

r
',.,
,..,
v'
v'
,..,
'01'
50
30
20
<,
E
100
x
0
70
f-
L"
-i
LW
Q
,
....
..,.
W
'"
50
SO
.-1
:-0
20
f-
-i
u,
0
~
::J
~
X
." .
0
, -"
.00 ,
K.
'0
';
'/
'" '"
..
'0
'"0 '"'" '"
1'\7
."-.I~.f- --.l ,--'.i-' LA.!l

\0,
--"-'"
DZ.
L"'''
0."
.002 003 .005
'r .L L
.z,
.01
L
L,JL..
.02
I'\,
e"" ""
1~.I":
.03
.05.07.1
<:;;.
'A
Uk'
Ai
~~ ~ ~ _V
lL
~"
.2.3
,5.7
"
"0
<0
w
:f
L-
0
f-
0
f-
<J
W
......i
IS
::J
~
~
><

'J
I'
0'
J.
"
e:::: e::::
LOAD DURATION TO rUNDAMENTAL PERIOD,
Fi gure 3-87
.. !
z
f-
<,
W
Q.
~ ~.'
'\ ,_
l():/\J~~ PS j?r"
CO><
8;
' c
"'" .
'/(1..\
9.5
"-
0.
!.l
A. "-
'>
"""'"
~,~~,
~-".' ., 'I'>' l2':lX:x

--l
N
0
'"
~.
Li
~ , L v:::~,d.\-:~~I\: ,.
\0,ri
'"
N
,
"""
L!. -
.bV'
\ rf\. L.J . U
~. ' t.L
>
t\.,
,_ v
c6:1\
.1-11,
1
~hUi..l&Jl)
1\~jI-
.'J(
' -P".
.l0'''"
0.
"
,
~.....\L
't'1Xl1\ 1\,,, i Lx. ::-K V

..2 L ~ >D" 1>,,<
L "'I~)<J)VI;,~
'. '-' tI '
1<2:12951:'
~
~.
.;=;
f.-'
"
I-'> r
f.;i
'0.A
'Ir
--'J..LY
LL'
. l.:'.
.LtQ!'ett,-
'.
..
"..
d", ,
' of
lfC'c\ '
.... 0....
v'
"~
I~:.'.ES:LSlI\
ut:L1\
."
o.
~
I-~ .'
~u ~
.
".
"i. ~~.,
.LL.lAtAL'-, ~L1
\
A
,
,
, D
~ 12, ,/I j
A ./.. ~~ L
LX:
.L
0.5
.p
0
(.:i,0- .~ c: . "
..J.. \ '\
"-.. '.. _.
L' L'1 . II 'j'l
11 .
1'1;::(';; t!\ IlCll'; ""
-'
O'
',..,
,
,
..tY..J
D',~
.I- L~'v ' "
to. {':;
i",'
" !II "Y '" I's"
10
f-
<J
'01'
'"
OJ
0.
.5Y'f
w
X
E
'
10
:f
0
w
~
t(lT
TiME or YIELD TO LOAD DURATiON,
..',..,
"'"
v'
v'
,.., ,..,
'",
,~
.-'", .',.., .
t1i lL.lI:' '.A

oil
l.)(
....
V)leO
v
'"
f...:.-",-
'" '"
''S
0'
0,
'v'
0
.-
',.., ',..,0
ll, ="J
".-
co
~ YI Ll
l'
IA
,L
"'.i: ..>1-'
~
~
-\~"~
,L
'0
v'
'"
ix
L>" ,
U'
'" '"
0
U'
"~i".
& v 0D 1'..1
tyl"I(.I'
1)('/
~~L",)."P'
Jl.J e...:::t Q
'0
N
N
0
'"....
uJ
III
U'
9 S
J'
4..,
~~-'.f..j
"....
...E
, 6'
./
I \,
I...:::.. u.
~I'"'
iz,:
,~ ~
~~.
Ll);
1\
~.
~
~~
>C
,J
s
.J. o
.L.j:::...
I.,
.02 '.03-
.05.07
, ..,
""
-t
~~
.1
.2
.3
.5
.7,
TIT N
Maximum response ofelasto-plastic. one-degrce-of-freedom

4:
<.J
<0
f'....
<'Ii
11 .I"
~
521::' 'I'"'
....
'6'
I.
':0
z, s: .<.
' KD
><C,;,
4:
'I'
ld:
,'\-;><c
..J
J-
,L",
c2\ L ~H
y,~
J..L~
.01
C> " x
'<AIL
1 I.(~~~
"
Ie>
.
.L.. JL L
.A
Q.
'J-
'1)(
W
'"
, . , .-s
.L
",0
I'
-I Gt'
Z
0-
<,
,_
" ".1
LOAD DURA TiON TO rUNDAMENTAL PERIOD,
Fi gure 3-88
""ro
VII
J'
v"['~
~'A..x,L
1\"
V:~l\UJ(\'~A~.lV"
~-x- -X.:;.. /' 1:'\,p.II\.,~';J
w'1.l
~I,l. I( P',J,,~"
"-',~~
~
~
~. 'q'"~...~
0.7
I;C.L -r-0.5
.002.003 ,005
.00 I
h6
I
....l.l
l:\ '-,L
'"
.,! u
V
"t.l
c,f ,\6'
-"
"'-c> -' -" ' -'v

v '" "
'.
II'L
b L . I)
"1l
o
'0
'",
P'\..
~1L
P&~
/.-~ ... ~,
c
'
"0
.,
13,10 c/--:t. ,'Ap .
L'J
c .zxrz
'''-''''-'.
.is;
'"
IT, '" ..,
I~:
.L~;'"
ll~"
, I'I'".
"
1-'1L'
~/'"~'r,
o' . -\.'
I'.. 11::,,,
A iI'I .E)I ,,"
.L1
.. J
c,
'iii "i.>?L
I!C til..A
..~ a c>'"
,I.>
f1t'rC::Ni~,/;tt,-\X1
'"i"\Z,.
.
10
o
z
::>
"-
0Z
t:
u
W
..J
1.7
"W
/.5
1.3
::>
1.1
0.93
0.81
0'.70
0.61
0.53'
0,
~
~
X
4:
20
"0
~
t:
TIME OF YIELD TO LOAD DURATION. I[/T

po
.~
v'-
"..r
'I.fo
t-1
'oJ'
'0
50
o.....
o
'J)
't-J
000
.~
"-:,
.~
000000
'v'
.~
~
.~
'",
....
0
.0
'00
(III
CJ'
v'
'0'0000
U'
..
.......
to-J !'oJ
U'
U'
IV
,
1/
<,
Jv..IYIVI \11
E
sc
....
I/~"""
'/
,v
J
Y ITJlI
...
--,
u
W
...J.
L.
W
IV 1\ l\-l'\1A
0'
...J
W
~~
>-
.-z
o
;=
u
I~V
11\
I~l<
~""
'6'
'"
...z'"
w
<:0
J'.s
:::>
~"{V
~.[I;i
.to
~. Ii
~'.J
2.0
<,
,eJ
...J
1.7
t5
tj
'0
'"
....E
e-
yo
/rI~
:r
:::>
:r
x
:r
...z
<,
Q.
z
o
.,=
...,
....
.......
I'P
>(
...
II
5'
-k=1~~nv't'~t
!j
~
07
12
0.5
.001
./ VII
.002 003 .005
I
.01
IV'" V
.02
.05
~k'
.05.07.1
.2.3.5.7
LOAD DURA TlON TO FUNDAMENTAL PERIOD, TIT N
Figure 3-89

10
..J
:r
'"
....
...0z
0
t:
......J
w
a
:E
:::>
:E
tl
;;:
0.93
0.81
0.70
0.61
....
0.55
;=
'"
:E
:E
TIME or Y-lELO TO LOAD DURA nON. trJf
.-
',.>
v'
v'
,.,
.J'
,.>
0
'.J'
',.>
0,
'"
'J
'{,.
.-.J'
',.>
v'
'S
. /1\ /1\Vl:If
c-
II
,1T~~1l1\
->
j
, "
.
\ X 1\1:1"
r
_
"" '
"'-,
Jl
."
\
"" I
-.,I hi
d'''~T
A
'
W'",'57'
,u
0>
a
c,
I X'
,o..
'z
,7:''.1"" \
!
\0
1/
z;
.I
W
L,
W
IY """'
d-
a
:>
,oU"\IX
::f
><
-a:
.::f
/
.>
7I7J7L'
-
0.'
,00 I
,002.005 .005
,01
7'F\
If
.02
'0
IJ'
'V"1
7'
rr
"'V'v
.,..." " ' ' ' ," , , '
"
.[ "1 I;"r ' 'I".
J'
r-,
,
/ ' j 's
"
.'
"
.II \TIT
i<
717 >,'
:52;>::0"'''
,,"', "
,2.J.5.7
"
~
l
~ \1.'
D? ~T~
I,
II
>
n.s ,
o.s ,
,,,
T '/'
.'
,OJ"
'"
UT
~
~
'05

for bilinear-triangular pulse ICI = 0.178, Cz = 5.5}
~ystem
.~i
00
-
L
"
"~,,
~
,,~ "
ho ,
'. ' ''7'
""",,
"
',e
'
..
s
k
"
"r "
Iz
X lI"'j(
"
if"""''''
'l
LOAD DURATION ro rUNOAMENfAL PERIOD. fjf N
Figure 3-90
"
".M""~
.t
~
0'
K"'>
-r; ,,(
k
If: XJ1
,
_
""'"
J
.05.07
""/~",,,,
"I
(;2
U'
~::;::
f.I-v"
'ilG ,l:" _
~ ~
'0
'0
'" '" '"
~
"
'
,
LI/L!:ru6:
.
. :::'dL..? 7J7
,05
'0
"
I
If.;!
';< x:lfi
;:x
i><l?i) 4.
/ XI
Z
"
'v
:oJ
0
U'
U'
-'
I
~"" ~
~. !'il[,;"
\
'"
t-~ "0I/~ 'jf:fB,L:

.w.!
I
0.)
t:
'
,Lt!\ J-or'"I II ,
w
-'
c.,
...'",
. -'i
I' l'
'0
O'
11(1"I x 1\ T\7Fi'i
. +=:
T\/ IT I XI!\. V\I l\TlA\
" \,
'0
v'
'"'
',.>
.-
O.
""
\0
>
>
TlMEor YIELD TO LOAD DURATlON,

p
',.,
v'
v'
,., ,.,
'",
'0
.- .-
'" ',.,
.,.,
0
<P
.~
'"
0
0
tdT
0
0
0
0
',., .,.,0 '.., .V' '",
II 'V 1\ /t\~
0
v'
'S
'0
'"
oJ'
..
'0
oJ'
0
<1'
'0
1\
,., ,., ,.,
'0
'0
V'
'0
0
oJ'
11\ JI"I-{j
...z
<,
. I
AI
...E
=t\lz+st#;~(4&-Vil=tA
c"
.,.,
IS'
cc
W
..
0..
_.'~
...J
...z..:
w
::IE
..:
c
z
::>
u.
., '~';:::I;t'j'l\t1~F~~~V1~)\
...oz
=:::c::::x
'
>=
u
..L WI
rw \
'b<l
1\
w
~
w
">-
>i~~JiR v
l
'~/;-,--
::lE
::>
::IE
)(
-c
Vi. '-.ia-,.n ~
::lE
u.
::lE
t:
0.7
os.1TJ,L.::LL14
.001
.002003 .005
.01
.02
.03
~
.05.07
.1.2
.3
LOAD DURATlON TO rUNDAMENTAL PERIOD,
Fi gure 3-91
.5.7
TIT N

system r or bilinear-triangular pulse (C1 = 0.133, Cz = 5.5)
.\0
TiME or YIELD TO LOAD DURATiON, lEfT

o
",p
'J'
.....1
0
..
'\1"
0
'v'
',.>
OO\.1',J'~O
',.>
.~
'0'0'000
'"",
'"
If'~Vlt'''t..l
OOt-JIJ'O
v'
d'
',,>
-'
'"
<,
bX IVI X ILl/I)
E
><
,.>
....z
...)
a
'"w
0-
z
0
c:
'oj
.,'6'
--'
i.,
W
0: 0
.....;:
z
w
:>:
.;:
.....
U>
--'
J: s
...5
0
>-
"<.(>
z
a
'",
,..
0
>-
10
,W
w
w
u,
0
1X5~~#.j.,bb
/
\ II \
a
....
<."
i=
u
20
1.7
V\
'0
:f
:>
:f
><
-c
:>:
0.5
,001
~
/-~I/
,002005 ,005
~ piru-;;"~
~
,01
,0205
,05,07
. / A.//I'.//
.t
,2
,3
,5.7
Figure 3-92

system for bil ine3r-triangular pulse (C1 = 0.100. C2 = 5.5)
10
I.S
I.;
1.1
0,93
0.81
0.70
0.6\
0.53
...w
. ::>:
=>
:>:
....
::f
w
:>:
i=
t[/T
TIME 0,' YIELD TO LOAD DURATION,

o
0
.~
0
.~
"'0
.l~
0
.~
0
.~
0
.~
0
0
.~'" .~
0
.~
'0
.~
'0
.....
'0
Cf'
of'
dJ
0'0'0'00
IJ'''~~N
OOy.)tJlO
....z
<,
flY
1\
'U'
#=M==t"7ldi'"M1/
cc
w
n,
z
o
.1'.
/1..1
c-
'of
....J
.'"
L
W
w,
.....
.....
'""
o
o
:>
....J
>-
10
u
W
....J
\.
L
W
(\
....
oco
....J
.....
z
o
u
i=
W
....J
L
W
O.
II 'vi \
'"
'A\NtrL.~
IAI'\l
::J
VI
\ .....
:>
~~ \~
'"
",.
.'"
'"
'"
i=
tzr~~-IA--~.I
1/
m -
07
0.5
.001
IA--Yf
.002 003
.005
.01
'
--JZ;Y---7'4Z
I"'"
I'
/1
.0203
/1/1
IA
.05 .07
'/I~/A/A//
.1
.2
.3
i i i
.5.7
iii
LOAD DURATlON TO rUNDAMENTAL PERIOD. l/T N
Figure 3-93

system for bilinear-triangular pulse (CI= 0.068, C2 = 5.5)
iii i
\0
TlM[ or YI[LD TO LOAD DURA TlON,
tclT
.
. . .
. .
l1'~~~~tQ~~
0000000000
.
~
'v"~~"''''
.~
'u'
'..1"0
'\l' ',..J
.~
~.
o.
.0
(,
/1\ Y VI \
l'f'II"X'IXI /\1
',,1
~I~I\
'0
Cl'
tS'
'0
'"
'0
'"
o,...
00,...
/\ 1/
,...
'"
vr-::..J\ 1)<
Z
t<,
I
~
><
<,
><
z
o
i=
u
100~~
70~
II\.
XI
...E
\//
CI
tf\
1\
.'"
6'
C;V \17
.t.
1\
'v'
...
V>
11.
...J
<!
t-
::>:
-'
w
Q:;
Z
W
r.,
....
<!
<>
z
a
o
-'
:>
u,
>-
t-
...
z
o
t:
o
o
o
;::
10
7\
-'
c-
::>:
><
::>:
<!
r-
<>
'\ /IV
::>:
:>
~+VJl::..L
::>:
:::>
v\
...J
....
w
:::f
~
:::f
....
o
w
:::f
;::
0.7~V:b1~
0.5 .
.001
Zl2ttt
.002.003 .005
.01
.02
.03
z
~
.05 .07.1
.2.3.5.7
LOAD DURATlON TO rUNDAM[NT AL P[RIOD, TIT N
Figure 3-94
f1aximum response of e le s tn-p l as t i c , one-degree-of-freedom

system for bilinear-triangular pulse (C1 = 0.046. C? = 5.5)
10
tdT
..',..,
500
,.., ,..,
c-
'0'
v'
191 0-.1
'oJ'
100
X
<,
E
x
100
0
t:
u
w
70
l~
,...
IJ>
W
--'
>-
30
'"
'"
X
"
:::J
::I
10
0.7
"
,
/'\ 7
:>..-.
-i/-
iV
~-:].
0.5
.001
'I'
\ I
1/\17
/' /
1\
'X
'"
1\
\-
1\
I JA
1"1
II
~\L
-\l
AI/I\
v<
K.
,.,..,
d'
'A II
J.
.;
r-L.\I/ K (\ . ~
~ .... 1\ ,y.
IV
X y X~../
1/",/\/
V\
1/'\
' ";
Irv,.....lI~
~I
\" r.......
/\ 1\17'
:'j-./.. J
k:. ~ r\ x 1'\
. ~ V /
'\
' ; "-
IAI)( -,
I X'
Y
J
lA rx 'X
.
1,,)(
,/
.....
IXR V /V iJ
b<JX~l)b<!)
/1/
//
.01
.02
//1/
YJiP0~~~v
-XV k")L11X'~V
bC~ Q<~IXES~
.03
l'-'!-
J: s
:::J
J: o
t--.h.\.
~~ r/; - ~~ 0,53
LOAD DURA TlON TO rUN'DAMENTAL PERIOD,
TIT N

system for bilinear-triangular pulse (CI = 0.032. C2 = 5.5) .
10
....
z
o
;::
o
u
.....
L..
U
::
.. ;;:
f)('
L..
1.1
0.70
0.61
<{
:::J
0,81
-t
::I
1.5
1.3
0.93
~~ '9
'.5.7. I
.....
<{
I-
~o
.
1/
.2.3
'"
0..
/' ,,'/'
v/'...-:r//v
,05.07.1
'6'
'."'"
1/
'~V
...E
~'6
~'J
<0
1.7
X "/.;
1\
1,)\ 171\
f\;!'o ~VKI>
Y lJ(-- k"\
X I/'d7)( ~ ~ I)
pc:
/1\
/'
....2:
<,
i\
1'\
,.,
6'
.
-s';r
Y .~ ' \ \
'f. I I
"
v."'" .P/\ K
IX 'V
..,...
11\ I LV
/
oJ'
'0
0
,.., ,..,oJ' ,..,0
'0
v'
I--..l 1/ ,/ f...-V\ [')

I/ \
r\)( IV ~
/1\.
cr t-1. .
'0
'0
. oJ'
d'
0
AI/ 1\"
Figure 3-95
''0
1\ II
(\
x rxr x ',;(
},
.002.003 .005
IV
II
/
/
//
1/
I
'"
>v'
\'t' 1\ \ / 1\ "
7\ 7- /\}
f\:'v'f\tf\A\ Y\l/
1,( \ rx k 1X1lf\
~k:jxJ>~kD~
IJ:
V 1)\ X
'0
'"0-
'''''0
1/\ f\ I J
II
Y. \ X
lJ III ;/ IV '\
IV 7'
-'X
',..,
If,.
::J..
1/\.
V\ !A!! 'J
v'
0
~ Iv
'x
;I},
1\/'
7\
K,
oJ'
V\ .
1-
v
"
\-;/" -\ -\ \iJ\7
,
V\
'J
'\\
" I
J \
Ii
--'
L..
W
, \
-t \ 'It
10
',&
V\;
II \II
'V" -I'[-'tl\
r-
I):
. '1\
.i-,~
--" '-~"I
1-
1\1','
e/-"
'..>
~~~I~?
!\ 'I! \ \ .
..:...y. :'0N9'
0
.J)
\b1\~IJ}\i
50
--'
a
a
')1' PI
',..,
\ I , II
"-~~'j:>f\ 1>..1 .
300
'0
::
....
::E
L..
u
::I
t:
TIME or YIELD IO LOAD DURA TlON,

..
.~
u'"
:v<
t.:I
'1.1'
"
'0
,.
000
",-J
'oJ'
'"p
'-1.
"1.1'
oJ'
0
.~
0
.~
...,.. 0',.,0
'''6-
tdT
0
.~
o
.
-0
~
\I'
'0
'0
'0
oJ'
..
V'
00,..,
'0
'"
,..,lJ'
0._
.,.,
d'
><
E
><
1\ I I V I
<,
100~~
70
~':f-\j:
V I
)lJ
->
IA
'/
1/\1 'V 11 IXI!
.,.,
6'
J'
II \'It/\ I I
"
f-
U
W
'J'
I /\
50
0..W
....
'"
~
"
a
a
i\ I
)-
10
7
5
X I X 1\1' I
t:
W
....J
cW
1'_"'::
:E
:>
:E
><
<!
:f
-c
>Z
w
:::t:
>-
::>
:f
0...
....J
~
o
~w
'\v '{A IAII

1"'1"
0..W
Q:
c-
o
,u
c:
...E
<!
z
o
>-
<,
:::t:
c-
w
:::t:
f=.
- - -
14~
./L-LLL
.002.003 .005
. / V Y /I/VV
.01
.02 .. 03
. / Y /V/./1/
V/Y/A'//V
.05 .07.\
.2 . . 3 . 5 . 7
LOAD DURA TlON TO rUNDAMENTAL PERIOD.
Fi gure 3-96
TIT N

system for bilinear-triangular pulse (Cl = 0.022. C2 = 50S)
\0
e
TIME
~..,..~~,.",.
"r>
v"
.,j'0
...
. \
--
....
u
w
,
.....
'"
'"
30
'"
20
--'
?3~Ai~~W
't-=l
.~
,,:,0
0,
.~
.~
.~~",;
0
0
'0
dJ -' Cf'
Pr"O
'ttj ~~
1\'
'\ I AI
~J1:II
'0
'0
'0
oJ'
v4
00000,..,
"0
....OJ'
0
....
-A-~
1\
II
:1-
/\
-~.
--'
..>
....E
-1'....
N: \7o'f/\-,l/
'~"Y1l1.
'(0
J: s
J: o
"-'~MIX
<.f;
<.,J
<0
/.7
1.5
I.J
I. I
0.9J
0.81
0.7.0
0.61
..
0.5J
0.7
0.5
~-.- -
~~
.
.001
.
.
'w
=>
a:
w
'(IS'
'f-
1<-
f-
-J
u
w
<,
',.
IS'.,.,
.,.,
d'
..,
10
,-
.' '.
ll.
8 ~I}
z
o
/ t7r'X
p!\
a
a
oJ'
I)(,
/ 1\/
~O
w
--'
Co.
w
..'.v".....,..
70
oJ'
1\ I 1\ Y \I
/\ f\ / I
><
E
><
100
'oJ'
1\
<,
YIELD TO LO ....D OUR .... TlON, tdT
300~-s: :
a
.J
~<fllCci7'fvT'yr
200 -
or
o
'"
.~
'oJ'
~OO~
fit
.002.003 .005
.01
.02
.OJ . . 05.07.1
.2.J.5.7
LO ....D.DUR.... TlON TOrUN'O ....t.lENT....L PERIOD, TIT N
Fi gure 3-97
.Maximum response.of eJasto-pJastic. one-degree-of-freedom

system for btl inear-tria~gular.pulse (Cl =-O.Ol5 . CZ ~ .6)
to
S
u,
0
f-
Z
0
t:
w
oJ
".w
'0
::
=>
::
"0
::
;:::
TIM: or YIELD TO LOAD DURATlON,

p
u'
u'
,.., ,..,
',..,
.p
'J
o.
0
p
0.r . 1
'?rJ
.~
.~
...
'0
" "
,00,l~1?fWl~ ,
'~;'ftNf'\r1fl .,~y
"1", _
;00
',..,
'1.1'
'0
'"
td T
C>
><
200
<,
><
z
0
-'
u.
C\
....
'"
a-
C1
W
d'
ri~l\Izt~Ij\~\
II
'"0 0
"
'0
,..,
v'
'0
,..,
....0
'"
.....
',..,
IV
1/
'"
.J"
'J'
...,.
'6'
<:0
J: s
."
6'
~rx
....E
Cl
~'-'tf-\JL.~IV,
>-
,-
I-
<,
.~
d'
~IY
7(~ p,( I A
-'
-~~~IV
'-S
..
100~~~m
,~
.s-
Q.
...J
w
::
.
a
:>
"0
'.1. 0
I-
~'G
~.J
;=
u
;0
:J
u,
-'
I.;
1.5
I.J
1.1
0,9J
O.B 1
0,70
0.61
0,,3
L.
W
:>:
::>
::
><
'"
::
0.7~1/
o. s
.00 I
.002.003 .00,
.01
.02
.03
.O~
.07.1
.2.3.,.7
2 . 3
LOAD DURATION TO rUNDAMENTAL PERIOD, TIT N
Fi gure 3-98

system for bilinear-triangular pulse (Cl = 0.010. C2 = 6)
10
::
:>
::
::
"0
w
::
;=
..
nME OF YIELD TO LOAD DURA nON, tciT
.-'\1'
.-'.t-J
'",
000000
'",
'..
'v'
'V"
t-J N
'.,i
\1'1.1'-10
...
'" '"
000000
-0
Cd Q'I
CJ\ ,.. ..... N
oVtOONIJI
....z
<,
><
<,
E
Il~
, ~tt~---mT\I/
sc
Mil
M
I A I VI
t:
:.VI
~/\..l/\
--_.f-\t-A--Ft-M+-I'ik-N'r--W--
,...J
o
o
...J
W
,
....
...'"
w
<>:
w
Q.
...J
....z-0:
w
~
"o
lo.
....
>--
JE==:r-,~'-k-J'k ~/I
e
Z
j::::
10
W
...J
o_
z
o
t:
l~EFx=J=='N~
IV
w
o
Iv
:J
::t:
.~
;(
><
-0:
...J
lo.
L7I"
::>
u
w
..Yr" I I
I<-
::t:
<l\;.;
__ 1\1.'
lo.
::t:
j::::
07
.00 I
,~
.002.003
.005
.01
.02
.03
.05 .07
.1
.2
.J
.5.7
Figure 3-99
Maximum response of elasto-plastic. one-degrce-of-freedom

10
TIME or VIELO TO LO~O DUR~ TlON,
..
e-
',.0
500
J57~T\ .-:\
::?7\
I \
JOO
200
w
><
IJ
(\- _~
\-1 I
-\If-
><
100
70
0
t:
JO
....
'"
V>
a-J
W
20
>0
>-
10
0
t:
lJ
v \
"1/
1'\
1\1/ Y X 1~~
.j 'v \; I'\-~~
I"
'" a>
0'"
v-
tt---: hZl'\A
r-,
l)
,\V
'"0
v-
...
b(
f'(
0 0 0
'"
16
\;
'j.
'"
\\
9.~
II
V\
D<
8.2
.J
I'-
7~ \
-.' I--
/ \
1\
\.
/.\1"
VI
II'"
~
II'\.
IV
r\Y
<,
-t.. /
'* ""
1./
~ (I>"
",'>X w ~ 11'1..
.p<\'
/>;
~ll
-I--.
5.3
/
1/
1/
46
J: s
r7
17
1/
J. o
,<.~
'l,~ ~
.I
1\
\
Y.
1/,._
I\.
IX IX
0 -. 7
0.5
.001
/1/ 1/
\><
1/
.002003 .005
\7
I\-.
Pi
\)
~V
-.::z
"'1. -/:. .I
1/
fAil>( !';II'> P'--b<
.\
rv
<'6
<.J
1/
\>. v . /
~~ ~[X/)k
~ -lK
Figure 3-100
It
~y
.~
lA"
AK: ,,~LS p,p
'1
f':~ p / r u = ....~l:*I--l-d
. .
.0.
.02
.03
.05 .07.\
.2.3.5.7
LO~D DUR~ nON TO rUNDAMENTAL PERIOD,
I.S
')(
~ ~~
I><2KJ)/ i>X ~ ~
1.1
/ .
I'XK:~Jb<~r:x
....z
<,
...E
a
o
a:
w
ll.
...J
....41:
z
:E
'0
';.0
IV\\\I/I\JI
<!
:E
a>
I~
l'
~f--tIA~\
}'.
Y):!:!I""W
f'\
I \lj J Ivl\lll\
><
0.0
., .,
-y
:E
:E
....
7-..L 11K II : \ \
I\L ~ I~ ~ /
1/
\ I
1\,,\
IV: X 1)\ D\ II
::>
r7
II.
)\ /
\.IVI
Po'o
'" ,\1-\
'"
.....
o
o
0
0
.V' . .V'
--'
0
1A I i'\, V
/ " \ f7
...
6.2
'! / !'\-
1\
I\"il\y .-\$ --
V \,
1\
'",
1\ 71\
IX IA [7\ j
II
Y \
'--,
'"
',.0
jl..-
-,
7 1 /
W
-J
L.
W
s::T --\/--\/-- j
fA- I "V I \
-J
L.
'",
'0
<:>
50
w
,
\ hi
,.0
I\;'i\
<,
,.0
'",
v'
v'
ttiT
2'
TiT N

system for bilinear-triangular pulse (C1 = 0.648. C2 = 10)
\0
1.3
1./
0.93
0.81
0.70
0.61
0.53
-c
...::>
o
....
z
o
;::
<.)
....:J
w
O'
:E
::>
:E
:E
...o
w
:E
;::
T1M[ or YI[LO TO LO~D DUR~T10N.
'0
3 o, ,,1---"
w
X
100
70
so
t:
,., ,.,
\I'
'0
""
"\..
".0
'-l
00
tclf
0
0
0
0
't/'
.~
'v'
.V'
!J'U'-1o
'j...i
l-J ......
0
0'
. .)
'"
o 0
co ao l1'
7.\
6.2
s..!
J/
1/
o
o
-'
w
1/
>-
fZ
1/
....z
..."-E
a
o
a:
w
Q.
...J
f-
til'
'"
'"
\~
8.2
l..
...
....l1' 0....0
....
".
-'
....,
00
V\ 1/\
1(0
000
U'
~ '"
t\=fcl~~~!J1\
LA
. .-
~ ~
2001~~*~~
<,
.,.
v'
'v'
. '6'
w
;>
o
2:
:>
l..
....o
z
\7\1\7
I-
U
W
/1\
-'
...J
.....
l..
W
"t'KtiA:ti'\t--nr~J5<
;>
:OJ
;>
l..
W
::f
,~IV
:>
::f
~~
><
;>
:Ii
l..
w
::f
t:
-J
0.7
Y"A~J-:
0.5
.001
.002 .005
.OO~
.01
.02
.05
l="
l--
.05.07.1
.2.5.5.7
LOAD DURAnON TO rllND~M[NTAL P[RIOD. TIT N
Fi gure 3-101

\0
TIME
..',.,
'"0
500
30 U
20
w
<,
'"
100
70
:'>
50 '",
.....
W
'",
....
0
'"
_\~
20
.i
-'
JA
IA.L. +
-"
-I-.....l
10
i="
W
-J
u.
0
::::>
~
><
4:
~
k-
(;
~-'
-\' I
-,
...,..
--'
Ib\
Ll
~L L L - : L
-,L
.00.
-'_ '"
'>! l'
.L
.02
.03.
'"
'"
1\
"~
~
9.5
8.]
?/
Lt.
IL
II
I)
~A"
~
"ll
'" ..t L.\
4:

.~
4:
.t. s
.t. o
<..1
<0
1.7
/5
'.J
::...:::.
I-
~,o
-J
I-
<'62
.2.3.5.7
:or
Ll-
~N"'/','_
~'"_
'"
r
r; rr
~ ~
r. ,
.E
w
'"
a..
."
\'
1
rbl'
'"
'0'
o\>.4
J
'.<.
d "- /
Z
I-
<,
0'
of
LOAD DURATION TO fUNDAMENTAL PERIOD, T/T N
Fi gure 3-102
'"
....
~t::IL11
I'
iz,
1\
r>
.05.07.,
6 6
'"
0
o '"
I-
,C ' "
'+
"-
'"
"j<"
0>
.\,lL-l
~
"~
D!
6 6
~. ,'J"
I'>' -1-,
ILl 'f1:
,-,",U
If,
oil>
L::[
'" \
I'.
.0'
'"
-'"
ll'I l '
"""
Ll>lJI., it l:o
YI)'-
~ ~ ~ L.. 4-<~
.002.003 .005
:..
IV"
~~ -"'- ",j}; " '~.v-
II
:'> -'
:.\
'"
-' -"
'r->
;t lA: :t- &
"f'
~ I'> M A.-<: <-..

2 i- i- DU' ~~ --I.i)
O"-X'v,w
'-. "'"
~ I:s:: '"
I~,-,
'" ~ " C!" f'!<"
Ki K~I(: <
~K~~
~
~~
'
-..'l -\ :)'.. DI l.LW..,4::

~
1Q,p.,
0.5
'0
.'v'
0
1:1';"
0.7
..,.
o.
VI
h_
.L
oJ'
LA k'\
-'I
tll
t'
'&
LX LY 'I " ,
+'
,-
....
"'
.....l
-s
tdT
~
~
~"
Ic:;~
"/'5;14-,"
~"
~
.L
30
-J
W
-,
TO LOAD DURA TlON,
.A~ ~
'L",.L:.'
I!.\
.L
"-
i="
W
-J
...::
><
0
-- --,.,
'oJ'
,p~
~ l'\,,"~
~- ' "c, .L~~
C'.
><
'oJ'
~ ~~
~ .c
il;
,., ,.,
v'
v'
or YIELD
10
I-
u
w
~
~
.~
::::>
1.1
0.9J
O.B I
0.70
0.61
....
0.53
;::
~
0
,..,
<l'
'0
v'
if
,..,
,'0.1' "'r-J
,..,
'of
'0
l[/T
o
00000000
..p
......lo
'1.1'
...
'v'
v'
f..> tJ
00oJ'l1'-10
...
0
0
0
0
0
.....
.....
.....
ttl (J'l
C1'1JI.OU'l
OONlJIO
~iLl
\1/
\JI~'-"'1"-J'N
1/
<f",
f\ftz~nr ~~ii717lIILhUI ~/
6'
~
z
o
r~\ "/I' >"1
~~
u
-'
u.
u
o
co
....'"
...""
u
:~
1'-
.v, iVt~17'\-t-N~
~~
.s'cJ'
,.>
/ l/
;-
<,
...E
o
o
cc
W
Q.
.
-'
;-
'6'
..
:>'
'
It><
1/
'-
;-
;-
......
,~~I/ ~lt'l
z
o
jN!\-IV
t:
;-
...J
'-
-'
,~
o
:>'
=>
:>'
-c
:>'
o
:>'
::>
:>'
sc
::t:
w
:>'
;::::
LL~
0.5
.00 I
~002
.003 .005
.01
.02
.03
.05.07.1
.2.3.5.7
LOAD DURA nON TO rUNDAMENTAL PERIOD,
Fi gure 3-103
235
TIT N

system for' bilinear-triangular pulse (C1 = 0.316, C2 = 10)
10
TIME or YIELD TO LOAD DURA nON,
..',..,
'"0
.,..,.
,.., ,..,
'",
"'", "',..,
oJ)
'J
.~
500~,'~/I\II/~I\ IV
...
'"
0'0
.~
. '" '"
~~
.~
30
l\
tdT
....0
.,..,
.~
.~
Z
f-
......
JY
><
<,
-'
'"
J.
><
."
6'
cY
t:
1\/
...,
....a-
""
a
a
".~
>0
f-
t:
u
w
'6'
1/
<[
~
a
L.-
~v
>-
z
a
i=
o
w
...J
L.W
1'.,
\/
a
::E
::>
'5
:1:
::J
~
;;:
-c
:1:
w
::E
II
-'
L.-
-'
<[
-'
w
Q:
Q.
>z
\=;zjid\71'\tJ~(\
-'
L.-
J:;r
I
...)
::E
3
::l
,{\
q
C\l~\I\
:1:
L.-
w
::E
i=
07
0.5
.001
/
.002.003
.005
.01
.02
.03
~.
v
.05 .07
,I
.2'.3.5.7
Fi gure 3-104
I'
TIT N

system for bilinear-triangular pulse (Cl : 0.237. C2 = 10)
\0
tdT
TIME or YIELD TO LOAO DURATION,

0'
O'
',::,
500
h'l'
p)(, &'
30Q.
._~
200
w
><
I-A
><
100
70
t-.
U
W
)(
I
T
'::'
0
1\
1\1 V_,'
11\
W...> \11 ~ ~
TT
1\"-~'-'"
"'\I!\--rr
\.
'\
)(
1\1 1/ 1\
....'"
<.
'"
20
>0
...J
-.'"
v "Iv'
X IV
1\ I
I
rJ> ll(
1\T \
I\INI/\I
(\
10
-'
....
w
:>'
~
::E
<i
::E
1,l ..).IX-- '" .

Y:' v x 1:)-
V . 1/ !\ It'
I~I.)<)( IAi( il1/
1/ \1/
3
2
U'
'" '"
'0
U'
0
jj
II
II
VN., 1\ l--.
LL.)(I fiN I J. II
~ c\1
IVJr-
1\)(
'0
....0
.U'
11[\ II
II
'lr-
.,.,
r-,
VI\i~
<
tJ\ W
If"..
\1
-
f\ J 1'>'..)(
7~'..\
[)<
I'
b<1\
Illl\Y[\
1/ '\ _
I\7 rX;;~[;)~V 1\
f\./"f'S(lX \V
~kZ-K) ")~r)
i~K&,~[)<KKr- KXl?'fOl~KD
1r7
0.7
0.5
.001
'/
1/
/./
/1/1/
.002.003 .005
.02
.03
.5
rY'1) /\ IA ~h
"X IV IV v~l\
~~~
/"
.05.07.\
.~
~es~~ p ir u = "--0;;.~1\;~~
r.//l/
'.2 .. 3
Figure 3-105
/ 1 / -" L - - / ' l '7v
/
.01
1/\ . IV
'
.5. . 7 ..
TIT N
Maximum 'nispo'nse of e l asto-p l as t f c , one-degt'ee-of-freedom

\0
..:
c
z
l--
1.7
1.5
r-.....
t>
r--.~ J.
,fa
<.J
Y I'
~~
..:
z
l--
u,
20
~'\.~
Y\
0:
,fs
<Ii.
,Ii<
1/
o
n,
So
<,
., A
"l
rr-.
'"
....
II\-~l
'0
'0
v'
\ .
1\7~b'( ~v
1/
'0
r-,
7
5
'0
~v::
)'t--li
t-:,('
'A.. II
V\ I X
V \
'y \ b'-1Jl
'1/\1/./\/1t-1\
1\ I'i-
'0
-Y. ..
f--
I,,, "
i'lllX'
-c.
\1 W
\/ \11 IV \V 1\I X
IV
IJ\
V \ r-V
1\
II \I
,!f--tv
.
11\
\1'\
'"0'.
'",
"-IA-J
I,
f--
~I
',::,
V\
c.,
30
II
'.,
SO
a
a...J
II V
II
ltV
_J
oJ'
II '.
0
'v'
0
0
O'
oJ'
J\ I/J./ II
11\ 1\
I}\ IV
'bl
'",
I \ II \
1\ I
Ij
,g
0
dlll\\
'\PI
I
\11
....
--'oJ' . --.,.,
'1/
\1, \ II
j\-/o
'<,
'::'
oJ'
or
o
Z
o
;::
u
cw
c
~
1.3
::>.
I. I
0.93
0.81
0.70
0.61
><
-c
.....
0.53
;::
,.
. ':
TIME or YlELD/ro LOAD DUR~ TlON, t[/r

P'v'~t.l
't-l
'u'
'..J'
'0
........
't1'
't.l
O'
'..9
.~
O' 0
Q.
'oJ'
....
'vI'
oJ'
t.1'
:....1
o :
"v"
0
"t-l
..
't-J,
..
0,
'-::"':"'...
u
-0
"'-
'0
e:tI
0
'0
CI'
'0
L1'
lfI
VI.
r-J
,~
\J'o
llCl~
<i'
'r'
,~
x
E
II \
),
<,
I"'."
><
z
.L
~IW1A-T\
;:::
u
of
'J
~
Iv
'0
o
z
o
'"
::>
..J
'"
_i
.
....
w
'"
c.
I-
"'
~
w
,
Z
I-
<,
>~
f::
l..
.~
.1. 0
I-
t:
, I),
..J
u,
ViA r 7'1'"7'., 1I r:::I'
! \ /!
l-;iT
;~,Il.!!T(
"
--~~~
'"
::>
'"
..J
L..
-11~-
'"
'::>
'"
><
'"
.<[
l..
'"
'"
;:::
,.
/v./V/v
/1/
.002 .003
.oos
.ot
.02
.03
.O~
.07 .. 1
.2.3.5.7
LOAD DURATION TO rUNDAMENTAL PERIOD. T/T N
Figure 3-106
Maximum response of etasto-plastic, one-degree-of-freedom

system for bilinear-triangular pulse (C1 = 0.133, C2 = 10)
10
e
TIME
or
YIELD
ro LOAD
DURA TlON,
V"
o:
"y-J'~
telr
0
....
0
.....
o~oCJ''''''.
o
'o
cJJ
0
'0
<J'
lJ'
'0'0'000
l1'
~
......
t-J
t-J.
o
0
f'.J
1.1'
0
-',-,,---u--,r--,
.,
Z
0-
-'
'"F.
6'
'"
<,
.'"
.:z
>-
'0
'"
W
Q.
...J
:
t: o
o
z
..J
-tv
.J
,
....
'"
'"
. ",
lI'--:,---JI,,~N-,4r-I'\
,..
w
'.J-
a
o
'J
r

o
0-
,o..
~L~
.\ I
:z
o
,-u
...
..J
I~
u,
W
o
::>:
::::>
::f.
.::>:
::::>
::>:
><
:
v
.~
.00 ,
002003 .005
.01
.02
03
.05.07.1
.2.3.5.7
LOAD DURA TlON TO fUNDAMENTAL PERIOD, TIT N
Figure 3-107

10
TlMC
v
',.,
u'
v'
,., ,.,
'J'
'J'
'.'
'"
or YICLD
0
..... 0.~
0
TO LOAD DURATION,
0
'"
'v'
0
',., ',.,
~
tdT
0
'..,
0
";
u'
0
';
'0
'0
t1'
'0
'0
'"0 '" '"
... ...'" "...
'0
u'
'0
,
_, v
><
<,
L'
sc
;:::
u
w
-'
...,
....
'"
'"
~\tTI\I-1
50~pl*
IZVlXIM:! \/
<,
....
.....E
'/
rv--r~IV
.,.,
1t'C~~-1Lf\
1-
.[\f\
./
\l
/\1
l\
:::f
'0
r>
5
Figure 3-108
\0
::>
L-
f-
a
u
t:
w
.s
I.,
"w
1.5
I. .3
:::f
1.1
0.93
0.81
0.70
0.61
0.53
p/r'
<.0
~~~I\

::>
./.0
.'
-'
.
.
LW
0
-'
f-
.J
;::
-s
'.1'
30
0
0
~
w
a,
IS'
n
-'
w
Z
0
i:
f-
'r'
.A
I.
W
(")
IV
d'
::>
:::f
><
:
:::f
"0
:::f
;::
TIME OF YIELD TO LOAD DURA TlON, tEiT
"-1
'0.1'
1iI'"
'v"
OOl1'''''~
...0
0'
v'
.,.,
.s-
o.
0
'""
.~
'0
OJ
'....
0
Ol
'"
0
...
l1'
'0
v4
,.., 0,..,
'0
00,..,
,."Ji=W=>#9i.1"==1o~
2
IX
\+--hl;+-t,-J-A
>-
<,
..>
,x
001:;.,.,
IVI X I J.JI
I '07
,.-
I~
os:.oJ'
/1 \ / I X 1/
'-,
'cS'
~.
t..
w
....'"
-'
<:
>z
w
:::f
...
::>
-'
>-
f:'
w
<>:
o
a
,0
u,
z
o
.....E
-'
L..
f#
x'
>-
z
o
i=
o
W.
...
..J.
"
...
'0
:::f
::>
:::f
::>
-c
><
<:
:::f
...o
:::f
i=
0.7
/v
I / .
.002 003 .005
.01
.. 02
.03,
~
.05.07.1
.2
.3 ..,
.5
.7
LOAD DURA TlONTO FUNDAMENTAL PERIOD, T/T N
Fi gure 3-109
'Maximum response of elasto-plastic. one-degree-of-freedom

7 .

/
'",
',.,
'"
-0
'..>
'oJ'
. p_. oJ' r oJ'
.~
',..,"
0
''''0
'IT
..,
>OJ'
0
/
'0
rJ>
''""
'0
'"
'0
'0
.... 0....0
V'
....
/\ 1/ \Fl/--...~
'"
I)
,.,
rJ>
..>
'"
',6'
'-'
~:
S.
~1'Jl~1
f-
'J'
.,
c,
.. 1
c..
'0'
CJ
~o
CJ
'.:,
I.~
'"
'"
cr
W
D.-
2:
0
,...,
...E
C
'J'
Z
I-
<,
.t s
--'
:-
j j
,0
<.(;
:r-
<s
f-
U
W
,if
--'
c..
I\J...J:
<0
/1"1\7
w
C
"
::J
"><
<i
~ pir;;-'Q;,.~t tHcl
0.7~ro
.002.003 .005
~/
.01
1.
.02 .03
.05.07.1
.2.3.5
.7
LOAD DURATION TO rUNDAMENTAL PERIOD, T/TN
Figure 3-110

system for bilinear-triangular pulse (CI = 0.032. C2 = 10)
10
w
::f
<C
.
Q
::J
"0
'0
'"<C
I-
1.7
I.S
1.3
I. 1
0.93
0.81
0.70
0.61
0.53
I-
z
0
i=
0
u,
::f'
::J
::f
<C
::f
. "0
w
::f
i=
TIME or YIELD TO LOAD DURA TlON,tdT

p
',..>
v'
v'
500 ~-fT'
,..> ,..>
OJ' '0
,.. ,..
',..>
'oj'
--:X'-,'-"
,p
'...1
'~
0
p
oJ'
v'
0
',..>
... 1"\71\"V--'"
0
',..>
0
...
0,
,;'
v'
'0
oJ'
'0 0 "J.
0
. . -.--.-,
'"
'0
'0
'0
.... ....OJ' ....0
V'
"'N'i',V' \7' .,
'X' AI r
M
l~ .'\ J. ,.. ,
. '\If I.'.
300
200
IX
x
z
0
f=
w
-'-'
u,
w
\00
7a
./, V ;,p.,
'\.
....
'"
'"
-i
-i
VO: r\7'
VJ 1\
1\
'\1'1'\ \. 71\
2-1-\--'"
'fV-l-f
.x
1\
',X
/ \
\ /
V IV
A =~V\_~I~
~
...J
J: o
~'6
~'J
2,0
;l
In:
,\.LV.
1,7
1, S
"
II
YiI'Y \! \/\ II)( i.
d' -j-'V
/ ,,), 1'-.:. -, 1\ /1\
4(~~</~
0,7
p/ru:=~
;L1A'j:/~~;Z'I.A'IYII.r"V
/1/1/I.A'VIVl/.A'/V/A/""'-Y1I111
'T~:?JL/VVV
.""7 7' -%'[;1-1.
0,5 "
,001
,002,003 ,005
,01
,02
,03
,05.07
,1
.2
,3
,5
,7
Figure 3-111
1111111
177f:7P'77V

system for bilinear-triangular pulse (Cl = 0.022, C2 = 10)
t-
J: s
,~
-!':;.
':0
1111
J 1\
0
O;
':
f\1'
.s-
c,
I~
Y II
'"
'''':>
.If+----j\-JI'I+Ik-I'\
)I"
t<,
-'
',..
~ V'~tillLbHja=tl\.J'h\-ttr,-~'--
IT
'1.
'r'\: / rv
7\17'
/\/
'
::t
><
'"
'IX '
-'\ - ,,/,,,,,,,-'/\-11
::J
't1\ 7
~"",. \ \
IA
~l~ ~VV '\' -;.
T
-7,' T ' .,
10
u,
W
1-\, l\i~
\ I I 'x' .\ _\ I' ./..
I-
.f., ~
"vR"l\" X' \
30
2a
/I'
.+-,.;
II, " \
l~
\f-\Ii- ."'/\ 'y'\
1-
I" ,
-\7 3V,.\.,
50
>Z
r<"IVL
11' I-A,I/\ /
X_\, ". . '\
',""
j~~:~X Vf\ ~ ~~, , ~lrv~ x'
V 1\
-'-\i1\I-A 'Y.
<,
:::" \ 07
II \ t-I?!Wr<-- \ . \ -
(p
"
10
1.3
1,1
0,95
0.81.
0,70
0,61
0,55
'"
'"
::J
u,
0'
t-
;::
o
w
...J
....
w
::J
::t:
::t:
....
0
w
::t:
;::
triT

..
.~
v,~~,;,;
'v'
'\1"0
'J-
't-l
0
'-::'
".9
0
0
_.~
':r
'0
.~
.~
o
',-.)
...
.~
',...
';
IS'
C?
'0
'0
'0
~0d.lc1'
vl.
0\1'
'0
'0
,",,~1.J4
OO~
'0
....
....
'"
:r-;N:"""""'".lml
e:tb6l.....Al
~---'=l1~\f- f*'HI-'d.~~d'
.....
..>
'/
\1)
1/\
....=+u~F11\t<fjJ,=PJ=i~
'
'rl\~
,W
.J
a
a
...J
.. , r-
>-
~;;.
II
i=
u
W
-x
~~~
10
7
u,
W
::f
-c
::f
J. s
::J
<.f>
<.J
<0
t.r
p/r u = ~
...
.002.003 .005
.01
.02
/1'
.03
l . r ' / I . . . . , ; I ......
.05 .07.1
.2.3.5.7
Figure 3-112

syste~ for bilinear-triangular ~ulse (C1 = 0.015. C2 = 10)
10
l..
0
....
i=
l..
W
::f
1.3
I. I
0,93
0.81
0.70
0.61
::J
0.~3
i=
~
~?f2~-i~'-lzl~Ltj-i1t~7'~~~~z12';1Z;~,~~2Z?:f22f~P~7-L7-t4-~~
s
0.5 .G.
.00 I
::f
<t:
I. S
...J
<t:
e-
":0
J. o
">
::f
::J
1\'- II/
AlA
...J
IX
W
":6'
e-
z
o
....
2
Q..
'o"
,
....
....
o
...E
a
6'
co
e-
<,
~
l..
w
::f
_.
e,
"
TIME OF YIELO TO LOAD DURA TlON,

p
.~
50
v'"
'v"
.... ....
~..r
'0
"'J' .-.....
'...>
0
,p
0
''ft
0
p
J'
o'
'S
..... 0.~
0
v'
0
O.PJlk~"l"~'rWId':lldM'I=A~~>#~
telT
0
.~
.-v'
0
<fJ
.0
MdlvIAIJ1
'X
CI'
J'
'0
'0
v'
J'
....
.... "0
....0
'0
'"
-l\~I~
<fJ
.....
...>
'"
.,.,
6'
-.,.l;:-'VN;>q..>.dA"t--1r1'<1f-t"<1It I~,}
t:
-d\+--N-'IY-t"""'lw-+-~HllI-l
W
...J
IX
...J
.<[
'0'
.2
w
:>:
-c
.....
f-.
..
u.
,
.....
....
..."-E
c,
Z
I-
::>
...J
L.:
O.
>-
1-"
of-
o
;=
z
o
t:
':1
L.:
W
...J
u,
Q'
:>:
a
:>::
::>
:>:
:::>
:>:
><
:>:
:>:
L.:
w
:>:
i=
07
0.5
.001
. --
._--I.L
.002003005
747'V7f7f7Dl ~~
-.01
'.02 .. 03
.05 .07.\
,2.3.5.7
LOAD DURATION TO FUNDAMENTAL PERIOD,
Figure 3-113
TIT N

7:' 10
telT
TIME Of YIELD TO lOAD DURA TION,

OJ
0
'0
'..,.
Ei' Y 7\
.3/'",:F
(;7
I "e
50
so
20
w
sc
'E><
z
0
t:
w
-'
u.
w
,
'"
....
....
N
W
7
5
3
2
:>'
<:
.If'
A"
X"
.. ...
...
~
01-'
C?~??~?~~?oooooo
""V4lJ4NN--
V\
t./'
"v
'
U\"'-IoV'oQ\.l.N
IJ\
IV
V.
'\A."
~~II
"r:FJ.'I.
it" '-'-".
r~
1'Ji' i><1X I')
1-'
tz' 1_/ ..,,{.
'/J1M
i'><
.!/,Y/
./1"7' .
...L /
P7J
"'v,,,
.
~iI'"
1/
. .
~
,/.. "
'
!I
I)<
" 1/
C,
1/
... ,
rs,
,/I'-.
1/
.01
~
~~.
rV'
I;'
~~
/9
/7
/5
13
"
.9.5
8.2
7.1
6.2
5.3
4.6
4.0
3.5
3.0
2.6
2.3
2,0
t.7
i.s
KV
\.1
'
v-
'"'
1(":
......
'
.', ,-
"I' . ,
.02
.03
.05 .07.\
.2.3.5.7
3.
. Maximum response of elasto~plastic. one-degree-of-freedom

....z
<,
k,1/ - -
lOAD DURA TlON TO fUNDAMENTAL PERIOD, T/T N
Figure 3-114
~G
I'
'"
- '2
/v
.002.003 .005
=,..
,1Iff
V '
r-..
O.
DO'
l..HN
CUI
D'
'\'-. ,''' r-.
'
.r -
1)<
'"
~v ~ ~
r-.4 \
'
'"
"~"')~'/ '~I/
IA '> I.!'
rv v
wtx 'X'S: ~
U
i'Y VIVH
I
'0,'
F-
IX-n X I /
~.I"
'v'"
>
f'-:
II
\i V ""
tx . V
II
iJ
y
,v
" , , , "\
VI""
00
-D)Q'l
00Ul
<o
\ ""
IX
N)
J
~i
7'I-I-J <'~'"
IT 1/
b'J
o.
hi
I\-,l
"\....... "
lIll"L~fj:;f\~,-+X-\-l~u'I-'
I'x'-->
"
,_.lI
I-,.C
1-'1<
.... ~
-t.
/\ !tt\ /\
.
- I'-' Ii.
~
A !I
~\"V V 1/
, A
-:-
',;
"""',.
'\0lc
><
:>'
.:>,
::J
'0
~",~x- ,J
YI~~'~~, ~~VV X~' ,.
r=t
't-'"
r>
I~ <c'
!A
iL V,
-r-
t:
U
~t-I~
v"
.6'
'p.
7'-:""-1'
12t.,\ bX._'\. .
I-L-'
w
-'
u.
..
rzcrz
-'
w
>-
t.1'
.....,..
d'
10
...E
o
'"w
Q.
-'
4:
....
Z
L.J
::f
4:
o
Z
...
o
....
z
o
;=
u
...'j
L.J
::f
~
::f
<:
0.93
0.81
0.70
0.61
"-
0.53
;:::
::f
o
w
::f
'. ) ;;4
TIME or YIELD TO LOAD DURA TiON,
'0'
d'
'0
'"
'J'
U'
'v"
..
"..
vi.
v"
'0
(J'
'If'
t-J
....
...1
'..
tEiT
"". '0
0'"
~.
'~'.."J,
t-J
0
U'
0
'?~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ? ~
l1"
.':!'
..
lJ\
lJI,VIoNN ..............
"
O'VI 0 (7) VI 0
IJ'
00
ooO\
'"
1'\
~
~I~
'"
'"
0'"
'
II
\I'
,_~
.. i\=ltt:~U-~
00
Z
l-
...)
nt
11
""
l..J
Q.
IN..l
t:
'I
'."..... ,
""'-I'IX\II"
IVlI'V
-J
<C'
l-
'''~I % Ni(
'\
f.,JX"
,..1
l..J
-J
u,
l'
l..J
I-'
....
w
'"
n
-J
l>
>-
o
,-
tLJlf\lJ A }N YllvCllig
l\."'l\ l<. tv'i.1Y1.J Y
I J V 1\/ ~ )(\ V't-IU'Il
0 ,
:>:
<C
a
z
':)
u,
o
lZ
)1\;
.1:).--
i=
u
.-=
U
l..J
-J
l..J
u,
-J
l..J
c,
a
:>:
l..J
:>:
:::>
:>:
. ir"'>l:71~
><
:
M"~'/}
':)
:>:
::>:
l..
.A~/.
W
::>:
i=
VA/;/
.01
.02
.03
.05.07
,I
.2.3.5.7
Figure 3-115
Maximum' response of elasto-plastic, one-degree-of-freedom

10
nME or YIELD TO LOAD DURA nON,
Cl
I\ClI
500"
300
200
w
17 ~
100
70
lis
.........
>-
30
IV
\
20
,z
0
\,
~.I
::f
><
::f
/
2
--\
Y.
.001
It-
II
-iL'11
fl
\I IVr\~I\
./\1/ ~D' I\)
1'\/ lV1\~
l7
1\
\ t'\ \$
fJ 1:' \1
I"
'"
'"
o
.
0
00
'"
.....
0'"
I'
r-;
r-,
(J\
.I,
~
1'\
PC I)
00
I"
1'\
0 0
:...
:'\.
')(
0
A\ 1\
i\
~~
.,
26
22
rr-
"I',
19
17
15
r-
13
..
7\ t-i .J\. M
kI tv \!I\. 0-
1/
~~~
fj i!tI
~ )< k><
9. 5
IV
. ')
IX I!\ }Cv f\'1K~ .

W
.)
$< r-,
' I" - 1'-11, r-,
,
I"
I
r-
IJ'
r-
KI'- r-
t'---
,,'
'"/
]\, ,0\
II
2.6
2.3
V\c-, \ K ,/ v 7-
~ I~ VX X
~~ W~
IVY k>
~
~
1,1
I,S
1.3
1.1
0.93
~
./
':::- ....
,.t
....
:-0
.:.l:'EP
'h-'!
~,.-:
.l.
I-"
,\ I\
~\
.x
r-;.,
-,
1\
' P /r u
/.
VI
,.002 003
005
.. 02
.03
,OS .07, .1'
.2
.3
Fi gure 3-116
.5.7
TIT N
Maximum response of e;asto-plastic, one-degree-of-freedom

....0
z
u
w
..J
"w
:::E
=>
:::E
0.53
'"
-c
:::E
0,,61
'//1'
//1'
.01
:::E
"-,
ll.
...J
O.'SI
0.70
17' 7
'"w
a
z
=>
I.-
4. 0
3.5
3.0
...1
l';>(: 1\
5;
I'itI
....E
....z<i
4. 6
....z
<,
Il~
1.\
6.l
2.0
f'\
-'v
/
IX"
--
tx- IX
' 1\ 17" tT -l" '-\N ..

. }1'1rJ\ ~ q,V'
1\
'\.,\1 \ '\ 11/\

I
/
~ )I..
I.
OJ Ir'
/
D,S
~
....
X V
V 1\
1\'
-Y,- 1-1\
',,;
/"'-1 \
/I.
~
...J,
t-J
telT
0000000000
'000
-.t.
lJI .. l.J'lt.-"N""
....
\/'0
lJIlJ\ ....... oU\o(Jl.(Jo.l
\I
1\
xo
::f
oc,
.1
Iv
r\
/ II 1\
10
1/\
1\7' 1\/ 1\/
yp 1\
...J
I.W
"V
r7\
'\ !IV
IA
'oj'
'-\
-I- lo;;,
v
'x
" f.
.",>l-
50
...J
'(1'
.lJ\
IX~ I-\-If\-
W'
vi'
'0
v'"
....
I' :J 1\/. Y
u.
\, 'f.. I
I
IV v
...J
a
a
'oJ'
'0
..
'c-
ff'
><
<,
I~
oJ'
'" '"
'0
C)
10
:::E
ldT
TIME or YIELD TO LOAD'DURATlON,

cP6'I.1'P"~v'"t-.l~
'0
500
sc
~\-:
rs:
SO
_I
50
....
-.J
...
--'
w
>-
20
Z
t:
::f
><
-c
::f
lY
'"
...\.
\-.J ~
10
.'1l. \
::f
::>
r '\ :.;
--'
u,
w
-:i
1"1 r
0.7
0.5
.001
-~
LV
lD.
f\
-?~~O~?~??oooo
U'
~V4VlNN"""" -Ql)0'l U1~
U' lJI -a 0"'" 0
(J'l Vl
0
0 fJI 0
Q
11
j"- \
(\)
Y\
I'!..11 PI<.
~ 11'
r-
00
lo04N
UI
26
'J
'f..
22
l)tolf r'V I"" IL
1\
~ [)(
I 1\
1\
I'-
v 1)(
/ "'-'
-'-.u>,
)('-- ' \
/\
J,
1L It'
Eo .'1.
"1/
xl"
_
[')
1-;'
'"
,( .
:l"
4.Eo
4.0
3.5
t-
t':
12 l::'r-- k"
r-
I'l( I ,
",.;'
v
t-
,~,~ r- K' I/'\,Y r-
>\It
.L'. ,
J.O
f-
I'
It-
IX
~j lV
v
&6
1"'
~~K-
v. ~
;K
r'i:
-t:. . \.
or
ur.J
::I
C"
r--
"
~rp/ru=
.01
.02
.03
.05.. 07.\
.2.3.5.7
LOAD DURA TlON TO rUNDAM(NTAL PERIOD, T/T N
Fi gure 3-117

system for bilinear-triangular pulse (Cl = 0.750. Cz = 30)
::f
<[
::>
"0
J-Z
/.5
l.J
::>
'nU;q!~'t'M
1.7
L~
':./'.I/ l"c/ V 1:::2
...J
<[
J-Z
11
.' -
'"
lL
;::
o
w
1\
~.
l./i
l ..]
l.Q
,/
I-:::
....
~ ?V~~
IX(
J'
I'X
D-'
..h' 'rl.,
-I"X1l I\t'x
xr~~
.002003 .005
1,\
. """-
.1\
\\
~.~
...:>
1/
..fj
11 ~JX:'.:.I"
...E
\~
lL
J--
<,
\;
r/
!"
~ I'
\9
\1
'6.'1.
\1"--,.'
1/'';;D
lJ(-
-"L IY Ii( ~ ~ 1'\
"-.l
/'
:..}!Z'
D~
,--.j
'-"
.Jj,
~)XX:"~~
~I">:""J< L ><Q<
/.
lJ\
'>~,
Lt. . .!"'"
1\
\\
:l\..
~
1\ V
LY.
\
c: 1/\1 [:WI
Pi
-:,.~
r- x...
..i.i L\
'. IAv ~
j< ts, \v.
.i
':' -:'
~ t--J
..l
II
I~ Jl.. t\ 'i I\
0
....
IJ
..D..
."
~ f
v.
X X::L II
1\
JL
Ll
'""
l f r~ '$"\1/'
\ IL\ " k::\
I ~
.L 1YJ..\ f !",.I~
70
u,
W
'0
"G'
IX
~L
A 'iT
t:
....
-/
x\
E
>< III0
0
_'.Ii. -"
r.2...\.
<,
.v'
.~ -1
X
.L 1/ -.'f --i
500
200
'oJ'
~ilI
'0
10
l. I
0.93
0.8\
0.70
0.61
0.53
...J
L-
::f
:%
><
<[
If
L-
w
::f
;::
riME or YIELD TO LOf>.D DURA n'ON,
~oo
,,"II
.~
300
><
E
>< \00
t:
~o
I~
'"
a
a
30
10
-'
>-
I-Y'
-'
10
:l'
:l'
1\
\1
il'l
~()IX ')f')4i"V
o,~
/
1
V L /
.00\
\,
1/ 1\
,II\.
1$
I\
l/\
/1"'--
""''''
K I"Nr"--r--.
[)( 1\ !-1Il' \)< t'---l) r--- "17/'t-tit;>'11l
\) [\
1/:,,"t--- j
I'
1"- II
'.
i'-ll'1'- '
i'-
I"
lJ<,
I/'
,/'
V-~IX;~~
I'.. / [',
I-;
f.-
I')
oJ:--
.l<', ~
I'
)' r-
....
III' \
IN)(
r-
'\)<,,1)\ M ~ V~..c
PZ:Y)l) l/ tL\:V V
f\
~7
~~
k-'ttT
II)&O~ '?1Z1-'I:"
~
_'
1/
,~
~PI pir u ="Qi,f!I'J~ffi
Q.
.002,003 ,005
Figure 3-118
4.6
:f
;Z
::>
I..-
.1. 0
...
<'6
s:
2.0
.-1
t.
1.5
I.J
1.1
0.93
0.81
0.70
0.61
0.53
Maximum response of elasto~plastic. one-degree-of-freedom

system for bilinear-triangular pulse (Cl = 0.715, Cz = 30)
-1
":;
~'l~'/QL~+--/.--J---J-.-I-I-+-4'----l--J---c--I--I---+--I-I-++-i---'---+--i--+-+'-+-H--H
.01
.02 .03
.05.07.1
..2 . 3 . 5 . 7
2
3
5 7 10
LOAD DURA nON TO rUNllAMENTAL PERIOD, T/T N
...Z-<:
/
1/ -Z. / 1'/
1\
<.,J
...E
IX
"7
l-
<,
9'.>
'/).l
J.5
..
'""1-..
\\
4.0
1--'2!-1-W'17H
I'>
\;
<--"" ~
.L.
r- t:><
/ r-,
22
19
11
~.l
,....
. I'-
I\~V Vi'\- J
"--i ~ / 1\ v: V IV
_'X lX \1 ')(~K lX.If).x~ ~~
1~",~l));:C2l)
0,7
IY j 1\ J<
l\.lI
K I\. 1/1\
""'I \
VI\tWrv<l'Y
"
\. ,)(
""~ J,\
l\
K V I\-
\It-I.L '\N 1/
\if
1\.6 I'X
_v -x
'I'll"
><
-<:
-w
'.
\0
..\ f\
00'00000000000000
\1"~Vl~NN:"":""
-OOC7\
VI.
v.N
tJo 0
V" U'...a oV" o<J'llN
0
olft
00
aU'
-:'""r;IJ"....i.
1\1 1\ V\ . f\. 1\ 17'

1\""9
N
II \ 11\
IV"
r-
-:'"
~
,.A-
\.l7I\1
I\I
..
l\.'/A]')
>\
rv
lA
..,
/\
r;
"/'
-I.
IX
IV IV J I\-~t---~
- \ \ /\ 1r--:V
/
f\ Rt-M \
A'
1\
~\AX
,5
:
:::J
'i to
I..-
.
\1
K7"'. lX
' \ '\
I\
,'I'
It'\
I-
II'
J' 11\-./ \//1\1.<

r,\. .1'>. .
-I--IX
I I \' ,/I
i=
u
1/ I~
r-
70 t- :J,
-'
w
,
....
....
'\ 1\
'V'I ?1 ~I ' \
200
I,>\-y \ I ' \~I
<,
cPcf'o.J'''v''-..rt-l~
'0
'oJ'
"..r "p'IS'
'0
"I$'
.....
'0
tclT
I..-
.:f
::>
.::f
i<
-c
...a
w
::f
i=
I;
tdT
.....0 0
. 0.l0
.0.0.0. 0. 0
.0
.
1I"'VlO/oNN--
TIME or YIELD TO lOAD DURA TlON,

<1'
'0
ti"<.1'''v'-v'-,-)~
'\1'
."v"
.....
'd'
'0
"\I'
....
"'-'
"
0-10'
...
",.
\-.Jo~
IJl
-l
U\lJ'-IOlJ\OO\Vi
><
<,
, E
>< 100
,J " 11'\...
:,L..J I\.
T=r2\",--
;::
--'
I,
W
....
--'
I.W
:1"
::>
:1"
..L
11\
'"
000
"'....
0"
....0
Z
f-
<,
...E
1!'NJttl
M"p,
5Q.
1---lo(d-'~>,7*'i"-l'\-I
fJ
--'
.",
f-
l/
~}\
",illf\~V
>-
a
,z
'w
' III
JLM\1I
'w:3
i=
u
1"
11\'
. ,1/I
.......""
~I\f\\.
00
~7
JW~ ~
w
.. .
00 o
:..
()l) en
IV
l/tw
.i-
~
"
z
w
:1"
:>
I.-
a
fz
a
t:
u
w
..J
IV_'
I.W
t><
L..-
><
'"
:1"
:f
i-
:01/
:>
:1"
I-
I.-
'"
:::if
w
:::if
i=
.1::
~
.0.
,02
.03 .. 05 .07.1
. 2 . 3 '.
lOAD DURA TlON TO rUNDAMENTAl PERIOD,
Figure 3-119
.5
.7
TIT N
I _
3
~l
Maximum 'response of elasto~plastic. one-degree-of-freedom

system for bilinear-triang~lar pulse (C1 = 0;681. C2 = 30)
5
},
10
nME or YIELD TO LOAD DURAnO'N, le/T
500
'" '" '"
'. "o
'\
300
200
w
<,
sc
t:
Ll
100
,
....'"
'"
CD
30
20
lA
\
10
AO
~=
""""
1\
N}
1-11
'1"
r'\
11'
1\1'--
1Il
-&
IJl
V\
I"J
.I
\'1. rx
l,.Il
(J'l
r-
It(
_I
I".
VI
.0 VI
,q
,1
,'>
i'..L
I'--Ar"__-JI4l
'>
Ii'-.
r-,
PI
r\
u;
I'l'- IV
1\
1\
1/
"ik"--l\1'1\ . :;I;j:
f\ I"\~\'./W'
1 \
AhA J\ tAl)!
IV
f<,
-"/I-.... [\~l II'\.

(\/N V I\X V
,I
r-, 1/
. ""
lJr--K~
r--
..
W
...J
l..
W
::J
:20
sc
<!
:20
_\
<c
Y
)(
II
V \ /\~c-
i/:S/
IV~}
~ I\. v
1/,/i
-,
./. /
~/~/~~/~.IL7'~l75i~-i
0.:5 1/
001
' /,
.002.003 .005
ll"
F--
4.6
1-0
IJ
1-'
r-
'l.
/.:2
~ \.
r\
~Q --~
"" ; . -""
<.~
<0
1.7
k-
\?
.~
0-:
~ ~~ p/ru = ~Ft++J
- "
/.5
I.J
1.1
0.93
0.81
0.70
0.6\
0.53
~:jqL'/':L'/.J:V~""'-~.j;.'--l---I-~I-++-.l..--I---l--l-+-+-++'H---'-...j.-...j--+-If-+-+-H-i
.01
.02.03
.05.07.1
. 2 . 3 _ .5 .7_
2
3
5 7 10
LOAD DuRAnON ro rUNDAMENf.ALP[RIOD. T/T H
Fi gure 3-120
<!
l..
tc
<!
z
w
:::r
I J: s
I\. ~
~ -r
...J
It
<.J
Q.
I-
AK
iii
40
~ 1--.
:..-17' 'J-
1/
J ["
,,- \
~~ )0~
I~Kt><rK><
0.7
r ~v
I I'r'-, IX Y /'
~I\M~
!\.f
'O~
5'.3
l-
Ll
...E
1/ f':;l1Z
I'...
tI"' /
,V"
I-
<,
"q.'>
,.\
HI-
-,
vr-YV4.~r.\ ~ lJ
f\
1\/
\II
&.2
I . 1\
\ II
1\
~,~o~~~oo 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
""'-lfol.V<NN--ClQO\V''''
veNN
'X '\It'
J \ll [ \ / \
1X--f1f\;~~"Y Xr\,1 \'\111*
/1\
r\
rv 1\ j
'\0 '\ Y.
I-
1\
;\r-V\
r\~ '".'. IV
II \ 1/_\ ---
-"J
"~"'~'~'-a
....l....
~tJ'O
~
',.-
IX V 1\ 17 e.-L\
\i. II \ ~t- i\
,-.;;/:
, 1\. /{
'\I'
l\
11\
fV-V --
,..J
1\/1\/1\.
,\
1\
/\'
..r
"'"'0
'",
1\
;t'J
"
...J
,.
\ -
50 LL
-f?(-
70
...J
l..
W.
J, o
...
/ \ VI\
,] to
II .
\ - \ -)
sc
'o-
'\I'
,.0

syste~ for bilinear-triangular pulse (C1 = 0.648. C2 = 30)
0
~
"::>
Z
0
;::
o
w
...J
l..
w
0
:::r
:::r
::J
><
<!
:::r
l..
:::r
;::
TlM or YILD TO LOAD DURA TlON,
-0
cP
CS'
'oJ'
..r
U'
'..,..
'4'
V''0
~
,..>
'\1""
.~
"!'
...1
Ie/T
C?~.C??~?~~?
.... 0
'01
-lo
l.JI 0
!J'
t,I\
~
X
100
z
o
70
50
f-~
\
;::
W
rX'..-IJ\
1\
IX
'",
........
'"
>-
f-
~v
t:
'-W
'!'
N
0
01 !.It
0,0
0 . 0 VI
00
co
II'
~oo
II'
(tl
..
1ft-.z
....
<,
...E
<:>
Q:
c,
'/\I~
4.6
..J
4(
....z
::E'
<:>
:>
WI
W
..J
..,J,
'"" N
503
..J
..J
Vt
".I
c,
a
a
...
U\
~J])<
w
<,
L..
o
....
I'll
~
b!
r7
i? I"-
;::
u
L..
W
<:>
::f
~
,/
::E
:>'
::E
\'<
::f
><
V'~
L\--
::f
><
~\f\
::E
L..
w
::E
;::
l:2
0.5 ! /
.001
X /Ih
,. 'Y / . y.
/..r..
l?Y.I'Y/'....-r.....-:f __
.002003 .005
'.01
.02' '.0'3"
,.
.05.07
.,,'
.,
.2.3
.5
.7
LOAD DURA TlON TO rUNDAMNT AL PRIOP, TjT N
Fi gure 3-121

system for bilinear-triangular pulse (Cl = 0.619; C2 = 30)
10
TiME Of YIELD TO LOAD'DURA TiON, lEfT

,.
cfJ
'0
1\ C>/I
4"
"J'
50 0 :-:-71-;-V~
\ /
oJ'
~.
po
'v'
0'
'""
<-;'
J'''''
~~
-:' -:'
iii"
"",,-V,I
.\Ii.
\J
.
/1 ___UA
\
.I-".Li.i:Jt\ l\i'-~~
1\"tA-.
11J\IAIA
OD
01 '-4
U'
0
-:"
opoooooo
iI' '. I~
l)\
\11-.1
;....
N N :.. :..
QUI
l1'Vi
1\7'\.1/\\(.
X_\~)6J 1\
_
Ill'--
I"
>f'\\V\\ IX' I\c! I
0 0
~ ~ ~
r-,
000
... N
1ft
_JI1-:
>-
<,
l7
~~~~~rr
/1~_k~..Iv
....'E
a
1--
'"w
c,
z
o
5.S
t:
~fi
---J
L.
w
::>:
o
:::>
---J
....
o
'"
<J:
<J:
o
o
'",
---J
>-
L.
,~
>-
>-
o
,-
z
o
;::
u
()
u
'""
...J
L.
---J
L.
J;
:::>
J;
><
.v
<J:
::>:
.002.00.l .005
.01
.02
.03
.05.07.1
:f
:::>
:f
><
<J:
1M
,2.3.5.7
::>:
L.
w
:f
;::
2.
LOAD DURATiON TO fUNDAMENTAL PERIOD, T/T N
Figure 3-122
Maximum'response of elasto-plastic. one-degree-of-freedom

system 'for bilinear-triangular pulse (C1 = 0.562. C2 = 30)
',0

,,;
dl
'0
c1'
'U'
"!'
..r
..
..
TIME
or
........
r:J
.......
(J'
oJ'
":'
~
""
":"
-l
..-
~
~
...
'00
IJI
... 'v\ IX. V\ V- I\J1-I
......
0
'.
ldr
YIELD TO LOAD DUR:ATlON.

C?
\1"
t,}\
\J\ \
..
IJ'l.
l}\
-I
~?
Vt.
~?
NN
U'I 0
hi Xi\l
)(J
.- C1l Vi
0
u\'"
0
0
00
0' en
0
lJ\
000
CI
VI N
0 U\
N
0
1-1
1/\ '-It/I
_--_.~ ~
nztrllL
~
"LA"
/L
AI
If
~\
x
~++-A
...
\AI \?i \
If JJ-
I'l(
z
o
/'
-......L \
..J
..
I V"'. A ' ..... 1 A'
I~
...en,
r-
...
'"
__
V1 I
l/
~~..
..........._
11 jW" ~
.1-.........11
_ Ir 1---17
r U
. "",'V1<+*Idt'-J'l,.j.hl*:--V'w'11--ll-4-1l'H\-:;:;>l\-''''II6r-1-::
:>-
I'-..
f\ IA I Y\ II 't'l II I't: I\R--..u II"N.<L ,/
>-
II
z
o
" .I
1I
"'11 r-, 1/11 . . . . ' . u ' I
.I/1
1/
~:~: 1.1 V'Tf'i...-AJ. l-/I;r1<" I T1l1\l
'VII1-lVnM II Y"W.n1:JrLlV
....
\V\j
I~'~
,k,U'...........-....-.....,..,Jt--f7ft-t1' IJIo ..
"
,"
. IA
s-,
w
:>
H rtl"-H--I.l..UI--Vr IA ~ t
..J
cr
w
a.
>-
..u--. .
LLL.~~_~~.
I 'bI-J I AI IIVI
\ '"
. "'. . ~~/
--.,..........--.....
..... I
... ~:\,: ~ /\l
".
..J
-~
'11.
<,
...E
>W
>-
",,-;-r--~
::>
"-
o
>z
o
t=
o
w
..J
,-,
--......\1
-'
L
W
/ \ ' / \ I \ V I \MI
. - _rH~
I - t _ -V
. . - - _ _ -.... __ -.-.,..l!':'1'":tt:T
. . . , ._. . .,
,~
.~,
'rv'-. ..Jo\~\b<-\~-)
"'1 \ ~\ A
X )f.....~.
'I'
"'"
"w
<,
"'IlJ~::wl::::j4:A-~
:>
./ jx iX;.-::v);~\un
..r ":P'"n
/\..I"'o-.Al
,-
...... ,
:>
::>
::E
x
:::>
:>
><
.[
:>
.1.
"-
=~
'!-j
1005005
Figure 3-123
I.
2
I
3

system' for bilinear-~riangular pulse (CI - 0.511. C2 - 30)
II1I1I
5
7 \0
::E
t:
tdT
liME or YIELD TO LOAD DURATION,
"0
<P
'0
0.1'
U'
'o-
v"v4~t-'
po
'6'
'Ii"
'0
'1.1'
",;
"',.,.
.~. ' . ~
OOOQOOOOOO
~~'cP'-1
....
~N
N:":'"
\S"U'~OU'loO'I./o4
01$'0
,~~ ~\IX
I);
,. ~1~~rtK~ Iff
I \
<,
Ii
I Y
'"
o
'"
o
00
"'o ....'"
....0
."
._
V I 11A\1U--
G.<
C<
w
Q.
J'<OJ.
>u
1&
w
-.i
W
o
o
-,
\1/".,
>-
th
Nd~
>-
a
;=
u
ilL
I,~I
-oJ
L.W
1"/
:J
kW
<
~
f'"
~
~Oi'i
.01
,02
,03
,05 ,07.1
,fJ'
,3
.5.7
4:
:::J
L..
<.j
~\l/
1.3
1./

syste~ for bilinear-triangular pulse (Cl = 0.464. C2 = 30)
<'6
1.7
.~
.$,0
<0
/5
f=
-oJ
L..
W
Cl
~
:::J
~
;<
4:
0.8 ,
0,70
0.93
0.61
L.-
Qd!~~f.j 0,53
s:
Ii
.2
-oJ
....4:
a
.-
"
LOAD DURATION TO rUNDAMENTAL PERIO~. T/T N
Fi gure 3-124
<:0
~]~i~;~~!~1
~
>(
.,
'6'
L.-
...~
"-
.II
z
o
..,,
.-z
\1I]J....Y'
X\I~
co '"
N. 11/
1/ ._
"LP..!,t...j.
00
~ ~
1\
>(
o
-
'1. \0
tit
IdT
TIME or YIELD TO LOAD DURA TlON.

.,.
rP
'0
0'
'1.1'
<J'
'v"
500
..
's-
v",-)~
..".
'0
"(I'
, VI V
'U"......
~
.:....lo
0000000000
":"~
r..J
":". .f:/J
..,J,
\J'
XJ ' VI\17'if
\.JI.v<~NN:-:'"
1./1
-l 0
lJ\
0
0"1 vo
. 1.1'
'Xl~
\;\
300
>(
<,
-o
00
'"
'"
'"
o
0
'"
.
0
00
'" N
o '"
0
N
0
R \ IIi LII-t1\l 11-1-1
1/
9,5
171IM,u..,~
ri<'JI
~~
Z
f-
<,
...E
FA----=*-4A~~L
>(
z
o
;::
o
1\/
w
--'
L..
W
...,
...
...
0>
'"w
0..
.D
70
a
a
,.
,,..
ow. , .
'it'-
l-1'-
',j
'6'
>-
1\)(1 YN'\~
'0
f-
'z
,-, ,- _
::E
<I:
L..
.,. .I-...."V
.... ''''''''''- AT"
.., JNl,(1N(1I VI V I ~.
Z
::J
r-1Tl\IN M \1'-
..
<I:
il.l"'IINI~
-.~
u,
--'
w
-'
f-
;::
afz
a
;::
u
w
-'
w
--'
u.
L..
W
<,
.W
FTJ9*t-x::;,t7iq::;, ,
:>'
::J
:>:
.,.
>(
:>:
05r~ /~
.002.003 ,005
::E
::J
::E
'~ ~\ {/3F\r
;;:
<I:
::E
L.-
0.7~
.00 I
1:1"
~..-r/
,01
,02
,03
,05,07
,I
. ,2
,3
,5
,7
::E
t:
Figure 3-125
Maximum ,response of elasto-plastic. one-degree-of-freedom

7 . \0
TtM[ or YIELD TO LOAD DURATlON~ tciT

~
~
0
'-!
~\
oJ'
vi.
II"
II"
":
0'
500
'~
.100
.~
_X
200
><
~...l""'f"
\
A ")1
If-
':L
><
z
0
eLl
100
50
...J
I.e
W
0
.....
'"
.10
0
...J
~
20
)-
I'
10
:>:
:
><
>:
./
LJ~
f-' l:::::
d::. 1
..
sz
.It
V
rt
t::
I'
It
l:>
1\\
/ . L l If',IX
.,..,
'\ ~/
Ii.
1 .~
r-
t2!
.~v
-1
-I.Y
~
"' ..,, ,~"
\(
11\ IV -> '"
L,It1b(
I~..l
~tl,._,
..LI\<
l/\ I~.)( V
~t'2's[Q(
~j)<[?92,:;;~v ~0;rx
1'.L~~jLJL"'2P
C.--/. /-, ~ . ~
t:L'. v
t:
.01
iIt
I()I~,".
~t';1?)~
/
~.
~11i'1E d\. ~
,/\
IN
j/j V
ftX"1\
V\
'.'ll11l
P<,
L~ 'L" v.
0.5 1<". /
.002.005 .005
.001
x.
t-:
:02
.05
~~I:;;K
t-'nrt>S
'....
.05.07.1
Do
-.j
I 2'
":0-
<'6
<,.5
I::::::
f..d:~
'c.. ''';~
LJc_ ~
I
W.
~
-<
fZ
;::
u
W
..J
t...
1. .1
OJ
I.'
0.5J
10
Z
t...
0.70
0.61

system for bilinear-triangular pulse (CI = 0.316, C2 = 30)
-<
1.7
IS
0.9.1
0,8 I
__
.J
...J
OJ
.....
.2.J.5:7
W
0..
.J: s
IX--:Ict: .~
~~ p/r
'"
"':0
<,0
.f.
":,,.
'\.
...E
f-
Ak'..l 1'X I"

-L I".,
~ V
/>
Figure 3-126
.s'',f
'
f.....
c
6'
.J
.L!
-~X
I'X"
. ~ -S "'~ Y:
. '\ .1. ~tt2.
. ,?A j -:rh1
rv
i\1olX
co '"
I'
X,
.L..x
1. .... 1 \
I'>
1/
b::: Y
c.1y,
.v
/\
r: "" '\
,->
1:7\
o"'fJoI.
Ll
'/.
..xx~'
l41~ )~l.L';lllLl . \L~\~ 1\

i'L Il' Liu \ Ii. 7~ll ~
.\1 \ ~-I- fnX
J\ r'\
1=:1;
.J
...
Ii.".
OUI
.....
.c: N.
..lI.
"U\
LL
IT
r \'0
i,,- \,t N N ., :..
lJ'
_.
-.6 V\ I.\Y
hL
r:. -1 C\ II
I V .x LV.
....
lJ'
~y,,-
,L
\
'""
.Y ...~i.L
...J
OJ
IV
J'1
If
u.
oJ
0
o.
':'" ':'" 'fIJ

t-J otJ'
I--";
-:J'i 7-
I:X=V' I!'s:
J\
0-
;::
f~
I k V
/\
..
0
0
)1'
li\"", 1-+
L ' II- )(.~
70
':'"
,\!I..YL\V!l',\
':"IL
-'l;
/\.L ,1
':"'-1
'"
II
<,
t;J'
~XLV
\::,/ \V \ \if
]~
Of "'!.. .1
+-"#1~-:1,:Xc
1
~
J'
C
~
~
-<
t...
o
W
i=
. T:!ME O~ YIELD TO LOAD OURA nON.

,.
rJI
'0
6"
'..,.
U'
v'
po
po
v"v"~,.-J
'6' 0'.U' ',;
~~."
.... C?'?
cP~
...1
..
l1'
.'
t[/T
,??,?o~~ooooooo
tJ"
\f'
-03(J'lIJl~
0
0
V'i
0
0
"\)I.\,rlNN-U\ ..... 0 .lJ'

0
(J\ VI
o
o
"',.., ,..,
0
V'
9,S
30
~"
..>
."
><
-=-'i' .
<,
><
I--
~ 17~
.s.
.,J-
--'
w
>::
F:1f
V-+&1i
yo
'6'
'"a.w
;i
Z
':l'
<l:
P<
::>
"-
a.
z
a
~1\...IV
I--
w
--'
Lt
t'::::
;::
u
1--.
I 1lL.l\/\
--'
u,
w
'"
'"
[\[~
...'",
Z
I--
<,
I--
;:::
u
w
..J
l.w
~<1l
l.W
'"':l'
':l'
::>
.. _IV"
':l'
::>
><
<l:
':l'
><
<l:
':l'_
L.-
':l'
w
_n1l.t
OJ
. A
~.
.002.003 .005
~~
.01
.02
.,03
~
.05 .07.1
,
.2.3.5
. .7. I
LOAD DURA nON TO rUNDAMENTAL PERIOD.
Figure 3-127
':l'
;::
3 .
TIT",

10
TIME, or YIELD TO LOAD DURA TlON,
rP
'0
(J'
'oJ'
v" v" t.l ~

"Cf' '0 ',J> >
V'
"o'
-:
. ...1
-: -:
..
-:
'0
'(9
oJ'
.~
0
'IJ"
\1'
'.,
""
ttiT
C?
lJ4
__
VI
lJ4 N
~
tool
0
0
(J'I
0
V<
0 0
0
-
00
0
01
U'
U'l
0
..
0
'0
'"o '"
.....0
U'
- ... - .
_.
~='$.'tN7'-\1P<~:;lt:::JI
>-
<,
:XW~ v
~-'I'h
JZJU\'1X
~J
-E
s',J-
~~
1~7fU~ $
::f
z
Q
~""J7\t{ WII'
:>
l..
VI"U~
t:NXL~
>-
z
o
~~IV
17
>-
1/
LL
<>:
w
c,
...J
t:
u
...J
\;,..,.\
l..
W
y\ <,
::f
:>
::f
::f
l..
w
::f
t:
'1//1/
y,/{./
.002005 .. 005
.01
.02
.05
.05.07 . . 1
.2.5.5.7
LOAD DURATION TO rUNDAMENTAL PERIO~ T/T N
Figure 3-128
Maximum response of.elasto-plastic. one-degree-of-freedom

system for bilinear-triangular pulse (Cl = 0.215. C~ = 30)
10
e
TiM[ or YIELD TO LOAD OURATlON.
"
dJ
IS'
'0 '1'\1'
t1'
..
'v"
....
u" v'- ~ ~
'11' '0 '\/'-""
soo
~ _/
/\
,fI oK 'Y
y
300
\1' \ \, \
)
1\
0
0U
..J
l...
W
Cl
w
,
....
....CD
."
>-
70
'I
W
..J
u,
W
Cl
::F
:::>
::F
><
-c
::F
'\1'
IJ'
....
..,.
r\
"'. 0
\II
-.1
' \/
'\ 1'\
(.:..
-ll i\.. ~
)f
rvr\1V'
j""'.
(J\
...,.,
"0"0
~ ~
x., . . /
V' / ~ '"
"0
"0
....o
~rli
1/
rI
I
X_.
~ ~
'" '"0
lJ'
~
1"\'
1111'-
1-11' '\ i
r.--
'f
'"
"'"'1"-\(\
\
Va. \,l N N :... :..
"I
[--.
.. 'I-A.
~o
'1
1\ '\
30
/\
20
'\ '\
Il(
'\
/\
\
l/
/ I
/\
\II
./1\
10
I' I
XI
~XV
~
"h
0-
i=
~~
II"
0
Z
'"
:..--:
.J- 1. I'
It---
1rf"1 ' L
"ll
<P,
....z
-"
....E
' .,..,
<,
'/
O'
.,..,
Il'
,
Cl
..J
W
f'\
"cP'~
I'
[7-
tdT
0000000000
. X \ f\
A V
1 n . . I \ '\ IV
1/\
" I ,....,.
1/\
'y \
E
>< 100
z
..
X X
Y '\
I~~I
1/\
><
<,
1\ . ~
":' ":'
...l
/ \"
rv
200
-t
\ I \
s
3
V 1\1
J\ 1-\
,J'\
'7 ,\-~\ ~f\;
t( '\ IA ~V ."\v '\
1'\-...1\. fJ
A. ~
.\
VX I \.I'- /
\,lX
_I/- -I '1
~ '--~ l' ~
I It"
1'\
1.:.r:
I
~D)l<'S( ~ ~ X
"V)'" /. x '\ ~ ~'
txY~~1
~<KX~"
~~0~~~
.r\
XlttX
::\-\~
\.
.A
II
D'J v
x
r-, 1\ )<
'Il'
~ '" K
I
r-,
1/
'I
9;0
.,
IX\
~ v ~C:>
l-1r:--t<
l>b '.~ '"
~Kv
I'
~~~ "'V~
rx
//.
.002 ,003
.cos. .
-:'
.01
.02
.03
LOAD OURAn.ON
Figure 3-129
/'/z
.05.07.1
o
....
r-.
'<,~
<;.1
i=
u
1.5
".3
1.1
0.93
.7'
TO rUNDAMENTAL PERIOD, TIT N
Maximum response of elasto-plastic. one-degree,of-freedom

10
z
o
::F
:::>
::F
s
::F
0.81
0.70
0.61
0.~3
i=
Qi~p;~u='~~
'/
,2.J.5
c
z.
.1,0
/'
o.~
u
::F
I'.
1.7
.... -
..J

l....
<,
Y.1V'
Q.
J:,s
<.0
II,
if /
Kx
1..:
'.
IL
k1
II
II
U
L l--'
1I
~
,)I"
!'}\'V 1\
~~
t-,.
'0.7
.001
Lt1
I,
V ,"-1/\
X 1\ "
1\1 ~
LVII
IVI~~I~II
I~
'~.f
1'"-.!
\ rv-~
'"
L.-
::f
,
r:P
C>
500.:0/
o~
"oJ'
oJ'....
.",r
'!P'
vi.
'(f'I
v" ,-) ~
'0 'J' >
'"
.....1
M \ll \ V\ I X1~~
:1 IX 1 ~ 111\ /\1
... ,;
'..
)(J
".-
C!
't-l '0 c:P...

...
l?
~o
200f~~~#~~
70
0, 0
i-oJ
'Ul
N :.... :..
j'x'
IY
9 5
ee
'"
of-
V'
o
'"
'"
'"
0
nA
IX17fi1\
'"
.'"
IS'
IS'
<,
...E
a
o
a:
w
0...J
f--k+
>-
.'"
So
.<of
~~ttn---'t--}fT';l'l
50
d'
-1\
~1<1\'
:--
LW
...'"
~~
.W-
-I..
a
o
...J
W
0 0
o U\
-OOlC7'lU',",
fI-\tAlL._ I"!
...J
oU'oO'lUl.
J.-rI7
E
x
z:
1'\'1...\ I'X
"'o
j::
o
C? o.
'""lJ'1JI
... '"",......
I)(
300
telT
;::
...J
LW
::r
:::>
::r
><
<i'
::r
3 . t'1't117~~j)
~
L-
o
w
::r
;::
v;r~
0.7~'"
0.5 '.
.001
.002003 .005
.01
I......r x
.02 ,.03
.05.07.1
.2.3.5.7
lOAD DURA TlON TO rUNDAMENTAl PERIOD,
Figure 3-130 .
TIT N
Maximum response of elasto-plastic, one-degr~e-of-freedom

10
e
TIME or YIELD TO lOAD DURA TlON,
rfJ
'0
0'
',j'
U'
"vi:
1l"
'J>'
v'" v'- ~ ~
'If' '0 '11'.....
--:
..1
':' ':' ~.
p t-l
0 ~
0
'-1
'1.1"
\l'
0
'..
\1'
0
'ut
....l
tdT
"vt0 'N
N
\II
0
500
-'" -'"
0
0"0
~ ~
0
~
'0
'0
'"
~_.
Q.
... ...
'0
,0
\lit
U\/l '1'.1 /
w
><
<;
-'
....E
0
0
t:
>-
'/
<,
><
z
.,.,
w
.~
-'
:f
<:0
CI
.....
CD
..t~
::>
..,
-'
>-
0
f-
0
t:
10
L.-'
W
...J
--
::>
::t
><
::f
p Ir'
07,.LM
05
.00 I
'~.,
,002003 ,005
.01
,02
,03
.05 ,07
.t
.2"
,3
,5 ,.7
lOAD DURATION TO rUNDAMENTAl PERIOD, T/T N
Figure 3-131
<.(1
<.J
20
L.-
1.7
1.5
I.J
1.1
6.93
0.81
0,70
0.61
0.53
::t
Maximum 'response of elasto-plastic, one-degree-of-freedom

\0
L.-
a
>z
a
c:
u
..to
I~
z.
...J
:f
::>
:f
x<
:f
L.-
:f
;::
TIME or YIELD TO LOAD DURA TlON, ttlT

c:P
'0
e-
U'
'oJ'
..
'v'
'v"
'"
~..-J
vi.
" ":' ~
~ .. or.:. 0
'a" '0 'V'....
500 1 P/I \ A\ Ii. ...
C?
<?...l
0
000
.""
,n".". " " . . . . . " ....
\j\
'..
. '"
'lJ'lo
:.J
N t.o '" 0
'Ol
99
~
'"
'"
o
..
'0'0
'0
'0
'0
t,I\
'0
'"o ....'" ....0
CJl)O'''''''
...
'Z
bPr+AJMII.~...:>1 XI\
I/L~
\ fA!
z
o
t:
o
w
...,E
.,
0-.
Q:
n,
.t.
",18
50
-'
u.
w
o
...,,
....
o
'"
>-
<,
'J'
":
4:
:::>
L.-
1'\!J7wrv
>-
a
>z
~\Jf
4:
-'
'J
-'
f-
~~
.r
~~IV
vL.\
a
fz
a
r-,
r-,
c:
u
t:
-'
c..
- ...
..J
u,
~+7'?-...t.---;p.'{-.ljL-\"l'I'-'
":
:::>
":
":
:::>
":
><
...o":
4:
J'
":
;::
07l9BrdZ
0.5 .
.001
.002.003 .005
....1/1.......-1/'f t.01
.02
.03
.05 .07.\
~
.2.3.5.7
Figure 3-132

system for bilinear-triangular pulse (e1 = 0.100. C2 = 30)
\0
TIME or YIELD TO LOAD DURATlON, t(/T

r:P
'0
J'
'-!'
v"
po
~ ~
d'
t:>J' ~-"
':"'J ~ '-:''';
'P
00000
"fP....1
'If'
.~ .U'
\I'
0
1.1'
\l'
....1
'?4?
V'
0
\JI
c:??O
t-J
0
(J'l
VI
c:?'oo'o'o
-
rP
0
(J'l
l1'
""
'0'00
t-J
U'4
..
lJ'I
~oo
f-l
;00
2 00
IA~W\=1~~
"-
E
x
z
0
>-
\1
70
~o
--'
L~
....
....
'"
-M-;:---Y-HNI--'k>H1't:1
\I
.,
-j
L.J
Cl
T7
U1
fA
30
--'
'"
,r
2 0 j /'i->T :h'--'lI
Z
0
10
IV'
t-
U
W
<,
" . Vh..\I\ .1'-..\
--'
L-
i>
Cl
~
=>
:1:
<i
:1:
~P
,./ v
p / r ~ ';;11..
0.7
~],
0,5
--V
.001
.002.003 .005
~.
.01
'--:02
.03
.0-5 -.07.1
.2.3.5.7
LOAD DURAJION TO rUNDAMtNTAL PERIOD, TIT N
Fi gure 3-133

'system for' bilinear-triangularpulse (C1 = 0.075. C2 = 30)
,s
10
TIME Or YIELD TO LOAD DURA TlON,

tf'
'J'
V'
v"
'.,r'1'"
v' ,..J rl
'0' '0 'J' '-"
-:
J,
-:
po
-:
rl
-:
0
C!
<?~
0
tdT
00-00000
"..,.
...
'vi'
'v'
;...
i-.J :IJ'
iJ'
-'
0
\JI
0
CT'
:...
'"'"
:0
'0
cP
0
'0
CJl
\JI
'0
o
U'
o
'0
<1'
'0
...
...
<1'
~.
"~\M~~m.~r
so
Ii
.,..,
d'
Cl
.,.,
6'
.><:
.j
'0/'
0
t:
~'A
w
--'
u.
w
a
a
.....
>-
\Y Iii
o
....
0
, ... 1\1/\
<C
....
Z
If>
--'
::f
<C
--'
'"
I-
o
Q.
rrr-rr-w-
'"
'"
....,E
'/
<,
....z
<,
~ ~~"l
z
o
;:::
u
W
..J
I-
U
W
."'-"
--'
'''''~.,
u,
<,
l~
r>
:f
::f
::>
::f
::>
;<
:f
x
-c
<C
::f
'\1 \
::>:
t.-
w
::f
t:
~
!.005 .005
Figure 3-134
10
TIME OF YIELD TO LOAD DURAnON,

If'
.r
1'"
....,. 'c- 'po
v" v" t..l,-.)

'~'o '\.1'....
500 l-c-J.--
..
--:
r.l
o'rP
tclT
000000'00
'l1'
po
'v'
'"", ~
'r-J
''...
l1'
~
~
0
IJ'
0.
0'
VI
.~
11'
o
......
o
'0
cP
0
0
(f'
oJ'
'0
oJ'
'0
'0
V'
'0
,..,
,..,
oJ'
-~
1'1\1\1'1 V IV
d'
'r'
200
-'
'"
<,
E
x
z~
100
70
<I'
~~Ijt~~rn
'r'
'7;
.t
~/.--lr'A
"I'
u,
50
-y
'J
...'6'
1\7
-'
....
..,
00
Cl
cc
w
'l-'
...
4:
::E
LW
...z
;z
...
OJ
-'
...o
:-
or-.
z
o
t:
,-
....
u,
"7
-'
Cl
L-
.:>
::f
OJ
"
::E
...
4:
0,
::E
;::
-;7
y, VI
VII
,00200,005
,01
/,01/
,02
./
,03
,05,07".1
'//V/J'//
.2.3
Figure 3-135
,5 '~T
TIT,.,
Maximum response of e)asto-plastic, one-degtee-of-freedom

system for bilinear-triangular pulse (CI ; 0.042, C2 ; 30)
5 '7
10
TIME
\J" .. v'
'oJ' 'v"'" 'Cf'
(1:'
,.,
'<1'
y.)
~ > ~'?
>~
..
<,
z
i=
'"
'<1'
~o~o
'"
0
~
<1'
\-oJ f..,J
o '"
'"
'v' .
'"
.~
'"
.~
'0
.~
V'
'0
'0
'0
V'
'0
'" '"'" '"
... '0...
'0
'"
....
<1'
"
:~ ~
200
vl\"
'?~
~\
.10
'E
or YIELD TO LOAD DURATlON, telT
100
7l~
50
..>
'/
',,>
'
.10
..J
'"
0
>-
;:
0
t:
..J
u,
W
:::E
::J
:::E
x
<!
?'
20
MJJVItV
tl~\P\IY
10
..J
.,
f-
-':0
<!
0
~-
O.7j~
0.5 , .
- -- .-- ; --"-----;;r ;r 717[7
.001
.002.003 .005
.01
.02
.0.1
.05.07.1
~~~~?:Qi{j;l.~
P/
ru = Q;;R
.7
LOAD DURA TlON TO fUNDAMENTAL PERIOD, T/T N
Figure 3-136

.J
'0
f-
e. e
H1~
::J
~
.2.3 . .5
:::f
J: s
V"tI7I-'t1Pr7r [)\.
.I
, .....-.-'
<!
'6'
Q:
f.:t
<.J
<0
"-
,
""
,....
...)
0
6'
..J
u,
f-
10
1.7
1.5
1.3
1.1
0.93
0.81
0.70
0.61
0.53
"0
i=
"w
:::f
::J
:::f
:::f
"0
w
:::f
t:
triT
TlM[ or YIELD TO LOAD DURA TlON,
()
1.1' .. v"
~
'v' '"" '0' 'd'
50~o Cl,/
\1
v 17'
300
w
ZOO
<,
E
x 100
0
eU
w
~r"v
C\ \ ,
~~ll\
y.)
'".;
":'
p
...
~.
1\ /
Y I
X\t \ lX,
.\
,/1\
'"
'..r
-"
0
'v'
\/1\
';
!J'
Cf\
Il
1\
1\
';
0
....
"
IV
'0'0
rP
tJ'
';
I I \/
I!\/A '\
1\ \I
II
X /\
..'
't-J
Y V \ I \
V\
/!JI
!A II.... \
1'\_I /1\ ~o\,~
'..
If'
J'.1 "
II
'\I'
....l
v :
IV
"I
\l \ ' .
~! jW I"
IX K / / 1\
I" III Y\
'0
IJ'
'0
..
11':17\~
1IV IT 7
[I
'0'0'0
V'
f"J
N
0
IJ'
0
v-.. V 'j
It
Y f\ ~ ~\'\~I\
V .A ~I/ tJ
./ \
~ i\
/'l.:::tb.l\ lLi \ 1\
.,.,
d'
..,.
.,.,
6'
lQ\~~I\T\lA 1\
"'0 [':.
1\II.H
"of
-c.
":6'
'"
L.'~~~~
>0
20
,-
l~1
0
r-.
W
...J
X'~IYM'
~~ ~
l/~
A I'" 1\1' \ 11
.. .'
~I
~1t--
V \ ....../ T-oVI \111"'\.11 / \ , 1\/
L..
...J
<i
w
:lI
<i
.....,
'"w
I-
...J
W
(L
70
...J
'/
L..
Z
l-
<,
:lI
sc.

:lI
l"\...L
MI~
":0
10
~o
1.7
1.5
I.J
1.1
0.93
O.B I
0.70
0.61
0.53
a
z
a
;::
u
w
..J
L..
w
0
:lI
::>
:lI
i<
..J,P'~0J'
....lo
0
",
'I/'
l1'
'..
'V"
J'-Io
'v'
.0
t-1 .
I"J\
0
f.,I
O.
,hiT
0,. OJ
..... ,....;.
l1'
v4.
0
.....
0
rP
CP
L1'
o
o
'0
'"
'0
u'
0
,..,
0
,..,
'"
;-
<,
-'
'/
'" lJ\ 'V\IL\L: .

z
o
'if
f':
.,.,
6'
1"/\1 V
A
Ii
-
o
,z
o
L.-
;-
J\'~
'k-f,;
;-
Z
:>
'0
t:
..J
W
W
I"
_\LL>'
..J
,~
L.-
W
C
::t'
:J
J;
::t'
:>
><
J;
<i
x
-<
J;
::r
. -~A~oV1''it''<d'k=*~oI'---':O~lf-
I.-
w
:f
;::
-...x.U:I.L-..Y-Y-A.L
vI J.1 /ILlL.A'..A_Y...t...01
.02
.03
.~
.05 .07.1
.2.3.5;1
LOAD DURATION TO rUNDAMENTAL PERIOD, TITN
Figure 3-138
. Maximum response of elasto-plastic, one-degree-of-freedom

system for bilinear-triangular pulse (CI = 0.018, C2 = 30)
10
TIME or YIELD'TO LO't,D DURA TlON,

,.
,
p
v" ~
'v' '.. '6" 'rjJ
oJ'
,-)
",
0'
'cP' '-i
0
>~"'"t-J01.1'
.~
.~
.~
.~
tdT
00000
0
.~
-to . .~ 'op, ,'~
'0
''0
c:P
- 0
'0
-I.
(J'
'0
tJ'
'0
'0
'0
V'
,..,
'"
_ ... ~
I.,.,
ctJ~~~
<,
<,
E
><
0
70~
u
w
50
30l~~
-'
u,
w
,
....
...
'CO
'"
",'
'"
IS'
..,.,
l~
11.'
.'"
-I\fit1 \1/
AI"};
,.
..
10
t:
u
w
"
w
I~IVI\I)I'
\Y\ X'I \ Y\
u.
",.
:::I'
::>
:::I'
,AroY
111'
:::1'"
IN*"d-T"'t/''d7t-'
,"-
::.~
~.4.l(1\
.00\
.002 003 .005
'~
~
.0\
.. 02 . . 03
1/
.l.s
J
<'6
t.7
1.5
I. J .
/.,
0.93
0.81
0.70
0.61
0.53
p/ru=~"
.05.07.1
.2'.3 -
.5
.7
\ 2 -
'0
., ;0
LOAD DUf/ATlONIO rUNDAMENTAL PERIOD, T/T N
Figure 3-139
'0
1\ 1/\
'.
<..1
.'"
IA
~.
1--
(\J(\)
,~~
><
v.~
Ii
-'
.-'6'
IX
>-
....
<>:
S.
-'
c;
....E
-'
....
....z
d'
><
,..,
Maximum response ot: elasto~plastic, one-degt;ee-of-freedom

sys tem 'for bilinear-triangular pulse (C1 = 0.013, C2 = 30)
5' 7
:,0
....z
w
::f
'"
::>
"-
a
....
z.
a
;::
u
w
-'
u,
w.
::f
::>
::f
;<
::f
"-
w
::f
f::
tciT
TiMC or YICLD TO LOAD DURATiON,
o
l..J
~
,>(
><
W
. ...J
L.W
..."",
00
'"
>0
fA
d'
.""
',.
.,..,
6'
\.
\V\
" "\
It:d~~~~
l/~I)
~~.,
VI'
I
,_.
<:>
;::
u
c.
w
n
-"
}/
.~
><
"<!
~6'
~o
b<
L\,.
P/r\.l~
as
,001
-,jLl-~~1
r'l,
,002.003 ,005
.0.
/ILLL.-
",',-1/17Yl7
.02
.03
,2
,3
.5.7
'I
,3
LOAD DURATION TO rUNDAMCNTAL PCRIOD, T/rN
Fi gure 3-140
Maxi~um
'"c,w
...J
<!
response of elasto-plastic. one-degree-of-freedom

system'for bilinear-triangular'pulse (Cl'= 0.010. C2 = 30)
W
~
.<!
0
I-
<Os
0.93
0.81
0.70
0.6\
0,53
fT.7/Yff//v
.05 .07.\
.J. o
1.1
\ '\
::>
1.7
/.5
I.J
)
....
.J. s
<'s
<'0
l~
::>
s',J-
t-
I-
'f~
IX:
II ]I
7\17\/\1/
3 0 '
tZ
'0'0
0
vtr..)N
ooooooU"o
50
20
'0 '0 '0

'0
'0
t;p...1Cf'!J''''
..~
70
Cl
t...J
'"",
.J''YJ\ V f\17
E
>< 100
t:
u
\ I Y \ 1/\ I I\>
<,
0
~ .~.
~'"'t.J"
'", '",
'
5 .
; 7, : 10
L.-
Z
0
;::
...J
L.W
0
:f
::J
:f
<!
:f
....
0
w
:f
;::
..
e
or
TIME
,..,
'0
-0-. 'i-
oOO~Ai 71\
,~
'0
<i'
1\17-J IX
'!'
V'
Y1ELO TO LOAD 'DURA TlON, t[/T

!'
vi-
..
v(J\
':'
oJ)
..,.
\71--\,{ V II\'
':"'
':""
DO"
- 0
~;,g.
(\ U\ \ I K
lJI
loot
1./1, -....l 0
lJI 0
:..., i..n ;.. ~
0' 0
~oooooo
N N :...:..
(Jl
IJ<..J 'V'"
-IOlUl.u..N
OlJlOONUI
CJ.t
[)(.
I)
J)
2
.....
<,
-
....E
-_..
'"w
Q.
70
..J
i~
1'\
'1~
...
D'
r-
..:
toz
t-
..:
O'
...
::>
. 1.-'11'
a
z
a
.....
'"
'"
;::
Ll
w
...
..J
I
v
::>
r-
i-
I\
0.5
.001
...o.
w
;::
'-'"
.0'....
.02 .03
',05. ,07.\
,2,.J
. 'lOAD DURATIO'N TO rUNDAMCNTAL PCRIOD,
Fi gure 3-141
..:
J'
"
'~I
.002.00.1 .. 005
)(
,5.7'
2'3
TIT,.,

system for bilinear-triangular pulse (Cl = 0.909. C2 = 100.)
10
TlM[ or YI[LD TO LOAD DURA TlON,
"'0
~.'-;'
01'
'0
(J'
'"
\f'
ul
:..
--';'NCUJ
vl.
r-J
(J'
"..0
IJ4
vr
':""
Ol
...
~x
~..,.N=t~-t'k+~i:::-XIW-.- ~ y
?~?OO??OOOOOOOOO
...... U1.lAlANN _ .... - ( X l ( T l U ' l " VI'"
a lJl l/I ..... OU'lO (f)lA 0 a t.1l 0 0 N l/I
_?
:..
1.D
11\1
~
\)<it\
r\.Yl
~ B! /l:i..f\ 1'\1/ \l.
IA
,,'
w
--'
'L
W
..
...
..
It
...~
a.-l
bt
'"
. . . . . . _.I~
>-
o
>z
o
,.
7
~IAI~
--'
u,
,J~
::f
:J
::f
><

L-
o
....
V"
~
~
..
~~.
rW///A/
w
::E
z
o
i=
u
w
-'
LW
><
-c
. ....
::E
..l.-H"
1\
0.5
.001
o
::E
:>
::E
_~ ~ _~.
0.7
....Z
Nk
'"'
>-
<,
-'
t:
u
'"o
t--
Q.
z
o
w
,
tj
l>r-.
P\
l)l~1J
'k
-,
00
I-xTVIIX
/'f'-j'1 'I
"cU~
tdT
L.-
::E
s:
.002003 .005
.01
.02
.03
.05 .07.1
.2.3.5
LOAD DURATlON TO rUNDAM[NT AL P[RIOD,
Figure 3-142
'.7
TIT N

10
..
TIME OF YIELD
TO LOAD DURATION. lEiT
.
.
~
~,,,,~
I \'
1J
cP
'0
"!'
q'
\I'
200
u
sc
<,
>(
100
J'
50
-'
1W
...
...'"
1
..,
0
-'
>0
....
z
0
t:
>(
(1)11'
?5
I\.dl2\.
/I It: v.
xv, :~~
.K --),1
/>
~ VA
~~
0.7
Y;l()I ~
ID
0
Ul'" tA t.M IV IV
Ul Ln ...... 0 tI' 0
I\.
I\.
1'\ 1/ ['\
Ill.
"I'\..
"l( r>
P' 00
~~~.~!='P'P'~
.."
0
"IA.
/
I)(
.t'~. r-,
1"\
IX
Ii'
lJ"WI1
--
at
--
t."t
011 en
0 Ul
V [)IE.
i'.
"
,;.
I""
CJII ~ eM IV
0 0 N
UI
36
50
26
22
;::
\g
\1
\'i
\\
~.'i
r;
1\
~""~ffi~=ftfl~~
3
l-
fl'1
0''1
r-,
'i.~
4. 0
4.0
~K VI~_
~
"..rP
./ .
I-- ""
3.5
3.0
2.6
2.3
2.0
~~
/.7
. L
/.5
b--'r-
~ ~V
r--
'P"
~~\tro~FfJ
~ r-
v: -\- H
' ' - ' P I r;;
r-
1'0"1"
>6
000
r-
V'
~ ~ t(
x,
~l=M:'H
:L
/'
0.5
.001
\~
X' l)(1~ ill"
'>(
.\
::f
::f
IX
~ II\\ til.
\\ f\
IXc:P
:..
1/VI, I\.
_r
t\V
DI'"
.r: ..)
I \,
IV
:::>
X ~ 1\'/\
__
LL
-~~~,
20
\.
!/,
~ IX c& V\
f-ry_V:~~~~txim~'-L L'x I r---lX
(1
10
u
w
-'
u,
0
t\0l. V_\
.1L~~\
.-
II 1\
II
...l
30
VI
~ -'-,\
h(.
_'V.
':"
.x'
,
\
tt r-/.. ~ ~
-e-, -
':"
IIXIIv
IX-~ \I
" 'ii -A ''\
V-\,,j
_U
70
t:
u
w
,1\ "A
-Y~ r\ fl.
.1,,~\ nV
k \ ,7\ .r>X
I~
"f\
300
cr
...
500
11\
"!"
!""
vi-
.",.
"/1/
.002.003 .005
.01
.02
.03
.05.07.\
.2.5.5.7
'LOAD DURA TlON TO FUNDAMENTAL PERIOD. T/T'"
Figure 3-143

system for bilinear-triangular pulse (el = 0.825, C2 100.)
10
I.j
1.1
0.93
0.81
0.70
0.61
0.55
I-
<,
...E
a
0
a:
w
Q.
""'
0
I-
t:
0
...w
...J
::f
:::>
::f
s
::f
...0
w
::f
t:
-"0',
triT .
nM,E OF YIELD TO LOAD DURA nON,
"'0 -a. .-;.

500
dJ
"0
<fI
'J'
IJ'
.V'"
..
....
V"
(J'
....0
"'"
..._.. ..:
~-~.:f.J~
- .-,,-V~r\-ll
_ .... ?
.~
'00
:"!oD
? ??
"-I
Lot LoNN
IJI'"
IJI IJI ~
?? ? ? ? ?
OUI
N""
0 (J\
fI<.
00
00
C (fl.
0 IJI
lI'
lit
N
....
LH 0
....
0
N
V\
t1b
Z
I-
II
<,
><
<,
,\
E
><
z
0
1\
I /~ /\
.~
...J
'~~i~
W
-J
<..
0
'"
'"
IzW
-J
W
>0
Z
0
t:
10
fI
~.
f.-
"'"
I>"
W
0
0
'"a.w
'\ I 1\
t:
....,
a
o
k{
:::J
"-
I-
o
;:::
o
-J
<..
"
"~
~\~
::I:
:::J
::I:
:::J
"
><
::I:
-\ I \
o"-
\I \
"
t:
I'-:
r/h
~
0.7
0 -. 5
.00'
~~/
.. 002.003 .005
.0'
.02 .03
.05.07.'
.2.3.5.7
LOAD DURA nON TO FUNDAMENTAL PERIOD,
Fi gure 3-144
TIT N

system for bilinear-triangular pulse (C1 = 0.787, C2 = 100.)
\0
TIME Of YIELD TO LOAD DURA TlON, lE/T'
-a. -;.
~
500
-0
,c/,\1TlX -\II \1 DC
....
cS'
tI'
"oJ'
'0
I
1.1'
.U"
.p
'7
U"
'Cf'
0000000000
~oooooo
-:-~~:"'\1';..i...tl..tNN:":'" -0 00 CTl Ul"'lJ..iN
...
0
0
UI VI:...... O.VI 0 en VI
':"':'"
,J)
......
.
1711\tt--\J'
\ VI
"'-Ahl{ xt,;
00
QUIOONUI
IX \
IIX' \1'\1
1)(\
1/11"-..
111*-"
><
E
>< 100
0
-J'r-->,jl,-......i;
70
I/'
a
a.-!
f-
--'
10
7
><
~
0,5
.001
1\
\
~"
I'-.~P/ru= ~
~"""-'--'
,002.003 ,005
.02
,01
,OJ'
,05 ,07
,I
.2
,3
"
,5
,7
2. 3
TIT,..
.
M~xi~um response or elasto-plasti~, one-degree-of-freedom
LOAD DURATION TO fUNDAMENTAL PERIOD,
Figure 3-145
system for bilinear-triangular pulse (C1
= 0;750,
C2
= 100.)
.5
10
Q.
--'
'"
I-
':>',
.,6
.,0
5,5
::>
3,0
f-
2,6
1,7
/,5
I4b
l>:
6,1
2. .1
2,0
,;q
~
0,7
,/
I 11
'"
I'><
K.
I .
W
::>
:::;:
~,':>
.:-?
t'S'MV~
,/
\L~
)'
'. 1\\
[ALH
j::
....E
r-;
r~,
--'
"w
\'>
1 _\
'"
w
<,
\1
_ ..
f7
_--l,_,f.jI."I'
--+t1
f-
\~
'0,1
II" ~
r Fl.
j::
w
,
,0
16
11
200W--
<,
l--,
1.3
1,1
0,93
0,8 I
0,70
0,61
0,53
u,
tz
u
w
--'
"w
0
:::;:
::>
:::;:
:::;:
u,
0
w
:::;:
j::
.,
tdT
TiME or YIELO TO LOAO DURA TiON,
'4> ....
<P
-0
(J'
'11'
'0
~
po
'"
"vi-
V"t.Jr-J-'(f'
"\D
.~
.~
OJ
0000000000
?oo
~ ~
.... \Jl ... i:. i,. N.N :. :..

0
VI UI "oJ.9U1
en
000
'" VI
o co
0 '" o
Vi
.........
0
IV
0
N
VI
,.VI'\Jt-.\J/\ 1JNj\" ........ _ . _...... _...._ .. _.. 1'\I?1 I!'l I/II--U.
Lll_rkliA--\AHHM1
~
idI1~h~-PI-+*Nrl\H1'\I
w
X
I \.<l>X
'"
f-;
t:
V\ll,l\
"/1 "l7'
1/1" /'.:/
I'-- 1)<
...J
~K
o
a
""c,w
><:
t> r-,l/ r-.
>-
oez
IL
T
:E
r-t ~
--'
.,;
e-
7"?
b(
Ef ~ v
lot"'"
W
...J
I~
....
rVr'r
z
o
'",
.,
o
e-
<,
11~~'1111l
dL
.~+'I\+~""'-N'-+
<,
---.
a
z
~.~ ~
:J
'-
o
....
t:
i=
u
W
...J
--'
w
'-
"'-
'W
Cl
k'"
::f
:J
::f
:E
:J
:E
X
..,;
:E
IV
.,;
::f
~
.002.003005
.01
.02
:E
c:
.'-.I'\..
.03
.05 .07.1
.2.3.5.7
LOAD DURA TiON TO rUNDAMENT AL PERIOD,
Figure 3-146
u,
TIT N

10
T1I.lE or YIELD
-a.'P-.~1J
r:P
'0
6"
'o.JI
\.I'
........
.~
TO
t.J
v"
'CfI
'oj)
'ciT
LOAD DURA TlON,

N
"'"
~ ? ~ ~? ?
.....a U\ .... Ut \.H N N
_? ?'
~".,:... . U)
IJI
VI "'-I 0
(Jl
-.(J'l
'LH
? 0 0
-
00
en
(Jl
0
....
,.,.
=T'
500
I"
2 0 0 tf--\,'--IV-I,~~
";]t-1
><
z
70
>-
11:>
11
It-
12
IV
IVlI\
'"
9''>
!l.1
1\
--'
'--
..,'",
I-
<,
""
t'l'
u
w
,'>
0
N
t.n
.100
><
<,
(Jl
a
a
"J
'l><l.~
,z
0
>-
\0
--'
'--
7 !L,:__
d'
5
u
w
" lj
::>i
r-
w
a.
--'
5 . .3
>-
4.6
4.0
<G
1..1
I. I
~\l\
..
1\
}-'"
0.5
.001
.002.003 .005
.0\
..02
.03
.05 .07.1
.2.3.5.7
LOAD DURA TION TO rUNDAMENTAL PERIOD, TIT N
Figure 3-147

system for bilinear-triangular pulse (C1 = 0.681, Cz = 100.)
7' 10
<:
I-
0.93
0.8\
lr
0.70
0.6\
p/ru='~ p.53
'1.
J. o
'.7
1.5
.I
::>
<0
L>
J.5
<.J
17
-.f.
_ /\11\ 'I"
::F
::>
'Q:
II.2
>-
L..
z.
i=
u
w
--'
'-w
::F
::>
;;:
<:
~
L..
c:
tclT
TIME Of YIELD TO LOAD. DURA TlON,

,0
~ ~
rPO'\I''''uolo~~
'0
'\1'
'u'o
....
'Cf'
'tJ)
.~
-0
500
/ \ /1\/\
300
t: V\ ">1\
) _'1. \
200
w
_L /I
L ,-
><
<,
E
>< 100
2:
70
50
t:
W
...J
u,
W
....o
N
o
en
30
...J
>-
20
X :\,
IL\
0\.\
~
1\ C'i.-
r::t
,.Y
j\
bL N.~ 'II IX
.zr, r--\
-:!X- L
lX'..:::J
t-\
'-\
j
10
V I\
-A
.1\1 r"
"':L
en
X,
I"
UI
"I" f--.
1/
I'Jc:I T\.I<
V I"
'l'
r-, I" IL ~
"
U'l:0
'l-'l-
V . :I.
i<--
II.
(.'
f-;
r-
.~.. ~
.
[J.>:<' [/' . . '

t'>
I'>~.
I-"
,,>
p- V,
II;..
I'>(
r---
.~
[)
Ul"'~NN
JII-/..a
,
' i')
f'-'
1'\
i""-
'r--
,\1 J lL ~ J
L<) C\I/\"
"
. 1')
1\'\.\ ~
I,/i'f '1\ rIf\bX

_\.
'r\ IT r-
UI.V'o -..1"0 U'I
0000000
-caD'!
..
'I
~'\
Ij\'\ lV
\1/
\. 1\
N.:":'"
-l'
.fl~"'( ~ Ie:"-
I\
\.<1
.;
"
r--,tl
t=f!'/I~~:w.~
\~Mr:o
'v
IXI
f~ ~ I/\:' r... ~,
---.l.
Rl)'
:.... "" .... i..H iA N
....
it ~L\/~ ,\
_.
0600000000
'CJQ
r x ' \
I'st "'"~J'il/
.L /
l-
2:
0'
'~I\;,\f\
. -::\ ' '1/ S~ 1/
- - !. tDo
,'!>
V' ;-
~~ V
1/
-1
~
~
'1--1
W
...J
"W
:::f
::>
:::f
><
<
:::f
0.5
l--\.L
~
l)(
/
"'v'
"'"
.I ~
:-x ,,\,
IY,...,l\ ~
'\-;>
I)'"
rl:V ~[).:
k%
4.6
.001
.L
-J--
..
V.
""
F--' __
J:o
l-
.01
~, f'll.o\
'
_
~ ~ P/ r u : "~:1"tt1
..-t'
.02
.03
~ .~-"1..n\ 1\
. ,
t'I
.05 .07.1
I'
.2.3.5.7
. 5
LOAD DURA i1o.N TO rUNDAMENTAL PERIOD. T/T N
Fi gure 3-148
::>
u,
f-':;~~
'n1.3
1-\-11
b-
.".......
.002.003 .005
~ :.-\
..J
<
....
2:
J: s ,
1.7
/.5
\..
<
a
<.0
t-
6- VA:
40
<'6
Xl::': t>
:::f
2-
>< / '
~
f.~~ ~
1I.. :~Yo t"\I ~ ~

~~ .. VV
c,
..
f-...,6 /
0.7
1\
6. 1
11
(\0'
\I
_'l..
<'.1
7 j- ,
5
\\
'I''>
'b .'l-
5.3
l-
l-
.....

syst~m for bilinear-triangular pulse (Cl = 0.648. C2 = 100.)
10
1.1
0.93
0.81
0.70
0.61
0.53
2:
;=
0
...J
"w
:::f
::>
::t:
)(
<.
:::f
"0
::t:
;=.
e
iclT
'6- -p.
'0
~:~
...
~????!='?????oo
000
00
til
N N
Ul 0
:... co
""''''UtLHN N - ClJO'
til""' .... 0'" 00' lI<
70
t:
U
<oJ
-'
"<oJ
...
Lot
M;
...z
><
<,
...E
o
'"D.
W
..J
nR;QTTT~
...z
w
::f
'"',
'"
....0
:::>
-'
L..
<oJ
...oz
r-
>0
,z
o
u
~,1V I/'
~
U
Y11
<oJ
A""L A
11""'o.J. ..... I 1.1
.r
I I
.If
~~~
...~~
-'
u,
<oJ
::f
:::>
::f
i=
w
Cl
::f
:::>
'7
AIVI~
><
::f
0.7
0.5 .
.00 I
,002.003 .005
.01
.02
1\
1\' \
L..
::f
i=
.03
.05 .07.\
,2
.
,3
'
,5' ,7..
TITN
system for bilinear-triangular pulse (Cl : 0.619, C2 : 100.)
Figure 3-149
::f
I'""
5' 7
10
[lME or YIELD TO LOM DURATION,
"0
'"
'0
~v
WI!.
'H f
0U
W
..J
u,
W
..
>-
CD
...
..J
:"\0
~lft"'VtVtNN--
00
~
flIt-.
lr\.1 II .JJI I
U'lfJI-..lOl,/\ 00"
Vt
VI""Vo
-ctIO"
0
lI\
0
00
NV
1711. H 1L.i
Z
0-
j(lIJ
. -g
<,
IV
IX
f7l1.tY"V/
'"
w
0..
..J
i-
0-
-ti7t<tti'bf"*"l~Mt'lt7fH#4It=t7'1f:::k9?f"Z
,ttk<1l....t.11l
Cl
...,,
_~~~?O~~?O~OOOOOO
O\\J'~V"t-.I~--
1.1'
'u'
..
'If'
',p
'\14
'01
....
lEfT
w
~
~~~ffi
o
z
:::>
L.-
j..-
o
0z
0Z
r-,
i=
i=
u
w
L.-
..J
..J
L.W
Cl
N-
IV
::>
:::>
-,-
J-\'
~~ ~"-,., "'" t,
0.7
.001
~:T////'1/
---t
,.,~...
q~y~~---_.
r::;
05!7%
"~.
>
L.-
Lei,
W~
U
~
i=
/1/
.002.00j .005
.0.
.02
.03
.05 .07.1
.2.3.5.7
LOAD DURA nON TO rUNDAMENTAL P'RIOD,
Figure 3-150
.2
TIT N

syst~m for bilinear-triangular pulse (C1 = 0.590, C2 = 100.)
10
TiME or YIELD TO lOAD DURA TiON,

.~
~o!1P
....~~
500 '
b/\- I
Y. \1/ VI'
1\
200
50
--'
u,
w
,
I'>
'"
a
a
--'
,..,
>0
\J(
.
.
If'\ 7\' 1(,\ I
>=
u
\j
.
.~
7 ,Vol /
1\ I\. V "
20 17\--W. 1\ /.
__
oa
..
1)1
.'\
X \ II
IJ x.
1/
'\lJ
I"
!'.
1/ k 1/
~U
IX
I\.
~. I/~
v-, IJ'
. lLlJ.
I'J(
r-
,-I-
I-.....
10<-
P'17
Ii
00
NN
"'0
\1
\"
I'J
\;
\\
~rn
'I,!>
l.,t- V V
11.2.
t:~~
7. \
,\
I\~\
r-;
::f
t.I
)(
Y..
~ lV
.:>
r-, ~
'> b(
V l>' I'>' ~
r;
::-,Ic; ;0(
:r:x
-..
lot:
")10
,-
N I/'lJ
"~
--'
..... I~W
_-
L
W
"A
'I' ',\
:.y"
11. '
-- _..(\._...\ _l'fl\,Y'
.._...
r-.
'\
.)(
.1\
t\
::f
.\ 1\' .x
....
'Z
0-
<,
...E
a
1 6.2
Q:
e,
t:
><
<i
'oS).'"",
tclT
00000000000"
. . . . . . . . . . ooooo
\0 .... \11 .... '-" LH N N co en UI .. ""
0
0
1ft V' .... 0 Ul 0
en "" 0 0 VI a 0 N
'
'(J'
' tJbll)) '\~Y\
'~7'l/\ iV N. Z\'
"dlJl-.\ b( \ /
0Z
.~
, './\ X'f'. 1/
\ j~~K lX y
A-I--X ~lV 1
,J
l' IX
'vi-
-Y.
jp '1~'iIMI\ >/
100 .
OY W \V\II'
\ , 'OX-It";
<,
E
x
/1\
lo1'
CJ'
.'l/'
0"0.
~I\V
300
'"
-0
.
V"t.lt-J
D'~ b1
~
r
iI
.t--I
....- /
i/.
r1 A
~ --1 ,....,
1""0
rz.
"'" Z-1
p;:;; ~ ....-'7 I
l,tV
v,
,.--
r-
~
~
:Y
,01
,02
,03
,OS .07.1
,2
..3 . 5 . 7
LOAD DURA nON TO rUNDAMENTAl ('ERIOD,
Figure 3-151
<II
',7
1.5
I.J
1./
Ifcr!
TIT N
Maximum response of elasto-plastic. one,degree-of-freedom

system for bi1inear~triangular pulse (Cr= 0.562. C2 = 100.)
::f

'0
0-
'0
t:
u
W
--J
"'-
::f
::>
::f
'"::f<i,
"'-
0.53
;::
p/r u =
0.93
0.81
'0.'70
0.61
.002'.003 .005
0: 0
<.J
<,0
.~
J. O
I'
~
..)
~'II
J. S
"
--J
<i
0-
r-
.,,(,.~
6.J
IlI--:i'
10
w
::f
.~
"f'
TIME or YIELD TO LOADDURATlON,
"',0-
'6-~
cP
'0
'0
\l'
0'
'\S'
..
'...,.
....
t-1
vi
'6'
'",
....,.
--
,'0)
". .
.I~
00
00'"
~iD~U.
0
. _~'iJ)<
l<1M
~~~
IX
:ti::--lly)}1'\l:\{ .\'1\
I)(
.... ~i...tNN:-:a.
'"" VI ...., CUI 0
00
-~I
z
o
'ciT
0000000000
ll'l
:..
CD
000
".!
U\"
0 (...
en
NLI I 11\9
r..c:
Z
f-
<,
...E
~ftV
~~~
"o
./
'"a.w
S'J
II'
1/
>-
;"'(,110
,w
--'
....
'"
o
...J
f-
o
a
k'\~ X\ ~ ~~ttrN:n)K, \p<,
, '-
...
:::>
--'
>-
f-
n'KYbruJtf')\(JY.
fZ
\1
'r\
,,'\./t
,-::
WVb<[~
;::
u
W
...
...J
w
w
...J
u,
W
...-
:::>
?'-.
:::>
~
><
.
><
...o:::E
<:
w
...
,)
07
0.5
.001
",~:,
~y
.002003 .005
__"l'r...
I\._--'_' ,
.. , .
',-+<#~'". - ."- ...
,,
:::E
B.r
;::
.01
.02 .03
.05 .07.1
.2.5.5.7
LOAD DURA nON TO rUND.AMENTAL PERIOD.
Figure 3-152
TIT N

system for bilinear-triangular pulse (Cl = 0.511. Cz = 100.)
10
e
nME or YIELD TO LOAD DURA nON,
....0
'0- .... ?
'0
dJ
lJ'
(f\
'0
'\1'
v'-
'v'-
.,..,a
'Cf""\O
to>
0'
'ut
tdT.
:...lD-&c.ft ... lJotVtNN .... o

OUllJl....aoU\OO'1~
7f
w
".E
X
100
2:
,-u
w
70
~M I)
~~~t~~~
"YT'tj=;\rlJIJ
50
--'
L.-.
CJ
,
....
'"
: ....
,W
a
a
--'
w
>-
a
f2:
i=
u
V\I
r-..\J'
.,,,
50
20
Iv
f\Y l<\1.
\\
. . . . _,.
9. 5
8.2
I'
~J--
t.
t7 H1J
t7
v-
s':f
11/
IV~I..L
":0
of
'/'0
rn,~
<.
<.J
<0
--'
-\-:;
::f
::>
::f
~/r~~
.002.003 .005
~'::l'<'T
po
.01
.02 .p5
.05.07'.1
.2 . . 3 . 5 . 7
Figure 3-153
TIT N

system for bilinear-triangular pulse (Cl = 0.464, C2 = 100.)
10
'"''''
c,
--'
4:
2:
w
::f
4:
:a:
::>
L.-
I--
2:
i=
u
w
...J
L.-
1.7
1.5
I.J
I. I
0.95
o.J
0.70
0.61
0.55
i=
o.s I
4:
::f
'('
I--
'6'
L.W
0
<,
e. ;
~~
V\l7:Il.LI IV
I--
7./
'jz YW
IO~
-ODlo\lII"'l.ooiNN
alJlOONUlO
'/
f<l>1lfkf
" ........ ,""'-1
~ooooooo
1/1('.,
...m m
11.",\, ,,,' .... y, ..
r.
000
..-.0 0
. 0
..
.0
..0 0 0
--:..
::f
::>
::f
4:
::E
L.-
::E
TIME or YIELD TO LOAD DURA TlON, ie/T
""0
~l
-;.
.~
!'
..,.
'7
~.p
.....
00-00000000
?ooooo o
o o
OU\OON
~:. ~
..
i.I' .... ~ i...tN N :...:..
UlVl ..... OUlO(J\LH
0lI
en
lI\
..
lH
~
Nv
't\
500
111~~-A4--!l.il
'~~v
N
'"
r><Ii iji
,"~
_w
..,
.,
...
.... 'w
1\'Wq,\of~l~
Xli'll
_. . . . _.- _._._ . . - . . -_
...... "
......
""~
-... ........ ,
~'"
J:
'J-
~,
a
f-
y1
a
f=
u
w
.~
/l~
'6'
cc
w
11.
..J
4:
:z
4:
;z
::::>
~ ~
-;:-
Z
0-
<,
0-
i'::2
-_ . . . . - - --_ .. - ~
-'
8 2
W
_J
t:
L.-
1.J!...lWllj
:z
L.-
'f
0-
\7-[L'~ /
t:
..J
L.-
I'
-'
L.-
:f
::::>
:f
-c
4:
:f
-~~
_
0.5
'
,00 I
::::>
~
~
~
L.-
w
J;'<'l t:
::t:
f=
t:N'i.~~~~~~~
~
,002,005 ,005
,01
,02
,05
,05.07
,1
.2.5.5
LOAD DURA TlON TO rUNDAIoIENTAL PE.RIOD;
Figure 3-154
,7
TIT,..
Maximum response of e lasto-p last tc , one-deqree-of-freedon

system for bilinear-triangular pulse (CI = 0.422. C2 = lOa.)
10

tP
"0,...... -;., -0
suo <:>
~f,i-\
200
w
><
W
-oJ
50
...'"
W
30
o...J
W
;::
Z
0
t:
10
W
...J
...
Cl
~
:>
'\
\1"
II
r --.l.
f4
X"
\ Q,
/'
'fI.. ~ . j,
X /\ /
V f\7Mr..d\
f.X \
" "\~
"r-:--f\Kf\
"
\.
I\ ~
,1\ 17'
IX'V\
!\.,(
IX
V)w
1~~~N~n
~ '\ ./~~
fj;
77
~'
'.
17
.00 I
'/1"/
j,-
. \
.02
.03
1.-
:Jr:;
"1. ~-y\ X
v~
' J X "'"
..
.05,07.1
17
)<
"i. '
I,
I ,J. S
I .J. O
<'6
/.5
= ';,~iUt=N-N
Maximum respOnse of elasto-plastic, one-degree-of-freedom

-J
<I:
....
Z
o
z
:>
u,
o
....
z
o
u,
'\
W
0..
<0
Cl:
<.J
Cl
t:
u
I.,
r<..
t--~
<I:
":0
"-
LOAD DURA nON TO rUNDAMENTAl:' PERIOD, T/TN
Figure 3-155
'6'
V):~ ~
"' I'
\U
~'"
.2.3.5.7
>./
I"
r-,
II
k'\~
p/ r
~,
z
....
<,
.'"
~ 1-,.,.( 'I r-,

~"
.~t-'~
I\--
:::.k1(: " "
i>
8<
I,6'
14'
V
~."
~
~
.01
II
I-..- ....
.~~
. ' ts~. v:s.. i'\

k-'<: '- \.
.002.003 .005
It
r.- '
~~
::::
__
b~ft v~
.~".
~4:v~V
I/.K V
'[)<I'-,.,I
f1'
9.5
I'V"t.---
.A1 -"
rr
II
f,(
rI [I p I- V
~ 1/ i/
V 1/
C'ONlJIO
I./,.A
7 It..I
"\
l%
-'V/V
r>..
I"....c.
r-
'-~
0.7
~ J r-- be
I'.
IX V
Wrv p V
II.-..
l!( ~
I\~l~
~ :I'J<
lZ',;&:;
')
000 0
a
Ultlo"""I'JN
-cCh
/I
Ij II
~IX.I.
\I I
00Ul
1/ : . . . . "
J'l
~.1
'\. 'II "1\
,r-
r-;
?oo
Ol1'UI ..... OU'lOCflOl
\I 'L ""- /
"'~ ~r"\~
-s:'
~~~~~~?~?
LY
tclT
....aU'.v.Ul.NN--
:"l.O
il
-r-:i 1\7' J
,,\
-<0,'
V\
--tl,l.
1\;.; I
/6'
o,~
_~
t-J'_'.'~
'(lIto
'. .
K V \rr-'lfl\k NIl\! K
'X 7\
IL'\
\0
1/\~bVIV' V
3 V~h
><
<I:
X I
\ 7r--1.
iJ
I\vo
....
u
"\
20
~
'"",_
IV"I\(I\'A . 1\ I)
\y
\ J\ X \ M r-\~~)\\JI\
''...>\IJf,lI-\-.
'
70
...
X \'
V <:>'
E
>< 100
....
'/'-'~/
<,
u"
,'Cf'-
\JI
'v'
.",
"
500
tr'
'0
10
~.
Cl
~
I.J
:>
I. I
><
<I:
0.93
0.81
0,70
0.61
0.53
...o
w
~
;;:
TIME Of YIELD TO lOAD DURATlON."lc/T
'6' ~
500
"
"
0
dJ
'0
~.
0'
'IJ'
N i l \1\/1 \
'..;.
vi
ocT'
'19
'!J4
.~
OJ
~/\I)tV\\1
~~
...
? ??
_ ~ ~ O'? 0 ~ ~
:"'\D"-.IUI-'l..HtJ04NN-o o UlUl-"'OUlOO"l..I'&
000
'"
I "IIN/I'4ll 'til
lX1I ;1'N/II l'J(
><
9.5
~.<
.>
~7
><
<,
'"
i/1
o 0
... ....
'"
0 0 '"
...
0 0
-o '" '"
./
'".'"
.1'.
--'
u,
..
...,
.......
!'>
.. ......I Al'WY
.,-l">.....
XI '\11/ ,
_.,
-~
)!7Il
,-,1 }J.L riot:--
a_J
,'"
>-
a
s-.
z
0
t:
'or
1'1
!I
"
P=:1!
"AI
....::::l
r-
.J. o
.....
1'--"1'
<.~
~
,"1
~~~
-I I I I I III-=::v=r:.cr I I 1,1 III.
.03
.05.07.1
.2.3.S.7
I I I
lOAD DURA nON TO fUNDAMENTAL PERIOD. TIT N
Figure 3-156

syst~m for bilinear-triangular pulse (Cl = 0.316. C2 = 100.)
w:
::::l
.02
1.7
<:
<.,j
<0
><
i=
u
L..
W
.01
J'.s
I'-
.002.003 .005
--'
<:
>--
<:
a
~
w
c,
0: 0
NV
--'
i'\.tK
~}bC
-E
'ti'
'm'
fjI
ltV'
,.
>--
<,
10
/.5
/. J
1.1
0.93
0.81
0.70
0.6\
0,S3
--'
L..
::>
:::f
><
<:
~
L..
w
~
;::
..
TlM Or YIL~ TO LOAD DURA TlON. l[/T
. '0' -;.
~
500
.
-5J.S..
soo
-c
c:
o
w
w
,
.....
'"
'"
-'
,.
20
v-:
;.::
u
w
10
-'
If'
"
::J
~
><
"
-..A
I~
I-X
I'it'
\1'\
.,j
v~
:~
II 1/
..... 0
l/I
r-:
,I
r-
. ~I":()
'V
I)<,
v./
~ v,
l7
.
..1
i:"V';
r
1:7\1~
[l:
II(
-l
0.5
.L.
r;.
.001
I-'Z
I.e.
:L:k:.
I-""
.002.003 .005
.0.
J.
<9..".
Z
f-
-'
...)
IS'
'/
',.,
IZ. -r:
/
Do
.s-'
',J-
r-
'6'
I '\
I'0:0
J.
s.
.t. o
'1/:\
<.f>
,L
<.J
20
....\
~ k"
~.
1.7
~
~
I~ .'
IX'
__
ES). ~ p/r y = ~m:MI'
~
IX
i;':'
....\
,;.02 ,OJ
.05.07..
.2.3.5.7

/.5
1.3
I.,
I 0.93
.... t::::.
.<:::..
LOAD DURATION TO FUNDAMNTAL PRIOD, TIT N
Figure 3-157
9 S
'
iii Y
M 11'
c::::::tz
V;
0.7
'L
..... ti1
-,
f"'
It!
V'
. .
K..
v:z
P"
f""
o 0
..... .....
'"
.....
""0
...
~ .I )6L2()l1 LIZ..(
M:
~~
'\/'h:XI}v1(
~
.d V ..-- kR.t
t;:: r-:'.'kF\ f /,\
lCSO .r ~lL::1(L
.:: ~I\ <' 1'. ~
l2S ~J8G~
P.
-'t::" ~f-'"
~
v: y- cfS l"\:,. . \S5~ ~ ~:-'"
-:
')l:lc'\
,L /.
11
r'/12
'"
..
00
000
00'"
p:-17 I<P'. '

11' ~ 11' IL.
h(
0CD (,
C7I
l:i:r /'
::-, L.l1I
I" r- V , \
If IL
:-
VI
'T II
/~..k
IY\
. 1ft". .
P.41X-~ 'v'. , 'v 1:
--i.."i. 16,\ I
en
,I
j~W.~.
4_
17..:!
.x.I.
~\l
13'11 "f.,.. i':L Dr- t( t'.-.x ::L ~
L\J )f(.~. _ ~v J
v''.Ili L\. j{
0.01 U"
f'{.
V \" n '-l'.
1\
tn'.BII\I\/I"'_\
\t7'1LX..,,E'~'::;Q;J
t
,
.
\
J..L:i:~
rv v.. \")J: II,V'

. IJ
J.
21.J..
t,
III ....
:-1.D"-.&U'''l.r4l1tNN--
..
. Y-
1.\/'- '"
-&'
I \
"
_yf\['l tL~\~
oc
0000000000
.-0
c.L 1\
'-4
~V-i IA.\' -I'll
1.6.
SO
L \
.'L
:'V1V
50
-'
Cl
1:::.
70
~
~\I .
tll.
yt.::"
100
.be -.X "
I~X ~,JXIYX
<,
c1'lo1''''''''''''~t.J-:'J'
'v'
...
'CJ'
'lSI
'1J4
OJ
~ - D. \ \. 0.
20u
>(
.
1
r
l
'.
dJ
"0
I.'.
;'
10
0.81
0.70
0.61
0.53
ec
w
0..
.J
<C
f-
Z
W
f-
t:
.J
::J
~
s
~
L.-
w
~
;=.

~
..
-0
rP
lJ'
."'"
G"
.~
~
'..
v'o
'Cf'
"'"
',p
tool
V.
-:"
t:P
or
..
oe
:- to
00
,\I
tdT
oC/oooooo
,
. . .N .- -
00
Ul"'lrI",N
U'lU''"'''OlJl.
:...
CJ)
CJ'l
'"
0\","
:--,1
..-
><
E
<,
z
a
>-
-'
100~.'-
....'"
'"
a
a
--J
,..
30
20~
f-
0
t:
X
.
~
~'"
".\
'"
tf'
.."
1L.'MI Ll_ .l-
s.'-f
1"1'
\
J
K.
J
ii' r--.
V '\
II
,f--\j81 ~ :::V~
or
.~
I. II
V
V
1"-
'6'
,005
.0.
.02
.03
.05 .07.1
<,6
IX 17 M
.1
.2.3.5.7.
e. ,J
1.7
1.5
1.3
1.1
0.93
O.B I
0.70
0.61
Figure 3-158
response of elasto-plastic, one-degree-of-freedom

system for bilinear-triangular pulse (CI = 0.261, C2 = 100.)
Maxlm~m
I I JJI
7
....0
0.53
. 002.003
.l,o
,DO'
....z
<,0
--J
-f.s
k'\1~
0.5
a:
)<
t5l~,..~
:::>
0.7'
...E
'!"-o
7
5
'Z
....
<,
Q.
..-
:::>
~s
t- v'lJL.
II
~
y~
VII
fuA"V"/l~
~
~
l.-
11'
r-,
~'"
NXN?}\I"
-'
~hL
SOj~
1_
W
~I\
1/ I)<
'1,-11 f.-7 11,

r
" ' , / ~Zl
1'" V
-,
U'-.",NN
0
N
I.fI
0
v'1//\
tz- /
"\
,,'/ .....
1"\ 'If.J l,(
,/
o 0 0
10
t:
u
W
...J
:::>
::f
::f
~
w
::f
i=
:
TlM( OF YIELD TO LOAD DUR~ TlON,
6_
"".? ....o
rIA
d'
'J'
'0
lJ'
..
'V"
'4\
500
,:1".\
VI\ r\.Ll\
V"
....
-'
t-J
cIJ
'v'
'I.D.
I,
I'X
\1'lY
f'
....
:"'!J)
'iUl.IJI,v.,NN-0 0 U'U' .... OUlOO\..,.
:..
00
00 0\
l~
)I.
I)
30
ll?1 ~Q)
'-'
><
fV\_\ .li~'f;..
<,
><
100
10
>-
w
w
50
"",
....
....
N
50
Cl
--'
20
>-
-\
l'wl J ,/,
Vi.
6 \ \-
fJ
>-
,.
W
W
--'
,W
o
'a
\I
::f
::f
t17
0.5
00
~ ~/\
V\~
vi
t>o:
r-
1&
&
0./
X'r--,
v
I~
h
TI~
f-'
U'
..
1\
IliA a,s
.:.I
~"
,
t2-
-"
-La.,
'"
11
II
.'"
6'
'.1'
~l2;:
~ r\ ~
.
1/
,il
e---
":0-
yN.; I'\, \<

=" ~/\. \/
":0
~~
l.'
v11:
Y-=:-
r-,
x_
r-s-
('\ vi'
kY
VlX:
es
',7
<,
~" ~ ~I II
~:)., f".. r\ :"> ~
'<,J
<:0
~." ~
\.
<,(;
........ ~LJt
r1.-\K /\
fA;. ,
.1: 0
1/..l .
lV\'rI
.l: s
J ',
IIJ11/
P- LA;
/
r.
r7
. . /-'
r-
Vi.
\.
"1'\
,I
~~ k-
r-, ,
.(!><Y.
t'
II
.k"
",n
~~\
~:l -\
{\
... ...
...
.t
I,.,
1/
I-l ~
/0 l>'
~xI: K<~ IS(;
I~
I"
[0)1) :~ t1*.
1& (\
'I ,v
v ~ V
11\)(
.'E"'" ,,0(
l'~/
IL
1///,:10
I " l l . II
'
-II
';
./',,,
1\
/\
'A,J
II'\,.
U'
":"-;b-'j .A
_. -''d+INItr-
1i..L )(I~""" rv
I~
(',
,..
~'~J
,L.,l,l/
"'-;.L
'"
'"
Y,
~ ,
1 /I
0(:,
Ir
I"\li
.t lli Ii
}fr,;_->t
7
. .~A
::f
'"><
..L /
'A
-J
.1:.
~ 1\'y.
~ \t~
V
1)\
r I / IX
1/\'1\\ X II\FX
Z
0
..
~.A~.
I--' -
t'iloTl.1
--'
L-
Cl
1/
. . . . . .
0000000000
J1hI~
~!i\".. AI1\, I".

) \0y\ f\of\ '! _
x)~-[7:".\'1
20
. .
trlT
I.s
1.3
I.,
0,93
0:81
0,70
0,61
'!'
~~
, _ ,':'
P/ r u
=.u.t;J!3t=N~ 0,53
~
L
V/
,002,003
.005,
..
r ........ /'
t"'"
,01
' .02
,03,.
.cs
,07,1
' .2,': .,3
LOAD DURA TlON TO FUNDAMENTAL :PERIOD,
Figure 3-159
,5.7
I.
.2
TIT N
Maximum response of elasto-plastic, one-degree_of-freedom

10
...z
'-.'
c. . .
a
a::
w
Q.
--'
...z
w
::t:
Cl
z
'"a
...z
L.-
t:
LW
'::t:
'"
::t:
;(
::t:
L.-
w
::t:
;:::
tclT
ru.. [ or YI[LD TO LOAD DURAnON,

~,."",..
\l" t-l
0
rfJ
'0
c1"V',""v"~t-.l..-'oJ'
.r '", '41' ',.g '"" .~ ....
_~~~~O~~~~?
.... lJ)-.ltJI ................ N N ......

OOtJ'ltJ'l"-lOU\OCFIv..
- ~ 17\ii\-..lY '+' "111\1J
..
__ __
1/
\\ M"\
00
UI
- '" '"
0
U'
0
...
0
_ _ _ 11~. tl....-1 rr
'0
"'"
t""
0
t""
0
N
0
tJ'I
1.1
~
'"
Z
I-
<,
...E
Cl
'l\'[\
'"w
ll.
fP
I-
..J
L_
LI
...,,
,....
'"
0>
oJ'
',r
~m~~~~1'\
w
:I'
'"
Cl
::>
....
..J
I<
>-
'"
I-
, hi. 'Y1lo,V
..J
I-
I-
i=
t:
u
l---I
..J
'-
Cb1
....W..J
I~
:I'
::>
:I'
"
"
".'"
::>
><
'"
:I'
..n,~~~
IA1 I j..---
.002 00.5
_005.
.01
w
:1'.
i=
-r----il I ~.....-I'"/f""""'" .v
.. 020.5
.05 .07
_I
.2
.. 5 . 5 . z
LOAD DURA nON TO rUNDAMCNTAl P[RIOD,
Fi gure 3-160
....
o
3'
TIT N
Maximum. response of e l as to-p las t i c , one-degree-of-freedom

system for bilinear-triangular pulse ICt = 0.215. C2 = 100.)
10
e
.'
TIME Or ~IELD TO LOAD DURA TlON, trtT
6',,~ '0
<,
E
x
z
t:
w
-'
w
20
'"
I-
..J
0
t:
10
::E
:J
::E
><
-c
::E
....
"",..,
'ff' '!J)
V'
l\V\~
,-.., --L
I..\.
cP
...
'\. " 1\
V'
Cf\
\It
I '
I" I "b(
hi:
I"
0 ,0
.... 0....
0 '"
.... II' ,0
'
~n iLl.
1/ vf d
-1!
1!::'1
~
r\
j.,D
"-",
"
II'
0
lJ'l
-: I--'
1/ \1
I"
Il'"
,,1
I'
UI til ......
IJ
-Q
4
Y..d..::,
LC-: l..'>
''7 D.L"
.. X
~~;~t!J. /
"" '
~li~'
~ /',K
~~~~~K
I0P
? " . ""
..-'
Fi gure 3-161
i-"1J
f"
~ It\
e:::.
L ""
zi
~ 1\" .z~
~.t
W
d
-z
J:,s
.J.
<.,]
'''' "'"
~
1~~~\i4m
IQi ~'"
41'.
~ ~lll
~ ~ .~~ ~~ 0; ~ <::: ESP t':5:).c-'P
Ir
~
~
~
, '"
u \ .,.; A
.a .'L >" r
;(LI
="
'" '" .
1.7
/.5
I.J
1.1
0.93
0.81
0.70
0.61
0.~3
.L.
:t=
])
. : : :~
:
t:
,;', .
L t::.
,02
,OJ
,05.07.\
.2
'.J
.5
'.7
LOAD DURATION TO rU/<IDAMENTAL PERIOD, TIT N

Maximum response of e'lasto-pl asti c. 'one"degree"of-freec1om
system for bi.linear-triangular .pul.se (Cl"= ,0:178. Cz = .100.)
..J
0: 0
<'5
1<11-'"
~'"
4
Y
a:
w
vIS'
'"
..A --\.. >..1-
n.-c
,
-Y I V"L.
f-
.,
'"
'-.E
zw
'J'
Il"-',
1-
Z
I-
a,
.t
" ,
. Lt "' "'"
.,~
,01
."
6'
~,
0,7
1/.,4
,4
~
J:LL
0,5 ,I<LL.~
,002,003 ,005
,001
.-'
<,0
:.a. ",.
.;
l<' ~ ~"
Il'
'''" .
"
Ll.I
'''' .I K. > \ -,
..- ....... ~?~~~?Pp?~?oo 0

.
'!J)
~ UI"~lr4NN-- _ OJ(fl
'~
-i' --X K\' ~ .Jl
.is: .""
L.-
".f
V "r
1M'
,Ll.
~-"
-i \ LY
..J
u,
'vi'
.Y'~..
- ~r
~
1'.. Ii'
u: ~LI" ,l' jI'j ~
r < r: r~
ok: X l
J...\ >l../1'.'- 110 IJ<,I ~" " C ~"J" V'1..::I' .
"
;::
='X '.
V..
30
....
iJ'''
,~- U [\A t7f. L

u IL..>'~ ~ fA
~ ~<)" .Jh1' L\Ll~~
100
JL.A .'x' -w\ 70
4
rJ1
50
a
a
'\I'
~ ~ ~~,
" " '"
'1'>.
u,
d'
/ \ 'V\
\ " IY\ -'L
"' ) "."
20
w
X
'0
50'
30
fP
.:.
10.
::E
-c
:J
'--
ofZ
o
c:
u
w
..J
u,
,W
a
-- ::E
::>
::E
~
....
::f
w
::E
;::
,
TIME pr YIELD TO LOAD DURATION:
~~.
'0
dI
'!'
If
V'
v"
"t
a'
"
-:"
oJ)
v4
tclT
,
0000000000
":" {,::,.~ :..:a i.l' ....

~
;". N N :.... :...
U'lI''''-lOVl
(J\lJot
o
0
.
.0
-o
'"
_VI
DO
0
U'
o.
....
00
'0
'0
....11'0
....
l,r4
....
500
3 0 0 f\'I)-',I=I',,",'l9t-+->.!+.loI!=
200
....z
<,
><
<,
E
><
.J.Io'--f'hliI~~III'
,,~
...,
'"
o
'"
....w-'
. >",'
....o
z
o
;::c
u
w
~I
10
1\,
-- -_. - - - ----
~v
,V\'\V\,;'J
._-\ /
."
'"
-~~
'"
W
0..
...J
'..r
J-
0:",
3::f
C
z
::>
M7l<
u,
oJz
~ v"
1/\
-'
"Il..U-Jl">LIl'.11I1
- -
....
I\1\1\ lI\ \ I'xI \ !A'
u,
w
r-,
u,
Q
'7
IlL
cl'
oS
'11 .
~~Wlilt~~~cA:J.J:lII-H'II~
...J
>-
17
;::c
u
"
::f
::>
::f
::f
)(
::>
::f
-c
><
::f
.....o
::f
w
::f
~
IS
t::
;....-""':'.
0\
.02
.03
v./x.../.V/v
.05 .07.\
.2.J.5.7
LOAP DURA nON TO rUNDAMENTAL PERIOD,
Figure 3-162
. J
TIT N

system for bilinear-triangular pulse (el = 0.147. C2 = 100.)
\0
TlM[ or YI[LD' TO LOAD DURATlON.

~
~
p
""
~
fP
"0
(f'
'\I'
'"
.V'
'po:
~ to'
'19 'U'
v''0'
---
,.
,..o
...
'Ol'
:.,.I.D
...
....
I~
'ciT
0
..... ." ' '. ' ' ' \ I0.oat. U0.l o0.N N
. 0
---
O"U'
0'
Ul
a.
01.1'
..,\
I Y
___
oz
c:
... !PI
.~ 1V\
70
-~-+V'tI-fJI
-'
....
co '"
'"
'0
"..
l/'
"0
'0
'V'
t-J
N
OONl/'O
....z
<,
....E
o
w
'"
a..
.S"
r-AJ 1\1 I \ 1'1. _.",\ I
w
,
lMlV
o o
::3jz\.r-,Xr-:
N
N
I)<
,f
/1tft\/
lI4
- -
'.l\\
Q\
a
a
..,
..J
~-
I(\~
f-
"-._~_~
r-
l/
_ _
. ~ . _ ~ ~
~"
',J'
nn
..J
<t:
....z.
<t:
r--
:::>
L
....o
\7
~~
~'tt1 \ 'iJIl
"'
i=
fU
W
..J
L'
W
1'-
..J
L
W
:::>
~
><
<t:
~
:
:::>
~
K
<t:
o
w
i=
l--'"
0.7
0.5
.001
'......-'1...--.11
.002.003 .005
01
.02 .03
.05.07
'//.VA//
.1.
.2.3
LOAD DURAnON TO rUNDAM[NTALP[R.IOD.
Figure 3-163
.5.7
TIT N
Maximum response of elasto-plastic; one-degree-of-freedom

system for bilinear-triangular pulse (Cl ; 0.121. C2 ; 100.)
'5
to
TIME.or YIELO TO LOAD DURA nON,

~
:..1
""
.....
t.J
..
rP
'0
t1'd'~v"~~
'oJ'
'v" '.,.
'0'
'v'
'.p
e-cP
tciT
00000'00000
':'"-:'".,b:...&""
~ ... 0
0
U' ~
NN:-:V\
0\
00'0'0
-
O'
(II:)
01
lJ\
U'I
IJI
U"
"0
'0 '0
'0
vovtoy-,)N
lJ' 0
lJ'
0
d'
',.,
""i:
1\
-'
'"
"
<,
F
>(
.,.,.
6'
t:
70 I'{
\I / Kf
\I~
,f
~t\%I,1\iTh 1/
"oj
1/ 1.A-r V .r: \ It-
/V'-..
':6'
LW
..,..,
a
a.J
30
,..
20
a
0
""
W
1~~"'N~8*~
':0
.J. s
.t. o
0
f-
<'5
-l-I-A~,lLJ.l.~.""-.A.'-'<-.&...L..l""""-'A.,
;:::
o
"
<.J
<0
..J
L-
/.7
/.5
1.3
1.1
0.93
0.81
0.70
0.61
0.53
~~ ~l.L\.r~-t:tf\Pt~tf:\4--lr-/X
"
I"l.-H1I'"k--r
:>
::f
><
..:
::f
UI
..>t
::j~
.001
.002.003 .005
--P
.. 01
'1---'
.02' .03
~
.05 .07 .. 1
.2.3'.5.7
figure j-164
..J
.
l-
..J
..,"",
....
0..
l-
<,
Maximum response of elasto-plastic, one-deqree-or-fraedon

10'
Z
w
-c
a
z
::>
...
a
z
a
I-
I-
..J
L...
::>
~
....a
w
::t:
.~
11
TiME or YIELD TO l.OAO DURAnON.

"""
... ~ 0
500
J/\
200
><
<,
F
>< 100
z
t:
u
70
'",
'"
'"
'"
n
...J
W
>0
0
rU
w
...J
r.,
::J
"
><

0'11
7
L
v'
.;0
~~OO~?OO
~oo
-0
lJI"l,rILANN-\J\ lJ'I ;.I 0 tJI

0
(f\...,.
~"\I)..J
":'
OJ
..
..
\-{\J{'\N.
\.1.1 y.l.Ii.~ Il-\nJ1IVT~
i~lX.
'. ' ..
1\11
- ~\
'0
!J'
CJ'I
U"
~11\
"IJ'lVlot-.>
O!J'
\I'
0
N
h- \( ~
bf111 X"1Vl7
d'
nJ1\1\~
',,>
'
.-
1\/r~lY\
~~~~.
''\\-
._
/\
H+
I-~ ~\'1iLl ~
., ,.
' A IA:...I\"'/Ut-\"'Tl\
LH'"T7
rr
~,.
'Ci'
t: o
"
J. s
~.(i
1'-
~'J
20
L"
.-I
IV'
~~J
~~~0~
'-
V//lI"""~~
O,51~~~/
.--4'.L''-'''-l-'<'/+-+'''I--I-hK''--'---f-''''I--IL-l--;''''
.001
.1. 0
... ;
I~'
.002.005
.005
.01
.02
.05
.05.07.1
//.Y/....r/,/V
.2.5.5.7

system for bilineartriangular pulse (Cl = 0.075, C2 = 100.)
!"
<
1.7
1:5
1.5
1.1
0.95
0.81
0.70
0.61
~~ ..
0.55
vO'Ciii<J
lOAD DURATiON TO fUNDAMENTAL PERIOD, T/T N
Figure 3-165
'"
...J

J'
2~~~
0.7
'0'0'0'0
1\
_..-~-.AlHW'
- ~ rx'l " 11
-J ~i\. .LX "'I ,\ :\\...
/7. rt
.
~/ 1)1.. X
Il.lf;t; ":"~I\
co
(:;t ~ 1\ 11\ _f\. rx~'. ~.~ ~L.~--1I1;H.W\l.Jf--"\/L\-M,

te, Ll fv\ IAI') i-v ~)< lY!. IVf n
1 0 - r.
":>
~~ - . _ -
..1-.
...
z
...
50
20
"'J\II~LYJ--I,i
,-\iIY ~'-AI-/"
.
. 'V-'
'''''w
1/\
FT'j:s2 \
c,
-'ri"
.~"'~\~~ '.\14.'
50
W
...J
',6'
""
f~ ~I~)-~
\ 17\1" J\ >;Ji~W
-- :~ . -:vIIV
,..
v'
./
Y Iv' 1\
\; '\ lXA \I!~-
JOO""
o'V'
1\ 'I
(",!!v"~
rP
tdT
10
'2!
::E
4:
0
z
=>
u,
0
fZ
r::
u
w
...
...J
::E
=>
::E
'i(
...1 .. ~U'o l I ' U ' I - I o t l l 0 CfIU"
~
0
~
0
'0 '0
IS' IS'
IS'
'0'0'000
... ~
"'"
v'o~o~O
IS'
....z
...E
6'
'"
><
<,
E
><
z
0
'r
70
t:
u
or'of
'l:
\'11\
..J
1\1
"",
'"
e'"
..J
>0
~'/I \1 mJ V ,
1-
"
~V"
u,
W
N M"b<
_1'1'
. JI' I
'~I
t:
..J
..J
-<
....
z
,-<
z
:>
Ii
, ",,;::l1\t-ttn~7Ii\:tr\"j
....
'"a,
a
a
....::IE
'-
<,
...
o
....
X'","l
,.._
'-
NIf.t~\ P<
o
;::
u
7
VJ 1\-V'Itt*",-;J-'-t-t-J\'-~t,p"
'-
Q
'"
::IE
:>
::IE
:::>
:>'
::IE
-0:
:f
....
o
....
::IE
;::
-/lVfI~
.01
.02 .03
,05 .07.1
~
;2.3.5.7
Figure 3-166
TIT,.,
Maximum response of e lastc-p last tc , one-degree-of-freedom

system for bilinear-triangular pulse (e1 = 0.056. C2 = 100.)
7'
10

n'ME or
...
o-
...
0
OlCf'oJ'~vl'
0
'\1'
'o- ....
'6'
YIE~D TO LOAD DURA nON, telT

00
~-:""~~~cp'~
." -" ~ t.J 0 U' 0
t-l
'dJ
o\
00000
""'...
""
U'
\,I.'-"N
""'" 0
lJl.
t-)
0000
'
"
-
lJ'l'"
__
t-.l
'0 '0'0
~ -.1 lJ'
'0
\J\
'0
..
'0 '0
V" V"
'0
t-J
0
N
OOOO~IJ'OlJ'O
500
.100
d'
.,..,
Z
t-
<,
oJ
....
...E
6'
Cl
0
'"
<,
sc
100
70
.""
oS
;::
0
,~
Jk
5U
A"1-..)\J
v ~\
'"
'"
'"
30
-'
N"~:t1\,Ti\7f!1.ji
>-
xv
t-.
z
0
;::
'0
10
,I/t'-U
-'
KWD
::t:
~XIX"
::t:
.J. o
I-
~'6
~ .]
~~
><
2
1.7
15
1.3
1.1
0.93
I:
0.81
0.70
'{';:l;~: :'p I ru = ~Zl J q'lJ
07~'3-VYlY
17/f7Y7
0.5
.001
.002.003 .005
~I/
.01
'.02 .:.03
f;+
.05 .07
~
.1.
..2
.3
.71
3 ,. '5
T/TH
system for bilinear-triangular pulse (C1 = 0.04l. C2 = 100.)
Fi gure 3-167
.5
<:
Cl
::>
IJl.-
'\/~110
:f
J.,s
2.0
71\15"
L.-
:::t
::>
...
Z
":0
-'
<:
I-
":6'
-'
L.W
. ',r
'"l1.w
10
L.-
Z
0
;::
o
w
..J
u,
Cl
:f
::>
:f
')(
<:
....
:f
'0
0.61
...
0.53
i=
:f
tdT,
TIME OF YIELD TO LOAD DURATION,

".
r;P
er..,.. '!'v'"'!".. ~.
(1"'
fIJ
,,;
~ ~.1'
-lo
..
l'
o.C?
'O!'
\J'
~
0
C?
\J'
U'
U'
'? '? '? '?

'-"
...,J
""
\II
0 0
- -
(J\'"
'? '?
-
to)
'0'0'0
QlI - l
l7'
'0
\f"
o.
'0
...
t.J
'0 '0 '0

"'" ~.t-.J
I,J' 0
\1'
0
N
Z
I-
-"
Cl'
',.>
-s
';,r
'"
'"
'"
'"w
Q.
W
-0
L.W
'6'
b"I-\4tf+'od"
..J
I-
z.
::r
:::>
-0
L.-
>-
I-
a.
o
~
u
c!
w
I-
.-a
W
-0
L.-
r-,
::r
:::>
::r
:::>
::r
;<
-a;
:r
::r
s
::r
L.-
::r
;:::
. nU
0.7 r....4iLY~
0,5'~
,00'
,002,003 .005
Figure 3-168
~
,01
,02 ',03
'/#/A'//
,05 ,07,'
.2
,3
,5
,7

system for bilinear-triangular pulse (C1 = O.03!. C2 = 100.)
'0
'.
TIME or YIELD TO LOAD DURATlON, Ie/T
'0
dJ
CJ' ~
..
v"
'0 "I.$' .v"'.... 'Cf'
t-l
'fP
~~".-",.oo
..., .~ .....~ '0 '(j! '..J,
os- 0
t?
lI"
\II
~
..
VI
lr'-
'""
0
-l
C?
l/"
~.
N'
0
t? t? '? '?
-
....
d'\ ~
.-1'
'0
'"
t-J
'0
'0
CJ'
\I'
'0
V"
V"
V'
.. IJ'
200
sc
F.
<,
Z
f-
<,
~~$!Jt@~B~~=r~.Ml'\fJl:''''"
sc
lJ'I
I Y1\
, \If \ IX'\;{J\
lA=tI~~
0
t..I
0
V"
~H~M\itl~ffii\;:::ltrr~lJJ':ru: I.
w
'0
'0'0
',,>
70
'of
;::
W
.J

L.-
>-
0
f-
.._
I JI
fZ
IT'<I-l.'<""i"<:+-h,*~
t:
u -
fU
W
W
I .,
:::f
::>
.J
L.-
<
.J
L.-.
:::f
::>
:::f
:::f
><
<i
:::f
:::f
L.-
<i
0 ..
_
w'.
J:id\
:::f
;::
./V./
0.5
.001
/-17'1 Y
.002.003 .005
./
.01.'
.02
.03 . . 05.:07.1
'/~//
.
'.2
.3
,5.7
.';
3~
LOAD GU!lA nON TO rUHDA!'IEN! ~L PERIOD, TIT N
Figure 3-169
~Maximum re~ponse of'elasto-plastic, one-degree-of-freedom

,
10
.'
!lrLO
lHoil,:O[
., .
r:P
0' V' '" v'

t-'
'0 ":101' 'u""" '0' '($I
,~.
.',
~.
0
':"
.-;
_\ '"'t->
":"
"r;j)
lJ'
'It0\ 7t.. '

~'1) \ . \ \ 1\' rs:?r....
JOO ~i'1\ \;~\j"IX
/ ,'X\-'l';n' ,'w .1\,
,-XI\-i\" ~f~ . ~ X\JA,
\.1',
do
t.,. i-J ''r-J
lJl
-I
....
...;..
a\
...
'?
...a
~OO .'0;' \~ X\ 'il\'.\
O_.ll'
/I,
1/ ' ' ' ' ' ' I
'.'
triT
10 .LOAOPURA nON,
,0
.~
....1
.,
'0
."
.; .
'0
'0
'0
0'.,..""
...
o ~~ u:' _ t.1'
'0
.1,14
'0 "0
V'
f'..I
.t.1' ,0
0
N
.....
,v~, ."
d'
,..,
200
w
><:
<,
F.
:-<
z
a
.;=
u
100
so
,,,J
JO'l'\.
1-
L-
t:
u
-.J
,u,....
0
>:
:1
>:
sc
-c
:>
'J'
X'X~" . --}1
'0'
!\/,",~~~ .. ~"
':0
~.\tIY\'t\il'- ~U~Y1'lJ~--t*l-\
.J
'.
V ~ :;~~ Et:\\J."~ .. ~
.~.
IL'{,~"'Y\;~> /
,, ~
.,j
:.
. . ,
'''f'''{ A
.J
C)
0'.,..,
/:'~'\
IV
IL }. \ 1)
-;""(\~ ,'\,(::V't'\lIt--n:r~LX:l::t;d"E1t:'l1L1AAL::n::ttrt:lf\t\t:tlutttN1
\.. 1\
\. ,.1' - '.,~, '~.
.. \f'I..... . .
.
hJl
.r
j\
10 I
I.,
....,
'"
00
'"
"
--'
'-"
20
IO~Vc~...\~,~r~~-fV\i,A--v~.-~-~.~~.~~
. ~~~- , .~. ",
.
..} ......-1\.
'-V",rt,.l: ' -if'-\1
L\,l,~ '7'_
1A~
: ~\J~\~A~
.1:- .......... _ >1, -'
\~t-7M:'~
Y
l\
I'"
VI
;"' }''''I..\
VI-...vI
1'1.1." ........
ltv
'I
\l""
1'\.\<1\'\
'''/
IX 1\
~:><bbt)(~~
.~
- '~r--7 ~ 17
17" ,7'1-01-'
,-,-
0.1
o.s
1/-:
.001
/"
7721:
V 1/ 7-'
.002.003 .005
-X- Xl""
11E..\ X '
'1/
I/' y\ If\
j<
~,
~
. ~l<:~~~~~
i-L-,.....
.
X P\7k:[)<i\'/
: X. KJ<Vlx<)("
~2~~~rse>
"
'
~~ p/r" = o...-w.rlloH
'
./ /' L
.01.02
.05
V /A77.YV Vl/
.05,07.1
.2.5.5.7
TIT N
Maximum response of elasto-plastic, one-deglree-of-freedom

1.7
1.5
I.J
1.1
, - 0.93
0.81
0.70
0.61
0.53
~~ ~ .~
'='
' \ - - . \I~\I \
-/17~
V
LOAD DURA nON TO rUNDAMENT AL PERIOD.
Figure 3-170
2.0
'-I
; ~~~~~~~ ~\ 0~~r<;~: \i \ -'x~v~r v~~:: ~

7
'" ~~V'lr~~
t,ot.. '::s;' ~ .. -1'\ 1\
<.(;
<.J
~~~\~-X-v '~""""'''T,n,,,
"-0
.. r
10
....:z
<,
0:
w
a.
:....J
....z...-
..
::E
;z
::>
"-
0
....
z
a
....o
....-'
w
a
::E
::>
::E
><
...-
::E
"0
::E
;=
.:
TIME or YIELO TO LOAO OURA TlON,

dJ
'0
d'..r'00
'"
'6'
,..,'dJ
t-.I
."
-="-l. --: ":' -('
0000000
"(jJ
'-l.
, "l1'
.... 'v' 'v ~
0
"'+.1' ..... 0\1'
Pt..10",
,
tdT
c:' C?' 't? C? '?
'0
~~""~'O.~
'0
'" ..,.
..,.
oj'
'0
~
oj'
'0 '0
u' V'
\f' 0
'0
r.)
lJI
0
N
O.
tv
',..,
-'
c,
X
<,
><
;:=
-'
u,
'"
'"
'"
-\1'4\/1'I7CIl 1\
..
70~
50
Fvl\\'
1\
'F\f---\-f
., M-h-~tA-J~'*
30~~~JnU1
20
-'
~6'
":0
.J'.s
..t. o
<'6
z
o
<.J
f=
2.0
1.7
..J
u,
OJ
::t:
<i
::t:
1.5
"M~~
~~~_n
p/r;=~
0.7
0.5
.00.
AIYII~:Z
.002.003 .005
.01
.02
.03
a
0
'"c,w
-'
<i
....
Z
::t:
.05.07. . 1
.2.3.5.7
"I
,2
"
7
10'
5'"
TIT N
Maximum response of elasto~plastlc. one-degree-of-freedom

.z
OJ
"0
f-
z
0
t:
u
w
-J
b
a
1.3
::t:
OJ
I.'
0.93
0.81
0.70
0.61
0.53
/..1//.1"//1/
LOAO DURATioN TO fUNDAMENTAL PERIOD,
Figure 3-171
-
<,
'"."
.\ I
a
a
w
w
'/
100 ~
. _ -0 '
....z
dJ
::t:


-~
500
"
1/\1
".,;
"..
...,j,
'0 ~. 0
I\VI\IIV,,\
telT
00000000
'\I'
'10" , '""
'""" 't-J
~
.....
\l'
\l'
...1
0
\II
0
(1\
'"'"
>
~\I ~
/
Il'W-l\I
'?
,;
'00'0'0
fJJ - l G'
t1'
'0
...
V'
'0
'0
....
U'
....
~--_
..
Z
l--
<,
\00
...E
1\
I~\
ycnA\.
.x.v
1\:
.s-
1\
',>
-,
;::::.
L)
oS'
\ V\
',J-
/\1/
... \! \ /
-'
L...
W
I~~~~V\
a
a
-'
w
.y
.~
1/
l-Z
'6'
~o
J:,t
::>
.J. o
I-
~'fi
~.,J
;::::
L)
-'
L..
W
:::>
~
><
-c
2.0
1"-.
:E
.Y ~ '\
k1 X--
t.r
"'i
1.5
1/
1.3
""-L' \ \
1.1
,5
;::::
L)
w
r:!
w
a
:::
::>
::f
0.70
0 ,6 1
0.53
\ .
,7'\
LOAD DURA nON TO fUNDAMENTAL PERIOD, TIT Ii
Figure 3-172
).?I~
VI..ff1 f(%jW4/JV I I I IIII

',2.3
0,81
~:-' p/r u = -,,',~
,I
L..
~ : :-- ~l-lT
'<"'\ \:
+-:;/,-+T-i-7'lH""I-
::f
::f
I><
... ,
.y
A
"
O.5 -:~'---'-""-+"--+---+..j-,I"-I--l-+'if-L.L.--+~'l-4.001
.002.003 .005
.01
.02 .03
.05 .07
-'
l--
Iv
20
>-
'"
Q.
..,"",
""o

10
L..
::f
;::::
TIME or YIELD TO LOAD DURA nON, i,. tiT

'.~'
':.,
.,.o ,., ,.,

~,
.....
....
f$J
o l..J
t-J
,(1\
0'
"!'
V".
~
N
\.1<1
'.,
!"'I
....t
.....
~
.0
VI.
?OO??O? ?oo 00
00
o.
"'l.NVINN-\II ' " 0 VI _0

VI
0'"
CD
1/1'\
Ul'..L~+7I-~It-*""'+-
~I~
... ,,~
.::JT----' V
'"
.. - ... I
-'
L
W
co
lR
'"
.....
",,,,
r-
M-=
I-
<,
...>
vt+:JVI
o
<>:
'0
t-
'z
W
:>:
Im
:/
,.o
-'
>-
..J
1);-
I~
Q.
r-.
co
\II"'"
"LI~1/
~-JP-
'0:::1;
."o
-OOO"l
0 0
\II
en
'Z
:>
L
,f-
"o
i=
,W
W
..J
s-,
U
W
.-'
L
L
W
:0
o
:>:
:>:
:>
:>:
:>:
'x
-t
><
:>:
.<[
'L
:>:
M
0.7'1/
~ II .l:.\
\I \ 1\
P Ir
'
w
:>:
.>.
i=
O. ~ -:..L-'--I--J--I~-J-++-++_....L-l;,.--I---+--+-I-4.J.+-""'--+--I---+-J--+-H-++:--...L.-J--+--J--I-+-I-I-H
.001
.002.003 .005
.01
.02 .03 ',05 ,07
..1"
.2
,3
,5
.7'
.. 2
L9.ADDURA no~ TO rUN~AME~T,~,L PERIOD, TIT N
Figure 3-173
'Maximum response of elasto~plastic. one-degree-of-freedom

system for bilinear-triangular pulse (C1 = 0.909. C2 = 300.)
7 10
TIME or YI[lD TO lOAD DURA TlON. L ciT

u'
~
..
rJ
.....
_ ........
-'
fSJ
0",..>
0=-.1.~
V'
(]'I
lJoI.
O l l J < f ' - I
!'J
....&
...
':""
':"" .
""'lI'IO~
~OO~~ 0 0
000
0000
"Uov.t,,)N
l/I"OVIO
-000'1
0 0 l.Jl
Ul'"
00
en
-CJ\v.
--~'"
11-.IA 1\
I il
~~
--~
70~~~g
50
t:
w
--'
,~
'"
N
'"
I
ci
~rtI4lll/
--'
'"w
Q.
oJ
~\
>w
-c
..
::>'
u,
''''>.....
z
o
.....
w
--'
t~
i=
u
0.1
05
ffi?"tt
.
1~
.001
I J J
.002.003 .005
1\
l~
~
,t
II
,01
J
.02
I
.03
,t
,t
.05 .. 07
~
J II
.1.
I
I
.2'.3
1\
p/r =
I \
I, 1 I I I J I
.5.7
1
lOAD DURATl9N TO rUNDA~M[NTAl P[RIOD:
Figure 3-174
::l'
::>
Ii 1
Vi
'~.~
"w
a
Of
~~
o
>z
~
7
S
Of
::>
Of
Of
'0
>-
<,
..J
~1/
Z.
\~.:
~f~\--'
I.'
a
\l\Vil'-,
k:-'-I.~f-+7'!-<:""
JI!-''l'+-\-If
\.olN
0"'.
I
2
I
3
I J 1 J I: I
5
7 .. 10
TITN
Maximum'response of elasto-plastic;one-degree-of-freedom
::l'
::l'
"-
w
::l'
>:=.
TIME
,..,
..
,..,
6, ......
~
0
\oJ
or Y1E'i.D
tIJ
TO LOAD DURA TlON, L ciT

"Vlt'-JN
(J\IJ'
U4,.N
"CJ'
...
. \1 i'l J'\-I .I."l \XI I VI M

-~ I l-li(' ~~X\
:...
:....:"'"
~ 0 00
o
~
0
?~~!=>???OOOOO
"'""",c...NN
--
OJ
fJI ...... OVlO
atlH
NX N,.-INI
.1>'.
. _1/1 N 1ft( 11><
NII~II/
Vi'll rNlI1NV
NIA'IJ $"V/I-
~
K l---IJ/
I n I\rrl(j.' Y,
-:;\"Vi V1N 1\/1\\

~ W'NV "-JA\! WJ\J K
I ,f)(r-IJA ~ YI\\ LXI A [X
, l'llHN \X~ '\1 NT'-
00
lI\ ...
lHN
0 0 ' 0 ...
C7'l
VI
lHJ I f'Y-i
t'lNU'td 1114'
Z
0-
<,
E
.J
a,
-L
l>
1-7
e>:
w
Q.
IX! \hI!
!l
NJikl-I1
1 H':!"I'7f+"'\,f-+;>h:--j
WLJI,vi!l
fl+1
I)'
"
'"
~,1'1<1
'
0z
W
~
-c
i!:
/rl~
w
,
w
w
..J
'-"'-
1M:
~'
....=>
o0-
~H1
,/
f-
'J
-'
r..
W
7
5
::>
:>:
><
:>:
~.
I--
=>
j----\JJ-H\~
.~
p Irl
=-n.:
:::E
><
....
o
w
~
i=
"%
07
o.~
'~'-i
.00 I
I I I I Hi
.002.003 .005
.01
I I I I III
.02
.03
.05.07.1
I. I.
1'1'1 I I III
.2.3.5.7
Figure 3-175
u
w
......J'
1'--.' /I\V
V, LX--...\)\'vf\XlU'\N~J1?
:>'
t:
T/T N
I I I I III
5 .7
Maximum response of elasto-pl~stic. one-deg~ee-of-freedom

10
TIME OF YIELO TO LOAO OURA TlON, L
'"
~
,-J~~"'~o~
..
0
v'
50
20
.w
X
<,
sc
s-:
--'
L.
W
w
,
'"
..,.
w
a
a
--'
;:::
"\1
'I"v
' 'YO, ~:t ~
l/ \lL
"- 1/\
30
.~.
70
100
50
20
0
tU
W
10
:>:
::>
::f
c-c

f'
r'llf-;
-t
I'
::::
.:::::
;'>
~_
!:6~
~~r- r.
;,
O~
..L
P
"
i2
",N
'UI"'040VlOlJ'l
r-
00
"L04ViNN---OOCJIU'l"
LHO OUl 0 0
(fI
~.<./
,)<
. r': Ie <::' ,/
10<::
r::: r-
>-
t::. Y-
I<
~t:St;
I-':
.1\
...1-
I-
,>.
::f
tc
I1
:L..J
1':.\
P r
.'.\,
.02
~.
~\
C'
.03
.05 --07.1
.2 ,.3
.5.7.1
2' 3
LOAO DURATION TO FUNDAMENTAL PERIOD. T/T N
Fi gure 3-176

system for bilinear-triangular pulse ([1 = 0.787. [2 = 300.)

20
E':
I:::::
E
...J
....s
~r
t-
<,
,;
r--
.l\I
1)~ { I '~f'
.
r-
ill
'. \ )
V\~ \ r:-,~M 4):1L
~'
0.7
' ..
I'
Jj
....
\1(
''''''
ffitM .~~r'\V
--'
'Ii
t-.J
\ '
OC \
rf ~ .x
.A
v \K \
IXJL
""
f1i"-lX V "
L-
:4..
Ii'
.so
a
r-.
z
VI' N
"01....
JL IX n\he-!0 ~ ~
h
t1
\J'
(J\
ciT
10
::>
L.-
i=
u
w
r:'w
1.6
Cl
I.J
1.1
0.93
0.81
0.70
0.6\
0.53
::>
::f
::f
;(
-c
::f
L-
i=
IT
TlM or .YILD TO LOAD DURA nON, l

~
v'
".. 0
"t,
~--;.
rP
~l,oI.N
V'
CfI
N~
O'~(J'l~N"':...a:..--..
500
.o
200
w
><
<,
E
>< \00
z
0
r=
u
w
70
50
-'
L..
...,
...
N
'"
a
a
30
20
-'
;::
f-
\0
f-
U
W
-'
L..
::>
><
<!
~
0.7
A +
"
X-\ 8....' ./....'

.
"C":"
~+
~.
~1-,f
.~
1-4
p
0 +.
:, 1"..'tJ(,
I~~,~V~
\"VI1
~~~~
~~
~ '"
~
14~~c
~~
'-'
L'I~.
I.\C t' c
1'1',
~ nM
'
liS" '".r~'k
M
'" ~
'"
'>" 1>+
t~V
1/11:;
,J &
a ~
H.y..
I)
I)
~~'"
..
;\<::l;
rJIr
-LH 0
L2
DO
0
00
&I c.n ..
c.n
>'-
~ ~
;"
;0
I'!'" .
II'
l--
. ,
",'
1(1.
"''''
0"
"L
'"
=rl-,;\.
~ ~
~.~
""
'>
l(
~"-'
en
. 'I".'~1Il'l'
f,.ob
. .
~. ~
,",u
'-'
--
1.10
1.1.
i?
~
<
\;
\
'
N
0
""
~ ~
e<.
... Lot tJotN

Ul .... QUI
~t::
;.....a::
u
:s:
pI
_~
.01
. . 02
.03.05 .07:\
:_
D:
,'.\
-'
0''1.
f-
.,.;
4. 0
4.0
3.5
3.0
<!
<!
::>
L..
f-
t:
<.>
w
..J
w
L..
/.6
1.3
::>
I. I
0.93
0.81
0.70
0.6\
)(
0.53
TITN
LOAD DURA TlON TO rUNDAMNTAL PRIOD,
Figure 3-177
'\
.2.3.5.7
E
:.,
a.
1..]
1,0
0.5 f0:::.. "'.00\

.002.003 .005
f-
<,
'b.t
1,6
'" -\ u
'"
"
I,
"T ~
':\"
...
.....,\
..
"'...
-'~~ ~~
1:~m:r~tT1
r: '
7::;.
J;';"":" "-::
.,.
\.
~.
'I;
V'
Il'
~:;
~J<, .l,,-,),
~ "cfIlt
~,,,
r 1'J"'v
L'
??????O?oooo
Vto(GCJ'l
.
JI...II ~ .4
I- '
'"Il I 'J.-: ,... ~ 11 I
--'"
-\' ' ,,,,,....
J 'j:)"
IXil "
~
\A . ~"
~
300',Y
-: ~ ~
:""
\0
<!
~
L..
r=
TI~E Of YIELD TO LOAD.DURATION. ldT

v'
~'
t-J.,...l
..
-;.
- .....
'"
'0
U'
Gl
't-J
...
"a>
li-l
. I'JI'U \'\ J\ \1 X\J VNII

.I 0 0
'i;)r~
r \.
t'\
I~ I
\.~
~~ .~~
\I
'{V
HI I 'Ii II
--'
.-l
>-
....
llA'\.IlIF\.
", .....
Ir
'-I
f--
.<)
7 17'
l/
'V
J\-v1 \X iI\
L-
o6 ~
v.JJ 1/
OCJ'lVl
.'4b1tt
'"
o N..
Z
f--
<,
E
.-l
J-;
~ v
1'- .~
~
r-
~II"-
'"w
<,
k::,
~ ./ vb-
r::YV
..
r-, V, V
./'i(vV
--'
f--
,... ..et
<:'
k,f-~
o,
i/""
--=
Ja
"/."
{,.7
.00.
,.-
.:::>
,.-
<; 'I.- "L-,
><
vm
1m'
~
~
L-
w
:::I
p/r =ll.,
>=
./
.002003 .005
.01
.02
.03
.05 .07.\
.2..3.5.7
LOAD. DURA TlON T9 rUNDAMENT AL PERIOD. TIT N
Fi gure 3-178
f--
>=
0.7
0.5
L-
'"w--'
i>
1\ v :
:::>
1\
'I
::E
a
z
t.-
~TI7
t-
L-,--.
......,"::'
L-
II--"
. .1
Y:
II"
\<1.dr .J...-
,.-
,.-
? 00
N--
'?11
<
'Y
><
.
-- - -
1--.11
,.-
IJ
"'VI~N
V\~OUl
VlfM
l\I
II l)([b(rY
~" \';ttl 1',
'0
f--
::>
"'III J'I I
--
:0:~
w
--'
???~ ?~?
n,
70
L-
f\
)1
>=
u
'",
'"
'"
N I
J\jJK\MIX J>(f>K.- 'K
<,
~ ~
O'l
o o
J\ I 11.1 U\ I I'll I I
.... "m 'W \\l'\ \II
><
V\L
A
. .
~
.
--+-VI \I III NIl I X '-I 1\
><
z
a
l\
N" -
N,,:...a:-:...a~003
Maximum ~esponse of elasto-plastic. one-degree-of-freedom

system for bilinear-triangular pulse (Cl = 0.715. C2 = 30D.)
\0
..
-,
.,
TIME OF YIELD TO LOAD OURA TlON, L ~/T

_
~
500
300
100
70
t:
50
...J
...
...'"....
I
a
a
30
20
'---
f=
W
...J
-7.
u,
:>;
:::>
:>;
><
.<!
:>;
~
~
0.7
'\'---'
o!
"'" _ ,N
(\
:..
:..,
[\ "
,\ J\"
'
'
. .
,~
? ? ?
' 1'- V f\J'
J r-, "
" "
!>~?
O?
"l.#llNNN-VI -.l 0 VI 0
(fl.lN
".~~~'
~~.1 ~
\.
~
k!:>
'\.
'" K
'"
V' r-,
.v"
J\ )' ~ /',
~
~~
~~
.tIl
./
'" z
'v ""
r,
"'he '
~h
7"
1(.
'
-J
~.
,'>
t-\;
\\
"
~.'>
~~
'"
"'<-' . \
'"w
5. 3
4.6
4.0
.I. 5
"
'7-
.!.o
~'6
~'.I
,,'
-t
.0.
.02
.03
.05.07.1
.2.3.5.7
Figure 3-179
....Z<!
:>;
<!
:::>
"-
>-
f=
u.
.:w
16
1.,5
:::>
I. I
0,93
0.81
0.70
0.61
0.53
"
0.5
.002.003 .005
...J
::E
,/. =.,.
I/'
I'OJY
0..
'Z
,U
1\
b0c
.,.,E
a
).0
~\:;, ....,
><,
'/>.1...1-
?:
.00 I
1-1>
1-1-
o 0
'"
o IV
..
'"
.;
'
,,_
-OttUlUl.
.....
oj
? 0
,~"
'r " ,
IV
\
i.-.~OoCn
.00
1'..
",,,,,
V\ 1\ i/' '\ ,
0 /
~)().
-tao
U'I
'k"
I I"
J
J:
%-- Y
:~.
(J\.
f\. IX
,r-;IJ
i\
II""
_II:---..
<\,,,
(lit.
-r.. II
JI ,.:"
'l.
10
' '"'
D\7" .Ji
, V'
>-
~
J ~
...
. II -"1<
_...
'
lD'
0'
....
.s<
:
'
...J
>-
,-
sc
'"
c-
"
l' OC
<,
)'\ ,/:sf
f-J'
, J)"
or
--.:U
II
,
200 1-1/
11
1'1\'
~ V\
><
E
,-.)
u'

syste~ for bilinear-triangular pulse (C1 = 0.681. C2 = 300.}
10
::E
<!
::E
cO
::E
i=
fIME or YIELD TO lOAD DURA fION, L ~/T

_
.~~ ~ ~
500 r-r-r-r-r-r-t-r-e-ecr-
... ~
'0 t'fr-J
J C!'01
.'
If'
l.JoI.
Y" t"
...........
..J\YI~ I\J 1i.:'I/\

r, \/'~
'd'~ \X
I/W'...I
.. I
..... am:...
300 1~~=J,'l.-=-:I!-\,-f1'1:l
\ N
'Xmt1 \N/V\
200 1+:~$~UW~W4~\-Ai>rA).J~~~
,)(
100
70
....,
~ ~.~
[)
I)
r*
<,
z)(
.~-~
r;.
~~~~~~~~
11\....... 11\..............
'
\)<
\~1I
o-J
W
>-
ntm~
o
l--
A'" ,,,,,,,n,v
o
l--
...x
~
00 0
VI ..... 1I4
00
0
000l
0 VI
00
NN
....,0
r-r:tt:tlht:J;m;oo ~
\'\'> " ,~Qdf;
M
1-1-
:;r:~~~lltm
'"
'I' >
~
'
"-
'
~~
B'k Ii
Q-
E
J
t> .~
1\
&.1
Q.
5.3
4.6
<>:
w
...
-J
l--
...
:::f
P
Z
::>
L-
l--
i=
u
W
L-
'G
I--
rt
r-
UYkl~
~
p/r
"\..
:ll.
0.5~1'!111/
I
.002.003 .005
.01
!
II
.02
IIII1III
.03
.05 .07.1
'I
111/1111
. 2 . 3 . 5 '.7
'I
2
1111/111
3.
5
7 10
lOAD DURA TiON TO rUNDAMENTAl PERIOD, TIT N
Fi gure 3-180
:::f
::>
~
><
...
:::f
L-
W
~
;::
0.71~
.001
Z
l--
<,
\\
~/
:2C
::>
-J
L-
-O'l ~
-J
C.
W
-J
.... """f",N1V N
1II"'-J oU",o
.'
!b;
'",
co
'"
O'l
MIWIlI'
i=
~~?~?????oo

nME or YIELD TO LO"O OUR" nON, t[/T

o0
,., ,.,
p
...
<:>
'"...
'0
a'
.~
1<\\
..
-c
<,
-VI
-_ ...
"
>(
co
t...NJA~\N
0
0000
. .0 ..
. 0
...
~u..Vl.NN--
V\ ' " 0
VI
(J\
VI
o'
00
'"
co '"
~
o 0 '" o 0
Z
/-
<,
... ,.. ,... J'X ..4"'-:L.....=
"N)!'i
, ,j l'i.XI J}I'>l;\d
F.
rt'lII:H-A"l....,'I-Jl(-'H'
'. ,
.... ....
.'f'
N '" :... :.... :....
'"
'"
....E
.__ .__ ... _.
NA l>i1 ' Ilt--
'"w
Q.
z
0
/-
-'
cw
a
.~
w
,
-'
w
w
'"
'"
>/-
vi
i=
u
w
-'
cw
a
iL-\:
7
5.3
4.6
/ I:l\ / IV I/'
J: S
>(
<t
::f
2
>F~~
~1.J....+411l
II
1I.A-1r1 II V1
LI-11"" I A. V.oI1I
I'''''''
---
.002,005 .005
,01
III I
,03
.05,07
,1
\/\ 1\
.2:3
,5
,7.
LO"O OUR" nON TO rUNO"MENT "L PERIOD, TIT N

,
Figure 3-181

system for bilinear,triangular pulse (C1 = 0.619. C2 = 300.)
j::'
<'J
~.O
u,
'"
',02
0.7~
.00 I
c-
<'5
,-/10
0,5
-c,
~
":> "
/-
'0
'~
~\
J'
:1:
":>
::f
~O
~-
',(~
-'
<t
/-
10
1,6
a.
1.3
I. I
0.93
0.81
0,70
0,61
":>
0,53
t:
If
;(
<t.
cO
w
If
TIME or YIELD TO LOAD DURA TlON, L ciT

v'
500
..
..-J~
'0
,.~OJ
....
_.~.~UlJJ '\,(J
:.....:..:.....Vl :-"00
0
(flU',,"Il.""NN-
~o~(fl~~ ....
..
-- -
000000
U' ..... OUl
lH
.. c....OcNN:...:00'1
~ 00 00
-OCldCfltJI'"
0(,1100
000
Vo"''''
0 .. 0
t:b
\X Y\I V\I
,':>
/
w
l-\:~~i--"'t;!::rv1\00
>(
<,
>(
z
0
t:
70
~~
"q.'>
\I
'"
"
0
f-
<,
l!l.l
."
1.\
6.2
'"
0.-
5.3
--'
-c
f-
50
--'
I.
W
~,'>
<e
w
:::f
a
a
30
t: o
.0
20
J:S
:>
'w
--'
>-
L.-
.1. 0
~o
~'.J
2.0
i=
u
1. 0
1.3
1.1
0.93
0.81
0.70
0.6\
:>
0.53
i=
fZ
,uw
--'
L.W
::f
:>
::f
><
::f
-r
f':1-J
"'~
0.7
0.5
.00 I
.002.003 .005
.01
.02 .. 03
.05 .07.\
.2.3.5.7
LOAD DURA TlON

TO rUNDAMENT
AL PERIOD, TIT N
. , f
Fi gure 3-182
Maximum.response of elasto-plastic. one-degree-of-freedom

system for bilinear-triangular pulse .(CI = 0.590. C2 = 300.)
\0
f-
w
-'
"w
:::f
:::f
><
:::f
"-
:::f
e
TIME
v"
vi.
.....
....
,.;
6'" ...
~
...
0
tJ
or
YIELD TO LO~O DUR~ TlON,
e
tdT
0000
. 0
..0 0 0.
c:P~IJ'~~~~~:"",,:,,,,,!=' .en ..
""v.ViNN .... -..
~
N
.................
C,.ooI0b o V1
..... 0UlOOll.o<
(t\
.....
~ooooo
-oaOlUl'" ....
0 ... 0
Ul
------------,.-...",TI<, -ecr-rsr-r-cr-r-r-p-r-s-w-'
.r
2
f--
<,
--~=-M
.. ::l-v"dl\\6\lL
1'it\;KT'tH~\N
,,,
.~.
......'"
,.
Q.
Cl
...J
-~.
>'0
,z
o
>-
Ll
W
5.J
-;
...J
-
Cl
'SJITFJ IV &111 OJD<Jlj)YI Ili'9RbP
1>1 ......
....E
~'6
-c
C
Z
::>
"-
of-Z
o
;:::
o
...J
. ...J
"w
64/1/
F:-..
u,
W
Cl
"
>"<
::>

I. 3
::>
='11.
,r
TIT N

system for bilinear-triangular pulse (eJ = 0.562, [2 = 300.)
.,
~
~
I.'
'x
0.93
0:8 I'
0.70
0.61
'i
}.53
'1
1.6
~
"0
i:
TIME OF YIELD TO LOAD DURATION, ttiT

v'
v'
,.,
'"
,.,
,.,o. -::.
....
...
",,-
~~~
tr' '!'
r:P
l.JO'->G""""N
....
-..l
....:..:....e
0
0
_0
. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0
0
0
UI.
CD
O'l
V.
N N
U'I " 0 " " 0
- CJ\ UI
01
0
en
U'l
VI
0
.. .....
O' 0
\
.
"f-\-tf'IH~H'r"1f\1--7\h
Z
0-
....)
w
X
\\J\W t-,
<,
E
x
Cl
0::
c,
;=
u
...J
L..
W
Q
..,'",
..,
~
I~~ t>
...J
>-
a
0z
I.<::
...J
zw
,u~:~
0-
::::f
~.
"
r-,
VII~
10~1)/'
Cl.
U
W
...J
L..
W
I:
:::f
=>
:::f.
sc
-c
:::f
I
r-
~'J
.002.003 .005
.01
\1 \
.02
.03
W
...J
L..
.O~
.07.1
.2.J.~.7
16
Cl
!.J
I. \
=>
0.93
0.81
0.70
0.6\
0.53
LOAD DURATION TO FUNDAMENTAL PERIOD. TIT N
Figure 3-184
a
o
;::
::::f
0.7r~
.001
=>
a
Iz
.\
0.5'~
L-
<'6
i>
\'
'Z
.J. s
<.0
1\
0.
'0
.J. o
0-

system for bilinear-triangUlar pulse (Cl =0.536. C2 = 300.)
\0
:::f
::::f
L..
w
::::f
;::
.,
molc'or YICLDTO LOAD DURATION. telT

v'
v'
rP'
...
~.~
0
~.'O
,..,
";,'"
n,
><
:1.
X,
\l
..J
,,-.
W
30
20
t:f-......,-jA--H\~IA-l'<\HI'd\
j""lf-jt-l*--1".II+-W'l\-'i~
'0
....
o
\I'
,I
.~.
.\0
1/
. ,;1
r-...
~
1')1
.....
V.12b< :--.. .1)
1/
b<
LH
0
NN
..
\;
\\
~.~
82
7.1
62
1/
rv
1/
;-
I?
:", I- V
kI-
S. .s-
P. I/l7f: "1': ~
.f.7
IJ
1/
0:0
0.00
1~lltv
iT I'i/ .
'lIE V.
(JI'.
....
-1-1 ?
01'1--'
P.o:
I...
t- if
.,.
'6'
if '71
. 1/ .t'-'1'-
~P ~
:'--~l1' ..,11
,....
f?
r-
r-...
t:
W
..J
._-
><
:f
!\
I\, \
1\.
.002.00.5 .005
.01
.02 .03
.05 .07.1
.2.3.5.7
;;=
1.3
1.1
0.93
0.81
0.70
0:61
0.53
.p /(1 ';"'Q.
LOAD DURAnON TO rUNDAMCNTAL PCRIOD, TIT N
Fi gure 3-185
Maximum response. of elasto-plastic. one-degree-of-freedom

,<'6
<..s-
0.7~~
0.5.~
.001
:f
0
....
.,~
=>
u,
1.7
1.5
..J
....z
of'
:f
exw
2.0
._-~~- -,~-
Cl
...'0
:f
....E
s
oJ.()
"-
z
....
<,
"-
IX I'X
VIANI'\>
(ft
11
K)
'.'
00
en
VI LA1'J
M'\KI'i.11 ~I
.~
0'00
I\V..:tt
....
u.
~?'~~~'?O
..,.C,.NNN ........ ' .... 00

O. VI ..... O.Ul.O m,(,H. 9 0
0\
~\XiIX1~1<l>
..._. ....__ ... _N<DrJ/h
.
.~
".
-".
0'00
I\.
-'0
..J
W.
"'-I
_ _ ~?
~;iH
.~
~ttt\l'~iiI~r
.E
Cl
ltt,;..N . "
N-
><
,.
....
.....,.,
....
toJ :.<Jl-
.",
W9l2~M~:iJ~~
.- ''''''
"1(1 N V\IIA
I/~ I lei
300
CJl-U'-~ .. ,,"
10
'Z
u
w
..J
"w
0
:f
=>
:f
;;:
:f
"0
w
:f
t:
...
,.
.,
tt;T'
TIME or YIELD TOLOADDURA TlON,

'..r
.v" ,dJ
..-J
...
..-
~
~
,0 ,~''''-;'
.
c:P
(J\
o. ~
'dl
""
t.,.
'\-.LI \Ii.. \ XII \
tN!\~I)( tvlM I)
w
X
c:
u
W
...J
u,
" ~\J ~~
f5f
100 . _. "
:;~
>:
,-cS
z
a
~ 0. ~
o 0
~II\,
~ ~
. . VI.
I,JI ......
~ ~ ~!='
lIl. N
OUI
~'
::f
...x
::f
0'00 .
00
OUI
LH N.N
'.:0
t(
I;<L
.IT
M
tRJ) 17
17
'1:i
1--
~.L
'"
,VIl7~
vtr1tlm
":II""'-"
..-y:..-r'"A
1T"'l'
::.l-
"tf
J\'::!lJ::rn: J" :JI

..l lII.
::f
0
UI
,I
i'\
::>
-'DIJ G\
Jt1
b.
...J
u,
?o
N
o~cn VI
17
i~
9
w
;=
u
1m
l.A
o.
~
~.
...'",
....
\ I-XfW"fl
<,
0'0
NN-
~'~' ~ ~
..
t.U
"
J\. \
"11"
IT
I'>: ~
"1''''
,.&'
1/
I'"
1/"
17m::
/;/:f-.
\
t-
s...c~.
",\1/
17 t-,V tS1~
U\
II
=\. ::l
'\
~ ~,
p/r
-r
-r
07~
O.5"~
. 001
.002.003 .005
0\
.02
.03
,05.07.\
.2' .3
' .5 ',7
,.
LOAD DURA TlON TO'rUNDAMENTAl PERIOD, 111 N
Pigure 3-186

10
..
TIME or YIELD TO IcOAD DURA TlON, tdT
~ ~~
-;.
..-cPCJ'lIJl~V<N
....
t-J0t-J""IJ4~"~
...... ~
i..N
_~O~~??5>000aooo 0 0 0
ClD
0
"'l.oIlHNN-Ul ....... OU'!OOl~
Q'l
000'l
Ul'"
00
00Ul
'"
.0
\;
G
X
\\\P'\~\K
<,
>(
9. 5
It-
tt
(\,.1 JfItJII
7"
1/
V1"v
6.<
s,,j
~,
W
..J
u,
W
a
a
'"
'"
..J
20
"
l~~~{-}~M(L~Q
~R<o
1..J
u,
W
..-- ,-.
::f
Iv;
'"
'0
.t. o
~m
<'6
<.,]
<.0
t.7
1.5
1.3
1.1
0.93
0.81
0.70
0.61
5
3
>(
::f
0
<>:
1\
~~~
1'..--1--'
0.53
0.7
0.5
.001
.002.003 .005
.0.
.02
.03
.05.07.1
.2.3
..5
~7
LOAD DURATION TO rUNDAMENTAL PERIOD, TfT Il
Fi gure 3-187
.J
'"
'6'
J. s
:>'
::>
f-'
1/
0
.....,.-.
U
,.j
....E
w
,-
,~
<,
a,
'",
.,
I-
8.2
- ~-/I\:l*KJ'P'ff-~~
\\
Maximum response of elasto-plastic. one-degree-d-freedom

system for bilinear-triangular pulse (C1 = 0.464. C2 = 300,)
10
::f
.~
::>
"0
f-
t:
u
w
.J
"w
::f
::>
::f.
><
'"
::f
"0
w
::f
~
tdT
TIME or YIELO TO LOAD DURA TlON,

v'
v'
,.,
'"
,.,
~.,;,.,.
~
~
11'
!"'~~~-:-:-:"'".
... \.JOt-JCfllJO.1'J' .. ..,J-...,VtO~
?~??~OO
I.I\
en "l.otf.HNN--
..... O\llOO"U4
00,0
00
o~~~~ '"
o
I
t
00
N N
~ 0
Vl4U1 8.2
7.,
Z
0-
<,
...,E
a
~<
z
o
.J
u,
C1
'"
v-tt--IVtIl~
I:
':.~JhIlf\
'"
',
1/1 I I)qJI
~
l~~~~~~~~~
/ ......
.U
~VIIV
.J
~-
w
>-
o
0-
l>'
v.
~{j
.J
'J-
0z
::f
C1
.=>
I"
L.-
o0~7
.0
i=
L.-
<,
... ., .~.. w._1"'-
u,
W
C1
J/
::f
""rl.r--....V'f V
=>
::f
::f
.J
W
..J
'"w
Q..
70
i=
""
-"+'I:\::::lI=:i::t:ili:~~H"f\:;~
~l\l\
I'
I.t
~~
=>
::f
><
L.-
w
::f
i=
.002.003 .005
.01
.02 .03
.05.07.1
.2.3.5.7
Fi gure 3-188
235
TIT N

system for bilinear-tri~ar pulse (C1 = 0.422. C2 = 300.)
\0
..
TIME or YIELD TO LOAO DURA TlON.
"
~~...
,..,o
....
riJ '" U'

;'
~~O~(Jl""
. '" ....
t[/T
N _? ~ != ~ ~ ? ~ ~ ~ ..? 0 e o
co O'l ..... IN" l.N N N - CD en V'
N '.. :...... .- :.... i". 0, 0
0 Cft ...... oc.nocnOlOOlft
o
000
..
VI.
..
N.
"
9.5
82
200
7.,
><
><
0
6'"
100
.s
...
'J
50
'6'
-J
1_
....'"
-:0
0
0
J: s
-J
>0
>Z
'"
-J
u,
J: o
<.(;
<..1
'I:
20
; /\,r
<,
1.7
1.5
1.3
1.1
0.93
0.81
0.70
0.61
0.53
i-
::;:
:c>
:>'
~
><.
<i
::;:
l;::::
~ ~'1d1-J
--- ---~
1'-
.002.003 .005
.01
.02
.03
~~~-\V
_.
.2.3.5.7
LOAD DURA TlON TO rUND'AMENTAL PERIOD.
Figure 3-189
~,
~ p /rl ,;","'ll.
.~
.05.07.1
'"
W
0-
t:
u
....E
0
"<,
f--
<,
TIT N
Maximum response of eldsto-plastic. one-degree-of-freedom

\0
..J
-
w
::1:

"0
f--
Z
0
;=
u
w
..J
"-
w
0
::1:
::>
::1:
)(.
<i
::
"0
w
:f
;=

~
o
~ ,-.ld'~
500~
..... ,.
....
tP
O'l
tdT
If" ~ _~ !"" ':-':'" :"" :"" ~ ~ ? ? ? ? ?

,lit
0
0
N :..
OOCJl. ...... OlJ'loO'lVt
Vt Vt N
---~W1m~~~
0
VI
..
......
\ i1~:1_
-~...Ltt---1\'k1'\HH-lXc\-+--*~
300 1=lf'1
200
-~;;\
"
)f
n,
....
QCI
(fl
~
n
on _ ,
,_
0 0
-o '" '"
0
'"
00
'"
o
0- 0
'"
..
~ ~
Z
f--
\2JM
~
VI
1/
<,
....E
~--M
In
.0
;=
u
W
"
..J
L..
--
i'--
\)(LI~
z
..
."
6'
'J
::F
tzItm-tVUV
>-
17IJ..l-.-7, V,
- ~ Y IMIM IJ'-
f--
...
7
5
::F
::>
::F
X
<!
::F
~~~
",,_ ... -- ' .....
"
'2:
rl
::>
Jio'X h(Jl'.
.....,
L..
f--
2:
,...... ~ ,.,:,/.-. IV:.
;=
L..
W
..J
<!
f--
-'
-'
n,
<!
;=
u
cc
w
1111'\0,'
..,.,.'",
'"
a
o
.19"
...-
::
i>
3~
2
..J
L..
::F
-h
rwM
0' .?\J;~~.",><_,
:;./A,y~:;-,...].->oc....
ffi
I I
.002.003
.005
.01
.02
.03
.05 .07.1
....o
w
::
s:
----
.'
.2.3.5.7
LOAD DURA TlON TO FUNDAMENTAL PERIOD, T/T N
Figure 3-190
<!
::
\f.\
~"
0.7~
0.5-,
.00'
::>

system for bt l inear-t.r tenqul ar pulse (C1 = 0.365. C2 = 300.)
10
e
td T
~ ~
500
,.,
20
~
<,
E:
x
2:
70
;::
u
50
--J
u.
W
,
'"
N
n
n
30
20
--J
>::
'"
>-
2:
10
l)
W
;::
--J
k
W
OJ
~
:1
'"
'"
,II;
1\IX'1)\
e'
;.~
cst l&r.l)(W"
.,
"
" ~ ,,~
'-\~ M
l7t1t r Ie -y.
"'hi\}"
""
"o~"I~
"
,
-1..'
'-'
;h
'"
~ W'
,)
J VI
"
~~~???O?oo
.... ""NN:-:-~
.
N... :....:.~""'o~~
'"
- ' , ''\<l'"'. -,
-.L
p\II'.
.
l/~
~~
r-,
II
~,,"
r-,
',(
"
I~,,I,'~J' Ilt
~ ~'/
rJ,
'
'"
~'
,.c.
'.'
,15"
'I{
'- k:~./
'.
.
>i
'"
b< K
,
V
0.5
.001
:z
8.<
'-C-11-1
:1
rl
./
.
IS'
',",
...t'J:
~.6'
0: 0
>",V:"
vob'"
"
/P
"
'"
J:,s
..t. o
v : :Jt't " " ',L' ; '"

"
~.
L-
1/
,/
"
J.
_,
"',,<00
07
9.5
-r,,".
'
"
......
'
7,
.. 0
'"
0
<'8
<.J
.<.0
1.7
1.5
1.3
1.1
0.93
r-,
"
"
',,",-\-).1/\[/
>'0/.""
1"//
~ Vci
."
. [\
0 00
'/"
-I'
V "
V ,,'- /
'"
VI~
-z
N
''"
b,
1'." 1/r-, f-.... hI
II
'"
o
.lAl",iNN---goCJ')
U\....aOUl 0
en V4 0 0 til
T.I ./'
.... ' ' - . /
rJ>
-0 i-> '"
'"vN
VI I./\1
:---.
I.
100
,f \ ) Yln~(...
~ f-...,L.I\
(\ 'Q.. V\
300
.....
"
.002.003 .005
r\.
rx"'\I'X."
T
.
.
'\
v"/
,,~
r:>-a- ~
0.81
0.70
0.61
0.53
IJ...
.~,
'I' ' b.
><,,\l)
'
'
......,
.01
.02
.03
.05.07.1
.2.3
LOAD DURA TlON TO rUNDAMENT AL PERIOD,
Figure 3-191
~v
., ,/
.5'.7'1
TIT N

system fOr bilinear-triangular pulse (C1 = 0.348. C2 = 300.)
10
l-
"-
....E
a
'"
W
II.
--J
l-
W
~
:>
<..
0
l-
Z
0
;::
u
w
oJ
u,
::s
:>
~
.~
::s
".0
w
~
;::
rH.iE or YIELD TO LUAU DURA TlON, trlT

v'
v'
soo
<,
"
..... -f.
"
IV \
~ 1/
V \
0000000000"
.
'
...
~NN---
.
. . . . -_ .
.- 0
000000
.t-J G
.CJ'I ' V.
.
.
.
.
:...a'
ell
O'l
... lH t....N N
co 0'\ t.n ... UI N N
...,. N
........ lH 0 O. 0
U' ...... 0 U\ 0
a, Ui 0 0 UI 0 0
0
... 0
c:P
,.,... .,l-J ....0
:7 -\
X \: Atf
200 I"
I
X
~ -\
~A .Y \: \;; ~j
E 100
"
<
r-,
I\.
/
~
1\
V
"
1'\
"
/ "/
I'.
f.. /
''7- I;>(
rz- -IJ V
,./, V 11. .4
I,
l.-
:t-v ~ ~'-
j)'
:--
I'v
I'- /
IJ
~v: y 1-:: l'
0
>-
s 0 t-,..lo;kN--A1~b'-'l-).'M
IX
IihAL"'I 'i:.:.<:l ex.: II i ; }t-- A" . )
...J
c,
...,,
I'.>
0
'"
a...J
W
30
-:::-rI-V't-'\"-,!;t-\--14 \-J
L
'Jt,
.'1
~ IVlKll A"'ft
1<:~~
10
..J
l..
W
..-
..--0'
_ . . . _A
~'-i1'-~---Ilt~k\-I,.~, IA~M\Ml-,+::iJ!"tH- IL
'l"::tfl I LV H ~
0
1-
>=
. ')K \7 i'..
20
)--
Pr
IV'
<L
:.L
stz~~~
P'
~
-'
l-'~
iLl
'AKI
N IN!
1-
'" . .
v:.-:
II p .
J.
7/
l;'
",~('..;V
N'
' / ...,
i"1.Ll
"'ll
7 /
~ I\. I'
z-
Y1
rn:r
.~
[/
:>:
:>
.
:>:
:>:
0.7
o.~
.00 I
.~
~-=
.002 .003
.oos
.01
.02
.03
.05.07..
P/ r I ';'n.
.2.3.5.7
Figure 3-192
Maximum response of elasto-plastic, one-degrfe-of-freedom

.0
e
~
.. -r-:
. -.l
TIME or ~IELD TO LOAD DURATION, lclT
~ ~""
",
:...l
t-J
""
CJ'
t1'.
000000000
. , . '. . . .
fo.
~NN-0
0
U'
0 U'I 0
cn Uo
"",Nto-J-:.a:--"
'
DO en
..
-.I
-.I
lH
~--------
0'
,
00
,
-0
co '"
0
'"
o 0000 (:,
U'I.V1NNN
o 0 ~ 01 -'_0
-----
~,f\ -~ " ~
\f\
l/lV-ll4m ~\I/
9,S
Z
f-
'11.01\.
I)<,
[')<
Yk
:;~;';;~!I~~\)
II --------- --
<,
....E
.. _...
1.lVI1~
'"
o,
..J
I' /
f-
.111\
-'
L.-
~""-I'
II
<t
~\N/i\'
_.. _
f-
7w
::f.
<t-.
..,
..,
o
....
'"
o
o
-'
w
IlL
:::J
L.-
....o
f-
t:
,~Pftt/~
"Z
i=
u
jf\,
..J
L.-
...J
L.W
Of
:::J
:f
ri
;<'
4:
Of
Of
:::J
::
\-
i.I'\. \ " \. J-. -,
0.7
J?
0.5
.001
p [c
~
.002.003 .005
.01
.02
.03
Of
I 'fll..,
i=
~
,OS .07.1
,2.
,5
.5.7
LOAD DURATlON TO rUNDAM~NTAL PERIOD, TIT N
Fjqure 3-193
Of
L.-
Maximum response of elasto-plastlc. one-de9r~e-of-freedom

system .for:bi.11near~trian9ularpulse ((;1 =.0.287. C2= 300.)
\0
TIME or YIELq TO LOAO D~RA TION, telT

,.>
',.>
d'
500
r:P
tJI
(7\.
~~",~-of..,l'O'~
o
.
'J\I/'l A ~
'\J'-....~
Vt
,N _
"_
N..:~:.~.~oo,m
o 0
.v.r. . . .
til ...... 0
NN
U\
....
C7l
lot
?ooooo
-OOO'lV'.v.r.
,0 0 lJ'I V' lJ\ 0'
0
lit
..
I\J..II "lJ11',
fi \tI
?O??~O?
9 .5
6~
w
><
f:
><
;::
u
w
100. /\
70
50
...
..,,
..,'"
-'
w
~
',><- '..A
30
-- -
::::J-
IV I'l-
I~ '\ I i ~ i<\
/
u.
V\IJI
-'
a
a
.:m~rw)K
.~ [\Ill( tv-~~vI
<,
I"
t - } ) I i"'-V
1\
IX
..
r-. . r1rni
~ l/ IJ
Y"\)1'-"V
Vf'.
V '"
20 ,1""'V-hf-li7'
IS'
'r
~I
i'Vl~~:HEWM~RlM
1'\.11
nq
~'"
10M,!
"IN'
ill Il'Il-Irll /I V l-VT L%
f-
1.L
Z
0
t:
u
w
-'
:>
~
><
..:
~
:". 'I. \.l.. \

0.7
J.
.../
05 ,!~.d2
.001
,002.003 .01l5
.01
.02
.03
,05 ,07
.1.
.2.3
Figure 3-194
Maximumrespons~
.5
,7
3.
TIT N
of elasto-plastic. one-degree-of-freedom
system for bilinear-triangular pulse (Cl 0.274. C2 300.)
\0
..:
...
:>
0
.f. o
I-
<'6'
<.,]
0.53
p / r ';ll..
a
'z
1. .1
1. .1
1.1
0.93
0.81
0.70
0.61
-'
..:
f-
0: 0
1.7
~.
'"c,w
t:J
<0
":6'
J: s
....E
Q
NUdl7
_. - -
_ ... --- -
,1%'... ,,
I/"~)
17~1Y1V ~~n
~~
\N
V\7~ nI) I 'I)<
....
z
f-
<,
z
;::
u
w
..I
u,
:>
,~
;;:
-c
~
"0
w
~
i:
TIME or YIELD TO 'LOAD DURA TlON, t[/T
t..I
~ t..I~ t..I~
,.
...
,.
t-J
"..
0
'f:!J
t..J
'!'. ' ~
IS'
VI.
lJoI.
..
-a
po.)
:...
~ r: ~?
? ?? ?? ?
00 (fl
-...I Lot 0
l.JoI,
..... N
N
o 0
...." QUI 0
50Q<C>
I",-/' "/ .
';_\.>.0",,"
'1',/_\
(\ y
'/\
I\ V
~';'
200 :i
-, D.. 1"-r>:1'i.... (I
/, ITI\-~'
:\\ ~
500
><
<,
E
>< 100
70
50
-'
CI
'"
'"
""
-'
>-
30
20
0-
O'
10
w
"
-'
CI
::f
::>
::f
><
'"
::f
I"
IJ
I'
L'l1"N
IY---IX'l I
"-\~
1"
. ~~ r-,
1\
;!;;"
r1'aLl-X:, [',
It>--.:i\..J
1/
vt
Dv . r;
1/
\L ~
.r-
1/
I~
'.
lI'
,
1/
'"Y--
I""
.00 I
IJ
e<
I-'
J..L
F-'
_\
."
,.'"
J
~~~-.lrHl'tH1t'ftj
III 17 I
I''J'
\)C
.~
1 "-
'1/ 17
H:
Id::"'
,~
./
,;,- po
L'
1...""
":>~I"<
I-'
,___
~
LA'"
I'
~_ \'"
r.0 I
.02.03
.05.07
.\
.2
.7
LOAD DURA TlON TO rUNDAMENTAL PERIOD, T/T '"
Figure 3-IQS
Maximum response of e l as to-p l a s t ic., one-degree-of-freedom

\0
1Z
o
Z
s:
u
w
..J
I.J
::>
1.1
0.53
<0
1.7
1.5
0.70
'.
-c
0-
0.93
...
.3
-'
0-
.1
o.a 1
L..
e: I-":
L.
l:::::..
0-
::>
"-
. 0.61
,~p/( . _
es
J: s
<6
I ':: '.n..
..:
"'-'"
~\
'6'
<.J
l:"
X' K\
\k'
W ~K
\~~
~\ . ~ i:">.
~~~
c-:::
.002003 .005
A:
e-"v;Y1!l
Ll.
J(
.. e<.
~ l'l~n
""
':0
I'
L > ' ''':
v: 17,-z.
/'
-;
.....
<,
I"-''".
' j
~ ~ r-- /Y~'" r-
V': t-
~M.J:l~" ~.r ,-<;

'-'l< r V.>It:'" "0 <:> -'", . _to
I.....
L'L L.
c. V L
l--'L J-::. r
9S
..l
"1<
I~~~
~
F(')
v /
-r
ilC:>. hL
H~~r\.0..V\
..
CI
"0 "0 o
/'
1~
I.LI.
L\
Xl'D='
0.5
,oX 1-.IIli
... . .V\X
07
:~"
1/
')j
1/
0000
-OOCToU""'UovtNN
OUlUlUlOOO.,.O
:L"
lJo4
k'1",1
-t:.J
V Iii
V
!,kt::/'"
(/ r- 111/
,~
0
-
-,
". .
lLJ. ID
r--."
-\
,U
'-\.
..Y
CI
"",
WI \
(fl
1 - . . . . , . '"
,,1-\>
"w
-';( .If'. .xr\,~ \Y\ A' " "

~\
~
1\
--r-'N
1-
v:
Ii
X'
I~, f'l'
.
"l
\f-. liLt'- 1\\ vlL
'
0
-
u,
CI
::f
::f
::f
u,
w
::f
;=
::0
TIME or VIELD TO LOAD DURA TlON, tdT

~
..D
t..l
..
t..l
0
r:P
.
t..l
~,.""...
...
(J'
lJI'
....
V4
'
(J>
.....
N -
'.'
....
....,J
0'000
00
"
VI ...... 0
(f\
l.H
~_.
.
OOD'
0
.
.
. .
..
0 0
0
.. " " ' L H N N - - - c o m l J l
VI
U'
..
0 0 0
.... ..,. .....
OU' 0
0
0
N!'J
..
1J
1 1 Y / 1 . - 1 .....
9 S
'Z
n. n''lI AJ
""
"'"
.Y
,."
. - tlflt\T.I~U'
\\ J \I 111"'1 M R){J
><
<,
....
..
.....
......-
"'" .lIIMI
><
z
a
. In..
j..: :
II:...
XNJi .,,"w"
I~"
X\l~
I -:RI c
<9"
17
.~
VII --'-"--11
111~
--'
."
(AI ...1:11.....,1"""'- '.......,/1 \
llyn
.K 111 LKIIL/
~-~~.~~--
. . . . _ . _ . ~ ~ ~.
.-
."
.s
c+ti-l-M-tl.-
.-.J
0:.-
l~
"",
'"
'"
~
0
...J
'-'-""0~
>0
""-I
AI
'V'
rv" .........
I-
A''T'L.. f
I I
.., I
1..-.
I"'~
~x-
c:
w
::f
<..]
;0
1.7
1.5
u,
. I. J
1.1
0.93
O.B I
0.70
0.61
::J
::f
><'
..s:
::f
"
.00 I
0.53
p/rl';Q..
::.-1........t>
o5
.002.003
.005
.01
.02
.03
.05 .07.1
.2.3.5.7
3.
LOAD DURA TlON TO rUNDAMENTAL PERIOD, TIT N
Figure 3-196
.. Max,imUlIi response of elasto-plastic, one-degree-of-freedom

..:
I-
Z.
w
~
..:
::J
.Ii"
...J
Q.
of
---
cr
<'IS
'j...
0: 0
.1. 0
JV\l)<
....E
...J
'of
:::IZ'"
I-
<,
10
:z
l..
a
Iz
a
t:
u
w
...J
l..
Q'
~
::J
~
x
..:
~
l..
w
~
t:
tdT
TIME or YIELO TO LOAD DURA TlON,

~
t-ll'
'0
! ...
....
cP
'r-
f!" '!'
IJ4
(f>
N
!"' ~ ~." .
N
.... -1_-.1
. .
'""'
?~O?~!=,?O!>OOO
0000
00 'G'l
.... CA
CllI (J'l
I)\
l/I-...&QUI
Olll
OOlllO
l;l
O"l tl'i
..
::
~~~~~Mmg~~A
')4_
~n
~.
_.
rA1
...,....,..
...
..
0
N
0
,9.
s
2
><,
....E
~"i\-...'
~. I~~ ~I ~ ~
............
'\X".
~''''$,
4\-,I~H\,)H
~..:
II'
-'
u,
'",
'"
'"
'"
o
-'
>-
>-
z
o
'i1;~
lJ\"lk1 pt.
:~
.. _..
s'
.oJ"
~.6'
j...,
i=
u
w
-'
UoIrI .k" \A
r..
W
.x A \
~I
/I '1.<\
1.V'--"
.. t+\~~=t-t::f\f.&:-~~=-r.t=::!J;I?\
:>C.
'":>C
><
.~.
4:
llU+T""
_~I\'"
o5
.00 I
7r4
p irl
Tn.,
~~/yYI'
V'"""'
A"".A"/ ., .
.....-='J -j:;;
..,002.003 ,005
,01
.02
.03
.05.07
,I'
,2
,3
,5.7
LOAD DURA nON TO rUN DAM ENTAL PERIOD, T/TN"
Fi gure 3-197

,7 . \0
TIME or YIELD TO LOAD DURA TlON, (ciT
"".""
"' ..
500
~ ~ .~ 1".) '0 ~r.J ~O"'v<

"!'
~VlNN7-':"'~O
N
... -..I_ ...... l;lOCOO1
o 0
0000000
.. v.
VlN-N
fJI ...... O U l 0
6
:.'"
0 0
O'll;l
LfI. . . . . . . . . .
000",-'00
(fl
U" lJI (Xl
lJ\ 0
SOD
200
..
, ...
."
dO
r-
-'
xc
<,
><
z
0
A I
100
W
..J
~<!I
70
'/
I it
A=:J::j::;=
0 I
:u f A;t
U7nt1:;;t\,) ::P" \ I. J,
~~~
~rru \( \I KI ,
F-
,1M I\i' '{)<.!

'"It,;I1 \J T\ ~ V\\V ~
f{i,-n-no'j\"a--1~iI a:: ,
50
,..
'",
'"
'"
'"
30
wo
20
III I
."
6'
.,
'6'
:'0
J
.~.~
LA' II Ll!~ ltt-m" 1\ 1A1. X I Ak>~'
10
f=
~.(;
~. .J
, 1/l1""}<l..L k:1I
-'
<0
IVlII 1LHfVL--
1.7
1.5
I.J
L-
'"
::>
'"
V " \ I I_ _
'"
_ .-
I I ~
><
~s..:31\l \1 \
,\~
o5
.00 I
.f. o
,;:~
pl(1
....E
a
0
'"
W
11.
..J
<{
f-.
Z
::E
.<{
~~FftpTt-,t-Ibf-,irf:*f'1C7~'iEi~frlF1'IF:II~'l-.d,f-;d"i*,'ll
,u
.,,~_,
\*1'11
X.III/.VIIA~~"'--VI
0
0
.,
ll, 1\',,"\
.s',J-
~-7IJ,f-H"-d+-NI\-j'W+lNf\-?'oI
.ssw
:f-\I7
Cl
1:1
2
f-
<,
~1l.
1.1
0.93
0.81
0.70
0.61
0.53
<Z
::>
L-
0
fZ
'0
;=
....w
..J
::E
::>
::E
;(
<{
::E
....
0
w
::E
;=
~'
E
.. 002.00300~
.01
.02.03
.05,07
,1
.. 2.3
.5' ':7
2'
5 . 7 : 10
LOAD DURATION TO rUN?AMENTAL PERIOD, TIT N
Figure 3-198

e,
TlM OF YILD TO LOAD DURATION, telT

,-.l
,-.l
.,
..
t..J
~~
cJj
.....
0"
0"
V'
.' ..
"vt~N---'
..
" ':....i
-a VI. 0
V'\.V\'lX \VWlN
.X
\/I)(~.
'
~I-
.Z
,0
70
-.
1X\~
en.
.VoINN
Olt 0 ..... (D",
I'--
ow (,,,
000
t
Cf\ LI' .....
..,.
l/I U' -.1-
U' 0
... 0...0
'0
Ul
,t\-It1
A1
m Q~
l---tY\
17'
----~
No
\~
i'A
J1
00000
0 00000
..
-
aa CJ)'"
-'
,.,
If'.
IX
J'
- -----'
'J"
o
W
wtr:~
'"
....
'"
yo
I ..
...J
L..
a
a
. If'
...
~o
rrk'~
...J
w
>-
o
....
J'
-z
f'-
17
o
o
....
J: s
J: o
11
~'G
~'J
w
-'
u.
~.o
A '\( \ ,".17'-.
1.7
1.5
I.J
I. I
0.93
0.81
0.70
0.61
:>:
::J
:l'
X
1\\
~,.
.<
:>:
L
O.7'T~
O.5/~~
.001
.002.00.1 .005
~'\I\
,~
0.53
~
.01
.02 ,.0.1 ,.05.07.1
.2, ,3.
.5
,7
2'
LOAD DURATION TO FUNDAMNTAL PRIOD, 'T/T N
Figure 3-199
....E
0
0
l>:
W
Q.
';::
....z
<,
'",
r-,
wtr/
It
.,.,

L.-
'0
....
z
i=
u
w
...J
L..W
'0
~
:::>
><
~
L.-
i=
TiME or YIELD TO LOAD DURA TiON, triT

~,-J~6
oS>
....
~ ~
rP
.~
d'
'6'
\J"
v..
I'>
VtNN-
~.~
:....:..:....
__
~oQll
o 0,
0
00000000
.....
.... Ulv.N N
U' .... OlllO .. l.ot
=. -
.
-0
..
0000000
00
N
N
OlllLl\-JOLJIO"'O
QlI
CfllJl
..
I'>U'V'
f-
"'-
oJ
c-c
<,
><
'"w
0..
J'
..J'
eU
...J
c-
::f
n.
n
"",
'"
CD
'"
...J
f-
::>
c-
...J
>0
f-
e-
t:
0
~.
u
W
W
...J
...J
u,
cW
LV
::f
::>
::f
::>
::f
::f
sc
><
::f
::f
....
w
::f
": p
07 ~
0.5 -:
.00 I
E::t:~
,002.003 .005
Ir
t:
.
.01
.02
.03
.05 .07.\
.2.3.5.7
Fi gure 3-200
Maximum response'of elasto-plastic. one-degrce-of-freedom

system for bilinear-triangular pulse ((1 = 0.162. (2 = 300.)
10
TiME OF YIELD TO LOAD DURA TiON, tdT

~~.
t-:I0
U":
..
'"~.~
,.
cP
(J\
...
;.;
":'"
"CJI
500~47\l7\17;~
V'
)Il
.~
..
.... -
0000000000
0 0 0 0
_.
CIlI
en
"'-I
..... 0
~,."~~ IV'
'A ""'IIII)Ik
\/1
"t,.ooIlI'IN
'VI ~ O. U\
Cd
(tl
Vol'
V I r,J Y u-
x n
200
w
<,
'"
100
.....
0 0 0
0
0
"V'v&
l'J N
0, lJ'I 0
:1IIX ~7
<$'
',>
8
v
JI
H71V1~
~~~~S~~
..
'1/1\ /1
JOO
'"E
(J'IV'-'
lJI V' ~
.:>
'"
.,..
/S"
....2
<,
....E
o
o
'"
<oJ
Q..
.s-
'.,j
t7
...J'
4(
~-~
Z
<oJ
.. - ..
..,....""
,,~ -fOO--k1th1'.V+7f.d-w:l~~ff<>j!
4(
a
z
~I.LI'b.l-b'ffi";\f-~:l-I+MW<~41,t:l
~ :"-:;;:';~~~
""
, ..rr--4...- Y1 I '
I I I 1AJ....r
~I
..Y/ 1/7
\I1'lli
.......A1
::>
\')<
f .
'"
::f
"1~
L..
o
....
z
o
~!'~
t:
U
<oJ
...J
"<oJ
~~:t
v
~\ ~J.
::f
::>
::f
l1-,
.(p.D5
.~7
.1.
~-+.
'
.2
,.3
'~.'
.5 . . 7
'LOAD 'DURATION TO FUNDAMENTAL PERIOD, T/T H
Figure 3-201
::f
:'\.I\,
,
_ ..~2
.~
k.'
"
.0\
I--
. .,...."'-+
2
3
-'--~,..
'
Maximumresponse of elasto-plastic, one-degree-of-freedom

\0
- -
'.'
I.
'
TlM(O'(VIELD TOJOAD DURATION,
,., ,.,
'" ~
dl
t't:,~
500'~
\1'
(J\
'~
-;.~"O
.... _ VI _f'-J
j...) .......... :.."-a
'a>'"""
.~
r.
x-,
I'
t~';T
~ 0
~. 0
1IV IJ)<1
z
a
t:
<oJ
-'
l'>JJ.L
'",
...
<oJ
'"
-'
>-
>-
z
a
>-
....... ,~
000
(TI
UI."
VI I.J'
(1J
'0'0'0
........ Vo
0 lJI 0
r->
r->
0
"1/
'r1
1JV11/Y1~ ~\~
M;
~
2:
>-
tdl~1\Mi'
a
a
0000
I'\i-.L" .r
U\ll~n/
L..
~ooo
en .\.HVlN N :..:..:... . ~
O.C .(J\-....l CLII 0
O"Ifo.NO 0
II
<,
.->
'",
.,.,
6'
Y1
'.r
\\~
.lI ~'YIN
a
w
'"
ll.
.1"
....E
'6'
...J
4:
I-
4:
."
OJ
L..
a
>z
a
\n{~
--,
i=
u
w
...J
L..
W
L..
.Ii"-
~ ..~~~~
/I
Z
-'
:-I
Y' '
OJ
'1 '"
4:
-r'
f'f~ ~-'(
{'l\f'{ \ \
.02
vE:,..
1~~
4:
.03
"'I \
b'
..,. .\,~~
l--.01
OJ
~
.05.07 .1.
' .2
.3
p Irl ';;l).:'l
.5.7
~.
lOAD DURATION TO rUNDAMENTAl PERIOD, TIT N
Figure 3-20l
Maximum response of elasto-plastic, one-degree-of-fl'eedom

system for bilinear-triangular pulSe (C1 = 0.133. C2 = 300.)
L..
i=
\0
e
tdT
nM( or. YI(LD,TO LOAO DURA nON,

0
,-l
,,$)
1iI'"
~. 6"
r:PCflU''''vtt..Jf'Jc:''"'=-'i'
-'."-a' -. I"N 0 1XI
.'" ~, ....
0
..1
","...-,
t--!"'"
t-I
V'
--
(J'l
...
VI.
Vi N
U' -.
0 0
UI
N ~ -;.
0
"
V'
~fi:i
z
o
L.W
o
--'
w
, "N
o
z
o
U'
...
f-
<,
III~
'/
, .,.,
tl'
l/{'U
I)<kIV
I nl '
LI U"'-JI
I /r-4 H
I -,
__.. _r
"IVIIN/.\.Yli(..J
q II
\..IV
r-1
....- r
1n-1'"t?
1/ ur TI A
... _.
It--17Ih
~.A7r ..v:-t\71\ Y\"
. _.rl\lA-
....E
o
o
<>:.
Q.
--'
>-
--'
....'"
U"
'.j- .
>-
Kill)'
>-
oJ'
i=
..,
\!~
~I/If'-
w
,
l Y
,~
U'...co
000000000
OJ
0"1
~ I.J" I.J"
t..J N
N -0
w
:>
a
z
::>
L.-
\jt~k~
r\<rl:~1J
i=
u
);
o
....
z
o
11--
t:
u
--'
L.-
--'
L.W
:>
,
o
::>
:>
::J
:>
sc
:>
-\-m
><
.,,~~
:>
.....
--"
\.
\/\
"
L-.0\
,02
.03
P'4.rj.<L K
'.05,07.\
r r
C
I I I I IJI
.2.3.5.7
,.
'.'
LOAD DURA'nON TO rUNDAMiHAL PRIOD, T/T N
Figure 3-203

system for bilinear-triangular pulse (Cl 0.121, C2 300.)
, "
.\0
TlME'or YIELD TO LOAD DURATION,

'"
'J.~~~
\f' ~
'0'00.
....,),.
VI
(J\
'dJ
'0
__
VI
"0
00
(flo
IlL
VI
t[/T
00000000
..
Ut I.JoI, !"oJ N
,-
"
-
~ ...
\II O' "" -
. ~:. .
0000
00
(J\
UI
!J""
VI
'0'0'00
V"\"l'l~
...
G'o!J\
v
'\I JI,. IIVI
..... "
r-,
~ ~~: ~
---~-
t-
<,
/11)
v-.-r::v:r-rb\""r,..~l'
I I ii i
----"~~~
I""'"
....E
~tI
!7JltWXlY Y1Vl--
ttl JJ.&- lIl"
\\
'"
W
Q.
".....
;=
u
w
l'>
'"
l'>
~
- --~A<-::I-:f'+7'ffilP6i!>I"F;ALi.f'<'H!--'
-'
)0-
A'
VIlYlH
,m
~
,_
."
I~
tZ
.
rY\1 \-'1)/\ I___________
kl..V
. _
.....
.Lt
,
111A11 .r:
_.
t?
t-
L.
o
o
-'
I'/'
II
"
-'
. ...... ... .....
::F
...o
:J
1-X1.l---Y1\/
l-l
li
tZ
~~\I)<
;=
o
w
-'
"w
o
tU
W
-'
"w
::F
.17'
.It-
II
:J
::F
;.(
::F
~~=-O.
::F
:J
::F
)(
::F
"'0
1\
::F
;=
p/r -
0.7
f-71;
0.5
.00 I
+-
.002.003 .005
.01
.02
,03
.05.07.1
.2 '.3
LOAD DURA TlON TO rUNDAMENTAL- PERIOD,
Figure 3-204
.5.7
I:
TIT N
Maximum.response of elasto-plastic. one-degree-of-freedom

\0
e
TIME
~
..:f
~"",,.,,..:,,,,
ocf'v'
or
YIELD TO LOAD DURATION,
C!'IJ'!"'
oOJoooooV'l'o
~
~ iJ
YNf N
1\
><
z
a
"""
.
.
l'-.l oN
lDNo"
Ii I II II1.l
....
...
"
... NO
000'0'0'000
DD Cf'I IJ'
.. V'"
V'
.-J
t.J
oV' ..... V' .... oV' 0
~~
It-fflIM-!
."
~tIV\i.-V
'i. 1'\(1 Mr'XIJl
cw
o
o
..J
....E
o
II
r<,
'6'
<:
1'1 Y1~~
\/1 \
r-
'"
'"
VI
'~i)
<,
CJ'l
1'\1
><'"
w
,
ldT'
0000000000
t;-J~~(JI
......
'J'
. tv<.! \N ITI4I1I'h
;::
u
W
Q.
....J
:
....
z
~
:>
L.-
....a
--.--,....,.,., r" II ,.....,
vV1..A1".J..f"'1\J -_M _~
r,v",v.--r.~....-~~
z
o
o
~\l<
t:
W
....J
u,
w
..J
L.W
>r-
'"
W
5 . M.:7'l'\-m
:f
:>
:>c
><
3h>(.l;t/lXAPm
><
:
:>c
:>c
OJ
'>,""'""'-
:f
"-
'W
~
1\
::'~
,001,002':003- .005
;::
___,- I.-,01
,02
.03
V.//V/f././V
.05,07-:1
,2.3.5
,7
LOAD DURA TlON TO ~U~DAMENTAL PERIOD. TIT N
Figure 3-205
Maximum respons~. of'el~sto-plastfc. one-degree-of-freedom

system'for bilinear-tr'iarigular pulse (Cl = 0.100. C2 = 300.)
.5
7' 10
TIt.. r Of YIELD TO LOAD DURATI'ON, tciT
\r.
t-lo
--;. ~
'0
.1
"cJl
, ,
(J\V'''
'0'0'0
.. _
__
i.I' :-".
OJ
VI.
><
F
><
1-
U
W
-'
I~
.;
'"
'"
>0
I"
0
..... NN---. 0
. '0
. 0 0 0 ooa
....
UlO....,,t--)O
..
'0 '0
C1' IJI
\JI
Vl
'0 '0
'0
......
V" ~
'0
V'
...
...
<1'
111\
,.,
<9
.. '1'0
~O
V to..
"it1 \""f
~'\I W \ I'IJ/
,~M-hfi.-~
n-.
"-~-~m
~..
1",v
',j-
~AM
Cl
ir
1.'3
1.1
0.93
0.81
0.70
0.6\
0.53
><
<[
p/rl ';'0.
0.7
uF~
.001
ez:
---
.002.003 .005
.0 I
J
.02
k
.03
V/A/"/V/
.05.07.1
.2
.3
.5
.7
LOAO DURATiON TO fUNDAMENTAL PERIOD, T/T N
Figure 3-206

10
<[
,-c
"-
~o
1.7
15
.1:"-
-J
t-
J: s
~.,j
"
'Z
J' G
....E
~?
J: o
~\l<
W
..;
.tf'
1-
IL
t<,
"-
'.1
20
."
...
\1'\ ~ J \ll
10
tf'
Cl
a.;
'0
"0
'" 0..
~ 1\ AI" ~, ,_,~
<,
000
=>
0
I-
t:
w.
-J
"w
,=>a
,
,
,
)(
<[
"0
w
~
e
.
liME or YIELD TO LOAD DURAnON, telT

t-J
l.1'
....
(I'
,.
v"
....
0
-l
(J\
OJ
IJ"""
0
"
Vl
,-
IJI
.'
:.
00000600000'"
. -,
.
...
0
0
co oJl IJI ..
tv N'" - 0'
a>
Cl
VI
0""" .. N
U'
IJ'
V'
IJl
..
V'
(1'\
...,.
..,.
'Z
f-
.......
,..,E
~.
0'
',",
....I1b-..~t'-\'td:-N-I.~~
o
f-
.s',j'
...'0'
-'
L-
- '~j>t~llUt\
w
N
'"
'"
,.,yl'>d~
c.
-'
.,..~
>-
r-.
'.
.w, ",I
\0
'tlli-t7
I
'"u,
LJ
..J
....'Z
I 1~\ot-*f'H~;rn-li'+:!J.'~ot=:'iPa;I;~
'\
:J
:>
>(
...a
<i
::i
LJ
:f
;::
0,7
0.5
JZ2r.Lr'.:-J:::::TI~_.__~-'-,-
.001
,,002.003 .005
.01
,02
.03
.05,07
~
, 2 . 3 . 5 ,7
.i
2' 3
LOAD DURA nON TO rUNDAMENT AL PERIOD, TIT N
Figure 3-207
Maximum response of elasto-plastic. one-degre~-of-freedom

system for bilinear-triangular pulse (Cl = 0,083. C2 = 300,)
'5
7' '\0
. .
"
~
~o
-0
"0'
,I .
nMEOr YIElD TO,lOAD DURA nON,

CfI IJ' ..
'0'0'0
-1
'cP
V'
,..,'0
....
lI'
t(/T
ooooopoooo'
ClD
OlU'fo.lJoINN----."
OOON
tJlo"""' ... N O 0
'"
.....
v I~
..
0
CfI
\JI
'0'0'0'00
lJ'I
"vtvo.~N
VI.
CfI 0
IJ'
0
V"
1\
d>.,..,
..>
>:
'"
<,
\\
><
.,..,
6'
.t
;=
'J'
I~ ....
i.,
IIIYf
0
-oJ
W
D::
>-
l\\
I~M'1\tt\7"/51::lctrDI1[
0: 0
'S
J'.o
f-
0
f-
-'
i-
::I'
:::>
::I'
sc
<i
::I'
"
::~,-,
.001
.002.003 .005
P /r ,=
~
.01
.02 .03
.05.07.1
.2.3.5.7
lOAD DURA nON TO rUNDAMENTAl PERIOD,
Figure 3-208
TIT N
Maximum response of elasto-plastic. one-degr~e"of-freedom

system for bilinear-trianqular pulse (C1 = 0.075. C2= 300.)
"0
-c
z
...
::>
0
t-
Z
0
t:
<.>
<0
l.-
1.1
0.93
0.81
0.70
0.61
0.53
1\
o:
::f
<,.1
I.J
<Of!
1.7
1.5
l.W
-oJ

::f
><
<{
::f
u,
::I"
;=
Cit
. ,-
0,;
, ,,-
TIME OF YIELDTO LO~D DURATION. ldT

~
~. '0'
,.
v'
a\l1''''
....l
,.
..
r:P
"
~
t-.I r..
0
U'
:..
~
o:a
!=?
?~? ~~~ o~~t?'o

O'IUI
..
l"lNt-J,----
0.0
0\ -
..... ... N
'0
'"
0.1'
'0
'0'0'0'00
"'\,I4V't"'N
0.1'
V'
V'
CJl
lJ\
v.
z
>-
<,
.>
'"
.'"
6'
z
o
70
w
..J
l..
W
..,
...
.
'"
o
......,
\?Iv
g
O;
t:
"
,~ ""
..J
".
~..I~ IwMW
ill \ II' "
>-
. ...
. . . . ..
>-
'';-
~~
_---~
~K
z
o
t:
'6'
_. .
._ __~
_. .
'1I,ANH\z1'l-.JJt1
,0
of'
IP1\7
.....E
o
o
'"
w
c,
..J
>-
w
::Ii
-c
~-t~J\1l><
~/l'
::>
l..
o
z
o
t:
u
>-
...
..J
.-Vr\l \ / n
-'
u,
',~ v
.0
'::Ii
::>
::f
><

::f
;<
:t:
...o
1-\
f;
:t:
""
0.7
0,5
,001
/v
J--
,002.00.! .005
,01
.02
~14vt11{7~/Y1
.03
.05.07
,I
,2.3.5.7
i :
LOAD, DURATION TO FUNDAMENTAL PERIOD. T/T N
Figure 3-209

system for bilinear-triangular pulse (e1 = 0.068, (2 = 300.)
5.
10
liME O~ YIELD TO LOAD DURA nON, tciT

~
soa
~; lX
., ...
'"t,
200
w
sc
'"
100
'"
ex>
'"
a
a
-'
w
>-
~o
20
0
f--
10
f--
U
W
'- fl.",
i.,
::f
=>
::f
sc
<{
~
\"'\i
M-JH:N'il-lv-'--., ,~
~~ , r '
'i<
r-,.
'X.I
.
"
'\oJ)<.;
1/ r-;
)("lAJ'.'
~ ~r--
~A
r /vN(.~
\~
At
...
'
>1,
--..J
..;;
I; .
'~
. 1 - . ,"
_."'t
1\ (\ (1-'
\1 \. I""lll
/\
~I
.02
/"
.05.07
II
I' /
"
0'
'~
'..I
.I -,
!' \.
v'
:.> .~'"
\j
7 K-r-..
>Q -2 (~/.
.: ~
//.'// :
'l/. 'l': ,/./,/
.t
~. .
..
~,IS. ~V
,2
,J
,V
. r--'
L---
'W:V
-v ;
'
..:Y
'\
--"::
1\
p/r :- -~
'
.'
'.'
.5'.7
J'
TIT N'
'Maximum response of e Ia s to-p l as t i c , cne-deqree-uf-freedom

system for bilinear-triangular pulse (Cl = 0.056. C2 = 30U.)
\0
4:
-f
L..
::f
4:
=>
f--
t:
<'J
<0
u,
..J
/.,
1.5
I.J
I. I
=>
0.70
-'
f--
-0: 0
o.e I
'"c,w
O,9J
'
~'6
, . ...",
....E
.1. 0
N/
'1.1 '
x:: .?~
X~
'i
/\I/,:y'.'
1,/
~ , ~ J\
/~b~ 1/1'-.. '
'
V,j
f--
<,
'0'
~ I\) \ "\..
1'\ y
7\.
LO"D DURATION TO rU'NDAMENTAL PERIOD,
Fi gure 3-210
\,I'
,-\,,f
'\
'V-
,/
,OJ
'.
,/ v
../
--
--' '
1J-
A '\/
20 '(\~~ ~:x
' ',.,
.-:1\7
d'
1\
-A 1/1
\ , /
"
"
I'~"
v0 7:v
.~.
V ,4 e)F-'\V
II \
.0\
"
.,'
*",v:..\_
~ ~ ). --':,
1~'J1i-
~~
. ,
TI
',;-1
.
V"c1'OI.J'
-<;f';
ljvt
' . . .~;
.;J U f 1 '
.
~
V"
11\
',.
T.
<,
,\0,
---
,002005 .605
'I ell,'
lJ'I
Ii /' " II
L---
'0'0'000
...
..... vo."t-J
N
000
o:J
(J\
lJ'I
(/1 A . '
'
o,~
.001
II
. -
\,
1'-/5l'A..I'&/"~
/""
'\
-:/~
'-,
,
/./
' / ' ,/
'"
00
(f\~"~N""'-0_.0 00 0 ...... ...a N
co \.J\
'(
/'r-~
/7
0.7
,/
'f..
','
If'-At, -y Y... )<

r--1i ~ \ /.
~
~
lfI
I \
',I"
, _, "
I\jt"+'--~'"
, .
Z'i.A
.
~ ' J-l. ':)(
-I \ ! '
-'
00000000000
N....
..
......
'
'" ,/
Z1~I*/I\ ~.
~o
-'
w
,
...
7\--::,- :x, '/1i. K (
r--='J~...t~ 1
70
r.,
oJ'
).kY
.''f' :~/~..l-..j~
: x: :'Y.-4,>I,~
1., ~;:. I " , '
I~:~~;~~~~~ .' '. I)
;:.:
(f'
'IT
<,
-l
\I ,-/ \ ,,-'
o~r
500
,.
If'V'OrSJoooo
::f
::f
><
4:
::f
u,
0.61_
O,5J
i:
e
'-.\;
i-
,,':':
tJ
.. ,
"
,1
TIME
~ ~ ~ ~ ''0
'.
or
hiT
YIELD TO. LOAD DURA TlON,

O
...1Cf\"'V"f"Jf"J-_
'd!o.. '0 '""
~:...t
0000000000
;" U. ... ~ N N~ :"0 i.". :.. ca

..
o OOONUIO
500~
"_
~o
0'0'0
'0'0'0'00
~G'\J'I
O. IJ'
V'
...
...,..
~V"t-JN
l5'
IJ'
.,.,
dO
=j.l--\,tj:,W:--,1 Y1\
'"
6'
',.,
z
o
t:
-'
L.
W
1t1/V W
I y".....:7i
1\
-s..t
I "L:JKI"'_~"""*~V
,-'
'"
a
>z
a
>-
t:
-'
L.
W
7
5
:J
~
>(
<!
~
~
~.
<'Ii
<.J
\YJIIXIJr
-\/'1
IX
r~1$'~~~
p/rl
IL
00 I
,..
'r
1.5
1.3
1.1
0.93
0.8 I
0.70
0.61
0,53
\t\I\'
0.7
0.5 ,"/ ,
1.7
~ v
"'F ,-; I t;:ao
.002003 .005
Figure 3-211
~
:
4 I I
';""0.
"
.' 5
7 , 10
-'
<!
20
,
cc
c,
0: 0
.1: 0
~ N~\lK
.1: S
l!'-~
....E
>Z
w
'6'
...'",
'"
n I JtL
>-
<,
::>
L.
>-
i=
u
w
-'
L.
w
a
~
::>
2'
2'
L.
w
~
i=
.
;
TIME or YIELD. TO LOAD DURA TlON, tdT

00000000000'
\,. ~o
". ...
d'v'
...
0
....1..n.~vlr-J~,--.
.
.
"!.
.
.
.
.
.
:..
Oll l1' U' .. l.N N
N .... - . . . -
dJ
\J'
~o'"" ...
..
500
k.7T7rN \71-,kY~
'I.,><::::::r
,~ Tilvn7B
VI I/~
OOO~1JI0~~NO
..
VII t.l\11\Y\1l-11\ J\.-
-~~ ~
h~~f~J;
. tIJ:tlXJ
~
><
-~"t7.1rJ'~
E
>< 100 .
z
a
""" ...., ,."
--'
u,
-J
T~\l\
o
z
a
>-.
>-
--'
c,
><
<i
:2'
.....E
~"
."
II 1
<i
W
~
<i
l7
jt-
:J
!).
4'<""
~~
~
~"" A". ',,, ,
.. WHJ~~
- -- .. _.. _.
---
f0-
.........
IN".
yj
.I?"
i=
1.7
w
-'
c..
w
1\
:p Ir l ~Q.
t-fft
.0.
f'
. ..02 .03
c
1/
r v, r
.05.07
----
l'f_~_..L....<L':'''':'''I~
.1.2
.l.5
.7
I'
~O~D yURA TlON TO rUNDAMENTAL PERIOD, TIT N
Fi gure 3-212

system for bt l ineare tr tanqul ar pulse (Cl " 0.042. C2 = 300.)
10
:2:
1.1
:J
0.:
0.81
-
=>
Z
l-
<,
~-c-~~~a
~~tI'\/t'~j j>'lJ~~
.. --.1_,
~~IV
w
a
a
V4O"OU'O
" WI 1Ar..,rt. 1>1 I I I"UI I /
i=
u
....,
....
o'"
'-U'vlNN
YW
~
II
"
'0'0'0'00
\l7 \Y -lJlI:::I
1)
-.l 'n!'c'l'1l.vI-1\-CA+MI-
..
QOO
cP
(Jl
IJ'
0
\JI
vl
:2:.
><
:2:
L-
0.61
0.53
t:
:2:
TIME or YIELD TO LOAD DURATION, triT

~
v'-
....1
"
,,
; ,0 . .\J'
~
v'-
IJ'
':'7
00"'"
"..
.- l
.:
.N
'?
~.,~ ~ ~. ~ ~ ~. ~o 0
'0
l.D..,JlJI"VI~""N--""_fSJ
OOlJlc.l',,-,o\1l-
...... ~
01.1"
'00
~G'
00
'0
lJ'
0
'0
..
t-J
'0
'0
'0
V4V"t-J
IJ'O lJl
(,
N
0
Z
f--
<,
-'
'"
.,.,
t
z
o
c:
u
..J
t..
W
...,
.....
'"
.....
a
a
6'
70
-s',r
.\t~
'6'
'I~I"J~
....E
a
'"
W
0..
..J
....-<
z
w
:If
<C
..J
::>
>-
l..
f--
j-,
o
f--
t:
u
w
'-oJ
l..
U
W
w
a
..J
u,
W
:If
::>
::>:
::>
:If
;<
::f
-<
:If
::f
w
:If
;::
I~II~
.01
.02 .03
~
.05.07
.1
.2'.3
.5.7
.2
LOAD DURAliON TO rUNDAM(NTI>.L PERIOD, TIT N
Figure 3-213
Maximum response of elasto,plastlc. one~degree-of-freedom

10
,,
'.
TIME or YIELD TO LOAD DURA TlON, trlT
".
.....l.
". ""0
;v'
oJ'
t.1'
.,-'
r.0
~ ~.
0
Vl.
-l
.N
?~~.~c;>,??
sao
J aa
\D
IJI
l,II
Ut
IJl O'l 0
lJl
~c:'
U' -
-,.
C?'o
~ ~
-'
01
'"
'0'0
~
0
Cf'
'0
\I'
0
'0'00
~
0
V'
t.1'
~
0
'0
l'..J
l.I\
---
\ I
1~f-jJ~l\Dj~t'l
-a
zoo I-tIT~~mw
\till
.,.,
--1
u,
....,
....
'"
'"
o
6
f-
->
....E
100
g~~~~~~~
.,.,
6'
~31~~~~~~\:~,
70
50
....,
If)\J a l-lIf.L1"'~'!\-'J>-..A-I'-j\,'!G
20
10
::
s-c
..:
::t.
':0
l~
:;: o.
:;7"" '.
;:,:'1~
.001
l--
J-
,002.003. ,005
.0.1
. 02
.O~
.
~
~1/
..'
...
'
. .05.. 07.1.
.'
.2.3
.5.7
~.'
LOAD DURATION. TO,rUNDAMENT AL PERIOD.- TIT N
Figure 3-214
"Maximumresponse ~f elasto-plastic, one-degree-of-freedom

system for bilinear-triangular pulse (C1 = 0.026. C2= 300.)
7 . \0
'Z
::>
c-
~o
o
fz
<'Ii
<.J
i=
u
1.5
::
::>
....Z::
<.0
1.7
J;;
-oJ
..:
f-
':6'
~s
-oJ
u,
'"w
..:
r-.
0
Q.
S
'J"
)-
,-o
z
"0
17
-oJ
d'
';
-c
0
!'J
0
......J
.......
o
::
I.J
::>
1.1
0.93
0.81
0.70
0.61
0.53
><
..:
::
::
.;:
0
....
.::
t:
TIME OF Y1LD, TO'LOAD DURA!IO'N, t[/T

'.
'0
-'
oJ'
'oJ'
!"o '-:.
t7.
:,
0
IJl
'\f'
ce0
0
'-.I
.1'
0
0 0
0
0 0
'VI ..... 'vo ~ N N
Vl'O\
lJI
o'U'\"-
:-'"_
l-l
.. -~
0
'0
cP
oJ'
o
-\
'0
(J'I
00
' 0 ' 0 ' 0 ' 0 '0

l1'~" V' VI
Ol1'O
l1'
'0
'0
~
\II
'"o
,)'-
><
<,
' n ........' "
_....,
.. "\"V\ .JJ--Yi'.
I I\I~,
~
"U
><
z
0
/\
f'"
.~~_.
u
w
-'
u.
a
a
'",
...,
'"
'"
-'
w
;;::
0
r-.
)lJ
,,\V
IY1'U\I' V I L
~)1.,lIXI V
f"
u
w
-'
'"w
.J-17I.
/\/.1.-"1A
I\vr-,J\.
I AV
r/~
a
:i
::::>
"
><t<
::
r-----l:
0,5
.00 I
.'
~--V
,00200'\
,00'5
>'
\ - I ..
~
,0\'
,02''',03
,05 :O}"
~
,I"~;
{,2
,3'
,5 ''',7, "r-l '
.!",2
- '-te. ,
,3'~"
,LOAD pURATlON TO FUNDAMENTAL PERIOD, TIT N"
Fi gure 3-215

system'for'bilinear'-triarigular pulse (Cl = 0.022, C2 = 300.)
\0
'-"',",.
U",-
"
TlM(
.-
/'
:...
/'
V"
/'
tJ'
'-!'
1.1'
!'
~,~
0
vi.
C>
500
~I
'or ,Y,[LD TO LOAD DURAnON,

;0
"...
.- - .
-l.
>
~~~~~ C?~~C?'?~ ~o 0 0 ' 0 ' 0 0 ' 0 ' 0 ' 0 0

I.D -&
\II ..,. \,rl
toJ ,toJ ~ ~ -....._ ...
"... ('/J
-'
G' 0.1' '"' V' V'
~
N
0
U" lJl -I
I.D ... o. ~
.. ~ o lJ' .0 0 ~ ~ !J" 0 !J" 0 lJ'
0
N
0
----'------_
\ 11\\
'-I>oJ I
t(/T
_.
....
.1
...
"
1#.J...A:'1'~
l /\17 \ k'\.Y XI}
11
IINI' - ,,-
Xl\
: "'.:....:.:-::: '1'0.':': . :~ t
~:
:/",
~Jr
d'
',,>
....E
,'.
o
a:
w
0..
z
o
. ,., -
,.~
... _.
'..J
. .. "'1
t:
I-
z
,w
.:.~'l~N
W
'...J
u,
,
'"
N
-..
...
'Z
I-
<,
-:0
II
c
....J
J:,s
'TT
;..
I-
Il-
\7
j~
J: o
<'8
<.J
I-
U
W
2,0
...J
u,
W
Ii
.~
::>
~
><
.
...o
'I-
i=
,U
-w
...
..J
=>
~
;<
...o
i=
e
TlM[ Or.YI[LO TO LOAO OURAnON, t(/T
,
:..J,
,;
V'
"
-1
'\f'
l.1'
"1.1'
..
'0
V'
'0
.... - ~o.D l?
?V' ~......
? C???
C? ?' . '?......
'?
~ ~
-.1
""'Nt"" .. _
'v"
01...
-.
500.~ \17\ )I( AI \A

.
CJI lJl
-.I
0\
0'
.,
"0
dJ
Lf\
'0'0
-' Cf"
0
0
0'0'0'0'0
"' ...... V' V'
0 lJ' 0 "'" 0
"0
t.J
N
0
lJl
il"ll I
)
....
d'
'r'
'-
....E
',.,
i<
.'-
(;-
><
'r'
'J'
.
.
w
-'
<w
.If'
...'"
'"
'0
ci'
...J
W
J: s
....
J: o
..4-\l'ttrlfMJi:k
llThI
0( 1\ lWJI
<.&
<.J
c:
U
W
...J
u,
::>
4:
~
.3
10
~-
""
;(
""
.n.
w
,
c
0
l*~~){f\/~
1.7
1.5
I.J
I. I
0.93
0.81
0.70
'0.61
0.53
. "/
~IY
.002.003 .005
J(;v
.;/
.01
A),2 .03
~
.
.05 .07.1
.2.3.5.7
-.
'\
I I
2
LOAD OUR!"nON TO rUNDAM[NTA!- P[RIOD, liT II
Fi gure 3-217
Maximumresponse of ela~to-plastic. one-degree-of-freedom

10
...J
4:
....Z
w:
~
4:
0
t<
::>
L-
0
....
u
w
...J
<w
c'
:l'",.
::>
:2:
><
4:
:2:
L-
.0
:2:
s:
TIME or YIELD TO LOAD DURA nON, tell

~
-0
'0.1'
.r
'l1'
!'
.... '",
.,.. 0
'!" ~ ..... 'so- ".,.." co
C?
-.I.
~? 0
VI
.. -V"
C;:>.
VI
c:' 7' '? C?
.~ ~ -~
....
~~
'0
'0'0'0'0 '0
"0 0
..J.
G'
If' ~ .. V' lJl
t.J
t..l
tS'OOO\1'Olf'OlJ'O
'?"o,'o
OOU'l,II-.&O"'O~"-
OOv'V-
"'0
cP
IIJ-17 H1V1\
W1KLJrAi1\! X
300.
/J.-,.A-1o'tHltrt\L....:l..
V,
200
w
><
>;
100 .
'1
f=
u
'
'
-J
u,
W
0,
,
N
....
aW
30
..IT
-J
20
'"
><
-c
~
I7lr'Y~"
10
....E
....
r: '" ,\
,s
..)-
y~
I}\
I\'N
X
/ . ~Cl :v
~
io'\
~ \\i l\
"I,
'6'
1)<
J:,s
'/'
V ~ ,,,\
.1 0
t'-,V
<s
<,.1
.v "'lin-..
<.0
~yy
INJ VI-.....u l:nt'l 1.7

1.5
1.3
\.1
3
2
~ P Ir
. 0.5
.00 I
/'
....--r
IY
.002.003 .005
~
.01
.02
-,03
-.
.,
v
.05 .07.\
O.
:0
'
~x.//V
.2.3.5.7
LOAD DURA nON TO rUNDAMENTAL PERIOD, r/T N
Figure 3-218
Maximum response of elasto-plastic. one-degree-of-freedom .

>-
c.
'"a,w
-J
z
w
:::f

~..."
-'
6'
-VI
..v
z
f=
u
w
-J
"-w
",1.'11:7 '1111 \J7
,"-"
0
r0
~
\
<,
'",
<,
d'.,..,
10
;:).
"0
>-
z
0
f=
W.
-J .
'"cw
:::f
:::>
:::f
><
-c
0.93
0.81
0.70
0.61
...
0.53
f=
:::f
w
:::f
T1t-li: Of Y,IClD. TO lOAD 'DURA TlON, ti:.I.T

~
"0
~
'1J'
..ro
'If'
...,..
'0
'0
". c:' t?-.I
.;.
'f"J
0'
IJ)'
o'
t.J
~ ~
\I'
U'
U'
?VI t?..,.. t?~ t?t..J t?... C?, C?,

-./,
..
'"
'"
'0
fP
\1'
0'0
~
-1
00
00'0'("1'0"0
!J''' ~ v" lJl t-I
O\1'OlJl 0
IJ'
"0
N
l-
...
~-
."
.--
w
X
<,
E
x
tz
u
U
~T'-
-s.
50 P!'-j;at!
u,
W
a
w
,
IV
"'"
"
50
~~~:litit"Xt)l'
...J
>0
0-
0
t:
."
6'
70
...J
'"
W\(
20
tt-*t::Yt-k'i\'
.~,~~r1tJ'9A<Im
",mt~H~~~
,"~'rIkl1l
'or
1\/ V \ ,{\
r;..
\1~I\
":0
J:,s
,\AAtoy
.1. 0
I~V
J.t>
J'J
20
1.7
/.5
/.3
1./
0.93
0.81
0.70
0.61
0.53
...J
l.-
W
Q
5~~fr~M
:'f
:'f
<i
:::If
~~
::J
f\
1\.Vl:
~ ~ ~~AX~
"
0.7
0.5 -: '
.00 I
'\
p/rl ~O.
/'
.002.003 .005'
.01
.02
1/
.03
.05 '.07.1
~
.2'.3.5.7
lOAD DURATION TO fUNDAMENTAL PERIOD. T/T N
figure 3-219
)
0
2Q:
W
Q.
...J
<i
0-
":6'
.x
<P
Maximum response of el e s to-p l as t ic , one-oeqree-nt-rreecom

system' for' bilinear-triangular pulse (CI = 0.010. C2 = 300.)
10
:'f
l.~
~,7\\:A
70
.."
'"
20
0
>Z
10
;:::
u
....J
"-
:t
><
-c
:t
11.', ?'AG, a2
L:' '"
.:-
~???????OO?Oooo
:"'"
~LLL:
l::ll'
I'
.t-
L:
K
KI"V~
7'
.I'
t>~
'1
'1
r:
>Sot:
IL
s..
:S;::
!W
t:9.-
~ x:=
f'/
_-
8. t:L.l.
tJ
UII
,.l.
....l,
~ ~ I;:S
l.l,
...l-\....l,
~....l,
....lj
Ql.
~/r = r8
'-' ..>
0.53
~.....,
::::::.. L
0.7
.-
0.5
.001
.
,
.002.003 .005
.01
.02
.03
.05.07.\
.2.3
.5'.7.
2'
LOAD DURA TlON TO rUNDAMENTAL PERIOD, TIT III
Fi9ure 3-220
Maximum response of elasto-plastic. one-degree~of-freedom

S'
\0
cc
w
a.
t-
7. \
_ ff:d.
....J
6.2
5. ,
4 .6
4.0
3.5
,.0
2.6
2,3
2.0
\.1
\.5
1.3
\.1
0.93
0.81
0.70
0.61
if
....,E
\8
"
I
1_'
2
I-
<,
\5
\3
9. 5
8.2
E:
F"I="-
65
56
48
.\
35
30
25
2\
.~
1:.r
uz ~ "1m
j2~i{:. ~
'"
o '"
..
L:.J
LL l..=: I"
,...::
00
1.0 ....... l1'''' .lH ...... N N -0

- (lD Q\ lI' ....
OOU'lV'lU\O.,.OOllH
OUIOO
et-.t.-A...l
/r
[:
-j(
1"'>K.:t-
OUlN
'
(V (
I"::: f/ L2'
.....
AlA
~".~ t<
~
:t
:>
r-.x
.L
Il'c
1(,
~\ ~ ~
- .
It
.' f - - "
,-.;{,
II
[' _V ~ I '
~IJI X ~ \(
30
....J
>-
' '.
f-) It},, ~ "
50
....J
.-~
,;.\
./-' -r-
...,,
l'I
, ..f'. 1) ~V
I
6.
'/...
U'UI
~~~jY,bIC.
L 1",
I....:::'
~~
~~ l"
. ~ 1..,2
.
' l~ -IfAr'""
- ~ . l( 'I; r
- ~~.'. ~ ,..., ~ t~
"-
a
a
4>
.----::li.~ , .A
__
~ 0\
0-10
N
_' _
OO'Vl
"

u,
0
t-
i=
u
w
....J
"w
:t
:>
:t
><

vi
1.1'
V"
N
.....
N
0
(J\
-,lcn
VI
-.
0 - -.....
0,
tv
4_
500
0O;r;,=t~~5ft~~nI
."
sc
--'
70
50
L.W
__
...,
'"
'.J
~Wif>\t:Zi:~
lQ..!
N/ 1/ ff:>o
,.
Z
0
c::
--'
10
:>"
Q:
W
Q.
..J
"

L.-
tZ
o
;::
Ie
.I
..J
L.-
:>"
><

:>"
oJ
l[;:;
L.
W
t-
~.
--'
r
0
<,
IS'
~ ' '"'
t-
iii
VI
00
'" N
][;
VIH<
<,
OUlOO
r-....VINJ
0
t:
~ 00 0 0
-oaO'lUl"
OQOOOOOOOO
I.D ...... t.n .. l . H U i N N - 0
0
l.n U'I ...... 0 VI 0
en .....
........ N N - -
...
VI lI' ...... 0
Ul
,~
=>
:>"
><
2m;'
.
"
!!"
r-,
:>"
L.JT'i
L.-
1\
p/r =cr.
\ I \ 1\
1\ \
:>"
t:
0.7
0.5.L
.001
I I I I I II
.002.00.1 .005
.01
.1
.02
I I I I III
.0.1
.05 .07.1
I I " III'
.2.3.5.7
I I I I III
LOAD DURA TlON TO FUNDAMENTAL PERIOD. TIT N
Figure 3-221

10
TlM
'"o '"
0
V'
V'
o '"
""
Cf'I
~ 'Xi. \11-
or YILD TO LOAD OURA TlON. tclT

...
:-t.CJ'I
""""
UI
NN
~.
."
UI """"
-.IN I/'"
(\\)<l Ai.. ~
~/~''j[I~
v " ......... ~I\" '"
~c\l \'clA 1\
- ~lli'tHIN+---M---J!~PI
"~I~I~
r,
>(
<,
>(
o
LW
Cl
c-
CD
VII \)qj
YNJ V
N~~
II "1-.11
VI ..
0 0
'"
o ...
00
~
[)(.
b(.
1--1 V
iL
k;:
CD en
0
UI
_
0
>-
<,
'oJ
'"w
<t
--'
'"
o
lH.
UI ... c.... '"'" N N O"U1 UI " 0 UI 0"
--'
l>.
'" ....,
70
>-
O~~~OO???O?oooo
'" ..
'AlIl!l~
W IVII"
--'
w
>-
z
o
>Z
I-..
w
::f
<t
~~
.. "f',
Ii:::>
...
a
>-
i=
t:
W
-J
u
w
--'
,~
::f
:::>
::f
IS<:
x",'
3~
::f
0,7
~.,
-2:."
L-
0,5
,00 I
~~
.~
'----=:
::f
:::>
::f
\ I\ I \
"
.002.003 .005
,01
,02
,03
,05.07,
~
,I'
:2
"'l"-
,3
,5.7
>(
<t
...a
.\ 1\
l;2.
,w
::f
~~,
I
i=
LOAO DURATION TO FUNDAMNTAL PRIOD, T/T N
Figure 3-222
::f

10
..
e
TIME or YIELD TO LOAD DURA TlON, tt/T
d'
.s'
...
............
r..J
ot.Jl.1'OIJ'
.....
en
"'LolNN--
'" '"
r\~
200
'<
D'
<,
><~
z
100
70
~~~~~~~~~
~
~
...J
~.
....ec
0000
NN-
!=>~!=>~?
-
00 00000
CG O'l
Ul.\Io{t.I4N
VlOal
(.H
OUl
00,",,0,"'_
~I/
~Y>
NIA1~
II
~,
rM
,,'>
.~ j,f~
.
/
').'>
...J
w
>
,Y>
,'>
4."
~~~8mJ4.0'
~~tl4if1lj 3.~
><
2.
:::----:
1~
_.
1.3
I. 1
0.93
0.81
0.70
0.61
~
\ I '"
p/r~ = 0..
0.53
~._--
071~-1
0.5
.001
1.7
/.5
.00200J .005
.01
.02
.OJ
.05.07.1
.2.J -
.5
.7
LOAD DURA TlON TO rUNDAMENTAL PERIOD, TIT II
Fi gure 3-223
'"wZ
::f
<
c
z
::>
....
...oz
o
....w..J
1/
.I
...J
<
<0
__
_";;1
.
~
.~
;::
2.6
l>:
J..-tr/lloo ~-t-tli 2. J
I;l;'tlIt'
c.--1
.::f
3.0
1I'9o-1f~l:;flii
w
...J
u.
<:
.').
o
c:
u
0..
"
?!':3~~H<'MI1bf19 s ~
....E
,"
1\
t5
.:
<,
"~.')..'>
::f
').,
IV
::>
~()
}'
f=
u
~ ~
-o
o~ou.lJI:""~:""'''' ~\D""-IU'I"'t.oI
o 0 11I UI lJ\
'Maximum response of e I asto-p I as ti c , one-degree-of-freedom

10
u
w
::f
::>
::f
><
-c
::f
....
o
w
::f
t:
.~.~
tdT
mole or YI(lD TO lOAD DURA TlON,

...",
o.J'
0

0'
IJI
ao
Vt
0\
..
lA
U\
Ul
.....
500
If ......
tl ,
300- I
200
><
<,
E
>< 100
z
0
,-u
W
..J
L.-
w'
'",
'"
N
a
a
..J
>-
50
I'" ' __, '
,\ ) l ",1\21, \iX K
,,'y1\\J1 .11 f'I' r-
~(~
r.,
"
::>
::f
sc
 V
IIIN.
I'
.L
L"
1"""--
~~
c: r-
I)'
I'"
f<:
~ I'< l> ~ B -,/

K
f'
~ k' f?: ;.;:;
\;:=-
~~
->
'"
{'
.~".
Jf
............
CD 0 "
""
'j."
'j.\
l-'
;::
- 12
....
~r'"
r-
r:
\"
\\
c
o
~."
'b.1.
c,
I-
A. EJ
A.O
<i
C
Z
2::' I'
3.5
L.-
'9F
2,6
2.0
1,7
1,5
1,3
"-'"u,
<"
,,,,, I I
t'::'1L
\ \
..1 l 1 , ..}. \
\ \ -"'-
"
I. I
0.93
O,BI
0.70
0,61
0,53
~. ~
~P, ~
Ir
';' 'tl..:.!!
:::E
0'
f-
t:
2,,]
1/
it:
EJ .1.
-r..,....ylrh:>t<. 3.0
m:_
.,)
~~~ I"~
t::
t:
Q:
f-
It
~ I-'::
I:-
....E
,.\
...
Z
f-
<,
\'b
,"
..,.
rs
: k"
VI.
I.'
I-' I
_.
\
~\
_I
0
VI
0
V
"r:J
11lI\li'ID7'i+h#=#tt1j1~r1
-'
0 0
ClIO'l
0'"
l--'
I-'
t:
~ !>: ~ k:-:: 'f" , __ :t:;

p<f:J::
P'
0
0
~,
.",<~
~ , "t:",
V
0 0
0
N0 en',"""
c)II
'l'
N
UI
i><:::=: ><
. IX
E.E r-..J,
W;;; 1-'<'"
0.7
f'\
0.0 O?
1ft ... lH
0
1ft 1ft UI
U) ......
"'.
1I [.",. ,.', 1\/
20
.~
III
- - \ . ,
IJ':: :+~ iLl'

30
th ~ V l\L!'"
10
1/1"
"I~" I'l J (1/, II' 'V

h(~v\~IC
1\
f=
"
-I\f::: .t\J~
--It"YH, !-:i
70
I-
X. \' X.
\"x"
- -1\
XI)<
,I <:I!
0
0
- '/\
1\
l;'tj.;)( J;~t)< ~\I\
,1"w
" . \1
w
.....
w
~
:::E
~
:::E
><
<i
::f
....
a
:::E
t:
0.5
.00 I
.002003 ,.005 .
.0\
.02
,03
.05.07.\
_2
,3
lOAD DURATION TO rUNDAM(NTAl P(RIOD,
Figure 3-224
.5.7
to
T/r",

.'
nMe or YieLD ro LOAD DURAnON, tEir

'"
o
.s0
.,. ,..,
<J'
--l
0\
....
.'
'LM
00000
N' N
,"
'.
o(1\VlO~OUlUl"""O
IJ\~
ry
~:""Ul;"'~
?OO?oooooo
N---OO(J'l
U\~
ViN
OUlNOOUlOOO"""
OOUlUlU\(h
if
l;><
. 'IV 'l\ 11\IVN/]' r-,
..
--
.. -
_...
....2
<,
...,E
II:"
o
<>:
00-
o
o
~17
'"
w
...J
I..W
...'",
<D
'"
o
o...J
W
>-
30
t\'~~~~,<:0lD
20
r-,
...J
II
'"
w
...J
;z
::>
I..-
o
....
o
k-Il7'
'"
lJ
W
...J
I..-
)l'
'P:S
~I\
><
<!
::>
II
et
..ex
,~
c: ~
;+
lJ
....<!
I~
::>
><
~
I..-
".1 \
d(L~
'\".10..."1-.,
I
0.7
0,5
.001
.002.003 ,005
0\
.02
.03
,05.07
.1
.2
,3
.5
LOAD DURAnON ro rUNDAMENr AL PERIOD, r
figure 3-225
.7
Ir N
'Maximum.;response.of elasto-pl ast tc , one-degree-of-freedom

system for bilinear-triangular pulse (Cl = 0.715, G2 = 1000.)
,0
'"
nME or 'Y![LD TO LOAD DURA TlON.
'" '"'
V'
500
0
1 -> 1---,]
,.., ,..,
<.1'
O'\~ ~( ';t _~~
E
x
100
0
...u
w
70
50
.J
"W
...,
'"
CIO
~
0
.J
30
.
20 ' "
::f
::>
::f
::f
I\.
/v"
I~
~
I
.. '"
\0
7
5
~
I,
0.7
" ,,0
'"
'"
0
lJI
'"
'"
o '" '"
00
.....
o.
~
.~,:;"J,,~
00'
.
.00 o 0
--0001V\'"
NO o
r-,
>
',I) 1,/"'
f>
,e-,
1<:"
~"
~ tz',
.....
1,'-'
'\.,
,'0
V H ,'>
. ,',I" .
"
"c-
'
<
t-
~
'\
~
L:
.002.003 .005
.~
.01
"
..
.02
.03
Q.
..../

.1. 0
...z
<'6
;:::
17.
. p)r
Q:
J.5
l.O
.
,
"
./
--\
'/>.'1.
1\
!>.'1.
<.J
....E
'Z
r,
...z
<,
,\."
5. 0
..,<::>
'\."
I::
'"
t-
UI
V"'-"
~,')""~~.
-
R1:>'''-
0'"
'
"
II' "",'
.~~ ~
0.5'
.001
000
.~
I)< 0<
b%> l!'
~t -
/.7
' /5
I.J
1.1
0.93
0.8\
0.70
0.61
'W
~ r--'
I~
"
i.II
b ( ' ,II r-, "
~.,- ~ ~;
'\75 .:
-
l/
t-,
'/'
~
,
~. .
1\
.. _"
y::<>"
.J
L,
0-'
.....
,~
~
et
~i
...
z
;=
.....
'" '"
'"
,,X"
'"
"
1\
f\ ,C;'I>(J ,0"
1.1 ,
i7
-
0
0
11
"
"'-'to
w
>-
'"
'"
if~i\ljZ .V II"
<, \
;..._ ,
><
<,
... ""
0
\
Ii K
D'.- "
IX '
" -- '. k -, 1\ I.";:;' 1\. 1
200
/: ):::-; I) f\" l/ "
JOO
~~
, /
a, <;.
t[/T-
=n.G=
0.53
"0
w
'-oJ
"w
a
::
::>
::
x
-c
::
"0
w
::
;:::
..
.O~ .07.1
.2.3.5.7
\0
LOAD DURA nON TO FUNDAMENTAL PERIOD, TIT N
Figure 3-226

system for bilioear-triangular pulse ICI = 0;681, C2 = 1000.)
'e
nME or YIELD TO;LOAD DURA nON, t(/T

<f'
oJ'
0
V'
....
....
oJ'
a.
~.
...
~ ~ ~!=' ~ ~ ~ ~
(.lot
NN
- '... u . . N N ~ln~oi..nN tD-..&UI
o 0 VIOl VI (J'l 0 G\
00
VI
Oll' O'l
~o
v
~,.
"'..
00
00
0
'"
1/
:z
0-
<,
.....E
w
>(
<,
-I!"''fb<'L1 II" I R L
i 10
I l
a:
w
>(
e,
z
o
t:
j,-
o
z
l.."'J'tv
-'
-'
0-
0Z
>-
i=
u
i=
u
lS
-'
l..
W
L-
k:::
IV"
L.-
Co
::J
~
::J
~
>(
l~
-,
><
in
:::f
L-
w
:::f
=11.
p/r
i=
0.7
o.~
.00 ,
' I -_-I
.002 .003
I " _" I I
.01
.oo~.
J
.02
I
.03
"
.os
1 II I
.07.1
1 JIII'I I
.2.3.~.7
J
2
1
3
LOAD DURA'nON TO rUNDAMENTAL PERIOD, TIT",
Figure 3-227
'Maximum response of elasto-plastic. one-degree,of-freedom

J 1 Jill
7 10
TIME OF YIELD TO LOAD DURA. TlON. ttiT

..
..o
<1'
0
V'
.<1'
0(7\'-"'
500
.....
Ilc "7 !\T'll)l

(\ \
300
4oJ>I
~~ ~
~~
<,
10 0 1"f:-1-'r''k-'t--l'\--!'1
z
o
70
50 hl\t-Afl--'dj.-',\l
r\l/
. .
U)
......
lIlu, . . . O '" '"
~~
\H
. 1)<
<,
? ?
0\
... v
D
-;
u.. 0
(7\
\-.V
1)< <,
I'..
"'-
..
I')(:
I'.... V l'><
t><
l1\
OOVlU\l.Jl
7'
V'\ V
00000
N"N
f\17~I)<
I)
..IVJ 1-11/
3~
k b< 1"-I K II .~~~':'~
00
000\
OUI
v
.-1
"" V
~~
,'>
,;
"f V: /'
"q.'>
......E
'b .1-
. vfZv~EL~[;?
1,\
6.1.
5.3
t:
W
...J
4.6
'"'.
CD
'"
c,.
...J
W
>-
2 0 Y-'~t.A-IAfi
:1
\)'wf#7'1
J: s
J: o
IZ
N \IN <'6
10 -tl/I--Aila.
ID'
.-
"
iV
...J
::
:::>
::
::
j.-'
~J\F':::
...
'~
0.7
<.J
<,0
...w
1.3
1.1
0.93
0,81
0,70
0.61
0,53
t-,
i=
u
1,7
1.5
u,
W
::J
c-
...J
Izw
Z
o
Z
'"w
11.
4'0
30
I-
::
u,
o
o
I-
<,
...J
::
::J
::
::
...
0
.::
t:
-",
j~'--
.0.5
.001
.002.00l .005
.01
.02
.03
.05 ,07
,I
,2 . . 3 . 5
,7
10
LOAD DURA"TlON TO FUNDAMENTAL PERIOD. T/TII
Figure' 3-228
Maximum response of elasto-plastic. one-degree~of-freedom

system for bilinear-triangular pulse (Cl = 0.619. ,C2 = 1000.)
e
.
'

.r
V'
o.
....
'"
... a.
0
N
'"
'"
'" 0 "'-' 0 u. u. '-'
'"0
td T
0000
'" N
l.D"-'U1"
OOUlt,l\
'."
000
N
"'-
'"
'"
'"
O'
00
000
Ul ..
00'1.,00
"'''''''
0Cl' O.
0 ....
0",-
IA
~
/NYI"'i'
JOO
200
w
c
<,
N<1lX'h
E
sc
. ~
,c:
u
u
--'
u
100
Jl
U,,"IIIINn I I
Y1:xw
Z
I-
<,
...,E
a
o
II J,."l..L1.LLIU...Il........i:t'/Nf,A Y
H7 .........,.1I-.Yl~ b.l.
- -_.
70 I"''kf-'g
..J
cr:
rHA13"..J)'1t.JrPlf4IJJ,.,......:K11 ""M
~O
46
r,
Cl
co
,
...'"
cc
l>:
w
a..
I~
w
:f
cr:
jO
2:
::>
o
I-
--'
u
L..
f-
z
o
...
t:
u
e:
u
u
--'
'u
W
..J
L..
W
:f
::>
:f
:>:
::>
~
x
cr:
L..
:f
><
""
~
w
:f
i=
07
O.~
g_
. ....
l7,
.001
.002 003
.OO~
.01
.02
.03
.05.07.1
.2.3.5
.7.
LOAD DURAllON T~ FUNDAMENTAL peRIOD,. T/T H
Figure 3-229

57
10
TiME or YIELD TO LOAD DURA TiON, lEfT
- 000000
.s-
0'
lI'
l1'
t...J
0
C1'
'"-lcn""t..otNN--
.
."
CD"lJ' ...
V4N
.......
0
lJ\
VI"
0
IJIN O O U l l / l .
(J'l
-.
0
Vt
~.~M,
'''-r-'Ft**~~rA~IT
B
.....
.. -.-.. _..
..
'iJi
"'J Al'-Jll)
.. . V" JV JlJ lJt'....I M LYI [')( II n
. V'l.IIMJrNrAF
,
.... ~' 'H.fl\)( IIJ-tl
----.-.--~
,)( 11 ),.,/ "'"A I
E
W
><
l\.l-1
<,
><
.-l
u,
...,,
'"
0>
0>
'-l
Cl
--'
,..
~J
")Q.
tf\-.. liN Ll'1'ilY1~

.01
""'
I'>
I I ""1'111
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~'t'~<~.
In-.
'1
I"X..
J I
.I.f
lui,11
II
000
N--
0"''''
... co en
VI
...
COllloe
o.
~
}Z::uY
--'
L.
W
:>'
::>
:>'
><
-<
:>'
'1'/
I I K:: II I;; I )(: I
....E
IA.o4I/
J9
Ill' I ,.,
:AI
Cl
o
~1~'1
I O.L
cc
W
:>'
....::>
o'
,J
i-
-~
I-
t:
u
w
....w--'
Cl
t-
~
r\
~'Ii
"""rl;l?l~A~./
l:O'""1Ffl' I II.<
1\
--'
I-
lS"?f'hIl'!l'\;..4..'7I'-
I?
Z
I-
<,
~~~_J(.~c._
Q.
':.2
..
mf!
11'IIV111"'~ ~
A'
I I b I 12 Ibf Ibf:>F
o
Z
_.~_._~~~
I-
000
'" N N
p / r I ';"'ii.
:>'
::>
:>'
:>'
....
o
w
:>'
i=
0.7
0.5
i====
.00'
.002.005 .005
.01
.02 .05
.05 .07.1
.2.5.5.7
71,
10
LOAD OURATiON Tq rUNDAMENTAL peRIOD, TfT N
Figure 3-230
Maximum'response of elasto-plastlc. one-degree-of-freedom

system for bilinear-triangular pulse ICl = 0.562. 'C2 = 1000.)
_
tdT
TIME or YIELD TO LOAD DURATION:

6'
500
\1'
;0
...
0
v<
0
j,/<--.lVI"f-.:'-=1Ii"-k
f'\
iJ'
J'"\ V\
(\ 'j.
'" ,\
"('f)(
'\
\--/1\-
200
l4~ ~~\)\
-K \1'\ Y '~,xil\
70
.'"
50
l'
to
'"
0>;::
20
1-
~
.,u
-,
.'
\:
0"
\
X' f-
Y, /
. -
[)<'
. 1>- eX
l>
Cl
;~
If\...
VI
VI
0
....
tH
??
VI
VI
N
(J'I
N
0
O?
--.O"l VI
0 0
0
0
0
..
0
/" ~
;;~ V
J" If 11.
I'
lA'Vj'/
fiY /
t2
.I.
l' ~
\~
I
"I
00
N N
.. 0
tH
f/ IV
"
r-,
V
0
UI
0
0Cl 0'1
0
VI
D/ J
\'
'~
b<
V I'>(
[)< P'-Vi>
k/ P'v
t--.. V-I/o c.<
<::? v
1,( i>. 17" k'v'
vb
~[)'
\\
V.
~.~)
&1
7. \
....
62
'"
S. 3
'1
v::
-
v-
I-
Ai
"...-; .---:
I-
~j/ lI' I'<l
I-
I--' /
V ,....V
,,-,
r--"'"v........ ~
b'
I-~
8: I-'
b"r::: ~
A"'-
":6'
1/
..
'0
L :-
.J
. .1
.J.
1-
V 1/
1.1-
..l.1 . '
~~'\10
'::. ' t
p/r -,.
o .53
j::- ;
. ~..
-J-
.002.G03 .005
.0'
.02
.03
.05.07.1
.2.3.5.7
lOAD DURATION TO rUNDAMENTAl PERIOD,
Figure 3-231
TjT N

system for bilinear-triangular pulse ICI 0.536, C2 1000.)
0.93
<t
OBI:'
0.70
0
0.61
u
.'0
V\,
1.1
\.
\ 1\
1::-
.OU \
a
...
::>
I\:;
l.-
' 1 . 5
. rj/
I. 3
P<- 1\
~
~
""
'i
1.7
F'"
..\.
;;
r-
1~_
0:)
~l----
<.6'
e. 3
:t 0
1;::-,:;
/'--['--"1
g
!z
VI/... 7
HIM1i-'~
'~~ '"""..<0
Ij.f
P'
c-\
1;;:::.i--'"
i~f.-'
......
0
Ie
i?\.~\g~
~
II
"
:;:
:l'
i'><
1:>'
'/-. X
l2 -,'
,lV!IV
/ I> ~
lX"d (X~.,
!j
U t-, VD<
, _,,,,-
, ~ -- "V. V
- " ' i L ",./
/'t~-_.
10 .: Y
7
'IJ<
'I\.
ui\i \ V
I'"
,..J
N
W
\D
'--:\~
JO
V'
lD
0
IX.
,\ 'f,/_
? '<? '?
/
~
1'\
,- "ii
1","\\
'j
1'\)\
)I--....!L\ ,~, '\ V

. l'
c
100 k /IV \t'\~
\
I\.
""
"iI--1\;! f _- - ,7.
.~
Vo
JOO
-c
-...l (f\
....
V<
N
N _
....... 0
VI
(Jl
-...l
0'1
o.?,
10
r::
e0
500
'"
0
,.., ,..,
V'
'"
200
w
sc
><
z
0
;:.:
u
w
-'
t.,
w
0
...,
..,..,,
-'
>-
IAI%l4:~f;;0/ t7.
r-,
I----L
<,
100
70
50
30
20
~/I\'i
.\/1----0 L,~
,-
-'
w
0
:>'
IJ
/X
1/
It.
I"
,,'
L,
I r-,
17
<.u
t-,
"
o-
"""
...0o . ..
00
"'
00
NN
o~
\;
v.. . Ij
~~ ~
"
1/
1/
\\
9. 5
B.2
if
7.1
1.-1
~
' i c:: 12 j;
'v
III
..
00
DO ' "
0 U'
Ii
If'.
......
00
6.2
1>
k. J) ,I><
r-,
K 7
i)(L/"
~
17
1../
~~
,c,
I-I--
17
i/ V D'V (><,.< .
IP
'
v
V
r~ l7
t-- I-l
t:I
~v
L--
hft:vv~
II
'6'
....
,7
1/
":0
r-,
J: s
J'.o
;1,&;
~-'7~~M~~
l.t
b~~ r-t>_ h'l---
'r VI
U Ir
?- V.
I--
t...
t...
<'6
<.J'
2.0
"
1.7
I.s
I:J
1.1
0.93
0.81
0.70
0.61
. "'t::-
V
V
i-
-:...,
. . . \ - ' 1 _ - HI\-
:::::----1.---
I\
1\
PI: Il
\ ...
..x
..
. L.-'
\.
1';I"'- ~
.....E
o
cc
Q.
S:J'
:15
....z
<,
''')
c::::1
t~ CJ..:
0.7
'
"' ...
v
o'
.. .
])
I/(/}/ ._: .
I"
II)\.
I><
/
I$;hif+,.rl:>'"
/ 0,
5
6
~.
r.:Y:::
'"
00
'"
"fir>'
K'
r.x
l'X /
I\\-II ..
J
'\\[~
/ -I j
)<
...
f~~ r- "tv r-
LX' 'lX<,!Y'1 l/
11'\ r\ 1'\1/
X I>
1\"
$<IN7
A IV
><
'
::J
:/1\
Ii\'~ Y.. . y \ .f\

bl\'x .7' t/D< '
f--
I\
!V:~~kX.: .
r-,
'"
l!"hl-~ -/ 11' \I!' 1/
~ lX'J 11
JOO
tci
TlM( or YI(LD TO LOAD DURA TlON,

T
,'t .
~.~ ~~ ~ 0 0
....
... N
N
;.., ;..,
C;;
<; :.. 0 v- v- :.. 0 lAt...a clO-...aUl"c.....
o t.l'UI UI
0
'"
11\
V"..._
0.53
p/r =:n'.
-'
....Z'
'
::J
:>'
;<
'
...a
w
:>'
i=
!=
0.5
.00 I
.002.003
,005
01
,02
.03
.05.07.1
.2
,3
LOAD DURATION 'TO rU,N.DAM(NTA~e(RIOD,
Figure 3-232
.5.7
",
10
T/T N
Maximum. response of elasto-plastic. one-degree-of-freedom

system for bilinear-triangular pulse (C1 = 0,511. C2 = 1000,)
o
TIME
'"o
'"
0
OJ'
,.,
'"
CfI
"""
or
--
YIELD TO LOAD DURA TlON: t[/T

L
-r
00000
'Icn.lolNN--
....
~'
'
UI
11I.......
..
0
Q........
."
UI
U)~U\.lH
0
0 VI IJI l/l
N
_ ...
000'1
O'IoO'lVtoU\
~olLLLR'.l ~ji~ I~'
"'~
. ":J W\\V \l1l't1JNJ 11 '
_~tt?tf-tJrXI:
sc
.,1)<
<,
k'
E
><
z
o
OO~
0-
,-'rl
,.,
--'
k
W
1/
k:'
--'
'"
.....
'"
>-
o
o
;=
w
..J,
,.
,.
,.sc-c
::>
... 0
Z
0-
II
<,
....E
6.;
o
Q:
0..J
<{
0-.
Z
<{
,.
1:tlt~~~\7
0-
z
o
n-
;=
..J
k'
17
.I
l/
,.
~IV
\
::>
x<{
~~'
2,
,.
,.
r\
,.
P I r ~ ';;"1l,
t:
,.
o7
0.5
.t:::
.00'
.0,'
.002'.00.1 .005,
~
Figure 3-233
.02
.05.01" '.1
.0.1
.2
.. 1 . 5 . 7 . 1
LOAD DURATlON TO RUNDAMENTAL PERIOD.- TIT",

,
'
'j
~.
::>
I.
W
00
NN
"
0-
.Z
0<
I1W
3111l IlJ
r-t...
00.0
r-,
~~~tt7'~~~f'-iIS*4~~m~4fIJ
.,I/I'll 'J.fNJ I
"",
U'.
~~???oo 0 0
Moximum response of elasto-plastic, one-degree-of-freedom

system'for,bilinear-triangular'pulse (Cl = 0.4&7. C2 ~ 1000.)
,0
'.~'
...
TiM( or YI(LD TO LOAD DURA TiON", t[/T

cf'
lJ"
...
500<l>R=::Y
I"
...,.. . t'-l
Dll'
",.
;;. "0 ...

:-.... '"
0
............
\V"{XI\VllVIG
I'IIIAI
f{
..
'11I1\J7IINY
" '" 0'V:
v-
... "' .
a-a
'"
-0000
l1' l1'I
v-
'" '"
00
"'v-
00
0
0
"''''
0 ' " '"
v-
00
NN
.. 0
\>
x'"
<,
<
z
sz:
"...Iil fl{ I ..~,
50
rI"'~>,i-~~-".jf'"
.3 0
1f11'i1:'P\~LtJ<~~\[;~Ull
1/1V1 Lr JU--1II U/
Y-
J\,}'
f:;H'"M>:b-lf'::Jf1+-
-.J
LU
'",
'"
'"
'"
0
-.J
U
>0
f-
0
~
L-
20~
10~~~,
f',
ETI
. 7
::>:
..
oi'
2'
'\I
J \
~-\
-Lll-\
1\ .
II
V \:' ~
::>:
fqJV1
-l-:
::>:
OJ
.~
['7
<=
-.J
L,
W
il-U-lllL
~-,
"
r-,
'\ \
,;'
i?1.-"
.-t'
7't: .t' "'.
:v
\~
IT" 1\
""""l::::l
\
--,,\'~
. p(rl::b..
d:
.. 3 . 5 . 7
, ,
,,
0.5
.. 001
._.002 :'00.3 .005
.01
.02
.0.3.05.07 -.1
.2
2.3
to
LOAD DU(lATiON roruNDAM(NTAL P(RIOD. T/TN
Figure 3-234
Maximum response of elasto-plastic; one-degree-of-freeaom

TiME or YIELD fD'LOAO DURATiON, t('/f

,
'"
0
500
U'
0
r'_.
E
>< \00
II:: .1 "
70
1\ "-
r-s
50
~~ii
20
f--
\0
u
w
;=
,w
~
><
e>
J<:a
. /'
>5@
_,(
I~o
o,
00 \
0000
:~ ~~lA"
0 0 1IIU1
0'000
N' N :- -
'"
'"
~ . ,,~ ~~ ~
D<
1/
II
r-;
O'IoO\u.
I II
)("-.1
II ...... /
,,y
'(
1'-
V.
....
'.
IV Y
NN
.. 0
II
9,0
Z
B.2
1"
,,",
YO" P .I'
V:;i//z"
II:-
)<../
'oJ'
'~'- v ~
"-.IK
t>
iY
\
i \
'
-,
vr--Y-a-vy.<r:
....,l.-'"
.J,o
I---.
~'6
;'.1
I--
;0
1,7
~> '<:\--.
1.5
./
\.
,0 r
,02
,0'3
'LOAD DURATiON
Fi gure 3- 235
L.J
:O~
,07
,I
.2
,3
ro rUNDAMENfAL PERIOD,
.,~
'.. 7
I '"
f/f N
Maximum response of elasto-plastic. one~degree-of-freedom

system for bilinear-.triangularpulse (C1 = 0.422. C2 = 1000.)
Iq
...J
-c
f--
zW
~
<>:
CI
::>
L..
f--
o
o
t:
-'
L..
L.J
1.1
)(
0.53
- ,
.OO~
l>:
::>
0.70
0.6\
.002003
1.3
0.93
O.B 1
\ .
">. x:xr'>:'P I ( ~
'-
J: s
/ "-
V
/
r'
'0
"k
f;,
~I~-
'6'
rX
"" ,; """'I '" ,.

:..a:
-ff
~'
l/'
,C
,/
f2 '
\ \ \ 1\ \
"-.
....E
c,
oS'
<0
1-
a
~<
: / '
'k
f./
I"
'7
00
'" 0
'"
'" 0 0 '"
Cd
..
r; ~ / : ~ r,t
~ " ) ~~"
{/ L-f 1/
1A' /I " / IIJ,,~lffi
I?
1/
-;;
I I
1/
k' / 1>;.... ~h-<

"v
1'--7>/1><""
"
~ y"" _
V
,,~~:.. ' L
~
,-r
Lc::'
7
./) ,)'",~".
11/
i';.<fr;
r-,
N
':'"
.",
D<
K.' r-, ' .:-.
'" 1/
~_ is ~/-:?
M
'
\'7'l /"
,-/J
, 3
'r" 1/ J
I'--
~/'
~~
.-,
'"
l/
I'.
'\. :
I Y.
r-;
_;Lr/
A.../
.I ,V
""
JI. .
~Q
.' ... .
'0 :.; '"
0 '"
..,
r-,
:l'
::>
'
'X .
f-/
-'
CI
-,'"
,,_:Xl
1~~'iX <'
\ <1/ 7
30
CI
'" ,.
..,'" 0
'" Z
'"
t\
. 'j'
-'
w
a.
\ / "j,'\.;"
.
'Y--.
V'M'. Y
~
<,
CI
rA--\~bl
~~ /
w
><
'-'
w
-'
L
J:.l. IV' v. IV Y
17~ : ~ I~~') \V
200
f-
v'
'lL~
;00
l-
-c
"
.L..
:::f
~
TiME or YIELO fO LOAD DURA TiON, tdT

0;
..
...,.
v'r-J
.........
Oli'O
Q'V"
'W'l L
500
~t'~- fi [{I~
---4.l JII
300
200
'-E
'"
z.-
0
,_.
u
w
-'
u.
w
0
...'"cc
\00
70
50
30
-'
w
>-
20
0
f--
Z
C'
\0
f--
0
~
"
><
4:
::i
Vl
.
-oJ
0
V\N
.L'J.
[7< 1-
-IX-V\-,
i~
~ r\
I\
'.
t:
""
k:
I"
<
I~
~ t1--
. 0.1:\:
'" l-\
00
000
VI .
V.
oUtOO
Lf::.A e:
').
N.N
~
0
r: It:::
f"1
1\
LL
T"
j"
9.5
I-"I-":VV(",...V L>:t 'a.

r/
t' r- y
iI'
8.2
:>.,
f-
."
a
V ~~tf
t:~
_
L'-
0:"
'"
W
0..
."
c.
..
J'
'or
,-'-~ P
' - ' . ~.
k:::
'7
f6,k
v...r:: V
<"'. rM
~ _I' ~
t:: :; rr "
. "'1.
~
,1
..;;
~
I<:';
.i!l.
f1]
\)
0:: 0
'2
\.
:l;;rl';ll
'"a
L.-
.J. o
I'
<.6;
<.J
u
w
20
1.1
'.5
!:::::
~ If l!2:::\
..I.6\,
. C-.'
k:--
::i
j~ I'
tl t1
/1l21'
";:::
I.L.
':6'
-c
~..l.
..J
4:
f--
. LL l ~
I"
-1d:
..,l
1= ~ R::: ~
r""" IT;:.c\
1.3
1.1
1\
0.93
0.81
0.70
0.61
0.53
f-
f--
..J
L.-
::i
:0
:::f
><
::i
L.-
w
:::f
~.
=:r:::.
:t==
.00.2003 .'005
IL
ot.::
p. t'S::~
...... OQ 0\
. V111
.
1;,( IL
j~
.00"
N -0 0'1 VI
1I
0.1 ~
c. s I::::::"
01
ILI.j
.:1
~I\Y"~c
-~
~
f-:'
000
[")I
c_.e:r-
.~~.
N
V
0
.
'-""
V\
'. liI,JI\/v
,\,- >1
ki
~_c \~
...... 0\ ...
Oll\U\
'K tlI<I r-
IVUii'W
I')
100
0
P<I)
0'1;" lA" " _'" r- _,~ ,

Li'\;
"
IP l0
VIX JI\V'
- ,," l"
')
r- ,.. ",t;.
7"
e
t.1
1(,.
k',.'i-L i- .~ I.'
~v
.
3
2
~~l '. - cj'r,'
:0
::i
....,J
'
VI
_J
}J
- Il '
-
~L~ . ./-I\ J~\' ~v ~

"~V\
[j
x:
I!\"_\~f\&'
_'i.
00000
-lOl"'\..HNN--
.0 \
.02
.03
.05.01
.1
.2
.3
.5
.1
2'
10
LOAD DURA TiON TO rUNDAMENTAL PERIOD, . TIT N
Figure 3-236

system for bilinear-triangular pulse (Cj = 0.383. C2 = 1000.)
I;
TIME or YIELO TO LO"O OUR" nON, t((.T

e-
.J'
..o
v'
r-J
c.J'
...
:--&.?'
(J\
V'
-.l
u.
l1\1Jl
~
-.l
~
0
00000
00
(Jl
~:- ,,-,to
U\N
:.... i..n ;.. i.... N

(ftu\
""
oo~~oo 0 0
;"':"'_-(17\
o(7\l"I,
00V'
'"
o
00
'" '"
o ..
'"
",**H-4f+!-J1.I+-H'lM-A-lFI.oA--lf""l<
9.5
' . \Vll 1"1 /1\ 1/\.1 A 1'\
'"E
'"
z
>-
w
--'
w
0
0
--'
w
>0
>-
if '\J Vil.1tl1'\..V1 \)'
,-
<.n
'"
>:,
J...j
'"
<,
...,,
8.~
~-M
.....
'of
.1'-,
r.,6'
1/'1)
w
--'
L-.,
L.
0,_
::::>
:):
'"
~o
1.1
/.5
1.3
I. I '.
i ~.93
.~
'-J',.
0.7
...
05
.00 I
.002.003 .005
.0,
.02
.os
.05.07.\
.t5
.2.j.5.7
LO"O OUR" TlON TO fUNDAMENTAL PERIOD. TIT N
Figure 3-237
0.8\
0.70
0.61
0.53
p';r I ';11..
-,

system for bilinear-triangular pulse (el = 0.365. C2 = 1000.)
zw
:):
~.,J
<
:):
>-
I.-
<.;'
:):
...I
<.
J: s
J: o
""
.....
'"
c,
<
>-
":0
"-
.....E
0
6'
S'
~I\'\
>-
5"7
10
::>
0
>-
Z
;::
u
...I
I.-
::E
::>
::E
-<
::E
1.-'
o.
w
::E
t:
0'
-s:
0
..
THolE' or YIELD TO LOAD DURA nON,
v ,
v
o
f'-l
IJ'
f'-l
~.
Q'I
VI
_
0,
;:--i
~
en
a
U\
.~.~ ~
Il.,
....1'
NN---oom
OU\NOOUlV4Ut
. _... _.._.
0d\X"f1 D
II
??O?Ooo o
0
0.
00 0
N
_
.
\D'lUl-'\.H.
..... ~
c..n'"
UlOO'l(.HOUl
..._. ..- .- ..
. .-r-- . . . -
-- .. .
'\
tdT
I 1"1.1 ,...
1'\.1
I I
Wlv
0
lJoI.
00
N N
.. 0
/f/,
._ . ____.
v - _ _ .VAI:
~
- - -
9.5
2:
. .
f-
I--
i"JI
l\
0
Ul"
o 0
<,
~~:Itzf::+~
litAR
...
~I~ .
./
:,0
I Y~'a. JIh.
t:
,I'll AI Nl
.J
" 11'l.ll W II lIlV
'"
a..
'"
\..'-I/.~I
IYI"IIl../1
PJ)
l~
'"
>-
o
,-
ILll/~
z
o
:I
t:
.J
.L.
W
-A,,~. "
:

'J-
~III/
.J
.s
JI
11.v
\)[1 i1 ~
W
I.
W
o
0-
....E
><
18
\~
,1\
::f
L..
w
::f
p/rl ';ll..
0.7
o 5 .j::::;
.001
'.
.002.003 .005
.01
.02 .03
.05.07.1
'
Figure 3-238
4'
.2.3.5.7
, i
i=
10
TIT II

system for bilinear-triangular pulse (CI = 0.348. C2 = 1000.)
..
e
riME or YIELD TO LOAD DURA nON, tdT
0'
oJ'
0
..o
v'
....
....
oJ'
z,
(Jl
..
Loo
0",
Ull/I"'"
y)
~ ~ ??
XI\ It'll
_ IIX II AN.IIAlf,U I
All
JJI
A'\.lfl
I\lI'
III"
IIIII~
? ? ? ??
~,~~l~~~-~
._._-. . __
z
o
~
..J
L
W
...,,
....""
'"
'"o
IV'
~..t
~I
2:
I-
<,
-HL
....E
n
...
30
_. . .
-fftbmt
_-
...'"
Q..
...
-- -_.
- ._. . _. --
... _-_.
10
"'
...
::E
r-
...::>
a
I-
.... _.
.-
. _. __...
a
u
~\/f~
t:
........:J
o
[:c~~*t1
.. J,...of'""I.1 ---t-"'lV---It'""".I........--
n
:>
<
eW
..J
L
....J
I-
'oj
<
o
'-l Yl 'j.j,( Ub:
,..
J'
bi'
20
,)
......
..
00(:)
!.,o
. -
..J
U
, ff..:-'\(J I A '\..1 r lI"!WAf V-'; .' I'''''' 1 Id

<l>A"I-.J I IV! '!I ~ I V I '1'1'...-1'1 Y..I'f VIlA vt' LA- I.
,..
O.
'"
o
"tr
. ___... J-:
_---- VI\~
__ . . . .
_ ...
..
.. ... ... .. . . ... .-Ill N'-t+7'IM'I
l N)( 1l'iJ ~..

IXJAI~
..... N t - J - - - Q l J O \
(,HUlOo\t.M00Ul
...... lII~
OUlNOOll'l"oi
V ~A
I\IA\I
/ \ "l-..!/t...l1""-
::E
::>
::E
::::J
)(
:>
'"..
<
"
:>
~
0./
..-
<,
I \I
-, .....
'"
1'-
,,
::E
i=
-c-r:::~:t-
k-:t'4 I IIIII-l
.002.003
.OOS
.0\
.02.03.05 .07.\
.2.3.5.7
I W-J
LOAD DURA lION.TO rUNDAMENTAL PERIOD, TIT N
Figure 3-239
...
'\1'\1\
o. ~
.00 I
""\
...o::E

system for bilinear-triangular pulse (CI = 0.316. C2 = 1000.)
\0
TIME
O'
.J'
0
.. . .
o
Of
YIELD TO l.OAD DURA TlON,
..
~r.J--_
O\J'OlJ'lV40~
,00
01
...
l.1t
lJI
l/l
"'-I
__
..
.lJIN
tdT
? ?
~ ~.?
00
U)~1II'"
I.A
VI
'"
VI
~o
lIIU1
, ... ~
0
o
--OJ.,..
'"
0
III
o
..
.._
( IIX I /1I'lIlIl'NL.I'
INI 1111 I V 1/
.-~"fI-1+f'1h::H'-H---,J,h-ll-!M"l,fI,..A~ll
!\" JoI ~/I '\If .lK.".!1'Nf liP'"" . " "

.to.....ll~
j(JQ
no
'"o ...... ....0
;,r;:
t IV'iLlNiI Ilfl
>-
<,
.....E
sc
<,
oz
u
e'
..J
II
,0
".f\r-Y<J
'"
'"
0>
o
>-z
o
i=
u
,oJ
....W..J
a
l'nJ'r"o..-l
~
1lW-'.
1"1
IA'I
I"~
VAJ,.../,
'-H ~ 1.J:1tJ
'P%1'P/1. .I. .%
Wi'
JV'
VJ.I1j
~ II
VII....". 6
.
l ....
I
, ..
I
~~
.\0
V-
20
od"'"
N/I'\
------..
.....-::::I::::i
II
I-
...
o
I-
ll~
- . .1
i=
o
j
...w
a
r=r=J.
"
::l
:E
::l
><
.\
~
~ p/r
\1\
1'-
.'-
[
.0 I
.02.05
.05 .07
.'
~
.2
.5
lOAD DURA nON TO fUNDAMENTAL PERIOD,
Figure 3-240
.5
.7
lJ~
._'.~ -l~ \.~ __: :~_1l'_
o7
...J
::l
,[
I --A--1l
Of
"-c
"'"
..
l. 0
pt::;..
..
.
7
A A't-..c:.1 A"""-
Q:
Ii:
Z
W
O!
1-'"
I-,.
\0
-s',J-
.i.
f--
e,
...J
~
...
10
e.
a
a
o'
II
_..NIK NYN:I Lfi-.ll,11111A-1- 11
E
>< 10 0
....
o
='~
c:
TIT N
Maximum response of elasto-plastic, one-degree-df-freedom

5 .1
\0
f1ME or YIELD fO LOADDURAftON. t d f

0'
<1'
'"
...
r-JO;~o:...ao
o
'"
0'<1'
'0-0
00
!"'~~!".l:""':-lD:""Ut"'",,"
fJI
tJl
-....10
V\N
VIOl
lI'
to
....
"'.0
00
:"':"00 Ol
u \ N O O Ift
0 0
o
lJ'
o
o "0 (:)
'"o ...... ....0
0
..
_. 9'5
\ 17
rp"",n, }'l-f~Ic-,fh.-f lJi'<-jfP!H-bHlll"
SOD
""
,no
-"
...J
'"E
~.
'"
"
>(
.,.,
6'
\00
70
,-'u
W
...J
r.,
W
'",
'"
'"
'"
a
a
.\ 0
}O
-'
>-
IN.t11
r .
z
c:
lftt~~~
'6'
'0
~s
.t.
'0
~'fi
<.J
-l.
.f-
...J
L.
w
0
.
.
rr+_IlL'"
<0
~~-'Q;<M+;<R~F:;!?'Y4F
.'m
oS
'J"
1.7
1.5
1.3
I. I
0.93
0.81
0.70
0.61
::>
.5
'"
I\
I \
1\ \
,I\."I -,
v'
V'('
1\
p/r =rn-.
0.53
I-~....-r-=~I--
---_ ..
0.7
==
,.--r:::-t==
,
00'
.00200.5 .005
.01
.02
.0.1
.05.07.1
.2.3.5.7
LOAD DURATION fO rUNDAMENTAL PERIOD. f/T N
Figure 3-241
Maximum response of elasto-plastic. one-degree-bf-freedom

10
...z
<,
....E
a
0
'"
W
0..
-'
...
Z
::E-
a
z
::>
....
0
f--
z
o
t:
....w...J
'?
::E
::>
::E
><
::E
....
0
w
::f
t:
td(
nME or YIELD TO. lOAD DURA nON,
'"o '"
0
__
:--"(J\
OIJ'OO'VlO""O
V"~t..J-
~
"0
500
'bl\t-..l \ .,,~
.100 1\--<)1\ J ~/ K
I~SJ~~'~
zoo
1~--1):~,)(!, ~
w
><
<,
F.
><
z
f=
100
70
-'
I"
oj
W
0
0
-'
>-
z
0
i=
10
:::>
::f
...
.I
><
::f
VI.
rII
X
~
i7
VI',
'000
_ .0 0 0
.
.
L D ..... U' ...
lJ,iN
U'N
U1l1\
,..
en
It'
,/.
I~ ~l!
ViNI'..l
OtftOO
'I-
...
LV
[t ~
L-<
liY.. ~
t:I:,--
II l>
000
-OOO"llJl.
IY
--- [t
Y.
0000
cn,lJ,i
i/IL
Ii
1)1'
--
000
....a
1/.11'
I'
K (',
9S
t1 1/
V
I
\_
w:
I--V
t-.'
, .,
1--:7
~rs:~tf ~
r-,"'" k
-::
c<,
.>
....E
'" r7
rI
r;
r>
I-
17
I--
~I--Z
f?l~ 7"~ ~'F\V 1I
.v
I\
t-, 1'\
-,
-,
-, \. I'\.
'". \
.....
~ i'\.. K-.X k-:::
~ K) I::)..G ~
I'
I'\,.
l.f,
t/
I",
1>\
1\ ~
lK"
> :p I r
V'.
-J
0: 0
...
::
Z
L.
I'--
.f.
c-
<'Ii
1.7
I.s
1..1
'
~.
...
cZ
w
<0
'r
ki I> r~ ~"t-
De
"J
n,
-I--:
J"
',r
<.:5
"--
V-V 1/
---:
',.,
Cl
.f
1/ . '"
:.-0 V
e-
"
,r-.
-cv
'"
' (;'
~ 'tTvl" I)
~~
1/1'\
If
. "\( It
rJ
/.
f/;t
f--
:::;:
I. I
0,93
0,8 I
"I
0.70
1\
0,61
0.53
;: o,
a
z
o
t:
..J
L.
W
Cl
::
:::>
::
...::><
L.
.::f
c:
,DO I
::J "".17'" ~ It
.z
I,<9"
~I
.) I b
"i
~ p. '
><-
~ ~ ',-
0,5
1-]1,
_ . r"-
0,7
~/
r-,.
V' /
x
t:5:
/-'..-'
-'V
::f
\A)< A
-'
Cl
;t'-~
L.
tv
IJ
.'X 1\ I/~ ~
I)< rx) I"-
-(\y V [)])
"
20
c-
If
....
~ ~ o
..
I'\.
I'
J 1/
_.
)(\ I \\ ')c
~
It,( K\ ~ ~ 1)<
Cl
30
",
It~~(\~~'!..~\I~I'\~\i)iVl!",~V~~MIII~II~J."~~I}~~lla~v~IJ~I/IJIh!I~
V-:I'J&-~ I\](
50 Ii \ I "
u,
\\
.u,
-'
/-
V
,002,003 .005
.0 I
,02
,03
.05 ,07
.t
,2
,3
.5
.7
\0
lOAD DURA nON TO rUNDAMENTAl PERIOD, TIT N
Figure 3-242
Maximum response of elasto-plastic. olle-degree-of-freedo(l1

"
TIME OF YIELD TO LOAD DURA nos, tEfT
'"o
~
.0
U'
.... ....0
'"
,- '"
U'
'>"
'"
:""0
~VtNN~~
...
t.n :....: (:,
lI\N
0000
.
...
t,p"'-lUl'"
OOU\Vl
000
N N :..:..
o '" U'
'"'" '"
1/11 VJb~
500
2 0 0 ~+-ill-'\l>(..\
<,
z
o
70
e:
u
...J
...
t4;
. /\1'~
/\V Ill\,
"w
w
,
w
o
~ I/I~
j~~AA:A--~
00
'"
0
0 ' '"
" '"
o o
0
~
U'
....
N
0
iPfA,ff-:;.f'-;;.oWH /
...<,z
~LY
'"
6'
..-'
7/
'J-
'6'
o
o
...J
>-
o
1Z
._V.U __ A
,_~v
.-
__ ._-------
t:
.-o
...J
I
"
::>
...-r-ll
"
"
>->:<
.-.
-..
Lb
..
.,...
\~
I.
.~
,"-.
OJ
;:.,::::;
1~_"=
0.5
,00 I
,002,005 .005
.\ I ...."
/'
,0\
. ,02' .05
.05,07,1
.2
,3
".5
.7
3 "
LOAD OURA TlON TO FUNDAMENTAL PERIOD, TIT N
Fi gure 3-243
Maximum response of el;sto-plastic, one-degree-of-freedom

5 7 ,\0
....E
m"c or YICLD TO LOAD DURATION. tclT
...o
..
V'
r.a
loP
AI /'I. V\
N
0
\it.
::
011
en
00
..
Uf,N-
NO..
IV l>{ IX 1)<
><
E
><
z
0
bl:..
r:..-
<,
NN-
I-')(J\ l{V.V
UIi
OOUli""""'lv. 1lD
~~\~--Au1~n~'"
I/MNf'Al(
oob'oooooooo
", .
000000
N'O
:...a
::-=.
-0010"'\1'
aU''''''''' .....
_.
.~
00
...... ....0
Vl
.9
... I
~~H.II
~
IY'T ,u.-
-'
~~
i'-.
'"
6'
.
a:
.,
oJ'
'J-
50
....
....0
0
...
...J
I-
c:
W
...J
<.0
/.7
/.5
1.3
1.1
0.93
0.81
0.70
0.6\
0.53
......
L.-
::f
::>
::f
><

::f
><
'
::f
L.-
u
::f
;::
l===-
0.5 .,
.001
.002.003 .005
.~I
.02. . 03
.. 05.07.\
.
.2.J
..5 . 7 I
2. . 3
7. \0
lOAD DURAnON TO rUNDAMeNTAl peRIOD. TIT Il
Fi gure 3-244
Maxi~umresponse of eiasto~plastic. one-degree-of-freedom

--
TlM( or YI(LD TO LOAD DURATION,

01'
v'
....
....01' ....0
__
V'
-
./~
'"
....
ON:'"
CIOcn~
.
0
'"
NtD
..... "" ..
0 0 " - " \It
d\--t\lI-Hr'Ir--'ll!--i'V--fuJ'.ch'
17\rk1l'Xl bt' IX IN)
~,
z
0
""'........ ~
70
--.oMM\,j-J,I"""A-~wf--\.F"
-oJ
,..
0
f-
Z
0
1-
U
W
-oJ
L.
W
OOlH tD
--
:E
...... 0....0
',>
lI.1.?
\~
-'
'/
6"
',>
I/l~~
i-
'6"
~
'0
~y
VI
~ k\ d~n\ "
[)(
P'"'I
p./r
1\
-'~
---I
.1-
.001
~~llfliJI
:'
.002.003 .005
.0'
.02
.03
.05 .07.1
.2.3.5.7
,t
II
2
I II
J
LOAD DURi\TIONTO rUNOMIOUAL PERIOD, T/T M
Figure 3-245
w
'"

system for bi1inear-tri'angular pulse (C1 = 0.198. C2 = 1000.)
'10
-oJ
....4'
3
::f
....0
1.5
1.3
1.1
0.93
0.81
0.70
0.61
0.53
[J\'- Ik' .-:-
___
.J. O
1'X"-ll .I1'NU \I nt'l 1.7
[Y"17'~
0.7
...E
...:>
20
/ \'Il( \
....z
<,
J.,s
<'6
<'05
05
V4...,.
..... 0
0\\1\'"
VI"" U\
,::f
00
VI~
:>
0000 0
-01
lI'N
IIr
-oJ
L.
'",
0
'"
'"
....
Q.
a
a
h.
UiNN-
.J'
'J'
t:
u
W
<,
E
x
t[/T
_~~~?'~~~~oo ~o
l/
AI'\i1 "J
2
0
i=
u
\oJ
...
..J
\oJ
'0
::f
::l
::f
><
...
,0
w
::f
i=
,'.
'I
. ' ' ' '
"."
TIME or YIELD. TO LOAD OUR .... nON. tEfT
'"
500
300
<,
20
><
'E
><
z
0
;:::
."
,-'
u,
'w
...,
.....,.
0
70
50
30
w
>0
r-
20
z
0
f-
U
W
-'
u,
:>:
sc
-c
:f
t-.l
y-.J
l.1'
:,/~;:,I~
~f:\oA"'" 0" .
~LL.
1&-,
_,011
IJI
0.7
Jx Il 12
~12
"V
I.tl'
.LJhlJ
-; iLl
.r:
- : 17
'..,.g ,
I:ol~
r-", "",.
",po'
w-:
Di; , ..,,"
I;'c'
>"K
Ht<- r, r
'W.
"
'A - -
..
'~
'c::,
I=1
= - ,
F=-
I ", .
eo r
J,
" .
.01
.02
:03
r;
:"
6'
'"
-s
"
'J
~'
'6'
~b:
.~~"
s:.
+,05,07.1
rt
..
a:
w
11.
...J
-<
z
>-
:E
-<
Cl
"-
<'IS
<,.1
<,0
I.]
1.5
~"
<'< ._
Co'.
pl'L
Cl
.J. s
" " ' - ' . C'
"".D
....E
.J. o
z
>-
<,
W: O
."c
[l, C
IX: y tl
.1.
:>
o
z
a
t:
u
>-
w
...J
"w
:E
1.3
:>
1.1
0,93
0.81
0,70
0,61
0,53
:E
:E
"-
O.
w
:E
;:::
<::"4-
,2.3:5
LOAD DURATION TO rUNDAI.4ENTALPERIOD.
Figure 3-246
..
..-' B:
'"
-"
.002003 .005
",e
~4 ~ ~ ~ ~.~,~""'~~
~ v~
. -'
'X C ' , " '
r
uzr
-'
'-"
~ '"
0/
"
... u
c1 "
-""
."
<9
~ ~
"'.
"',
u.,Q
4- "' . .
~
;j.J:.
r,
~r:sl's'
,..tILL\.
'i=-
v.' j
""
e;
!'oJ
0
N
...
~"
r,
~
:~ i-.Ll
e,
0 0
~I'
Ji
.
::::::.. ~ z ~
"~ ~'A'
~
~..
~
~ ~. ~" ~"'->u
IX'.
<L'A~
~l<
~~~~'-'
=
"",,
V.,.[
. "".
0.5
.001
rJ
W. "'-'>4
L: ,
~'
IL
? ?
1\'" ' '

"
:xuu...
10
~!,,>.
N O N ......
'.Jl
0: 0
0 ~ ~
0 ~ ~?
0
0 0
0
-0
lD"'" 1Il ... lH N N.... -- CllI 0\ VI ..
VIlJl
NOOlllv.""COlHWlIlNOOU'lV"U\-.l
0
..... _
en
00
-'lL'.p '
F'.Ji',
"V~
"",
,~.
I I"
:f
::>
"e~
il,
..
I'Lj"
I~ISv~
LiJ!.-'/"1L
"t[, f\~ l
I"; V ,
I1\v,",
. " i>I:'
~<.
"
4
kilt V/", ~ ':::
100
a
a
-'
~
~
"
u'
po
,7 -
T/T N '
'2 " 3
10
Maximum response of elasto-plastic, one-degrec-of-freedom

.-
e
TlM[ OrYI[LD TO LOAD. DURA nON,
o
"o
sbo
1.J
r--.l
""
",
, 1~\T'1J:: Y~
U'
.... Vt N _ _ .
..
.'
..
\D ...... UI ...
00
N O N ...... NOOUl~
toen
......
tdT
~VWI ')<
1/
-0 0 0 0
0
0 0,"
...
...
..
000 0
0
0
v.NN-- - 02CJ'U''' vt.
\"
"'CllI\I<lIDUl N O
c U ' V ' lJ'
-.I
0
iNJII IYII
.
0
N
.
0
N
..
LI1JK llt--tY \ II'
.. 'm,n"
1/1
-l IN'.1I x\I IN '
'"E
'"
z
-~
....
IX
-'
L
W
o
a
'~1~
-'
w
>-
.,'~
f-
.s.
i-
~ 'R-\N
.
.
---
i=
.__
....l
....z
w
:20
l)
y --
---
'J-
~\\
U
W
'"
~i4V\l\
..... ,. _. IV1'IIA'
f-
o
0..
...,,
...,
....E
____________________ 3
-~~~
<,
....z
<,
~~
._--~\~
I~
:oJ
L..
....o
z
t:
u
...J
-'
L
- ----
-~
-~
"
!
.-nrJ.....-
.....
"
r"
:20
:oJ
:20
:oJ
'Y
.."""
I\
J\. \I\. 1\ \
c,
-1-'"
.00 I
,002 003
,00,
01
.02
..x
Maxim~m
:20
L..
w
:20
c:
,03
,0' ''-07.1
.2
,3
LOAD DURATION TO rUNDAM,[NTAL p!=nlOD,
Figure 3-247
1M
~,
0,7
o.s
rt~
,5.7
TIT N
response of elasto-plastic, one-degree-of-freedom

system' for bilinear-triangular pulse (CI = 0.162, C2 = 1000.)
10
. ',';'r i
"
"1','
<p,,;'" -,<t".:"01tlo""
~"~'4"". ~"''."I:t"'~W~-'''''''''1:n' -t;t.~i.'"
I \ '"
. ,.
TIME or YielD TO lOAD DURATION, telT

oJ'
u.V'
.!'DIIPbI--->,j\-f-ll,.<-+N
... --;;:;;;.!'lIl! I
. .z
a
tz
\q-
17
'v....
~
t'ftl7'~
~"""J- P>.4~-]f--
,n '.JII"<'-+'.4'''''A-+I:;K.~
mI
.~
~,
..-
Z
I-
<,
,E
....
o
J.--n\/
t--.lA '/\
It:
e,
-soJ'
::E
..J
L-
'<
a
w
W
'"
o
o
;;
a
Iz
'"
1'1. ....
i=
..J
W
..J
LW
I.-
a
z
a
I-
..,
t:
...J
I.-
'"
.fC:
:2"
~
:2"
::!:
=>
::!:
><
4:
::!:
...J
I-
:2"
fIT
8'
I.-
:::\1-\1\
:2"
;:::
1'\ \I\.
0:7
0.5
.001
.f-"
.0'02.003 .005 .
.01'
.02
.03
.05 :07.1
..,~
.2'.3:5
,7
. 2
.3
lOAD DURATlON TO rUNDAMf.NTAl PER10D. TIT N
Figure 3-248
Maximum response ~f elastv-plasti~, one-degree"of~freedom

system for bilinear-triansular pulse (C1 = 0.147, C2 = 1000.)
10
e
TIM[
~
0.
..
V'
t-.l
t..J
lJ'
t..J
lJI
Or YI[lD TO lOM DURA TlON. trlT"

ODCJl
00
...
00000'000000'
l#IoN--
.....
.I 00
.- .:-'P'rl~~--,\\,...--l~f1
MH~~'i;-}\jJ
200
!l=::\f-l----\:N
II.
1/
___
,,,,tt
, -'1rlb'ttlA-li"<1QHM--I
><
<,
><
00000
,
."
"" .... ua ... l,If.NN- - - CD O'll,ll'"
Ul
NQ""'''''''OOUlllo<",CDl.ItloDlftNOOUlUltJ!.''''''''
h'-
tool
Ul
0
----
if III
to-)
...
~m
z
o
z
>-
....)
~V\
'"
ll.
.s.
;:".
u
',j-
I~~
....w-'
....,
....
....o
000
:2'
IL
<r
CI
2!
CI
....::>
ft
1/
-'
o
....
>-
>-
-'
u,
.;J
....
w
rxt
.9
.::f
::>
:2'
::>
><
<I:
:2'
F
u
w
:2'
z
o
z
o
F
u
,w
-'
<r
....
z
.I !
2~,
1\
r-
"_
II
.002.003 .005
<r
.01
.02
.:03
w
::f
l..--1'"" I
.05 .01.1
.2.3.5.1
I ..
UlAD DURA nON TO rUNDAM[NTAl P[RIOD, TIT N
Figure 3-249
::f
u,
~I\"
I,"\j~
0.7 J~
0.5
.001
::f
Maximum' response of e l asto-p last ic , one-degree-of-freedom

10
nME OF YIELD TO LOAD DURA nON. tEiT

00000-000
'"
po
V'
....
l1'
f"oJ
0
U'
00
DltOl' ...
lJo4N--
......
I.D "l.n", \.MNN_

0
0
N O N " N 0 0.01. l.H ... 00 IN U) tJ'I NO
III"
...,
I I
.....V
II "W"L VI
0000'0'0'0'0
CJ)C1'lUl~~,",,~N
OU'U\U\~'O
..-0
III
-z
r-
~
__J~
J
,r :~~~
._- ---- ,n..I,.i 'roliiiii'iir"ii7
VII 1..1 111"/1 ";t." I. 1/1 'N:J II V IIIAlI3L
<,
....E
o
'"
W
0..
-'
~.
-c
r-
t\
-'
:::t:
L-
<t
...,
...o
0>
z
=>
a
-'
.~
r-
>-
,o..
,,~
--
ru
w
..
L-
f-
a
>:.
-_.v -_.
>'<-.Yf I IA!' lOY I
...J
II~
"
......-..-. '+q:>4\'f~""':'-'~44c~4loo!=Fl"A.d'~!:;K~
-'
LW
0'
=>
~.
><
LW
:::t:
=>
I\~\I
:::t:
n.'"' , ___
1\ I \ 1 \...1-1-
:::t:
\ Ir
<t
:2i
L-
Fil\
"'"
p/r
~N",\I\
- - --
w
:::t:
=' n-.
>:.
.,
0.5
.00 t-
.002.903
.005
.QI
.02
.03'
.05 .07
.1
.2
.3
.5
.7
10
LOAD DURA nON TO FUNDAMENTAL PERIOD.T ITN
Figure 3-250

e
~
t...lN-IJ'
0
V'
-
po
00000000000"'"
..
,
00000000
.. "'"NN----ClDCTiI,1\~V4~t_.lN
N O N " ' - & N O O U l L H .... OD(,rI,!,DUlNO
Oll'lJI
"'"
'-'
0
.. 0
caCJ\
-
. , N
I o-D
..... Ul
00
500
11. 'f; '"
()
300
1-l--'lLV,K
~I~~,"
200
><
<,
><
100
70
c:
u
w
....,
....
0
'"
-'
>0
30
20
I-
\0
'I--
U
W
-'
LW
7
5
::J
,~
.""
Vl
:-YC1l
., .
I~
~b1"-'
l~ ~ 1/ r-
~ / .1'
/ 1 7
I~n
r-
'll
r-
li: f'1 v Vi
2'" . 111""':
I/,~p,( I-'" VIP'
If ~
I"
I II
. fI.,/ c-....)'
~IT
I_I
Ii
!"
1/
i:
l'"'[
k::l
v.
r': fA
'.
""
~
l,.!) I-;
If
'.-'li
:J:-1
'\.
~V It
VlIAIAIII
L:.Lj,.
-=
0.7
0.5
.00 I
l'
'.J'
~,\
":",
~/ IX \V n I....
,/
cI.
t::
V
.L'<
K
1/
1::::.
V IX
/11"..i
,.....
I--
--
-\" =.ill
f-'
\ '
,.'I
~
It'S; '..\i ~ IX122'
v.1--L r7 11..
\--::
t:
u- -r- :::l: fr.l-,~ ?-'I'

~41-"
;f"
:~f'e'><~
""'~""L>
l'-:
,002.003 .005
.o r "
,02
,03
IL
f.,..\
l(4Q
, '.J'/';x I)
~V' 0~.Lt;
.
0:::::::
.s
1.
":0
J.s
I'W
~10 V~
.f.
1)<"
ILl.:: u.
.05.07.1
~v~
:/ X/ V/ v
.2.3.5.7
(\V
l/i': ~ .
~ 4:
''1
':.v'I
'l:
Z\
<.J
Q.
J.ll
;'
p
,
3
lOAD DURA nON 'TO fUNDAMENTAL 'PERIOD: TIT N
Figure 3-251

system for bilinear-triangular pulse
= O.llO. Cz = 1000.)
.E
.....
a
o
Of.
W
..
10
-'
I-
~
o
IL-
i=
<0
1.7
/.5
....-'
1.3
::>
.1.1
0.93
0.81
0.70
0.61
O,~3
e. e
L\
7/f
Z
I-
<,
Q.
.s.
..::0
~
,~
V
F:?A-rl- .....~
1'~I\
22 'S'
t:'(,
.,..
6'
[.,...., ,
17~
v
~
.....
-'
",.
6!"
:~A.
()
-s
.L
.?,-
k'
r- .
I"X--
',.,
l"
[[' /
y VI)(
d'
r-
'rT
f'"
bill
''
J1
,. - '
V
--:-,/
.k"
0'
17
i"
...!J It-
1\
L( L. y:
}< t':
D(
-(J .'\
~k\f
~
rvil)l/Kj2<b{'~
ki
J)
><
'j"p<-
1:'1.
~,N/III
-I'" -- \""\ t'l'
50
~\ '-.:\I I
Ii, 'tIILYI
1)(
N ~l'fo'
)(1
LL
!-l.
-'
LW
Cl
rlY 7'(;.. '~
'
TIME Of YIELD TO lOAD DURATION, t(/T
w
a
.
~
....
o
w
::f
i=
TiME or YIELD TO LOAD DURA TiDN.
t.~/T
00000000000'
<l'
v-
.....
~
lJ'
t-J
0
., .t \
l/.
1\
U'
U'I'"
(lllIa""~N--""""
. . -
lD ......
u.NN00
N
O N ...... NOOU'll.N ... (lllI~lD
00000000
00 (fI ~ . .
V4
U4
~ tool
0
U'U"
U"..I
0
... 0
L.-\'1
~-lJJI
~.
I--MXr\Zl~J
~I
-'
u,
W
o
o
-'
.1"
.01'
.
.
..J
I-
2:
1:
...oz
o
;::
u
w.
o
?>
",I -, '.1 \,
---J--
0.5 ,
.002.003 .005
.01
.. 02
.03
.05 .07
.1
.2 ' .. 3
Figure 3-252
-c
~
t..
;::
~./v
1_
.001
;;;
~_E
./
0.7
w
n.
t..
Q:
..J
~
~
:::E
0'
o>-
:J.
u,
<,
l'\
>-
...z
....E
70
o
t:
u
~\
....,
....
....o
,""NO
~~
~]D(
o
;::.
V I VVfl M/1U1I
IX\ IXl YI'vI1 JtI/
<,
.5.7
.I
7.
\0
TIT",

system for bi 1inear-triangular pul se (C1 = 0.100. C2 = 1000.)
f,< .
,.
TIME 'Or yiCLD TO LOAD DURATION, t~/T

~.
....
,'O .. ~ ....<1'.0
... en
",'lI<IN-
00 N
N~
_?~???~?OO.OO
'~""',",,"',""NN---
""'OOUI
"'CDI,Itl.QJ
Ut
I11'VlV
I N(JII/
200
w
v:
<,
100
70
0
t:
w
-'
l.W
...,,
...,
....
....
VI'"
1/ r-,
50
w 1- IV
r-, rI I') I~ II
IY . . . b
30
~ b<
'"
>-
20
r-. ...L
17
D" t--
f-
10
f:.
L,..;IJ
'1/
rJ\h
VI \ 7t.~JXJ\
xr.t1\l\
)'"
II
1t:.I'l..-1 l-'
1/
~J\~
.u;
II
;-
r\
l.--/l:.Ii 1'1\17'
.f"
~~~~
...
oS"
',f
rx
~cr
1(0
~J~
j'
'S
./.0
r-
~'6
~:J
20
1.7
I.S
1.3
1.1
0.93
0.81
0.70
0.61
0.53
i=
-'
c,
Cl
~~
.t.
::>
~
><
'AA
0.7
"
IS
0.5
.00 I
.002.003 .005
.01
.02
.03
.~
.05.07.1
.2.3.5.7
2.5
LOAD DURA TlON TO rUNDAMCNTAL'PCRIOD, TIT N
Figure 3-253
',.,
...
Cl'
tV \ \
d'
Maximum response of eiasto~plastic. one-degree-bf-freedom

2
I-
<,
....E
'/
1\
r;; rl'-:7
I..,;'?
r-
~ I~
[:?
10.~L.'
h(-
Vl'1
i:
~V'.
0
0
t')I
L\-1\ XI\"
t1'
r/fAJ...-,
I ~.1
Ii ~ V
-'
0'0'00'0'00'0
0:1 (J'l lJ\
..
'"
U4
tJ N
0 ..,. IJ'
\I'
-.l
o .. 0
r-t
t1I..1l1
XC
NO
1111' rWIt
I1"rflAA' II
500
'"E
VI
10
Cl
w
'"
Cl.
.:J
I-
'
Cl
::>
L..
a
I-
;::
u
w
:.J
L..
Cl
~".
::>
:::::E .. ~-
'
~
t,
0
;::
tdT
o
0"0
UtN--
0
oJ'
,P
500
300
200
U
W
50
--'
L,
W
"",
....""
0
.0
--'
.W
>:-
30
20
0
0
i=
10
c'.
0
- \ s-:
--;j~
::E
::l'
,)
...
00
'\
-
ID
..... U'I
r--.
ff<
'0 0
J-
V vl1l/~~
.!IW'
. ,/
II1.A'I
'\
'J ~ I' /
I?I:<:::
,/ /
r/ kj
V'
0:5
'!-
,00 \
"
v7
t~'~fi
v
/v.
it""
t/ lY
rf . :;
--
rJ r-..
I.
I-.l
1'\'
I ":-"
-I..
.~~
II
1/
I>
../
;-
A~~
/~
~..I
7
..,
11 .
'\
'j- 11' r--y-'y , 17 .
IV
~ .....
-~
b<:~;;
;"-~fj
'1-
I .vI-
\\
L.f
'I<
'"
'"
IS'
.,..,
/R< 7>/
p/r
::..-'<
\..-
'i:~'~
'.002.003 ,905
, Figure 3-254
,.0\
.02 .03
,-
V/,VA/'/V
.05 ,07.\
.2
,.
,3 -,....5
LOAD DURATION TO FUNDAMENTAL PERIOD.

.,
" ....., ... " , '
.'
~
.7
\",
2'
TIT,.. -
Maximum 'response'of elasto"plastic, one-degree-of-freedom

. 5 '7 -'10
....z
~
J: s
:::J
'"
o
....
z
<.{;
o
i=
1.7
1.5
1.3
'
....
o
<.0
.......
IX
....
11.
t: o
<..1
."
o
...J'
'6'
-.
v
'-/1'-.
'oi'
I/~ K
~~
,X4 AVO/'$:
"'--~ kS<:
.!"
.?:'-v.
~/
&. Jlvl)~
~ \:1--'1
1\
t1 / P /
,0'1\
..>
II \
_1)\ X,~'
I?
<,
.s
/\:"-
1-;; ~>
IPfI
,'\.,\
1\
t- .
'of
....z
,d'.,..,
/. r:. I"0 x
.;;; to-... 1\
/v
t>
/
"-.,r/.
~;>;><: .....
~I-:::v
<,
');-....!L ' V
1/;><-
~\.
-
11
~rJ"V
/
/
VI
~/
t..... <,
-I 1<.
r/,7
l~~
0.7
-I
~~G:
:V / IX I>
I~
t-
A;'
"
-)I
ik-
II'
'x
,I(
l\i
--
I~.
IIY
'j/
""NN--
...
l..-;
-,
'X
.00000000
aD Cl"tJ'
..
"'"
~""!"oJ
N O N ..... N O O \ l l l . H ... OIIJI,IDU'NO
0
U'tJ'
\II....t.
0
... 0
(lltcn
.~ ~
II "
::l'
::>
~~~'-J~IX'f
1/
f-,
Z
,.,
IJ\
I~I/\
E
>< 100
70
f'-l
IJ'
v- II' V \ 1 ' "X!

.Jt\ 1\ II
1 K\ lrt...
~l\-I-V..
><
-..,
,~.
V'
I. r
0.93
0.81
0.70
0.61
0.53
t:
....
c
~
::>
~
~
~
'"
0
!i
>:'
--
e
TlM[
'-.I'
po-
00
cr-l
r-l
1J'
.....
0
-:=
LI'
or YI[LD
(.OOl
00
IO LOAD DURATlON, tdT

00000000000,"
... v - . N - -
.
. ~. o.O"""V1,.
NqN
NOOVlv..
'.'
. . . . .
. -00000000
__
CJl
(J\lf''''
Vl
u"
~~
ClILNU)U\NO
0
iJ'1J'
IJt
-.10
0
...
0
....
NN--
W'rX1 Yl\ l'\t'l<1 \
i'-"'A-ttrl VYlV1l./
d'
'r'
~/t11::{V~-vjt'i2
"-
'"
r ...
'0
a:
w
c,
z
0
.s
I-'
'J'
'-"'~~
U
C)
-'
' >0
:f
z
0
1="
l.-
~v
,..
I-
z
o
t:
u
'w
-J
LJ
I.-
<,
-'
_._-
l~
.. - _.
--
:f
;:>
:>:
:>:
-J
I-
u
-'
<,
....E
'-"
xC
'",
.....
'"
'"
I-
:f
.I
~~~M~~~'\
-<W-IW.ll-W\-
4:
.:>:
OJ 1--.
o,
.00 I
.002.00.5005
.0'
"-
.02
.0.5
:f
w
:f
i=
V /VA/./.
v /A/"/ l/'/ V
.05.07.1
.2.3.5
',7
LOAD DURATION TO FUNDAM[NTAL PCRIOD, TIT N
Figure 3-255
Maxfmum response of elasto-plastic. one-degree-of-freeaom

system for bilinear~triangular pulse (CI = 0.075. C2 = 1000.)
10
.,
TIME or YIELD TO LOAi;> DURIITION -.

U'
00
5 aa
vl
t-J
~t-J
__
Ol(tl~
""'0
U\-
OON
~g,::'TVl\Y'-r<
'"
o
t(/T
_~??????OOOO'o
..,N:...a
\D~V'I"'VlNN-
UI
v.. ...
c:alJol,loD
u\
--
NO
0 '0
OJ
'"'" '"'"
'0
'0
'0
...
u'
V'
'"
...
'0
.... ....0
J O o l \ l, \
.
. \f>1t'H'l~rffi\;l--,f\~
_.,
'DO
d'
'7t--\II1l4
[\fl'l
".
100
<:
. I
17IlrI~
....-'
w
l7
. .V
'~
.<I~fl7
--JI J II/l----..d
0
0
..,......
....E
-'
w
0>-
0
~
1/11'0-.1.-1 1/
-s',r
I:i
'f'
LA
'6'
""
...J
....
z
w
::f
1/
::>
l..
o
....
VI I
;::
u
W
t-
W
-'
u,
w
Q:
1'>r ill1.Jl./111
I W-UV
z
U
o
o,
w
,
-'
.-.,..,
<,
'/
'"
-- .
....z
.,..,
- -_.
_. .
- -
..
--
. -
_.- - .
....W
...J
-'"
::f
... _..
::>
::f
::J
i<
-c
:::E
"::>'"
::f
\~
....
o
w
::f
;::
po-0.7
0.51-00 \ "
.002.003 .OO?
.0\
.02
.OJ
.. 05.07.1
LOAD DURA nos TO
Fi gure 3-256
~ax;mum
~
,2 . :3'-'-.5
rUND~MENTAL
PRIOD.
.7: "
3 -.
7,
10
ilT N
response cif elasto-Plasiic, one-deg;ee-of-freed~m'

,I.
,.
TiME or YIELD ro LOAD DURATION. t[/f

t
-so
...,.
t-J
IJ'
~
0
...
\I'
= c:o
0
i!'
~~:-":o'~"
0- 0
0"00 0
LH.
~:""lJI"
U'I
lHNN...
CJI \.H
f.D
00
--:lJl N
o.
--~H1lb#1'W,o-bV''thf-lH
0'0.0'0'0
0'
0
CflIJ'''
U" IJ'
IJ'
"'"
-1
'0
'0
'0
..
U'
'0"
'"
-4\l:=~~~~\
z
>-
<,
E
.."
w
X
<,
<>:
w
:z
0..
>=
<::
>:z
w
...J-
...J
::l;
<::
c...J
'i
:J
a ,
'",
....
'"
'"..
~l:1-"\.~\F'II--IP'5l>
>0
0
>=
o
s:
10
.:;,
(j
W
...J
L
....J
l.t-r/
::l;
::l;
"
0.7
.002.003 .005
.01
......
"-'""
.02
v
.03
.. 05 :07.1
LOAD DURATION
Figure 3-257
::l;
x
<::
::l;
L
o
w
::1:.
pjr1;;'n..
J--- p
1~
0.5
.001
C
::l;
._1\
f--=:::='---
:J
<::
"
~ ~:l>"f"-l\>;.-r:::
::l;
:J
>-
:z
t-.
:z
to
. 2 . 3 , 5 - ,7
'c
i=
I I I I III'
3
rUNDAt.lENf AL PCRIOD,' r If N
Maximum responsecof elasto-plastic. one-degree-of~freedom

systemfor-bilinear-tr.iangular:pulse (tl= 0.056,.C2 = :1000..)
7 . 10
TIME or YIELD TO LOAD DURA TlON;
,..,
'"o ,..,
C1'
~ ~
00
__
~ ~ !'J.
NON.....
,f'.,)
~????
0
\D
tclT
? ? ?'?? C? '?
.... lJ' . . . . Vt NN
(I)
CD 0
..
CJ)
'""
U)
-- -
0\" ~
'0
'0
CP
0
(J\
\I'
'0
'0
tJt
If'
'0
v'
..
!J'
'0
'0
N
....
U"
0
N
0
~
I
>-
<,
....E
Cl
'"wa,
oS
'of
I-
U
'.J
..J
L.W
\Yti
Cl
....,
.......
'"

.hI
L.-
>-
i=
u
W
>-
"1~IJl
,0
.1/
\0
i=
'-'
w
L.-
..J
..J
L.-
Cl
Cl
::f
:J
::f
""
><
Z
w
::f
L.-
..J
W
o
>z
'..J
I\.~
::f
:I'
~I\
.1\"'
L.-
:I'
=n.
-:
0.7
~,"
~
0.5
.001
:I'
=>
.002.005' .005
.0\
.02
.05
'//V/"r//
.05.07 . . \'
.2.3
Fi gure 3-258
i='
'.5, ,7
i.
'
10
TIT N

..
It
nME OF YIELD TO LOAD DURA nON, t(/T
t
V'
f'-ol
,..-,","
t.>
t1'
OJ
... .
-
O'
.
a
...
.'.
: ; ,:..: .
-
. :.....' N
NON
','
. , . t"
~ ~ ~ ~ .f? ~ ~.
? ~ ? ~ C? '?
N
-".- - . ; - . . .
00011000..,011
Vt
I.OCJl"N
U): ..... l,Il' ....... "'"
'0 '0 .'0 '0

G" l1'
~ "V'
l1" &S'
\Jl
~
'0
01
0
'0
V'
"0
t.>
....
0
IJ
f-
<;
....E
\H--\--,,,*,,,'I-I-*\
MAI-:~+,l;"
II
6'
.~
'"
Q.
.Z
'0
;::
U
...J
W
a
a
"'.
0'
0-
lit
'z
o
;::
10
.....w
...J
::E
:>
::E
::E
::l
L.,
l.--K
::E
;::
(j
W
...J
....
W
o
~.~~~~A.t:tlh
VI
><
a
fz
a
.~
1/
::E
.::l
'::E
::E
0.7 ,... _-0.5

.001
P;;I \
.'11
.002'.003
L----r~.
.005
_01
.02
.03
.05 .07
~
.1
.2
L-
w
::E
;::
.,
.3 -. _5
LOAD DURA nON TO FUNDAMENTAL PERIOD.
Figure 3-259
...J
~
w
'0
~U.-J
JIll
...J
I
~
,......
u,
'",
........'"
-s'J-
I~
(7
.7
TIT N - . .:
3
>
"

system for bili~ear-triangula~ pulse (CI 0.042. C2 1000.)
\0
s-
TIME or YIELD TO LOAD DURATlON, t(/T
u'o
,-.)
......
t.J
0'\
01
0
(fl.
.
0
~ ,.
Vt
.' .
N. 0
N
N
.....
N,
00000000'000'0'0
.
. . . . .
. ..
lO -..&. l1' ... Lot N !'oJ - _ _
...
0
0 DI OCt 0 .... 011 V' \D
t-)
0
(J\"
,0
'0
fIJ'
'0
G'
'0
'0
'0
...,. '..- . V'
LJ'IIJI
'0
U'
lJ'...l
'0
......
~
lR
.TI711:4/V 1/
BfllJ
. IHIM+
~iib<l'
><
E
<,
A/I/
--
><
~1Vi
. NV\JAJ\
z
o
II
>-
w
...J
l..
W
Q
....,
....
....
00
[\
~,~ ~l>
Q
...J
W
,..
y\-rV\h'~
>-
z
o
1'-'
t:
W
...J
l~
'w
'"
. /'( L~ X I
\i'Kl{
"
f\1"tYl M
.~
:f.
::>
:f,
\17
')("
<.
'. :f
0,7
0.5
.001"
f'/r l =
""J'-
.t
--
---rJ
',002003'
III~
.... ci I
,9'5 '
.. 02
.03,.05.07".1
.2'.3
.s
.7
'2
'5
7. \0
LOAD DURATION TO rUNDAMENTAI: PERIOD, T/T N"
fi'gu're' 3-260 . Maximum response ofelasto-plastic. one-deqree-of'-f'reedom '

system for bilinear-triangular pulse (C1 : 0.032. C2 : 1000.)
"
TIME or YIELD TO LOAD DURATlON.

"",N
.
:....
NON
(IOCtl"
P"
v'
0
t-.l
~
0'
.
0
,
_
tdT
0
0 ' 0 0 0 0 0 0 '0 0 0 0
0
. . . . "."
tD "'-J U' . . . . . VI' N
N
.....
a 0 02 m 0... 00 ~ lD C1' .... t-J 0
'"0
_.,
.
.
.
000
".
G" !J'
0
IJ'
IJ'
'0
'0
..
.ro
'0
V'
...
V'
"
M I Iv' iNI A N..l VilLI
"0
...
..
'~
Z
I-
.......
....E
'"E
sc
~~}.'\(wV\
100
2:
>-
-.J
u.
o
o-.J
>-
.2:
-XIV
N~t
I-
o
.,:
<.)
L..
-.J
'"W
::f
.JV
.I
>(
"
...J
I-
a'
"
'"e,w
::f
>-
zw
o
o
',.>
'J:
... -11-"Cff1I'=ldp.j.d~<\4j;~
w
....
'"
'ii' ....L I .
.'11
d'
oS
-~'
J.l-t\ AI 1\
<,
,v .fir
::f
1\/IVI
::f
-I1A
~R
;(
:f
\~
2 ' t:?'\*~~=fI::
L..
w
::f
t:
-17
0.7
1/1%1.-'
,01
,02
,0.1
,OS ,07
,I
.2
,.I
.5'.7
,
LOAD DURA TlON TO rUNDAMENTAL PERIOD.
Figure 3-261
,
.2
.I
TIT N

system for bilinear-triangular pulse (C1 = 0.026, C2 = 1000.1
5 ,'7
10
TiME or YIELD TO LOAD DURA TiON~ tdT

p.
V"
00
r.l
t-.l
~
(J'
C!'~h~-l"rI.~~
OONON-t
_? ~~~~?C? 9 t? C?,? ? 7'

N~~~:;'6~~~~'~-;'~ '0
'0
'0
'"'" '"'" '"
5001'>1=,"'-
..
'0
'0
v'
....
'0
v'
o
'0
'"
..
'"
0
Z
0-
~~~~~+tI~~4.h~flrl
Y1\
It
.zu-
<,
....E
'"....
z
o
oS.
.--
fl .....' I f
'J'
If'"ll
--'
c,
W
w
,
W
N
--'
w
~A
In! Yft-.,
>-
0-
o
0-
U
W
"'\
..J
u,
W
.~
::
:::>
::
><
'"
::
w
%
i=
0.7
0.5
.001
~
.002.003 .005
.01
.02
.03 .. 05.07.1
~
.2.3.5.7
2'
3,
10
LOAD DURATiON T~ rUNDAt.4ENTAL PERIOD, T/T N .
figure 3-262

for bilinear-triangular pulse (C1 : 0.022. C2 = 1000.)
~ystem
It
TiME OF YIELD TO LOAD DURA TiON, tdT
p.
500
v"
,.-)
t..l
00
..-
0'
Cf\ ~
lA N~
..
-4
o.~
I\. y
~,-
U)
'0
C? 9-
lJI . . . . . VlNN
OOOClOO.,. oa VI
....
1/
IV'
tJ)
t?~ C?
_ ........
(J'I"".~
C?-
'0
tP
0
r1Jr\!.-\-1\
j,
~/ rnJ.
w
-c
<,
xC
~ ~ ??~.???
,I'
200
'0
oJ'
r---.:
toO
~V"V'"""N
J'
lJI...J,o~O
1-. I x: 1/\ If\--
Ir \Y
~I\
'00'0'00
'0
(f\
-'-'-'"""VT---'-'TOrnr-n'CrTT"7"17T7r~,.,..,.-"""r-r-r-
~-AJ,{~IA
SOO
.xJi'\-
M-c
I\~
~JI\
..>
'/
~~
.'"
6'
~;r
,u
w
':6'
-'
k
W
..
>-
....
J. S
-,~rtn~~1M
J. o
,-
<'G
<..1
,-
10
)(1 )(1/\
-J
u,
W
"
x"
::J
__
n'~
R~ ~
OJ
O. 5 .!_-,-'.l,_~
.001
.00200S .005
_, I.J
1:1
\ If
f""
2.0
1.7
1:5
y
""_,,,
<i
~
'/0
.01
l/rf=';;;'"~l;4~m~~~~
.02
.03
.05, .07.1
.2.3.5.7
'LOAD DURATiON TO FUNDAMENTAL PERIOD, TjT N
Figure 3-263
"'-
....E
a
'"
'"z"
W
0..
..j
::f.
<i
0: 0
COl
..J
W
N
f'-..
....z
Maximum response of elasto~plastic, one-degree-of-freedom

10
~.
0
....
1=
o
w
.......J
w
a
::f
::J'
::f
0.93
0.81
0.70
0.61
.....
0
0.53
1=
::f.
w
::f

V'"
t-l
t...l
'
0'
-::::
00
(J\
r: .- ~J ~ ~.~ ~ c;:> <? ~ C? '? '? '? C?
....
VI
O. N
...
.. '
tdT
Nl.D"""t.I\ ...... lr&NN- ........ '

0
0 co oa 0, ~ 0' VI. ,J) CJl .. ~
-l
....
0
dI
0
. _ __ . _ ..
'0
a:r~
'0
..
I,JI
0
vi.
'0
V'
...l
'0 '0
toJ t-J
... 0
--- ---
>-Y~m+7-lM;l-Jfl:J.ilyfi!~
."scE
><
o
e-
w
-'
'oo~~~~~MMg
70~
PlI.nl
w
,
w
'"'"
56
'"
70
.-'
w
>-
.......... ...,.
'\fA
o
w
.~
::>
sc
1\
17\V\~
10
. 5
. -Yl-V
<i
L7
~\-W
u,
~v
"
.~
-'
::F
.V I \
1\
I ~ 1\1
J :1t'1
L~
"
k=ft'Th'Y.IX -,..." ""
eU
\71\71\:
A _ V_~
I.<'VVlA.A7 I IVJ.-\I-r\
oJ ......,..- I 111
t-*'''d'I.-l'H~I~I4~'*F~ihJ.4::I:
"--t1"IYV .Y-7 U-Jjf I/~
o
1Z
. .. .Y'"nlf~
50
u,
.....-,
.:I"-
~~
1-~
::F
n
1 .........1 I
. ..J-.--0.5 .!~
.001
.......
~_.
J-"
Lk.:l.vr--
.002.005 '.005
III/' 1/1/
/'
..01.
.02
.05
" /"v/Y//1/
.05.07.1
.2.5.5.7
..
7' 10
Figure 3-264
Maximum response of elasto-plastic. one-degree-of-freeaom

system for bilinear-triangular. pulse (Cl =0.015. C2 = 1000.)
e
)
...,.
....
tdT
.rII;4E or YIELD TO l.OAD DURA TlON,
..-
OJ c:"
o~(I'-oo
_1"_ , 0 ~~,':' ~C?,?

!"' ~,~.""'" ~N'\O . . " \J\ .. to vVN
NON
til 00
0 .....
01
C?N c;>........
~ t?? C?
..- " , . ;
V"
""
"'
...
l'..!
'0
dJ
o
G"'
iJ'
'0'"'l.1'
\S'
'0
too
iJ'
'0
v4
'0
'" '"
V"
'Z
l-
do
',.,
-c
-1oYI-,HlH-'.,J-)-.o;i
<,
'",
-----_
. >(
'0
.....
'V-A-'7I~-
u
w
,.
, I II '\l
--r-I \ n
....
0"
....
J'
:,j'
11\- !I\
N1
1\/ 171lV
":0
J: o
w
;:
,IX
" ,,~'" ." ./~.rX1~
,,~,.
--'
'"-
:>'
J
:>'
~.
:>'
lX'~\1<
'3
.~
l)..C-.P<7't"<III7
~
07
_O. 5
'. . 001 '
--
,,~
,...01
.002.003 .005
G
...
Figure 3-265
.02 ..03'
~'6
~'.J
~o
sc
'
....
w
J: s
....
.--'
":",
--'
:>'
"rY
.0
s-:
'"
z
--'
0
Q.
u,
....E
0
...,,
...,
...,
'"
<,
~l~:
p/r -
~h
V/Qff/.7l7
.05 .07.1
.2'.3 -
.5
.7
.2
LOAD DURATIgN TO rUN~AM[NTAL PERIOD. T/T~
Max.imum response of e las to-p le s t'ic , one-degree-of-freedom

7.
10
"Z
J
L..
....0
z
;::
u
--'
-L..
W
1.7
/.5.
1.3
1.1
0.93
0.81
0.70
0.61
'0
0.53
;::
:>'
J
:>'
::r
L..
.::r
:'
v'.
t-J
~
G\
...
V4 N '"-..
>p
O'
#~
0;--1"
,. ~,
~"1
~-i
TlMLOr YIELD'TO LOAD DURATION. "t[/T
'. -
? ~??
0'0 C? C? '? '??'. t?
.... lJ\ . . . l." N t..J .... -
j.."j-lD
NON
CJ)
co 0...
011.
"'"
o.D
t?
(fI
0
rJl
0'0
(J\
tJ'
1.1'
tJ'
'0
'0
vol
u"
\1',
...:
'0
0
N
-'~"'------
"
;.('"'
._'.".~
<,
E
sc 100
z
0
c:
l>
- -
I.
n'lQ
ItI)A 1:'-... 1A
"-"~I"'~""~"
I lL-.
r-,
70
VI?
50
IA
,/\ IA
LX
c.J
-'
a
a
W
,
'"
'"
'"
-'
w
30
2 O
>-
I~~lttt~
r"".
l>
L~
I;
-'
\ LJ.Ir , 1
1'1
I'"
I ~~,.,A..l-.A
.. ,,"\---j;f-~.
'.
"
L..
--E--M_~ _ _R
01 II Im\L
"
....J
II..
D'
~
::J
~
<::
~
...
0.5.~ ~
:00 I
~-
/1/1 /V Y 1/
.002.00J .005
.01
.,
Figure 3-266
'.02
.OJ
.05.07
.1
.2
.J
LOAD DURA nON TO rUNDAMENTAL.PERIOD.
.5
,7
3.
Tit II
Maximum response of elasto-plastic~ one-degree-of-freedom

system for bilinear-triangular pulse IC] = 0.010. C2 = 1000,)
10
,C
,.
"'
.-
r'
r-r-
<
-,
..
' '
'.
0..
I.' . ,>~
.~~
;:. ..
Cl
'
... ..
'
~
::
.....
"
"
"
pI'l5:>"
Of
"
'2"
.,"."
,
IF
;)
re
o<=
....
t-. ~
',I
I.'
.e
"
..
I~
;-
"
.
,
'
"
:
,
-;'1
I,
"
,I'
i
!
,
i
;;
3-325
c.
,~
<=
',~
'"
J, >
"
'
'
. !.;
'"o
..
j
.
",
"
,~,
.;
;;
..
r-,
...'
,U
:8Q
.,
',~
Cl
'.
0N
~,
It s!
,
i'
! - ~-
..
'-
. r-:~.,"\
U-
Cl
"
'.
r--
:-
'r- ~=
..
"
,,
.:
r-'
"
<
.s:::
i- .'"
, ,e
"
c. '
CJ
'
?7I!J
..
.~
P~T
...(;....
-~
-e-e--t-
-c
""::r.....'
".''irltlt
~
Pressure'- Time
"0 L
XE
Resistance
10
~HI.,
~
I~
. ..
'.
'-'~
'f~
r.
.'
~
"-
.,
20
~~~1io~
='=
-~-
O''
!.. ~'*!r
I~~i+tl
r:
,~~
ji
-Def,eetion~l~'g~~i~~
Xm
oj
~
'1'.' 1I".II/OAi.LLL
-I,Ii::!I'~1I
'II :
il.
'fI11
~BlIiIi=.=:-."
.,
'ii-r'/if,tifl<:f7f:rrrtT:T""'T:TT1 tIItrTTTT
'~I
__ "!'!~~1111111; .1'1-:-:--1-11' i
"
IlolTTTT:fT1I;-inTTTTTTT
z ..
...,,
...,
'"
-Xni
XE
T'4
-,;r..;1=T:_....-
C1t=~":IOl:c
-I---:!.c.
:.+;..~"f""':'
v-
o~(~
J "," 1'1....
---.....--t-+
rA
'0--,-
_ .::r '--"-,"- .__. ......
:-+
t-I$-~
::j::;.
," - _..~.. '.
I:P=~-
......,.
.2' .'
~~;
I'
~.I . '
.....
...1-.......,
"""":'"
.. , tI;
iT
~_._-
!i+~~_
_-
.~~-:..
Ii:
~",,,--",,:S::
i~::"-=.,...........-:::"""'..,...I.-:
-..-f.-
'~'"
~-
. . -+
._:t=1.7..I....
jf-HWf:;it!
I
I ;:
- ,,"
. I
II
I..
'i
I.
"-'-11+ I
""
I~.
I ! _
~~;I1-,*j.;.;~1..~
I' li'~'
I;
, It,
I,
rii:
I- .
::
Ll.!.
.! illll :11 i
..
'~
illillitttH
II
.:.
.'
y_
I I!11....
~;
j
:++;
r rr t
;r;,
; ,.....:. , : I I ",I:
iIIII;I:ili.~q;~
0.2-
9:},,7.:........,.
:j::f.t::.I=4-_...
' i l ::.
.;., .":
~;'
.._=c,
_......=..:..
'~:':~x.:.t:=:_.
o'
'"
I '---:
E,
I' I;
'-;'+*
-t
II) "
,"
10
20
50
T/TN
Figure 3-268
Elastic rebound of simple spring-mass system
100
.,.
.1
<
B,LAST ,IMPULSE i b
/1
TIME
Figure 3-269
Pressure-time and resistance-time curves for elements which

respond to impulse
TK 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
Table 3-14
Details of computation by acceleration impulse extrapolation

method
.t.
Pn
I<"
Pn - I<"
Po
RO
Po- Ro
"nO
(P n
I<"J/m
~(4t)2
zx,.
",,-, ",,+1
'ao(6t;)~.' .. 0':
'0
. xl .
0'
. At i
2(4t
P" R,
Pz ' RZ
1)
P,- R,
P2- RZ
"
'I
81 (At})2
2X,
Xz
'2
aZ(4t 1)2
2X Z
X,
X3
"
,
j-l
.... j
'.
(j-l)4t
J4t 1.,...r
Pj
1
.,'
-,
_,
Pj _,-R j
_,
R,
PL ~j .. , Pj - ;.~J.
"-
j+l j(t.t 1 ) + 4t Z Pj + 1 ~j+l P j +1 - R j + l
.'
.aj_l
...
'J
.' -
6j+l .. _
6j-l (4~1')'
~j-:
a j (4t 1)2
,2Xj
_,
aj+l(4tl~2
2X j + 1
j
j
Z Xj
Xj - 1
Xj +1
~j+2 _
, I,
. ;" ,
; :Yr"- " . f s
:,..>-;.' ! . ' I
3-328'" i'
.'
.~
t'
.. ;."
'"
TK 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
Table 3-15
Figure numbers corresponding to various combinations of C1

and Cz
C2
1.00
1.70
3.00
5.50
10.0
3-64
3-64
3-SIt
3-64
3-64
C1 \
1.000
30.0
100.
300
1000
3-64
3-64
3-64
3-64
31U
3-115
3-116
3-141
3-142
3-173
3-174
3-221
3-143
3-175
3-222
3-144
3-176
3-223
3-177
3-178
3-225
0.909
0.866
0.825
3-220
0.787
0.150
3-85
3-99
0.715
0.681
3-64
3-65
3-75
,:0 -,64S"
0.619
3-100
0.590
0.562
--
- -
3-117
3-118
3-145
3-146
3-119
3-120"
3-147
3-121
3-149
3-86
3-101
. O.Sl~r:
0:487
0;422
3.,64
3-66
3-76
3-181
",3-228
3-122
I 3-182
3-151
3-183
.I 3-184
3-229
3-230
3-123
3-152
3-102
0.383
3-125
.'
O~3~S
flo 348.:'
0.316
0.281
0.2104
0.261
0-:231
0.215
.
3-61t
3-61
3-11
3-88
3-103
3-69
3-104
3-126
3-121
3-64
3-68
3-18
3-126
0~'t98
0.118
0.162
0.141
0.133
0.121
0.110
0.100
0.091
0.083
0.015
0.066
0.056
0.046
0.042
0.032
0.026
0.022
0.018
0.015
0.013
0.010
.3-64
3-69
3-90
3-105
3-91
3-106
3-19
3-129
3-130
3-131
3-64
3-10
3-60
3-92
3-101
3-93
3-106
3-94
3-109
3-95
3-110
3-96
3-111
3-91
3-112
3-98
3-113
3-132
3-133
3-64
3-71
3-61
3-64
3-12
3-82
3-64
3-13
3-83
3-64
3-14
3-84
3-134
3-135
3-136
3-131
3-138
3-329
3-139
3-140
3-231
,3-185
3-232
I" F186 ';3-233
3-153
3-187
3-234
'3-154 1 3-188
3-235
3-189
3-236
3-155 I 3-190 . 3-237
3-191
3:-238
- -3-i56
3-239
3-193
3-240
3-151
3-194
3-2041
3-158
3-195 3-242.
3:1'96
3-159
3-243
3,:160
3-191
3-244
' 3-196
3-245
3~161
3-199
3-2463-200
3-247
3-162
3-201
3-248
3-202
3-249
3-163
3-203
3-250
3-251
3-204
3-164
3-205
3-252
3-253
3-206
3-201
3-254
3-165
3-206
3-255
3-256
3-209
3-166
3-251
3-210
3-211
3-258
3-161
3-259
3-212
3-166
3-260
3-213
3-169
3-214
3-261
3-262
3-215
3-110
3-216
3-263
3-264
3-217
3-111
3-218
3-265
3-112
3-266
3-219
..
3-124
3-87
3-224
3-226
3-179
3_148; 1 3"180 . : 3':227"
3-150
'0;536
0.464
I: ;-~9~
TK 5-1300jNAVFAC
P-3~7/AFR ~8-~2
, n
i ;
f.
-,
.
,
:,.
" I.
i '
,
c
"Response Chart Interpolation'
Table 3-16
Figure Number
"
.C
1
C2
Desired Parameter
C2l
Cll
1
\'1
Cl
C2l
"
. (;12
Cn
Cl
. C2~'
C ,
,13
- C2l
,"
Cl 4 '
C24
3-330.
Y2
Y
C23
"
Cl:
"
'?~
,. ,.C23
~
'.
'.
"
'Ch
..
0/"
."
::J
Yb
'JI
APPENDIX 3A
TH 5-l300iN.\VFAC P-397/AFR'SS-22
.,
~.'. ~
-'. ~
" u
-,
3A-l(A) . Ultimate Unit Resistimce

~ ~
"
: .~
,,'
- . ~I .
..
'
" -' !:, 1
Determine the ulHmateunit'resi~tanceof' a'twi>"way structural

element ~sing (1) general solution and (2) charts.
Problem:
C)
Procedure:
N)"J~ '.1;',
Part (a) - General Solution
Step 1.
Step 2.
"
'i~-
:;.'
Establish design
t.:, ', ..
,I..
,d- :-. .(1J:' ,

, " ' : dc .
.
param~ters.
~~.:.,:
-~
fll.
.~
Assume yield line locations in terms of x and/or y considering support conditions, presence of openings, etc.
'-"Jl;
~ 4
I'
'
. ;:.'
~._
Step 3.
Deteroiine' negative 'and' p~sitive-moment capaciti'es' of sections crossed by assumed yield lines,
Step 4.
Establish distribution of moments across negative and assumed yield lines, cons~dering corner effects and those of
openings.
Step 5.
Determine the ultimate unit,resistance for each sector in

te~s of x and/or y considering free bi>dy diagram of the
sectors (fig. 3-3). Summation of the moments about the axis
of rotatio~ (support) of the sector yields equation 3-3,
Step 6.
;,..,~",
Equate the,:ultimate unit resistance of." the sectors and solve

for 'the yi!!ld line location x and/or y.,
.:
Step
7.
With known yield line location, solve for ultimate unit

resi'stance'of the element, using equations obtained in Step
6.
,.--.~'"
'
\.<>;;"-""':','-""
.. ,", ;',
'
Note: For complex problems (three or more different sectors) the

solution for the. ultimate unit resistance is most easily accomplished through a trial-and-erro; procedure by.determiningru for
each sector for a given '(assumed) yield line location and adjust-.
ing the yield lines until the several values of r u agree to within
a few percent.
,
Procedure:
--'
'...
Part (b) - Chart Solution
Step 1.
.'
11<11 ..
4-
,>,. "
Same as in step 1 of
, part a.
..r~
"
Step 2.
'
Same as 'in step 2 o"f part
a.
Step 3.
Determine' the ':ri~gatIve and positive 'ultimate moment capacities in vertical and horizontal directions .
:
's>
..., .
-..
l~ i
J'
..
: .r
'
".
! . .'.' .
3A-l
,.r: .
- ):
TK
5-l300/NAVFACP-397/AFR88~22
Step 4,
For' given support conditions (and value of x2/xl in the case

of an element with three. edges supported and fourth free),
use the appropriate'~hart (figs, 3-4 through 3-20) to. obtain
yield'line location'ratios x/L or y/H for value of quantity
obtained in step 4,. Then calculate x or y',
~ .'
Step 5.
Using the appropriate 'equation from table 3-2, determine the

ultimate unit 'resistance of the ele~ent,
";-
',;.'
:J.: .:
, , ,'
Example 3A-l
Uitimate Resistance
,
Ultimate unit resistance of two-way structural'steel element shown

below;~sing (1) general sol~tion and (2).char~s.
Required:
-'./
'.
"
Figure 3A~l
-:
(Solution: Part (a) - General Solution)

Step 1.
(a)
(b)
~.
Given:
H' - 168 'in

L - 240 in
free'
at the fourth
Fixed on three sides and
>
Step 2.
Assume y,ield line. lo~.ati~n.(fig. 3A - 2)
Step 3.
The negative and positive moment capacities in both the

horizontal and vertical. directions are determined from the
prop~rties of the material. For this example; it will be
assumed that the moment: capacities are equal to M - 20,000
inlbs/in,
3A-2 '
TlI 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/,AFR 88-22
240
120
~
~
II:
...
/
,"
,,,
.,
eo
"
"
""!N
..
.,
CD
"
""!N
"
eo
120
"
III
III
~!i
~!i
ti: >
ti: >
> III
I
CD
, ,)'"
",
...' ...
, ,,' I
CD
CD
,"'
=
-
"'M~
> III
119III
f9III
jMHN"
jMHP
M
"
ri III
1111
AT NEGATIVE
,YIELD LINE
\,2
I..,..,I""M'" AT POSITIVE
YIELD LINE
al ASSUMED YIELD LINES AND DISTRIBUTION OF MOMENTS
...~
,(Q
120
.-R.:. ).~
CI
.W
RII
liMVN
120
'bl FREE-BODY DIAGRAMS FOR INDIVIDUAL SECTORS
Figure 3A-2
3A-3
....
.;
88~22
'MHN - MHP - MVN - MVp - 20,OOO,in 1bs/in.

Step 4.
For distribution of moments across negative and assumed

positive lines, see f~gure 3A -2 (a). ,
Step 5.
The ultimate unit resistance of each sector 'is obtained by

taking the summation of the moments about its axis of rotation (supports) so that
I:MN +I:Mp - Rc - ruAc
a. " Sector I
(Ug. 5A - 2)
D{VN; + I:MVP - 120(20,000) + 2(2/3)(20,000)(60) -I'

, :'
120(20~000) + 2(2/3)(20,000)(60).
8.0x10 in-1bs.
240(y)
2
therefore,
b.
Sector II
I:MHN + I:MHP -
(fig. 3A - 2)
(168-y/2)(20,OOO) + 2/3(20,OOO)(y/2) +
(20,OOO)(168-y/2) '+ '2/3(20,OOO)(y/2)
- 336(20,000) - y/3(20,OOO)
120[168+2(168-y)
120(168+168-y)
[ -----'---] /
3
(168+~68-y)
therefore,
.336(20,000) - y/3(20,OOO)
:-
:.
r u-
Step 6.
4800 (252-y)
Equate the ultimate unit resistance of the sectors.
'.
r
"
:;
'.
"
10(20,000)
, 2
336(20,000) - y/3(20,OOO)
4800(252-y)
Simplifying:
y3 _ 1008y2 _ 144000y + 36288000 - 0
and the desired root is:
y - 137.6 ins.
3A-4
1M 5-l300/NAVFAC'P C397iAFR 88-22
Step 7.
The ultimate unit resistance is obtained by substituting the

value of y into either equation obtained in step 5, both of
which yield:
r u - (20,000)/(137.6)2 - 10.6 psi
Solution:
Part (b) - Chart Solution
Note:
Element conforms' to the requirements of section 3-,8 since it. is fixed on
three sides and free on the remaining side and has uniform thickness in
the horizontal and vertical directions ..
Step 1.
Step 2.
,Same as step 1 in part a.

For illustrative purposes, a different
3A-3) will be assumed.
'
~ield
,. !
..
\,
! .
240
p-
X1
CD/
I
pattern (fig.
~
~
\~
~
\ ~
I
,
io
...
CD
~
\~
Figure 3A-3
Step 3.
Step
4.
For ultimate moment capacities, see step
of part a
.... ,
,For three sides fixed and the fourth' f r ee; calculate cheparameter.
From figure 3-11, (X2/Xl
1.0) calculate the parameters:
L/H[MVp/(MHNl + MHP)] - 240/168[20,OOO/(2)(20,OOO)J l/2 - 1.01

.,
,;
3A-5
TK 5-l300/NAVFAC 'P-397/AFR 88-22

and
20,000
HVp
1.0
20,000
Read yield.line location
I,
-,
. Xl/L exceeas the maximum possible value of 0.5 therefore, assumed yield
line pattern is wrong. Assume alternate yield' line, pattern ~s shown in
. figure 3A-2 ..
From figure 3-16 calculate the following parameters:
-,
L
H
,,'
240
(20,000+20,000) 1/2
]
- 0.71
168
, [ (20,000+20,000)1/2 + (20,000+20,000)1/2
and,
[40,000/40,OOO]1/~,/
1 +[40,000/40,000]1/2 - 1/2
from figure 3-16 read of yield line location:

I
y/H - 0.82;
Y -,0.8(1~8) - 137.6 in
X/L - 0.50;
X - 0.5(240) - 120.0 in
From table '3-2
Step 5.
NOTE: Both equations given in the table for each edge condition and
yield line location, will provide identical values of r u:
vp)
5.,(Mw" H
"yZ' .
.. \
.',
\_
-.
'. \
5(20,000+20,000)
137.6 2
Required:
,.
"1
Example 3A-l(B)
(0.000?5)20,OOO - 10.5 psi
Ultimate unit resistance of the element considered' in example 3Al(A) except there is an opening as shown in,figure 3A-4.
3A-6
.'
TIl: 5-l300/NAVFAC P'-39i/AFR,'S-S-22
".J
.1~'
.~
:./ ";
.. .: r
240'
;t;
'.
.'.
..
l~
/-
I"
,...
.... , . i
1-
-:..,
'':.:.
~- ~.~.
'. t":~'
",f'-
';\
~ Ij
,
"
"
figure 3A-4
."
'
"
'.
j"
Solution:
Step 1.
Given:
Two additio'nal free edges are formed

240"
H - 168"
to
due to the presence of the opening,
(a) L -
.',
Step 2.
Assumed ii~ld line location is shown in figrue 3A-5 (three

different sectors ar~ formed),
Step 3.
S&ue as step 3 of Example
1A- l ( A) ,
p~rt
a,
"
.e ,
.
,'~
~'0
". ~ . (.)
" i0'
,,/
.'
t-, ' ,,' ,"-
"
xJ2
.r .
-
...
'
"
0'
....
180-xJ2
',..
I I111I11
I
, .
-,
"
!@ITITI[[]
II I I I
il(f
. I
a" -
o~ .~
m '0
"" '. c']
.
;.~ .:~ tr
I
\
,I
I .
..f
00
24<l
Figure 3k-5
,3A-7 '.
TH 5-1300/NA.VFAC P~ 397/AJ1R88 ~.22

Step '4'.
For distribution
positively yield
located at lower
capacity in this
Step 5.
The ultimate unit re~iitance is obtained from:

EMN +
a.
of moments across negative and assumed

lines ,see' figure 3A,5. (Since opening is
right corner, there is no reduced moment
area.)
- Rc'- ruAc
Sector 1 (fig. 3A-5),

- (20,OOO)(168-y/2),+ 2/3(20,000) (y/2) +
(20,000) (168-y/2)' +. 2/3 (20, 000)(y/2)
- 336(20,000) ~ y/3(20,000)
-,(336-y/3)(20,OOO)
ruAc - r u[x(168+l68-y)/2j [x(168+2(168-y/3(168+l68-y)]

r ux 2(252-y)/3
therefore,
'(1008-y)(20,OOO) ,
ru
b.
Sector II
x 2(252-y),
(fig. 5A-5)
EMHN + EMHP - (20,000)(80) + (20,000)(80)

- l60(2q,<:>,OO)
Note:
I
The sector is divided into 'parts a, b, and c so that the centriod

may be obtained (see table 'below).
Portion of
Sector ,
Area
(A' )
Distance from Centroid

to axis of rotation' (c')
'3
2
(y-88)(60)
6q
'
(168-y)(240.x)
"
(y-88)(180-x)(360-x)
(y-88)(60)2
...
.
.'
-:
A'e'
.
c
..
,
b
- 360-x,
(180-x) , +,60
(y-88)(180-x)
a
2
,
(240-x)
2
3A-8
.,
"
'
,,'
(168-y) (240-x)2
2
TK 5 e1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

(ye88) (l80-x) (360-~)
+_(y-88)(60)?+ (168-y) (240-x)2
Ac - 1:A'c' .6
- 1/2
(y-SS)c\
I
[(lSO-x)(360:x) +'lOSOO]'+ (16S-y)(240-x)2
, I
3
'... :-
..
ru -
'
Ac
6,400,000.
(y-SS)
---- [(lSO-x)(360-x) + 10,800] + (168-y)(240-x)f
c.
." .'
"
Sector III
~
.+
(fig. 3A-5)
DI"p.- (20,,000) (lSO-x/2) +,2/3(2.0,000)(x/2) +

(20,000)(lSO-x/2) +.2/3(20,000)(x/2)
- 360(20,000) .~ . (20 , 000),x/3 , , , '
.-'
Area
(A' )
Portion of
Sector
. '.
Distance from Centroid

to axis of rotation (c' )
A'c'
,
(y-SS) + SS - Y + 176
riM.-x) (y-SS)
--
a
3
2
.
(lSO-x)(SS)
c
. ~I
: (lSO,x) (y-SS) (y+176)
v r-
l'
.yr
xy
2., .
,
y
----
(lSO-x)(SS)2
SS
"
,
'
.'
'
'
..
2
xy2
6
'.
Ac - 1:A'c' - (y-SS)(lSO-x)(y+176)/6 + (lSO:~)(SS)2/2 + xy2/6

, - 1/6 (lSO-x) [(y-SS)(y.+176)+23.,232] + xy2
c;
."1
ru -
Ac
......
, t;t
(2l60-2x)(20,000)
Step 6.
(lS'O-x) [ (y-S8 ).(n176 )+23; 232] +xy2,'

.,
Due to the ~omplexity of obtaining a direct solution,for
ultimate unit resistance, a trial-and-error solution will be
used,( see table below):
3A-9 - ,
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22 '

,
x
125
125
125
125
125,
130
130
131
130
135
140
145
.150
130
135
135
rI
9.21
9.55
9.92: .
10.32
10.77
8.52
8.83
8.70
rIl
rIll
7.67
7.92
8.19
8.4,8
8.79
8.29
8.55
8.68
9.33
8.77
8.25
7-.78
7.35
9.50
..
"
~.92
..
8.85
Therefore:
"
x - 131. iris
y - 135 ins
r u - 8.68 psi
Problem 3A-2
Problem:
..
Resistance - Deflection Function
Determine the actual 'and equivalent r e's Ls t ance deflection function

in the elasto-plastic region for a two-way structural element.
Procedure:
Step 1. Establish design parameters

a.
Geometry of element.
b.
Support conditions
Step 2.
Determine ultimate positiye and negative moment capacities.
Step 3. Determine static properties:

a.
Modules' of elasticity for the element.
b.
Moment of inertia of the element.
Step 4.
Establish points of interest and their ultimate moment

capacities (fig. 3-23)
Step 5.
Compute properties at first yield.

Location of first yield '
.
b.
Resistance at first-yield r e
c.
Moments at remaining points consistent with r e
d.
Maximum deflection at first yield.
a.
Step 6 .
Compute properties at second

Remaining moment capacity
Location of second yield.
Change in unit resistance
d.
Unit resistance at second
e.
Moment at remaining point
a.
b.
c.
.r
3A-io
yield
at other points
Ar between first and second yield.
yield rep"
consistent with
TK S-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
f.
g.
Change in maximum deflection.

Total maximum deflection.
Note:
An element with unsymmetrical support coriditions may exhibit three
or four support yields; Therefore, repeat Step 6 as many times as
necessary to obtain 'properties at the various yield points.
Step 7.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Compute properties at final yield (ultimate unit resistance)

Ultimate unit'resistance.
Change in resistance between ultimate unit resistance and
resistance at prior yield.
Change in maximum deflection (for elements supported on
two, three, or four sides, use stiffness obtained from
figure 3-26, 3-30 and 3-36, respectively).
Step 8.
Draw the actual resistance-deflection curve (fig. 3-39).
Step 9.
Calculate equivalent maximum elastic deflection of the

element.
"
Example:
Required:
3A-2
Resistance-Deflection Function
The actual and equivalent resistance-deflection function (curve)

in the elasto-plastic region for the two-way structural steel
element.
Solution:
Step l.
a.
b.
Step 2.
Step 3.
Given:
L - 240 in;
'H - 168.in.
Fixed on three sides and free at 'the fourth.
Same as step 3 of example 3A-l(A), part a.
Static properties.
a.
Modulus of elasticity, Es for steel

Es - 29 x 10 6 psi
b .'
Considering a I-inch strip' (b - 1 inch)

Assume I - 144 in4
Step 4.
For points of interest, see figure 3A-6.,
Step 5.
Properties at first yield.

3A-ll
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC'P-397/AFR 88-22
'
.
, "
POINT 2
MHN
~n' '".
,
:: 1., ,,'1
.'I' ..'.
..-
....,
-j
--!
"
-~
.....
I'(POINT 3
IJMVN
,.
,,
"
'.
~"
.,
.t.
Figure 3A-6
c
q'
"
From figure 3-Z7 for H/L - 0.7

\ ~.~! -
a.
. ' t
B1 - 0.077
BZ - 0.160
Y1 - 0.012
v - 0.3
,,
p'
MHP - MHN - MVp - MVN - ZO,OOO in-1bs/in

Mp
-_BrH~.
r '"1 ' ..
_.., ~_
,.' -,
....,
1::_
~.
M/BH Z
..J
.. ':.
.-.....
...
".
r1 ... 20,000/[(0.077)(168)2]."',9:Z0 psi
..
rZ - 20,000/[(0.160)(168)2] - 4.43 psi
,.
r3 - 20,000/[(0.115)(168)2] - 6.16 psi

! -,
First yield at point 2 ,(smallest. r)

.'-> .,
...t
b. 'r e - 4.43 psi

c .. Mp (Point
1) -
,.
"
"
(0.077)(4.43)(168)2
9,627 in'lbs/in
MN (Point 3).-'(0.115)(4.43)(16,8)2,,.. ~14.379. in-1bs/in

d.
D - EI/b(1-v 2)
-,
- 29 x 10 6 . x 144/1[1::.(0.3)2]-
45.9 x 10 8 in-1bs
Xe - Y1reH4/D - (0,'0120)(4:43)(168)4'/43(10 8)-.:0.0092 in
Step 6.
Properties at second yield.
3A-12 ,
",I
TK 5-1300fNAVFAC
P-397/AF~
88-22
After first yield e~ement assumes a simp1e-simp1e-fixed-free

stiffness, therefore from figure 3-29 for H/L - 0.7.
B1 - 0.120
B3 - 0.220
v -
Y1 - 0.045
a.
0.3
(Point 1) - MHP - Mp (at r e)
Mp
- 20,000 -, 9,627
MN
10373 in-1bs/in,
(Point 3) - MVN -' ,Mp (at r e)

-.20,000 - 14,379
b.
"
5621 in-1bs/in
Mp (Point 1) - 10373 in-lbs/in - B1 Ar H2

Ar -,103~3/(0.120)(168)2 - 3.06 psi
~ (Point 3) - 5,621 in-lbs/in - B3Ar H2

Ar - 5,621/[(0.220)(168)2] - 0.90 psi
Second yield at Point 3 (smaller Ar)
c. Ar - 0.90 ,psi
d. rep - r e + Ar
4.43 + 0.90
5.33 psi
e. Mp (Point 1) - 0.120(0.90)(168)2
1
- 3.048 in-1bs/in
f. D - EI/b(1-v 2) -
(29)(10 6)(144)/1[1-(0.3)2]
45.9 x 10 8 in-1bs/in
Ax - Y1ArH4/D - 0.030(0.90)(168)4/45.9(10)8
- 0.0047 in
g. Xep Step 7.
Xe + AX
0.0092 + 0.0047
0.014 in
Properties at final yield (ultimate unit resistance). After

second yield element assumes a simp1e-simp1e-simp1e-free
stiffness, therefore from figure 330 for H/L'- 0.7.
Y1 - 0.045
v - 0.3
a. r u - 10.6 psi (part a, example 3A-1(A

b. Ar - r u - rep - 10.6 - 5.33' - 5.27 psi
3A-13
..
c. D
"
- 45.9 x 10 8 in-1bs
Ax -
Y1rH4 /D
(0.045)(5.27)(168)4/45.9 x 10 8;
.'
.',
0.041 in
d. ~ - X ep + AX'! _. '0.014 + '0.041 - 0.055 in
Step 8.
For actual resistance-deflection curve .:see .f Lgure 3A-7.
Step 9.
3-35
XE - 0.0092(5.33/10.6) + 0.014 [1-(4:43/10.6)
+ 0.055[1-(5.33/10.6)J .
0.00463'+ 0.0081 + 0:0273
0.040 in
'.
1~ '
The equivalent resistance-deflection curveis 'shown in figure 3A7.
.
Problem 3A-3
'.'
'
-r,
Dynamic Design Factors For A One, Way Element

i
".'
I
Problem:
Determine the plastic load. mass and load-mass factors for a oneway ,element.
Procedure:
. . ,.
Step 1. '
'
...
'1
Step 2.
Establish design parameters'.

t' ,
Determine deflected shape."
a. geometry of element
b. '" support' condf t Lons
c.' type of load'a~d mass
' . l.
.'
Step 3.
Determine maximum deflection

\
Step 4.
a.
Determlne deflection function

For distributed ~oad and/or continuous mass determine the
deflection at any po Lrrt ."
3A-14 :'
TH
5-1300/~AVFAC
P-39?/AFR
88-~2
12
ruJ-----
10
XE
Xp
/
/
H
Ul
EQUIVALENT~
/
r--ACTUAL
W
U
"">--
Ul
H
Ul
W
a:
>--
:oJ
O-f----+---+----+---t---+----j----t----t0.0
1.0E-2
2.0E-2
3.0E-2
4.0E-2
5.0E-2
DEFLECTION X (INCHES)
c.
F.igure. 3A- 7
3A-15
6.0E-2
7.0E-2
8.0E-2
b.
Step 5.
For concentrated loads and concentrated mass determine the

deflection at the load.
Calculate the shape function
For distributed
equation 3-43.
b.
For concentrated load and concentrated mass calculate r'

equation 3-46.
Step 6.
arid/or continuous mass calculate (x),
Calculate the load factor, KL.
.a.
Use equations 3-1>1 and 3-42 for a distributed load .
b.
Use equations 3-41 and 3-45 for a concentrated load
Step 7.
Calculate the mass factor,
~.
a.
Use equations 3-47 and 3-48 for a continuous mass
b.
Use equations 3-44 and 3-49 for concentrated mass
Step 8.
Calculate the load-mass factor KLM, from equation 3-53.
Example 3A-3(A)
Required:
lo~d
a.
Dynamic Design Factors For A One-Way Element
The load, mass and load-mass factors for a structural steel beam
in the elastic range, with a distributed load.
Solution:
Step 1:
Given structural steel beam shown in figure 3A-8
Figure 3A-8
a.
b.
c.
L - 120 in.
Simply supported on both edges
p(x)
2,000 Ib/in
m(x) - 0.0055(lb-s 2/in4)/in
3A-16
TN 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88 022
,.
Figure 3A-9
Step 2:
Assumed deflected shape for elastic range is shown in figure

3A-9
Step 3:: .The maximum deflection at the center is

5p(x)L4
384 EI
Step 4:
Determine deflection function

p(x)
o(x) _ ---- (L 3 _ 2Lx2 + ~3)
, .
24EI
Step 5:
Calculate the'shape function using equation 3-43

......o(x)
p(x)x
384EI
</>. __'
(L3 _ 2Lx2 + x 3 )
0max
24EI
5p(x)L4
.,
,..--Step 6:
L
FE -
Using equation 3-42, determine equivalent force

120
".
16
(L3X . - 2Lx3 + x 4)dx
p(x)</>(x)dx
(2,000 lb/in)
4
o
5L
a.
-f
2Lx4
.+
<
x5
5
I"
- 1, 280L
- 153,600 lb.
b.
From equation 3-41, find the load factor

FE
KL - -F
KL
153,600
lb.
(2,000 lb/in x 120 in. )
0.64 in th!, eLas t Lc range
3A-17
.'
TK 5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 8S i 22
ME
Find the equivalent mass from equation 3-48
a.
Step 7:
-,J
256
L
2
m(x)~(x)dx
.:0055
120
(L 3x
2Lx3 + x 4)2
25L8
dx
0
1.408
25L8
.,
120
+ x9
1.408
25L8
.00277L
.:
0.3325 lb 2_ s3/ i n
b.
From equation 3-47, calculate the mass factor
. 0. 3325.,lb - s2 '/in 3
',; (0.0055 lb - s2 /in4' x 120 in)

KM -
Step 8:
0.50 in the elastic range
Calculate the load-mass factor as defined by equation 3-51

KLM - KM/KL
- 0.50/0.64
KLM -
Example 3A-3(B)
Required:
0.78 in' the elas tic range

Dynamic Design Factors For A One-Way,Element
in the .plastic range
with a 'distributed load .
.,
Solution:
Step 1.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Step 2.
Given the structural steel beam shown in figure 3A-8

L - 120 in.
Simply-supported on both ends
p(x) - 2,000 lb/in
m(x) - 0.0055 (lb - s2/ i n4)/in
Assume deflected shape for the plastic range is shown in
figure 3A-lO
3A-18
LIZ
LIZ
Figure 3A-10
Step 3.

0max - (L/2)tane
Step 4.
Determine the deflection at any point.

o(x) - xtane.
x < L/2
Step 5.
Calculate the shape function,; equation 3-43

o(x)
xtane
</J(x)
-- 0max
(L/2)tane
- 2x/L
x < L/2
Step 6:
a.
Find FE using equation 3-42.

FE
60
-J p(x)</J(x)dx
2,000 lb/in) (2x/L)dx
_ 4,000 lb/in [ x2 /L ]:0

- 120,000 lb
b.
From equation 3-41

FE
120,000 lb.
KL - -
(2,000 lb/in) 120 in
KL - 0.5 in the plastic range

Step 7:
a.
Use equation 3-48 to find the equivalent mass
ME -
m(x)</J2(x)dx - 2
o
- 00'4 [
60
::,
(0.0055)(4 x 2/L2)dx
TM 5 c1300/NAVFAC P~397/AFR.'88~22 " ,

'
b.
As defined by equation 3'47

ME
KM - - M :., ,
KM
Step 8.
..
- s2
0.22 1b
/in 3:
s2 /in4)120 in
(0.0055 1b:
0.33 in the plastic range
Calculate KLM using equation 3-53

KLM - ~/KL
0.33/0.5
KLM - 0.66 in the plastic range
Example 3A-3(C)
Required:
in the elastic range, with aconcentrated load.
Solution:
Step 1:
'.'
'
Given structural' steel beam shown in figure 3A-l1
r
L/2
{
r. ,'.
',J:.
Figure3A-ll
\.
a.
b.
c.
;,
L - 120 in.
'j
Simply supported on both sides
F - 240 kips
m(x) - 0.0055(lb - s2/i n4)/in.

Step 2:
Assume deflected shape for elastic range is shown in figure

3A-12
TK 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88"22
Figure 3A-12
Step 3:
max - - - 48EI
Step 4:
8.
Determine deflection functions

for continuous mass,
O(x) 48EI
b.
for concentrated load
48EI
Step 5:
a.
b.
Calculate shape functions

for continuous mass use equati~n 3-43
o(x)
Px(3L - 4x 2)
t/J(x)
48EI
max
_ (3L 2x -.' 4x 3)/L3
for concentrated load, use equation 3-46
PL3
48EI
t/J r 48EI
PL3
- 1.0
Step 6:
a.
Find equivalent force from equation 3-45

i
FE -
Frt/Jr - Pxl - 240 kips
3A-21
48EI
PL3
..
TM 5"1300/NAVFACP-397/AFR
.,
_.,. ,"
"..
...'88-22
'.~
b.
Using equation 3-41, calculate the load factor

240 kips
240 kips
KL - 1.0 for the' elastic"gange
Step 7:
Equation 3-48 gives the equivalent mass.
a.
<
120 (0.0055)
ME -
Jm(x)2(x)
dx -
o
0.0055
L6
!'
b.
From equation 3-47, cel cu'l at.e rche mass .f'ac tio'r
0.321b - s2/ i n3
(0.0055lb - s2/ i n4 x 120in)
";
.I',
KM - 0.49, in,.th.e elastic range

"
Step 8:
.'
Calculate the load,mass factor, frof,equation 3-53
KLM - KM/KL
':- 0.49/1.0
KLM - 0.49 for the elastic range
F
Example 3A-3(D)
Requ!.red:
Determine the load, mass and the load-mass factors for a structural steel beam, in the plastic range, with a concentrated load.
Solution:
Step 1.
a.
b.
Given structural steel beams shown in figure 3A-ll.

L - 120 in
Simply-supported at both edges
3A-22'
r-,
TK 5-1300/NAVFAC
c.
P~397/AFR
88-22
F - 240 kips
m(x) - 0.0055 (lb - s2/ i n4)/in
Step 2.
Assumed deflected shape for the plastic range is shown in

figure 3A-13
.1
.<
L/2
L/2
.x
Figure 3A-13
Step 3:

0max - (L/2)tan9
Step 4:
a.
Determine deflection function ..

for continuous mass
x< L/2
O(x) - xtan9
b.
for a concentrated load

Or - (L/2)tan9
Step 5:
a.
Calculate shape factors using

equation 3-43 for continuous mass
o(x)
(x) -
-max
xtan9
(L/2)tant'
2x/L
b.
x < L/2
equation 3-46 for concentrated load

(L/2)tan9
(L/2)tan9
1.0
3A-23
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
Step 6:
a.
The equivalent force is found using equation 3-45

i
~
FE -
Fr'I'r - PXl -
240 kips ..
r-l
-,
b.
Equation 3-41 gives. the load factor
KL -
a.
240 kips
240 kips
1.0 for plastic range
KL -
Step 7:
FE
The equivalent mass is found using equation 3-48
J
L
ME ;.
m(x)2(x)dx - 2
b.
60
(0.0055)(4 x 2/ L2)dx
Solve for KM using equation 3-47

.~-
(0.0055 lb
KM - 0.33 in the plastic range

Step 8:
From equation 3-53, calculate KLM
- 0.33 in the plastic range

Problem 3A-4
Problem:
Plastic Load-Mass Factor
Determine the plastic load~mass factor KLM for a two-way element

using (1) general solution and (2) chart solution.
Note: The determination of the plastic load-mass factor follows
the calculations for the ultimate resistance, hence the structural
configuration and the location of the plastic yield lines will be
known.
Procedure:
Step 1.
See part a, problem 3A-l for the 'structural configuration

and location of plastic yieJ.d lines. Denote sectors formed
by yield lines.
3A-24 .
TM 5-l300/NAVFACP-397/AFR 88-22
Step 2.
Determine the load-mass factors properties I, c, and L' for
Step 3.
Step 4.
Step 5.
Determine the factor I/cL' for all sectors ...

Calculate the total area of the element.
With values obtai~ed above, calculate the plastic load-mass
factor for the element using equation 3-57.
all sectors.
;..
Note: In the above problem, an element of uniform thickness was

considered. For non-uniform elements, the load-mass factor is
c a l.cul at edlus tng equation 3-53 where the ma58 of the individual
sectors must be considered.
Procedure:
Part (b) - qhart Solution

,;
Step 1.
See partb, problem 3A-l for structural configuration and

location of plastic yield lines in terms of x/L or y/H.
Step 2.
For known value of X/L or y/H and support condition, determine the load-mass factor for the element from figure 3-44.
Note: Chart solution may be used only:if.the element conforms to

the requirements listed in section 3,17.3
Example 3A-4
Required:
Solution:
Plastic load-mass factor for the eleme~t considered in example 3Al(A) using (1) general solution and (2) chart solution.
Step 1.
L
H
Plastic Load-Hass Factor
Given structural configuration and location of yield lines

shown below (see part a, exa~ple 3A-l(A)) in figure 3A-14.
240 in
168 in
120 in
Y - 137.6 in
constant
Tc
I
I
I
I
Fixed .........
/
/
/""
"" .
" m
"
.,
Figure 3A-l:4
3A-25 .
TM S-1300/NAVFAC P:397/AFR 88-22
Step 2. Load-mass factor properties.

a. Sector 1..
L' - Y - 137.6 in
c - y/3 -137;6/3
I - L(L,3) /12 - 240(137.6)3/12.
'.
~L
Sector II.
b.
e.g.
AXIS OF
ROT~mN7
:z:
rZ??,,~ti
ILl .
I-AXIS OF
Figure 3A-15
ROTA11ON
Figure 3A-16
L' - x - 120 in
H - Y - 168 - 137.6 - 30.4 in
L' [H + 2 (H-y)]
c -
120 [168 + 2 (30.4) J
3 [H + (H-y)]
3 (168 + 30.4)
c - 120 (0.384)
(H-y)(L' ) 3 +
y(L'P
I 3
12
30.4 (120)3 +
137.6(120)3
12
21. 60(120) 3
Step 3. Calculate factor I/cL' for each sector:

I
240(137.6)3/ 12
Sector I.
cL'
I
(133.4/3)(133.4)
21.60(120)3
6,646 in2
Sector II.
cL'
I
Sector III.
8,256 in 2
(0.390 x.120)(120)
6,646 in 2
cL'
Step 4.
Area of panel
A - LH - 240 (168) - 40,320 in2
3A-26
TIl 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
Step 5.
Load-mass factor
l/cL'
(eq. 6-14)
A
'8,256
K
2(6,646)
0.534
lJol
Solution:
"
40,320
Part (b) ,,- Chart Solution
Step 1.
Given: Panel fixed on 3 edges, 1 free and y/H - 0.803

part, b, example 3A-l(A.
Step 2.
From'figure 3-44, read load-mass factor
._'
I'
(see
KlJol -0.,543
Problem 3A-5
Problem:
Response of a Single-Degree-of Freedom System subject to

Dynamic Load
Determine the maximum response and the corresponding time it
occurs of a single-degree-of-freedom system subjected to dynamic

load using (a) numerical methods and (b) design charts.
,
Procedure:
Part (a) - Numerical Methods
Step 1.
Establish dimensional parameters of the system.
Step 2.
Determine the natural period of vibration and integration

time interval.
Step 3.
Construct a table similar to table 3-14 of section 3-19.2.

Note': For the first interval n-l, Equation 3- 59 is used and
subsequent intervals, the recurrence formula (eqn. 3-56) is
used.
Procedure:
Part (b) - Chart solution
Step 1.
Same as step 1 of example 3A-5, part a.
Step 2.
Determine the non-dimensional parameters.
Step' 3.
Example 3A-5
Required:
,Determine. the ratio of the maximum displacement to the

elastic displacement ~/XE and the ratio of the time at
which this maximum displacement occur's to the duration of
the blast load.
Maximum Response of Single-Degree-of-Freedom System Subjected to a Triangular Load.
The maximum response and the time it occurs,' of a single-degreeof-freedom system subjected to blast loads, using (a) numerical
methods and (b) design charts.
3A-27
TH 5-1JOOVNAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
Solution: Part (a) - Numer1cal Methods

Step 1.
::
Given:
p
.'
,'u
XE
,1"'
TIME
(a) Single-Degree-ofFreedom System
'.
DISPLACEMENT
(b) External Load

,
"
Figure 3A-17 '
"
r-
(c) Resistance
Function
I.,
-' ~"
2.5 Kips-sec 2/ft

- 9,860
- 750 KipsKips/ft
XE - 0.076 ft
T - 0.10 sec
1000 Kips
P
m
K
ru
J ..
"'1 ...
Step',2 '., Natural period .of vibration and integration' time interval .
I
2" [m/ Kjl/2''':'
'~',
2" [2.5/9,860]1/2
t - TN/10 - 0.01 sec

Step 3,
Construct table as shown below,
",r,.
-,'to
3A-28 '
- 0.10 sec
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
Pn
(sec)
Kip.
0
1
2
3
4
5
0
0.01
0.02
0.03
0.04
0.05
6 0.06
7 0.01
8 0.08
(Xips) (Kips)
1000
900
800
100
600
500
40
300
200
Pn-R"
R"
"n-(Pn -R,,/m
(it/ne Z)
400
1000
197.200 702.800
671.68. 128.426
-50.0
150
150
750
750
750
750
51.366
-20.0
-150.0
-60.0
-100.0
zx"
"..-1
"..+1
(ttl
(ttl
(ttl
(ttl
0.040
0.0
0.0
-0.00600 0.34522
-0.0100 0.43673
-140.0
-180.0
-220.0
10
"n(4< l 2
0.028112 0.0400
0.0
0.05131 0.13622 0.020
-0,00200 0.242114 0.06811
281.120
-250.0
-350.0
-450.0
-550.0
-0.0140
-0.0180
-0.0220
0.020
0.068112
0.121351
0.17261
0.121351 0.21186
0.17261
0.25312
0.050623 0.21786
O.S48H 0.25312
0.55525 0.27431
0.271t37
0.27762
0.25880
9 0.09
Note:
Pn - f(t n)
- 1000 [l-n(At/T)]
~-
Note:
For n-O, ~+l (Column 10)
- XO+l - Xl - (1/2)aO(At)2
- (1/2)(0.040)
- 0.02 ft
For n-l,
2~ (Column 8)- 2X l - 2[(1/2)aO(At)2 j

2(0.02) - 0.04 ft
~-l
(Column 9) - Xo
~+l
(Column 10)
0.0
X2 - 2X l-XO + al(At)2
- 2(0.02) - 0 + 0.02811
- 0.06811 ft
For n-2,
2~
(Column 8)- 2X 2 - 2(0.06811)

- 0.13622 ft.
3A-29
TH 5l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
~-l
(Column 9)'
- Xl
- 0.02 ft.
~+l (Column 10)
- X3
- 2X 2 - 'Xl + a2 (At)2
- (2)(0,06811)
- 0.121357 ft.
"
:.
"
For n-3. 4 ... repeat the above procedure.

,
"
"
:'
0.02 +'0.005137
Solution:
'
Part (b) - Design Charts
Step 1.
Same as step 1 of example 3A-5, part a
Step 2.
Non-dimensional parameters
a.
Natural period of vibration, Tn

Tn - 2rr[m/Kjl/2 -
b.
2rr[2.5/9.860J l/2 -
0.10 sec
Ratio of duration of blast load T to natural period TN

T/T N - 0.10/0,10 - 1.0
c.
Ratio of peak resistance r u to peak load P

ru/P - 750/1000 - 0.75
Step 3.
Using the ratios calculated in step 2 and figures 354 and

3-55, determine 'the value of ~/XE and tm/T N.
For T/TN - 1
and
from,figure 3- 54
from figure 3-55
Step 4. Determine
and t m
~/XE
- 3.7
- (3.7)X E - (3.7(r u/K E)

- (3.7)(750/9,860) - 0.28144 ft,
tm/T - 0.77
tm
- (0.77)T - 0.77(0.10) - 0.077 sec
3A-30
TK 5~1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

Problem 3A-6
Maximum Response of a Single-Degree-of-Freedom System to

Bilinear Blast Loads
Problem:
Determine Xm/X E tm/T N and tE/T (when applicable) for a singledegree-of-freedom system subject to various bilinear blast loads.
Procedure:
Part (a) - Solution in Region D
Step 1.
Establish normalized parameters
Step 2.
Enter table 3-15 with the given C parameters and determine

which figures have to be used.
Step 3.
Enter each of the figures determined in step 2, with the

given values of the other two parameters and determine the
region where the intersection points are located.
Step 4.
Based on the region where the intersection points are located.

enter the appropriate figure and f~nd Xm/XE tm/T N and tE/T.
Procedure:
Part (b) - Solution in Region C - Graphical Interpolation.
Step 1.
Same as step 1 in part a.
Step 2.
Step 3.
Step 4 ..
Set up a table as shown in table 3A-l .. Post each figure

number and the corresponding values of Cl and C2 leaving a
space between each line of information. Post in the spaces
the appropriate values of Cl and C2 "needed for interpolation. Enter each of the figures determined in Step 2 with
the given parameters and find the values of Xm/X E. Post
these values in table 3A-l.
Step 5.
Use log-log graph paper to plot the points obtained in Step

4. Post these values in table 3A-l. using linear interpolation where necessary.
Step 6.
Procedure:
Plot on log-log graph paper the points which represent

(Xm/XE' C2) for the given value of C. Use linear interpolation to find Xm/X E for given value of C2.
Part (c) - Solution in Region C - Mathematical Interpolation
Step 1.
Step 2.
Step 3.
3A-31

Step 4. Same as step 4 in part b.
Step 5. Solve for lnY a and lnY b using equations 3-83 and 3-84.
Step 6. Solve for lnY using equation 3-85.
Step 7. Solve for Y using equation 3-86.
Example 3A-6
Required:
Solution:
Maximum Response of a Single-Degree-of-Freedom System to

Bilinear Blast Loads
Determine Xm/XE tm/T N and tE/T (when applicable) for a singledegree-of-freedom system subject to various bilinear blast loads.
Part (a) - Solution in Region D
Step 1.
Given:
P/r u
1.0
T/TN - 3.0
Cl - 0.66
C2 - 50
Step 2.
Enter table 3-15 with Cl, - 0.66 and C2 - 50.

3-119, 3-120, 3-147, and 3-148 apply.
Step 3.
Enter each of the figures determined in step 2, with P/r u 1.0 and T/T N'- 3.0. Note that the intersection point is
located to the right of the line of solid squares, defined
as region D. In region D, the maximum dynamic response
depends only on the shock load described by P/r u and T/TN;
the gas,load described byClP/r u and C2T/Tn does not influence the maximum dynamic response. Consequently, figures 364a and 3-64b for a single triangular load pulse apply.
Enter figure 3-64a with P/r u - 1.0 and T/T N - 3.0 and find
Xm/X E - 3.55, tm/T N - 0.98, tE/T - 0.086.
Solution:
Note figures
Part (b) - Solution in Region C - Graphical Interpolation
Step 1.
,-
Given:
T/T N - 0.10
- 0.06
-;
Step 2.
Enter table 3-15 with Cl - 0.06 and C2 - 20.

3- 108, 3-109, 3-133 and 3-134 apply.
3A-32
Note figures
TK 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
Step 3.
Enter each of these figures with P/ru ~ 32 and T/Tn - 0.10.

Note that the intersection point is not located in regions
A, B or D. Therefore the intersection'points lie in region
C and interpolation between charts is required to obtain a
solution.
Step 4.
Set up table as shown in table lA-l below. Post each chart

number and the corresponding values of Cl and C2 leaving a
space between each line of information. Post in the spaces
the appropriate values of Cl and C2 needed for interpolation. Enter figure 3-108 with P/r u - 32 and T/TN - 0.10 and
find Xm/X E - 112. Post this value in the table. Enter
figure 3-109 with P/r u - 32 and T/TN - 0.10 and find Xm/X E 86. Post this value in the table. Repeat this process for
figures 3-133 and 3-134, and post values for Xm/X E in the
table.
Step 5.
Use log-log graph paper to plot the points (112,0.068) and

(86,0.046) which represent (Xm/XE, Cl) for C2 - 10 as shown
in figure 3-267. Use "straight-line interpolation to find
Xm/XE - 103 for Cl - 0.060. Post this value in the table.
Repeat this process for C2 - 30, and find Xm/X E - 251 for Cl
- 0.06 as shown in figure 3-267.
Step 6.
Plot on log-log graph paper the points (103,10) and (251,30)

which represent Xm/XE' C2) for Cl' - 0.060. Use straightline interpolation for finding ~/XE - 182 for C2 - 50 as
shown in figure 3-267. Thus the solution is Xm/XE - 182.
Table 3A-l
Figure No.
Cl
C2
Xm/X E
3-108
3-109
0.068
112
0.060
10
--
0.046
10
86
0.060
20
--
f-
103
3-133
3-134
0.075
30
340
0.060
30
--
0.056
30
230
3A-33
I-
251
182
TH 5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFB.88-22 "
Solution:
Part (c) -
S~lution
in region C - Mathematical Interpolation
Step l.
Same as step -l.-of part (b) .
Step 2.
Same as step 2 of part (b).
Step 3.
Same as step 3 of part (b).
Step 4.
Same as step 4 of part (b) .
Step 5.
using equation 3-83 and 3-84, find lnY a and lnYb.

1nYa - 1nY1
In[Y2/ Y1] 1n[C1/ Cll]
1n [ C12 / Cll]
1n(86/112)ln(0.060/0.068)
1nll2 +
1n(0.046/0.068)
1nYa
- 4.6339
In[ C14 / . C13 1
1n(230/340)ln(0.06/0.075)
1n340 + - - - - . . . : . - - - - - - 1n(0.056/0.075)
1nYb - 5.5304
Step 6.
Find 1nY from equation 3-85

1nY - 1nYa +
(lnYb - 1nYa)ln(C2/C 2l)
1n(C 23/C n
(5.5304 - 4.639)ln(20/10)
- 4.6339 +
1n(30/10)
1nY - 5.1995
Step 7.
Solve for Y using equation 3-86

Y _
_
Y -
e 1nY
e5.1995
181
3A-34
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
APPENDIX 3B
LIST OF SYMBOLS
1M 5-l300jNAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
(1)
(2)
acceleration (in./ms 2)
depth of equivalent rectangular stress block (in.)
area (in. 2 )
area of diagonal bars at the support within a width b (in. 2 )

area of openings (ft 2 )
area of tension reinforcement within a width b (in. 2 )
A' s
area of compression reinforcement within a width b (in. 2 )

Grea of flexural reinforcement within a width b in the horizontal direction on each face (in. 2 )*
area of flexural reinforcement wIthin a width b in the vertical direction on each face (in. 2 )*
total area of stirrups or lacing reinforcement in tension
within a distance, ss or sl and a width b s or b l (in. 2 ) .
area of sector 1 and II, respectively (in. 2 )
(1)
(2)
width of compression face of flexural member (in.)

width of concrete strip in which the direct shear
stresses at the supports are resisted by diagonal bars
(in. )
width of concrete strip in which the diagonal tension stresses

are resisted by stirrups of area
(in.)
Av

are resisted by lacing of area
(in.)
Av
constant defined in pargraph
(1)
(2)
distance from the resultant applied load to the axis of

rotation (in.)
damping coefficient
distance from the resultant applied load to the. axis of

rotation for sectors I and II, respectively (in.)
dilatational velocity of concrete (ft/sec)
shear coefficient
critical damping
38-1
TH 5-l300/NAVFAC P-39i/AFR 88-22

shear coefficient for ultimate shear stress of
one~way
ele-
ments
post-failure fragment coefficient (lb 2_ms4/in. 8)

peak reflected pressure coefficient at angle of incidence a
shear coefficient for ultimate support shear for one-way
elements
shear coefficient for ultimate support shear in horizontal

direction for two-way elements*
shear coefficient for ultimate support shear in vertical
drag coefficient
drag pressure (psi)
,~t

shear coefficient for ultimate shear stress in horizontal
leakage pressure coefficient
impulse coefficient at deflection ~ (psi_ms 2/in. 2)
Cu '
impulse coeffici~nt at deflection ~ (psi-ms 2/in. 2)

shear coefficient for ultimate shear stress in vertical
I
(1)
(2)
(3)
impulse coefficient at deflection Xl (psi-ms 2/in. 2)

parameter defined in figure
impulse' coefficient at deflection'~ (psi-ms 2/in. 2)

distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of tension
reinforcement (in.)
d'
distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of compression reinforcement (in.)

distance between the centroids of the compression and tension
reinforcement (in.)
38-2'
distance from support and equal to distance d or de (in.)
di
inside diameter of cylindrical explosive container (in.)
dl
distance between center lines of adjacent lacing bends measured normal to flexural reinforcement (in.)
dc o
diameter of steel core (in.)
dl
diameter of cylindrical portion of primary fragment (in.)
(1)
(2)
(3)

location of shock front for maximum stress (ft)
minimum magazine separation distance (ft)
nominal diameter of reinforcing bar (in.)

equivalent loaded width of structure for non-planar wave front
(ft)
DIF
DLF
dynamic load factor
(2E)1/2
Gurney Energy Constant (ft/sec)
f' c
static ultimate compressive strength of concrete at 28 days

(psi)
dynamic ultimate compressive strength of concrete (psi)
dynamic design stress for reinforcement (psi)
dynamic ultimate stress of reinforcement (psi)
dynamic yield stress of reinforcement (psi)
static design stress for reinforcement (a function of f y ' i u
and 8) (psi)

38-3
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
(1)
(2)
(3)
total external force (lbs)

function of C2 and CI for bilinear triangular load
force in the reinforcing bars (lbs)

equivalent external force (lbs)
g
variable defined in table 4-3
charge location parameter (ft)
(1)
(2)
span height (in.)

distance between reflecting surface(s) and/or free
edge(s) in vertical direction (ft)
height of charge above ground (ft)

scaled height of charge above ground (ft/lb l/ 3)
height of structure (ft)
scaled height of triple point (ft/lb l/ 3)
sum of scaled unit blast impulse capacity of receiver panel
and scaled unit blast impulse attenuated through concrete and
sand in a composite element (psi-ms/lb l/3)
unit blast impulse (psi-ms)
scaled unit blast impulse (psi-ms/lb l/ 3)
total scaled unit blast impulse capacity of composite element
(psi-ms/lb l/3)
scaled unit blast impulse ca~acity of receiver panel of
composite element (psi-ms/lb /3)
element (psi-ms/lb l/3)
i
unit negative normal reflected impulse (psi-ms)

38-4
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

moment of inertia (in. 4 )
average of gross and cracked moments of inertia of width b

(in. 4 )
moment of inertia of cracked concrete section of width b
(in. 4 )
moment of inertia of gross concrete section of width b (in. 4 )
mass moment of inertia (lb-ms 2-in.)
j
ratio of distance between centroids of compression and tension

forces to the depth d
constant defined in paragraph
(1)
(2)
unit stiffness (psi-in for slabs) (lb/in/in for beams)

elastic unit stiffness (psi/in for slabs) (lb/in/in for beams)

elasto-plastic unit stiffness (psi-in for slabs) (psi for
beams)
equivalent elastic unit stiffness (psi-in for slabs) (psi for
beams)
load factor
KLM
load-mass factor
(KLM)u
load-mass factor in the ultimate range
(KLM ) up
KM
mass factor
KR
resistance factor
Kl
factor defined in paragraph
KE
kinetic energy

spacing of same type of lacing bar (in.)
(1)
(2)
span length (in.) except in chapter 4 (ft)*

edge(s) in horizontal direction (ft)
length of lacing bar required in distance sl (in.)
3B-5

wave length of positive pressure phase (ft)
wave length of negative pressure phase (ft)
wave length of positive pressure phase at points band d,
respectively (ft)
total length of sector of element normal to axis of rotation
(in. )
m
unit mass (psi-ms 2/in.)

average of the effective elastic and plastic unit masses (psims2/in.)
effective unit mass (psi-ms 2/in.)
effective unit mass in the ultimate range (psi-ms 2/in.)
~p
effective unit mass in the post-ultimate range (psi-ms 2/in.)
(1)
(2)
unit bending moment (in-lbs/in.)

total mass (lb-ms 2/in.)
effective total mass (lb-ms 2/in.)

ultimate unit resisting moment (in-lbs/in.)
(in. -lbs)
fragment distribution parameter
equivalent total mass (lb-ms 2/in.)
ultimate unit negative moment capacity in horizontal direction
(in. -lbs/in.)*
ultimate unit positive moment capacity in horizontal direction
(in. -lbs/in.)*
ultimate unit negative moment capacity at supports (in.1bs/in. )
ultimate unit positive moment capacity at midspan (in.1bs/in. )
ultimate unit negative moment capacity in vertical direction
(in. -lbs/in.)*
ultimate unit positive moment capacity in vertical direction
(in. -lbs/in.)*
3B-6
1M 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
(1)
(2)
modular ratio

p
reinforcement ratio equal to
p'
reinforcement ratio equal to
or
A'
s
or
bd
A'
s
bd c
strength
Pm
Pmo
Peak mean pressure in a partially vented chamber (psi)

reinforcement ratio in horizontal direction on each face*
Pr
reinforcement ratio equal to PH + Pv
Pv
reinforcement ratio in vertical direction on each face*
p(x)
(1)
(2)
pressure (psi)
concentrated load (lbs)
negative pressure (psi)

interior pressure within structure (psi).

fictitious peak pressure (psi)
peak pressure (psi)
p r

peak reflected pressure at angle of incidence a (psi)
positive incident pressure at points band e, respectively
(psi)
3B-7
1M 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
Pso
Ps o -
peak negative incident pressure
Psob,Psod,Psoe
peak positive incident pressure at points b , d, and e, respectively (psi)

dynamic pressure at points band e, respectively (psi)
peak dynamic pressure at points band e, respectively (psi)
(1)
(2)

radius of spherical TNT (density equals 95 lb/ft 3 charge
(ft))
unit rebound resistance (psi)
Ar
change in unit resistance (psi)

elastic unit resistance
elasto-plastic unit resistance (psi)

ultimate unit resistance (psi, for slabs) (lb/in for beams)
post-ultimate unit resistant (psi)
radius of hemispherical portion of. primary fragment (in.)
R
(1)
(2)
total internal resistance (lbs)

slant distance (ft)
distance traveled by primary fragment (ft)

normal distance (ft)
equivalent total internal resistance (lbs)
ground distance (ft)
total internal resistance of sectors I and II, respectively
(lbs)
spacing of stirrups in the direction parallel to the longitudinal reinforcement (in.)
3B-8
spacing of lacing in the direction parallel to the longitudinal reinforcement (in.)

S
height of front wall or one-half its width, whichever is

smaller (ft)
SE
strain energy
time (ms)
time increment (ms)
any time (ms)
time of arrival of blast wave at points b, e, and f, respectively (ms)
(1)
(2)
clearing time for reflected pressures (ms)

container thickness of explosive charges (in.)
rise time (ms)

time to reach maximum elastic deflection
duration of positive phase of blast pressure (ms)
time of arrival of blast wave (ms)
time at which partial failure occurs (ms)
T
duration of equivalent triangular loading function (ms)

thickness of concrete section (in.)
scaled thickness of concrete section (ft/lb l/ 3 )
rise time (ms)
thickness of sand fill (in.)
3B-9

scaled thickness of sand fill (ft/lb l/ 3)
u
particle velocity (ft/ms)

ultimate flexural or anchorage bond stress (psi)
shock front velocity (ft/ms)
velocity (in./ms)
boundary velocity for primary fragments (ft/sec)
ultimate shear stress permitted on an unreinforced web (psi)
maximum post-failure fragment velocity (in./ms)
average post-failure fragment velocity (in./ms)
velocity at incipient failure deflection (in./ms)
initial velocity of primary fragment (ft/sec)
residual velocity of primary fragment after perforation
(ft/sec)
striking velocity of primary fragment (ft/sec)
ultimate shear stress (psi)
ultimate shear stress at distance de from the horizontal
support (psi)*
ultimate shear stress at distance de from the vertical support
(psi)*
volume of partially vented chamber (ft 3)

ultimate direct shear capacity of the concrete of width b
(lbs)
shear at distance de from the vertical support on a unit width
(lbs ./in.)*
shear at distance de from the horizontal support on a unit
width (lbs/in.)*
volume of structure (ft 3)
shear at the support on a unit width (lbs/in)*
shear at the vertical support on a unit width (lbs/in.)*
38-10
Vs v
shear at the horizontal support on a unit width (lbs/in.)*
Vu
total shear on a width b (lbs)
weight density of concrete (lbs/ft 3 )
weight density of sand (lbs/ft 3 )
charge weight (lbs)
Wc
total weight of explosive containers (lbs)
Wf
weight of primary fragment (oz)
Wco
total weight of steel core (lbs)
Wc l ' Wc 2
total weight of plates 1 and 2, respectively (lbs)
Ws
width of structure (ft)
WD
work done
yield line location in horizontal direction (in.)*
deflection (in.)
Xa
any deflection (in.)
Xe
Xep
elasto-plastic deflection (in.)
Xf
maximum penetration into concre ce of armor-piercing fragments

(in. )
Xf '
maximum penetration into concrete of fragments other than
lSn
Xs
(1)
maximum penetration into sand of armor-piercing fragments
(2)
(in. )
static deflection

equivalent elastic deflection (in.)
y
yield line location in vertical direction (in.)*
38-11
TN S-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
scaled slant distance (ft/lb l/3)

scaled normal distance (ft/lb l/3)
scaled ground distance (ft/lb l/3)
(1)
angle formed by the plane of stirrups, lacing, or diagonal reinforcement and the plane of the longitudinal
reinforcement (deg)
(2)
(1)
coefficient for determining elastic and elasto-plastic

resistances
(2)
y
particular support rotation angle. (deg)
deflections increase in support rotation angle after partial

failure (deg)
support rotation angle (deg)
angular acceleration (rad/ms 2)

horizontal rotation angle (deg)*
vertical rotation angle (deg)*
Eo
effective perimeter of reinforcing bars (in.)

summation of moments
(in.~lbs)
sum of the ultimate unit resisting moments acting along the

negative yield lines (in.-lbs)
sum of the ultimate unit resisting.moments acting along the
positive yield lines (in.-lbs)
ductility factor
v
Poisson's ratio
(1)
(2)

bar diameter (in.)
"'(x)
assumed shape function for distributed loads
38-12
1M 5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

free edge
simple support
IIIIIII
fixed support
xxxxxxx
either fixed, restrained, or simple support
Note.
walls.
When roof slabs or other horizontal elements are under consideration,
3B-13
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
APPENDIX 3C
BIBLIOGRAPHY
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
1.
Blast Resistant Design, NAVFAC Design Manual 2.8, Department of the Navy,
Naval Facilities Engineering Command, Alexandria, VA 22332, April 1982.
2.
Design of Structures to Resist Nuclear Weapons Effects, ASCE Manual of

Engineering Practice, No. 42, American Society of Civil Engineers, New
York, NY, 1961. (1983 Edition under preparation)
3.
Designing Facilities to Resist Nuclear Weapons Effects, Structures, TM5858-3, Headquarters, Department of the Army, Washington, DC.
4.
Structures to Resist the Effects of Accidental Explosions, Technical

Manual TM5-l300, Navy Publication NAVFAC 1'-397, Air Force Manual AFM 8822, Department of the Army, the Navy, and the Air Force, Washington, DC,
June 1969.
5.
Crawford, R. E., et aI, The Air Force Manual for Design and Analysis of
Hardened Structures, AFWL-TR-74-l02, Air Force Weapons Laboratory,
Kirtland Air Force Base, New Mexico, 87117.
6.
Healey, J., et at, Design of Steel Structures to Resist the Effects of HE

Explosions, by Ammann and Whitney, Consulting Engineers, New York, NY,
Technical Report 4837, Picatinny Arsenal, Dover, NJ, August 1975.
7.
Hopkins, J., Charts for Predicting Response of a Simple Spring-Mass System

to a Bilinear Blast Load, Technical Note N-1669, Naval Civil Engineering
Laboratory, Port Hueneme, CA, April 1983.
8.
Stea, W., et aI, Nonlinear Analysis of Frame Structures Subjected to Blast

Overpressures, by Ammann and Whitney, Consulting Engineers, New York, NY,
Contractor report ARLCD-CR-77008, U.S. Army Armament Research and Development Command, Large Caliber Weapon Systems Laboratory, Dover, NJ, May
1977 .
9.
Stea, W. Weissman, S., and Dobbs, N., Overturning and Sliding Analysis of
Reinforced Concrete Protective Structures, by Ammann and Whitney, consulting Engineers, New York, NY, Technical Report 4921, Picatinny Arsenal,
Dover, NJ, February 1976.
10. Javornicky, J. and Van Amerongen, C., Tables for the Analysis of Plates,
Slabs and Diaphragms Based on the Elastic Theory, Bauverlag GmbH. ,
Wiesbaden/Germany (2nd Edition 1971).
11. Roark, R.J. and Young, W. C., Formulas for Stress and Strain, McGraw Hill,
New York (5th Edition 1975).
12. Cohen, E. and Dobbs, N., Design Procedures and Details for Reinforced
Concrete Structures Utilized in Explosive Storage and Manufacturing
Facilities, Ammann and Whitney, Consulting Engineers, New York, NY, Annals
of the New York Academy of Sciences, Conference on Prevention of and

Protection against Accidental Explosion of Munitions, Fuels and Other
Hazardous Mixtures, Volume 152, Art. 1, October 1968.
3C-l
"STRUCfURES TO RESIST THE EFFEcrs OF ACCIDENTAL EXPLOSIONS"
CHAPTER 4. REINFORCED CONCRETE DESIGN
TK
5-1300/~AVFAC
P-397/AFR 88-22
CHAPTER 4
REINFORCED CONCRETE DESIGN'

I~TRODlicTION
.,
r.
4-1. Purpose
The purpose of this' manual i;.to present methods of'design'fot protective

construction u~ed in facilities'for development, testing, productio~,.storage,
maintenance, modification, inspection, demilitarization, and disposal of'
.
. .
. '"
.'
'I'
4-2. Objective
techniques whereby propagation of explosion (from 'one structure or part ofa
structure to another)'or mass detonation can be pr~vented and to provide
protection for personnel and v;'luable equip;;'';n!:,'
': "
(1)
e,
"
( 2)
(3)
(4)
Establish the blast load parameter~ ~equired for design of p~ote~

i:ive s truc t;"r~s. '.
Provide methods for calculating
the'dynamic
respon;e'of
'structural
.'
r
.'. ,
elements including reinforced'concrete, and structural steel:
Establish construction details and procedures.necessary to afford
the requi~ed
strength
resist the applied blast 'loads.
".
',; .
','
Establish'guidelines,for siting expl!,sive facilitie~,to.obtain
maximum cost effectiveness in, both' the p Lannd.ngvand structural .
arrangements, providi~g' ~losure~, 'and preventing' damage to interior portions ,of structures
because of. 'j..structural motion,
shock, and
"
.,
,
"
,..."
to
~
","'
" ,
"
.,,~
-r
,
4-3. Background
:-.'
For the,first
60 years of . the
20th century;
criteria'
and met~ods ';(based
upon
.
,
. '
.
results of catastrophic , events were used, for the design of explosive facilities. The criteria and methods did, not include a detailed or reliable,quantitative basis for assessing the degree ,of protection afforded by the. protective
faCility. In the late.1960's quantita~ive procedure~ were set,forth in the
first edition of' the present.manual,'''Structures ~o R~sist'the Effects ~f
Accidental Explosions". This manual was based 'on extensive research"and
development programs which permitted ..a.inore,reliable approach to current and
future'designrequirements. ',Sin~e the original 'publication of this manual,
more extensive' testi')g and d~ve~opmen~ pr;olp:;ams 'have t~lken place: This
,
additional research included ,work with materials other 'than reinforced concrete which was the principal con~t~uction ma~erial referenced in the initial
.
,
I .
,..
"
Modern methods for the manufacture and storage of explosive materials, which
include many exotic chemicals: fuels, and prop'ellants, require-less,space for
a given qt1,mtityof explosive materiar'than'w~s prevfous Iy needed. Such
accidental explosions. (One accidental explosion causillg the detonation of
4-1
-.~
TM
5-l30~/NAVFAC
P-397/AFR 88-22
other explosive materials.) It is evident that a requirement for more,accurat~ design techniques is essential. This'manual describes rational design
methods' to provide the required structural prot,:ction.
"
These design methods a~count for the ~lose-in effects of a 'detonation including the high pressures and the nonuniformity of blast loading on protective
The dynamic response of struct~res, constructed of v~r~~us m~terials, or
combination of materials, can be calculated, and details are given to provide
the strength and ductility required by the design. Tge design approach is
directed, primarily 'toward protective structures'subjected to the ,effects of a
applic~ble to the design of other explosive environments as well as other
The design techniques set forth in this manual'are based upon the re~ults of
numerous full- and small-scale structural response and explosive effects tests
of various materials conducted in conjunction with' the d~velopment of this
4-4. Scope
It is not the intent 'of this manual to establish ,safety criteria., Appiicable
documents should,be consulted for this purpose. Response predictions for
personnel and equip~ent ,are included for information.
"
'
'
In this ~~nuaicaneffort is
been included in order 'that
situations other th~n those
made to:cover th~ more probable design'situations.

information on protectiye desig~ techniques has
application of the basic theory can be made to
which' wet;e fully cons Lder'ed , "
"
,',.
This manual is applicable to the' design of prot~ctive structures subjected to

the effects associated with high explosive detonations. For these 'design
situations, the manual will apply for explosive quantities less than 2s,QOO
situations such as far~ or intermediate-range effects. For these latter cases
the design procedures are applicable for explosive quantities iri the order of
500,000 pounds which, is the maximum quantity of high explosive approved for
aboveground storage 'facilities in 'the Department of Defense manual, "Ammunition and Explosives Safety Standards", DOD 60ss.9-STD. Since tests were
pr~marily directed toward the response of structural steel 'and reinforced
concrete elements to blast overpressures, this manual concentrates on design
procedures and techniques for these materials. However; this does'not imply
that concrete and steel are the only useful materials for protective'construction. Tests to establish the response of wood, brick blocks, 'and plastics, as
well as the blast at cenuat Lng andjnas s e ff'ec cs tof soil are contemplated. ' .The
result" of these tests may require, at a later)date~' the supplementation of
these design methods for these and other materials~~
Other manuals are,available to design protective structures 'against, the

effects of high explosive or nuclear detonations. The procedures' in these
manuals will quite often 'complement this manual and 'should be consulted'for
specific applications'.
(
,
,
4-2
"
TK 5-l300/NAVFACP-397/AFR 88-22
Computer programs, which are' consLs cent; with procedures and techniques contained in the manual, have been approved by the appropriate representative of
Explosives Safety Board (DDESB). These programs are available'through the
following repositorie~:"
,"
,
,',
'.
Dep.i.tment of the'A~niy
, Comminder and"Director
U.S. Army Engineer
(1)
",
"
'.',
I,
... .:. .....

"'.t
,".t
~~t~rways Experi,~ent.Station
Post Office Box '631

~icksburg,'Missi~sippi 39180-0631
Att~: :WESKA
'
Depart~ent of the Navy
(2)
..
Commanding Officer
Naval Civil 'Engineering ,~borat~ry
Attn: . , i Code . L51
,.
(3)
'
Department of the Air Forc~

Aeio~pace' Structures
Wright Patterson Air 'Force Base
Ohio 45433. "
Attn:
. . .AFFDL/FBR
'-
.~.
,~,'
t'
"
,'
,-
',"

for review by. DDESB and 'the above services.' 'Up~n concu~rence of the revisions, the necessary changes'will be made and notification of the changes,will
4-5. Format
!. . -,
This manu~l is ~ubdivided into six spe~ific' chapter~ dealing with various
aspects' of des'ign'., The titles of
these 'chapters
",,-,'"
'.:
.:
. , are as,, follows':
'
Chapte; ,1
Chapter' 2
Chapter 3
Chapter'4'
Chapter 5
Chapter 6
In'troduction ~
'j
;.
.~
)llas t, Frag~ent,: anfShock ,Lo~ds'

/,"
Reinforced Concrete,Design
Structural Steel D~~ign'
"
. "
Special Considerations in ,Explosive Fa~i1ity' Design
_'"
. L . , . .
When applicable, illustrative examples are included in the ,Appendices . .
'.
"
.'.
'.".
,.
"
".
' : ) . "
Commonly accep~ed symbols are, used as much as possible. Howevo;r, protective

design invo1ve~ many different scientific and' engineering fields', and, therefore, no attempt is made to standardize completely all the symbols used: . Each
symbol is defined where it is first used; and in the lIst of symbols at the
4-3
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR ,88-22
1,1'
CBAP'l'ER
, ,CONTENTS
'
4-6. General
.~.
.' ,
,
,~
'.
-, - . '
~.,
.,,,~
,.
This chapter is concerned with the design of above ground blast . resi~tant
' . \.:-,
,
concrete structures. Procedures are presented to obtain the dynamic strength
of the various structural components of concrete structures.
Except
for ,the
I '
.' '.
.
... ..ll
particu~ar case of the design of laced reinforced ~opc,r~te.elem~~t~" 7he
dynamic analysis of the structural components is presept~d,in Chapter;~,
,
"
. ,'...
.'
,t'
The dynamic strengths of both the concrete and reinfor~ement'under yarious

stress conditions are given for the appl~~abledes~gn.range and t~e;allowable
deflection range. Using these strengths, the ultimate dynamic' capacity of
various concrete elements are given. These capacities include the ~ltimate
moment capacity for various possible cross-section types, ultimate shear
.'
capacity as a measure of diagonal tension as well ~sultimate .direct shear'and

punching shear, torsion capacity of beams,.and.the development of 'the reinforcement through bond with the concrete.".
,,'
.'
'I'
"
This chapter contains procedures for the design of non-laced (conventional

reinforcement) and laced concrete slabs and walls as'well as procedure~ for,.,
the design of flat slabs, beams and columns," Procedur~s ate presented for the
design of laced and non-laced slabs and beams, for close-in effects,whereas
procedures for'the design of'non-laced and flat~slab~, bea~~' and columns are
given for far range effects. It is not ecoriomical to use laced slabs for far
range effects. Design procedures are given for the flexural response' of oneand two-way non-laced slabs, beams and flat slabs which undergo limited
deflections. Procedures are also given for large deflections of these
elements when they' undergo tensile membran';,actio':'. 'Laced reinforced'slabs'
are designed for fle~ural action for'both li~ited and large deflections.
Lastly', the design of co Iumns is presented for elastic or, at best',' slight '
plastic action.
,C
The above design procedures are concerned with the ductile response of
structural elements.
Procedures.' , are also given-'" for the '.brittle
mode response
,",,'
. ' , ,",1
"
of concrete elements; The occurrence of both'spalling arid scabbing of the
concrete as well as pr6tection against their ~ffects is treated. In addition~
procedures are presented for post-failure fragment- design- of laced concrete
,. .
walls and slabs. The resistance of concrete elements to primary fragment
impact is consid';red. For the primary ~bigme~ts determined in Chapter' 2',
'
methods are presented to determine if
fragment is'embedded in or perforate~
a concrete wall. If embedment occurs,' the depth of penetration is determined
and the occurrence ,of spalling of the far face can. be evaluated. If perfora-,
tion 'occurs; the resid.ual velocity of tHe fragment is determined.
c. h.
1
"
>
Required cons t ruc t Lon "details' and procedures for' conventionally reinforced arid
laced reinforced concrete structures is the last item discussed in the
chapter.' 'Conformance to' these details', will'Insure' a' due tile response 'of' the
,
structure co the applied dynamic loads ;,!;"
.....
I.
'
...'
....
"";~:~!
.',
...
,~
4-4
')'
;".
,

BASIS FOB. STRUCTURAL'DESIGN
4-7. General
Explosive storage 'and opet;"at1ng facilities are' designed to p'rcvfde a predetermined level of protection against the hazards o~ accidental explosions. The
type of protective structure depends upon both 1;he donor and acc~pt~r systems.
The donor system (amount , type and loc_~tion of the' pot.errt La'l Ly detonating explosives) produces the' damaging output: while the accept:or system (personnel,
equipment, and "accepcor" explosives)' requir~s'"a level. of protection. The'
protective 'structure or s t ructura'l. elements are de s Lgned to shield against or
attenuate the hai~rd9us effects to levels which are t:ol~rable to the'accept9r
system.
v
Protectiv~ concrete strtictures are classified ~s'eitheI'cshelters or barri~rs.

'. t
. . "
"
-.
;
Shelters,enclose the rece~ver system and are generally located far from a
potential explosion. Barriers, on itihe other' hand, gene,rally enclose the'donor
system arid; consequently, are Locaced close to the potemtial explosion:' A
shelter is a fully enclosed structure which is designed to prevent its
contents (acceptor system) from being subjected to the direct effects of blast
pressures and fragments. A barrier. may be" either a fully enclosed structure
(containment structure) r or an, open 'structure '(b~rricadE! "or cubicle tyPe
'
structure ,in ~hich one or m~re surfaces 'are frangible ~r open to the atmosphere). Barriersar;, generally designed to resist close7in detonations.
Their purpose is to prevent acceptor explosives, and to'a'lesser extent,
personnel and equipment from being subjected to primar)' fragment impact and to
attenuate blast pressures in acco~dance with,the structural configuration of
the barrier.
'
,
4-8. Modesqf'St,ructu~al'Beha~ior
"!~
' . !
'
The response of a;' concrete element can be expressed in terms of two modes of
structural behavior; ductile and ,brittle. In the ductIle mpde of response the
element may attain large inelastic deflections without.complete collapse.
While, in the brittle mode, partial failure or total co l Laps e of the element
occurs. The selected behavior of an element for a par t Lcul ar design is
governed by: ,(1), the niagni~ude and duratl,on of thebillst output;" (2) the'
occurrence .of primary fragmehts, ,and (3) the function of the .p:ro!:"cti'!'e
structur~, i.e., shelter or barrier depending,upon'the'protection level
required.
-, . ,
I'
..i
'
4-9. Structural
... Behavior of ,Reinforced Coricrete
4-9. L 'General..
When a reinforced concr<cte element is d~amically load"d, the element deflects
until such tim~ that: (1) the strain energy of the e Lement; i:S developed
sufficientiy,to balan~e the kinetic energy produced by the blast load and the
element comes t,o rest, o~ (2) fragmentation of't,he con"rete occurs resulting
in either partial or. total collapse of the element .. TI,e maximum deflection
attainable is a,' function of the span of' the element, the ,depth of the element,
and the type"amount; and details of, the reinforcement used in a particular
design.
4.5 .
TM 5-l300/NAVFAC P"397/AFR 88-22

The resistance-deflection curve ,shown in Figure 4-1 demonstrates the flexural
action of a reinforced concrete 'element. When the element is first loaded,
the resistance ideally increases linearly with deflection until yielding of
the reinforcement is first initiated. As the element continues to deflect,'
all the reinforcing steel yields and the resistance is constant with,increasing deftection., Within this yieldra~ge at a deflection corr~spondirigto 2
degrees sUp'port rotation,_ the compression co~.crete crushes.
For e Lemeritis
without shear reinforcement, this crushing'of the concrete results in failure

of the element. For elements with shear reinforcement (single leg stirrup;
'shown in Fi'guie 4-2 'or laci~g shown in Figure 4-3) which properly ti~ the'
flexural reinforcement, the crushing 'of the concre ce results in'a slight loss
of capacity since the compressive 'force is transferred to the, co':pression '
reinforcement. As the element is further'deflected, the reinf~rcement enters
in~o its strain hardening region, and the resistance increases with increasing
deflection. Single leg stirrups will restrain the compression reinforcement
for a short time into its strain hard~ningregion. At four (4) degrees
support rotation, the e Lemerit; loses Its struct~ral integrity and f~ils.' 'On
the other hand, lacing thro~gh its truss action will restrain the'reinforcement through its entire strain hardening region'until tension failure of the"
reinforcement occurs at 12 degrees support rotation. .
Sufficient shear capacity must b~ affo~ded by the concrete alone,or iri
' '
combination with shear reinforcement in order to develo.p'the flexural capacity
of an element (Figure 4-1). An abrupt shear failure can occur ,at any time "
during the flexural response if,the,flexural 'capacity exceeds the shear'
capacity of the element,
'
4-9.2. Ductile Mode of Behavior in the Far D~sig~ Range
In the far design range, the distribution of the applied blast load is fairly
uniform and the deflections required to absorb the loading are'cornp~ratively
small. Conventionally reinforced (i.e., non-laced) concrete elements with
comparatively minor changes to standard reinforcing details are peif~ctly
adequate to resist such loads. While laced reinforcement could be used, 'it'
would be extremely
uneconomical ' .'to. do so.
""
.
' .
The flexural response of non-laced reinforced concrete elements is demon~
strated through the resistance-deflection"curveof Figure 4-1. Fo~ elements'
without shear reinforcement: the ultimate deflection is limited to deflections
corresponding to 2' degrees support rotation whereas 'elements with shear
'
reinforcement are capable of attaining 4 degrees support rotation. For ease
of constructiori, single leg stirrups (Figure 4-2) are used as shear reinforcement in slabs and walls, This type of reinforcement is capable of pfoviding
shear resistance as well as ,the necessary restraint of the flexural reinforcement to enable the slab to achieve this increased deflection.
~. ~
A conventionally reinforced slab may attain subs t ant t a l.l.y Lar ge r deflections
than those corresponding to 4-degrees support rotations . These increased
deflections are possible only i f the ,element has suf f Lci'ent; rateral re,itraint
to develop in-plane forces. The resistance-deflection' curve 'of Figure'4 C4 '
illustrates' the structural response' of an 'element having lateral restraint:'
Initially, the element 'behaves essentially as a flexural member. If the ",'
t
lateral restraint prevents small motions, in~plane compressive "forces are
developed. Under flexural action, the capacity is constant with increasing

deflection until the compression concrete crushes. As the deflection in4-6
:' I
TH 5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR',88-22
creases 'further and ,the load'carried by the slab decreases, membrane action in
the slab is developed. The slab carries load by the reinforcement net acting
as a plastic t~nsile membrane. The capacity ~f the element increases with
increasing deflection'until the reinforcement fails in tension.
4-9.3. Ductile Mode of"Behavior in the Close-in
Design
Range'
,
.
,
Close-in det(;nati~ns produce nonuniform, high intensity blast load. Extremely

high-pressure concentrations are developed wpich, ~n turn, can'produce local
(punching) failure of an element. To maintain the structural integrity of
elements subjected to these loads and to permit the large deflections necessary. to balance the kihetic energy produced, lacing reinforcement has been ",
developed.
'
,
Lacing reinforcement is shown in figur~'4-3 while' a typical laced wall is

shown in Figure 4-5. A laced element is reinforced syffimetrically, i.e., the
compression'reinforcement is the same as the tension reinforcement. The
straight flexural reinforcing bars on each face of the element and the
intervening concrete are tied together by the truss action of continuous bent
diagonal bars. ~ This system of lacing contributes to the'int~grity of the
protective elemen~ in the following ways:
(1)
Ductility of the flexural reinforcement, including the strain

region, is fully developed.'
,
Integrity of the concrete between the.two layers of flexural
ha~dening
(2)
reinforcement is ma Lntia Lned despite
maSSiVE!
c r ackl.ng ,
(3)
Compression reinforcement is restrained from bucklfng.
(4)
High she a r stresses at the suppo r t s' .are. resisted.
(5)
Local shear failure produced by the high intensity of the peak

blast pressures is prevented.
,
Quantity and velocity of post~failuie fragments produced during
the brittle mode of behavior are reduced.
(6)
'
The flexural response of a laced reinforced concrete element is illustrated by

the entire resistance-deflection curve shown in Figure 4-1. The lacing
permits the element to attain large deflections and fully develop the reinforcement through its strain hardening region. The maximum deflection of a laced
element corresponds to 12 'degrees support rotation.
Single leg stirrups contribute to the integrity of a protective element in
much the'same way as lacing, however, the stirrups are less effective at the
closer explosive separation distances. The explosive charge must be located
further away from an element containing stirrups than a laced element. In
addition, the maximum deflection of an element with single leg stirrups is
limited to 4 degrees support rotation under flexural action or 8 degrees under
tension membrane action. If the charge l,?cation permits and reduced support
rotations are required, elements with single leg stirrups may prove more
economical than laced elements.
4-9.4. Brittle Mode of Behavior
The brittle behavior of reinforced concrete is composed of three types of
concrete failure: direct spalling, scabbing and post-failure fragments.
Direct spalling consists of the dynamic disengagement of the concrete cover
over the flexural reinforcement due to high intensity blast pressures.
4-7
TM 5"l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR88-22
Scabbing ,also consists of the disengagement of the concrete cover over the
flexural reinforcement, howev~r, scabbing is due to the element attaining
large deflections ... Finally post-failure fragments are the r e suLt; of the,
collapse of an element and are'usually the more serious. Post-failure
fragments are generally large in number and/or size with substantial velocities which can result in propagation of explosion, Spalling and scabbing are
usually only of concern in those protective structures where personn~l,
equipment, or sensitive explosives require protection. Controlled postfailure fragmen,s are 'only permitted where the acceptor system' consists' of
relatively insensitive' explosives . . '
The two tyPes of spalling, direct spalling and sc~bbing; occur during the ' .
ductile mode of behavior. Because direct spaLl.Lng is dependent upon the
transmission of shock pressures, fragments formed from this type of spalling
are produced immediately after t~e blast pressures strike the wall., Scabbing,
on the other hand,'occurs during the later stages of the flexural (ductile
mode) action of the 'element. Both'types of spalls affect the capacity of the
element to resist the applied blast load. '
Post-failure fragments are the 'result 'of a flexur~l failure 'of an element.
The 'failure characteristics of laced and unlaced elements differ significantly, The size of failed ,sections of laced element is fixed by the location of
the yield lines. The element fails at the yield lines and the section between
yield lines remain intact. Consequently; failure of a laced element consists
of a few large sections (Figure 4-6). On 'the other hand, failure of an
unlaced element is a result of a los~ of structural integrity and the fragments take the form of 'concrete rubble (Figure 4-'7). The velocity of the post
failure fragments from both laced 'and unlaced elements is a:function of the
amount of blast overload~ However, tests have 'indicated that the fragment
velocities of laced elements are'as low as 30 percent of the maximum velocity
of the rubble formed from similarly loaded unlaced elements '.
4-8
'o.,
YIELD
;'!
(I)
..,iii
a:
-,
,:
,.
.1
"t
I'
';
...........
~.
"
~'
q.
,..
NO SHEAR
REINF.
MAXIMUM
DEFLECTION
SINGLE LEG STIRRUPS
LACING
"
Figure 4-1
."
.~.
. Typical resist'ance-deflection:,"'curve for flexural

response of concre~e.elements
..
SINGLE LEG
STIRRUPS .
. ...
'
... .
'
' "
'
.
, , .'.
,
4'
'0, "
\ :. Ii:,
..
.:a '",
"
" ~
., "
,'0
,
'
. .. .
"
"
. '.' "
"
....
'0-
"
. ., .
0.
00
.'
......"
1>,
'0
...
, ,
,
..
'0' ";..
FLEXURAL
"
Figure 4-2
.:
-;
REINF.
-
..
Element reinforced with 'single leg stirrups
"
j,',~,
,. "-~'!
4-10'
!.
LONGITUDINAL FLEXURAL REINF.

LACIN(; REINF.
TRANSVERSE FLEXURAL
Figure 4-3
REIN~
Lacing reinforcement
4-11.
'"oz
~
Ul
iii
a:
'"
..
,
'
DEFLECTION
FLEXURAL ,ACTION
Figure 4-4
TENSION MEMBRANE ACTION
Typical "resistance-deflection curve for tension

membrane response of concrete
412
TYPE
MaM
HORIZ. LACING
YERT. LACING
3/4"
....~_CL_._. TYPE "b"
...o
N
(DIAGONAL BARS
TYPE
FLOOI~
. SLAB
3"
tONSTRUCTION
JOINT
CL.
PAD
Figure 4-5
Typical laced wall
4-13
~.
Figure 4-6
Failure of a laced element
4-14
Figure 4-7
Failure of an unlaced element

DYNAMIC STRENGTH OF MATERIALS
4-10. Introduction
A structural element subjected to a blast loading exhibits a higher strength
than a similar element subjected to a static loading. This increase in
strength for both the concrete and reinforcement is attributed to the rapid
rates of strain that occur in dynamically loaded members. These increased
stresses or dynamic strengths are used to calculate the element's dynamic
resistance to the applied blast load. Thus, the 'dynamic ultimate resistance
of an element subjected, to a blast load is greater than its static ultimate
resistance.:'
."'
, . . , -
Both the concrete and reinforcing steel exhibit greater strength under rapid
strain rates. The higher the strain rate, the higher the'compressive strength
of conc re cetand the higher the yield and ultimate strength of the reinforce-,
ment.
This phenomenon is accounted for in the design of a blast resistant structure

by using dynamic stresses to calculate the oynamic ultimate resistance of the
reinforced
~oncrete
members.
4-11. Stress-Strain Curve

Typical stress'-strain curves for concrete and reinforcing st~el are shown in
Figure 4-8. The' solid curves represent the stress-strain relationship for the
materials when tested at ,the strain and loading rates specified in ASTM
Standards.. At a , higher strain'rate, their strength is greater, as illustrated
by the dashed, curves. Definitions of the symbols used in Figure 4-8 are as
follows:
"
f'c - static' ultimate compressive strength of concrete

f'dc - dyn.~i~ultimate co~pressive strength of concrete
f y - static yield stress of reinforcing steel
f dy - dynamic' yield stress of reinforcing steel
f u ..; static ultimate stress of reinforcing,ste'el
f du - dynamic,ultimate stress ofreinforcin~:steel
Es
modulus of, elasticity for'reinforcing steel
Ec
secant modulus of elasticity of concrete
eu
rupture strain
..
From the standpoint of structural behavior and design, the most important
effect of strain rate is the increased yield and ultimate strengths of the
reinforcement and the compressive strength of the concrete. For typical
strain rates encountered in reinforced concrete elements subjected to blast
loads, the increase in the yield strength ~fthe-steel and the compressive
strength of the concrete is substantial. The ultimate strength of the
TIl ;5~130CI~AVFAC P-397/AFR 88"22
reinforcement is much less sensitive to the strain rate .. The increase in the
ultimate strength is slight and the strain at which this stress ?ccurs i~
slightly reduced. There is essentially no change with strain rate in the
modulus of elasticity and rupture strain of the steel. In the case of
concrete, as the strain rate increases the scant modulus of elasticity
increases slightly, and the. strain at maximum stress and rupture remain nearly
constant.
'I,
''''
"
4-12 ;'Allowable Material Strengths'
"
,-.
,
4-12.1. General
.-/
..
~.
-,
The behavior of a structural element ~ubjectedto a bl,,~t loading depends upon

the ultimate strength and ductility of 'the materials from'which it is constructed. The required strength' of /i'ductile element is; considerably 'less'
than that necessary for a brittle element to resist th" same applled loading.
A ductile element maintains its peak or near:peak'streIlgth through'large
plastic strains whereas a brittle element fai1s,'abruptly with"llttle'energy
absorbed in' the plastic range. Reinforced concrete wIth well tied and '
anchored
ductile reinforcement can be classified as a ductile
material.
,
.
4-12.2. Reinforcement
Reinforcing steel, designated by theAmerican Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) as A 615, Grade 60, is c~nsid~red to have adequate ductil"it};, in .
sizes up to No. 11 bars. The large No. 14 bars also have the desired duc: .
tility, but their usage is somewhat restricted due to !:heir special require'ments of spacing and anchorage. No. 18 bars are not r ecommended for use in
blast resistant' structures. "For all reinforcement, duc:tility is reduced at
bends, lapped splices, mechanical"splices';' e cc . , and location ,of,the'se '
anchorages near points of maximum stress is'undesirabl" and should'lie avoided.
,
;.'
,..,,'.,'
",
Reinforcing steel ha~ing a minimum yield of 75,000 psl can'be produced'having

chemical properties' similar to'ASTM A 615,' Grade 60. However, production of
thiS steel requires Ii'special order to be 'placed in whIch iarge quantities of
individual bar sizes (in' the order' 'of' 200 tons per bar Size) must be' ordered.
It is recommended that for these high strength bars only straight lengths of
bars be utilized, splicing of oars be avoided'and application'of this reinforcement be limited to members designated to attain an elastic respons~ or a
slightly plastic' resporise' (~/XE}e'ss' than .~r,.equal. to. 3).\....
I t is desirable to' know the stress-strain'relationship'for the reinforcement
being utilized in order to calculate the ultimate resistaric~ of an element.
This information is not usually available; however, minimUm values of the
yield stress f y and'the ultim~te tensile stress f u are,~equired'by ASTM Standards, For ASTM A 615; Grade' 60 reinforcement, the 'minimum yield and
ultimate stresses' are 60,000 psi and 90,000 psi, re'spec:tl.velY-:" Review of
num~rous mill test reports for this steel indicate yiel.d stresses at least 10
percent greater than the ASTM minimum, and ultimate stresse's 'at least' equal to
but not much greater than,the ASTM minimum. Therefore i.tis.~eco~en~ed that
for des Lgn purposes, ,the minimum ASTM yield stress be Lricreased ,by 10 percent
while the minimum' ASTM ultimate stress be used' without any increase, 'So that,
the recommended
design
values
for ASTM
A 615, .,Grade'60'reinforcement,
are:
.
,
- l.
-
'.
.~
y.. 66,000 'psi
'"
4-17
TK 5-1300/NAVFAC
P-39~/AFR 88~22'
and
'"
f u - 90,000 psi
4-12.3. Concrete
Even though the magnitude of the concrete strength i~ on,~y> significant in the
calculation of the ultimate strength of elements with 'support rotations less
than 2 degrees, its effects on the behavior of 'elements with both small and,
large support rotations are of equal importance. The shear capacity of an
element is dependent upon the magnitude of the concrete strength. For
elements with ,small suppprt rotations (less than 2 degrees)', the use of higher
strength, concrete may eliminate.,theneed,for.shear reinforcement; while for
elements requiring shear reinforcement, the amount of reinforcement is reduced
as th!" concret;e ,strength is 'i~creased. .For elements with large support '
rotations (2 to 12 degree~),. the cracking,an~ crushing of the concrete
associated with the 1arger,rotations is less severe when higher strength
concrete'is, employed. Therefore, t~e strength, of the concrete used in a blast
resistant structure may be selected to ,suit the particular design requirements
of the structure. ' However, under'no circumstances should the concrete
'
strength f' c be less than 3,000 psi. It is recommended that 4,000 psi'
strength concrete be used in all blast resistant structures regard1e~s ,of the
magnitude of the blast load and ,deflection criteria.
4-13. Dynamic,Design Stresses for Reinforced Concrete
4:13.1.
Gener~l
Ductility is a significant'paramete~ influencing the dynamic response and

behavior of,reinforced'concrete members subjected to blast loadings. The,
importance.of.ductility ipcreases as the durati~n of the blast load decrease~
relative to the natural period of the member. In general, to safely withstand
a blast load, ,the required ultimate resistance ,,!Iecreases wi.th increasing,
ductility of the msmber., In.fact, the ultimate resistance required of ductile
members is 'considerably less than that required for brittie members which fail
abruptly with littl~ energy absorbed in, the plastic i'ange .of behavior.
'
A ductile' member is one that develops plastic hinges in regions of maximum
moment by first yielding of the tension reinforcement followed by, crushing of
the concrete. This behavior is typical of under-reinforced concrete sections.
A section can be designed to be very ductile by maintaining an under-rein,
forced section, adding compression reinforcement, and utilizing lacing bars to'
prevent buckling o(,tpe compression reinforcement. For a laced section, the .
reinforcement i~ stressed through its entire strain-hardening region, that is,
the stee~ reaches its ultimate stress f du and fails at its rupture strain Eu '
In a flexural ,member, 'l'he straining of, the, reinforcrement, and consequerit Ly its
stress, is.expressed,in,te~s of its angular ,support ~otations. ,
~.
f.~
I .
4-13.2. Dynamic. :Increase

Factor
. .'
"
>
i'
.. ,
The- dynamfc im,rea"e factor, DlF, is equal. to the nitio'of the dynamic str!,'i~
to the static stre~'i', e. g., fdy/f y' fdu/f u ,,;nd f' dc/f~c" The DIF depends, upon
the rate of strain ,of, the element, increasing as the strain rate increases.
The design curves for' the DIF for the unconfined compressive strength of concrete and for the yield stress of ASTM A 615, Grade 60, reinforcing steel, are
4-18
TM 5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22,.
given in Figure 4-9 and 4-10, respectively. The curves were derived from test
data having a maximum strain rate of 10 x 10- 3 in./in,/msec, for concrete and
2.1 x 10- 3 in./in./msec. for steel. Values taken from these design curves are
conservative estimates of OIF and safe for desigri purposes.
Values of OIF have been established' for design of members in the far design
range as well as for members in the close-i~ design range. These design
values of OIF are given in Table 4-1. Because of the increased magnitude 'of
the blast loads and subsequent increase in the strain rate, the dynamic
increase factors, for elements subjected to,'a close-in detonation are higher
than 'those for elements subjected to an explosion located far from the
element.
'"
'
"
-j
"
The, design values of OIF presented 'in Table 4-1 vary not only for the design
ranges and type of material but also 'with the state of stress (bending,
diagonal tension, direct shear, bond, and compression) in the material. The
values for fdy/f y and f'dc/f'c for reinforced concrete members in bending
,
assume the strain rates in the reinforcement and concrete are 0,0001 in./in./
msec. for the far design range and 0.0003 in./in,/ msec, in the close-in
design ran~e. For members in compression (columns). these strain rates are
0.0002 in./in./msec.and 0.0095 in./in./msec. The lower strain rates in
compression (compared to bending) account for'the'fact that siabs, beams' and
girders "filter" the,dynamic effects of the blast load, Thus, the dynamic loan
reaching columns is typically a fast "static" load (long rise time of load)
which z-eau Lc s 'in lower strain rates in co'lumns" Thes e strain rates and the
corresponding values of OIF in Table 4-1 are considered safe values for design
purposes.
Available data is not sufficient to permit the construction'of a design curve

for the DIF for the ultimate' stress of ASTM A 615 Grade 60 reinforcing steel.
However, it is known that the increase in the ultimate strength of the steel
is small and; therefore, not a significant factor in the design of reinforced
concrete members, A nominal: va Lue of th~ DIF is given 'in Table 4'-'1.
The listed values of O~F for shear' (diagonal. tension and direct shear) and
bond are more conservative than~ for' bending
compression.
This conservatism
or
is justified by the need to prevent brittle shear'imd bond failure and to

account for unce r t afnt'Le ad.n t,he design .
process
for' shear and .bond'.
. '
A more accurate estimate of the OIF may be 'obtained utilizing the DIF design
curve for concrete and steel given in Figure 4-'9 and 4 .. 10, respectively. The
increase in capacity of flexural elements is primarily a function of the rate
of strain or the reinforcement, in particular, the tim" to reach yield, t E , of
the, reinforcing ,steel~ The average rate of'strain for both the concrete' and
steel may be ,obtained considering the strain in the materials at yield and the
tIin~ to reach' yield, The .membe r is 'first designed' (p rccedures given in
subsequent ~ections ) using the D~F values given in Table 4-1, The time' to
reach yield, t E', is then calculated using the response chart s presented in
Chapt-er 2.' For the value t E , rhe average s t r a Ln rate :In the materials can be,
obtained. The 'average, strain rate in the concrete (based 'on f' de be Lng
reached at c - 9,992 in./in.) is:
"
4-1
"
while the average strain rate' in the reinforcement is:
TH5~1300/NAVFAC P-397iAFR 88-22

f' s
t t
where
for~concrete
E'C
average strain rate
f'S
average strain rate for reinforcement
,t E.- time'to yield the~reinforcement

For th~ strain rates obtain~d from Equations 4-1 and 4-2, the-actual
DIF is
. .
obtained for the concrete and reinforcement fr~m Figure 4-9 and.4-l0, respectively. If the difference between the calculated DIF values and the design,
values of Table 4-1 are small, then the correct values of DIF are those calculated. If the difference is larg~, the calculated values of DIF are used as
new estimates and the process is repeated until the differences between the
"estimated" and, "calculated", values of DIF are small, The process'converges'
"
very rapidly and. in most cases, the ae cond iteration of, the process corrve r'ge s
on the proper values of DIF.

In most cases,the values of DIF' obtained from Table 4-1 are satisfactory for
design and the determination of the' actual DIF values is' unwarranted~
"
However, the DIF values can significantly effect the final design of certain
members" and the extra calculations required to obtain the actual DIF values
are fully warranted. These include dee p members, members ,subjec,ted to '
impulse-type blast loads, and members' designed to sustain large deflections.
The actual DIF values (usually:higher than the desig~ value~,of Table 4-1)
result in a more realistic estimate of the ultimate flexural resistance and,
therefore, the maximum shear and bond stresses which must be resisted by the
member .
.
'
For'the elasto-plastic or plastic design, of concrete elements, an equivalent

elas~ic curve is considered rather than the actual elasto-plastic resistancedeflection function, The time to reach yield t E is C9mputed'based on this
curve using 'the equivalent elastic.deflection XE ana stiffness KE , Actually,
the reinforcement along the supports yield in less time than t E whereas the
r~inf?rcement at mid-span yields at a time greater ,than 'tEo
These differences
are compensati~g errors, ,There,fore, - the time to reach yield, t E for the
equivalent curve when used in Equations 4-1 and' 4-2 produces an accurate
average DIF for the concrete and 'reinforcement at' the critical sections
throughout a reinforced concrete element.
,
,.
, .'
4-13'.3. Dynamic Design Stress~s,
The magnitude of stresses ,produced in the reinforcement of an element responding'in the elastic range, can be related, directly to the strains. However, in
the plastic range'the stresses. cannot be related ~irectly to the'strains., An
estimate of the average "stress over portions of the plastic range can be made
by relating this average stress to the deflection of the element.' The deflection is defined in'terms of the angular rotation 'at the supports. The average,
dynamic stress is expressed as a function of the dynamic yield stress f dy and
the dynamic ultimate s t re's s f du'
Criteria for the dynamic stresses to be used in, the plastic design of ductile
reinforced concrete elements are presented in Table 4-2. The dynamic design
stress is expressed in, terms o~ f dy' f du' and f'dc' The value of these terms
4-20
"

is determined by multiplying the appropriate static design stress by the
appropriate value of the DIF (Table 4~l). so that:
;
4-3
f(dynamic) - DIF x f(static)
..
4-21
,
fdc
~
--------------,/~I--<,
'
....
I/)
I/)
.5f c'
--A
/~~
;;/~
<, <,
I
I
I - - - ASTM
I/)
..
//
II:
I-
//"
c-----7--
I - - - RAPID
Ec
I 0.002S
i~
......
"<,
STRAIN 'RATE
STRAIN RATE
(a) STRESS-STRAIN. CURVE FOR CONCRETE
f du
--------::------f u --------,."...-----,/
z--, .......
",,'/
I/)
I/)
~-_-/
...
fy
W
II:
lI/)
II
I
I
I
I
I
- - - ASTM STRAIN RATE

- - - RAPID STRAIN RATE
0.07 ~Eu < 0.23 in.!in. APPROX.

0.01 to 0.02 in.!in. APPROX.
STRAIN .e (in.! in.)

(b) STRESS-STRAIN CURVE FOR STEEL
Figure 4-8
Typical stress-strain curves for concrete and

reinforcing steel
4-22
0.002 approx.
.;
u <0.005 in.!in. APPROX.
STRAIN,E (in.!in.)
f dy
....
'u
_ 0
<,
_"0
IW
_0::
lL U
-z
00
~U
O::lL
00
IU
I
iiI-
<!J
wz
UlW
'd:0::
..,,
'"
~
-i-t
-r
:" , ,,,i
"'D"'"
f- +:,
"j
wIO::Ul
zW
->
uU5
-Ul
-r
~W
'd:o::
Za..
>-~
00
l'd:
1.10
+1+1:
I-
-l
::::>
STRAIN RATE. E(in.{i~:/rrsec.l
Figure 4-9
De s Lgn . curve
~forDIFfor .ultimate
compressive' strength' of concrete
1.70
1.6o
~
1.1.
0_>'
~,
a::
>.
1.50
0."
it
...
,rJ)
WrJ)
(/)W
...,
...""
<ta::
W~
a::'"
; -,~
1.40
<.
1.30
::!:
1.2 o
zc
-..J
u!!:!
-)-
<ta::
zo
)-1.1.
1.1 o
I. 00
10'6
STRAIN RATE I t {in.lin.lmsec'>
Figure 4-10
Design curve for DIF for yield stress of ASTM A 615 grade 60
reinforcing steel
TK 5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22,
.. '
Table 4-1
Dynamic Increase Factor (DIF) for

Elements
Des~gn
of Reinforced Concrete
t.
f.
,
FAR DESIGN'RANGE
CLOSE-IN DESIGN RANGE
TYPE OF STRESS
Reinforcing Bars
Concrete
R~inforcing
Bars
Concrete
f du If';
f'dc/f'c
1.05
1.25
.
f dy /fy
f dy /fy
f du /f u
f' dc/f',c
Bending
1.17
1.05
1.19
1. 23
Diagonal Tension
1.00
--
LOa
Direct Shear
1.10
1.00
1.17
1.10
Bond
Compression
..
1.10
_. 1.00
-
1.00
1..10
1.10
1.00
1.10
1.05
1.00
1. 23_.
1.05
1.00
--
1.12
1.13
--
1.16
.-.
...
"
4-25
..
TK 5-l300/NAVFAC 'P-397/AFR 88-22
Table 4-2
Dynamic Design Stresses for Design of Reinforced Concrete

Elements
TYPE
OF
STRESS
TYPE
OF
REINFORCEMENT
Diag~naf
Tension
and
2<e.u:s S
f dy +,<tdu -fdy)/~
Compression
S<8mS12
Stirrups
O;;8m:S Z
2 < ~ s 5
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Diagonal
Bars
Column
(f'dv+ fdu)/2
f'de
(2)
(2)
fdy.
t'de ,
f dy
l'de
f dv'
f'de
O<8m:S Z
f dy
f'de
2<8m:5S
f dy + C(du- tdy)/4
f'de
5<e.. 5 12
(fdy + f du ) / 2
f'de
0<e.. 5 2"
f dy
f'de
Tension
Compression
REINFORCEMENT, fda CONCRETE, f d e

f dy (1)
Lacing
Shear
DYNAMIC DESIGN STREss
0.< ~:!l 2
Diagonal
Direct
(DEGREES)
Tension
0
Bend~n8
MAXIMUM SUPPORT
ROTATION. -8m
< 8
m :5 12
2<8m:5S
<
8m :s
~2
(4 )
f~y
+ (~du-fdy)/4
(fdv
(3 )
+ f du ) / 2
(3)
f dy
['de
Tension reinforcement only,

Concrete crushed and not effective in resisting moment,
Concrete is considered not effective and shear is resisted by the
reinforcement only.
Capacity is not a function of support rotation.
4-26
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
STATIC PROPERTIES'
4-14. Modulus of Elasticity
4-14.1. Concrete
The modulus of elasticity of concrete Ec is equal to:
E" - w 1.5 33 (f~ )1/2
c
c
c
4-4
for values of Wc between 90 and 155 lbs/ft 3 where

concrete and normally equal to 150 lbs/ft 3 .
c is the unit weight of
4-14.2. Reinforcing Steel

The modulus of elasticity of reinforcing steel'E s is:'
E - 29 x 10 6 psi
s
4-5
4-14.3. Modular Ratio

The modular ratio n is:
4-6
and may. be taken as the nearest whole number.
4-15. Moment of Inertia

The deter~ination of the'deflection of a reinforced'concrete member in the
elastic and elasto-piastic ranges is complicated by the fact that the effective moment of inertia of the cross section along the element changes continually as cracking progresses. It is'further complicated by the fact that
the modulus of elasticity of the concrete changes as the stress increases. It
is recommended that the computation,of defle~~ions throughout this volume be
based upon
empirical relations . de t e.rndned froin test' data.
.
.
..:"f..
.'
The ayerage moment of inertia I a should be used in all deflection calculations

and is given by:
Ia -
4-7
2
'
For the design of beams, the' entire cross-section is consider~d, so that

,
bTc 3
,
'"
4-8a
12
and
4-8b
4-27,.
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC
P~397/AFR
88-22
For the design of slabs, a unit width of the cross-section is considered, so

that
T 3
c
, 4-9a
12
and:
I
,- Fd 3
where:
4-9b
.'
I
average moment of inertia of concrete cross section
Ig
moment of inertia of the gross concrete cross section (neglecting

all reinforcing steel)
moment of inertia of cracked concrete cross section
width of beam
Tc
thickness of gross concrete cross section
coefficient given in Figures 4-11 and 4-12
distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of tension

reinforcement
considers
The moment of inertia of the cracked concrete section"

the compression concrete area and steel areas transformed into equivalent concrete areas
and is computed about the centroid, of the transformed section. The coefficient F varies as the modular rati~ n and the amount of,reinforcement in the
section. For sections ,with tension reinforcement only, the coefficient F is
given in Fdgur'e 4-11' .wh~'le for sections with. equal r~lnforcement on opp~sit'~
faces, the coefficient F is given in Figure'4-l2. '
The variation in the cracked moment of inertia obtained from Figure 4-ll tand
4-12 is insignificant ~or-low reinforcement ratios." The variation incre~ses
for the larger ratios. Consequehtly, for the comparatively low reinforcement
ratios normally used in, slab elements either chart,maY,be,t,lsed with,negligible
error. For the higher reinforcement 'ratios normally used for beams'; Figure' 412 must be used for equally reinforced sections whereas a weighted average'
from Figure 4-11 and 4-12 may be used for sections where the compression steel
is 'less than the tension steel.
For one-way members the reinforcement ratio p used to obtain the factor F
should be ,an average of the tension steel at the supports and midspan'. Also,
the effective depth d used to compute the cracked moment of inertia I c should
be an average of the effective depth at the supports and midspan. However,
for two-way members, the aspect ratio must be considered in the calculation of
the cracked moment of inertia. Average values for the reinforcement ratio p'
and effective depth d should be used to obtain the cracked moment of inertia
in each direction and cracked moment of the member is then obtained from:
4-28
~"
TK 5-l300jNAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
.,
where:
IcV -. cracked moment'of inertia in, vertical direction
IcH.~crackedmoment of inertia in horizontal direction
span length
- span height
.,
4-29.
4-10
11
;;'-,
,C'
0.060
0.050
...
~
,r
0.040
'
l&l
......
'
D..
0.030
tr
l'
','-. =,
'++
0.020
5:1': ' "
,l
+
'8
.
til
.~,
"
...
.; r ..
Il~~lt
0'
0.010
..
......... r- ..
;~~ t
do
Figure 4-11
0.004
0.008
-r'r
0.012
REINFORCEMENT RATIO p: As / bd
~tt1
. ~-~
t
0.016
Coefficient for moment of inertia of cracked

sections with tension reinforcement only
4-30
0.020
"
j
1
I . .;.
.070
~-+-
t1
ttr
-t
. d
r
+I
T _ j.
- oj;".
. ... t
..;
:.
It'i;
++::"1
11
:Jtt 1
t ..
-+
.
,
.
Jim
f
I,
e>
';'j-++
.060
itT
-H
.i
fZ
UJ
U
...
u,
,. +
r.040
-:-
.. ;
++.
:t
.1.'
UJ
ou
.,
",,~
'.030
-r
'r'
~t
n ="Es/E c
rc:=Fbd 3
.020
...j
',>
.~
-I
H'"
f
.010
." ~
-t'
-,-
.I
1.,.
o
.'
,
'hf.::l$$
1
c++- 1.
.1-,
..004
.008
,"
,"1
.012
REINFORCEMEt{T, RATIO
Figure 4-12
.016
p.7As/bd
(
Coefficient for moment of inertia of cracked sections

with' equal reinforcement on opposite faces
4-31
.020
TN 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
'.
ULTIMATE DYNAMIC STRENGTH OF SLABS

4-16. Introduction
Depending upon th~ magnitudes of the' blast output and permissible deformations, one of three types of reinforced'concrete cross sections (Figure 4-13)
can be utilized'in the design or analysis of blast resistant concrete slabs:
a.
type I
The COncrete is effective in resisting moment.
The
concrete cover over the reinforcement on both surfaces
of the element remains intact.

b.
type II'
The concrete is crushed and not effective in resisting

moment. Compression reiriforcement equal to the tension reinforcement is required to resist moment. The
Concrete cover over the reinforcement on both surfaces
of the element remains intact.
c.
type III -
The concrete cover over the reinforcement on both
surfaces of the element is completely disengaged.

Equal tension and compression reinforcem~nt which is
properly tied together is required to resist moment.
Elements designed using 'the full cross section (type I) are usually,encountered in those structures or portions of structures 'designed to resist the
blast output at the far design range. This type of cross section is utilized
in elements with maximum deflections corresponding to support rotations less
than 2 degrees.' Maximum strength of an element is obtained from a type I
cross section. Type I elemen~s may be reinforced on either one or:both faces.
However, due to' rebound forces,' reinforcement is required on both faces of an
element.
"
Crushing of the concrete cover over the compression reinforcement is exhibited
in elements which undergo support rotations greater than 2 degrees. This
failure results in a transfer of the compression stresses from the concrete to
the compression reinforcement which, in ~urn, results in a loss of strength.
Sufficient compression reinforcement must be available to fully develop the
tension steel (tension and ,compression reinforcement must be equal), Elements
which sustain crushing of the concrete wi,thout any disengagement of the
concrete cover are encountered in structures at the far design range when the
maximum deflection conforms to support rotations greater than 2 degrees but
less than ~ 'degrees. .
'
Although the ultimate strength ,of elements with type III cross sections is no
less than that of elements with type II cross sections, the overall capacity
to resist the blast output is reduced. The spalling ,of the Concrete cover
over both layers of reinforcement, caused by either the direction transmission
of high pressures through the element at the close-in range or large deflections at the far range, produces a loss of capacity due to the reduction in
the concrete mass. A'moredetailed treatment of the phenomena of crushing and
spalling is presented in subsequent sections of, this, .chapter'.
4-32
TM 5-l300/NAVFAC
88"22
P-39~/AFR
The ultimate dynamic strength of reinforc~d concrete section~'may b~calcu~'

lated in accordance with the ultimate'strength design methods'of the American
Concrete Institute Standard Building Code Requirements for 'Reinforced Concrete
(hereafter referred to as the ACI Building Code). The capacity reduction
factor 0 which has been established for convent Lone l, st.tic load condd t.Lons vLs
omitted for the determination of ult,imate' dynamic scrength. Safety or
reliability of the protective, ,structure is inherent in the establishment of
the magnitude of the blast output for the donor charge, and in the ,criteria
specified for deflection, support rotation, 'or fragment velocity. 'Other
permissible departures from the criteria for stattc or gas'pressure loadings
are described below.
,
., _
..
'.
_.
'.
0.',.
Although certain formulae for elements constructed with conventi.onal weight ' "
concrete are given in the following paragraphs of this chapter, more.d~tailed
information and design aids are given in the bibliography. 'Because tests have
not yet been conducted to determine the response of lightweight concrete
elements designed for close-in and far design ranges, the"pertinent f6rmulae
for this type of concrete are not included in the manual. However, lightweight concrete may be utilized for structures designed for low pressures
(less than 10 psi); but the reduction in mass from conventional weight
concrete must be accounted for in the design to maintain the blast resistant
capacity of the
~ I!'
structure.
4-17. Ultimate Moment Capacity
t' ..
..
"
'.-
4-17.1. Cross Section Type I

The ultimate unit resisting moment ~.of a rectangular
tension' reinforcement only is given by:
~ectJon
of
wi~th
b with
-.
in which:
4-12
"
."
where:
As
area of tension reinforcement ,within thewidth.b

.....
dynamic design ~tress for ,reinforcement

d
.. ,
distance from extreme compression fiber

to centroid of tension reinforcement '
J;;
. ~.~ .
, J
'
width of compression face
f' dc - dynamic ultimate compressive strength of <:oncrete .
"
, .' .e '
The reinforcement ratio p is defined as:,

'.'.i:..
4-33
.. ..
a - deptll
of
equivalent. rectangular stress
blo<:k
... _ ".'l.'
....
..
...
b
4-13
.,
'
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

To insure against. sudden compression failures, the .reinforcement ratio p must
not exceed 0 :'75 of the ratio Ph which produces balanced conditions at ultimate
strength and is given by:.
4-14
where:
"'"
.'.,.
, f
0.8.5 for f'dc up .to 4,000 .psi~and is reduced 0.05 for each'1;000
,.
. \.
psi in excess of 4,000 psi.
For a rectangular section of width b with compression reinforcement, the
ultimate unit resisting moment .is:
'~'
~ -; (A's)fds!.b][d - (a/2) J . ,
.
+ (A!;sfds
;b)
I '
(d- di)
in which:
a
4-16
".
where:
A's
area of compression reinforcement within the width b
d'
distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid.of compression

reinforcement
..
depth of'~quiva1ent rectangular stress block

The reinforcement ratio p' is:
~-17
p' - A'slb
Equation 4-15 is valid only when the compression steel reaches the. value f ds
at ultimate strength, and this condition is satisfied when:
p - p'~ 0.85K1(f'dcd'/fdsd) [87,000/(87,000 - f ds)]
4-18
If p - p' is less than' the v~lue given'by Equation 4-18 or when compression
steel is neglected, the calculated ultimate unit resisting moment should not
exceed that given by Equation 4-11. The quantity p - p' must not exceed 0.75
of the value of Pb given in Equation 4-14.
4-17.2. Cross Section Types II and III
The ultimate unit resisting moment of type'II and type III rectangular
sections'~f width b is:
4-19
where:
I
As
'area of tension or compression reinforcement within the. width b

4-34
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR"'SS"-22
dc -
distance i>etween'th'e centroids of'the compression and the tension

,~
reinforcement
'p'
The reinforcement ratios p a~d
are equal to:
t',
'" .c - A' /bd ' '

,Ps, - , ,P
\-20
r:
The above momerit" caplicity:can oriri be "obtaine'd' whenthl! ar';iis of the tension
and compression r~inforcemei1t a,r" e,qu'al. , in'~dditi~n; th,is"reinfcir:cemeI),t ,must
be properly restrained so as to m~in~ain the integrity of 'the erement'wh"n
large deflections
are
encounte'red.
...
"
'
,
'0'
.'
"
,
.,
4-17.3. Minimum Fiexu~al'Reinf~fcement, , ~
~'
....
To insure proper structural behavior under both conventional and blast

loadings, Ii mi!,lm\im amount of fle'xural :rel.nf~r:ce'ment Ls required.. this
quantity of
reinforcement
Lnsures that' the' moment capac Lty ' of the reinforced
t
.
section is ,greater than that corr,esponding, to 'the plain concrete .sec t Lon
computed from l,ts modulus of rupture .. Failure, of, a .plain concrete section is
quite sudden. 'ilso, this minimum'reinforc"ment prevents exces~ive cracking
and deformations under conventional loadings'. . ..
' . " -,
F
..
'I
-.
. '
, .
..
'. . '
'
,".
'
.'!
.'
"
, J
The minimum reinforcement required for slabs is somewhat less than that
requirea for' beams, since an overload would be distributed laterally and
sudden failure would be less likely. Th~'ml.nimum' reinforcement ratio for
dynamic design .of slabs is given in, Table ,4-3. However ~ this quantity of
reinforcement must also'~atisfy static' design requirements: Except for blast
loads in the order of magnitude of static loads, the minimum requirements for c,
dynamic loads will control. In cases where minimum requirements ,for static
cond1tions control, the quantity pf'reinforcement,m~st be at least 1.33 times
the quantity required by static .analysis or ,0.0018 times the gross concrete
area, whichever is less..
'.'
."
. .<
PI'
,',,
..
r..
Concrete '~ections ~ithc~e~sion i~f~r~ ..ment only are not 'permitted. For type
I sections, compressipn reinforcement equal to at least'one half the required
tension reinforcement must be provided. This reinforcement is required to
resist the ever present rebound forces. Depending upon the magnitude of these
reb~und forces, the compression reinforcement required may be greater than one
half the tension reinforcement and substantially greater , than the minimum.
quantity given in Table 4-3. For type II and'III cross sections, the compression,reinforcement is always equal to the tension, reinforcement.
4-lS. Ultimate Shear (Diagonal Tension) Capacity
4-lS.l. Ultimate Shear Stress
The ultimate shear stress v u' as a measure
for type I sections from:
~f
_diagonal tension, is
compute~
"
4-21
and for type II and III sections frpm:
t
4-35
4-22
TK5-1300tNAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

where Vu is the, total shear,
at the section a distance d
the support. For the latter
the support and the' section
on a width b at either the face of the support, or

(type I) or'dc (type; II oz: ill) fr~m the ,face of
case, the shear at sections between the' face of
d or d c away nee?not be consiqered critica~;
,
For'l~ced elements, -the shear stress is always calculated at 4c fr~m the face
of the support (or haunch) since the lacing and required diagonal bars provide
sufficient corner reinforcement. For'unlaced elements, the shear stress is
caLcu'l.aced at d' .f'~om ,the face of tpe. support'~for ~!"\ose ,me.mb~~s ,'that c8:4se :,:'
comp re ss Lon in their supports (Fig: 4~14a). This provision should not be '
applied for 'tHose members that c'aus''; tension i',,' their supports' (Fig. 4-14b)':'
For this case, the ultimate shear stress should be' calculated at the face of
the support. In 'addition, the shear within the connection should be investigated and special corner reinforcement should be provided.
The ultimate' shearstJ;ess 'vu must not' "exceed ~IO Xf' dc),\ in sections' using'
stirrups.
The thickness
of such' sections
must "tie increased and/or the ~
. ~
.
'. '"
.'
",
quantity. of flexu,ial re,infor!,ement', reduced in .ord~r'~to bring the value of vti
'within tolerable limits. In sections using lacing, "there Is n,o restric,tion on'
V
u because of ,the continuity provided by this .type of shear ,reinforcement,
However, for large shear stresses the' area of ,the lacing bars required may'
'. .
"
become impractical.
"
"
"
4-18.2. Shear Capa.city of Unreinforced Cclnc'rete ..

The shear stress permitted on' an unreinfo':ced w~b ~f a member subj ect;'d to .. ,
flexure
only'is
limited to:
'
"
. .
"1-.1.
V
-,
dc)I~2 + 2500p] <-. "3.5(f'd~)1/2 ~

c - [l.9(f
..
,
'
'.
'.
'
. ' ,-
-j
,-
where p is tne reinforcement ratio of the tension requirement at the support.

For the computation of the reinforcement ratio, d is used for type I sections
and dc for type II and III. sections, For m~mber.s ,subjected to significant
axial tension, the shear stress 'permitted on 'an urireinforced web is limited
to:
, )1'
g)
v c,- 2(1 + Nu / 500A
(f'dc)I/2 ~~.O
while for, significant 'axial comp res s Icn ;"

V
'
) 1/2 .' .
,
g )( f' dc-":
c - 2 (1 + Nu/2000A
, 4-25
where:
A'g -' gross area of'the cross section
The axial load Nu must occur simultaneously with the total shear Vu on the
section in order to apply Equations 4- 24 and 4- 25. '
The value of Nu shall be taken as positive for compression and negative for
tensi9n. The simplified dynamic analysis normally performed is not sufficient
to accurately determine the time variations between'the desired forces'and
, 4-36
TK 5:l300/NAVFAC
p C 397/ AFR
88-22
moments from which Nu 'and Vu are obtained. Unless 'Ii' tim~-hisi:.<iry '!,naiyses is
performed, any apparent strength increases due to'loading combinations are
unreliable. Therefore, it is recommended that the increased shear capacity
due to compressive axial' l~ads be neglected'and,
the ~ame reasoning, the'
reduced capacity due to:"tension forc~s be LncLudad , ,Both as sumptri.ons are
conservative.
,, ...
by
t,
4-18.3. Design of Shear Reinforcement
Whenever the ultimate shear stress Vu exceeds the shear capacity V c of the
concrete, shear reinforcement must, be provided to carry the excess. This
shear re-inforcement can be either stirrups or lacing, dependdrig uporithe
magnitudes of the blast loading and support rotation permitted'., Stirrups can
be used only for elements designed to attain small deflections ',under flexural
behavior. Lacing can, also be used for elements des Lgned to attain'small
deflections; however, lacing must be ,used for eiements designed,to attain
large deflections. Therefore, stirrups may be used for elements with a type
I, II, or III cross section as long as the element is designed to attain small
deflections. An exception "to this deflection criteria is for the particular
case of slabs subjected 'to 'tension membr';ne"action. He:re" the slab can attain
large deflections. Lacing may be used for type II and III,crosssecti~ns
designed for either small 'or large deflections. It wo,.ld.be grossly unwarranted to use lacing for a'type I: cross section.
", '
The required area of stirrups is calculat~d from:
"
, A.; .: [(vu '. vc>,b'~s'slh f ds
4-26
while the required area of lacing reinforcement
</lfds (
dna
{s:
4-27
+ cosc )
where:
,
,,'
"
total, area of s t Lrrups or,: 'lacing r'e Lnfo rceraent; in tension: within a
width' bsor b l,' and a "dfstance Ss 'or si
.excess shear stress
wi'dth' of concrete strip in which

resisted by, stirrups of area
Av
t~e:.diagonaf,t.ens Lon. st~e.~~es
are'
width of concrete strip in:whic~. ,the, df.agoual, te'nsion,st'resses are

resIs ted- by lacing of area P..vss -
spacing of stIrrups in the direction,paranel

,rein,forcement
,', .
t~'
the longitudinal
spacing of lacing in the direction parallel to the longitudinal

reinforcement "
"'
capacity reduction
'factor, equal.to O.8~
,
,
'
4-37"
TK
5~1300/NAVFAC
,a
-"1
pc 397/AFR ' 88-22:

t~e
angle f.orme,d by the plane, of th,e lacing, and

reinforcement .
:~oI)gitudinal
".
'.
;.
.,
.". ~
-2B(1-B)
),
i [2B(1-B)]2- 4[(1-B)2+
A2][B2_ ';'2Jil/2
<
,:
'j
<
'j
"
" "
:~ I
.t:,
_.;
".
j-' .'
..."
~.
t.
...
4,-29b
'.
..
1.
I,
"
s,
""
where
"
4-29a
":4. '.'
; I
.
,d l
.'
,-
-s.
4-28
in which
,~
th~
A2 ]
2[(1-B)2 +
~.,
plane of
"
~
'v
_'
between centerlines of , lacing bends measured normal

'.. ',cf1,,,iural 'reinforcemept
'"
'
distan~e
,.,.J-
, "ra'drus '1,f bend in lacing bars (min i~

nominal diameter of
.... baF
rei~for~ing
'fdb)
:
..~
'1'
"
A typical section of a lacing bar illustrating the terms used. in the above
I.
.
equation, is shown in,Figure 4~15. To facilitate the design ,of lacing'bars,
the angle a can be determined from
Figure 4~15,
.~
~'1'"'l
! :)
-
,,'- -
.l
4-18.4. Minimum Shear Reinforcement
,.
.-.
In order to develop the full flexural capacity of a, slab, a premature shear

failure must be prevented. Shear reinforcement must be provided to resist
shear stresses in excess of the capacity of the concrete. However, except for
slabs having a type I cross section' or subjected to tension-membrane action in
the fa~ design range, minimum she~r ~einforceme~t must always be provided to
insure' the full development'of the flexural reinforcement arid enable the slab
to attain large deflections.
, , " . "." ,
Stirrups or lacing must conform to the following li~itatio;s to insure a
proper distribution of shear reinforcement throug~out the element and, in
specific'case;;; fo provide a minimum quantity
... , of shear'reinforcement:"
.
.
".
1.
'f
2'~
,'Th'e. minimum design '!tress (excess shear stress V u .- v c) used to

, caLcuLace the required amount 'of shear reinforcement, must conform
to the limitations of Table 4-4."
"
When' stirrups or lac'in'g reinforcem';nt is" required, the, area ~
should not be less than 0.0015 b s Ss for stirrups or' 0'.0015 b l -i
, for lacing.
t. . . .
3.
..
',.1.
When stirrups or lacing are provided, the required area ~ is

determined at the critical section and this quantity of reinforcement must be unifor~lY"di~tr'ibuted throughout, the element'.
"
TM 5-l300/NAVFAC
4.
P~397/AFR
88-22
Single leg stirrups should be used for slabs. At least one

stirrup must be, located at .aach- bar. interse,ction.
..
-.'
5.
A lacing bar is bent f'r om a single; .reInforcing bar. In one

direction, the lacing must be continuous across the slab between
opposite supports. In all cases, the lacing must be carried past
the face of the support and securely anchored within the support.
6.
"
The maximum spacing of stirrups
Ss is limited to d/2 for Type I
cr'os sc.s ec t Lons and dc/2 for Type II and III sections, .but not
greater than 24 inches.
7,
"
The maximum spacing of lacing sl is limited to d c or 24 inches,
whichever is smaller,
. - , ."
'"
The spacing of stirrups. arid' lacing is 'a' function .o f the -f Lexura L bar spacing.
Consequently, the above limitations .for, shear ,reinforcement should be considered in selecting the flexural bar spacing. Once selected, the flexural
bar spacing may have to be altered to suit the above limitations'.
"
4-19, Direct Shear Capacity
4-19.1, General.
." :.
..
:.; J
,,. '
',
'
.'
'
'., '"
Direct shear failure of a member is characterized by the rapid propagation of:

a vertical crack through the depth of the member, ThIs crack is usually
located at the supports where the maximum shear stres sescoqcur . .Failure of
this type is possible even in members reinforced for diagonal tension..
Diagonal bars are required at slab supports to prevent: direct shear failure:
when the design support rotation exceeds 2'(unless che.vs Lab is simply \,
supported as given in section 4-19.2); when the desi~~ support rotation is ~
2' but the' direct' shear capacity of the concrete -Ls insufficient; ','or when the
section is in tension (as in containment cells), Diagonal.reinforcement
consists of inclined bars which extend from the support into the slab element.
4-19.2, Direct Shear Capacity of Concrete
If the design support rotation, e, is greater than '2! ;(e > '2!)', or if a
section (with any support rotation) is in net tension, then the ultimate
direct shear capacity of the concrete, Vdl -is zero and diagonal bars are
required to take all direct shear.
If the design support rotation, e, is less than or equal to 2' (e ~ 2'), or if
the section; with any rotation ,e, is . simply suppo r t.ed (total moment capacity .:
of adjoining 'elements at the support ritust be significantly less thari the
moment capacity of 'the section' being 'checked for 'direct 'shear), tnen the
ultimate direct shear force, Vd, that carr-be r e s'Lst.ed by ,the"concrete in a'
slab is:
.,
~,
"
-.:
4-'39'
'
4-30
"t.:
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

4-19.3. Design of Diagonal Bars
The required area of diagonal bars ,is determined from:'
4-31
where:
'
Vd
or
Vd
and
Ad
Vs
'Q
0.18 f'dc bd.
(9
..
2' or simple supports),
(9) 2' or section.in tension).
total area of diagonal bars at the support within a width b

'.'
shear at the support of unit width.b '.
"
angle formed by the plane' of .the' diagonal reinforcement and
the longitudinal, reinforcement.'
~
4-20. Punching Shear

4-20.1. Ultimate Punching Shear Stress
When a flat slab is supported on a column or a column rests on a two-way slab,
failure occurs around and against the concentrated load, punching out a
pyramid of concrete from the slab. The ultimate shear stress v u' as a measure
of punching shear, is computed from: ~
",
4-32,
,':
where:
,Nu
the total concentrated axial load or. reaction

distan~e
bo
,failure perimeter .located at a

load or reaction area
d/2 from, the concentrated
de -
,either d or de depending on the type of cross section
4-20.2. Punching Shear, Capacity of Concrete

The shear stress permitted for punching shear is, limited to:
4-33
Equation 4-33 applies to circular col~ns and tO,rectangular col~~s with
aspect ratios nogreater than 2, For rec~angular areas with aspect,ratios
greater than. 2 , the allowable value of V c .shcul.d be reduced.,according.to the
ACI provisions (not I'Ls t.ed , in thi~ text).
Shear reinforcement is not ,permitted to increase the punching shear capacity
of a slab. If the ultimate shear stress V u is' greater than .the .s t res s
permitted for punching shear v c' the slab thickness must be increased., In
flat slab design, the use of a drop panel to increase slab thickness, and/or a
4-40
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR,88-22
column capital to increase failure perimeter.' may be employed to prevent

punching shear failure, If a'drop pane'l, -Ls used; punching shear mus trbe
checked at the perimeter of the drop panel, as' well as at the top of the
1
column ....
. r.
4-21, Development of
Reinfoicem~nt
I.'
4-21.1, General'
"
In order to 'fully develop the' 'flexural and/or' axial load 'capacity of a

concrete slab or .wall. the full strength of the reinforcement must be realized,"At'.'ariy section along the length' of 'a 'member, the tensile or compr e s s Lve
force in the reinforcement must be developed on each side of the section by
proper embedment length. splices (lapped or mechanical). end anchorage,' or' for
tension only, hooks. At a point of peak stress. this development length or
anchorage is nece~sary on both sides of the point; on one side to transfer
stress into and on the other side to transfer stress out of the reinforcing
bu,
"
;,...
."', -
'.'
I',
'
The tYpes.and locations of reinforcement anchorages are severely restricted

for blast;resistant structures', These restrictions are necessary to insure
that the'"stiu~t,jre acts' in a duc t.LLe manne'r .: Typical details' for 'both.
.
i'.'.", .-,.....
.:
. . laced
'.
reiriforced
convention~11yreinfoicedand
~oncrete
.'
..
elements are given in'
latter sections dealing with construction detaiis~ Conformance to ~hese'

details greatly simplifies the 'calculation of' development lengths:' :The
required development lengths to be used in conjunction with the 'required
typical'details are 'given below,
...
. '.
.
.
.-:
-I
"
.,
0"
"
-, .
. - ,
While conformance to the typical details given is mandatory. certain coridit Lonsjaay "preclude' their use,
For these"unusual conditions .. the required
anchorages'~':e calculated according to the 'procedures g~ven in the1CI
Building Code, The basic development length is first calculated and then
modif~ed ?ased O? the constructi,on detail~ employed to obtain,the required end
anchorage or. splice length: This procedure is out.Lf.ned in Sections 4-21.4
through ~-21:7, Ho~~v~r, it must be'~epeated that the typi~al details given
must. _be. foIlciwed
and any'
,.
' deviation
, ' . from
' - these. restrictions
r
., and requirements
must be carefully 'considered to insure pioper structural'behavior.
~.
4-21. 2
',I
.'
'.
_.'
'Provisions for Conventionally Reinforced Concrete Elements

J
'
I'
'.'
~'.,.
... ~
I _
Typical d~tails for conventionally reinforced (non-laced) concrete elements

are given,i~ subsequent sections, These'details locate splices ~n reinfor~e
ment at points of low stress, This permits the minimum length of lap splices,
as wellc~s,th~ d~~elopmerit length for end anchorages, to be given by
..
.
'
Id , 40 db
'.
4-34
.
where
lE' .
Id .- development length ""

i
_
diameter of reinforCing bar
db
.
"I'
-.
. ..
The value of Id shall not be less than 24 inches, Equation 4-34 applies for
end anchorage of #14 bars and smaller. and for lap splices of ~ll bars and
smaller since lap splices of #14 bars are not permitted,
4-41 '
TH'S-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

Lap splices of reinforcement must not be located at critical sections.
Rather, ,they must be located in regions -of low stress (inflection points)
where the .area of reinforcement provided is more ,than twice the area of
.reinforcement required by analysis. In addition, not more than one-half of
the reinforcement may be spliced at one location. The splice of adjacent bars
must be staggered at least the required lap length of the bars sinc~ ove,lap
of splices of adjacent bars is not desirable. Under these conditions, the
required minimum length of lap splices is given in Equation 4-34. If it is impractical to locate splices at the inflection points, then the length of the
splice must be .calculated according to the provisions ofSec.tion 4-21.4.,
Typical details for intersecting. walls and slab/wall ,intersections ,avoid the
use of end anchorage' 'of the primary reinforcement:,. Rather, the reinforcement
is .anchored by continuing it through the support and.bending it into the'.
intersecting wall or slab. This reinforcement is then lap spliced with the
reinforc~ment in the intersecting wal~. .
.,'.
4-2l.'3
'Provisions for Laced Reinforced, Con~rete'Elements
Tests.of.laced elements have indicated that i~ continuity.of th~lla~\ngand

flexural reinforcement is maintained throughout the element, the required
development.Je?gth for end anchorage as ,:well '"s ..t,h.e minimUm i~ngth,: o(lap , . '
splices is given by Equation 4-34, but not Less than 24 inches . Thi~ equation
applies for end anchorage of #14 bars and ,smaller., and for lap lerigths :of #11
bars and smaller since Lap spli~es of #14 .bars. a re no c ' permi tted... ' . ':_
Required cons~~~~~ion details and procedures for laced'p;inforced c;ncret~ .' "
.elements are given in subsequent sections. These details must be f'o l Lowedico
insure the full development of both the concrete and reinforcement well into
the range o f plastic action of t.he materials. , The use of Equation.4-'34 t,o
obtain the required development lengths of the reinforcement is predicated on'
the use of these d e t a i l s . '
.,.
'., .... ,'
The t~pical de t a LLs fo r laced r e Lnf'orced concret~;elements' i~qu'ire that' the
reinforcement (flexural as well as lacing bars) must not be spliced,at
.
critical' sections but'rather must be spliced in regions ,of low stress ,(infle-,"
ction points) where the' area of reinforcemeritprovided is more than'twice the
area of reinforcement required by analysis. 'In addition, not ~ore than one:' quarter of ~he' reinforcement may be sp~iced at on~.location. The ~plice of
adjacent bars' must be staggered at least the required'lap length of the bars
since overlap of. splices
of adjacent,~aq is not, de s Lr'abLe ,
.
Specific end ancno~age.details ~re r~quired for. laced reirifqrced cohcrete
walls and slabs to enable the reinforcement to attain its ultimate strength.
The preferred method of end anchorage is through ,the use of' wall extensions
sinc~ this method presents the least cons~ruction problems.
If architectural
requirements do not permit the use of wall extensions, the reinforcement is
anchored by continuing it through the support and bending it into the intersecting wall or slab~ In this latter case, the reinforcement is developed by
a combination of anchorage and lap splic~ . . In either case, the lacing .extending into the supports provides the necessary co~finem~nt which' pe,mits'the use
of Equation 4~34."
"
4-42
til 5-l300;lNAVFAC' P,-397;lAFR 88-22

4-21. 4. Development' Length for Reinforcement in Tension
The basic development length for //11 b~rs' and ~maller 'which are ,in' tension is
given by:
The basic development length for //14 bars in tensl'on is given by:
"
ld
The
~se
- 0.085
f ds/;I(f'
' de ) 1;12
of f/18 bars is not
~ermnted
4-36
,"
by this ma';ulii.
"
"
.I~
.1.
'':''
For top rei~forcement,'

is, horizontal J reinforceme~t: 'so.~ pla'c~d that ni~re
than 12 inehes of eoncre~e is cast in the slab below the reinforcement, the
t;hat
basic development Leng th must 'be' multiplied by 1.40. This p r ov Ls Lon applies,
to ho r Lzorrta L slabs only. Walls ,with mul t.LpLe runs o f iho r Lzorrt.aL bars plus
vertical bars are not e f f'ec t ed 'by this proyision. ,.',In addition, the basie
development length of all bars may be multiplied by 0.80 if the bars are'
spaced laterally at least six (6) inches on center. In no case shall the
development length be less than 24 inches nor 40 tim~s the di~m~ter ,of'tne
reinforcing, bar.
4-21.5
Development
'for Reinforcement
in Compression
. ' Length
.'
.
.~
'
The basic development length,for bars in compression is 'given by:

4-37a
but not less than:
,,'
4-37b
The development length for compression is not modified for top bars nor
lateral bar spacing. In no case:shall' the dev,:lopment length
, used be less
rhan F",elve,'<12) inehes.,
:'
Under dynamic load conditions, members are subject to load reversal or
rebound, Reinforcement ,subject to comp~~ssiv~ forces unde"the primary load.
may be subject to tensile forces ,under rebound. Consideration must be given
to this st~ess. r~versal: sinc~ the d~v~lopme~t,~e~g~h of.bar~ :ih co~pression.
is less than the 'development 'length 'of bars in tension:'"
,,,
4-43 .
T!I,'5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR BB~22
4-21.6. Development Length of Hooked Bars
"I
The basic development length for .bars in, tension which terminate in a standard
gO-degree or lBO-degree hook is given by:
ldh - 0: 02 db fds/(f' de) 1/2 "
4-38
...
-.'
but not'less than 8d b or 6 inches, whichever is greater. The development

length for a hooked bar ldh is measured from the critical sectional~ni the'
length of the bar to the end of the hook. That is, the length ldh includes
the straight length of the bar between the critical section and point of
tangency of the hook, the bend radius and one bar diameter. The required hook
geometry as specified in the ACI Building Code is given in Figure 4-16.
In the development of hooked bars, no'distinction is made between top bars and
other bars. However, since hooked bars are .especially susceptible to concrete
splitting failure if the concrete cover is small, 'the above' equation takes
into account the effect of minimum concrete cover. For #11 bar and smaller
with the cover not less than 2-~ inches, ind for a gO-degree hook, with cover
on the bar extension beyond the hook not less than 2 inches, the development
length Idh may b~ muLt tpl.Led 'by 0.7.
.' .
, :". '
Hooks are not to be considered effective in developfng bars in compression.
However, in the design of membe;s subjected to dynamic loads, rebound or load
reversal must be considered. That is, under the primary loading, reinforcement is subjected to tensile forces and anchored utilizing a standard hook,
but this same hooked 'reinforcement may be s~bjected to compre~sive forces
unde r rebound. Therefore, the .straight portion of the hooked bar must be
sufficient to develop this compressive force. For'th;se ca'ses where 100
percent ~ebound is e~~o~ntered, the straight portion of a'hooked bar "must be
equal to, the d",velopment length for bars in compression,.
.
4-21.7. Lap Splices.of Reinforcement

,
'
ln blast resistant structures, reinforcing bars may be lap-spliced using only

contact lap splices; noncontact lap splices are.not permitted. Lap splices
shall not be used for reinforcing bars larger than #11 bars. If #14 bars are
used, they must be co')tinuous -.
Lap splices of adjacent parallel reinforcing bars must be staggered by at
least the length of the lap, The minimum length 'of lap for tension lap
splices depends upon the location of the splice. For blast resistant structures, it is strongly recommended that splices be located in regions of low
stress, where the area of reinforcement provided is at least twice that required. In such cases, the length of the lap is equal to the basic development length ld for bars in tension as given by Equation 4-35 or 4-36 and
modified, if applicable, for top bars and%orlateral spacing of the bars. In
other design situations where the lap splice is not located in regions of low
stress, the lap length is equal to 1.3 times the modified 'development length,
ld'
) ....
)
." "
The minimum'length of lap forcompression lap spiices'is equal to the basic
development length ld for bars in compr'e s s Lontas given by Equation 4;37.
However; due to the occurrence of load'revetsal, it is recommended' that the
.,....
4-44
~',

, length of lap splices be based in tension unl~ss it can be shown that the
reinforcement will a~ways be in compressi~n~
4-21.8. Mechanical Splices of 'Reinforcement
Mechanical devices may beused for end anchorage and splices in reinforcement.
These devices must be capable of developing the ultimate dynamic tensile
strength of the reinforcement without reducing its ductility. Tests showing
the adequacy of such devices under dynamic conditions must be performed before
these devices are deemed acceptable for us~ in hardened structures.
4-2l~9.
Welding of Reinforcement
Welding of reinforcement is to be avoided in blast resistant structures since

it results in a reduction of the ultimate 'strength and ductility of the
reinforcing steel. In those cases where welding is.absolutely essential, it
may be necessary to obtain special reinforcement manufactured with controlled
chemical properties. Tests showing the adequacy of the combination of weld
and reinforcing steel under dynamic conditions must be ,performed to demonstrate that this weldirig does .not reduce the'ulti~ate strength and ductility
of the reinforcing steel. In lieu of these tests,. welding is permitted if the
stress in the reinforcement is maintained at a level less .thim 90 percent of
the yield stress.
4-21.10. Bundled Reinforcing Bars
The use of bundled bars may be required for unusual conditions. However.,
their use is not desirable and should be avoided where possible. -A 3 bar
bundle should be the maximum bundle employed. The development length and lap
splice length of ' individual' bars within:a'bundle shall be that of the individual bar increased 20 percent for a 2 bar bundle and 33'percent for a 3
bar bundle. In addition, splices of the individual bars within a bundle

should be staggered .. That is, only one bar of the bundle should be spliced at
a given location.
4-45
A'
d'
.Sl
I-
d Te
I I I
I I I I I I
.,
L As
OR
.NO CRUSHING
,
.,
SPALLING
.'
:,
,
-",
'\
TYPE I
:'
.
",
'"
'.
.>
~s --As
'.
f---
- 7
d'
.,
tr I"
'.
~.
de Te
I
I' I I I
'LA s ..
i
"
CRUSHING
TYPE
\.
-l-
----'~
".'
--
d'
", .
,."
'.
de Te
--t- -.---As
SPALLING
TYPE
m
LEGEND:
III I I!! CRACKING
- - - CRUSHING
- - - - DISENGAGEMENT
;
,
t .
r.:
Figure 4-13
Typical reinforced concrete cross sections
4-46
dOl' de Vu
POTENTIAL DIAGONAL
. TENSION CRACK
SUPPORT
a. CRITICAL
SECTION AT d or de FROM FACE OF SUPPORT.
POTENTIAL DIAGONAL
TEl'SION CRACK
SUPPORT
Vu
b, CRITICAL SECTION AT FACE OF SUPPORT
Figure 4-14
Lncatipn of critical sections for d.iagonal tension
4-47
"
..
'
90
""s:,
80
a>
70
Ul
1LI
1LI
a:
60
50
CO
1LI
I 11: ! I ' , , , I
' ,,,,
0.70
"" I II ill i i II' II
. , , , iii,lIilllllllllllI11111i"'''1
i i i i Frlill
I
,
'"
'L'
'lQ.8O
I
i I
.
' , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , "0.90
1.00
'l{
0.05
0.10
0.15
0.20
0.25
0.30
0.35
0.40
0.45
0.50
(2R t +dbl
dt
Figure 4-15
Angle of inclination of lacing bars
db
..
.Critical
sectian
12db
db'
#3 thraugh
2)12' min.
#8
#9..#\0 and #11

#14
Figure 4-16
Geometry for standard hooked reinforcement
e
449
TM
5~1300/NAVFAC
P-397/AFR 88-22
Table 4-3
Cross-Section
Minimum. Area of Flexural Reinforcement
Reinforcement
Main'
Direction
As - O.OO15bd
A' s - O.OOlObd
Secondary ,
Direction
As - O.OOlObd
A' s - O.OOlObd
Type I
Type II
and
Type III
One-Yay Slabs
Main
Dir'ection
, ..
Secondary
Direction'
Two-Yay Slabs
.
I
As - A' s .- O.OO15bdc.
'As - A' s -
O.OO15b~c*
As - O.OO15bd
A's - O.OOlObd
As - O.OO15bd
A' s - O.OOlObd
As - A's- O.OO15bdc
As - A's- O.OO15bdc*
* but not less than As/4 used in the main direction
4-50
TH 5"1300/NAVFACP-397/AFR,88-22
-,
-,
'Table 4-4
Design
Rang~
FAR
Excess Shear
Type, of
,Type of
, ,Stress Vu - V c
Type of
Structural
Shear
Reinforcement vuSvc vc<vuSl. 8Svc ..iu>l. 85vc
Cross-Section
Action
Type I
Flexure
Stirrups
Type 'II
Flexure
Stirrups
o:8S:;'c
Type II &
Type III
Tension
Membrane
Stirrups
Type II &
Type III
Flexure or
Tension
Membrane
.
CLOSEIN
Minimum Design Shear Stresses for Slabs
- Vc
Vu
- Vc
O,8Sv c
Vu
- Vc
- Vc
Vu
v'
- ,c
Vu
'vu
,
Stirrups or
Lacing
O,8,Svc
0: 8Svc
p... ;'.
'J
v,;,
"
"
"
.' ....
4-51
Vc

DESIGN OF NON-LACED REINFORCED SLABS
4-22. Introduction
Conventional reinforced concrete elements are for the purpose of this manual,
members without lacing. These non-laced elements make up the bulk of protective concrete construction. They are generally used to withstand the blast
and fragment effects associated with the far design range but, may also be
designed to resist the effects associated with the close-in design range. In
the latter case. the distance between the center of the explosive charge and
the element must not be less than that corresponding to a scaled distance Z
equal to 1.0. Laced elements are required for scaled distances less than 1.0.
Non-laced elements may be designed to attain small or large deflections
depending upon the protection requirements of' the acceptor system.
A non-laced element designed for far range effects may attain deflections
corresponding to support rotations up to 2 degrees under flexural action.
Single leg stirrups are not required to attain this deflection. However,
shear reinforcement is required if the shear capacity of the concrete is not
sufficient tO,develop the ultimate flexural strength. A type I cross-section
provides the ultimate moment capacity.' The flexural action of a non-laced
element may be increased to 4 degrees support rotation if 'single leg stirrups
are provided to restrain' the .compre s s Lon reinforcement. "In this deflection
range, a .type II cross~section provides
the .
ultimate moment
and mass
.
, capacity
.
to resist motion.
Single leg stirrups must be provided when a non"laced element is designed to
resist close-in effects. The shear reinforcement must be provided to prevent
local punching shear failure. When the explosive charge is located at scaled
distances less than 1. 0, a laced rather than a non-Laced element mu'st b~
employed. For scaled distances greater than 1.0 but less than 3.0, single leg
stirrups must be provided, whil~ for scaled distances greater than 3:0,shear
reinforcement should be used only,if required by analysis.' With single leg.
stirrups, the member may attain deflections corresponding to support rotati~ns
up to 4 degrees under flexural action. A type I and II c ros svaec t.Lon provides
the ultimate moment capacity and mass to resist motion for elements designed for 2 and 4 degrees support rotation, respectively. If spalling occurs,then a
type III cross-section would be available.' In addition, a non-laced element
designed for small deflections in the close-in design range is not reusable
and, therefore, cannot sustain multiple incidents.
A non-laced reinforced element may be designed to attain large deflections,
that is, deflections corresponding to incipient failure. ,These increased
deflections are possible only if the element, has sufficient lateral restraint
to develop in-plane forces. The element may be designed for both the close-in
and far design range. A type III cross-section provides the ultimate moment
capacity and mass to resist motion.
The design of non-laced reinforced elemerits subjected to a dynamic load
involves an Lt.erat.Lve (trial and error) design procedure. An element is
assumed and its adequacy is verified through a dynamic analysis. ,The basic
data required to determine the ultimate strength of the reinforced concrete
section has been presented in previous sections. Procedures to determine the
resistance-deflection function used for design, the dynamic properties of the
4-52
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC P-39.7/AFR 88-22
section, and the'dynamic analysis required to determine an element's response

is presented in Chapter 3. This section contains additional data needed to
establish the resistance-deflection curve for design as well as procedures to
design the element for shear.
The interrelationship between'the various parameters involved in the design of
non-laced elements is readily described with the use of the idealized'resistance-deflection curve shown, in Figure 4-17.
4-23. Distribution of Flexural 'Reinforcement
4-23,1. General
A prime factor in the design of any facility is cons eruccf.on economy.
Construction costs are divided' between labor; and material costs. Labor cost
is further di~ided into shop and field work, with field labor being generally
the more costly. Labor cost can account for as mush as 70X of the cost of
blast resistant reinforced concrete. Proper selection of concrete thickness
and reinforcement steel will result in a design which optimizes .the structural
resistance and minimizes required construction materials. Subsequent sections
will 'discuss procedures to optimize the required materials. The designer must
then evaluate the issue of constructability. Factors such as standardization
of rebar
slzes~
spacing, congestion, steel erection and concrete placement
difficulties, These considerations may require that the initial design,

optimized for material quantities, be modified.' Such a modification may
actually increase the cost of materials while reducing the overall construction cost by reducing labor intensive' activities. In addition, improved
constructability greatly reduces the risk of quality control problems during
construction,
4-23,2. optimum Reinforcement, Distribution
Fora given total amount of flexural ,reinforcement and a given concrete
thickness, 'the dynamic capacity of an element varies with the amount of
reinforcement placed in the vertical'direction to the amount in the horizontal
direction, For a given support condition and aspect ratio L/H, the ideal
distribution of the reinforcement'will result in the most efficient use of the
reinforcement by producing the greatest blast capacity .
.
.".
The optimum distribution of the reinforcement for a two-way element is that

distribution which'results in'positive yield'line~ that bisect the 90 degree
angle at the corners of the element (45 degree yield lines). For two-way
elements there are numerous combinations of support con,ditions with various'
moment capacities due either to quantity ofreiriforcement provided or degree
of edge restraint as well as various positive moment capacities 'again due to
variations in the quantity of reinforcement provided, Due to these variations
in possible moment' capacities, the ratio of the'vertica,l to horizontal '
reinforcement cannot be expressed as 'a function of the aspect ratio L/H for
different support conditions. Figures 3-'4 .through 3-20 'must be used to
determine the moment 'capacities which will result in a "45'degree yield line",
The reinforcement ,can then be selected from these moment capacities.
In some 'design case;, it may not be possible to furnish the optimumdistribu- '
tion of reinforcement in aparticular'element. One such case would be where
the optimum distribution violates the maximum' or minimum ratio of the vertical
4-53
TN 5~l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

to horizontal reinforcement AsV/As H of 4.0. and 0.25, respectively.. A second
situation would arise when the optimum distribution requires less than minimum
reinforcement in one direction.' The most common case would result from the
structural configuration of the building in which support moments may not be
fully developed (restrained support rather than fully fixed) or from the need
of maintaining continuous reinforcement from adjacent elements; In these and
other situations where. the optimum distribution of the reinforcement cannot be
provided, the reinforcement should be furnished to give a distribution as
close as the situation allows to the optimum distribution to maintain an economical design.
", J
4-23.3. Optimum Total Percentage of Reinforcement
The relationship between ther; quantity. of reinforcement to the .quantity of.
concrete which results in the minimum cost of an element may be:expressed as a
total percentage of reinforcement. Thistotal percentage of reinforcement
PT is defined as
4-39
'Pr .,. Pv + PH
where Pv and PH are the average percentages of reinforcement onone face of

the element in the vertical and horizontal .directions, respectively. Based ~n
the average costs of concrete and steel, the optimum percentage for ~ nonlaced
reinforced element using single leg stirrups has been determined to be between
0.6 and 0.8 percent with 0.7 a reasonable design value. For elements wh~ch do
not contain shear reinforcement, the' optimum percentage would be s~m~what
higher. For large projects, a detailed cost analysis should be performed. to
obtain a more economical design.
In some design cases, it maybe desirable to reduce the concrete thickness
below low the optimum thickness. A smal L. increase in, cost (10 percent) wo,,:ld
be incurred by increasing the value of Pr to one percent. Beyond one percent,
the cost increase would be more rapid.- .However, except; fot; very thin elements, it may be impractical t~ furnish 'such. large quantities of reinforcement. In fact, in thick walls it may be Jmpractical to even furnish the
optimum percentage.
,
Unless single leg stirrups are required for other than shear capa~ity such as .
for close-in effects or to extend fle~ural action in the f~r design range from
2 to 4 degrees support rotation, it is more economical to design non-laced
elements without she.ar reinforcement. In.thi';1 case, the' total percentage of
reinforcement must be limited so th.atthe ultim.at~.resistance of th~ element
does not produce
shear
stresses in excess of.,.the concrete cepac Lty ..
.
.
;
.~.
.~
1 .' , ::"
4-24. Flexural Design for Small
Deflec~~ons
:,
.(
..,
. .
.'
The design range for small deflections maybe divided into two regions;
elements ,with support.rotations less'than'2 degrees (limited deflections) and
support ~otations between 2 and 4 ~degrees: .Except for stirr~p.requirements
and the type of cross-section available to. resist moment, .the design procedtire
is the same.
. . '
"
In the flexural. design of a non-laced reinforced concrete slab, the optimum
distribution of. the flexural reinforcement must first be determined. A 45
degree yield line pattern is assumed and, based on the support 'conditions and
4-54
TH 5-l300/NAVFAC;P-397/AFR 88-22
aspect ratio; the ratio of the vertical to horizontal moment capacities are
determined from the yield ,line location figures of Chapter 3.
Reinforcing bars and a concrete thickness are next chosen such that the
distribution of reinforcement is as close as possible to that determined above
and such that the total reinforcement ratio PT is approxImately 0.7 for
elements ,utilizing,'stirrups. For those elements not utilizing shearreinfor- "
cement PT is minimized.so that the shear capacity "fthe concrete ~s'not exceeded.' '.Using the, equations of preyious sections (eq. ,411 for, type I cross
sections, eq , 4-19 for ,type II or III cross -aec t Lons ) rhe moment capacities
are computed. 'The moment capacities are required to calc:ulate the ultimate
unit ze s Lst.ance r u and the equivalent elastic deflection X E . These parameters
along with thenatural period of vibration'TN define the equivalent singledegree-of-freedom system of the slab, and are discussed in detail'in Chapter
3.
..' '
...
A dynamic analysis (see Section~4-26)'is then performed to check that the slab
meets the response' c'r Lt e r La . Lastly, thi":shear capacity is' checked (Section
4-27). If the slaD does not meet the response criteria or fails in shear (or
is greatly overdesigned) a new concrete section is assUID"d and the entire
design procedure is repeated.
\. '
3.
_.
'. , <I
,
4-25. Design for Large Deflec'i:ion.s "
-.
,t.
Design of non-laced reinforced concrete elements without shear reinforcement

(single leg stirrups) for support rotations greater than 2 'degrees' or elements
with single leg stirrups for support rotations greater than 4 degrees depends
on their capacity to act as a tensile membrane. Lateral restraint of the
~lement must be~provided to achieve this action.
Thus, if lateral restraint
does not'exist, tensile membrane action is n9t developed and th~ element
reaches incipient f'a'l Lur'e at 2' degrees (4 'degrees' if adequate singte leg'
stirrups are provided) support rotation, How~ver': if lateral restraint
exists, deflection of the element induces membrarieaction and Ln-p Lane forces.
These in-plane f'orc e s provide 'the means for the' element co continue 'to develop
substantial re's'istance up to maxim\IID support' 'r"hitions of approximately 12
degrees.
.' j
'
..
4-25.2. Lateral Restraint
Adequate' later~l ie~traint' of the reinfor~e~ent is mandatory in order for the
element to develop 'and the' designer to utilize the benefi~s of tensile
membrane behavtor" '-Sufficient lateral restraint 'is prov Lded 'if 'the reinforcement is adequately anchored into adjacent supporting members capable of
resisting the lateral force induced by tensile membrane action.
Tensile membrane behavior should not be considered in the design'process
unless full external lateral restraint is provided in che span directions
shown in Table 4-5. Full external lateral restraint means that adjacent
members can effectively resist a total lateral force equivalent to the
ultimate strength of all continuous reinforcement in the element passing the
boundary identified by the arrows in Table 4-5. External lateral restraint is
not required for elements supported on four edges provided the aspect ratio
L/H is not less than one-half nor greater than 2. Within this range of L/H,
4-55' '

the inherent lateral restraint provided by the element's own compression ring
around its boundary is sufficient lateral restraint to develop tensile
membrane behavior.
4-25.3. Resistance-Deflection Curve
A typical resistance-deflection curve for laterally restrained elements,is
shown in Figure 4-18. The initial portion of the curve is due primarily to
flexural action. If the lateral restraint prevents small motions" in-plane
compressive forces are developed. The increased capacity due to these. forces
is neglected and is not shown in Figure 4-18. The ultimate flexural resistance is ,maintained until 2 degrees support rotation is produced. At this
support rotation, the concrete begins to crush and the element ,loses flexural
capacity. If adequate single leg stirrup~.were provided, ,the flexural action
would be extended to 4 degrees. However, due to the presence of continuous
reinforcement and adequate lateral restraint, tensile membrane action is
developed. The resistance due to this action'increases with increasing
deflection up to incipient failure at approximately 12 degrees support
rotation. The tensile membrane resistance is shown as the dashed line in
Figure 4-18.
In order to simplify the design calculations, the resistance is assumed to be'
due to flexural action throughout the entire range of behavior. To'approxi~
mate the energy absorbed under the actual resistance-deflection curve, the
deflection of the idealized curve is'limited to,8 degrees support rotation.
Design for this maximum deflection would produce incipient failure conditions.
Using this ~quivalent design curve, deflections between 2 degrees (or 4
degrees if single leg stirrups are provided) and incipient failure cannot be
accurately predicted.
For the design of a non-laced laterally restrained'. element for ,8 degrees
support rotation, a type III cross-section is used to compute the ultimate
moment capacity of the section as well as to provide the mass to resist
motion. The .stress in the reinforcement f ds would be equal to that cor~
responding to. support, rotations 5 ~ ,8m .~ l? glven in. Table 4-2 -. '. At .every.
section throughout the element, the tension and compression reinforcemen~ must
be continuous in the restrained direction(s) in order to develop the tensile
membrane action which is discussed in d~tail below.
4-25.4. Ultimate Tensile Membrane Capacity
As can be ,seenin Figure 4-.18, the tensile membrane resistance of an e Lemerit;
is a function of the element's deflection. It is also a function of the span
length and the amount' of continuous reinforcement. The tensile membrane
resistance, rT of a ,laterally restr!'ineci element a't a, deflection,. X, 'is expressed as:
For one-way elements
8Ty
[--]
"
Ly2
4-56
4-40
TIl 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/A.FR88-22
For two-way elements

4-41
1
_(_1)(n-1)/2
,
n 3, ; "
4 :E
1 -
"
cosh' [,
n-1,3',5
n7TL~
2r..y'
1/2
:'[ r:l]
in which
and
"
where
rT
tensile membrane resistance
deflection of element
ly
clear span in short direction
Lx
clear span in long direction<

force in the continuous'reiriforcement in the'short direction
,
force in'thecontinuous reinforcement in the ,long direction

"
corrt Lnuoirs 're"inforcem~~t in the short direction

'contirnlous re1nforcement,:"in the long direction
'.
..
Even though the capacity of ~. laterally restrained' ele~ent is based on
flexural' action, 'adequate tensile membrarie ~apacity must be provided" That
is, sufficient continuous' 'teinforcement 'must 'be"provided so that the" tensile
membr~ne resistanc~ rr l:~~r~spon~ing't~:8d~gr~e~suppcirt rotatloj.,,:must be,
greater than the flexural res'tstance r u . Th!!. def Lec t Lon is compu t ed as a'
function of the yield 'line 'locations (shortest'sector length).' The force in
'the corrt Lnuous reinforcem~nt is calctil~ted using'the dyn':'mic design stress f ds
corresponding to 8 degrees support rotation (Table 4-2),
'
4-25.5.1 Flexural
Design
'
J
,
'
.~.
~..,
Since ~he actual tens~le membrane resistance deflection curve is replaced with
an equivale~t flexural curve, the'design of a non-laced ele~ent for'large
deflecti6ns, is greatly, simplified', "The, design is, performed in a similar ,,'
manner as for small deflections. However, sufficient continuous reinforcement
must b~"provided to develop the" required t-;;nsile membra,;e resistance': Where
4-57
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397iAFR 88-22, '"
external restrain is required, the support must withstand ,the lateral forces
Ty and Tx as ,given in Equations 4-42, .and 4-1,3" respectively,
4-26. Dynamic Analysis
4-26.1. Design for Shock Load
The dynami~ ,analysis of a slab is accomplished by first representing it 'as a
single-degree-of-freedom system and then lfinding the response of that system
when subject to a blast l~~d. The equiv~lent ,single,deg~ee-~f-freedom system

,is definedin terms of its ultimate resistance ru"equivalentelastic deflection XE and natural ,period of vibration TN' The ultimate unit resistance,is
calculated 'from the equations of Chapter ,3 for the moment capacities determined according to the previous sections. The procedures and parameters
necessary to 'obtain the equivalent elastic deflection and natural period of
vibration can also be found in Chapter 3.
For elements subjected to dead loads in the same direction as the blast loads, , '
(for example a roof or retaining wall exposed to an exterior explosion) the
resi~tance available to withstand, the blast load is reduced,
An ~pproximation
of the resistance available is
4-44
. where
dynamic resistance available
uniform dead load ,

Chap!'er 2 describes procedures for determining the dynamic load which i~
,defined by its peak value P and duration T. For the ratios P/r u and T/T N, the
ductility, ratio ~/XE and tmlT can be .obtafned ~r()m J:he respopse charts of
Chapter,3. These values, ~ which'is the maximum deflection, and t m; the time
to reach the maximum
,deflection, define
,the dynamic
..
. ,'
.
--. response,of
,.
.. the element.
The effective mas~ ,and the stiffness used in computing the natural p~riod of
vibration TN depends on the type of cross'sJ!ction and loaamassfactor used"
both of which ~~pend on the range of the maximum deflection. When the.
,
deflections are small (less than 4 degrees) a type I or type II cross section,
is used". The mass is calculated u~ing the eritire'tllickness of the conc re ce ' ~'
element Tc': The spalling that,occurs when an ,element a~t~ under tensile
'
membrane behavior" or which may occur ,"due to ,close - in, effects requires the'use
of a type III cross section to resist moment." Since: the concrete cover ,Qv!'r
the flexural reinforcement is completely disengaged, the mass' is calculated
based on the distance between the .centrroIds 'of the, compression' and tension"
reinforcement'.
"
.
'..When designing for completely elastic behavior, the elastic stiffness is used
while, in ot~er cases, the ,equivalj'nt elasto~plastic stiffness KE is used,
The elastic value of the load-mass factor KLM is used for the elastic range
while, in the e Las t.o -p Las t Lc range', the load-mass factor~s the average of'the
elastic,and elasto-plastic values. For small plastic deformations, the value
of KLM is,equai to, the a~erag:,of. the, equi~~len~ elastic value a~~ th~,plastic
4-58
TK 5-1300/NAVFAC .P-397/AFR88."22
- (,
value. The plastic value of KLM is used for slabs designed for large plastic
deformations.
Due to the large .number of variables involved in the design of non-Tac ed.. "
reinforced elements, design equations have .not; been devel.oped.. Howeve r ,
design ~quations have been developed for laced elements subJected to impulse
loads and are presented in subsequent sections of this chapter. U~e of these
procedures fo, the des~gn of:non-laced elements subje~ted.to,impul~e.load,will
r e suLt in, a variety of errors depepd Ing upon support conditions, t.h i.ckne s s of
the concrete section,' quantity and distribution .of . the flexural reinforcement.
etc. However, these procedures may be used.to ,obtain a trial section which
then may be analyzed as described above.
4-26.2. Design for Rebound
Elements must be designed to resist rebound, that is, the damped elastic or
elasto-plastic harmonic motion which occurs after the maximum positive
di5placern~nt ~
has been attained.
When an element reaches
Xm,
the resistance
is at a maximum, the velocity is zero, .and its deceleration is a maximum, The

element,will vibrate about the blast load curve (positive and/or negative.
phase) and/or the zero line (dead load' for roofs) depending on the time to
reach maximum deflection t m and the duration of the blast load T.
Usually only those elements with a type I cross-section will require additional reinforcement to resist rebound. Additional reinforcement is not
required for type II and III cross-sections since these sections have equal.
reinforcement on,~pposite faces and t~~ maximum possible rebound resistance is
equal to the ultimate (positive) resistance. However, the supports for all
types of cross sections including the anchorage of the reinforcement
(compression reinforcement under positive phase loading is subjected to
tension forces under rebound conditions ) must be investigated for rebound
(negative) reactions. . Also. it .should be noted that. the support conditions
for rebound are not always ~he same as for the positive load.
The negative resistance r-" attained by an element when subjected to a
triangular pressure - time load, is obtained . from figure 3 - 268 of Chapte r 3.
Entering. the figure with the ratios of ~/XE.and T/TN, previously determined
for the positive phase of.desig!l" the ratio of the required rebound, resistance
to the ultimate resistance r-/r u is obtained .. The element must be reinforced
to withstand this rebound resistance r- to,insure that the slab will remain
elastic during rebound. However, in some cases, negative plastic deformations
are permissible.
The tension reinforcement provided to withstand rebound forces is added to
what is the compression zone during the initial loading phase. To obtain this
reinforcement, the element is essentially designed for a negative load. equal . '.
to the calculated value of r-. However, in no case shall the rebound reinforcement be less than one-half of the positive. phase reinforcement., The moment
capacities and the rebound resistance capacity are ca LcuLatied using the same
e~uations previously presented.
Note that while.dead load reduces the
available resistance for the dynamic loading, this load increases the available resistance for rebound.
4-59
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

4-27. Design for Shear
.'
4-27.1. General
The ultimate shear V~ at any section of a flexural element is a function of
its geometry, yield line location and unit resistance r. For one-way or twoway elements the ultimate shear is developed when the resistance reaches. the
ultimate unit v~lue r u' In the design of 'a concrete element, there are two
crit~cal locations' where shear must be considered . . The ultimate shear stress
V
u is calculated at a distance'd ordc from the supports to check the diagonal
tension stress 'and to provide shear reinforcement (stirrups) is necessary.
The direct shear force or the ultimate support shear Vs is calculated at the
,face of the support to determine the required quantity of diagonal bars,
4-27.2. Ultimate Shear Stress at d. from the Support
4-27.2.1. One-Way Elements
The ultimate shear stresses V u at a distance de from the support are given in
Table 4-6 for one-way elements. Depending upon the cross section type being
considered, de can represent either d or d c'
For those cases where an element
does not reach its ultimate resistance r~ is replaced by the actual resistance
r attained by the element. For those members whose loading causes tension in
their supports, the ultimate shear stress is calculated at the face of the
support. For those cases, the ultimate support shear V is calculated as
explained in the next section. This shear is' then divided by the effective
cross-sectional area (bd or bd c) of the element to obtain the ultimate shear
stress.
4-27.2.2. Two-Way Elements

For two-way elements the ultimate shear stress must'be calculated at each
support. The shears acting at each section are calculated using the yield
line procedure outlined in Chapter 3 for the determination of the ultimate
resistance r u" Because of the higher stiffness at the corners, the shear
along any section parallel to'the support varies. The full shear stress V
acts along the' supports except in the co rner s where only 2/3 of the shear
stress is used (Fig. 4-19). Since the shear is zero along the yield lines,
the total shear at any section of the sector is equal to the resistance r u
times the area between the section being considered and the positive yield
lines . .
To illustrate this procedure, consider a two-way, element, fixed on three sides

and free on the fourth, with the yield line pattern as shown in Figure 4-19;
For the triangular sector I, the shear VdV and shear stress vuV at distance de
from the, support is
...
2
3
L'
Vdv ( 4
deL
2y
L "deL
+ --, .4
2y
- ru
4-60
L
+ Vd"v(-)
2
y-d e
2
4-45a
deL' ,
) (L
'y
TK 5-l300/SAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

3ru y (1 -'d~/Y )2
4-45b
(5 - 4 de/Y ).
and since the shear stress
u is equal to Vfbde and b equals one. inch
(1 - de/Y )2
3ru
4-46
Y
For the trapezoidal sector II

2
Y
-V
(dH
2d e y
r u ( - - de)
) + VdH (H -
(H - Y + H -
4-47a
3r u(L - 2 de) [2H - Y -
2d ey
L
]
4-47b
Vdh
2
3ru (1 -
[6H
2d e
- Y -
8d ey
L
y
) (2 -
]
-
2d ey
--)
LH
4-48
v uH 2
(6 -
LH
Values of the ultimate shear stresses v uH and vuV at a distance d J from the
support for several two-way elements are given in Table 4-7. As stated above,
de represents either d or dc' depending upon the type of cross section being
considered. The ultimate shear stress is calculated at the face of the
support for those members whose loading condition causes tension in their
supports. For these cases, the ultimate support shear V is calculated as
explained in the next section. This shear is then divided by the effective
cross-sectional area (bd or bd c) of the element to obtain the ultimate shear
stress v.
For the situations where the ultimate resistance of an element is not attained, the maximum shear stress is less than the ultimate value. However,
the distribution of the shear stresses is assumed to be the same and, there-
4-61

fore, the shear stresses can be calculated from the equation of Table 4-7 by
replacing r u with the actual resistance attained (re rep' etc.),
4-27.3. Ultimate Support Shear
See Chapter 3,'for procedures used to calculate the ultimate shears of both
one-way and two-way elements.
4-62
UL TrflATE
<I:
f(/)
1--1
(/)
W
CI::::
X( 8 = 1')
X(
X( 8= 2')
e = 4')
X(8= 8')
X(8= 5')
DEFLECTION
<]
ot" I
<]
Not
PROTECTION CATEGORY
@ &
G:
SHELTER
PROTECTIVE STRUCTURE
BARRIER
PRESSURE - TIME DR IMPULSE
STRUCTURE-LOAO
SENSITIVITY
FAR OR CLOS -IN

DESIGN RANGE
RESPONSE CHAR S, ITERATION PRoC DUR, 1M ULSE (QUA TIONS
DESIGN METHOD
LIMITE D
LARGE
DEFLECTION CRITERIA
FLEXURAL
DUCTILE MODE OF
RESPONSE
FAR RANGE
FLEXURA,L
ACTlON
CTloN
S IRRUPS IF !;>EOUIRED
STIRRUPS
"'EO'D
TENSION MEMBRANE ACTION
STIRRU S IF RE lJIRED
FLEXURAL ACTIO
S IRRUPS REQUrRE D
CLOSE-IN
TENSION MEMBRANE
ACTION
STIR~ UPS REQl HED
BRITTILE MODE OF
RESPONSE
NONE
CRUSHING
SCABBING
FAR RANGE
'SPALLlNG
CLOSE-IN
CRUS:HING
SCABBING
POST
FAILURE
FRAGMENTS
CROSS-SECTION TYPE
FAR RANGE
I OR
CLOSE-IN
<Fely
DESIGN STRESS
fely
::
II
III
II OR III
III
fely +l/4( ~cfu- ely)
--
l/2(fely+fdu l
Nate 11 Nei-ther shear reinforceMent nor tensile r'leMbrane- action

Note 21 Either shear reitlforceMent or +.ensite nenbr-cne action
Figure 4-17
Relo. i;ionship between deSign pc r-o.ne t er-s for unlaced eleMents
4-63
.,
r:
ACTUAL RESISTANCE
DEFLECTION FUNCTION
IDEALIZED RESISTANCE
DEFLECTION FUNCTION
....,
,/
./
,/
./
CONCRETE CRUSHES,
LOSS OF FLEXURAL
RESISTANCE
-,
'--
_./
/'
/'
../
./
./
/'
./
Figure 4-18
Idealized resistance-deflection curve for large deflections
4-64
AT
SUPPORT
AT de FROM
SUPPORT
"'1'"
I
:r
"VSH
s>
II i1111
..
>
;ff'
II1II1
AT SUPPORT
"'I'"
.
>
."
>
:ffill1
TrITl
> ,
del
"'I'"
I- .2!
I-
AT. de FROM SUPPORT

deL
2y
Figure 4-19.
Determination of ultimate shears
4-65
,,
Table 4-5
Restraint and Aspect Ratio Requirements for Tension
Hembrane Behavior
Edge Support 'Conditions
L
.'
~ ....
..... ~
External Lateral Restraint Requirements
Opposite edges
...
..
..
...
.,
~<.!
H
....
:I:
..
Opposite edQes
;~,
t-
r:EJ3
I
. I
L
Opposite edQes
short direction
1-" 'I
/
.-
h<.!.
H
..
....
:I:
opposiie edQes
short djre~tion
,
.,
None required
.!.<!:.<2
:I:
Indicates direction of external laterol restraint

which must be resisted by adjacent member
4-66
..
--
Table 4-6
Ultimate Shear Stress at Distance de from Face of Support

for One-Way Elements
ULTIMATE SHEAR STRESS
Vu
Edge Conditions and Loodil)g Diagrams
~.
~.
L/2
L/2
L/2
.1
...&.
2d e
L/2
5L
ruts-de
RI,GHT
SUPPORT
ru(s--de)/d e
LEFT
SUPPORT
RIGHT
SUPPORT
3L
IIR u
16de
5R u
16de
de
"
Ru
2d e
r u (L-del
,I
:'
-.f. i
L/3< L/3
de
Ru
de
j
,, ..
I
f/2
L/3
4-67
Ide
SUPPORT
ru (~--de)
LEFT
/2
"
de
t
-.
L/2
L/2
ru(~-de)
Ru
2d e.
Table 4-7
Ultimate Shear Stress at Distance de from Face of Support
for Two-Way Elements

Ed-. cOQdiwna
tntimUI borUorItal.ta.r . . . . . .
Umla
Yield liM locatioD
u...
Ultimate verticltJ ehear ,k_ ... V
Two adjac:ent edgee

fixed and two
edges free
OS;d,,/zSl
D
I
OSd./HSl
r.(l-d.j:)
tSd./zSl
%[[;;;:.::)3
3r.(I-4.../%)'
dJz(3 f#J../%)
O:Sd.,/L::~a
2(d./::I:)
ISd.IHSl
3r.(I-d./L) (2-1I/H -d.,,/LH)

do/L{8 '118 -4d.rIUl)
OSd./"St
r.(I':'d./H){2-%/L-d..zIHL)
3r" (1..."d,,/,,)'
do11l(5 4d..1,,)
,..(I-d./,)
..../
tSd./vSI
2dJL(1 ....ILH)
2d./H.(I-d.z/HL)
r. (I-dolL) (2-,!H -d.,,/L8)
t,S;d.IL:S:I
3r.(I-d./H) (2 -zIL-d..zIHL)
d./H(6-%/L fd.z/HL)
,
Three edges fixed
and one edge Iree
~
a-
b
%
I
00
',-
/'
ISd./HSl '
2(clJz)
>'j
d..1;(5-o&d./:)
d./H(3-:/L 4/4%jHL)
r,,(I':"'d./HHl-:/L-d.zIHL)
d.jH(1 2d,;z/HL)
3T.(l-d./,}'
4d,/r)
, d.11I(fJ
OSdJH51
r.(I-d./II)
..../.
lSd./,:S1
3J'.(l-d../J:)t
Sd./J:St
3r.(I-d,./H)(I-:/L-d.,z/HL)
OSd./.SI
r.(I-2d./L) rJ-,/H -2d.,/LH)

fd./L(I- .....ILH)
iSd./LSt
t-!--
3,...(1 ~UJL)(2-,IH -2d.I1/LH)

2d./L(6 r/H-Sd.rjLH)
O:S;d,,/LSt
<;
..
r.(I-d..b)
.,-.
....J<,
.O:Sd./HSt
d.b:(S-t4./:)
tSd./zSI
Four edges fixed
ar.(l-dJ:)1
Sd./zst
a-,(t -d..IH) (1-J:IL-2d..J:IHL)

dolH (3 -;/L -Bd.zIHL)
I'-,
"
,," --<"........
'-
%! --y--.. ..
r.(I-d./J:)
/.
....
tSd.lzSI
.~~" " "
__ i
,"" .
__
tSd.IHSt
r.<t-d.IH)(I-zIL-2d.z;IHL) dolH(1 .Jd.zIHL)
-,
OSd./LSI
3r. <t-4.IL) (I-,IB -2d."ILH)

d.1L(3 rlH &L,ILH)
3r.{I-d,11I)1
-d.I,,(5-td.,III)
OSd./IISt
:
ISd.ILSt
r.<t-d..IL)(I-,IH -2d.,ILH)
d./L(l-4d,IIILH)
lSd./rSl
r.(I-d.I,)
..../.
e,
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 8-8-22
DESIGN OF FLAT SLABS

4-28. Introduction
The typical unhardened flat 'slab structure consists of a two-way slab supported by columns. Except for edge beams which may be used at the exterior
edge of the slab, beams and girders are not used to transfer the loads into
the columns. In this case, the columns tend to punch upward through the slab.
There are several methods that can be used to prevent this; the upper end of
the column can be enlarged creating a column capital, a drop panel can be
added by thickening the slab in the vicinity of the column, or both a column
capital and a drop panel may be used.
Hardened flat slab structures may be designed to withstand the effects
associated with a far range J
explosion.'
The flat slab of a hardened
structure
.
'
is similar to an unhardened slab but for a hardened.flat slab structure, the
exterior supports must be shear walls which are monolithic with the roof. The
shear walls transmit the lateral loads to the foundations. Due to the stiffness of the walls, there is negligiBle sidesway in the columns and hence no
induced moments due to lateral. loads. 'Shear walls ,may also replace a row of
interior columns if additional stiffness is required. Earth cover mayor may
not be used for hardened flat slab ~,tructures.
'
A portion of a typical hardened flat slab structure is shown in Figure 4-20.
As depicted, there are generally four differ~nt panels to be considered,
interior, corner and two exterior, each of 'which has a different s t Lf fneas-,
The exterior pan~ls,are designated as short and long span panels which Fefers
to the length of the span between the columns and the exterior wall. Inthe
typical flat slab, the reinforcement would be ,distributed according to elastic
theory. The elastic distribution of th~ flexural'stresses is approximated'by
the methods presented in the ACI Building Code, The static design must meet
all of the criteria of the code as well a~ of.all applicable ,local code~.
However, for blast resistant structures, certain design criteria are more
restrictive than those giveri in the ACI Building Code. To ensure two-way
action in the slab, the aspect ratio'L/H of each panel must be greater than 1
but less than 2. While the ACI code permits 'unequal span lengths and offset
,columns, it is str~ngly re~ommended that offset columns not be used and the
variation in span lengths be li~itedto 10 percent. Columns and column
capitals may have either a round or square cross section, but round columns
and capitals are preferred to avoid shear,stress concentrations. It is also
recommended that haunches be provided at the shear walls.
Flat slabs may bedesigned to attain limited or large deflections depending
upon the magnitude and duration of the applied blast load and.the level of
protection required by the acceptor system. Under flexural action alone, the
slab may attain deflecti~ns corresponding to 2 degrees support rotation. The
flexural action may be extended to 4 degrees ,rotation If single leg stirrups
are added to restrain the flexural reinforcement .. 'If ,s~ufficient continuous
flexural reinforcement is provided, the slab, may ~ttain'8 degrees support
rotation through tension membrane actio!". Unless" requIre.d for shear, single
leg stirrups are not required for the slab to: achieve.support rotations less
than 2 degrees nor ,tensIon membrane acti?n., The 'stress in the reinforcement as
well as the type of cross section used to determine thE! ultimate moment
capacity of the reinforced concrete is a function of tt,e maximum deflection.
4-69

The basic data required for determining the ultimate strength of ,the reinforced concrete, including the ultimate moment capacity and the ultimate shear
capacity, have been presented in previous sections. Procedures for performing
the dynamic analysis are presented in Chapter 3. Only modifications and
additions relating to flat slabs are presented in this section. The interrelatiopship between the various parameters involved in the design of flat
slabs is readily described with the use of the idealized resistance-deflection
curve shown in Figure 4-21.
4-29. Distribution of Flexural Reinforcement
4-29.1. General
For a two-way slab continuously supported on its edges, the flexural stresses
are distributed uniformly across the entire slab (except for the reduced
stresses at the corners). The flexural stresses in a flat slab supported,by
walls and columns are distributed from one panel to'the n'ext depending on: the
relative stiffness of the supports and the spans of the panels. Flat slabs
also dis~ribute the flexural stresses 'transversely, concentrating the' stresses
in the vicinlty of the column. A uniform distribution of reinforcement would
result in a failure due to local "fan" yield lines around 'the columns at a
relatively low resistance. By concentrating the reinforcement over the
columns, a higher ultimate resistance is obtained'.
"
"
An elastic distribution of reinforcement
is required in the design procedure
,
presented in this Manual. This distribution will insure the formation of a
predictable' collapse mechanism. Local failures around the' columns, and one-or
two-way folding (local one-way action) will 'be prevented. With an elastic~
distribution of reinforcement, the yield lines form simultaneously across the
entire ~lab. In addition, the design will be more economical 'and cracking
under service loads will be minimized.
'
4-29.2
Elastic' Distribution of Moments According to the ACI Building Code
Procedures outlined in the ACI BUilding Code are employed to determine the
elastic distribution of the reinforcement (and hence of the moments): The
Code presents two design methods, namely the Direct Design Method and the'
Equivalent Frame Method. The Equivalent Frame Method may be used for all flat
slab configurations whereas the Direct Design Method can only be used for
three or more spans. Since the Direct Design Method 'requires fewer calculations, it is the preferred method and is discussed in detail in'this section.
For the typical flat slabs with continuous exterior 'walls and L/H > 1, the
column strips are H/2 in width in each direction. A wall strip is parallel
and adjacent to an exterior wall and its width is H/4. The remaining portions
of the slab are 7alled middle strips.
'
Using the Direct Design Method as given in Chapter 13 of ACI 318-77 the
moments are distributed taking into account the relative flexural and torsional stiffnesses of the wall, slab and beams. 'Assuming there are'no beams
or interior shear walls, the ratio of the flexural stiffness of the beam
section to the slab section a , is zero. The torsional' resistance of a
concrete wall monolithic w~th the slab is very large and, therefore, the
torsional stiffness ratio of the wall to the slab'B t may be assumed to be
greater than 2.5.
4-70
TN
5~1300/NAVFAC
,.
P-397/AFR 88-22
The ratio of the flexural stiffness of the exterior wall and the flexural
stiffness of the slab is defined as:
(4E c I w) / H.,
4-49
(4E c I s ) / ls
where
a ec - ratio of the flexural stiffness of the exterior wall to slab
I w - gross moment of inertia of wall
Is
- gross moment of inertia of slab
H., - height of wall

ls
- span of flat slab panel
In direction H, Equation 4-49 becomes

Tw 3 H
a ecH - - - - -
,,
4-50
and in direction L
a ecL - ---,---
4-51
-.
where
Tw
thickness of wall
,
- short span of flat slab panel
Ts
- thickness ~f fl~Cslab
- long span of flat' slab panel
The unit column and midstrip moments' a~e proportioned from the total span
moments. The distributions percentages for a flat. (slab with equal spans in
each direction is as follows (see Fig. 4-22):
For Direction H:
4-52
0.65 a'ecH MoH /L
m2
+ - 0.40 (0.63
m3
0.25 (0.75
m4
0.25 (0.65) MoH /(L-H/2)
0.28 a'ecH) MoH /(L - H/2)
4-53
0.10 a'ecH) MoH !(L-H/2)
4-54
4-71
4-55
TN 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

m5+ - 0.40 (0.35) MoH./(L-H/2)
4-56
'.
m6+ - 0.60 (0.63 - 0.28 a'ecH) MoH /(H/2)
4-57
m7- - 0.75 (0.75
4-58
0.10 a'ecH) MoH /(H/2)
m8- - 0.75 (0.65) MoH /(H/2)
4-59
m9+ - 0.60 (0.35) MoH /(H/2)
4-60
in which
wL(H-c)2
4-61
8
1
and
a' ecH - - - - - 1 + (l/aecH)
4-62
MoH - total panel moment for direction H

w
- applied uniform load
-. width of column capital
For Direction L:
mlO- - 0.65 a'ecLMoL /H
mll+ - 0.40 (0.63
0.28 a'ecL) MoL /(H/2)'
m12
0.10 a'ecL) MoL /(H/2)
- 0.25 (0.75
4-63
4-65
m13- - 0.25 (0.65) MoL /(H/2)

m14+ - 0.40 (0.35) MoL /(H/2)
..
4-67
m15+ - 0.60 (0.63 - 0.28 a'ecL) MoL /(H/2)
4-68
m16- - 0.75 (0~75
4.-69
m17- - 0.75 (0.65)
0.10 a'eeL) MoL /(H/2)
...
~~
/(H/2)
4-70
m18+ - 0.60 (0.35) MoL /(H/2) .
4-71
wH (L_c)2
MoL----
4-72
in which
and
1
a' eeL - - - - - -
4-73
1 + (l/aecL)
4-72
TIl 5-l300/NAVFAC'P-397/AFR 88-22
where MoL' 'is' :the total' panel moment) for; direc'tion' L. '"
For the wall strips in both di.rections the same reinforcement as in the
adj acent middle strips' is used .. At"the co lumn; the targer' or' the"hici:'negative
moments is' chosen and the posLt Lve moment 'can then .be a,djusted tip to '10'
,
percent so' that C the' total, panel' mome'nts remain unchanged,": '" "
,"
';"
4-29.3
"
".~
<,
. ,
_.'
r'
,Design for Small Deflections

'T'
.....
l-
t..
"
The resistance-'deflectlon function 'fo~ flat slabs' with sm:all'~'deflections- is

shown in' Figure 4~23a.' With an elas'trc'di~trl.bliti.6n of r,einfor'cetnent aU the
' . . . .
"
.' .
I
,.
, "
yield lines form simultaneously and the slab remains elastic until it reaches
its ultimate' resis'hmce. Since"'for 'smail 'deflections' the conc re t;e r.!tnains
effictive in' .esisting s tr'e as , a type I' cross ""ec,tion i Ls ,Used,to compute the
ultimate moment c":pacities.' 'The slab may undergo a'maximum support rotation
of 2 degrees' at which point the ccnc re t.e: crushes.' Shear' reinforcem'krit is'
gene r a.LLy not required for fla,t slabs, but must be provided if r~"qtiirE"d by
analysis. If properly designed, single leg s t Lrrups are provided, the,
flexural action of the slab may be extended to 4 degre,,,,' supp6rt rotation:' i,'
While stirrups may be furnished to ~esist shear or to "xterid flexural action,
it is 'usually more cost 'effective 'to design flat slabs' without shear'reinforcement.-'
~,'F--'
t'\' ..
"'~".-'
''':'..It,
,".
~,'
: .. :
4- 29.4. De-S'lgn"fbr 'LargeD~fi.ections

.
..;
_..
. - -:
.
.;.';'-.
'.
.
.
., .
~..
-, ~
.,'., ."
t
. ~,
Due to the geometric limitations' (aspect"ratio L/H of each parie L must be
greater 'than .r' !'but 'less
tlian
'2) imposed on flat slabs des'igne'd' for blast
.' "
.',.'"
,. '
.
1
.
loads, sufficient' lateral restraint'is available ,to develop "Lri-p Lane forces.and induce' ten'S'ion inembra'ne 'action.' 'This tension 'membrane action provide's the
,me';ns for the sl',lb to: attairi"defl~ctions corresponding
to'. a"';aximi.un
support'
, .
'-'
..
.
rotation in excess of 12 degrees. Continuous reinforcement must be provided
to r_~s",ist I thr~~~'..~n-p,la~e !~.~~sion,. ~orc~s.
, '"'.
l'
,.~
~'(
A typical resi"t'1in~e-deflection'~urve :f~r th~' flat slabs up to incipient

failure is shown in Figure4-23b'. ,.The initial po r t Lon of the, curve is due
primarily' to f\ex\frai acdon .. : 'AV ,2"degreeS' 'support rocactcn, 'the 'concre ce
begins to crush,~nd the s Lab 'lqse's' flexural capacity, However, due to 'the"
presence 'of continuous
'refnforceinent;
tension
membr
ane action
is -mobil1~ed.
" .i".'i"'
"'.
.""
.,',
.'
., "
-" "
, "
,
The re'!'ristan!'ed,ue' t~ t;his ,action,':increases with increasing deflection up, )00"
incipient faIlure at 'approximately"12 'degrees support rotation" The t ensLon '
membrane action is shown' as the dashed line in Figure 1.-23b.
~"
,~,
~.
';/
' ,
~,
"
,"
In order to simplify the design calculations, the resistance is assumed to be

equal to the flexural action throughout the entire range of behavior.' To
approximate the energy absorbed under the actual resistance~defl~ction curve,
the deflection of" the equivalent curve is limite,d to 8 degrees support
"
rotati~~: This deflectioiirw~uid pz oduce inc'ip'ient failure conditions. Us Lng
thi~equivalent design-'curve, deflectioris, between 2 'deg;re,esand, incipient
faiiuie ,cannot, b,e 'accurately predicted. " -- , " ",.
'
,
.'
,-
.r.'
' "'
-.
"
"', ".
A type II or ,Ip,cro~'s sec:ti~rri,s,used,~~' compute :the ul,timate moment ~,apacity

of a 'flat ,sfao"designed for large d<;fleftions, At. every section ,throughout.
the slab, tension and compression reinfo'rtement must bra continuous. in order to
develop the tension membrane action (tension membrane capac icy fs 'di'scussed in
detail below). It should be noted that in addition to the above requirements
4-73
88-~2
for the reinforcement, an elastic distribution of reinforcement must, still be

maintained,
Shear reinforcem~nt is.~nlyprovid~d,whe~ -iequired' by', analysis', I f tlJ'\'
concrete' can resist the shear stress,es, shear reinforcement is not required
for flexural'action (deflections le~~, than 2, degrees), nor ,for tension membrane:
action (deflections between 2 and 8 degrees). 'However', shear reinforcement, "
in the fom of single leg stirrups, does, ,allow,
the slab to rotate "!p to 4 . '
..
degrees under flexural action. There are two design situations where single
leg stirFups are desirable when designing for rotations between 2,and 4
degrees,: ' '(I) the dab, is ,incapable of: deveLop i ng adequate' tens,ion'm,embrane
action and (2) 'the maximum deflection, mus't' be"accurateiy predicted, (which ,: ""
cannot be done utilizing tension membrane ~~tion)'.', In 'all' 'other design
'
situ~tions, it is usually mor~ ,economical ~~eliminate,single leg stirrups,by
increasing .cbe slab thickne,ss (to increase shear capaci,ty). and/or, by Lnc'reas -"..
ing the amount; of .contInuous reinforcement (!=o ,develop 'adequate rens'Lon ,
membrane capacity).
'
'.
'"
.~;
. . "
"
'
~.
-,
"
4-29.5, MinimUm
Reinforcement
. 'fe'
,
..'
To ensure proper strUCtural behavior under, dynamic loads ,and also, to minimize'
excessive'deformations under conventional loads, the"mlnimum area of r;i~for
cement m~st.be at least equal to that specified in Table 4-3. With an elastic
, distribution of'reinforcement in a flat ,slab; the ml,,!imum'reinforcement
generally will occur only in the center of the' inidstr1pandior 'in 'the wall
strip. It is important to also check ,the static requirement~ for minimum
reinforcement. Where static conditions contro L, ,the,area 'or' reinforcement,
must. be,at least equal to 0.0018
times
the gross
:0';'
1.33
,~
"
"
. 'are,{of,. concrete
".
.
,
times the area required ,by static loading conditions, whichever Ls less ',::'
. Unles,s ,the blast load,s are in the!,~~ order .of ;"~gnftude as th<;..stafic l-;'adl','.
this crlteria does not contro L.
" .,,_
, .. i
. ,-
, .
~,
Although the spacing of the flexural reinforcement m~st not exceid'two times
the slab thickness nor 18 inches, the preferred, spacing is 12 inches or Less.,
"r
There fs no minimum shear reinf;;~ce;"eritrequirementfor' flat slJbs. ,shear

reinf';rcement is only"provided when required~i.' analysis.' 'Howe~er, .:whe;'a
slab is" de s Lgned to undergo ,flex;ural response with support r0t;atlons .be tween 2
and 4 degrees (i.e.. , where t.ens Lon membrane action is not consider.ed).
"
'
stirrups are required. The mini;"um area of the".stirrups"i.s' given Ln Table 4-"
4.
.
' "
~.
. "
4-30; Dynamic Analysis
"' ' . \ . ' .
"
4- 30,1. 'General
.r: '
:" '.:
"
by
The dynamic analysiS of a 'structural ele;'e';"!: isahc'o;'pli~hed

fi,rst' represeriting the ,struct~ral' element ,a!, a 'single-degre~'of-freedo~ system a~d'then
finding the response of that system when subject to a, bla~t loa.d. ,Chaptef 3
presents procedures, figures and response charts for 'determining the dynami~
cally equivalent system and its response. However, certain parameters of ~
flat slab, such as the 'ulti~ate' resistance and the elastic deflections, cannot
be calculated'using the methods' of Chapter 3', Methods for calculating those
paranieters ,,;re pre'seneed below'. . '.,.. '-' ,"
,
,
,-
" I
"
...
"
,-
.'
4-7,4
'..
. . -
,':
TH 5-l300/NAVFAC P".397/AFR" 88-22
4-30.2. Ultimate Flexural Resistance

4-30.2.1. General
The ultimate resistance r u of a flat slab is a function of the strength,
amount and distribution of the reinforcement, the thickness and strength of
the concrete and the aspect ratios of the panels. The ~ltimate resistance is
obtained using a yield Lfne analysis .. Since Ln-p Lane compre ss Lon 'forces'and'
tension membrane forces 'arel'lio-t considered;':;the u'l t Lmatievres Ls t.ance determined
from a yield line 'analysis will.generally be lower than the actual resistance.
.
f) -, ,
",'
The first step in finding', tne ultimj,.te'resistance is 'to assume a yield'line '
pattern consistent with'the support conditions and' the distribution of/,the'
reinforcement. The pattern will contain one or more ul1known dimensions: which
locate the yield lines. The correct solution is the one which gives the
lowest value of the ultimate resistance, Figure 4-24 shows the yield line
pattern that will form in a multi-panel flat slab with an elastic distribution
of reinforcement. The roof-slab interactions must be designed to insure that
the perimeter yield lines form in the roof s Lab and not in the wall. The
yield lines at the columns are assumed to form at the face of the column
capitals.
The ultimate' resistance can be .. found from the y Le Ld line" pattern.'\ising either
the equilibrium method or the virtual work metl\od;' ,both of which nave been
discussed in Chapter 3. The equilibrium method is one 'that has been employed
in previous examples but, in the case of flat slabs, r,equires the introduction
of nodal forces which ar'e n:ot always readily determine,ti'. The'virtual' work
method though more difficult to solve algebraically, does not'require the'
calculations of the nodal forces. Consequently, the virtual,work method is
the easier method to applY'to flat slabs and'is the method detailed below.
The virtual work method does not predict the correct yield line pattern but
rather gives the minimum resistance of an assumed yield line pattern, If the
distribution of reinforcement is not elastic and/or'the span lengths are not
approximately equal , the minimum, resistance found by the virtual. work method
'may not be the ei tiin:a:te r e s Lscance , "In, these cases, 'loc';l failures are '.'
possible. It is strongly recomm!"nded that these design' s i tua'tLons be a";o'ided.
In ,the rare instances where they cannot be avoided, die, nodal' forces must, be ...
calculated and the equilibrium method used to predict the correct. yield line'
pattern.,
.I
4-30'.2.2. Virtual Work Method
In the virtual work method" equations for the external and internal work are
written,interms' of theuU:it resistance r~~,the mqment~apacities and the'
geometry. "The expression for the ext.erna l, work is set equal to that fo~ tpe"
internal work, end the resulting equation is solved for the minimum value of"
r u an~, the ass.ociated, failure meclianism.
'",
'.
'
:"".
I .
.!
A point within the 'slab boundaries i~given.a small displacement in the

direction of the load. The resulting deflections and rotations of all of the
slab segments are determined in terms of the displacement and the slab segment
dimensions. Work will be done by ,the ,external loads and,by the internal
reactions along the yield lines.
4-75'
,
TK'S-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88"22

c",
'
"
The external work done by r u is:

W- E
r.J>A
where:
,
,
4-74
'
external work'
A- area of the sector
A,- deflection of the sector's centroid
."
The :i.~tern;'l work done by the reactions'at'the yi~ld H;'e~ i~ due only to the
bending,moments since the support reactions do not undergo any, displacement
and the, work done by the shear forces'(n~da~ for~es)' is'zero when s~~d ~~er
the,entire, slab.
The internal :work is:
E - E
mel
,,-.
4-75.
'
where
E
m
-.
,9
internal work
ultimate unit moment
relative' rotation' about yiel? line,
length' of the yield line,
'
....of
reinf~rcement direcIn terni~_of the moments ~rid r~~a~ions in the, principal

.L
tions X, 'and y:
4-76
,E
Equat~ng
the external and internal
w~rk,
W- E
4-77
Particular ~tte'1tion must be paid to the negative .J!lOment capacit~es of the.

yield lines' radiating from the column capitals/when determining E, Top bar'
cut-offs, i f present, will r'educe tthe moment/c;"pacity on the part of the yield
line' furthest from the coi.:.mn. 'In addition;' corrier effe~ts' must be cons Idered
wherE,"'the two walls intersect. That is,
a'result, ~f 'the increased stiffness at the corners, the ultimate moment/of the reinforcement is reduced 'to
2/3'of its capacity over a length "equal' to Ii the length .of ,t;he positive yield
line.
"
as
To illustrate the application of Equation 4-77; consider the fl~t 'slaD shown
in Figure'4-25. Thi~ flat' slab is the roof';ofa, square structure with one
central column, and is symmetrical about the x and y axes.'
'"
'.
Note that Sectors I and III, 'and Sectors, ILand' IV are identical because' of
symmetry. To simplify calculations, each sector has been resolved into a
' rne
rectangle and.a 'triangle.
.. '
. 'external
'.
- work
. f,k
..' each "ectdr is:
c ".
.;
..
'.,
4-78'
4-76,
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
VII - VI V - ruc(L - x - c)(A/2)

+ r u (L
-'X
c)[(L - x -'c)/2](2A/3)
4:- 79
Substituting L - 41 and summing
~ V - 2 (ruA/6)(32 1 2_ 4lx + cx - 4cl
480
where
c L x 1 A-
width of column capital'

length 'of panel
,
horizontal location of the yield line
width of ~ of the column strip
maximum deflection of slab
,'~
The internal work for each sector is:

< ,
2
-
+ [ - (2m) 2
m (L -
m -
] 9A
x
+ 2m(3l - - ) + 3ml]9A
2
4-81
Ell - EI V - [3ml + 2m(L - x - 1)]9B

+ [4.5ml + 1.5ml (L
4-82
1)]9B
Substituting L - 41, :9A - 'A/x and 9 B ~ A/(L - x - c)

~
18 1 - 3.5x
13 1
1
2Am'[-,-, - - +
41'- x - c
x
2
Equating V - E and solving for r u

131
6m
x
r .u -
4-83
'
"
iai 3. 5x
1
- -+ -----2
41 - "X - C
4-84
---"7""~---'--------:-
321 2 - '4lx + cx - 4cl _c2
with x as the' only'unknown~' The minimum value ofru breadily determined by

trial and error.
A complete design example is presented in Appendix 4A.
In general, the ~irtual'work equation wiil, contain morEl than' one unknown, and
it will be correspondingly more difficult to obtain the minimum ultimate
resistance. However, a trial and error,process rapidly converges on the
correct soluti~n.
"
4-77
TIl:
5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22- '
A trial and error procedure to solve for the minimum value of the resistance
function (ru/Mn for a preliminary design and r u for a final design) with two
unknown yield line location~, x and y, can be accomplished as,follows:
L
Start with both yield lines located close to the centerline of the
respective middle strips.
2.
Vary x, holding y constant, in the direction which minimizes the

resistance function until it begins t~, increas~.
3.
Hold x constant~nd vary y in, the, minimum direction until the

resistance function begins ,to increase.
:j' .
4.
Once this minimum point is achiev~d', shift each yield line to

either side of the minimum location to check that a,further
refinement of the yield'line is ~ot necessary to minimize the
resistance function:
'-j
.'
It should be noted that if the yield li~e' should shift out of the middle
strip, a new resistance function equation must be written and the procedure
then repeated since the magnitude of the unit moments acting on the yield
lines would change.
4-30.2.3. Effect of Column Capitals and Drop Panels
r. ~ .
Although column, capitals and di~p panels are primarily used to prevent shear
failures, they have a significa.nt effect o~,the ult~mate'resistance. The
addition of a column capital or revision of the size of the capital changes
the clear span of a flat slab and req~ires, the,re-evafuation of a slab's
ultimate resistance.
'
Drop "panels increase the ultimate resj.~.t.ance by incr!,.a,\ing the depth of the
section and thus the moment capacity in the vicinity of the column. This
effect can be countered by decreasing the amount of reinforcement to maintain
the same moment capacity. If the drop panel is used to increase the negative
moment capacity, it must extend at least 1/6 of the center-til-center span
length in each direction. The width of ,the drop panel may be up to 20 percent
larger than the column strip. When'the Arop panel.is larger than the column
strip, the percentage of reinforcement calculated for the column strip shall
b~ provided throughout the drop panel. ,Additiona.l r~inforc~ment must be
provided in the bottom of the drop panel to prevent it from scabbing and
becoming hazardous debris. For a typ~ II cross section, the reinforcement in
the drop panel is the same as the negative reinforcement over the column.
Only ~ the.amount,of,the negative reinforcement is required in a drop panel
for a type' I' cross se~tion. ,,'
,
.'
"..
"
4-30.3. Ultimate Tension Membrane
~apa~lt~
"
'
When the support rotation of a flat ,slab reaches 2 degrees" the.concrete

begins to crush and flexural ~ction ~s nO,longer possible. ,Ho!eve!, the,slab
is capable of sustaining large rotations due to tension membrane action. As
previou~ly ~xpiained;"the' actu~l re~i~tance-deflection curve describing the
tension membrane action has been replaced with an equivalent curVe which
considers flexural action only (Fig. 4-23b). Using this idealized curve,'
, ,
" ,
" , j
4'C78
TN S;1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR88-22
incipient failure is taken to occur at 8 degrees which corresponds to'an
actual support rotation of approximately 12 degrees.
It can be seen from Figure 4-23b, that .the tension membrane resistance is a
function of the deflection. It is'siso a'functiori of the'span length and the
amount of the continuous
reinforcement. Data is riot p:resently
available
to .
.
. ,
.
obtain the tension membrane capacity of a flat slab. However; an approximation may be made using the equation developed for two-way slabs. Therefore,
the tension membrane capacity, rT' of a flat slab is given' hy':"
' , .~,
.-~'
"
. '[" ~Lx.
of
cosh
:2~
[~H] 1/2]' .
~L,
"
J,
_/
where
.\
rT
ten~ion membrane r~sistante
deflection of slab
La
clear span in short direction
Lx.
'..1
4-85
. '!:of
'.
TH
clear span in long direction
I'
:-:..
force in the coi.i:inuous reinforcement in short span direction
".
Ti Altho~g~,~h~,~~p'a~i~yof.a,~~at,.~~ab 1~ b~~e~,on ~}exural:acti~p:,adeq~~te
tel).~ion JIlembrane capacity must be provided~ '. That, ~s, rT corr~sponding to 8

degrees support'rotation must be grea~~rthan tlie'Flexura} re~istance r u '~hen
designing for large deflections, The deflection' is computed as'a function of
the'yield line locations (shortest sector length): The force in. the continuous'reinforcement is calculated using the dynamic design stress cor- .
responding to 8 degrees (Table 4-2), . The clear span 41 and Lx. are calculated
as the clear distance between the faces of the support" (face of'the column if
no column capital, is used, ~ace of the column capital, face of the wall if no
haunch is used or' the 'face of hau";ch),
.".
"::'
-".
>.
4-30.4 .. Elastic'Deflections'
'~.
"'.' .
,.
The elas~ic'd~fi~ction of variou~ ~oint~)m.an . b\t~r1or panel of a flat Slab

are given,'~y .t~e::'geI!eral eq~a~loh
"
.;
4-86
Xe -
4-79'

where
elastic deflection
from'~able
deflection coefficient
,
long span of panel
4-8
poisson's, ration - 0.167.
Ia -
average of the cracked and gross moment of inertia of the concrete '
slab
The deflection coefficient varies with the panel aspect ratio L/H, the ratio
of the support size to the span C/L and the location within the panei. The
values of the deflection coefficient given in Table 4-8 are based on a finite
difference method.an~ are gi~en for the c~nter ~f the pane~ Cc and the
midpoint~ of the long and short sides, CL and C
S' respectively.
The deflection for the interior panel is determined by using Cc in the above
expression. For the long and short span panels and the corner panel (Fig. 420). No. simplified' solution for the center 'deflections are currently available. Generally, the deflections for these panels will be smaller than the
deflection of the interior .panel because of the restraining effects of the exterior walls. These deflections can be approximated by using the following
expressions:
Long Span Panel
C - Cc -, CS/2
4-87
Short Span Panel
Cc - CL!2
4-88
Corner Panel
Cc CS/2 - CL!2
4-89
where the valu,!s

4-8.
~f
~C' Cs and CL are, those for the .interior panel from Table
The.dyn~ic response of a flat slab is more sensitive to the elastic s~iffness

when the maximum' allowable deflection is small. The possible error diminishes
with increasing allowa~le maximum deflecti~n.
4-30.5. , Load-Mass Factors

"
4-30.5.i. Elastic Range
tK .
No Oata, is 'currently availabie to determine .the loadmass factor, K

of a
flat slab in the elastic range of behavior. It is, therefore, recommended,
that the values listed in the table of the load-mass factors for two-way
elements'be used (Chapter 3). The slab should be considered as fixed on all
four edges with the appropriate L/H ratio. Since an average value of th~
elastic and plastic load-mass factor is used in determining the natural period
of vibration, the possible error incurred will diminish with increasing
allowable maximum deflection.
TK
5-130~VFAC
P-397/AFR 88-22
4-30.5.2. Plastic Range

The load-mass factor on the plastic range 'is determined'uslng' ~he procedure
outlined' for two-way elements in Chapter 3. The '~upports for the individual
sectors are at the face of the exterior walls (or haunches, if present) or at
the face of the column capitals. Flat slabs without drop panels have a
uniform thickness and the equation for determining the load-mass factor may be
expressed in terms of the area moment of inertia and the area of the individual sectors. For flat slabs with drop panels" the' equations must be
expressed in terms of the mass moment of inertia and th.. non-uniform mass of
the individual sectors to account for the norr-rrndfo'rm sl.ab 'thickness. '
4-30.6. Dynamic Responsa
J' ",
The equivalent single-degree-of-freedo~system'of'the'

f l.at'slab is defined in
terms of its ultimate resistance r u' elastic deflectIon XE and its natural
period of vibration TN' The procedure for determining the value of TN has
been presented in Chapter ~ while the calcula~ion of r u and XE h~s been
presented above. The .resi~tance deflection curve used in the dynamic analysis
is shown in, Figure 4-26. The resistance available to withstand the ~last'
'
loads must be reduced by the dead loads. An approximation of tne resistance
available is
.
f
ds
4-90
rDL (--)
fy
wher~
dynamic resistance available

uniform dead load
The total deflection of the flat slab includes deflections due to dead load
arid blast Xm. so t;hat' the' ;"aximum 'support rotation Elm is given by
X DL
.em -
tan~l (
Xm
XDL
,
Ls
4-91
.' i
where Ls is the length of the shortest sector.

The blast load is.defined in terms of its peak pres~ure P and.its du~ation T
which are determined from Chapter 2. Chapter 3 contiadns .the pxocedures to
determine the dynamic' r espcnse of,..a slab "~hicll LncIude , the maximum dynamic
deflectionXj" and the tim~ 'to reach th~t' de f Lec t Lon t m. ' I t ' must 'be r'emembezed
that using" the equivalent'resistance-deflec:tion curve 'to include tension'
membra~e action, deflections between 2 degrees and incipient failure cannot be
accurately predi,cted:
'
,
'
"
The , required rebound resistance of the flat ~lab':i.s calc:ulilted in accordance

with 'Chapter 3 and the reinforcement "necessary to attain th:i.scapacity must be
provided. Note that while the dead load reduces the 'av'dlable resistance for'
the dynamic loading. this load increases the available resistance for rebound.
,
4-31. Dynamic Design

4-81

4-31.1. Flexural Capacity
The ultimate moment capacity of a flat slab'is usually based upon a type I or,
type, IIi cross section depending
the magnitude of the maximum aliowable'
deflection., Th~ distribution of reinforcement is critical in flat slab
design. The actual moment capacity provided must be as close as possible to
the unit moments required for an elastic distribution of stresses. The
quantity of flexural reinforcement which is mad~; continuous provides the
on
tension membrane. resistance.
If the amount of' continuous' reinfor'cement provided is inadequate for .t.ens Lon
membrane action, care must be taken'in furnishing additional reinforcement.
Any additional reinforcement must be placed to maintain the elastic distribution of reinforcement and the new moment capacities and ultimate resistance
must be re-evaluated. The ultimate moment capacity will not be altered if the
additional reinforcement is provided by increasing the compression reinforcement.
4"31.2. Shear CapaCity'
..
Unlike continuously'supported two-way slabs where'shear stresses are '"checked"
.
"
"
after the flexural design is completed, the ,design for shear of a flat slab
must be considered during the flexural design. Due to the nature of the
support system, flat slabs will usually generate large shear stresses. Flat
slabs with high percentages of flexural reinforcement and/or long spans should
be avoided.
The shear forces acting at a support are a function of the tributary area of
the sectors formed by the yield lines. The shears at the colUmns should be
cliecked first, since design for these 'forces can drastically effect the
flexural design of the slab. Two types of shear action must be considered;
punching shear along a truncated cone around the column and'beam shear across
the width of the'yield lines. These c~ndiiions are. illustrated in Figure 4-27.
Shears at the columns may require the use of column capitals and/or drop
panels. Punching shear can occur around the periphery of the columns or
column capitals and drop panels. The critical section is,taken at d e/2 from
the face of the support. The total load is calculated based on the area
enclosed by the positive yield lines and is then distributed uniformly along
the critical perimeter. Figure 4-27a illustrates the critical sections for
punching shear. Beam shear, as a measure of diagonal tension, is taken as
one-way action between supports where the width of the beam is taken as the
spacing between the positive yield. lines. The critical section is taken as de
away from the f'ace of the column or 'column capital and from the face "of the
drop panel (Fig. 4-27b). The total load is uniformly distributed along the
critical section.
'
The slab at the e~terior walls must be' evaluated for diagonal tension capacity. Due to the assumed uniform distribution of load at the exterior walls, a
unit width of loaded area may be considered between the positive yield line
and the critical section. The cr!tical section is taken at 'de from the face
of the e~terior wall or, if a haunch 'is used, from the face of the, haunch.
,
The ultimate ,shear capacity of slabs has been previously presented. Using!
these procedures, the capacity of the slab is evaluated at the locations
4-82

described above. If required; stirrups' may be furnish"d . . However, it is more
cost effective to revise the design to incorporate the use of column capitals,
drop panels and/or .increased slab thickness to reduce shear stresses. As
preyiously stated, the use of stirrups'is mandatory in the flexural design of
flat slabs between 2 and 4 degrees support rotation.
'
Diagonal bars must be provided at the face of all supports due to the cracking
caused by the plastic moments formed. For'slabs designed for smallsupport
rotations, minimum diagonal bars must be furnished. However, for slabs
designed for large support rotations where:the cracking at the supports is
severe, diagonal bars must be designed to resist the total support shear but
not less than the minimum required. The diagonal bars furnished at the column
supports should extend from the slab into the column. In slabs where shear
stresses are high, it may be impractical to place the required diagonal bars.
r
If column capitals were not initially used, their addition would reduce the
requiredquantity'of diagonal bars. In the case where column capitals are
furnished, at least one-half' of the diagonal bars should extend into the
column with the remainder cut-off in the column capital. Procedures for the
design of diagonal bars have been previously presented while the required
construction ,details are illustrated in subsequent
sections.
,
,.
4-31. 3. Columns
The interior 'columns o'f a flat slab/shear' wall structure are not s'ubj ected to
lateral loads nor the moments they induce . . These colwnns are designed to
resist the axial loads and unbalanced shears generated by the ultimate
resistance of the nat slab. The axial load and monenxs 'at. the' top of the
column are obtained from, the flat slab shear forces ac,ting on the perimeter of
the column capital plus the load 'on' the tributary area of the column capital.
As can be seen from Figure 4-28, the axial load is:
4-92
and the unbalanced moments are:
V2) (c/2)
4-93
(c/2)
4-94
V 3)
.The;procedures for the design of columns is presented in Section 4-49. When

using these procedures, the unsupported length of the column is ,from the top.
of the, floor to the bottom of the column capital.
4-83
'
\'
.' ."1"'
. -.
,----I
'
I"":
---+t==------+-__
..,...--.....---:--f--:----,--::... ,
----------
~'"
SHORT. SPAN
CORNER
1--'
I r ,"l I,
I L cJ',
L __ .J
".~
,.
',;
'.,
INTERIOR
LONG SPAN
1
f.~
.,' Irr -l
l '
' - . --I
I r
',.
l
r-t-t
L "..J
_-.J
c'
"
,;
'1' . ,"
_..J
,L
t'
'.J
NOTE,
!:. ~
H
_.
'}
I.
.,
.,t.
PLAN
:. '
,-
c
~
~o
"
,
,
Tw,
"-
/
\
'
"'--'S:.,. RO~ND
'"
,.
SECTION
Figure 4-20
Typical flat slab structure

4-.84
or SQUARE
.CAPITAL
"
COLUMN
w
u
z
t1LTIHATE
ELASTIC
<[
fVl
~
Vl
W
~
X('~")
X( t")
X( '.8')
X('.5')
DEFLECTION
CD
otp 1
<D
Not
PROTECTION CATEGORY
@,LG)
SH(L TER
BARRIER
P ESSURE-TtME
STRUCTURE-LOAD
SENSlTIV1TY .
"
FAR-OUT
DESIGN RANGE
ESPONSE
CHAR
S OR ITERATION Pit: CEDURE
DESIGN IIlETHOD
LIMIT
LARGE
DEFUC110N CRITERIA
FLEXURAL
S IRRUPS IF
FLEXURAL
ACTION
CTION
~T1RRUPS REQ'D.
EQUJRED
DUcnLE, IwlODE OF
RESPONSE
TENSION
EHBRMIE ACTION
STIRRU S IF RE UIRED
CROSS-SEcnON TYPE
(fdy
Not~
Note
Figure 4'-21
,
II
,<
fdy-+1I4<fdu- dy)
Fdy
DESIGN STRESS
SCABBING
CRUSHING
NONE
aarrnr "lODE Of
RESPONSE
"
III
1/2<fdv-+fdl.l)
I. Nplthe-I" she-G.I" re-lnforce-I"Ie-nt nor te-nsll,e- "~"bl"o.ne- ec-ncn

Either shear relnforcel"lE'nt 01" tensIle nel'lbrane ec-ncn
e.
Retationship between design paroMeters for flo.t slo.bs
4-85
NOTE:
!:.H >- I
L
m+
2
12
E
+=
m+
2
i'
IQ
m+6
1!2
E
o
I~
E
- ....... -
+!!!
-E
+!:
-E
1!2
E
. ,.'
+!!!
"
m+9
12
E
+=
___
+!:
E -
0"-
IN
"
8-
:toI
,I
%
Col.
:.F;
PLAN
Figure 4-22
Unit
'~~~ents
It:
E
~o
:I:
U
ru +-+-----,
....
: ~
t,
'
..
a) Small' Deflection
-_
....
-:
"
ACTUAL 'RESISTANCE
DEFLECTION FUNCTION
IDEAL.IZED RESISTANCE'
DEFLECTION FUNCTION
'
-,
....
;'"[r- .'
XE
..
I~ ,
-, ...
_
...
. ,/""
,/
/ , '
CONCRETE CRUSHES,
...LOSS OF FLEXURAL
. ...i
RESISTANCE
'..
..
."'.
.
/
<,
1 ..
'..
"/"
,//
'
,'
..
X (6'=2)
b) Large Deflection
']l~
Figure 4-23
1.
J ..
J'.:" .
l : ..
l-:.~'
Typical resistance-deflection functions for flat slabs
4-87J'-
,---1
FACE OF WALL
..,....-------_r_--~_r__I_-----'--
W'
II
II
PLAN
Figure 4-24
Yield line pattern for multi-panel flat slab
4-88
"O~d
~L-~~[
I-x .l
L-X-C
.1
SECTION A - A
NEGATIVE YIELD LINES

.-I
.-I
~.
--
POSITIVE
YIELI) LINES
.-I
CD I.L
"'C\l" ~
""(
:::l
.-I
At.
I @'
. o+"':-_~""1-NEGATIVE
~
YIELD LINES
__1_- - I
I
FACE OF WALL
I
- - - - _I . -
""
.,
"
@I
~~
COLUMN CAPITAL
~A
1_ _-
SYMMETRICAL
ABOUT ,'.
L-X
PLAN
UNIT MOMENT CAPACITIES:

EXT, NEG,
WALL STRIP
MID STRIP
m*
m*
COLUMN STRIP
*'
Figure 4-25
POS.
2m
2m
3m
INT. NEG.
1.5m
1.5m
4.5m
. ,''2/3 OF MOMENT CAPACITY EFFECTIVE AT CORNERS
Quarter panel of flat slab

4-89 ' ,
ru
'KEI
.,
.
..
.">
..."
L-
..
xDL
I XE
Ir
Xm
.,
,
. Figure 4-26
Dynamic resistance-deflection curve
4-90
dQYCj.
- 2
JL JL
FACE OF DROP PANEL
d QVlJ.
FACE OF COLUMN CAPITAL
o. PUNCHING
SHE.~R
:z:
L ~F D~OP
FACE
PANE-L
FACE OF EQUIVALENT
COLUMLN/:APlr:r
L
-x
b.
Figure 4-27
BEAM
SHEAR
Critical locations for shear stresses
4-91
AREA I
AREA
4 . V:fl -:: 1:3;

.
COLUMN
L_.J
>!
I
I ~v,. I
CAPITAL
YIELD
LINES
AREA'3
v = ruA
ROOF PLAN
U-J_V
4
_ _ _ _ _ _V_
2.."....-
COLUMN. ELEVATION
Figure 4-28
Typical column loads
4-92 .'
e
Table 4-8
Deflection Coefficients for Interior Panels of Flat, Slabs
center or Panel
"'"
0.3
D.]
0.00289
0.00200
a.o0ll3s
0.003011
0.00173
0.00100
0.001135
0.0030"
O.OOt73
0.00100
0.0301
0.00189
0.00120
0.0378
0.00262
0.00155
0.00085
0.00230
"
0.00131
0.00057
0.00020
0.00327.
0.002311
0.001113
0.00080
0.00321
0.0022.8
0.00137
0.00015
. 0.00Q99
0.00040
0.00008
0.00005
, 0.0030'-
0.00216
0.00129
0.00071
0.00299
0.0021_
0.00121
0.00069
0.00058
0:,00018
0.000011
0.,'
1.00
0.00581 .
0.004.111
1.25
0.00420
1.61
2..00
LlB'
Midspan or Short Side
0.3
oiL
.'
or Loa8 Siele
K1dapan
.co
.....
0.2 .
.'
..
- ..
..
'
'
, Valu for ell = 0.3 ore tra~al~i'd,
.j:-
...'"
.'
,~
<
.,.
,.. .
[Q]
' ....
I
Cs
.~
.!:..
~I
H
Cl
.1 ,_, ~,.
COLUMN CAPITAL
rL
.
. . . . . -.'
'.-~
1-
- , ',1'.
'
+ Cc
::t:
:'
-,
[2]
I
I
[2]-' "
'I
.... ,
,~
i.
I
L
..
J,-'
'
TN 5-l300/NAVFAC P~397/AFR 88-22

DESIGN OF LACED ELEMENTS
4-32. Introduction
r
The detonation of an explosive charge c Lose to a barrier produces 'a nonuniform, h~gh intensity blast load which ~cts on the ,barrier for a,comparatively short period of time. The concept of lac,ing reinforcement (Fig:-4-4,
and 4-5) has been developed for use ,in protective struc~ur~ssubjected t9 such
loads. Lacing maintains the structural integrity ofa~bar~ier' and:permits it
to attain large plastic deflec~ions.
'
"
Extremely'highpressure concentrations are caused'by~close~'in detonations.
These concentrations cari produce local (punching) failure, of ,an element.
However, ,with ,the use of lacing" die, high shears, produced- Ln. the vic'inity of'
these pressure concentrations are - q'arisferred to, other .areas of the element
where the applied blast loads are, less seyere. In effect ,"the, lacing tends' to
spread out the effects of the non-uniformity of the loading and permits the,
use of an average blast load over th<; entire surface are a .o f the e Lemerrt .: In
addition, lacing is required in those .e Lemant s where ,large,'deflections are
desirable. 'In these cases" the lacing not only resists the high shears"
produced but also maintains the integrity of the severely cracked concre~e
between the tension and compression reinforcement during the latter stages of
deflection.
The primary use of laced elements i~ to resist the effects of explosive
charges located close to 'barriers. The minimum separation;distance between
the charge and the laced element i~ given in Section 2~14.i.l of Chapter 2.
It should be emphasized that these separation distances are the minimum clear
distance from the surface of the charge to the surface of the laced element.
The n~rmal scaled distances RA (center of charge to surfac~ of barrier),
corresponding to these minimum clear s~paration distances are equal to
approximately 0.25 ft/lb l/3.
'
A laced element may be designed for limited de f Lec t Lons (less than' 5 degrees
support rotation), large deflections (up to 12 degrees' support rotation) "or
controlled post-failure fragments depending uponthe protection requirements,
of the receiver system. 'The stresses developed !n the 'reinforcement' is, 't
function, of the deflection attained by the element. ,TIle type of cross-section
which determines ~he ultimate moment'capacity of'the 'r~inforced section is
also a function of the deflection' but, more importantly, is a function of the
elements brittle mode response. High intensity blast pressures ca~se direct
spalling during the initial phase of an element's response: Therefore,
type
III cross-section will usually be available to provide,moment capacity as well
as the available mass to resist motion.
' I :.
"
Single leg stirrups may be somewhat more economical than ,lacing as'shear~
reinforcement. However, in many design situations, the use of lacing reinforcement is mandatory. When explosives are located at scaled distances less
than 1.0: lacing must be used; single leg ~tirrups are not effective:f2r such
close charge locations. Also, the blast capacity of 'laced elements are-greater than corresponding (same concrete thickness and quantity of reinforcement) elements with single leg stirrups. Laced elements may attain deflections corresponding to 12 degrees support rotation whereas elements with
single leg stirrups are designed for 'a maximum rotation of 8 degrees. These
non-laced elements must develop tension membrane action in order to develop
4-94,
"
TN 5-l300/NAVFAC ,P-397/AFR ,88-22

this large support rotation. If support con1itions do not permit tension
membrane action, lacing rein~orcement must be used to achieve large deflections.
The design of concrete elements subjected to blast loads involves an iterative
(trial and error) design procedure in which the element is assumed and then
its adequacy is verified through a dynamic analysis (Chapter 3). The design
of'laced elements for limited deflections is performed in much the same
manner. However, the design of laced elements for large deflections has ,"
unique features which permit the formulation of design equations. Since a
laced element is subjected to very'short duration blast loads, the actual
pressure-time relationship of'the load need not be consl-dered. In fact, the
actual duration of the load need not be considered at an: The load may be
taken as an impulse (area under the pressure-time curve), that is, the' entire
load ia applied instantaneously'to the element.' This aasumpt Lon results in an
insignificant error since' the time for the element to rl!ach the maximum
deflection is large in comparison 'to the actual duratiol\ 'of the load,
Secondly, the elastic portion'of the element'a resistanc:e-deflection'curve
need not be 'considered. This assumption will s l so result in a ne'gligible
error since the plastic portion'of the curve is many times that of the elastic
portion. Lastly, laced elements must be symmetrically reinforced which
greatly simplifies the expressions for an element's capacity. 'These feature's
permit the formu~ation of design equations and design 'charts which are used to
design laced elements for large deflections and for the preliminary design of
laced elements for limited deflections.
This section includes the design of laced elements for ductile mode response.
The brittle mode of response including 'the occurrence of spalling and the
design for controlled post-failure fragments are presented in subsequent
sections'; The interrelationship of the parameters involved in ,the design of
laced elements is illustrated in the'idealized resistance-deflection curve
4-33. Flexural Design for Large Deflections
4-33.1. General
The basic equations' for the analysis 'of the impulse capacity of an element
were derived in Chapter 3. For a two-way element-which exhibits a post:
ultimate resistance range and is designed for large deflections, the 'response'
is:
i 2
b
2'"u
- r u Xl +
'"u
r up
<Xm-
Xl)
4-95
'"up,
The response equation for a one-way element, or a two-way element which does
not exhibit a post-ultimate resistance range is:
4-96
applied blast impulse load

4-95
TH S-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR88-22
effective unit mass in the ultimate and post-ultimate rang. .
es, respectively
~
unit resistances in the ultimate and post"ultlmate'ranges,

respectively
deflection at partial failure
maximum deflection
The above equations give the impulse capacity "of a given structural element.
Use of'such equations for design purposes is not practica~ since the procedure
would involve a tedious trial ~nd error,design ..
4-33.2: "Impulse Coefficients
Equations suitable for design are o~tained by, substituting the general
expressions from Chapter 3 for .t~e effective masses (~ and ~p)' the ultimate
resistances (ru and r up) and maximum deflections (Xl' and~) into Equations,
4-95 and 4-96 The. reSUlting ,equations take the form:,
"
..
4~97,
- C
height of the element
horizontal reinforcement ratio

distance from the centroid of the compression reinforcement
to the centroid of the tension reinforcement
dynamic design strength 'of the steel
impulse coefficient
To illustrate the method used to obtain the impulse coefficients, consider a

two-way element (roof slab or wall) fixed on two adjacent edges and free on
the other two. The yield line Locat.Ion is defined by y and' L < Y < H. The
solution desired is for incipient ,failure (deflection ~) of a spalled section
(cross section type III).
From Chapter 3 the equations for the resistances, deflections and effective
masses for this two-way element are as follows:
1. Ultimate unit resistance

(Table 3-2)
ru -
where
(eqs. 4-18 and 4-19)
b
4-96
TH 5~PO(I/NAVFAC' P-39UAFB. 88-22"
and Pv is defined as the vertical reinforcement.ratiojon each face.

2. Post-ultimate unit resistance
(Table 3-4)
'.'
3, Partial failure deflection

(Table 3-6)
Xl - L tan 12
4. Ultimate deflection
where
. . , '-!-.
Xu -
(Table 3-6)
ytan 12 + (H - y) tan y
-
,(
y _ 12' -
tan ~l [
tan 12 -'~]
.,'
y/L
5. Effective unit mass in the ultimate range

~
- (Kut)u m
I
(Kut)u is from figure 3-44

m
de
---
1728
150
l-'225dc,.
386, (10- 6?
.';
6. Effective unit mass in the post-ultimate ,range

~p
- (Kut)up m - (2/3) m .
the units used are:

inches
psi-ms
.MVN MVp'
in, -lbs/in ..
f ds' r u' r up
psi'
As
in. 2
m.
p~i.-ins2/i~. '
~. ~p
Substituting into Equation 4-95

i 2 - 2 X 225d (Kut)u
b
c
[
4-97
..
TN 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
12 + (H - y) tan 1 -
Lta~120]
4-98a
Factoring
(H - y) tan 1
(y-L +
4-98b
tan 12
Dividing each side by PH the horizontal reinforcement ratio, and rearranging
.-
Pv
3(Klli)u 2
L
- -
Pv
- 287(
tan 1
tan 12
'3. 33(Klli)u(L/H)
)
4-98c
(y/H) 2
PH
y
4.70 (Klli)u
+ (1 -
, ib 2H
'
3
PH d c f ds
) tan 12
L
--- + 4.70 (1H
[--H
Y
) tan 1 J
4-99
H
"
where
, . 'Y -
12 - tan - 1 (
0.2126
) .
4-100
y/L'
The solution for partial failure (deflection Xl.) for,the above two-way
element is obtained in a similar manner. Substituting the general expressions
for partial failure into Equation 4-96 yields:
ib 2H
PHdc 3fds
Pv
957 (---)
PH
( L/H
, 4-101
(Klli)u
( y/H )2
Equations 4-99 and 4-101 can be rewritten as:

ib 2H
. 3
PH dc f ds
- .C1,
4-102
4-98
TK
5-t300/NAVFAC'P~397/AFR
88-22
,:
4-103
PH d c 3fds
where the right-hand side' of' the equat Lon.d s 'design~ted as: the impulse
coefficient: The impulse coefficient Cu h:used for incipient failure design
(maximum deflection equals Xu) whereas Ci is,for partial failure design
(maximum deflection equals Xl)' 'These impulse, coefficients are a proportional
measure of the impulse capa~ity under the' resistance-deflection curve up to
the maximum deflection. "
"
,
,
"
Expressions for the impulse 'coefficients of elements with various support

conditions and yield lihe locations have been derived as above. Equations for
Cl and Cu for two-way elem~nts" are given ih,'Table' 4-9 and Table '4-10,' respectively. For one-way elements which do not exhibit the, secondary resistance
range (Xl - Xu), the coefficient Cl is equal to'C u' In addition, for a given
support condition, Cu for ~ one-way, e!ement./s a c~nstallt vaLue . Table 4-11
gives the values of.'C u for one-way elemen~s..
' "
"; '.,
."
.....: - . : . ,
.
. ;
, f" :
4-33.3. Design Equations for", Deflections 'Xl and

-:
. "
,"
,.,
. ' .
"
'"
For design purposes, Equations 4-102 and 4-103 can be, rewritten as:
,
For a tW6-way element Cl and Cu are,functions;ofslJ,pport,cohditions, aspect
ratio, ' yield line location" r'e Lnfo rcement; ratios and rhe.: Load-mas s factors:
It was shown in Chapter 3 the'(KLM)u for a two-way element varies with the
yield line location ratio y/H or x/L. further'!'ore, it was shown that yield
line location ratio is a function of the span ratib L/H and the moment'ratio
[(MVN + MVp)/(MHN + MHP)]' Since the cross sectiohs used'for large'deflection
design are equally reinforced "on each face, the moment ratio is " in effect,
the ratio of the reinfbrcement'r~ti~ PV/PH' Thus it can be'se~n that the
impulse coefficient~ are solely, functions of L/~ and PV/PH for a given support
condition,
'
To. fac.l.litate the design procedure, charts,have been constructed for the
impulse'coeffi~ients Cl and' Cu for t~~-way,eiem~nt;a~ a function' of PV/PH and
L/H. These curves,for various suPPo~t cond.l.tions are given in Figures 4-30
through 4-32 for Cl and Figures 4-3) throlJ,gh 4-3S'~or Cu'. ,For' one-way
elements Cu Ls a cons cant; (see: Taple' 4-11):
'
4-33.4:,Optimum Reinforcement
,
A prime factor in,the des~gn of' any facility is construction economy. 'Proper
selection of section si~es and reinf9rcing steel will result in a'design
having optimum ?ap'acity and minimum cost. ' See discussion in paragrayh 4-23.1,.
,
4-99' ,-
"
TK S-1300/NAVFAC
P~397/AFR'88-22
'
To determine the optimum design of any particular two-way structural element,

cons~deration must be given to the following:
1.
There is an ideal distribution of flexural reinforcement, defined

by the reinf~rcement ratioPy~PH' which ,is independent of ,section
depth. This ratio will yield the.maximum,blast impulse capacity
for a given total ~oUIii:: of: fle.;{ural rei~forcement PT'
2.
There is,an ideal relationship,between:the quantity of reinforcement to the quantity of'concrete which' will result in the '
minimum cost of an'element. This relationship is defined by the
total percentage of reinforcement,in one face of an element. this
total percentage PT is the ,,~of the yerti'i'a~ and ,horizontal ,
reinforcement r~tios, ,Py, an~ PH'. ~espective~y.
. ' I;f
oJ.i'
~,
'
, '
'
'-.
H.
4-33.4.1. ' Opt'imum Reinforcement Distribution

,
'1
"
The blast impulse capacity of an element varies with the,distribution of the

reinforcement even though the total amount'of reinforc~ment and the concrete
thickness remains the same. This optimum reinforcement 'ratio varies for
different support conditions as a function of the aspect, ratio L/H. In'
addition, the optimum ratio is different'-for' partial' faiiure 'and inc'ipient
failure design.
J' ,
... ', .
I
'/
To illustrate the determination of the' optimum reinforcement distribution

ratio PV/PH' consider a twoway panel fixed on three sides. The panel has an
aspect ratio L/H equal to 3 and a total percentage of rei~forcement'PT equal
to 1 percent. For various values of PV/PH' the impulse capacity can be
determined for both partial and incipient failure design from Figures 4-31 and
434, respectively. _
If (ib2H)/(dc3fds is plotted versus PVPH the resulting curves are shown in
Figure !,-36:, The ideal PV/PH occur's at the maxiJ,num value of ib2H/dc3fds and
is indicated,o~ ,the illustration as 1:58 ro~' incipient failure ana 1,93 for
partial failure d~~ign: ~ncreasing or decre~sing the ,S~tal amount of steel
PT' will shift-th~ curyes'up 9r down but not eff~ct the optimum Py/PH ratio.
This optimum.PV/PH ratio for oth~r L/H ratios and support conditions are '
determined, from similarly const.ructied curves. . '..
'. '
The optimum ~al?es'of PV/PH for vario~s sup~oftcJoRditions are plot~~d- as'a,
function of the'aspect ratio. Figure 4-37 gives the optimum reinforcement for
partial' "failure design, while Figure 4 38 'giv~s the' optimum :ratio for' in~
cipient failure design.
',-
,.-
-'.
'.
'
The optimum reinforcement ratio for partial failure'design always results in ,

positive yield lines which
bisect the
90 deg.~e
angle. f, at the' corners of the
..
.
..,.
..
element (45 degree yield' lines). for all support;conditions. Consequently; all
supports reach the maximum rotation of 12. 'degrees'
simuitaneously
and . they are.
'
,
1
_
all on the verge of failure. Therefore, the' optimum condition for partial
failure is a particular case of incipient failure. T9is condition is evident
from the common point on Figure 4-36. It can also be seen from this 'figure
that atpV/PH r~ti'?s other than the common ~oint, par t La l failure design is
more conservative than incipient failu~e design which includes the post
ultimate range,' The optimum PV/PH ratio for partial' fail\l~e design maxLmf.z es
the impulse capacity up to Xl leaving'no reserve capacity (post ultimate
.
~
4-100, '
TM
5-1301~/NAVFAC
P-397/AFR 88-22
rang'e) . Therefore, at this ratio, the capacity is ~um,eric'ally equal to 'that

for incipient
failure
design. . Whilei there
is. no_
quantitative
advantage
to
,
.
- "
.
'
. -.
.
optimum partial failure design over incipient:fa~lure design, there is a,
qualitative advant age, The elements rema,tn J,.ritact' s Lnc'e, all suppo,~s are on
the verge of failure as opposed' to ,optimUm incipi,,'nt failure where some
supports have failed and the remaining supports are on the verge of failure.
In this Lat t er case '. t;he,re ,is unlmown sec9lJ:dl\ry cracki'~g which is n~t accounted for in th!, ~esign.,
' , ' , " '.
'0
As previously expl8i~ed, 'incipient::failure design includes' the dlp~city fro{,t

two:w~y action of an element up topartral 'fallure'Xl, an~ the capacity of
one-way action up to LncLp Lent; failur,e ~. 'Except" as exp,lained below, the
optimum reinforcement ratio' 'f.or it1cipient failure design results from' maximizing the capacity due to one-way action after partial failure (post-ultimate
range). The, resulting optimum rei~forceDierit rat'ios for incipient failure'
design produce various yield ~ine.configurations depending.upon the support
condi~ions., For !~~r'edged'fixed, the,optimum reinforce~erit'ratio is 0.25 and
4.0 for aspect ratios less than and greater than one, respectively. This
distribution. maximfzes the post ultimate one-way ac t Lon inthe shorter.
directfon. 'Fo'r two edges fixed, rhe increase, in '.capacity due to, cantiiever
action in thlji pcst; ultiIila~e ,range is less than th~ ,Aecrease in capac Ley 'of the
ultimate range. Thus , for ,these elements, the capacity cannot; be Lncreased
above that for partial failure, and the optimum ratio for 'incipient failure
design is the same as for partial failure design (45 degree yield lines). For
three edges fixed, the post ultimate range capacity is due to either cantilever a~tion in the,yertical direction or fixed~fixed'beam action in the
horizontal direction. ' In regions where the,post ultimate range consists,of
cantilever' action (L/H ratio, in the immedfate vic,inity of'"2 and L/H ratio ,
greater than 4) the optimum ratio is the same'as' for pa'rtial : failure . For L/H
ratios 'less than 1. 5, the post 'ultima,te range, consists of fixed-fixed beam
action and, therefore; the optimum ratio is'equal to 0.25. Between theseL/H
regions, neither behavior dominates and'the resuiting optimum PV/PH ratios
maximizes the combination of ultimate and post:ultimate rang'!' capacities"
~
."1"
. '
....
'"
I ,
4-33.4.2. Optimum Total Percentage of Reinfof~ement

The optimum total percentage of reinforcement PT gives the relationship
between the quantity of r~inforcement to the quantity of concrete which
results in the minimum ,cost of an element. ,The total percentage of reinforcement in one face of the, element is defined as:
"
4-106
The o~timum percentage of reinf~rcement depends upon the relative costs of ,the
concrete and reinforcing steel. Based on' the average costs of concrete and
steel, the optimum percentage of reinforcement PT has been determined to be
betwe~nO.6 and 0.8 percent, with 0.7 being a reasonable value to be used for
design. However, for'large projects, a detailed cost analysis may'result in a
'
more economical design.
In the usual design situation, the optim~ PV/PH ratio is first determined
based 'on the support conditions and aspect ratio. Knowing this ratio, Clor
Cu is determined and along with the given values'of i b H, f ds' Equation 4-104
or 4-105 results in:
4-101,

4-107
With the known, values of PV/PH.and the optimum total percentage of reinforcement equal to 0.7, the required quantity of hoxizontal,reinforcement'PHis
calculated. The required thick~ess,~f'the element is then calculated from
,Equation 4 - 1 0 7 . "
'
"
"
"
In some design cases, it' may'be desirable to "reduc:e the c'oncrete thickness
below the optimum thickness. The quantity cif reinforcement"in eX:cess of the
optimUIII PT must be provided to obt;ain the ne,cessary imp~lse capacity. The
,
cost increase is small for total percentages of ,steal in the vicinity of ' the .
optimum value of PT' In,fact, the 'use of PT '~~ual to 1 perce~t will result .~n,
a cost increase of less than 10, percent.' Beyond 1 percent reinforcement, th~
cost increase is more rapid. However, except for very thin,elements, the'use
of reinforcement in excess of 1 percent is impractical since the required r " ,
details cannot be' maintained ,with 'such"large 'quantities' of reinforcing ~tee~.~.
For thick walls providing even the optimum PT of 0:7 percent maybe impr.acti'"
cal and PT ~ay have to be redue,ed to as low as 0: 3', percent (mi.nimum rei~fOJ;ce - ",
ment of 0.15 percent in each direction) in order to permit placement of the
reinforcing steel. The total reinforcement PT m.ay also be less than optimum'
if a minimum concrete 'thickness is required to preve~t fragment penetration.
When the minimUm quantity of reinfor"ement ,is,pro~ided whether for strength, or
to satisfy minimum requirements, the res~lting cost may b~ far in excess of
optimum. '
. , '
'
,
In some cases of incipient faiiure des Ign, the optimum reinforcement ratio
Pv/PH is equal'to 0.25 or 4.0. However, in most cases, it is'impractical to
provide four times as much reinforcement 'in one direction as in the other
direction.' Since the minimum required percentage of reinforcement in a'given
direction is 0.15, the 'orthogonal direction would require 0.6 percent'for a .
total percentage of 6.75. ' Although this percentage is 'approximatelY,equal to
the optimum percentage of 0.7. it may still be impractical in all 'but thin
walls.: Consequently, Lri such design situations" a trade of'f between optimUm
rein%ofceoient ratio Pv/PH and tne optimum total percentage reinforcement 'PT '
must be made for an economical design. ,
'
4-33.5
, Design
Equation for Deflections Less than Xl or
Xu
For certain conditions, it is sometimes desired,to design a structural element

for 'maximum deflections other than p~rtial failure def'Lec't Lon Xl or incipient
failure deflection
For those cases, the impulse coefficients can be
scaled relative to the deflections.
Xu.
For a maximum deflection

107 becomes
Xm
in the deflection range Xl <
Xm
<.~,
Equa~ion
4-
'
,
'4-108
'4-109
4-102
TK 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
For a maximum deflection corresponding to a support rotation greater than 5

degrees, but less than Xl' Equation 4-108 becomes
,
PH dc
i 2H
b
4-110
C'lfds
whe're
C'l
. ~.
Xm
4-111
( - - ) Cl
Xl .
The ~ptimum Pv/PH ~atio for ~ given elemen~ is a constant for any deflection
less than partial failure deflection~l'. and 'is determi?~d from Figure 4-37.
In the deflection range Xl < Xm< ~ the optimum,PV/PH ratio varies with the
maximum deflection. However, for design purposes, the values from Figure 4-38
for incipient.failure may b~ used.
4-33.6. Design Equations for' Unspalled Cross Sections
The impulse coefficients derived,above may.also be used 'for type II or
unspalled cross sections. However, the'general form of the equation is'
slightly modified to account f~r ~he'ch~nge in the physical properties of the
cross section. For a tyPe II cross section, the full thickness, of concrete
element is included in calculating the effective mass. Thus, the design
equations, for the impulse coefficients of unspalled sections take the form:
.'
..
4-112
4-113
where Tc is the total thickness of the concrete section.
The optimum reinforcement ratios and the impulse coefficients are the same for
spalled and unspalled cross sections . The design procedure for unspalled
cross sections is ,very similar to the procedure described in Section 4-33.4.2.
The total thickness of ,concrete Tc caribe expre~sed in terms, of d c by approximati.ng the value of. d'. The. value of d'.. can be estimated by determining
the required concrete cover and assuming the reinforcing bar sizes.
4-34. Flexu~ai Design for Limited Deflections
In the design of elements for large deflections, only the plastic range
behavior of~he element was consider~d, since. the ,capacity due to elastoplastic behavior is re~atively small. For elements where support rotations
are limited 'to 5 degrees or less,the elasto-plastic range is a significant
portion of the el~ment's total capacity as well as of its deflected shape.
Therefore, it.mus~ be ~ncluded in the determination of the response of such
elements.
..
4-103

The blast impulse capacity of an element whose maximum deflection is less. than
or equal to 5 degrees was given in Chapter 3 as
i 2H
b
r u XE
2ma
where
ma
ru
(Xm -. XE)
4-114
ma
average of the effective elastic and plastic unit masses
XE
equivalent elastic deflection
This is an equation which is suitable for analysis rather than design.

Impulse coefficients could theoretically be derived in a similar manner as
that for large deflections'. However, 'the equivalent elastic deflection cannot
be defined by a mathematical expression making the determination of impulse
coefficients' for the various support conditions impractical.'
'
","
The design of an element subjected to an impul~e load' (short duration pressure-time load) for limited deflections is, accomplished using a trial and
error procedure. An element would be'<aasuaed (concrete thickness and reinforcement) and its response determined from the response charts of Chapter 3. A
preliminary esti~ate of the size of the element can be obtained using the'
equations for partial failure design where the impulse coefficient is modified
for reduced rotations according ~o Equation 4-'110. It should be noted that
this prelimina!y design will underestimate the required element.
The above procedure would be used for laced elements designed for support
rotations less than 5 degrees. However, if an element is designed for support
rotations less than 2 degrees and single leg stirrups are used in place of
lacing reinforcement, the above preliminary estimate ,of the size of the
element may not be used. Since the position of the flexural reinforcement is
not altered for single leg stirrups" an average d c may not be used. Two
values of d c 'must be determined; one for the vertical reinforcement and second
for the horizontal reinforcement. Therefore, the capacity of the element
(flexural and shear capacity) must be determined according to the procedures
for conventional reinforced slabs.
4-35
Design for Shear
4- 35.1. General
After the flexural design of an element has been completed, the required
quantity of shear reinforcement must be determined. -: This 'shear' reinforcement
insures that the desired flexural behavior in the ductile mode will' be
attained. The design of the lacing reinforcement has been discussed in
previous sections. This section is concerned with ,the 'determination of the
shear stresses' and forces to be used i~ the design equations.
Shear coefficients can be. derived in a manner similar to that used to derive
the impulse coefficients above. The equations ' for support shear given in
Chapter 3 and for the ultimate shear'stress given in Section 4~27 show that
the shear reinforcement is'a function of the resistance of the element, and not
of the applied load. The shear forces'and stresses vary as the ultimate unit
resistance, the geometry and yield line locations of the element, and the
section depth. If r u is evaluated and substituted into these shear expres,4-104
TK 5-l300/NAVFAC
P-397/AFR88~22
aLons , it cap be shown 'that the ultim":te auppor t; shear Vs car{'be represented
as an equatifon in the, 'general fOrm
".
.,
,-,
I'
4~115
and tpe ultimate shear 'st;J;essa1; dist~~~e .:dc fr:.oin the support~s
"
, "
where
C
.p
, .,
shear co~fficient'
'"
,,
4-116
" !
"
f~exural rein~orcement ratio
,.
f d/-, ;dynami'c' de~'ign stress 'of the flexural reinforcement

The shear;coefficient is differ~nt for each 'case and also different for oneway and two-way eleme~ts, Specific values ~re indicated in ~he following
paragraphs of iliis section:
' ',.
"
y
0:
4-35.2. Ultimate Shear Stress
','
..
., ",
4-35.2.1. One-Way Elements
The ultimate shear stress v u at distance d c from the support for

element is
a one-way
4-117
where Cd is the shear coefficient and a function of the ratio of dc/L. Values
of Cd are shown in Table 4-12.
4-35.2.2. Two;Way
Elements
,
. ,
",
:' ...
~.
The' ultimate shear .. stress v,J;" in the horizontal' direction (along side H) at a
distance d c from the support for a two-way element is given as
"
4-118
vuH - CHPHfds
c
and in the vertical direction (along side L)" 'a~

4-119
where., CH and Cv are the horizontal and vertical shear coefficients, respectively. The shear coeffici~nts"given in Table.4-l3, vary a~,dc/x or dc/Y for
the triangular sectors and as x/L and'dc/H or y/H and dc/L for the trapezoidal
sectors. The solution for the shear coefficients is presented graphically in
Figures 4-39 through 4-52.
The shear coefficients for the triangular sectors, can be read directly from
either Figure 4-39 or 4-40, since the yield line location is the only variable
involved
.. ' Plotting the- .'shear, coeffi.~i'llits.
for the
trapezoidal
seCtors
for a
' .
t .

particular support condition yields a family of curves. That is, the shear
'~....'
4-105
TN 5-l300/NAVFAC
P~397/AFR,88-22
coefficient is plotted versus dc/L for various values of y/H, (or dc/H for
various values of x/L). The maximum value ,of the shea~ coefficient is,
'
different for each curve of y/H or x/L' ~nd occurs at various values of dcIL or
dc/H. Therefore, these family of curves overlap and accurate interpolation
between curves is diffic~lt. '
Using a method of coordinate transformation, the family of curves has been
reduced to a set of curves with a common maximum point defined (using the
horizontal shear coefficient as an example) by CH/CM - 1 and (dc/L)/(dc/L)M
1. The quantides CH and (dc/L)H represent the co'ordinates of the maximum
point, on the original family of curves for y/H and x/L. The left-hand
portions of the curves become identical, and accurate interpolation in the
right-hand portion iS'now possible. This transformation results in two
figures to define'the shear coefficient for a particular support condition and
yield line pattern.
. '
The above sets of curves are presented in Figures 4-41 through 4-52. When
using these curves, the shear parameter curve, for ,the applicable support
conditio? is entered first'with the value of'x/L'or y/H to determine CM and
(dc/H)M or (dc/L)M". The second curve is then used to determine ,CH or Cv.
f '
It should be noted that when designing two-way panels for incipient failure;:
the shear stresses in the post-ultimate range must also be checked using the
equations for one-way elements.
"
4-35.3. Ultimate Support Shears
4-35,3.1. ,One-Way element
The
~ltimate
support shear Vs for a one-way element is

4-120
where Cs is the shear coefficient and is a constant for a given support

condition. Values of Cs for several one-way elements are given in Table 4-14.
4-35.3.2. Two-Way Elements
For a two-way element, the ultimate support shear VsH' in the horizontal
direction (along side H) is repres~nted as
PH d c 2 f ds
4-121
and VsV' in the vertical direction' (along,side L) is

Pv d c 2 f.ds'"
H
where CsH..a nd Csv are the horizontal and vertical shear coefficients', ,respec-'
tively. For a given support condition! these. coefficients vary" as the yield
4-106
TH S-13ClO/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

line location ratios x/L or Y/H. The shear coefficients are listed in Table
4-15 and for the trapezoidal 'sectors only are plotted in Figures 4-53 through
4-56 for various support conditions.
,.,",
.;
-;
": -,
>---,-,-
"
4-107
...
'.
.'
'I
<[
l-
(/)
(/)
POSTI ULTIHATE:
LA.. TlPIfAT
, ELASTICI
II
'I
I- INCIPIENT
FAILURE
,X( 9= 2-)
XE
TCTAl
FAILURE
X( 5")
X,
Xu
DEFLECTION
CD
PROTECTION CATEGORY
<9
$HE:LTER
.~ RJER
PROTECnVESTRUCTURE
PRESSURE - TI I/!E OR IMPULSE:
STRUCTVRE-LOAD
SENSln\1TY
cec (-IN
DESIGN RANGE
RESP
SE CHARTS DR HERAnON PROC(DUR
DESIGN METHOD
IMP
SE (QUA TIONS
IMPULSE
CR C
LARGE
LlHIT C
DEFLECllON CRITERIA
QUAlIONS
ARTS
TOTAL
FAILURE
BENDING'S ~AA
DUCTILE MODE Of
RESPONSE
POSTCRUSHING
BRITTlE MODE OF
[RIll
CROSS-SECllON TYPE
<fdy
SHEAR REINfORCEMENT
Figure 4-29
'<tv
U OR
f'dy+1I4Cf'c1u-fdy>
FAILURE
FRAGMENTS
DJRECT SPAL ING
RESPONSE
DESIGN STRESS
SCABBING
1Il
1/2Cf'ctu+ f'rI>
LACING
Rele.tlonship between deSign pe.re.Meters for le.ced etenerrt s
4-108
2000
,~.,...
,,'
I
;;
I I'
rrrr
I'
1000." '""
,I"
I"
1
II
iii lrt!
"
".
'"11"
I
I
, , ,,.
'I
UI
--'~
,
t '
.,
"1"1
I I ' i II
II
'"
I!
I,'
"
," "i'lo"
'1Iil':O
Iii
II
l-T '
"
I:
!
"
0.;
,
,
, ,
1""1
':
I,
, I
,
II1I
'Iii
"
I
'1,1
700
500
N.
5O
<,
400
...
300
200
..
"
;"
,.j
Ii
"
."'
i;L;1 I
'!lId
Ilii'
100
.""
'1,'1
:0
"';>.
..
~0
.
0"
, ,",
," ,
I'"
I I!
I'
011 I 'I
'I
"
'
I "
I ".
",.
,
I
"
III,
"
I I I
, , ,'
"
,,
:
o "
III
III I I'
I I II ,
,.,
"
,".'
I ' " """

"
""",,
.. I'"
"",.,,,
'1"1"11 ,
;I
11\111'11
1'1'11'
1':1 III I
11"1'
'I"
"
I
I
0"" ," ""

i
'"
I
"" ,'I "
::H-*
I
111I
'0"
-=
70
50
.2
.4
.3
.5
.7
1.0
2.0
RATIO. OF VERTICAL TO HORIZONTAL flEINF.
Figure 4-30
Impulse coefficient Cl for an element' with

two adjacent edges fixed and two edges free
4-109
3.0
4.0
5.0
3000
N.
c
<,
N
400
co
E
co
Q,
.. - -- -,._--
. -. - --"""1"
.. _-. _.
__
0 "._-
..
-:~::.::r=:.,-~
. _...t -_._--,- : - - _...
- - - - _.._ .. ,-_... _ ..... -
! . - . . . . .
-'___,_:'::-:~::::::1::::::.:::::..._..:j-=- -- . . - :'1::. _ .
.. ~- "I' .'~._4 0 - .
'_~':~"".:.:::."._
.. - - '.
.l:-
.."
::1 :: :": :::.. i
.::;_:':~:':':'
. ;.._
-_..
.:"1:
,.
-1. .
:~~~=-l:~_. ~ ~
! "_
_,-,~; =.::
.". ".-.-.- -'j .- .. -~.- - -l-~-''-' . t- _~: r:~~:~..::;,~::.,~= ~:::.;
0
'
....
... ".-.
..,
~-~ ~ I ~~.~-~! ~~~

I ~~.:..:
.2
.4
.3
.5
;~~ ~~===::~::~:.::i:~~~;-:.:=j~~~'~:~~~~i~~~~~ :~~~i~~~l~~~~~,~?:~
.7
1.0
2.0
3.0
RATIO OF VERTICAL TO HORIZONTAL REfNF.

Figure 4-31
Impulse coefficient Cl for an element with three

edges fixed and one edge free
4-110
4.0
5.0
.E
......
...E
...<>.
U
. ..
,
..
.. "'":."
,.......
........ ::' I.:.:::::.:
c i......
. ..
", I." ..., ......... ,,--: :"'.C.' .: ... :
...... ,
.......
. ""
'
.... ,
.2
.5
.3
.7
1.0
RATIO OF VERTICAL. TO
Figure 1,-32
HO~IZONTAL
2.0
1---'
3.0
REINF.. Py I PH
Impulse coefficient Cl for an element with four

edges fixed
4-111
..
.--,:: . : : :": :::':,":: ::l:':.

.:: :::
.. ,..... I, ....,
.
. .... ...,::::::-. ::T::: .... :::
4.0
5.0
-:s....
.2
.3
.4
.5
1.0
.7
2.0
3.0
4.0
RATIO OF VERTICAL TO HORIZONTAL.REINE. Py'/PH

Figure 4-33
Impulse coefficient eu for

fixed and two edges free
4-112
~n
element with two adjacent edges
tlO
2000
1000
100
..s
.....I
.-
...
500
400
300
200
..
, ."
.j,
"
.,
,
;
100
II
" ,
"
I
I
II
I
I I
'"''
1111111
I I I
, ,
I
70
50
.2
.3
.4
.5
.7
1.0
2.0
3.0
RATIO OF VERTICAL TO HORIZONTAL REINF.. Pv /PH

Figure 4-34
Impulse coefficient e u for an element with

three edges fixed and one edge free
4-113
4.0
5.0
2000
II' ,.
1000
,,
I,
700
500
.5
......
N
400
""
rz-!J
. 'b!J
""
Go
\ .'=>
N .
300
--
200
'" ",
,I"
'1"
," ""
"
" ,
,
I"
'"
I'!I
'"
,,'
+:
.,
r ,
, ,,
II'
I'
'"
"
100
70
.~-
50
.2
.3
.5
.7
2.0
1.0
3.0
RATIO OF VERTICAL TO HORIZONTAL REINF.. Py /PH

Figure 4-35
Impulse coefficient
four edges fixed
4-114
cu
for an element with
4.0
5.0
e
THREE EDGES FIXED
- H "- 3.0.
P,- " 1%
2.8
-s
-.,..,.
.~
':'
...,
..-
'"
Pv II;'H"=
1.93
2.6
%~
0I.a
"
2.4
DEFL'ECTION
XI
2.2
2.0
0.25
0.5
0.7
IrO
2.0
3.0
Pyl PH
Figure 4-36
Determination of optimum ratio of p /p for maximum impulse

.
V H
capac1.ty
4.0
5.0
PH
'm'77">7r.n "7'7'
:JH
I.
.1
TWO EDGES FIXED
THREE EDGES FIXED
FOUR EDGES FIXED
TWO EDGES FIXED
3.0
:1.'
, ,
, , , ,,
,, , ,
,, , "
2.0
, ,
, ,, , , , ,,, ,.
, ,
, ," ,,
'" ,
"
. ,
," , '"
,
,"
", ,
'.' '.
III
li'l
'i'
"
iii'
%
Q.
......
",,
>
Q.
IL
C(
II:
::;)
2
~
IL
,"'!
;,.
j',
"I"
, " " ,
"
'll
'" ,
I'i
'11
0
0
""
"i
,"
,
. '"
Ii_
t r
"
..
'" ,
""
'
IIII
"
(I,'
f.'1
;,1,
I I I",
FOUR EDGES FIXED
r :
'"
,.,
, ,
, ,,
,, ,
, , , ,,
,
, ,, , ,,, . , , ,,
,, , , ,
,
,, ,
,
,, ,
"
I t,
".,
I);
,I'
, ,
I:.
.'
.'
.,
It:1
'i'
",
"
. ,, "
Ii-
,
,
""
"
"
. . .' r . .,
1.0
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.3
",
,
,
0.2
,I "
"
t
,
t
"
I'i
,
, ';1'
"
"
IIII
"
!I
, ,
III
I; ,
"
,
,
I II
"
'"
"
I
'I
"
'Ii
II, I
.
", ,
p
1, '
"
I' "
..
,J'
, "
" " ,"'"
I'
,,
"4
"
,"
"
RATIO OF ELEMENT LENGTH TO HEIGHT. L/H

Figure 4-37
Optimum ratio of pv/p for maximum capacity at partial

H
failure deflection,x
1
4-116
,
,
'"
",,
6
TWO EDGES FIXED
THREE EDGES FIXED
FOUR EDGES FIXED
FOUR EDGES FIXED
3.0
TWO EDGES FIXED
,,
,",
, ,
,,
"
2.0
.....
THREE EDGES FIXED
0
j:
II:
:.
:)
:.
~
Q,.
, ,
,,
f
....
0
"
'
1.0
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.2
O~,
RATIO OF ELEMENT LENGTH TO HE:IGHT t LlH

Figure 4-38
Optimum ratio of P /P for

H
incipient failure,V x
u
4-117-
maximu~
capacity at
l-,,:~~'/j3
:r
"
,'- .... ...........
--
" ....-T............
........
........
,.,1
"
1.4
. 1.2
1.0
.'
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
o
Figure 4-39
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
Vertical shear coefficients for ultimat~ shear stress at distance

d c from the support (cross ~ection type II and III)
4~1l8
r-,
1\
1
.,JI'",JI'
:z:
/'/
.!.
"
'~- --<,
,
;'
,'"
1.4
1.2
1.0
0.8
0.6
0.4
"
0.2
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
de/x"
Figure 4-40
Horizontal shear coefficients for ultimate shear stress

at distance d c from the support (cross section type
II and III)
4-119
1.3
~[
0.56
/'"
'"'"
'"
1.2
L
1.1
1/2 ~/HS:I
1/2~ dc/HS: I
0.52
1.0
0.9
0.50
O<dc/ HS1/2
0.48
0.8
0:46
0.7
0:44
0.6
0.42
Figure 4-41
0.2
0.6'
04
0.8
X/L
Vertical shear parameters for ultimate shear stress
at distance d c from the support (cross section type

II and III)
4-120
0.5
1.0
I . 1
:J:~/
./'
1.0
0.8
'/L=OIHO
0.6
....
....
'"
Cv
CII
'/L =0.4
'/L=0.2 ._
0.4
'/L=0.6666 0.8
0.2
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
dc/H
(dc/H)..
Figure 4-42
Vertical shear coefficient ratios for ultimate shear stress
at distance d
from support (cross section type II and III)
1.8
2.0
1.3
--
:z:
,- -'
>-1
0.56
1.2
0.54
1.1
1/2 ~ dell <I
~
1/2~
0.52
dell <1
,
O~de/l51/2
0.50
1.0
,
0.9
O~dell:S;1/2
,.
0.48
,
...
0.8
0.7
.0.46
.'
0.44
0.6
,
0.42
Figure 4-43
0.2
0.4
0.6
Y/H
0.8
0.5
1.0
Horizontal shear parameters for ultimate shear stress

at distance de from the support (cross section type
II and III)
4-122
e
,,-
"
" "
I
.
1.0
III
0.8I
...,
....
'"
'"
Y/H=O 81.0
0.6
..
CH
CM
Y/H=0.4
lif'l
0.4
Y/HaO.2
.' .
.r
Y/H=O.666 8 OS
0.2
0:2
0.4'
0.6
,0.8
1.0
dell
1.2
1.4
1.. 6
-,
(clc/llM
Figure 4-44
Horizontal shear coefficient ratios for ultimate shear stress

at distance d c from the support (cross section type II and III)
.1.8
2.0
1.3
r1
:I:
0.56
1.2
0.54
1/2 < dC/H~ I
0.52
1.0
0.50
0.9
( dC/H)M
0.48
0.8
0.46
0.7
0.44
0.6
0.42
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.5
0.5
0.4
~L
Figure 4-45
Vertical shear parameters for ultimate shear stress

4-124
;t
distance
xrgr;\
I
0.8
'/L.=O 60.5
t-'
'"
'"
0.6
eM
X/L=0.2
X/L=O.l
0.4
,"'t
X/L=0.3336:0..4
0.2
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
dclH
(dc/HI..
Figure 4-46
Vertical shear coefficient ratios for ultimate shear Gtress at

1.8
2.0
'::1:
,."
.A, ...
,."
<,
>-I
0.28
"
...,
.
0.27
1.30
1;4:$dc/L:$ il2
0,26
1.25
. V4<dc1LS va
0.25
1.20
<dc/L:$ V4
0.24
II
1.15
O<dc/L:$II
0.23
I .10
0.22
I.05
0.21
Figure 4-47
0.8
0.2
Horizontal shear parameters for ultimate shear stress

II and III)
.
4-126
I.00
1.0
I:
:I
--
"""',....... -i,
,
,"
1.0)
0.8l
Y/H= OIHO
.Y/H= 0.6
...,
...'"
....
0.6
~*!YIH=O.4
S!-
ee.
III
0.4~
.Y/H=O.2
0.22
.Y/H0.8
..
'0
0.2.
Y/~=0.9
0.4
0.6
.0.8
1.0 ,.
1.2 .,
1.4
1:6
dell
(delL).,
t-
Figure 4-48
Horizontal shear coeff"icient ratios for ultimate shear stress at

distance d c from the support (cross section type II and III)
G'
1.8
2.0.
-,
.. 7
I,/~---';'-<
J:
0.28
"
0.27
1.30
1/1~dc/H~1/2
0.26
'. .
1.25
1/4S'delt+.;' 1/2
0.25
1.20
OS"dc/H~I/4
CM
0.24
1.15
...
tim:
O~dc/~J/4
0.23
1.10
~
0.22
0.21
1.05
O.
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
1.00
0.5
X/L
Figure 4-49
Vertical shear parameters for ultimate shear stress at distance

d c from the support (cross section type II and III
.4-128
t-!-
"
:z:
)C--
-.</,
..
1.0
~
0.8
'/L=0800.5
....,
'/L=O.3
0.6
....
'"
'"
EY
e
'/L=O.2
lll
..
0.4
'/L=O.l
..
,.
~.
0.2
.
. ,'/L=O.4
"/L#o.451
0.2
0.4
0:6
0.8
1.0
.,
dc/H
1.4
1.2
"
1.6
-(dc/Hlw
Figure 4-50
Vertical shear coefficient ratios for 'ultimate shear stress at

distance d c from the support (cross section type II and III)
1.8
2.0
,.
......-
:r
.....
--
-- _ ....
".-
....."
>f
............
0.28
..
1.30
0.27
1/4!dc/L~1/2
I
0.26
L25
1/4~ delL S' 1/2
,
I
..
r.20
0.25
O!d e/L ...1/4
..
I-~
0.24 ,
,
;,
-r-t-
, ,
0.23
+-t
I
I.15
0 ...d e/LSI(4
I
..
..
I
,
..
I.10
r+
rt+:
t ,
'
,
I
0.22
'
-!-_tm
~.'
'.'
'J
"
"
,
,
I
,
.4-I
.,
++-
.. ,
,
,
I.05
,,
I
0.21
0.1
02
03
0.4
Y/H
Figure 4-51
Horizontal shear parameters for ultimate shear tress

II and III)
4-130
I.00
0.5
e
.
1-
-i -;
'
--
.i .
....-"":..:.T.--:I:
--. -L
--
. '
--
~.
1.0
--
0.8
!l'H=OaO,5
*H-O,3
....,
.....
w
.....
0.6
'III
...
0.4
-- .-
'H=O.l
-- - - . .
. .L
---
0.2,
Y/H=O.2
--
Y/H=OA
Y/H=O.45
0.2
0.4
0.6
08
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.8
1.6
dC/l
( dC/Lly
Figure 4-52
Horizontal shear coefficient ratios for ultimate shear stress

at
2.0
"
"
,
"
.' :,fl;;;,::,j]
. .I' , .I '
"
..
"
"
C IV
:z: 5
u'
tI
1:'
0.2
'..
0.4
0.6
It
0.8
T'O( H
Figure 4-53
Shear coefficients for u~timate support shear

(cross section type II and III)
4-132 .
1.0
[.~
I
", rr,,'77
.5
..
>
U
0.1
, 0.3
0.2
0.4
..!..
L
Figure 4-54
shea r coeff Lci.erit.s for ultirnatesupport shear

.(cross section t"ype II and III)
4-133
0.5
! .
,.1...
".
".
.,
".'"
'.'
' ....
....
,
,
,.1
II
i
(,,).
10
0.2
Figure 4-55
0.4
y
H
0.6
0.8
. 1.0
Shear coefficients fo} ultimate support shear

(cross section type II and III)
4-134
..
. ..
....- ......
...., ... '
.".""
......
>.
""""
L
~
~
II
to
10
0.1
0.2
0.3
L
Figure 4-56
0.4
Of'tr
Shear coefficients for ultimate support shear

(cross section type I I and III)
4-135
0.5
Table 4-9
Edge
Conditions
Impulse Coefficient Cl for Two-Way Elements

Yield Line
Locations
(Kull ).
'=It,;;;,;,:.:J]
I
(sIH) .
(Ku l I,
'(:r/B)I
957 (K..,,).(p,lpH)
(.IH)
957 (K..,,).(pvlpH)(LIH)
'. (.IH)'
OSz/H;Sl
(K", ).
957 (.IH)
H5,.%'5.L/2
(K..,,).
957 (x/H)'
.,
..
'=IL;';~::?J~
L
..
91:
..
)----<,
H5,.z$L.
L5,1I5H
0
I
957
O$y/L$1
.1-
Three -edges
supported and
one edge free
Impu!se Coefficient t C.
OS,z/HSl
EJ
Two adjacent
edges supported
and two edges
free
. .
Four edges.
supported
Limits
L/2"."H
478 (K..,,).(p,lpH)(LIH)
.
(.IH)'
0$%/H54
(K..,,).
957 (.IH)
8/25.%$.L/2
471 (x/H)'
{ -..........-"
51 (KLJI);,(pvi'PS)
O".IL"I
O".IL"I
3
LIZ"."HIZ
4-136
(XLII i,
S5
__ ..J... __ .
"'IH)
7 (KLJI ).(PV/'PH)
(II/H)'.
(KL"),,(py/Ps)(L/H)
47_
(II/H)' 1
e
Table 4-10
Edge
Conditions
Yield Line
Locations
,(x/H)'
287
+ (Ku,).
[3.333 (K LII ) . (pV/PH)
xIL;;,;,:J3
L
0
I
Three edges
supported and
one edge free
.1
elY -1
(L/H)I+
4.705(L/H -x/H)
;
(L/B)1
tan~)
Where, A._120 _ la n- 1
(0.2126)
xlB
8
-. Ie]
/
)----<,
L5.y$H
287 CPr/PH)
o5.%IH 5.1
", 287
H5x$L/2
1148
ylH
(Ku, }.'(L/B -y/H) ]

(LIB)' .
LAI
[3.333 (K
) . (LIB)
(yIH)!
+ (K
LJ1
"
] Where, ),,_12
+4.705(1-y/H)
}.'(yIH -t.tu
tanA.)
(02126)
gIL
-tan-\
[3.333(KLJ,.)~+(KLJI) ..t(PY/PH)(1_X/d)J
rlH
[0.833 (KL.JI)..
(riB)'
+2(Kl.AI).
(XIB
-1 4..705(L/2H -:LIB) tan>.)]
(L/HP+
(L/B)I
Where,).,= 120 _ t.a.n- 1 (0.2126)

xlB
__ ..J...-.-.
ILl
'
[1.333(Kud,,(PV/PH)+32(K
(L12H-YIHJ]
05yjLSt
717
LI2$y$H
(LIH)
(K LN )~f(yIH
lanA)
287 (pVIPH)[L667 (Kud"
(y
IH
) !-LI2H+t.i05(l-YIH)
.
.O$xIH$!
1112$x$LI2
O$yIL-st
ylH
.'
LM..
1148
:I:
287.
I.
O$.y/L:51
{L;,;~;:;J3
Four edges
supported
rn
-,
:-
"
287 [3.333 (Ku). + (Kul ).'(pV/PH) (l-xIH) ]
[3.333(Kud.
H5:x$.L
t2--t
Impulse Coefficient I Cu
o'5:x/H5, 1
EJ
1
"
>-'
Impulse Coefficient Cu for Two-Way Elements
Limits
Two adjacent
edges supported
and two edges
free
.. 1148
1148
(LIB)!
[0,&13(K')+(K
_jp )(1-2~)]
xIH
LN )'(
~ pi"
H
[O.4li(KLM)~
(xIH)1
ylH
-'
)]
'-
1148 (pdpH)
[0.417(KLN)~(LIH)
(1IIH)'
Where, A_120_tan-1
) I (LIII-2 YI H
LM ..
(LIB)1
'
(02126)
2 11 IL
(02126)
~
_,
2xlll
l]
3
LI2$.y$.HI2
Where, >._12_t.a.n-
-,,
,
lelH-t 4./05(LI2H-xIH) tanx
+2 (Kutl .. (LIII)I+
(LIB)!
[O:S33(KU,)~(PdPH) +(K
+ (K LM.
) !(2 YIH -LIB +4.705(1-2YIH) tenx)
Where, A-12-t&n- 1
(02126)
2YIL
TN 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
Table 4-11
Impulse Coefficient Cu for One-Way Elements

IMPULSE
COEFFICIENTS
EDGE CONDITIONS
Cu
CANTILEVER
127
FIXED SUPPORTS
510
L
4-138
Table 4-12
Shear Coefficients for Ultimate Shear Stress at Distance dc

from the Support for One-Way Elements (Cross Section Type II and III)
S,ULTIMATE SHEAR
TRESS COEFFICIENTS
Cd
EDGE CONDITIONS
CANTILEVER
FIXED SUPPORTS
I.
~I
2(dC)(I_ dc)
L
L
.
dc
I dc
.16(-)(---)
L
2
L
"
4139
Shear Coefficients for Ultimate Shear Stress at Distance de from

the Support for Two-Way Elements (Cross Section Type -II and III)
Table 4-13
- .Edae c::onditionll
Two adjacent edges

fixed and two
edges free
Limita
Yield line loeatioD
O:S:d./%:~:a
0
%[t;-;;,::8
I
"
....
-,
"o
Three edges fixed

and one edge free
0
%
I
""",.
,t~
f5J
%
,
-,
--..,....--__
__ k
IA
...............
","
3O(d.!z)(1
(5
at~
coefficient
eN
5 (d./z) (1-40/%)
OSd./LSt
6(d-IL) (3 +2y/H) (i-d./ L) (2-,1/8 -d.VILH)

(3-2,,/H)(6-IIIH dollfLH)
(d./L)(3 +2~/H)(1-d./L) ('1.-IIIH
(3 2V/H){1 d.,,/LH)
'
r.. ..
O$d./r:S:1
(5-4d./%l
t:Sdo/:9
5(4,/%)(I-do/:)
Vertical ultimate mear atre!lll coefficient CV
O:S:d./H:~a
6(4./H) (3+2%/L) (I-(MH) (2 -z/L-doz/HL)

(3-'1.%/L)(6 -z/L-4d.J:/HL)
l:Sd./H$l
tSd./z$l
tSd./L:Sl
UfI\i",
.-
d./Z)I
U,(%)
-do",LH)
3O(d.j%)(I-do/z)t
rr r
Four edges fixed
Horiaontal ultimatol ahear
(d./H)(3+2z/L )(1-d./H) (2 -zlL -tLzIHL)

(3-2%IL) (l-doz/HL)
3O(d"lv)(I-d./r)1
, OSd./rSt
(5 4d./V)
5(d"lv) (i-do/r)
t:S:c4/rS l
O:S:do/HSt
6(do/H) C3+h:/L) (I-do/H) (1-%/L-tLzIHL)

(3
u/L)(3-~/L
~/HL)
tSd"IHSI
2(4./H)(3+4:/L) (I-do/H) (I-:/L -~/HL)

(3-u/L)(I 'ld.%/HL)
05dolLSt
12(doIL)(6 I/IH)(I~2d./L)(2-I//H 24.1IILH)

(3-21//H)(6 -11/ H -StklllLH)
05d,,/1ISt"
3O(d,,/1I) (I -4.111)'
(5 4d./11)
tSdo/LSt
2(d.IL) (6-1IIH) (1-24.1L) (2 -IIIH -2d.IIILH)

(3- 211/H)(I-2d.IIILH)
tS:d./lISI
6(14/1/)(l-dol'l)
05~/HSt
24(4./H)(3-%/L)(1 -2d./H)(I-.;JL 'ld.%/HL)

(3-4%/L) (3 -.;IL-8d.zIH L)
OSd./~SI
30(d./.;)(I-d.I.;)'
(5-4d./z)
8(do/HH3-z/LHI -2d.IH)(I-.;fL-24.zIH L)
ISdol.;SI
5(tI.1.;)(l-do/z)
ISd-/HSt
OSdolLSt
24(doIL)(3 '1IH)(I-24./L)(I-I//H 2d.lIILH)

(3-4.,,/H)(3 1I/H-&1.'1ILH)
05d.hSI
3O(do/l/)(I -11.1'1)1
(5 4d./I/)
ISd-ILSI
8(d-IL) (3-lIIH) (l-2d.IL) (l-lIIH -2d.'11 LH)

(3-411IH) (i-4d-'1/LH)
I S:d.hSI
5 (do/v) (t -tI./1I)
(3 4%IL)(1 4d.z/HL)
Table 4-14
Shear Coefficients for Ultimate Support Shear for One-Way Elements

ULTIMATE SUPPORT
SHEAR COEFFICIENTS
Cs
EDGE CONDITIONS
CANTILEVER
FIXED SUPPORTS
..
~ ~"
I.
4-141
.1
Table 4-15
Ed.-
Shear Coefficients for Ultimate Support Shear for Two-Way Elements

Horiao:t&al uhima\e npport
ahear coemciut Coli
Yield liM loea\ioll
eoDdltio ..
V.=~~~~
TwO adjaeeot edsee

fixed IIDd two edges
. ..
/"
b..
~[1;;;,~:J3
I,
.
Throe od.,. fixed and
one edp Iree
\\
"""
~
"
'
6(2-./H)(3+2./H)
(6 ./H)(3-2./H)
6
./H
6(2-./L)(3+2./L)
(6-./L)(3-"/L)
nj
"
6
./L
J.<...
J''''''
<,
:, ,.,t
6
./L
6(1-./L)(3+U/L)
(3-./L) (3- ../L)
12(2-./H)
6
./H
(3-2./H)
,,~
..!,
Four qCll .fixed
<,
-<,," ,
,.,~- ...
"
, "', ,
,
,
....---- .....
-:
--
~~
~,.,
:,
4-142 .
6
./L
24(1-./H)
(3-4./H)
24(1-./L)
(3-"/L)
6
./H
TK 5-l300fNAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

COMPOSITE CONSTRUCTION
4-36. Composite Construction
4-36.1. General
Composite elements, are composed of two concrete panels (donor and acceptor)
separated by a sand-filled cavity. They have characteristics which are useful
in the blast resistant design of structures located close-in to a detonation.
For a large quantity of explosives, replacing a single concrete pan~l with a
composite element can result in a considerable cost sa~ings. It is not
usually cost effective to use a composite element for smal Ler quantities of
explosives where a single concrete panel would be three, feet thick or less.
Where a single concrete panel would be between three and five ,feet thick, a
detailed cost analysis is required to dete~ine whether or not'a composite
element would be more cost effective.
'
Composite walls are generally used as barricades to prevent propagation of
explosion between large quantit~es,.of explosives. The"" s~ructures are
usually designe,dtf?,r, '~,P\cipie.nt fail~r~. Composite e Lementis may be designed to
provide higher degre~s of protection, but the massive ~,alls (greater than 5
feet thick), that m<lk'e' composite elements, cost, e f f'ec t Lve are gene'rally not
required in such' cases. ,If the maxinium support rotation is limited to 4
degrees or less, a~d'a composite element is shown'to bE! cost effective,single
leg stirrups may be ",sed instead of lacing re:infor,cement. :, Walls using single
leg stirrups are somewhat; more economical dian .laced walls'.:'
"
"
Composite elements can also be useful for reducing the hazard due to direct
spalling. Spalled fragments from the donor panel are1:r~pped ip the sand fill
and, therefore. are of no concern. Spalling of the acc:eptor panel can be
eliminated by maintaining the required minimum thickness and maximum density
of the sand fill given in Section 4-56.2.
The mechanisms by which composite elements resist the blas~ pressures are (1)
the strength and ductility of the concrete panels and (2) the blast attenuating ability of the sand fill. The attenuation of the blast by the sand is
accomplished by (1) the increased mass it affords to tl,e concrete portions of
the wall, (2) the increased distance ,the blast wave must travel due to the
increased wall thickness produced by the 'sand' (dispersIon of blast wave), and
(3) the blast energy absorbed by the displacement and c:ompressfon of the sand
particles.
'.
4-36.2. Blast Attenuation Ability 'of Sand Fill

The method for calculating the impulse capacity of composite elements is
similar, to that: for'single laced concrete elements exc..pt that the blast
attenuating ability of the 'sand m;;st' be included in the calculation. The
blast wave attenuation is partly due to the increased lDass of the slab. When
computing the impulse capacity of each co~crete' p~nel, the total effective
mass includes both the mass of the concrete and the mass of one-half of the
sand. This increased mass is taken into account'by multiplying the impulse
coefficients Jor spalle~ sections, by,
4-143
TN
5~1300/NAVFAC
P-397/AFR 88-22
[ , T.
+ '\" +
~s
) (
Ts
Wc
,]
Idc
4-123
or for unspalled ,!ections by
'!s
Tc + -'Wc
' T's
2
] fTc
where
w~
'wc
Ts
weight density of sand

'weight density of concrete
thickness of sand fill
The attenuating ability of the sand due 'to'blast'wave'dlspersion and energy

absorption is a function of the thickness and density of the sand, the impulse
c~pacity of the concrete panels and the quantity of explosive.
Figures 4-57
and' 4-58 have been developed to predict the impulse capacity of the concrete '
element for a sand density equal to'85 pcf'and lOO'pcf; respectively. These'
figure,s' are based on identical donor and acceptor panels. The effect of the' "
quantity 'of 'explosive is taken into account through the use of "scaled"
parameters which are defined as follows:
'
4-125
4-126
4-127
4-128
Wl / 3
where
scaled thickness of concrete panel
weight of 'explosive charge
scaled thickness of sand
scaled blast impulse which can be resisted by acceptor panel

i ,a
b -
blast impulse capacity of acceptor panel

4-144
TK~ 5-l300/NAVFAC 'P-397/AFR 88-22

;1
sum of scaled blast impulse resisted by the acceptor panel

and the sc~ied blast impulse absorbed"by the' sand
sum of blast impulse capacity of the accept~r'panel and the
blast impulse
absorbed by the .sand
,
ia -
,'
~." ~ '.~'
..
Explosion response slab tests have indicated that the density of the sand fill
affects the amount of blast energy absorbed by the sandi dfsplacement', 1. e , ,
the higher the initial sand "density ,the smaller' amount of: blas t; energy
absorbed, Also, it was observed in~he above response 'tests' that 'for a unit
weight of sand equal to 100 pcf, the deflection of the donor panel is approximately equal in magnitude to the-, .deflection
of the acceptor
panel. On
,,1
,.. '
r
the other hand, with a unit weight ofrsand fill equal to 85 pcf, it was
observed that the deflection of the donor panel usually,was significantly
larger than that of the acceptor panel. This iatter phenomenon was caused by
" sand
. had
~the fact that, with the lower density, - 'the
more voids and, therefore,
more room for movement of the sand particles. This sand movement in turn
permitted
larger
displacements "of
"the
donor panel before
the near
.
t .
--,;' "., . . .: '.
(
!.'
..
<
. solid state,
of, the
sand
occurred.
'
,
,
"
'
.
"
..
.
"
' J."
r' .
t' ".
. "..... ~
'J,."
,.~ "
~
~".)..."'"
~'
~'
',
Based on the ,above inforn"ition,.it can be ;seen that' i f nea equaL displaceme~t
of' the' donor and receiver panels,.'!,re .desired, then a unit weight of sand fill
equal to 100 pcf"shoul,d -be used. ' A variation of the dIsplacement of donor and
receiver'panels can be achieved,using 'a unit weight of ,sa~dequ~l'to 85 pcf,'
but the actual: variation cannot be predict;ed."
,
.
._ ..1
'.
'
Since
the impulse
capacity of
composite elements
is a function of the density
-.
-'
.
.
-.;. . r
of the sand, it is important to prevent 'the sand from compacting due to Its
own weight and/or water drainage. Several possible methods fo'r matncatnt.ng
the proper sand density are discussed in subsequent sections concerned with
construction details of composite elements.
I
,-~.
.'
..
',."
."
f'
..' ,
~.
'
.~,
4-36,3, Pro~edure' for Design of' 'Composite Elements

"," J
t.
- . ;1.
"-'.
.' '
,"
C'
r,
The design of composite elements is a' trial and' error procedure. 'By using
Figures 4-56 and 4-57 and the impulse coefficients of previous ~ections, the
calculations are greatly simplified. The donor and acceptor slabs are
identical making it necessary to design only one wall. The depth of the sand
fill is usually equal to the total thickness of the two concrete panels.
Using the procedures in the previous sections, each panel is designed to have
a blast impulse capacity slightly less than half the required. This includes
the increase in capacity due ,to the additional mass of the sand (Equations 4123 and 4-124). It should be noted that the design is based on the assumption
that both panels will attain the same deflection. If the density of the sand
fill is 85 pcf, this will not,be.true. The donor panel will probably have a
larger deflection than the acceptor 'panel. Since the accuaI deflection of
each panel cannot be predicted, it must be assumed that the design deflection
is an average of the two.
With the blast impulse capacity of the two concrete pan.els, Figure 4-56 or 457 is used ,to d!'termine,the, t;:otal b~ast' capacity,of the composite element.
The following procedure illustrates the use of these'figures.
TN 5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR ,88-22

1.
Using the given charge weight calculate the scaled thickness of

the concrete panel and the sand, Tc and ,T s' respectively.
2.
Calculate the scaled
Impuls~
capacity which can be resisted by the
donor panel i b d and the acceptor panel i ba

3.
Using either Figure 4-56 or 4-57

a)
"
" Enter
the ordinate at value of. i ba
b)
c)
d)
4.,
Proceed horizontally from Tc to i a (the sum of ' the scaled

unit blast impulse resisted by the acceptor panel and the
scaled unit'impulse absorbed by the s~nd).
"
,Calculate
the summations of .ibd .and. i a to get 'thetot;al unit
impulse which can be resisted by the composite wall i bt.'

5.
Determine the scaled unit blast impulse i b acting on the composite

, element.
."
,
"
6.
Compare i b t and i b. If the blast impulse which can be resisted by

the composite element is not greater than,or equal to the impul~e
produced by the blast then the impulse capacity of the walls
shou~d be increased and/or the thickness of the sand increased .
.,
~
..
...." '
',
,.
1000'
JT"
l~.
Figure 4-57
Attenuation of blast impulse in sand and concrete,w s = 85pcf
'-4-147
"-
!S.s
AIL
J.";'O
d5
.:
J.-
20 .. _.-
Figure 4-58
Attenuation of blast impulse" in sand and concrete, w s = 100 pc f
4-148

,
...
J1LTIHATE. DYNAMIC STRENGTH OF REINFORCED. COlIC~TE BEAMS

4-37
Introduction
Blast resistant.~oncrete b~ildings subjected to external blast pressures are

generally shear wall structures rather than rigid frame structures. Shear
wall. structures respond to lateral loads in' a.somewhat differ~nt manner than
rigid frame structures; the basic difference being the manner in which the
lateral loads are transferred to the founda~ion. In rigid frame struc~ures
the lateral loads are transmitted to'the foundation through bending of the
columns. Whereas, in shear wall structures, the lateral forces are transmitted
tothe foundation through both. bending and shearing action of the shear walls.
Shear walls are inherently strong and will resist large lateral forces.
Consequently, shear wall structures are inherently capable of.resisting blast
loads and can be designed to resist substantially large blast loads whereas
rigid' frame structures cannot be.econ~micallydesignedto resist significant
blast loads.
..
.
In shear wall structures ,. beams and columns are usually provided between shear
walls to carry the vertical loads including blast load" on the roof and not to
transmit lateral loads to the foundation. For example, blast. loads applied to
the front wall o f- a two-story shear wall s t ructwreiare transmitted through the
roof and intermediate floor slabs to the shear.walls (]perpendicular walls) and
thus to the foundation. The front wall spans vertically between the foundation, the floor, and the roof slab. The'upper floor and r~of.~labs act as
deep beams, and in turn, transmit the front wall reactions to the shear walls.
The roof and floor beams are not subjected to sign'ific,ant axLaL loads due to
the diaphragm action of the slabs.
The design of beams as presented in the following sections applies to beams in
shear wall type structures rather than rigid frame structures. The design
procedure presented is for transverse loads only; axial loads are not
considered. However, the procedure includes the design for torsion. The
design of beams is similar to the design of slabs as described i? sections
4-13 through 4-18. The most significant and yet not'very important difference
in the design procedure is that in the case of a slab the calculations are
based on a unit area, whereas, for a beam, they are based on a unit length of
beam.
Beams may be designed to attain limited or large deflections in the same
manner as non-laced slabs. However, unlike non-laced slabs which in some
cases do not require shear reinforcement (single leg stirrups), shear reinforcement in the form of closed ties must always b~ provided in beams. Under
flexural action, a beam may attain deflections corresponding to 2 degrees
support rotation with a type I cross-section to provide the ultimate moment
capacity. The flexural action may be extended to 4 degrees support rotation
if equal tension and compression reinforcement is furnishe~. A type II or III
cross-section provides the ultimate moment capacity and the required closed
ties restrain the compression reinforcement., If sufficient ' lateral restraint
is provided, the beam may attain 8 degrees support rotation under tension
membrane action. The above support rotations are incipient failure conditions
for the structural configurations described.
Beams are primary support members and, as such, are generally not permitted to
attain large plastic deformations. For personnel protection, the maximum
4-149
: 'TN 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR'88-22

deflection is limited to a support rotati?n of 2.0 degrees. Structures
intended to protect equipment and/or explosives may be designed for deflections up to incipient failure conditions.
Beams are generally employed in structures designed to resist the effects
associated with far range explosions.' IIi: these structures, beams are usually'
used in the roof as primary support members and as secondary support members
such as pilasters around door openings. To a far lesser extent, beams are
designed to resist the effects of close-in detonations in containment type
structures.
In these cases, they ~re'general1y'used
secondary' support
members such as pilasters around door openings. Large" tensile forces are
induced in containment type structures and, therefore;, these structures lend
themselves to tension membrane'sction when the applicable design criteria'
permits large deformations.
:,'
as
The interrelationship between the various parameters involved in the design of

beams' is readily described with the use of the idealized resistance"deflection
curve shoWn in Figure 4- 59.
' .
'
4-38. Ultimate Moment Capacity
,.
..
4-38.1. Tension Reinforcement Only
"
./~
The ultimate dynamic resisting moment Mu:of'a'rectangular'beam section of

width b with tension reinforcement only (type I) is given by: .
a/2)
4-129
and:
1
, ' 4-130
0.85b f'dc
where:
Mu
ultimate' moment capacity ~
As
total area'of tension reinforcement within the beam
fds
dynamic design stress of reinforcement
-'
distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of

tension reinforcement "
eq~ivalent
depth of
rectangular stress block
width of beam
f'dc"
dynamic ultimate compressive 'strength of concrete
The reinforcement ratio p is aefined'as:

p
..
bd
,I
',.r
4-150
4-131
". .
..
'\"
and to insure against sudden,compression failuF~s" the reinforcement ratio p

must nqt exceed 0.75 of. the ratio Pb which pro,duces balanced conditions ~t
ultimate strength and is given by:
l,.
" -[
0.85K~
....
f'dC]
4-132
f ds
where:
It
'''l '-~
"
0.85 for f'dc up to 4,000 psi and is reduced by 0.05 for

each l,OOO.psi in excess of ~,OOO p~i
4-38.2. Tension and Compression Reinforcement
: "
The ultimate dYnamic resisting moment ~ o.f. a rectangular'.b,e,am

width b with compression re.inforcem~n~. Ls. given ]>Y:,
,~ect~on of .
T.,." . .
. ';"
:J.
~.,
"
--i'
and:
"
'.
: '.;, ...... , .
...
0.85 b f'dc
'.,1'1, ' .
.
where:
",,~~
, 'a
,.,."
"
J"
,~.
'.
..
.
!
..!">
.'
total area of compression' reinforcement within th~,beam
d'
distance from extreme compression fiber

compression reinforcement'
,to,~entroid
of
"
.defi~e~
as:
A' s
4-135
bd
,
Equation 4-133 is valid.only when the compression rein~orcement yields

ultimate s.trength. This condition is satisfied ~hen:.
p-p' S
..
A' s
The compression reinforcement ratiop' is
0.85 Kl
.-
f'dc
f ds
:' ]
[ - '7,000
87,000,.-
'd,] .:
a~
4-136
<:
~
.r
In addition,' the quantity p-p' must not exceed 0.75 of the value of Pb given
in Equation 4-132 in order to insure against sudden compression failures. If
p-p' is less than the value given by Equation 4-136, l:he ultimate resisting
moment should not exceed the value given by Equation 1,-129.
For the design of concrete beams subjected to far range blast loads which are
to attain support rotations of 2 degrees or less, it Is recommended that the
ultimate .resisting moment be computed using Equation 1,-129 even though a
4-151
. .-.
TM: 5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22'

considerable amount of compression reinforcement is required to resist rebound
loads. It should be noted that
large amount of compression steel that does
'not yield due to the linear strain'variation across' the depth of t~e section,
has a negligible effect on the total capacity.
For type II or III cross-sections, the ultimate resisting moment

rectangular beam section of width b is given by:
Mu
of a
where
area of tension or,compression reinforcement within the

width b
distance between the centroids of the compression and the
tension reinforcement
The above moment capacity 'can only be obtained when the areas of the tension
and compression reinforcement are equar". In addition,thesupport rotation
must be greater than 2 degrees except for close-in designs where direct
spalling may occur and result in a type III. ",,'
". '
4-38.3. Minimum Flexural Reinforcement
To insure proper structural behavior under both conventional and blast
loadings, a minimum amount of flexural reinforcement is required. ' The minimum
reinforcement required for beams is somewhat greater than that required for
slabs since an overload load in a slab'would be distributed laterally and a
sudden' failure will be less likely. The minimum required quantity of reinfor-"
cement is gfven by:
'
p ;.. 200/fy
4-138
which', for 60,000 psi yield strength steel, is equal to a reinforcement ratio
of 0.0033. This minimum reinforcement ratio applies to the tension steel at
mid-span of simply supported beams and to the tension steel at the supports
and mid-span of fixed-end beams.
Concrete beams with tension reinforcement only are not permitted. Compression
reinforcement, at, least equal to one-half the 'required tension reinforcement,
must be provided., This reinforcement is required to resist the ever present
rebound forces. Depending upon the magnitude 'of these rebound forces, the required compression reinforcement may equal the tension reinforcement.
4-39. Ultimate Shear (Diagonal Tension) Capacity'
4-39.1 .. Ultimate Shear Stress
The nominal shear stress vu, as a measure of diagonal tension, is
from:
co~puted
bd
where:
4-152,
4-139
TK 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

~"
j . .
nominal shear stress

total shear at ~ritical section'
The critical section is taken at a distance d from the face of the support'for
those members that ~aus~ compression in their supports. The ~hear' at sections
between the face ,of the support and the section d therefrom nee,d, not be'
considered critical. For those' members' that cause tension .Ln ,'their supports,
the critical section is 'at tlje, face of th~ supports.
'
4-39.2. Shear Capacity of Unreinforced, Concrete
The shear st,ess permitted on a~ unreinfo~ced web of a beam ,subjected to
flexure only is limited to:
Vc
where:
- [1.9 f'dc l/2 + 2,500 P] S

..
, '
3.5 f'dc l/2
' ) ; .,..
maximum shear capac Lty of an unre fnf'o rc ed web
,..t'
reinforcement ratio, of the tension rei'}forc'';~~rit 'at the

support
"
4-39.3., Design of Shear Reinforcement
"
Whenever the nominal shear stress '''':I ~,!"ceeds, the"she~r ,capacity vc of the
concrete, ' shear, r eLnforceraent; must be provided to ..carry the excess.', Closed
ties ,placed perpendicular to the flexural reinforcement must be used to
furnish the additional shear capacity. Open stirrups, either single or double
leg, are not permitted. The required area of shear reinforcement ,is calculated using:
[ (vu - v c ) b ]
5g
Av
where:
Av
4-141
f dy
'
total area of stirrups

excess shear stress
4-39.4. Minimum Shear Reinforcement
In order to insure the full development of, the f'Lextrre l, reinforcement in a

beam, a premature shear failure must be prevented. ~he followi~g limitations
must be considered in the design of closed ties:
1.
The design shear stress (excess shear s t r'e s s V u - v c) used in

Equation 4-140 shall be equal to or greater than the shear
'
TN 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

capacity of unreinforced concrete,vc as qbtained from equation
4-139.
2.
The nominal shear stress
3~
The are~
4.
'The r~~uired area Av of closed ties shall be determined at 'the

critical section and this quantity and spacing of'reinforcement
shall be used throughout the entire member.
5.
The maximum spacing of closed ties is limited to d/2 when v u'- Vc

~s less than 4 ~ f'dc)1/2 or 24 inches! whichever is smaller.
When V u - Vc is greater than 4 ( f'dc) /2 the maximum spacing is
limited to d/4.
Vu
must not exceed 10 ( f'dc)1/2.
of closed tie~ should,natbe' less than 0:0015 bs s'
Av
4-40. Direct Shear

Direct shear failure of a member is characterized by the rapid propagation of
a vertical crack through the depth of the member. 'This crack is usually
located at the supports where the maximum shear stresses occur. Failure of
this type is' possible eveh in members reinforced< for diagonal tension. '
Diagonal bars are'required at supports to prevent direct shear failure: when
the design support rotation exceeds 2 (unless.. the beam is simply supported),
when the design support rotation is s 2 but the direct shear capacity of the
concrete is insufficient', or when' the sec tLond.s in tension. Diagonal
.
reinforcement consists of inclined bars wnich'extend from the support into the
beam. ,
Diagonal bars are not typically recommendea in beams. Therefore, beams should
be designed for small rotations and with an adequate cross-sectional area for'
the direct shear capacity of the concrete, Vd' to exceed the ultimate direct
shear force, Vs'
If the design support rotation, 9, -Ls less than or equal to 2 (9 s 2), or if
the section, with any rotation 9, is simply supported (total moment capacity
of adjoining elements at the support must'be significantly less than the
moment capacity of the section being checked for direct shear), then the
ultimate direct shear force, Vd' that can be resisted by the concrete in a
slab is given by Equation 4-30.
If the aesign support rotation, 9, is greater than 2 (9) 2), or if a
section (with any support rotation) is in net'tension, then the ultimate
direct shear capacity of the concrete, Vd,'is zero and diagonal bars are
required to take all direct shear.
"
', .
If diagonal bars must be used, the required cross-sectional area is:
,
..
Vd)/(f~ssin(~)r'"
where:
-'Vd' -
0.18 f'dc bd.
(9 S 2 or, simple supports),
4-154
4-142
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-~97/AFR 88-22

" section in tension).
(8) 2' or
or
and
total area of diagonal bars at the support,within a width-b

shear at the support of unit width b
'.
angle formed by the plane of the diagonal reinforcement and

,the longitudinal reinforcement.,'
"
4-41. Ultimate Torsion Capacity

'
4-41.1. General
... ,
In addition to the flexural effects considered above, concrete beams may be

subjected to torsional moments. Torsion rarely occurs alone in reinforced
concrete beams. It is present more often in combination with transverse shear
and bending. Torsion may be a primary influence but more frequently it is a
secondary effect. If neglected, torsional: stresses can cause distress or
failure.
Torsion is encountered in beams that are unsymmetrically 10a~ed. Beams are
subject to twist if the slabs on each side' are not the same span or if they
have different loads. Severe torsion will result on beams that are essentially loaded from,one side., This condition exists for beams around'an opening
in a roof slab and for pilasters around a door opening.
The design for torsion presented in this Section is limited to rectangular
sections. For a beam-slab system subjected to conventional loading conditions, a portion of the slab will assist the beam in resisting torsional
moments. However, in blast resistant design, a plastic hinge is usually formed
in the slab at the beam and, consequently, the slab is not effective in
resis'ting torsional moments.
4-41.2. Ultimate Torsional Stress
The nominal torsional stress in a rectangu1ar.beam in the vertical direction
(along h) is given by:
',.'
4-143
and the nominal torsIonal stress in the, horizontal direction ,(along b) is
given by:
4-144
"
where:
vt u
nominal torsional stress
"Tu
total torsional moment at critical section
width of be am
4-155
TIl:
5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR~88-22
h
overall depth of beam
The critical section for torsion is taken at the same location as diagonal
tension. It should be noted that the torsion stress in the vertical face of
the beam (along h) is maximum when b is less than h whereas the torsion stress
along the horizontal face of the beam (along b) is maximum when b is" greater
than h.
Capacity of Unreinforced Concr$te for Combined Shear and Torsion
4-41.3
For a beam subjected to combined shear (diagonal tension) and torsion, the'
shear stress and the torsion stress permitted on an unreinforced section are
reduced by the presence of the other. The shear stress permitted on an
.
unreinforced web is limited to:
4-145'
'
, ,
while the torsion stress taken by the concrete of the same section' is limited
to:
"-
4-146
-'
.'
~: '
where:
-'
.,~
maximum shear capacity of an unreinforced web

Vtc
Vu
Vtu
maximum torsion capacity of an unreinforced web

nominal shear stress
nominal torsion stress in the direction of Vu
It should be noted that the shear stress permitted on an unreinforced web of a

beam subjected to shear only is given by Equation-4-l39, Whereas, the torsion
stress permitted on an unreinforced web of a beam subjected to torsion only'is
given by:
Whenever the nominal shear stress vu exceeds.vche' shear capacity vc of. the
concrete, shear reinforcement must be provided to carry the excess. This
quantity of shear reinforcement is calculated using Equation 4-140 except the
4-156
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR88-22
value of vc shall be obtained from Equation 4-144 which includes the effects
of torsion.
4-41.4. Design of Torsion Reinforcement
j.
4-41.4.1. Design;of Closed Ties

Whenever the nominal torsion stress"vtu exceeds the maximum torsion capacity
of the concrete, torsion reinforcement in'the shape of. closed ties,' shall be
provided to carry the excess. The required area of the vertical leg of the
closed ties is given by:
;
( v(tu)V - v t c)
b 2hs
4-148
'3<fl CIt b t h t f dy
and the required area of the horizontal leg of the closed ties is given by:
( v(tu)H - v t c ) bh 2 s
4-149
3<fl CIt b t: h t f dy
'.
in which:
0.66 + 0.33 (ht/bt) S
1.50 for h t
0.66 + 0.33 (bt/ht) S
1.50 for h t ? b t
b t'
4-150a
~-150b
where:
area of one leg of a closed stirrup resisting torsion within
a distance s
,
s -
spacing of torsion reinforcement in

the longitudinal reinforcement
II
direction parallel to
capacity reduction factor equal to 0.85

center-to-center dimension of a closed rectangular tie along
b
center-to-center dimension of a closed rectangular tie along

h
The size of the closed tie provided to resist torsion Jnust be the greater of
that required for the vertical (along h) and horizontal (along b) directions.
For the case of'b less than h ." the torsion stress' in the vertical direction is
maximum and the horizontal direction need not be considered. However, for b
greater than h, the torsion stress -Ln the horizontal direction is maximum. In
this case the required At for the vertical and horizontal directions must be
obtained and the greater value used to select the closed stirrup. It should
be noted that in the horizontal direction a beam, in shear wall type structures, is not subjected to lateral shear (slab resists lateral loads) and the
4-157

value of v t c used in Equation 4-148 is calculated from Equation 4-146 which
does not include the effect of shear.
When torsion reinforcement is required, it. must be provided in addition to
reinforcement required to resist shear. The closed ties required for torsion
may be combined with those required for shear. However, the area furnished
must be the sum of the individually required areas and themost restrictive
requirements for spacing and placement must be met. Figure 4-60 shows seve,al
ways to arrange web reinforcement ..
~or
low torsion and shear, it is con-
venient to combine shear and torsional web reinforcement in the form of a

single closed stirrup whose' area is equal to' At + Av/2 . For high torsion and
shear, it would be economical to provide torsional and shear reinforcement
separately. Torsional web reinforcement consists of closed stirrups along the,
periphery, while the shear web reinforcement is in the form of closed stirrups
distributed along the width of the member. For ve~ high torsion, two closed
stirrups along the periphery may be used. The combined area of the stirrups
must equal At and they must be located as close as possible to each other,
i.e., the 'minimum separation of the flexural reinforcement. In computing the
required area of stirrups using -Equ.at.Lon 4-147 , , the .v'a Lue of bt should be
equal to the average center-to-center dimension of the closed stirrups as
4-41.4.2. Design of Longitudinal Reinforcement
In addition to closed stirrups, longitudinal reinforcement must be provided to
resist the longitudinal tension caused by the torsion. The required area of
longitudinal bars Al shall be computed by:
t
Al - 2A t [ b
+
s
.4-l5la
or by:
Al -
["Ob.
f dy
Vt u
Vtu + Vu
,.,] [b'
+ ht
s
. 4-l5lb
"
whichever is greater. When using Equation 4-l5lb, the value of 2A t shall be

greater than or equal to 50 bs/fdy' It should be noted that Equation 4-l5la
requires the volume of longitudinal reinforcement to be equal to the volume of
the web reinforcement required by Equation 4-147 or 4-148 unless a greater
amount of longitudinal reinforcement is required to satisfy the minimUm
requirements of Equation 4-l5lb.
Longitudinal bars should be uniformly distributed around the perimeter of the
cross section with a spacing not exceeding 12 inches. At least one longitudinal bar should. be placed in each corner of ,the closed stirrups. A
typical arrangement of longitudinal bars ~s shown in Figure 4-60 wh~re ,
torsional longitudinal bars th'\t are located.. in the flexural tension zone and
flexural compression zone may be combineq with,the flexural steel.
4-158 '

The addition of torsional and flexural longitudinal reinforcement in the
flexural compression Zone is not reasonable. It is illogical to add torsional
steel that is in tension to the flexural steel that is in compression~ This
method of adding torsional steel to flexural steel regardless, of whether the
latter is in tension or in compression is adopted purely for simplicity. For
blast resistant design, flexural reinforcement added but not included in the
calculation of the ultimate resistance could cause a shear failure. The
actual ultimate resistance could be significantly gzeace r than the calculated
ultimate resistance for which the shear reinforcement is provided. Therefore,
torsional longitudinal reinforcement cannot be indiscriminately ,placed but
rather 'must be placed only where required.
In the design of a beam subjected to both flexure and torsion, torsional
longitudinal reinforcement is first assumed to be uniformly distributed around
the perimeter of the beam. The reinforcement required along the vertical face
of the beam will always be provided. However, in the flexural compression
zone, the reinforcement that should be used is the gr..ater of the flexural
compression steel (rebound'reinforcement) 'or the torsional steel. In terms of
the typical arrangement:of reinforcement in Figure 4-60, either A's or Al is
used, whichever is greater, as the design steel area in the flexural compression zone. For the tension zone at the mid span of a uniformly loaded'beam
the torsional stress is zero and torsional Long Lcud.LnaL reinforcement is not
added. Conversely, the tension zone at the supports is the location of peak
torsional stresses and longitudinal torsional reinforcement must be added to
the flexural steel.
4-41.5. MinimUm Torsion Reinforcement
In the design of,closed ties for beams subjected to b<>th shear and torsion,
the 'following limitations must-be considered:
1.
The minimum quantity of closed ties provided 'in 'a beam subjected
to both shear and torsion shall 'not be less than, that required for
a beam subjected to shear alone,
2.
The maximum nominal shear stress
3.
The maximum nominal torsion stress v t u shall not exceed

12
4.
5.,
(f'
Vu
must not exceed 10 (f'dc)1/2

,
) 1/2
dc,
The required spacing of closed stirrups shall not exceed (b t + .

h t)/4 or 12 inches nor the maximum spacing required for closed
ties in beams'subjected to shear only.
Av
The required areas

and At shall be determined at the critical
section and this quantity and spacing of reinforcement shall be
used throughout the entire beam.
4-159

6.
To insure the full development of the ties, they shall be closed

" using 135-degree hooks.
4-42. Flexural Design

The flexural design of beams is very similar to the design of non-laced
concrete slabs. The main difference is that in the case of a slab the
calculations are performed based on a unit area, whereas for a beam, they are
based on a unit length of beam. In addition, since beams are one-way members,
the distribution of mutually perpendicular reinforcement does not have to be
considered.
4-42.2. Small Deflections
The design range for small deflections may be divided into two regions; beams
with support rotations less than 2 degrees (limited deflections) and support
rotations between 2 and 4 degrees. Except for the type of cross-section
ava Ll eb Le to' resist moment" the de s Lgn procedure is the same.
A concrete section and reinforcement are assumed. Using the equations of
section 4-38 (Equation 4-129 for type I cross-sections, Equation 4-137 for
type II and III cross-sections) the moment capacities of the trial section is
computed. The moment capacities are,require4 to calculate the ultimate unit
resistance r u and the equivalent elastic deflection XE. These parameters,
along with the natural period of vibration Tn' define the equivalent sing1edegree-of-freedom system of the beam, and are discussed in detail in Chapter
3.
A dynamic analysis (see section 4-43) is performed to check if the'beam meets
the allowable deflection criteria. Finally, the assumed section is designed
for shear and torsion, if applicable. If the beam d~es not meet the allowable
response criteria, the required shear reinforcement is excessive, or the beam
is overdesigned, a new concrete section is selected and the entire design
procedure is repeated.
4-42.3. Large Deflections
Design of reinforced concrete beams for support rotations greater than 4
degrees depends on their ability to act as a tensile membrane. Lateral
restraint of the beam must be provided to achieve this action. Thus, if
lateral restraint does not exist, tensile, membrane action is not developed and
the beam reaches incipient failure at 4 degrees support rotation. However, if
lateral restraint exists, deflection of the beam induces membrane action and
axial forces. These axial tension forces provide the means for the beam to
continue to develop substantial resista~ce up to maximum support rotations of
approximately 12 degrees.
-'4-42.3.2. Lateral Restraint
Adequate lateral restraint of the reinforcement is mandatory in order for the
beam to develop and the designer to utilize the benefits 9f tensile membrane
4-,160
'qi 5,-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22,

.t,'
.~
.,
behavior. Sufficient lateral restraint is provided if the reinforcement is

adequately anchored into, adjacent supporting ~embers capa1?,l,!, of res is ting the
axial forces induced by tensile membrane action,
.,.
Tensile membrane behavior should not be considered in the design process
unless full external lateral restraint is provided . . Full lateral restraint
means that adjacent members can ef'fectively resist 'a tot~i lateral force
equivalent to the ultimate strength of all continuous reinforcement in the
beam. This external resistan~e is more difficult 'to' realize fo~ beams than'
for slabs due to th~ concentration of the. end
., reactions:..
'- ,"
'
4-42.3.3. Resi~tance ",Deflection qurve
'.'
.
r '
The resistance-deflection curve for a .beam is the. same as that for a slab
which is shown in Figure' 4-18. The initial portion of the curve is primarily
due to flexural action (increased capacity due to possible comp~ession forces
is not shown). ,At 4 degrees support rotation, the beam, loses flexural
capacity. However, due to the presence of continuous re'inforcement and
adequate lateral, restraint, ten.sile'membrane action deve Lope d . The resistance
due to this action increases with increasing deflection up to incipient
failure'~t
approximately
rotation. '
"
.
. . . 12 -,degrees support
.
.~ ~
"
\.;
"',
In .o r de r. to' simplify the design' c a Lcu'l e t.Lcns , the res:i.st~nce is asswned to be
due to flexural action throughout ,the entire range of behavior (same procedure
for siab calculations). To approximate the energy absorbed under the actual
resistance-deflection curve, the maximUm support of the ,idealized is limited
to 8 degrees. Design for this deflection would produce incipient failure
conditions.
For the design of a laterally restrained beam for 8 degrees support rotation,
a type III cross-section is used to compute the ultimate moment capacity of
the section as well as to provide the mass to resist mot Lon . The stress in
the ,reinforcement,fds .would,be, equal to that correspo:~ding to support rotations 5 S em S 12 given in Table 4~2,. ,At every ' s ec t Lon ,throughout .tihe ,beam,
the tension and compression reinforcement must; be cont.Lnuous in order. to
develop the tensile'membrane action di~cussed below.
4-42.3.4. Ultimate Tensile Membrane Capacity,
As can be seen in Figure 4-18, tensile membrane .resistance, is a function of
de f Lec t Lon ,
It is also a function .,of the span length 'and th~ amount, of " '
continuous reinforcement. I The tensile membrane, resistance rt of ~ later~lly
restrained beam at a deflect~~n X is expressed as:
,
"
rT - X
in which'
8T
L2
~,
-, ,
4-152
"
.,
"
4-153
" :.
"
"
where
r
tensile membrane resistance
4-161
,',
TH 5-l300/NAVFAC P~397/AFR 88-22

X
deflection of the beam
force in the contfnuous 'reinforcement
clear span
"
A sc
total area of continuo~s reinforcement
Even though the cepac Ltiy of a Lat e r a l.Ly restrained beam is based on flexural
action, adequate' tensile membrane capacity must be provided, that is,
sufficient continuous reinforcement must be'provided so that the tensile
membrane resistance rt corresponding to 8 degrees support rotation must be
greater than the flexural resistance r u' The deflection is computed as a
function of the plastic hinge locations. The force in the coptinuous
reinforcement is calculated using the dynamic design stress fds, corresponding
to 8 degrees s~pport 'rotation (Table 4-2).
"
'
...
4-42.3.5. FlexUral Design'
Since the actual tensile membrane' resistance-deflection curve is replaced 'with

an equivalent flexural curve, the design of a beam 'for large deflections is
greatly simplified. The design' is performed in a similar manner as for small
deflections. However, sufficient continuous reinforcement must be provided to
develop the required' tensile membrane resistance.' Thisreinforce'ment must be
fully anchored in the lateral supports. 'Care must. be taken to ensure that the
lateral supports are capable of resisting the lateral force T as given in
Equation 4' 153. '
4-43.1. Design for Shock'Load
When a concrete slab supported' by beams is subjected to a blast load, the slab
and beams act togetheito resist the 'load. The'beam-slab system is actually a
two-mass system' and should be t re'aced as such. However, a reasonable design
can be'achieved by considering the slab and'beams separately. That is, the
slab and beams are transformed into single-degree-of-freedom systemscooipletely independent of each other and are analyzed separately, The dynamic
analysis of slabs is treated extensively in previous sections.
The equivalent single-degree-of-freedom system of ani structural element is
defined'in terms of its ultimate unit resistance, r u' equivalent elastic'
deflection XE and natural period of vibration TN' The ultimate unit resis-'
tance is obtained from the table for one-way elements in Chapter 3 for the
moment capacity given above, The procedures and parameters necessary to
obtain the equivalent elastic deflection and natural period are also obtained
from Chapter 3.
Chapter 2 describes procedures for determining the dynamic load which is
defined by its peak value P and duration T. For the ratios P/r u and T/T N the
ductility ratio Xm/XE and tm/T can be obtained from the response charts of
Chapter 3. These values Xm, which is the maximum deflection, and t m, the time
to reach the maximum deflection define the dynamic response of the beam.
4-162
TIl 5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
A beam is designed to resist the blast load acting OVE!r the tributary area
supported by the beam. Therefore, the peak value of l:he blast load P is the
product of the unit peak blast pressurE! times the spaeing of the beams. and
has the unit' of pounds per inch.
In addition to the short term effect of the blast load. a beam must be able to
withstand the long term effect of ~he resistance of tI,e element(s)'being
supported by:the beam when, the response time of theelement(s)"is equal to or
greater than :the duration of the blast load. To insure against,'premature
failure, 'the 'ultimate resistance of the beam must be gr-eace r than the reaction
of the supported element (slab. wall, blast door. etc,), applied to .rhe beam as
a static load.
.
In the case of a supported slab. the slab does. in fac t , act with the beam; a
portion of the mass of the slab acts with the mass of the beam to resist the
dynamic ,load." I t is. therefore.' recoriunended thii:t 20 percent' of the mass of
the slab (or blast door. wall. etc.) on each side of che beam be added to the
actual mass of the beam. This increased mass is then used to compute the
natural period of vibration TN 'of the beam, I t should b.!'.,noted that in the
calculation of TN the va Iues used for the effective mass and stiffness of the,
beam depends upon the allowable 'maximum deflection. lJhen-designirig'for
completely elastic behavior. the elastic stiffness is used while. in other
E is
cases, the equivalent eLas covpLas edc stiffness K
used. ~ The elastic value
of the effective mass is used for. the 'elastic range while ....in the elastoplastic range, the effective mass is the average of the: elastic and elastoplastic values. For small plastic deformations, the '~alue 'of the effective
mas s Ls equai to the average oftlie':~quivalent e Las tLc value: arid the plastic
value while for large plastic de fo rmatiLons , the effective mass is equal to' the
plastic value.
....,;
,.
i
4-43.2. Design for Rebound

The beam must be designed to'. resist the negative de f'Lec t Lon. or rebound :which
occurs after the maximum positive deflection has been reached. The n~g~tive
resistance r-. attained by the beam when subjected to a triangular pressuretime load. is obtained from figu~e' 3-268 .in Chapter 3. Entering the figure
with the ratios of x.,/X E and: T/TN'; previously determined for the positive'
phase of design. the ratio of ,the required rebound resistance to the ultimate
resistance r " /r u is obtained ... Th~ oeam'must be rei;'f,orced to withstand this
rebound resistance ,r- to insure that the beam will remain elastic during
rebound.
,"
-'
.'~";
The ten'!ion reinforcemerit provided to withstand rebound'forces is added to

what is' needed for the'compression zone during the initial loading, phase. To
obtain this reinforcement', ',the 'beam is essentially designed 'Eo'r 'a negative
load equal to the, calculated value of r;. However. in no case shall the
rebound reinforcement be less 'than'one-nalf'of,the positive phase reinforcement. The moment capac Lt Les and t.he rebound resistance capacity are calculated using the same equations previously presented.
"il.-
4-163
w
U
TOTAL
FAILURE
ULTIMATE
<[
INCIPIENT
FAILURE
t-
(/)
......
(/)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
X( 11= 2)
XE
I
I
I
I
X( 6= 4)
X( 6 = 5)
X(
e=
8)
DEFLECTION
kD
Not.e 1
-,
PROTECTION CATEGORY
@ ~I G:
SHELTER
BARRIER
PRESSURE-
STRUCTURE-LOAD
SENSITIVITY
TJ~IE O. IMPULSE
FAR OR CLOS -IN

DESIGN RANGE
RESPONSE CHAR S, ITERATION I'ROC DURE.
1M
UL.SE EQUATIONS
DESIGN METHOD
LARGE
LIMITE D
DEFLECllON CRITERIA
FLEXURAL ACTIO
DUCllLE MODE OF
RESPONSE
CLO ED TIES REQUI ED
TENSID
MEMBRANE ACTION
CLOS D TIES REQUIRED

BRITTLE MODE OF
RESPONSE
CRUSHING
NONE
FAR RANGE
::
SCABBING
SPALLING
CLOSE,...IN
CRUSHING
CROSS-SECllON.TYPE
II
FAR RANGE
I DR
::
POST
FAILURE
SCABBING
FRAGMENTS
!II
1I DR III
III
rely 1I4( fdu- dy)
Jl2( fel/ felu)
CLOSE-IN
<fdy
fdy
DESIGN STRESS
Note i. Stirrups (closed ties) o.lwo.ys reqUired.
Figure 4-59
Relo. tionship between deSign pc r-cne t.er-s for

beOMS
4-164
bt
~'
1"
~'
'"
"
..
2
,
a SHEAR
Arrangement
(0)
.
Av
-;
LOW TORSION
HiGH TORSION
Ai
3"
3"
Ai
.3
Al
TORSION
(b)
Figure 4-60
a SHEAR
Arrangement
Web. Reinforcement
A's
FLEXURE
VERY HIGH TORSION
of Shear and Torsional
At
,>-
As
.: A~
A S +T
3"
TORSION
AI.
A~
, A S,+-3
+ FLEXURE
of Torsional and Flexural Longitudinal Steel
Arrangement of reinforcement for combined flexure and torsion
4-165
TK 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

DYNAMIC DESIGN OF INTERIOR COLUMNS
'4-44. Introduption
The de~ign of columns is limited to those in shear wall type structures where
the lateral loads' are transmitted through ,the floor and roof slabs to the
exterior (and interior, if required) shear walls. 'Due to the extreme stiffness of the shear walls, there is negligible sidesway in the interior columns
and, hence, no induced moments due to lateral loads. Therefore, interior
columns are axially loaded members not subjected to the effects of lateral
load. However, sig~ificant moments can resul~ f!om unsymmetrical loading
conditions.
4-45. Strength of Compression Members (P-M Curve)
4-45.i.General
The capacity of a short compression member is based primarily on the strength
of its cross section. The behavior of the member ,encompasses that of both a
beam and a column. The degree to which either behavior, predominates 'depends
upon the relative magnitudes of the axial load and moment. The capacity of be
the column can be,determined by constructing 'an interaction diagram as shown
in Figure 4-61. This curve is a plot of the column axial load capacity versus
the moment it can simultaneously withstand. Points on this diagram are
calculated to satisfy both stress and strain compatibility. A single curve
would be constructed for a given cross section with a specified quantity of
reinforcement. The plot of a given loading condition that falls within the
area represents a loading combination,that the column can support, whereas, a
:.plotcthat falls outside the interaction curve represents a failure'combination: Three points of the interaction' diagram are used to define t~e behav~or
of compression members under combined ,axial and flexural loads. These points
'are: (1) pure compression (Po' M - 0), (2) pure flexure (P, - 0, Mo)' and, (3)
balanced conditions (Pb' Mb)' 'The eccentricity of the design axial. load for
the condition of pure compression is zero. ,However, under actual conditions,
pure axial loads will rarely, if ever, exist. Therefore, the maximum axial
~oad is limited by a minimum eccentricity, emin' At'balanced conditions, the
r
eccentricity is defined as eb while the eccentricity at pure flexure is
infinity. The strength of a section is controlled by compression when the
design eccentricity e - Mu/Pu' is smaller than the eccentricity under balan?ed
conditions. The strength of the section is controlled by tension when the
design eccentricity is greater than that for balanced conditions.
4-45.2. Pure Compression
'j
The ultimate dynamic strength of a short reinforced concrete column subjected

to pure axial load (no bending moments) is given by:
Po
where:
0,85 f'dc(A g - As t) + As t fdy
Po
maximum axial load
Ag
gross area of section
As t
total area of reinforcing steel
4-166
4-154
TH 5-l300/NAVFACP-397/AFR 88-22
A member subjected to pure axial compression is a hypothetical situation since

all columns are subjected to some moment due to actual load conditions. All
must be designed for a minimum load,eccentricity.
tied and spiral columns
This minimUm design situation is presented in a subsequent section.
4~45.3.
Pure Flexure
An interior column of a shear wall type structure cannot be subjected to pure

fiexure under normal design conditions. For the purpose of plotting a P-M
curve, the criteria presented for beams is used.
4-45.4. Balanced Conditions
A balanced strain condition fo~ a column'subjected to a dynamic load is
achieved when the concrete reaches 'its-limitirig strain of 0.003 in/in simul-,
taneously'with the tension steel reaching its dynamic yield stress. f d. This
condition occurs under .the ac t.Lonvof the balanced load Pb and the cor~espond
Lng balanced 'moment 'Mb. 'At balanced conditions,' -the eccentricity of the load
is defined .as eb' .and is given by:r,'
.
", ,
~.
\!.
4-155
The actual values of,the balanced load arid'corresponding balanced moment are
generally 'not required~ The balanced eccentricity is the important parameter
since a comparison of the actual eccentricity,to the balanced eccentricity
distinguishes whether the strength of the section is controlled by tension or
compression. The co~parison of the actual eccentricity to the balanced eccentricity dictates the ,choice :o':f the appropriate equation for calculating the
ultimate axial load capacity 'Pu'
. --, .
~
'.
'
Approximate expressi~ti.shave been derived for the balanced eccentricity for

both rectangular and .circular members. These expressions, are sufficiently
accurate for design purposes. For a rectangular tied column with equal,
reinforcement on opposite faces (Fig. 4-62a). the balanced eccentricity is
given by:
(
eb - 0.'20h+ (l.54mA s )!b
and:
where:
As
4-157
'
depth of rectangular 'section
h
b
4-156
balanced eccentricity
eb
,','. ,,'
(C,
,width of rectangular section

area of reinforcement on one face of the section
!
For'a circular section with spiral reinforcement (Fig. 4-62b), the balanced
eccentricity is given by: .~
eb - (0.24 + 0,39' Prm) D
and:
4-167
4-158
TN
5~1300/NAVFAC
P-397/AFR 88-22
4-159
where:
"
total percentage of reinforcement,

Ast
Ag
D
total area of reinforcement

gross area of circular section
overall diameter of circular section
4-45.5. Compression Controls

When the ultimate eccentric load Pu exceeds the balanced value Pb' or when the
eccentricity e is less than the balanced value eb' the member acts more as a
column than as a beam;, Failure 'of the section is initiated by crushing of the
concrete. When the concrete reaches its ultimate strain, the tension'steel .
has'not, reached its yield point and may actually be in compression rather'than
tension. The ultimate eccentric load at' a given eccentricity e less than eb
maybe obtained by considering the actual strain variation as the unknowri and
using the principles of statics. However, equations have been developed which
approximate the capacity of the column. These approximate' procedures are
adequate for design purposes.
For a rectangular tied column with equal reinforcement on opposite'faces (Fig,
4-62a), the ultimate axial load capacity at a given eccentricitY,is,approximated by:
bh f'dc'
+
[e/(2d-h)] + 0.5
,4-160
(3he/d2) + 1.18
where:
ultimate axial load at actual eccentricity e .
e -
actual eccentricity of applied load

area of reinforcement on one face of the section

tension reinforcement
depth of rectangular section
width of rectangular section.
For a circular section with spiral reinforcement,.the ultimate axial load

capacity at a given eccentricity is approximated by:
'. - [
As t
3e
fdy
Ag
f' dc'
9.6D e
.
,2
(0.8D + 0.67 Ds)
,+ 1.0
Ds
4-168
4-161
+ 1.18
TH 5-l300/NAVFAC P-397jAFR-.88-22
where:
As t
total area of uniformly distributed longitudinal reinforcement
Ag
gross area of, circular section

-r ,
Ds
diameter of the circle through centers of reinforcement

arranged in a circular pattern
4-45.6; Tension Controls

When the ultimate eccentric load Pu is less than the balance value Pb or when
the eccentricity e is greater than the balanced value" eb' the member acts more
as a beam than as a column._ Failure of the section is J.nitiated by yielding
of the tension steel; The ultimate. eccentric load at a given eccentricity e
greater than eb may be obtained by considering the actual strain variation as
the unknown and using the principles of statics.
However, again, equations have been developed to approximate the capacity of
the column. It should be pointed out that while tension controls are a
possible design situatio~ it is not an usual condition for interior columns of
a shear wall type s truc ture. ,..'
For a recta.ngular tied column with equal reinforcement cm opposite faces (Fig.
4-62a). the ultimate axial loa_d capacity at a given eccEmtricity is approxi- ..
mated by:_ .
Ps -
where:~
.-;'
4-163
j bd
e' - e + d - (hj2)
4-164
m - f dy j (O.85f' dc)
4-165
I.:
p'percentage of'reinforcement on one faceof section

e'
eccentricity of axial load at the ..end of member measured

from the centroid of the tension reinforcement
4-169
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

For a circular section with spiral reinforcement (Fig. 4-62b), the ultimate
axial lo~d capacity at a given eccentricity is approximated by:
..
Pu - 0.85 f'dc D2
[[
PTmDs (/2
. O.85e
0.38)2
D ""
'I-
.,
2.5 D
0.S5e
(
"
where:
PT -
total percentage of reinforcement and is defined in Equation

4-159
4-46. Slenderness Effects

4-46'.1. General
The preceding section discussed the capacity of short compression members.
The strength of these members is based primarily on their cross section .. The
effects of buckling and lateral deflection on the strength of these short
members are small enough to be neglected.' Such members are not in danger of
buckling prior to" achieVing their ultimate strength based on the properties of .
the cross section. Further, the lateral deflections of short compression
members subjected to bending moments are small; thus contributing little
secondary bending moment (axial load P multiplied by lateral deflection).
These buckling and deflection effects reduce the ultimate strength of a
compression member below the value given in the preceding, section for short
columns.
In the design of columns for blast resistant buildings, the use of short
columns is preferred. The cross section is selected for the given height and
support conditions of the column in accordance with criteria presented below
for short columns. If the short column cross section results in a capacity
much greater than required, ,the dimensions may' be reduced to achieve an
economical design. However, slenderness effects must be evaluated to insure
an adequate design. It should be noted that for shear wall type structures;
the interior columns are not subjected to sidesway deflections since lateral
loads are resisted by the stiff shear walls. Consequently,' slenderness
effects due to buckling and secondary bending moments (Pu) are the only
effects that must be considered. '
4-46.2. Slenderness Ratio
The unsupported length Lu of a compression member is taken as the clear
distance between floor slabs, beams, or other members capable of providing .,'
lateral support for the compression member. Where column capitals or haunches
are present, the unsupported length is measured to the lower extremity of
capital or haunch in the plane considered.
4-170
TIl S-1301)/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

.,
The effective length of a column kLu is actually the equi~alent length of a

pin ended column. For a column with pin ends the effective length is equal to
the actual unsupported length (k - 1.0). Where translation of the column at
both ends is adequately prevented (braced column), the effective length of the
column is the distance between points of inflection (k less. than 1.0). It is
recommended that for the design of columns in shear wall type structures the
effective length factor k may be taken as 0.9 for colwnns that are definitely
restrained by beams and girders at the top and bottom. For all other cases k
shall be taken as .1.0 unless. analysis shows that a lowe r value may be used.
s s may
For columns braced against sidesway, the effects of s Lenderne
.
.
.be
n!,glected when:
~,
kLu
< 34 - 12
4-167
H2
where:
effective, length
~actor
unsupported length of column

radius of. gyration of cross section of co Lumn (r - 0.3h for
tied. columns and 0.25D for circular <:olwnns)
r -
"value of smaller end moment on column,positive if.memb",r is

bent in single. curvature and negative in double curvature
"\
..
value of larger end moment on column'
H2 .-
"
In lieu of a more accurate analysis, the value ot' 'HI IM2 may conservatively be
taken equal to 1.0. Therefore, in the design of colwnns! the effect of
slenderness may be neglected when:
:5 22
4-168
The use of slender ,colwnns is not permitted in. order .t;o. avoid stability
problems. Consequently, -the slenderness ratio must be limited to a maximum
value of 50.
4-46.3. Moment Magnification
Slenderness effects due to buckling and secondary bending moments must be
considered in the design ofcolwnns whose slenderness ratio is greater than
that given by. Equation 4-167. The r~duction in the ultimate. strength of.a
slender colwnn is accounted for in the design procedure by increasing ,the
design moment. The cross section and/or reinforcement is thereby increased
above that required for a short colwnn.
A column braced against sidesway is designed for the applied axial load P and
a magnified moment H defined by:
4-171
TK 5~1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

4,169
in which:",
6
-~----
,1
where:
design'mome!1 t
moment magnifier
value of larger end moment on column
equivalent moment correction factor defined by equation
4-171
value of smaller end moment on colUmn'
design axial load

critical axial load causing buckling defined by equation
'4-172
..
The value of the moment magnifier 6 shall riot be' taken less than 1.0.
For columns braced against sidesway and not subjected to transverse loads
between supports, i.e. interior colUmns of shear wall type structures, the
equivalent moment factor Cm may be taken as:
4-171
The value of Cm may not under any circumstances be taken less than 0.4. In
lieu of a more accurate analysis, the value of Ml/M2 may conservatively be
taken equal to 1.0. Therefore, in the design of interior columns, Cm may' be
taken as 1. a.
,.
The critical axial load that causes a column :to buckle is given by:
".2 EI
Pc -
4-172
In order to .appIy Equation 4 -172, a realistic value; of EI must be obtained for

the section at buckling. An approximate expression for EI at the time of
buckling is 'given by:
"
EI
4-173
1.5,
4-172
5-l3C10/NAVFAC,P-397/AFR 88-22
4-174
4-175
where:
aver~ge moment of inertia of section
f'
,:,
'
moment of inertia of gross concrete section

axis, neglecting reinforcement
abo~t
centroidal
moment of inertia of ,cracked concrete section with equal

reinforcement on oppo~ite faces
F -
coefficient given in Figure 4-5

l
'
Columns are. not. subjected to the blast loading directly, Rather, the load
that a column must resist is transmitted through the roof slab, beams and
girders. These members "filter" the dynamic effects of the blast load. Thus,
in buildings 'designed to obtain plastic deformations, the dynamic load
reaching the columns is typically a fast "static" load, that is, a flat top
pressure time load with a relatively long rise time.
The roof members and columns act together to resist the applied blast load.
However,
reasonable design can be achieved by considering the column
separately from the roof members. The response (resistance-time function) of
the roof members to the blast load is taken as the applied dynamic load acting
on the columns.
Columns are
SUbje~ted to
an actual axial load (with
~ssociated eccentricity~
equal ,to the ultimate resistance of the appropriate roof members acting over
the tributary area supported by ~the column. It is re"ommended for design of
columns the ultimate axial toad be equal to 1. 2 times the actual. axia!' load.
This increase' insur:es that the maximum response of th.. column will be limited
to a duct~lity ratio (~/Xe) of 3.0 or less. I f the r Lse t~me of the load
(time to reach yield for the appropriate roof J!lembers) divided by the natural
,period of the column is small (approximately. 0.1), th.. maximum ductiJity is,
limited to 3.0. Whereas, if the time ratio is equal to 1.0 ,or greater, the
column will remain elastic. For the usual design cases, the ratio .of.the rise
time to the natural period will be in the vicinity of 1:0. Therefore', the
columns will remain elastic or, at best, sustain slight plastic action .
.
'l.,
In some instances: buildings may be designed to remain cOlllpletely ela';tic. In

these cases, 'the actual axi~l load that the column must resist is equal to the
maximum actual response of the roof mem~ers framing into the colUllln. This
response and, therefore, the maximum load on the column, can be,.no more than
two times the ,blast load.
, , '
4-173
TK 5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR' 88-22

4-48. Design of Tied Columns
4-48.1. General
Interior columns are not usually subjected to excessive bending moments since
sidesway is eliminated by the shear walls. However, significant moments about
both axes can result from unsymmetrical loading conditions. These moments ,may
be due to unequal spacing between columns or to time phasing of the applied
loads. As a result of the complex load conditions, the columns must be
proportioned considering bending about both the x and y axes simultaneously.
One method of analysis is to use the basic principles of equilibrium with the
acceptable ultimate strength assumptions. This'methodessentially involves a
trial and error process for obtaining the position of an inclined neutrai
axis. This method is' sufficiently complex so that no formula may be developed
for practical use.
'. ~
An approximate design' method has been, developed 'which gives satisfactory
results for biaxial bending. 'The equation is in the form of an interaction
formula which for design purposes can be written in the form:
1
Py
Po
+
Pu
Px
,.
where:
I ';
Pu
ultimate load for' biaxial bending with eccentricities ex and

ey
Px
ultimate load when
ultimate 'load when eccentricity e'

y is
ultimate' load for a'concentrically loaded column (e x- e y- 0)
"
ecce~tricity
ex is present (e y
pre5~nt
0)
(ex - 0)
Equation 4-176 is valid provided Pu is equal to or greater than 0.10 Po' The
usual design cases for 'interior colUmns 'satisfy this limitation. The equation
is not reliable where biaxial bending is prevalent and is accompanied by an
axial force smaller than'O.IO Po' In the case of ~trongly prevalerit~bending,
failure is"initiated by yielding of the steel (te~sion,controls region of P~M'
curve). In 'this range it is safe and satisfactorily accurate to neglect the
axial force' entirely. and to calculate the
- section for, biaxial bending'
, . only.
This procedure is conservative since the 'addition ~faxial load in the tension
controls ~egion increases the moment capacity. 'It should be mentioned that
the tension controls case would be unusual and, if possible, should be avoided
in the design.
Reinforcement must be provided on all four faces of a tied column with the
reinforcement on~opposite faces of the col~n equal. In applying Equation 4176 to the design' of tied columns, the values of Px and Py are obtained from
Equation 4"160 and 4-162 for the 'regions where'compression and tension control
the design,respectively. The equations are for rectangular columns with
equal reinforcement on the faces of the column parallel, to the' axis of
L.
bending. Consequently, in the calculation of Px and.Py' the r~inforcement

perpendicular to the axis of bending is neglected. Conversely, the total
quantity of reinforcement provided on all. four faces of the column is used to
calculate Po' from Equation 4-154. Calcu.!ation of Px' Py.and,P o in the:manner
described will yield a co~s~rv,:,tive value,pf Pu from Eq'uation 4-176. :
4-48.2. Minimum Eccentricity
Due to the possible complex load conditions that can result in blast design,
all tied columns shall be designed for biaxial bending. If computations show
that there are no moments at the ends of the column or that the computed
eccentricity of the axial load is less than O.lh, the column must be designed
for a minimum eccentricity equal to O.lh . The va~~e of his the, depth of the
column in the bending direct~on considered. The minimum, eccentricity shall
apply to bending in both the x and,y dire~tions, simultaneous!y.,
4-48.3: LongitudInal Reinforcement Requir~ment's
',
To insure proper behavior of a tied colum~. the longitudinal re~nforcement

must meet certain restrictions. The area of longitudinal reinforcement shall
not be less than 0.01 nor more than 0.04, times' the gross area, of the section.
A minimum of 4 reinforcing bars shall be provided. The size of the longitudinal reinforcing bars sha~l not.be less thap#6 nor ,larger than #11. The
use or: #14 'and .f118 bars .as welJ. as the y.se,,!>f bundLed bars, are not recommended
due to p~oblems associated with the,developme~t and anchorage ,o~ ,such bars.
To p~rmit proper ,placement of the.concret~. th~ mini~um clear distance between
longitudinal bars shall not be, less thaIJ'l. 5, times. the nominal, diameter of the .,.
longitudinal bar-s nor 1.5 inches.
,,,:: ,
,'.'
',_
~.
4-48.4. Ci~sed Ties Requirements
Lateral ties must enclose all longitudinal ~ars in compre~sion to;-ins1J.re their
full development, These ties must conform'to the following:
'.
1.
Th~
ties shall be at least.#3,bars for longitudinal bars #8 or

smaller and ,at least .#4 bars for #9 longitudinal bars.or greater.
2.
To insure the full development of the ties they shall, be closed ~

using l35-degree hooks. The use of 90-degree bends is not recommended.
3.
The vertical spacing of the ties shall not exceed 16 longitudinal

, bar diameters, 48 tie diameters or .~ of ,~he,'least dimension of the
column section.
4.
The ties shall be located verti~ally not more than ~ the tie
spacing above the top of footing or slab and not more than \ the
I
tie spacing below the lowest horizontal reinforcement in a slab or
drop panel. Where beams frame into', a column', the ties! may be
terminated not more than 3 inches below the lowest reinforcement
in the shallowest of the beams.
5.
The ties shall be arranged such that every corner and alternate
longitudinal bar 'shall have lateral support provided by. the corner
of a tie with an included angle of not more than 135 degrees and
4-175
..
'
".,
TN 5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22'

no bar shall be farther than 6 inches clear on each side along the
'tie from such a laterally supported bar.
The above requirements for the lateral ties is to'insure against buckling of
the longitudinal'reinforcement in compression. However, if the section is
subjected to. large, ,shear or torsional stresses, the closed ties mUst be
increased in accordance with the provisions established for 'beams (see section
4-39).
4-49. Design of Spiral Columns
4-49.1. General
Spiral columns may be subjected to significant bending mom~nts about both,axes
and should, therefore, be designed for biaxial bending, However, due'to the
uniform distribution of the longitudinal reinforcement'in the form of a
circle, the bending moment (or eccentricities) in each direction can be
resolved into a resultant bending moment (or eccentricity). The column can
then be designed for uniaxial bending using Equations 4~16l and 4-166 for the
regions where compression a~d tension control the design, respectively.
4-49.2.'Hinimum Eccentricity
Since spiral columns show greater toughness than t,ied columns, particularly
when eccentricities are small,"the minimum eccentricity for spiral columns is
given as 0: 05D in each direction rather than O.lh in each direction foro,tied
columns. 'The resultant minimum eccentricity for a spiral column is then equal
to O.0707D. Therefore, if computations show that there are no moments at the'
ends of a column or that the computed resultant eccentricity of the axial load
is less than O.0707D, the column must be designed for a resultant minimum
eccentricity of O.0707D.
4-49.3. Longitudinal Reinforcement Requirements
To insure 'proper behavior of a spiral reinforced column, the longitudinal
reinforcement must meet the same restrictions given for tied columns concerning minimum and maximum area of reinforcement, smallest arid largest reinforcing bars permissible and the minimum clear spacing between bars. The only
difference is,that for spiral columns the minimum number of longitudinal bars
shall not be less than 6 bars.
4-49.4. Spiral Reinforcing Requirements
Continuous spiral reinforcing must enclose 'all longitudinal bars in compression to insure their full development. The required area of spiral reinforcement Asp is given by:
'
f'dc
4-177
where:
area of spiral reinforcement'

4-176
.'
s -
pitch of spiral

,
diameter of the spiral measured through the centerline of

the spiral bar
The spiral reinforcement must conform to the following:
1.
Spiral column reinforcement shall consist of evenly spaced continuous spirals composed of 'continuous #3 bars or larger. Circular
bars are not permitted.
2.
The clear spacing between spiral shall not exceed 3 inches nor be
less than 1 inch.
3.
Anchorage of spiral reinforcement shall ,be provided by l-~ extra

turns of spiral bar at each end.
4.
Splices in spiral reinforcement shall be lap splices equal to l-~

turns of spiral' bar.,
5.
Spirals shall extend from top of footing or slab to level of

lowest horizontal reinforcement in members supported above.
6.
In columns with capitals, spirals shall extend to a level at which

the diameter or width of capital is two times that of the column.
,. '
...
p.
-,
MAXIMUM AXIAL
COMPRESSION
STRENGTH
-,
"
"
l1.
.....,
,
P
( MAX.)
e-n
0
I
I
en
l&l
'.
e,
;I
~
:::E
0
c.J
..J
Cl:
x
Cl:
COMPRESSION
CONTFIOLS
0::
....
fIJI
Pb
- I-I - - - - - - - - - - .-/
I
I
/
/
//
./
BALANCED
CONDITION
.,/
0'0 .,/
/
......
./
......
.,/
/.
......
TENSION
CONTROLS
"I.
BENDI NG
Figure 4-61
Mb
MOMENT Mu
Column interaction diagram
4-178
. .'I
;;.
"
AS~ ..
,CLOSED TIE
.. ,.
,
..'.A~
s , .
\.
"
'
: '. 14 :-.
.,
REO'D COVER
.f
(TVP.)
-a) RECTANGULAR SECTION

WITH EOUALREINFORCEMENT
ON OPPOSITE FACES
"
As!
Os
Ds
SPIRAL
REINF
Asp
REO'D
COVER----'
b) CIRCULAR
SECTION WITH UNIFORMLY

REINFORCEMENT
Figure 4-62
Typi~al
DISTRIBUTED
interior column sections
4-179
TN 5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22 '

DYNAMIC DESIGN OF ExTERIOR 'COLUMNS
4-50. Introduction
Exterior columns may be required for severe'loading conditions. These columns
could be monolithic with the exterior walls and',as such would be subjected to
.boch axial and transverse loading'. The axial load results ft~m the direct
transfer of, floor and roof beam reactions while'the transverse load is due to
the direct impact: of the blast, load.
'
,
The use of exterior columns would'normally be restricted to use in framed

structures to transfer roof and floor be~ reactions to the foundation,
Normally, only tied 'columns woJld be used since they are compatible with,the,
placement of walland beam reinforcement. Exterior columns are not normally
required for flat slab structures since roof and floor loads are uniformly
transmitted to the exterior walls.'
4-51. Design of Exterior Columns
Exterior columns are generally designed as beam elements. 'The,axial load on
these columns may be significant, but usually the effect of the transverse
load is greater~ The coiumn,will usually be in'the tension controls' region (e
greater than eb) of the P-M curve (Fig. 4-61) where the addition of axial load
increases the moment capacity of the member.
Consequently, the design of an exterior column as a'beam, where the axial load
is neglected, is conservative.
Since an exterior column is a primary member which is subjected to an axial
load, it is not permitted to attain large plastic deformations. Therefore,
the lateral deflection of exterior columns must'be ,limited to a maximum
ductility (Xm/XE) 'of 3.
'!
',I.
"
,
"
.,
STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS AND DESIGN FOR BRITTLE MODE RESPONSE

4-52. Introduction
The response of a structural element in the, brittle mode consists of ". that
structural behavior which is associate4 with either partial or total failure
of the .element and is characterized by two types of concrete fragmentation:
(1) spalling (either direct spalling or scabbing) which is the dynamic
disengagement of the surface of ,the element, and (2) post-failure fragmentationwhich is associated.with structural collapse.
Spalling is usually of concern only for those acceptor systems' where personnel, valuable equipment and/or extremely sensitive .explosives require prqtection. Where the acceptor system consists of relatively insensitiye explosives
so that fragment impact will not result in propagation of explosion or mass
detonation, then post-failure fragmentation can be.considered in the design.
For this latter case, even though the velocity of the spalls can be greater
than the velocity of the post-failure fragments, the effects of spalling can
be neglected because of the smaller masses involved. Post-failure fragmentation cannot be permitted when personnel are being protected.
4-53. Direct Spalling
Direct spalling of a concrete eleme~t (Fig. 4-63) is the result of a tension
failure in the concrete normal tG its free surface and is caused by the shock
pressures of an impinging blast wave being transmitted through the element.
When a shock front strikes the donor'surface of a concrete element, compression stresses are transmitted from the air to the element. This stress.
disturbance propagates through the element in the form of a compression wave,
and upon reaching the r!'ar (acceptor)' free surface, is reflected as a tension
wave identical in shape and magnitude to the compressiorl wave. During the
return passage, if the tension stresses in the reflected! wave'exceed the
stresses in the compression wave plus the tensile capacity of' the concrete,
the material will fracture with that part of the element: between the rear free
surface and the plane of failure being displaced from the remainder of the
element. A portion of the stress wave is trapped in the failed section and
contributes to. its velocity. The part of the stress wave which remains within
the main section continues to propagate with additional reflections and
concrete fractures until its magnitude is reduced to that level below which
spalling does not occur.
Direct spalling generally results in the formation of small concrete fragments. The size of the fragments is attributed to the ncmuniformity of the
shock wave (close-in effects) and the further distortions of the wave during
its propsgation through the element (nonhomogeneous mat..rial, nonelastic
effects, etc.). Localized .failures occur under the ac t Lori. of both flexural
and shear stresses resulting. in the'rupture of the mortar binding the stone
aggregate together. The failure zone propagates across the concrete surface
forming a large number of comparatively small concrete fragments. The
thickness of concrete between the rear (acceptor) surfaee of the element and
the centroid of the rear face reinforcement is the usual depth of. concrete
dynamically disengaged from the element. Although the concrete between the
layers of reinforcement may be cracked to some extent, it is confined by the
flexural and lacing reinforcement, thus preventing its disengagement.
4-181
TK 5-l300/NAVFAC P-397iAFR 88-22

The size of,the surface area which spalls depends upon the magnitude and
duration of the applied blast' loads striking ,and subsequently being transmitted through the element, in addition to the size and shape of the element
itself. For long cantilever-type barricades, only a portion of the wall will
usually spall, since the magnitudes of the applied blast pressures decrease
rapidly along its length, while for cubicle-type structures, the entire wall
surface will usually spall because of the amplification of the blast pressures
due to their multiple reflections within the structures.
'
A wide range of velocities exists for spalled fragments. The'initial velocity
at which spalled fragments leave a structural element has been found to be low'
(50 feet per second or less). However, concrete elements subjected to the
close-in effects 'of"a detonation are generally accelerating before or soon
after spalling takes place. This accelerated motion of 'the element in turn'
accelerates spall~d fragments. The fragment velocities produced by these
acceleration effects may be as high as several hundred feet per second. For
analytical purposes, an upper 'limit for the velocities of direct spalled
fragments from elements sensitive to impulse may be taken as the initial
velocity of the element which is also assumed to be the maximum velocity.
However, for elements which respond to the pressure only or pressure-time
relationship, an evaluation of the resistance-time and pressure-time curves
must be performed to obtain the maximum fragment velocity. The procedures and
equations that are necessary to determine the above velocities are contained
in Section 4-58.
4-54. Scabbing
Scabbing of reinforced concrete elements (Fig. 4-64) is the end result of a
tension failure in the concrete normal to its free surface and is asso,ciated
with large deflections. In the later'stages 'of the ductile response mode of a
reinforced concrete element, extremely large'deflections are developed
producing large strains in the flexural reinforcement and, consequently,
severe cracking'and/or crushing of the concrete perpendicular to the free
surfaces. 'Because the tension,and compression strains are highest at the
surface and 'since the lacing reinforcement in the later stages of deflection
confines the concrete between the layers of flexural reinforcement, damage to
the concrete is more severe at the exterior of the reinforcement than between
the layers. The applied loads having long since passed, the element is in a
stage of deceleration at these'large deflections. Therefore, the velocities
of scabbed fragments, which are equal to the yelocity of the element at 8 _ 5
(start of scabbing)" are lower than. the velocities of accelerated direct
spalled fragments. However, the velocities of scabbed fragments also may be
in the order of several hundred feet per second. Refer to Section 4-58 to
determine the velocity of the element at a support rotation of five degrees.
4-55.
Predictio~
of Concrete Spalling
,
As previously explained, direct spalling is due,to,a.compression wave: traveling through a concrete element, reaching .the back face and being reflected as,
a tension wave. Spalling occurs when the tension is greater than the tensile
strength of the concrete. Spalling will occur:
for:
, s.l.O
when
4-182
1.0
4-178
TM
5-1300/NAV~AC
P-397/AFR 88-22
or for:
where:
au
V
-.
"
,0.1 f' c
"
h.
f.'
4-18<)
rl
(E c/p)1/2
4-181
and:
re(lected pressure
Pr
peakno~a1
au
tensile strength of concrete
velocity of c,?mpression wave,through concrete.
ir
normal .ref1ected impulse
Tc
thickness of concrete element
f' c
Ec
P
'
,.
static compressive strength of concrete
_..
..
modulus of elasticity of concrete

mass density of concrete
;~
.. ' ;
Equations 4-178 and, 4-.179 are shown 'graphically' in Figure 4-65 .:Use of this
figure . predicts the incidence of spalling, that .Ls " whether or not spalling'
will occur a~ the point on the element which is subjec:ted to the peak normal
reflected pressure Pr and impulse i r.
.~,
J.
'r'
"
_ ,
If spallingis predicted, the spalled area ,cannot be c:alculated ,from the above
data. However, the,spa1Ied,area may be 'qualitatively estimated.by considering
the distance'of the .p10tted point above the line on Figure 4-65. The greater
the distance above. the ,line, the larger, the spalled area is likely to be.' ,In
addition, if the average reflected pressure Pbsnd impulse i b are substituted ,.
for Pr and i r respectively, andspa11ing is still predicted, tnen the spalled.
area will likely include the,major portion, if .not al1,.of the element~s
surface.
...
r'
..... '-'.
,
If a concrete element is subjected to.side-on.pressurcas, only, Figure.4"65 may

still. be used ,to predict the occurrence .of : spalling;, In this case, 'the peak
reflected pressure Pr and impulse ir'are ,replaced with peak side-on'pressure
Ps o and impulse is, respectively.
\'.
4-56. Minimization of Effects of Spalling and
Scabbinl~
.s ,
~.
If it is determined that concrete spall.due to blast loading will- occur (using

the procedures outlined, in the.preceding Section), or that scabbing will occur
4-183

due to large deflections (>5), then there are several procedures which can be
utilized to minimize its effects.
4- 56.1. Design parameters
The occurrence of direct spalling can be eliminated by an adjustment of the
charge location, i.e~. if an explosive charge is placed at a sufficient
distance away from the surface of an element, the magnitude of the blast
pressures striking the element will be less than those which will cause
tension failure of the ~oncrete. Large adjustments of the donor charge
location in a design for the sole purpose of preventing direct spalling is
usually not economically feasible.
Although sufficient separation distance between a detonation and an element
prevents direct spalling, its effect in reducing scabbing is negiigible. A
reduction of scabbing is accomplished by limiting the magnitude of the maximum
deflection of the element. By reducing this deflection, the strains.inthe
concrete and reinforcement are lowered to a level where tensile failure of the
concrete and subsequent scabbed fragment formation is prevented. Scaledtests
have indicated that scabbing does not occur when deflections are limited to
values less than those corresponding to support rotations of no larger' than '
five degrees. To maintain the same response of the element, the resistancemass product of the element must be increased proportionally to the decrease
in deflection, ;and this capacity (resistance and/or mass) increase results in '
an increased construction cost.
4-56.2. Composite Construction
Direct spalling and scabbing can be eliminated through the use of composite
elements composed of two concrete panels (donor and acceptor) separated by a
sand-filled cavity. Spalling of the donor panel is not generally of'coricern
since resulting fragments enter and are trapped in the sand fill. On the
other hand, spalling of the receiver panel will endanger the acceptor system.
By maintaining certain design parameters, both. direct spalling and scabbing of
the receiver panel can 'be prevented.
To prevent the occurrence of direct spalling, the,high peak blast pressures
applied to the donor panel of a composite element must be attenuated by the
sand fill ... This attenuating capability of the sand is attained by providing:
(1) a thickness of the sand fill at least equal to twice the thickness of the
'donor panel where the panel thickness is predicated upon the required strength
to resist the applied loads, (2) for one-way elements a ratio of the cavity
thickness to span~length not less than 0.25 for cantilevers and O,05,for
elements fixed on' two opposite sides shall be used, and for two-way elements
each direction (span) shall be considered separately as shown above and the
larger cavity thickness used, and (3) the sand density shall not be greater
than 85 pounds per'cubic foot. Since scabbing is eliminated by limiting the
element's deflection, scabbing of composite elements is prevented by limiting
the deflection of the acceptor panel to the support rotation previously cited.
Figure 4-~6 illustrates the use of composite construction to prevent spalling.
The magnitude of the donor panel deflection.was such that the panel was near
incipient failure, the panel experiencing the effects of both direct spallirig
and scabbing. On the other hand, the deflection of the acceptor panel has
been limited and; therefore, had only minor cracking. Directspalled or
4-184
scabbed fragments were not formed on the exterior surface, of the acceptor
panel.
The use of composite barriers for the'sole purpose of 'eliminating spalling is
not usually economically feasible. However, if the magnitude of,the:applied
blast Loada warrant, the use of comp"osite, construction, tl)en the:eli.'llination of
spalling can, be acha eved at asligl!t increase; in .cost by, conforming ;.to the,
previously stated,element configur~tions and response.
<'
4-56.3. Fragment Shields
4-56.3.1. General
,,
Fragment shields are composed of stee~ ,plates or other structura~ material
which can be attached to, or placed a short distance from, a, protective
barrier (fig. 467). Unlike the other me,thods, the use, of shields does not
reduce Clr deter the ,formation of ,spalled fragments but, rather .confLnes and
prevents them from striking the acceptor system.
where:
a -
, .ru
,
4 c182
deceleration of the structural, element
.u'l t Imat;e unit resistance of conc ret;e element

.
'.
IIlu -.
effective unf.ta.mas s of .the.concreto. element -Ln -che plastic

,,' ."::' range
The force acting on the shield is due to the inertial force of the fragments.
Thus, the required resistance of the fragment shield must be equal to this
inertial force,or:
4-183
4-185
TM '5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88 c22

where:
ultimate unit resistance of fragment shield
mass of the spalled fragments
When calculating'the mass of'the spalled fragments ,the actual mass of the'
disengaged concrete is used, It is assumed that all the concrete from the
rear face of the 'element to the centroid of the 'rear face reinforcement
disengages. Thus, the spall thickness for a laced'section"is:
4-184
where:
ds p
depth of spalled concrete

thickness of the concrete element
,! '
average ,distance between the centroids of the compression

and tension reinforcement
An attached fragment shield usually consists of a flat or corrugated 'steel'
plate spanning between angles or channels. The angles or channels act as
beams spanning between anchor bolts. The' anchor bolts connect the~plate and
beams to the,unspalled portion of the concrete. To insure that they do not
fail due to concrete pull-out, the 'anchor bolts are hooked around the flexural
reinforcement as shown in Figure 4-68. If the required resistance of the " ,
fragment shield is small, the fragment shield maybe' considered a two-way"
spanning member without the supporting beams. In such cases, the shield is
designed as a flat slab with the anchor bolts supporting it at multiples of
the flexural bar intersections. For larger resistances, the plate thickness
would become 'excessive and the design uneconomicaL
'J'
4-56.3"3. Separated Fragment Shield
'
If the barrier is' permitted 'to attain large deflections (greater than fivedegree support rotation) then the shields must be 'separated from the barrier.
This separation distance should be sufficient to'eliminate the. possibility of
impact between the deflecting barrier and shield. Fragment shields, separated
, from the main protective elements and affording protection against spalled
fragments from the walls and/or roof, are shown in Figure 4-67b. The shield
may consist of structural steel, reinforced concrete, wood, etc., and must be
designed to resist the impact and penetration of the spalled fragments as well
as the overall motion of the main protective structure and any leakage
pressure which may occur.
~
To design a separated 'shield; the mass and velocity of the spal1ed fragments
must be determined. As an approximation" an average velocity for all spalled
fragments can be utilized. The average velocity of the spalled fragments is
taken as equal to the maximum velocity of the element (single-degree-offreedom system) so that:
4-185
where:
v -
average velocity of spalled

4-186 '
frag~ents
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC P~397/AFR 88-22

,.
ib
blast impulse
Mu
effective unit mass of the concrete element in the plastic.'

range
The impulse imparted to the fragment shield by the spalled fragments is equal
to their momentum or:
'
: 4-186
where:
"
~fs -
required impulse capacity of the fragment shield.

mass of the spalled fragments (Section 4-56.3.2)
The shield is designed to resist this impulse, i f s'

The cost of separated shields may be somewhat more expensive than shields
attached directly to the barrier. However, the cost reduction achieved. by
permitting the larger barrier deflections may offset the increased cost of the
separated. shield.
"
4-57. Post-Failure Concrete Fragments

When a reinforced concrete element is substantially overloaded by the blast
output; the element fails and concrete fragments (post failure) are formed and
displaced at high velocities. The type of failure aswell as the size and
number of the fragments depends upon whether the element has laced or unlaced
reinforcement.
Failure of an unlaced element (Fig. 4-69)' is characterized by the dispersal of
concrete fragments formed by the cracking and displacement of the concrete
between the donor and acceptor layers. of the reinforcement. With increased
deflections,these compression forces tend tOe buckle the'reinforcement outward
thereby initiating the rapid disintegration of the element.
Laced concrete elements exhibit a different type of failure from unlaced,
elements, the failure being characterized by reinforcement failures occurring
at points of maximum flexural stress (plastic hinges) with the sections of the
element between the'points of failure.remaining essentially intact. When
fracture due to excessive straining of.the tension rel.nforcement occurs at the
positive yield lines, some small concrete fragments wl.ll be formed at the'
acceptor side of the barrier. Quite often, if the overload is not too severe.
the' compression reinforcement at'the hinge points does not'failsandthereby
prevents total disengagement of the sections' between the hinges', (Fig. 4-70).
In cubicle type structures where contl.nuous laced and flexural reinforcement
is used throughout, failure I.ssometimes initl.ated at the positive yield lines
where flexural and lacing reinforcement fa 1.1 , whl.1e at the supports; only the.
tension reinforcement fails. The intact sections bet"een the 'failure points
rotate with the compression reinforcement at the supports, acting:as the
mechanical hinges of an analogous swinging door (Fig. 4-71). The compression
reinforcement at the supports, serving as hinges, produces rotational rather
than translational motion'of the failed sections; and energy which would
ordinarily result in translational velocities is transferred' to sections of
the structure adjacent to the failed element. In other situations, where
4-187
TH'5-l300/NAVFAC'P-397/AFR 88-22
there is a larger overloading of the element, the failed sections of the laced
element are completely disengaged and displaced from the structure. The
translational velocities of these sections are usually less than the maximum
velocity of the element at incipient failure ..
4-58. Post-Failure Impulse Capacity
4-58.1. General
Elements which protect non-sensitive explosives may be designed for controlled
post-failure fragments with a substantial cost savings. These elements fail
completely, but detonation is prevented by limiting the mass and velocity of
the fragments. Barriers and'shelters which will protect personnel, equipment
and/or sensitive explosives cannot be designed for post-failure criteria.
Procedures are presented below for determining the post-failure impulse
capacity of laced elements.
4-58.2. Laced Elements
4-58.2.i. General
The idealized curves of Figure 4-72 illustrate the response of an impulse-'
sensitive two-way element when the applied blast impulse load is larger than
it flexural impulse capacity (area under the resistance-time curve, Fig.
4-72a). The assumptions made in these curves are the same as those for
impulse-sensitive systems whose response is less than or equal to incipient
failure (Vol. III) namely: (1) the element prior to being loaded is at rest,
and (2) the duration of the applied blast load and the time to reach to yield
are small in comparison to the time to reach the ultimate deflection. In
Figure 4-72 the duration of the applied blast load and time to reach yield
have been taken as equal to zero so that the element will respond and reach
its maximum velocity instantaneously (i.e.,. at to - 0, Vo - ib/mu).
When the element is designed to remain'intact (equal to or less than incipient
failure conditions), its velocity at time tu (deflection Xu) is equal to zero ..
However, if the element is overloaded, then the velocity just prior, to failure
is a finite value, the magnitude of which depends upon: (1) the magnitude of
the overload, (2) the magnitude of the flexural capacity, and (3) mass of the
. element ...
When laced elements are overloaded, failure occurs at the hinge lines and the I
element breaks into a small number of large sections. The magnitude of the
velocity of each sector at failure varies' from a maximum at the point of
maximum deflection to zero at the supports. The variation of the fragment
velocity'across.a section produces tumbling .. This tumbling action may result
in an acceptor charge which is located close to the barrier being stuck by
that portion pf a failed sector traveling at the highest velocity. If the
acceptor charge is, located at a considerable distance from the barrier, the
velocity of the fragments'should be taken.as the translational velocity. The .
translational velocity is approximately equal to the average velocity of the
sector before.failure (the average momentum pf the element before failure is
equal to the ~verage momentum after failure).
.. .
The analytical relationship which describes the response of a laced .element,.

both in its flexural' and post-failure ranges of action, is obtained through' a
..
4-188
TK 5-130Ci/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

"
semigraphical solution of Newton's equation of motion similar to that described for incipient failure design in Chapter 3.
If the. areas under the pressure-time and resistance-time curves' (Fig. 4-72a)
are considered to be positive and negative, respectivel.y, and the velocity of
the system before the onset of the load is zero, the slwmation of the areas at
any time divided by the 'appropriate effective mass for each range is equal to
the instantaneous velocity at that .time. The velocity vi at the incipient
failure deflection ~ (time, ~) may be expressed as:
4-187
roup
where the values of i b, r u' tl and t u are defined in Figure 4-72 and rou and
roup are the effective masses of the single-degree-of-freedom system in the
various flexural ranges (ultimate and post-ultimate) of the two-way element.
The acceptor charge is assumed to be close to the barrier, so that the maximum
velocity of the fragment after failure vf is equal to the maximum velocity of
the element at incipient failure vi'
The expression for the deflection at any time may be found by multiplying each
differential area (between the time to and the time in question), divided by
the appropriate effective mass, by the time which is defined by the distance
between the centroid of the area and the time in question,' and adding these
values algebraically. Using this procedure and the expression for the
deflection at partial failure (initial failure of a two-way element) the
deflection at.time t l is:
2
i b 'tl
r u t1
"
4-188
while the equation for-the deflection at incipient failure at t u is given by:
,"
ib tu
mu
,r u tl
--"'U
tl
t ,u -
4-58.2:2. Post-Failure Impulse Capacity
- 2
r up (t~ -- tl) 2
4-189
2~p"
The expression for'the' blast overload impulse capacity of a two-way element

includes both the flexural capacity and the post-failure fragment momentum
portion of the element's response. Solving Equations 1.-l~7through 4-189
simultaneously gives the expression for the blast overload impulse capacity.
For a two-way element the resulting equation is:
i
2
4-190
2
For a one-way element or a two-way element which does not exhibit a postultimate range, the blast overload impulse capacity is:
4-189
TN 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

ib 2
IDu
vf2
2
4-58~2.3.
Response Time
The response time is the time at which the elements reach theultimate
deflection Xu, and failure occurs. 'The expression for the response time tu is
found by solving Equations 4-187 and 4-188 simultaneously. The response time
for a two-way element is:
IDup
4-192
The response time of a one-way element or for a two-way element which does not
exhibit a post-ultimate range is:
4-58.2.4. Design Equations

The basic equations for the analysis of the blast impulse capacity of an
element are given above. However, the form of these equations is not suitable
for design purposes. The use of these equations would require a tedious
trial-and-error solution. Design equations can be derived in the same manner
as for elements designed for incipient failure or less (see Sect. 4-33).
If Equations 4-190 and 4-191 are compared with Equations 4-95 and 4-96, it may
be seen that except for"the right-hand term in each of the above equations,
the corresponding analytical expressions are ,the same if Xu is substituted for
Xm The additional term in the above equations is the kinetic energy of the
fragments after failure. Because ofthis similarity, Equations 4-190 and
4-191 may be expressed in a form which will be a function of the impulse
coefficients (section 4-33), the geometry of the element, applied blast
impulse and a post-failure fragment coefficient. The resulting equation is: .
".4-194
"
where
ib
applied unit blast impulse
PH
reinforcement
dc
distance between centroids of the compression and tension

reinforcement
rati~
in the horizontal direction"
"
4-190
TM 5-1300jNAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
f ds
H
dynamic design stress for the reinforcement

span height
vf
maximum velocity of the post-failure fragments
Cu
'impulse coefficient for ultimate deflection
Cf
post-failure fragment coefficient
x.,
Equation 4-194 is applicable to both one-way and two-way elements which are
uniformly loaded. Values of Cu can be found in Section 4-33. The postfailure fragment coefficient takes into account the variation in ,the effective
mass. It is a function of the element's horizontal and vertical reinforcement
ratios, aspect ratio and boundary conditions'. To facilitate the design procedure, values of the post-failure fragment coefficient Cf have been plotted in
Figures 4-73, 4-74 and 4-75 for two-way elements supported on two adjacent
edges, three edges and four edges respectively. For one-way elements, the
value of coefficient Cf,is a constant (Cf - 22,500).
4-58.2.5. Optimum Reinforcement
The optimum arrangement of the flexural reinforcement in two-way elements
designed for post-failure fragments will not necessarily be the same as that
for similar elements which are designed for incipient failure, damage or less.
The optimum ra~io of the vertical to horizontal reinforcemen~ Pv/PH will be a
function of the ,amount of the blast, impulse absorbed through the flexural
action of the element in,comparison to that which contributes to the momentum
of post, failure fragments. Unlike incipient failure design, the optimum ratio
will vary with a variation in the depth of the' element. As discussed earlier,
the optimum depth of an e1ement,an~ total amount of reinforcement PT is a
function of' the relative costs of concrete and reinforcing steel. In a given
situation, the designer must establish, through a 'trial and error 'design "
procedure, and; a cost analysis, the" optimum depth, reinforcement ratio Pv/PH
"
,and total, amount of reinforcement PT",
For very large projects. this type of detailed analysis may result significant
cost benefits, but for most projects using the values of Pv/PH and PT recommended for incIpient failure design will yield an' economical design.
4-191
f
\
4-1.92
4-193
100
50 I II I 'I! II tIl1l!
30
10
5
~
,..
.t5'
<,
'"
a,
.5
.3
.111
.01
.03
.05
.10
:3
.5
10
30
50
100
irv/P.Tc
-\
Figure 4-65
Spall threshold for blast waves loading walls
Figure 4-66
Unspalled acceptor panE!l of composite panel
'.
PROTECTIVE
BARRIER
....
'"
'"
...
F
I
MAXIMUM BARRIER
DEFLECTION
II"-SHIELD
PROTECTIVE
BARRIER--"""
'-SHELTER,
I ~.
I
,
>
\DON IR
SYSTEM)
'-SHELTER,
//////////
PROTE :T1VE
BARRI R--'"
\1g..,.SHIELD
\PONOR
SYSTEM'""'\
"
\
\
M4XIMUM ROOF
DEFLECTION
!'-SHIELD
,,I
.
.I
I
~
'"SHELTER,
//////////
b 1 LARGE DEFLECTIONS
LIMITED DEFLECTIONS
Figure 4-67
":""'----
\..DDNOR
SYSTEM"')
0)
MAXIMUM BARRIER
DEFLECTION
Sheilding systems for protection against concrete fragments
J, '
4
..
SHIELD
'
~ ....
It
I
(
LACING/REINF.
FLEXURAL
REINF.
V~
..
~ ;...
Ii
4
II
Figure 4-68
-.
-,.
K!cl
lD
.J
cl
cr
:>
'
!oJ
.J
lL
lL
.'"
!-'-+'
C)
V>
1-,
. ...
.... ... .
,
. .. .
:z
,.
.
~
'
.::-.
'"
-.
'
cl
..
.. x
~;
I"~'~
II III
,..-.c''''
'
rANCH~R BOLT- ,
'-
-.
,...
~,
..
..
..
'.
t.
II
..
Rigid attachment of fragment shield to barrier
4-197
Figure 4-69
Failure of an unlaced element
4-198
~,'
4-199-
''t'-\''
.pI
~
o
o
Figure
4-71Bac~wall
fail\lreOf
r>.
e
'.
-.p
l~.
.,~,
.-
:.n.
0 ...
... (,)
0: 2
:::>'
",t;" II
en_
... en
.. 0:
...o
II
'u
'u
~"I-_------"';""'-..;;...-"t..
, - . -:-__
I
'0 I
'
'u '
'u
. I
'up
X,
IINCIPIENT
FAILURE
'-"
~.'-
Xu
TIME
"",
0) IDEALIZED PRESSURE - TIME AND

RESISTANCE - TIME CURVES
o
....'"
Cl IDEALIZED RESISTANCE - DEFLECTION CURVE

"
~
'.
;..'
-.
i& -, unit blast impulae

r ultimate unit .resistance
u
>'
!:
(,)
o
,INCIPIENT
FAILURE
...>
..J
y:_y
'0
'u
TIME
bl IDEALIZED VELOCITY - TIME CURVE
Figure 4-72
~-.
t'up - p08t-ult~te 'unit resistance

_
:"
to .duration of po~itive phase of bl8Bt'pres8u~e
t ... time at which partial failure occurs
:--.
1
t
time at which ultimate deflection occurs
vf post-failure fragment velocity
Vi velocity of element at incipient failure
Vo initial velocity of element
Xl - partial failure deflection

XU --ultimate deflection
Idealized curves for determination of post-failure fragment

velocities
...EICl
-.
.5
.,:,,'d.::I:::I:': .r.. J
2. 201' I'!
. .
,. "'1:
.
"1,"
. .., .1 .
"""..,.. ,.. , . ,j,..

IjLL\_:_~:~l:":i:t:::;lL.tLl:unl::{~U~
. .. '1'
-,
2.00
,.,
I.I I
; I,
2.10 .---.-.-.
N.o
TO
'I',
'I.;""l
.1.,1
.!
-t-~.
1 ' .,
,,,
, ,..
....
IZ
I&l
U
ii:
I&.
I&l
t,)
l-
t,)
I&l
C!I
of
a::
I&.
I&l
a::
:::>
-J
~,
,
IUI
1.20' .
0.25
1 ., .. I
, I'
0.5
1.0
2.0
I'
4.0
RATIO OF VERTICAL TO HORIZONTAL REINFORCEMENT. PV/P

H.
Figure 4 .. 73
Post-failure coefficient C for an element fixed on two

f
adjacent edges and two edges free
EI'".s
N 1,
~
-...-
'Q
'
U
IZ
I&l
k:
.0N
0
...
IL
8
IZ
I&l
(l)
4(
If
I&l
II::
::;)
....
:,
lll)
,,0'
0..
2.20 ,!:;, i t.: I;: I; .,,;;:

....
:; r :
1'1:,
::"
'1>,';'
In!'' it;; :;:I'Ii.: '::. :it:' . .'
: ;,;
, ,.:'
'"
I, ,:.:: :: ,'. Ii;: . ;I!::::::,;::O:,,,,.,,.,,,:!:,"
'.
210
.
"
...
,,,,,1'.,,,
1;".'.1':
''',''"
:::: , ,.'"..,.,
,...' 1" , ...:
.
.' .... .,.I;:''1:''''''T'' ....
';::: : "I; ': ." .;: . ';:'
..
.. ;: I'ii''"
r:
I: " ! . ; "''-'I!';:!!.'.'
:
"
,.,
Ii.,::
"",::.,,:1.,
::: I; 'TfTTTT
., .. ..,.::r: i::! :if'!::::: " . . .,',iT' .j.:.'.+i"i.
::'. I' , .'
,-;' i 'i; I iii:l::l
"T.,
r;rIHHiL:j.:. : : . t UHf :::'i;::n::,::;:':., ;:

:,':
2.00 : : .: ,:1 ,.. ;1';1': : {'IEer,miff:
<ce":'
. ; ., I:': li::
".
.p.' r; n-, ,,",'"
.,..:
\,./\-\ - '
1
IF
I ; : .;
1
I ... ;
,!,: i: ;: II:
.: F" :'! 11:'
1.90 tiT'.....
:
.. i".':.I,'. " . ' i:
1 ; ;:.1
1.80
rn1
I:
j'.
"'..,
f f Ii!"
U Il;,!Ji"
.
-,
:I,,:+7J
..
IT!;,
,,:'T! !'; i IT. i ! j ITGlnE

::., I : i
hi" .
.' : u:; ' 1::!Iil"

'. : ';:.: .':'.1': ['! :..,:, ; : i ;iii
. ".il"::.;:!:.:
~,,- tn+:"" H:'!,
~
ll,
.; , ; ,:
it::
i :
:i~"
1' "
.
t :
~n-rir: n::'';-:i: Fi"" .': I::::: Iii I: F'...,; 1ii)'.... ::;......'.....

f 1~M:.:.I.:~ .7 ; .~.l ;c, ~~... '; =......rrrr.:.' i:.
;~,.:. pm}', :
I:,: ,:.::.:::
I
:~.
I T ' : .:.:::::1'
:':; ".; .".1.,
~60
,,:: H,' I::! :.:: I':!,":;'!!:LI. i , :' ':' ' [ ' ; ' \-\ " ...".0 .
" : ...::..il"!:i\.... ,,.!I'......' . . '. I:'
H-t'T:I: ..'.'
u..... :.; ;
:;1'.
~'c
,:Ii, .,,,,.,' .,'.

.. ..::::'1"::,,::., ....... , , , , '
l : I . : I , . ,:: " .
"....
,,,. ,..,"'"lii.."... ......-:.: ' " , " '.".
1701""
:"'I!q
C+
.ii
.:i::
' . ;:, k..::I;;:: :: :Ii"::::'
..,'il,::;:1"":':: iffl \..
. 0
..
; i I 1i::1
.'
:', ..... 'm'T
' l . '.
1\-\~''"LrF
Lili';"
~.,:-;;
'.
l f- fiU
,~:!!t:
" ,,.rr:;:
,,~'"
'Ii 'Ii" l': ,.,.."

:: . . . i :
I~'.,:
' " ,:",,,,,'
"P' ,
"" ,",."""
'"::~,:,,,
' , , '" "", /\-\'- \..
,[""k::;":;';!":"'::'
-~:: :,::
Ii,'
......
:
,.
\.../.~;'.....,..,::
ti::...
"i'
l 1.:..J..!.
I::~
." ....
,.,,' ".",.'
r ': ,, i..l "
' ,": : I::.,:
j ,'f, .!.:~
160 .,
'!iN Ji II ,'iHbl?,i;: ;' j' : i ' ' ' : A
T ' : f; i i ,.. .. :i Ii:i
' ;: : :" I \.6..-. ..'. .' l.o'":.1
I 50 !, yL(;.. K 1:.:i', ...
!",;b:;:li'f:. ::::10'1."......n .: .:." : .""'1":
.
.. D."
1/ . ' " . ".,,:::':"

I':,!",':::';':::::'''b
:: "TIC
H. ::I''N: ,;,
; ,
:>.:).;~!
.... ,I"~ilf.'H,::'y.'i::,'::::::'
~~
1':,:1:;;;;; !~;H,~lo"""""
.',
,,;;,\,:;:'; ii' I~~ '. ::,~i-:+
; TT F: !iT! '.', ;;],;ll,' jj:',js>'.H", " Iii: 1i'f!: \.. . !: :: i ,::
1.40 K:: .:I,.,:Iu..... ~.;rs.:.:SL
:1::r:.:::::::'.'::::..
.. 'i.::".'.
:.:.",;.10"."
jl, .,[-:T1".>~;"
:; 'H.;,i:Pf ::!'
'::1/::;
~. :i' i;; I' :JX(:
. -:-,-t
O./. "'r!
I.;,, tYN-: TC FC.;.;!!U!,; ~j:i . .:. :X'. 1/ ,':: . \)~ ... / : : 1
1.30 :,;.IX: . ;iili~: '...:. 'iii '.' :_;..,,~r:":::: : I: :A. [f!'! :::1
V:" . 'K.'i,;,;"c, , .'
., ...
::v:,~I;;"':,:,
i':"""""
:!.....:
:;'L!iY;:::t,' I,.:"';:::::::''''' .. " ' ' ' ' ,":':' z"

I! i1::'"
1:. ' "I i f; :i i! . . ", ,::j'" ;U ::i' .... "",. X' ::; :1 ,'K:D
!"
:.,
".:
.200.25..... j" ...
.
,:':."".,.",.1...
,'.......
.
' ''1':.
, '.' .:.. :'N':.'
i
'' : ;:.i::
..'. ... ::,J!r::""'"
.:
.
l
.
,:,.:!
':.'!::!: f.ii'!
' .., : ,.:,,;-:1:
j.:;
:'. "
:: ; Ii : !:
:i:
'.' .. :::
0.5
1.0
2.0
4.0
RATIO OF VERTICAL TO HORIZONTAL REINF.. P /P

v H
Figure 4-74
Post-failure coefficient C for an element fixed on three

f
edges and one edge free
EllDC
.-
-,
,I
2.20
2.10
.0
'
2.00 " .. ,
T
Q
>C
....
IZ
1&1
...,,
1.80
It
1&1
1.70
'IZ
1.60
..,
1.90
1&1
(!)
II::
u,
1.50
1&1
II::
:::l
.J
1.40
-e'
IL
1.30
I-
fI)'
1.20
0.25
0.5,
1.0
2.0
4.0
,RATIO, OF VERTICAL TO HORIZONTAL ~EINF:, PV/P

H
Figure 4-75
~ost-failure
coefficient C
edges
for an element fixed on four
TH 5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR
88~22
STRUCTtJ!lALBEHAVIOR TO PRIMARY FRAGMENT IMPACT

4-59. Introduction
4-59.1. Fragment Characteristics
Detonation of cased explosives results in. the formation of primary fragmen,s
due to the shattering of the casing. These fragments are us~ally small in
size and initially travel at velocities, in the order of thousands of feet per
second. Upon contact with a barrier, the fragments will, either pas~ through
(perforate), be, embedded. in (penetrate with or' without spalling), or be
deflected by the barrier. The resulting effect is dependent; on the interac-,
tion of the following 'factors: ' (1) the magnitu~e of the initial velocity, . (2)
the distance between the explosion and the barrier, (3) the angleat which the
fragment strikes the'barrier (angle of obliquity), a~d (4) th~,physical
properties of the fragment (mass, shape and material strength) and the barrier
(concrete strength and ,thickness).
4-59.2. Velocity and Impact Limitations
This section deals with ~he situation. where a.fragment with given properties
strikes a barrier element with a known velocity and where the angle of
obliquity between the traje6tory path ,of the fragment and a normal to the
surface of the barrier is zero degrees (normal impact). The striking velocity
of the fragment is assumed equal to its initial velocity for a detonation in
close proximity to. the element or is determined according to the procedure in
Chapter 2 for cases where the fragment travels a distance greater than 20
feet.
.
4-60. Fragment Impact on Concrete
4-60.1 .. General
When a primary fragment strikes a concrete barrier, penetration resisting
pressures, in the order of thousands ~f psi, act on' the cross-sectional area
of the fragment. For a given mass of the fragment, as the striking velocity
is increased, the resisting pressures also increase, while for an increase in
the cross-sectional area of the fragment, the resisting pressures decrease.
If the fragment can withstand these' pressures acting on its,frontal surface,
then the amount of penetration will be governed 'by its mass, shape, and
striking velocity. On the other hand, if the fragment deforms under the
applied loads, then the resisting pressures in the c9ncrete become effective
over an increased cross-sectional area, thereby reducing,the possible penetration for a given available kinetic energy of the fragment. Generally, larger
penetrations may be expected with less ductile"metals, such as fragments from
armor piercing casings.
As,afragment impinges on a wall surface, a section of the wall adjacent to
the point of impact spalls, forming a crater around .the impact area (Fig. 476). 'This crater is conical in shape but irregular. As the striking velocity
of the fragment increases, the size of the crater also increases. At small
velocities, the increase in the crater size for a given velocity increment is
more rapid than at high~r velocities in the order of several thousand feet per
second. At a striking velocity of approximately 1,000 feet per second or
less, the fragment does not usually penetrate beyond the depth of the crater,
4-205
TN 5-l300/NAVFAC P~397/AFR 88-22

.whi~e
for larger velocities, the fragrnentpenetrates beyond the front of the

crater and either lodges within or passes through the barrier.
A crater similar to that formed on the front face of the barrier is also
produced on the back side if the kinetic energy of the fragment upon impact is
sufficient to produce excessive tensile stresses in the concrete.
As in the
case of the front-face crater the size of the crater'on the back'ace in- .
creases with an increase in striking velocity of a particular fragment. The
back-Face crater'is generally wider and shallower t.harr-che front-face crater,
though again the surface of the crater is irregular. Quite often, the kinetic
energy afforded by' the striking fragment is orrl.y sufficient to dislodge the
concrete on the exterior side
of the rear face reinforcement.
In this case,, .
-" f
,
.
';.
only spallingwill occur. As the striking velocity is increased beyond th~,
limit to cause_spalling, the penetration of the fragment into the slab"
increases more and'moreruntil perforation isattained~
- 'J'
4-60.2. Penetration by Armor-Piercing Fragments

A certain amount of experimental data, which is analogous to primary fragment'
penetration, has been accumulated in connection with projects to determine the
effects of bombs and projectile impact on concrete structures. This data has
been analyzed in order to develop relationships for the amount of fragment
penetration into concrete elements in terms of the physical properties"of both
the metal fragment and the concrete. A general expression for the maximum
penetration into a massive concrete slab (i.e.'a slab'with infinite thickness)
by an armor-piercing fragment ,has been obtained as follows::
Xf - 4.0x 10. 3 (KND)0.5 d l. l v s 0.9
for Xf
X~ 4.0 x 10- 6 KND d l. 2 v s l. 8 + d
for Xf > 2d
:5
4-195
2d,
4-196
and
K - 12.91/(f c)1/2
4-197
where:
Xf
penetration by armor-piercing steel fragments

penetrability constant
'.
.
N'-
.' nose shape factor as 'de f Lnad in Figure 4- 77
:'
D
cali~er
fragment diameter'
vs
striking velocity
density as defined'in Figure 4-77
For the standard primary fragment and concrete strength f'e equal to 4,000
psi, Equations 4-195 and 4-196: reduce to the following equations in ternfs of,
fragment diameter
(in) and ,the striking velocity s (fps):
. ,
,
Xf - 2.86 x 1O-3 d 1. l v s 0.9
for Xf
2d
'4-198
Xf -' 2,04 x 10- 6 d1. 2 v s 1. 8 + d
for' Xf > 2d
4-199
..
:5
.
4-206
,r..
TK
5-l300/~AVFAC
P-397/AFR 88-22
Equations 4-198 and 4-199 can also, be expressed in. terms of fragment weight
(standard shape) as: .
-,.-
.,
0,37 v 0.9
for Xf
1.92 x 10- 3 101 fi
s
101 0 . 4 v 1.8 + 0.695,W 0.33
Xf-, 1. 32 x 10-6 .f
, s
f
Xf
2d
.jt
! ~
4-201
for Xf >. 2d
II "
- '.
4-200
,..-
'"
Figure 4-78 is ..: p Lot; .of the'maximum pen:etr'ation of a s1:and;'id fragment

through 4,000 psi concrete for various fragment weights arid"str1kihg velocities.
Maximum penetration of fragments in concrete of strength~_.other than .4,000
psi, may be calculated using the '\(alue~. of Xff.rom. Equadon 4- fqo ,,4-201 or
Figure 4-78 and the following equation:
>'.
.4- 202
.,
where:
Xf
X'f
maximum penetration into (>,000. psi concrete

maximum penetration into concrete with compressive strength
;. equal to f' c .
't:
In addition to the weight and striking velocity of a primary fragment, its

shape will also .atfect the resulti!.'g penetration. The sharpen the leading
edge of a fragment; the greater the distance traveled through the concrete.
The shape indicated in Figure .4-77 is not necessarily the' most critical. When
the container,of'an explosive. shatters, it is statistically probable that some
of the resulting .,fragment'! will have a 'sharper shape .chan the st~ndard bullet
shape assumed in, this manual. lJowever, the ..numbercof these fragments is
usually very small in comparison to the tota! number formed, .and the.probability that these sharper fragments will have normal penetrations though the
concrete is low. In most instances, the majority.of the primarY'f;~gments
will have a more blunt shape than that shown. Therefore, for design purposes,
the normal penetrations defined for a;bullet-shaped fra.gment can usually be
assumed as critical.
4-60.3. Penetration of Fragments Other than Armor-Piercing
.'
d'
To estimate the concrete penetration of metal fragments other than armorpiercing, a procedure has been developed where the concrete 'penetrating
capab Ll Lt Les of armor-pierCing fragments haye been r e l ated. to those of other
metal fragments. This relationship is expressed in terms of reiative metal'
hardness (the ability of the metal to resist deformation) and density,' and is
represented, bythei.c~nstant, in Equat.Lcn 4-2<)3. ..'
._
4-203
4-207
TK S-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22'

where:
X'f
'maximum penetration in concrete of metal'fragments other

than armor-piercing fragments
constant depending on 'the casing' metal,' from Table 4-16:,

r
-.(.."
maximum penetr~tton of armor-piercing fragment'
Xf
It should be noted that Xf is calculated from'Equation 4-200, 4-201 or Figure

4-78 i~ f'c -,4~000,psi, and f~om Equation 4-202 when Xf is modified for
concrete strengths odler than 4,000 psi.
,",'
' . :
,-':
.... ..~
4-60.4. Perforation of Concrete

' .
. ' .
"
Quite often the'magnitude

of the' initial
kinetic
energy
primary:
fragments
,
'
;"
.
,
.of
.
. .
.
will be'large. enough to produce perforation of the concrete.' The depth of'
penetration Xf of a fragment into massive concrete is less than into a wall of
finite thickness'due to the high resisting stresses afforded by the massive
concrete. Consequently, the concrete thickness required to prevent perforation is always greater than the depth of penetration Xf into massive concrete.
The minimum thickness of concrete required to prevent"perforation can be
expressed in terms of the equivalent depth of penetration into massive
concrete and the fragment size according to the following relationship:
~
".
-;
4-204
where:
minimum thickness of concrete to prevent'perforation by a
,given ,fragment,'
'depth'of penetration' corrected for concrete 'strength,and
,
..
, "fragment mater'ial
...
'.-
"
Fragments which perforate a 'concrete element will have 'a residual/velocity

which may endanger the receiver system. 'The magnitude of this velocity may be
approximated ,from ,the expression which defines the velocity of the' fragment at
,!ny time as it penecraees the concrete.
., t:'
.'
".
"
'"
, For cases where Xf' is less than 2d: .

'
'[
,4-205
1 ',0
and for cases where' Xf, is greater, ~han 2d:'
c / Tpf)]
(T
where:
0.555
. 4-206
."- ,
J'
thickness of the concrete, less than'or

vr
"
equar't~ Tpf
residual velocity of fragment as it leaves the,element
4-208
.,
Plo'ts' of v r' /
5-l300/NAVFACP-397/AFR 88-22
s against: Tc / Tp f a,!c"rding to Equations

4-79 and 4-80, re~pectively.
4~205,and
4-206 are
pres~~ted in~Figures
4-60.5: ~s.palling due to F~agment Imp~~t
"
When a primary fragment traveling at a high velocity strikes the donor surface
of a concrete barrier, large compression stresses are produced in the vicinity
of the point of impact. These stresses form a compression wave which travels
from the impact point,expanding spherically 'until it reaches the back face
e l.ement, At this fr~e surface, the compression 'wave is refl'ecte'd, (reverseg in
direction and changed from a compression wave to a tension wave). Whe~ the
stresses in the resulting tension'wave exceed the tensile capacity of the
concrete, spalling of the c,oncrete at:the receiver,surface occ~:r~. The
spalling forms a crater on the recei.ver surface.' This crate~ does not usually
penetrate beyond ,the reinforcement, at the receiver surface,
The occur renee of spalling Is a function of the fragment pene t r at.Lon ; '1. e. ,
the fragment must penetrate a barrier element to ,such a depth that suffi'
cien~ly large stress~s,are formed at the receiv~r surface to produce spalling.
If the thickness of the, element is increased above the critical thickness at
which spalling occurs, for a particular t:rag';'';nt, rhen t:he spaiiing is eliminated'. ':On 'the: other ,hand, concrete .spa Ll.Lng always occurs ,with j'ragment '
perforation. The minimum.'thickness of con<~rete barrier required, to p r event;
spalling 'due to penetration of a given fragment can be expressed in terms of
thefragme?t penetration , into massive concrete~nd the fragment diameter:
Ts p -1.2l5Xf dO. l
+ 2.l2d
4-207
whe re ;
minimum concrete thickness to prevent spalling

depth of
.pene~~ation"corrected.jforconcrete stren~th
fragment materi~l
and
'
The' secondary fragment velocities ass~ciated with spalling r~sulting from

fragment impact are usually small (less than 5 fps). "However, when blast
pressures are also involved, the magnitude of the resulting velocities can be
quite large. The secondary concrete fragments are accelerated by the motion
of the ~arrier resulting in,possible fragment velocities up to several hundred
feet per second,
"
Because of tJ:1e potentially large secondary ,fragment velocities associated with

primary fragment impact" .full protection .Ls usually, required for personnel,
valuable equipment, and sensitive explosives. This protection may be ac-,
complished either byproviding sufficient concrete thickness to eliminate
spalling or by othe~ m~chanical means used to minimize the effects of spalling
resulting ,from blast pressures as described in section 4-56. The required
concrete thickness to eliminate spalling caused by primary fragment impact may
be obtained from Equation 4-207.
,
4-61.
Fragment Impact on Composite Construction
4-61.1. General To evaluate the effect of primary fragments on composite

(concrete-sand-concrete) barriers, the penetration of the fragment through
both the concrete and sand must be considered. For damage to be sustained at
4-209
TN
5~1300/NAVFAC
P-397/AFR 88-22
the rear, of a composite barrier a fragment must first perforate both the donor
concrete pane l and the sand , and then penetrate or perforate the receiver "
panel. If the fragment penetrates only part of the way through the receiver
panel, then spalling may'or may not occur, ,depending on the panel thickness.
Obviously, fragment perforation' of the receiver panel' indicates perforation of
the entire barrier.
'
'
4-61.2. Penetration of Composite Barriers

,
To determine the degree of damage at the receiver' side, t~~ penetration of the
fragment in each section of the barrier must be investigated in sequence.
Starting with the striking velocity and the weight of the primary fragment,
the donor concrete sectibn is first analyzed to determine whether or not '
perforation of that section occurs. If the'calculations indicate that the
fragment will stop within this section, then no damage will be sustained by
the remainder of the barrier. On the other hand, if perforation does occur in
the forward (donor) section, then the fragment penetration through the sand
must be investigated.
The amount of the penetration through the sand depends upon the magnitude of
the residual velocity as the fragment leaves the rear of the donor panel.
This residual velocity is determined from'Figures 4-79'and 4-80 utilizing ,the
striking velocity, the thickness of the donor panel; and the theoretical
maximum fragment penetration obtained from'Figure 4-78.
'
The maximum penetration through massive sand is obtained from Equation 4-208,
using the residual velocity calculated above as the
, striking velocity of the
fragment on the surface of the sand.
Xs - 1.188 Dd In (1 + 2.16 x 10- 3 v s 2 )
4-208
where:
Xs
penetration of 'the fragment "into 'the sand
Substituting the caliber density D for a standard shape (Fig. 4-77),

4-208 becomes:
E~uation
4-209
A plot of ' Equation 4-209 for a range of fragment weights and striking properties is shown in Figure 4-81. If the penetration in the sand is found to be
less than the thickness of the sand layer, no damage is sustained at the rear
surface of the barrier. In case of perforation, the penetration of the frag~
ment into the rear section (receiver) of, the ,barrier is governed'by the residual velocity as the fragment leaves the 'sand. This residual velocity is .
calculated in a manner similar to that used for computing the residual
velocity for the donor panel, except that the 'fragment penetration and
striking velocity are those associated with movement of the fragment through
the 'sand, that is:
4-210
where:
actual thickness of the sand layer
4-210
;., .
.....
TK5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

Figure 4-80 can be used to calculate the residual velocIty of a fragment
perforating the sand layer.
Similar to the fragment penetration through the donor panel and sand, penetration of the fragment through the receiver panel is a function of the magnitude
of the fragment velocity as the fragment strikes the forward surface of the
panel. This velocity is equal to the residual velocity as the fragment leaves
the sand. Once the penetration in the receiver panel ill known, then the dam~
age sustained at the rear of the composite barrier can be defined in terms of
either spalling or fragment perforation.
<:.
, 'J
.. .
<
r
'.'
.j
..
.,,')
:: '.0'
DONOR SURFACE
I ".
.. :.
~~:
r~XIS OF PENETRATION
~F PRIMARY FRAGMENT
FRONT CRATER
...;.: .. ~
..
~..
-...."
': ..
"
.~.
"0.
.:."
~'.:
....
~.
_,
:?:
.... '.=:.
. '. ,
'.
.
','
Figure 4-76
REAR CRATER
RECEIVER SURFACE
','
.: t',
Perforation and spalling of concrete due to
primary fragments
4-212'
.
..
..
/"
y
d = DIAMETER OF CYLINDRICAL
PORTION OF FRAGMENT
r = RADIUS OF HEMISPHERICAL
PORTION OF FRAGMENT
r =
2"
D= CALIBER DENSITY. Wf Id 3 - 2.976 oz.lin.3
Wf = FRAGMENT WEIGHT
N = NOSE SHAPE FACTOR = 0.72 + 0.25
In, -0.25
n = CALIBER RADIUS OF THE TANGENT OGIVE

OF THE FRAGMENT NOSE = rid
..
Figure 4-77
Shape of- standard primary fragments
4-213
= 0.B45
NUMBERS NEXT TO
CURVES INDICATE
,. ,
FRAGMENT WEIGHT, WI (oz.ll~ '~
50 L
P-'>'h"7.''>1
C~.o.r.~:.I.e..=.~,o.?o.~.si ..
10.0
c' . 8.0
L.
30i--:.-ri:_
,
I
6.0
4.0
,!.
20,'-: :.. _; _..:._. ,-.. :-.:.
2.0
LO
:I:
~
0..
0.5
0.3
0.1
....
1
"1
,
2 r-
.:..1
;.
..-... ~ ..-_._._- _.-:- .._-_._-.----_!
. .
..!
I ': j
..,.._....: i...__ _L. ....1...__.j
2000
4000
6000
8000
vs , STRIKING VELOCITY, Ips

Figure 4-78
Concrete penetration chart for armor-piercing

steel fragments
,.
4-214
1.2
1.0
0.8
...
.....
0.6
.,
0.4
0.2
..
,.
,'
',0.2
0.4
0.6
0,8
1.0
1.2
RESIDUAL VELOCITY,j STRIKING .VELOCITY I Vr IVs
....
Figure 4-79
Residual fragment velocity upon perforation of concrete

barriers (for cases where x < 2d)
4-215
1.0
0.8

.....
~
Ct:.
0.6
....
1-0.
<,
0.4
0.2
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
RESIDUAL VELOCITY I STRIKING VELOCITY.
Figure 4-80
1.0
v; IVs
Residual fragment velocity upon perforation of

(1) Concrete barriers (for cases where x > 2d)
(2) sand layers
4-216
1.2
e
10,00011
0.5
':11'
ITT
, ' . II
i!
Ii i t !
'j"
, it'
: 1 '1
; i :
,
i
,
I
,._
I I
-ti-r,'
-"';--'-4-
r:
I i
1.0
2.0
3.0
5.0
e
7.5
10
20
15
I'
25
30
I. I
!
,
t
i,
"i-:-"'~
-1_
i J 1 _I' i .
iL11
!I j"I
1
I'
.i
8,000
I.I
! t!"j
I!l
Ul
...a.
>-
h+:
.,.,
,.,;
....
.....
6,000
-I' -i-,I"
1. t
1\ :
II!
. -i I ;
__:... ,
~+_+-;
'j' TT
.
i -I-LI '1' '.
"!"!"
"'. -'It
,- " l .-,,-, -r-:
I,
I
I,
,-
I-
._1 ..
(J
--l
W
>
(.\I
:><:
II::
I1Il
- - _. -
20
30
40
50
MAXIMUM
"'.
". .'"
--
60
PENETRATION
- - .. ,
-",.
70
I
_.
80
90
(In.)
NOTE: NUMBERS NEXT TO CURVES INDICATE FRAGMENT WEIGHT, ( ca.)

Figure 4-81
Depth of penetration into sand by standard primary fragments
100
Table 4-16
Relative.Penetrability-Coefficients for Various Missile Materials
. ..
Type of- Metal
Constant k
Armor-piercing steel
1.00
Mild steel
0.70
Lead
0.50.
Aluminum
0.15
-,
4-2~8
TM 5-l300/NAVFAC P~397/AFR 88-22

V.'
CONSTRUCTION DETAILSAND,PROCEDURES,
4-62. Introduction
A major portion of the detailing, and construction"procedures required for
structures designed to resist blast pressures is the same'as required for
structures designed conventionally. However, some differences do exist and "
neglecting them would result in an unsafe situation, since,the structure 'would
not act as assumed in the des Lgn, ,These sections descrIbe -the differences in
construction. Particular 'attention is directed towards: the construction . of,
structures subjected to close,-in blast effects (elements reinforced with
lacing or single leg stirrups) but the construction of conventionally reinforced elements, flat slabs and composite elements is "Iso discussed.
Although the,construction of blast resistant structures is'similar- to conventional structures, some changes in the fabrication and construction procedures
are required to insure full development of both the 'concrete and the reinforcement well ,into the range of plastic action of the'various elements. Since
these changes primarily affect the reinforcement rather than the concrete, the
major portion of the following discussion pertains to reinforcing steel
,
details. Typical details are presented to illustrate detailing procedures and
design considerations. These details "may not be applicable to all design
situations, and may-have'to'be modified by the engineers, within the guidelines
given below.
4-63. Concrete
,
.'
'
The dynamic characteristics and high magnitude-of' the applied blast load
require the strength of the conc rat.a-uaed in blast resistant' construction to
be higher than, that . required for -convent Ional, construction . ' -Because' of the
flexural ' action of blast resistant elements while ' large deflections are
required and the high pressures associated with blast loadings, it is recommended that a minimum concrete strength ,of 4,000'psi beused .
. ! .:
The properties and testing of the concrete materials (cement, aggregate,

water) used in blast resistant concrete construction are the--same as those
normally used and should conform' to the'standards specified'in the ACI
Building Code . High early-strength Portland cement; (type IIll'may be used.
To minimize the ,effects of spalling, 'it is recommended that the size of the'
aggregate used be not ,greater than 1 inch.' This limitation of the aggregate
size also facilitates the' placement of the concrete, particularly-where the
cover over the reinforcement is held to a minimum. In all cases, the minimum
conr.rete cover should;conform to that, specified in the ACI Building Code and,
wh~rever possible,;should also be the maximum thickness,of tne concrete' cover.
B""ause of the large amounts of',flexural reinforcement and, in laced elements,
the presence'of lacing reinforcement, the'concrete slump used iS'usually
larger than that permitted for conventional construction: A'concrete slump of
4 to 6 inches is recommended for laced elements to insure that concrete voids
do not occur.
..
Wherever possible, both horizontal and vertical construction-joints' should be

avoided. A wall'whose height is equal to or less' than ,10 feet usually can be
poured without a horizontal joint. On the other hand, good construction
4-219
TII,5-l300/NAVFAC Pc397/AFR 88,-22

techniques and economy may require the use of horizontal joints for higher
walls. These joints should be located at points of, low str~ss intensity. A
more detailed discussion' of joint locations is given later in sections.
4-64. Flexural Reinforcement
The flexural reinforcement, used ,in blast resistant'constructio~'shouldbe
designateo as. ASTM A 615, Grade 60. Slabs must,be reinforced in two mutually
perpendicular directions. 'In all elements, the'reinforcement should be
cont~nuous
in. any direction.
AII.flexural
reinforc~ment
should consist of
straight bars, and bends in, the reinforcing within the' spanof'an element
should, be, avoided. However, the reinforcement may be bent well within the
eLemerrt ' s supports when additional anchorage' is required.)
.
.
The spacing of flexural bars is 'governed by the required area of th~ reinforcing steel, the selected bar size and, as discussed later, the spacing required
to achieve a working and economical arrangement of lacing reinforcement and ,
single leg stirrups. In general, flexural bars should lie' 'spaced fairly close
together to insure that the cracked concrete between the layers of reinforcement,will not be dislodged from the element. Tests have indicated that a
maximum spacing of approximately 15 inches will insure confinement of the,
concrete.
Because of their reduced ductility, reinforcing'steel larger than No. 14 bars

(No. 18) should not be ,used as flexural,'reinforcement in blast resistant
elements. Also, th~ 'size of the flexural steel should be at least equal to a'
No. 4 bar. Where necessary, the area of steel normally furni~hed by the
special large bars should be provided by bundling smaller bars. However, the
use of these bundled bars should be limited to 'one direction only," for any
laced element. If bundled bars are used i'\ an, element Whose',main 'span is
between two opposite supports: then all bars of each bundle should be con-
t Lnuous -across the full, span.
On che co ther ihand , if the main span is' between
a support and a free edge, then bundled bars may be cut off at points of '
reduced stress. At least, one bar in each bundle should be continuous across
the full span. For two-way elements these 'cutoffs must, be located beyond 'the
positive, yield line with sufficient anchorage to dev~lop the,bars. '
Continuous reinforcement ,should be used, in, blast' resistant elements. b~t,in
many cases, this, is .:.. physical impossibility. Therefore, splicing of the
reinforcement is necessary. Splices should be,located in regions of reduced
stress and their number held to a minimum by using tne longest reinforcing,
"
bars practical (bars 60 feet in length are generklly available throughout the
country). Tests have indicated that the preferable method of splicing
flexural reinforcement in laced.concrete elements is' by lapping the reinforc-,
ing bars. The length of' each lap should be at least equal ,tp 40 diameters of
the larger of the two bars spliced, but not lessthan 2 feet ,(usually the same
size bars will be spliced). In addition, splices of adjacent parallel bars
should be staggered,toprevent the formation of a plane of weakness. Figur~
4-82 illustrates typical splicing. patterns for -bo rh single, and bundled bars
used in the close-in
. . .design range.
.
.,
" .... '
In conventionally reinforced' (non-laced) concrete elements used in the far.
design range, .a two' bar splice pattern is used. The length. ~f the lap splices
must be calculated to ensure full development of the reinforcement. If the"
splices occur in regions of low stress,.the length of the lap 'is taken ,as 40
4-220
A
.,
bar diameters. Lap splices of No. l4'bars are not permitted in either laced
or non-laced concrete elements.
Mechanical splices may also be used, but they must be capab Le of developing
the ultimate .s t rengch of the reinforcement without reducing ,its ductility,. If
the bar deformations have to be ,removed in the 'preparation of these splices,
grinding rather than heat should be employed since heat can alter the chemical
properties thereby changing 'the physical properties of the steel and possibly
reducing the capacity of ,the element., Welding of 'the re~nforcement should, be
prohibited unless it can be determined that the combination of weld and
'
reinforcement steel will not result in' a ,reduction' of tne Mltimate strength
and ductility. In'those cases where 'welding is absolutely essential, it may
be necessary to obtain ,special reinforcement manufactured with controlled
chemical properties.
'
4-65. Construction Details' for "Far'Range" Design

4-65.1. General
Unlaced reinforced concrete elements arergene rel l.y used in those facilities
designed'to resist explosive output at the far design range. The facilities
generally, consist of shelter-type structures:',
Blast resistant structures utilizing unlaced 'reinforced concrete construction
will only differ from conventional construction insofar as the increased
magnitude and reversibility 'of applied loads 'are concerned.'These differences
are reflected in the details of ,the blast' resistant "s t r'uc trirr e-, An increase in
the amount of reinforcement is'required to resist the'iarge dynamic loads:
Also, the reinforcement at both 'surfaces of ,an element must be detailed to'
prevent failure due to ~rebound stresses.
.'
"
In general, conventionally reinforced elements are limited to deflections

corresponding to support rotations of 2 degrees or less., However, elements
designed for far range effects are capable of attainingdeflections'up,to 4
degrees through the use of single leg'stirrups and up 'to 8 degrees by developing tension membrane ,action. Elements 'subject to close,in effects'require
stirrups and are limited to 2 degrees support rotations. Details ar'e presented below for elements designed for -limited deflections', elements acting
under tension membrane action and columns., For elements 'subjected to low and
intermediate pressure and reinforced with stirrups, the details given below
may be used without modification. However, details for elements with stirrups
and subject' to high pres'sur'e s are dt scussedtn the following, sec t Lon..
"
<..
. . "
4-65.2. Elements Designed for Limited D~ftect1ons

Construction and detailing of'unlaced, blast resistant structures is very
similar to conventional structures. The major difference iS,the method of
anchoring the reinforcement. , A typical section through a n~n-laced wall is
shown in Figure 4-83. At the roof-wall intersection, the exterior wall
reinforcement is continued through the 'regions of high s~ress 'and lap spliced'
with the roof reinforcement in the vicinlty <if the point ,of in~lection., Thus,
the reinforcement is:not actually anchored but rather developed. The interior
reinforcement <if both wall and roof is terminated"J;'ith a ,s'taridard hook in '
order to be effective in resisting rebound~ensi<in forces, However, this
reinforcement will be in compression during the initial ph~se of loading and
4,221
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC
P-397/AFR'~8-22
therefore, the straight portion of the bar must be sufficient to develop the
reinforcement in compression .
The bottom floor slab reinforcement is extended through the floor-wall
intersection into the wall in the,same manner as the .roof-wall intersection.
Again the reinforcement is developed, into the wall .. The vertical wall
reinforcement is supported on the floor slab rather than supported above the
floor slab on thereinforcement. Figure 4~83 illustrates a building ,with a
'slab-on-grade foundation. Figure. 4-84 illustrates several alternative
arrangements.
A horizontal section.through the intersection through two discontinuous. walls

(Fig. 4.-85) would reveal details very similar to those shown for the roof,wall
intersection. The number of splices used would. depend on the length of,each
wall.
Wherever possible, continuous reinforcement should be used. Lap, slices' ma~ be

used when necessary but their number should be held to a minimum and they must
be located in regions of reduced stress. To prevent the formation of a plane
of weakness, splices on adjacent parallel bars must be staggered. In addition, the splice pattern for the. reinforcement on -,opposite faces of an element
should not be in the same location. Figures 4,86 and 4-87 illustrate preferred splice locations for a two-way slab' and ,a multi,span slab respectively.
4-65.3. Elements Designed for Large Deflections
..
'
Unlaced concre ce.vs Labs are capable of attaining deflections up to 8 degrees

support rotation through the development of tension.membrane action. Construction details are basically the same whether the .slab attains large or small .
deflections, however, there are two important exceptions. At large deflec-'
tions, tension membrane action produces large tensile strains in both tension
and "compression" reinforcement. Therefore, all anchorage lengths and lap
splice lengths must be calculated for the design stress fds and all the
reinforcement is in tension. The second difference,. in detailing concerns the
location of splices. Although 'splices should still be located in regions of
low flexural stress, they will be, located in regions of high tensile stress
when the element attains its full tension,membrane capacity. The length of,
the lap splice must, therefore, be increased to 1. 3 times the modified .
development length given in Section 4-21.4 of. a reinforcing bar Ln-j.ens Lon,
4-65.4. Column Details
.. 0;'1
Columns are, generally r'equ l red in blast r e's Lstant , .shear wall structures. r,
Their details differ little from those used in conventional structures. Both
round, spiral reinforced c?lumns.and, ~ect~ngular, tied columns can be used,
but one or the other is preferred for a given design situation. Details of
the reinforcement and formwork of rectangular cqlumns are compatible with beam
details and, therefore, are reco~ended fqr beam-slab. roof systems. Round
columns should be ,used for flat sla~ roofs.
.
."
.\
Figure 4-88 illustrates a typical se~tion through a circular column with.a "
capita\. supporting a flat slab. A round' column prevents stress concentrations
that may cause. local, failures. ,The column capital .. altho,!gh not required" is
preferred:since it,simplifies the. placement ,of the diagonal bars as well as I
decreasing shear stresses. All diagonal bar svshouLd extend into the column.
4-222 .
TK 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

,
"
If, however,. the number and/or size of the diagonal bars do not permit all the
bars to extend into the column, up to half the bars may be cut off in the
capital as shown. Lateral reinforcement of a circular column consists of
spiral reinforcement beginning at the top of the floor slab and extending to
the underside of the drop panel or the underside of rhe roof. slab if no drop
panel is used. Within the column capital, No.4 hoop reinforcement at 6
inches on centeromust enclose the diagonal.bars.
In a.beam-slab system, beam reinforcement does not permit the addition of
diagonal bars at the top of the column. Therefore, th" beams themselves must
be able to provide adequate shear strength. Closed t i e s provide lateral c,
support of the longitudinal reinforcement in rectangular columns. The ties
must.,start not more than '5 tie spacing above the top of the floor slab and' end
not more than 3 inches below the lowest reinforcement in the shallowest beam.
The ties must.be arranged so that, every corner and alternate longitudinal bar
has the lateral support provided.by the corner. of a til> having an included
angle 'no more than.135 d~grees. In addition, no 'longitudinal bar shall be
farther than 6 inches clear on either side from such a laterally supported
bar.
The column footing illustrated. in' Figure 4-88 is the same fo, both rectangular
and circular columns. Dowels anchor the column into its footing; .Since there
is little or no moment- at the bottom of the column, splices need not -be
staggered. as, they are in a 'wal'L . The splice should 'be able to fully develop
the reinforcement in" tension in order to resist~rebound tension forces.
Within.the column, no splices of the.longitudinal reinforcement are permitted,
Continuous reinforcement should not be,a problem as blast resistant structures
are' limited to one and two-story buildings.

,.
4-66. Construction Details for "Close~In Design"
4-66. L General
Laced reinforced concrete elements are usually used in those facilities which
are designed to resist the explosive output of close-in detonations (highintensity pressures.with short duratlonsj. The functional requirements of
these facilities (storage and/or manufacture of explosives). normally dictate
the use of one-story concrete buildings wi'th austere architecture. Basically,
these structures consist of'a series of inte~connecting structural elements
(walls, floor slabs, and/or roofs) forming several 'compartments or cubicles.
Because of this cubicle arrangement, the walls separating the individual areas
are the' predominant 'element used in .Laced construction and are the most'
critical component in the design. However, in soinecases, the roof and/or
floor slab can be of equal importance .
'.
Single leg stirrups may replace lacing bars when the scaled normal distance
between' the charge and the element is equal to or'greater .than 1.0 ft/lb s l I.3.
However, the maximum allowable support rotation for el.ements with slngle leg
stirrups is less than for laced elements. Single leg stirrups are more
economical to 'fabrlcate and slightly more economical to place during construction: Unlike laced reinforcement which requires that the position of the
flexural reinforcement be changed to suit the horizontal and vertical laclng,
the position' of the flexural reinforcement remai'ns constant for single leg:
stirrups. The stirrups are. tied around the 'outer' bars whether"they 'are
4-223
TN 5-1300jNAVFAC
" . . P-397/AFR 88-22
.
horizontal, or ",v~r'ti~aL ,'Details for' flexural reinforcement, splice location
and length;etc., are 'the same for single leg stirrups and laced reinforcement.
4-66.2. Laced Ele~ent8.
4-66.2.1. Lacing Reinforcement
All flexural reinforcing bars must be'tied with continuous diagonal lacing
bars (Fig. 4-89). At any particular section of an element, the longitudinal
or main tension and compression reinforcement is placed to the interior of the
transverse or secondary flexural reinforcing steel around which the diagonal
lac ing bars are. bent.
'
., .
Cacing reinforcement must be fabricated without the formation of excessive
stress concentrations at the bends. The bending should be performed without
the use of heat, and in no case should the','radius of the pin used to bend the
lacing be less than four timesthe diameter of the bar. Figure 4-90 il-'
lustrates, the typical lacing bends used with both single and bundled flexural
bars.
The amount of lacing reinforcement required iri an element depends upon the
element's capacity (quantity and distribution of flexural reinforcement,
. thickness of the element, and the type' and number of supports). while the' size
of the lacing bars is'a function of the required area and spacing. The
.
maximum and minimum size of the"lacingbars should be No.8 and No.3 bars,
respectively. However, the.preferred maximum size of lacing'bar is No .. 6.
Several lacing schemes have been developed (Fig. 4-91) which avoid excessive
stress con~entrations .as .a result of large angular bends, provide adequate
restraint against buckling of the compression reinforcement, andmake use of
the most efficient arrangement'of,the;laclng reinforcement (lacing making an
angle of 45. degrees with the longitudinal reinforcement is most efficient).
In these scheme s, the transverse flexural.reinforcement mayor may not be tied
at every intersection with a longitudinal bar. However, a grid system is
established.~hereby,bar intersections are tied within a distance sl or 2 feet,
whichever is less. The choice of the scheme to be used depends upon the
flexural bar spacing and the thickness of the element.so that the angle a is
approximately equal to, but never les~ than, 45 degrees. Although not tying
every transverse flexural bar results in a large lacing bar ';'ize, the total
cost of the lacing may'be reduced since thesize of the lacing bend associated
with an increase :in the spacing sl reduces ~he.overall length of the bar and
the number of bends required to cover a given longitudinal dd st.ance ..
Anadditiorial cost' saving in the fabrication of the lacing may be realized by
utilizing the equipment that is used to bend the steel bars for open web steel
joists. However, when detailing the flexural and lacing reinforcement and,the
concrete wall thickhess,' consideration must be given to the physical capabilities (size of bend ~nd bar, depth of lacing, etc.) of the equipment. Alteration of'vbar' joist' equipment to meet the requirements of a d~sign is not usually practical with; respect to both. time and cost.
The placement of the lacing depends upon the distribution of the flexural
reinforcement and the number and type of supports. Lacing is always placed
'perpendicular to the element's suppprts to resist diagonal tension stresses.
Rec~use .of the'nonuniformity,of the blast loads associated with close,in
detonations, continuous lacing across the span. length should be used to
4-224

distribute.the loads. Exc~pt for ,ca~tileveF' elements, lacing in one-way
elements is placed in, the direction 9,f a~d s~ntinuous across the span,
Canti~ever ,elements require lacing in two directions., Discontinuous, ,lacing is
located perpendicular and adjacent ,to the support ,while continuous lacing is
placed across the ,full width of the ' element in direction parallel a~d adjacent
to t~e free edge located opposite the element's 'support. For two-way elements, diagonal tension stresses must be resisted in two. directions. Because
of interference, lacing can orily be continuous in one direction, which in
general is in the direction of the longest span. Figure 4-92 illustrates the
location of the lacing used in a cant~lever wall as well as in several tw~-way
elements. For two-way elements ,.th.. .LocatiLori of .the .LacLng is 'not affected by,
the tyPe of supports., Therefore, the suppor~s indicated, in Figure 4-92 can be
simple, restrained; or fully fixed.
Similar to the flexural reinforcement, lacing will usually require.spIJces.
Tests have indicated'that the'preferable'way of splicing lacing is by lapping
the.bars., The lap length which is measured along the bars should be at least
equal to that required for a full tension. slice (40~bar diameters). ,However,
the lacing should also be bent around. a minimum of t.hree flexural bars. :' The
splices of, adjacent lacing bars should b~ staggered,to avoid forming, a' plane
of weakness 'in the element,. and the slices should be iocated in regions of l~w
stress (away'from the supports and,positive yield lines). Typical details for
the splicing 'of lacing' bars" are' presented in' Figure .4- 93. ,Wherever -po s s LbLe-,
welding of lacing bars should be avoided and is only permitted while the full
development of, the ultimate' strength can be assured without 'any reduction in
strength, or ductility.
- '.'
"
'0
The location of the splices is determined from the distance along,the length
of the element which can be covered by a given length of lacing bar,(usually
60 feet) '. The express Ion for the actual length o~' lacing bar LI' .r equdr e d to
cover the length s1. is a func t.Lon of, the' flexural bar, spacing, and the geometry
of the lacing and is given in' Figur~ 4-94.
-.
4-66.2.2. Corner Details'

,
....
. ,
Because of the magnitude of the blast loads associated'with close-in detonations'and their amplification at c6rners, the 'use of concrete haunches has
been found' to', be a satisfactory method, of maintaining the integrity, of, these
sectfons of a structure. All corner s should be feinforced. with. dd agona L'b ars
to transfer the high shear f~rces from the' element to its support ,and to as- .
sist in maintaining the integrity of the intersection. Diagonal 'bars should
be used in eiements both with, and without haunches. 'Reinforcement, details for
corners are shown' in conjunction with wall intersectfons,"in the fo'llowing
sect ten,
'
"
4-66,2.3,' Walls
Figure 4-95 illustrates the detailing procedure for a typical laced wall, The
wall is free at the top, supported at its sides by other walls (not shown),
and at its base by the floor slab. It has vertical lacing which is continuous
from the bottom. of the wall .to approximatelymidheight . , In the upper 'half 'of
the'wali, the horizontal lacing reinforcement is' continuous over the.~ull
length of the wall and anchored 'in the side suppor t s, , It should be noted that
the horizontal flexural steel' in the lower half of the wall is .located at, the' .
exterior of the vertical reinforcement, while in the upper half of the wall it
4-225
TM'5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

is at ,the interior, This arrangement is necessary for the placement of the
lacing so that the lacing can provide 'full confinement of both the flexural
steel and the concrete separating th~ two layers of reinforcement, If'
spalling is critical', its 'effects may be"minimized by-reducing ,the concrete
cover over the'reinforcement in the upper'haleof the wall. The addition of
U-bars at the top of the free'edge also minimiies'the formation of concrete
fragments from this area. Reducing the concrete cover is not cost effective
and, therefore, if spalling is not critical; the wall 'should have a constant
thickness.
"
A portion of the wall should extend below the ,floor' slab a'distance no less
than that required to anchor the flexural reinforcement (40,bar diameters) and
in no case less than I' foot; - 6 inches'. 'In addition ,'to providing"anchorage
for the vertical reinforcement, the portion of the wail,below the floor slab
assists in resisting sliding of the structure by developing the passive
pressure of the soil' adjacent to the wall. '
The working pad at the base of the wall provides the support'required for the
erection of the wall reinforcement'and also affords protection for the
reinforcement after 'construction is completed. ,It should be noted that in the
example illustrated in Figure 4-95 ,the cover over the reinforcement in the
portion of the wall above the floor slab is specified as 3/4 inch (minimum
reinforcement cover'required by the ACI'Building Code for concrete not exposed
to the weather). while below the floor slab it is specified as 2 inches
(minimum, cover required by ACI BUilding Code for concrete in contact with the
ground after- removal of the forms). The, increased cover below the' floor slab
is achieved by increasing the wall thickness rather than bending ,the reinforcement.
l'
Diagonal bars are provided at the intersection of the floor slab and,wall.
These bars transfer the high shear forces from the base of the wall,through
the haunch and into the floor slab. Section,C-C, Figure 4-95 indicates the
location of the diagonal bars relative to the lacing reinforcement. '
Details of the reinforcement at wall intersections are similar to those at the
intersection of the wall and floor s Lab. Figures 4-96 through 4-98 illustrate
these details for .the intersection of two continuous walls,' one continuous and
one discontinuous wall, and two discontinuous walls, respectively. Lnva.Ll,
cases, both the'flexural and lacing reinforcement'are fully anchored by being
made continuous through the intersection, (a distance of at least 40 bar'
di~eters), In discontinuous walls, the wall must be extended a distance
sufficient to anchor all reinforcement but not less than 1 foot-6 inches.
This extension (or extensions) aids in resisting both the overturning of the
structure and.the tension force, produced in the walls (discussed further in
subsequent sections). Diagonal bars have been provided at all intersections
to transfer the support shears and to maintain the integrity of the section,
Where discontinuous walls are encountered, only one diagonal bar is. effective,
for the continuous wall of Figure 4-97 ,and for both discontinuous walls of
Figure 4-98, For these cases, bundled diagonal' bars (2, bars maximum) may have
to be used.
If wall ,extensions are not permitted due to architectural or other criteria,
the reinforcement is anchored by bending it within the corner (figs, 4-99 and
4-100). However, the distance from the face of the support to the end of the
hook must be at least 20 bar diameters. A standard hook may be used if;. (1)
4-226
TK'5-l300/NAVFAC
P~397/AFR
88-22
the total distance from the face of the support to the end of the bar (including the hook) is 40 bar diameters and (2) the length of the hook is at, least
,12 inches. The use of hooks may cause problems in the placement of the lacing
reinforcement and is discussed in conjunction, with the sequence of construction below.
',
In addition to flexural reinforcement, the walls of containment structures may
require the addition of tension reinforcement. This reinforcement is'placed
at the mid-depth of the wall and has the same spacing as the flexural reinforcement. It may be required in the vertical 'and/or horizontal directions.
The reinforcement'is anchored at wall intersections in the same'manner as the
flexural reinforcement. Vertical tension reinforcement usually does not
require. splices: However, if the horizontal ,tension ndnforcement requires
splicing; the splice, (lap, mechanical, weld) and pattern should be' same as the
flexural reinforcement. Of course; the tension steel should never be" spliced
at the same location. as the flexural reinforcement.' ,
4-66.2.4. Floors Slabs
Floor slabs on'grade'must provide sufficient capacity to fully develop the'

wall reinforcement. " If sufficient resistance is provided by the soil" slabs'
poured on grade usually do, not require lacing' nor other shear reinforc'ement;
although lacing r'e Lnf'o r ceraent; is always :required in slabs exposed to multiple'
detonations. Soil strata having enough bearing capacity to support the'dead
load of the structure ,can be considered to provide the support required by the
slab. Before placement of the slab, the top 6 inches of the subgrade should'
be compacted to 95 percent of maximum density in accordance with ASTM Standard
01557.
Piles are used to support a structure where the,bearing capacity of the soil
is inadequate. ,The piles are placed under the walls and the' floor must span
between thein. Lacing or single leg'stirrups'must be provided. The reactions
of the slab are transferred to the portion of the wall below the floor 'slab
whichacts 'as a beam' spanning between piles.
In addition to flexural reinforcement, floor slabs may require,tension
reinforcement located at mid-depth of the slab. Tension forces are'discussed
in conjunction with single and multi-cubicle structures.
4-66.2'.5. Roof Slabs

Roof slabs are similar to walls since they' are usua Ll.y supported only at their
periphery and require the addition of'lacing to distrIbute and'resist'the
app Ld'e d blast loads. In those facilities"where the explosion 'occurs within a
structure, the blast pressures acting on the'interior surface of a nonfrangible roof causes tension stresses in the walls which require the addition of
tension reinforcement above that needed for bending. Tension forces are
discussed in conjunction with single and multi-cubicle structures.
4-66.3. Elements Reinforced with Single Leg Stirrups

:
4-66.3,1. Single Leg' Stirrups

"
A single ,leg stirrup consists of a straight bar with a hook of at least' 135
degrees at each end. Hooks shall conform to the ACI Building Code. At any
4-227
TK 5~1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

particular section of an element, the longitudinal flexural reinforcement is
placed .to the interior of the transverse reinforcement and the stirrups are
bent around the transverse reinforcement (Fig. 4-101).
The required quantity of single leg stirrups is calculatedin the same,manner
as lacing. They are a function of the element's flexural capacity while size
rebar used is a function of the required area and spacing of the stirrups.
The maximum and minimum size of stirrup bars are.No. 8 and No.3, respectively, while the spacing between stirrups is limited to amaximum of d/2 or d c/2
for type I and type II or III, respectively.
The preferable placement of Single-leg stirrups is at every flexural. bar
intersection. However, the transverse flexural reinforcement does. not have to
be tied'at every intersection with a longitudinal bar. A grid system may be
established whereby alternate bar intersections in one or both directions are
tied within a distance not greater than 2 feet . . The choice of the three
possible schemes depends upon the quantity of flexural reinforcement, the
spacing of the. flexural bars and the thickness of the concrete element. For
thick, lightly reinforced elements, stirrups may be furnished at alternate bar
intersections, whereas for thin and/or heavily reinforced elements, stirrups
will be required at every bar intersection. For those cites where large
stirrups are required.at every flexural bar intersection, the bar size used
may be reduced by furnishing two stirrups at. each flexural bar intersection.
In .this situation, a stirrup is .provided at each side of longitudinal bar.
.
.;
Single ~eg stirrups must be distributed through~ut an element. Unlike shear

reinforcement in conventionally loaded elements, the stirrups cannot be
reduced in regions. of low shear stress. The size of the stirrups is determined for the high stress areas and, because of the non-uniformity of the
blast loads associated with close-in detonations, this size stirrup is placed
across the span length to distribute the loads. For two-way ,elements ,
diagonal tension stresses must be resisted in two directions . . The. size.of
stirrup~determined for each direction is placed to the same extent as - the
lacing shown in Figure 4-92. However, t~e distribution does not apply for
cantilever elements since they are one-way elements requiring only one stirrup
size which is uniformly distributed throughout.
4-66.3.2. Corner Details
Corner details for elements with single leg stirrups are the same as for laced
elements. Concrete haunches, reinforced with diagonal bars, should be used at
all corners. For those cases where compelling operational requirements
prohibit the:.use of haunches , diagonal bars must still .be placed at the.se "
corners.' In addition to diagonal bars. closed ties must be placed at all
corners' (fig. 4-102) to assist in maintaining the integrity of the intersec,
tion. The tie should be the same size as the stirrups but not les~ than a ~o.
4 bar. The spacing of the ties should be the same as the flexural reinforcement.
4-66.3.3. Walls
The detailing procedure for a wall ,with single leg stirrups is similar toa
laced wall. Figure 4-103 illustrates the detailing procedure for a typical
wall with single leg stirrups. This wall is the same as the wall shown in
Figure 4-95 except that stirrups fire used rather, than lacing. These are only.
4-228
TN 5-l300fNAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

two differences. between ,the two walls. First, there is no need to .alter the
position of the horizontal flexural reinforcement,for the placement of
stirrups. The horizontal reinforcement is in the main, direction (assumed for
wall illustrated) and, therefore, this steel is placed exterior of the
vertical reinforcement for the entire height of the wall. Second, closed ties
are 'placed at the wall and floor slab intersection to a~~ist i~ maintaining
the integrity of the section. The common requirements for both walls include
the addition of U-bars, diagonal bars, concrete'haunches, increased cover over
the reinforcement below the floor slab by increasing the wall thickness, shear
reinforcement (stirrups or lacing) in the wall extension below the floor slab,
and the preferred use of a working pad.
Details of the reinforcement at wall intersections are similar to those at the
intersection of the wall and floor slab. The requirements' for anchorage,of
the flexural reinforcement and diagonal bars at wall inters~ctions are exactly
the same as laced walls (fig., 4-96 through 4-100). The placement of the..
single leg stirrups and the required closed ties are shown ,in Figure 4-102,
Similar to laced. walls , the use of wall extensions is the preferred method of
reinforcement anchorage at discontinuous walls.
4-66.3.4. Floor Slabs
The floor slab must provide sufficient capacity to Eu'lLy-vdeve Lop the wall
reinforcement. The requirements are the, same as a floor slab for laced walls.
4-66.3.5. Roof Slabs '
Roof slabs are similar to walls since they are usually supported only at their
periphery and require the ' addition of single leg stirrups ~o distribute and
resist, the applied blast loads. For interior explosions, the roof causes
tension forces in the walls; Tension reinforcement i" discussed in
conjunctiop with. single and multi-cubicle structures.
4-67. Composite Construction
Composite construction is .primarily used for barricades'and consists of two
concrete panels separated'by sand fill (Fig. 4-104). Details of each panel
are similar to those described for single laced walls (or walls reinforced
with single leg stirrups).
The 'concrete panels may be supported:' at the base e Lther by the floor -s Labs or
a concrete pedestal. When the pedestal is used, reinforcement across the base
of bo~h panels terminates in the floor slab and provides a monolithic connection between the two panels. The floor reinforcement serves as the monolithic
connection when pedestals are not used.
The upper portion of the wall may either be open or solid.' .Open sections are
usually used when the upper edge of the wall is, unsupported; the solid section
is used when.anexternal tie system is used to restrain. the motion and provide
support for the top of the wall. The solid section m\lst be reinforced to
resist torsion and bending induced by the ties 'and rhe panels.'
The impulse capacity of composite walls is a function of the density of' the
sand fill. The sand will be compacted after construction due to its own
weight and/or by water drainage when the wall is exposed to the weather. The
4-229
\
sand fill must be continuously maintained at the level stipulated in the
design by mechanical means which will "allow periodic' rearrangement of the sand
fill. Clay pipe or other similar material may be placed in the wall cavity
with the sand so that when the wall is loaded the clay pipe will be crushed by
the impact of the donor panel, thereby providing space within the wall cavity
into which the compacted sand"may fiow, hence reducing its density. If possible; the sand should be protected from the elements by sealing the top of the
cavity.
4-68. Single and Hulticubicle Structures
I
In single-cell structures (Fig. 4-105) unbalanced force (support reactions)"

exist at all element intersections (walls, and floor and wall intersections)
and must be resisted by tension force produced-in the support elements~' In
addition tothe r~inforcement"requiredto resist flexural and shear stresses,
tension reinforcement, distributed along the centerline of ' the elements, is
required. Horizontal tension reinforcement in the side wall and floor slab'
(parallel to the side walls) is required to resist the vertical and horizontal
rea~tions of the back wall, while horizontal steel in the back "wall and floor'
slab (parallel to the back wall) resists the tension force produced by the
side wall reactions.
These unbalanced forces are transmitted to the structure's foundation and,
depending upon their magnitude, the size and configuration of the structure
and the subgrade conditions, the structure may be subject to both"translational and vertical rotational motions. Translation of the structure is resisted byrthe ext.ens Lon of the walls below the floor slab (shear key) and the
friction developed between the floor slab and subgrade , whereas rotation Is
resisted by" the mass of the structure with ass Ls t ance from the blast load acting on the floor slab of the donor cell. 'The stability of the structure can
be:substantially increased by the extension of the walls and floor slab as
illustrated" in Figure 4-105b. "" This "extension of the walls and floor slab' (1)
increases the resistance of the structure to overturning (rotation), (2)
increases the rigidity of the structure, (3) reduces the effects of the
unbalanced wall moments which cause twisting of the corners, (4) reduces the
required thickness and/or reinforcement in the floor slab (moment capacity of
the' floor slab extension must be developed" by bearing on the subgrade). and
(5) eliminates the need to anchor the'reinforcement by bending at the corners
which would ordinarily hinder" the placement of the concrete.
End cells of multicubicle arrangements also require the addition of tension
reinforcement to resist unbalanced blast roads acting on the end walls., The
interior cells do not require this additional reinforcement since the mass and
basecfriction of adjoining, cells provide the restraint to resist the lateral
forces. Two possible multicubicle" arrangements are shown in Figure.4-106. In
both arrangements the back walls of the cells 'are continuous, whereas the side
walls between the adjoining cells are either continuous or discontinuous. The
type of cell arrangement (either one of those shown in Figure 4-106 or a
combination of both arrangements) used in"a particular design depends primar-"
11y. upon the functional. requirements of the facility and the economy involved.
However, there are certain structural features which should be considered in
the final selection of either structural arrangement. The horizontal reinforcement (flexural and lacing) in the side walls may be placed continuous across
the back wall of scheme" a, whereas with scheme b, the side wall horizontal
reinforcement must be bent and anchored in the back wall. ,This latter
"4-230
.TK S-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

arrangement canresult in'congestion of the horizontal reinforcement at the
wall intersections., On the other hand, by offsetting the side walls at each
side of the back wall,. the span.length of the back.wa'l l, between adjacent side
walis is reduced thereby reducing the required strength (concrete thickness
and/or reinforcement) 'of the back wall.
In general, continuous'walls usually require constant concrete thickness and
horizontal reinforcement. However, where economy can be achieved, it may be
desiraDle to reduce the thickness and reinforcement of the continuous wall of
one cell in comparison to those of adjoining cells. This reduction should
only be made between the supports in order that a constant moment ,capacity can
be maintained across the length .of the reduced element'. This capacity
reduction requires the'horizontal reinforcement to be sll.ced at the supports,
and extreme caution should be exercised in the detailing of the splices.
,'
4-69. Sequence of Construction
Although the construction procedure for all blast r'es Ls't.ant; .ccncre ce elements
is similar; each structure must be evaluated to determine. the specific
sequence of construction which is most appropriate for the particular situation. This evaluation should consider: (1) type and location of shear
reinforcement (single leg stirrups, horizontal and vertical lacing). (2)
location of reinforcement splices, (3) erection sequence of the reinforcement
(flexural and.shear), (4) location of'horizontal construction joints' and (5)
pouring sequence of concrete.
To illustrate the construction of a laced concrete' structure, consider the
recommended construction procedure for the cubicle 'structureshown in Figure
4-105 b. A vertical section through any wall is similar to the wall described
in Figure 4-95. Figure 4-107 illustrates the pouring sequence for the
following procedure.
1.
Fabricate the reinforcement as indicated on the drawings.
2.
Pour a working pad.
3.
Erect vertical flexural reinforcement, vertical lacing and vertical diagonal bars in all walls. Thread horizontal flexural bars
between vertical lacing ,and vertical flexural bars up to the top
of the floor slab. Also place reinforcement for the floor slab.
"
4.
Adjust reinforcement torequired -pos LtLons and complete, second

pour to the top of the floor slab. As an alt~rnative, place
sufficient horizontal lacing (as described' in step 7) to insure ~,':
proper positioning of the vertical flexural.reinforcement and then
complete second pour .. 'Additional horizontal flexural bars may be
placed beyond' the limit.of the pour to help stabilize .the reinfor-'
. cement.
5.
Thread horizontal flexural bars between the v~rtical lacing and

vertical flexural bars beyond the limit.of the third pour. Adjust
reinforcement and complete the .third pour . .
6.
Thread the remainder of the horizontal flexural bars up.to the top
of the vertical lacing.
4-231
TN 5-l300/HAVFAC
P-3~7/APR88-22
7.
Place horizontal. flexural and lacing reinforcement. and diagonal , '

bara between the.. top of the. verticai lacing, and, the top, of the'
wall. Placement of the horizontal flexural and horizontal lacing
reinforcement is accomplished by lowering this reinforcement over
the vertical reinforcement. At wall intersections the proper
sequence is to first lower diagonal bars, type a. Then in the
north-south walls lower horizontal lacing bar 'type b,. place
horizontal flexural reinforcement and 19wer opposing lacing bar
type .a , Repeat this.,sequence with the reinfo'rcement in the east.west walls and .complete this individual layer of reinforcement by
placing'the horizontal-diagonal bars type b. The entire sequence,
is repeated for the remaining reinforcement.
8.
Add U bars at the top of the wall and adjust reinforcement to

required positions. Pour remainder of the wall.
The above procedure is for the cubicle structure of Figure 4-105 b, where wall
extensions are provided at the corners. For the case where 'wall 'extensions'
are not used (Fig. 4-105 ali-the horizontal reinforcement must utilize a 90
degree-hook for 'anchorage (Fig. 4-10P). The horizontal flexural reinforcement
for the side walls requires a 90 degree hook at one end.- Therefore, the
reinforcement must ,be threaded between the vertical lacing and vertical
flexural bars' from behind the back wall. -, If the back wall was close to an
existing structure, the horizontal reinforcement could not be threaded. The
horizontal flexural reinforcement in the back wall requires a 90 degree hook
at each end which would prohibit threading the bars. To place this steel, the
bars would have to be spliced so that they could be .threaded through the back
wall from each side wall.. The use of splices is not desirable and should be
avoided, making the use of wall extensions _preferable. '
The construction procedure for an element reinforced with single leg_stirrups
is similar, but not quite as complex as laced elements. The single leg
stirrups should be lowered into position if the vertical, flexural reinforcing
bars are exterior of the horizontal bars. However, if the horizontal bars are
exterior of the vertical bars (Fig. 4-103). the horizo~tal bars should be
threaded between the stirrups and vertical bars. Again, as for laced elements, the reinforcement of intersecting walls and the diagonal bars must be
placed in sequence.
The use of construction joints. (both vertical and horizontal) should be
avoided wherever possible since all joints are a potential plane of weakness.
However; joints in large structures cannot be.avoided because goo~ practice
for placement of concrete and/or_economy 'requires their use. All'joints
should be. located in regions of .low stress intensity, and, if possible, for
laced elements,' vertical joints should be'situated in areas where horizontal
lacing is located, andhorizontal joints should be situated in areas where
vertical 'lacing is ,located. However, vertical joints are difficult to form in
laced construction. In most cases, vertical joints are not used, 'and a
certain height of all walls is poured simultaneously. In addition, concrete
surfaces should be roughened at all joints.
,"
'.'
'.
The above construction procedure required the use of two horizontal construction joints.- The joint located at the floor slab is generally used in all
blast resistant structures while the second joint in the upper section of the
wall should-only be used if the height of the wall warrants it.- The use of
4-232
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

vertical construction joints is generally required for multicubicle arrangements. Walls (intersecting walls must be poured simultaneously) and corresponding floor slabs should be poured in checkerboard fashion to guard against
joint separation due to shrinkage and temperature variations. To maintain a
minimum rate of pour, multiple pouring crews may have to be used, and pumping
of concrete; rather than the use of tremies, may be required for high walls.
joints are generally not required for laced concrete elements due to
the presence of relatively large amounts 'of reinforcement. However, their use
should be considered for long buildings and/or structures subjected to extreme
temperature c h a n g e s . '
.,
Expans~on
"
..
,
.'
..
'
4-233
,
;'
,.
,.
CD
I
Ii Of SPLICE PATTERN
~ ! <r
<r Al
=+=-+-1
-1::;[
w
'"
~
cp cp
It
OF SPUCE PATTERN
i'~
===IW
===1 +t1
81
L~
.. =r
'=f=1=- B- -~- -' ' ' ;
BUNDLED BARS
Tc
,J
1
I
~~
A..J
SINGLE BARS
I'
I
Tc
,!,
SECTION B-B
e;
It .oF
SPLICE PATTERN
,
4011 MIN.
SEE NOTE
,
/.
I 40~: I
CONSTRUCT;ON
JOINT
::E
I
....
.,
/ ~
..
CONSTRUCTION
JOINT
'
~
AS REQUIRED
FOR
,
FULL ANCHORAGE
(
~.
... ~
li W
TD. 90:1
HOOK
..
Figure 4-83
"
NOTE:,
CENTERLINE OF SPLICE PATTERN
TO BE LOCATED IN REGION OF LOW
STRESS (POINTS OF INFLE CTION
PREFERRED)
olD
L...
40
'
SPLICE .. ", SPLICE"

LENGTH
LENGTH'
.)\
i.
".
MIN.
Typical sectio? through conventionally reinforced concrete wall

I
4-235
.S.
",
"
l'
,."'
. ' A"
...
. .
.
.
~
'
',.
-'
CONSTRUCTION 'JOINT
EXPANSION JOINT
..
'
~."
..,.
'"
'"
.'
'
.'
..
'.
".'
,.'
'. ::~.~.,.
..
'"
:.:,;>::.:
..'
=J
r..-'-'::=::_=-_,~_
PAD
<; W~~':,':I~NAL)
..
,'.
"
:".: I"
.,
: ;: ,"
.- ..
I'
CONSTRUCTION JOINT
';. :4 ..'
'4.: .
"
CONTINUOUS WALL FOOTING
r:
"
Figure 4-84
Floor slab-wall intersections
I--t
,
SEE NOTE
SPLICE
ALT, SPLICE
"
,"
..
",
'J'
'
.
.: ..
'~
40'
,'~"',
': ~
'~:.'~:..
,",'
. - 40"
,
"
-I
"",
.. ~
,
....
t-
'.".
N
W
.....
..i
I
.'r ",. ': I
"
"
'"
'
'.\
..
401I
....
t-
.l.
ALT, SPLICE
"
:...:.~'
L SPLICE
1-- ~t
... . I
. .
O"
,lI)
-,
...~
....
....
...o
SPLICE
'SEE NOTE
-e-
O
Z
....
....
lI)
. I
"
ALT. SPLICE
NOTE' 'SPLICES TO BE LOCATED

IN REG IONS OF LOW STRESS
(POINTS OF INFLECTION PREFERRED)
BUT NO LESS THAN 40 1I FROM
THE FACE OF SUPPORT,
0"
Figure 4-85
Typical horizontal corner details of conventionally reinforced

concrete walls
~OF SPLICE PATTERN

"
>.
I
:I:
Figure 4-86
OF SPLICE
PATTERN
Preferred location'of lap splices for a two-way element

fixed on four 'edges
4-238
..
I- It.
.-
40~'
.
I-t. SPLICE PATTERN
SPLICE PATTERN
OF TOP BARS
'
I
MIN.
MIN. ;
'/
/'
"'
MIN"
...,
'"
'"
I.
'/
I><
'/
OF TOP BARS
4011'
..vP
..
r-
,
r
rx
t
SPLICE PATTERN
OF BO'fTOM BARS
.
NOTE: :t.'s OF SPLICE PATTERNS TO BE LOCATED

, - - . IN REGION OF LOW STRESS (POINTS OF
INFLECTION PREFERRED)
-.
..'.
Figure 4-87
Splice locations for multi-span slab
...
-"';
"
...... '
"
..
..
'
ADDITIONAL
BOTTOM REINF.
DIAGONAL BARS
*4@6" HOOP BARS
CONSTRUCTION JOINT
U---SPIRAL REINF.
'---COLUMN REINF.
CONSTRUCTION
'
JOINT - - _
'
.. ' .
Figure 4-B8
"
'
.. '
'.
Section through column of flat slab
4-240
.'
"
,"
"
..
..... , :
,,~,
.'
,~
,"
J
"r-
LONGITUDINAL FLEXURAL REINF.

-,
('
LACING REINF
.~
on
....
.
TRANSVERSE FLEXURAL REINF.
Laced reinforced elemant
Fiqure 4,-89
,h
4-241
t;"
LONG FLEX. REINF.
TRANSV. FLEX. REINF.

RA
OF FLEX.
-tqo:~--I-''--- ,REINF.
OF FLEX. REINF.
WAll SURFACE
LACING
WALL, SURFACE
---1--
'7:
,',
NO:rE:, MIN.
,
SINGLE BARS
Figure 4-90
R.t
LACIN~
SHALL EQUAL, 4d';'

,
BUNDLED BARS
Typical lacing bend details
-3
;x~
TYPE.
..J '
l'
-_.
TYPE
~X8~,~,_,
~
., '. ",. r"
~,
...,'"
~
'
I,',
LACING 'METHOD' NO.2
I'~
"'1 ;~
~,
TYPE b
'"
b",
~
,
'~""
" ...
/US-X_}-)-I':-'-""""4 '
r, r
;,
'-TYPE b
"",
TYPE b
"
l~
"
"",S d", .. S 2 ft .
.!pSl.Sd",Dr,12 ft.
"'.,
LACING METHOD NO.1
!!!!.!!.:
l'
TYPE b
"
,i
1: '
TYPE
I '
~'~
~ I
TYPEc
TYPE d
'
LACING METHOD NO.3
:1 *1.
Io
1 l~T,Y:.E.
-p
'"
I
,,
.,.
J,
...
,.
"
TYPE d
TYPE
II
...ee
,LACING METHOD NO.4
LONGITUDINAL; SECTioN
';1,
.....
I 'I
o ,
;I
LJ.
.,
TYP E
TI PE d
TYPE f
:-Et??TY~~p;
,
"
TRANSVERSE SECTION
',. ~"
Figure 4-91
b.
Typical methods of lacing,
c
TYPE b
HORIZ.
.......
.. .
-.
,.
....
.A A A
-- -- -- ...-...--..
0) CANTILEVER
HORIZ
'",.
~
.. .:
:
- .. / " ,
/."
.;/
VERT .1
I .
[;.00'
,-.',
: .. L
~'"
/'
~N....
~
.
....
c)
i"
..
lL--- ._---
....
N
....
'"
r
vEin
V
HDRIZ.
N
....
z
....
z
VERT.
._--
:--
\ k.
--<~
-,
.I
N
N
'"
VERT.
/.'
N
....
z
THREE SIDES SUPPDRTEO AND ONE' SlOE FREE
">-
Figure 4-92
. HOllZ.
b) TMO ADJACENT SlOES SUPPDRTED AND TMD SIDES FREE
..
:-
..I
/-
'
I'
"
.'"
VERT.
',.
HORIZ
'",
..
.,
d) FOUR SlOES SUPPORTED
I . I VERT. ,
~
Typical location of continuous and discontinuous lacing
"
..
,.
1
ft bF' SPLICE
:
(2
PATTERN
-"
TYPE A
"-- TYPE B
--"
"
TYPE C
..
"-'--.
"-- TYPE 0
TYPE A
TYPE B
..
a)
SPLICE PATTERN
~'.
..
,
b) LACING SPLICE
t,
Figure 4-93
Typic:"l detaii~
for: splicing of lacing bars
4-245
It
Q"
NOTE L.t IS MEASURED ALONG CENTER LINE OF LACING BAR

BETWEEN 'POINTS "a" AND b",
.
, 2R.+db
A =s,t/d.t AND B =
Figure 4-94
..d.t .
Length of lacing bars
4-246
e
TYPE"b"
TYPE "all
TYPE lib'"
TYPE "all
D<eI I
-.
r:
HORIZ. LACING
VERT. LACING
3/4
I l:::.o(.
"
IJ~TYPE"b"
HORIZ. REINF.--r.;r"'"-'t.1
VERT.
REIIlf.
TYPE "a"
'~
HORIZ.
REINf.
VERT. REniF.7
HORIZ. LACING
11
CL. TYPE."b"
TYPEtla"
SECTION A-A
..,.
..,.
'"
I
.....
r~"<
B
0'
TYPE B
B
SECTION B-B
-ffi --
NI
TYPE B
VERT. LACING
DIAGONAL BARS
.
/FLOOR
C
TYPE A
~LAB
.'
20
DIAGONAL
t:ONSTRUCTION
JOINT
VERT.
..;0
ARS
tlNF. -
~
~
~HOF
J
REINF.
r--
-<
'SECTION C-C
Figure 4-95
Reinforcement details of laced concrete walls
In ".
FLEXURAL, REINF.
DIAGONAL
DIAGONAL BAR
TYPE B
TYPE A
e.
O"(TY,P,1
(TYP,)
DIAGONAL
BAR
TYPE A
..
Figure 4-96'
Typical detail at intersection of 'two continuous laced walls'
4-248
AS REQUI RED FOR

FUL.L. ANCHORAGE
-I
0"
L'ACING
MIN.
20d
(TYP.)
.'.!
DIAGONAL CORNER
,
BAR (,TYP.)
t- ,
FLEXURAL REINF.
Figure 4-97
Typicai d'~tai.l;. at intersection of continuous and d.i acontif nuous

laced walls
4-249
,,
-,'
-<0 Z
..J
..J
:::>
"
' - ::iE,
Ll..Q;
>-
Cl:1-
f2~
<.!l
o.
Cl: Cl:
:::>
o
w
::t:
U
Cl: Z
en
. : ':9".
201'1'
(-TYP.) ,
" -L...J..L-I
',' ',
Figure 4-98
Typical~detail ~~
4-250
corner of'laced walls
/' ,,":/.;.
,
,
"
0"
-,
LACING'
~
"
(TYP.) ,',
*
".
DIAGONAL CORNER
BARI,TYP.)
"
i~~:
FLEXURAL RE INF.
~ii:
0)-
Nt-
"
,/
Figure 4-99
LEGEND:
STANDARD HOOK IS
USUALLY ADEQUATE
"
Intersection of continuous and disc~ntinuous laced walls

without wall extensions'
4-251
,.
.~,
"LEgEND:
~.
"
~r
":1'
.-ExTmOR SURF:ACE
~t.
'
t~
,.
STAN'DARD HOOK IS USUALLY ADEQUATE
iii#! ,I ,!A
d::~) ~'j =f
'O~
.,.,
I~A'
f'o,)
.."
h.
~I'
.!!!
'01
',']
0:'
'"
cf'
\.30
I TVP.)
1-0 W_MIN,ITV")
INlERKlR SURFACE
a:
"
EXTERIOR LOAD
t--- om:RlOR SURfllC

INTERIOR U:>AO
,bl FLEXURAL. REtNF.
01 LACING
,..,
4.
Figure 4-100
Corner details fo~ laced walls without wall' extensions
.-'
lJ-F.
. ,:
"'
"
,SINGLE LEG
'STIRRUPS
: .
I,
....:. ::.;
-::'::~ .~
..
.
.
"
.'
','
'
,.'
.'
"
'.
'.
'.'
"
'
D,
"
"
....
FLEXURAL
Figure 4-101
. '.
..
,~.
"
'
..
'
REINF.
Element reinforced with single leg stirrups
4-253
AS REQUIRED FOR
FULL ANCHORAGE
,SINGLE LEG STIRRUP
" -6"
20 0
MIN.
t.~:
,.,
....
'.
v,
'"
",
,.
..
. ~,.
'.
"\
... - ..
..
,1
Figur; 4~l02
--
-'
.,
-.
. ',.
, '
-,-;,;.,,~
"
,:
.
'. .. ..:. .
-- .
",
~.
'-,
.;~
",
-"
.~
"
...
.: "" ~. : ....
Typical detail at corner for walls

reinforced with single leg stirrups
4-254
DIAGONAL BAR
.. . , .. ,
'-
-BAR
.. ':'.,
.:.:':.fl: ': .:.;
LOSED TIE
"
.-~~,.
";'
..
.". .. W'
, .....
-. .
-,. . < 1 . ..
.- ..
..:. - .... '.
....
;
.. -- .' :
. ". .. .~". , .
>
~
; ~ _f '. ....
-",
AS REQUIRED:FOR _
'FULL ANCHORAGE
~r.
MI,~
l~
..',: .0"
l'
..
'j'
.'. "
HORIl.
FLEXURAL,i .'.
REINF.
.
t
>.'
.-..
FLEXU'i~;(R-EINF.-;:'
;.
..
,.. '.', ....-, .
.,:.;.
I'\.
ll'
;; . v:.~., . . , .
'"' VERT.
"
~:
:-
\
......
'-IIL'.' "'.' -. ~: -'.
t'
-.- . ,.",,~~
MIN.
- .-
-,
SINGLE LEG STIRRUP
-'
,
~I
n BAR
'. '. J .
"
"
. . 0'
.
. ,-c-
"
"I
- ,
.i. iJ'
VERTICAL REINF.
'
'
I-,
-,
"
r-HORIZ. REINF.
.,
I-
3;4'CL'
c,,
,r-
"
!""
.; ;
SINGLE
LEG'STIRRUP
,
...
""
~-
'.
,-
t-
.
"
-'';'
ii,
:........:; ....:-:
'~.'
c.
"
"
. --
-,
C/'"
..
DIAGONAL BAR
~~, ,.~ ,.
,-r<.,',. -,
~.
- . - ..
",'
'
"
},.,
'
'
1(3" CL
.',- 1--'-','
-,
t:f CL.
... .
"
!
J
!
,
Figure 4-103
FLOOR SLAB,
"
'....:.-.'
.
... t"......
'. { .:..- .. . .- -...... .,-.' , , ,-.
. o' .
- ..
"
:i
,;:.
':,
,
,
,
CLOSED TIE
,.
,"
;,
~',;,"
"
~
. ~ 1-".
-~"
..
.. :..,.'.
WORKIN'G PAD
'
.. "-v.-
"
Reinforcement detail of wall with single leg stirrups
4-255
.. :~i',' .'..
;;;
TieS ystem
'j"
.~!:i
:.~::~ ~.
II
::.::..:
..': F
f,.;
...
....
1:~llli
;';.(~..
t.- :.', f."
I- ":':'.
~. ; . f."
'"
'"
,:.;-.
......:;jj
'1'"
7, A
.~
'~
=l"
Open
,
~
C'Sand Fill
II
Sand, f ill
.' .
. .
,.
'
-.'
t-Pedes
01
,
"-
"r"
I... ,
....
r Slob
" . ,
,..
.,
,w
.....
i
I
=.;
0' Top
Figure 4~164
.....
Closed
0' Top
Typical composite wall details
e
.'
:.
::-.
G.
, PLAN
SECTION A-A
"
.....
,.
N.
'
. -
0) DISCONTINUOUS . WALL CONSTRUCTION..
'-
."
<
"
..
....
'"
.z," -:':
G..
-.!J .'
,
.'
'-'
.s
PLAN
--
SECTION 8-8
b) CONTINUOUS
,
WALL
C'ONSTRUCTION '
"
Figure 4-105
Typical single-cell structures
, .'.,
....
"
',"
'".1
SCHEME
d ) CONTINUOUS SIDE WALL CONSTRUCTION
SCHEME b) DISCONTINUOUS SIDE WALL CONSTRUCTION
Figure 4-106
Typical multicubicle structures
4-258
LEGEND:
(!)
Z
U
4th POUR
ISS:'J
3rd POUR,
Wffi3
2nd POUR
mm
I st POUR
IL <l:
oJ
I- oJ
Z
IlJ
I- Z
SIDE WALL
X 0
IlJ N
0::
:t:
~_HORIZ.
CONSTR.
JOINT
'(!)
Z
IL -
OU
<l:
l-oJ
z..J
1lJ<l:
BACK WALL
I-
u
X_
IlJI0::
IlJ
>
~~:--~+-- HORIZ. CONSTR.

JOINT
.......--FLOORSLAB
--~WALL
PEDESTAL
~~fj~~Jr---'WORKING
Figure 4-107
PAD
Pouring sequence
4-259
TK 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
APPENDIX 4A
TH S-1300/NAVFAC 'P-397/AFR 88-22

Problem 4A-l.
Problem:
Elements Designed for the Pressure~Time Relationship

,
"
.'
Design an element: which responds to the pressure'"time' 'relationship.
f'"
'.
Note:'
Steps S, 8,10 through 18; 22 'and 23 are'specl!fic for two-way
elements" "however, references' are givim. defining similar .prccedures for one-way elements.
,
Procedure:
<
. a.
b.
c.
d.
':-
: i'l
..
Step 1.
Blast loads including 'pressurectime relationship,(Chapter 2).

Deflection criterta;,
. "'
r,','_ ,.'
'.
J"" 'J:'
Structural configuration including geometry andnsupport'conditions . . ,
.
. :.
.' J ' . i
Tjpe of section available toresistblast; Type I, ,IIor ,III
I depending upon' the occurrence of spaLl.Lng and/or crushing of the
concrete cover':
J
!
r~-:' ~.:~'~. .
0'
'.
Step 2.
Select cross section of element including thickness and concrete

cover over reinforcement ..i.'Also-'determine'static, stresses of .
concrete and'reinforcing steel (Section 4-12)" . ',". 'n.
Step 3.
Determine dynamic increase factors for both concrete and reinforcement from table 4-1. Using the' abovejDIF"and' the 'static
stresses of s.tep 2, calculate the dynamic strength" of:'materials.
f, ",
...
Step 4.
Step 6.
,,.
Determine the dynamic design stresses 'using, table 4-2:and the,"

results from step 3.
jo
Step 5.
.f,l ;"
Assume vertical and horizontal reinforcement bars to yieid the

optimum steel distribution', 'The- steel' distribution is optimum
when the resulting' yield: Lf.rie s make an, angle of 4S"degrees 'with
supports.
. i . \. .
a . ' .'
Calculate de (d or dc, depending upon type of cross section available to res Is t blast) for both the pcs LtIve :and negative' moments
in both vertical and horizontal.directions. Determine reinforcing
ratios. Also check for minimum steel'ratios from table,4-3.
, ..
Step 7.
Using the area of, reinforcement'; ,t~e value "of' d,,',ifrom step 6, and
the dynamic design" stresses of, step': 4 ;r calculate' the moment
capacity (Section 417) 'of both the-positive and'negative reinforcement.
'.
-0.
4
Note: Steps 8, 10 through 18 are required to determine the actual
and equivalent resistance-deflection curves for two-way elements.
To obtain these curves for one-way elements, see problem 4A-6.
4A-l' .,
TK'5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFa 88-22

Step 8.
Using the equations of table 3-2 or table 3-3 and the. moment
capacities of step 7. calculate the ultimate resistance in the
plastic range..
'.'
Step 9.
Using equation 4-4, the static concrete stress of step 2,. and unit
weight for concrete equal to 150 psf, calculate the modulus of
elasticityf!,r concrete. With th~ above modulus for concrete and
that for steel (eq. 4-5) and equation 4-6,. calculate the modular
=t~.
Step 10.
With the use of equation 4-9a and the assumed concrete thickness
.of step 2, calculate the gross moment of inertia of the concrete.
Using the value of de for the negative and positive reinforcement
of step'6, calculate an average value of de' Also calculate an
average' percent of.positive and negative reinforcement using the
above de and the area of reinforcement 'of step' 6 .Ln both vertical
and ,horizontal directions. With the.values of p(average) and
figure 4-11 or 4-12, determine the values of the constants F and
calculate the moment of inertia of a cracked. section w~th equation
4~b in both directions . .Calculate the average cracked. moment 'of
inertia for the element using equation 4-19, and also, the average
moment of inertia of the element from equation 4-7.
Step 11.
Usingequation 3- 33, and the modulus. of elasticity.. of step 9 and

the moment of inertia of'step 10, calculate the unit flexural
rigidity.
Step 12.
Establish'points of interest and their ultimate moment capacities

(fig; 3-23).
Step 13;
C0!Dpute properties of first yield."
"
"
a.Location of first yield.

Resistance at first y,ieldr e.
"
-c ,
Moments at remaining points consistent with r e.
d. .
Maximum deflection at fir~t yield.
b ,..
Step 14.
Compute properties at second yield.
" ..
Remaining moment capacity at other points
.
Location of second yield.
Change in unit resistance Ar, between first and second
yield.
Unit' resistance at ~econd yield. rep'
Moment at remaining points consis~ent with rep'
Change in:maxi~um deflection.'
d,
e.
f.
g.
-.
4A-2
TH 5-l300/NAVFAC'P-397/AFR 88~22 ,:
Note:
'An element, with unsymmetrical support condd t.Lons may exhibit three
'or four 'support' yields.' Therefore, 'repeat step 14 as many time,~
as necessary 'to obtain properties at various yield ,points. .
'
,-'
Step 15.
'.Compute properties at final yield (ultimate unit 'resistance).

,','
.
\ ~"
a.
Ultimate unit resistance.
b.
~r:
c;
..
'
".
.Change' in :resistance . between': 'ultimate

and resistance at prior yield,
"
.. '':
Step
iz.
unit resistance .. '
Change in maximum deflection (for elements ,s~pport~d on two,

'. three or four 'edges" use stiffness ,obtairied".from figure 3<26; 3-30 and 3-36 ,',respectively) .
.,'
d.
Step 16.
' . . . J:.
Total maximum 'deflection.
,'"
_ ,,_I:
Draw the actual resistance-deflection curve (fig. 3-39).

Calculate equivalent-maximum elastic deflection of, the' element.
r'
Step 18.
Calculate the equivalent elastic unit stiffness KE from equation

3-36.
.j,
.'
Step 19.
Determine I the <Lo.ad-mas s factor K LM .for the elastic, e Las trovpLas t.Lc
and plastic ranges from :table 3-13 and:.figure '3-'44'," The, 'average'
load mass factor is obtained by taking the average'KLM,for the
elastic and elasto-plastic ranges and averaging this value with
the KLM of the plastic range. ' In addition, calculate the unf t; .
mass of the element (account for reduced concrete thickness if
spalling is anticipated) and multiply,this.uriH mass by KLM for
the element to obtain the effective unit 'mass 'of the element.
1-\
. ;.
Note:
'
"
......
For one-way elements, use table 3-12 to determine the' average load
mass factor.
Step 20.
Using the effective mass of step 19 and the equivalent stiffness,

calculate the natural period of vibration TN' from equation 3-60:,
Step 21.
Determine the response chart parameters:

a.
Peak pressure P (step 1) .
b.
Peak resistance r u.. (step 8) .
c.
Duration of,load,T (step 1).
d.
Natural period of vibration TN (step 20).
4A-3 "
I"
,:
TH 5-l300jNAVFAC'P-397/AFR 88"22
Also calculate the rat~os of peak pressure P to peak resistance r u and

duration T to period TN' Using these ratios and the response charts of
Chapter 3, determine the .value of Xm/XE and tm/T N '. Compute the value of
Xm and compare it 'to the maximum' permissible deflection of step 1, and
if found satisfactory, proceed to step 22. If comparison is unsatisfactory, repeat steps 2 to step 21. In addition, compute the value of
Cm/t o .from tm/T N and T/TN and' ,assuming that T - to' determine whether or .
not correct procedure has been used; for elements to respond to the
pressure- time relationship, 0.1 < tm/t o < 3';',''''
Step 22.
Using the'ultimate resistance of step 8, ,the value of de of step 6

and equations of table ..4-7,calculate theultimate diagonal
tension shear stresses at distance de from each support. Also
'calculate the shear capacity of the element from equation 4-23.
If the capacity is greater than that produced by the load, shear
reinforcement is not ,required. However, if the shear produced by
the load is greater than the capacity, then shear reinforcement
must be added to resist the excess.
Note:
"
For one-way elements, use table 4-6to establish diagonal tension

shear stress.
Step 23.
Using the equations of table 3-10 or 3-11 and the ultimate resistance of step 8, calculate the shear at the supports. Determine
required area of diagonal bars using equation 4-30. However, if
section type I is used, then the' minimum diagonal bars must be
provided (eq. 4-31).
"
".'
:"
, .
Note:
For one-way elements, use table 3-9'to calculate the shear at the
supports.
Example 4A-l, Elements Designed for the Pressure-Time Relationship

Required:
Design a wall which spans in two directions and is fully restrained at all supports for a given blast load.
Solution:
Step 1.
Given:
a.
Pressure-time loading (fig. 4A-l) ..
b.
Maximum deflection equal to 3 times, elastic, deflection.
c.
L - 180 in., H - 144 in. and fixed on four sides (fig, 4A=1).
d.
Type I cross section.
4A-4
TK 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR'88-22
1
35
iii
APPLIED
LOAD
CIl
CIl
...a:
10,5-
TIME,rna
BLAST LOAD
SECTION
"
Figure 4A-l
Step 2.
. Select cross .sec t Lon of element and static st r e s s of reinforcement

and concrete (fig. 4A-2).
,
'
".
NEGATIVE REINF. _
CL.
"
. ::. ':', '.:: . I--POSITIVE REINF.

~"":. -.::.
.'.
INTERIOR SURFACE
'.
1'12'
.."....
..
f'
c - 4,000 psi
\'
.fy - 66,000 psi
Assume .T~ - 12 in. and

concrete cover as shown,
EXTERIOR SURFACE
'. :
, !,~~\~,~/,:~ 1
.,
Figure 4A-2
Step 3,
Determine dynamic stresses.

a.
Dynamic increase factors - DIF (table 4-1).

Concrete:
Bending
Diagonal tension
1.19
1.00
'
4A-5
..
TH S1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR"88-22
Reinforcement:
Bending
Diagonal tension
Direct shear
b.
1.17
1.00
1.10
Dynamic strength of materials
Concrete
(f'dc):
.
Compression
DiagonaF'tension
1.19 (4,000)
4,760 psi
1..00 :(4,OOOr -4,000 psi
Reinforcement (f dv):
Bending
Diagonal tension
Direct: shear ,"
Step 4.
- 1.17 (66,000)
- 1.00 (66,000)
- 1.10 (66',000)
77,200 psi
66,000 psi
72,600 psi
Dynamic design stresses from table 4-2.

Concrete (f'dc):
Compression
Diagonal tension
Reinforcement
4,760 psi
4,000 psi
(fds - f dy):
,
>
Step 5.
Bending
"
Diagonal tension
Direct shear
77 ,200' psi
66,000 psi
72,600 psi
...
In order to obtain optimum steel ratio PV/PH; set x'- H/2 to have
45 degrees yield lines.
2L
144
- - - - 0.40
2 x 180
From figure 3-17,
.,
."
Therefore,
1. 43 x 144 ] 2
[
- 1. 31
180
Try No.4 bars at 10 in. o.c. in vertical direction, and No.4

bars at 12 in. o.c. in horizontal direction.
4A-6 .
TK 5-1300/NAVFAC
Step 6.
P~39~/AFR 88~22
Calculate de and steel ratios for,each direction, minimum reinforcement ratio is equal to 0.15 percent.
Vertical:
Vertical reinforcement bars are No, 4 at 10 in. o.c. from
step 5.
AsV - .20 X 12/10
.~
0.24 in /fe--
Negative moment
dv -
12 - 1. 5 - 0.25 - 10.25 in
Positive moment
dv -
12 - 0.75 - 0.25 - 11.0 in
0.24
------------ 12 X 11.0
bdV
0.00182
> 0.0015
O.K.
.'
Horizontal:
Horizontal reinforcement bars are No.4 at 12 in. o.c. from
step 5.
AsH - .20 X 12/12
.../ft~
0.20 in
Negative moment dH - 10.25 - 0.25 - 0.25 - 9.75 in

Positive moment dH - 11.0 - 0.25 - 0.25 - 10.5 in
;'
.20
-
0.00158
>
0.0015 O.K.
12 X 10.5
.
Step 7.
'~.
Calculate moment, capacity of both positive and negative reinforcement in both directions.
a.
Depth of equivalent rectangular stress blocks.

a
Asfds
- .85 bf'dc
.24
aV -
77,200
- .382 in
.85
.20
aH -
(eq. 4-12)
12
X
4760
77 ,200
,
.85
- .318 in
X
12
4760
.,
4A-7
, "'b:' 'Homent capacity (eq. ,!-11).

i '
.
i'
(d- a/2) ,
, 0.24 (77,200)(10.25
vcrt,'(A ( 1'1,,~~/,'o/~
. HVN t7 .
....
vcr],',.
f" ,~j, ':/i
f)
HVp
t.
12,
HHN
.,
HHP
15531 in-1bs/in
e.
.382/2)
16689 in-1bs/in
12
~1 ~.,
0.20 (77,200)' (9.75
.318/2)
,
12
'.~'.
:'382/2)
-r:
0.24 (7'7,200) '(11.0
,.
0.20 (77,200) (10.5
.";
,
~
.318/2)
12340 in-1bs/in
'
i)
(',i'
13305 in,-lbs/in
12
,.
t....
0"
Step 8.
Determine ultimate 'resistance of the element.

'.
"
Vp
[ HVN +,.H
HHN + HHP
From figure 3-17; .

'r
...
'
180
'"' 1. 43 (step -s)
12340 +'13305
144
:.~;'"
-;':
.405
L
x - .405 X 180 - 72.9 in
',,':
Ultimate resistance (table 3-2).
' ,':\.'
5(12,340 + 13;305)
~tep
9.
"
24:13 psi
ru -
(72.9)2"",
Determine modulus of elasticity and modular ratio:

a.
Concrete (eq. 4-4)
4A-S'
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFa. 88~22
Ec - w1 . 5
33
(f' c)1/2 - (150)1.5 (33) (4000):l/2
- 3.83 X 10 6 psi
b.
.1.
Steel (eq. 4-5)

Es - 29 X 10 6 psi
c.
lltep 10;
Es
n -Ec
. ::
29 X 10 6
7.56
~:
3.83 X i0 6
(eq. 4-6)
.,~
Determine average moment of inertia for an inch strip.

Gross moment of inertia (eq. 4-9a)
a.
3
T
.c
I -g
12
..
12 3.
'd
- 144 in4/in.
--12
'i~
b.
-,'
Moment of inertia of cracked section (eq. '4-9b).

iJ
Vertica1.direction:
10.25 + 11.0
d(avg)- - - - - - - - :10.625 in
2
, '
As
. fX(avg) - - - bd(avg)
0.24
------------ - 0.00188
12(10.625)
, ','
..'
.. F - 0.0102 (fig. 412)
IcV - Fd(avg)3 - .0102 X (10.625)3 - 12.2 in4/in

Horizontal direction:
9.75 + 10.50
. t.,:.
4A-9
TK 5-1300/NAVFAC.P-397/AFR 88-22
- .00165
p(avg) - 12 (10.125)
.. F - 0.0092
I cH - .0092 X (10.125)3 - 9.5 in4/in

C.
"Average moment of inertia of cracked section.

(eq. 4-10)
(180 X 12.2) + (144 X 9.5)
I c - -----------
180 + 144 '
d.
Average moment of inertia (eq. 4-7).
" .
144.0 + 11.0
- -
' .., - 7 7. 5 'i n 4/ i n
' i.
Step 11.
Calculate unit flexural rigidity.

(eq. 3-33)
Use
.167 for concrete
Therefore,
(3.83
10 6 ) 77 .5
305.34 X 106 in-lbs
1- (.167)2
Step 12.
For points of
Step 13.
Properties at first yield.
interest,.see~figure 4A-3;
4A-10
TIl 5-1300/NAVFAC P~39j/,AFR'88-22' '

From figure 3-33 of Chapter 3 'fdr H/L,:' 0,80
.,.,
"
~,
r'
.:
r '.
I'
...
"
( , ',
c. ' . ( . ."
POINT 3, My"
'.!\, :'
)< .
'I
r:
,.- POINT 2, MHII
-e J
~".-
"
, . "
POINT' 3, II YII
. ,.".
. ,.
'.
..,
',',
I,
Figure 4A-,3.'
'
'
. i
.. ..,'
B1H - 0.023
B2
- 0.056
BlV - 0.031
B3
0.068
I;d
Y1 - 0.0018
.~ ~
a.
.1
'
MHp - 13.305 in-lbs/i.n

.
MVp.-
i-
16,689
;): 1
MHN - 12,340 in-1bs/in

f .. :..-, '.
.
'1 I
in-1bs/in
'.
MVN - 15,531 in-1bs/in
.. r -
BH 2
rlH - 13,305/[O.023(144)2 J - 27.90 psi.

rlV - 16,689/[0.031 (144)2] - 25.96 psi
r2
- 12,340/[0.056(144)2] - 10.63 psi
4A-ll
(eq. 3-25)
TH
~~1300/NAVFAC
P-397/AFR88~22
r3 ~
15,531/[0.068(144)2],- 11.01 psi ..
"
Fir~t
yield at point 2 (smallest r).
b.
r e - 10.63 psi'
c.
M1H - (0.023)(10.63)(144)2 ~
5,070 in-1bs/in'
M1V - (0.031)(10.63)(144)2 ~
6,833'in-1bs/in
M3 - (0.068)(10.63)(144)2 - 14,989 in-1bs/in

d.
Xe -
4'
Y1reH /D
~."
(eq. 3-32)
Xe - (0.001.8)cl,O.63)('i44)4/305:34
Step 14.
Properties at
X 10 6 -0.0269 in
yield,
se~ond
,After first yield element assumes-a sinipie-simp1e-ftxed-fixed

configuration, therefore, figure 3-34 forH/L ~,O.80.
B1H - 0.020 ,
BlV -0.039-
11
a.
- 0.0022
M1H - MHP
M1H (at r e) - 13,305
Mpj -MVp
MlV (at ,r e) - 16,689
M3 -MVN
M3 (at r e) - 15,531
5,070- 8,235 in-1bs/in

6.,833 - 9,856 in-1bs/in
- 14,989 _.
,
542 in-1bs/in
.' .{
b.
Ar -
-BH2
Ar1H - 8,235/[0.020(144)2] - 19.86 psi

.;
ArlV - '9,8561['6.039(144)2]',-
1;.1~
psi
. ' '1
l ~:. '
l.-.
".;'
.
.
4A-12
,',.
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

&r3 - 542/[0.076(144)2] -
0.34 psi
Second yield at point 3 (smaller &r)

c.
&r - 0.34 psi
d.
rep - r e + &r - 10.63 + .34 -
e.
K1H - (.020)(0.34)(144)2 +
f.
K1V - (0.039)(0.34)(144)2 +
&X'- Y1&rH4/D
10.~7
5,070 -
psi
(eq. 3-26)
5,211 in-1bs/in
6,833 - 7,108 in-1bs/in
&X - (0.0022)'(0.34)(144)4/305.34 X 10 6 - 0.0011 in

,.
.028 in
g.
Step 15.
Properties at final yield (ultimate unit resJ.stance). After

second yield e1ement:assumes a simp1e-simp1e ..simp1e-s;l.mp1e configuration, therefore, from figure 3.36 for H/L - 0.80.
11 - 0.0054
a.
r u - 24.13 psi .(from step 8)
b.
&r - r u - rep - 24.13 - 10.97 - 13.16 psi

&X'''Yr&tH4/D .
c.'
'
d.
&X -(0.0054)(13.16)(144)4/305.34 X 10 6 - 0.100 in

~
- Xep.t &X - 0.028.+0.100
0.128 in
Step 16.
For actual resistance deflection curve, see figure 4A-4.
Step 17.
Equivalent elastic deflection from equation 3:35.
4A-13 .
,
r,
.,
....
..
'.' . .
ru = 24.13
'/0'
EQUIVALENT - y
ILl
U
<[
I-
'
, i. ,
I/)
1/)'
ILl
ll::
r.p =10,97
I-
r. =10.63
,.:..-,-
/
ACTUAL
::::l
><.=0,0269
X. P =0.028
,
,.'
"
..:.
FIGURE
4A
~4
'.-
...,
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

XE - Xe(rep/ru) + ~ep[l- (re/ru)] + ~[1 - (rep/r~)]
XE - 0.0269 (10.97/24.13) +
0~02~
[1 - (10.63/24.13]
+ 0.128 [1 - (10.97/24.13)] - 0.098 in
The equivalent resistance-deflection curve is shown in figure 4A4.

Step 18.
Calculate equivalent elastic stiffness.

KE - ------ - ------
Step 19.
a.
(eq. 3-36)
246.2 psi/in
Ca1culate'effective mass of element.

Load mass factors (table 3-13 and fig. 3-44),'
x/L - .405
L/H - 1.25
Elastic range
- KLK - .61 + .16 (1.25-1) - .65
Elasto-plastic'range:
two simple edges
- KLK - .62 + .16(1.25-1) - .66
four simple edges
- KLK - .63 + .16(1.25-1) - .67
Plastic range'
KLK -
KLK(avg. elastic and elasto-plastic) -
.54
.65 + .66 + .67
3
.66 + .54
KLK (avg. elastic and plastic) b.
- .60
Unit mass of element.
wT c
m-g
c.
. 2
150 X (1) X 10 6
- 2,700 psi -' iIIs2/in
32.2 (1728)
Effective unit mass of element.
4A-15
.66
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22 ,
me'- KLMm- .60 (2,700) - 1,620

c-
Step 20.
Calculate natural period of vibration.

.:
..
TN
Step 21.
pSi-ms~/i~
- 2(3.14)
i, 620
(eq. 3-60)
~
]~:...
'16.1 ms
246.2
Determine response chart parameters (fig. 3'64a).

Peak pressure
oP -.35 psi {step 1)
Peak resistance
.ru- 24,13psi (step 8)
Duration
T - 10.5 ms .(step 1)
Period of vibration
TN - 16.1
P/ru - 3?/24.13 - 1.45
T/T N - 10.5/16.1 - 0.65
ms
(step 20)
From figure 3-64a:.
~ Use assumed section
(fig. 3-64a)
The correct' procedure has been used since tm/t o - 0.923 is within
the range, 0.1 < tm/t o < 3.
Step 22.
a.
Check diagonal tension at de distance from support .
Ultimate,..shear. stress (table 4-7).

, VuH -
-where de
4A-16
dW.(of negative moment)
TN S21300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

3 X,24.13 (1 - 9.75/72.9)2
VuH - ----~---------
(9.75/72.9) [5 - 4
- 91.0 psi
(9.75/72.9)]
3ru (0.5 - de/H)(1 - x/L - 2 dex/HL)

de/H(3 - x/L
where de -
dv
8 dex/HL)
(of negative moment)
3 * 24.13(.5 - 10.25/144)(1 - .~05 ~ 2*.405*10.25/144)

VuV - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - (10.25/144)(3 - .405 8*.405*10.25/144)
-99.1 'psi
b.
Allowab1e',shear,. stress (eq. 4-23).

V
c -
[1:9
...
wher~p
(f'dc)1/2 +
2,500 p] S 3.50 ('c)1/2'_ 221.4 psi
is, the steel ratio at support
,
,
' [ 2,500 (0.20) ]
vcH- 1.9 (4,000)1/2,+ ----'------- - 124.4 psi> 91.6 psi
12 (9.75)
(4,000)1/2 + [
..
iitep 23.
2 , 500 (0.24) ]
-
125.0 psi,> 99.1 psi
12 (10.25)
tio stirrups required
Det~rmine
minimum area of
~he
diagonal bars (cross section,type
I) .
. (eq., 4-31)
where d ,fa equal'to de at support.
Using a-45,
AdH - 124:'4 (12 X 9.75)/72,600 (0.707) - .283 in2/ft
""
AdV -125.0 (12 X 10"25)/72,600 (0.707) -
.300 in 2/ft
..
4A-17
TH S-1300fNAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22.

use #5 diagonal bars @ 12"
Problem 4A-2.
Preliminary Flat Slab Design for Large Deflection
Problem:
Design a flat slab for large deflections.
Procedure:
Step 1.
Establish, design' parameters:

a.
Blast loads including pressure-time relationship (Chapter
b.
c.
Deflection criteria.
Structural configuration including geometry and support
conditions.
Type of section available to resist blast, type I, II or III
depending upon the occurrence of spalling and/or crushing of
2).
d.
the concrete cover.
Step 2:
Select cross section'of the slab and the col~ or column capital.'
Include concrete cover over reinforcement and maximum size of the
reinforcing bars in the flat slab. Also determine allowable
static stresses of concrete and reinforcing steel (Section 4-12).
Step 3.
Determine dynamic increase factors for both concrete and reinforcement from t~ble 4-1.' Using the above DIF and the allowable
static stresses. of step 2, calculate the dynamic strength,of
materials'.
Step 4.
Determine the dynamic design stresses using table 4-2 and the
Step 5.
Determine the ratio of the flexural stiffness of the.wall to slab

in both directions using equations 4-50, 4-51, 462 and 4-73.
Step 6.
Proportion total span moments to unit column and midstrip moments

in both directions using equations 4-52 through 4-60 and 4-63
through,4-71.
Note:
Use equivalent. frame method for the direction(s) with only two
spans.
Step 7.
Adjust unbalanced negative unit moment at column and midstrip in

both directions of the roof. Correct the corresponding positive
moments to maintain the same total span moments.
Step 8.
Calculate total external work done by r u from equation 4-74 using

yield line patterns similar to figure 4-24. Use uniform deflection (A) for all positive yield lines.
4A-18
Step 9.
Calculate, 'total internal work done using equation 4- 76 and the

unit moments determined in steps 6 and 8.
Step 10.
Equate,the total external work to the"internal work (equation 477). Solve the resulting equation for the ratio of ru/HoH . Use
equations ,4-61 and 4-72 to substitute HoL with HoH'
Step 11.
Determine the minimum value 'of ru/HoH'by trial 'and error proce., dure. 'Vary the assumed'value of one of the yield' location vari,. 'abIes while assuming a constant value for the rest to find the
minimum' rl.l/HoH" Repeat untllall 'yieldl1ne locationvariables
, are established (X, Y, Wand 'Z): The last step wllLyield the
final minimum value of ru/HoH to be used in the following steps.
,
,..
Step 12.
Calculate the load-mass factor for the flat slab 'using the procedure outlined in Chapter, 3, for two-way elements. Use equation
, 3-59 'for the slab' sectors with. no drop panel and equation 3-58 for
the,:slab sectors with drop panel.
Step 13,
Calculate effective unit mass of the slab using the larger de of

the assumed slab 'section from step 2'and equation 3-54.'
Step 14.
Calculate ,the'maximum deflection of the flat slab using the

shortest 'sector ,length (Ls)"
Step 15.
Determine the required unit resistance (r"vail in equation 4-90)

\ ,to resist the given -Lmpu l se loading (Chapter 2) and the' values
from steps 13 and 14, Check that 'the correct procedure was used.
Step 16.
Determine, the uniform ,dead 'load of the flat slab and calculate the
ultimate resistance of the slab (r u) from equation 4-90.
Step 17;
Determine the required total panel moments in each ,direction using

the 'ultimate resistance from step 16, the minimum value of ru/HoH
from step 11 and "the ratio of HoL to HoH established in step 10.
Step 18.
Calculate the minimum required unit moments in each direction from

step 6 or 7 using the v~lues of HoL and HoH from step 17.
T'.
':.
~-
.',
Step 19.
Calculate' the minimum moment capacity ,of the 'slab section in each
direction'by choosing reinforcing bars, ;rhese capacities should
be equal to or slightly larger' than the corresponding moments from
step 18. Also check for minimum reinforcing ratios from table 43.
Step 20.
Determine provided, resistance in each direction by using 'the

ratios provided to,requibid unit moments from steps 18 arid '19.
Find the average of these values to establish the unit resistance
of the flat slab.
Step 21.
Determine ultimate tension membrane capacity of the flat slab

using equation 4-85. Find the average of continuous steel ,in the
4A-19
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P"397/AFR 88-22.

mid and column strip using: unit ,moment ratios from step 6 or 7
and step 19. Use f ds for bending from,step 4 in calculating unit
tension forces in the continuous reinforcement, in each span
direction..
, '
Step 22.
Calculat~ diagonal tension stresses at de distance from the edge

of wall supports according to Section 4-31.2 in both directions.
Determine concrete capacity in diagonal tension from equation 4-23 ',.>.'
using the ratios of unit moments -from
steps.6~
or 7 and the rein-
forcing ratios from step 19. If the. diagonal. tension stresses are
larger chan the concrete capacity, 'single leg stirrups should be
used' or a drop panel be, added along the wall in lieu of a change
in flat slab cross section. If drop panels are used, the diagonal
shear ~tress at de distance from the edge of wall drop panel must
also be checked.
,.
'n
Step 23.
Check punch Lng shear d e/2 df.st ance out and around the column or
column capital. Use the load area ,between positive yield lines
minus the area supported by ~olumn or its capital. If the shear
s~ress is larger than 4(f'c> , use a column drop panel and check
the punching shear with the new thickness of the slab over.the
column.
Step 24.
Determine the size of column drop panel ,by checking punching shear
d e/2 distance out and around the drop panel.
Step 25.
Chec k one-way vdf.agona I ",hear
yield lines
de distance out from the column drop pane~ in each direction. Use
equation 4-23 to find concrete capacity. Increase column drop
panel size, ,if. r'equf r ed or use 'single leg shear stirrups according
to Section 4-18..3.
Step 26.
Check one-way diagonal. shear, stress'between positive ,yield lines

for an average de distance out from the column capital similar to
step 25. Average de is b~sed on the width-of the drop panel to
the total width. Increase column drop panel width or.thickness if
required'.
.,
.'.
stress~"between positive
,. 'r
Step 27.
Assume preliminary reinforcement for'the flat slab using unit

moment ratios from step 6 ,and 7,-MoL'and.MoH from step 17 and
equation, 4-19 with the slab thicknesses established throughout
this procedure. Calculate all ,actual' unit. moment capacities.
Note:
'Check the actual flat slab resistance using' unit moments from step
27 and the established sizes and thicknesses; .of drop. panels.
Repeat steps 8 to 27 for the actual values' 'in each direction.
Also provide diagonal bars at wall and column according to sections 4-19 and 4-31.2.
4A-20 .
Example 4A-2.
.
Required:
Preliminery Flat Slab Design for Large Deflection

,.:j,'" . t- .
Design of a flat slab with three equal spans, in each direction for
...
f._ .
large deflections.
~:
Solution:
Step 1.
Given:
a.
P - 96'psi,
T - 15 ms and. triangular loading.
b.
Maximum support rotation of 8 degrees.
c.
L - H - 240 in., continuous walls all around 207 in. high
and 21 in. thick.' .
Step 2.
'fl,
Type III cross'section.
d.
, j'
Assume:
a.
Tc - 15 in. thickness of flat. slab.
b.
D - 45 in. diameter of colUmn capital.
c.
Concrete cover r-
outside 2 in.
~":.
inside 3/4 in.

d - 3/4 in. largest bar diameter.
d.
L
. f'~'- 4,000 psi compressive strength of concrete.
e.
f.
g.
Step 3.
'
..
" .
fy
66,000 psi yield stress of'reinforcing bars.
f u'
90,000 psi ultimate stress' of reinforcing bars.

a.
Dynamic incFease fac cors .
DIF (table '4-1).
Concrete:
Diagonal tension
- 1.00
Reinforcement:
Bending,yieid: stress
..
1.17
1'.05 ,,;.\
',Bending, 'ultimate,'. s t're s s .
b.
.1
Direct shear yield stress
1.10
Direct. shear ultimate stress
1.00
Dynamic strength of materials.
4A-2l
TH 5d300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

Concrete:
Diagonal tension (f'c) - 1.00 (4,000) - 4,000 psi

Reinforcement:
Step 4.
Bending (f dv)
1.17 X 66,000
77
Bending (f du)
1.05 X 90,000
94,500 psi
t220
psi
Direct shear (f dv)
1.10 X 66,000 - 72,600 psi
Direct shear (f du)
1. 00 X 90,000
90,000 psi
Dynamic design stresses from table 4-2.

Goncrete (f' c):
Diagonal tension
- 4,000 psi
Reinforcement (f ds):
Bending
85,860 psi
Direct shear
81,300 psi
Note:
Since the structure is symmetrical in both directions, the caloulations will be done only in one direction in steps 5 through 9,
12, 17 through 22, 25 and 26.
Step 5.
Determine the ratio of the flexural s t i f'fne ss of the wall to the

roof slab.
Tw3 H
QecH -
21 3
Ts3~
*
3
15 *
240
207
- 3.18
J.
- 0.76
Q'ecH
l+l/Ct ecH
Step 6.
(e q , 4-50)
(eq. 4-62)
1 + 1/3.18
Calculate unit moments using equations 4-52

figure 4A-5 for locations.
4A-22
460.
See
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

m+2 - 0.40 (0.63 - 0.28 a'ecH) MoH/(L - H/2)
- 0.40(0.63 - 0.28 X 0.76) MoH/(240 - 240/2) - (0.334) MoH/240
m-3 - 3.25 (0.75 - 0.10 a'ecH) MoH/(L - H/2)
- 0.25(0.75 - 0.10 X 0.76) MoH/(240 - 240/2) - (0.337) MoH/240
m-4 - 0.25 (0.65)MoH/(L - H/2)
- 0.25 X 0.65 MoH/(240 - 240/2) - (0.325)MoH/240
m+5 - 0.40 (0.35)MoH/(L - H/2)
- 0.40 X 0.35 MoH/(240 - 240/2) - (0.280)M oH/240
m+6 - 0.60 (0.63 - 0.28 a'ecH) MoH/(H/2)
- 0.60 (0.63 - 0.28 X 0.76) MoH/(240/2) - (0.501)MoH/240
m-7 - 0.75 (0.75 - 0.10 a'ecH) MoH/(H/2)
- 0.75 (0.75 - 0.10 X 0.76) MoH/(240/2) - (1.011)MoH/240
m-8 - 0.75(0.65)MoH/(H/2) - 0.75(O.65)M oH/(240/2) - (O.975)M oH/240
4A-23
If.
NOTE:
-LH
r- t
=1
OF SYMMETRY
,'" L= 240
11
"-
[=240"
f------=--=-..:.-=----+'----'-,....;--~---:,.;...
om,
I-
II
+=
E
IQ
m,
m+
m+
(\J
I'
0
V
I~
I~
+~
'-
nl+2
m+
+=
I,
I
IN
- ' ' - - . _ ,0
I!::::
+~
o
v
(\J
mi5
II
1-j--- I~
W
:IE
~
-r=
m+
1!:2
E
m+
i:::;
E
.,..~
'-
0
IN
E-
1---r-------1~----l--------,--..:.~-----1--
me
)C/)
u,
PLAN
FIGURE 4A-5
"''4
~~
m-9 - 0.60 (0.35)MoH/(H/2) - 0.60 (0.35)MoH/240/2 - (O.420)M oH/240

Step 7.
a.
b.
Balance the negative unit moment over the column and

midstrip.
m-3 > m-4
.,
m-3 - m-4 - (0.337) MoH/240
m" 7 > m-8
..
m 7 - ra" 8 - (1.011) MoH/240
Adjust the corresponding positive unit moment in order to

keep total panel moments equal.
Adjusted m+5 - m+5 - 2(m-3
:.
m-4)
m\ - [0.280 - 2(0.337
Adjusted m+9 - m+9
0.325)]MoH/240 - (0.256) l1oH/240
2(m-7 - m-8)
m+9 - [0.420 - 2 (1.011 - 0.975)]MoH/240 - (0.348)l1oH/240

Step 8.
Calculate total external work for an assumed deflection of ~. Use

one quarter of the roof slab due to symmetry in both directions.
See figure 4A-6 for yield lines and sectors.
Equivalent square column capital, C X C.
lTD2
C -[ - 4 ]
IT(45)2
[--:- ]
WI - WIV - r u
3L
3 X 240
- r u [(
1/2
- 39.9 in.
X2
- X) (X)- + ( - )
2
2
!J.
X2
- X) (X) - + ( - )
2
2
!J.
4A-25
say 40 X 40 in.
-;-]
+J
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
"
WIn - WVI - r u[
- ru
,,]
40
4
1 3*240
X)- + -(----- - X - 40)(240 2
2
2
2
40(240 - -;-
- ru
X) (;-)
1 3L
4
H - C 24
(--- )(-)
C)-+
-(-X
C)
(H
:
2
2 2
2
3
40
4
1 [(3) (240)
;- (240 - 40)- + - - - - - X 2
2
2
From equation 4-74.
VI
W -!: Wi. i-I
Step 9.
r u4
--(243200 - 320X)
3
Calculate total internal work for the assumed deflection of 4.

Use one quarter of the roof slab due to symmetry in both directions. See figure 4A-6 for angles of rotation.
8 2H - 8 2H -
C/2
240
8 3H -
8 3V -
Assume 0 < X < 3H/4
(240 - 40)/2
(H - C)/2
220 - X
40/2 - X
100
- 180 in.
3L
X
)
+ m+681H ( - ) + m+281H (L - - ) + 2
4A-26
X
m+281H(-)
2
TIl: 5-l300/NAVFAC
(240) (2) (240) X
MoH
X/3]
P~397/AFR
88"22
+ 0.501 (240)
11
x----
(2) (240)
[<0.501
1. 011) 240
220 - X
+ 2 (0.334 + 0.337) (240 - X)]

L
L
EI I I
- EvI - m+963H(-) + m+563H(L-X) +
m-~3H(-)
+ m-363H(L-X)
11
- _ _ x - - [ (0.348 + 1.011) 240

100
(2)(240)
+ 2 (0.251) + 0.337) (240 - X)]
From equation 4-75.
E - l:
m 61
VI
E - l: E i
i-I
Step 10.
MoH 11 [ 139972.8 + l33l.76X - 9.7832X 2 + 0.01186X 3 J
- ----------------------
240X (220 - X)
Set the external work equal to the internal work and solve the
equation for the ratios of ru/MoH'
W- E
(243200-320X) -
MoHI1[139972.8 + l33l.76X
240X (220
4A-27
9.7832X2 +O.01186X3]
X)
t
L=240"
OF SYMMETRY
L/2=120"
FACE OF WALL
1:
...
N
"
.
:r
r-i'-,.--;;-_J---_..l
L-C
COLUMN
CAPITAL
-~
"
~L
(l)
-Z
..
:r
<tl"
:r
(l)
]I[
J[it
lbh~
OF SYMMETRY
LEGEND'
= NEGATIVE
= POSITIVE
PLAN
FIGUR~
4A-6
4A-28
YIELD LINES
YIELD LINES
TK
5~1300/NAVFAC
.
P-397/AFR88-22
139972.8 + 1331.76 X -9.7832X2 + 0.01186X3
-- - - - - - - - - - - ' - - - - - - - -
.. -
80X (220 - X)(243200 - 320X)
Step 11.
Minimize, value of, ru/MoH using the equation from step 10 by assuming'variou~ values for X to locate the yield line locations.
X (Ln)
Step 12.
110
ru/MoH (psi/in-lbs)
913.212 X 10- 9
115
911. 686 X 10- 9
120
912':445 X 10- 9
116
911.654 X 10- 9
117
911. 713' X 10- 9
Calculate plastic load mass factor for the flat'slab.

4-30.5 and figure 4A-6.
( - ) I - ( - ) I V - (-)
eLl
eL2
3L
X
(-
(-)11- ( - ) V -
eLl
eLl
'-
2
-C(H
3-
2
(3)(240)
1 116 2
X + - ( - ) - -(116)(
- 116) + -(--)
.. 2 28
2 2
3
2
3
X) + -' (H
4
C
- - X) [3: _ C - X] /2
2
40
(40)(240 -
116)
40
+- (240
4
1
See Section
X2
*minimum
116)
[ 3 X 240
2
2
(-)111- (-)VI - - C (H
eLl
eLl
3
. ']
C)/2 + - (H
4
"
~: v:
4A-29
"
- 40 - 116) ] /2
-X] /4
TK 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
[ 3 X 240
+ - (240 - 40)
4
VI
1:
i-I
I
(--)i
CLI
..
116
-.-
(3L - X)
2
AU - AV - (H -
(3 X 240 - 116)
2
C
- X)
3L
--+
' 2
40
- 116)
- (240 -
[ 3
2
AI U- AVI - (H - C)
1:
Ai
C - X]
X 240
[ 3L
+ C
2'
/2
+ 40 - 116] /4
- (240 - 40)[
VI
116]./4 '
86558.67 in2
AI - AI V - -
-' 40,
X]/4
3 X 240
]
2
+ 40 - 116/4
- 128,000.0 in 2
i-I
1:
I
(-)i
CLI
86558.67
Ai
128,000.0
KU{ 1:
Step 13.
- 0.676
(eq. 3-59)
Calculate the unit mass of the slab ..

dc -
15 - 2 - .75 -
,W
m - ,- g
(2 X .75)/2 - 11.5 in.
11.5 X 150 X 1000 2

- 2583.5
psi-ms 2 lin
12 X 32.2 X 1728
Determine effective unit mass from equation 3-54.

me - KU{ X m - .676 X 2583.5, Step 14.
1746.4
psi-ms 2/in
Find maximum deflection using shortest sector length.

4A-30
TK 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

240 - 40
H - C
Ls ~
Step 15.
( --- )
2
----
- 100.
in
- Ls tan 9 maK - 100 X tan 8 - 14.05 in.
Determine impulse load and required resistance for blast.

ib -
- (96.0 X 15.0) I 2 -
PT/2
i b2
720.0 psi-ms
(eq. 3-93)
r~
2m,.
. 720.0 2
.. r - - - - - - - - - - - 10.56 psi - ravail
2 X 1746.4 X 14.05
Check for correct procedure.
720
ib
tm - - - tm/T
Step 16.
- 68.2
10.56
68.2 I 15
Iils
4.55 > 3
O.K. (section 3-20)
Calculate uniform dead load of slab and the required ultimate

resistance. Assume 150 psf concrete.
rDL -
15/12
X 150/12 2 -
1.30 psi
(eq. 4-90)
Required
85,860
r u - 10.56 + ( - - - ) 1.30 - 12.25 psi
66,000
4A-31
TK,5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR
Step 17.
8~-22
Calculate required panel moment using the required r u from step 16

and the ru/MoRfrom step 11.
12.25
Required MoR - (ru)/(
Step 18.
- - - - - - - 13,437.,115 in-1bs
911.654 X 10- 9
Calculate the minimum required unit moments from step 7.

.
..
Minimum unit moment - m+5
. .,:
." "., '.:-~.
.,
_."
....;'
. 256 MoR
240
.256 X 13,437,115
... m+
,5-
- 14333 in-1bs/in
240
Step 19.
Calculate actual moment capacity at m+5 ' assume No.4 reinforcing

bars 12 in. o.c.
.5,
de in R direction - dR,:," 15 - 2 - .75 -.'2 X .75 * + 2 X'- - 11.25 in

2
de in L direction - dV - 15 - 2 _.. 75 - 2 X .75*
* Assumed
.
~-
~14
.5
2 X - - 10.25 in
2
No. 6 reinforcing in step 2.

(eq. 4-19)
b
.2 X 85,860 X 11.25
- 16099 in-1b/in > 14333 O.K.
12
.2 X 85,860 X 10.25
M+ 5 -
- 14668 in-1bs/in > 14333 O.K.

12
(eq. 4-13)
p -
.20
- .0015 - .0015
12 X 11.25
4A-32
O.K.

.20
-----12 X 10.25
Step 20.
.0016 > .0015
O.K.
Calculate the nrOVloeo unit resistance of the flat slab.

m (unit moment provided)
r u (provided) -
m (unit moment required)

16099
13.76 psi
(r u ) m14 - 12.25 X ------
14333
(ru ) m5
14668
12.25 X -----14333
(ru)m14 + (
12.54 psi
13.76 + 12.54
- 13.15 psi> 12.25 o.k.
Step 21.
Estimate minimum area of continuous steel in column strip using

unit moment ratios from step 7 .
. 348
240
X (0.20) - .27 in2/ft
240
Calculate the average unit tension force in continuous steel.
(L -
.20
H/2)
240/2 + .27 X (240 - 240/2)

85 ,860 X 2 - 3.362 lbs lin
----------------------------- X
12 X 240
Calculate tension membrane resistance from equation 4-85.
rT- --------------------------------------------------------------1
1
{ _ (_l)(n-l
4
:E
[ 1 n-l,3,5
r
cosh
41
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

HL - H - C - 240 - 40 - 200 in
"3 1.5 X 14.05 X 3,363 /200 2

rT- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1
{_ (_1)(n-l)/2
1:
n-l,3,5
[ 1 -
n3
nn(200)
cosh
[ 2(200)
[~3
]J.:i]
3,363
"3 X 1.5 X 14.05 X 3,363

- 23.97 psi> 13.15 psi O.K.
rT -
4 X (200)2 (.6015-.0364+.0080)
Step 22.
Calculate diagonal tension stresses at de distance from the edge

of wall supports according to section 4-31.2 in both directions.
3L - X
r u X Area (Sector I) - VV(
3 X 240 - 116
13.15 (
116
2
460670.8
... Vv - - - - 340.67
2
+ - Vv
3
3 X 240
Vv
X
2
116
)
116
2
+ -VV3
2
1352.3 lbs/in
Total diagonal shear load in L direction.
VuV - Vv
3L - X
) +
2
- 1352.3
[,
X
Vv (- - dv )
3
2
X 240 - 116
2
2
+ - X [
3
1~6
Diagonal shear stress in L direction.
4A-34
- 10.25J] - '51.'" 10.

v uV
vuV
451,443
125.9 psi
3 X 240
3L
( - - d) dV
2
(---
10.25)
10.25
Estimate reinforcing ratio at support using the ratio of unit

moments.
MoH
.494
m1
(-)
m5
r m1 - r m5
240
- .0016
- .0031
MoH
.256
240
Calculate diagonal shear capacity of concrete.
V
c - 1.9 (f'c)1/2 +
2500 p
(eq. 4-23)
v cV - 1.9 (4000)1/2 + 2500 (0.0031)
127.9 psi> 125.9 psi
:. No stirrups or wall drop panel required.

Note:
Diagonal shear at de distance from the H direction wall will be
less than the one in L direction due to symmetry and larger de in
H direction. Calculation is not required.
Step 23.
Check punching shear around column capital.

Use average de'
d + d
davg - - - - -
10.25 + 11.25
- - - - - - - 10.75 in
Dp - D + dav g -
Diameter of punching.
45 + 10.75 - 55.75 in.
Find area between positive yield lines minus column capacity.
xf --?TD 2
Area
:L -
3 X 240
- 57095 in 2
4A-35
- 116
2
n X 55.75 2
]2
-
TN
5-1300/NAVFACP~3!17/AFR
88-22
r u X Area
v (punching)
13.15 X 57095
- 398.8 psi
"Dp dav g
V
"X 55.75 X 10.75

253.0 psi < 398.8 psi
c - 4 (f'c)1/2 - 4 (4000)1/2 -
:. Need drop panel, assume 6 in.

d av g (revised) - 10.75 + 6 - 16.75 in.
Dp (revised) - 45 + 16.75 - 61.75 in.

Area (revised) - [
3 X 240
- 116
12
- 5641 in 2
4
"
13.15 X 56541
V (punching) -
228.8 psi < 253.0
O.K.
"X 61.75 X 16.75

Step 24.
Assume 63 X 63 in. drop panel.
Check punching shear.
Punching Length - I p - 1 + d av g - 63 + 10.75 - 73.75 in

3L
Area - [-2- -
v (punching)
12
XJ
1 2_
P
240
1161 - 73.7522 - 54097 in 2
2
13.15 X 54097
r u Area
- 224.3 psi < 253.0 psi
4 I p davg
Step 25.
4 X 73.75 X 10.75
Check one-way diagonal shear de distance away from column drop

panel and between positive yield lines.
3L
Width in L direction - --2
240
3 X
- X-
- 116
2
1
Area in L direction
Width (H - X 2
4A-36
~)
244 in.
TIl:
5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
63
- 244 (240 - 116 -
- 10.75) - 19947 in 2
13 .15 X 19947
v-
O.K.
d" Width
10.75 X 244
Note:
Diagonal shear in H direction will be less than the one in L
direction due to symmetry and larger de in H direction. Calculation is not required.
Step 26.
Check one-way diagonal shear at an average d distance away from

column capital and between positive yield lines.
(Width)L - 244 in
(step 25)
d" + ( - - ) X drop panel depth

width
63
d avg - 10.25 + --- X 6 - 11.80 in

244
C
Area in L direction - Width (H - X 2
40
- 244 (240 - 116 -
- 11.80) - 22496.8 in 2
v -
d avg Width
13 .15 X 22496.8
- - - - - - - - 102.7 psi < "c
11.80 X 244
O.K.
Note:
Diagonal shear in H direction will be less than the one in L
direction due to symmetry and larger de in H direction. Calculation is not required.
Step 27.
Calculate all remaining required moments similar to step 18.

Assume reinforcing bars for each, and determine actual provided
unit moment capacities similar to step 19.
4A-37

Problem 4A-3. Elements Designed for Impulse-Large Deflections
Problem:
Design an element subjected to an impulse load for a large deflection.
Procedure:
Step 1.

a.
Impulse load and duration (Chapter 2).
b.
Deflection criteria.
c.
d.
Support conditions.
e.
Type of section available to resist blast. type II or III

depending upon the occurrence of spalling.
f.
Materials to be used and corresponding

strengths.
g.
Dynamic increase factors (table 4-1).
static
design
Step 2.
Determine dynamic yield strength and dynamic ultimate strength of

reinforcement.
Step 3.
Determine dynamic design stress for the reinforcement according to

the deflection range (support rotation) required by the desired
protection level (table 4-2).
Step 4.
Determine optimum distribution of the reinforcement according to

the deflection range considered (sect. 4-33.4 and figs. 4-37 and
4-38). Step not necessary for one-way elements.
Step 5.
Establish design equation for deflection range considered and type

of section (type II or III) available.
Step 6.
Determine impulse coefficient Cl and/or Cu for optimum PV/PH ratio

and L/H ratio.
Note:
If the desired deflection
is not equal to Xl or ~. determine
yield line location (figs. 3-4 through 3-20) for optimum PV/PH
ratio and L/H ratio and calculate
Xl' and, if necessary, ~
(table 3-5 or 3-6).
Xm
Xm.
4A-38
TN 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

Step 7.
Substitute known parameters into equation of step 5 to obtain

relationship between PH and d c'
Step 8.
Assume value of dc and calculate PH and from optimum PV/PH

calculate pv. Select bar sizes and spacings necessary to furnish
required reinforcement (see Sect. for limitations).
Step 9.
For actual distribution of flexural reinforcement, establish yield

line location (figs. 3-4 through 3-20).
Note:
. ' ; [MVN + MVp ]
1/2
MHN + MHP
[~f/2_
PH
[ As V ] 1/2
AsH
since:
MN - Mp - P dc 2 f ds -
As
b
dc f ds
Step 10.
Determine the ultimate shear stress at distance dc from the

support in both the vertical (vuV from eq. 4-119) and horizontal
(vuH from eq. 4-118) directions where the coefficients Cv and CH
are determined from figures 4-39 through 4-52 (see sect. 4-35.2
for an explanation of the figures and parameters involved).
Step 11.
Determine the shear capacity V c of the concrete in both the vertical and horizontal directions (use eq. 4-21).
Step 12.
Select lacing method to be used (fig. 4-91). (Note: Lacing

making an angle of 45 with longitudinal reinforcement is most
efficient. )
Step 13.
Determine the required lacing bar sizes for both the vertical and
directions from equation 4-26 where the parameters b l
and sl are determined from the lacing method used (fig. 4-91), and
the angle of inclination of the lacing bars a is obtained from
figure 4-15. The lacing bar size db must be assumed in order to
compute d l and Rl .
horiz~ntal
(Note: See sect. 4-18.3 for limitations imposed upon the design
of the lacing).
Step 14.
Determine required thickness Tc for assumed, dc, selected flexural

and lacing bar sizes, and required concrete cover. Adjust Tc to
the nearest whole inch and calculate the actual d c'
4A-39
TIl: 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88
Step 15.
022
Check flexural capacity based on either impulse or deflection.

Generally, lacing bar sizes do not have to be checked since they
are not usually affected
a small change in dc'
a.
Check of impulse. Compute actual impulse capacity of the

element using the equation determined in step 5 and compare
with anticipated blast load, Repeat design (from step 8 on)
if capacity is less than required.
b.
Check of deflection. Compute actual maximum deflection of

the element using equation determined in step 5 and compare
with deflection permitted by design criteria. Repeat design
(from step 8 on) if actual deflection is greater than that
permitted.
Step 16.
Determine whether correct procedure has been used by first computing the response time of the element ~ (time to reach maximum
deflection) from equation 3-95 or 396, depending on the deflection range considered in the des
and then compare response
time t m with duration of load to' For elements to be designed for
impulse, t m > 3 to'
Step 17.
Determine the ultimate support shear in both the vertical (VsV

from eq. 4-122) and horizontal (Vs H from eq. 4-121) directions.
The coefficients Cs v and Gs H are determined from table 4-15 and
figures 4-53 through 456 (see sect. 4-35.3 for an explanation of
the figures and parameters involved).
Step 18.
Determine the required diagonal bar sizes for the vertical and
horizontal (intersecting elements may control) directions from
equation 4-30. Diagonal bars should have the same spacing as the
flexural reinforcement (fig. 4-95).
Note:
To obtain the most economical
repeat the above steps for
several wall thicknesses and compare costs. Percentl1j>es of
reinforcement may be used to reduce the amount of calculations.
In determining the required quantities of reinforcement, lapping
of the bars should be considered.
Example 4A-3, Elements Designed for Impulse-Large Deflections
Required:
Design the back wall of the interior cell (fig. 4A-7) of a

multicubicle structure for incipient failure.
4A-40
TH 5-l300/NAVFAC P"397/AFR'SS-22
28'0
I'
...
I'
.', r-,'
..
-0
.'
2
PLAN
Figure 4A-7
Solution:
Step 1.
a.
Given:
i b - 3,200 psi-ms and to - 5 ms
...., "
,~ .
b.
Incipient failure
c.
L - 336 in, H - 120 in
d.
Fixed on three edges and one edge free
e.
Type III cross section
f.
Reinforcement f y - 66,000 psi-and f u - 90,000 psi
"
,"
concrete f'c - 4,000 psi

g.
For reinforcement DIF - 1.23 for dynamic yield stress

,
DIF - 1.05'for ultimate dynamic stress f

Step 2.
Dynamic Strength of Materials

-181,l~0
1.23 x 66,000
psi
1.05 x 90,000 - 94,500 psi

Step 3.
"f,
Dynamic Design Stress, from table 4-2,

(81,180 + 94,500)
---------------, - 87,840 psi
2
4A-4~
TK 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22'
,Step 4.
L
336
From figure 4-38 for --- - --- - 2.8 and 3 edges fixed,
H
120
Optimum:
Step 5.
'Since
Xm -
Pv/PH - 1.41
Xu
(incipient failure):
i b2 H
- - - : : - - - - Cu
3f
PH d c
ds
Step 6.
(eq. 4-103)'
L/H - 2.8 is not plotted on figure 4-34, ,therefore must interpolate for optimum Pv/PH'
For Pv/PH - 1.41 '

L/H
Cu
1.5
2.0
3.0
,4.0
613.0
544,0
444.0
387.0
,
"
From figure 4A-8, Cu - 461.0.

Step 7.
Cu f ds
(3,200)2 (120)
- 30.3
(461.0)
Step 8.
(87,~40)
Assume de - 21 in:
'.
30.3
PH -, --3-
30.3
-
0.00327
de
Pv -
(PH) - 1.41 (0.00327) ~ 0.00461
4A-42 '
"
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
Step 9.
Yield line location.
Actual:
1.20
,
2 x 0.86'
'.
~.
0.698
"1/2
From figure 3 ell,for. . ' ; [ ASVJ , : : 2.8 (0.698)1/2 ,. 2.34
HAsH'
and ~/M"N2
1 . 00 ,
x/L - 0.385,' x;' 0.385(336)' ';'; 129 in
."12'"'
. - ;'"
12'"
...
&~.
o
!l!
'":z:
I.
L 558"
'Figure 4A-9
Step 10.
Ultimate shear stress at distance d c from support.

a.
Vertical Direction (along L):

For:
-- - -----H
120
- 0,175 and x/L - 0.385
4A-44
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR ,8,8"22' ,
From figure 4-45:

de
)K -
0.49
eK -
and
1.07
For:
0.175
0.357
From figure 4-46:
Cv
--
0.58
Therefore:
'1
A~V
Pv - ---- -
,1.20
'"
b de
'" J.
0.00476
, .
Cv Pv
(eq , 4-119)
f ds
- 0.62 (0.00476) (87,840)
,J"
- 259 psi
b.
Horizontal Direction (along H) ,

For:
-----, -
> .
12 (21)
so that:
VuV ,-
... ;
21
-----129
0.163
'0.00341
4A-45
TN 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR'88-22
: i
}'.
so that:
VuH -
CH PH f ds
(eq. 4-118)
- 0,81 (0.00341) (87,840)

- 243 psi
Step 11,
:;;.
Shear Capacity of Concrete

a.
(eq. 4-23)
Vertical Direction
Vc
- (1.9 (f' c)l/f .+2.500i'v)
"
- [1.9 (4,OOO)i/2 + 2,500 (0.00476)J

;~~
129 psi
b.
Horizontal Direction
Vc
- (1.9 (f'c)1/2 + 2,590
~'.
PH) \
- [1.9 (4,000)1/2,+ ,2;500 (0.00341)]

- 132 psi
Step 12,
Use lacing method No, 3 (see fig, 4-91).
Step 13,
Lacing bar sizes:

a.
.~
.'
.\
'
Vertical Lacing:Bars
b 1 - 10 in
'h -
22 in"
Assume No. 6 Bars,

"
(eq. 4-28)
4A-46
TK 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
9 (0.75)
.;. 0.271
(eq .
4-29)
24.88
..
~".
lHORIL)
Figure 4A-10
From figure 4-15:
a - 53.0'
For shear:
f dy - 1.10 x 66,000 - 72;600 psi
f du - 1.00 x 90,000 - 90,000 psi'
fds - (72,600 + 90,000)/2 - 81,300 psi'

(VuV - v c) hI sl
A.v - - - - - - - ~
fds (sin a + cos a)
(259 - 132) (10) (22)

0.85 (81,300)(0.799+'0.602)
- 0.289 in2
Min
A.v -
0.0015 hI
,,
si
- 0.0015 '(10) (22)

- 0.330 in 2 '
4A-47
(eq. 4-26)
TH
5~1300/NAVFAC
P-397/AFRl!8-22;
Use No. 6 bars:

(A
b.
-"0.'44
in 2 ) ,'
Horizontal Lacing:
. b l - 11 in
sl - 20 in
.'
,'"
,
'.
Figure 4A-11
'~
"
Assume No. 6 Bars:

db - 0.75 in:'
-v ,
.'
d 1 - 21.0 + 1.13 + 0.75 - 22.88 in

Min. R1 - 4 db
For:
-i
----
20
.. ,-.0.874
d1
(eq. 4-28)
22.88
i
2 RI + db
d1
,9 db
---d1
'
9;,(0. 75)
-
'.\
0.295
."
..
a - 53.5'
(eq. 4-29)
22.88.
From figure 4-15:

,"
I:,
rv
I '
+:0.595),
- 0.259 in2
4A-48._ }
(eq. 4-26)
. [I .
,',
TK
Min.
Av -
5-l300/NAVFAC,P-3~7/AFR
88-22
0.0015. b l sl
- 0.0015 (11) (20)

- 0.330 in 2
Use No. 6 bars:
',.....,.....
Step 14.
"
Actual d c depends upon verticallacing.

Cover
2 x 0.75
- 2 x 0.75
Lacing
Horizontal
2 x 1. 00
Vertical
1.13
.-
.1.50
1.50
2.00
1.13
:',
"
6.13 in
.r" -
dc
+ 6.13
- 27.13 in
Actual d c. - 27
Check capacity.
a.
Use 27 in
6.13 - 20.87 in
Step 15.
..
21 + 6.13
Actual impulse capacity.

For:
Pv
-.1.~0 ~
1.41,
Cu - 461.0
-, (fig. 4-34)
For:
0.86
d c - 20.87 in,
,
PH 3 f
d
PH.c,
.\
ds
'12(20.87)
C
- 0.00343
'
, ...
0.00343(20.87)3 (87,8~0) (461.0)

(120)
, -o
4A-49

i b,- 3244 psi-ms> i b - 3,200 psi-ms
b.
Actual maximum deflection.

For:
Pv
-- - 1.40, Cl - 452.0
PH
(fig. 4-31)
Note: Interpolation for C1 not shown.

Cu - 461.0
From table 3-6 for x'

Xl - H tan 12 ~
:> H:
120 (0.2125) - 25.5 in
.~
x ,tan 9 max + (. 2
_ (129) tan 12 + (168-129) tan[12'-tan-'1[ tan 12 ] ]

.
.
129/120
- 27.42 + 0.56 - 27.98 in.
From Step 5:
(3200)2 (120)
"
0.00343(20.87)3(87.840)
~ - 25.5
452.0 + (461.0 - 452.0)

.
From 'which:
~ - 24.58 in'<X
27.98
25.5 .
Note:
Since the deflection ~ is less than Xl' the above solution
(~ - 24.58) is incorrect because the equation used is for
4A-50 .
TN 5-l300/NAVFAC
P~397/AFR
88-22
xm
the deflection ra~ge XI'S

S~. Therefore, an equation for the
deflection range 0 S Xm S-Xl must be used to obtain the correct
solution.
From Section 4-33.5 for Type I I I cross sections and valid for
deflection range:
"
i b2 H
Cl (
3
PH d c f ds
Xm-
Xm
Xl
i b 2 H Xl
PH d,c
3 f
ds Cl
"
(3200)2 (120) (25.5)

(0.00343) (20.87)3 (87,840) 452.0,
Xm -
25.3 in
Note_:The element is slightly over-designed. To obtain a-more economical design, the amount of flexural reinforcemen~ may be reduced.
Step 16.
The response time of the element is obtained 'from:
~---
'. -
(eq. 3-96)
where:
(table 3-2)
ru -
but:
..
4A-5l
TK 5-1300jNAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

'0.86 (87,840) (20,,87)'-"
..
12
131,380 in-1bs/fn
therefore:
5 (2) (131,380)
ru -
- 78.9 psi
(129)2
so that:
ib
tu - -
ru
tm
3,200
78.9
40.6 ms-
"
40.6
"
;,
The correct procedure has been used since:
Step 17.
Ultimate s~pport shear.

,,"
a.
,.
Vertical Direction (along L):

From figure 4-54, for:
x/L - 0.385
CSV - 4.40
(eq. 4-122)
H
4.40 (1.20) (20.87)2 (87,840)

12 (20.87). (120)
- 6720 1bs/in
b.
Horizontal Direction (along H):

From table 4-15:
6
CsH
- --(x/L)
- 15.6
0.385
4A-52.
'
TM S-i300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22 '
Vs H - - - - - - - - -
(eq. 4-121)
. },.,.
<_.. l
15.6 (0.00343) (20:87)2 (87,840)
336
6,090 lbs/in
i.
Step
is.
,"
Diagonal bar sizes.

Note:
Place' bars
on
sin
a 45- "angl'...
0.707
'r ' '.
Vertical'Direction (at floor'siab}:
a.
,Ad - - - - ' - -
f ds sin
. Required area of bar:

.
"
,
0.58 in2
2
-'..-.\
Use No.8 @ 10.

Horizontal Direction' (at wall, inters"ctibns) ':
u
' .
" -.
;
.'
6;090 (11)'
Ad - - - - -
f ds sin
. ",
, '81,300 ~0.707)
"
..
j'. '.'
Required area of bar:
. :J:.:.:,
- 0.58 in 2
Use Nil. 8 @
'
2
.,- L16 in
n.
.......
4A-S3
-"
(eq. 4-30)
TH
5"~300/NAVFAC
P-397/AFR 88-22
Problem 4A-4. Elements Designed .for Impulse-Limited Deflections

Problem:'
Design an element which responds, to the impulse loading of a

close-in detonation.
Procedure:
Step 1.
Establish design
I"
-'
.. ~-'
parame~ers:\
'0
a.
Blast loads including pressure-time relationship (Chapter 2).
b.
Deflection criteria. ' .
c.
Structural configuration including

tions.
d.
Type of cross'section available depe~ding upon the occurrence of

spa11ing and/or crushing of;the concrete cove~ .. _,'
Step 2,
geome~ry.
and
. ....
"\--..
s~pport
condi-
Select cross section of element including thickness. and concrete

cover over the reinforc~~e~t. Also determine. the static design
stresses of concrete and reinforcing' steeL (Sectio'n, 4-12),.
'"
"
"1
i,'
Step 3,
Determine dynamic increase factors for both.concrete and.reinforcement from table 4-1. Using the above DIF's and the static
design stresses of step 2, calculate the dynamic s~rength of
materials.
Step 4.
Determine the dynamic design stresses using. table 4-2 and the
f'\J
~;-:~ }', . s,..
"',
Step 5.
Assume yertica~ and horizontal.rl"ipf~~cemen~.,bi'.rs.co yieM the

optimum s t ee l, ratio. The steel, ratio is optimum whEm the'resu1ting yield lines make an, angle of 45 degrees with the supports.
.
','
-.
,.
\.
,
.
-. ..' .
.. Calculate de (dor de ;depending.upon th..,. type, of cross section
available to resist the blast load) for both ',the"positive and
negative moments in both the vertical. and' horizonta1..directions.
Determine the reinforcing, ratios. A1so'check 'fot the'~inimum
stee1'ratios from table 4'3.
-;'
~_.
Step 7.
--~
'~.
\'~
Using the area of reinforcement' and th~ :ir~l~e' of de -from "step 6,

and the dynamic desi'gn, stress of step 4,'calcu1ate the moment
capacity (Sect. 4-17) of both the positive and negatiye ..r"inforcement. Also calculate the Pv/PH ratio and compare to ,the optimum
steel ratio from step 5. -.
.
Step 8.,
Establish values of KE , XE and r u similar to .the procedures of

problem 4A-1, steps 8 to 18.
Step 9.
Determine the load-mass factor KLM, for elastic, e1asto-p1astic

and plastic ranges from table 3-13 and figure 3-44. The average
load mass factor is obtained by taking the average KLM for the
elastic
4A-54 . "
TK S-1300fNAVFAC'P-397/AFR 88-22
and elasto-plastic ranges,and averaging' this valu~ with.the,KIM of
the plastic range. In' addition, calculate the unit mass of the
element (account for reduced'concrete thickness,if spalling is
anticipated) and multiply ,this unit mass 'by KIM for the element, to
obtain the effective unit mass of the element.
"';
Step 10.
Using the effective mass ~f step 9 and the equivalent stiffness of

step 8, calculate the natural period of vibration TN from equation
3-60.
Step 11.

a.
Peak pressure P (step 1).
b.
Peak resistance r u (step 8).

.
c.
Duration of load T (step 1).
d.
Natural period of vibration'TN (step .10).
..
Also,calculate the ratios of peak'pressure p,to peak resistance r u

and duration T to period of vibration TN' Using these ratios and
the, response charts of Chapter 3, determine the value of'~/XE'
,co;"pute th;' value of x",.
Step 12.
Determine the support rotation corresponding to the value of x",

from step 11 using the equations of table 3-6. Compare this value
to maximum permissible support rotation of step 1, and if found to
be satisfactory, proceed to step 13. If comparison is unsatisfactory, repeat steps 2 to 12.
Step 13.
Using'the ultimate resistance of step 8, the values of de of step

6 and the equations of table 4-6 or 4-7 (table 3-10 or 3-11 if
shear at support is required),' calculate the ultimate diagonal
tension shear stress at a distance d~ :from each support (or at
each support). Also, calculate the shear capacity of the concrete
-from equation '4-23: If, the capacity of the concrete"is greater
than that produced by the load, minimum shear.,reinforcemimt must
be used. However, if the shear produced by the load is greater
than the capacity of the concrete, then shear, reinforcement in
excess of the minimum required must be provided. Also yheck for
maximum spacing of shear reinforcement.
Sten 14.
Using the equations of table 3-9.3-l0'or 3-11 and the ultimate

resistance of step 8, calculate the shear at the supports.
Determine the required area'of diagonal bars ~sing equation 4-30,
However, if section type I is. used, then the minimum diagonal bars
,. must' be provided. . '
,_
..
4A-SS'
TH 5-1300/NAVFACP-397/AFR 88~22
Example 4A-4, Elements Designed for "Impulse-Limited Deflections
..
":,
"t,;
,.j
Required:
-.
"
Design the side, wall of cubicle',with,lno roof or front wall and

subject to the effects of:a detonation of ,an explosive.within the'
cubicle.
~t~
"
Solution:
Step I:
t;
,,)
".'
,Given:
a.
Pressure-time loading (fig. 4A-12).
b.
Maximum support rotation equal to 2 degrees.
c.
L - 180 in., H - 144 in. and fixed on two sides (fig. 4A12) .
I '
d.
Type Ll Lr c r os s section . r-
"
,
...
.. 1485
,',
,.
PLAN
SECTION
.. ' -
Step 2.
Sele~t,element
..... ,
..l.
.'
Figure
I,
~l'
~]
.Eo
-
BLAST LOAD
-:'
'.'
.. ---
1,2
TIME,ml
'15'O~
T.'
....
4A-12.1~<
I'~
thickness anq,static'stress of, reinforcement and

concrete (fig 4A-13).
.'
';
"rIAnY! MINt-
.. "
: ~ :.:' ;:.: :':

o'
, .'
1~'cL
.. :~POSITIVE
,
,
,
.' .',
.. ..
"
IlCTrlUOlt SUR'ACr
, .'
.;
IItIN.
,
"
INTrRIOR SURFACt:
f'c - 4,OQO psi.,
,
~;CL
::...
-'.'
'. :fy - 66,OOO,psi
".: T
~,~
-;
.J
',"
Assume'T c - 22 .Ln.. and-conc re t e

cover is as shown in figure 4A-13,
':<.:'., ;(::
Figure 4A-13
4A-56' .'
TH S:'1300/NAVFACP-397/AFR 88-22
,.
Dynamic increase "factors, DIF (from table 4-f) .
Step 3.
a.
-v-.
Concrete:
"
Diagonal
Tension
.
t,
-l.QO
.r
.1'
..
Reinforcement:
""
Bending
Diagonal Tension
L10'
Direct Shear'
1.10
''''!'
b,
1.23
'
H,
,.
.' ~tf"
'
. ,_.
. ',..~ . i .
'.l.~
,
; -'
:~
:'
4,000
psi
. <,
.
")'1
.<
1.00 ( 4,000)
r, '\ ;. .
Reinforcement (f dy):
'\
Bending
=''''
..,
,.
'
.,
_~ ~,'l,
>
,Concrete (f'dc):
Diagonal Tension
,-~
./'..
,":",
. . ..
psi
- 81,180
,.
1,10'(66,000) - 72',600 psi
,; ...c....
1.10 (66,000) - 72,600 psi
1.23 (66,000)
Dlagonill Tension'
Direct Shear
'
~ ;,:
,,;:;
'0.
"
Step4.
:-: ""
Dynamic design stress from table 4-2:'
Concrete '(f' de): . ri:i

,
',_e'
'.
'1
Diagonal Tension
Reinforcement (fds
.~;
L
"
,,-
. -.1'/
4,000 psi
- f dy for 0 < 2)
-
Bending
Di'agonal Tension
Direct Shear
81,180 psi
72,600 psi
72,600 psi
fl.
Step 5.
Determine tlle optimlim steel ratio P;'/PH'

degree yield lines,
'x
'H
144
- - - L
L
180
0.80
From figure 3-4,
4A-57
Set x - H to obtain 45
TK 5-l300/NAVFAC,
P~397/AFR
88-22 "
:~.
"'~-'- ',
"
LOS
Therefore,
or
;
..
..,.
Try No.7 bars atS,in. o .c , .Ln the vertical direction and No.6
bars at Sin. e ;e , in the ' horizontal direction.'
Step 6.
<.
,'j
~ t:
Ca1culate'dc and the steel ratios, for each direction.

"
Assume No. 3 stirrups.
"
,.';.
.",
...
"
d cV' - 22- (2 X 0.375) " 0.75 - ,1.5-, (2.XO:875/2) - 18.125 in.
d cH- lS.125
(2 X 0.875/2)
.' ,
)'.
"
(2 X 0.75/2) ..'16.50 in.

-,
0.60
"
"
......
0.44
0.0033 > 0.0015 minimum'
S X 16.50, '
Step 7.
"
~'."
"
Calculate the moment' capacity of both the posJtive':and negative'

reinforcement in both directions (eq. 4-19).'
. '!'
M,,-
--~
"
, _
W-
.~,
. '.'
"
0.60'isi,180)(li.125}
MVp - --:~"--"---:-,"-~~~' ';",,110,354 iri-lbs/in
'8
0.44 (Sl,lS0)(16.50)
8, .'
MVN/MHN'- 110,354/73,,671 :::: 1.5
-:1.5
d' ..,
4A- 5 t
from step 5 o.k.
'
TM 5c1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR.88-22
Step 8.
Using the procedure inc'exampie' 4A~1."steps 8 through 18 and the

moment capacities from step 7. establish the .va1ues of KE, XE and
,.
":
r u'
-'...
KE - 36.7 psi/in .. "o'
E-
:: .. ,. ,PX
C'
..
<
"
0.968 in.
r u - 35 ..53 psi'
Step 9.
Calculate the effective' mass of thee1ement.a.
Load mass factors (table 3-13 and'fig. 3-44)

x/L - 0.80.'
elastic. range'
"
"
'.'
e1asto-ptastic range:
"
KUi -
onesimp1e.edge
0.66
" . Ktit ~ 0 -, 66'
: two simple. edge s

plastic range
"'"
...
..
r,,'~
. ', '
KU{ (average elastic and
e1asto~p1astic
values)
0.65 + 0.66 + 0.66

- .' 0.66
.:'
KU{ (ayerage elastic. and p1astic.va1ues)'

0.66 + '0.54
0.60
-c
b.
Unit mass of element:

Using the1arger. d c as the. thickness. of the element.
Due to spa11ing (Type III cross section) available thickness

equals
Tc - d c - 18.125 in.
wcdc
150 (18.125)' 10 6
m---g
32.2 X 12 X 1728
4A-59
4,072 psi-ms 2/1n
TKS-i300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
1"/
'c ...)
Effective unit mass of element:
"
.: ",
me - KLMm - 0.60 (4,072) - 2,443 psi-ms 2/in
Step 10.
Calculate the natural period of vibration.
TN - 2 " (meIKE)1/2
(eq. 3-60)
TN ~ 2 (3.14) (2443/36.7) l/{ - 51. 2 ms ,

Step 11.
Determine maximum response pf element.
a.
Response chart parameters:.'
"
Peak pressure, P - 1485' psi (step 1).

Peak resistance, r u - 35.53 psi (step 8):
"
Duration of blast load, T ~"J1. 2 ms .(step 1)

Period of vibration TN - 51.2
m~,(step6)
P/ru - l485/35.5~_- 41.8,.

"
.
T/TN - 1. 2/51. 2."~ 0.023
b.
. From figure 3-64a:
.,
. . '.
Xm/XE - 5.0
. Xm - 5.0 X 0.968 - 4.841n
Step 12.
Check support rotation (table 3-6). c

Since x - H - 144 in. and 0 < Xm < Xl
Xm ..; x tan e.t
tane.t - 4.84/144
e.t-. ,1. 93 < 2
assumed section is O.K. ..
-.
. ."
4A-60.
"
TH 5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22"

Step 13.
Check diagonal,tension at supports (internal loading).

a.
Calculate ultimate shear stresses at support by dividing the

values of the support shear from table 3-10 by their respec. tive dc'-" ".
-t '
VsH - 3rtix/5 - 3 X35.53." X' 144/5 - 3,070 1b/in
X
3ru H (2
-)
L
VSV - - - - - - 'X
(6 -
3 (35.53) 144 (2
0.80)
- - - - - - . - - - - - 3,542 lb/in
'(6'-, 0:80)
L,
vuH - VsH/dcH vuV - Vsv/dcV

b.
3,070/16,50
- 186 :1, psi
3,542/18.125 - 195.4 psi
Allowable shear stresses (eq. 4-23)

Vc - 1.9 (f'c)1/2 + 2500 p 53.5 (f'c)1/2 - 221.4 psi
."
.J.
~.'
where p is the steel ratio at the support;

vcH .. 1.9 (4000)1/2 + 2500 (0.0033) - 128.4 psi < 221.4 psi
vcV - 1.9 (4000)1/2 + 2500 (0.0041) - 130.4 psi < 221.4 .ps I
c.
Required area of single 'leg stirrups.'

(Vu - Vc)bs
(eq. 4-26)
0.85 (f' ds)

vuH - vcH - 186.1 - 128.4 - 57.7 < 0.85vcH - 108.8 psi
Use 0.85 vcH as minimum .
.,
4A-6l
TN 5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR88-22
,vuV - vcV - 195;4 130.4 - 65'.0 <0.85vcV... - 110:8 ,psi
minim~.
. Use 0.85 vcV as
"
,
Tie every reinforcing bar intersection, therefore,

b - s - 8 in. < dc/2 (maximum spacing), O.K.'
108.8 X 8 X 8
AvH -
0.85
X~
0.11 in 2.'
72,600 '
minimum Av~. 0.0015 bs - 0.10 in2 < 0.11 O.K.

110.8 X 8X 8
Avv-----0.85 X 72,600
minimum
Av -
0.0015 bs - 0.10 in 2 < 0.11 O.K.
The area of No. 3 bar is 0.11 in2 ;so

O.K.
Step 14.
~a~ ~ssUm~d
in step 6 is
Determine ~equired area of diagonal bars using the values of the

shear ,at the ,support from step 13. '
(eq. 4-30)
,-
f ds sin a
Assume diagonal bars are inclined at 45 degrees.

3.070 X 8
AdM
- 72,600
0.707
3,542 X 8
AdV -
- 0.48 in2 at8 in. o .c.
'
- 0.55 in 2 at 8 in. o.c.
72,600 X 0.707
Use No. 7 bars (Ab, - 0.60 in 2) .ae 8 in. o.c. at both supports
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC
~~397/AFR 88~22
Problem4A-5 .. Elements
Designed for Impulse-Composite
Construction
.
v . .
.
Problem:
Procedure:
Step 1.
Step 2.
Design a compo~it~ (concrete-sand-concrete) wall to resist a given

blast output for inci.plent failure.
a.
Stru~ture
b.
Charge weight.
c.
Blast, impulse load (Chapter 2).
d.
Thicknesses of concrete and sand portions of wall.
e.
Blast impulse resisted by concrete panels .
f.
Density of concrete and sand.
configuration.
",
Determine scaled thicknesses of concrete and sand using:
. Tc - Tc JWl/3 and
Ts - Ts JWl/3
.
Step 3.
Determine: scaled blast impulse resisted by each concrete panel

using:
-i
1/3 (donor panel)

bd - ibdJW
I ba
Step 4.
-'i baJW l/ 3 (acceptor panel)
. l .
Correct scaled blast impulse resisted by concrete (Step. 3.) to

account for the 'in~reased mass produced by the sand and the
reduction of the concrete mass produced by spalling and scabbing
of the concrete panels using:
Tc + d c
(ccrr , )
i bd -
i bd
.n
Tc + d c
(Corr. )
,i ba -
i ba
Ts
W
s
+ (-) (-)
Wc
2
[
4A-63
dc
Ts
W
s
+ (-.-) ( - . )
2'
W
c
dc
r
r
Step 5.
Step 6.
Determine scaled blast impulse attenuated By acceptor 'panel and

the sand i a from figure
pcf., respectively.
4-5~
Calculate total impulse
resi~ted
or
4-58"f~~
ws,
~qua~
~5
'and 100
by the wall using:
i b t - i a + i bd
Step 7.
to
Compare blast impulse which is re~istedby wall to that of the

applied blast loads.
'
Example 4A-5. Elements Designed for i:mpuls~-CompoSite":Construction

Required:
Design the composite wall shown below for incipient failure

conditions.
'
,.
....
,"
'. ,.
'. '
~~~ ..~:'.'.
' ': ~~a~ ....
:z:
.... ~~~:r;;;
'" . ~r,~~
:.
i::~"::~
'. :,-"::.,.
.;-:
,:-.:,,~~
"
-v.
."
" . :a:~:
....
.. . ..'
0"
I.
ELEVATION
SECTION
;
. . 1\
Figure 4A-14
Step 1.
Step 2.
a.
Structural configuration as shown ~in figure 4K-14'.
b.
c.
'ib .. 4,800 psi-ms (Chapter 2).
- 1,000 Lbs ,
d.
1 ft, T; - 2 ft, and d c - 0,833 ft.
e.
i b a - 1,500 psi-ms (sect. 4-33).
f.
150 pcf and
s - 100 pcf.
Scaled thicknesses of concrete and sand:

4A-64
TK
5-1300/NA~FACP-397/AFR88-22
(eq. 4-125)
(eq. 4-126)
...
Scaled blast impulse resisted by individual

concrete panels.
.
Step 3.
-i bd - -i ba
1500
- -----.,.(1000)1/3
-150 psi-ms/lb c,.
(eq. 4-127)
Correction of scaled impulse resisted by concrete panel used in .

composite walls.
Step 4.
(Corr. )
2];
+ -100 (-)
150 2
.'
150
0.833
- 207 psi-ms/lb l/3 - i ha (corr.)
Step 5,'
Scaled .blast impulse attenuated by scceptor panel and sand.

i a -'280 psi-ms/lb
Step 6.
Total scaled blast impulse resisted by wall,
...)
Step 7.
(fig. 4-58)
I bt
I a + I bd
- 280 + 207 - 487 psi-ms/lb l/3
Comparison of wall capacity and applied blast load.

O.K. "
4A-65 ,(
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC'P-397/AFR.88-22
'.
.
-......
...,
Problem 4A-6, Design of a Beam in Flexure
Problem:
'.Dload.
esign an interior beam of a roof subjected'to an overhead blast
Solution:
Step 1.

"
a.
Structu~al
configuration.
b.
Pressure-time loading.
c,'
Maximum allowable support rotation.,
d.
Material properties
'J
Step 2.
From table 4-1, determine the dynamic increase factors, DIF. For
the deflection criteria given ,in Step lc, find the equation for
the dynamic design stress from table 4-2. Using the DIF and the
material properties from Step Id, calculate the dynamic design
stresses.
Step
3.
Assuming reinforcing steel and concrete cover, calculate the

distance from the extreme compression.fiper to the centroid of the
tension reinforcement; d.
Step 4.
Calculate the reinfo,cement ratio of the steel assumed in Step 3.

Check that this ratio is greater than the minimum reinforcement
required by equation 4-137,but,less,than the 'maximum, reinforcement
permitted by equation 4-132.
Step 5.
Using equations 4-129 and 4-130, the dynamic design stresses from
Step 2, and the'value of d,from Step 3. calculate the 'ultimate
moment capacity of the beam.
Step 6.
Compute the ultimate unit ,resistance of the beam ,using the moment
capacity of Step 4 and an equation from table 3-1.
Step 7.
Calculate the modulus of elasticity 'of concrete Ec and steelEs

(equations 4-4 and 4-5, respectively) and the modular ratio n
(equation,4-6). Determine the average moment of inertia I a of the
beam according to Section,4-15.
Step
From table 3-8, find the correct equation for the equivalent
elastic stiffness KE. Evaluate this equation using the values of
Ec and I a from Step 7.
8.
Step 9.
With the ultimate resistance from Step 6 and the stiffness KE from
Step 8, use equation 3-36 to calculate the equivalent elastic
deflection XE.
4A-66 \
TH 5-l300/NAVFACP:397/AFR88-22
Step 10.
Find the values for the load-mass factor KLM in the elastic,
elasto-plastic and plastic ranges from table 3-12. Average these
values according to Section 3-17.4 to determine the, value of KLM
to be used in design.
Step 11.
Determine the natural period of vibration TN using equation 3-60, '

KLM from Step~O, KE from.Step 8 and. the mass.of.the beam. The
mass includes 20 percent of the adjacent slabs.
Step 12.
Calculate the non-dimensional parameters T/l'N and ru/P' Using the

appropriate r,esponse' chart by Chapter 3' determine :the ductility
ratio, j.l.
Step 13.
Compute the max~mum deflection Xm using the ductility ratio from

Step 12 and XE from Step 9. Calculatethe suppo.rt rotation
corresponding to Xm using an equation from table 3-5. Compare
this rotation with the maximum allowable rotation of Step lc .
Step 14.
Verify that the ultimate support shear.V s givenin table 3-9 does
not exceed the maximum shear permitted by equation 4-142. If it
does, the . size of the beam':must, be', Lnc reaaed-rand Steps 2 through
13: repeated.
-e :
", ,
Step 15.
Calculate the diagonal tension stress Vu fr~m,equation 4:139 and'

check, that it.:does -not; exceed.lO(fdc l ) l~ 2.
'
,
'." r>,
3.
-"~_.:
'.
...
. ,,,
',1
'-(
~,
.,.
.",
-~::.
Step 16.
Using the dynamic concrete 'strength f dc' from Step 2 arid equation
4-140, calculate the shear capacity of the unreinforced web, v c'
Step'17 .
Design the shear reinforcement using_equa~lon 4-140, ~nd the

excess shear stress (vu - v c) or the shear capacity of concrete
v c' whichever is;greater.
, ~.
Step 18.
Check'that the shear reinforcement meets .the'minimum'area and

of Section 4-39.4.
~axi~umspacing requirements
Step 19 . .,., With T/TN and Xm/.XE from Step 12, enter figure 3-268 and read the
required resistance of the beam in rebound.
Step 20.,,"
Repeat;
~ ......... tance
Steps' 3 through 6-to -sat Lafy the required .rebound resis'.J
. .' . - Example 4A-6. Design of a Beam in Flexure

\' "..
~.".'
.'
Required: . 'Design of an interior of a roof beam subjected to an overhead

blast load.
.,
,.
~
4A-67",
-'.
TN 5-1300/NAVFAC: P"397/AFR 88-22

'. ,
Solution:
Step 1.
Given:
. ~ .' :
a.
Structural configuration is shown in figure 4A-15a.
b . ',. Pressure- time. loading is' shown figure 4A-15c.

'~
"
c.
Maximum support rotation of one degree.
I.> Yield stress
of, reinforcirig steel, ' f
- 66 000 :psi
'i
Concrete compressive strength, f'c - 4,000 psi

Weight of concrete; w -
,.
Step 2.
a.
Dynamic increase factors from table 4-1 for intermediate and

flow preasure., range.
. .
"
"
Reinforcing steel
bending, DIF
.~
- direct shear, DIF
Concrete
1.19.
direct shear,' 'DIF'
... L 10
- diagonal t~nsi~n, DIF - 1.00
compression,~DIF
'c,' _
b.
.,"
I,
...
Dynamic design stresses from'equation 4-3.

;ReinforCing. steel - 'bending"
.~
..
1. 17 -x 66,000
- 77 ,220 psi
diagonal tensi?n :~y
,.
'.
"
From table 4-2, for em S 2:

. f'ds. -
c.
1.17
-' 1: 10
It'.....-
:Concrete
,"
1. 00 x 66,060 "
66,000 psi
- compression.
f'dc '- 1.19 it 4,000

4,760 psi
- direct shear
f'dc
1.10 x 4,000
- 4,400 psi .
,
diagonal tension f dy' - 1.00 x 4,000

- 4,000 psi
Step 3.
Assume 5 No. 6 bars
for
bending:
As - 5 x .44 - 2.20 in 2
For concrete cover and beam sections,see figure 4A-15b.
,4A-68
14-'~'------il1-"---==,,'--=-.~
14'-0"
18"
!I II
"I
18"
. ' . ,.
..
.I
20'- 0 "
:1'
.
'
'.
,"
.-,
.
18"
I'!,
I
r--r--;--- , - -.-~
r-,--,
-----.,-... --r-"-,-I--=-+I. I
' I
I'
I
I
<.
,~~...,
'
--~-I--;---' --t--i----------r-i-~
. ' II
I
I
I
'
il"
I I
1- -
I I
" ,'\'
I I
I I
II II
" I "I
I I
I I
I I
I
I I
I I
.'
I I
I I
I I
I I
'
I l
1 , I'
,r--r-r -.- - --- r-i---- -. .
-, --""':--j-r- =!!!
i-"'-jf---;---,-, -. ~-r-:"----7"----'---~-i-',i
It'-+.
I
I I
I I
.'
~,
. ,
(a)
.\;,r
;'
-CZ)
'(\I
(\I
--(\I'1,...1
U<'i
,',
n::;~~~~.:~,
.,
I~
.~
"
'--
., -
CL, .I: ..
....:,
"
"
,"
I~"
"=,,-2
CL.
~4 fJ
,
, i ";
."
=
,f
r_;
(b)
"
,p~i
.'
, ,,7.2
.: :
;;~.f,
60.7
( c)
FIGURE
4A-15
4A-69 .'
ms
TK 5-1300/NAVrAc'P':397/AFR 88-22
Cnesk reInforcement requireme~ts:
Step 4.'
a:" (i;;lcu1~te d nega'ti';'~' '('support) '~;;d positive(mid-~:pan) for

, "'checking bending "re1nfcircementratioii.
'" - ,
..Ji
"
d - h - d' (cover)' -
..
';
I,
q, , (tie)
(Blmding Bar)
30-2-0.5,-p.75/2
b.
27.125in
30- 1.5 - 0'05 J; 0:75/2 - 27.625 in.

,
f
Calculate reinforcement, ratio:
j
From equation 4'131.
PN'-' 2.2/(18
x' 27;:125)-"0:0045
,*
"
Pp - 2.2/(18 x 2~)615)
c.
'--1'" "..
... "... .
..--- -,
"
\-
0.0044
Maximum reinforcement: '

Maximum r~inforciTlg.,.rati,o:, Pmax .~ 0~J5 X..Pb,
,
From equ,ation .4-132;
',.:'t,:-
K1 - 0.85
.,
~ .. i
'.
.t .
-. "l
, .. 0.85K1
dc
I'
.,'
Pb
where:
...,":f.~', .:
,,87.. 000
, 8y;OClO
,
.
- Jr ._~_
.~
+ f dy '-'
.... ".
..
-..
"
O. 05 ~t<!c: - 4,000)
--.:.:...;;"'-'---- , - 0.812
1,000'
0.85 x 0.812,x 4760
87,000
Pb - - - - ' - - - ' - - - - - - .... ( - - - - - - )

77,220'
. d7~006 + 77,220'
0.0225
. I .
Pmax - 0.75 x 0.0225 - 0.0.169> PN - 0.0045

Pp - 0.0044 O.K.
d.
and
"
.
'
.Check for ininimumreinforcing ratio usi~g,equation 4-138

".i
-..~
TH 5'-1300/NAVFAC 'P:397/AFR 88-22

Pmin - 200 1 f y
i .
200
Pmin - --------- - 0.0033 < PN - 0.0045 O.K.
60,000
, < Pp - 0.0044 O.K.

Step 5.
Moment capacity of the beam using equations 4-129 and 4-130 is:
where:
As f dy
0.85bf'dc
2.20 x 77,220
a--.,----,-.,---. ..'
,0.85 x 18 x 4,760
-2.333 in
-,
at support:
MN - 2.20-x77,220.x (27.125 2.333/2)

. -.4,409,934in-lbs
at mid-span:
~
- 2.20 x 77,220 x (27.625 - 2.333/2)

- 4,494;876 in-lbs
Step 6.
From table 3-1, ultimate resistance of a uniformly loaded beam

with fixed ends is:
ru -
8-(4,409,934 + 4,494,934)
r u - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1,236.79 Ibslin
Step 7.
a.
From Section 4-15, calculate average moment of inertia of the beam

section.
Concrete modulus of elasticity (eq. 4-4):
4A-71
TH 5-1300/NAVFACP-397/AFR88-22 '.
Ec - wl . 5 x 33 x (f'c)1/2
Ec - 150 1. 5 x.33 x (4,000)1/2
- 3.8 x 10 6 psi
Steel modulus of elasticity (eq. 4-5):
b.
Es - 29 x 10 6 psi
c.
,.
Modular ratio (eq. 4-6) :
"
n----
Ec
29 x 10 6
n -
3.8 x 10 6
7.,6'
..
From figure 4-11 ~nd havf ng n , 'PN and Pp' the coefficients
for moment of inertia of cracked sections are:
d.
FN - 0.0235 at support
Fp -0.0230 at:mid-span'
Cracked moment of inertia from equation 4-8b is:
~
,'
lcN - 0.0235x 18 x'27.125 3

lcp - 0.0230
'x
8,442 in4
18 x 27.625 3 - 8,728 in4
Average:'
Ic -
(lcN + lcp) / 2
8,442 + 8,728-.;,
Ic -
e.
""
. ,.' ...
Gross moment of inertia
(eq.
...
.,;
8,585 in4
4-8):
'.::
- ..
4A-72
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC'
P~397/AFR
88'-22
bh 3
I
---
12
.18 x 30 3
- 40,500 in4
I g - ----
, .....
12
;" -,
f.
Average moment of inertia of the beams from equation 4-7:

,
40,500 + 8,585
Ia -
Step 8.
From table 3-8,
- 24,542.5' in4
2
,KE
of a uniformly loaded beam '.with f,ixed ends is:
307 Ec I a
L4
307 x 3.8 x 10 6 x 24,542.5

2404
- 8,629.70 lbs/in/in
Step 9.
Step 10.
Equivalent elastic deflection from equation 3-36 is:

ru
1,236.79
KE
8,629.70
Load-mass factor from table 3-12 for a plastic range of a uniformly loaded beam with fixed ends is:
elastic
- 0.77
elasto-plastic
- 0.78
- plastic
- 0.66
KI1f for plastic mode deflections; from Section 3-17.4 from Chapter
3:
'u<-
[[O.";O"J.o.,,]
4A-73 '
/2
-0.77
TH5-1300/NAVFACP-397/AFR 88"22
Step 11.
Natural period of the beam from equation.3-60 is:

TN - 2lr (Rut mIKE) 1/2
Where m is the mass of the beam plus 20% of the slabs span perpendicular to the beam:
m - wig
.
m - (30 x 18 + 2 x 8 x 102 x 0.20)

1,000 2
150
x-x
12 3
32.2 x 12
194,638.50 1\?s-ms 2/in/in
Tn Step 12.
2lr [ 0.72 x 194,638.50
-- 25.3' ms
8,629.70
Find J.l. ductility ratio from figure 3-54.

From Step 1:
.'
T/T N - 60.7/25.3 - 2.40

P - (18 + 84 + 120) x 7.2
- 1,598.40 1bs/in
1,236.79
ru/P -
- 0.77
1,598.40
J.l - 9.0
Step 13.
,.
From table 3-5 support rotation is:

L tan
~----
2
~ - J.l
~.
x XE
- 9.0 x 0.1433 - 1.29 in
4A-74
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC"P-397/AFR
88."22',
,
..
'\
2'.x 1 ..29'
tan 9 - '
- 0.01075
240
9 - 0.620
Step 14.
sr:
"
,
;.,
O'.K.
Direct Shear froln'tab1e 3-9 :ts: '

'.,-
"
",
Vs -
,1236 .79x 240''

: ':.
"
- 148,415 Lbs
2
!r~
Section capacity in direct shearfrom.equaticm 4-142:

Vd - 0.18;,f"dc bd .
Vd - 0.18 x 4,400 x 111' x 27.125 ,\:.
- 386,694 lbs > Vs - 148,415
Step 15.
Diagonal tension stress from equation

".
O.K.
"
4~139:
\
"
10 (f',c )1/2
Total shear d distance from the face of support: '
Vu -
"
(L/2 -d), r u
240
' ..
- ( - - - 27.125) 1236.79 - 114,867 lb
2
114867,,,
Vu - -------------- - 235.2 psi
18 x 27.125
10 (f'dc)1/2 - 10 x (4,000)1/2
Step 16.
Unreinforced web shear capacity using equation 4-140 is:

V
c - [1.9 (f' dc)1/2 + 2,500 p)
< 3.5 (f'dc)1/2
4A-75
, .
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC' ,P~397/AFR,088:"22
- [1. 9 (4,,000) 1/2 + 2,500 x: 0.0045]
"e
.,
;;, .131.4 psi

3.5 (f'dc)1/2
3.5 x (4,000)1/2
221.4 psi '> 131'.4. psLO.K.,
Step 170
Area of web reinforcing'from equation 4-141:
Av Vu
Vc
[(vu - v c) ~:bx ssl /~
X~dy;
- 235.2- 131.4 -, 104 < "e use

.'
,;
Assume:
Ss .. 9"in _,.'
;0'
_.
Ay'-:131.4 X 18 x 9/(0.85,Xi~6.000)
0.38 in /,9 in2 .
-r :
Use No.4 tie:

.
Step 18.
"'"''
Minimum tie reinforcing area,:
'
Av
A
(min) - 0.0015 bs s
'(min)
0.0015 x 18.x 9:::
""V
. ' , :,:-,
"
- 0.24 in2 < 0.40 in 2. O,.K:- .
')
"
Maximum tie spacing:
- 253 psi> ~c - 131 psi.,'"

> v u." Vc - 104 psi
smax - d/2
Smax - 27,125
,
'1.2.-
13. 56'in > 9 in ' O.K.
"
4A-76. "
TH 5-130~ftIAVFAC'P-3971AFR 88-22
Step 19.""
Determ~ne required .resistance for r,eboun,d r- :,from' figure ,3-268:

.' ~~
,/,'
~!
.;r-/ru:-'",o:50for T/TN,-,2.40, and,Xm/ XE
9.0
".
Requf.red s
r
0.50 x 1236.79
'.I'
Step 20.
.1
618.4 lbs/in
H:<.
Repeat Steps 3 to 6:
.Assume:
:'
'
: ~.' -
,,
2 No: 7 + 1 No.6
,p N at support
-0.0033
eo
"
p -p at mid-span
,:t.
.;,..,....r "
N-
N at.support
. '"
200/fy
,. - 0; 0034 > 20,o!:fy
- 3,388,275 in-lbs
~,
. : : ! ':
3,324, 954
M-P "at mid-'span
i~'~:lbs
- 932.4 ,1bs/in . , ., .. ,.
> 618.4 lbs/in :O.K. ",

,
Prob1em4A-J. Design,of a Beam Subject to Torsion.

,. .'
Problem:
Design a beam for.
a uniformly
distributed torsional load.
r-t-
Procedure:
Step 1.
Design the beam and. adjacent slabs in .fTexure for' the. applied
blast load.
'
" , : ...
",
Step 2.
Calculate the unbalanced slab support shears, VT using the ultimate resistance' of:'the slabs, from Step 1.
,.
.. ;,
.' "i
Using the unbs.Lanced' slab support' shears, compute the torsional

. load at. d' distance "from .the. face of ,the'~support :from: :
L
T~
- ( - , - d)
2
4A-77
Step 3.
"Using the' torsional' load ,from Step 2 ..' compuce the 'noininal'"torsion- ....
al stress .Ln the vertical direction from, equation, 4-143 and in the
horizontal direction'from' equacdon 4-144. 'Ver.ify that the torsional stresses do not exceed the maximum stress permitted in Sec.
4-41.5.
-z.. ('
,If,
.
Note:
:.
If the height of the beam is greater than width,' the horizontal
torsional stresses will not be critical arid'maybe ignore&
Step 4.
Determine the shear and torsional capacity of anunreiriforced web,

V
c and v t c' from equations 4-145 and 4-,146 or 4-147" the torsional
stress from Step 3 and the shear stress I from step 1.
Step
Find the excess ,shear. stres~(vu ~ vc)'where'ithe- nominal shear

stress v u' is from Ste,P I, !'nd the shear capacity o~ ,the unreinforced web v c is ',from Step 4:,' U~ing the' excess'lshear stress and
equation 4-141, determine
the area of, web reinforcing
for shear.
.
.
,
5.
" , "
: I .,:
' '.
,0'
:- .,
~;
::.....
Step 6.
With torsional capacity of the concrete from Step 4, the torsional

stresses from Step'3, 'and equations 4"148 a~d 4"149, calculate the
area of web reinforcement for torsion, in the vertical and, if
required, in'the horizontal ,directions.
Step 7.
Add the, area of "shear reinforcem'mt from Step 5 and the area of
torsion reinforcement in the, vertical direction, and compare with
the area of torsion reinforcement required in the horizontal
direction.' The larger.of .the' two values will'control for,the
design of the closedties. (If height of beam is greater than
width, see note at Step 3.)
Step 8.
Check minimum area and maximum spacing requirements of ties

according to section 4-41.5.
:::.;
(J:
..... ~
.!
.~
, I,
<i
Example 4A-7.Design of Beam in Torsion

_' -.1,,, ',t I,'
Required:
Solution: .
1.
1.l'~ t
.';
...--.
,'
Design of 'beam in 'example 4A-6 " 'for "torsional 'load due to"unequal
spans' of adjacent slab.
....
.' -r:
4A-78 "
>l'
TK 5-1300/NAVFAC
Step 1.
P-397/AFR88~22
Given:
a.
Beam designed for flexure in example 4A-6 where:
240 in
L -
d - 27.125 in;
b - 18 in
,.
V
b.
u - 235.2 psi
Slabs designed
, for flexure
: wh~re:
- 14:ft
168 in
7.85;psi L2 - 20 ft
240 in
r u1 - 15.0 psi
~
r u2
Step 2.
Calculate torsional load.
b.
Torsional load at d from the support:

Tu -
L
(-
- d)
b
2
240
- ( -2 Step 3.
L1
(VT)
18
27.125) x - x 320 - 267,480 in-lb
2
Maximum torsional stress:

Since h > b, the torsional' stress in the vertical direction is not
critical and will be ignored.
a.
Torsional stress:
(eq. 4-143)
3 x 267,480 .
82.5 psi
1'8 2 x 30
4A-79
,.
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
b.
Shear stress:
c.
Check maximum allowable torsional stress.
Vu
-235.2 psi
12(f' dc )1/2
12 x (4000)1/2
- - - - - - - - - - - 212.9 > 82.5 O.K.
1 + [1.2 x 235.2
[
82.5
.
Step 4.
r]~
,
Find shear and torsional capacity of unreinforced web.

a.
Shear capacity:,
2 (f' dc)1/2
(eq. 4-145)
- 121.4 psi
(eq. 4-146)
howdy,
4A-80
TK 5-1300jNAVFAC P-397/AFR: 88"22
tc -
2.4
(4.000)1/2
-----------~-
r1'
[1 [".::'"
- 42.6 psi (Vertical Face)

Step 5.
Area of web reinforcing for shear using equation.' 4-141:
Av- (':'u'
v c) x b x
s/(</I f dy )
Assume s - 12 in: .."
Av r."
(235.2 - 121.4) x 18 x 12/(0.85 x 66,000)
- 0.438 in2/ ft
Step 6.
Web reinforcing' for torsional' stress using equation 4-148:

(v t u
- v t c ) 2b h s ,
Vertical
where:
1. 50
\
h t - 30.0 - 2.0
1. 5,"
(2 x 0.5/2) - 26 in
See figure 4A-15.

b t - 18.0 - 1.5
- 1.5 - (2 x 0.5/2)
See figure 4A-15 .
.,
.,
14.5 in
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR88,;22
'26
at - 0.66 + 0.33 x --" .
14.5
1.25 < 1.50
O.K.
(82e5 - 42.6) 18 2 x 30 x 12
Ai: - -,---'----'------"-'-------3 x 0.85 x 1.25 x 14.5 x 26 x 66,000

0.059 in 2/ft
Step 7.
Total web reinforcement:, '

At + Av/2 - 0.059 + 0,438/2 -'0.278 in2/ft/Leg
Use No.4 ties @ 8 in - 0.300 in 2/ft/Leg.
Step 8.
Minimum torsion reinforcement (sect. 4-41.5):

a.
Minimum tie reinforcing area:

. Av (min) - Av shear alone. from example 4A-6
Use No.4 ties @:9 In.,
0.38
12
---x--
Av, (min)
- 0.253 in 2(ft/Leg < 0.300 in 2/ft/Leg

b.
O.K.
Maximum spacing:
"
Smax - - - - 4
26' + 14,.5
Smax - - - - - - 4
- 10.125 in> 7 in
Step 9.
O.K.
Required area of longitudinal steel is the greater of the two

values from equations 4-l5la or 4-l5lb.
4A-82
TM
'..
5-l300/NAVF~CP~397/AF!t
,88-2,2
bt + ht t ,
Al - 2At x - - - s
14.5 + 26.0
Al - 2 x 0.06 x - - - - 12
.' .
..
or:
_[ <00
Al
x b x s .
f dy .
vt u
.' Vtu' +!vu
,,;,]
:.b t +
ht
where:
SObs
2A t -
f dy
SObs
50 x 18 x 12
f dy
66,000.
---
- 0 . .16 in 2/ft 2A t
. [ 400 x 18 x 12 ,,(82.5)
Al -
66.000
82.5 + 235.2
14.5 + 26.0
x------
0.~2J
0.74 in 2 .
12
Step 10.
Distribui~ Ai. As. and As-
as follows (see fig . .J4A-16):

'1
Distribute Ai equally between four corners of ~he beam arid one on

each face.of depth, a total of six .locations to~~atisfy maxi~um
sp'acing
12 i.nches .~.,
. .:
"
cof
.......
Vertical Face:
'.
,-;
'
'.
One (1) No. 4 bar "',

- 0.20 in2 > 0:12
.
-Horizontal Face at Top:
4A-83
O.K.
1M 5-1300/NAVFAc"'P-397/AFR 88-22Support - 2.20 (bending) + 2 x 0.12 (torsion)

2.44 in 2
Two (2) No. 7 at corners + three (3) No. 6
'
_ 2.52 in 2
O.K.
Midspan - 1.64 (rebound)

Two (2) No. 7 at
co rrier sr e-
- 1.64 in 2
.1
one (1) No.6'
O.K.
Horizontal Face at Bottom:
"
Support - Greater of rebound (1.64 in 2)

or torsion (2 x 0.12),
Two (2) No. 7 at corners + one (1) No. 6
_ 1.64 in 2
.'
O.K.
j .. "
Midspan,- 2.20 (bending)

Two (2) No.7 at .co rne r s + .one (1) No.6 + two (2) No.5
i
'.
:.. 2.26 fn 2 > 2.20 ,O.K.

,
,-'.'
,.
,f' .
., ..
"
r,
...!...."-'.
~~.:
": ..---- "
"
',.
f.=-
..
~:
..
_.-
'.
l2-#7
'
'f.
'4 /),
':.~':' '.
'
'[-: -
"
.~.
7'
'1
"
'
," X'.. .
,
,.. . .
.
- --:H
. .
- ------ --; -.,"
0_:'
..... 1.
, T :: !.:.
- ,.
.,~\
,4
.'
2-#5 7
+ 1-#6
#4(8~'
,.
20', 0"
Figure 4A-16 .
4A-84
-,
-,
I #4 E.F./
,
,
---~
}".
'oC
....;....,..
i...
..
1'-6',1'
TK 5-130oiNAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

. Problem 4A-8. Column Design"
Problem:
Design an interio~,col~n ofa one-story structure with shear

walls;
.
Procedure:
Step 1.
.' ; i
; .', .
"

" ,
. '.~'
Step
2.
a.
End conditions of coiumn.
b.
Clear height
c.
Dynamic loads 'from roof.
d.
Static materfal properties.
for'
'.
co Iumn,
Find equivalent static loads on the column by increasing the

dynamic loads' 20 percent (sect. 4-47).
'\-
~.
" '.'
Step 3.
From table 4-1, determin~ the dynamic increase factors, DIF.

Using the DIF, the material propertfes'from Step 'ld and equation
4-3, calculate the dynamic design' strength of the concrete and the
re inforcement.
.
.'
Step 4.
Assume a column section and'reinforcing'steel.

<: " .~
Step
5.
Step 6.
l~""
Calculate the slenderness ratio of the column section assumed in

Step 4, using 'either -equatrLon 4-167 ~i'4:168. I f the slenderness
ratio 'is less than 22, slenderne~'s 'effects may be neglected. If
it is greater than 22 and le~s" than 50; the moment magnifier must
be calculated from equation 4-170 and the moments increased
according to equation 4-169. The col~n section must be increased
if the slenderness ratio is greater than 50.
the moment by the axial load to ,obtain the design eccentricity in both' df.rec t.Lons .' Verify that the'cdesign eccentricities
are greater than the minimum eccentricity of O.lh for a tied
. co Lumn and 0.0707D for a spiral column.
.:
Divi~e
Step 7.
Compute the balanced eccentricity eB of the'column using equation

4-156 or 4-158 (for a rectangular and circular colUmn, respectively), the dynamic material properties' from Step 3, and the section
properties from Step 4. Compare the balanced eccentricity with
the design eccentricity from Step 6. Determine' if the column
failure is controlled by compressive strength of the concrete (eb
> e) or tensile strength of reinforcement (eb'< 'e) ~
'
Step 8.
Calculate the ultimate axial load capacity, at theiactual eccentricity, in both directions. If compression controls use equation
4-160 'or 4-161. If tension controls use 'equation' 4,162 or 4-166.
4A-85
TH 5-l300/NAVFACP-397/AFR88-22
. ,.
. - ....
~...
Step 9.
Using equation 4-154, compute the pure

section.
Step 10.
Compute the ultimate ,capacity

load capacities at the actual
axial load capacity from Step
the ultimate load capacity is
load from Step 2.
aXi~l,load
of. the column section, using the,

eccentridities fr~m. Step 8,
pure
. the
,.
9, and equation 4-176. Verify that
greater than the equiv~lent static .,.
..,.
Step 11.
capacity of the
'.
'Provide ties according to section 4-48.4 for a tied column, or

section 4-49.4 for a spiral reinforced c~lumn.",:,
'.;
Example 4A-8. Column. Desigll.. ..
~
Required:
\,
'
Design of a rectangular, tied interior' column.
Solution:
.. }
Given:
Step 1.
"
Both ends of'col~n fixed
a.
b.
.,
Axial ioad 491,066 Ibs
c.
Moment about. x-axis, .2,9.46 ,OOO,inclbs

No calculated. moment about y-axis
,
. _'~
..
\j..
-:.
..,:
:.
,
a.
'
.....
":'
IbsN .
..
. 1. i .
: '
",
n -
-'0 Ln-Lbs.
s .: 1.'t-,
'.,
. ~ tt: .' :
r : ,..
:J\'. :~:.~ or, 11'.;
.. ;
,,1
.'
Dynamic material s t rength.. : __ ..

.
T' -:-
-2,946,OOO'x 1.2 .. 3,535,200 in-lbs'
.', ""Y
"
Moment about y-axis (
c.
Step 3.
.:
"
"
,.
,5~~,200
..
...
"..
Moment about x - a~i" ':

~
'
.' '. ~ "

-,
\.
P- A9l,OOO x 1.2 -
"
"
,"
Equivalent static . loads '.~
b.
...',
.r .' :.'
Axial load
."
.""
" ~?ncrete, f: c ;'.:4, OOp psi
a.
r;
Reinforcing steel,:~y:" ~6iOOo., p,,~,

. "'t.~
Step 2.
't
:'
Reinforcing Steel.
,"
.: ..
"
4A-86
,~
.: ;.'
":
'.
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR88-22
72,600 psi
b.
Concrete.
f'dc - f'c x DIF
f'dc _: 4,000 x 1.12
Step 4.
4',480 psi
Use an 18." x lS" column section with 12 No~ 7 r e Infcrc Ingrbars

(see fig. 4A-17).
Figure 4A-17
Step
5.
Radius of gyration for rectangular sectiori is equal to 0.3 of

depth.
,
..
~.
r x - r y - 0.3 x 18 - 5.4 in
From-section 4-46:
k - 0.9
kl
'
O. 9x 120
20 < 22
r
.....
5.4
4A-87
(eq. 4-168)
...
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC, P-397/AFR 88-22
, I
,.'
"0' -
.'
Therefore slenderness. effects may be nagLacced ...

Step 6.
Minimum eccentricity in both directions,
"".
emin - 0.1 x 18 ~ 1.8 in

ex
- ~/P - 3,535, 200/5~9, 200 - 6 in
"s.. Step 7.
Hy/P - 0/5S.~,200 -.()
..
>
0j:K.
1. 8,' in
:< 1.8!, use 1.8 in,
;'
Balanced eccentricity:
a.
From figure 4A-17,
dx - dy -
18 - h5- 0.5 - 0.875/2
15.56 in
As x - 4 x 0.6 - 2.40 in 2
Asy - 2 x 0.6.- 1.20 in 2
b.
Find value of m,
-.'
m - fdy/(0.85,~ qc)' - 72,600/(0.85 x 4,480)
19.06
c.
Using equatiop 4'-156, -
"
-,
0.20 h- + 1.54 s
r,
.',
A m/b
;
0.20 , x 1S. '+(1.54

x2 .40 x 19.06)/18 '
.
"
'.
- 7.51 i~ > 6 in,. compression'controls

eby
-0.20 x'18 +(1.54 x 1:2x 19.06)/18'

- 5.56 in> 1.8 in, compression controls
Step 8.
Axial ,load from equation 4-160:
Pu
a.
. ~/(2d- -, h). + 0.5. '.'
bhf'dc
. :.3he/d 2 + ,1.18 "
When only eccentricity ex is present:

r
2.4 x 72,600
Px - - - - - - - - - - - 6/(2 x 15.56 - 18) + 0.5
- 758,417 Ibs
I,
4A-88
18 x 18'4,480
+
3 x 18 6!ii5. 56) 2'+ 1.18
TH
b.
5-1300/NAVFAC~P-397/AFR
88-22
When 'only eccentricity e y is"present: '.

PY -
1.8/(2 x 15.56
18) + 0.5'
,.
,18 xU x'4'.480
+ -----------,-----3 xU x 1.8/(15.56)2 + 11.18
Ii:
1.054.557 1bs
"',,
-',
Compute pure axial load capacity from equaU~.n 4-154.

.,
. . "i
c
'.
"
.~ 7"! ~
,1 .
0.85 f'dc (Ag - As t) +A~t fc:iy
Po
324 in 2
Ag
18 x 18
., :.
As t - 12 x 0.6 - 7.2 in 2
Step 9.
Po - 0.85x 4480 (324
7!2) + 7.2 x-72.600
..
1;729,094 1bs
Step 10.
1
+
Px
1
Py
:'
."
-r,'
.<
1
---l/lbs
1.054.557 ..:1.729.094' .:592.254
592.254 1bs
>. 589.200'O.K.'
".
" , . ' _' '-"I
Provide ties. according to section 4-48.4 .

~
;.
.:' '.
.' -, I{"
For 1/7 longitudinal bars. use 113."Ues.', '.
, 1"
.,
1
758.417
Step 11.
Po
+
Pu -
..
'
.
Ultimate capacity of the column from equation 4-176:
.'
..
4A-89 -,
,TH 5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22"
Use two (2) #3 ties at 9 inches ,arranged as 'shown in figure 4A-17.

'Problem 4A-9, Brittle Mode, Post-Failure Fragments
......
,
Problem:
Design an element, which responds to blast impulse, for ,controlled

post-failure fragments.
Procedure:
Step 1.
Step 2.
Step,3:

a.
Impulse load and duration (Chapter 2) .:, ,.'
b.
Maximum average velocity of post-failure'fragments'vf as

required by receiver sensitivity.
c.
d,
Support conditions:
e.
Materials to be used and 'corre;ponding static design

strengths. '
f.
Dynamic increase factors.(tabl~,4-l).
Determine dynamic yield'strength and ultimate strength of reinforcement from equation 4-3.
,..
"
.'
Determine the dynamic design stress for the flexural reinforcement

. according to the deflection ,range ,(support rotation) from table
4-2.
, Step 4.
Substitute known quantities of i b (step la); f ds (step' 3), H (step

lc), arid.vf (step lb) into equation 4-194,
Step 5.
'Obtain optimum ratio of vertical to horizontal reinforcement Pv/PH

for a given wall thickness Tc:
a.
Assume a value of dc and substitute it into the equation

obtained in step 4.
b.
Read optimum: Pv/PH ratio from figure 4-38.
4A-90
TIl:
Note:
5-l300jNAVFAC P",397/AFR 88-22
For one-way elements, the ratio of the main to secondary rein, f'or'cemerrt is always '4 to -1. unless minimum conditions. govern (table"
"43) . . Obtain Cu f rcm.icab Le 4-.11 .fo r the given support condition.
Cf is always equal to 22,500 (Sect. 4-58)
Step 6.
F~r the'optimUm PV/PH r at i.o , ,determine Cu '(from figure 4-33, 4-34

or 4-35). and Cf (from figure 4-73, 4-74 or,4-75). Calculate Pv
and PH' Select bar" sizes, and spacings -naces aary to 'furnish the
required reinforcement ratios.
Step 7.
Determine the required lacing and diagonal bars~ (Procedure is

exactly the same as that for, elements designed for' the ductile
mode for incipient failure or less. See problem 4A-3.)
Step 8.
Determine the required Tc for the assume~ d c select~d flexural and

lacing ,bar sizes and required concrete' cover. Adjust Tc to the
nearest whole inch and ~alculate the actual d c'
,"
-,,,'t"
Step
9.
. . .
Checkflexu~al
capacity of the element based on either blast

impulse of-, post~'fai1ure 'fragment' velocity. "'Generally, lacing bar
sizes do not have to be'checked since they are' not usually affected,by,a, smal~;change in'dc'
a.
Compute the actual impulse capacity of the element using

equation 4-194 and compare with'the antiLc Lpat.ed. b l.as t; load.
"Repeat design (from step 5 on) if the capacity is less than
'that required.
.
b.
Compute the actual post-failure fragment'velocity-using

equation'4-l94 and compare with the value permitted by the
- acceptor sensitivity. Repeat design (from step '5 on) if the
actuai ve Ioc LtyLs greate:rthan that
permitted.
.'
.. - .
,~.,,,,
Step 10.
Determine whether the correct design procedure has ,been utilized

by first' coraput Lng the response time of the: e Lement; 'tu (time to
reach ultimate deflection) from equation 4,192' or 4-193. Then
compare the response time ~u with the duration of the blast load
to' For elements ~hat respond to ,impulse load~ng, tu/t o > 3.
Note:
To obtain the most economical des Lgn , repeat' steps 5 through 10
for several wall thicknesses.and compare, their costs. Percentages
of reinforcement can be used to' reduce ,the amount of calculations.
In determining the required quantities of reinforce~ent, the
. length of the lap spLf cevshouLd b'e' considered. -,:
'
,',I
.f '
4A-9l
TK 5-1300!NAVFAC 'P-397/AFR88-22
Example 4A-9, Brittle Mode, Post-Failure ,Fragments "

.
,~,
Required:
Design the back wall of an interior cell (fig:. 4A-18) .o f a

multicubicle str~cturefor ,controlled post-failure' fragments.
,
Solution:
Step'l.
-:
"
Given: ,
0",'
a.
i<800psi-ms,' and to' -, 1'.0 ms.
b.
100 fps - 1.2 in/ms.

:
H ... 120' in.
c,
L-
d.
Fixed on three' edges and one ,edge free.
e.
Reinforcing bars; f
66,000 psi and' f u'- 90,000 psi
'.. .
. ~ . . ',..
Concrete, f' c - 4,000 psi,
360 Ln . ,
y-
"",'
DIF'~-
For reinforcement',
.f ,
1'.23 for, yield stress
'''~''.'.
DIF -'1.05 fqr'ultimate stress,'
...
,
'.
'I
,
...u
,
.
,
...
.:
",
.ELEVATION
h;
:.
~,
Figure.4A -.18

f dy - DIY f y - 1,23
. .
-:;-
~ ,'~
.'.
"
. ;.::
Step 2.
X 66,000
..
'
.r '."
~,81.180:psi
,~
'\ -.
fd~ ~ DIF f u .- 1.05 X 90,000 - 94,500 psi
Step 3.
Dynamic design stress from'table 4-2.

81,180 + 94,500
87,840 psi
2
4A-92 '
. i
"
TH 5-1300/NA,VFAC P-39.71A,FR,,88-.22
Substitute known quantities into equation 4-194.
Step 4.
120
Optimum reinforcement ratio.
Step 5.
-. t __
'
..
a.
l.~
.Assume de .,. 21 in. and substitute into equation ..4-194.

'23.04 X 10 6
'. -;
..
732 Cu PH (21)3 + 1.44 Cf (21)2

,
L
Therefore:
..
23.04 X 10 6
PH - - - - - - - - - .;; "
."
b.
Read optimum PV/PH value from figure 4;38 for 'L/H - 3 ..

Pv/PH'" 1.58
,!
Step 6.
For ,?ptimum PV/PH -
1. 58
From figure 4-34, Cu - 477

From figure 4-74, Cf - 1.583 X 10 4
[23.04 X 10 6 - 635 (1.583 X 10 4)]
PH Pv -
(6.78 X 10 6). (47.7-) .

1.58 PH - 1.58 (0.00402)
- 0:00635
AsH - 0.00402 (12) (21) - 1.013 in 21ft.,
e
4A-93
0.00402
h
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC'P-397/AFR 88-22
use #8 @ 9 in. (As - 1.05.iri2)
-"
"
..
rj
.s
0.00635 (12) (21)- 1.60 in 21ft.,

use #10 @ 9 in. (As ~ 1.69 in 2)
1.69
- ---- - ----
Actual
PH
AsH
1.610
r.05
-,
No. f vertical lacing ba r s va r'e renot shown since they are similar to
4A-3 for incipient failure design.
design for shear will not be shown.)
.; . , .. ,
,
",
The actual d c depends upon'the details of the'base of the wall
(region of vertical lacing).
Step 7.
Using lacing method No.3,

quired. (Calculations are
,those ,presented 'in example
Also, the remainder of the
Step 8.
- 2 X 0.75
3"
~CL.
(TYP.)
'-
-10 VERT. REINF.
-8 HORIZ. REINF.
~_~-7 LACING BARS
lacing
horizontal
bars
- 1.50
2 X 0:.75
1.75
- 2 X '1.00
2.00
"9",.,
vertical bars - 1.27
-l.....U
't.
.,
Figure 4A19
Tc - d c + 6.52 - 27.52 in., use,28"in.
"
actual d c - 28
':
6:52.- 2l.48in.
.'
4A-94
6.52 in .
TIl 5:l300/NAVFACP~397/AFR 88-22

Step 9.
.:
Actual capacity of, element.

a.
Actual impulse capacity.

For Py/PH; - '1.610, Cu '-, 481 "
and
Cf - 1.~88 X 104
d c - 21. 48 in.
PH -
"
1.05
i c2 -
- 0.00407
12 (21.48)
' (0.00407) (21.48)3 (87,840)']

481 [
120
+ (l!588 X 10 4) (21.48)2 (1.2)2
i 2 _
c
24.75 X 10 6
,
'.
i c - 4,975 psi-ms > i b - 4,800 psi-ms

b.
O.K:
Actual post-failure fragment velocity.
4,800 2 - 481
0.00407 (21.48)3 (87,840);

120':".
Vf - 1.10 in/ms - 92 fps
4A-95. '
<
100 fps
O.K.
.,
.l".-
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

Step 10.
Response time of element t u:
'~
"
(1.05) I (87,840.)
.(21.48)
. . '
<
12
- 165,095 in-1bs/in
(1.69) (87,840) (21.48)
, 12
"
- 265,725 in-1bs/in
~ie1d
x2/x1 - 1. 0 ,(symmetrical
360
120
lines)
26, 725. ]l..i,

[-2---X 165,095 '
2.69
265,725
MVp
-MVN2
1.0
265,725
From figure 3-11,
.... :
,~,
x1/L - 0.358
xl - x2 -
0.358 (360)
128.88
,,
i'
5(M HN1 +MHP)
ru -
(table 3-2)
x 2.
1
.11,.
5 (2 X 165,095) ,
ru
. '120 2 '
- 99.4 psi
4A-96
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

m - 225d c - 225 (21.48) - 4833' psi-ms 2/in'
(fig. 3-44)
(KLM)u -,0.557
~ - 0.557 '(4833) -2692 psi:ms 2/in '

Xl - 128.88 > H - 120
~
Vertical supports fail first and the post-u1timate"range resistance is:
8 (2 X 165,095)
360 2
~p Xl -
20.4 psi
0.66 X ~833 - 3,190 psi;ms 2/in

H tanBmax -
12 X tan 12 - 25.51 in.
(table 3-6)
Use equation 4-192 for t u'
4, 800 [
3190
+
u - - 2,692
2692 X.20.4
2692
( - - ) 1.1
20.4
tu ,
2
_1] [4800 -' 2 X 2692 X 99.4 X 25.51]
99.4
3.78 ms
-' 3.78 / 1.0 ;. 3.78 > 3"..
4A-97
correct procedure: has been used
l>z
TH
5-l300/NAVF~C,P-397/AFR
88-22
Problem 4A-10, Maximum Fragment Penetration

.,
Problem:
.L.
Determine the maximum penetration of a primary metal fragment into

a concrete wall and determine if perforation occurs.
Procedure:
Step 1.

a.
Type of fragment
b.
Weight Wf and diameter d of ,fragment
c.
Fragment striking velocity
d.
Thickness T~ and the ultimate compressive strength f'c of

concrete w.all
'.
Step 2.
Determine the maximum penetration Xf from ,figure 4-78 (or equation

4-200 or 4-201) for the values of Wf and V s in step 1. Xf is the
maximum penetration of an armor-piercing steel fragment into 4,000
psi concrete.
Step 3.
To determine the depth of penetration into concrete with ultimate

strength other than 4,000 psi, use Xf from step 2, the concrete
strength from step ld and equation 4-202:
"
Step 4.
X'f ~ Xf (4000/f' c)1/2'

To obtain the maximum penetration into concrete by metal fragments
other than those of armor-piercing fragments use the penetration
from step 3, the penetrability coefficient k from table 4-16 and
equation 4-203.
X'f-kXf
Step 5.
Calcula~e the limit~ng thickness of concrete at which' perforation

will occur from equation 4-204:
Tpf - 1.13 X d O. l + 1.311 d

Where applicable, replace Xf with X'f from step 3 or 4. If T f is
less than Tc embedment will occur; if Tpf is greater than Tc ~he
fragment will perforate the wall.
TK 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

Example 4A-l0. Maximum Fragment Penetration,
Maximum penetration of a primary fragment into a concrete wall;
determine if perforation occurs.
Required:
Solution:
Step 1.
c.
Striking velocity:
s - 3.500 fps ,
'18 inches '.,
d.
Ultimate concrete compressive strength:

Step 2.',
f'c - 4,000 psi
Maximum penetration:
For:
30 oz and
Vs
- 3.500 fps
"
14.5 inches from figure 4-78

or'from equation 4-199
,
'.'.;'
Xf - 2.04 x 10- 6 ~1.'2 V s 1.8 + d ~ 2 d

2~04 x 10- 6 (2.15)1.2 (3500)1.8 + 2.15
,'.,'
. - 14.4 inches
2 x 2.15
4.30
O.K.
"
"e: .'
.'
":
J.
4A-99
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC P"397/AFR 88-22

'(eq. 4-202)
Concrete 'strength adjustment
Step 3.
X'f
Xf (4000/f'c)1/2
14. 5 x 1 -' 14. 5 in.
'Fragment material adjustment:
Step 4.
a.
b.
"
!'-
(table 4-16)
k - 0.70
(eq. 4-203)
kXf
0.7 x 14.5 - 10.15 in

Calculate.minimum thickness to prevent perforation.
Step 5.
1.13 X'f dO. l + 1.311 d
(eq. 4-204)
1.13 (10.15) (2.15)1 + 1.311 (2.15)
.'
15.20 inches S 18 in
Since Tpf is less than Tc the fragment does not perforate the
slab.
Problem 4A-11, Determination of the Occurrence and Effects of Perforation

Problem:
Determine ,the residual velocity of a primary 'fragment if it

perforates a conc,ete wall.
Procedure:
Step 1.
Determine the type, weight Wf, and striking velocity V s of the

primary fragment. Also, the thickness of the concrete wall Tc and
the ultimate compressive stress f'c of the concrete must be known.
Step 2.
Proceed through steps 2, 3, 4, and 5 of Problem 4A-IO.If Tpf is

greater than Tc' perforation will occur.
'
Step 3.
If perforation is not indicated by the calculations in step 2 then

discontinue the analysis.' If' perforation' does result. then
compute the value of Tc/Tpf'
4A-100

Step 4.
Utilizing the value of Tc/Tpf' obtain vr/~s from figure 4-79 or 480.
,
With the values of V s and vrlvs of Steps 1 and 4, calculate the
residual velocity v r.
'
'
Step 5.
Example 4A-ll, Determination of the Occurrence and Effects of-Perforation

Required:
Residual velocity of a primary fragment if it perforates a con, crete wall.
Solution:
Step 1.
Given:
a.
Type of metal:
b.
Primary fragment weight:
c.
Primary fragment diameter:
d.
Striking velocity:
Vs
e.
Thickness of wall:
Tc - 12 inches
. f.
Step 2.
mild steel
Wf
20 ounces
d - 1.89 inches
- 4,700 fps'
Ultimate concrete' compressive stress:
f'c - 4,500 psi
For given conditions:

Xf - 19.75 'inches
(fig. 4-78)
Actual maximum penetration:
x', f
. '.
.
- 19.75(4000/4500) 1/2
(eq. 4-202)
, ,;
'
- 18.6 inches
,
"
}'
,
(table 4-16)
k - 0.70
X' f - 0.7' (18.6) - 13;0 inches
"
-\
(eq. 4-203)
Since Tpf is greater than X'f' and X'f (13.0 inches) already
exceeds the wall thickness (12 inches), perforation will occur. It
is necessary to determine Tpf (eq. 4"204) in order to calculate
the residual fragment velocity. Hence:
4A-lOl
TH 5 c1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
.,
Tpf - 1.13 (13.0) (1.89)1 + 1.311 (1.89)

( .
18.1 inches
- 15.6 + 2.5.
Step 3.
Tc/Tpf -
Step .4.
.'
12.0/18.1
-.0.663
Since the given conditions correspond ..toa case
'.:
where:
. ~ .' . .)
determine:
for:
0.663
from figure 4-80.
Obtain:
Step 5.
- 0.55 (4,700) - 2,585 fps
Problem 4A-12. Determination. of the Occurrence of Spalling
, !'
Problem:
To determine if spalling of a concrete wall occurs if there is no

perforation by the primary..fragment.
Procedure:
Step 1.
r -.
Determine the type. weight Wf and striking.velocity V s of the

primary fragment. Arso,' the thickness of ;the concrete .wall and
the ultimate compressive stress of the concrete f'c must be known.
I
Step 2.
Proceed through Steps 2, 3, 4, and 5 of Problem 4A-lO.
Step 3.
If embedment of the fragment occurs, compute .the limiting concrete

thickness at which spalling witl occur according to:
,. ..
,'
4A-102

Ts p - 1.215 Xf dO. l + 2.12 d
(eq. 4-207)
If Ts p, is greater than Tc' spalling ,will occur.

Example 4A-12.
Required:
Determination of the Occurrence of Spalling
Determine if spalling of a concrete wall'occurs due to penetration

by a primary fragment.
Solution:
Given:
Step 1.
Step 2.
a.
Type of metal:
armor-piercing steel
b.
c.
d.
Striking velocity:
v s - 3,000 fps
e.
Thickness of wall:
Tc - 19 inches
f.
Ultimate concrete compressive stress: ,f' c - 5,000 psi
Wf - 40 ounces
2.38 inches

Xf
- 12.8 inches
X'f
- 12.8 (4000/5000)2
- 11.5
(fig. 4-78)
i,
"
(eq. 4-202)
r
in.
k - 1.00
(table 4-16)
Then:
,'.
Tpf - 1.13 (11.5) (2.38)1
+ 1.311 (2.38)
- 14.2 + 3.1.,.. 17.3. Lnche s-.
Since Tc is greater than 17.3 inches, embedment occurs.
4A-l03
(eq. 4-204)
TM 5-1300!NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
'Determine minimum concrete thickness to prevent spalling from

equation 4-207:
,,
1.215 (11.5) (2,38)1 + 2.12 (2.38)
20.3 inches
,,' Since Ts p is'greater than 19 inches. spalling will occur.
Problem 4A-13. Determination of the Effects
, of a Primary Fragment on a Composite Wall
Problem:
Determine the maximum penetration by a primary fragment into a

composite wall and the resulting effects on the donor panel, sand
layer and acceptor panel.
Procedure:
Step 1.
Determine the type, weight Wf and striking velocity Vs of the

primary fragment. Also, the thicknesses of the conqrete donor
panel Tc (donor), the sand layer Ts' and the concrete receiver
panel Tc (acceptor) and the ultimate compressive stress f'c of the
concrete must be known. '
Step 2. r >
Proceed through Steps 2, ,3, 4, and. 5 of Problem 4A-lO.

If embedment of the fragment in the donor panel occurs,'perform
Step 3 of Problem 4A-12 to determine if spalling takes place.
If perforation of the donor panel occurs,'compute:
Tc (donor) IT pf
and perform Steps 4 and 5 of Problem 4A-ll to find the residual
velocity v r.
Step 3.
Utilizing v r (donor) as the

from figure 4-81.
s of the sand layer and Wf, obtain Xs
If Xs is less than Ts' the fragment is embedded in the sand layer

and the analysis is discohtinued."
. '
If Xs is greater than Ts perforation of the sand occurs.
Step 4.
Compute Ts/Xs if perforation results.

I
I,
4A-I04
Use this value and figure

, .
TK 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR'SS-22
4-S0 to obtain vr/v s of the sand layer.
Calculate vr(sand).
Step
5.
Utilizing vr(sand) as the V s of the acceptor wall and Wf obtain

Xf (acceptor) from figure 4-7S.
Proceed through Steps 3 and 4 of Problem 4A-IO, if necessary.
If embedment of the fragment in the acceptor panel occurs, perform
Step 3 of Problem 4A-12 to determine if spalling takes place.
If perforation of the ,acceptor wall occurs, compute Tc
and perform Steps 4 and 5 of Problem 4A-ll to find v r.
(accept~r)
Example 4A-13. Determination of the Effects of a Primary Fragment

on a Composite Wall
Required:
'Maximum penetration by a primary fragment into a composite wall

and the resulting effects on the donor panel. sand layer and the
acceptor panel.
. ..
Solution:
Step 1.
Given:
a.
Type of metal:
armor-piercing steel
,
b.
c.
d.
Striking velocity:
e.
Thicknesses:
f .
Vs
d -,1.89 inches
- 4,200 fps"
Tc (donor)
12 inche;s
Ts
24 inches
Tc (acceptor)
12 inches
Ultimate concrete compressive stress:

f'c - 5,000 psi
Step 2.
Wf - 20 ounces
4A-I05 "
'
TN 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88 c22

Xf - 16.5 inches
(fig. 4-78)
X'f - 16.5 (4000/5000)2
(eq. 4-202)
14.7 inches
..
k - 1.00
(table 4-16)
Since X'f is greater than 12 inches, perforation of the donor

panel will certainly occur. Tpf must be calculated in order to
determine the residual velocity of the fragment.
Tpf
- 1.13 (14.7) (1.89)1 + 1.311 (1.89)

-17.7 + 2.5 - 20.2 inches
Tc/Tpf - 12/20.2 -0.594

Since ~f is greater than2d,'vr/vs ~ 0.61 from figure. 4-80.
,
(donor) - 0.61 (4,200) - 2,562 fps:
Vr
Step 3.
For:
Vs
(sand) -2,562 fps,
(fig. 4-81)
Xs - 64.0 inches
Since Ts is less than 64.0 inches, perforation of the sand layer
will occur.
Step 4.
Ts/Xs - 24/64.0 - 0.375

from figure 4-80 .
Vr/V s - 0.77
Step 5.
v r (sand) - ,0.77
v r - 0.77 (2,562) -1;970 fps

" ~"
.,
4A-106 r.
"
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
Step 6.
For:
Vs
(acceptor) - 1,970 fps
Xf (acceptor) - 5.6 inches

'X'f - 5.6 (4000/5000)1/2
(fig. 4-78)
(eq. 4-202)
- 5.0 inches
(table 4-16)
k - 1.00
X' f - Xf
Tpf - 1.13 (5.0) (i.89)0.1
(eq. 4-204)
+ 1. 311 (1. 89)

- 6.0 + 2.5 - 8.5 inches
Since Tpf is less than Tc (acceptor), the fragment is embedded in
the receiver panel. Cal.cul.at;e Ts p to determIne -Lf spa11ing occurs:
Ts p - 1.215 (5.0) (1.89)0.1
(eq. 4-207)
+ 2.12 (1.89)
- 6.5 + 4.0 - 10.5 inches

Since Ts p is less than Tc (acceptor), spa11ing will not occur.
4A-107
TM ,51300/NAVFACP-397/AFR. 88-22
"'.
APPENDIX 4B
LIST OF SYMBOLS
(1) acceleration (in./ms 2)

(2) depth of equivalent rectangular stress block (in.)
(3), long span of a panel (in.)
ao
velocity of sold in air (ft./sec.)

acceleration in x direction (in./ms 2)
acceleration in y direction (in./ms 2)
By
(1) area (in. 2)

(2) explosive 'composition f actor (oz.1/2 i n. -3/2)
Aa
area of diagonal bars at the support within a width b (in. 2)
Ab
area of reinforcing bar (in. 2)
Ad
(1) door area (in. 2)

(2) area of diagonal bars at the support within a width b (in. 2)
AD
drag area (in. 2)
Af
net area of wall excluding openings (ft. 2)
Ag
area of gross section ,( in. 2)
AH
maximum horizontal acceleration of the ground surface (g's)
Al
area of longitudinal
AL
lift area (in. 2)
(l)cnet area of section (in. 2)

(2) area of individual wall subdivision (ft. 2)
Ao
area of openings (ft. 2)
~s
area of prestressed reinforcement (in. 2)
t~rsion reinforcement (in. 2)
,.
'
As
area of tension reinforcement within a width b (in. 2)'
A' s
area of compression reinforcement within a width b (in. 2)
A s
area of rebound reinforcement (i~.2)
AsH
area of flexural reinforcement within a width b in the horizontal

direction on each face (in. 2 )*
Asp
area of spiral reinforcement (in. 2)
4B-l
TIl 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

As t
total area of reinforcing steel (in. 2)

area of flexural reinforcement within a width b' in the vertical direction on each face (in. 2 )*
area of one leg of a closed tie resisting torsion within a distance s
(in. 2 )
total area of stirrups or lacing reinforcement in tension within a
distance, Ss or sl and a width b s or b l (in. 2 )
AV
maximum vertical acceleration of the 'ground surface (g's)

area of wall (ft. 2 )
area of sector I and II, respectively (in. 2 )

b
(1)
(2)
(3)
bf
width of compression face of flexural' member :(in.)

width of concrete strip in which the direct~liear stresses at the
supports are resisted by diagonal bars (in.)
short span of a panel (in.)
.
width of fragment (in.)

width of concrete strip in which the diagonal tension-stresses are
resisted by stirrups of area Ay (in.)
width of concrete strip in which the diagonal tension stresses are
resisted by lacing of area Ay (in.)
failure perimeter for punching shear (in.)'
"
bt
center-to-center dimension of
explosive constant defined in table '2-7 (oz.1/ 2inJ/6)
(1)
(2)
(3)
cI' c II
a-
closed rectangular tie
distance from the resultant applied load.to the. axis of'rotation

.for sectors I and II, respectively (In.)
dilatational velocity of concrete (ft./sec.)
( 1)
Cc
ong-b (in:)'
distance from the resultant applied load to the axis of rotation

(in. )
damping coefficient
width of column capital (in.)'
cs
(2)
al
shear coefficient
deflection coefficient for .flat slabs
deflection coefficient for the center of interior panel 'of flat slab
4B-2 .
.-'
TM 5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR
~8-22
critical damping
shear coefficient for'ultimate shear stress of one-way elements
CD
drag coefficient'
CDq
drag pressure (psi)
CDqo
CE
"
"
'
post-failure fragment coefficient (lb. 2 ms4/in: 8)

shear coefficient for ultimate shear stress in horl.zontal direction for
two-way elements*
(1)
(2)
(3)
leakage'pressure coefficient from figure 2-235

deflection coefficient for midpoint of long side of interior flat
slab panel
lift ,coefficient .
CM
Cm
equivalent moment correction factor
Cp
compression wave seismic velocity in the soil from Table 2-10 (in./sec.)
Cr
sound velocity in reflected region from figure 2-192 (ft./ms)
CR
Cra
Peak reflected pressure coefficient at angle of incidence a
Cs
shear coefficient for ultimate support shear for one-way elements
Cs H
shear coefficient for ultimate support shear in horizontal direction for

two-way elements*
Cs V
shear coefficient for ultimate support shear in vertical direction for

two-way elements*
Cs
deflection coefficient for-midpoint of short side of interior flat slab

panel
Cu
impulse,coefficient at.deflection.Xu (psi-ms 2/in. 2)
C' u
Cv
shear coefficient for ultimate shear stress in vertical direction for

two-way elements * .
.,
. .
Xm
4B-3
(psi-ms 2/in. 2)
TIl 5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR'SS-22,'
shear coefficient for the ultimate shear a.Long- ,the long .s Lde of window
frame
shear coefficient for the ultimate shear along the short side,of window
frame
-t
CL
confidence level
(1)
(2)
impulse coefficient. at,deflection Xl (psi-ms 2/in. 2 )

impulse
C2
d
"
coeffici'en~ at d~flection ~' (~si:ms2/in.2)
;~ I,
___
v..

, ,
(1)
(2)
(3)
distance from extreme compression fiber to cent ro Ld of' tension ',reinforcement (in.)
',Jdiameter (in . .),
,.
'fragment diameter (in.)
~'.,
. .'
d'

reinforcement (in.)
db
diameter of reinforcing bar (in.)
dc
distance between the centroids of the compression and tension reinforcement (in.)
d cH
distance between the centroids of the horizontal'compression and tension

reinforcement (in.)
,compr~ssion
'
,"
dc o
diameter of steel core (in.)

"
d cV
y .
:1'; ."
distance between the centroids of the vertical compression ,and tension

reinforcement (in.)
"
'"
-"
distance from support and equal'to distance d'or.dd'(in.) ,
. -(
di
average inside diameter of explosive casing (in.)
d'i
adjusted inside diameter of casing
, .J.;,.'
J~"
"
'.
(in.)
'
distance- between.center lines of adjacent'lacing bends measured normal'

to flexural reinforcement (in.)
"j
distance from extreme compression' fiber' to centroid of,prestressed

reinforcement (in.)
ds p
depth of spalled concrete (in.)

diameter of cylindrical portion of primary fragment (in.) .'
48-4 '"
.'
"(.
TK 5-l300/NAVFAC
D
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
P~397/AFR
88-22

location of shock front for maximum stress (ft.)
minimum magazine separation distance (ft.)
caliber density (lb/in. 3)
overall diameter of circular section (in.)
damping force (lb.)
displacement of mass from shock load (in.)
equivalent loaded width of structure for non-planar wave front (ft.)

maximum horizontal displacement of the ground surface (in.)
DIF

diameter of the circle through centers of reinforcement arranged in a
circular pattern (in.)
diameter of the spiral measured through the centerline of the spiral bar
(in. )
DLF
dynamic load factor

maximum vertical displacement of the ground surface (in.)
(1)
(2)
(3)
eb

distance from centroid of section to centroid of pre-stressed
reinforcement (in.)
actual eccentricity of load (in.)
balanced eccentricity (in.)
.., ,
(2E,)1/2
Gurney Energy Constant (ft./sec.)
internal work (in.-lbs.)
(1)
(2)
Ec
Es
(1)
(2)

frequency of vibration (cps)
f' c
static ultimate compressive strength of concrete at 28 days (psi)
f'dc
dynamic ultimate compressive strength of concrete (pSi)
f'dm
f ds
dynamic design stress for reinforcement (a function of f y f u and 6)

(psi)
4B-5
TK 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
dynamic ultimate ,stress of reinforcement (psi)

dynamic yield stress of reinforcement ,(psi)
f' m
static ultimate compressive, .s t r sngch of mas,onry units (p s L)

natural frequency of vibration,(cps)
average stress in.the
spe~ified
prestres~ed reinforceme~t
at ultimate load1(psi)
tensile strength of prestressing, tendon (psi)
yield stress of prestressing tendon corresponding to.a 1

elongation (psi)
.,
reflection factor
fs
fse
fu
static design stress for
reinforce~ent
p~rcent
(ps,i)." -.
"effective stress in prestressed reinforcement after "allowances for all
prestress losses (psi)

static ultimate stress of reiT)forc<;ment (psi),
k"
static yield stress of reinforcement (psi)"., " , .
(1)
(2)
(3)
'.
total external force (lbs.)

I
coefficient for moment of inertia,of cracked section
function of C2 and Cl for bilinear triangular load
Fo
force in the reinforcing bars (lbs.)
FE
equivalent external force (lbs.)
FD
Drag force (lbs.)

frictional force (lbs.)
lift force (lbs.)
vertical load supported by foundation, (lbs.)
acceleration due to gravity (.32.2 ft./sec. 2 )
shear modulus (psi)
(1)
(2)

height of masonry wal~
~average
clearing d~stance for indiv~~~al ,are~~ .of op~n}ngs from Section
2-15.4.2
'I
ht
I,
center-to-center dimension of a closed rectangular tie along h (in.)
48-6
TH 5-l300/NAVFAC
h'
clear height between floor slab and roof slab
(1)
(2)
(3)
88-22
span height (in.) *

vertical direction (ft.)
minimum transverse dimension of mean presented area of object
(ft. )
Hc
height of charge above ground (ft.)
Hs
height of structure (ft.)
HT
height of triple point (ft.)
I\,
height of wall (ft.)
HC
heat of combustion (ft.-lb./lb.)
Hd
heat of detonation (ft.-lb./lb.)
unit positive-impulse (psi-ms)
ia
sum of blast impulse capacity of the receiver panel and the least
impulse absorbed 'by the sand (psi-ms) "
i ba
blast impulse capacity of receiver panel (psi-ms)
i-
ia
P~397/AFR
.":
'.
sum.of scaled unit blast impulse capacity of:receiver panel and scaled
unit blast impulse attenuated through concrete and sand in a composite

element (psi-ms/lb. l/ 3)
ib
ib
scaled unit blast impulse (psi-ms/lb. l/ 3)
i ba
scaled unit blast imp.ulse capacity of receiver panel of composite

element (psi-ms/lb. 173) -
i bd
scaled unit blast impulse capacity of donor panel of composite element

(psi-ms/lb. l/3)
i bt
total scaled unit blast impulse capacity of composite element (psimS/lb. l/ 3)
ic
impulse capacity of an element (psi-ms)
id
total drag and diffraction impulse (psi-ms)
ie
ifs
required impulse capacity of fragment shield (ps Lvras )
4B-7
,-
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22 ,
ig
-.
gas impulse (psi-ms)

, ',."
-,

' .
peak reflected impulse at angle of incidence a (psi-ms)

i s-
i st
impulse consumed by fragment support connection
(1)
(2)
(psi-m~)
moment of inertia (in. 4/in. for siabs) (in. 4 for beams)

total impulse applied to fragment
,
, 4
l'
average of gross and cracked moments of inertia (in. lin. for slabs)
4
(in. for beams)
,
" t , :,'
moment of inertia of cracked concrete section,(in., 4/in;; for slabs) ,(in. 4
for beams)
"
moment of inertia of cracked concrete section in horizontal

(in. 4 /in.) *
direction,~,
moment of inertia of cracked concrete section in vertical direction

(in. 4/in.)*
'"
moment of inertia of gross' .conc re t ecsec t Lon (in,4/ i n. f'or vs Labs ) (in. 4,
for beams)
t~'
,
s:
1m
mass moment of inertia (lb,-ms 2-in,)
moment of inertia of net section of masonry uni~ <tn,4)
... '
Is
gross moment of inertia of slab (in. 4/in.)
1s t
impulse consumed by the fragment support connection (psi-ms)

gross moment of Lner t La ro f waL], (in. 4/in.) '_
i
ratio of distance between centroids of compression and tension forces to

the depth d
.'
(1)
(2)
constant depending on the casing metal

effective length factor

K
(1)
(2)
, .v-
unit stiffness (psi/in. for slab~)'(lb'.'/in./in. for beams)

(lb./in. for springs)
constant defined in, paragraphj2-1B ..2'
,.
4B-8.
"
'
TM 5-l300/NAVFAC' P-397/AFR 88-22

elastic unit stiffness (psi/in. for slabs) (lb./in./in. for beams)
elasto-plastic unit stiffness (psi/in. for slabs) (lb./in./in. for
beams)
(1)
(2)
KL
equivalent elastic unit stiffness (psi/in. for slabs) (lb./in./

in. for beams)
equivalent spring constant (lb./in.)
load factor
KLM
'load-mass factor
KM
mass factor
KR
resistance factor
KE
kinetic energy

(1)
length of the yield line (in.)
(2)
width of \ of'the column strip (in.)
ld
basic development length of reinforcing bar (in.)
ldh
development length of 'hooked bar (in.)
lc
length of cylindrical explosive (in.)
lp
spacing of s ame t.ype of lacing bar (in.')
ls
span of flat slab panel (in.)
(1)
(2)
span length (in.) *

horizontal direct~on (ft.)
,
Lcyl
length of cylinder (in:)
Lf
length of fragment (in.)
Ll

4B-9
TN 5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 8.8-22.
..
Ls
length of shaft (in.)
lu
unsupported length of column (in. )
Iv
Iv-
wave .length of positive pressure phase (ft. )
Lx
l-y
wave length of negative pressure phase (ft. )
wave length of positive pressure phase at points band d, respectively (ft.)

Ll
total length of sector
(1)
(2)
(3)
o~
element.normal to axis of rotation (in:)
unit mass (psi-ms 2/in. for slabs) [beams, (lb./in-ms 2)/in.]

ultimate unit moment (in.-lbs./in.)
mass of fragment (lbs.-ms 2/in.)
average of the effective elastic and plastic unit masses (psi-ms 2/in.
for slabs) [beams, (lb./in-ms 2)/in]
. effective unit mass (psi-ms 2/in. for slabs) [beabls, (lb/in-ms 2)/in]
mass of spalled fragments (psi-ms 2/1n.)
effective unit mass in the ultimate range (psi-ms 2/in.
[beams, (lb/in-ms 2J/in.]
ffiup
M
'fo~
."
slabs)
(1)
(2)
(3)
unit bending moment (in.-lbs./in. for slabs)

total mass (lb.-ms 2/in.)
design moment (in. -lbs.)
(i~.-lbs.
,.
..
for beams)
" .
effective total mass (lb.-ms 2/in.)
~
~-
ultimate unit' resisting

beams)
mom~nt (i~.-lbs./in.2 for
slabs) .(in.-lbs. for
ultimate unit rebound moment (in.-lbs:/in. for slabs) (in.-lbs. for

beams)
moment of concentrated loads about line of rotation of sector (in . lbs:)
i -
..
equivalent total mass (lb.-ms 2/in.)
",
"
48-10
,,"
TM 5-1300jNAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
HHN
ultimate unit negative moment capacity in horizontal direction (in.1bs. lin.) *
HHP
ultimate unit positive moment capacity in horizontal direction (in.1bs ./in.) *
MoH' MoL
total panel moment for direction H and ..L respectively (in. -lbs.)
HN
ultimate unit negative moment capacity at supports (in,-lbs./in. for

slabs) (in.-1bs. for beams)
Hp
ultimate unit positive moment capacity at ,midspan (in.-1bs./in.for

slabs) (in.-1bs. for beams)
...
ultimate unit negative moment capacity in vertical direction (in.1bs ./in.)
ultimate unit positive moment capacity in vertical direction (in.1bs ./in.) *

value of smaller end moment on column
value of larger end moment on column
\t
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(1)
(2)
';
modular ratio
number of time intervalsnumber of glass pane tests
caliber radius of the tangent ogive of fragment nose
nose shape factor
Nf
Nu
NT
total number of fragments

'.
reinforcement ratio equal to As/bd or As/bdc
p'
reinforceaent ratio equal to A'sl bd or A'sl bd c
Po
reinforcement ratio producing-balanced conditions- at ultimate strength

~:'J :.
t
ambient atmospheric pressure (psi)
Pp
prestressed reinforcement ratio equal to

..
~s/b~
.,
~ ~
.:

Pmo
peak mean pressure in a partially vented-chamber (psi)

.J'
4B-11
..
TH 5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22 '.
Pr
average.peak reflected pressure (psi)

reinforcement ratio in horizontal direction on each face*
"
total reinforcement ratio equal to PH + Pv
Pv
reinforcement ratio .in vertical direction. on each face*
p(x)
(1)
(2)
P-
Pc
critical axial load causing buckling (lbs.)
Pg
maximum gas pressure (psi)
Pi
interior pressure within structure (psi)
APi
Pf
Pmax
maximum average pressure acting on interior face of wall (psi) .

(1)
(2)
(3)
pressure (psi)
,concentrated load (lbs.)
peak pressure (psi)

maximum axial load (lbs.).
atmospheric pressure (psi)
Pr
P r
Pr et
peak reflected pressure at angle of incidence et (psi)
PR1B maximum average pressure on backwall (psi)

Ps

positive incident 'pressure at points band e, respectively (psi)
Ps o
Ps o
peak negative incident pressure (psi)
Psob,Psod,Psoe
peak positive incident pressure at pointsb, d, and e,

respectively (psi)
Pu
ultimate axial load at actual ecceritr LcLty, e, (lbs.)
Px
ultimate load when eccentricity ex
4B-12
TK 5-l300/NAVFAC
P~397/AFR
88-22
ultimate load when eccentricity e y is present (lbs.)

q
qb' qe
dynamic pressure at points band e , respectively'(psi)
.,
peak dynamic pressure at points b and e, respectively' (psi)

r
(1)
(2)
(3) :

.
. .
radius of spherical TNT [densitY'equals .95 lb./ft. 3 ] charge (ft.)'
r!,diusof .gyration of cross' 'section of :co1umn (Ln..) , ;
unit rebound resistance (psi, for slabs) (lb./in., for beams)

dynamic resistance available; .(psi)
Ar
-t
change in unit resistance (psi, for slabs) (lb./in. for beams)

.'
f,
1..
'"
'1 !
. -f t
,. '
radius from center of impulse load to center of door rotation .(in. )

rOL
uniform. dead load. (psi)
re
elastic unit resistance (psi, for slabs) (lb./in. for beams)
\.
"
rep
elasto-plastic unit resistance (psi, for slabs) (lb./in. for beams)
rfs
ultimate unit resistance of fragment shield (psi)
rs
radius of shaft (in.)
rT
tension membrane resistance (psi)
ru
ultimate unit resistance (psi, for slabs) (lb./in. for beams)
r up
post-ultimate unit resistance (psi)
r1
radius of hemispherical portion of primary fragment (in.)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
..
total internal resistance,;(lbs.)

slant distance (ft.,).
ratio of S/G
standoff distance (ft.)
. t
Re f f
.,
'~'-"'-
effective radius (ft.)
(1)
(2)
..
distance traveled by primary fragment (ft.)

distance from center of detonation (ft.)
..
Rg
uplift force at corners of window frame (lbs.)
48-13
~tl
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

Rl
radius of lacing bend (in. )
Rt
target radius (ft. )
RA
normal distance (ft. )
RE
equivalent total internal resistance (lbs. )
ground distance, (ft.)
Ru
total' ultimate resistance (lb. )
'
'.-.
. ".
I""
total internal resistance 'of .seccor s I and' II, resjlectively' (lbs.)

s
(1)
(2)
(3)
sample' standard deviation"

-",
spacing of torsion reinforcement in a direction parallel to the
longitudinal reinforcement (Ln. ),.
pitch of spiral (in.)
.
'.
,"
spacing' of stirrups in the direction parallel to the longitudinal

reinforcement (Ln .') ,"
','
spacing of lacing in the direction parallel to the longitudinal'rein c
forcement (in.)
,
'
S'
height of front wall or one-half its width, .whichever is smaller (ft.)

.,):: .. : ..
.'
weighted average clearing distance with openings (ft.)
SE
strain energy
time (ms)
At
time increment (ms)
ta
any time (ms)
:<,
time of arrival of blast wave at points b, e, and f, respectively

(ms)
,'"
(1)
(2)
t' c
(1)
(2)
clearing time for reflected pressures' (ms)

average casing thickness of explosive charges (in.)
adjusted casing thickness (in.)
Clearing time for reflected pressures adjusted for wall openings
(ms)
"
.
rise time (ms)

tE
"
time to reach maximum elastic deflection (ms)

".'
fictitious gas duration (ms)
4B-14 ,
\,

.......... .
duration" of positive phase of blast pressure (ms)
"'
fictitious positive phase pressure duration '"(nis)"

fictitious negative phase pressure duration '(ms)
j
..,

time of arrival "of "ground shocK (ms)
time at which partial failure occurs (ms)"'"
(1)
(2)
(3)
Tc
duration of equivalent triangular loading function '(ros)

thickness of masonry wall" (in,)
toughness of material (psi:in,/in.)
thickness of concrete section (in,")
,""
scaled thickness of 'concrete section (ft./lb,l/3)
angular impulse load (lb.-ms-in.)

force in the continuous reinforcement in the long span direction (lbs,)
effective natural ,period of vibration (ms)
"minimUm.thickness of concrete/to prevent:perforatiori by"a given fragment
(in. )
,
Tr
.... ;
rise time (ms)

"
(1)
(2)
thickness of sand fill (in.)"

thickness of slab (in,) ""J "," r.
-,
-i .
Ts p
minimum concrete thickness 'to prevent spalling (in,)
Ts
scaled thickness of sand fill (ft./lb. l/ 3)
Tu
total torsional moment at critical section (in.-lbs.)
4B-15
..
TH 5-l300jNAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

Tw
thickness of wall (in.)
Ty
force of the continuous
particle velocity (ft./ms) .
reinfor~emept
dir~ction (~bs.)
in the short
...
.' .:
..
ultimate flexural or anchoragevbond stress. (psi) "'.,
shock front velocity (ft./ms)
,',
strain energy
\'1
c,
velocity (in.jms)
va
~,
~.,
.,"
..
'-.,' t
boundary velocity for primary fragments, .(ft./sec.) .

ultimate shear stress permitted on ,an unreinforced web
(psi),
-t
I
maximum post-failure fragment

vf(avg.)
vel.o~ity;.<~n.I.".'.s),
ave r age tpcs c-Ea Ll.ure {ragaent .ve Loc Lty (in./ms)
'
-v : .-.
, I
vi
velocity at incipient failure deflection t(in./ms) ,. ",:
-,
,"
-,
(t:~./sec.),
initial velocity of primary fragaent
residual velocity of primary fragment after pe r for e t t on (t:t .j~!,c. ) .

striking velocity of primary fragment (ft./sec.)
.J
maximum t;ot;~ion,capacity of ap,;un.reinfo~ced~web (psPl' ._'J ."

nominal torsion stress in the direction of
ultimate
v uH
:~hear
u (ps L) . _.
"
stress (psi)
"
ultimate shear stress at distance de ,from the horizontal suppor-t. (ps L) ".
ultimate
she~r
stress at distance de' from the vertical support (psi)*
velocity in,x direction (in./ms.)

"
velocity in y direction (in./ms.)
(1)
(2)
(3)
. ;J
.1'
volume of partially vented chamb~r (ft.:i )'~ .'

velocity of compression wave through concrete (in.jsec.)
velocity of mass under ' shock load (in./sec.):
"
j-,
t
>:
".
"t It;
,l
4B-16
;~
....
... --:. .'
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC- P-397/AFR 88-22
Vd
ultimate direct shear capacity of the concrete of width b (lbs.)
VdH
shear at distance de from the vertical ',support on a unit width

(lbs ./in.) *
VdV
shear at d1stance de from the horizontal support on a unit width

(lbs./in. )
Vf
free volume (ft. 3)
VH
maximum horizontal velocity of the ground surface (in./sec.)
Vo
volume of structure (ft. 3)
Vs
shear at the support (lb./in., for panels) (lbs. for beam)
V sH
shear at the vertical support on a unit width (lbs .fin.) *
V sV
shear at the horizontal support on a unit width ,(lbs./in.) *
Vu
total shear on a width b (los.)
Vv
maximum vertical velocity of the ground surface (in./sec.)
Vx
unit shear along the long side of window frame (lb./in.)
Vy
unit shear along the short side of window frame, (lbs./in.)
applied uniform load (lbs.-in. 2)
Wc
(1)
weight density of sand (lbs./ft. 3)
(2)
( 1)
(2)
(3)
,..
'
unit weight (psi, for panels) (lb./in. for beam)

weight density of concrete (lbs./ft. 3)
des Lgri-charge weight' (lbs. ),

external work (in.-lbs.)
width of wall (ft.)
~.
.',
.:,;,..
WA
weight of fluid (lbs.)
WACT
actual quantity of explosives (lbs.)
Wc
total weight of explosive containers (lbs.)
WE
effective charge weight (lbs.)
WE'
g
effective charge weight for gas pressure (lb. )
WEXP
weight of explosive in question (lbs.)
Wf
weight of primary fragment (oz.)
48-17
"
",
..
, :,1'
TM 5-l300/NAVFAC
P-397/AF~
88-2.2.' .
,~
".
average fragment weight (oz,)

weight of
f;a~gible element (l'b./f~. 2)

.,
weight of .Lnner .qas Lng (lbs ..) ,;.
Wc o
total weight of steel core (lbs.)
,weD
weight of outer casing (lbs.)

;'
Wc l ' Wc 2
.'~
Ws
width of structure (ft.)
WD
work done
yield line location in horizontal direction (in.)
(1)
.,.1
Xa
'0-.
"
'.
"
r-~
(2)
r:."
...
total weight of plates 1 and 2', respectively (lbs.)
It
\",
-,I
t~'
-;
..;
'* '..
.'
deflection (in.)
distance from front of object to Loca t Lon .of Larges tvc ros svsec t icn
to plane of shock front (ft.)
any deflection (in.)

"
lateral deflection to which a masonrywall develops no resistance (in.)

.'
'. I:
.-}
deflection due to dead load (in.) ,
Xe

1
equfva l enc elastic deflection (.in.)
Xep

. maximum penetration into concrete of armorcpier!,ing fragments (in.) ,
I
maximum penetration into concrete of fragments other than armor-piercing

(in. )
I .;
.._
(1)
(2)
j I
,.,
maximum penetration into sand of armor-piercing fragments (in.)

static deflection (in.)
ultimate deflection (in.).
','
.,
, ,
.'.1'
See' note at end of symbols
4B-18
TM 5-1300/NA1(FACP-397/AFR.88-22
(1)
(2)

deflection at maximum ultimate'resistance. of masonry wall (in.)
,
yield line location in vertical direction
(Ln, ) *."
distance from the top of section to c~ntroid (in.)

Z
scaled slant distance (ft./lb. l/3)
ZA
scaled normal 'distance '(ft. /lb,}/3) .

scaled ground distance (ft./lb. l/ 3)
~.'
..J'
:i
(1)
ec
,,~
.'
.'
angle formed by the plane of stirrups, lacing, or diagonal reinforcement and the plane of the longitudinal reinforcement (deg)
angle of incidence of the pressure, front (deg)
(2)
(3)
(4)
trajectory angie, (deg'.)
, H":
, ",.:
... ,......
:>,
ratio of flexural stiffness of exterior wall' to .f La t . slab,

ratio of flexural stiffness of exterior' wall to slab 'in direction
Hand L respectively
'.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
coefficient for determining elastic and elasto-plastic resistances

particular support, rotation angle (deg): .:
rejection coefficient
target shape factor from figure 2-212
factor equal to 0.85 for concrete' strengths' up to 4 ;000 ps i and is

reduced by 0.05 for each 1,000 psi in excess of 4,000 psi
81
, ,
'.:.
.. , .
'.\.
Yp
factor'for type of prestressing tendon
moment magnifier
6n
clearing factor
.J
, '.
"-
deflection at sector's displacement (in.)
e' c
average strain rate for concrete (in./in./ms) r'

,
Em
unit strain in mortar (in./in.)
average strain rate for reinforcement (in./in./ms)
~ ~
-,
.'
Eu
rupture strain (in./in./ms)
e
*
"
TH 5-l300/NAVFAC 'P-397/AFR ,88-22'

(1) support rotation angle (deg) ,
(2) angular. acceleration (rad/ms 2) .,

horizontal rotation angle (deg) *
increase in support rotation angle after, partial failure (deg)
(1)
(2)
ductility factor,
coefficient of friction
"
Poisson's ratio
(1)
(2)
mass density (lbs.-~~:2/in.4)

density of air behind shock front (lbs/ft. 3'l
"
'
fracture strength of concrete (psi)-.

Eo
'
effective perimeter ,of reinforcing bars (in.)

!':'
. ~'.
summation of moments (in.-lbs.)

.
".
.' '",
,-":10
sum of the ultimate unit resisting moments acting along the negative
r-.
.)
sum of the ultimate unit resisting moments acting along the positive
maximum shear stress in the shaft (psi)
(1)
(2)
(3)

bar diameter (in.) ,
TNT conversion factor
."'1,0
rfJ r
rfJ(x)
assumed shape function for distributed loads free edge
'"
angular velocity (rad./ms)
,.'
48-20
...;','
simple support
IIIIIII
fixed support
either fixed, restrained, or simple ,support
* Note. This symbol was developed for two-way elements which are used as
walls. When roof slabs or other horizontal elements are under consideration,
4B-2l
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
APPENDIX 4C
BIBLIOGRAPHY
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
American 'Concrete Institute. Design Handbook. Volume 1 - Beams. One-Way

Slabs. Brackets. Footings. and Pile Caps, in accordance with the
StrengthDesign Method of ACI 318-83. Publication ~P-17(84).,ACI'
Committee 340, American Conc reee Institute, Detroit, MI,1984.
American Concrete Institute. Design Handbook: Volume 2 - Columns" in
accordance with the Strength Design Method of ACI 318-83, Publication
SP-17A(85),.ACI Committee 340, American Concrete Institute, Detroit, MI,
1985.
l
American Concrete Institute, Design Handbook, Vol\une2 - Columns, Publication SP-17A, ACI Committee 340, American.Concrete Institute'" Detroit,
MI, 1978. '.
American Concrete Institute Standard Building Code Requirements for
Reinforced Concrete, ACICommittee 318-77. American Concrete Institute,
Detroit" MI, August, ,1979.
,
,
American Concrete Institute Standard Building Code Requirements for
Reinforced Concrete, ACI Committee 318-83, American Concrete Institute,
Detroit; ,MI, November 1983; .
Design Criteria for Deflection Capacity of Conventionally Reinforced
Concrete Slabs, an investigation conducted by Construction Technology
Laboratories; Structural Analytical Section, 5420 Old Orchard Road,
SkokLe-, Illinois 60077, for Civil Engineering Laboratory .. Naval ConstructionBattalion.Center, Port Hueneme, CA, sponsored by. Naval
Faciliti~s .Engd.ne e r Lng Command, Phase I -, State-of-the-Art R';port, CR
80.026, October,1980, Phase-II - Design and Construction Requirements,
CR 80.027. .Oc cobe r 1980, Phase III - Summary ,of Design Criteria and
Design and Construction Details - Design Examples, OR 80.028, October
1980.
Design Manual. AEC Test Structures ,: Volumes II and III,' by 'Holmes and
Narver, ,Inc., under Contract AT (29-,2)-20, for U.S. Atomic Energy
Commission, Albuquerque Operations Office, Albuquerque, NM, December
1961.
Design ,of Structures to Resist Nuclear Weapons Effects, ASCE Manual: of
Engineering'Practice No. 42, American Society of Civil Engineers, New
York, NY, 1961. ;
.:,..
Design of Structures to Resist the Effects of Nuclear Weapons, Department of the Army ,Technical Manual TM 5-.856-2, 3 and 4, Washington, D.C.
Dynamic, Tests of Concrete Reinforcing Steels, Technical ,Report R,394,
U. S. 'Naval Civil Engineering Laboratory.., Port, Hueneme, CA, September
1965.
'
Effects of Impact and Explosion, yolume 1, Office of Scientific Research
and Development, National Defense Research Committee', Washington, D.C.,
1946 (ConfIdent.La'l ) .
.'
Fundamentals of Protective Design (Non-Nuclear), Department of the Army,
Technical Manual TM 5-855,1, Wa~hington, D.C., July 1965.
Impact Design Criteria 'for Blockhouses Subjected to Abortive Launch
Environments, Technical Publication PMR-TR-70-2, Mechanics Research,
Inc., for the' Pacific Missile Range, Point Mugu, CA, July 1970.
Industrial Engineering Study to'Establish Safety Design Criteria for Use
in Engineering of Explosive Facilities and Operations , by Ammann &
Whitney Consulting Engineers, ,New York, .,NY, under Contract' DA-28-0l750l-0RO- 3889, for Process Engineering Branch, A. P.M. E;,D., Picatinny
Arsenal, Dover, NJ, ,April 1963.
Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced'Concrete Structures, ACI,Committee 315-65, American Concrete Institute, Detroit, MI,
1965.
4C-l
"
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
Non-Nuclear Weapons Effects on Protective Structures (U>. Technical

Report No. AFWL-TR-69-57, (SECRET), Mechanics .Re se arch , Inc. ".for the
Air Force Weapons Laboratory, Kirtland Air Force Base, NM, 'September
1969.
Strength and Behavior of Laced Reinforced Concrete Slabs Under Static

and Dynamic 'Load, Technical Report R620, prepared by ,Naval Civil).
Engineering Laboratory, Port Hueneme; California, Sponsored by'Department of the Army, Picatinny Arsenal, April 1969.
.
Summary of One-Third Sc,lle Slab Tests and Scaled Bay Structure Tests. 'by
Ammann & WlJitney, Consulting Engineers', New York, NY, under Contract DA28-0l7-AMC-423(A) for Picatinny Arsenal, Dover, NJ, March 1969';
Ultimate Strength Design Handbook, Volume No. I, .Special Publication No.
17. ACI Committee 340, American Concrete Institute, Detroit, MI,.1967.
Ultimate Strength Design of Reinforced Concrete Columns, Publication SP7, Interim Report of ACI Committee 340, American Concrete Institute,,'
Detroit, MI, 1964.
r '
U.S. Army Engineer Waterways Experiment Station, Technical Report N-7210, Design and Testing of a Blast-Resistant Reinforced Concrete Slab '
System, Criswell, M.E;'; Vicksburg, MS, 1972. '"
22.
" .'-.
Amirian, A... Dobbs, N. and Dede, M., Technical Approach' for' Structural
Design Procedures for a'Family of Horseshoe-Shaped MTC {Phase I>"
prepared for Naval Civil Engineering Laboratory; Port Hueneme, CAby
Ammann and Whitney, Consulting Engineers, New York, N. Y';, August 1985,
23.
Ayvazian, H.' and DeDe, M., Development of Preliminary Designs for ,NAVFAC
MTCs and Preparation of: Construction' Cost Estimates,' prepared for Naval
Civil Engineering Laboratory, Port Hueneme, CA by Ammann and Whitney,'
Consulting Engineers, New York, N.Y., Draft.
'
.
24.
Ball, J. W., Baylot, J.T. and Kiger, S.A., Ki'rtland Underground'Muni-'
tions Storage Complex Model Designs, Construction. and Test' Data',
Technical Report SL-84-l4, prepared by. Structures Laboratory, Department
of the Army, Waterways Experiment Station, Corps of Engineers, P. o.. : Box
631', Vicksburg, Mississippi 39180-0631, for Defense Nuclear ,Agency,
Washington', D.C. 20305, Under DNA Subtask B990AXRE, 'Work Unit 0004 and
Subtask B99QAXRD, Work Unit 0013, "Advanced Design Explosive Tests'," .
September,1984.
25.
Baylot, J. T., Kiger, S. A. and Ball, J. Wi.. Structural Design..ofdBlastContainment Facilities, Abstract for the Twenty-First Exp Los Ive-Bafe ty
Seminar, prepared by U.S. Army.Engineer WaterwaysExperiment Station,
Vicksburg, Mississippi, August 1984.
26 . . Baylot, J.T., Vulnerability of 'an Underground Weapon Storage Facility,
Technical Report SL-84-l6, prepared by Structures Laboratory" Department
of the Army,. Waterways Experiment Station, Corps. of Engineers .... P.O.
Box 631, Vicksburg, Mississippi '39180,00631',. for Defense Nuclear ..Agency,
Washington, DC 20305, Under Subtask A99QAXFC, Work Unit 00046 .. September
1984.
.
27.
Bergstrom, P., et al., Hard-Structures Munitions -Phase I; Warehead {U>,
AFATL-TR-67-13, Volume III (AD-379, 468) .. '(SECRET), Chamberlain Cor-poration, ,February 1967.
. .v : .
. .'
..
28.
Beth, R. .A., Final Report on Concrete Penetration,. Report No. ;A"388,
National Defense Research Committee, 'Office of Scientific Research and
Development, March 1946.
".
29.
Beth, R. A. and Stipe, J. G., Penetration and Explosion Tests on '
Concrete Slabs, Report I; Data, Interim Report No, 20, Committee on .
Passive Protection Against Bombing, National Research Council, January
1943.
4C-2
TK 5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR,88-22
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
Branson, D., Deformation of Concrete Structures, McGraw-Hill, Inc., New

York, NY, 1977.
'
'
.
Brown, J. W., Response of Selected Materials to High-Speed Fragment Im~,U:S.
Army Engineer 'Waterways Experiment Station,Vi~ksbur~.. MS,
1970.
Cohen: E. and Dobbs, N., Design Procedures and Details for Reinforced
Concrete Structures Utilized in Explosive Storage and Manufacturing'
Facilities, Ammann & Whitney, Consulting Engineers, New York, NY, Annals
'of the New York Academy of Sciences .. Conference on Prevention of and
Protection Against Accidental Explosion of Munitions , FUels and Other
Hazardous Mixtures, Volume 152, Art.-l, October 1968.
Cohen, 'E. and Dobbs, N.,' Models for Determining the Respo~se of Rein'
,forced Concrete Structures to Blast Loads, Ammann & Whitney, Consulting
Engineers, New York, NY, Annals of, the New York Academy of Sciences,
Conference on Prevention of and Protection Against Accidental Explosion
of Munitions, Fuels and Other Hazardous Mixtures, Volume 152, Art. I,
October 1968.
'
,
Cohen,' E. and Dobbs, N., Supporting Studies to Establish Safety Design
Cri'teria for Storage and Processing of Explosive Materials - Inte'rim Report No, I, Summary of One-Third Scale Reinforced Concrete Slab Tests,
Technical Memorandum Col, by Ammann & Whitney, Consulting Engineers, New
York, ,NY,' under Contract: DA-i8-017 -AMC-423 (A) for Picatinny Arsenal,
Dover, NJ, June 1965.
'
,
Coltharp"D.R., Vitayaudom, K.P. ' andKfge r , S.A., NATO Semiha'rdened
Facility Design Criteria Improvement, Final Report, prepared by Engineering and Services, Laboratory, Air Force Engineering and Services
Center, Tyndall Air Force Base, Florida 32403. June 1985.
Criswell, M.E., 'Design and Testing of Ii Blast-Resistant Reinforced'
Concrete'Slab System, Technic~l Report N-72-l0, Conducted by U.S. Army
Engineer Waterways Experiment Station, Weapons Effects Laboratory,
Vicksburg, Mississippi, sponsored by Defense Civil' Preparedness Agency,
Work Order No. DAH C20-68-W-0192, Work Unit l127E, November 1972.
Dede; M. and Amirian, A., Test Plan to Verify Failure C'riteria for
Conventionally Reinforced Concrete Slabs, prepared for Naval Civil
Engineering Laboratory, ,Port Hueneme, California, by Ammann and Whitney,
Consulting Engineers, New York, N. Y." April,'1985.
'
Doyle, 'J. M., Klein, M. J. and Shah, H., Design of Missile Resistant
Concrete Panels, Preprints of the'2nd International Conference on
Structural Mechanics in Rea2tor Technology, Vol. 4, Commission of the
European' Communities, Brussels,' 1973, Paper No. J 3/3.. ' "
Fisher, E. M., Explosion Effects Data Sheets', Report 2986, U. S. Naval
Ordnance Laboratory" Silver Spring, MD, 1955.
' ,
Getchell,"J.V. and Kiger, S.A., Vulnerability of Shallow-'Burried FlatRoof Structures, Technical Report SL-80-7, prepared by Structures
Laboratory, ,U.S. Army Engineer Waterways Experiment Station, P.O. Box
631, Vicksburg, Mississippi 39180, for Defense Nuclear Agency, Washington, D.C. 20305 and Office, Chief of Engineers; U.S. Army, Washington,
D.C. 20314, under DNA Subtask Y99QAXSC062, Work Unit '42. and Subtask
H19lAXSX337, Work Unit 02, and OCE R&D Project 4A7627l9AT40, Task Ad,
Work Unit 008, Report 2, Foam HEST 4, October ,1980, Report '3" Foam HEST
5, February 1981, Report 4, Foam HEST 3 and 6, December 1981 and Report
5, Foam HEST 7, February 1982.
Gewaltney, R. C>, Missile Generation and' Protection in Light-WaterCooled Power Reactor Plants, Nuclear Safety, 10(4);, July-August 1969.
4C-3 .

42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
48.
49.
50.
51.
52.
53.
54.
Giere,.A. C., Calculating Fragment Penetration and Velocity Data for Use
in Vulnerability Studies, NAVORD Reoort 6621, U.S. Naval Nuclear Evaluation Unit, Albuquerque, NM, October 1959.
.
Hoffman, P. R., McMath: R.; R. andMigotsky:E., Projectile Penetration
Studies AFWL Technical Report No. WL-TR-64-102, Avco Corporation 'for the
Air Force Weapons Laboratory, Kirtland Air Force Base, NM, December
1964.
..
.
Ingraham, J. M. and Abbott, K. N. ,Feasibility Study of Laminated
Metallic Armor (U), AMRA TR 63.-30, '"(CONFIDENTIAL), U: S. Army M,\~erials
Research Agency, Watertown, MA, December 1)163.
Iqbal, M. and Derecho, A.,; Design Criteria for Deflection Capacity of
Conventionally Reinforced Concrete Slabs. Phase I - State-of-the-Art
.Report , Report No. CR'80.026, Naval.Civil Engineering Laboratory,. port
Hueneme, CA, October 1 9 8 . 0 . "
. .' .
' .Johnson, C. .and Moseley, J .W., Preliminary Warhead Terminal Ballistic
Handbook. Part 1 : Terminal Ballistic Effects, NAWEPS Report No. 7673,
U.S. Naval Weapons Laboratory, Dahlgren, VA, March 1964.
Keenan, W. A., Strength and Behavior of Laced Reinforced Concrete Slabs
Under Static and Dynamic Load, Technical Report R-620, U.S. -Nava L ,Civil
Enginee~ing Laboratory, Port Hueneme, CA, April 1969.
Keenan, W., Timcreto, J., Meyers, G" Johnson, F., Hopkfris , J., ,",
NickersoI!, H. and Armstrong, W., NCEL Products Supporting bob Revision
of NAVFAC P397, Technical Memorandum 2591TM, prepared by Naval Civil.
Engineering Laboratory, Port Hueneme, California 93043, Program No.:
Y0995-01-003-201, Sponsored by Nav~l Facilities Engineering Command,
Alexandria, Virginia 22332, March 1983.
Kiger, S.A. and Albritton, G.E., Response of Burried Hardened Box
Structures to the Effects of Localized Explosions, Technical Report SL80-1, prepared by Structures Laboratory,.U.S. Army Engineer'Waterways
Experiment Station, P.O.' B~x 631, Vicksburg. Mississippi 39180; for.
Defense Nuclear Agency, Washington, D.C. 20305 and Office, Chief of
Engineers, U. S. Army, Washington,. D.C, 20314, under DNA Subtask
Y99QAXSC062, Work Unit 04; and'OCE R&D ,Project 4A762719AT40, Task AI,
Work,. Unit 027, March 1980..
." ,
.' .
Kymer, J. R.,.Penetration Performance 'of Arrow Type ProJectiiesi.Report
R1814,U.S. Army Frankford .Ar senaL, Philadelphia, PA, May 1966. . . .
Liu, T.C., Strength Design of Reinforced Concrete Hydraulic Structures
Preliminary Strength. Design Criteria, rechnical Report,SL-80-4, Report 1
of a series, prepared by Structures Labor atory '. U. S. .Army Eng Lnee r
Waterways Experiment Station, P.O. Box 631, .Vicksburg, Mississippi
39180, for Office, Chief 'of Engineers, ,1!.S. Army, Washington, D.~.
20314, under CWIS 31623. July 1980:
'
Mascianica, F. S., Summary of Terminal Ballistic Data on Lightweight
Armor Materials (U), AHHRC TR 69-17: (CONFIDENTIAL), U.S. Army Materials and Mechanics Research Center, Watertown, MA, July 1969.
Nara, H. R. and Denington, ,~. J. Ricochet and Penetration of Steel'
Spheres in Clay and Sand Soils, TM-E7; AD-059 883, Case Institute of
Technology, Project DOAN BROOK, October 1954.
,
Newmark; N. M. and Haltiwanger, ,J. D. ,Air Force Design ManuaL Princi~
pIes and Practices for'Design of Hardened Structures, Technical'Documentary Report No. AFSWC-TDR-~2-138, by Department of Civil Eng~neering.
University of Illinois, Urbana, Ll.Li noLs , under pontract AF29 (601) -2390
for Research Directorate, Air Force'Special Weapons Center, Air Force
Systems .CQmmand, Ktrtland Air Force Base, NM, December 1962.
4C-4 '.
TK 5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88 c22
55.
56.
57.
58.
59.
60.
61.
62.
63.
64.
65.
66.
67.
68.
69.
Park, R. and Gamble ," W. L'., Reinforced- Concrete Slabs, John Wiley & .
Sons', New York, 'NY; 1980.
,-','
.
Pecone, G, ,.Design of Flat Slabs Subjected to' Blast Loads, prepared for
-Northern Division, Naval Facilities Engineering Command, U.S. Naval
Base, Philadelphia"PA, by Ammann and Whitney, Consulting Engineers,' New
York,-N.Y., Contract No. N 62472-76-C-1l48: June 1982:
. .
Recht, ,R., et a1., Application of' Ballistic Perforation Mechanics to
Target Vulnerability and Weapons Effectiveness Analysis (U), NWC TR 4333
(Confidential), Deriver Research'Institute forthe.Naval Weapons Center,
'China Lake, CA, "October 1967.
-;
.
.. . .
Richey, H." M., Armed Services Explosives Safety Board Dividing Wall'Program, Phase C, Tests 1 through 13. U.S, Naval Weapon Center, China Lake,
CA, 1964 (Secret Restricted Data).
Rindner, R'-,M." Establishment of Safety Design' Criteria' for Use in
Engineering of Explosive Facilities'and'Operations, Report No, 2, Detonation by Fra'gment Impact, Technical Report DB-TR: 6'-59, Picatinny
Arsenal, Dover, NJ', March 1959.
Robertson, H.P., Terminal Ballistics, Preliminary Report, Committee on
'Passive Protection Against Bombing, National Research Council, 'January
1941.
,.ii"
.
Rohani, B., Fragment and ProJ ectile Penetration Resistance of Soils:
Report 2. High-Velocity Fragment, Penetratiorr into Laboratory-Prepared
;'Soil Targets,' Miscellaneous Paper S-'7l-l2,U.S. Army Engineer' Waterways
Experiment Station, Vicksburg, MS, 'June 1973..
"
-St Lpe , J'. G.,. e't a-l., .Ballistic, Tests on Small' Concrete Slabs, .Lnt er Im
Report No. 28, Committee on Fortification Design, Nationa-l Research
Council, June 1944.
Schumacher, R.N., Kingery, C.N. and Ewing, Jr., W.O., Airblast and
Structural Response Testing of a 1/4 Scale Categorv 1 Suuuressive
Shield, BRL Memorandum Report No. 2623, by U.S.A. Ballistic Research
Laboratories, Aberdeen Proving 'Ground, Maryland, May 1976.
Schwartz, A., et. al., Establishment of Safety Design Criteria for Use
in Engineering of Explosive Facilities and Operations, Report No.6.
Test of One-Tenth Scale Bay Structure, Technical Report 3439, by
Picatinny Arsenal, Dover, NJ, and Ammann & Whitney, Consulting Engineers, New York, NY, under Contract DA-28-0l7-AMC-423(A), July1966.
Takayahagi, T. and Derecho, A., Design Criteria for Deflection Capacity
of Conventionally Reinforced Concrete Slabs, Phase III - Summary of
Design Criteria and Construction Details - Design Examples Report No. CR
80.028, Naval Civil Engineering Laboratory, Port Hueneme, CA, October
1980.
Takayanagi, T., Derecho, A. and Iqbal, M., Design Criteria for Deflection Capacity of Conventionally Reinforced Concrete Slabs, Phase II Design and Construction Requirements, Report No. CR 80.027, Naval Civil
Engineering Laboratory, Port Hueneme, CA, October 1980.
Tancreto, J., Design Criteria for Deflection Capacity of Conventionally
Reinforced Concrete Slabs,: Naval Civil Engineering Laboratory, Special
Project 1311 SP, Port Hueneme, CA, 1980.
Thomas, L.H., Computing the Effect of Distance on Damage by Fragments,
Report No. 468, Ballistic Research Lab9ratories, Aberdeen Proving.
Ground, MD, May 1944.'
Timoshenko, S. and Woinowsky-Krieger, S., Theory of Plates and Shells,
McGraw-Hill Book Co., New York, NY, 1959.
4C-5 '..

70.
71.
72.
73.
74.
75.
76.
77.
Vanderbilt, 'H., Sozen, H. and.Be Lss., G., Deflections of Hultiple-Panel

Reinforced Concrete Floor Slabs, Journal of the'Structural Division"
Proceedings of the ,American Society of Civil Engineers, August 196?, '
Vargas's, L. H.,'Hokanson, J. C."and Rf.nde r ," R. H., Explosive Fragmentation of Dividin~ Walls, by Southwest ,R~search Institute, San Antonio,
TX, Contractor Report ARLCD-CR-8l0l8, U:S. Army Armament Research and,
Development Command, Large Caliber Weapons Systems Laboratory, ,.Dov"r,'
NJ; July 1981.
"
,
"" .
Wachtell, 5., Comparison of. Blast Response-Scaled VB. Full-Size Concrete
Structures, Picatinny Arsenal, Dover, NJ, Annals of the New York Academy
of Sciences, Conference-on Prevention ,of and Protection Against Accidental Explosi~ns of Hunitions, Fuels'an~ Other Hazardous Hixtur~s , Volume
152, Art. 1, October 1968.
'
Wang, Chu-Kia and Salmon, Charles G., Reinforced Concrete Desi~n, Intext
Educational Publishers, New York, NY, 1973.
Whitney, C. S., Plastic Theory of 'Reinforced Concrete Desi~n, Tran~a~
tions of the American Society of Civil Engineers, Vol. 107, ASCE, New
York, NY, 1942.
. '
",
Whitney, C. S. and Cohen", E., Guide ,for Ultimate Stren~th Desi~n 'of Reinforced Concrete, Ammann & Whitney, Consulting Engineers, New York, ,NY,
Journal of the American -Conc r'e tie Institute , November 1956'.
Whitney,' C. S., e"t. a1. ,:Desi~n of Biast~Resistant' Construction for
Atomic Explosions, Ammann & Whitney, Consulting Engineers, New York"NY,
Journal of the American Concrete Institute, Harch 1955.
Wood, R. W., ,Plastic and E1B.stic Design 'of Slabs and Plates .. The Ronald
Press Company, New York, NY, 19,61-.
.
.-
";
"
~.
','"
'\
,.
-.
".:
'
4C-6
'''STRUcruRES TO RESIST THE EFFEcrs OF ACCIDENTAL EXPLOSIONS"
CHAPTER 5. STRUCTURAL STEEL DESIGN .
TK 5-l300/NAVFAC
P-3~7/AFR
88-22
. CHAPTER 5
STRUCTURAL STEEL DESIGN
INTRorUCTION
5-1. Purpose.
The purpose of this manual is to present. methods of design for protective

construction used in facilities for development, testing, production, storage,
maintenance, -modification, inspection, demilitarization, and disposal of
5-2. Objective
r.

techniques. whereby propagation. of explosion (from one sl:ructure or part of a
protection for personnel and valuable equipment.
(1)
(2).,
(3)
(4)
Establish the blast load parameters required for design of protective structures.
elements including reinforced concrete, and structural steel.
the .. required strength to resist the applied blast .Loads ,
maximum cost effectiveness in both the planning and structural
arrangements, providing closures, and preventing damage to interior portions of structures'because of structural motion, shock, and
5-3. Background
For the first 60 years of the 20th century', criteria and methods based upon
results of.catastrophic events were used for the design of explosive facilities . . The crfteria and methods d~d not include. a detaile".or.reliable quantitative bas Ls for assessing the degree of protection afforded by' the protective
facility. ,In the late 1960's quantitative procedures were set forth .in the
first edition of the present manual, "Structures to Resist the Effects of
development. programs which permitted a more' reliable approach to current and
future design. requirements. Since the original publication of this manual,
more extensive. testing and development programs have ~aken place .. This
additional research included work with materials other than reinforced concrete which was the principal construction material referenced in the initial
Modern mathods-Tor the manufacture. and storage of explosive materials, which
include ~any exotic chemicals, fuels, and. propellants , require less space for
a given quantity of explosive mace r LaI than .was . previously needed. Such
accidental explosions. (One accidental e~plosion causing the detonation of
5-1
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC'P-397/AFR 88-22
other explosive materials.) It'is evident that a requirement for more accurate design techniques is essential. This manual describes rational design
These design methods account for the close-in effects of a detonation includ"
ing the high pressures and the nonuniformity of blast loading on protective
structures or barriers. These methods also account for intermediate and farrange effects for the design of structures located away from the, explosion.
The dynamic response of structures, constructed of various materials. ,or
combination of materials, can be calculated, and details are given to provide

directed primarily toward protective structures subjected to the effects of a
high explosive detonation.
However, this approach is general, and it is

The design techniques set forth in this manual are 'based upon the results of
numerous full- and small-scale: structural response and explosive effects tests "
of various materials conducted in conjunction with the development of this,
5-4. Scope
It is not the intent of this manual to establish safety criteria. Applicable
documents should be' consulted for this purpose. Response predictions for
. .
In this manualan'effort is
been included in order that

information on protective design techniques has
application of the basic theory can be made to
which were fully considered,
This manual is applicable to the design of protective structures subjected to

situations, the manual will apply for explosive quantities less than 25,000
situations such as far- or intermediate-range effects. -For these latter 'cases
the design procedures are applicable for explosive quantitiesinthe order of'
500,000 pounds which is the maximum' quantity of high explosive approved,for
aboveground storage facilities in 'the Department of Defense manua l , "Ammunition and Explosives Safety Standards", DOD 6055.9-STD. Since tests were
concrete elements to blast overpressuresi this manual concentrates
design
procedures and techniques for these materials. However, this does not imply
that concrete and steel are the.only useful materials for protective construction. Tests to establish the response of wood, brick blocks, and plastics, as
well as the blast attenuating and' mass effects of soil are contemplated. The
results of these tests may require, at a later date, the supplementation of
'
on
Other manuals are available to design protective structures against the

manuals will quite often complement this manual and should be consulted for'
5-2
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
(1)
"
U.S.'Army Engineer
Post Office Box 631
Vicksburg, Mississippi,39l80-063l
Attn: WESKA
(2)

Commanding Officer
Attn: Code LSI.
( 3)
Depar cment, of the Army
.~,


Ohio 45433
Attn: AFFDL/FBR
for review by DDESB and the above service~. Upon concurrence of the revisions, the necessary changes will be made and notification of the changes will
5-5. Format
aspects of design .. The titles of these chapters are as follows:
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
I
2
3
4
5
6
Introduction

design involves many different scientific and engineering fields, and, therefore, no attempt is made to standardize completely all the symbols used. Each
symbot' is 'defined where it is first used, and in the list of symbols at the
5-3

CHAPTER CONTENTS
5-6. General
This chapter contains procedures and guidelines for the design of blastresistant steel structures and steel elements. Light construction and steel
framed acceptor structures provide an adequate form of protection in .a.
pressure range of 10 psi or less. However,if' fragments are present, lightgage construction may only be partially appropriate. The'use of structural
steel frames in combination with precast concrete roof and wall panels
(Chapter VI) will provide a measure of fragment protection at lower pressure
ranges. Containment structures or steel elements of containment structures,
such,as blast doors, ventilation closures, fragments shields, etc. can be
designed for almost any pressure range. This chapter covers detailed
procedures and design techniques for the blast-resistant design of steel
elements and structures subjected to short-duration, high-intensity blast
loading. Provisions for inelastic, blast-resistant design will be consistent
with conventional static plastic design procedures. 'Steel elements such as
beams, beam columns, open-web joists, plates and cold-formed steel panels are
considered. In addition, the design of steel structures such as rigid' frames,
and braced frames are presented as they relate to blast-resistant design.
Special considerations for blast doors, penetration of fragments into'steel,
and.unsymmetrical bending are also presented.
5-4
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR88-22
, STEEL STRUCTURES IN PROTECTIVE' ,DESIGN.
, .'
'.;'~,
5-7. Differences Between Steel.and Concrete:Structures in Pr~tective Design

Qualitative differences between steel and concrete protective structures are
summarized below:
(];)"
I.
t"'
'1:
In close-in high-impulse, design' situations where a containment
~.-
'.
: " structure is. utilized, - 8 massive.. reinforced concrete, struct.ure ,ft,

J.rather ,than a steel structure, is generally employed in o rde rvco
" 'limit"deflections and to offer protection. against the effects of

. pr Imary.vand: secondary fragments.
; However , elements of containment
'structures such as blast 'doors', ventilation c Loau're s i v e t.c , , .are
generally ,designed .us Lng structural st ee L. Fragment protection Ls.> ,,'
-,;usually accomplished by increasing the element thickness to resist
'. fragment'penetration or by providing'supplementary fragment
'protection._ In some cases, structural steel can'beused in the'
,design of containment cells. However;oexplosive charge weights
are generallY"low; f thereby preventing brittle, modes of' failure,
(Section 5 -18.3) due to high pressure intensity.",
_ I.
Structural steeL shapes are, considerably .mo re slender ,bothin
(2)
terms 'of the overall structure and the components of a typical
member' cross section: As a result: the effect of overall and,

local instability upon the ultimate capacity is an important
consideration 'in steel des Lgn ,
Moreover
in most cases. 'plate
eiements1and structures wili:sustain large deformations'in

comparison to those of more rigid 'concrete elements.
:,
..,,,
(3), The'amount of rebound in concrete structures is considerably

" reduced by internal damping (cracking) and is essentially elimi
nated in cases where large deformations or incipient failure are
.... .permitted.to occur: In structural steel,however,. a larger
response in rebound, up to 100, percent, can- be obtained for a
combination'of short duration:load and a relatively' flexible
element . As a' result, steel structures require that . spec'LaL
provisions be made to account for extreme responses of comparable
magnitude in both directions.
,t
-cc
The treatment of stress interaction is:, more of a consideration' in

;.'steel shapes since each' element' of the cross section' must be
considered' subject to a state of combined stresses. In reinforced
concrete t~' the provision of separate steel reinforcement for
flexuie,i shear and torsion.enables the designer to consider these
stresses as being carriedby'more or less independent systems .
(4).
.... l
(5)
.r
~.
,'Special care must be taken in steel design to provide for connec

tion 'integrity up to the point of maximum r e spons e ,. For example.
in order to'avoid premature brittle fracture in welded connections, the welding characteristics, of the'particular grade of
steel must be considered and the introduction of any stress
concentrationsat'joints and notches in main elements must be
-avo Lded ,>"
. ,',
,J
"
.,
_',
5-5
..
(6)
If fragments are involved, special care must'be given to brittle

modes of failure as they affect construction methods. For
example, fragment penetration depth may govern the thicknessofa
steel plate.
5-8. Economy of Design of Protective Structures in the Inelastic Range
......
..
,.'
The economy of facility design generally .requt resvnhac blast-resistant- structures be designedto perform in:the inelastic response range during an. accident. In order to ensure the structure~s integrity throughout such severe
conditions, the facility designer must be cognizant of. the various possible
failure modes: and-xhe l r inter-relationships. The limiting design values are
dictated by the attainment of inelastic deflections and rotations/without
complete.collapse . . The amount of inelastic deformation is dependent not only
upon the ductility characteristics of the material, but also upon. the.intended
use of the structure following an accident as well as the protection required.
In order for the structure to maintain such large deformations, steps must be
taken to'prevent premature failure by either brittle fracture or instability
(local or overall). Cuidelines and criteria for dealing with these effects.
are presented in the body of this chapter.
5-9. Applications of Steel Elements and Structures In Protective Design
- ...... >
The design procedures and applications of this chapter are directed toward
steel acceptor-. and donor-type structures,'.
,.
',
Acceptor-type. struc.tures are removed' from the immediate vicinity of the

detonation. These include typical frame structures with beams, columns and
beam-columns composed of standard structural shapes, and built-up sections.
In many cases, t4e relatively low blast pressures suggest the use of standard
building components such as open-web joists,. prefabricated wall panels' and
roof decking detailed as required to carry.the full magnitude of' the dynamic
l~ads. Another economical application can be the use of entire pre. engineered
buildings, strengthened locally, to adapt their designs to low blast pressures
(up to 2 psi) with short duration. For guidelines on the blast evaluation of
pre-engineered buildings " see. "Special Provisions for Pre-engineered Buildings", Chapter. VI.
..
Donor-type structures, which are located in the immediate ~icinity of the
detonation may include steel containment cells or steel. components'of reinforced concrete containment structures such as .blast doors or ventilation and
electrical closure plates. In some c~ses, the use of suppressive shielding to
control or confine the hazardous blast, fragment, and flame.effects of
detonations may be an economically feasible .alternative.' A brief review of
suppressive shield. design. and criteria is outlined in Section 6-23 to. 6-26 of
Chapter VI. The high blast pressures encountered in these structures suggest
the use of large plates or built-up sections with relatively high resistances.
In some instances, fragment impact or pressure leakage is permitted .
... .
5-10. Application of Dynamic Analysis.

The first step in a'dynamic design entails the development of a trial design
considering facility requirements, available materials, and economy with'
members sized by a simple preliminary procedure. The next step involves the
performance of a dynamic analysis to determine the response of the trial
5-6
/.

design to the blast and the comparison of the maximum response with the
'deformation limits specified in this chapter. The ,final design is then
determined by achieving an economical ,balance between sti:ffness and resistance
such that the calculated response under the, blast loading lies within the
limiting.,values dictated by:the operational requirements of the facility.
The dynamic response calculation involves,either,a.single-degree-of-freedom
analysis using the 'response, charts "in"Chapter. 3, or, in more complex structures, a multi-degree-of-freedom.analysi~using,availabl" dynamic elastoplastic frame programs.
.,~ . .
.
. <.
A single-degree-of-freedom analysis may be performed for the. design analysis

of either a given structural element or of an element for which a preliminary
design has been performed according to procedures given in. this chapter.
Since this type. of.dynamic analysis is described fully with accompanying
charts and tables in 'Chapter 3 i it .will not becdup Li.ca t ed herein . . In
principle, the structure'or'structural element is characterized by.an
ideat"ized,' bilinear, . elasto-plastic. resistance function and, the loading is'
treated as' an. idealized. triangular (or. bilinear) 'pulse with zero, rise.,time
(Chapter 3). Response charts are presented. in Ch~pter 3 for 'determining the.
ratio of the maximum response to the elastic response and, the timeto reach
maximum responsefor the initial response; The equations presented for the
dynamic reactions are also.applicable to this chapter.
Multi-degree-of-freedom, nonlinear dynamic analyses' of braced,'and unbraced
rigid frames can be performed'using programs available through.the repositories listed in Section.5-4 and i.tihr ough the reports listed in the bibliography
at the end of this. chapter.
" .
.,
t ~
, 1\;
5-7
s:
TM 5-r300/NAVFAC
P-397/AFR88~22
PROPERTIES OF STRUCTURAL STEEL

5-11. General
('
Structural steel is known-to be a strong and ductile building:material~ The

significant engineering properties of steel are strength expressed in terms ,of
yield stress and ultimate tensile strength, ductility expressed in terms of,
percent elongationat'.rupture, and rigidity expressed in terms of modulus of
-,,~
elasticity._ This section covers the mechanical properties of structural steel
subjected to static loading and dynamic loading.

stresses for bending and shear are then derived.
admissible 'in plastic design arelisted.
.'
5-12. Mechanical Properties -
"
:~I.
..
,.~ ~.
5-12.1., Mechanical Properties Under Static Load Ing ; Static Design Stresses'
Structural steel generally can be considered as exhibiting a linear stressstrain relationship.up,to the proportional limit, which is either'close'to or
identical to the yield point. ,Beyond the~yield'point, it can stretch substantially without.appreciableincrease in stress, the amount of elongation'
'reaching 10 to 15 times that needed to reach yield, 'a. range that is termed
II
the yield plateau".
Beyond that .. range
'./
Recommended dynamic design'

Structural steels that are
strain hardening. occurs. i. e .. "
additional elongation is associated with an increase in stress.

reaching a.maximum nominal stress called ~the tensile strength lt
'After
,
a drop in. the'
nominal stress accompanies further elongation and precedes' fracture at an .

elongation (at rupture) amounting to'20 to 30 percent.of the specimen's
original length (see Figure 5-1). It is this ability of structural steel<to
undergo sizable permanent (plastic) deformations before fracturing, i.e., its
ductility, that makes steel a construction material with the required properties for blast resistant design.
Some high strength structural steels do not exhibit a sharp, well defined
yield plateau, but rather show continuo~s yielding with a curved stress-strain
relation. For those steels, it is generally accepted to define a quantity
analogous to the yield point, called "the yield stress", as that stress which
would produce a permanent strain of,0.2 percent or a total unit elongation of
0.4 to 0.5 percent. Although such steels usually have a higher yield stress
than those steels which exhibit definite yield and tensile stresses, their
elongation at rupture is generally smaller. Therefore, they should be used
with caution when large ductiliti~s are a prerequisite of design.
Blast-resistant design is commonly associated with plastic design since
protective 'structures are generally designed with the assumption that economy
can be achieved when plastic deformations are permitted. The steels to be
used should at least meet the requirements of the American Institute of Steel
Construction (AISC) Specification in regard to the adequacy for plastic
design.
Since' the average yield stress for structural steels having a specified
minimum yield stress of 50 ksi or less is generally higher than the specified
minimum, it is recommended that the minimum design yield stress, as specified
by the AISC specification, be increased by 10 percent. That is, the average
yield stress to be used in a blast resistant design shall be 1.1 times the
minimum yield str~ss for these steels. This increase, which is referred to as
...
TH 5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR"SS-22
the increase factor (a), should not be applied to high strength steels since
the average 'increase may be less than 5 percent.
The minimum yield stress, f y; and the tensile stress, f u' (minimum) for structural steel shapes and plates which conform to the American Society for
Testing and Materials (ASTM) Specification are listed in Table 5-1. All are
admissible in plastic design"except for ASTM A5l4 which exhibits the smallest
reserve in ductility since the minimum tensile stress is only 10 percent
higher than the minimum y~eld stress"" However, elastic dynamic design may
require "the" use of this "steel' or its boiler" plate equivalent, as in ASTM A5l7"
5-12.2. Mechanical Properties
un~er
Djnamic Loading, Dynamic Increase Factors
The effects of rapid "loading on the" mechanical behavior of structural steel

have been observed and measured in uniaxial "tensile stress tests" Under
rapidly applied loads, the rate of strain increases and this has a marked
influence on the mechanicaf properties of structural steel.
Considering the mechanical properties under static loading as a basis, the
effects of increasing strain rates are illustrated in Figure 5-1 and can be
summarized as follows:
(1)
(2)"
(3)
(4)
The yield point increases substantially to the dynamic yield

stress value. This effect is termed the dynamic increase factor
for yield stress.
The modulus "of elasticity "in general will remain insensitive to
"the rate of loading..
'
The ultimate tensile strength increases slightly. However, the
percentage increase is less than" "that for the yield stress. This
effect is termed" the dynamic increase "factor for ultimate stress.
The elongation at rupture either remains unchanged or is slightly
reduced due to increased strain.rate.
In actual members subjected to blast loading, the dynamic effects resulting

from the rapid strain rates may be expressed' as a function of the time" to
reach yielding. In this case, the mechanical behavior depends on both the
loading regime and the response of the system which determines the dynamic
effect felt by the particular material.
For members made of ASTM A36 and A5l4 steels, studies have been made "to determine the percentage increase in the yield stress as a function of strain rate,
Design curves for the dynamic increase factors (DIF) for yield stresses "of A36
and A5l4 structural steel are illustrated in Figure 5-2. Even though ASTM
A5l4 is not recommended for plastic design, the curve in Figure 5-2 may be
used for dynamic elastic design.
The strain rate, assumed to be a constant from zero strain to' yielding, may be
determined according to. Equation 5-1:
where
5-9
tE
f ds
average strain rate in the elastic range of the ste'el'

(in/in/sec)
time to yield
(sec~
dynamic design stress (Section 5-13)
Dynamic increase factors for yield stresses in var-Lous pressure levels Ln the
bending, tension, 'and compression modes are listed in . T able 5-2, 'The values
for bending assume a strain rate of 0.10 in/in/sec in the'low design pressure
range and 0.30 in/in/sec in the high pressure design range. For tension and
compression members, the DIF values assume the strain rates are 0.02 in/in/sec
in the low design pressure range and 0.05 in/in/sec in the high design
pressure range. Lower strain rates are selected for the tension 'and compression members since they are likely to carry the reaction of a beam or girder
which may exhibit a significant rise time, thereby increasing the time, to
reach yield in the tension or compression mode.
On the basis of the above, the dynamic increase factors for yield stresses
summarized in Table 5-2 are recommended for use in dynamic design. However, a
more accurate representation may be derived using Figure 5-2 once the'strain
rate has been determined.
Steel protective structures and members are generally not designed for
excessive deflections, that is, deflections associated with elongations well
into the strain-hardening region (see Figure 5-1). However" situations arise
where excessiye d~flections may be tolerated and will not lead to structural
failure' or collapse. In this case, the ultimate stresses and associated
dynamic increase factors for ultimate stresses must be considered. Table 5-3
lists the dynaml.ciLnc re aae factors' for ultimate stresses of steels. Unlike
the dynamic increase factors for yield stress, these values ~re independent Of
the pressure ranges.
'
,
5-13. Recommended Dynamic Design Stresses
5-13.1. General
The yield point of steel under uniaxial tensile stress is' generally used as a
base to determine yield stresses under other loading states namely, bending,
shear and compression, or tension.
The design stresses are also functions of
the ave!age stre~gth increase factor, &, and the dynamic increase factor, c.
5-13.2. Dynamic Design Stress for Ductility Ratio
~ ~
10
To determine the plastic strength of a section under dynamic loading, the

appropriate dynamic y~eld stress, f dy' must be used. For a ductility ratio
(see Section 5-16.3) ~ ~ 10, the dynamic design stress, f ds' is equal to the
dynamic yield stress, f dy' In general terms, the dynamic yield stress, f dy'
shall be equal to the product of the dynamic increase factor, c, the average
yield strength increase factor, a, (see Section 5-12.1) and the specified
minimum yield stress of the steel. The dynamic design stress, f ds' for
bending, tension, and compression shall be:
5-2
5-10
TK 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
where
dynamic yield stress
c -
dynamic increase factor on the yield stress (Figure 5-2 or

Table 5-2)
a -
average strength increase factor (- 1.1 for steels with a

specified minimum yield stress of 50 ksi or less; - 1.0
otherwise)
fY -
static yield stress from Table 5-1
5-13.3. Dynamic Design Stress for Ductility Ratio,
> 10
Where excessive deflections or ductility ratios may be tolerated,-the.dynamic

design stress can be increased to account for deformations, in. the strainhardening region. In this case, for ~> 10, the dynamic design stress, f ds'
becomes
5-3
where:
dynamic yield stress from .Equation 5-21
dynamic ultimate stress equal to the product of f u from
,Table 5-1 and the value of c from Table 5-3 or Figure 5-2
it should be noted that the average strength increase factor, a, does not
apply to f du' ,
,-., ' ..
5-13.4. Dynamic Design Stress f9r ,Shear

The dynamic design stress for
shea~
shall be:
5-4
where f ds is from Equation 5-2 or 5-3 .
.;
5-11 '
.'
fdu
. fu
fdy
~
'iii
c.
:;:'
fy
/1----,,-
,,I
.,:Jl
,,-'
,,-
--
,.
,.
ASTM STRAIN RATE
- - - - RAPID STRAIN RATE
0.070
( J)
--<Eu < 0 .2 3 injin. APPROX.
0.01 TO 0.02 in.lin. APPROX.
STRAIN,
Figure 5-1
(in./in.) .
Typical stress-strain curves tor steel

5-12
1.70;
-f
1.60
()
OC
.-u
0
1.50
it
lIJ
l/)
V'
t-'
'"
<l:
UJ
'1.40
1t41,.
-t-t-
OC
U
1.30
u
~
<l:
z
>-
1.20
tE
1.111
1.00
10-3
"
'"
,IO~2.
'
,10- 1
19_' ._
10
STRAIN RATE e (in.lin./sec.)
Figure 5:-2
Dynamic increase factors for yield stresses at various

strain rates for ASTM A-36 and A-514 steels
100
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22 .
t ,
.,
Table 5-1 Static Design. Stresses for Materials'

Material
f~.min
fa.min
"(ksi)
(ksi)
A36
36
58
A529
'42
60.
'(ASTM)
40 .
42
, 46
50
60
63
67
"'70
42
50
: . 60"
65
60
65
75
, 80
A242
42
46
50.
63
67
70
A588
42
46
50
63
67
70
A44l
A572
,
.,
A5l4
90
100
,'.'
100
lio
,
5-14 \
TH 5-l300,iNAVFAC P-:l97/AFR 88-22
'
....
.,
..
'.".
Table 5-2
Material
A36
As88
As14
Dyn~mic
.
(f
Increase Factor., c. for .'yield Stress of Structural Ste.els
..
,
Tension or' Compression
Bendf.ng
,
-,
Low
Pressure
High
Pressu,re
0 ..10 in/in/sec)
. (f
1;-19~, .
L09
(f
- '0,. .
92).,j
-,
1.36
1.24*;,
,,'
"
' ...
1.12
-.
,
Low .
Pressure
,
0.30), .
"
"
1.29
'.'
, .,
1.19
1.12*
, 1 . .0 5" ,
'.
'"
,. High
Pressure
. (~.." 0.05)
.. - 1.24
.~
....
..
,.1.15*:
.1,.07
*Estimated
Table 5-3
Dynamic Increase Factor,. c , for,Ultimate Stress of Structural

Steel,S.
~
.,.
';.
'.
Material
A36
..
'
':
c
"
1.10
)
As88
..
As14
1.05*
"
'1.00
"I.
*Estimated
"
'.
,
5-15
.'
"
,.
TN 5-1300(NAVFAC P-397/AFR.88-22
DYNAMIC RESPONSE OF STEEL STRUCTURES IN THE PLASTIC RANGE
5-14. Plastic Behavior of Steel Structures
Although plastic behavior is not generally permissible under service loading
conditions, it is quite appropriate for design when the structure is subjected
to a severe blast loading only once or at most a few t~mes during its existence. Under blast pressures, it will usually be uneconomical to design a
structure to remain elastic and, as a result, plastic behavior is normally
anticipated in order to utilize more fully the energy-absorbing capacity of

blast-resistant structures. Plastic design for flexure is based on the
assumption that the structure or member resistance is fully developed with the
formation 'of near to'tally plastifikd sec t Lons- at' the most"lii'ghiY"sties'~ed"
,. <..;.
locations. For economical design, the structure should' be proportioned to
assure its . ductile behavior up to .the' limit of Its'load-carryi:ng
capacity:
...
I
The structure' or structural element can attain its: full .plastic capacity,
,
provided that'premature impairment of' strength due to secondary effects, ~uch . '
as brittle fracture' or instability, dce s'<rio t; occur.
.. '
.
~,~
., .._
"
Structural resistance is determined on the basis of plasti~ d~s~gn concepts,

taking into account'dynamic yield sttength v~lues,' The' desigh' proceeds with
the basic obj ect Ivef chat; th-e comput'ecl'd7formatipns'of<dth'er the' iii.dividualmembers or the s t ruc ture as a whole, d!,e'. to the ant LcIpaced
blast loading,
.
\J,
' "
should' be 'limited to prescribed maximum values consistent'."'ith safety and the
desired post accident condition:
'
' ~..... .1.
'.
.'-.
5-15. Relationship Between Structure
~nction
."
and Deformations
5-15.1. General
Deformation' i t e
are
ih: ideiail for two' 'categorie~ off str;'ctU:fes,
namely, acceptor-type structures in the low pressure range and structures in

the high pressure'range which may either be acceptor- or donor-type .. A
description of the two categories of structures foI16~~'
cr
r'La
spec Lf'Le'd
<
_~
5-15.2. Acceptor-type Structures
in the
I
'.
~J
.,
.,..
Low'Pressure-RAnges
1
'
;,
The maximum deformations to be specified in this category are consistent with

maintaining structural integrity into the plastic range while providing safety
for personnel and equipment. The type of.structure generally associated with
this design category may be constructed of one or two .stories with braced or
rigid frames. Main members consisting of columns'and main beams should be , .
fabricated from hot rolled steel while secondary 'members, consisting of '; r : .t
purlins or girts which span the frame members, can be hot-rolled I-shapes and
channels or cold-formed Z-shapes and channels. The structure skin shall
consist of cold-formed siding and decking spanning between the wall girts or
roof purlins.
5-15.3. Acceptor- or Donor-type Structures in the High Pressure Range
The deformation criteria specifiedin this category cover the severe conditions associated with structures located close-in to
blast. In cases where
the design objective is the containment of an explosion the deformations
should be limited. In other cases where prevention of explosion propagation
or of missile generation is required, the structure may be allowed to approach
5-16 '1 .'
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
incipient failure, and deformations well into the strain hardening ,region may
be permitted for energy absorption. In general, plate elements and curved
plate-type structures fall under these categories.'
5-16. Deformation Criteria
5-16.1. General
The deformation criteria presented. in'this chapter will be consistent with
designing the structure for one accident. However, if it is desirable for a
structure to sustain two or three "incidents in its lifetime, the designer
may limit design deformations so that, in its post accident condition, the
structure is suitable for repair and reuse.
'
The deformation criteria for beams (including purlins, spandrels and girts)
are presented in Section 5-16.5. The 'criteria for frames, including sidesway,
are presented in Section 5-16.6 and that for plates are given in Section 516.7. Special consideration is given to the deformation criteria for open-web
joists (Section 5-33) and- cold-formed metal decking (Section 5-34)., Deformation criteria are summarized in Section 5-35.
5-16.2. Structural Response Quantities
In order to restrict damage to a structure or element which is subjected to
the effects of accidental explosion, limiting values must be assigned to

appropriate response quantities. Generally speaking, two different 'types of
values are specified, namely, limits' on the level of inelastic dynamic
response and- limits on the maximum deflections 'and rotations.
For elements' which can be represented as single-degree-of-freedom systems such

as beams, floor and wall panels, open-web joists, and plates, the appropriate
quantities are taken as the maximum duc t Ll.Lty ratio and the maximum r orat Ion
at an end support ..
For systems 'such as frame structures which can be represented by multi-degreeof-freedom systems, the appropriate quantities are taken as the sidesway
deflection and individual frame member rotations.
5-16.3. Ductility Ratio,
Following the development 'in Chapter 3 of this manual, the ductility ratio, ~,'
is defined as the ratio' of the maximum deflection (~) to the equivalent
elastic deflection (XE) corresponding to the 'development of the limiting
resistance on the bilinear resistance diagram for the element. Thus, a
ductility ratio of 3 corresponds to a maximum'dynamic response three times the
equivalent elastic response.
"
In the case of individual beam elements, ductility,ratios as high as 20 can be
achieved provdded that sufficient bracing: exists. Subsequent sections of this' "
chapt.er vcover bracing requirements -for beam elements. in the case 'of plate
elements, ductility ratios are important insomuch as'the higher ductility
ratios permit the us e of higher design stresses.
' "
'.,:'
Support rotations, as discussed in the next paragraph, provide the;ba~is'for

beam and plate design. For a beam element, "the ductility ratio must be '
5-17
;.
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC> P-397/AFR 88-22
checked to. determine whether the specified rotation can be reached without
premature buckling of the member. A similar. provision shall apply to. plates.
even though they may undergo larger ductility ~atios in the absence of
premature buckling.
5-16.4. Support Rotation,
The end rotation, e, and the associated maximum deflection, ~, for a beam are
illustrated in Figure 5-3. As shown, e is the angle between the chord joining
the supports and the point on the element where ~he deflection. is a maximum.
5-16.5. Limiting Deformations for .Beams
A steel beam element may be designed to attain large deflections corresponding
to 12 degrees support rotation. To,assure the integrity. of the beam element,
it must be adequately braced to permit this high level of ductile behavior.
In no case, however, shall the ductility ratio exceed 20.
A limiting support rotation of 2 degrees, and a limiting ductility ratio of 10
(whichever governs) are specified as reasonable estimates of the absolute
magnitude of the beam deformation where safety for personnel and equipment is
required. These deformations are consistent with maintaining structural
integrity into the plastic range. Adequate bracing shall be present to assure
the corresponding level of ductile behavior.
The interrelationship between the various parameters involved in the design of
beams is readily described in the idealized resistance-deflection curve shown
in Figure 5-4. In the figure, the values shown for the ductility ratio, ~,
and the support rotation e, are arbitrary. For example, the deflection
corresponding.to a 2-degree support rotation can be greater than that cprresponding to a ductility ratio of 10.
5-16.6. Application of Deformation Criteria to a Frame Structure
In the detailed analysis of a frame structure, representation of.the response
by a single quantity is not possible. This fact combined with the wide range
and time-varying nature of the end conditions of the individual f r ame ymembe r s
makes the concept of ductility ratio intractable. Hence, for this case, the
response quantities referred to in the criteria are the sidesway deflection .of
each story and the end rotation, e, of the individual members with reference
to a chord joining the member ends, as Illustrated Ln Figure 5 - 3. In addition' in lieu of a ductility ratio criterion, the amount of inelastic deforma-.
tion is restricted by means of a ,limitation_on th~' individualme~ber rotation.
For members which are not. loaded between their ends, such as an interior
column, 0 is zero and only the sidesway,criteria must be considered. The
maximum member end rotation, as shown in Figure 5-3, shall be 2 degrees. The
maximum sidesway deflection is limited to 1/25 of the story height.
These .responsequantities, sidesway deflection, and end rotation are part of
the required output of various c~mputer programs which ,perform an inelastic,
multi-degree-of-freedom analysis of frame structures. These programs are
available through the repositories listed in Section_5-4 and several reports
listed in the bibliography at the end of this chapter. The designer can use
. the output of.these programs to check the sidesway deflection of each story
and the maximum rotation of each member.
5-18
..
1M 5-l300jNAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
5-16,7. Limiting Deformations for Plates

Plates and plate-type' structure's can undergo -Lar gd deformations 'with regard to
'...
support rotations and ductility ratios. The effect of overa~l and local
instability upon the ultimate capacity isconsiderably more important to
structural 'steel shapes 'than to plates ... Depending upon 'the' functional
requirements'for a plate, 'the following-deformation criteria should be
considered in the design;(;"f a'plate'~
'. C ' ,
"c "
'
.'.
.....
'0. :',
...
(1)
'Large deflections ator close to'incipient failure.
(2)
Moderate deflections where the structure is designed to sustain

two or three "incidents" before being nonreusable.
(3)
Limited deflections where performance of the structure is critical

during the blast as, in the case of a blast door designed to,
.(4)
.. contain pressure and/or ftre':lleakage.

c
,'.
'
"
. .
'\.
Elastic deflections'where the 'structure must not sustain permanent'

deflections, as in the case of an explosives test chamber.
This is a partial list of d~sign'considerations for piaties. I t can be seen

that the designer must establish deformation criteria based on the function of
the plate or plate system.

A plate or plate-type structure may undergo a support rotation, as illustrated
in Figure 3-22 of Chapter 3, of 12 degrees. The corresponding allowable
ductility ratio shall not exceed'20. It should be noted that higher design
stresses can be utilized when the ductility ratio exceeds 10 (See Section 513.3) .
-'
. A limiting support rotation of 2 degrees is speclfied as 'a reasonable estimate'

of the absolute magnitude of the plate support rotation where safety for,
personnel and equipment -in an acceptor-type ,i):ructure is required. As in the
deformation
for.
beanis';ratio shall . not exceed 10. '
.. - criteiia
,
. the ductility
.
Two edge conditions may :goverri'the deformation'6f'plates in the plastic
region: The' first o~cuis;when~opposite edges are'riot built-in. In this case,
elastic plat~'deflection: theory and yield-line theory apply: The secorid
involves tensiorimembrane.actionwhich occ~is when at least'two opposite edge~'
are clamped. In this case, tensile"membrane'actiori can occur before the plate
element reaches a support rotation of 12 degrees. Tensile-membrane action of
built-in p La t e s is not cov~red in' this chapter'. . However,' the. designer carr'
u~ilize yiel~-line theory for. limited,plate defl~ction p~oblems.
.'
The interrelationship between 'the various parameters involved in the design 9f
plates is readily described in the idealized ,resistance-deflection curve shown
in Figure 5'-5. The figure shows the values for the ductility rati;'" u ,' and'
the support rotation, e; are arbr'rary. For example,' 'the deflection cor':
responding to a 2-degree support rotation' can be greater than that' co r r e sponding to a ductility ratio of 10.
' , .
,- ,
,
5-19'
"
TK 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

5-17. Rebound
Another aspect of dynamic design of steel structu~es subjected to blast
loadings is the occurrence of. rebound: Unlike,the conditions prevailing in
reinforced concrete structures where rebound. considerations, may not be of
primary concern" steel structures, will be subjected to relatively large stress
'reversals caused by rebound and will require, lateral ,bracing of ,unstayed
compression flanges which were formerly in t ens Lon , Rebound is mo~e critical.
for elements supporting light dead loads and subjected to blast pressures, of
short duration. It is also a primary ~oncern in the design of reversal bolts
for'blast doors.
5-18. Secondary Hodes of Failure
5-18.1. General
In the process of designing for the plastic 9r.ductile mode of failure, it .is
important to follow certain provisions in order to avoid premature failure of
the structure, i.e., to ensure that the strugture can develop its full plastic
resistance.
These secondaFY modes of failure can be grouped in two main categories:
(1)
Instability,modes of failure
(2)
Brittle modes. of failure '.
5-18,2. Instability Hodes of
Fail~re
In this category, the problem of structural instability at two levels. is of

concern, namely, overall buckling of the structural system as a whole, and
buckling of the component elements .
....
Overall buckling of framed structures can occur in two essentially different

manners~ In the first case, the load and, the structure are symmetric;
deformations remain also symmetric up to a critical value of the load for
which a sudden change in configuration will produce instant anti-symmetry,
large sidesway and displacement, and eventually a.faiiure by collapse' if'not
by excessive deformations. This type of instability' can also occur in the .
elastic domain before substantialdeformati~nor any plastification has taken
p Lace , It is' called "instability by' bifurcation;' .
"
"
In the second case, the loading or th~ s t ruc ture .or both are nonsymmetric.
With the application of the. load, sidesway develops progressively. In. such
cases, the vertical loads acting through the sidesway displacements, commonly
called "the P-A effect", create second order bending moments that magnify the
deformation. Because of rapidly increasing displacements, plastic hinges
form, thereby decreasing the rigidity of the structure and causing more
sidesway. This type of instability is related to a continuous dete~ioration
of the stiffness leading to an early failure by. either a c911ap~e mechanism or
excessive sidesway.
'
Frame instability need not be explicitly considered in the plastic design of
one- and two-story unbraced frames provided that the individual columns and
girders are designed. according to the beam-column criteria of Sectio~ 5-37.
5-20
TIl 5 c1300/NAVFAC P-397/A,FR88 c 22"

,
'
For' fiamesn.greatet .than two stories l"'bracing is' normally ,required "acc'ording to .
the AISC provisions for plastic design in order to ensure the ove'r a Ll, .s t ab Ll.Lc;
ty of the structure. However, if an inelastic dynamic 'frame analysis is
performed;to.'determiriethe complete time,history_of'theJstructura1 'response to
the blast loading, including the 'P-Aeffects, 'it may be established, in particular cases, that lateral bracing is not necessary i.n a frame greater than
.two stories. ,.As ;mentioned previously, .compuce r iproguams. which perform an ine1astic,.imu1ti-degree-of'freedom analysis of frame! structures may be employed
for such an analysis.
..L~" ,.,
:::'.1,., '
,}"
.~
;.~
1-,
'
"v
_f",
Buck1ingcof an element in 'the structure (e.g,:.', a'beam, girder; 'qr column) can
occur under certain loading 'and r end :conditions. Instabi1ityvisof' tw,o types,
name Lyo vbuck l'Lng co f. the member' as a whole (e . g. , 'lateral torsiona1'buck1ing)
and local buckling at certain sections, including. flange buckl Ingvand web'
crippling.
Provisions for plastic design of beams and columns a r e presented in a separate
section of this chapter.

5-18.3. Brittle Hodes of Failure
Under dynamic loading, there is an enhanced possibility that brittle ,fracture
can
d~velop
under certain conditions.
Since this type of failure is sudden in
, ,nature and difficult to predict, it is very important to diminish the risk of

such premature f a Ll.uxe . '
The cOl)lp1exity of the brittle fracture phenomena precludes a complete quantitative .definition. As a result" i t is' Lmpos s Lb Le to establish simple rules
for'design. Brittle fracture will b~ associated with a loss in flexural
resistance ..
Brittle fractures are caused by a combination of adverse circumstances that

may include a few, some', or all of the folloWing:
,"
(1)
Local stress concentrations a~d residual stresses
(2)
Poor welding
(3)
The use of a notch se~sitive steel
(4)
Shock loading or rapid strain rate
(5) ,Low temperatures'
(6)
(7)
,(8)
'.
Decreased ductility due to strain aging

The existence 'of 'a plane strain condition causing a state of triaxial tension'stresses, especially in thick gusset plates, thick
webs and in the vicinity of welds
Inappropriate'use of some forms of connections,
..
The problem of brittle fracture is closely related to the detailing of "connections, a topic that will b<;> treated in a'separate section of this chapter..
TH,5~1300/NAVFACP~397/AFR'88-22
However, there:a~e'certain gener~l guLde H.ne s to .. follow in 'order to ,minimi:!:e
the danger of brittle fracture:
,".,
,.0-
: (1) .'
.~
"
"
,0
~ -'~
"
,,"".
Steel material must be' 'selected to conform with the

'. condi tion
," ...
,.
anticipated in service.
(2)
Fabrication,and'w,orkmanshlp should meet high standards, e i.g s ,

sheared edges,and.notches should be. avoided, and ~aterial that'has
been severely cold-worked sn~~id'b~-~e~oved.
(3)
Proportioning and detailing of connections should be such that'

free movement of the ba~e material is .permitted, stress con~entrations and t
L a x
L a
l . v s
r e
ductility is ,provicle'd'.
conditions
- a r
avoided" and
~f
c' -',
r.
. a d e q u a
.(
t . e
:'
')',
.",
, 1
,.
". 1
",l '-.' '".
., .
.'.'
'.
'-
..
',.-
1.
. ,:;- .'
~.
, _.,
'.-.,
, ',".1
",-
"
",
<s"
'
.~-.
'
:.' ~
'J
"
'\
.c
.,,
~'
J';","
:'0.
j !.. ',.
"
, - .'
,
i' :
... ;.~
,1 ."
',"
'" -",
"
. ,'
'\ '5.-22
. .
~
"
t.,,"
.s, '
. .','
'.
~.
,,
Jr----------:::;...-.
.
,
.
-;-.~ ~m
.!
BEAM, SLAB OR PANEL
.,
8 8
8BO
80B
0-
FRAME
, ,
Figure 5-3
Member end rotations for -beams and frames
.'.,
ILl
TOTAL
FAILURE
(.)
sen
en
ILl
a::
ULTIMATE
ELAST
-,
, ..
. .'
I
I'
I
..
'I
I'
,-INCIPIENT
FAILURE
"
"
XI9=2") OR IfL =10)
XlfL= 20)
or
DEFLECTION
X(9 =12)
CD
PROTECTIO N CATEGORY
(3)8(4)
SHELTER
BARRIER,
PRE SURES
STRUCTURE - LOAD
SENSITIVITY
PRESSURE - TIME
STRUCTURE CATEGORY
..
..
....
ACCEPTOR' OR
DONOR
,.,.'
ACCEP,;rOR
,~,
'
..
"
'or-
RESp'O SE CHARTS OR ITERATfON
DESIGN METHOD
'"
LIMI TED
RESPONSE CRITERIA
..
LARGE.
DUCTILE MODE OF
RESPONSE
BENDrN 8 SHEAR
S
DESIGN SECTION
MODULUS'
(S+Z)/2
<'dy'
DESIGN STRESS
..
,
'dy+
'dy
Y4(' du-'dy)
Figure
5-~
,
. ,
,,
Relatio!15h1P!'. between des t gn parameters for beams
'"1':
5-24~
r. J
..
ELAST
TOTAL
' flIlLURE
' ULTIMATE,
"
"....INCIPIENT
FAILURE
/1l
'.
.'
I,
'
X(9:2") OR (JJ- :10).
X(JJ-' 20)
DEFLECTION
X(8:12)
-'
or
'CD
.' ,.
PROTECTION' CATEGORY"
(3) a (4)
SHELTER
BARRIER
.
..
PRESSURE'S'
,
STRUCTURE - LOAD
SENSITIVITY
PRESSURE -TIME
ACCEPTOR,
,
,.
STRUCTURE CATEGORY
ACCEPTOR OR
RESPO SE CHARTS OR ITERATION
DESI,GN METHOD
LIMITED
RESPONSE CRITERIA
DUCTILE MODE OF
RESPONSE
<Id'y
SHEAR
(S+Z)/2
DESIGN STRESS
'
LARGE
BENDrN
DESIGN SECTION
MODULUS
DONOR
I d y+ 4 ( I d.-Idy)
I dy
"
.'
Figure 5-5 'Relationships between dest-gn parameters for plates

~.
5-25
1M 5-l300fNAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
. DESIGN OF. SINGLE 'SPAN..AND CONTINUOUS BEAMS'
5-19';' General
The emphasis in this section is on the-dynamic plastic design of structural
steel beams. Design data have been derived from the static provisions'of the
, AISC Specification with necessary modifications and additions for blast
design. It should be noted that all provisions on plastic desig~ in the AISC
Specificati~n apply, except as modified in this chapter.
The calculation of the dynamic flexural capacity of beams is described in
detail. The necessary information is,pre~ented for determining the equivalent
bilinear resistance-deflection functions used in evaluating the basic flexural
response of beams:
Also
pres~nted
are the supplementary considerations of
adequate shear capacity and local and overall stability which are necessary
for the process of hinge formation, momenf redistribution and inelastic hinge
rotation to proceed to the development of,a full collapse mechanism .
...
5-20. 'Dynamic Flexural Capacity

5-20.1. General
The ultimate dynamic moment resisting capacity of a steel beam is given by
5-5
where f ds is the dynamic design stress" (as' de scr Ibed in' Section' 5 -13) of the
material and ~ is the plastic section modulus. The plastic section modulus
can be calculated as the sum of the.static moments of the fully yielded
elements of the equal cross sec t fon 'areas. above and below the neutral axis,
i.e. :
5-6
Note:
where
Acml - Atm2 for a doubly-symmetric section

area of cross section in compression
area of cross section in tension

distance from neutral axis to the centroid of the area in
compression
distance from neutral axis to the centroid of the area in
tension
For standard I-shaped sections (S, W, and M shapes), the plastic, section
modulus is approximately 1.15 times the elastic modulus for strong axis
bending and may be obtained from standard manuals on structural steel design.
It is generally assumed that a fully plastic section offers no additional
resistance to load. However, additional resistance due to strain hardening of
the material is present as the deformation continues beyond the yield level of
the beam. In the analysis of structural steel beams, it is assumed that the
plastic hinge formation is concentrated at a section.. Actually" the plastic
region extends over a certain length that depends on the type of loading
5-26
(concentrated or'distributed) on the magnitude of the deformation, -and on the

shape factor of the cross section. The extent of.the plastic hinge has no
substantial influence on the ultimate capacity; it has, however, an influence
on the final magnitude of the deflection. For all practical purposes, the
assumption of a concentrated plastic hinge is adequate.
In blast design, although strains well into the straIn-hardening range may be
to1erat~di the corresponding additional resistance is generally not sufficient
to warrant analytical consideration since excessive support rotation and/or
ductility ratios of beams, which are susceptible to 10cal,f1ange or lateral'
torsional buckling, are not rec8mmended .
5-20.2. Moment-curvature Relationship for Beams

Figure 5"6 ,shows the stress distribution'at various stages of deformation for
a plastic hinge section. Theoretically, the beam bends elastically until the
outer fiber stress reaches f ds and the yield moment'designated,by Mv is
attained (Figure 5-6a). As the moment increases above My" the yie1a stress
progresses inward from the outer fibers of the'section towards the neutral
axis as shown in Figure 5-6b. As the moment approaches the fully plastic
moment, a rectangular stress distribution as shown in Figure 5-6c is approached. 'The ratio between the fully plastic moment to the yield moment is
the shape factor, f,' for 'the section, i.e., the ratio between the plastic>and
elastic' section modu1ii:

A representative moment-curvature relationship for a simply-supported steel'
beam is shown'in Figure 5~7. The behavior is elastic until the yield moment
My is reached. With further increase in load, the curvature increases at a
greater ra~e as the fully plastic moment value, M2, is approached. Following
the attainment of M2, the curvature increases: significantly, with only a'sma11
increase in'moment'capacity.
For design purposes, a bi1in~ar representation of the moment-curvature
relationship is employed as shown by the dashed lines in Figure 5-7, For
beams with a moderate design ductility ratio (~S 3), the,design moment ~ - '
M1. For beams with a larger design ductility ratio (~> 3), the design moment
~ - M2
'.
5-20.3. Design Plastic Moment,
'
The equivalent plastic design moment shall be'computed as follows:

For beams with ductility ratios less than or equal to 3:
"'
~ -
..
..
f ds (8 + Z)/2
'
5-7
where 8 and Z are the elastic and plastic section modu1ii, respectively.
For beams with ductility ratios greater than 3' and beam columns:
5-8
Equation 5-7 is consistent with test results for beams with moderate ductilities. For beams which are a l Iowed to undergo' large ductilities, Equation 5- 8"
based upon full p1astification of the section, is considered reasonable for
design purposes.
5-27
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

It is important to note that the above pertains to beams which are supported
against buckling ... Design provisions for guarding against local and overall
buckling of beams during plastic deformation are discussed in Sections 5-24,
5-25, and 5 - 2 6 . "
5-21. Resistance and Stiffness Functions

5 -21.1. General
The single-degree-of-freedom analysis which serves. as the basis for the
flexural response calculation requires that the equivalent stiffness and ..
ultimate resistance be defined for both single-span beams and continuous
beams. The ultimate resistance values correspond to developing a full
collapse mechanism in each case. The equivalent stiffnesses correspond to
load-deflection.relationships that have been idealized as bilinear functions
with initial slopes so defined that the areas under the idealized load
deflection diagrams are equal to the areas under. the actual'diagrams at the
point of inception of fully plastic behavior of the beam. This concept is
covered in Section 3-13 of Chapter 3.
5-21.2. Single-span Beams

, ..
l.
Formulas for determining the stiffness and resistance for one-way steel qeam
elements are presented in Tables 3-1 and 3-8 of Chapter 3. The values of M in
Table 3-1 represents the plastic design moment,~. For example, the value of
r u for the fixed-simple, uniformly loaded beam becomes r u - l2~/L~.
5-21.3. Multi-span Beams

The beam relationships for defining the bilinear resistance function for
multi-span continuous beams under uniform loading are summarized below. These
expressions are predicated upon the formation of a three-hinge mechanism in
each span. Maximum economy normally dictates that the span lengths and/or
member sizes be adjusted such that a mechanism forms simultaneously in all
spans.
It must be noted that the development of a mechanism in a particular span of a
continuous beam assUmes compatible stiffness properties at the end supports.
If the ratio of the length of the adjacent spans to the span being considered
is excessive (say, greater than three). it may not be possible to reach the
limit load without the beam failing by excessive deflection.
For uniformly distributed loading on equal spans or spans which do not differ
in length by more than 20 percent, the following relationships can be used to
define the bilinear resistance function:
Twospan continuous beam:
rubL - 12 ~/L
5-9
163 EI/L 3
5-10.
Exterior span of continuous beams with three or more spans:.

i
5-11
5-28

5-12 '
Interior span of continuous beam with three or more spans:
Ru-
rubL -'16,O~/L
5-13
KE
300EI/L3
5-14
For, design' situations 'which do not meet the required condf t Lons , 'the bilinear
resistance function may be developed by the'application of the basic procedures of plastic analysis!
' L ,
,,
"
5-22. Design for Flexure'

5-22.1. General
The design ofa structure to resist the blast 'of an accidental explosion
consists ,essentially of the determination of'the structural resistance
required to limit calculated deflections to within the prescribed maximum
values as outlined in Section 5-35. In general, ,the resistance and'deflection
may be 'computed on the basis of flexure provided that the shear capacity of
the web is not exceeded. Elastic shearing"deformations of steel members are
negligible as long as the depth to'span ratio is less than.about, 0.2 ~nd
hence. a flexural analysis is normally sufficient for establishing maximum
de f Lec t Lons t.
'
,,'
5-22.2. Response'Charts
,
1& .
Dynamic response charts for one-degree-of-freedom systems in 'the elastic or

elasto-plastic range under various dynamic loads are given .in',;Chapter 3. To
use vche charts, the effective natural period of, vibration 'of a'-s t ruc tura I
steel beam must be determined. The procedures for determining.tne natural
period of vibration for one-way elements are outlined in Section 3-17.4 of
Chapter 3. Equation 5-15 can be used to determine 'the' natural 'period of
vibration for any system for which the total effective mass, Me. and equivalent elastic stiffness, KE are known:
.
','
5-15
-o.
5-22.3. 'Preliminary Dynamic'Load Factors

For preliminary flexural design of beams situated in low pressure range, it is
suggested that an equivalent static uitimateresistance equal to'the peak
blast' pressure be used for those beams designed for, '2 degrees support rotation, ' For large support. rotations , a preliminary dynamic load factor 'of 0.5
is recommended. Sincethe duration,of the loading for lo~,pressure range will
generally be' the same or longer than the period of ,vibration of tne structure,
revisions to this preliminary design from a dynamic 'analysis ,will usually not
be substantial. However, for structures where the loading environment
pressure is such that the load duration is short as compared with the period
of vibration of the 'structure, this procedure may result ina substantial
overestimate of the required 'resistance.
5-29 '
5-22.4. Additional Considerations in Flexural Design

Once a dynamic analysis is performed on the single span or continuous beam"
the deformations must be checked with the limitations. set in the criteria.
The provisions for local buckling, web crippling and.lateral bracing must be
met. The deformation criteria for beam elements including purl ins , spandrels
and girts are summarized in.Section 5-35.
The -rebound behavior of the structure must not be overlooked.-
The information
required for calculating the elastic rebound of structures is contained in

Figure 3-268 of Chapter 3. The provisions for local buckling.and lateral
bracing, as outlined.in subsequent sections of this chapter, shall apply in
the design for rebound.
Shearing forces .are of.-significance in plastic design primarily because of
their possible influence on the plastic moment capacity of a steel member. At
points where large. bending moments and shear forces exist, the assumption of
an ideal elasto-plastic stress-strain relationship indicates that during the
progressive formation of.a.plastic hinge, there is a reduction of the web area
available for shear. . This reduced area could result -.in an initiation of shear.
yielding and possibly reduce ... the imoment capacity.
.~-'
,;
'-,
However, it has been found experimentally that I-shaped sections achieve their
fully plastic moment capacity provided that the average shear stress over the
full web area is less than the yield stress in shear. This result can
basically be attributed to the fact that I,shaped sections carry moment
predominantly. through the flanges and shear predominantly through the.web.
Other contributing factors include .the beneficial. effects of strain hardening
and the fact that~combinations of high shear and high moment generally occur
at locations where the moment gradient is steep.
"I
The yield capacity of steel beams in shear is given by:

_,'
5-16
where Vp is the shear capacity, f dv is the dynamic yield stress in shear of
the steel (Equation 5-4), and
is the area of the web. For I-shaped beams
and similar flexural members with thin webs, only the.web area between flange
plates should be used in calculating
Aw
Aw.
'.
For several particular load. and support conditions, equations for' the support
shears, V, for one.way elements are given in Table 3-9 of Chapter 3. As
discussed above, as. long as the acting s~ear V does not exceed V , .I-shaped
sections can be considered capable of achieving their full plast~c moment. If
V is greater than Vp,.'the web .area of the chosen section Lsi Lnadequat.e and
either the web mu~t be strengthened ora different section should be selected .
..
However, for, cases where the web is being relied upon to carry a significant
portion of the moment capacity of the section, such as rectangular cross.
section beams or built-up sections, the influence.of shear on the available
moment capacity must be considered as treated in Section 5-31.
5-30
5-24., Local Buckling

In order to ensure that a steel beam will attain fully plastic behavior and
attain the des Lred ductility at plastic hinge locations, it is necessary that
the elements of the beam section 'meet minimum ,thickness requirements sufficient to prevent a local buckling failure. Adopting the plastic design,
requirements of the AISC Specification, the width-thickness ratio for flanges
of rolled,I- and W-shapes and similar built-up' single web shapes that would be
subjected to compression involving plastic hinge rotation shall not exceed the
following values:
f y (ksi)
b f /2tf
36
42
45
50
55
60
65
8.5
8.0
7.4
7.0
6.6
6.3
6.0
where fyis. the specified minimum static yield stress for the steel (Table 51), b f is the, flange width, and tf is the flange thickness.'
The width-thickness ratio of similarly compressed flange plates in box sections and cover plates shall not exceed 190/(f )1/2. For this purpose~ the
width-of a cover plate shall be taken as the distance between longitudinal
lines of connecting rivets, high-strength bolts, or welds.
The depth-~hickness ratio of webs of members subjected to plastic bending
shall riot,exceed the value given by Equation 5-17 or 5-18 as 'applicable.
d
412 [ . P ]
~l - 1;4,~
when
0.27
5-17
,.
p
when
> 0.27
5-18
where
,p
the applied compressive load

the plastic axial load equal to the cross' sectional area
times the specified minimum static yield stress, .fy
These equations which are applicable to local buckling under dynamic loading
have been adopted from the AISC provisions for static loading. However, since
the actual process of buckling takes a finite period of time, the member must
accelerate laterally and the mass of the member provides an inertial force
retarding this acceleration. For this reason, loads that might otherwise
cause failure may be applied to the members for very short durations if they
5-31
TM 5-l300/NAVFAC' P-397/AFR 88-22
are removed before the buckling has occurred. Hence, it is appropriate and
conservative to apply the criteria developed for static loads to the case of
dynamic ,loading of, relatively short duration.
These requirements on.
design of all,members
necessary to evaluate
member which does not
cross section' geometry should' be adhered, to in, .the

for blast loading. However, in the event that it is
the load-carrying capacity of an existing structural
meet these provisions, the ultimate capacity should be
reduced in accordance with the recommendations made in the Commentary!and-
Appendix C of the AISC Specification.
-.
5-25. Web Crippling
Since concentrated loads and reactions along a short length of flange are
carried by compressive stresses in the web of'the supporting member, local
yielding may occur followed by crippling or crumpling of the web. Stiffeners
bearing against the flanges at load points and fastened to the web are usually
employed in such situations to provide a gradual transfer of these forces to
the web.
Provisions for web stiffeners, as given in Section 1.15.5 of the AISC Specification, should be used in dynamic ,design. In applying these provisions, f y
"
should be taken equal to the specified static yield strength of the steel. . "
5-26. Lateral Bracing
5-26.1. General
'.'
Lateral bracing support is often provided by floor beams, joists or purlins

which frame into the member to be braced. The unbraced lengths _(lcr", as
defined in Sections 5-26.2 and 5-26.3) are either fixed by the spacing of, the.. ,purlins and girts or by the spacing of supplementary bracing.
When the compression flange is securely connected to steel decking or siding,
this will constitute adequate lateral bracing in most cases. In addition,
inflection points (points of contraflexure) can be considered as braced
points.
Members built into a masonry wall and having their web perpendicular to this
wall can be assumed to be laterally supported with respect to .t.he Lr .weak axis
of bending. In addition, points of contraflexure can be considered as braced
points, if necessary.
Members subjected to bending about their strong axis may be susceptible to' , ,
lateral-torsional buckling in the direction of, the weak axis if their compression 'flange is not laterally braced. Therefore, in order for a plastically
designed member to reach its collapse mechanism, lateral supports must be
provided at the plastic hinge locations and at a certain distance from'the
hinge location: Rebound, which constitutes stress reversals, is an important
consideration ,for lateral bracing support.
'
;
"
5-32
TN 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
5-26.2. Requirements for Members with
~ ~
Since members with the design ductility ratios less than or equal to three.
undergo moderate amounts of plastic deformation, the bracing requirements ,are
somewhat less stringent.
For this case, the following relationship may be used:
l/rT -
[(102 x
103~) /f d S]
1/2
5-19
where
1 -
distance between cross sections braced against twist or

lateral displacement of the compression flange
radius of gyration of a section comprising the compression
. flange plus one..- third of the-,compression web area taken
about an axis in the plane of the web
bending coefficient defined in Section 1.5.1-.4.5 of, the AISC
Specification
5-26.3. Requirements for Members,with
> 3
In order to develop the full' plastic momen~, ~ for members ~ith' design
ductility ratios greater than three, the distance from the brace at the hinge
location to the adjacent braced points should not be greater ~han lcr as .
determined from either. Equation 5-20 or 5-21, as. applicable:
1375
+ 25 when 1.0
> -0.5
f ds
1375
when -0.5
f ds
where
5-20
-1. 0
5-21
the radius of gyration of the member about its weak axis

the lesser of the moments at the ends of the unbraced
segment
M/~ -
the end moment ratio. The moment ratio is positive when the
segment is bent in reverse curvature and negative when bent
in single curvature.
critical length correction factor (See Figure 5-8)
The critical length correction factor, B, accounts for the fact that the
required spacing of bracing, lcr' decreases with increased ductility ratio.
For example, for a particular member with r y = 2 in. and f ds
51 ksi and
using the equation for M/~ = 0, we get lcr - 71.7 in. for ~ - 6 and lcr 39.7 in. for ~ - 20.
5-33
TII,5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
5-26.4. Requirements for Elements Subjected-to ReboUnd

The bracing requirements for nonyielded segments of members and the bracing
requirements for members in rebound can be determined from the-following
relationship:
5-22
where
the maximum bending stress in the member, and in no case

greater than f ds
When f equals f ds' -this' equation reduces to'the l/rT requirement of Equation
5-19.
"
5-26;5. Requirements for Bracing Members
ln order to function adequately, the bracing member must meet certain minimum
requirements on axial strength and axial stiffness. These requirements are
quite minimal in relation to the properties of tyPical framing members.
Lateral braces should be welded or securely bolted to the compression flange
and, in addition, a vertical stiffener should generally be provided at bracing
points where concentrated vertical loads are-also being transferred. Plastic
hinge locations within uniformly loaded spans do not generally require a
stiffener. Examples of lateral bracing details are presented in Figure 5-9 .
,".
5-34
N.A.
MZ "7
(c I
Figure 5-6
Theoretical stress distribution for pure -l:iending'at

various stages of d:;7Hlllli c loading
5-35
CURVE'b
ACT:;:~~_;;:;~R~:G~
DESIGN MOMENT FOR
BEAMS WITH MODERATE
DUCTILITY ( P. H)
Mp=M1 =fds
. (.!.!.!..)
2
DESIGN MOMENT FOR BEAMS WITH
LARGE DUCTILITY (P..>3)
Mp=MZ=fds l
CURVATURE
Figure 5-7
Manent-;curvature diagram for s-imple-supported,

dynamically loaded, . I-shaped beams
5-36
3.0
.
'.
'.I
a::
~.
~ 2.5
17
>
V
~
u,
..
ILl
a::
:5
2.0
17
", V
(!)
-l
.v
1.5
.- 1/
1/
!:::.".
a::
. .
.,
.- 1/
V,
,.
. . . ILl
;i
i=
17
'.'
1.0
3
10
DUCTILITY
12
14
RATIO,
16
'18
20
Xm/X E
"
:,
..
\'~
Figure 5-8 . Values of
'a
for use in equations 5-20 and 5-21

5-37
~--BOLTS
BOLTS,,..
BOLTED CONTINUOUS CONNECTION
. BOLTED DISCONTINUOUS CONNECTION
STIFFNER
WELDED CONTINUOUS CONNECTION
WELDED DISCONTINUOUS CONNECTION
STIFFENERS
TI E D BOTTOM
Figure 5-9
FLANGE CONNECTION
Typi cal lateral bracing details
5-38
DESIGN OF PLATES
5-27. General
The emphasis in this section is on the dyn~mic plastic design of plates. As
in the case for simply supported .and continuous beams, design data have been
derived from the static provisions of the AISC Specification with necessary
modifications .and additions ,for blast design.
"
This section' covers the dynamic flexural' capacity:..of plates, .as well ';'s' the'
necessary information for determining the equivalent bilinear resistancedeflection'functions used in evaluating the flexural response of plates. Also
presented is' the supplementary consideration of adequate shear capacity at
negative yield lines.
5-28. Dynamic Flexural Capacity
As is the case'for standard.I'shaped'sections, the ultimat~,dynamic momentres Ls t ingvcapacd ty of a steel plate is a function of the elastic and plastic
modulii and the dynamic design, stress. For :plates or rectangular cross
section beams, the plastic section'modulus is 1.5 times the elastic section
modulus.
A representative moment-curvature relationship for a simply-supported steel
plate is shown in Figure 5-10. The behavior is elastic until a curvature
corresponding to the yield moment'Ky is reached. With further increase in, '
load, the curvature increases at a greater rate as 'the fully plastic moment
value, M2 , i s appr oach ed . Following the attainment ,of M2 , the curvature
increases while the moment remains constant.
For plates and rectangular, cross section beams, M2 is 50 percent,greater than

and the nature of the t r ans'Lt Lon . from yield to the fully plastic condition
depends upon the plate geometry and end conditions. It is recommended that a
capacity midway between'Mv'and M2' be used to define the plastic design moment,
~ (M l in Figure ,5-11), fbr ,plates and rectangular cross section beams.
Therefore,' for plates ,with any ductility. ratio, Equation 5-7 applies.
'Y'
5-29. Resistance and Stiffness Functions

Procedures for .determining stiffness and resistance factors for one- and twoway plate elements are outlined in Chapter 3. These factor~ are based upon
elastic deflection theory and the yield-line method, and are appropriate for
defining,the stiffness and ultimate .load-carrying capacity of ductile structural steel plates. :In applying these factors to steel plates, the modulus of
elasticity should be taken equal to ,29,600~000 psi. For two-way isotropic
steel plates, the ultimate unit positive and negative moments are equal .Ln all
directions; i.e.
where ~ is defined by Equation 5-7 and the remaining values are ultimate unit
moment capacities as defined in Section 3-9.3 of Chapter 3. Since the stiffness factors were derived for plates with equal stiffness properties in each
direction, they are not applicable to the case of orthotropic steel plates,
5-39
TIl 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88"22
I
such as stiffened plates, which have different stiffness properties in each
direction.
5-30. Design for Flexure
The procedure for the flexural design of a steel.plate is essentially the same
as the design of a.beam. As for beam~,. it is suggested that preliminary
dynamic load factors listed in Table p-4 be used for plate structures. With
the stiffness and resistance factors From Section 5-29 and taking into account
the influence of shear on the available
plate moment.capacity
as defined in
I
c,
Section 5-31, the dynamic response anp rebound for 'a given blast loading may
be determined from the response charts in Chapter '3. It should be noted.,that
for IJ. > 10, the dynamic design stress, .incorporating the dynamic ultimate
stress, f du' may be used (see Equation 5-2).
In the design of rectangular plates, the effect of simultaneous highmoment
and high shear at negative yield lines upon the plastic strength of the plate
may be significant. In such cases, the following interaction formula describes the effect of the supportcshear, V, upon the available moment'capacity, M:
5- 23
,
"
where ~ is the fully plastic moment capacity in the absence of shear calculated from Equation 5-7, and Vp is the ultimate shear capacity in the absence
of bending determined from Equation 5-16 where the web area, ~i is taken
equal to the total cross sectional area at the support . .
For two-way elements, values for the ultimate support shears which are
applicable to steel plates are presented in Table 3-10 of Chapter 3.
I
_ r_ "
It should be noted that, due to the inter-relationship between the support

shear, V, the unit ultimate flexural resistance, r u' of the two-way element,
and the fully plastic moment resistance, ~,. the d.etermination of. the resistance of steel plates considering Equation 5-23, is not a simple calculation.
Fortunately, the number of instances when negative yield lines with support
shears are encountered for steel plates will be limited. Moreover, in most
applications, the V;Vp ratio is such, that the available moment capacity is at
least equal to the plastic design moment for plates (Equation 5-7) .... '
It is recommended that for a V;V . ratio on negative yield lines less' than
0.67, the plastic design moment ~or plates, as determined from Equation 5-7,
should be used' in design. However, if V;Vp is greater than. 0.67, the influence of shear on the available moment capacity must be accounted for by
means of Equation 5-23.
5-40
"
:r
CURVATURE
NOTE: SEE FIGURE 5- 7
--FORMy,M 1 ANDM 2
Figure 5-' 0 Manent-curvature diagram for dynamically loaded plates

anur-ect angui ar-. cross-section beams,' ';,
5-41'
ylt
r
I->
i'-TRANSVERSE LOAD
'j
x
x
ELASTIC AND PLASTIC
NEUTRAL AXIS
THROUGH THE CENTROID
~,
8
cot
L -_ _.....
Figure 5-11
=ELASTIC DEF.LECTION
=-/ 8x' + 8/
Biaxial bending or-a

5-42
doubly-s~etrie ""etlon
TN
5~1300fNAV~AC
P-397/AFR 88-22
. f .'
i
, '
\- "
.
;
t ..
" .
"
"
,Table: 5-4
Preliminary
Dyn~mic ~ad
Factors for
..
":~
Pl~tes
-.
Deflection
'" ,
"
Magnitua,;
Small
'
, . I ."
Moderate
Large
. '- . '
-:"
..
,~.\.:
..
"5
'2
4
12,
"
"
..
"
,.'-
nLF
.
. J.~
0.6
".
..
....
; r: -,
'
"
.J' .::'
"
"
"
..
"
'
,-
,
,
1.0
0.8
'10
20
Whichever governs'
"
Deformation* .'.
max
~ max
TIl 5-l300/NAVFAC.P-397/AFR ,88"22',

SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS, BEAMS
5~32.
Unsymmetrical Bending
5-32.1. General
In blast design, the number of situations where unsymmetrical bending occurs
is limited and where encountered, it can be treated without serious economic'
penalty. Due to the fact that blast overpressure loads act normal to the
surfaces of a structure, the use of doubly-symmetric cross sections for
purl ins and girts (e.g., hot-rolled'S- and W-sections or cold-formed channels
used back-to-back) is generally recommended. In such cases, the deformation
criteria for flexural members in Section 5-22 apply.
Unsymmetrical bending occurs when flexural members are subjected to transverse
loads acting in a plane other, than a pr LncIpa l, plane. With this type of
loading, the following are applicable:
(1)
(2)
(3)
, (4)
The member's neutral axis is not perpendicular to the plane of

loading.
Stre~s~.s cannot in general be'calcul~teii by means of the' simple

bending ,_formula (Mc/I).
The bending deflection does not coincide with the plane of loading
but is perpendicular to the inclined neutrai axis.
If'the plane of'loads does not 'pass thro~gh the shear center of
'the cross section, bending is also accompanied by twisting.
..
~
Doubly-symmetric S, 'w, and box sections acting ~s individual beam elements and
subjected to' biaxial bending, i.e'., unsymmefrical bending without torsion, can
be treated using the procedures outlined in the following se ct Lons.
5-32.2. Elastic and Plastic Section Modulus
The inclination of the elastic and plastic neutral axis through the centroid
of the section can be calculated directly from the following relationship (see
Figure 5-11):
tan a
where
5-24
angle between the horizontal 'principal plane ,and the neutral

axis
angle between the plane of the load and the vertical

prIncipal plane
, and x and y refer to the horizontal and vertIcal principal axes of the crosssection.
The equivalent elastic section modulus may'be evaluated from the following
equation:
S - '(SxSy)/(Sycos ~ + Sxsin ~)
5-44
5-25
. TM 5-l300/NA.YFAC ;P-397/R 88-22 .
elastic' section. modulus about. the x-axis
where
. ~ ','
"elastic section modulus about the y-axis

",
..
?~';
The plastic. section modulus carr-be ec a LcuLa t ed using Equation5-~-, ,With these
values of.the. elastic and.plastic section'modulii~, the design p~~stic mom~nt
capacity can be determined from Equation 5-7 . . "
.i
,.
. ,'l
5-32.3.
Equi~alent
Elastic Stiffness
.. .':'
In order to define the stiffness:and bilinear resistance function, .. it is

necessary to' determine the'elastic deflection of the beam. ~is.deflection
may be calculated by resolving the.. load into.components acting in,;the principal planes of the cross section. The elastic deflection, &, is;calculated
as the resultant of the deflection~ determined by simple bending calculations
in each direction (see Figure 5-11). The equivalent elastic de f Lec t Lon on the,
bilinear resistance functionX E, may then be determined by As~uming ~hat,the
elastic stiffness is. valid up to the .. development of the des Lgn plastic moment
capac i ty, Mp.
, ".
.., ,.
~ ,
. ..'
, ..... ,
5-32.4. Lateral Bracing,and Recommended ~esign.~riteria
"
"
r- ,;
The bracing requirements of Section 5-26 may not be totally adequate to permit
a b Laxf.a Ll.y loaded section to deflect into the inelastic range' without..,.
premature ..failure. However.; for. lack of data, the provisions ,of .Sec t Lon 5 -26,
on lateral bracing. may be used' if the total' member end r o t at Lcn -co r r eapondfrig ,
to the t o t'a l: deflection due to the incliped ,load is limited to 2 degrees., In
addition, the actual details of support conditions and/or bracing prOVided to'
such members by the other primary and secondary members of the frame must be
carefully checked t;o. ensure that the proper. conditions exist t.ov-perm l t;
' "
deflections, in'the inelastic range.
' .:; '.~
.... : -v,
.: "
,i
~"
, ,.
5-32.5. Torsion and Unsymmetrical Bending
.'
.J
The Lne Last t cibehavf.ox 'of sections subjected to unsymmetrical bending, .with.
twisting; is not totally known at present .. Consequently, theuse of sections ... :
with the resultant load 'not passing through the shear center ,is not'recom-' ",'
mended in.plastic design of blast-resistant structures, unless ~orsional
constraints are provided f'o r. the elements
In actual .installations', however,
the torsional constraint offered to a pur lin or girt by the. "flexural .,rigidity
of the floor. roof, or wall panels to which it.is attached may force the
secondary member to deflect in the plane of loading with little or no torsional effects', -Unde r such conditions or 'when some other means of, bracing, is
p r ovf.ded to prevent torsional, rotation in both' .the loading, and rebound phases
of the response, such unsymmetrically loaded members may be', capable of, .
performing well in the plastic range. Ho';ever, because of the limit'ed data
presently' avaIlable, there is insufficient, .bas Ls for providing practical
design guidelines .Ln this area. Hence.,: if a c as e involving unsymmetrical
bending' with torsion:cannot be prevented in design; the maximum ductility,.
ratio should be limited to 1. O.
" .
01
Furthermore, special precautions may have tobe taken to restrict the tor'
sional-flexural distortions that can develop under unsymmetrical loading,

thereby reducing the f Lexura Lcc apac Lt.y of, t.he member."
.. __
.'j
5-45
'.:
"
5-33. Steel Joists and Joist Girders (Open-web'Steel Joists)

Open-web joists are commonly used as load-carrying members for the direct
support of roof and floor deck in buildings.' The design .of joists for conventional loads is covered by the "Standard 'Specifications, Load Tables and'
Weight Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders!', .adopced by the- Steel Joist
Institute. For blast design, all the provisions of this Specification. are in
force, except as modified herein.
These joists are manufactured using either hot-rolled or cold-formed steel. HSeries joists are composed of 50-ksi steel in the chord members and either 36ksi or 50-ksi steel for the web sections. LH Series, DLH Series and joist
girders are composed of joist chords or web sections with a yield strength of
at least 36 ksi, but not greater than 50 ksi.
Standard load tables are available for simply supported, uniformly loaded
joists supporting Ii deck and so constructed that .the top chord'is braced
against lateral' buckling. These tables indicate 'that the capacity of'a
particular joist may be governed by. either flexural or shear (maximum end,.
reaction) considerations. As discussed previously,it is preferable in blast
applications to select a member whose capac Lty. is controlled. by flexure rather
than shear, which may cause abrupt failure.
"
The tabulated loads include a check on the bottom' chord as an axially' loaded
tensile member and thedesign of the top chord as a column or beam column ..;
The width-thickness ratios of the unstiffened or stiffened elements of the
cross section are also limited to values specified in the Standard Specifications:
The dynamic ultimate capacity of open-web joists may be taken equal to '1.7 a x
c times the load given in the joist tables. This value represents the safety
factor of 1.7 multiplied by a dynamic increase 'factor, c, and the' average
strength increase factor, a (see Section 5-12).
The adequacy o~ the section in reboundimust be evaluated. Upon'calculating
the required 'resistance in rebound, r-/ru,"using the rebound chart in Chapter
3 (Figure 3-268), the.lower chord must be checked as a column 'or beam column.
If the bottom'chord of a standard joist is not adequate in rebound, the chord
must be'strengthened either by reducing the' unbraced length or by increasing
the chord area. The top chord must be checked as an axial tensile member, but
in most circumstances; it will be adequate.
"
The bridging members required by the joist specification should be checked for
both the initial and rebound phase of ' the response to verify that they satisfy'
the required.spacing.of compression flange' bracing for lateral buckling ..
The joist tables indicate that the design of.some joists is governed by shear,
that is, failure of the 'web bar members in tension or compression near the
supports. In such cases, the ductility ratio for the joist should not exceed
unity. In addition, the joist members near the support should be 'investigated
for the worst combination of slenderness ratio and axial load under load
reversal.
, '
For hot-rolled members not limited,by'shear considerations; desrgn ductility.

ratios up to ~he values specified in Section 5-35 can be used. The design
5-46
TM 5-l300/NAVFAC:P-397/AFR'SS-22
ductility ratio of Joists with light' gauge chord meinbers -should be-limited to
1.0.
c,
The top and bottom chords should be symmetrical about a vertical axis. , If
double angles or bars are used as chord members. the components of each chord
should be fastened together so as to act as a single member.
-'
","
..
:~
r';
: J..;':
.-.~.
'.1
-,
'
..
OJ
,j
~
-,
r.
'~1 ~."
r ;
,',
'
,.
..
t.
.;
"
j,
. l:
t"
a~_,_
....
t "
'v '
-",
"
"
5-47
TM 5-l'300/NAVFAC!'P-397/AFR' 88-22
..SPE.CIAL .CONSIDERATIONS, :.COLJlcF,ORMED STEEL, PANE:I<S
5-34. Blast Resistant Design of Cold-Formed Steel Panels

:.
5 -34.1. .General
'.
'J
. -: .
"
..
,!
~.
.,' .(
Recent studies on cold-formed panels have shown that the effective width
relationships for cold-formed light gauge elements under dynamic loading do
not differ significantly from the static relationships. Consequently, the
recommendations presently contained in the AISI Specifications are used as the
basis for establishing the special provisions needed for the design of coldformed panels subjected to blast loads. Some of the formulas of the Specification have been extended to comply with ultimate load condit1ons and'to'
permit limited performance in the inelastic range.

Two main modes of failure can be recognized, one governed by bending and the
other by shear. In the case of continuous members , the interaction of the two
influences plays a major role in determining the behavior .and the' ultimate
capacity. Due to the relatively thin webs encountered in cold-formed members,
special attention must also be paid to crippling,problems. Basically. the
design will be dictated by the capacity in flexure but subject to the constraints imposed by shear resistance and local stability.
5-34.2. Resistance in Flexure
The material properties of the steel used in the production of cold-formed
steel panels conforms to ASTM A446. This ~candard covers three grades (a, b,
and c) depending on theyield point. Most commonly; panels are made of steel
complying with the requirements of grade a, with a minimum yield point of 33
ksi and an elongation of rupture of 20 percent for a 2-inch gauge length.
However, it is generally known that the yield stress of the material used in
the manufacture of cold-formed panels generally exceeds the specified minimum
yield stress by a significant margin; therefore, it is recommended that a
design mini~um yield stress of 40 ksi (corresponding to an average strength
increase factor of a - 1.21) be used unless th~ actual yield stress of the
material is known. For grades band c 'which exhibit higher minimum yield
points, an average strength increase .factor of 1.21 is also recommended.
In calculating the dynamic yield stress of cold-formed steel panels, it is
recommended that a dynamic increase f actor , c , of 1.1 be 'applied irrespective
of actual strain rate and, consequently, the value of the dynamic design
stress to be'used is
a x c x f y - 1.21 x 1.1 x f y - 1.33 f y
5-26
and hence, f ds equals 44 ksi for the particular case of f y - 33 ksi.

Ultimate design procedures, combined with the effective width concept, are
used in evaluating the strength of cold-formed light gauge elements. Thus, a
characteristic feature of cold-formed elements is the variation of their
section properties with the intensity of the load. As the load increases
beyond the level corresponoing to the occurrence of local buckling, the
effective area of the compression flange is reduced; as a result, the neutral
axis moves toward the tension flange with the effective properties of the
cross section such as A (area), I (moment of inertia) and S (section modulus),
5-48
' "
,
TK 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
decreasing with load increase.' The properties of the panels, as' t';bulated, by
the manufacturer, are related to different stress levels. The value' ~f S '
r~ferred to that of the effective s~c~ion,modulus at ultim~te and theyalue of
I related to a service stress level of 20 ksi. Ln tihe case of panels fabricated from hat sect:lons and a flat'sh~et, two' sectio~ ';'odulii'are tabulated,
s+ and S-, referring to the effective section modulus for positive and
negative moments, respectively. Consequently, the following ultimate moment
capacities are obtained:
i
~p -
ds
S+
,
5-27
. ~ '.I
~n '- fdsS'
where
'.
5-28
~p
ultimate posi'tive Dioment capacity for a I-foot width of

panel
~n -,
ultimate negative moment capacIty for a I-foot width of

panel
It should be noted that in cases where tabulated section properties are not
available, the 'required properties may be calculated based upon the relationships in the AISI Design Specification.
As for any single-span flexural element, the panel may be subjected to
different end conditions, either si;'ply supported or fixe'd. The fixed- fixed
condition is seldom found in practice since this situation is difficult to
achieve in actual installat10ns. ' The simply fixed' condition is found because
of symmetry in each span of a two-span continuous panel. For multi-span
members (three or more), the 'response is governed by that of the first span
which is generally characterized by a simply supported condition'at one
support and a partial moment restraint at the other. Three typical ca~es can"
therefore, be considered:'
"
(1)
Simply supported at both ends (single' span),
(2)
Simply supported at one end and fixed 'at 'the other (two equal span
contin~ous member).
(3)
Simply supported at one end and partially fixed at the other

(first span of an equally spaced multi-span element).
The resistance o the pan:l is a function of both the strength of the section
and the maximum moment in the member.
"
The ability of ,the panel to sustain yielding of its cross section produces
significant moment re-distribution 'in the'contihuous member'which' results in
an increase of the resist~nce of. the panel.
The behavior of cold" formed steel sections' in flexure is nonlinear as shown in
Figure 5-12. 'To s Imulat;e the bi.linea~ app roxfmat.t on to the resist,u;cedeflection curve, a factor of 0.9 is applied' to'the peak resistance. Therefore, for
design purposes, the recommended 'resistance formula for a simply supported,
single-span panel is given by: "
'
0.9 x 8
~p/L
2'
- 7.2
~p/L
5-49
i.
5-29
1M 5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
where r u is the resistance per, unit lengtp of, panel, and L is the clear or
effective span"length .
.'
The recommended resi~t'ance' formula for a' simply-fixed, .single-span panel or

fi!"st span of anI equally spaced, continuous panel i~ gfven 'b:r
;~:9 x.4 (Mun + 2~p)/L2 '". 3.6' (~n + 2~p)/L2
r u ;.
'5-30
5-34.3. Equivalent Elastic Deflection

As previously mentioned, the behavior of cold-formed sections in flexure is
nonlinear as shown in Figure 5-12. A bilinear approximation of the resistance-deflection curve is assumed for design. The equivalent elastic deflection XE ~s obtain~d by using the f~llowing equationi
,
5-31
where
is a constant which depends on the support conditions and whose values
are as follows:
B
0.0130 for a simply suppori:~ci element
B - 0.0062 for simply fixed or continuous elements

20 is defined es the effective moment; 'of, i,',ertia of the section at a service
stress of 20 ksi. Th~ value of 1 20 is generally tabulated as a section
property of the panel. The value 9f r u is obtained from Equation 5-29 or 530
'
1
'.,
5-34.4. Design foi Flexure'
t-
!<ben perfor~ing a 'one-degree-of-freedom

properties of the equivalent system can
factor, KLM - 0.74, which is an aver~ge
t i cns .
The na tura I period of vibration
system is thus obtained by substituting
analysis of the'panel's behavior, ,the

be evaluated by using a load-mass
value applicable to all support condifor' the equivalent single-degree'
in~o Equation 5-15:
TN = 2" (0.74 mL/KE)1/2

where
m -
5-32
~/g is the unit m~ss of ~he panel,

ruL/X E .is the equivalent elastic stiffness of the system
,
'
5-34.5. Recommended Ductility Ratios

Figure 5-12 illust~ates the nonlinear character of the resistance-deflection,
curve and the recommended bilinear approximation. The initial slope of the
actual curve is fairly linear until it enters a range of marked nonlinearity
and, finally, a point of instability, ,However, excessive def Lec t.Lons ,cause,
the decking to act as a membrane in tension (solid' curve) and, consequently, a
certain level of stability sets in. It should be noted that, in,order tu use,
the procedure outlined ,in this section~ care must be taken to adequately
connect the ends of the decking so' that it' can achieve the desired level of
t
eric Lorr-memb r ane action.
ed in Section
5~8.
A d~_~(".ussi._')n :,F c r nne ct.o r s at; er.. d panels is r::esentWhen t:ensi.on-mer:,brar:,::, .act
, I on .Ls not p re senr , increased
5-50,
TK' 5-l300fNAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
deflection will result in a significant dropoff.in resistance as illustrated

by the dott~d curve in Figure 5-12.
Two limits of deformation are assigned, depending on, end-anchorage condition
of the panel'. For panels having nominal end anchorage, that is, where
tension-membrane action is minimal, the maximum deflection of the pane L is X o '
as illustrated in Figure 5-12, and is defined by:
"
5-33
.. -,
,.
For pane Ls with sufficient' end anchorage to 'permi't tension-membrane action,
the 'maximum deflectioh of the panel is Xm,'as'illustratediri Figure 5-12, and"
is defined by:
'
' ...
.,
5-34.6. Recommended Support Rotations

In order to restrict the magnitude of rotation at,the supports, limitations
are placed on the maximum deflections X o . and Xm as follows,:
For elements where,tension-membrane'act10n is not present:
!
,~
"Xo ~ 1;/92 or 9 max' -,1. 25 'degrees'
For elements where' tension-membrane 'action is present:

.:
-',~ ,- L/92
... -,', or
5-34': 7, Rebound
~
9ma~
"
~. "
'
- 4'~egrees
5-36
~,
"
:
.' .!
.,
':"~
.' f
"
,'
,
r.,
'
'
Appropriate dynamic response charts for one-degree-of-freedom systems in the,
elastic or elasto-plastic range under various dynamic'loads are given 'in
Chapter 3. The problem of rebound should be considered in the design of
decking due' to' the different section properties of the'panel, depending' on
whether the hat section or the rlat sheet is'incompression. Figure' 5-13
presents the maximum elastic resistance in rebound as a function of T/T N:
While the behavior of the panel in rebound does not often control, the'
de s Lgne r should be aware of 'the' problem;', in any" event, there is a need for
providing connections capable 'of resisting uplift' or pull-out forces due' to
load reversal in rebound.
'
" ,
.'
5-34.8, Resistance in Shear

Webs with hit in excess of 60 are in common use among co Ldv f orme'd members' and
the fabricatio~~process'makes it impra~tical to'use' stiffeners. The desfgn
web stresses must', therefore, be limited to ensure adequate stability without'
the aid of stiffeners, thereby preventing premature local web failure and the'
accompanying loss of load-c&rrying capacity.
,
The possibility of web buckling due to bending stresses exists and the
critical bending s t re ss Ls ~~ve~: by Equation 5-'37: '
fer ~. 640,OOO/(h/t)2 ~
'
..
!y
,
5-51
5-37
TM5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

By equating f c r to 32 ksi, which is a stress close to the yielding of the
material, a value hit - 141 is obtained. Since it is known that.webs do not
actually fail at these theoretical buckling stresses due to the development of
post-buckling strength, it can be safely assumed that webs with hit ~ 150 will
not be susceptible to flexural,buckling. Moreover, since the AISI recommendations prescribe a limit of hit - 150 for unstiffened webs,_ this type of web
instability need not be considered inthe design.
Panels are generally manufactured in geometrical proportions which preclude
web-shear problems when used for recommended spans and minimum support-bearing
lengths of 2 to,3 inches. In blast design, however,.becausE!'of the greater
intensity of the. loading, ,t~eincrease in required flexural resistance of ~he
panels requires shorter spans.
In most cases, the shear capacity of a web is dictated by instability due to
either
(1)
(2)
Simple shear stresses

Combined bending,and shearing stresses
For the case of simple shear stresses, as encountered at e~d supports, it is
important to distinguish three ranges ,of behavior depending on the magnitude

of hit. For large values of hit, the maximum shear stress is dictated by
elastic buckling in shear and for intermediate hit values, the inelastic buckling of the web governs; whereas for very small values of hit, local buckling
will not occur and failure will be caused by yielding produced by' shear
stresses. This point is illustrated in Figure 5-14 for f ds - 44 ksi. The
provisions of the AISI Specification in this area are based on:a safety factor
ranging from 1.44 to 1.67 depending upon hit. For blast-resistant design, the
recommended design stresses for simple shear are based on an extension of the'
AISI provisions to comply with ultimate load conditions. The specific'
equations for use ;n design for f ds - 44, 66 and 88 ksi are summarized in
Tables 5-5a, 5-6a, and,5-7a, respectively.
At the interior supports of continuous panels, high bending moments combined
with large shear-forces are pres~nt, and webs must ,be checked for buckling due
to these forces. The interaction formula presented in the AISI Specification
is given in terms of the, allowable, stresses rather than critical stresses
which produce buckling. In order to adapt this interaction formula to ultimate load conditions, the problem of inelastic buckling und~r combined
.
stresses has been considered in the development of the rec9mmended design
data.
In' order to minimize the amount and complexity of design,calculations, the
allowable dynamic'des~gn shear stresses at the interior support of a continuo!'s member have ,been computed for different depth-thickness ratios for 'f ds
- 44, 66', and 88 ksi',' and tabulated in Tables 5-5b, 5-6b, and S-7b, respec-
tively. .
'.
5-34.9. Web Crippling
In addi.tio~' to shear problems, concentrated loads" or reactions at panel supports, applied over relatively short lengths, can produce load intensities
that can cripple unstiffened thin webs. The problem of web crippling'is
rather complicated for theoretical analysis because it involves the following:
5-52
TM'5-1300/NAVFAC.P C397/AFR 88-22
e,
Nonuniform stress ,distribution under tlieapp1ied load and the

adjacent portions of the web
(1)
. ,
";.",
,"I'
",,::.
3~.:",
_ ..0
....
.r,......
'_Jh-
".
'-~',J.
J f'
-'(2)" . Elastic' and inelastic' stability. of;'the web' element' .'"

(3)
Local yielding ,in the intermediate region of'load application
(4)
The bending produced by the eccentric load (or reaction) when it

is applied on the bearing flange at a distance beyond the curved
transition of the web
The AISI recommendations have been developed by relating extensive'experimental data to service loads with a safety factor of 2.2 which was established
taking into account the scatter in the data. For blast design of cold-formed
panels, it is recon~ended that the AISI values be multiplied by a factor of
1. 50 in order to re,late the crippling loads to ultimate conditions with
sufficient provisions for scatter in test data.
For those sections that.provide a high degree of restraint against rotation of
their webs, the u1t:imate crippling loads are given as follows:
Allowable ultimate end support reaction
' 0.558 (N/t) 1/2 ]
Qu - 1.5 fdst 2
[4.44,+
5-38
Allowable ultimate interior support reaction

Qu - 1. 5 f:ds t 2 [6.66 + 1.446 (N/t)1/2]
where
Qu
f ds
5-39
ultimate support reaction

dynamic design stress
N-
bearing length (in. )
web thickness (in)
The charts in figures 5-15 and 5-16 present the variation of Qu as a function
, of the web, thickness for bearing lengths from 1 to 5 inches for fds - 44 ksi
for end and interior supports, respectively. It should be noted that the
values reported in the charts relate to one web ~n1y, the total ultimate
reaction being obtained by multiplying.Q u by the number of webs in the panel.
For design, the maximum shear forces and dynamic reactions are computed as a
function of the maximum resistance in, flexure. The ultimate load-carrying
capacity of the webs of the panel must then be compared with these forces. As
a general comment, the shear capacity is controlled for simply supported
elements and by the allowable design shear stresses at the, interior supports
for continuous panels.
In addition, it can be shown that the resistance in shear governs only in
cases of relatively very short spans, If a design is controlled by shear
resistance, it is recommended that another panel be selected since a flexural
failure mode is generally preferred.
5-35
Summary ,of Deformation Criteria for Structural ,Elements
Deformation criteria are summarized in Table 5-8 for frames, beams and other
structural ele~ents including cold-formed steel panels,open-web joists,and
plates,
('
"
-". ~
"
';;',
'
.)
'-,
'I'
-",
,.
"
"-. ~
;"
"v
. . '-:1:.
,. ' .;f
.~
.,
~.'>
"
5-54
.\
.e
, .
~.
-::-
'.
;"
. ' , . . 0'
STIFFNESS . .
CORRESPONDING
10 120 '
-,
,,
,',.
/ .
.
.
, P.EAK RESISTANCE:
.'
"
WITH TENSIONMEMBRANE
ILl
o
Z
<l
,.'
I-
en
en
,.
ILl
a:
"
WITHOUT "TENSION - MEMBRANE

.'
'.................
"
-r-
,.,
DEFLECTION
-,
,.,.
,-.
Figure 5-12
Resistance-deflection curve for a typical

cold-fonned section
5-55
h ..
lc
:.;,
I.OO~
t
tt;,
,P~T
. IH- .:+l
z
:::>
o
m
-:::
i=
~
...J
ILl
II::
fr
...,
...
'"
ILl
U
.1 ; ! '.I.
IT""" ,
':"I'~'
1Il
f3
ItH+#I uuuuu f
J'" ....
ILl
11:.
Xm
IH
f~rnt~, tlH
i-r
fl= 1.0
-t
.40
.1 . i.I.;;IL .
"":::1:';:1:':1::::
,;
.d',I;
IJ-= 1.25
tttH-1 tli
~c~
' ,I', ,tl...I. I,j,.,I... ,/..
., ".W~
'illllilllJ.ill .
. .,.
'ViE, ;...,.. " . . ".
..
1 .. 1 '..1
..' ! I""""
....,
_; ..;I
!t~~
.' :
t.. 'lc".
...... 1+ ...
'.
I;
IJ-= I. 75
.+l-l
d:
. I ..li; .. I.".
1J-=3.0
,.,.=6.0
,..l
.l;.
i.u
.'....Lt"..=r:';
. W...;.:.~1Hlhti'.
".,
.....,
::I::r:::I:~J:~2J8; +-r:-:
tnt tin ,
-t A"'~ ":1"'r :~;+t~)i.fHtt
l....
.I!'.:I..
.,,,
,4:::r::: 1;;:I':f~!'1~tt'~.
0.4
-i--+-:.....j... - ~._ ...:.. .;..;..;.t

,
'.
t,
"
I'
"
1,,Ilili
0.6 0.8 1.0
2.0
4.0
20
6.0 8.0 10
T
Tn
- .
~
'40
.- .
..
60
"
Figure 5-13
uu: .
.
." Ii;]:
. '..I.JI..... ;
11:
o
~
:::>
o
I
I
RESISTANCE - DEFLECTION
,,
... I+: :1~;:~"'l~"~"

". ;~:--FEi::::I I't,
.60
XE
,.
, I
-t-
't>
:t
PRESSURE - TI~E
Elasti c rebound of single-degree-of-rreedom system
.. '
:3 5
,
,..
._.~
..
:3 ~
YIELDING IN SHEAR
i
I
00
I,
2r
i
I
I
-,
~;'O'
hit
I
" " " 1.07x"10
10
'COMBINED BENDING 6 SHEAR
I
I
I
I
o
I
I
Figure 5-14
40
60
~hlt)Z
I .
' .1
; I
20
5'
1--~
:
"
.1
I
I
INELASTIC I ELASTIC BUCKLING SHEAR

BUCKLING
I,
0.50 fds
....
80
!
"
I 0
-------
.
120
Allowable dynamic (design) shear stresses for webs

of cold-formed members (f ds - 44 ks r)
5-57
18
-N=5
-N=4
16
N=3
,.
~.
VI
Q.
14
..
:0: ' .
.'
.
12
.
,
a:::
....
Q.
10
"
....
a:::
8
,
..
'& W
W
,,
IlJ II
llf)
II vii
WI 'I
'/j
h 1/'
V
!J 1//
IPh V
. z
I-
I
IjIJ
'I I N=2
'lII -N =I
I.'
2
I
,04
.08
.12
SHEET THICKNESS (IN.)
.16
.20
Figure 5-15 Haxim\ID end support reaction Cor cold-Col'lled steel

sections (C os ~ 44 .ks L)
.
5 -58,
..
36
-N=5
.. .
.t 'N=4
.\
32
II
VI,
28
( /)
-"
.. '_ ,r. ~ ..'
:lO:
24
lD
II::
ILl
l1.
20
"J;/ II
hIf/ I
0
I-
16
1$II
ILl
II::
~
!JVI /
12
VI
~ 'l"1
~V
~~
~ '1/ /
..
-N ::;3.
f vI, -N=2
II 1// N=I
If! VI
"
e,
'
'l
.04
';08
.12
.16
.20
SHEET THICKNESS (tN.)

.\,'
'("~,
.,;.;.
t'
Figure 5-16 Maximum interiorsuppart reaetion for cold-formed

steel sections (f ds 44 kst)
TK 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

Table 5-5
Dynamic Design Shear

44 ksi)
~tress
for Webs of Cold-formed Members (f ds'-
(a) Simple Shear

(hit) S
57
f dv ~ 0.50 f ds S 22.0 ksi
57 hit) S
83
f dv :- 1.26 x.10 31 (hIt)
83 <. (hit), S 150
f dv - 1. 07 x 10 51 (hit)
(b) Combined Bending and Shear

f dv (ksi)
(hit)
10.94
10.84
10.72
10.57 .
10.42
10.22
9.94
9.62
9.00
8.25
7.43
20
30
40
50
60
70
. 80
90
100
110
120
.! ..
<.
5-60
TN 5 21300!NAVFAC Po397/AFR.88~22
Table '5-6.
Dynamic Design' Shear Stress for \lebs of

66 ksi)
Co1d-f6rmed'~Members
(a) Simple Shear
.f
(h/t) S
47
47 < (hIt) S
67
67 < (hit) S 150
f dv - 0.50 f ds ,S 33 ksi
f dv - 1.54 x 10 3/(h/t)
f dv - 1.07 x 105/(h/t)
,".'
rr.
.~
fdv(kid)
(h/t)
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
120
,..
16.41
16.23
16.02
15.75
15.00
14.20
13.00
11.75
10.40
8.75
7.43
,.
, .
(f ds
=.
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC
Table 5-7.
P-3~7/AFR
88-22
Dynamic Design.Shear Stress for Webs of Cold-formed Hembers'

88 ksi)
(fd~'
",0,
(a) Simple Shear

(hit) S
41
f dv - 0.50 fds S 44-ksi
41 < (hit) S
58
f dv - 1.78 x
10 3/(h/t)
_f dv - 1. 07 x 105/(h/t)
58 < (hit) S 150

(hit)
fdv(ksi)
-20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
120
21.60
21.00
- 20.00
18.80
17.50
16.00
14.30
12.50
10.75
8.84
7.43-
5-62
TK 5-l300I.NAVFAC.P-397/AFR 88-22
Table
~-8'
. Summary of Deformation ,Criteria
Highest level
of Protection
(Category No.) Additional
.*
Specifications
Element
Beams, purlins,
spandrels or
girts
..
Deformation
Maximum
Type **
Deformation
2
10
I!-'
...
12
20
'I!
Frame
structures
Cold-formed
steel floor and
wall panels
..
Without tensionmembrane ,action
I!
With tension-
membrane action
I!
, .'
1
Open-web
joists
H/25
2
a t
a
1. 25
1. 75
S .,
a
I!
a
1
I!
a
2
.a
-**
t
2
4
I!
Joists controlled by
, maximum end reaction
Plates
I!
1
1:
2
10'
12
20
maximum member end rotation (degrees) measured from the

chord joining the member ends . . .
o-
relative sidesway deflection between stories.
story height.
I! -
ductility. ratio (Xm/XE)'
as defined in Chapter.l.
whichever governs.
individual frame member.
5-63
TH' 5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22'
SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS; BLAST DOORS

5-36. Blast Door Design
5-36.1. General
..
~;,
This section outlines procedures for the 'design of steel blast doors.
Analytical procedures for.the design of the individual elements' of the blast
door plate have been pre senced in earlier sections of this chapter.
In
addition to the door plate, door frames and anchorage, reversal bolts; gaskets
and door operators are discussed.
Blast doors are categorized by their .
functional requirements and method of opening.

5-36.2. Functions and Methods of Opening
5~36.2.l.
Functional Requirements
Blast doors may be designed to contain an accidental explosion from within a

structure so as to prevent pressure and fireball leakage and fragment
propaga,
.
tion. Blast doors may also be designed to protect personnel and/or equipment ,
from the effects of external blast-loads. In' this case, a limited amount of
blast pressures may be permitted to leak into the protected area. In most
cases, blast doors may be designed to protect the contents of a structure,
thereby negating propagation when explosives are contained within the shelter. !
j
5-36.2.2. Method of'Opening

Blast doors may be grouped based on their method of opening, such as: (a)
single leaf, (b) double leaf, (c) vertical lift, ,and (d) horizontal-sliding.
5-36.3. Design Considerations
5-36.3.1. General
The design of' a blast door is intrinsically related' to i-ts function during
and/or after an explosion. Design considerations include whether or not the
door should sustain permanent deflections, whether rebound mechanisms or
fragment protection is required, and whether pressure leakage be tolerated.
Finally; the design pressure range may dictate the type of door construction
that is to be used, including solid steel plate or built-up doors.
5-36.3.2: Deflections
As stated in Section 5-16.7, plates can sustain a support rotation of 12
degrees without failing. This is applicable' to blast doors providing that the
resulting plate deflection does not collapse the door by pushing it, through
the opening. However, deflections may have t o z be 'limited if 'the mechanism
used to open the door after an explosion is required to function." In addition, if a blast door is designed with a gasket so as to fully or nearly
contain the pressure and fireball effects of an explosion, then deflections
should be limited in order to ensure satisfactory performance of the gasket.
5-64
TH 5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22.
5-36.3.3. Rebound Mechanisms

Steel doors will be subjected to relatively large stress reversals caused. by
rebound. Blast doors may have to transfer these reversal loads by means of
retracting' pins or "reversal bolts." These heads can be, mounted on any edge ,;
(sides ,top, 'or bottom) of a doo rp Lace> Reversal bolts can be designed as an
integral part of the panic hardware assembly. or, if .tapered, they can' be,
utilized in compressing the gasket around a periphery. The magnitude of the
rebound force acting on the blast doors is.discussed later.
5-36.3.4. Fragment Protection
A plate-type blast. door, or the plat'e(s) .of a built-up blast door, may be s Lzed
to prevent fragment penetration. 'However, when the blast door is subjected to
large blast loads and fragments, a supplementary fragment shield may be necessary since the combined effects of the fragments and pressures may cause
premature door failure due to the notching effects produced by the fragments.
Procedures ,for predicting the characteristics of primary fragments such as
impact, velocity, and s Lz e of fragment are presented in Chap t e r 2. Methods
for determining the depth of penetration of fragments into'steel are given in
Section 5-49.
.'.
5-36.3.5. Leakage Protection (gaskets)
Blast doors may be designed to partly ,or fully contain the pressure and
fireball effects of an explosion in which case gaskets may' have to be.utilized
around the edge if a door or its opening. A sample of a glisket is illustrated
in Figure 5-17. This gasket will have to be compressed by means of a hydraulic operator which is capable of overcoming a force of 125 pounds per linear
inch of the gasket. This gasket is made of neoprene conforming to the
material callouts in Note 2 of Figure 5-17.
5-36.3.6. Type of Construction
Blast doors are formed from either solid steel plate or built-up steel
construction.
Solid steel plate doors .are usually used for the high pressure ranges (50 psi
or greater) and where the.'door span is relatively short. Depending on plate
thicknesses, these doors may be used when fragment impact is critical. These
plates can range in thickness of I-inch or greater. For thick plates, connections using high strength bolts or socket head cap screws are recommended in
lieu of welding. However, the use of bolts or screws must preclude the
passage of leakage pressures into or, out of the structure depending on its
use.
Built-up doors are used usually for the low pressure range and where long
spans are encountered.' ,A typical built-up blast door may consist of a
peripheral frame made from steel channels with horizontal channels serving as
intermediate supports for .the .interior and/or exterior s t e eL cover plates.
The pressure loads must be transferred to the channels via the. plate.
Concrete or some other material may be placed between the plates in order to
add mass to the door or increase its fragment resistance capabilities.
5-65
5-36.4. Examples of Blast Door Designs

5-36.4.1. General
In order to "Ll.Lus t ra t e the relationship between the function of a blast door
and its design considerations, four examples are presented'in the following
section.' Table 5-9 lists the design requirements of each of the above door
examples.
5-36.4.2. Door Type A (Figure 5-18)
This blast door is designed to protect personnel and equipment from external
blast pressures resulting from an accidental explosion. The door opening
measures 8-feet high by 8-feet wide. It is a built-up double-leaf door
consisting primarily of an exterior plate and a thinner interior plate both
welded to a grid formed by steel tubes. Support rotations of each element
(plate, channel, tube) have been limited to 2 degrees in order to assure
successful operation of the panic hardware at the door interior.' The direct
blast 'load is transferred from the exterior plate to tubular members which
form the door ,grid. The grid then transfers the loads to the'door frame at
the center of the opening through a set of pins attached to the top and bottom'
of the center mullions of the grid, At the exterior, the loads are transferred to the frame through the hinges which are attached to the exterior
mullions and the frame. The reversal loads are also transferred by the pins
and by the,built-up door hinges. The center pins are also operated by the
panic hardware assembly.
5-36.4.3. Door Type'B (Figure 5-19)
This blast door is designed to prevent propagation from an accidental explosion into an explosives storage area. It is a built-up, sliding door
protecting an opening II-feet high by 16-feet wide, consisting of an exterior
plate and a thinner interior plate. These plates are welded to'vertical Sshapes which are spaced at IS-inch intervals. This door is designed to act as
a one-way member, spanning vertically. Since flange buckling of the S-shapes
is prohibited in the presence of the outer and inner plates acting as braces,
the composite beam-plate arrangement is designed for a support rotation of 12
degrees.. The yield capacity of the webs of theS-shapes in shear (EquatIon 516) ,as well as web crippling (Section 5-25), had to be considered in the
design. This door has not been designed to resist reversal or rebound forces.
5,-36.4.4. Door Type C (Figure 5-20)
This single-leaf blast door is designed as part of a containment cell which 'is
used in the repeated testing of explosives. The door opening measures 4-feet
6-inches wide by 7-feet 6-inches high. It is the only door, in these samples,
designed elastically since it is subjected to repeated blast loads. It
consists primarily of a thick steel door plate protected from test fragments
by a mild steel fragment shield. It is designed as a simply-supported (four
sides) plate for direct internal loads and as a one-way element spanning the
door width for rebound loads. It is'equipped with a neoprene gasket around
the periphery (Figure 5-17) as well as a series of six 'reversal 'bolts designed
to transfer the rebound-load into the door frame. The large thickness of ,the
door plate warrants the use of high-strength, socket head cap screws in lieu
5-66
of welding to connect the plate to the reversal bolt housing as well.as to the
fragment shield.
.r ,
5-36.4.5. Door Type D (Figure 5-21)

This single;-leaf blast door is designed as part of a containment structure
which is used to protect nearby personnel andstructures in the event of. an ,
accidental explosion. The door opening measures4-feet wide by 7-feet high.
It is designed .as simply-supported on four sides for direct load and 'as a oneway element spanning the door width for rebound loads. It is equipped with a.
neoprene gasket around the periphery and a series of six reversal bolts which
transfer the rebound load to the door frame. The reversal bolt housing and
bearing blocks are welded to the door plate. Excessive deflections of the
door plate under blast loading would hamper the sealing capacity of the
gasket. Consequently, the door plate design rotation is limited' to:2 degrees'.
5-36.4;6. Other
Type~
of Doors
Another type of blast door design is a steel arch or "bow" door: The tension
arch door requires'compression ties to develop the compression reactions from
the arch. The compression arch door requires tension members to develop the
tension reactions from the arch. These-doors are illustrated in Figure 5-42.
5-36.5. Blast Door Rebound
Plate or element rebound can be determined for a single-degree-of-freedom
system subjected toa triangular pulse (see Figure 5-13). However, when a
system is subjected to a bilinear load, only a rigorous, step-by-step dynamic
analysis. can determine the percentage of elastic rebound. In lieu of.a
rigorous analysis, a method of'determining the upper bound on the rebound
force is presented here.
Three possible rebound scenarios are discussed. Figure 5-22 is helpful in
describing each case.
(a)
;
..
Case I - Gas load not present (Pgas -0). In this .case, the"
required rebound resistance is ootained from Figure 5-13.
I
(b)
Case II - t m S t i In this case, the required rebound resistance

is again obtained from Figure 5-10. This procedure, however, can
overestimate. the rebound load.
(c)
Case III - ~ > ti Figure 5-22 illustrates the case whereby the
time t? reach the peak response, .tm, is greater than the point
where the gas load begins to act (t i). Assuming that the gas
pressure can be considered constant over a period of time, it will
act to lower the required rebound resistance since the resistance
time curve will oscillate about the gas pressure time. curve. In
this case, the upper bound for the required rebound resistance is:
5-40
r - r u - Pga s
However, in all three cases, it is recommended that the required rebound

tesistance be at least equal to 50 percent of the peak positive door response.
5-67
5-36.6. Methods of Design

5-36.6.1. General
Techniques used for the design of two types of blast doors will be demonstrated. The first technique is used for the door illustrated in Figure 5-18 while
the second is used for the door shown in Figure 5-21. Detailed procedures for
the design of plate 'and beam elements, as well as the related design criteria,
are presented in earlier section of this chapter and numerical examples are
presented in Appendix A.
5-36.6.2. Built-up Door
The built-up steel ,door shown in Figure 5-18 is constructed by welding the
steel plates to the steel tubular grid (fillet welded to the exterior plate
and plug-welded to the interior plate). The heavy exterior plate is designed
as a continuous mem~er supported by the tubes. The horizontal tubes, in turn,
are designed as simply supported members, transferring load to the vertical
tubes. The interior tubes are also designed as simply supported elements
which transfer the direct and rebound loads 'to the pins while the side tubes
transfer the direct load to the door frame proper and rebound loads to the
hinges. The exterior tubes are also designed as simply supported elements
with the supports located at the hinges:
5-36.6.3. Solid Steel Plate Door
The steel plate of the blast door shown in Figure 5-21 is initially 'sized for
blast pressures since no high speed fragments will be generated in the
facilit~The plate is sized for blast loading, considering the plate to be
simply supported on four edges. The direct load is transferred to the four
sides of the door frame. In rebound, the plate acts as a simple beam spanning
the width of the door opening. The rebound force is transferred to the six
reversal bolts and then into the door frame. The door frame, as illustrated
in Figure 5-19, consists of two units; the first unit is imbedded into the
concrete and the second unit is attached to the first one. This arrangement
allows the first frame to be installed in the concrete wall prior to the
fabrication of the door. After the door construction is completed, the
sub frame is attached to the embedded frame and, thus, the door installation is
completed.
..
5-68
CONTINUOUS GASKET
(SHOWN COMPRESSED)
0;
7/8 "
hit.. GASKET,a
I, - DOOR FRI.\ME
\
r-11t..
"
SURFACE OF
DOOR GROOVE
"
BLAST
DOOR
.,/1
,~
.1 :
'.,
DOOR
OPENING
J...-'--DOOR
FRAME
. GASKET>'
DOOR. GROOVE
'.
'"o
'"
'"
DETAIL
(TYPICAL AROUND
PERIPHERY OF DOOR)
I :Z'~=
1
~OT
,
!;
1"
NOTES FOR GROOVE a GASKET

I. ALL SURFACES OF DOOR GROOVE SHALL BE MACHINED
TO 125 MICROINCHES AND SHALL NOT BE PAINTED.
VULCANIZE
2.
GASKETS FOR ALL DOORS SHALL t-lEET THE SPECIFICATION.REQUIREMENTS AS PER ASTM 02000-770
AND AS INDICATED INTHE"'FOLLOWING LINE CALL OUT;
2BC 520 AI4 BI4 CI2 F17.
.
3.
THE FORCE REQUIRED TO'CLOSEDOOR IS APPROXIMATELY, 125

P,OUNDS PER L'INEAR. INCH
OF GASKET.
.
.,
'
"
GASKET SPLICE
,;
Figure 5-17
Gasket det atI for blast door
r-----
a'-d'
'.' ,
BLAST
LOAD ..
<I.
r-
-1 t
I I
~-
HINGE
-l
1 r-
J-!wl~
I======.:J
iI
- ---r------
I I
1
1-
eli- DOOR
DETAIL
1====-'9
I
l-
@Y~-
I I
t=-===---=i 1=====1 L
I.!---@ I - .J-@
I: ~
--j
-ll==-==d
I
I
--, -
1==_===1
l-
~
B
-<;>
.--/
00
SECTION
1=====1 F=-==l lI _
I I
- I _I .... B
I
Bf"" - --i11=-=== =j' I=-!:;==~ fT~I
HINGE
! I~
_.J
,_!+~
--.1__
i:'oj
;
I 1-
B-B
"1
'"
....qo
'~"
L_
,
:;~""
..
--
--
INTERIOR DOOR ELEVATION
-,
-'
DETAIL
SECTION _A-A
LEGEND:
0-_CHANNEL'
C9~ MECHANICAL
_,(~y ~
".
~ -~STRUCTU~AL,TUBE
"
EXTERIOR PLATE
0-
INTERIOR PLATE
(9-
PINS FOR LOAD TRANSFER

AND PANIC HARDWARE
Figure 5-18
REINFORCING BAR
STIFFENER PLATE
~ BENT DOOR F,RAME PLATE
CD -
ANCHOR
PANIC HARDWARE
&lilt-up double-leaf blast door with rr-aae buil t

into concrete
.'.
~
, ...
., ,:.
,
;.'
"'~"'"
.:
<1
,II
""
,,",,---
,,
,'
'~
I~'
-::------ - - - - "
I '
'",
....-.J
'a
- :.'u'-11
b.
'/
-:
,.<,.'
L--., _:!~6'~'0'"
.'
II
I
I ",.
""
0'
DETAIL
.. ':1
""
LOAD
f5<t
f ' BL~S/
SECTION
,.
r.ll.J
J'
-I
I
. '.
:I'
",
"
,I
<,
:.~~
>//
.:
'
.:,,
.INTERIOR It
A""-.PLUG WELD
\
EXTERIOR It-:l
,..
EXTERIOR FACE OF SLIDING DOOR

. "
DETAIL
"
"
~igure
5-19
Horizontal sliding blast door
SIO
'.
1
_
61~
-1
BLAST
.. LOAD
7D
-,
,
,
I
I
, I
I
,-
cD
-r<-'
---..<=11=11-11 :
'",
...
....
,
SECTION
LEGEND:
(~}
CD
...
~-
ELEVATlON-'OF B-tAST DOO'R' ,- ,

'.4,
'r
~,,,
.'\
.:'~ t
Figure 5-20
-. .:
HINGE
REVERSAL' BOLT HOUSING
CROSS ... SECTION) ':
CONTINUOUS GASKET
fH\ _REVERSAL BOLT (CIRCULAR
SOCKET - HEAD CAP"SCREWS
G)-ROD TOmCKING
.c~Y-!"ILD
0,
.
0-
STEEL FRAGMENT SHIELD
THICK BLAST-DOORP'LATE
MECHANI~M
0-GAGE METAL COVER,PLATE
~600R
FRAME STIFFENER It
,
DOOR FRAME
r:
., " '
Single-leaf blast door with Crapent shield (very

high pressure)
4 1_0"
.u..
:- .,
)-
10'
:!
,...
01
)-
I
I
'~il,
F'
' I~f@
G
(<i.~,
~7::'
'"
'I
I"
"
'%:
<s::
' "" !I
tI
I~
B'LAST
LOAD
'SECTION
I
I
&: k *'
I
'!-:--
Ifl
--'
.....
II
L
oilo
'
LEGEND:
L.J
i"ir
J..
@-
STEEL FRAME'EMBEDDED IN CONCRETE,
- CONTINUOUS GASKET
...!l
@@-
ELEVATION OF BLAST DOOR
BEARING'BLOCK
BLAST DOORPLATE
- DOOR HINGE
- REVERSAL BOLT HOUSING
- REVERSAL BOLT
@-
BAR CONNECTED TO CLOSURE' MECHANISM
CD - STEEL FRAME EQUIPPED WITH ,eiU\ST DOOR

0- LIGHT GAGECOVER PLATE
Figure 5-21
,'f,'
<7
"
,-
- "'=. I~
'",
'l
-I
~;,
,.....,
I'
:'
.u
}
"
Single-leaf blast door (high pressure)
%..)II ~..
.6 .. ...
v ',
.
LOAD-TIME
P
LOAD
RESISTANCE - TIME
7"
.J.
TIME
,~
P
= PEAK LOAD
PIlOS = GAS PRESSURE
ru
ti
tm
=
=
=
=
PEAK PO,SITIVE RESPONSE

REQUIRED REBOUND RESISTANCE
TIME AT WHICH SHOCK AND GAS LOADS INTERSECT
TIME TO REACH MAXIMUM RESPONSE
'.
~.
Figure 5-22
.'
Bilinear blast load and single-degree-of-freedoo

response for determining rebound resistance
5-74'
TK 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
"<
,,'
",
, Table 5-9
Design Requirements for Sample Blast Do~rs'

~1
Door Description
:,
,"
5-18
Double-Leaf
5-19
Sliding
5-20
Single-Leaf
5-21
Sirigle~Le~f
.. '.
'
.- . ,
_._
Rebound
Fragment
Mechanisms Protection
Permanerrt;
Method
of
Op"ning
'
Design Requirements
Deflections
Door Figure
None Limited Large
Yes
.- -
.'
'
""
X
X
'X"' "
"
N.o '
Low
"
.1" ,
"
High
.,
,. ,
5-75
Yes
"
"
Required
No
"
-.
Protection
Level of
Leakage
TK 5-1300/NAVFAC'P-397/AFR,88-22 .
COLUMNS AND
BEAll COLUMNS
5-37. Plastic Design Criteria

5-37.1. General
The design criteria for columns and beam columns must account for their
behavior not only as individual members but also as members of the overall
frame structure.
Depending on the nature of the loading, several design cases
may be encountered. Listed below are the necessary equations for the dynamic
design of steel columns and beam columns.
5-37.2. In-plane Loads
In the plane of bending of compression members which would develop a plastic
hinge at ultimate loading, the slenderness ratio l/r shall not exceed the
constant (Cc) defined: as:
, Cc - (21r2E/fds)~/2
where,
modulus
~f
5-41
elasticity of steel (psi)
I
dynamic design
s~ress
(see Section 5-13)
The u1timat~ strength of an axially loaded compression member shall be taken

as:
5-42
where
A-
gross area of member,
(1 - (K1/r)2 'I
Fa -
2C c 2) f ds
5/3 + '3 (Kl/r) IBC c - (Kl/r) 3 I BC c 3 '
5-43
, and
largest effective slenderness ratio listed in Table'5-10 or

5-11
Kl/r -
5-37.3. Combined Axia1'Loads and Biaxial Bending

Members subject to combined axial load and biaxial bending moment should be
proportioned so as to satisfy the following set of interaction formulas:
P/Pu + Cmx~ 1(1 - P/Pex)Mmx + CmyMy 1(1 - P/Pey)~ S 1.0
P/Pp +
or
IMpx
where
~,
11.IBMpx +
11.IBMpy:S
r.o for P/Pp
0.15
+ ~ IMpy S 1.0 for P/Pp < 0.15
- maximum applied moments about the x- and y-axes
P - applied axial load'

Pex - 23/12AF'ex
5-76
5-44
5-45
5-46
TK
5-l300/NAV~AC
P-397/AFR,
88~22
23/l2Af'ey
F'ex
l2W2E/[23(Kl b/rx)2]
F'ey
l2W2E/[23(Klb~ry)2~
lb'-actual unbraced length in the plane' of bending,,:

r x' 'ry--~corresp~ri~ing radii of ' gyration
:P
P - Af d s
. ,"-
Cmx' C ,-,
\
.~Y
coefficients applied to bending term in' interaction

formula and dependent upon column curVature 'caused by
applied moments (AISC Specification, Section 1.6.1)
~x' ~y -
plastic bending capacities about x and y axes
moments that can be resisted by the member in the

absence of axial load.
For columns braced in the weak direction,
Kmx -
~x
and
~y
~Y'
When columns are unbraced in ,the weak direction:
Kmx -
[1.07
(l/r y) (f ds)1/2 /3160] ~x S ~x
5-47
~y
[1.07
(l/r x) (f ds)1/2 /3160] ~y S ~y
5-48
Subscripts x and y indicate the axis of bending 'about which a particular

design property applies. Also, columns may be considered braced in the weak
direction when the provisions of Section 5-26 are satisfied. In addition,
beam columns should also satisfy the requirements of Section 5-23,
5-38. Effective Length Ratios for Beam-columns
The basis for determining the effective lengths of beam columns for use in the
calculation of Pu' Pex' Kmx, and ~y in plastic design is outlined below.'
For plastically designed braced and unbraced planar frames which are supported
against displacement normal to their planes, the effective length ratios in
Tables 510 and 5-11 shall apply.
Table 5-10 corresponds to bending about the strong axis of a member, while
Table 5-11 corresponds to bending about the weak axis. Iri each case, 1 is the
distance between points of lateral support corresponding to r x or r y, as
applicable. The effective length factor, K, in the plane of bending shall be
governed by the provisions of Section 5-40.
For columns subjected to biaxial bending, the effective lengths given in
Tables 5-10 and 5-11 apply for bending about the respective axes, except that
Pu for unbraced frames shall be based on the larger of the ratios Kl/r x or
5-77
TH 5-1300/llAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
KI/r y. In addition, the larger of the slenderness ratios, l/r

not exceed Cc'
x or
~/ry'
shall
5-39. Effective Length Factor, K

In plastic design, it is usually sufficiently accurate to use the Kfactors
from Table CI.8.1 -of the AISC-Manual (reproduced here as Table 5-12) for the
condition closest to that in question rather than to refer to the alignment
chart (Figure C.l.8.2 of AISC Manual) . . It is permissible to -interpolate
between different conditions in Table 5-12 using engineering judgment. In
general, a design value of K equal to 1.5 is conservative for the columns of
unbraced frames when the base of the column is assumed pinned, since conventional column base details will',usually provide partial rotational,restraint
at the 'column base: For girders oLunbraced frames" a design K value of '0.75
is recommended . .1
')
- "
..
"
,
;
';
, \
"
..
.'
5-78
,,'
'.'
TH 5-l300/NAVFAC
Table
5-io,
,
.,
Braced Planar Frames*
One-and Two-Story
Unbraced Planar Frames*
.
'"
, ,
, Use la~ger ratio , l/r or Kl/r
x
y
"
Use larger ratio, l/r y or l/rx:
Pex
Use lir x
limx
Us,," l/ry
Table 5-11
,"
"
"Use Kl/r x
Use l/r y
Effective "Length Ratios fo. Beam Co Lumns (Flanges of members in

the plane of the f r'ame; 1. e , bending about the ,weak axis)
-
Use larger ratio', l/r y or l/r x
Pey Use l/r y
Use larger, ratio,
,-
Use Kl/r y
Use l/r x
~y Use l/r x
"
One- and Two-Story

Unbraced
. ' Planar Frarnes*
Braced P'l'anar Frarnes*

Pu
88-22
"Effective Length Ratios' for Beam ~olumris (Webs of members in the

plan~ of the frame"; Le"
bending about the strong axis)
,
Pu
P~397/AFR
l/r y shall not exceed Cc'
5-79
l/r x or Kl/r y
'"
"
Table 5-12
Effective Length Factors for
(a)
(b )
, ,,:,(.u
'~~
"
Buckled shape of
column is shown
by dashed line.
I
I
(e )
and Beam-columns
(d)
(e )
(f )
,, J", +
'J
~I
'
..
',~:a
\
,\
\
9
I
,f
I
\
Colum~
~::r
,f\
I
I
,I
I
/
'"1" "f
1-"
l'
91'
I.
I
I
I
,,
l-
I.
I
" iJl '.'
, It
"'?'r
Theoretical K value.
0.5 '
0.7
1.0
1.0
2.0
2.0
Recommended
design value when
ideal conditions
are approximated .
.
.
0.65.
,
0'.80
1.2
I. 0,
2.10
2.0
I"
Rotation fixed and translation fixed.
End condition code.
~,
~
'VfI'
9.
..
"
Rotation free
.~
and ' trunslctton fixed.
Rotation fixed and translation free.

Rotation free
5-80
and translation free. .' .

.
'.'
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
FRAME DESIGN
5-40. General
The dynamic plastic design of frames for blast resistant structures is' '.
oriented toward industrial building applications common to ammunition manufacturing and storage facilities, 1. e. , 'relatively low, single-story',' multi-bay
structures. This treatment applies principally to acceptor structures
subjected'to relatively low 'blast overpressures.
'
The design of blast resistant frames is characterized by (a) simultaneous

application 'of,vertical and horizontal pressure-time loadings with peak pressures considerably in excess of conventional loads, (b) design criteria
permitting inelastic local and overall dynamic structural deformations
(deflections and rotations), and (c) design requirements dictated by the
operational needs of the facility and the need for reusability with minor
repair work after an incident must be considered.
'
Rigid frame construction is recommended in the 'design of blast resistant
structures since this system provides open interior space 'comb i.ned with
substantial resistance to lateral forces.
In addition, this type of construc-
tion possesses inherent energy absorption capability due to
t~e
successive
development of plastic hinges up to the ultimate capacity of 'the structure.

However, where the interior since and wall opening requirements permit. it may
be as effective to provide bracing.

The particular objective in this section is to provide rational procedures for
efficiently performing the preliminary design of blast resistant frames.
Rigid frames 'as well as frames with s'!pplementary bracing "and with rigid-or
nonrigid connections are consider~d.. In both cas~s, preliminary dynamic load
factors are provided for establishing equivalent static loads for both the
local and overall 'frame mechanism>' .Bas ed upon the mechanism merhod , as
employed in static plastic design, e's t Imaees are made' for the 'required 'plastic
bending capacities as well as approximate values for the axial loads and .,'
shears in'the frame members~'
The dynamic: deflections 'and rotations iIl" the"
sidesway and local beam mechanism'modes are estimatedbased~upon single

degree-of freedom analyses. The design criteria and the procedures established for the design of individual members previously d i scus'sed apply for this
preliminary design procedure.
5-81
TH 5-l300/NAVFAC
P-397/AF~
88-22
5-41. Trial Design of Single-Story Rigid Frames

5-41.1. Collapse Mechanisms
General expressions for the possible collapse mechanism of si~gle-story rigid
frames are. presented in Table 5-13 for pinned and fixed base frames subjected
to combined vertical and horizontal blast loads.
The objective of this trial design is to proportion the fram~ members such
that the governing mechanism represents an economical solution. For a
particular frame, the ratio of horizontal to vertical peak loading denoted .by .
a is influenced by the horizontal frame plan of the structure and is det~r
mined as follows:
,
where
peak vertical load
qv
on
blast overpressure
o~
.'
'
rigid frame
peak horizontal ,load on

Pv
rig~d
frame
roof
..
reflected blast pressure on front wall

tributary width for vertical loading
bh
tributary width for horizontal loading
The orientation of the ~oof purl ins with respect to the blast load directions
are shown in Figure 5-23. The value of a will usually lie in the range from
about 1. 8 to 2.5 when the direction, of the ~last, load is perpendicular to ,the
roof purlins. In this case, the roof purlins are supported by the frame and
the t.ributary width is the same. for the ho r Lzorrta], .and vertical load. The
value of a is much higher when the direction .o f . the blast load is parallel to
the roof purlins. In this case, the 'roof,p";rlins 'are not.supported by the
girder of the frame.and the tributary width,of the vertical loading (b v - "
purl in spacing) is much smaller than the tr~butary width of the hori~ontal
loading (b h - frame spacing). "
It is assumed in this procedure that the plastic bending capacity of the roof
girder, ~, is constant for all bays. The capacity of ,the exterior and
interior columns are taken as. C~ and Cl~' .respectively. s ince the exterior
column is gellerally subjected to reflectea pressures, it is recolJl11lended that a
value of C greater than 1.0 be selected. In analyzing a given,frame with
certain member proper~ies, the controlling mechanism is the one with the
lowest resist.'ince . .In design, however,. the load is fixed and the required
design plastic moment is the largest ~ value obtained from all possible
mechanisms. For that purpose, C and Cl should be selected soas to minimize
the value of the maximum required ~ from among all possible mechanisms.
After a few trials, it will become obvious which choice of C and Cl tends to
minimize the largest value of ~.
5-82 ,
1M 5-l300/NAVFAC,P-397/AFR 88-22
~
; -'1
'5-41.2. Dynamic Deflections and,Rotations
It will normally be more economical to proportion the, memlieis so :that' the

controlling failure mechanism is:a combined mechanism rather 'thari'a beam,
mecbarri sm ,
The mechanism having' the least resistance constitutes' an accep-
table mode of failure provLded -ehac the .magni tudas of .'the, maximum deflections
and rotations do not exceed the maximum values recomnlended in Table'0-8.
"
. ~ :."~'"
5-41.3. Dyr(amic Load Factors
. ,
To obtain initial estimates of the required 'mechanism resistance, the 'dynamic

load factors listed 'in this section may be 'used to obtain equivalent' static'
loads for the indicated mechanisms, These load factors are necessarily
approximate and make no distinction for different end conditions. However,
they are expected to result in reasonable estimates ofthe required'resistance
for a trial design. Once the trial member sizes are established, then the
natural period and deflecti~n of th~ frame can lie calculated.
,'
It is, recommended that the DLF for a beam collapse mechanism be equal to 1.25
while that for a panel or combined collapse mechanism be equal to 0.625. ' The
DLF for a frame is lower than that for a beam mechanism, since the natural
period of vibration in the sidesway mode will normally be much greater than
the natural periods of vibration of the individual elements.
5-41.4. Loads in Frame Hembers
Estimates of the peak axial forces in the girders and the peak she'ars 'in the
columns are obtained from Figure 5-24. In applying the values of Figure 5-24,
the equivalent horizontal static load shall be computed using the dynamic load
factor for a panel or combined sidesway mechanism.
Preliminary values of the peak axial loads in the columns and the peak,shears
in the girders may be' computed by multiplying the equivalent vertical static
load by the roof tributary area. Since the axial' loads in the columns are due
to the reaction from the roof girders, the equivalent static vertical load
should be computed using the dynamic load factor for the beam mechanism.
..,w.'
5-41.5, Sizing of Frame Hembers ..',

,
.~ f
Each member in a frame under the<~ction of horizontal and vertical blast loa~s
is subjected to combined bending.moments and axial loads. However. the
phasing between critical values of the axial force and bending moment cannot
be established using a simplified analysis. Therefore, it is'recommended that
the peak axial loads and moments obtained from Figure 5-24 be assumed to act
concurrently 'for' the purpose of i:'iial'beam'-column design: The overall
resistance of the frame depends 'upon' the ultimate strength of 'the members
acting as beam-columns,
When an exterior frame of a building is positioned such that the shock front
is parallel to frame, the loadings on each end of the building are equal and
sideways action will only occur in the direction of the shock wave propaga-t.Lon, Frame action will also be in 'one direction, in the 'direction of the"
sidesway. If the -bLas t; wave impinges 0;'; a building from a' quartering direction, then the columns and girders in the' exterior frames are subj ecced to
biaxial bending due to the simultaneous loads'acting on the'various faces' of
5-83

the structure. This action will also cause sidesway in both directions of the
structure. The interior girders will usually be subjected to bending in one
direction only. However, interior columns may be subjected to either uniaxia~
or biaxial bending, depending upon the column connections to the girder
system -. Ln. such cases ,. the moments and forces can be calculated by analyzing
the respo~se of. the frame in eac~ direction and superimposing the respective
moments. and forces acting on the individual elements. This approach.is.
generally conservative since it assumes that the peak values of the forces in
one direction occur simultaneously' throughout the three-dimensionalstructure.
Having estimated the maximum values of the forces and, moments throughout the
frame, the preliminary sizing of the members can be performed using the
criteria previously, presented for beams and columns.
5-41.6. Stiffness and Deflection
The stiffness factor K for single-story rectangular frames subjected to
uniform horizontal loading is defined in Table 5-14. Considering an equivalent single degree-of-freedom system, the sidesway natural period of this
frame is
.'
5-50
where KL is a load factor that modifies K, the frame stiffness, due to a
uniform load, so that the product KKL is the equivalent stiffness due to a
unit load applied at the equivalent lumped mass me'
The load factor is given by
'KL - 0.55 (1 - 0.258)
5-51
where 8 is the base fixity factor and

and fixed base frames, respectively.
~s
equal to zero and one for 'pinned base
The equivalent mass me to be used in calculating the period of .a sidesway mode

consists of the total roof mass plus one_third of the column and wall masses.
Since all of these masses are considered to be concentrated at the roof level,
the mass factor, KM is equal to one.
The limiting resistance
Ru -
Ru
is givenpy
5-52
awH
where w.is equal to the equivalent static uniform load based on the dynamic
load factor for a panel or combined sid~sway mechanism.
The equivalent elastic deflection XE corresponding to
Ru
is
5-53
Knowing .the sidesway resistance Ru and the sidesway natural period of vibra-
tion Tn. the .ductility ratio (~) for the sidesway deflection of the frame can
be computed using the dynamic response charts (Chapter 3). The maximum
deflection ~ is then calculated from
5_84
TH' 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22'
5-54
~ - I-lXE
where
\.'
J-'~
'J
.',
1~
r-"
ductility r a t Lo-vLn
s Lde sway
'"f
JL -
5-.42'; Trial Design of Single-Story Frames with, Supplementary Bracing

5 - 42.1. General
Frames with supplementary bracing can consist 'of (a) rigid frames in one,
direction' and bracing .Ln- the other, direction .. ,(b) braced frames in two directions with rigid .connections, and vf c ) braced .f r ame s , in two directions with
pinned -cormec t Lons. .:Most braced . frames' utilize pinned connections '.'
':-,r\'."'~'
";,;,",,r-!'~'l.
..
,:j.,
'~'I,..
5-42,.2. :Coll~pse Mechanisms I
"
~
t,
.'
". J .
,5
The possible collapse mechanisms of single-story frames with diagonal tension

bracing (X-bracing) are presented 'in Tables 5-15 and 5-16 for pinned-base
frames with rigid and nonrigid girder-to-column connections, respectively. ,.,In
these tables, the cross sectional ,area of the tension brace is denoted by Ab,
the dynamic design stress for the b r'ac Lng member is f d s;' and the number of
_
braced' bays is' denoted 'by .tbe parameter, m..: In each,' c as'e , the ultimate
capacity of, the ..fraine !':ics~ expressed. in terms 'of the equivalent 'static load and
the member ultimate strength '(<:,ither Mp",or Abf ds)' In developing,'these
'
expressionSlin~the. tables," the_same~assumptions were made as for rigid frames,
Le., M., for the, roof girder is constant for all bays" the .bay width L is
constant, and .t.heico Lumn moment c apac Lcyj.coe f f Lc Lerrt; C is greater, than 1 .. 0. ,';
For rigid frames with tension bracing, it, is' necessary to vary C, Cl" and Ab
in order to achieve an economical design. When nonrigid girder-to column
connections are used, C and Cl drop out of the resistance functIon for the
sidesway mechanism and the area of the bracing can be calculated directly.
5-42.3. Bracing Ductility Ratio
,"
Tension brace members are not e~ttected to.remainelastic under the blast
loading. Therefore, it is necessary to determine if this yielding will be
excessive when, the system is permitted t~ deflect to the limits of the design
criteria previously given.
1-
T.
....'.,.,
1.
\.';i
The ductility r a t Lo i as soc La t ed-wf ch t'ensionyielding of the bracing, is defined

as the maximum strain in the,brace divided by its yield strain. Assuming
sma Lk rde f Le c t Lons I'and,neglecting axial deformations in the girders and
columns, the -ductility ratio is given by
"
5-55
where
. /J".'
."
0 ...-:
.
.~~q
,f: ~
j_t
'
ductility ratio
'
',.
'-,1-1
';-.
"'i.
..
.. ..
~
",
,,
"
'sidesway de f l.ec t Lon ;.. .Lnche's

_ 1":
"J
.1'
vertical angle between the bracing and a horizontal plane
-t
. -,"
5~85
TH.5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR
L -
88~22"
bay width, inches
From the deflection criteria, the sidesway deflection is limited to H/25.

ductility ratio can be expressed further as
The
5-42.4. Dynamic Load Factor

The dynamic load factors' Li s ced in Section 5-41.3 may also be used as a
rational starting point for a preliminary design of a braced frame.' In
general, the sidesway stiffness of braced frames is greater than.unbraced
frames and the corresponding panel or sidesway dynamic 'load factor may also be.
greater. However, since 'these dynamic loaa factors. are necessarily approxi- .
mate and serve only as a starting point.for a preliminary 'design, refinements
to these factors for frames with supplementary diagonal braces are not
warranted.
5-42.5. Loads in Frame Members
Estimates .of-the peak axialloads-in the girders' and the peak shears in the .
columns of a braced rigid frame are obtained from Figure 5-25. It should be'
noted that the shear in the blastward column and the axial load,in the
eX:terior girder are the same as, the' rigid frame shown in Figure '5-,24: The
shears in the interior columns V2 are.not affected by the braces while the
axial loads in the interior girders P are reduced by the horizontal components
of the force ~n the brace FH. If a bay is.not braced, then the value ofFH
must be.set equal to zero when calculating the' axial load in the girder of the
next braced bay. To avoid,an'error,' horizontal equilibriums~ould be'checked
using the formula:
_'
Ru where
Ru,
n
5-57
VI +nV2 + mFH
m'-
Hare
VI, V2 and F
defined in Figure 5-25 .
number of bays
number of braced bays
In addition. the value of ~ used in Figure 5-25 is simply the design plastic
moment obtained from the, controlling 'panel or combined mechanism. ,';
An e s tLma t e of, the peak loads for braced frames with nonrigid girder to column
connections may be obtained using Figure 5-25, .However. the.value of Mn must
be set equal to zero. For such cases, the entire horizontal load is taken by
the exterior column and bracing. There is no shear'force in the'interior
columns.
Preliminary values of the peak axial loads in the columns and the peak' shears
in the girders are obtained 'in the same manner as, rigid frames. However,in
computing the axial loads ,in the columns, the vertical components of the
forces in the tension braces must be added . to ..the vertical" shear in the roof
girders. The vertical component of the force in: the brace is given by
5-58
5-.86
TK
5-1300/N~VFAC
P-397/~FR
88-22
The reactions 'from the braces will also affect .the 'load on the foundation of
the frame; therefore, the design of the footings -must; include these Loads,
.
5-42.6. Stiffness and Deflection
The,equations for determining the sidesway natural period of vibration and the
deflection at yield for braced frames are similar to that of rigid frames.
The primary difference is the inclusion of the horizontal stiffness (Kb)
provided by tension bracing. The equations for the natural period and elastic
deflection are as f'o l.Lows t.
natural period of vibration
TN - 2" [me IKK L +
K~)11/2
5-59
and the equivalent elastic deflection is

't-7J:'
5-60
The horizontal stiffness of the tension bracing is given by
5-61
and other values have been defined previously.
It may be noted that for
braced frames with nonrigid girder-to-column connections, the
va~ue
of the
frame stiffness (K)'is equal to zero.
5-42.7. Slenderness Requirements for Diagonal Braces

The slenderness ratio of the bracing should be less than 300 to prevent vibration and "slapping". This design condition can be expressed as
5-62
where
minimum radius of gyration of the bracing member

length between points of support
Even though a compression brace is not considered effective in providing

resistance, the tension and. compression braces should be connected where they
cross.. In this manner, ~ for each brace' :>lay be taken equal to half of its
total length.
5-42.8. Sizing, of. Frame Members

Estimating the maximum forces and moments in frames with supplementary bracing
is similar to the procedures describ~d for rigid frames. However, the
procedure is slightly more involved'since it is necessary to assume a value
for the brace' area in addition to the assumptions for the coefficients C and
Cl. For frames with nonrigid connections, C and Cl do not appear in the
resistance formula for a sidesway mechanism and Ab'can be determi~ed directly.
In selecting a trial value of Ab for frames with rigid connections,the
minimum brace size is controlled by slenderness requirements. In addition, in
each particular application, there will be a limiting value of Ab beyond which
there will be no substantial weight savings in the frame'members since there

are-maximum slenderness requirements for the frame members. In general,
values"of Ab of about 2 square inches will result in a substantial~increase in
the overall resistance for frames with rigid connections. Hence, an assumed
brace area in this range is recommended as a starting point. Thei'design of
the beams and columns of the frames follow the procedures previously presented.
.,'
,~
I,
.'
"
'.
"
"I
..
5-88
,.
'.
ROOF
PURLIN
FRAME
/~
DIRECTION OF BLAST LOAD
PARALLEL TO ROOF PURL INS

( by> b h ) ,,'
WALL
GIRT
DIRECTION OF. BLAST LOAD

PERPENDICULAR TO ROOF
PURLINS ( by = b h )
. .
Figure'S-23
Orientation of roof purlins with'respect to blast load

direction 'for frame bl as t loadl11g
-.
.. ,}
Ru/4
Ru
Ru/8
3/8Ru
n=2
.
C' r
Ru / 4
3/4Ru
Rul2-Ru/2n
Ru / 2
.
Ru / 2 n
Ru / 2n
Ru 12n
.
Ru/2'
Ru/8
Ru/4
5/8R u
,r
Ru/ 2n
Ru/5
3/10Ru
Ru / 2n
3/20Ru
n =I
4/5R u
n=2
Ru/5
Ru/3
2/3Ru
7/10R u
Ru13 - Rul3n
Ru/ 3n
Rul3n
3/20Ru
3I2ORu
Ru/ 3n
Ru/3n
Ru/ 3n
. n = NUMBER OF BAYS
Ru = awH = EQUIVALENT HORIZONTAL STATIC LOAD
Figure 5-24
Estimates of peak sneans .and axial loads in rigid

frame", due to horizontal 'loads
5-90
.
PI
Ru
'.
P2
..
,P3.,
....t:>.c,
~~
VI
V2
,
, :,
..
'Ru ".
VI,
PI "
P2 "
"
fH'
awH
Ru /2.i' Mp / H
Ru /~. - Mp / H ~
PI - V2 - FH
FH Abfds cos r
FV Ab fds sin r
V2 . 'Ru/2n::- Mp/nH
P3 " P2-V2- FH
Pn ,. P(n-I)'-V2 - FH'
,
\
-.-
"
Figure 5-25
,"
Estimates of peak shears and axial loads in braced

frames due to horizontal loads
5-91
Table 5-13
Collapse Mechanisms for Rigid Frames with Fixed and

Pinned Bases
PLASTIC
COLLAPSE MECHANISM
MOMENT M"
PINNED BASES
FIXED BASES
16
16
BEAM MECHANISM
BEAM MECHANISM
! ! 7
70- 7 )
awH
awH 2
4(2C+1)
4(3C+I)
awH
PANEL MECHANISM
3;;0
-2- 0 "'27+7:
( n"'-"il""C:-,-
I+(n-I)C,+C
'C,22'
(C,<ZI*
awH
I .
--0
PANEL MECHAN ISM
4~
w
-0
2(n+C)+{n-I)C,
(C'~21*
aH
+2 l
2(2n+C)+(n-I)C,
COMBINED MECHANISM
50)
I I ?
3 awH.
8
COMBINED MECHANISM
.rrr:
COMBINED MECHANISM
3
C+(2n-T)
COMBINED MECHANISM
I , , I
awl
I 1-1-
Iii Ii' , Iii i
MP
!CMp
IC'MP
I..
i- [3aH2 + (n- il LZ]
[3aH +(n - I)L ]
, , , ,
'7.1:I: I:I ~ 1:
1_
5
.( n-I ) -+
C, (2n-3)
-C+
222
.1
i :- -;;. .1,2,3
NUMBER OF B AYS
,
r
.'UNIFORM
EQUIVELENT
STATIC LOAD
111 FOR CI 2
HINGES FORM IN THE GIRDERS AND COLUMNS AT iNTERIOR JOINTS.
5-92
".1 '
'
,,;;1
Table 5-14
-.4
,.,,-
--
H3
.n = NUMBER OF BAYS
D = lea
...
'L
,,:
(0,75~6.~5{3) IH
...
'.
P " 'ASE,FIXITY FA';""t
",
lco.c~ .rIT(0.7-0.1 o)(n-l)l'
STIFFNES'S FACTOR' K =' E

,
Stit't'ness Factors t'or Single' s.tory .Multi-bay Rigid

Frames Subjected' to Unit'orm Horizontal Loading'
I~II. ",1 'I. 1---
, .
I.' L '~:'
.
lea =
AVERAGE COLl/MN MOMENT'

OF INERTIA= LIe l(n+l)
..
C2
D
{3= I. 0,
26.7
0,25 ,
"0,50
3,2.0,
"
1.00
37.3
..
.
{3~0.5~ {3=0
:14,9
3.06
4.65
17. 8
, ~,296
6.0~
.. VAI"UE,S OFC2 ARE APPROXIMATE FOR THIS {3

t , {3 =.1.0 FOR FIXED BASE,
=0.0 FOR HINGED' BASE
..
',.
,,;
"
~'
WHERE:' .
'E='MODU!2U'S OF ELASTICITY(PSi5 '
lea. lillIe = MOMENT OF INERTIA(IN:4)
H = HEIGHT (FEET)
L= BAY LENGTH(FEE1)
5-93
Table 5-15
Collapse Mechanisms for Rigid Frames with Supplementary

Bracing and Pinned Bases
PLASTIC
COLLAPSE MECHANISM
MOMENT
1[)1)1>1
wL
Mp
16
BEAM MECHANISM
2VC7V<1'
.
,
.awH
'
".
2
"
4(2C+I)
BEAM MECHANISM
"
PANEL MECHANISM
4awH2_ mAbfds Hcos

'4n
2n,
PANEL MECHANISM
4~
COMBINED MECHANISM
5avt/1/1
COMBINED MECHANISM
5~
2m
aawH -2'AbfdsHcosY
, C+
COMBINED MECHANISM
6~,
(~-
t)
(Co>2)*
[3aH+(n-IlLj-l}A
,
COMBINED MECHANISM
bfd s
Hcos
, C+(2n-"il
'i 11';\' I "8' " " , , 1'1' , '.1:t:l:1::I::l:1: 'm =NUMBER
aw
~ ~.1
<3
(J
it FOR
~f]'-T-
~ ~~o'" ~ ~~o'"
L
~~o'"
HI'
I..
,I
OF
BRACEDBAVS
n = NUMBER OF
BAYS = 1,2,3"
w' UNIFORM EQUIVAL~
ENT STATIC LOAD
Co = 2 HINGES FORM IN THE GIRDERS AND COLUMNS AT INTERIOR JOINTS,
5-94
., '
Table 5-16
Collapse Mechanisms for.. Frames wi th SuPPlementary

Bracing, Non'rigid 'Girde~to-Column Connections and
Pinned Bases
COLLAPSE
MECHANISM
I:.~
BEAM MECHANISM
EXTERIOR GIRDER
2.
.. FRAMING
TYPE
ULTIMATE CAPACITY
-.
Mp
. M~
Mp
..._'
~
= wI..: /s
= wL2/1~
= wL." /16
CD
M p = wL." 116
a0
3.:Vl/V1. Mp' awH
awH 2 -il
CDa@
2
Mp =
BEAM MECHANISM
0.
4(2C+ 1)
,
BLASTWARD COLUMN
..
.
Abfds = a w H 12m cosY
(Da
'~V[7J;7r'
2Mp
aw H
Abfds =
2mcosy mHccisy
PANEL MECHANISM
,
M p = wL."
....
BEAM MECHANISM
INTERIOR GIRDER
Is
'
5,VL7l77
.
AtJds
COMBINED MECHANISM
3 a wH _ (2C+I)Mp
mHcosy
GIRDER FRAMING TYPE: .
~
3
GIRDER CONTINUOUS OVER COLUMNS AND RIGIDLY

CONNECTED TO;E)(TERIOR COLUMNS ONLY
~
.I
.. Ii
,.
GIRDER SIMPLY SUPPORTED BETWEEN COLUMNS

GIRDER CONTINUOUS OVER COLUMNS .
0.'
= 4mcosy
'
'. '.W ..
,.
]-1-
Igl I" I. I I I I " " I 1.1 II)" 1,1 I" hZ7r%%%%
~MpP
.. ' .
.'
~fdl'
Abfdl,
L
.~.
.1'"
= NUMBER
I
I
.. =
OF
BRACED BAYS
UNIFORM
EQUIVALENT
. STATIC LOAD..
TK 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
'e
CONNECTIONS ..
5-43. General
The connect~ons in a steel structure designed in accordance with plastic
design concepts must fulfill their function up to the ultimate load capacity
of the structure. In order to allow the members to reach their full plastic
moments, the connections must be capable of transferring moments, shears and
axial loads with sufficient strength, proper stiffness and adequate rotation
capacity.
Connections must be designed with consideration of economical fabrication and
ease of erection.
~elds,
Connecting devices, may be rivets, bolts,
screws or
various combinations thereof.

5-44. Types of Connections
The various connection types generally encountered in steel structures can be
classified as primary member connections, secqndary member connections and
panel attachments. Primary member connections are corner frame, beam-tocolumn, beam-to-girder and ol.\!lIlnbase connections as'well as splices.
Secondary member connections are purlin-to-frame, girt-to-frame and bracing
connections. Panel attachments are roof-to-floor panel and wall siding
connections.
Primary member connections refer to those used in design and construction of

the framing of primary members. They generally involve the attachment of hotrolled sections to one another, either to create specific support conditions
or to achieve continuity of a member or the structure. In that respect,
connections used in framing may be classified' into' three groups, namely,
rigid, flexible (nonrigid) and semirigid, depending upon their degre~ of
restraint which is the ratio of the actual end moment that may be developed to
the end moment in a fully fixed-ended beam. Approximately, the degree of
restraint is generally considered as over 90 percent for rigid connections,
between 20 to 90 percent for semirigid connections and below 20 percent for
flexible connections.
'
It should be mentioned that the strength and'rotation characteristics of
semirigid connections are <jependent upon the_properties. of the .inter!JIediate
connection elements (angles, plates, .tees) and thus, are subj ect to much
variation. Since semirigid structural analyses are seldom undertaken due to
their great complexi~y, no further details on semirigid connections will be
given here.
,
Secondary member' connections are used to fasten members such as purlins, girts
or bracing members to the primary members of a frame, either directly or by
means of auxiliary sections such a.s angles .~nd tees ....
Basic requirements for primary and secondary member connections, as well as
general guidelines for proper design, are presented in Sections 5-45 and 5-46.
In addition, dynamic design stresses to be used in the selection and sizing of
fastening devices are given in Section 5-47.
Panel attachments are used to 'attach elements of the skin or outer shell of an
installation as well as floor and wall panels to the supporting skeleton.
5-96 '
TK 5-l300/NAVFAC
P-~9~/AFR 8~-22
Connections' of this type are distinguished by the fact that they. fasten r.elatively thin sheet materIal to one ano cher br to hea'(i~rroll;'d sections:' Roof
decks and wall siding,have to wi 7hstand d~ring their lifeti~7'~apart,from :,
accidental blast loads) exposure.to weather; uplift forces, buffeting and",
vibration due to winds: etc, For this reason, and'be~ause of their widespread
use, special ca~e should be ,taken ~n design to ,ensure their adequate behavior"
Some bas i,c requi'rements.'for pane l connections are :presented. in Sec t Lon 5-4~,
,
5-45 ..
".,
' _
, ,0
n
."
,.
.
.
,.
Requirements.f,or'Hain:Fr~mingConnections
The design requirements for frame connections may be'illu;tratep byconsid~r

ing the behavior of a typical corner connection as shown in Figure 5-26. Two
members are joined together without stiffening,of.the corner web. Assuming
that the web thi~kness is insufficient, the behavior ot the connection is .
represented by Curve I' which shows that yielding due to' shear f~rce' starts' 'at
a relatively low load. Even though the connection rotates, past the required
hinge r ot.ar Lon.. the plastic moment Hp. is not reached. In ' addition, the
elastic deformations are also larger than those assumed by the theoretical
design curve.
.
, .
. '",
,.
A second and different. connection m~y behave as indicated'by Curve, 2. ,
Althoughth~elastic stiffness is satisfactory and the maximum capacity
exceeds .~, the connection faIled before reaching'the required hinge rotation
and thus, is unsatisfactory.
,
These considerations indicate that 'connections must be designed for strength,

stiffness and'rotation capacity. They must transmit the raquired moment,
shear and axial load, a~d develop the plastic moment Hp of 'the members.
Normally, an examination of a connection t~ see 'if it meets the requirements
of stiffness will not be necessary. Co~pared to ~he tot~llength of the
member, the length'of the connection is small, and, if the connection is
slightly more flexible than the member which it joins, the general effect on
the structural. behavior is not great., Approximately, the ayerage unit
rotation of the connecting zone should not exceed, that of an equivalent length
of the. members being joined.
,.
~i'
Of equal dmpor t ance with the strength of the 'connection "is an adequate re~~rve
of ductility after the plastic moment ha~ been attained; Rotation,capacity at
plastic hinge locations is essential to the development of the full ultimate
load ,capacity of th~.structure.
5-46. De~ign of Co~nections
It is not the intent of this section to present, procedures, and equations for
the design of the various types of connections likely to be encountered in the
blast-resistant design of a steel structure. Instead, the considerations
necessary for a pr~per design' will be outlin~d.". . . After completion of the dynamic analysis of the structure", the members are
sized for rhe given load~.ngs. ,The ,moments~ shears, and axial loads at the
connections are known. Full recognition must be given to the consideration,of
rebound or stress r'eve r s a L. ill; designing the' connections'. Additionally, in
continuous structures, the maximum values of P, M, and
may not. occur
simultaneously and thus, several combinations may have to be considered.

5-97
With rigid connections' sucha~ .a'<cont Lnuous coiumn-girder.intersecti~n,ther

web area within the boundaries of the 'connection should meet the shear stress
requirements of SecEio~ '5-23.' If the web area'is unsatisfactory, diagonal
stiffeners or web' doubler 'plates should be provided.
- .
..:..
,'.
."
'
Stiffeners will normally 'be required to'prevent web cripPfin~ and prese7Ve,'
flang~ continuity wherever flange=to-flange connections occur at columns in a
continuous frame. Web crippling must also be checked at points of load
application such as beam-girder intersections.
,.
In these cases, the require-
ments of Section 5-25,of this chapter and Sections 1.10.5 and 1.10.10 of the
AISc' Spec'ificatic;n must be considered.
,>
."
'-
. '
, ,.
Since 'bolted 'joints will develop yield stresses only after slippage' of the
member s'<has 'oc'cur'red, the use of 'friction-type bolted' connec t I ons 'is not
recoInrnended.
.,
5-47. Dyna~ic'Design Stresses for Connections

In accordance with Section 2.8 of the
welds shall be proportioned to resist
to 1.7 times those given in Part 1 of
stresses are increased by the dynamic
12.2; hence,
AISC Specification, bolts, rivets and

the maximum forces using stresses equal
the Specification. Additionally, these
increase factor spe~ified i~ Section 55-63
where
fei -: the maximum dynamic de s'Lgn stress for connections

f
!.
the dynamic increase factor Figure 5-2 or Table 5-2)
c fs' - , '
the aliowable equivalent' static design'stress of the bolt;

rivet, or weld
'
Rather than compiling new tables for maximum dynamic loads' for 'the various
types of connections, the de~igrier will find it advantageous to divide toe',
forces being considered by the factor 1.7c and then to refer to the'allowabl~
load tables in Part 1 of the AISC Specification.
5-48. Requirements for Fioor and W~ll Panel Connections
Panel connections, in general, can be considered either'panel-to-panei connec_
tions, or panel-to-supporting-frame connections. The former type involves the
attachment of relatively light-gage materials to each other such that they act
together as an integral unit. The latter type is generally used to att~ch
sheet panels to heavier 'cross sections. j~
-,
. . ..; ., .
. ;,.
The most common'type of fastener for decking and, steel wali' panels is the'
self-tapping screw with or without washer. 'Even for conventional design' and
regular wind loading, the screw fasteners have often been the source of local
failure by 'tearing the ~heeting materiaL. It is evident that under blast
loading and particularly on rebound, screw connectors ,will be even 'more
vulnerable to this type of failure. ,Special care should be taken in design to
reduce the , probability of failure by using oversized washers-and/or increased
material thickness'at the connection itself.
5-98
TK 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

Due to the magnitude of forces involved, special types of connectors, as shown
in Figure 5-27, will usually be necessary. These may consist of self-piercing, self-tapping screws of larger diameters with oversized washers, puddle
welds or washer plug welds, threaded connectors fired into the elements to be
attached, or threaded studs, welded to the supporting members, which fasten
the panel by means of a special arrangement of bushing and nut.
Apart from fulfilling their function of cladding and load-resisting surfaces,
by carrying loads perpendicular to their surface, floor, roof and wall, steel
panels can, when adequately' connected, develop substantial resistance to inplane forces, acting as diaphragms contributing a great deal to the overall
stiffness and stability of the structure. As a result, decking connections
are, in many cases, subjected to a combination of shearing forces and pull-out
forces. It is to be remembered also that after the panel has deflected under
blast loading, the catenary action sustained by the flat sheet of the decking
represents an important reserve capacity against total collapse. To allow for
such catenary action to take place, connectors and especially end connectors
should be made strong enough to withstand the membrane forces that develop.
. 5-99
"
M
/
UNSTABLE
-
/REQUIRED M-
--T.,L...;.-.
.
"
II-I
CURVE
CD UNDERSTRENGTH
PERMISSIBLE HINGE
ROTATION
e
ROTATION
v~L)
ll===ll=====
-~M
v
Figure 5-26
Corner connection behavior

5-100
,
.'
'
OVERSIZE WASHER
....
.-",'
. LIGHT ,GAGE
'";I.fANE.L.
,,
'.
SUPPORT
MEMBER '.'
RAMSET TYPE FASTENER
SELF - TAPPING SCREW'

~,
, '....
.. - .
.1 '
..
CIRCULAR
.,
. !'
WASHER .
SECTION AA
PUDDLE WELDS
LIGHT GAGE
PANEL
~T
SECTION B-B
WASHER PLUG WELD
ATTACHMENT
STUD
'. SPACER BLOCK
OVERSIZE
WASHE
DETAIL.
SUPPORT
MEMBER
"'-'
Figure 5-27
THREADED NELSON TYPE STUDS
....
Typical connections for cold-formed $teel panels

5-101 .
TIl:
5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

FRAGMENT PENETRATION
5-49. Penetration of Fragments into Steel
. ..,
5-49.1. Failure' Mechanisms
In deriving a prediction equation for the penetration and perforation of steel

plates, it '1s important to recognize the failure mechanisms. The failure mode
of primary concern in mild to medium hard homogeneous steel plates subjected
to normal impact is ..d uctile failure. In this mode, as the missile penetrates
the plate, .pLas td ca.LLy deformed material is pushed 'aside and petals or lips
are formed on both the front and back faces with no material being ejected
from the plate. For plates with Brinell hardness values above 300, failure by
"plugging" is a strong possibility: In this br Lt t l.e' mode of ~ailure" a plug
of material is formed ahead of the penetrating missile and is ejected from the
back side of the plate. A third mode of failure is dI sk Lng or flaking; in
which circular disks or irregular flakes are thrown from the back face. This
type of failure is mainly a concern with plates of inferior quality steel and.
should not, therefore, be a commdn problem in the design of protective'
structures.
5..49.2. Primary Fragment Penetration Equations

In protective design involving primary fragments, a penetration equation. is
required which yields reliable estimates corresponding to t~e st~ndard primary
fragment illustrated in figure 4-77 of Chapter 4. These design equations
consider only normal penetration which is critical for the design of protective structures. These equations apply to penetration into mild steel and are
conservative for plates with a Brinell hardness value above 150 .... Steel
penetration equations in design for primary fragment.impact are expressed in
the following forms:

For AP steel fragments penetrating mild steel plates,
x -
0.30 W 0:33 V 1.22

. f
5-64
and for mild steel fragments penetrating mild steel plates,

5-65
where
x
depth of penetration (in.)

fragment weight (oz.)
Vs
striking velocity of fragment (kfps)
Charts for steel penetration by'primary'fragmentsaccording to these equations

are presented in figures 5-28 and 5-29.
To estimate the penetration of metal fragments other than armor piercing, the
procedures outlined in Section 4-60.3 of Chapter 4 are entirely. applicable to
steel plates.
5-102
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
5-49.3. Residual Velocity After Perforation of
Ste~l
Plate
The'pe~etration equations presented in Sectio~:5:49.2 may be used for predicting the occurrence of perforation of metallic barriers and for calculating the
residual fragment ,velocity .after perforation.
.
For normal impact of a steel fragment, with. the shape illustrated in figure 477 of Chapter 4, the equation for .residual ve'locityis
,:,.
,.
5-66
residual velocity
where
Vs
striking' velocity
critical perforation velocity for the fragment.~f impacting
the plate of thickness t (see explanation below)
d -
diameter of cylindrical portion of f r agment; (in.), as illus. trated. in figure' 4-77 of 'Chapter 4'
The value of Vx is determined from Figure.S-28 or 5-29 by substit~ting the,

plate thickness t for the penetration depth x and reading the corresponding
value of striking, velocity , Vs " This striking velocity becomes the critical
perforation velocity, Vx ' A plot of the residual velocity equation for a.
range of t/d ratios is presented in Figure 5-30.
Multiple.plate penetration problems may be analyzed by.the successive application of Equations 5~64 or 5-65 for predicting the depth of penetration and
Equation 5-66 for- calculating the residual velocity upon perforation of the
plate. In addition, composite construction, consisting of concrete walls with
attached spall plates, can be analyzed for fragment impact by tracing the
motion of the fragment through each successive layer. The striking velocity
of the fragment upon each intermeqiate layer is the residual fragment velocity
after perforation of the previous layer. The conservative assumptions are
made that the fragment remains intact during the penetration and that it does
not'deviate from a straight line path as it crosses the interface between' the
different media.
.'.
5-103
.'
~ 1
10.0
7.0._~
"
5.0.~~
2.0
:r
l-
e.
1.0
I-
0::
I-
0.7
W
Z
W
e.
>C
,
- .1:4-:t-
0.3
'- '
~Ct-+--r--t--
NUMBERS NEXT TO
CURVES INDICATE
FRAGMENT: WEIGHT (OZ.)
0.2
0.1
Vs STRIKING
Figure 5-28
10
12
14
VELOCITY (FT. x 103/SEC.l
Steel penetration design chart - AP steel fragments

penetrating mild steel plate9
5-104-
10.0
;.
hf:ttttt:ttm-tti:t:rt1
t-
,.,'.': -WI =20.0
--
WI = 8.0
- Wf
+.
- -I'
WI=40.0
WI =30.0
...
6.0 r--'-"-r~r-'--'-i'-'-'--i-'-l
_..,
- WI = .4.0 '-'--~S-'c'-r.-'-'-'-f-':'-;-.:-j
.
Wf = 60.0
~:=:J:=':"l"---
2.0
-Wf =
1.0
3.0
2.0 -r-rt-rt-t
:I:
~Wf=
0.5
-Wf =
0.3
i.'.
--"i"::
:';':::F::-::
- +.
-
-Wf=
:c:'c- Fe::....
.cc.c::
- - .. .
l-
... ,.-
..,-- _.':::: t.::.::::-
.. : t : - . -
c,
UJ
0
l-
1.0
.'
e(
0:::
I-
UJ
UJ
e,
K
..
~-_.
-~
-.-,-------'.......
0.2
..
~.~
.... - .. -.--.
.
.
--
NUMBERS NEXT TO
CURVES INDICATE
+-- .-...'
..
,-_. FRAGMENT WEIGHT (OZ.)
~~.
-_. ---~ ..
~-_
--_.
:::;~~~:~~,::~::;:, ~~:~':~ ':::~:

~
--_._.
- .-.- '.-.. _.... -_..
. t - . '.
- . -
.:;;I;'{
. . .. . ...
-+'-'"
. __ ._._.- --'.---
-~
_~
. ':.::,.-
"'-""",
::x
10
Vs , STRIKING VELOCITY (FT.
14
103/SEC 1
,
Steel penetration design chart - .,
mild
steel fragments
.
penetratini mild steel plates
J
Figure 5-29
12
5-105
'~
1.0
fJtW.1
I
;
0.8
1111I I"
l" II! ! iii
!
iI !
I' .I1'1I:~ . II !I,I IIIt I, : I, I :I I!
I
1,1,
I I(
iH-,
11
f/cJ "':1
II t
If1'l
illflTf
0.6
"'H
,.!/cJ"'.75
...L.Ll. .
-!/d;/.5'
t/d"'2
t/d~3
0.2
tid; 5
0.2
I'
, t
t/d"'/.O
..
0..4
f/cJ"'.50
,~j
,I,
..
l-U
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
. VX/VS
Figur~
5-30
ResIdual fralllDent velocity upon perforation of

steel barriers
. :
'",
,
5-106
TK 5-l300/NAVFAC ,P-397/AFR 88-22

"
TYPICAL DETAILS
FOR BLAST-RESISTANT
STEEL STRUCTURES
,
, '
5-50. General
I.
'I
This section presents several examples of typical framing connections,

structural details and blast doors used in industrial installations designed
to resist accidental blast loadings. This section is intended to augme~t '
those details present~d i~ prior sections of t~is :hapter.
(
5-51. Steel Framed BUildings

Such buildings are often 'rectangular' in plan, \wo or three bays wide and four'
or more bays long. Figure 5-'31 shows, an example of a typ'ical' 'fr~i~g plan for
a s Lng'Lee s to ry bud Ldf.ng designed 'to~ re'sist ,a pre,ssure-time 'blast loading
impinging on,the,s'tr~cture at,an angle with respect to its .main axes. The
structural system consists of an orthogonalpetwork of rigid frames. The
girders of the frame~ running parallel to the building length serve also as
purlins and are pLaced , for
o'f erection, on top of the,
. .ease
.
. 'frames spanning
across the structure's width.
...
"
Figures 5-32 to ~,35 pre~e?t 'typical f~aming details rel~ted 'to,the g~neral
layout of Figure 5-31. .. As a rule, the 'columns' are fabric';'ted without splices,
the plate.,cov~rs
~and . 'conn~ct'ionplates
are shop w~lded to - the . columns,
.
.'
'.
-.
. a~d all
.
,~ .
' . )
"
girder to.co+um~ connections are field ~olte~. A channel,is, welded on top of

the frame girders to cover the bolted connections and prevent (avoid) interference with the roof decking. All of the framing connec t i.ons are designed to
minimize'stress concentrations and to avoid triaxial strains, 'They combine
ductility with ease 'of 'fabrication.
'
5-52. Cold-formed, Light Gage Steel Panels
Figure 5-36 sh~ws typical cross sections of cold-formed, light gage steel
panels commonly used in industrial installations. The closed sections, which
are composed of a corrugated hat section and a flat sheet, are used to resist
blast pressures in the low pressure range, whereas the open hat section is
recommended only for very low pressure situations as siding or roofing
material. A typical vertical section illustrates the attachment of the steel
paneling to the supporting members. Of particular interest is the detail at
the corner between the exterior wall and the roof; which is designed to
prevent peeling of the decking that may be caused by negative pressures at the
roof edge.
Figure 5-37 gives some typical arrangements of welded connections for attaching cold-formed steel panels to their supporting elements. Type A refers to
an intermediate support whereas Type B refers to an end support. , It is
recommended that the diameter of puddle welds be 3/4 of an inch minimum and
should not exceed 1-1/2 inches because of space limitations in the panel
valleys. For deeper panels, it is often necessary to provide two rows of
puddle welds at the intermediate supports in order to resist the uplift forces
in rebound. It should be noted that welds close to the hooked edge of the
panel are recommended to prevent lifting of adjacent panels.
Figure 5-38 shows an arrangement of bolted connections for the attachment of
cold-formed steel panels to the structural framing. The bolted connection
consists of: a threaded stud resistance welded to the supporting member, a
5-107 .. '
square steel block with a concentrrLc hold used' as"a spacer, and a washer and
nut for fastening. Figure 5-39 presents a cross section of that connection
with all the relevant details along with informat~onpertaining to puddle'
welds.
5-53. Blast Doors
Figures 5-40 and 5-41 show details of single~leaf and double-leaf blast doors,
respectively. Figure 5-40 presents a single-leaf door installed in a steel
structure. The design is typical of doors intended to resist relatively low
pressure levels. It is interesting to note that the door is furnished with
its tubing frame to ensure proper fabrication and to pzovdde adequate stiffness during erection. In Figure 5-41, the double-leaf door with its frame is
installed in place Rnd attached to the co~crete structure. in both figures
details of hinges; latches, anchors, and panic hardware are illustrated. It
should be noted that the pins at,the panic latch ends are made of aluminum in
order to eliminate the danger of sparking, a hazard ,in alnmunition facilities
which might arise from steel-on-steel striking;'
Figure 5-42 shows details of compression arch and tension arch doors. The
tension arch door requires compression ties to develop the compression
reactions for the arch and to prevent the door from being blo~ through the
opening. 'The compression arch door requi~es a ,tension 'tie plate'to develop
the reactions'and to prevent large distortions in the 'door that may bind it in
place.
'
r
'
, ,
,,
"
"
,"
'", ,'-.J
,~
5-108
,r;;;
....3_);ACES
",_._--
~'-O"--- ------
@17'---- 0"
-- -
'.
~,
0
--
;'.,
,'
! {,.W8XS8;-WI12.79
, :C"LUMN
"-'-',
- ' - H -""":'--:"--H
f?'i..A
-_' . . '''::
o
,
i~
O.
lD'
"
otl
~!?
I 10
~
0
o"
'"
~I.; ~
-+.
-~:
~@.
01/)'
-
')Ie:
IO~
"'otl
iH ,...
.. _..:...._-:_- H
..
,W
W 10.25
"
!!l
~--'-----I:.(
.
-_..
on":
",on
on
"
" " ."

0..0
:t
:t
:t
:t
!!!
!!!
". 2"
0" ..:tu
,+
I rW12.58
I J. C,OL.UMN
,.
,,3fp, INt COL..
W 10. 25
:t~
2"
g}
II", ,
10)
K'
0_ 'lD
3; !~
. H -"":""'_-':""'-H
STE EL' .PA NEL

TYF
2P!20
Q.
I/)
ton
..-
W 10 x 25
E~
~E
0)l_tc:-:-,,-===J:~~~===~=,=====1:f,_G
.,
COLUMN
ROOF'
PLAN
".
Figure 5-31
Typical. framing plan for a single-story blas.t-resistant

steel'structure
",
"
5-109
,~
C7
STEEL PANEL
ROOF DECK
x 9.B (CUT).
2- 3/4"; BOLTS
(TYP.)
I.
WI2 COL.
,'-
'3/ 8 "t 's
"
--'L--\I~-J.L ~ 4 7/B"p BOLTS
:.J '"
B
3/16
(TYP.)
'
SECTION A-A
3/8"
STEEL PANEL
ROOF DECK
SHIM-
-C4
31116
3/8"t
I!
'-~-2-3/4"; BOLTS
(TYP. )
4-7/8"; BOLTS-+-!
(TYP.)
'"u,
WI2 COL.
SECTION
Figure '5-32
B-B
Typical framing detail at

5-110',
interio~,Column 2-C
STEEL PANEL
ROOF OECK
C7
3/8" Il
1/4
W10 ~II-..-lIt
3/16
3/8" It.
C-C
SECTION
STEEL PANEL
ROOF DECK
C7l9',8(CUT)
'
. ;,
3/8" 'I.
SHIM
, WIO
WIO
?- 3/4" III BOLTS
3/B" It.
(TYP.):
W 12 COL,
SECTION
0-0
FigUre 5-33' Typical framing detail at end Col,umn l-C

5-111
STEEL PANEL
ROOF DECK
C7. 9.1 I CUT)
1/4
4-7/8" ~ 101,i-S--l-l
3/8"t
.'
.', SHIM
.I
318"t
WIO--+-~
2-3/4" _ BOLTS
.1
3/8" t
~F
SECTION
E- E
'\ .
, ... ',
STEEL PANEL
ROOF DECK
C4
SHIM-=j~~~~~::!:*!T~T~I!t~~r
3/1"i,-
WIO--.j....
2-3/4"_
.'J--WIO
..
3/I"t J ~
2.7/1"~~
BOLTS
..
~.:
..
Ii
. I'
SECTION
F.-F
FigUre 5-34: Typical framing detail at side ooll.llll1 2-D' .

5-112
' =-3/'' 160-''V',- STEEL PANEL

ROOF DECK
C7x9.B
(CUT)~
1/4
'
~
I
4-7/B"~ BOLTS ('typ')
--3/B"1l
SHIM
:1-
I~r==~~:+=~
3/16
3/B"Il'S
3/B"Il-
'w 12 COL.
SECTION
2-3/4"
BOLTS
lJ
G-G
STEEL PANEL
ROOF DECK -----,
C4
I
I
F==r'"'==a~;g, o!;;~ii"'~!
23I'l~~
3/16
BOLTS
4-7ft!" ~ BOl TS;-+.,
( TYP.)
II
II
SECTION.
Figure 5-35
H-H
Typical framing detail at corner Column I:-D

5-113
STEEL PANEL
CONNECTION
TYPE B
CONNECTION
TYPE A
CLOSURE L
TUBE
CONNECT.
TYPE B
J.
CHANNEL-
CHANNEL
STEEL
PANEL
CONNECT.
TYPE A
~
. .w&i
~~
. ,'ta" DEEP
PANEL
(OPEN SECTION)
3~;!
;i',"
~.
~~
I~" DEEP PANEL
(CLOSED SECTION)
. 2~.
, 57."
~~
~--+
~
3" DEEP PANEL
(!=LOSED SECTION)
~~~rt-CONNEC~
..
3+-t-f~
TYPE A
~ ~l
ANGLE
~~
~~r-'CONNEC~
.... '. ','
TYPE B
24
11
4'/2" DEEP PANEL

(CLOSED SECTION)
EXTERIOR VERTICAL SECTION
Figure 5-36
Typical. details for
TYPICAL STEEL PANELS
cold~formed.
5-114
light gage steel paneling
-,
3/4' iJ PUDDLE, WELDS
._.
--".. ----
~_.:.
,
-
- --
,--
--,
--
< ,,"
..
.. .
,
_- . - f- \-
'~
.,
--+r-f'.. '
..
I:-Q
, ., <0.
f--
- ..
1-- -
"
~- ..
PLAN, - WELDED CONNECTION. TYPES A a B
l...:..l::::J.._.l
C":"J 'iI-1:=' '.r=:l :,'

,I.
24" PANEL WIDTH' :--"
--~ ~t-
SECTION ., 1V2" STEEL PANEL
.'., 3/4" iJ PUDDLE WELDS FOR 20 GA~

I" iJ PUDDLE WELDS FOR 18 GA.
or ----
---
I .
~Ul-
.
:.. -_.~
+----H&+------
---f.l"+--+----f~+_-'-
'g;-
- -
--+--o-I---''---+-+-1f- i
-I'
t.
' , '.
3xWELD
0 IA. ~MIN.
3/4" MIN.
..v>......J.-L.J.-+
PLAN -WELDED CONNECTION TYPE A
----
- ._--_._-- L
I[
Ii
I~
---- -
1-
,-
.
.. - - -- y
. -.
.'
~-
---- I- - -
-e - - ,
,>
--- -.. -A
PLAN - WELDED CONNECTION TYPE B
~-'W_U_U_~4L13
I
I---l
24" PANEL WIDTH
SECTION - 3" STEEL PANEL
Figure 5-37
Typical welded connections for attachlni coid-rormed steel

panels to supporting members
.' . -;
5-115
".
,"" 1
THREADED WELDING STUDS
li;f - --
IL '
PLAN - aOLTED CONNECTION -TYPES Alia
'\t
~
I.
IS"
8"
~ ~
24" PANEL WIDTH
SECTION
Flgure 5-38
j-i
I}:i STEEL PANEL
BOLTED CONNECTION TYPES A&B
PLAN -
I.
12:~
~', THREADED WELDING STUDS, lOU.

~'1 T,HREADED WELDING STUDS, III GA.
'W
\1i
'24" PANEL WIDTH'
SECTION -
,12",
18"
"1
W ~~
.1
3" STEEL PANEL
Typloal ,bolted oonneotlons tor attaohln. oold-tol'llled ete.l

panele to s upportl ns 11811!bers
5-116
-+--r--\---r+
,
J
I
i
'"
'II ,~.
.
,
., ,
h~
.'
PLAN
lit
- SPACER I
I~" \fa"
WITH HOLE ~'.' I~I."
.
HOLE It! PANEL
.
~: I
WELDED
THREADED STUD
~VY HEX. NUT .
WASHER
3:' STEEL PANEL
1~::::i:::t:i'!:L (OVERSIZED)
SUPPORTING
MEMBER
SUPPORTING
MEMBER
r -,
SECTION
. '"
TYPICAL
SECTION
BOLTED CONNECTION
.,,'
"
-:.. '
. ,"
.+--+--~~--+
PUDDLE'WELD
sf; -," PUD~~E 'WE~D

STEEL FLAT
PANEL
WITH
SHEET
PLAN
. .
~.
..
.; PLAN
PUDDLE WELD
~.
. .
r. -
-~~",.~"lpllf~
SUPPORTING
MEMBER _
,"
~4
PUDDLE WELD
STEEL' PANEL
WITHOUT FLAT
SHEET
- SUPPORTING
MEMBER
TYPICAL WELDED CONNECTION
Figure 5-39
Det~hs of t'yJICal f'asteners for col'd-fof'llled steel panels
,.
tl
:;..
".
II
~
'..r
--'
---_ .....
'\
~
li4'CL~'~~~;;~r
1/2" STIFF. IL.
-===
3 16
TS5.3.375 .
1/4,
-N
HARDWARE
. PANIC
.
.
I.
4.3.3/B .
-'-'-v'...L"'"lt'-
.I,
LATCH I
-RELEASE U
- '11
I.
r-;
. I" ~ ALUM. PIN
3/8" R.-
BLDG.
FRAMING
.HOLE DIA. =
. PIN DIA. + 1/64"
~ .:-=.
Il
8'1~ .1/2"
. .A
,.
EXTERIOR
ELEVATION
SECTION
X-X
BLDG. FRAMING
TS 5.3 375
3/16
1/4
. HINGE
1/4
SEC'TlON
y~y
SECTION
Z- Z
nO
Figure 5-40
Single-leaf blast door il)sta11.ed.. in a flt.eel struoture

5-118 ,
-l!I' _
2
ANCHOR
BARS AT 12" nc,
~ CL.
"".,,," /2. . "\A
x "
., I
'0
'
-...- :
'1;'STlFF.t
I ~
1<.."
, ~2
'.
-.
, . I LATCH.
,
, RELEASE
, I
. -I
_u
:'.f!
::s"j __
',',
FIN. FL.
....
"'j-'
1'2II ALUM. PIN

~,--'-"~- PANIC HARDWARE
Ye" Jl
L 4"", 3"x 1;2"

I', ."
'
."
'~
:,.
I I
I
I
INACTIVE I ACTIVE
LEAF.
1
L;~~.F fJ,
I
.." "
.
-~r~~~'
'21~
I
.J
HOLE OIA.'
PIN OIA. + 1/64"
J
"u:..~
~~~
.... ..... ....
......
+1.'
X
' B"X
4"" 2
I"
, .LX
+ANCHORS
EXTERIOR ELEVATION
'~""
,
,
."
".
,-
.'.
,"
AOO'L 't4' _ x IB" LG,

ANCHOR AT BLOCK
SECTION X - X
'I; _ANCHOR'
BARS AT 12"O.C.
L4"X3"X't;~
l'
L~IIX3IlX~ .
I ....
;fa I<.
;' "
.\
SECTION
Y- Y
"..
FigUJ"e 5-41
Double-leaf blast door installed in a concrete structure

5-119
BLAST
I""
ABUTMENT LOCATION
COMPRESSION ARCH
:::?CE~~~D'ToO=R'F'T;='===9=:t=::s::::::l= ij~!:t:<=-':" "'t":- :HINGE
r----I
.' ..
.'
BEARING,
HOLDDOWN
BqLT
. .'
..
ANCHOR--/ .'
.t
-..
'.
.~
HORIZONTAL SECTION'
COMPRESSION ARCH
COMPRESSION TIE BAR
DOOR
BLAST
'J
, .
""_',' '," ""'.'
:. .
6"
,--
HORIZONTAL SECTION
TENSION ARCH DOOR
. .,
,
Figure 5-42
.I..O~.
'ANCHOR,
fb~I:::::::o=~=?~'~BEARING '~, " " "~o'
, '.
: :. .
.... 1),,- .
TENSION ARCH:,,, ",.,:'
HOLDDOWN BOLT
.'c, ,:: .,,'
-'
"
Compression-arch ,and tension-arch blast doors

, '
5-120
TN 5-1300/NAVlAC P-397/AFR88-22
APPENDIX 5A
ILLUSTRATIVE EXAHPLES
TH 5-1300/NAVFACP-397/AFR 88-22 "

This appendix presents detailed, design procedures and numerical 'examples on
the following topics:
1.
Flexural elements subjected to pressure-time loading,
2.
Lateral bracing requirements
3.
Cold-formed steel panels
4.
Columns and beam-columns
5.
.,
. Open-web joists
6.
Single-story 'rigid frames
7.
Blast doors
8.
Unsymmetrical bending
References are' made to the appropriate sections of this chapter and to charts,
tables, and equations.from Chapter 3 "Principles of Dynamic Analysis".
Problem SA-l 'Deaign of'Beama for Preaaure-Time Loeding
I
Problem:
Procedure:
Step 1.
Step 2.
Design of a purl in or girt as a flexural member which responds to

a pressure-time loading.
Establish the design parameters:
a.
Pressure-time load
b.
Design criteria: Maximum' support rotation, e, depending on

protection category.
c.
Span length, L, beam spacing, -b, and support conditions.
d:,
P,roperties and type of steel used, ':". f y alld E.
Determine the equivalent static load, w, using the following

preliminary dynamic load factors as discussed in Section 5-22.3.
1. 0 for e - 2'
DLF -
',0.5 fore - :12'
Step 3.
Using the appropriate resistance formula from Table 3-1and the

equivalent static load derived in Step 2,. determine. ~.
Step 4.
Select a member'size using equation 5-7 or 5-8. Check the local

buckling criteria of Section 5-24 for the member chosen.
"
5A-1
TN 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

Step 5.
Determine the mass, m, includi~g the weight of the decking over,a

distance center-to-center of purlins or girts, and. the weight of
the members.
Step 6.
Calculate the equivalent mass Me using Table 3-12 (Chapter 3).
Step 7. '
Determine the equivalent elastic' stiffness KE from Table 3.1.
Step 8.
Calculate the natural period of vibration. TN' using equation 515.
Step 9.
Determine the total resistance.Ru. and peak pressure ,load, P.

Enter appropriate chart in Section 3-19.3 with the ratios T/T N and
P/Ru and the values of Cl, and C2 in order to establish the
ductility ratio ~.
Step 10.
Check the assumed DIF used in Step 4. Enter the, response charts
with the ratio T/T N and ~ and to determinetE.Using,equation 51, determine the strain rate. Using figure 5-2, determine the DIF
and C. If there isa significant difference from t~at assumed.
repeat Steps 4 through 9.
Step 11.
Calculate the equivalent elastic deflection,XE as given by the

equation
and establish the maximum
deflection.~
,given.by
Compute the corresponding member end rotation.

with the criteria summarized in Section.5-35.
tan
e-
Compare
'.
Xm/(L/2)
Step 12.
Check for shear using equation 5-16 and Table 3-9.
Step 13.
If a different member size is required, repeat Steps 2 through 12

by selecting a new dynamic load factor.
Ezample SA-l
Required:
Step L,
Design of a Beam for Pressure-Time Loading
Design a simply supported beam for shear and flexure in a low

pressure range where personnel protection is required.
'-Given:".
a.
Pressure-time loading (Figure SA-l)
SA-2
b.
Criteria:
c.
Structural configuration (Figure 5A-l).
d.
f y - 36 ~si, -E - 30 x 10 3 ks~,. ,A36 steel
Personnel protection required.

limi ted to 2' .
Support rotation
. ,
..
>';"1.l
~J
.,
e . ' Compression flanged. braced.
v:
1.
,
17'
. ,spacing
2.
;:)
6.5 c,psi .
~,
en
11.I
a:
a.
40ms
'TIME
Beam configuration and/loading, Example.SA-l
the equivalent static ,load (i.e., required resistance).

For this pressure range, the equivalent static load is assumed
equal to ,the peak pressure'(Section '5-22.3)., The running load
becomes:
w - 1.0 x 6.5 x 4.5 x 144/1000 - 4.21 k/ft"
Determine required
wL2
~--
~;
-.
4.21 x 172
- - - - - 152.1 k-ft
(Table 3-1)
Step 4.
. a:en
" 'Determine
,.
Step 3.
b4.S'
Figure 5A-l
Step
11.I
,,
Select a member.
(S + Z)
- -- - - - - - - - - 2~
2 x 152.1 x 12
t,
(Equation 5-7)
"
where
fds - a x c x f y - 1.1 x 1.29 x 36 - 51.1 ksi
(Equation 5-2)
TK 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22'

'where'
a - 1.1 from Section 5-13.2
c - 1.29 corresponding to a DIF in the low
pressure range (see Table 5~2)
Select W12 x 26,
z
S+ Z
~
- 33.4 in3' "

- 37.2 in3
I' - 204 in4
70.6 in 3
- (70:6 x 51.1)/(2 x 12) - 150.3 k-ft
Check .Lccal. buckling cd teda.

(Equation 5-17)
d/tw - 53.1 < 412/(fy)1/2 - 68.7 O.K.

b f/2tf - 8.5
Step 5.
(Section 5-24)
O.K.
Calculate H.
wL '. [(4.5 x 4.8)'"+ 26] (17 x 10 6 )
- 25,130 (k-ms 2)/ft
H - --' - - - - - - - - - - - - -
32.2,
x 1000
~,
Step 6.
KLH' -
Step 8.
(Table 3-12)
(0.78 + 0.66)/2 - e.72 ..
He - 0.72 x 25,130 - 18,100 k-ms 2/ft

Step 7.
Calculate the effective mass,' He; for a response ,in the elastoplastic range.
-:
Determine KE .
384 EI
384 x 30 x 10 3 x 204
5L3
5 x 17 3 x 144
(Table 3-8) ,
Calculate TN'
TN - 2"(He/KE)1/2 - 2"(18,100/664)1/2
5A-4
(Equation 5-15)
TM.5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

Step 9.
Establish the ductility ratio
and compare with the criteria.
T/TN - 40/32.8 - 1.22 ..

6.5 x 17 x 4.5 x 144
.P - P x ~ x b - ---------,-~
71.6 kf.ps :
1000
~
P~
8~/L
- (8 x 150;3)/17 - 70.7 kips
71.6/70.7 - 1.01
From figure 3-64a,

~
- XmIXE- 2. 1
At this point, the designer would check lateral bracing requirements. Sample problem '5A-2 outlines this procedure.
Step 10.
Check the assumed DIF.

From Table 3-64a, for PfRu - 1.01 and.T/T N - 1.22.
tE - 0.24 x 40 - 9.6 ms
Find
E - fds/Est E - 51.1/30 x 10 3 x .0096 -0.177 in/in/sec
(Equation 5-1)
From figure 5-2

O.K .:
DIF - 1.31 - 1.29.

Step 11.
Determine XE: .
XE -
~/KE
- (70.7 x 12)/664 - 1.28 inch
.,
5A-5
TH 5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22 .

, Find Xm:
Xm -
~E
- 2.1 x 1.28 - 2.69 inches
Find end rotation, 9.

2.69/(8.5 x12) - 0.0264
tan 9 - Xm/(L/2)
e Step 12.
(Table 3-5)
."
1.52" < 2"
O.K.
Check shear.
Dynamic yield stress in shear
"
f dv - 0.55 f ds - 0.55 x 51.1 - 28.1 ksi
'
(Equation 5-4)
Ultimate shear capacity

Vp - f dv x
Aw -
'.
(Equation 5-16)
28.1 x 0.23 x 12,"" 77.6 kips
Maximum support shear
",
Vs - r u x L/2 -,Ru/2 - 70.7 /2
~35.4
kips
.""
.: (Table 3-9)
.'.t'<
Problem 5A-2
Problem:
Spacing of Lateral Bracing
Investigate the adequacy of the lateral bracing specified for a

flexural member.
'; ,
The design procedure for determining the maximum permissible
spacing of lateral bracing is essentially a trial, and error
procedure if the unbraced length is determined by the consideration of lateral torsional buckling only. However. in practical
design, the unbraced length is usually fixed by the spacing of
purl ins and girts and then must be investigated forelateral
,; ..
torsional buckling.
Procedure:
Step 1.

a.
Bending moment diagram obtained from a design analysis.
5A-6
Step
Step
~.
3.
Step 4.
b.
Unbreced length, l. and radius of gyration of the member,

r y about its weak axis,
c.
Dynamic design.strength, f ds'
d.
Design ductility ratio,
~.
(Section 5-l3)
from a design analysis.
From the momant diagram, find.tl\e end moment ratio, H,tM", for each
segment of the beam between points of bracing. (Note that the end
moment ratio is positive when the segment is bent in reverse
curvature and negstive when bent in single curvature).
Compute the maximum permissible unbraced length, lcr. using
equation 520 or 5-21, as applicable. Since the spacing of
.purlins and girts is usually uniform, the particular unbraced
length that must be investigated in a design will be the one with
the largest moment ratio. The spacing'of bracing.in.nonyielded
segments of a member should be checked against the requirements of
Section 1.5.1..4.5a of the AISC Specification (see Section 5-26.3).
The actual length of a segment being investigated should be less
than or equal to lcr'
Example5A c2
Spacing of Lateral Bracing
Required:
Investigate the unbraced lengths shown for the W10 x 39 beam in

figure 5A-2.
Step 1.
Given:
a.
Bending moment diagram shown in. figure 5A-2.
b.
Unbraced length (each segment)

ry
c.
Dynamic design stress - 51.1 ksi
d.
Design .ductility
ration,~
- 36 inches
- 1. 98 inches
- 5.
Step 2.
The moment ratio is -0.5 for segments BC and CD (single curvature)

and 0.5 for segments AB and DE (double curvature) .
Step 3.
Determine the maximum permissible unbraced length.

equation 5-21 results in the lower value of lcr'
.
'
."
5A-7
By inspection,
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
'.
36"
36"
36"
36"
-M p
-M p
A,E SUPPORTS
W10X39
A
B,C,D BRACING
LOCATIONS
Mp
Figure 5A-2
Bending moment diagram, Example 5A-2
From figure 5-9 for
Xm/xE - 5,
B-
, 1375 x '1. 98
lcr - - - - - - 1.36 x 51.1
Step 4.
Problem:
Design a Roof Deck as a Flexural Member which Responds

to Pressure-Time Loading
Design of cold-formed, light gauge steel panels. subjected to
pressure-time loading.
Establish the design parameters:

a.
b.
Pressure-time loading
Design criteria:
whether
Step 2.
39.2"
Since the actual unbraced length is les~ than 39.2 inches, the
spacing of the bracing is adequate.
Problem 5A-3
Step 1.
1.36
Specify values of
tension~membrane
and
depending upon
action is present or not.
c.
Span length and support conditions
d.
Mechanical properties of steel
Determine an equivalent uniformly distributed static load for a 1ft width of panel, using the following preliminary. dynamic load
factors.
5A-8
-t.
TK 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22'
Tension-membrane
action not present
Tension-membrane
action present
1.33
DLF
1.00
These load factors are based on an average value of T/TN - 10.0

the recommended design ductility ratios. They are derived 'using
figure 3-64 of Chapter 3.
Equivalent static load
w
b
DLF
1 ft,
Step 3.
Using the equivalent load derived in step 2, determine the

ultimate moment capacity using equation 5-29 or 5-30 (assume
positive'and negative.are the same).
Step 4.
Determine required section moduli using equation 5-27 or 5-28.

Select a panel.
Step' 5.
Determine actual section properties of the panel:
Step 6.
Compute r u' the maximum unit resistance per loft width of panel
using equation 5-29 or 5-30.
Step 7.
Determine the equivalent elastic stiffness, KE- ruL/X E using

equation 5 - 31.
'S
,:
"
-.
Step 8.
Compute the natural period of vibration.

(Equation 5-32)
Step 9.
Calculate P/r u and T/T N. Enter figure 3-64 with the ratios P/r u
.and T/T N to establish the actual ductility ratio ~ .
Compare ~ with the criteria of step 1. If
criteria value, repeat steps 4 to 9. -,
Step 10.
is larger than the
Compute the equivalent elastic deflection,XE using XE = ruL/K E.

Evaluate-the maximum, deflection, ~ = ~XE'
Determine the maximum panel end r ot.at Lon ..
e - _tan -1
[~/(L/2) 1
Compare e with the criteria of step 1. If e is larger than

specified in the criteria, select another panel and repeat steps 5
to 10.
5A-9 .
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

Step 11.
Check resistance in rebound using figure 513.
Step 12.
Check panel for maximum resistance in shear by applying the

criteria relative to:
a.
Simple shear, Table 55a, 5-6a or 5-7a.
b,'
Combined bending and shear, Table 5-5b, 5-6b or 57b.
c;
Yeb crippling, figures 5-15 or 5-16.

If the panel is inadequate in shear, select a new member and
repeat steps 4 to 12.
Example 5A-3 Design a Roof Deck as a Flexural Kember which Responds

to Pressure-Time Loading
Required:
Design a continuous cold-formed steel panel in a low pressure

range.
Step 1.
Given:
a.
Pressure-t,ime loading (figure 5A-3),.
b.
Criteria:
(Tension-membrane action present)
maximum ductility ratio
/.I max - 6
maximum rotation
9 max - 4
c.
Structural configuration figure 5A-3.
d.
Steel A446, grade a

E
30 x 10 6 psi
f ds - a x c x'fy- 1.21 x1.1 x

Step 2.
33,OO~
- 44,000 psi
(Equation 5-26)
Determine the equivalent static load.

Say DLF - 1.0
w - DLF x P x b - 1.0 x 5.0,x 12 x 12 -'720'lb/ft
Step 3.
Determine required ultimate moment capacities.

selection, assume
For preliminary
Mup - Mun - wL2/10.8 - 720 x (4.5)2/ 10. 8 - 1,350 lb-ft

,
(Equation 5-30)
5A-IO
5-1300/NAVFAC,P-397/AFR~8~;22
TlI
'L
..
'.
:~
,'.t:
'~.
f;
."
S.Opsi'
fa
I. '.
u:
Do
.'
2'-0', , .
40ms
TIME
,
"
.....
'
.. I"
.'
t----I~I----=--=--1
4'-6"
4'-6'
. 1'
Figure 5A-3
'4'-6"
,r
Roof decking configuration and loading, Example SA-3
~ ':'t ,-_ ~
":~'~f
,;.
SA-ll.
'
I'
",
TM 5-1300/NAVFACP-397/AFR 88-22
Step 4.
Determine required section moduli.

S+ - S- - (1350 x 12)/44,000 - 0.368 in 3
(Select Sec. 3-18,
Step 5.
1~1/2
inches deep)
Determine actual section properties.

For manufacturer's guide:
S+ - 0.3.98 in3
S- - 0.380 in 3
4
1 20 - 0.337 in4
w - 2.9. psf
Step 6.
Compute maximum unit resistance r u'

~n
- (44,000 x 0.398)/12 - 1,459 Ib-ft
(44,000 x 0.380)/12 - l,3931b-ft .
;(Equation 5-27):
(Equation 5-28)
3.6
4.5 2
(1,393 + 2 x 1,459) - 766 Ib/ft

(Equation 5-30)
Step 7.
Determine equivalent static stiffness.
0.0062 L3
- 124,260 Ib/ft
0.0062 (4.5 3) x 144

Step 8.
(Equation '5-31)
Compute the natural period of vibration for the I-ft width of

panel.
mL - wig -' (2.9 x 10 6
.-
4.5)/32.2 - 4.05 x 105 Ib;ms 2/ft
5A-12
TK S-1300/NAVFAC'P"397/AFR 88-22'
TN - 2x[(0.74 x 4.0S x 105)/124,260]1/2, - 9.7S'msec
Step 9.
Calculate P/ru and T/T N

P - P x b - 5.0 x 12 x 12, - 720 lb/ft
P/r u - 720/766 - 0.94.
T/T N - 40/9.75 - 4.10
Entering figure 3-64a
with ,these values.
,
,
Xm/XE - 3.5 < 6

Step 10.
O.K.
Check maximum deflection and rotation.

,
XE -
r~L/KE
- 766 x 4.5/124,260 - 0.028 ft
Xm - 3.5 XE - 0.098 ft
eStep 11.
tan- l [x;.i(L/2)]
~ t~n-l[0.098/2.25] -
2.5 < 4"
O.K.
Check resistance in rebound.

From figure 5-13, r /r' - 0.33; ,O.K. ,since available maximum
elastic resistance in rebound is approximately equal to that under
direct loading.
"
Step 12.
Check resistance in 'shear.

a.
Interior support (combined shear and bending). Determine

dynamic shear capacity of a loft width of panel:
h - (1.500 - 2t) inches, t - 0.048 inch
- 1.500 - 0.096 - 1.404 inches
"
hit - 1.404/0.048 - 29.25 - 30
SA-13
"
,1
TN 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

f dv -,10.84 ksi -
"
.',
Total web area for loft width of' panel: '
(Table 5-5)
......
,
"
(8 x h x t)/2 - 4' x 1'.404, x 0:048 ;.' 0:270 in 2

Vu - 0~270 x 10.84 - 2.92 k - 2,922,~b'
Determine maximum dynamic shear force:
The maximum shear at, an interior ,support: of
panel using limit design is:
a ,continuous
Vmax - 0~55 ruL - 0.55 x 766 x 4.5 - 1;896 lb

~
'
b.
, . '; "
- 1,896 lb
< 2,922 lb
,,
.. ... '
End support (simple shear)
11
O.K,
','
Determine dynamic shear capacity of a lft

width of panel:
.,. ,
For h/t S 57,
f dv - 0:50 f ds -.0.5 x 44.0 -,22.0 ksi,

, . ...' . ' '- '",,'. '
(Table 5- 5a)
'Vu' - 0.270 x 22,000 -5 ..940
., .,
~,
'
'
Determine maximum dynamic shear force:

The maximum shear at an end support,of'a continuous panel
using limit design is
,V!Dax'- 0.45 x ruxL -0,45 x 766 x 4.'5
- 1,551 lb < 5,940 lb
c,
O.K.
Web crippling (4 webs per foot)

End, support (N -
2~~
inches)
Qu - 1,200 x 4 - 4,800 lb> 1,551 ,"O.K.
(figure 5-15)
TK
Interior support (N - 5 inches)
Qu
P-397/AFR 88-22
S~1300/NAVFAC
j ..'
(2,400 x ,4)/2 - 4,800 Ib > 1,896 O.K.

...
Problem 5A-4 Design of Columns and Beam-Columns

Problem:
Design a columno,r beam-column for axial' load combined with

bending ,about the strong axis.
"
"
Procedure:
Step 1.
"
, '
Bending moment ,M, axial load P, and sheai',V are obtained
from either a preliminary design analysis or a computer
'analysis.
a.
-,
(figure 5-16)
"
'
b.
Span length 1 ,and'unbraced lengths Ix and ly.
c.
Properties of structural steel:

Minimum yield strength f y
,
'
Dynamic increase factor c
(Table 5-2)
Dynamic, design 'strength' f ds,
(Equation 5-2)
Step 2.
Select a preliminary member size with a section modulus S such

that S'~,M/fds and ~f/2tf complies with the structural steel being
used (Section 5-24).
Step 3.
Calculate" P (Section 5-,24) and the ratio P/Py. ,Using either

'equation '5.17 or 5-18, determine the maximum allowable 'd/tw ratio
and 'compare it .ro thar. of the section chosen. ':,If :the allowable
d/tw ratio is less than that of the trial section, choose a new
trial section.
Step 4.
Check the shear capacity of the web.
Determine the web area
Aw
(Section 5-23) and the allowable dynamic shear stress f dv

,(equation 5-4). Calculate the web shear capacity Vp (equation 516) and compare to the design shear V. If inadequate, choose a
'
'
,
new trial section and return to Step 3.
Step,S.
Determine the radii of gyration, r x and'ry, and"plastic section

modulus, Z, of the trial section from the AISC Handbook .
.
'
f ~l.:
SA-1S
1M 5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88c22

Step 6.
'.
Calculate the following quantities, using the ,various design

parameters:
a.
... .'
"'
Equivalent plastic resisting moment
,.
(Equation 5-8)
b.
Ef~ective slenderness ~atios Klx/r x and Kly/~y' For the

effective length factor K, see Section 1.8 or the Commentary
on the AISC Specification and Section 5-38.
c.
Allowable axial stress Fa corresponding to the larger value

'of K1:/r.
,,' ':"
"., '" .
d.
Allowable moment
Hm
from equation 5-47 or 5-48.
e . F ' eand "EuLer " buckling ,load 'Pe (Section 5-37.3).
Step 7.
f.
Plastic axial load (Section. 5:37 .3) and ultimate axial load
Pu (equation 5-42).
g.
Coefficient Cm (Section 1.6.1 AISC Specification).
Using the quantities 9btained in Step 6 and the applied moment M

and axial load P, check the interaction formulas (equations 5-44
and 5-45). Both formulas must be satisfied for the trial section
to be adequate.
"
.',
Example 5A-4 (a)
Design of a Roof Girder as a Beam-Column

.
J'
'"
i .
Required:
Design a fixed-ended roof girder' in a' framed structure for

combined bending and axial load in a,low pressure, range.'
Step 1.
Given:
a.
Preliminary computer analysis gives the folloWing values for
. ,
design:
..
0'
"
.'~
b.
Mx
115 ft-kips
,My
-,
..
53.5 kips.
,V
15.1 kips,
Span length Ix
"
'
' 1'.
"
-'
17' -0"
..
Unbraced lengths Ix - 17'-0" and ly - 17'-0"

c.
A36 structural
~teel
5A-16
TM5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

f y - 36 ksi
r ,(Table 5-2)
c - 1. 29
(Section 5-12.1)
a - 1.1
fds - c x a x f y
(Equation 5-2)
1.29 x 1.1 x 36 - 51.1 ksi
Step '2. "

S - Mx/f ds - 115 (12)/51.1 -:27.0 in 3
Try W 12 x 30 (S - '38.6 in 3)
A-8.79in2
"
d/t,. -'47.5,
b f / 2t f ~ 7.4 < 8.5
..
,-
O.K.
(Section 5- 24)
',
Step 3.
Py - Afy P/Py d/t,. -
8.79 x 36,-
53.5/316 -
0.169
[412/(f~)1/2] [1-
316 kips
(Section 5-24)
< 0.27
1.4 (P/Py )]
(Equation 5-17)
- (412/(36)1/2)' [1 - 1.4 (0.169)J ~' 52.4
>'47.5
O.K.
Step 4.
(Equation 5-16)
-,
f dv -'0.55 fds -
, Aw -
t,.(d - 2tf) -
0.55 (51.1) -
. f
'" (Equation 5-4)
28.1 ksi
0.260 [12.34 - 2 (0.440)]
- 2.98 in 2
Vp -
28;1(2.98) ..
(Section 5-23)
83.7 kips
> 15.1 kips
5A-l7 e..
O.K..,
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88"22

Step 5.
r x - 5.2J. in.
r y - 1. 52 in.
, (AISC Manual)
Z - 43.1 in 3
Step 6.
a.
~x
b.
K - 0.75
c..
- fds x Zx -
51.1 x 43.1 x 1/12 -
183.5ft-kips
(Equation 5-8)
(Section 5-39)
K1 x/rx -
[0.75(17)12J /5.21 - 29
Kl y/ry -
[0.75(17)12) (.1.52 - 101
Fa - 12.85 ksi for Kl y/ry - 101 and f y - 36 ks L,

(Appendix A, AISC Specification)
-1.42(12.85) - 18.25 ksi for fds - 51:1 ksi
Hmx -
d.
[ 1.07
(l/ry) (f ds ) 1/2
J'
.,
3,160
~x:S
J\,x
: .
(Equation 5-47)
(204/1. 52) (~1.1) 1/21 .

- (1.07 - ----------~----J183.5 - 140.6 < 183.5 ft-kips
3,160
,I'
127T2E
e.
F' ex -
23 (K1 b/r x) 2
23AF.'ex
Pe x
f.
PP - f ds A -
----;-~:---
177.6 ksi .
23(29)2
(Section 5-37.3)
23(8.79)177.6
12
127T2(29.000)
12
2,992 kips:
.
(Section 5-37.3)
51.1(8.79) - 449 kips
5A-18
(Section 5-37.3)
TK 5-1300/NAVFAC
P~397/AFR.88~22
(Equation 5-42)
Pu - 1. 7AFa - 1. 7(8. 79)18.25. - 273 kips ..1
g.
Step 7.
(Section 1.6.1,'AISC Specification)
- 0.85
(Equation 5-44)
".....,+L~.,.:...,---
Pu
(1
.,.;p
'
"
, o.
53.5
0.85(115)
-- +
273
(1- 53.5/2992)140.6
0;196 +'0.708 -' 0.904 < 1 '. O.K.
,.
" 5-45)
(Equation
'",
,'"
53.5
115
+ - . 0 ' . 1 1 9 + 0.531\- .0.650
449
1.18(183.5)
.. ~...-!'-.-
.
.< 1
O.K.
Trial section meets the requirements of Section 5-37.3.
...
." ..
Example 5A-4 (b)

. " ' . J
Design of Column
1..';
.,.
Required:
Design of an exterior fixed-pinned column in a framed structure

for biaxial bending plus axial loads' in a low pressure range.
Step 1.
Given:
a.
Preliminary design'~nalysis .~f a particular column gives the
following values at a critical section:
Hx -
311 ft-kips
My - 34 ft-kips
P - 76 kips
V-54 kips
b.
Span length 1 - 17'-3"

Unbraced lengths lx - 17'-3" and ly - 4'-0" (laterally
supported by wall girts).
5A-19'
"
TM
5-1300/NAVFAC'P~397/AFR
c.
88-22
A36 structural stee1.

fy
- 1. 29
36 ksi
.(Table 5-2)
a , - 1.1
Step 2.
f ds -
(Section 5-12.1)
x c x f y - 1.1x '1.29 x 36 - 51.1 ksi (Equation 5-2)

S - ~/fds - 311(12)/51.1 - 73.0 in 3
Try
W 14 x 68 (S - 103 in 3 ) ,
A - 20.0 in 2
d/~
- 33 ..8
O.K.
. (Section 5-24)
Step 3.
Py - Afy - 20.0(36) - 720 kips
P/Py - 76/720 - 0.106
(Section 5-24)
0.27
<
d/~ - [412/(fy)1/2 I [1 -1.4(P/Py ) l

-[412/(36)1/2] ,[1
(Equation 5-17)
58.5 > 32.9'
1.4(0.106)]< -
O.K.
Step 4..
(Equation 5-16)
f dv - 0.55 fds -
Aw -
0.55(51.1)
28.1 ksi
..
(Equation 5-4)
~(d : 2t f)- 0.415 [14.04 .,2(0.720')] - 5.23 in 2 ,
(Section 5-23)
Vp'- 28.1(5.23) - 147 kips
...
54 kips
.
O.K.
,
!'
I" .
5A-20'
.. '
-c
'
TH 5 -1300/NAVFAC P- 397IAn. ,'88,-22

Step 5.
r x - 6.01 inches
f ...
r y - 2.46 inches
~ - 115 in3
Zy
(AISC Manual)
-'36'.9 in 3
Step 6.
~-,
a.
"
~ - fdsZ
(Equation 5-8)
'
~x
- 51.1 x 115 x 1/12 - 490 ft-kips
~y
- 51.1 x 36.9 x 1/12 - 157 ft-kips
-'.1
b.
UseK - 1.5
'Kl
rx
K1 y
", (Section 5-39)
1.5(17.25)12,
6.01
c.
52
0,
1.5(4.00)12
2.46
ry
Fa - 18.17 ksi for
K1~
29
Ir x -
'.
52 and f y - '36 ksi
'
1.42(18.17) - 25.79 ksi for fds - 51,1 ksi

'.. ..t
Kmx - ~~ -
.. ~.:- .
'I ,
~,
., ..:.
490 ft-klps
" c;
d.
Hmy -
~y
- 157 ft-kips
,"
(Section 5-37.3)
"
.'
'
12"2E
12"2(29,000)
F' ex' ,.. ---'-....,....-...,-2 .
23 (K1b
irx)
12"2 E
"
'123(29)2
178 kSi
(Section 537.3)
','
.
"
..
I' "
5A-21
,'.
TH 5-1300/NAVFACP-397/AFR.88-22
23(20.0)55.2
. '.
- 2,116 kips
1 2 . , ' 'r,
23AF'ex
Pe x -
12
23(20.0)178
23AF'ey
Pey -
;;.
:
- 6,823 kips
12
P.p - fdsA -
12
51.1(20)
I:',
Pu - 1. 7AF a -
(Section ... 5-37.3)
- 1,022 kips
1.7(20)25.79
4
Cmx - Cmy - 0.85
- -,
..L'
':
-877 kips
~
.',
(Section 1.6.1, AISC Specification)

...
'
Step 7.
P
. CmxHx
-+
Pu
(1 - P/Pex)Kmx
:i
(Equation 5-44)
76
0.85(311)
--+
877
(1 - 76/2116)490
0.85(34)
"
{I - 76/6,823)157
0.087 + 0.560 +,/0.186 '.,.
0.,83~
<.1 ",
O.K.
. .
-"
P/Pp + MX/(1.18~x) + ~/(1.18~y)
'1..i.
(Equation 5-45)
76/1022 + 311/[1.18(490)] + 34/[1.18(157)]

~J
0.074 + 0.538 + 0.183 - 0.795

J ',(; . ,""
<
"
,,
Trial section meets the- ,requirements, ofSection .537.3

\ M<
Problem 5A-5
i ~' ,.' ;
. " . \,
Desigrr of: Open-Web
.,
Stee1,~oists
Pzob Lem:;" .' Analysis or design ot an open-web joist subjected to a pressuretime loading.
Procedure:
Step 1.
a.
Pressure-time curve
b.
Clear span length and joist spacing
5A-22 J
. . . .~
"
TK 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397iAF& 88-22:

c.
Minimum yield stress f y for'chord and web membars

Dynamic increase factor, c.
,
(Table 5-2)
and maximum end rotation,
e.
d.
Design ductility ratio
e.
Determine whether 'joist design is controlled by maximum end

reaction.
Step 2.
Select a preliminary joist size as follows:
a.
, b.
Assume a dYnamic load factor
, (Section 5-22.3)
Compute equivalent static load on joist due to blast overpressuy;e
wl - DLF x P x b
, (Dead load of j oLs t; and decking not included)
c.
d.'
Equivalent service live load on joist

w2 - wl/l.7 x a xc
"'(Section 5-33)
From "Standard Load Tables" adop ced by' the Steel Joist
Institute, select a joist for the' given span'and the
structural steel being used, with a safe service load (dead
load of joist. and decking excluded)'equalto or greater than
w2' Check whether ultimate capacity ot joist 'is controlled
by flexure or by shear.'
',;.'.'
Step 3.
Find the resistance of the joist by multiplying thci'safe service

load by 1.7 x a x c (Section 5-33).
Step 4.
Calculate the stiffne~s of~he' joist; KE,,:usl'ng Table 3-8.

Determine the equivalent elastic deflection XE given by
Step 5."
Determine the effective'mass using the weight of the joist with

its tributary area' of' deck'Lng , and, the corr e spondfng load-mass
factor given in Table 3-12 of Chapter 3.'
\
Calculate the
Step 6.
'
'1
natura~ .~eriod of,vibrati~n,
TN;
Follow procedure outlined in step 6a or 6b'dependlng on whether

the joist capacity ~s controlled by fle~ure or by shear .
. <t.-
5A-23
TH S-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22,

Step 6a.
Joist design controlled by flexure.

a,
Find ductility ratio ~ - Xm/X E from the ~esponse charts in

Chapter 3, using the values of T/T N and P/ru'
b.
Check if the ductility ratio and maximum end rotation meet

, r the criteria requirements outlined in Section 5-35.
, If the above requirements are not satisfied, select another

dynamic load,factor and repeat Steps,2,to 5.
c. '
"
, Check the selection of the, dynamic ipc~ease factor used in

Step 2c. Using the response charts, find t E to determine
,the
strain rat~, ,in equation 5-1. Using figure 5-2,
'.
determine DIF. (If elastic response, use T/T N and
appropriate response charts to check DIF).
d.
Step6b.
Check if the top chord meets the requi,ements for a beamcolumn (Section 5-37.3).
Joist design controlled by shear.

,~.
b.
Find ductility ratio~ - Xm/X E from the response charts in

Chapter 3, ~sing the values of T/T N and,P/~u'
.If,
..
'
.'
~ S 1,,0, d~sign~sO.K.,
. ,
! ",.',
If ~ > 1.0, assume a highe~ dynami~ load factor and repeat

Steps 2 to 5. ContiLnue until ~ S I.O.Check end rotation,
e, agaLns t de sLgn criteria.
. '.
c
c.
Check the selection of the dynamic increase factor used in

St.ep 2c, usirg the value of T/TN and the, appropriate elastic
response cha,t in ?ection 3-19.3.,
d.
Since the capacity is controlled by maximum end reaction, it

will generally not be necessary to check the top chord as a
beam-col,umn. .1:I0fev~r, wh!,n such a check is ..w arranted, the'
procedure'in
~tep 6a can,be followed.
"',
.
'.'
..
..
./
Step 7.
"
Check the bottom chord for rebound.

a.
b.
c.
. ( ."
<ll -
Determine the required resistance, r, for eiastic behavior

in ,rebound.
"'"
'comp~te
the' bending moment, 'H, and'find'the axial forces in

top and bottom chords using P - H/d where d is taken as the
distance between the centroids of the top and bottom chord
sections.
Determine the ultimate axial load capacity of th~ bottom
chord considering the actual slenderness ratio of its
elements.
SA-24
TIl 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397jAFR88"22
!!~.- 1.7A~a
where Fa l~ defined in Section 5-37.3 .

.'.
The value of Fa can be obtained by using either equation 5-43 or

the tables in' the AlSC SpeCification which give allowable .s trre s ses
for compression members. When using these tables. the, yield',.
stress should, be taken equal to f ds'
"'"
Check i f Pu > P. ,
d.
Determine bracing: requirements:,

I'
Example 5A-5 (a)

Required:
D~sign
Solution:
Step 1.
Given:
Design of an Open-Web Steel Joist
a simply-supported open-web steel joist whose capacity is

controlled by'flexure. '
..... '
(a)
a.
Pressure-time loading
b:
Clear span
Spacing of joists
Weight of decking
[figure 5A-5
1
50':0"~
7' _0"
,.' r
4 psf
Structurat steel propertfes
..c.
f;
"
Chords
Web
il
",
'~a ~
"';
':.
50;000 ~si
Y
<fY -"36000
ps L
,
Dynamic -Lncrease ' factor' (chor ds oni y) .

(Table 5-2,' for A588)
c - 1.19
,.
..
'," ..d>
Chords
f ds
';~1.19
.. '
c x a x 'fy
f ds
Dynamic design stressj
x 1.1 x 50 ;'000
-r
(Equation 5-2)
65,450 psi
! -
Design 'criteria
(Section 5-35)
, Maximwn ductility ratio:

Maximwn end rotation:
5A-25
,.
. "'max
4.0
t
~ , i
v.
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFll 88-22
~
,.
.-
w.
6.76"
Ii""--:-"'.:..o.--
-1--
a:
::::).
II)
2.0psl
f3a:
1:1.
40ms
TIME
.N
V32LH11
N
g
CO)
.-',
-f--_:_'---.-.-__
M[
..m..
o
~.
Figure SA-Sea)
Step 2.
Joist cross-section and loading, Example SA-Sea)
Selection of joist size

a.
Assume a dynamic load factor. For preliminary design, a DLF

1.0 is generally recommended. However, since the span is
quite long in tbis'case, a QLF of 0.62 is selected.
b.
Equivalent static load

on
joist:
..
..
v
w1 -
c.
~ 14~.x
7.0
1,250 lb/ft
Service live load on joist:

w2
d.
0.62 x 2.0
- w1/1.7 x 1.19x 1,! -.1,250/2,23 - 561 lb/ft
Using the "Standard Specifications, Load .Tab1es and Weight

Tables" of the Steel Joist Institute, for a span of 50'-0 11 ,
try 32LH11.
by flexure.
Joist tables show that capacity is controlled

r .
Total load-carrying c':p~city (including dead load - 602

1b/ft).
Approximate weight of joist and decking
- 28 + (4 x 7) - 56 1b/ft
5A-26.
TH,5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22 '
capacity (excluding' dead load - 602 - 56
Total
- 546
"
.,.
The following section properties refer to the selected joist

32L1l1L [Fl:gtire 5A-5. (a) }:
. . . ' .,
>,
Top Chord:
Two 3 x 3 x 5/16 angles
A - 3.56 in 2
r x - 0.92 -Ln ,
r y - 1.54 in.
Ix - 3.02 in4
, .r.
Bottom' Chord:
Two 3 x 2~1/2 x 1/4 angles
- 2.62 in2
r x - 0.945 in.
,
r
1. 28 in.
.,
'J
Ix - 2.35
::
...
<
in4
I xx for joist - 1;.383.0,in4: .

.Panel length - 51-.inches
Resistance perunitlength
Step 3.
l"
r u - 1.7 x 1.19 x 1.1 x 546 - 1215 Ib/ft

Step 4.
..
.. f
384.1< 29 x 10 6 x'l,383
i.
(Section 5-33)
3
KE - 384 EI/5L
5(12 x 50)3
- 14,260 Ib/in
(Table 3-8)
1,215 x 50
- 4.26 inches
14,260
Step 5.
Total mass of joist'plus decking

56 x 50 x 10 6
M-----386
Total effective mass Me - KLMM

KLM - 0.5(0.78 + 0.66) - 0.72
5A-27 .
(Table 3-12)
TM 5-l300/NAVFACP-397/AFR 88-22.
Me-, 0.72 (7.25 x 10 6) - 5.22 x 10 6 lb-ms 2/in
Natural period
T~
2n(M e / KE)1/2 -
2n(5.220.000/14:2~0)1/2.-
120.2 ms
Behavior controlled by flexure . . Use Step 6a.

Step 6a.
a.
T/T N - 40/120.2 - 0.332
2.0 x 144 x 7
P/ru
----~-
- 1. 82
1,105
From figure 3-64a.
'(
~.
O.K.
b.
Xm - 2.3 x 3.87 - 8.9 inches
tan
e -
e -
Xm/(L/2) - 8.9/(25 x 12) - 0.0297
1.7 0
< 20
O.K.
Check selection of DIF.
c.
From Table 3- 64a. for /I. - 2.3 and T/T N - 0.33.

tE/T - 0.55,
Find
.'
t E - 0.55 x 40 - 22ms
~ - fds/Est E- 65.45/30 x 10 3 x .022 - 0.099 in/in/sec

.'.
.....
5A-28 :
(Equation 5-1)
.,
TK S-1300/NAVFAC:P-397/AFR 88"22"
From figure'S-2 (average of A36 and A514)
DIF - 1.18
d.
'~
1:19 assumed
O.K.
Check top chord as a beam' column.

Maximum moment at mid-span
l,10S x (50)~ x 12
4,144 in-kips
8x 1",000
, Maximum axial load in chords
P - M/d
d -
distance between centroids of top arid bottom chords

[see figure 5A-5 (a)J
30.22 Lnche s
P - 4,144/30.22 - 137.1 kips

1
panel length
51 inches
Slenderness ratio, l/rx - 51/0.92 - 55.4 < Cc

"
where Cc -,(2n 2E/f ds)1/2, - 95
x
(Equation 5-41)
Fa - 23.5 ksi for f y - 50 ksi
(Table 3-50, AISC Specification)
1.31 (23.5) - 30.8 ksi for f ds - 65,450 psi
Pu - 1.7AFa - 1.7 x 3.56 x 30.8 - 186.4 kips
(Equation 5-42)
"
Considering the first panel as a fixed, simply supported

beam, the maximum moment in'the panel is ,_.
1,105 (51)2
M -'r u L2/12 -.~~---~---~-- - 19.96 in-kips
12 x 12 x 1,000
.' .
The effective slenderness ratio of the top chord in the
first panel is
SA~29
TIl S-1300/NAVFACP-397/AFR 88-22
- 48.7 ksi
Pex - (23/12)AF' ex' - 231.12 x. 3.
~6
x 48..7. - 333 kips
(1 - P/P ex) - (1.0 - 126 .. 6/3)3) - 0.62

.,
To determine ~, the plastic moment'~ is needed and the

value of Zx has to be computed. The neutral axis for a
fully plastic section is located. at a.distance x from the
flange.
3x
-~
- (3
5/16) 5/16 + 3 (5/16 - x)

."
- (43) 5/(16 x 16) + 15/1$' ~3x

x - 455/(6 x 256) - 0.296 inch .
The plastic section modulus s , :Z", is found to be
..
'
(0.2
Zx - 2[ --------- x 3
296)2'
,
(3.0~.0.3125)
(0.3125
0.296)2
+
2
'0.263 + 0.0007.+ 2.285 - 2.549 in 3
~x
- fdsZ x - 65.45 x 2.549 - 166.8 in-kips
(Equation 5-8)
(Equation 5-37)
where ry.is least radius of gyration - 0.92

- [1.07 - (55 ..4/391)J 166.8 - 154.8 in-kips
SA-30
TM S-1300/NAVFAC'P:'397/AFR'88-22
Cm - 0.85 .
P/Pti + CmM/ [ ( l "
.
(Section 1.6.1, AISC)

P/Pex)~xJ
,.'
~Equation
1.10
137.1 + 0:85 (19.96) ",

S 1.0 - 0.736 + 0.176 186.4
0.62 (154.8)
0.91~'~
5-44)
1.0 O.K.
"
Step 7.
Check bottom chord for rebound.

a.
Calculate required resistance in rebound ..

.
.,.
From figure 5-13, 100% rebound

r/r u - 1.0
r
b.
- r u - 1,105 lb/ft
Moment and axial forces in rebound

M-
(r x L2)/8 -
4,144 in-kips
Maximum axial force in bottom 'chord
P - Mid - 137.1 kips (compression)

c.
Ultimate axial load capacity

Stability in vertical direction (about x-axis)
1
51 inches
r x - 0.945
l/r - 51/0.945 - 54.0 < Cc

where Cc - [(27T2E)/fdsJ.1/2 -
95
Fa - 23.72 ksi for f y - 50 ksi

(Table 3- 50, 'AISC Specification)
1.31(23.72) - 31.1 ksi 'for'f ds - 65,450 psi
Pu - 1.7AFa - 1.7 x 2.62x 31.1,- 138.5 'kips
d.
Check bracing requirements.' '.
SA-31
TK.5-l300/NAVFAC P-39J/AFR 88-22

P
137:1
<
Pu - 138.5
O.K.
Adding-a vertical member between panel_joints of bottom chord

would have been required nad P > Pu' This additional bracing
would have been needed in mid-span but may be spared at the joist
ends.
Stability in the lateral direction (about y-axis)
Pu - 137.1 kips
A - 2.62 in 2
r y - 1.28 inches,
Fa - Pu / (1 . 7 x 1.31A) - 137.1/(1.7 x-l.31-x 2.62) ~'23.5 ksi

For a given Fa - 23.5, the corresponding slenderness ratio is
l/r := 55
(Table 3-5'0, AISC Specification)
Therefore, the maximum unbraced length in mid-span is

Ib - 55 x 1.28 - 70.4 inches
s,
Use lateral bracing at panel points, i.e., 51 inches at midspan.

The unbraced length may be increased at joist ends, but not
greater than specified for bridging requirements in the joist
specification.
.
Example 5A-5 (b)
Required:
Solution:
Step 1.
Analysis of Existing Open-Web Steel Joist
Analyze'a simply supp~rted, open-web steel joist whose capacity is

controlled by shear.
Given:
a.
Pressure-time loading [figure 5A-5 (b)]

,Joist 22Hll.
b.
Clear span - 32'-0"

Spacing of joists ,- 6' -,0".
Weight of decking - 4 psf
5A-32
TM 5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88.-22
ttc:i
6.35"
I"
"
'.
~...
lot
I/)
".
le' 1.0
~
pal
!'
.. I,l
'
III
III
in Go
N
le
22H11
N ~
N
Q,
25ms
.,
TIME
~-- .~
-L-....I--'
-
bI/)
c:i
Figure 5A-5(b)
'l
~:}
Joist cross-section and loading, Example 5A-5(b)

r. '
c.
Properties of structural steel:
Chords
50,000 psi
Web
36,000 psi
Dynamic increase factor

(chords only)
(Tabl~ '5 - 2 for A588)
c - 1.19
J.
"
Dynamic design stress, f ds

Chords
d.
-c x a
1.0
1
65,450 psi
(Section 5-35)
For members controlled by shear:.
Step 2.
.r-
f ds - 1.19 'x 1.1' x 50,000
Design criteria
amax
x fy .
a.
Assume the DLF
b.
Overpressure load on joist
1. 25
5A-33
'
TK 5-1300/NAVPACP-397/AP& 88-22
wl - 1.25 x 1.0 x 144 x 6 - 1,080 lb/ft

c.
Equivalent service load

w2 - wl/l.7 x a x c - 1,080/2.23 - 485 lb/ft
d.
From the Standard Specifications and Load Tables" of the

Steel Joist Institute:
, .,
Total load-carrying capacity (including dead load) - 506
lb/ft.
Approximate weight of joist plus decking 17 + (6 x 4) - 41 lb/ft
Total load-carrying capacity (excluding dead load) 506' - 41 - 465
From the steel joist catalog', the following are the section
properties of Joist 22HII [figure 5A-5 (b)]:
Panel length - 24 inches
Top Chord:
A - 1. 935 in 2
4
Ix - 0.455 in
r x - 0.485 in.
r y - 1.701 in.
Bottom Chord:
A - .1. 575 in2
Ix
0.388 in4'
r x - 0.497 in.
r y - 1.469 in.
I xx for joist - 396.0 in4
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

Step 3.
Resistance per unit length

r u - 2.23 x 465 - 1,035 1b/ft
384 x 29 x 10 6 x 396
384EI
Step 4.
- 15,580 Ib/in
(Table 3-8)
5 x (12 x 32)3
1,035 x 32
2.13 inches
15,580
Step 5.
Mass of joist plus decking

6
41 x 32 x 10 6
M-~----
386
Effective mass Me - KLMM
- 0.78 x 3.4 x 106 - 2.65 x 10 6 1b-ms 2in
Natural period TN - 2rr(Me/KE)1/2
- 2rr(2,650,000/15,580)1/2 - 81.8 ms
Behavior controlled by shear.
Use Step 6b of the procedure.
Step 6b.
a.
T/T N - 25/81.8 - 0.305

6 x 144 x 1.0
- - - - - - - 0.835
1,035
From Figure 3-64a of Chapter 3:
~
tan
~/XE
e -
< 1.0; elastic, O.K.
~/(L/2)
- 2.13/(16.0 x 12) - 0.0111
ec.
0.64 < 1
O.K.
Check selection of DIF from figure 3-49 of Chapter 3, for

T/T N - 0.305, tm/T - 1.12; t m - 1.12 x 25 - 28 ms
tH 5-1300!NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
Find
- fds/Est e
(t E -
~)
(Equation 5-1)
- 65.45/30 x 10 3 x 0.028 - 0.078 in/in/sec

From figure 5-2, (average of A36 and A514)
DIF - 1.18 - 1.19 assumed, O.K.
d.
Step 7.
Check of top chord as a beam-column is not ne<;:essary.
Check bottom chord in rebound.

~
a.
For
- 1 and T/T
- 0.305, rebound is 100%
b.
Determine axial load in bottom chord, P - M/d.

~
For an elastic response,

DLF - 0.87
(Figure 5-13)
< 1.0, where T/T N - 0.305, the

(Figure 3-49)
Equivalent static load,w

w - DLF x b x P - 0.87 x 12 x 12 x 6 x 1.0 - 751 1b/ft
Maximum moment in rebound, M - wL2/8
M - [751 x (32)2/ 8 J 12
1,155,000 in-1b
P - M/d - 1,155,000/21.28 - 54,300 1b - 54.3 kips

c.
Check bracing requirements.

(1)
Vertical bracing of bottom chord:

Panel length - 24 inches
r x - 0.497,
r y - 1 . 469 ,
l/rx - 24/0.497 - 48.3
5A-36
A - 1.575 in 2
TN 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

Allowable P - 1.7 x a x c x A x Fa
- 1.7 x 1.1 x 1.19 x 1.575 x 24.6 - 86.2 kips> 54.3 kips
(Table 3-50, AlSC Specification)
No extra bracing required.
(2)
Lateral bracing of bottom chord:

P - 54.3 kips, A - 1.575 in 2
Fa - P/l.7A - 54.3/(1.7 x 1.575 x 1.1 x 1.19) - 15.5 ksi
For f y - 50 ksi and Fa - 15.5 ksi
l/r - 96
1 - 96 x 1.469 - 141 inches
(Table 3-50, AlSC Specification)
Therefore, use lateral bracing at every fifth panel point

close to mid-span. The unbraced length may be increased at
joist ends, but not greater than specified for bridging
requirements in the joist specification.
Problem 5A-6
Problem:
Procedure:
Step 1.
Step
2.
Design of Single-Story Rigid Frames for

Pressure-Time Loading
Design a single-story, multi-bay rigid frame subjected to a

Establish the ratio a between the design values of the horizontal
and vertical blast loads.
Using the recommended dynamic load factors presented in Section 541.3 establish the magnitude of the equivalent static load w for:
5A-37
Step 3.
a.
local mechanisms of the roof and blastward column
b.
panel or combined mechanisms for the frame as a whole.
Using the general expressions for the possible collapse mechanisms

from Table 5-13 and the loads from Step 2, assume values of the
moment capacity ratios C and Cl and proceed to establish the
required design plastic moment ~ considering all possible
mechanisms.
In order to obtain a reasonably economical design, it
is desirable to select C and Cl so that the least resistance (or

the r~quired value of ~) corresponds to a combined mechanism.
This will normally requlre several trials with assumed values of C
and Cl.
Step 4.
Calculate the axial loads and shears in all members using the
approximate method of Section 5-41.4.
Step 5.
Design each member as a beam-column using the ultimate strength

design criteria of Sections 5-37.3, 38, and 39. A numerical
example is presented in Section 5A-4.
Step 6.
Using the moments of inertia from Step 5, calculate the sidesway

natural period using Table 5-14 and Equations 5-50 and 5-51.
Enter the response charts in Chapter 3 with the ratios of T/TN and
P/~'
In this case, P/~ is the reciprocal of the panel or
sidesway mechanism dynamic load factor used in the trial design.
Multiply the ductility ratio by the elastic deflection given by
equation 5-53 and establish the peak deflection ~ from equation
5-54. Compare the maximum sidesway deflection ~ with the
criteria of Section 5-35. Note that the sidesway deflection 0 in
Table 5-8 is ~'
Step 7.
Repeat the procedure of Step 6 for the local mechanisms of the

roof and blastward column. The stiffness and natural period may
be obtained from Table 3-8 of Chapter 3 and equation 5-15,
respectively. The resistance of the roof girder and the blastward
column may be obtained from Table 5-13 using the values of ~ and
C~ determined in Step 3.
Compare the ductility ratio and
rotation with the criteria of Section 5-35.
Step 8.
a.
If the deflection criteria for both sidesway and beam

mechanisms are satisfied, then the member sizes from Step 5
constitute the results of this preliminary design. These
members would then be used in a more rigorous dynamic frame
analysis.
Several computer programs are available through
the repositories listed in Section
5A-38
5~4.
TN 5-1300/NAVPAC P-397iAPR 88~22

b.
If the deflection criterion for a sidesway mechanism is

exceeded, then the resistance of all or most of the members
should be increased.
c.
If the deflection criterion for a beam mechanism of the

front wall or roof girder is exceeded, then the resistance
of the member in.question should be increased. The member
sizes to be used in a final analysis should be the greater
of those determined from Steps 8b and 8c.
Example 5A-6
Required:
Design of a Rigid Frame for Pressure-Time Loading
Design a four-bay, single-story, reusable, pinned-base rigid frame

subjected to a pressure-time loading in its plane.
Given:
a.
Pressure-time
b.
Design criteria: It is required to design the frame

structure for more than one incident. The deformation
limits shall be half that permitted for personnel protection, that is:
load~ng (~igure
5A-6)
& - H/50 and

9 max - 1 for individual members
Step 1.
c.
Structural configuration (figure 5A-6)
d.
A36 steel
e.
Roof purlins spanning perpendicular to frame (b v- b n,

Figure 5-26)
f.
Frame spacing, b - 17 ft
g.
Uniform dead load of deck, excluding frame
'.
. Determine a:
. (Section 5-41.1)
b h - b v - 17 ft
qh - 5.8 x 17 x 12 - 1,183 lb/in

qv - 2.5 x 17 x 12 - 510 lb/in
a - qh/qv - 2.32
5A-39
TM 5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AfR 88-22
..
'
, .
,
4 @ 18'-8" = 88'-0"
Root Dead Load = 13.5 pat
3 '
. Wall Dead Load = 18.5 pat
MEMBER REFERENCE
NUMBER
5.8
psi
a:
::;)
~a:
III 2.5
fa
a:
D.
D.
psi
78ms
78ma
TIME
TIME
BLASTWARD EXTERIOR
WALL
Figure SA-6.
ROOF (Average)
Preliminary design' of four-bay, single-story rigid frame,

Example 5A-6
5A-40
TM 5-l300I.NAVfAC P-397/AFR ,88-22
Step' 2.
Establish equivalent
a.
sta~ic
loads
(Section 5-41.3)
Local beam mechanism, w - DLF x qv.

1.25 x 510 x 12
7.65 k/ft
w-----~--
1,000
b.
Panel or combined mechanism, w - DLFx qh

0.625 x 510 x 12
w--------
3.83 k/ft
1,000
Step 3.
The required plastic moment capacities for the frame members are
determined from Table 5-13 based upon rational assumptions for the
moment capacity ratios Cl and C. In general, the recommended
starting values are Cl equal to 2 and C greater than 2. From
Table 5-13. for n - 4, a - 2.32, H - 15.167 ft, L - 16.5 ft and
pinned bases, values of Cl and C were substituted and after a few
trials, the. following solution is obtained:
~
- 130 kip-ft,
Cl - 2.0
and C - 3.5.
The various collapse mechanisms and the associated values of

are listed below:
Collapse
Mechanism
1
2
3a, 3b
4
Sa, 5b
6
(k~t)
( k/f t )
_ 1'1
7.65
7.65
3.83
3.83
3.83
3.83
130
128
128
129
110
116
The plastic design moments for the frame members

as follows:
,,
Girder,' Mp - 130 k-ft
,
"
260 k- ft
Interior column, Cl~
f . '
Exterior column,
- 455 k-ft
..
5A-4l
ar~established
,.

Step 4.
a.-
Axial loads and shears due to horizontal blast pressure.

w - 3.83 k/ft
From figure 5-27, R - awH - 2.32 x 3.83 x 15.167 - 135 kips
1.
Member 1, axial load

PI - R/2 - 67 kips'
2.
, .:7
Member 2, shear force

V2 -R/2(4) - 135/8 - 16.8 kips
3. -
.,

V3 - R/2 - 67 kips
b.
Axial loads and shears due to vertical blast pressure,

w - 7.65 k/ft
1.

VI - w x L/2 - 7.65 x 16.5/2 - 63.1 kips.
2.
Member 2, axial load

P2 - w x L - 7.65 x 16.5 - 126.2 kips
3.
Member 3 ,axial load

P3 - w x L/2 - 63;1 kips
The dead loads are small compared to the blast loads
and are neglected in this step.
Step 5.
The members are designed using the criteria of Sections 5-37.3, 538, and 5-39 with the following ~esults:
Member
(k-ft)
ill
ill
Use
(in4)
130
67.0
63.1
w12x35
285
260
126.2
16.8
w14x6l
640
455
63.1
67.0
w14x74
796
5A-42
Ix
8~-22
Determine the frame stiffness and sway deflection.
Step 6.
>. . (3 x 640) + (2 x 796)

lea - - - - - - - - - - - 702 in4
(Table 5-14)
5 '
19
~ 285 in4
:"
.......' r
B -
. e '.
:',\ .,
285/16.8
I /L g
-~-~-~-- -,0.498
0.75I ca/H
(Table 5-14)
(0.75) d62;15.167)
. C2 - 4.65
',..\.
t,
~-
El ca C2
H3
'
, (Table 5-14)
[1 + (0.7 -O.lB) (n'l)]
(30) (10)3 (702) (4.65) [1 + 0.7(3)]

- 50.2 k/in
KL,- 0.55 (1 - 0.25B) - 0,55
(Equation 5-51)
."
.'. '
Calculate dead weight, W:
.,
W - b[(4Lwdr) + (1/3) (Hwdw)] + (35 x 66)

. + 1/3 (15.167) [(3 x 61) + (2 x 74)] - 20,548 1b
me - Wig - 20,548/32.2
638 1b-sec 2/ft - 638 x 10 6 1b-ms 2/ft
TN - 2n[me/KKL]1/2
(Equation 5-50)
- 2rr[,(638'x 1-9 6 ) / ( 50 . 2 x_12 ~.103 x 0.55)1/2 - 276 ms
T/T N - 78/276 - 0.283
'
5A-43
..
,P/Ru - 1.6
~
- Xm/XE -
1.40
(Figure 3-64a)
2.32 x 3.83 x 15.167

XE - R,,/KE - awH/KE - - - - - - - - - - 2.68 inches
50.2
(Equation 5-52 and 5-53)
Xm-
5 - 1.40 x 2.68 - 3.75 inches

.;
(Equation 5-54)
5 - 3.75/(15.167) (12)H,- 0.0206H - H/48.5

Step 7.
Check deflection of possible local mechanisms.

a.
Roof girder mechanism (investigate W12 x 35 from,Step 5)

(Equation 5-15)
For an elasto-plastic response, take the average-load-mass factor

for the plastic and,elastic response, or:,
KLM - (0.77 - 0.66)/2 - 0.715
(Table 3-12)
. . m - 0.715 x Wig
w - (13.5 x 17) + 36 - 265 lb/ft

W - w x L - 265 X 16.5 - 4372 lb.
mE - 0.715 x 4372/368 ~ 8.1 1b-sec 2/in,
KE - 307 EI/L 3
(Table 3-8)
307 (30) (10 6) (285)

.' . K
- ---------'---
332,000 1b/in. '
(16.5 x 12)3
TN - 2" (8.1/332,000)1/2 x 1,000
- 31.0 ms
5A-44 .
TH 5-1300/NAVF"C,P-397/AFR 88-22
T/T N - 78/31.0 - 2.52
Ru - 16~/L - (16 x 130)/16,5,- 126 kips
(Table 5-13)
P - pbL - (2.5) (17) (144) (16.5)/1,000 - 101 kips

P/Ru - 101/126.-'0.80
~
(Figure 3-64a)
Xm/XE - 1.80
:; ; 1.
.. .s
Check end rotation of girder.

XE - Ru/KE - 126/332 - 0.380 inch
Xm - 1.80 x 0.380 - 0.69 inch
Xm/(L/2) - 0.69/(8.25) (12) - 0.069-tim
e
b.
-0.40' < 1
..
O.K.
e.
Exterior column mechanism (investigate W14 x 74 from Step

5).
\(Equation 5 -15)
TN - 21r (me/KE) 1/2 ".'

0.78
"
+' 0.66
s .,:
.(Tab1e 3-12)
- 0.72 wig
w - (16.5 x 17) + 74 - 354 1b/ft

W - 354 x 15.167 - 5369 1b
Me - 0.72 (5369)/386'- 10.0 1b-sec 2/in.
'KE - 160 EI/L4
(Table 3-8)
(160) (30) (10) (796)

", (1.82)3
5A-45
632,000 1b/in
-.

TN - 2ff(lO.0/632.000)1/2 x .1000 -.25:0ms'
T/TN -,78/25.0 -3.12
4~(2C
. .4 (130) [.(2 x 3.5) + I']
+1)
R,,-
275 kips
H
-' -
15.167'
.', .
(Table 5 -13)
-',".. r" -
. ~J
",
P - (2.32) (7.65/1.25) (15.167) - 215 kips

?
,.'
.'l
.'~
P/R" - 215/275 - 0.78..

~
- x.,/X
, E-
1.80
(Figure 3-64a)
. '~ .
Check end rotation of columns.

,-
~E
e,
- R,,/K - 275/632 - 0.435 inch

-\
x., -
'.';"<
~tiL;o!
1.80 x 0.435 - 0.78 inch
:_""~/(L/2) - 0.78/(7.58) (12) "'0'.0086 .. tan
Step 8.
Summary:
. ,.'
0.49'" <'!l'
O.K.
)':
. The deflections of the local mechanisms are within the criteria.

The sidesway defle~tion is acceptable.
The member sizes to be used in a computer analysis are as, follows:
.
.
Member
~
t;
Size
,W12 x 35
.. '-
.'
Problem 5A-7
Problem:
W14 x 61
W14 x 74
-
.,
.\
, '.
Design of Doors for Pressure-Time Loading
Design a steel-plate blast door subjected to a pressure-time

loading.
5A-46
TH 5-1300/NAVFACP-397/AFR 88-22
Procedure:
Step 1.
Establish the design parameters

a.
Pressure-time load
b.
Design criteria: Establish support rotation, em~x' and

whether seals and rebound mechanisms are ,req~ired.
c.
Structural configuration of the door including geometry and

support conditions
d. '
Properties' of steel used:

Minimum yield strength, f y' for door components (Table 5-1)
Dynamic incte~se'factor, c(Table 5-2)
Step 2.
Select the thickness of the plate.
Step 3.
Calculate the elastic section modulus, S, and the plastic section

modulus, Z, of the plate.
Step 4.
Calculate the design plastic moment, ~, of the plate (equation

5-7) .
Step 5.
Compute the ultimate dynamic shear, Vp (equation 5'16).
Step 6.
Calculate maximum support shear, V, using a dynamic load factor of

1:'25 and determine VfVp' If VfVp. is Le'ss 'than 0.67, use the
plastic design' moment as computea in Step 4 (Section 5-31). If
VfVp is greater than 0.67, use Equation 5-23 to calculate the'
effective ~.
Step 7.
Calculate the ultimate unit resistance of the section'(Table 3-1),

using the equivalent plastic moment as obtained in ~tep 4 and a
dynamic load. factor of 1.25.
Step 8.
Determine"the moment of inertia of the plate s ec t.Lon ,

'J
Step 9.
Compute the equivalent elastic unit stiffness, KE, of the plate

section (Table 3-'8).
"
Step 10.
Calculate the equivalent elastic deflection, XE; of the plate as

given by XE - ru/KE'
'
Step 11.
Determine the load-mass factor KLM and ,compute the effective unit
mass, me'
5A-47
'j
TK
S-130q/NAVFAC,P~397/AF~
Step 12.
Step 13.
88-22 .
Compute the natural period of vibration, TN'
.,
Determine the door plate response using the ,values of P/ru and
Determine Xm/XE and
T/T N and the response charts of Chapter 3.

TE
Step 14.
. Determine the 'support rotation,

,
Tan S - (Xm) I (LIZ)
Comp are-B with the design
Step i
s,
crite:ri'ii;~f'step
lb.
Determine the strain rate, E, using"e'quation'S"l. Determine the

dynamic increase factor using figure S-2 and compare with the DIF
selected in Step ld.
If the criteria of Step 1 is
with a new plate thickness.
n~t
'I
satisfied, repeat Steps 2 to lS

'
Step 16.
Design supporting flexural element considering composite action

with the plate (if so constructed).
Step 17.
Calculate elastic and plastic section moduli of the co~bined

section.
'v
Step 18.
Follow the design procedure for a flexural element as described in

Section S A - l . "
..
Example'SA-7 (a)
Design of'~ Blast Door for Pressur~-T1me ,Loading
..
'
Required:
Design a do~ble-lea~, built-up door (6 ft by 8 ft) for the given

Step l. _
Giver:
a.
'Pressure- time loading (Figure SA-7)
b.
Design criteria: ,This door is to protect personnel from

Leakage into the structure is permitted
but the maximum end rotation of any member is limited to 2'
since panic hardwar~ 'must'be operable after an accidental
explosion.
'
'e~terior loading.
c.
Structural configuration (Figure SA-i)
NOTE:.
" . This type of door configuration is suitable 'for' low-pressure
range applications.
d.
Steel used:
A36
SA-48
TIl 5-1300/NAVFAC,P-397/AFR88-22
--DETAIL, ' ,
SECTION;-,, -':' ,:", ,"
DETAIL
DOUBLE LEAF BL,AST DOOR
- '; l
14.8 psi
/I)
DOOR HEIGHT = 8'-0'
./1)
a::
lL
13ms
TIME
Figure 5A-7(a)
Door configuration and loading, Example 5A-7(a)
Yield strength, f y - 36 ksi

,
(Table 5-1)
Dynamic increase factor, c - 1.29
(Table 5-2)
Average yield strength increase factor, a - 1.1

(Se c t LonvS-12.1)
Hence, the dynamic design stress,

"
f ds - 1.1 x 1.29 x 36
51.1 ksi
(Equation 5-2)
and the dynamic yield stress in shear,

f dv - 0,55 f ds - 0.55 x 51.1 - 28.1 ksi
(Equat'ion 5-4)
Step 2.
Assume a plate ,thickness: ot'5/8 inch.
Step 3.
Determine the elastic and plastic section moduli (per unit width).
5A-49 '
'
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC
P~397/AFa
bd2
--6bd 2
88-22
1
(5/8)2
1 x (5/8)2
Z---4
Step 4.
Calculate the design plastic moment,
~:
~ - f ds (S + Z)/2 - 51.1 [(6.515 x "10- 2)
(Equation 5-7)
51.1 x8.14 x 10- 2 - 4.16 in:k/in

Step 5.
Calculate the dynamic ultimate shear capacity, Vp ' for a I-inch

width.
Vp - fdvAw Step 6.
28.1 x 1 x 5/8 - 17.56 kips/in
(Equation 5-16)
Evaluate the support shear and check the plate capacity. Assume
DLF - 1.25
v-
1.25 x 14.8 x 36 x 1
DLF x P x L/2 - - - - - - - - - - - - 333 Ib/in - 0.333 kip/in
2
V/Vp - 0.333/13.61 - 0.0245 < 0.67
(Section 5-31)
No reduction in equivalent plastic moment is necessary.

NOTE:
When actual DLF is determined, reconsioer Step 6.
Step 7.
Calculate the ultimate unit resistance, r u' (assuming the plate to

be simply-supported at both ends).
8 x 4.16 x 10 3
25.7 psi
Step 8.
Compute the moment of inertia, I, for a I-inch width.

bd 3
1 x (5/8)3
1- - - -
12
12
SA-50
(Table 3-1)
TIl 5-1300/NAVFAC P.-397/AFR'Ssc22
Step 9.
Calculate the equivalent elastic stiffness, KE.
,
384 x 29 x 106 x .02035
KE - 384EI/5bL4 -
27.0 psi/in
(Table 3-8)
5 x 1 x (36)4,
Determine the equivalent elastic deflection, XE .
Step 10.
0.95: inch
Calculate the effective mass of element.
Step 11.
a.
KLM (average.e1astic and plastic)

- (0.78 + 0.66)/2 - 0.72
b.
Unit mass of element, m

'",_ 5/8 x 'l'x "1 x .490 x 10 6.
m - wig - 458.0 psi-ms 2/in
... .:. ,1,728 x 32:2 x 12,
'.
1" ,
c.
Effective unit of mass of element, me

'"
'I, '
- KLMm - 0.72 x 458.0
.:
330 psi-ms 2/in

Step 12.
Calculate the natural period of vibration, TN'

t
'
Step 13.
.,
-,
Determine the door response'. '

Peak overpressure',
"! -\
P - 14.8 'psi .. ~
..
Peak re s t s cancev '..:.'
Duration
.1
.... ..
-13.0ms
'
22:ms
Natural period of vibration
.,
P/r u - 14.8/25.7 - 0.58

13.0/22.0:~'0~59
..'
From Figure' 3:64a o f Chapter' 3, .
.''::'
':,/
...
5A-51~,.
,",
. '.f
TN 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22.
Xm/XE < 1
Since the response is elastic, determine theDLF from Figure 3-49
of Chapter 3.
,.,
DLF - 1.3 for T/T N - 0.59

Step 14.
.,
Determine the.support rotation.

1. 3 x 14. 8 x O.95
Xu. - - - - - - - - - - 0.713 inch, '"
25.7
tan
Step 15.
e - Xu./(L/2) e - 2.27' > 2'
0.713/(36/2) - 0.0396. ,
N.C.
Evaluate the selection of-the dynamic increase factor.

Since this is an elastic response, use ,figure 3 -49(b) of Chapter 3
to determine t m. For T/T N - 0.59, tm/T - 0.7 and t m - 9.1 ms.
The strain rate is:
-, (Equation 5 -1)
Since the response is elastic,
0:713
51.1
f ds - 51.1 x
x---
38.4 ksi
0.95
0.0091 sec.
Hence,
..
" - 38.4/29.6 ,x 10 3 x 0.0091 - .142 in/in/sec

DIF - 1.31.
1.29 is acceptable.
Usingfigure\5~2,
.'
The preliminarY'selection of DIF -
Since the rotation criterion is not satisfied, change the thickness of the plate and repeat the. procedure. ~epeating these
calculations, it can be shown that a 3/4-inch plate satisfies the
requirements.
Step 16.
Design of the supporting flexural element.
- ,
Assume an angle L4 x 3 x 1/2 andattached to the plate as shown in

Figure 5A-7(b) .
Determine the effective width of plate which acts in conjunction
with the angle
5A-52 - .. :::
TK 5-1300/NAVFAC~PC397/AFR 88-22
(Section 5-24)
... ~
where b f / 2 is the half width of the outstanding ,flange or overhang

and tf is the'thickness of the, plate.
With tf ... 3/4'.inch, ,bf/2 5 8.5.x 3/4"
i. e . , 6.38 inches
Use overhang
of 6 inches:.'"",
,
.'
Hence, the effective width - 6 + 2 - 8 ihches.
with plate is shoWn in F1:gure' 5A-7(b)'.
The:angle together
Step 17.
Calculate the elastic and plastic .section '\noduli of the combined

section.
..
,.' Let Y be. the distance of. c. g. of'the comb Ined-esec't fon from the
outside edge of the plate as shown in Figure 5A-7(br.. therefore
(8
3/10 x 3/8) + .(4,+ 3/4 -,1.33) x 3.25
"
1.445,cinches
(8 x 3/4) + 3.25
-,
Let yp be the distance to the N.A. of the
full plasticity.
. .
1
yp - - -
section for
<
"
[(8 x 3/4) + 3.25J - 0.578 inch
'.
8 x 2 ..
"
8 x (3/4)3
I
combi~ed
+ 8 x 3/4 x (1.45 - 3/8)2
.'
,
','
12
~.:t
1.33 _ '1.4:5)2 _
, , + 5.05 + 3.25 (4 + 3/4

Hence, Smin - 24.881/(4:75
-~t881 i~4 \
1:445) - 7.54 in 3
Z - 8 (0.578)2;2+.8 (OJ5
+ 3.25(4.75 - 1.33 - 0.578)
SA-53, .
10.69 in 3
. ,.
,i
.'
TM 5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR ,88-22',
,,'w
Figure 5A-7(b)
:1.
I . ' ~,
'}
'J':' '.'
I.
j'
,t ',.
'
'
Detarl' of composite angle/plate.supporting.eiement; Example

SA-7(b) ..'
Step 18,
"'J
;,'
I,
Follow the design procedure for the'composite element:~sing steps

4 .t.hrough 13, - Calculate the-des rgn- plastic moment' ~ of the
supporting flexural element, .
>" r
- '
~
- 51,1 (7,54 +
.
10,6~)/2
- 465,8 in-kips
~."
"11
(Equation 5- 7)
~"
Calculate the ultimate dynamic shear capacity,;Vp;'

Vp - fdA - 28,1 (4,0 - 1/2) 1/2 -49.2 kips
(Equation 5-16)
,'" ...
Calculate support shear and check shear .capac Lty . " '
L - 8'-0" - 96 inches
t
".
Vp-, (14.8 x 36/2 x 96)/2

-
I'
1:
.:.
12,7901b
12.79 kips < V

O.K.
(
(Section 5-23)
Calculate the ultimate .ul1it resistance, r u . ..:~.
Assuming the angle to be simply supported at .,b'!th ends:' c"

.
5A-54,.,',
"
TK 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

r u - 8~/L2 - (8 x 465.8 x 1,000)/(96),2 - 405 1b/in
Calculate the unit elastic stiffness, KE .
384 x 29 x 10 6 x 24.881
4
K E - 384EI/5L - - - - - - - , . . . . - - - - - 5 x (96)4
(Table 3-1)
'.
,652.5"'lb/in 2
(Table 3-8)
Determine the equivalent elastic deflection; XE .
XE - ru/KE - 405/652.5 - 0.620 inch

Calculate the effective mass of the element.
KIH
0.72
490
11.1
3
w - --- + -- x 18 x - - - (0.925 + 3.825) - 4.750 1b/in
12
1,728
4
Effective unit mass of element,
4.75 x 10 6
me - 0.72 x
- 0.89 x 104 1b-ms 2/in2
32.2 x 12
TN - 2n[(89 x 102)/652.5]1/2 -23.2 ms
(Figure 3-64a)
Determine the response parameters,"
p'- 14.8 x 36/2'~ 266.5 1b/in
Peak overpressure
Peak resistance
I.
r u - 405'lb/in
T -13.0 ma
Duration
Natural period of vibration,
TN - 23.2 ma
P/ru - 266.5/405 - 0.658

~' .T/T
N~
13/23: 2 - 0.56
5A-55
.'
From Figure 3-64a,
.
From Figure 3-49 for. T/TN. - 0.56,.
DLF - 1.28
1.28 x 14.8.x 36/2
Hence,
Xm -
0.522 'in
652.5
tan
ee -
Xm/(L/2) - 0.522/48 - 0.0109

0.69
< 2
O.K.
Check stresses at the connecting point.
er - My/I - 355 x 103' x (1.445 - 0,75)/24.881

- 9,900 ps i (M
x
X
0.522,
------ x 405 - 341)
0.62
,
. l
'I" -
12.79 x 103 x 8 x 3/4 x (1.445 - 0.75/2)

VQ/lb - -------------.,....----------.....,.,,---------.,....------.,
24.881 x 1/2
5,}2l psi
..
Effective stress at the section 7" (72+ .. '1"2 )1/2
.!
~ 103 x (9.9 2 + 5.321 2 )1/2 _ 11,'239 p~i < 39.600 ~s~ . .O.K.
Example 5A-7 (b)
Design of a,Plate Blast Door for Pressure-Time Loading
Required:
Design a single-leaf,door. (4 ft by 7 ft) for the given 4 p r e s s u r e time loading.
Step 1.
Given:
a.
Pressure-time loading [figure5A:7. (c)]
"...
b.
"
Design criteria: Door shall be designed to contain blast

pressures from an internal explosion. Gasket and 'reversal
SA-56
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC p C 3 9 7/AFR88-22 '
;.>,
.'
1.5 Sym~'.abt. 't. ,."
','
- .. 'rI-....Lt
';
.-.
---,,
.,..
___ I
" ...
4'-0'
1 Bearing
PLAN / SECTION
Legend:
~
,...'
- A
B
C
D
E
F
G
Steel -frame- embedded in concrete

Steel sub-frame
r
Reversal bolt, housing
Reversal' bolt '
Blast door plate
Continuous gasket
Continuous bearing block
/-
a:
:::J
III 1100,Ill 'psi
~')
,<
' c
a:
ll.
, .
"
I'
.
"
100 psi
I
TIME
1,Oms
Figure 5A-7(c)Door configuration and loading, Example 5A-7(b)

SA-57
TK S-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR
88~22:
mechanisms shall
limi ted to 3
be provided.
Support rotation shall be
Str~ctural configuration [see figure 5A7 (c)l
c.
Note: This type of door is suitable for high pressure range

applications.
d.
Steel used:
ASTM A588
.Yield strength, f - 50 ksi

Dynamic increase ~ctor,' c - 1.24
(Table ,51)
(preliminary, Table 52)
Average strength increase factor, a -
1.~
(Section 5-12.1)
Hence, the dynamic design stress,

f ds - 1.,1 x 1. 24 x 50 - '68.2 ksi
(Equation 5,2)
Note:
It is assumed, for the limited design rotation of 3
'that
< 10, and, therefore, that equation 5-3 does not govern .
0
The dynamic design stress in shear

f dv - 0.55 f ds - 37.5 ksi
(Equation 5-4)
Step 2."
Assume a plate thickness of 2 inches, .
Step 3.
Determine the elastic and plastic section moduli (per unit width)
bd 2
---
1 (2)2
0.667 in 3iiri
6
,
bd 2
1 (2)2
Z -
Step 4.
"
,.'
3
.1.0 in lin
d '
Calculate the design plastic moment,

~ - f ds (S +
Step 5.
,; t
Z)/2.- 68.2 (0.667.+ 1.0)/2 - 56.8 in-k/in

(Equation 5-7)
Calculate the dynamic ultimate shear capacity, Vp' for a 1-inch

width.
SA-58

75.0 kips/in
Step 6.
(Equation 5-16)
Evaluate the support shear and check the plate shear capacity.
Example 5A-7(b)
Assume DLF - 1.0
(Table 5-4)
For simplicity, assume the plate is a one-way member, hence:
v - DLF
x P x L/2 - 1.0 x 1100 x 48/2 - 26,400 Ib/in
- 26.4 kips/in
26.4/75. - 0.352 < 0.67
V/Vp -
(Section 5-31)
No reduction in equivalent plastic moment is necessary.

Step 7.
Calculate the ultimate unit resistance, r u '

For a plate, simply-supported on four sides (direct load)
(Table 3-2)
where MHP -
and MHN - 0 and
L
0.35
for ---
L
thus,
(Figure 3-17)
- 329 psi
Compute the moment of inertia, I, for a I-inch width

bd 3
I - ----12
Step 9.
1.75
X - 0.35 x 12 x 7 - 29.4 in
r u - 5 x 56.8/(29.4)2
Step 8.
1 x 23
-
- 0.667 in4/in
12
Calculate the equivalent elastic stiffness, KE

(Figure 3-36)
5A-59
where
y - 0.0083
D - EI(b (1 -
(for H/L - 0.57)

v 2)
(Equation 3-33)
D - 29.6 x 10 6 x 0.667/1 (1 - .3 2) - 2.17 x 10 7

KE - 2.17 x 10 7/0.0083 x 48 4 - 492.psi/in
Step 10.
Step 11.
Calculate the effective mass of the element

a.
KLM (average elastic and plastic)

- (0.78 + 0.66)/2 - 0.72
b.
Unit mass of element,

2 x 1 x 1 x 490 x 10 6
psi-ms 2
- 1,468
m - wig 1,728 x 32.2 x 12

c.
in
Effective unit mass of element, me

me - KLM x m - 0.72 x 1,468 - 1,057 ----in
Step 12.
Calculate the natural period of vibration, TN

TN - 2n (1,057/492)1/2 - 9.2 ms
Step 13.
Determine the door plate response for:

P/ru - 1100/329 - 3.34
T/T N - 1.0/9.2 - 0.109
(Figure 3-62, Region C)
Cl - 100/1100 - 0.091
SA-50

C2 > 1000
Using Figure 3-253,
- 1.5
Xm Step 14.
Determine the support rotation.
eStep 15.
1.5 x 0.669 - 1.00 in
tan- l (1/24) - 2.39 < 3
Evaluate the selection of the dynamic increase factor.

(Equation 5-1)
fds/Est E
tE/T - 1.8,
-
(Figure 3-253)
t E - 1.8 ms
68.2/29.6 x 10 3 x .0018 - 1.28 in./in./sec.
DIF - 1. 3
(figure 5-2, average of A36 and A5l4)
Initial selection of DIF - 1.24 is adequate.

Since the support rotation criteria has been satisfied and the
preliminary selection of the DIF is acceptable, a 2 inch thick
plate is used in design.
Steps 15
through
18
These steps are bypassed since the door plate has no stiffening
elements.
Problem 5A-8
Problem:
Design of Doubly Symmetric Beams Subjected to Inclined

Pressure-Time Loading
Design a purl in or girt as a flexural member which is subjected to

a transverse pressure-time load acting in a plane other than a
principal plane.
Procedure:
Step 1.
Establish the design parameters.
5A-6l
TIl: 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
a.
Pressure-time load
b.
Angle of inclination of the load with respect to the

vertical axis of the section
c.
Design criteria:
d.
Member spacing, b
e.
Type and properties of steel used:
Maximum support rotation limited to 2.
Minimum yield strength for the section (Table 5-1)

Dynamic increase factor, c (Table 5-2)
Step 2.
Preliminary sizing of the beam.

a.
Determine the equivalent static load, w, using a preliminary

dynamic load factor equal to 1.0.
w-l.Oxpxb
b.
Using the approPriate resistance formula from Table 3-1 and

the equivalent static load derived in Step 2a, determine the
required ~.
c.
Determine the required section properties using equation 57. Select a larger section since the member is subjected to
unsymmetrical bending.
Note that for a load inclination of 10, it is necessary to
increase the required average section modulus, (1/2) (S +
Z), by 40 percent.
Step 3.
Check local buckling of the member (Section 5-24).
Step 4.
Calculate the inclination of the neutral axis (equation 5-24).
Step 5.
Calculate the elastic and plastic section moduli of the section

(equation 5-25).
Step 6.
Compute the design plastic moment,
Step 7.
Calculate ultimate unit resistance, r u' of the member.
Step 8.
Calculate elastic deflection, 0 (Section 5-32.3).
Step 9.
Determine the equivalent elastic unit stiffness, KE, of the beam

section using 0 from Step 8.
Step 10.
Compute the equivalent elastic deflection, XE, of the member as

given by XE - ru/KE.
5A-62
~'
(equation 5-6).
TM 5l300/NAVFAC,P.397/AFR 88-22,
Step 11.
Determine the load-mass factor, KLM, and obtain the effective unit
mass, ~~,' of the element.
Step 12.
Evaluate the natural period of v,ibration, TN'
Step 13.
Determine the dynamic response of the beam. Evaluate P/r u and

T/TN, usin~ the respons~ charts of Chapter 3 to obtain ~/XE and
e. Compare with, criteria.
Step 14.
Determine the ultimate ,dynamic shear capacity, ~p" (eq~ation 5-16)

, and maximum support shear, V, using, Table 3-9 of Chapter 3 'and
check adequacy.
Example 5A-8
Design an I-Shaped Beam for Unsymmetrical Bending Due to

Inclined Pressure-Time Loading
Required:
Design a simply-supported I-shaped beam subjected to a pressuretime loading actipg at an angle of 10', with, respect to the
principal vertical plane of the beam. This beam is part of a
structure designed to protect personnel .
Step 1.
Given:
a.
Pressure-time loading [figure 5A-8 (a)]'
b.
Design criteria:
The structure is to be designed for more
than one "shot."
A maximum end rotation - 1, is therefore
"assigned;
c.
Structural configuration [figure 5A-8(a)]
d.
Steel used:
A36
Yield strength, f y - 36 ksi
(Table 5-1)
Dynamic increase factor, c - 1.29
(Table 5-2)
. '-,
Average yield strength increase factor, a - 1.1
(Section 5-
12.1)
Dynamic design strength, f ds - 1.1 x 1.29 x 36 - 51.1 ksi
. (equation 5-2)
Dynamic yielding stress in shear, f dv
51.1 - 28.1 ksi
0.55 f ds - 0.55 x
(equation 5-4)
Modulus of elasticity, E - 29,000,000 psi

Step 2.
Preliminary sizing of the member.

a.
Determine equivalent static, load.
5A-63
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

Se1ectDLF - 1. 2
(Section 5-22.3)
w - 1.25 x 4.5 x 4.5 x 144/1,000
3.65 k/ft
y
IP /TRANSVER,SE
17 LOAD
.
19'-0'
,jE-x
w = 4.8 psf
(excluding beam weight
: :
Spacing: b = 4.5'
.,
,
4.5 psi
;:)
II:
~:--.
II. L -
20ms
TIME
Figure 5A-8(a)
b.
.,'.
Beam configuration and loading,
Determine minimum
:s.:
165 k-ft'
(Table 3-1)
Selection of a member.
For a load acting in the plane of the web,
(S + Z)
2Mp/fds
(2 x 165 x 12)/51.1
(S + Z) - 77.5 in 3
Example 5A-8(a)
required-~
~ - (wL 2)/8 - (3.65 x 19 2)/8

c.
(S +'Z) required
1.4 x
n.5 - 109 in 3
.,
5A-64
(Equation 5-7)
TH 5:1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR'88-22
(S + Z) - 116.1 in 3, Ix - 385 in4

I y - 26.7'in4
Check against local buckling ..
Step 3.
For W14 x 38,
d/~ - 45.5 < (412 / (36)1/2) (1
1.4 x P/Py) - 68.66

O.K .
. (Equation 5-17)
O.K.
(Section 5-24)
Inclination of elastic and plastic neutral axes with respect to

the x-axis.
Step 4.
','
"j
tan a ~ (Ix/l y) tan - (385/26~7) tan 10

a
- 2.546
'(Equation 5-24)
- 68.5
Calculate the.equivalent elastic section modulus.

S - (SxSy)/(SyCOS
+ Sxsin
) ,
Sx - 54.6 in 3, Sy - 7.88 in 3, '- 10

sin 10 -
0.174,
cos 10 - 0:985
S - (54.6) (7.881/(7.88 x 0.985 + 54.7 x 0.174) - 24.9 in 3

Calculate the plastic section modulus, oZ.
Step 5.
(Equation 5-6)
Z - Acml +,Atm2
Ac - At - A/2 - 11.2/2 - 5.6 in 2
.:
.,'"
,
"
"
-.
5A-65 , '
,',
TK S-1300/NAVFACP-397/AFR 88,22
Let
be the distance of the e.g. of the area of cross section in
compression from origin as.shown in Figure.5A-S (b).
1
y - --
14.10
.
6.770 x 0.5i5 x ( - - -
5.6
1
+ - (14.10
2
1
14.10
x- (-2
2
0.515
2
2 x 0.515) x 0.310
5.42 inches
0.515)]
m1 - m2 - y sin a - 5.42 sin 6S 30' -
5.05 inches
Z - 2Acm1- 11.2 x 5.05 - 56.5 in3
TRANSVERSE LOAD
.
., .
...
in
-r---L.x
---- Elastic anCl Plastic

Neutral Axis
Thro.ugh the Centroid
I/)
ci
~10
6.770
Figure 5A-S(b)
Step 6.
Loading on beam section, Examp Le 5A-S(b)
Determine design plastic moment'.
'1> -
'1>:: .
fds(S + Z)/2 - 51.1(24.9 + 56.5)/2
. SA-66
(Equation 5-7)
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC,-P-397/AFR '88-22
... 51.1 x 40.7 ,-,,2;080 in-kips ,-,
Step7.
'
Calculate u1 tim'!-te unit res Ls t.ance , 'ru''riJ - 8~/L2 - (8) (2;080) (1',000)/(19 x:12)2.- 320 1b/in
(Table 3-1) ,
Compute elastic deflection, G.

.,
2
G - [(Gx + G 2)J1/2
Step 8.
."
(Section 5-32.3)
5w cost/) L4
Gy - -
- ,
384El x
. , -e : .' <)
5w sinrtl L4
, J'
",.,
Gx ' -,' ~~~~-
384El y
w -
equivalent static load + dead load

(4.8 x 4.5)
+ 38
2.92 +
e: ,kips/ft"
.,..; 2.94 kips/ft
1,000
I,
G-
[,
Swcost/)L4 .]2
SwsinrtlL4 ]2
+
384El x
384El y
5wL4
.,
r
.
.'
'
'"
'
'-
.If,.;
',
-, : -
,.~
[(0.652)2 + (0.256)2 ]1/2-_ ,2..,08' 'inches '
38,400E
Step 9.
Calculate the equivalent elastic unit stiffness, KE .

2.94 x 1,000 x 1
12 x 2.085
. fj': .
,1l7.8'lb/in 2
-,
(Get w from 'Step 8)

Step 10.
Xi -
ru/KE - 320/117.8 - 2.72 inches
SA'-67;
-r
, I
'
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P"397/AFR' 88-22

Step 11.
Calculate the effective mass of the.e1ement, me'

Load-mass factor, KUC'
a.
1 .1
(Table 3,12) ,
KLM (average elastic:and plastic)

- (0.78 + 0.66)/2
b.
0.,72
Unit mass of element, m

[(4.5 x 4.8) + 38J x 10 6
m - wig - - - - - - - - - - - 32.2 x 12 x 12
c.
Effective unit mass of element, me
me - KLMm - 0.72 x 1,286 x 10 4 - 0.93 ~'l04 lb-ms 2/in2

Step 12.

TN - 21r '[('93 x 10 2 ) / 117 . 8 ]1/ 2 - 55.8 ms
Step 13.
(Section 5-22.2)
Determine the beam,response.

Peak overpressure
P - 4.5 x 4.5 x 12 - 243 lb/in
Peak resistance
Duration
r u - 320'lb/in
,
T - 20 ms
'
Natural period of vibration,
TN - 55.8 ms
P/ru - 243/320 - 0.7'6: '

T/TN - 20/55.8 - 0.358
From figure 3-64a
~/XE
< 1
"
From figure 3-49, for T/T N - 0.358"
5A-68
TK 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
DLF - -0.97
Hence, Xm - 0.97 x 4.5 x 4.5 x 12/117.8 - 2.0 in
Find end rotation,
tan
Step 14.
e.
e-
Xm/(L/2) - 2.0/[(19 x 12)/2] - 0.0175
e -
1~0'
O.K.
Calculate the dynamic ultimate shear capacity,. Vp' and check for
adequacy.
Vp - fdvAw - 28.1 (14.10 - 2 x 0.515) (0.310) - 113.9 kips
(Equation 5-16)
v-
DLF x Px bx L/2
- 0.97 x.4.5 x 4.5 x 19 x 144/(2 x 1,000)

- 26.9 kips < 89.2 kips < Vp
O.K.
(Table 3-9)
TN 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
APPENDIX 5B
LIST OF SYMBOLS
TK 5-l300/NAVFAC,P-397/AFR 88-22
yie~d,stress
Area of cross section (in 2 )
Ab
Area of bracing member (in 2 )
increase factor
,.
Area of cross section in compression (in 2 )

Area of cross section in tension (in 2 )
j'
Width of tributary loaded area (ft)
bf
Flange width (in)
Tributary width for horizontal loading (ft)
bv
Tributary width for vertical io~ding (ft)
c,DIF (1)
(2)
Dynamic increase factor

Distance from neutral axis to extreme
flexure (in)
,
.
fibe~
of cross-section in
C,Cl
Coefficients indicating relative column to girder moment capacity

(Section 5-42.1)
Cb
Bending coefficient defined in. Section 1.5.1.4.5 of the AISC

Specification
Cc
Column slenderness ratio indicating the transition from elastic to

inelastic buckling
Coefficients applied to the bending terms in interaction
. . formula
(AISC Specification Section 1.6.1)
C2
Coe'fficlent in approximate exp r as s Lon for sidesway stiffness factor

(Table
5-14)
- ". -. r
Coefficient indicating relative girder to columri stiffness (Table 5-14)
DLF
Dynamic load factor
(1)
(2)
E
,f
Web depth (in)

Diameter of cylindrical
"
port~on
Young's modulus of elasticity (psi)

(1)
(2)
Maximum bending stress (psi)

Shape factor, S/Z
5B-l
of fragment, in.
Axial stress permitted in the absence of bending moment from Section 537.3 (psi)
Bending stress permitted in the absence of axial force (psi)
Web buckling stress (psi)
Maximum dynamic design stress for connections (psi)
Dynamic design stress for bending, tension and compression (psi)
Dynamic yielding shear stress (psi)
Dynamic ultimate stress (psi)
Dynamic yield stress (psi)
F'ex,F'ey
Euler buckling stresses
di~ided
by safety factor (psi)
FH
Horizontal component of force in bracing member. (lb)
Fs
Allowable static design stress f~r connections (psi)
fu
Ultimate tensile stress (psi)
fy
Minimum static yield stress (psi)
Acceleration due to gravity (386 in/sec 2)'
Story. height (ft)
Web depth for cold-formed, light gauge steel panel sections (in)
Moment of inertia (in4)

Average column. moment of inertia for single-story multi-bay frame(in 4)
Effective moment of inertia for cold-formed section at a service stress
of 20 ksi (in4 per foot width)_
Moment of inertia about the x-axis (in4)
-1
Moment of inertia abo~t the y-axis (in4)

.
(1)
(2)
.';
Effective length factor f~ra compression member

Stiffness factor for rigid single-stor~, multi-bay frame from
Table 5-14
Kb
Horizontal stiffness of diagonal bracing (lb/ft)
KE
Equivalent elastic stiffness (lb/in or psi/in)
5B-2
P-3~7/A~R
TH 5-l300/NAVFAC
K
L
Load factor
.,
.~
..:.
'
88-ZZ
,,
KUI
Load-mass factor
KM
Mass factor
(1)
(Z)
Distance between cross section braced against twist or lateral

displacement of compression flange or distance between points of lateral
support for beams or col~ns '
llr
Slenderness ratio
Ib
Actual unbraced length in the plane of bending (in)
lcr
Critical unbraced length (in)
Total effective mass (lb-msZ/in)
,.
Span length (ft, 01:", in),

Frame bay width (ft)'
"
"
"
."
"
Moments about the x- and y-axis that can be resisted by member in

the absence of. .;>xial load,
,,,
~
Design plastic moment capacity
Ml,MZ Design plastic moment capacities, (f Lgure s 5-6 and:S-lO)

~x'~y
Plastic bending moment capacities about .the x- and y-axes
~u
Ultimate dynamic moment capacity
~p
Ultimate positive moment capacity .f or :unit width of panel
~n
Ultimate ne gat.Lve-momerrtvcapac Lt.y for unit width of paneI:
"
Moment corresponding to first yield

m
(1)
(Z)
Unit mass of p'anel ,(psi'-msZ/-in),'

Number of braced bays in multi-bay frame
Eff~~U';,e ~n'it~~~s
>
"
: '.'
"
(psi-msZ/in)
Distance; from plastic neutral axis to the centro Ld of the .area in

compression in a fully plastic section (in)
,mZ
Distance from plastic neutral axis to the centroid of the area in

tension in a fully plastic section (in)
,
Bearing length at support for cold-formed steel panel (in)
Number of bays in multi-bay frame
(1)
Applied compressive load (lb)

5B-3 , '
.,
TH 5-l300/NAVFACP~397/AFR88'22"
(2)
Peak pressure of equivalent triangular loading function, (psi)

[when used with rul. or peak total blast load (lb) [when used with
Rul,
Euler buckling loads about the x- and y-axes

Ultimate capacity for dynamic axial load, Af
dy
(lb)
Ultimate axial compressive load (lb)

.
. ; - ,.
Ultimate capacity for, static aXial'load',Af
"
Ph
Reflected blast pressure on front wall (psi)
Pv
Blast overpressure on roof (psi)
(Lb):'
Ultimate support capacity (lb)

"
qh
Peak horizontal load on rigid frame (lb/ft)
qv
Peak vertical load on rigid frame (lb/ft)
Equivalent total horizontal static load on 'frame' (lb)
Ru
Ultimate total flexural resistance (lb)

Radius of gyration of bracing member ,(in)
rT
Radius of gyration, equation 5-22 (in)
ru
Ultimate unit flexural resistance (psi)
rx,r y Radii of gyration' about 'the x- and y-axes"(in)

r
Required resistance for elastic behavior in rebound (jJsi)
Elastic section modulus (in 3,)

Elastic section modulus about the x- ,and y-axes (in 3 )
,
Effective section modulus of cold-formed' section for positive moments

(in 3 )
Effective 'section modulus of cold-formed ,section"for negative ,moments
(in 3 )
T
Load duration (sec)

Natural period of vibration (sec)
tE
(1)
(2)
Thickness of plate element (in)'

Thickness of panel section (in)
Time to yield (sec)

5B-4
","
TK 5-i300/NAVFAC, P-397/AFR 88 c22'

Flange thickness (in)
"
Time to maximum response '(sec)
t,.
Web thickness (in)
Support shear (lb)
Ultimate shear capacity (lb)
Vr
Residual velocity of fragment (fps)
Vs
Striking velocity of fragments, (fps)
'
Critical perforation velocity of fragment (fps)

II'
Total weight (lb)
We
Total concentrated load (lb)
WE
External work (lb-in)
Wf
Fragment weight (oz.)
WI
Internal work (lb-in)
(1)
(2)
(3 )
,.
Flat width of plate element (in)

Load per unit area (psi)
Load per unit length (lb/ft)
Xo
Deflection at design ductility ratio
XE
Equivalent elastic deflection (in)
Xm
Maximum deflection (in)
Depth of penetration of steel fragments (in)
Plastic section modulus (in 3 )
(~igure
5-12)
Zx,Zy Plastic section moduli about the x- and y-axes (in 3 )
(1)
(2)
(1)
(2)
(3)
Angle between the horizontal principal plane of the cross section

and the neutral axis (deg) ,
Ratio of horizontal to vertical loading on a frame
Base fixity factor (Table 5-14)
Support condition coefficient (Section 5-34.3)
Critical length for bracing correction factor (Section 5-26.3)
Angle between bracing member and a horizontal plane (deg)
(1)
(2)
'Total transverse elastic deflection (in)

Lateral (sidesway) deflection (in)
5B- 5 '
TK 5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88'122
Strain (in/in)
Average strain rate (in/in/sec)'
( 1)
(2)
"
Member end rotation (deg)

Plastic hinge rotation (deg)
,,,.,
8 max
Maximum permitted member end rotation
Ductility ratio
'"max
MaximJm permitted ductility ratio
</l
Angle between the plane of the load and the vertical principal plane of
the cross section '(deg)
,-
"l
,
It
,..
.'
';
"
,"
"
J,
"
...
.,
l~'
"
,
-:
"
"t
'J
, "
,;'
.'
,
,
t,
'-
5B-6 :' '
-.;
"'":'
r"
.-
,0,
.'.
"
t
f.
.'
t'
t
APPENDIX 5C
BIBLIOGRAPHY
TH
5-l300/NA~FAC,P-397/AFR
88-22
1.
Healey, J .', eJ: a1., Design of Steel ,Structures to Resist the Effects of
HE Expl~sions; by Ammann &'Whitney, Consulting Engineers, New York, New
York, Technical
Report 4837,
Picatinny
Arsenal,
Dover,
New Jersey,
""4
.
.,
.
,
August 1975.
",
."
'., ' ,
2.
Keenan, ~tL, T~ncreto I J., Mey,:rs,. G.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Joh:nson,. F., Hopk Lns , J.,
Nickerson, H. and Armstrong, 'W." NCEL Products Supporting DOD Revision

of NAVFAC 'P-397, ,Program No. ,Y0995-0l-003-20l, Technical Memorandum,
259lTM, sponsored by Naval Facilities Engineering Command,'~lexandria,
Virginia, ,and. Naval Civil Engineering Laboratory, Port .Hueneme, Ca I Lf ornt.a-, March 1983.' ' ..
Stea-: W., Ts~ng, G. and Kossover, D.. Nonlinear Analysis of Frame
Structures Subjected to Blast Overpressures, by Ammann & Whitney,
Consulting Engineers, New York, New York, Contractor Report ARLCD-CR77008, U.S. Army Research and Development Command, Large Caliber
Weapons Systems Laboratory, Dover, New Jersey, May 1977.
Stea, W., and Sock, F., Blast-resistant Capacities of Cold-formed Steel
Panels, by Ammann & Whitney, Consulting Engineers, New York, New York,
Contractor Report ARLCD-CR-8l00l, U.S. Army Research and Development
Command, Large Caliber Weapon Systems Laboratory, Dover, New Jersey, May
1981.
Stea, W., Dobbs, N. and Weissman, S., Blast Capacity Evaluation of Preengineered Building, by Ammann & Whitney, Consulting Engineers, New
York, New York, Contractor Report ARLCD-CR-79004, U.S. Army Research and
Development Command, Large Caliber Weapons Laboratory, Dover, New
Jersey, March 1979.
Healey, J., Weissman, S., Werner, H. and Dobbs, N., Primary Fragment
Characteristics and Impact Effects on Protective Barriers, by Ammann &
Whitney, Consulting Engineers, New York, New York, Technical Report
4903, Picatinny Arsenal, Dover, New Jersey, December 1975.
Manual of Steel Construction, Eighth Edition, American Institute of
Steel Construction, New York, New York, 1980.
Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural
Steel for BUildings and Commentary thereon, American Institute of Steel
Construction, New York, New York, 1978.
Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members and
Commentary thereon, American Iron and Steel Institute, New York, New
York 1968.
Design of Structures to Resist the Effects of Atomic Weapons, Department
of the Army Technical Manual TM 5-856-2, 3 and 4, Washington, D.C.,
August 1965.
Bleich, F., Buckling Strength of Metal Structures, McGraw-Hill, New
York, 1952.
Newmark, N.M, and Haltiwanger, J.D., Principles and Practices for Design
of Hardened Structures, Air Force Design Manual, Technical Documentary
Report Number AFSWC, TDR-62-l38, Air Force Special Weapons Center,
Kirtland Air Force Base, New Mexico, December 1962.
Seely, F.B., and Smith, J.O., Advanced Mechanics of Materials, Second
Edition, J. Wiley & Sons, New York, New York, '1961.
Bresler, B., et al., Design of Steel Structures, J. Wiley & Sons, New
York, New York, 1968.
Johnston, B.G., ed., Guide to Design Criteria for Metal Compression
Members, Second Edition, J. Wiley & Sons, New York, New York 1966.
McGuire, W., Steel Structures, Prentice Hall, Englewood, New Jersey,
1968.
5C-l
TK 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
Tall, L., et al., Structural Steei Design, Ronald Press, "New York, N~w
York, 1964.
Beedle, L. S., Plastic Design of'Steel Frames, J. Wiley & Sons, New York,
New York, 1958.
.
Hodge, P.G., Plastic Analysis of Structures, MCGraw-Hill, New York,
1959.
Massonet, C.E., and' Save, M.A:, Plastic Analysis and Design, Blaisdell,'
New York, New York, 1965.
Plastic Design in Steel, A Guide and Commentary, Second Edition, Joint
Committee of the Welding Research Council and the American Society of
Civil Engineers, ASCE, 1971.
'.
5C-2
"STRUCTURES TO RESIST THE EFFECTS OF ACCIDENTAL EXPLOSIONS"
CHAPTER 6. SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS IN

EXPLOSIVE FACILITY DESIGN
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC' P- 397/AFR88':22,
"
, CHAPTER 6',
1 -;
'SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONSIN EXPLOSIVE FACILITY DESIGN

".
...
INTRODUCTION
"
: 'J
6-1, Purpose
,,
"
'i
The
p~rpose
of this manual is to: present. methods of design for protective
";'
.. "
construction'used in facilities for development, .testing, production, storage,

maintenance', modification, Inspec t i on.: demilitarization, and disposal of "
L
6-2. Objective',
,'."
""

techniques whereby propagation of 'explosion (from one structure' or part of a
structure to another) .o r mass "detonation ,~an be -p r everrted and' to provide
protection for personnel and valuable ':equipment ..
(1)
Establish the blast load parameters required for design of protective' structures.
e, ,,".
(2)
Provide methods .fo r calculating the dynamic response of structural
elements including reinforcea concrete, and structural 'steel.
(3)
the required strength to z e s I's t; the applied blast' Lo'ads ,
(4)'
Establish guidelines' for siting explosive' facilities to obtain
'; maximum cost e f f'e'c t Lvene s s: in -hoth the planning 'and s t ruc t.ur a L
arrangements. providing closures', 'and preventing' 'damage to interij'
or portions of structures because of structural motion, shock, and

fragment .pe rfo r at.Lorr;
~
)'
6-3. Background
~.~
j' ..:
. '" .
"
For the first 60 years of the 20th ,century, criteria and methods based upon'
results' of catastrophic' events', were' used for the de s I'grr-of 'explosive facilities. The.vc r I t e r La -and .methods 'did' no r 'include a detailed 'or reliable quant Ltative basis".for assessing, the'''(jegree,,'of'prot'ection 'afforded by the protectIve
facility , I n ' the -La ce 1960' s -quantitative, procedures were set' forth in the
first edition'of the present ,manual~ ~Stiuctures to Resist the Effects of
Accidental "Explosions" .: This m"anual wa"s based on 'extensive -r e s e a r ch and
development programs which permitted a more reliable approach,to current and'
future design requirements,' Since the original publication, of' this manual" ,,'
more extensive testing and development programs have taken p Lace . : This
additional research included work with "materials other than reinforced con,
crete which was" the p r Lnc i pal'<coris t ruc t Lori material referenced in the i'nitial'
..
,".'"
", '/~
:': 1:',:
Modern methods for, the manufacture, and 'storage o~ explosive materials, which"
include many exotic chemicals, -Eue Ls, 'an'd p rcpe l l.ant s , require less space for'
a given quantity of explosive material ,than was p'r ev Lous Ly needed, > Such
-:
concentration of explosives increases the possibility of the propagation:of
6-1
"
TM 5-l300/NAVFAC p c 39 7/ AFR, 88 - 22
other explosive materials.) It is evident that a requirement for more accurate design techniques is essential. This manual describes rational design
methods to provide the'. required structural .p ro t.ec t Lorr. : "
.,'
,
6-4. Scope
.'
"
It is not the intent of this manual to establish safety criteria, Applicable

documents should be consulted for, this purpose. Response predictions for
" ;
In this manual' an effort is made ~p cover the more ,pt:obable design situations.
However, sufficient general information, qn pro,tective .de s Lgn. techniques has,,'
been included in order that application of , the basic theory can be made: to
situations other than those ~hich were fully considered. '
,
'r,
.,
.'
.~.
This manual is applicable to the design of protective -st.ruc tures subjected to

situations, the manual will apply for explosive quantities less than 25,000
situations such as far-' or Lnce rmed Lace-Yange effects'. For ,these latter cas e sf.,
the design procedures are 'applicable for explosive 'quantities in the order. o f.
500,000 pounds wh~ch is the m~ximum quantity of. high ,explosive approved ,for.
abovegr-ound s t.orage facilities .Ln the ,Oepa~tment,'of-De f'ens e manual, "Ammuri-rition and Explosives Safety Standards" ,DOD, 6055.9~S,TO.
Since tests were
primarily directed toward the response of structural steel and reinforced,
concrete elements to blast ove rp re ssures., this manual concentrates -on des Lgn -,
procedures and techniques for these ,materials. Howeve ri. this does, not imply.
that concrete and steel are,.the only useful materials .f'o r protective construction. Te s't s to establish the re sponse iof wO,od, brick, blocks, and plastics,. as.
well as the, blast attenuating ,and mass effects' .of soil are contemplated. .Theresults of these tests may require, at' 'a later date", the "supplementation, of'
..'
Other manual.s are available; to .,desigh:,protective. s t ructure s against .t.he
effects of high explosive or nuclear de t.ona t Loris-.' The procedures .Ln these"
manuals will quite often complement this manual ,and shoul.dibe 'consulted for
specific app Lfc at Lons.
,!~,
. ,
','
6-2
'j
'
'.
"
"
lfr
, :3"';
TK 5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22 -
Explosives Safety Board (DDESB). These programs ~re available through the
(1)

U.S. -Army Engineer
Post Office Box 631
Attn: WESKA
(2)

Commanding Officer
Attn: Code LSI
(3)


Ohio 45433
Attn: AFFDL/FBR
for review by DDESB and the above services. Upon concurrence of the revisions, the necessary changes will be made and notification of the changes will
6-5. Format
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
I
2
3
4
5
6
Introduction

Commonly accepted symbols are used as 'much as possible. However, protective
design involves many"different scientific and engineering fields, and, therefore, no attempt is made to standardize completely all the symbols used. Each
symbol is defined where it is first used, and in the list of symbols at the
6-3
1M 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

CHAPTER CONTENJS
6-6. General
This chapter contains procedures for the design of blast resistant structures
other than above ground, cast-in-place concrete or structural steel structures, as well as the design of other miscellaneous blas.t resistant components. Included herein is the design of reinforced and non-reinforced masonry
walls, recast elements both prestressed and conventionally reinforced.,.preengineered buildings, suppressive shielding, blast resistant windows,. underground structures, earth~covered archtype magazines, blast valves and. shock
isolation systems.
','
...
.,
...
6-4
..
TK 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
-MASONRY
.. j
6-7. Application
Masonry units are usedprimarily for.wall construction. These'units may. be
used for both exterior walls subj ected to blast overpressures' 'and interior
walls subjected to inertial effects due to building motions~,'Basicvariations
in wall configurations may be related t~ the type of masonry unit such as
brick, clay tile or solid and hollow concrete masonry'units (CM) , and.iche
manner in which these units' are laid (running bond, stack bond, etc,), the
number of wythes of units (single or double) ,<and -t.he basic lateral .Load 'carrying mechanism (reinforced or non-reinforced, one' or two-'way' elements) ..
..
"',
In addition to their inherent advantages with respect to fire protection",

acoustical and thermal insulation, structural mass and resistance to flying
debris, ma~onry walls when properly' designed and detailed can provide economical resistance'to relatively low blast pressures, However, the limitation on
their application includes a limited' capability for large deformations;';'
reduced capacity in rebound due to tensile cracking in the primary phase of
the response as well 'as, 'the limitations on ,the -amount; and type' of reinforcementwhich 'can be provided,' Because of 'these' limitations, masonry construc:
tion in this Manual is ,limited to concrete ma-sonry unit '(CM) walls' placed in a
running bond and with single or multiple wythes . . However, because of the
difficulty to achieve the required' Lrrte r ac t Lon between the individual"wythes,'

the use of multiple wythes should..be avoided, '
,;
Except for small structures (such as tool sheds,' garage, etc,) where the 'floor
area of the building is relatively small and interconnecting block walls can
function as shear walls, masonry' walls will usua l.l.yYequdre supplementary
framing to transmit the lateral forces produced by the blast forces to the
buLLdLng foundation, Supplementary' framing is gene ra Ll.y classified into 'two
categories (depending on the type ofvc orrs t r'uc t Lon used); name Ly': (1) flexible
type supports such as structural steel framing, and (2) rigid supports
including reinforced concrete frames 'or shear wall slao construction; , The use
of masonry walls in combination with structural steel frames is usually
limited to incident over-pressures of 2 psi or less while masonry walls when
supported by'''rigid supports may De:' designed 'to r'e sLs t; incident pressures as
high as 10 psi, Figures 6-1 and 6-2 illustrate these masonry support systems,
Depending on the type of 'construction used, masonry walls may,be classified
into three categories: namely (1) cavity walls, (2) solid walls, and (3) a
combination of cavity and solid walls, The cavity walls utilize 'hollow load
bearing concrete masonry Jriits conforming toASTM C90, Solid walls' use solid
load-bearing concrete masoriry units conforming to ASTM C145 'or' hollow units
whose cells and voids are filled with grout, ,The combined cavity and solid
walls utilize the combination of ho l l.oeeand- solid units',' Masonry walls may be
subdivided further depending on the type of load-carrying mechanism desired:
(1) joint reinforced masonry construction, (2) combined joint and cell
reinforced masonry construction, and (3) non-reinforced masonry construction,
' . '"
; I
.J'
.1
l'
.'
Joint reinforced masonry construction consists of single or multiple wythes

walls and utilizes either hollow or solid masonry units, rre joint reinforced
wall construction 'utilizes comme rcLa l.fy available' cold drawn wire 'assemblies
(see Figure 6-3), 'which 'are pl aced in the bed joints between the, rows of the
masonry units, Two types'ofreinfoicement are available; truss and ladder
6-5
TK 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

types. The truss reinforcement provides the more rigid system and, therefore,
is recommended for use in blast resistance structures. In the event that
double wythes are used, each wythe must be reinforced independently'. The
wythes must also be tied together using wire ties. Joint reinforced masonry
construction is generally used in combination with. flexible type supports.
The cells. of, the units located at the wall supports must be filled with grout.
Typical joint reinforced masonry construction is illustrated in Figure 64.
Combined joint and cell reinforcement masonry construction consists of single
wythe walls which utilize both horizontal and vertical reinforcement.
The
horizontal ,reinforcement may consist either of the. joint reinforcement
previously discussed or reinforcing bars. Where reinforcing bars are used,

special masonry units are used which permit the reinforcement to sit below the
j oint (Figure 6 - 5) .. The vertical reinforcement consists of reinforcing bars
which are positioned in one or more .of the masonry units cells. All cells,
which contain reinforcing bars, must be filled with grout. Depending.on the
amount of, reinforcement used, this type of construction may be used with
either the. flexible or rigid type support systems . .
Nonreinforced masonry construction consists of. single wythe of hollow' or
solid masonry units. This type of construction,does not utilize reinforcement
for strength but solely relies on th~ arching.action of the masonry units
formed by the wall deflection and support resistance (Figure 66). This form
of construction is utilized with the rigid type. support system and, in
particular, the shear wall and slab construction system.
6-8. Design Criteria for Reinforced Masonry Walls

68.1. Static Capacity of Reinforced Masonry Units.
Figure 67 illustrates typical shapes and sizes of concrete masonry units "
which are commercially available. Hollow masonry units shall conform to 'AS!M
e90, Grade N... This grade is recommended for, use in exterior below and above
grade and for interior walls. The minimum dimensions of the components of
hollow masonry units are given in Table 6-1.
..
.
The spec Lf'Lc compressive strength (f'm)' for concrete masonry units may be"
taken as:
Type of Unit
Ultimate Strength (f'm)'
'Hollow Units
Hollow Units filled with.grout
Solid Units
while the modulus of elasticity (Ern) of
~asonry
Em - 1000 f' m
,1350 psi
15QO psi
1800 psi
units is equal to:6-1
The specific compre~sive stre~gth and the ,modulus of elasticity of the mortar
may be assume~ ,to be equal to that of the unit. ,
Joint' reinforceme";t shall conform to the requireme~ts of ASTM A82 and,
therefore, it will have a minimum.ultimate (~un~,and yield (fm) stresses equal
to 80 ksi ~nd 70 ksi respectively. Reinforcing ,bars shall conform to ASTM-,
6-6
88-22~
A615; (Grade 60) andhave minimum.u1t1mate.stress (f;:m) of90.ksi and mi.m.mum

yield stress (fm),'of 60 ks L; ..The modulus 'of elasticity' ofrt.he r-e Lnf'or cemen t :
is equalto.29,OOO,OOO psi.
,.
-" '
.
'''. ,
"
6-8.2 Dynamic Strength of Material
....
..
-, ....
,
il.'
Since design for blast resistant structures is based on ultimate strength; the
actual yield stresses of the material. rather than conventional design.
stresses or specific minimum yield stresses, are used for det~rmining the
plastic strengths of members. Further, under the rapid rates of straining'
that occur in structures loaded by blast forces, materials develop higher
strengths than they do in the case of statically loaded members. In calculating the dynamic properties of concrete masonry construction it is !ecommended
that the dynamic increase factor be applied to the static yield strengths of
the var t ous-tcomponent.s as f'o LLows : ' ...
,
11
Concrete
. Flexure
... r
Shear
!rO,
t'l
.'
"
.JI .
.,~ -1. 00 - f" m.
,,
.',
~ .:.
Compression .",.
,.-
.,
Reinforcement
..
.. ~.
Flexure
1.17
6-8,3 Ultimate Strength of Reinforced Concrete Masonry Walls

-,
The ultimate moment capacity of joint reinforced masonry construction may be

conservatively estimated by utilizing the horizontal reinforcement only and
neglecting the ,compressive strength afforded by the concrete', That is the
reinforcement'in one. face will deve1op'the:tension forces while the steel in
the opposite face resists the compression stresses, The ultimate moment
relationship may be expressed for each horizontal joint of the wall as
follows:
.
6-2
'. ':
where:
,
As
area of j oint reinforcement at one face
-,
f
.,
'
dynamic yield strength of the joint reinforcement

distance between the centroids of
sion reinforcement
the;comp~ession
and ten-
ultimate moment capacity

'
On the contrary, the ultimate moment capacity of the cell reinforcement

(vertical reinforcement) .Ln a combined joint and cell reinforced masonry
construction utilizes the concrete strength to resist the compression forces.
6-7
..
TM
5-l300/N~VFACP-397/AFR
88-22
The method c f vc a Lcu l at Ing ultimate. momeritrs.o f thee vertical. reinforcement 'is' the,
same:as. that presented in Chapter' 4 of this:manual which is similar to that'.
presented in the American Concrete Institute Standard Building Code' Require .
ments for Reinforced Concrete.
.
The ultimate shear stress in joint reinforced masonry walls is computed. by the
,
formula:
6-3
,.
- '.
where:
'.
v u -.
unit shear stress-
total applied design shear at d c/2 from the support

~
,J
'
net area. of section
In all cases, joint reinforced masonry walls, which are designed t~.resist
blast pressures, shall utilize shear reinforcement which shall be d~signed to
carry the total shear stress. Shear reinforcement.shall consist of; (1) bars
or stirrups perpendicular to the longitudinal reinforcement, (2) longitudinal
bars bent 'so that the axis or inclined portion of the bent. bar makes an angle
of 45 degrees or more with the axis of the longitudinal part of the. bar; or
(3) a combination of (1) and (2) above . . The area of .the shear reinforcement
placed perpendicular to the flexural steel 'shall be. computed by the formuia:"
."
6-'4
-,
.'
,
. Av.
.area of shear- reinforcement. ' .

'.1'
u~it
s -
spacing between stirrups ..
width of wall
j;r,
~~.'.
"
-.
fm
yield stress of the shear reinforcement
</J
strength reduction factor equal to 0.85.'
.
When bent or inclined bars are used, the area'of shear reinforcement shall be
calculated using:.
:,.,
.. :
.'
6-5
</Jfm (sin
+ cos
Q)
r,
where:
.'
Q -.
angle between inclined stirrup. and longitudinal' axis of the

.' \'
mem1;>er,
....
,
6-8
-e
TK'
~'t'
"
5-l300/NAVFAC'P-397/A~R'88-22'
6-8.4; Dynamic Analysis
"
--';
..,
The principles for dynamic analysis of the response of structural elements to

blast loads are presented in Chapter 3 of this manual. These' principles also
apply to blast analyses of masonry walls. In order to.perform these analyses,
certain dynamic properties must be established as follows:
Load-mass .factors, for masonry walls spanning in 'either one' direction' (j oint
reinforced masonry construction) or two directions (ccmbLne d"] oint and 'cell .:,
reinforced masonry 'construction) 'are the same as those load-mass factors which
are listed in Tables 3-12 and 3-13. The load-mass factorsare appli~d'to the
"
'
'
actual mass of the wall.' The weights of masonry wall can-be"determined based
on the properties of hollow masonry units previously descr'ibed 'and utilizing Ii

concrete unit weight of '150 pounds per cubic foot: The values of the loadmass
factors KU!, will depend in part on the range of behavior, of the wall:;,:'Le.,
elastic, elasto-plastic, and plastic ranges. An average value of the elastic
and elasto-plastic value of KU! is used for the elasto-plastic range while an
average value of the average KLM for the elasto-plastic range and KLM of the
plastic range is used for the wall behavior in the plastic range.'
.
".,
The' resistance-'deflection 'function is 'illustrated in Figure, 3-'1 .. This 'figure

illustrates the various ranges' of behavior'previously discussed and defines
the relationship between the 'wall's resistarices and deflections as well as
presents the stiffness K in each range 'of behavior. It 'may be noted'in Figure
3-1, that the' elastic and e Las covpLas t.Lc range's'of behavior hive been idealized forming a bilinear (or trilinear)' function. ' The equations for defining
these functions are presented 'in Section 3-13.
.
'j"
The ultimate resistance r u' of a wall varies; (1) as the distribution'of the
applied load, (2) geometry,of the wall (length and width), (3) the amount and
distribution of the reinforcement, and (4) the 'nUmber and type of' supports.
The ultimate resistances of both one and two-way spanning walls are given in
Section 3~9.
. !
- '.
"
Recommended maximum deflection criteria for masonry walls subjected to" blast
loads is presented in Table 6-2. This table includes criteria for both
reusable and non-reusable conditions as well as criteria for 'both one.rand
two-way spanning walls,
,
,.
When designing masonry 'walls for blast loads using response chart procedures
of Chapter 3 the effective natural period of vibration is required. This
effective period of vibration when related to the 'duration of the blast
loading of given'intensity and a given resistance of the masonry wall'determines the maximum transient deflection ~ of the wall. The expression ,for the
6-9
TM,S-1300/NAVFAC
P-397/AF~88-22
natural period of vibration is' presented in equation 3-60, where" the effective,
unit mass'm e has been described prevIously and the equfval.ent; unit~.~tiffness
K E is obtained from the resistance-deflection function.
The equtval.ent .
stiffness of one way beams is presented in Table 3-8. This table may be used
for one w~y spanning walls except. that a unit width ,spall ,be used., ,Methods
for, de'termining the stiffnesses and period of vibrations for two-"!"8y'walls are
presented in'Sections 3-11 through 3-13. Determining the stiffne~s,.in the
e Las t Lc andelasto-plastic range .Ls complicated by, the fact that the moment of,
inertia of the .,c'ros.s sec,tion along the masonry wal~ changes cont~nual1y as
cracking progresses, and further by the fact that the modulus of elasticity
changes as the stress increases.
It is recommended that computations for
deflections and therefore, stiffnesses be based on average, moments ,of. inertia

I a as follows:
'
- .
.,
-. r,
"
f '
6-6
In Equatio~ ,6,-6, Iri is the moment of Lne r t La of the net. section and I c ~s the
moment of inertia of the cracked section. For solid masonry units tpe value
of In is rep~aced with the moment of, inertia of t~e gross sec t Lon ... The va Lues
of In and I g for hollow and solid masonry units used in ,joint 'reinforced
masonry construction are listed in Table 6-3. The values ,of I g for solid,
units may. also be used for walls which utilize combined joint and cell masonry
constructi;n. The values of I c for both hollow an~,solid masonry. co~;truction
may be obtained using:
.,'
I c - 0.005 bdc 3
;.
'::;
6-7
"
6-8.5: Rebound
.. : ;
Vibratory action of a .masonry wall.will result ,in n~gative deflection~ after

the maximum positive deflection has. been ":ttained .. ,This negat.Lve . de f l ec t Ion
is associated with negative forces.which will require t~nsion reinforcement to
be po s Lt Lonedjat; the opposite, side. of the wall from the primary reinforcement ...
In additio~, wall ties are requir~d to a~~ure that the wall.is~supporte~ by
.
the frame (Figure 6-8). The rebound forces are a function of the maximum'
resi;tance of the wall as w~ll as the vibratory,properties'of the,w~il and the
load duration. The maximum elastic rebound of a masonry wall may be obtained
from Figur~, 3-268.
_,
6-9. NoncReinforced Masonry.Walls
,.
.....
The resistance of non-reinforced masonry walls to lateral blast loads is a

function of the wall deflection, mortar compression strength and the rigidity
of the supports .
.,'
6-9.1. Rigid supports
If the supports are completely rigid and the mortar's strength is known, a
resistance function can be constructed in. the follOWing manne r,
Both supports are assumed to be completely rigid and lateralmotio~ of, the top
and bottom of the wall is prevented. An incompletely filled joint is assumed
to exist at the top as shown in Figure 6 - 9a. Under the action.of the blast
6-10
TK 5-l300/NAVFAC' P-397/AFR 88-22

load the wall is assumed to crack at the center. Each half then rotates as a
rigfd body until the wall takes the position shown in Figure 6-9b. During the
rotation the.midpoint m has .undergone a lateral motion Xc in which no resistance to motion will be developed in the wall, and the upper corner of the
wall (point 0) will be just touching the upper support. The magnitude of Xc
can be found from the geometry of the wall in its deflected position:
L2 -
[hi2 +" (h ,:- it) /2] 2
6-8
~2 _ (h'/2)2
where:
6-9
and
, :
..
6'10
All other symbo1s'are shown in Figure 6-9.
,.
For any further lateral motion of point m, compressive forces will occur at
points m and o. These compressive forces form a couple that produces a

resistance to the lateral load equaL' to:
.',
6-11
where 'a l L symbols have previously been defined. When point m deflects
laterally to a line n-o (Figure 6-9c), the moment arm of .the resisting couple
will be reduced to zero and the wall will become unstable with no further
resistance to deflection. In this position the diagonals o-m and m-n will be
shortened by an amount:
6-12
L - h'/2
The unit strain in the wall caused by the shortening will be:
Em -
6-13
(L - h'/2)/L
where:
Em '-
All the
unit strain.inthe mortar
s~ortening
is assumed to occur in the mortar joints and therefore:

6-14
where:
En -
modulus of elasticity of the'mortar

6-11
1M 5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR,88 c22
f m'-.
compressive'stress corresponding to the strain
In most cases.fm will be' greater than the ultimate. compressive strength .. of the
mortar f m, and therefore cannot; exist. ' Since for walls of normal height and
thickness each half of the wall undergoes a small rotation to obtain. the '.
position shown in Figure 6-9c, the shortening of the diagonals o-mcand m,ncan
be considered a linear. function of, the lateral displacement of point m. The
deflection at maximum resistance Xl' at: which a'compressive str~ss f m exists
at points m, nand 0 can therefore be found from the following: "
.
Xl
~c
f' m
f' m
Xc
fm
EnE m
6-15a
or
Xl -
(T - Xc) f' m
6-l5b
Xc
(EnEm)
The resisting moment that is caused by a lateral deflection Xl is found by
assuming rectangular compression stress blocks to exist at the supports
(points 0 and n) and at the center (point m) as shown in Figure 6~lOa. The
bearing width a is chosen so that the moment Ku is a maximum, that is, by
differentiating Ku with respect to a and setting the derivative equal to zero,
which for a solid masonry unit will result,in:.
a -
0.5 (T - Xl)
6-l~
"
and the corresponding ultimate moment and resistance (Figure 6-10b) ,are equal
to:
,
and
, - 0.25 f'm[T ~lV
Ku
1,
. ',.
ru
- (2jh2)
f'm[T
"
.',
6-17
~"'"
,<
,
- XlP
',;
J
"
6-18
When the mid span deflection is greater than. Xl the expression for the,
resistance as a function of the displacement is:
6-19
As the deflection increases the resistance is :reduced until r is equal to zero

and maximum deflection Xm is reached (Figure 6-10b). Similar expressions can
be derived for hollow masonry, units. However, the, maximum value of, a can not
exceed the thickness of the flange width.
..i
6-9.2. Non-rigid Supports

For the case where the wall is supported by elastic supports at the top and/or
bottom, the resistance curve cannot be constructed based on the value.of the
compression, force (af' m) which is determined solely on geometry of the wall.
6-12..
-' .
TK5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

Instead the resistance curve' is a function of the stiffness of the supports.
Once the magnitude of the compressi?n force is determined, equations similar
to those derived for the case of the rigid supports can be used.
!
-.".'.
.. ... -
'"\.,
__ 6-9.3. Simply ,Supported Walls
.Lf the supports ,offer no resistance to vertical motion,. the compression in the
'wall will be limited by the wall weight above. the floor plus any roo.f load
which may be carried by the .wall. If .the wall carries no vertical loads, then
the wa,ll,must be analyzed as a simply ,supported beam, the maximum resisting
moment being determined by the modulus of rupture of the mortar.
.
.f.
"
,-
I, .
".
"
~('
6-13
'.-
J"
"
I-
"
.L
.,
,.
. ,'.'
.".
::"
.1.
I. .
'.'
.. '"
-. ,-t
"
.L
,.
.t- .
"
0,
-0
..
'
or
....
4 Bavs (0)10'0": 40'0"
..
FLOOR PLAN
rMetal Roof
Column
Rigid
Frame
Cone.
Floor,
'Slab
AT- ROOF
Figure 6-1
,ATFL00R
Masonry wall with flexible support
6-14 .
-0
I
.- -
., ,
1:.:-"
..
"
--
-- .
, ,.,-'
..
""".
."'"
..,
.~
..-
.-
"
...
..
.. . ".- .
'<
,
~
.'!
.~
--_ _.
--..
... _--, ..
"
..
.-
..
.1"
1-0"
4 Bays @ 10'-0"= 40
FLOOR PLAN
Cone. Roof Siab
~:t:'f.:~~~J
''''-:-:
.-. . -,- .-..:~'.:::
.:-,,~
'
Cone:'
'j
'Becrr...
.,
Cane.
Floor
Slab
.. . i
AT ROOF
I
.
'0
.,
AT FLOOR
,Figure 6-2 ;; Mas.o~r.ywan wi th rigid support
6-15,
r-
..
..
..
...
,"
V "'\. r-,
.:-:~=.
..
".
'.
-,
i/
-,
..
., .
-... .
... i:: ',':

",2jL::
....
'
'::""
/'. ...
v '" k
'
--
'
.1 _
'.
.'
"
.....
.";
;V
\~
.
.. ..........
. ...
...... ',':
,\.~"
'
~~
.. .. ,. ..
,
..
~':-:'
Truss Type
. Reinforcement
,, . '
,, .
'.
. .....
..
~.
',11':.
. ....
'
...
"
'.
~
,
"
. .'
........
"
"
, :;.:
..
...
........ :
, : .n,,;; . :
'
,.
"
'.
,:~
-,~..
Ladder Type
Reinforcement
..
I:..
:'.:
.. .. .. . ..' ... '.
,
.. , ',
... .... ....
u.,
"
'
": ':"~
~"~'
'"
.',
SINGLE WYTHE CMU
:' . ~ ', .:.:
......
..
';'::':.'.,,,:. v,
.. : ....
:'
.',
.' V ,,'K.'"". ;'-:'.:
)'.
,.~
/'
.,',
. ..
~
. ..
........
,
'
."
"';';'.::
"
,:-.
'.
'. -" '..
. >
'. -::.
t ".
.. ' . .
.. .. , . .
,:'
t.'
>...-Tie"
"
,.',.
......
"
DOUBLE WYTHE CMU:
Figure 6-3
'.
Concrete masonry walls
6-16
r-
.7..~.,
'"
-r
..-.....
V;:..:.........:.
"
"
"', .;,L
1- ,
.'
'.
.'
, .",
v~
""',
JOINT REINFQRCED -MASOII!RY CON.STRUCT ION
,
I
COMBINED JOINT AND CEL"i.- REINFORCED

MASONRY
CONSTRUCTION
Figure 6-4 Typical joint reinforced masonry construction
6-17 '
....
.:;,: -.
"."~ ~,
..
PR~VISIONS f~~'~'EINFORCEMENT
THE. SPECIAL
PLACEMENT AS SHOWN ; ARE' AVAILABLE IN
MANY OF THE BLOCK CONFIGURATIONS. ILLUSTRATED
IN FIG, 6 -7,
';,:'
.,
.~
.'
"'"
,~
.. "....
.
.-
";.
~-
'<,';
Figure 6-5 '
'. (,,-
...
~ ... '.~
I
:
,-~
Special ,masonry unit'for ..lte with reinforcing bars

.'1' .;-.
'.
:_~
. T.I
1',,' " . ' , .~
"~'"~!.
. :'.,
II
';t
"
6-18,
,j ' ,
.:
Fi gure 6-6
. -;:.
Arching action of non-reinforced masonry wall
619
Double eo...,e.. nr
Jemb
&ull Nose
Pie..
"
.~.,, :~.
...
Full Cut Header
Floo,.
Solid Top
St~h.r
.' r~
('l eo... )
(In ~ Jlrus the _bo". unit!\ arY available in 4-nolTtinal heights)
Soffit FlOOf'
.JelTtb
St,.e+cher
Solid
Corne,.
Stretch.-
Figure 6-7
Solid B..iclo.
, ,
;1
,'J "
~
hem or L.l,,+.1
Fl"'OQgecI Brick
Trough
Corne"
. Chennel
Typical concrete masonry units
6-20
$'\
Stretcher
(Module ..)
'~'.
12" CONC. BLOCK
.'
. .".
ANCHOR STRAP
WI2x31
.' . . .t:1.
(0) Masonry
Anchor Straps at Corners
CI2
WT ~ x 13.5 FOR
EACH STRAP
TS 2x 2
CONC. BLOCK
..
..
.'
- . .' I'

".--4L
"
.:
It
0.1815 .
DOOR
MASONARY ANCHOR,
STRAP
DOOR FRAME
(b) Masonry Anchor Strap Detail at Door.
Figure 6-8
Connection details fof rebound and/or negative overpressures
6-21
. T-xc
::}
.<=
'. -'=
-11
-'=
W
(0 l
Figure 6-9
(b)
(el
Deflection of non-reinforced masonry walls
-.
6-22
..
'
-I.
(\j'
.:;0
"
(a)
ARCHING
BEHAVIOR
'j
.L.'
-4-l-Xc
Xm
DEFLE,CTION
x-
(b)
RESISTANCE - DEFLECTION
FUNCTION
Figure 6-10 Structural behavior of non-reinforced solid masonry panel

with rigid supports
6-23'[:
TM 5-1300;NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
Pr0p.erties of Hollow Masonry Units
Table 6-1
Nominal
Width
of Units (in)
/Equiv. Web
Thickness
(in)
Face-Shell
Thickness,
(in)
"
.
3 and 4
0.75
1.625
1.00
2.25
1.25'
2.25
10
1.375
2.50
12
1.500
2.50
, I
Taple 6-2
Deflection Criteria for Masonry Walls
Wall Type
Reusable
Non-Reusable
Support Type
Support Rotation
One-way
0.5'
Two-way
0.5'
.
One-way
1.0'
, ,
Two-way
2.0'
), ......
, i'
.'."
6-24-'
.
'
TK 5-l300/NAVFAC ,P-397/AFR,88-22
, ,
,,",'
"
., 1
.'
'.
"',
......
"
TabLe ' 6-3
r,r
Moment of Inertia of Masonry

Walls
..
.r-
Type of Unit
Width of Unit
(in)
,
"
~ln~) Ii II
..
Hollow
Moment of Inertia
..
3
4
, .
2.0
4.0
12.7
28.8
10
12
"
51. 6
83.3
'.
:< .
Solid
..
'
3,
'4
'
,.
"
a':
.
"
10
12
"
"
,
, -,
, "
",.'
....
6-25
."
.'
2.7
5.3
18.0
'42.7
8).0
144.0
,
1
TH 5-l300/NAVFAC'P-397/AFR 88-22
PRECAST CONCRETE
6-10. Applications
Precast concrete construction can consist of either prestressed or conventionally reinforced members. Prestressing is advantageous in conventional
construction, for members subjected to high flexural stresses such as long
span or heavily loaded slabs and beams. Other advantages of precast concrete
construction include: (1) completion time for precast construction will be
significantly less than the required for cast-in-place concrete, (2) precast
construction will provide protection against primary and secondary fragments
not usually afforded by steel construction and (3) precast work is generally
more economical than cast-in-place concrete construction especially when
standard precast shapes can be used. The overriding disadvantage of precast
construction is that the use of precast members is limited to buildings
located at relatively low pressure levels of 1 to 2 psi. For slightly higher
pressure levels, cast-in-place cpncrete.or structural steel constru~tion
becomes the more economical means of construction. However, for even higher
pressures, cast-in-place concrete is the only means available to economically
withstand the. appli,.ed Load . . ."
_ . . -.
. ,
Precast structures are of the shear wall type, rigid frame structures being
economically impractical (see the-discussion of connections, Section 6-16
below). Conventionally designed precast structures may be multi-story, but
for blast design it is recommended.that they be limited to single stor~
buildings. Some of the most common precast sections are shown in Figure 6'-11.
The single tee and double tee sections are used for wall panels and roof
panels. All the other sections are beam and girder elements. In addition ,. a
modified flat slab section will be 'used as a wall panel around door openings.
All of the sections shown' can be prestressed
conventionaily' reinforced. In
general though, for blast
design,
beams
and
roof
panels are
prestressed, while
t
columns and.wall panels are not. For conventional design; prestressing wall
. panels and columns is advantageous'in tall mu~ti-story building, and thus of'
no benefit for blast,resistant design which uses only single story. buildings.
In fact, in.the design of a wall panel, the blast load isfrom the opposite
direction of conventional loads and hence prestressing a wall panel decreases
rather than increases the capacity ot' section. - - _.
.
'
."
. 'j
'
or
6-11. Static Strength of Materials

6-11.1. Concrete
Generally the minimum compressive strength of the concrete, f c' used in
precast elements is 4000 to 5000 psi. High early-strength cement is usually
used in prestressed elements to ensure adequate concrete strength is developed
before the prestress is introduced.
6-11.2. Reinforcing Bars
Steel reinforcing bars are used for rebound and shear reinforcement in
prestressed members as well as for flexural reinforcement in non-prestressed
members. For use in blast design, bars designated by the American Society for
Testing and Materials (ASTM) asA. 615, grade 60, are recommended. As only
small deflections are permitted in precast members, the reinforcement is not
6-26
.'
TH 5-l300i'NAVFAC P-397/AFR"88-22
stressed into its strain hardening region and thus the static design strength
of the reinforcement is equal to its yield stress (fm - 60,000 psi).
6-11.3. Welded Wire Fabric
"
Welded wire fabric, designated as A 185 by ASTM, is used'to reinforce the

flanges of tee and double tee-sections. In conventional design welded wire
fabric Is sometimes used as shear reinforcement, but it is not; used for blast
design, which requires closed ties. The static design strength f m, of welded
wire fabric is equal to its yield stress, 65,000 psi,
6-11.4. Prestressing Tendons
There are several types of reinforcement that can be used in prestressing
tendons. They are designated by ASTM as A 416, A 421 or A 722, with A 416,
grade 250 or grade 270, being the most common. The high strength steel used
in these types of reinforcement can only undergo a maximum elongation of 3.5
to 4 percent of the original length before the ultimate strength is reached,
Furthermore, the high strength steel lacks a well defined yield point, but
rather exhibits a slow continuous yielding with a curved stress-strain
relationship until ultimate strength is developed (see Figure' 6-12). ASTM

specifies a fictitious yield stress fp'y' corresponding to a 1 percent elongaThe minimum value of fpydepenos on the ASTM des"ignation, but it ranges
tion.
from 80 to 90 percent of the ultimate strength, f pu'

".
.'
'
.'
.'
6-12. Dynamic Strength of Materials

Under the rapid rate of straining of blast loads, most materials' develop
higher strengths than they do ,when statically, loaded. M:.excep t Lon , is the
high strength steel used in prestressing tendons. Researchers have found that
there was very little increase in the upper yield' stress 'and'ultimate tensile
strengths of high strength steels under dynamic loading.
The dynamic design strength is obtained by multiplying the static design

strength by the appropriate dynamic increase factor. DIF, which is as follows:
(a)
Concrete:
Compression
Diagonal tension
Direct shear
Bond'
DlF-1.l9'
DIF - 1. 00
DIF - 1.10
DlF - 1.00 .
(b)
Non-prestressed Steel Reinforcement;

Flexure
DIF
Shear
DIF
1.17'
1.00
1';.
(c) ,Welded 'Wire, Fabric:

(d)
6~13.
'"
~~
Prestressed Reinforcement
DIF
1.10
DIF .. 1'.00'
.-
'
Ultimate Strength of Precast Elements
The ultimate strength of non-prestressed precast members is exactly the same

as cast-in-place concrete members and as such is not repeated here. For the
6-27
TH 5-l300/NAVFAC,P-397I.AFR 88-22
ultimate strength of non-prestressed precast elements, ,see Chapter 4 of this

manual.
6-13.1
Ultimate Dynamic Moment Capacity of Prestressed Beams
The ultimate dynamic moment capacityMu of a prestressed rectangular beam (or

of a flanged section where the thickness of the compression flange is greater
than or,equal to the depth of the equivalent rectangular stress block, a) is
as follows:
Mu - ~s f ps (~
- a/2) +
Asf dy (d-a/2)
6-20
and
.!.,
a -
-.
(~sfps + Asf dy )
6-21
. 85f' dc b
where:
ultimate moment capacity
total area of prestress reinforcement
average stress 'in the prestressed reinforcement at ultimate
load
distance from extreme compression fiber to the centroid of
the.prestressed reinforcement
a, -
As -
.'
depth ,of equivalent rectangular stress block

total area of non-prestressed tension reinforcement
dynamic design strength of non-prestressed reinforcement

distance from extreme compression fiber to the centroid of
the non-prestressed reinforcement
f'dc
b
dynamic compressive strength of concrete

width of the beam for a rectangular section or width of the
compression flange for a flanged section
The average stress in the prestressed reinforcement at ultimate load f ps must

be determined from a trial~and-error stress-strain compatibility analysis.
This may be tedious and difficult especially if the specific stress-strain
curve of the steel being used is unavailable. In lieu of such a detailed
analysis, the following equations may be used to obtain an appropriate value
of f ps :
For members with bonded prestressing tendons:
6-28
TM 5-1300jNAVFAC P~397/AFR88-22
f ps -
f,+ 2-]
f pu
Pp
B1
f'dc
. ,
df(i
.y
(p-p')'
6-22
~f'dc
"
and
.>'
,.
p'
~sfb~
Pp
. 6-23
As fbd
6-24
A'
s fbd
6-25
where:
f pu -
specified tensile 'strength of prestressing tendon

factor for type of prestressing
yp ' - _
0.40 for f py /f pu
0.80
/fpu'~
0.90
.t endon
0.28 for f py
"fictitious" yield stress of prestressing tendon corresponding to a 1 percent elongation

0.85 for f'dc up to 4000 psi and is reduced 0.05 for each
'1000 psi -Ln excess of 4000.psi
,',
prestressed 'reinforcement ratio'
Pp
ratio of non-prestressed. tension reinforcement
ratio of' compression reinforcement
p'
total area of compression reinforcement
,.
If any compression reinforcement is taken into account when calculating f ps
then the distance from the extreme compression fiberto the centroid of the
compression reinforcement must be less than 0.15~and
.(p-p')
Pp
f'dc
.!,
~f'dc
~,0,17
6-26
. j
If there is no comp~ession reinforcemerit and no non-prestressed tension

reinforcement,Equation 6-22 becomes: .
"
7'
6-29 '.'
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR',88-22
6-27
Pp
For members with unbonded prestressing tendons and a span-to-depth ratio less
than or equal to 35:
6-28a
and
f ps
6-28b
f s e + 60,000
where:
effective stress in prestressed reinforcement after allowances for all prestress losses
For members with unbonded prestressing tendons and a span-to-depth ratio
greater than 35:
6-29a
and
f ps
6-29b
f s e + 30,000
To .Lnsure against, sudden compression failure the reinforcement ratios for a

rectangular beam, or for a flanged section where the thickness of the compression flange is greater than or equal to the depth of the equivalent rectangular stress block will be such that:
(p
f'dc
dpf'dc
p')
0, 36B 1
6-30
When the thickness of the compression flange of a flanged section is less than
the depth of the equivalent rectangu1ar'stress'b1ock, the reinforcement ratios
will be such that
,6-31
f'dc
PpWI Pw' p'w -
~f'dc
reinforcement ratios for flanged, sections computed as for

p , p and p' respectively except that b shall be the width
o~ the web and the reinforcement area will be that required
to develop the compressive strength of the web only.
6-30
6-13.2. Diagonal Tension and Direct,Shear of Prest'ressed Elements'

,.'. ,.,
'.~ "'t JjJ';
' ..")
....
Under conventional 'service loads, prestressed elements remain almost entirely

in compression,' ~nd;hence are'permittedit higher concrete shear 'stress than
non~prestressed;el'einents: -Howeve r at~'qltimate Lo ads the effect of prestress.
is lost and thus no increase in shear capacity is permitted: The shear

capacity of'a precast beam may be calculated using the equations of Chapter 4
of this manual. The'loss 'of the effect of prestress also means that d- is the
actual distance to the prestressing tendon and is not limited to O.8h as it is
in the ACI code. It is obvious then that at the supports'of an element with
draped tendons, d and thus' the shear capacity are .gre at Ly reduced. Draped
tendons also make it difficult to properly anchor shear reinforcement at the
supports, exactly where it' is needed most. ,Thus it'is recommended that only
straight tendons be used for blast'design.
The dynamic analysis of precast elements uses the procedures described in
Chapter 3 of this manual,
Since precast elements are simply supported;' the resistance-deflection curve
is a one-step function (see Figure 3-39a), The ultimate unit resistance for
various loading conditions is presented in Table 3-1. As precast structures
are subject to low blast pressures, the dead load ,of the structures become
significant; and must: be t aken'<Lnt.o' account.
'
,
'.
,.
'
...
.~,
e. ..
"'.'"
The elastic stiffness of simply'supported beams with various loading'conditions is given in Table 3-7, In determining the stiffness, the effect of
cracking is taken into account by using an average moment of 'inertia la' as
follows:
"I: - (I' +'1 )/2
a
g.
F
.'
.,1
where:
Ig
moment of inertia of the gross section'
Ic
moment of inertiaof the cracked section

,
,-
For non-p re st res sed elements', the cracked moment' of inertia' can be det'e rmi.ned
from Chapter 4', For prestressed', elements ,the moment of inertia of the cracked
section may be approximated by:
....
6-33
where n is the ratio of the modulus of elasticity of steel to concrete. The
load-mass factors, used' to convert the mass of the actual system to the
equivalent mass, are given in Table '3-12 for prestressed elements thel,!admass factor in the elastic range is used, An average of the elastic and
plastic range load-mass factors is' used' in the design of norr-pr'e's t r e s s ed
elements.
"
6-31
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC ,P-397/AFR 88-22

The equivalent single-degree-of-freedom system,is defined in term~ of ,its;
ultimate resistance r u' equivalent elastic deflection XE, and natural period
of vibration T W The dynamic LoadTs de f Lned by. its peak pressure!, and
duration T. The figures given in~hapter 3 maY,be used to determine the
response of an element in terms of, its -raax Lmum deflection >SU. and" the time to,
reach maximum. deflection t m,
'0
'
;',:
'
Recommended maximum qeflection criteria,for precast,,!,lements is as follows:

,
<1-)
t'
1:.
For .pres cressed flexural mem!>er~::'
.'
'''','
9 max S 2 0 or'#max~S 1, whichever governs
(2)
For, non-prestresse~,flexural ~e~bers

9 max S 2' or ~max S 3, whicheve~,governs
(3)
For compression members
~max
where
..
'
S 1.3
9 max
maximum support ratio
~max
maximum ductility ratio
..
'_:--
6-15. Rebound
v.'.
,
"
"
Precast elements will vibrate under dynamic 'loads, causing negative deflections after the maximum deflection has been reached'. The negative forces
associated with these negative deflections may be predicted using,Figure,.3 c
268.
,
"~'
"
"!
6-15.1. Non-prestressed elements

The design of non-prestressed precast elements for the effects of rebound is
the same as for cast-in-place members. See Chapter 4 for a discussion of
rebound ,!,ffects in concrete elements.
,.
6-15.2. 'Prestressed elements
In pr e s t re s sed elements, ,non-prestressed reinforcement must be added to what

is the compression zone during the loading phase to carry the tensile forces
of the rebound phase. The rebound resistance will be determined from Figure,
3-268. but in"no case will it, be less than one-half, of the resistance available to resist the blast load.
The moment capacity of a precast
e~ement
in rebound is as follows:
a-/2)
6-34
.,
where:
Mu-
ultimate moment capacity in rebound

.. "
total area of rebound ,tension reinforcement

dynamic design strength of reinforcement
6-32
TM 5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR'88 l22
d'
distance, from-extreme compression fiber,to the centroid'of;'

the rebound reinforcement
depth of: the' equivalent rectangular stress' block "
'.
It is important to take into accounti the compression in the' concrete' due to

prestressing arid reduce the strength available for rebound. For, a conservative design, it may be assumed that the compression in the, concrete due to
- prestressing is the maximum permitted by theACI code,i'.e'. 0;45"f'c' 'Thus
the concrete strength available for rebound is'
,
.,..
;;,. '.'
.~
-,
0.85f' dc-' 0.45fi dc/DIF - 0.47f'dc':'

",.rr . . .
. ".
-,
..
6-35
r.f"~.,
'~'
A more detailed analysis may be performed to determine the actual concrete

compression due to prestress. In either case the maximum amount of rebound
reinforcement added will be
[
As ' S
(O"'~~: "
,
f dy
l6]
.'
"
I~'"
(j7000 - nfl' bd(87000 .-: nf + f dy)
'
'-,;. "l _ .
"
6-37
....'
'.
6-16. Connections
6-16.1: General
One of ,the fundamentaL difference's 'betweeri 'a cast- in-place concrete s t ruc tur'e.'and one consisting of precast elements is .the nature' of -connections between'
members.
For precast concrete structures ; as' in 'the c as eco f steel -structures;
connections' can be detailed 'to tra;"slIlit gravity loads only', gravity and
'
lateral loads, or moments in addition to' these 'loads. In general though,
connectors of precast'members shouldbe designed so that blast,ioads are
transmitted to supporting members through simple beam action. Moment-resisting connections for blast resistant structures would have to be ,quite heavy
and expensive because of the relatively large rotations, and,hence induced
stresses, permitted in blast design. ' .'
,"
.. ' .
,.
.
In the de s Lgn cof connections ,the -c'apac Lty 'reduction factor't/>, .Eor shear and
bearing stresses on concrete are asIp r e sc r Lb ed by ACI code, i:e.: 0.8'5 and' O.,7
respectively. No capacity reduction factor is used for moment calculations
and no dynamic increase factors are used in determining the capacity 'of a'
connector. Capacity of the conne~tion should be' at least 10 percent ,greater
than rhe .reac t tcn 'of' .che member being connec t e d vt o account for cheibr Lt t Lenes s
of the connection. ',In "addition che ,failure' mechanism' should be cont.rol Led by:
tension or bending stress of, the steel, and, therefore the pullout st rengch of
~
6-33 "
" ,6-36;:
where f is the compression 'in the 'concrete due to .p res t re ss tng and 'all ,the
other terms have been' defined preViously. If available concrete strength is
assumed to be 0.47f,d c' equation 6-36 becomes:
'
"
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR' 88"22 .
the concrete and the -strength of the welds should be greater than thesteel
strength.
The following connections are standard for use in blast design but they are
not intended to exclude other connection details. Other details are possible
but they must be able to transmit gravity and blast loads, rebound Loadsvand
lateral .loads without inducing moments".'
,"j
:J'"
~..
~',
.r. .!.
6-16.2. Column-to-Foundation Connection.,
... ~ 'OoOF!
cr"
<:-'--
,.
",
; .
'.
The standard PCl column-to-foundation connection may be used for blast design
without modification. However anchor bolts. must be checked for tension due ,to
rebound in order to prevent concrete pullout .
,
-.
. 'L
. -
1 I r
..
6-16.3. Roof ~lab-tocGirder Connection
.~ -.'
....
.t
.1 ~
, '. I
't',
'~"
, .
; 1
Figure 6-13 shows the connection detail of a roof panel (tee section) framing
into a ledger, beam. The bearing pads transmit gravity loads while preventing
the formation of moment couples. The bent prate welded to the plate embedded
in the f~ange of the tee transmits lateral loads but is soft enough to aeform
when the roof panel tries to rotate. The angle welded to the embedded plate
in the web of the tee restricts' the panel, through shear action, from lifting
off the girder during the rebound loading. The effects of dimensional changes
due to creep, shrinkage and ,relaxation of prestress should be considered in :
this type of .cormec t Lon .
"
' '
"
6-16.4. Wall Panel-to-Roof Slab Connection
The b~sic concepts employed in the .roof slab-to-girdei connection apply ~o the
wall panel-to-roof slab connection shown in Figure 6-14. The roof panel
instead of bearing on the girder, bears on a corbel cast with the tee section.
The angle that transmits lateral loads has been moved from the underside of
the flange to the top of the flange to facilitate field welding. "....,
:'...."
"
6-16.5. Wall Panel-to-Foundation Connection
The wal} "panel In Fdgur'e 6,-15 is attached to' .the 'fo,undation by 'means of, angles
welded to plates c~st in both the wall panel and ,the foundation., ~t is
essential to provide.a method of at t.achmenc to the foundation ,that :is capable. c s
of taking base shear inany"di-rection; -and also a method of -Leve Ll.Lng and ......
aligning the wall panel. Non-shrinking. grout is used to fill the 'gap between
the panel and the -founda't Lon so as to transmit the loads to the foundation.'
",
6-16.6. Panel Splice
"
...
"1
"\
Since precast structures are of the shear wall type, all horizontal blast
"
loads are transferred by diaphragm action, through wall and roof slabs to the
foundations. The typical panel splice shown in Figure 6-16 is used fo~:.
transferring the horizontal ,loads ,between panels.
, _.'
.".
6-16.7. Re Lnf'orcemerit; Around Door",Openings
. ~.
rl
~ ";
v., ..
A standard double ,tee section cannot be. used around a door opening.,~.Instead a
special panel~must be fabricated .co satisfy the .requirements for the door '.. . );l.
6-34
:'
,'.
"1
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

opening. The design of the reinforcement around the door opening and the door
frame is discussed in Chapter 4.
6-35
J I t..
..
':'
'j
a::
<[
...J
:::>
...
...
Ul
1/:"
~ ..;.',\31
... .. . ......
"
.J
II)
:>
'':,::~.: "
Z
<[
...a::o
...
.,
C)
. ~:" ':,j
...,
II>
c:
ClJ
ClJ
~
ClJ
...,
'"
II>
.
~
-,
.: : .. ~,
'.::
',..
:: : .-. . .
.".
:.::
.. :.:
U
ClJ
S-
p','
a.
......
c:
.J
E'
E
Ul
Ul
~
Ul
Ul
..
....; - - - -
o
'.
).....
i: .
Ul
~
a::
Ul
>
Z
6-36
2068.4
300
.,
t,
-.
..
200
V
....
--,
. r.
-. ,
"
"
'.
1379.0
.., .'
"
. ,
(J)
en
,!
en
--
1723.7
,,
"
,.
-'"
lr
I-
~-
250
--
--
..
-,
,
H
100
"
,;,),
.-. ..
..
.
\
,
;
..
-- -,
,
,
.. I
en
en
150
1034.2
::::>
689.5
344.7
U NIT STRAIN (%)
Fi gure 6-12' 'TypiCal st ress-st re't n curve
637
for
lr
II-
50
w
en
,>
::;:
hi gh "strength wi re
Embedded Plate.
Precast Roof F\:Inel
\Ty,p.)
Embedded -:f"'----~:_ll.,.;.:,
Plates
Loose Angle (Typ.)
.. .:. ..
. ..,. .
':
:,t'o"~'
recast Girder
'--~Precast
Column
Fi gU,re6-13 . Roof s 1a~-to-gi rder connecti on
6 - 38 c
LOOSE
PLATES
CAST IN TEES
ANGLE
=== ====':iI==
,.1:
.,J
.....= =
t::=
= = ..===
.~.
.. '.
" LOOSE' ANGLE. '
"
PLATES
CAST IN TEE!),
..
-.'
. .
...1'-"~
,Double Tee
Wall Panel ~
Bearing
Pad
Double Tee
Roof Panel
' "..
"
.',
.",
Figure 6-14 Typical wall 'panel-to-roof slab connection
.....
6-'39
Tee'Section
~
...
Plate Cast.
In Tee Section
Angle
,
Angle Cast
in Foundation
Stiffener Plate
41
. Q.
en
, Foundotlon
..
",
..'.. :~.o::.. .: ,
.'
'
i., -: .:
0.
Anchor Bar for Angle
"/
Figure 6-15 Wall panel-to-fourdation connection
....
i' ...
..
'
'0
,;.
I.
.:...
,.
:.' ;;.
'\,
"
. ""',,'
~.
"
,.,-
,,,
,'10
'10\
,
"
'
:,At..""
.
'J'
'--
.
.
,I'
r--
//
. 'I.~
'/,
. ~ .r
~,'Io
//
~,
~~
",,'.
Looie
Plate-:-
III~ ~
II~; "
:-..
'"
'q
I. //'
VI',
I'"l-- Angle
.
"
"
""":-..
"""~
0'
~-,
(,'/
'
" v
,Vo
" PLAN' .,
"
r .
,1
Angle Cast in ....

;Tee Section (Typo)
Of
;"
, Anchor Bar
for Angle
(Typo)
"
~.
Caulking with Back-up "

Material
SECTION A-A'
,.
:.
"
;'
....
'0
, -
."
'~,.'
Figure,,6~16,
.'
...
I- ,.' '
';
,Typical pane I, splice

.
-. .
6-41'
-'
...
'
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC'P-397/AFR 88-22
SPECIAL PROVISIONS FOR PRE-ENGINEERED BUILDING

6-17. General
Standard pre-engineered buildings are usually designed for conventional loads
(live, snow, wind and/or seismic). Blast resistant 'pre-engineered buildings
are also designed in the same manner as standard structures. However, the
conventional loadings', which are used for the latter designs, are quite large
to compensate for effects of blast loads.

ings,
pre~engineered
Further, as with standard build-
structures, which are designed for blast ,"'are designed
elastically for the conventional loadings with the assumption that the
structure will sustain plastic deformations due to the blast. The design
approach,will require a multi-stage process, including:' preparation of general
,layouts and partial blast designs by the design engineer; preparation of the
specifications, by the engineer including certain features as recommended
herein; design of the building a~d preparation of shop drawings by the,pre-engineered building manufacturers; and the final blast evaluation of the
structure by design engineer utilizing the layouts on the previously mentioned
shop drawings. At the completion of the' analysis some slight modifications in
building design may be 'necessary. How~vei, if the following procedures are
'used, then the required modifications will be 'limited and in some cases
eliminated for blast overpressures upward to'2 ?si.
6-18. General Layout
The general layout of pre-engineered buildings is based on both operational
and blast resistant requirements. Figure 6-17 illustrates a typical general
layout of the pre-engineered building'. The general requirements for structural steel, concrete, wall and roof coverings and connections are given 'below.
6-18.1, Structural Steel
In order for a pre-engineered building to sustain, the required blast loading,
structural steel layout 'must conf'o rm'<to the following requirements:
I,
The maximum spacing between main 'transverse 'rigid frames (bay

width) shall not exceed 20 feei:. ;~.
2.
The maximum spacing between column supports for rigid .. fr~mes shall
not exceed 20 feet while .the overall height of frames shall be 30
feet or less.
3.
Slope of'the roof shall not exceed four ,horizontal ,to one vertical. ' However, the roof slope shall be as shallow as physically
possible and be in compliance with the requirements of,the Metal
Building Manufacturers' 'Association.
4.
Spacing between girts shall not exceed 4 feet while the space
between purlins shall not be greater than 5 feet.
5.
Primary members, including frames and other main load carrying

members, shall consist ..ofhot.rolle'd ,structural steel shapes. The
shapes must be doubly-symmetrical'and have a constant depth., They
may be wide flange sections, I-sections, structural tubes, or
6-42,
TM 5-l300/NAVFAC
88-22'.
~-397/AFR
welded shapes built-up from hot r.olled,steel sheet, strips or

plates. Secondary structural framing, such as girts, roof
purl ins , bridging, eave struts and other miscellaneous secondary
framing, may consist of either hot rolled or ~old-formed structural .steel. All main secondary members (purl1ns" gir,ts, etc.) shall
be doubly-symmetrical. sections of constant deptQ;(e,g. wide
flange ,,"V' -shaped, structural ,t~bing).
,,:'
,.
6.
Primary structural framing connections shall be either shop welded

or bolted or field bolted assemblies. ASTM A 325,boltswith
appropriate nuts and washers shall be used for connesting of all
primary members; whereas secondary members may ,use bolts conforming to ASTM A 307. A minimum of two bolts shall.be used for each
connection while bolts for primary and secondary members shall not
be less than 3/4 and li2-inch in diameter, respectively,
7.
.Ba~e.plates
for columns shall be rolled and set,~n grout bed of

t-inch minimum thickness. ASTM A 307 steel .bolts shall be used to
anchor all columns.
6-18.2. Foundations
Concrete floor and 'foundation slabs
shall~be
monolithic in
constr~ction
and
shall be designed,to transfer all horizontal and vertical loads from the preengineered superstructure to the foundation soil.
Minimum slab thickness
shall be 6 inches, with edge beams thickened to meet local frost conditions,
6-18.3. Roof and Walls
, .. ,
',"
Roof and wall coverings must meet the following requirements:

1.
Roof and wall coverings shall conform to ASTM A. 446, G 90, have' a
minimum depth of 1-1/2 inches corrugation and have a material
thickness of 22 gauge.
~'
2. '
Conventional side .laps are not, usually sufficient to resist the " '
effects of blast loads,' The construction details, required to
strengthen'those joints .depend upon the type of decking employed,
Chapter 5 gives the required panel-to-panel attachments for
various types of decking.
3.
Insulation retainers or sub girts shall be designed, to' transmit

all 'external loads (listed. below) which act on the metal cover to
the structural steel framing,"
4.
Roof' and wall liners shall be a minimum of 24 gauge and shall,be

formed to prevent waviness " distortion. or f a LLure. as a result of
the impact by external loads'.
6-18.4. Connections for Roof and Wall Coverings

The connections used in a blast resistant s~ructure are especially critical.
To ensure full development of structural steel and the roof and wall panels,
connections must meet the following criteria:
6-43
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC
P~397/AFR
88-22
1.
Fasteners for connecting roof and wall coverings to structural

steel supports shall be designed to support the external loads
(listed below) and shall consist of 'either self-tapping screws,
self-drilling and 'self-tapping screws, bolts 'and nuts, selflocKing rivets, self-locking bolts, end welded studs, or welds.
" Fasteners of covering to structural steel 'shall 'be 'located at
,valleys of the covering and shall have a minimUm of one fastener
per valley.
2.
.. Fasteners which do not provide'positive locking such as selftapping screws, etc. shall not be used at side-laps,and for
, fastening accessories to panels. At least one fastener for side
laps shall be located in each valley and at a 'maximum spacing
'along'the valley of 8 inches.
J
, , '
3,
Self tapping screws shall not have a diameter smaller than a no,
14 screw while the minimum diameter of a self-drilling 'and selftapping type shall be equa Ll t o or greater -tihan a no, '12 screw.
Automatic welded studs shall be shouldered type and'have a shank
diameter of at least 3/16 inch, Fasteners for use with power
actuated tools shall have a shank diameter of not h'ss!'than 1/2
inch. Blind rivets shall be stainless steel type and have a
minimum diameter of 1/8 inch,' : Rivets shall be'threaded stem type
if used for other' than fastening 'trim and' if of-the hollow type
shall have closed ends, Bolts shall not be less than'l/4 inch in
diameter' and will,be provided with suitable nuts' and washe r s ,'
If suction andlor rebound loads dictate, provide oversized'washers
with a maximum outside diameter of 2 inches or a 22 gauge thick
metal strip along each valley.
6-19. Preparation of'Partial'Blast'Analysis

,
A partial blast analysis of a pre-engineered building shaI l.vbe performed by

the design engineer, This analysis shall include the determination of the
minimUm size of the roof and wall panels which is included in the' design'
specifications and the design of the building foundation and floor slab. The
foundation ,and floor slab shall be designed monolithically and have a minimum
thickness,as previously stated. 'The slab shall be designed for a foundation
load equal to either 1.3 times the yield capacity of the building roof
equivalent blast load or the static roof and floor loads listed below, Quite
often the'foundation below the'building columns must be thickened'to distribute the 'column loads. For the blast analysis of ,the building'foundation and
floor s Lab , the dynamic capacity of the soil" below the .f'oundat Lorr. slab can
conservatively be assumed to be equal to twice the static soil capacity, The
resistance of the roof of the building can be determined in'accordance with
the procedures given in Chapter 5. The front panel o~thebuilding is
designed in the same manner as the roof panel. "The blast loads for determining the capacities of the roof and wall panels can be determined from Chapter
2,
6-20. Pre-Engineered Building Design

~,
~.
Design of the pre-engineered building: shall be performed by the pre-engineered,

building manufacturer using static loads and conventional stresse~.
6-44
1M 5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
Conyentional stresses' are listed in "Specification for the Design. Fabrication

and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings with Commentary". Static
design loads shall be as follows:
1.
Floor live loads shall be as specified in the report titled

"American National Standard Building Code Requirements for Minimum
Design Loads in Buildings and Other Structures" (hereafter referred to as ANSI) but not less than 150 pounds per square foot .
.
2.
. 3.
4.
Roof live loads shall be as specified ANSI.

Dead loads are b~s~d on the materials of construction .
Wind pressure shall be as computed in accordance with ANSI for
exposure ;C.. ami a wind speed of 100 miles per hour.
.
~.
"
5.
Seismic loads will be calculated according to the Uniform Building

Code for the given area. If this load is greater than die computed wind pressure. than the seismic' load will be substituted for
wind load in all load combinations.
6.
Auxiliary and collateral loads are all design loads not listed
above and include suspended ceilings,
insula~i?n,
electrical
systems. mechanical systems, etc.

Combinations of design loads shall include 'the following (a)' dead loads plus
live loads; (b) .dead loads plus wind loads. and (c) 75 percent of the sum of
dead. live and Wind. loads.
6-21. Blast Evaluation of the, Structure
Blast evaluation of the structure utilizing the shop drawings prepared in
connection with the above design shall be performed by the design engineer. A
dynamic analysis which describes the magnitude and direction of the elastoplastic stresses developed in the main frames and secondarymembers as a
result of the blast loads, shall be performed-using the 'methods described in
Chapter 5. This evaluation should be made at the time of the shop drawing
review stage.
.
6-22. Recommended Specification for 'Pre-Engineered Buildings
Specifications for pre-engineered buildings shall be consisterit with the
recommended design changes set forth in the preceding Section. These example
specifications are preserited using the Coristruction'Spe~ificationInstitute
(CSI) format and shall contain as a minimum the following: .
1.
APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS. The following publica~ions of the issues
listed below. but referred 'to thereafter by basic de s Lgna t I'on only. forma
part of this specification to
extent indicated by the reference thereto:
, the
.
1.1
American Society of Testing and .Materials (ASTM),

A 36
Structural Steel
6-45
TK '-1300/NAVrAC P-397/Ara 88-22
..
A 30780
Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Externally and Intarnally Threaded Standard Fasteners
A 325
Standard Specification for High Strength Bolts

for Structural Steel Joint' Including Suitable
Nuts and Plain Hardened Washers
A 446
Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Ga1vanized)'by the Hot-Dip Process, Physical
(Structural) 9uantity
A ,501
Standa~d Specification for. Hot-Formed Welded and

Seamress C~rbon St~el Structural Tubing
A 529
Standard Specification for Structural Steel with

42,000 psi Minimum Yield Point
.
A 570
Standard Specification for Hot-Rolled Carbon

Steel Sheet and Strip, Structural Quality
A 572
1.2
Specification of High-Strength Low-Allow Colum,bium-Vanadium Steels of Structural Quality
American Iron and Steel ,Institute (AISI)

Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural
Members and Commentary ,
1.3
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

A58.1 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures
B18.22.1
1.4
Plain Washers
American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC)

Specification for the Design Fabrication and Erection of
Structural Steel for Buildings with Commentary Research
Council on Riveted and Bolted Structural Joints (RCRBSJ)
Specification for Structural' Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A
,,90 ,Bolts,
1. 5
American Welding Society (AWS)

,~
01.1 Structural Welding Code

1.6
Metal Building Manufacturers' Association (MBMA)

Metal Buildings Systems Manual
1.7
Uniform Building Code
6-.46
TK 5-1300jNAVFAC
2.
GENERAL.'
""(
-,
:,
','
P,397jAf~
88-22
"
. '.
l'~:'
2.1
This section covers the manufacture and erection of pre.-...
engineered metal structures. The structure manufacturer shall be regularly
engaged in the fabrication of metal structures.
',~
:2.2 ...The structure shall include ,th~ ,rigid Erami.ng , which are
spaced at a. maximum o f- 20 feet .on .cerrte r- roof and 'wall cove r Lng , trim, ,closures " and accessories .as indicated,on the draw1ngs:.. Minor. a Lt.er a t i.ons in
dimensions shown on the drawings will be considered. in .order: to.,comp1y with
the manufacturer's standards building system, provided that all minimum clearances indicated on the' drawings are maintained. Su~h changes shall be submitted for review and acceptance prior to fabrication.
1
. 2.3
Drawings shall indicate. extent .and general as sembIy details
of the metal roofing and sidings. Members and connections not indicated on
the drawings shall be designed.by the Contractor,in.;accordance with the
manufacturer's standard details. The Contractor shall comply with the
dimensions, profile limitations, gauges and fabrication. details shown on the
drawings. Modification' of'detai1s will be permitted ,only when approved by the
Owner. Should the modifications proposed by the Contractor be accepted by the
Owner, the Contractor ,shall be fu11yresponsib1~ for ~ny re-design and redetailing of the building construction effected.
-:', ,"
3.'
... J ':
DEFINITIONS. '
3.1
Low Rigid Frame. The building shall be single gable ,type
with the roof slope not to exceed one on four.
'.
3.2
Framing.
3.2.1 Primary Structural Framing ...,The primary structural

framing includes the main transverse frames and other'primary load carrying
members and their fasteners.
"
.3.2.2 Secondary Structural. Framing. The secondary structura1 framing includes the girts, Foof pur1ins, bridging, eave struts, and other
miscellaneous secondary framing members
. and their fasteners... '
- '
.. ,
3.2 ,3.. Roof . and~Wall .covarIng , ',TI1e:roof and wall covering
includes the exterior ribbed metal panel having a ..minimumdepth of one and
one-half inches, neoprene closure, f~steners and s~alant.
, "v
"
',',
"
3,3:
Building .Ceometry .
"",
,,",~'f'
'_'I
e
} . ~'
.'
"),
.3;3.1 Roof Slope.The~roof of .the bu Ll'dfng i shal L have a

maximum slope not to exceed onev on four ..
. "
'.t.r ,.
'.,
';'-
3.3.2 Bay Spacing ..:. The.bay,spacing shall -, not exceed

20 feet.
t't'
', ..
-,
'1.
:- ','
.'
, "
"""
3.4 '~I CoLumnt.Shape .. 'Main frame columns shall .:be doubly symmetrical members of constant, depth;" tapered .coLumns will not ,be permit,ted.
,
.........
,-
TH'S-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR'SS-22'
3.S
Calculations. The Contractor shall submit for'review
complete design calculations for all work, sealed by a registered professional
engineer.
:, .. .,
,,-"
,~-
".
STRUCTURAL DESIGN.
4.
'. "
4~1
Structural Analysis. The structural analysis of 'the primary
and secondary framing' and covering shall be b'a sed on;'linear elastic behavior
and shall accurately z e f Lec t; the final 'configuration, o"f the structure" and a11-
tributary design' loadings"
-,'
,;"
,-
.',
Basic Design Loads.
-'-.'
"
4.2.1 Roof Live Load. Shall be applied to the horizontal

roof p roj ec tLon . "Roof live loads shall be:
,-
Oto 200 'square feet ,trIbutary' area

"
20 psf
linear variation, 20
'200 'to' 600 square feet tributary 'area

c'
, ps'f to 12 -p s f
, ..~
over 600 square 'feet tributary area
- 12
psf
4.2.2 WInd Pressure: Wind design loads shall be computed In

accordance wIth ANSI' ,ASS. 1 for exposure "C" and a ba s Lc wInd'speed,of 100
mIles per hour.
" t.;
4.2.2.1
Typical Wind Loading .
'As'shown on
drawings (Figure 6-18).

4.2.2.2
Wind Loadiqg at BuIlding Corners.
shown on the drawings (Figure,:6-'18Y: ,.
',.
4.2.2.3
;,
Wind Loading on Girts.: As'shown'on
drawings (Figure 6-18).

Areas.
ture.
As
'
,4.2:2.4
Wind Loading on Purlins and Roof Tributary
As shown on 'drawings -'(Figure 6-18):
As shown on
4:2.2;S,Wind'Loading"for Design of Overall Struc6,;18) ~

. ..
-
drawing~ _(Fd gure
4.2.3 Auxiliary,arid Collateral Design Loads. Auxiliary and

collateral design loads are those'loads other than,the:basic design live,
dead, and wind loads'; which the building shall safely withstand, such as
ceilings, insulation, "electrical,' mechanical, 'and "p LumhLng systems, and building equipment and supports:
. " ; ,;' ': .
4.3 -App l i cat Lon- of Des ign Loads ..
4.3.l'Roof Live Load and Dead Load:
The ro~f live load (L),
andvde ad load (D), shall be cons Lde red- as . a uniformly distributed . loading
acting vertically on the horizontal ,projection of'the,roof.

4.3.2 Snow Loads.
appli'cation of 30 psf due to snow loads ..

6-4S:
TIl 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 8,8-22

, 4.3.3 Win,1' LOAds (1.1):' Application of forces 'due to
wind shall conform to the latest ANSI A58.1
'
' . '
4.3.4 Combination of Loads . The following combinations of

loads shall be considered in the design of all.me~bers of the structure:
0'+ L
0+ 1.1
.75 (0 + L + 1.1)
, ,
4.4
Deflection Limitations.
,
4.4.1 Structural; Framing. cThe primary,and secondary framing

members shall be so, proportioned that 'their maximum calculated roof live: load
deflection does not exceed' 1/120 of the ,span; "
.-
5.
STRUCTURAL
5:1
FRAMING~
General
,
'.~
5 .1.1 'All hot rolled structural shapes ana structural. tubing

shallhave a minimum yield point of 36,000 psi in conformance 'with ASTM A 36
or A 501.
All hot rolled steel plate, strip and'sheet used in the fabrication
of welded assemblies shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A 529, A 572,

Grade 42 or A 570 Grade "E'!, 'as applicable. All hot. rolled 'sheet and strip
used in the fabrication of 'cold-formed members shall conform 'to .the requirements of ASTM A 570, Grade"E" having a minimum yield strength of 50,000 psi.
Design of cold-formed members shall .be ,in accordance with the' AISI specifications.
;-
'..;
5.1.2 The minimum thickness ,of 'framing members shall be:

,.
Cold-~ormed seco~dary framing'members
Pipe or tube columns
Webs of welded built-up members
Flanges 'of welded built-up members
Bracing rods v..
I,
,18 gauge
12 gauge,
1/8 inch
1/4 inch
1/4 inch
5.1.3 All framing members shall 'be .f'ab r Lc a t ed for bolted.

field assembly. Bolt holes shall be punched or drilled only. No burning-in
of holes will be allowed. The faying surfaces of, all bolted connections shall
be, smooth'and free from burrs or distortions. Provide washers under head and
nut of ' all bolts. Provide beveled washers to match sloping surfaces'as
required. Bolts shall be of type specified below. Membeisshall be straight
and dimensionally accurate.
5.l.4'All welded connections shall be in conformance with

the STRUCTURAL WELDING CODE 01.1 ,of, the American Welding Society. The flangeto-web welds shall be one side'contin~ous submerged'arc fillet welds. Other.
welds shall be by the shielded,arc process .
.. '5.2. ' Primary Structural Framing;
5.2.1 The primary members shall be constructed of doublysymmetrical, hot rolled structural steel shapes or doubly-symmetrical built-up
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC' P-397/AFR'SS-22
mem~ers
of
const~nt
depth; welded from hot: rolled steel sheet, strip or
plates.
....
5.2.2 'Compression flanges shall be laterally braced to

withstand any combination of. loading.
'.,5.2.3 Bracing system shall be provided to adequately
transmit all' lateral forces on the building to the foundation.
5.2.4 All bolt connections of primary structural framing
shall be made using high-strength zinc-plated (0.0003 bronze zinc plated)
bolts, nuts, and washers conforming to ASTM A 325. Bolted connections shall
have not less than two bolts . . Bolts shall not. be ..less. than' 3/4 inch diameter.
Shop. welds and field bolting are preferred. . A:ll field welds will require.
prior approval of the Owner. Installation of fasteners shall be by the..turn- d
of-nut or load-indicating washer method in accordance with the specifications
for structural joints of the Research Council on Riveted and Bolt~d Structural
Joints.
,.
5.3
Secondary members may be constructed of either hot rolled or
cold-formed steel .. Purlins and girts shall be doubly 'symmetrical sections of
constant depth.and they may be 'built-up, cold-formed. or hot rolled structural
shapes.
'.
:.
" .
5.3.1 Maximum spacing ,of.. roof purlins and wall girts

shall not exceed 5 feet._ .
5.3.2 Compression flanges of purlins and girts shall be.
laterally braced to withstand any combination of loading.
..
5.3.3 Supporting,lugs shall be used to connect the purlins
and girts to the primary framing. The lugs shall be designed to restrain the
light gauge sections from tipping or.warping at their supports. Each member
shall be connected to each lug by a_minimum of two fasteners.
5,3.4 Vertical wall members not subjected to axial load,
e.g. vertical members at door openings, shall be constant depth sections.
They may consist of hot .rolled or cold-form steel. They shall be either
built-up, cold-formed or hot rolled "C" .or "I" shapes.
5.3.5 Fasteners for all secondary framing shall bea minimum
of 1/2. inch diameter (0.003 zinc plated) bolts conforming' to ASTM A 307.' The
fasteners shall be tightened to' SNUG TIGHT. condition. Plain washers shall
conform to ANSI standard B18. 22.1. '
. .'
6.
ANCHORAGE.
6.1
Anchorage. The building anchor bolts for both primary and
secondary columns shall conform to ASTM A 307 steel and shall be'designed.to
resist the column reactions produced by the. specified design loading. The
quantity, size and location of anchor bolts shall be specified and furnished
by the building manufacturer. A minimum of two anchor bolts shall' be used
with each column.
.. ,
6-50
TN
6.2.
to
ASTM~
7.
Column Base Plates.,
5~1300/HAVPAC
P-397/APR 88-22
Baseplat.es for columns shall conform
36 and shall be set on a grout bed: of 1 inch
minimum,thic~ness.
ROOF AND WALL COVERING.
7,,1
Roof and wall panels shall conform to zinc-coated steel,
ASTM A 446, G 90 cpating ,.designation. Minimum qepth of .each panel corrugation
shall be 1-1/2 inches and shall have a minimum material thickness of 22 gauge.
The minimum yield strength of panel material shall be 33,000 psi. Wall panels
shall. be applied with the longitudinal ,configurations, in ,the ",ertical position. .Roof panels ,shall be applied with the longitudinal configuration in
direction of the roof slope. Side laps of roof and wall panels shall be
fastened as shown on drawings. End laps, if required shall occur at structural steel supports and have aminimu~ length of 12 inches.
7.2
Insulation.
siding shall be
suppli~d.and
,7.2.1 Semi-rigid insulation for, the',preformed roofing and

installed by the preformed roofing and siding
manufacturer.
7.2.2 Insulation Retainers.
Insulation retainers or sub
girts shall be designed to transmit all external loads (wind, snow and live
loads) acting on the metal panels to the structural steel framing.

retaine~s
The
shall be capable of transmitting both the direct and suction loads.

7.3
Wall and Roof Liners.
minimum of 24 gauge.
Wall and roof liners shall be a
All liners shall be formed
o~
patterned to prevent
waviness, distortion or failure as aresult of the impact by external loads.
7.4
Fasteners.
Fasteners for roof and wall panels shall be
zinc-coated steel or corrosion-resisting steel.
Exposed fasteners shall be
gasketed or have gasketed washers of a material compatible with the covering

to waterproof
~he
fastener penetration.
Gasketed portion of fasteners or
washers shall be neoprene or other elastomeric material approximately 1/8 inch

thick.
7.4.1 Type of Fasteners.
Fasteners for connecting roof or
wall panels to structural steel supports shall consist of self-tapping screws,
self-drilling and self-tapping screws, bolts, end welded studs, and welds.
Fasteners for panels which connect to structural supports shall be located in
each valley of the panel and with a minimum of one fastener per valley while
at end laps and plain ends, a minimum of two fasteners shall be used per
valley.
Fasteners shall not be located at panel crowns.
7.4.2 Fasteners which do not provide positive locking such

as self-tapping screws or self-drilling and self-tapping screws shall not be
used at side laps of panels and for fastening accessories to panels.
Fasten-
ers for side laps shall be located in each valley of the overlap and positioned a maximum of 8 inches on center.
7.4.3 Screws 'shall be not less than No. 14 diameter if selftapping type and not less than No. 12 diameter if self-drilling and selftapping type.
6-51
TN 5-1300/HAVFAC
P~397/AFR
88-22
7.4:4. Automatic end-welded studs shall'be shouldered type

with a shank diameter of not less than 3/16 inch with cap and nut for holding'
the covering against the shoulder.
7.4.5 Fasteners for use with power actuated tools shall have
a shank diameter of not less than- 1/2 inch. Fasteners for securing wall
panels shall have threaded studs for attaching approved nuts or caps.7.4.6 Blind rivets shall be stainless steel with l/S
inch nominal diameter shank.- Rivets shall be threaded stem type if used for
other than fastening of trim. Rivets with hollow stems shall have closed
ends.
7.4.7 Bolts shall not be less than 1/4 inch diameter,
shoulders or plain shank as required with proper nuts.
7.4.8 Provide oversize washers with an outside diameter of 1
inch at each fastener or a 22 gauge thick metal. strip along. each valley of the
panel to-negate pull-out of'the panel around the fasteners.
,,
"
6-52
- ,!
-,
e
,
0)
,j~ ..
~'
".-
,,'::::J I,
'
"
:./.i.~
I,
It
"
-,
':r
'.
~~
.... 1') ~"
,-'PI:..
,>q'l
~~
''0..,(i,]
'i ~
, '" ~:;
\ 111::",
~",
\.;
"
~~
>
"
- t
~
C)
f:
' 'if!3 ,;
".
'7
...
'"
1 ' ,"
'
"'i
=F
"f'
II
r; 01
.
'a!'I
>:
-.~.
;,11
{,
4-
..,::I
c-,
'"
.,
! '!
~
Z&
or ',; r
,
',; .
I'
ji
8 ''',: f
~,'
I
~1
I, ; 0!'
~ ~;
;:,
,
'.,
..
11-
...
O"!_L.r-I'
(,
6-53 ,
1-
I~O
I. FLOOR LIVE LOAD:

2.ROOF LIVE
LOAD
20
"-
.. 18
Do
Q
...J
16
pII
"
""
14
12
200400600
SUPPORTED TRIBUTARY AREA,I,"
3. ROOF SNOW LOAD: 30 pII
4. DEAD LOAD: AS PER MATERIALS USED
5. WIND LOADS: WIND PARALLEL OR PERPENDICULAR TO ROOF
RIDGEIBASED ON 100mph WIND)
A. WINDWARD/LEEWARD AND ROOF PRESSURES (pIll
e , WHEN TRIBUTARY SUPPORT AREAS> 200 ft'

.
32.'
~
--
26
32
FOR DESIGN OF MAIN FRAMES AND

OTHER INDIVIDUAL MEMBERS, USE
VALUES SHOWN.
--
26
b.WHEN TRIB'UTARY SUPPORT AREA
:s 200 ft.
--43'0'143---
35
FOR DESIGN OF MAIN FRAMES, USE

VALUES SHOWN FOR TRIBUTARY AREA
.
> 200 fl'. FOR DESIG N OF OTHER
43
INDIVIDUAL MEMBERS, USE VALUES SHOWN
PRESSURES (psI)
35
43
B. SIDEWALL
~-::~~,.,.,.,...J.
FOR DESIGN OF INDIVUAL MEMBERS:

WHEN TRIBUTARY SUPPORTED> 200 ft"
USE P , 3 2 '
,
WHEN TRIBUTARY SUPPORTED < 200 II",
USE P'43
-
P
--
~O
C.SIDESWAY PRESSURES (psI)
';
r1"l.'
FOR DESIGN OF MAIN FRAMES FOR

TRIBUTARY SUPPORTED AREAS, TA,
LESS THAN, EQUAL TO, OR GREATER
THAN,200 ft',
~
.~
WIIO I I
.
D. LOCAL PRESSURES' SEE FIGURES IN 'B' AND

OF APPLICATION
REGION '1 : 50psl SUCTION
REGION 2: 105psl SUCTION
REGION 3: 42 psI SUCTION.
"w" IS
'c'
FOR REGIONS
FOR DESIGN OF DECKING

CONNECTIONS AT REGIONS
CITED
LEAST WIDTH OF ENCLOSED AREA
NOTE: FIGURES DEPICT WIND PERPENDICULAR TO RIDGE.

FOR WIND PARALLEL TO RIDGE, USE SAME VALUES.
6.
LOADING
COMBINATIONS:
A. 0
B. 0 l' L
C. 0 t- W
D.0.75(Dt-L+W)
Figure 6-18
WHERE
0' DEAD LOAD
. L' LIVE LOAD
W' WIND LOAD
Recommended pre-engineered building design loads

654
SUPPRESSIVE SHIELDING
6-23. General
This manual.presents methods for the design and construction of conventional
reinforced concrete arid steel protective faciltties which provide adequate
..
safety for hazardous operations such as munitions loading, maintenance,
renovation, or demilitarization. Such safety considerations include the

utilization of conventi~nal protective barrier~, total containment construction, or t.he use of separation.distances"or isolation of the, specific opera-,
tion from other parts of" .the f ac i Li ry cusLng . appropriate quantity distance
specifications .. Howeve r , an a l t.ernat Ive available to'. the designer of these. r
facilities is the .use of suppres~ive shield~ng as outl~ned in HNDM 1110-J-2,.
"Suppressive Shields Structural Design .an? Analysis Handbook,", 18. November
1 9 7 7 . , .
.,
A suppressive shield is a vented steel enclosure which controls or confines
the hazardous blast, fragment, and flame effects of detonations. Suppressive
shielding may provide cost or safety effective alternatives to conventional
facilities, depending upl?n the.hazardous situation under study. HNDM 1110-1-2
presents . procedures for design, anaLys Ls; qua Li.t.y ..control., and economic
analysis of .supp res s i.ve shields. .In .ch Ls. section, a br Le f review of che se .'.
procedures is presented. The r e ade r shouLd r eferjt.o HNDM 1110-1-2 for details
i
necessary. for design.
.'.
'..
'I"
.>.
6-24. Application
Facility operations such as munitions loading, maintenance, modification,.
renovation, or .demilitarization mus t .be analyzed to determine which operations
involve potentially catasttophic (CAT I or II " MIL STD .~82~) hazards in the
,.
event of an inadvertent ignition or detonation. Where the hazard analysis.
shows such a potential, the facility design must provide adequate safety for
those operations. The alternatives presented to the.design~r of the facility
are varied and may include the utilization of conventional protective barricades with appropriate ?eparation!distances, reinforced concrete or steel
structures, suppressive shields, or Lso La t i on of a particular operation from--,
the rest of the:facility by theappropriate quantity-distance . . The decision

as to. which alternative.system to use is based primarily on-economicf~ctors,
provided all safety 90nsiderations are equal. The facility,. availability of
real estate, ..and..equipment costs to include maintenance , .operation, usefuL
life, replaceme~t; and modification or renovation must be analyzed for.,each
alternative method of protection. Costs will be estimated and-compared over
the facility life to determine the most economical mode of protection.
.~
A major factor which is paramount in the determination of which form of protection to use is.:the requirement for approval of the .facility by the Depar-t-.
ment of Def'ense Explqsives Safety Board . If the designer can ,based on economic factors, adapt suppressive shields in the design and support the-adaptation with proven accepted analytical techniques, he should begin development
of a facility concept which employs suppressive shields using those shields
which have been safety approved.
~,
i .
. ,. r '
6-55
.'
6-24.1. Safety Approved Suppressive Shields

There are eight suppressive shield design groups that have been developed to .
various stages of definition. These shield groups are summarized in Table 6-4
and illustrated schematically in Figure 6-19; Of the design groups illustrated, five had been safety'approved by the Department of Defense Explosive'
Safety Board in 1977.
'
The five suppressive shield group designs approved' by the 000 Explosive Safety
Board (Groups 3', 4, 5, '6, and 81 mm) have 'been de's Lgned to meet the requlrements for most' applications to ammunition load, as semb Ly , pack (LAP) in the
Munitions'Production' Base Modernization and Expansion Program. However, specific shield requirements will vary with other applications and, even with LAP
applications, design details will vary from'plant to planc'and between muni- .
tions or different operations on the line. It will, therefore, frequently be
necessary to modify the approved shields to adapt them to the operation under
consideration.
Chapter II and Appendix A of HNDM 1110-1-2'describes the safety approved

shield group designs, provides guidance concerning acceptable modifications,
recommends procedures for securing safety approval of'new,~hield designs, arid
provides swnmary information
on "overal1dimen.l"sions
of the shield structure,
charge capacity, rated overpressure, fragment stopping wall thickness, and'

type of construction of the five approved basic shield' groups. '
6-24.2. New Shield Design
In exceptional, cases where a' safety approved shield cannot be made to fit 'a
desired applicatiori, a new shield can be designed. The guidance needed to design a new shield and the procedures for obtaining:the~afety approvai for the
new design are outlined in HNDM 1110-1-2.'
6-24.2.1. Hazardous Environments
p.
Considering that the hazardous environments' normally associated with suppressive shielding involves :explosives, and/or explosive ordnance, Chapter III of
HNDM 1110"t-2 presents information relative to internal and external air
blast, fragmentation, and fireball phenomena. This information can be used in
support of blast and fragment methods in this manual ,to -de t e rmf.ne venting
requirements, air blast loads on -tbe structure, and protection required to'
defeat fragments. Some graphs and prediction methods in Chapter 2 of this
manual are taken directly from the suppressive shields manual.
-,
6-24.2.2. Structural Behavior

Suppressive shields can be subjected to large, high pressure loads applied
very rapidly. ' The allowance of inelastic behavior of the shield material
structural,elements enables much more efficient use of the stru~tural material
and does not impair the function of the shield provided, of course, 'that the
inelastic behavior.is maintained within acceptable .limits.
The structural materials of primary interest in suppressive shielding are
steel and reinforced concrete. Chapter IV of HNDM 1110-1-2 discusses the
behavior and properties of these structural materials under static 'and dynamic
loading. Additionally, ductility ratios as they apply to suppressive shield
6-56
,"

appli~ation are covered.
Some.of the information provided will duplicate
material in chapters of this manua'L, In case o f- a conflict, this manual takes
precedence.
6-24.2.3. Structural Design and.-Analysis

Chapter V of HNDM 1110-1-2 describes techniques which are sufficiently
accurate'for preliminary designs in alL.cases, and~in most cases, adequate ..for
final designs. These methods deal primarily with the 'dynamic loadings imposed
by internal explosions . .The design methods supplement material'presented in
chapters .of this manual: Again, in case of conflict, .this manual takes
precedence.
~.
6-24.2.4. Structural Details

Each suppressive shield used for ammunition manufacturing and other hazardous
operations will have specific.requirements forlutility penetrations,and doors
for personnel, .equipment; and products. Guidance on the provision.of acceptable structural details such.as these:is presentedin Chapter VI of HNDM 11101-2 along with information on. structural details whi~h have been successfully
proof-tested.
6-24.2.5. Economic Analysis
The design of a facility entails the need to ascertain the. most co s tre f fiec t Lve
configuration from among a set of workable design alternatives. All will be
designed to provide the desired level of reliability and safety, and the~
selection'of one over another: will be ,based primarily on 'dollar costs. The .
economic analysis of alternative facility design is a'complex process unique
to each facility.' Chapter VII of HNDM 1110-1-2 illustrates the many factors
that must be considered.
6-24.2.6. Assuring Structural Quality
In the design of suppressive shields, specifications for.the quality of the
basic material. is paramount: The strength of welds and concrete components
are also determining factors in the overall strength of the structure. ",-Chapter VIII of HNDM 1110-1-2 .provides the guidance.which outlines a quality.
assurance program for .suppressive shield design.packages.,
.'
Included in Appendix A of HNDM 1110-1-2 is a detailed: description of .the
safety approved suppressive shields and guidance concerning acceptable.
modifications. Copies of the fabrication drawings -f or each" approved shield
design are included along with, direction' for ordering' full-size cop Les ....
Appendix B of that manual includes response charts for use in preliminary
design. The charts are based on the combined short duration -shock load' .and
infinite duration quasi-static load, along with an undamped elastic-plastic
responding structure.
'
6-25. Design.Criteria
Design criteria for use of suppressive shields,. or suppressive shielding
panels, are very dependent on specific applications in protective structures.
These criteria may include complete suppression of fragmentation effects, both
primary and secondary; attenuation of blast overpressures and 'impulses' to
6-57
"
TIl: 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
specified levels of specific distances from the shield or shield panels;

attenuation of-fireball radiation; or even essentially complete suppression of'
all of these effects.
Suppressive shields mayor may not present reaspnable or 'cost effective_
solutions to specific design problems in protective structures. Generally,
they have appeared attractive when fragment hazards are severe arid'when'
pocerrt La l Ly explosive sources are rather concent.rat ed.; The safety-app)'oved
shields protect against effects as limited as.small trays of detonators, and
as severe as a large melt kettlecin a HE melt-pour operation containing
several thousand pounds of explosive. 'The designer should consider their use,
and use the methods presented in HNDM 1110-1-2 to evaluate their efficacy,
compared to other types of protective structures discussed in this manual.
..
No general design criteria can be given here because the criteria for different operations or plants, and available real. estate, differ too widely. In
each specific protection design contract, the AE should be provided with quite.
detailed design criteria, in addition to general regulations which fix safety,
criteria 'such as AMCR 385-100. Both the specific and ,more general criteria
must be evaluated 'when deciding.whether or not suppressive shields will be
useful in the facility design.
6-26. Design Procedures
6-26.1. Space Requirements '.'
Once the operation requiring _suppressive shields has been identified, consid-
eration must be given to the s~ie and shape of the equipment needed .to.perform
the operation and the work'space required inside the shield. These factors'
necessarily provide the designer with an estimate of the size and'shape of the
shield required. Additionally, space available on the line or inthe building
will place limitations on the overall shield base dimensions and height.
6-26.2. Charge Parameters
.
<, -
A principal factor in the selection of a shield which will govern the shield
requirements is the establishment of the charge parameters for any specific
application. 'The charge parameters are: charge weight (W). shape, confinement, and composition; ratio of' charge weight to shield internal chapter. ,~
(W/V); and scaled distance (2) from the charge to the nearest wall or roof of
the shield. (2 - R;Wl/3), where R is the distance from the center of the
charge to the nearest wall. or roof in feet and'W is the charge weight in
pounds. ,These parameters for approved shield groups are summarized in Table
6-5. New shield designs can be rdeve Loped for individual needs.
6-26.3. Fragment Parameters
-.:;
.:
Another key factor in the procedure a designer follows in the selection:of.an(

approved design or the design of a new concept is the suppression of primary
and secondary fragments generated by the detonation of explosives or munitions. Much of the material in HNDM 1110-1-2 for fragment perforation of
spaced plates has been'adapted to Chapter 5 of this manual.
:l
J'
>
..
,{
6-58

6-26.4. Structural Details:
Suppressive shields used for,' ammunition manufacturing and other hazardous
operations 'require provisions for gaining access to the operation being
protected. Personnel must be able to' enter .the shield to accomplish .rcuttne
and emergency' maintenance and clean-up and other essential operations. ,An
opening of sufficient size must be provided to enable the installation or
removal of equipment in realistically large subassemblies. Openings for
conveyors and chutes.must also be provided and properly configured ,to prevent
excessive pressure and fragments from escaping. Provisions must be made to
provide all utilities and satisfy all environmental conditioning needs which
may be essentrt a'l. to the operations inside the shield.
Utility penetrations, ventilating and .air-conditioning ducts, and vacuum lines
must not diminish the overall protective capability of tne shield. They must
not alter the 'basic. mode o f vs t ruc tura I failure of the suppressive shield and
should be small compared to the general size of the shield. . .
Operations that produce explosive dust may require the use of liners both
inside and outside the shield to prevent the accumulation of dust within
shield panels. With configurations such as the Group 5 shield, which is
primarily designed for use with propellants or pyrotechnic materials, liners
must not, inhibit. the venting characteristics
of the, shield.
.
,
,
Utility.lines passing through .suppressive shields are vulnerable to both air

blast and fragment hazards. The air blast could push unprotected utility
penetrations through. the walls of'the shield and create secondary fragments.
Fragments from an accidental explosion could perforate the 'thin walls of an
unprotected utility pipe and escape from the shield. To eliminate the threat
of air blast and fragments. a protective box is used to cover the area where
the utility lines pass through the shield wall. The box is configured to rest
on the inside' surface of the' shield and is welded to the shield. The size of
the wall penetrations is limited to that required for the utilities . 'Each
pipe is bent at a right angle inside the shield within the protective box.
The penetrations "of' the' shield wall are reinforced .with a sleeve or box ",'
.:
section welded to the shield paner through which ,the utility line passes. The
penetration box is designed to maintain the structural integrity of the shield
area penetrated. A typical ,protective box de's Lgn is shown in Figure 6-20.
The cover plate thickness is selected to stop the'worst case fragment.
Typical penetrations for approved safety design suppressive shields are
illustrated in Figures 6-21 and 6-22, and a vacuum line penetration is
illustrated in Figure 6-23.
.,
6-26.5. Access Penetrations
In the munitions plant environment, suppressive shields are designed to

protect Category I or II hazardous operations as ,defined in MIL STD 882A~
Remote operation may be required so personnel will not be ,inside the shield
during operations. However, personnel access is required to allow for
maintenance,repair, and inspection. Further,:these doors must provide large
openings to enable most equipment to be installed or removed in large subassemblies.
6-59
Access is also required for munitions components, explosives, and assembled

munitions to pass through the suppressive shield. In the case of conveyor
transporting systems, consideration must be given to the proper pass-through
of the conveyor. Requirements for this type of access depend on the configuration of the munitions product, transporting pallets, and conveyors, as well
as production rates and other factors unique to each operation. For. these
reasons, definition of specific design requirements is not possible.
6-26,5.1.
-Pe r
s orme L Door
Three different types of doors have been developed for use in .suppressive
shields: sliding, hinged, and double leaf. The hinged door was designed to
swing inward. This feature reduces the usable space inside the shield. A
sliding door is preferred for personnel access to munitions operations.
Figure 6-24 illustrates a typical sliding door. This type door is used with
the Group 4, 5, and Milan 81 mm shields. The sliding door consists of an
entire shield panel suspended from a monorail system. The panel is inside the
shield and is not rigidly attached to the column members. Special consideration was given to, the air gap between the door panel and the column to assure
that excessive pressure leakage would not occur and that fragments could not
pass through the gap.

The cylindrical Group 3 shield contains a two-leaf door, hinged at eachside.
It swings inward as shown in Figure 6-25. The door is curved to match the
shield wall contour and is fabricated from S5 x 10 I-beams. Pressure loading
restraint is.provided by the door bearing on the external support rings ofthe
shield at the top and bottom of the door. An external latch provides restraint during rebound of the door.
' .:
6 -26.5,2. Product Door
Only one type of. product door has been developed conceptually for use in
suppressive shields. I t. is the rotary, three lobed configuration shown in
Figure 6-26 ... The design procedure for this door is described to illustrate
the type of analysis required . . It can be used as a guide for analysis of
similar alternate design concepts for product doors.
.
The air blast will most severely load the rotatfng.-product door when the
munitions opening is coincident with the pocket in the rotary door. A nonoverriding clutch prevents the door from counter-rotating. The angular
impuls i ve load Ls ;
6-38
where
angular impulsive load
reflected impulse
door area
radius from :center of impulse loadto the .center of door
rotation Assuming the product door to be initially at rest, the rotational velocity
imparted to. the door is given by: .
.'.
6-39
6-60'
TK 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

where
angular velocity
mass moment of inertia of the door about shaft axis
Im -
The kinetic energy imparted

to the door is given by:
,
,
KE
I m ~2
- --2
Ti 2
'
r' . ~
21'm
6-40
~ :'" ". ,
The strain energy absorbed ,by a circular shaft is given by:

6-41
"
where
strain energy
length of the shaft
shear modulus of tlie shaft material
radius of the shaft,
'.
maximum shear stress in the
shaft
Equating the kinetic energy'of th~, rotating'doo~ to the strain energy in the
shaft and solving for the shear stress yields:
.,. s
[::.. r
6-42
The computed shear stress in ,the shaft must be

stress or the shaft material, i.e.,:
~ess,
than the dynamic shear
':
s < 0.55 f dy ,
,
643
"
; l "
6-61
~2LT.
~Itl
NOMINAL
FRAGMENT
~X~;;~tr PATH
INSIDE_' "
SUPPRESSIVE SHIELD GROUP 3

( GROUPS 1 & 2 ARE SIMILAR. aUT MUCH LARGER, AND "'AVE THREE EXTERNAL RINGS)
10.4 FT.
NOMINAL
-1f-#-~~-'HI-"-,p>~'l- FRAGMENT
PATH
INSIDE-
-OUTSIDE
NOMINAL
-mm4H- FRAGMENT
PATH
INSIDE_
-OUTSIDE
Figure 6-19a.
General configuration of suppressive shield groups
662
..
o
i~
i
I
BAR
I
i
REINFORCING
, RING
1/4" MILD
STEEL
STEEL BANDS
~ -
REVOLVING TRAY
'
" :'1 '.,.
.~
15.4 FT.
INSIDE-
-OUTSIDE
SUPPRESSIVE SHIELD GROUP 81mm
Figure 6-19b 'General configuration of suppressive shield groups (continued)
6-63
.,
OUTSIDE
" " " INSIDE

CAULKING SE AL
SUPPRESSIVE SHIELD
WALL
d,~
r,
,
WELD
BOX STRUCTURE
i
f
.i!~%t1.MI;:F
~r'l!i:"" ",;,p.,
':'p'":;~:t~~:~;~;
!~:r:~i
....J''':' >t; :ilk
ELECTRICAL LINE
'"
'"
'"
PNE UMA TIC LINE
-, ;~~~;,~t~I::'lf~
"--
GENERAL WATER LINE
1", .. '
,.;'.:t.
~.'!
'J'
"'I,
COVER PLATE
.... )
;::~:~ '
.,
~
"j.
t'
;.\
C',
. DELUGE WATER LINE
Fioure 6-20
I
' .. DRAIN
I~
Typical utility penetration
<.
VACUUM LINE
PENETRATION
ASSEMBLY
PERSONNEL DOOR
,
"
.;.
:-~ 1.,
UTILITIES
PENETRATION
ASSEMBLY
:."
F';~ure 6-21
"
Typ ica I location cf tut t l t ty penetration i n vshi e l d groups 4,5,

and 31 nm
,-,
UTILITIES
PENETRATION
ASSEMBLY
(ALTERNATE
LOCATION)
VACUUM LINE
PENETRATION
ASSEMBLY
" ,
",
...I-'
CD
en
"
UTILITIES
PENETRATION
ASSEMBLY
Figure 6-22
_ I '
i -,
I'
' .....' ,
<,
Typical location of utility penetrations inrshield group 3
6-66
.'
"
OUTS1".-.
<,
U PP R E S S~VL1.
S~IELD
""
".
.' - INSIDE
w _
'",,",
'"
SPLIT COLLAR
VACUUM. LINE
BUSHING
Figure 6-23 -Typical vacuum line penetr~tion
6-67
OOOR SUSPENSION BEAM

ROLLER
SYSTEM
>
I!I I
'i;
I I
.!tt11
. ,
,
,,

o ,
'.
:.
I'
I ..
;)
I
I
II
, ,
o
o
, ,

o
o
o
o
..
. ,
SHIELD COLUMN
SLIDING DOOR
6-68
o
o o o
.

o
o

I.
I
Figure 6-24 Sliding
personnel~door
e
::-t
'"
..
"
...
" ~~
'J
"
II
SH)ELD SIDEWALL
II
II
II
II
II
I:
, STRUCTURAL TUBING
(ALL, AR9UNP, OPENING)'
" TOP
HINGE
PLATE
INTERMEDIATE
STEEL HOOP
(RING BEAM)
C1'>
LATCH
,BOTTOM
... ',.
"
Figure 6-25 Door - group 3 shield
PLATE
LOWER EDGE
(lESTRAINT
o
BASE SLAB
FRAGMENT SHIELD
SUPPRESSIVE
SHIELD WALL
ROTATING
CYLINDER
. WALL OF
U:L
---- PRODUCT
DOOR
81UM HE PROJECTILE
~~~~
BELT CONVEYOR
Figure 6-26
PROJECTILE HOLDING FIXTURE

(NOT ATTACHED TO BELT)
Rotating product door
670
Table 6-4
Summary of Suppressive Shield Groups
HAZARD PARAMETER
SHIELD GROUP BLAST
High.
High
REPRESENTATIVE
APPLICATIONS
FRAGMENTATION
Porcupine Melter
(2000 lbs) plus
.two POUl; un i.t s ,2?0
lbs each
Severe
, " HE Bulk (750 lb)

Minute melter
Severe'
LEVEL OF PROTECTION
Reduce blast pressure

at intraline distance
by 50 perc,ept
Reduce blast pressure
at. intraline distance
by 50 percent
..
-"
.Hi gh~'. - Moderate.' _:. HE Bulk (37 1l~)

Detonators, fuses
Medium
Severe
HE Bulk (91b)
Processing rounds
Low
Light,
30 lb Illuminant
Category I hazard
6,2 feet from shield
Category I hazard
19 feet from shield
.'
Category I hazard
Igniter s~urry mix- 3.7 feet from shield
ing HE processing
I
I
(1. 84 1\
, (
,6
, Very
: High
-'
Medium
Light
Laboratory, '
handling, and
f
t,.
Mo4era~e
t ranspo r t.at Lon
F'Lamej/ f Lreb a l L
attenuation
81 mm
High
Moderate
Category I hazard
at 5 feet from shield
"
81 mm mortar drill- Category I hazard

at 3 feet from shield
and-face and/or
cas t - finishing
operation
Category I hazard
at 'I foot from shield
All.shield groups contain all fragments
,
P-397/AF~:
TM 5,-1300/NAVFAC
88,-22 '
"
"
.i
"
Table 6-5
ChargeParameiers for Safety Approved Shields
"
MINIMUM
,
ROOF
MAXIMUM W/V
(lb/ft 3)
1. 63'
1..45
0.04157
' 2.23
'2.19
0.00762
4.14
6.79
..
"
..
.4'
(ft/1b 1/3)
WALL
SHIELD GROUP
.'
"
~,
,
-,
6A
1.01
N/A
0.22970
6B
1.22
~/A
0.13200
3.62
3.21
0.00340
4.23
3;75
0.00280
Prototype 81 mm*
"
,
'
Milan 81 mm *
"
See Figure 619

: .
ir.
0.00215
,.
~.
r :
6-72
BLAST RESISTANT WINDOWS

,
6-27. Introduction'
.'
Historical records,of'explosion effects demonstrate that blast'propelled'glass

fragments froin, failed windows', are a majo r- cause of injuries' froin,'accidental
explosions.' Also" failed window glazing often leads to add l t Lona LtLnj ur Les as
blast pressure can enter interior building'spaces' and' subject'personnel to
high pressure jetting, incident overpressure, secondary debris impact, and
thrown body ,'impact. 'These risks are heightened in modern facilities, which
often have' large, areas of glass.
Guidelines are presented for both the design,'evaluation, 'and certification' of
windows to 'safely survive a prescribed blast 'environment'described by a
'triangular-shaped pressure-time curve, Window designs using monolithic
(unlaminated) thermally tempered glass based on these guidelines can be'
expected to provide a probability of failure equivalent to that provided by
current safety. s't andar ds for safely' resisting wind loads.'
J.
-; .
Guidelines are'present~d ~n the form of load criteria for the design of both
the glass panes and framing system for the window. The criteria account for
both the bending and membrane stresses and their effect on maximum principle
stresses and the -nonlinear behavior of glass panes',
The criteria cover a
broad range of design parameters for rectangular-shaped glass panes. Design

charts a.r erp r e s enned for monolithic thermally tempered glazing'with blast
overpressure capacity' up 'to 100 psi, an aspect ratio of 1.00 S alb S 4.00,
pane area 1.0 S ab S 25. ft 2 . and nominal glass thickness 1/4 S e S 3/4 'inches.
An alternate method'f~r blast capacity evaluation by calculati~n is also
presented, This can be used to evaluate the blast capacity of glass when
interpolation between charts is unadvisable, when design parameters are
outside the limits of the chart, and to calculate rebound loads. Presently,
the design criteria are for b Las t -xe s Ls t ant windows with'thermally t r ea t ed ;'
monolithic tempered glass. Further research is required to, extend these

design criteri.ato laminated tempere~ glass,
6-28'. Background'
.. "
The design 'c r Ltier La cover monolithic 'tempered glass meeting the requirements
of Federal Specifications DD-G-1403B and DDG-45ld. Additionally, thermally
tempered glass must meet the' minimum fragment weight requirements' of ANSI
297.1-1984, Secdon 5.1:.3(2).
','
s:
".f .
Annealed glass is the most common form of glass available today. Depending on
manufacturing' techniques, ,it is also known as p l'ace , float or sheet'glass.
During' manufacture , it is cooled s Iovl.y .. 'The process r e'su l t s in very little;
if any.,' residual' 'compre s s Lvevaur f ace s t r e s s.
Consequently, annealed "glass -Ls
of relatively .Low strength when compared to tempered 'glass -",It has 'large
variations, in~trength and fractures into dagger-shaped, razor-sharp fragments. For, these reasons, annealed g l as s. is' not recommended for, use in blast
resistant .windows.,
~
' ..
'.
,'
"
Thermally, tempered 'glass is the most readily available tempered glass on the
market ., It .Ls manufactured' from annealed 'glass by ihea t Lng to' a' high uniform
temperature and then, applying, controlled, rapid' cooling:', As the" internal
temperature profile relaxes towards uniformity, internal stresses are created.
6 - 7,3
TM'S-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
The outer layers, which cool and contract first, are set in compression, while
internal layers are set in tension. As it is rare for flaws, which act as
stress magnifiers, to exist in the interior of tempered glass,sheets, the
internal tensile stress is of relatively minimal consequence. As failure
originates
from.te~sile
stresses
e~ci~ing
surface ,flaws in .the
g~ass,
precom-
pression permits. a larger load to be carried before the net tensile strength
of the tempered glass pane is exceeded. Tempered glass is typically four to
five times stronger than annealed glass.
, .'
I
The fracture characteristics of tempered glass are superior to ,those of

annealed glass.
Due to the high strain energy stored
~y
the prestress,
tempered glass will eventually fracture into small cubical-shaped fragments

instead of the razor-sharp, dagger-shaped fragments associated with,the.
fracture of anDealed glass. Breakage patterns of side and rear'window~ in
American automobiles are a,good example of.the.failure ~ode of , thermally or
heat-treated tempered gl~ss.
"
Semi-tempered glass is often marketed as ?afety or heat-treated glass.

However, it exhibits neither the dicing characteristics upon breakage nor the
higher tensile strength associated with fully tempered glass, and, therefore,
it is not re~ornrne~d~d for blast resistant windows.
Another common g~azing material,is wire-reinforced glass, annealed glass with.
an embedded layer of wire mesh. Its only use is as a fire-resistant barrier.
Wire' glass has the.fracture ?nd low strength characteristics of annealed glass
and, although the wire binds 'fragments, it contributes metal fragments as an
additional hazard. Wire glass is never recommended for blast resistant
windows.
6-29. Design Criteria for Glazing
"
-'
.'
6-29.1. Specified Glazing
h.
The design of blast-resistant windows is currently restricted to~'hea~-tre~ted,

fully-tempered glass in fixed or non-openable frames meeting both Federal
Specification DD-G1403B and ANSI ,Z97.l-l984. Tempered glass meeting,only 00G-1403B .may possess a surface precompression of only 10,000 psi. At this
leve~ of precompression, the fracture pattern is similar .to annealed and semitempered glass. Tempered glass meeting the minimum fragment specifications of
ANSI Z97.l-l984 (Section 5.1.3(2 has a higher surface precompression level
and tensile strength, which improves the capacity of blast-resistant 'wi~dows
and results in smaller, cubical-shaped fragments on failure.
Although therm~lly tempered glass exhibits the safest failure mode of any
glass, fai~ure under blast loading still presents a significant health hazard,
Results from blast, tests reveal that' on failure ,tempered glass' .fragments may
be propelled in cohesive clumps' that only fragment on impact into smaller
rock-~alt'-shaped.fragments.
Even. if the tempered glass .initially breaks into
small fragments" sufficient velocities may still,be imparted by the ,blast '
loading to cause severe hazards to personnel. Because the expected geometry'
of glass fragments .LnvoLve multiple, potentially sharp corners, a high
probability of, injury would result from application of the 58 ft-Ib criterion
for acceptable, kinetic energy. Because of -tihe s e 'hazards. to personnel, blastresistant glazing should be designed to survive e~pected loads.
~
:
6-74
TK 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR.88-22
6-29.2. Design Stresses
The_design stress, the maximum' principal tensile stress allowed for the.
glazing; fun" is set at l6000,psi. This correlates with a probability of
failure equal to or less than 0.001. The, design 'stress for blast, resistant '.
glazing is slightly higher. than that commonly used in the design,' of one.-minute
wind loads, 'but, it is justified b~ca~se of the expected, significantly
shorter, duration of loading.
f.
6-29.3. Dynamic Response to Blast. Load
".
.~
r ;
..s,
An analytical model was used to predict. the blast load capacity of annealed
and tempered glazings. Characteristic parameters of the model .are illustrated
in Figure 6-27.
The glazing is a rectanguiar, fully thermally. tempered glass plate having a
long dimension, a; a short dimension> b; a thickness, t;.a poisson ratio, v
0.22;. and an' elastic modulus ,: E'- 1 x 10 6 psi. The pl ate Ls simply supported
along -al.L four edges ,'with noinplane and .ro.tational restraints .at the edges,
The bending stiffness' of the 'support' elements ,is assumed, to,he' infinite,
relative to the pane., Recent static and blast load tests indicate that the .
allowable frame member deflections of 1/264-th of the span will not signifir
cantly reduce pane resistance from that predicted for an infinitely stiff
frame.
, ..
The blast pressure loadingis.described.by a peak triangular-shaped pressuretime curve as.shown in Figure6-27.. The blast pressure rises ~instantaneously
to'a peak blast pressure, B, and then decays linearly with a blast pressure
duration, T_' The pressure is uniformly distributed over t~e surface of the
pane and applied normal to the 'pane. ,
The resistance function, r(X) (static uniform load, r as a function of center
deflection, X) for the plate accounts for both bending and,membrane stresses,
The effects of membrane stresses produce a nonlinear stif~ness of'the'resistance-deflection, function (Figure 6-27). The design deflection, Xu is defined
as the center deflection where the-maximum principle tensile stress .at any
point in the glass first reaches :the design stress, 'fun' of l6,OOO.psi.
Typically, as the deflectionof the plate exceeds a third of its ,thickness,
the points of maximum stress will migrate ,from the center and toward the
corners of the plate.
The model, illustrated in Figure 6-27, uses a single-degree-of-freedom system
to simulate the ~ynamic response of the plate. To be conservative, no damping
of the'window pane is assumed. The'model calculates the peak blast pressures
required to exceed the prescribed probability of failure. The. model assumes
that failure occurs when the maximum deflection exceeds ten times the glazing
thickness_ This restricts solutions to the valid range of the Von Karmen
plate equations while preventing edge disengagement of the plate.
6-29.4. Design Charts
Charts are presented in Figures 6-28 to 6-48 and Tables 6-6 to 6-12 for the
design and evaluation of glazing ,to. survive. a prescribed ,blast loading'with a
probability of failure no greater than 0.001. The charts:relate the peak'
blast overpressure capacity of thermally tempered glazing to all combinations
6-75
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
of the following design parameters: afb - 1.00, 1.25, 1.50. 1.75 2.00. 3.00,
and 4.00; 1.00 S ab S 25 ft 2; 12 S b S 60 inches; 2 S T S 1.000 msec; and t 1/4. 5/16, 3/8, 1/2. 5/8, and 3/4 inches (nominal). Thermally t emper ed glass"
up to 3/4 inch thick can easily be purchased in the United States ... Thickness
greater than 3/4 inch can only be obtained by lamination, but. research and'
blast load testing are required to'oevelop approved designs for laminated
glass.
,"~
...
The charts are based on the minimum thickness of fabricated glass allowed by
Federal Specification DD-G-45ld (see Table 6-7). They are created by numerically integrating the equations of motion of a single-degree-of-freedom system
as'modeled in'Figure 6-27. A Wilson-Theta technique' was employed with a time
step corresponding limited to 1/25th of each of the five increasing linear
resistances used to model the resistance function.
'
6-29.5, Alternate Design Procedure
".
Design procedures in this ,section ean be used to evaluate the' blast capacity
of monolithic tempered glass 'when' interpolation, between charts is unadvisable ..
when design parameters are outside the limits"of the chart. or to calculate
rebound loads," It is recommended that the design charts be used for initial
guesses of required glass thickness.
'.'
Procedures to calculate resistance, r u' (Table 6-6) deflection, Xu' effective
static resistance. reff' effective pane stiffness. Ke and the period of
vibration, TN follow. The response charts' can be used with these parameters
to determine dynamic response. Tabre' 6-11 reports the fundamental period of
vibration and Table 6-12 reports the effective elastic, static resistance for
most dimensions of glass panes. In many cases these:values and the single
equation in Step 10 below can be used to directly compute b Las t-vove rpxes sure
capacity.
t
-, '._>
Step 1,
Determine i f the glass pane will' behave as a 'linearly responding'."
plate under the design load. If the ratio of' the short side of the plate, b ; "
to its actual' (not nominal) thickness is less than 'the maximum in the 'second;
column of Table 6-8, then simple formulas can be used for 'parameters needed to
use the response charts. Only glass panes .'above and to the left of the
steeped line in Table 6-6 will qualify. If the glass 'pane has a b/t-ratio'
less than that specified in Table 6-8. the glass will behave. in' a nonlinear
manner with the membrane stresses induced by straining of.the'neutral plane or
axis of the plate. Proceed to steps 2-9 to determine key parameters for this
nonlinear plate behavior.
. {-;
i' .
For glass plates that respond linearly, the-design static resistance and the"
effective elastic resistance 'are : . '..
-:
, 6-44a
.
"
The center deflection is:
..
..
6-44b
Coefficients for'computing the effective resistance, Cr' and the center

deflection,. CD;' are listed in Table'6-8.
1,
.I
6-76
The fundamental period of vibration is
Coefficient CT is reported in the last column of Table 6-8.

10 to determine blast capacity.
Proceed to Step
Step 2
For nonlinear behavior with the bit-ratio greater than specified
in column 2 of Table 6-8, determine the nondimensional design stress, SSD' as:
SND'- 0.0183 (b/t)2
where:
6-46
b -
short span of glass measured between center lines of the

gaskets (inches), and
t -
actual thickness of glass,'from Table 67 (inches)
For values of alb greater than 4, use alb- 4.

Stet," 3
Enter Figure 6-49 with the values of SND and alb to determine the
design load, ~D'
nondim~nsional
Step 4
Compute static design resistance as:
r u - 876,000 (~D)(tlb)4 psi
, 647
Use this value for frame design calculations other than those 'for rebound.
Use reff defined in Step 7 for the rebound phase.
Step 5,
Use alb and ~D in Figure 650 to obtain the nondfmens Lona l,
deflection, X/to If X/t exceeds ~O, use:t~e value' of ~D corresponding 'to an
X/t of 10 and recalculate r u using Figure 6-49.
Step 6
Determine center deflection of the glass pane as:

"
, ~ - (X/t) t, inches
Step 7
6-48
Determine the effective elastic, static design resistance as:

6-49
where':
resistance at 0.2
rl
re~istance at 0.4'
r2
resistance at' 0.6
r3
res 1.8 tance at 0.8
r4
r u obtained in Step 4
~ obtained in Step '6
Xu
~
~
Figures 6-49 and 650 should be used for rl 'through r4' The equivalent static
design load is the resistance that a linearly responding plate would exhibit
at the' Same strain energy as the norrl.Lriear Ly responding plate at the design
center deflection~, It is always less than r u' By this technique, the
linear response charts can be used with reasonable accuracy.
6-77
88~22
Determine effective stiffness as:
Step 8
6-50
Determine the fundamental period of vibration as:
Step 9
6-51
KLM
0.63 + 0.16(alb ' 1)
KLM - 0.79
where:
1 :S alb :S 2
alb ~ 2
The unit mass, m, of the glass is:
Step 10
Use Figure 3-49 of Chapter 3 with the ratio of load duration to
period of vibration, T/TN, to obtain the dynamic load factor, DLF. The blast
overpressure capacity of "the glass pane is:
6-52
For T/TN-ratios greater than 10, set DLF equal to 2.
0.05, set DLF equal to 0.3.
For ratios less than
6-30. Design Criteria for Frames

6-30.1. Sealants, Gaskets, and Bead~
All gaskets or beads must be at least 3/8 inch wide with a Shore "A" durometer
hardness of 50 and conform"to ASTM Specification C509-84 (Cellular Elastomeric
Preformed Gasket Sealing Material). The bead and sealant must form a weatherproof seal'.
6-30.2. Glazing Setting
Minimum frame edge clearances, face clearance, and bite (Figure 6-51) .are
specified in Table 6-7.
6-30.3. Frame Loads
The window frame must develop the static design strength, r u of the glass pane
(Table 6-6). Otherwise, failure will occur at less" than the predicted blast
pressure capacity of the window pane. This results from the frame deflections
which" induce higher principal tensile stresses in the pane, thus reducing the
strain energy capacity available to resist the blast loading.
In addition to the load transferred to the frame by the glass, frame"members
must also resist the static design load, r u' applied to all exposed members.
Maxim~ allowable limits for frame design are:
1.
Deflection:
Relative displacements of frame members shall be

the smallest of 1/264th of its span or 118 inch.
6-78
, 88-22
2.
3.
Stress:
Fasteners:
. . 1 .'
The maximum stress in any member shall not exceed f~/1.65, where f m is the yield stress of
the members material.
,
'
The maximum stress in any fastener shall'not exceed 1'.,.

I',
f m/ 2 . 00 .
'I,
.' . ,
The desLgn ioads :for the glazing are 'based on large deflection theory, but the
resulting design ,loads transferred to the frame are based on'small deflectidn
theory for normally loaded plates. Analysis indicates this approach to be
considerably ~impler and more conservative than using the frame loading based
exclusively on 'large deflection plate 'behavior: characteristic of window
panes. The effect of the static design load, r u' applied directly 'to the
expo~~d frame 'members of w~dth, W, should also be consider~d.
The designCroad,
equal to:
-'~"
6-53
The des Lgri load, .ru ' produces a line shear, Vy' applied by the short side, b,.
equal to:
6-54
The design load also produces a corner q6ncentrated load, R, tending to ,uplift
the corners of the window pane equal to:

.'
, ,
6-55
Distribution of these forces are illustrated in Figure 6-52. Table 6-9

presents design coef~icients, Cx' Cy ' and CR ~~r practical aspe~t ratios.
Linear interpolation can be used for aspect ratios not shown.
Altho~gh frames with mullions ,are 'included in the design cri~eria, it i;
recommended that single pane frames be used. Experience indicate~ that

mullions complicate the design and reduce the reliability of blast-resistant
frames. If mullions are used, the certification test must be conducted as the
complexity of the mullion cross sections may cause some ~f'the assumptions to
be.unconservative for local shear and stress
concentratio~~.
Also, economic
analysis indicates that generally_thicker,glass will be more cost effective,

than tqe more complex mullion fr~me. If mullions ar~ used, the loa~s f~om
Equat~ons 6-55 to 6-57 should be used to check the frame mullions and fasteners for compliance with deflection and stress criteria. ;Note that the.design
load for mullions is twice the load given by Equations 6-53 to 6-55 to.accou~t
for the, effects of two panes supported by a common, mullion. .
.
I
'
"
Special design considerations should be taken to assure that deflection of the

building wall will not impose deflections on the frame greater than 1/264th of
the length of the panes edge. When insuffi~i~nt wall rigidity is provided" it;
is recommended that the frames be pinned at the corners to provide isolation
from the walls rotation.
6-79
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
6-30.4. Rebound
Response to the dynamic loading will cause the window to rebound (outward
deflection) after its initial positive (inward) deflection. ,.The outward pane
displacement and the stresses produced by the negative deflection must be
safely resisted by the window while positive pressures act on the window:
Otherwise, the window which safely resists stresses caused by inward deflec'
tions may fa~l in rebound while the ,positive pressure still acts. This can ,',,>
propel glass fragments int"o rhe structu're" However, if the window fails in
rebound during ~he negative phase ,of blast loading, glass fragments will be
drawn away from the structure. Rebound will occur during the~egative loading
phase'if the effective blast duration is no greater than one half of the
natural period of vibration, TN' of the glass,pane. For T ~ 10 TN' significant rebound does not occur during the positive blast loading, so, for this
situation, design for rebound is not required. For 0.5 ~ TIT N ~lO, -the frame
must be designed for the peak negative ,pressure acting during the positive
ove.rp res sur e phase. Table 6-11 r'epo r t s TN for practical glass pane dimensions.
As the rebound chart, Figure 3-268 of Chapter 3, can be unconservative for
predicting maximum rebound (for glass panes), dynamic analysis using numerical
integration or a more conservative simplified analysis is required. In lieu
of a n~erical analysis, it is conservative to set the maximum rebound load,
r ", to the static design load, r u'.
The resistance. function for this analysis
can be generated by the Alternate Design Procedure. If the pane has a bit
ratio less than specified in T~ble 6-~, the pane will behave as a linear plate
and Equations 6-44 can be used to determ!ne rut Xu, and the resist~n~e
,
function. If the pane has a bit ratio larger than 'specified in TabLe.: 6-8, use
Steps 2 through 7 to define the resistance function. The negative resistance
-function is a mirror image of the positive resistance function.
The portion of the frame outboard of the' glass fuust resist the r~boundload,
r-. Use'Equations' 6-53 to 6-55 to apply: the rebound load to the frame
members. In some design situations the resistance bull t ,~into the member
outboard of the glass to resist the,corner concentrated force, R (Equation 655), during deflections of the pane inward will provide enough strength to
resist r ebound',
6 ~31-. 'Acceptance 'Test Specification

Certification tests ot the entire'window assembly are required' unless analysis
demonstrates that the window design is consistent with the design criteria.
All window assembly designs, usingmultions must be 'tested. The certification
tests consist of applying static uniform loads on at least two sample window
assemblies until failure occurs in either the glass or, frame. Although at
least two static uniform load failure tests are required, the acceptance
criteria presented below encourages a larger nUmber of test samples. All

testing should be performed by an independent testing laboratory certified by
the c?ntr~cting officer.
6-.31.1. Test Procedure - lIindow Assembly Test
The test windows (glass panes plus support frames) shall be identical in type,
size, sealant, and construction to those furnished.
shall be secured to simulate the adjoining walls.

6c80
The test frame as~embly
Using either a vacuum or a
TIl '5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR
88~22
liquid-fi'lled bladder .. an increasing uniform load shall be appli'ed to,the

entire window assembly (glass and frame) until failure occurs' .Ln either the'
glass or frame. Failure shall be defined as either breaking of'glass or loss
of frame resistance. The failure load ,shall be recorded co. three significant figures. The load should be applied at a rate of 0.5 r u per minute which
corresponds to approximately one minute of significant stress duration ~ntil
failure. Table 6-6 presents the static ultimate resistance of old ,tempered
glass, correlated with a probability of failure, equal to 0.001 and a load
duration of.l second, whereas this criteria is for a load duration of '1 ,,', , _
minute. This longer duration will weaken the glass by ceramic fatigue ; but ,new glass should tend to be stronger than old glass. To account for these
effects the certified static load capacity, r s' of ' a glass pane is to be rated
as:
0.876 r u
'r
_,s
,--,
6-56
6-31.2. Acceptance Criteria

The window assembly (frame and glazing) are considered acceptable when the
arithmetic mean, of all the samples tested, r, is such that:
"r
~'r~
!
+ s a
6-57
where
ru
s
a
static ultimate resistance of the glass pane

For n test samples', r is defined as:

n
1:: ri
i-l.
6-58
r -.
n
where ri is the recorded failure load of the i t h

sample deviation, s, is defined as:
~est sa~ple.
The standard
1/2
6-59
s -
(n-l)
The minimum value of the sample standard deviation, s, permitted to be
employed in equation ,6-47 is:
smin - 0.145 r u
6-60
This assures a sample standard deviation which is no better than the ideal
tempered glass in ideal frames.
6-81
'
TM 5-1300/NAVFACP-397/AFR'88-22
The acceptance coefficient,'

number" of samples tested.
Q,
is tabulated in Table 6-10 in' Ferms of the

"'?< ,-'"
.
. ,:'-:
The following equation is presented to aid in determining if additional test ,

samples are justified. If:
, ' , ~'
,.
-'
$;
',-'.:1
'. t .
,r u + s B
6-61 ,
then with 90% confidence, the design will not prove to, be, adequate with
additional testing. The .rej ection coefficient, B, is from Table 6 -10 .: I
.,
....
6-31.3. Certification for Rebound
<,
:..~."
..' .
Acceptance testing shall be ,performed for rebound unless analysis demonstrates

that the frame meets rebound criteria. All frames with mullions mus~ be
tested. Testing is performed with the load applied to the inboard surface of
the window assembly. The equivalent static rebound load, r ", is subs.tituted:
for the design load, r u'
j
"
6-32. Installation Inspection

A survey of glazing failures due to wind load indicates that improperinstallation of setting blocks, gaskets, or lateral shims, or poor edge bite is a
significant cause of the failures experienced.
\-
'.J
'.
e
6-82
'
-,
, &;
m
(I)
..
Window pane aeomlay
'\1
-------------
li
.s
~
0'
..~
,;;
l,:
iii
Timc.T
Center Deflection. X
lbl Blue loadin.
(c) Resistance of glass,p,ane
r<xl
, PW:
x
(d) Dynamic rnponw model
Figure 6-27
d1araetcristic parameters for gl:w pane. blast loading.

resistance function and response model.
!,
6-83
100
I/O 1.00
1/.. In
r--...
10
II I
Un
8'1..'
12.1:1
1.112
1 1'
,5.1'
c-
2'. 2"
3.IlZ
30.30
z.ol
loa
31.31
42 _ 4:1
;:"'0
OM
"It.
OM
M_M
.....
1.07 '
41"411
Po
a.
'OJ
'"
...
...
~
0.1 .
......
"a
10
10
100
1000
'".a..
alb 1.00
t 1/1'1...
...
u
....
10
,
II"in
12.12
1'"
1 1.
7.1lO
24.24
1.1'
30_30
:L48
31.38
:L48
4:,1.42
4lI.4lI
50&.50&
1.1:1
lA3
1.14
eo.eo
CI.M
,
I
t"'--.
~ ..... ;..,;
10.
O. I',
I
b II. (lnJ
10
100
1000
Duration of Blast Pressure. T (msee)

Figure 6-28
Peak blast pressure eapaciry for tempered glass panes, alb. 1.00, r. 1/4 and 5/16 in.
6-84
. ,.
100
.no
1.00
3IIlnw
b Un.1
'~I
12.12
&1
1 1.
11.1
.....
\0
:M.:M
,
:-...
n
<II
..
...
100
--
MaM
100
UI
:tai
".
I.
1000
DIll 1.00'
lIZ In,
UII
......
""
..."
_S
10
<II
1M
LIZ
42.42
.....:
a.
......
.
""
.."".
30.30
b lA!
.lpoll
12.12
qJI
1 1.
11.1
:M.:M
1"
........ .....
...
"
10
30.30
, ,
.
,
.
I
I
"31.31
SA
Q.Q
4.5l1
.....
z.n
111.111
z.3O
1000
100
Duretion 0/ Blest Pressure. T (m s e c ):

.
Figure 6-29
'
Peak blast pressure capacity for tempered glass pane>, alb = 1.00,
6-85
lA
54.54
10
po
= l/8 and 1/2 in.
tOO
UaJ
\00II
12.12
70A
11. l' .
31.3
:M.:M
17.5
30.30
11.:z
"-
'. 10
31._
7.
'42.42
.....
t.aI
4lI.4lI
1I.:l1
111.10
AM
:ua
alii 1.00
..
....,
0.
I
\
.r
\0
~ --;'~
100
1000
'"
...:J
. 1000
...
...
.a
0.11 . 1.00
t ..
31......
0.
'"a
-"
" IIllJ
12.12
0.
10 0
....
11.1
.,
m~
.~
10
30.30
1\l.3
31&31
11.3
~ 4lI.4lI
54-xM
10
I
1000
100
Duration of Blast Pressure. T (msec:)

Figure &-30
Peak blast pressure capacity for tempered gl151 panes: alb
6-86
1.00, t
...
211.1
10.10
I
1
1a
:M.:M
q.q
.1
fJoIl
S/8 and 3/4 in.
lIA3
\l",
5.110
II.1II
100
.."
...
_.~.
,-'.
125
1/4 In.
"
"
,
~
10
b
"
....
'"
".
......
.
....,
,
,1
....
'"
."..
:2
12. 15 ,
1.15
1', zz.a
4.IB
24.30
:LIII
30.31.1
1.
1.1'
....
."..
0, t
I
, ..
. ..
..
'"
e,
"
81....1
CII.1ZJ1
'"
...'"a
.'
....... .......
-I
..
a.
un.i
oa
oa
., ...,
I" -
10
..
100
"
..
..
1000
lL
100
,
'
.
.
i""'ooo.
-
I, ,
I'
'
.
b IIn.1
8 1....1
12. 15
12.7
...
1
t
I
10
"
"
alb 1.215
t SIt. In..
""-..
~
.......
'I
,
II
r-.....
I
I
I
i
10
100
I,
I
i
I
1I'.2Z.5
S.-
24,'30
4.111
30.31.5
2.93
3111 4lI
2.oz
42. !S2.5
l.S2
ao
1.11
1000
Duration ot Blasl.Prlssure, T(msec)

Figure 6-31
Peak blast pressure capacity for tempered glass panes, alb = 1.2S. t = 1/4 and S/16 in.
6-87 "
"
'
I.t
100
--
lib
-.
1.211 -
3111n. -
,
,
,
,
I. . . Un.1
,.
10
-,
...
1 22..B
..
:N.
i""'oo...
1:"'000.
..........
"'-
"
..
'-
a.
"
<II
".
..
10
I: .
I
I
.1
Figure 6-32
,
I
12.18
3Z.I
18. Z2.5
,."
..
:M.:III
8.13
:111.37.5
38.411
2.82.5
8.52
.02
"Duration ot 81ast Pressure"r (msec)
,'
I
'100
1000
-,
"'
. ..
~
6-88
..
,
3.-
z.,
Peak blast pressure capacity for tempered gl~panes, .ib'= 1.25, t.= ll8 and 112 in.
""",-
i ... eo
.'
10
81l1li/
,,
b Un./
II
'
"
... ..........
,
,
"
"
-,
...
z._
1.1,
lib- l.2l1 t ~ lIZ In. -
42 _IIZ.I
'
..
I
UI
1000
."
a_
0'
100
t'
100
a.
8iD
4..lIZ
10
...
:111.37.1
:,
'-
..
.
II
11.8
'0
.."
12Jl 11
81. .'
100
.",.
1
1.21
!5IlI1";
m..
......
--.
-,
,.
.,
"
...
100
,. a :z:z.s
ZU
Z4a30
112
3Oa37.1
UII
3lIa'"
4Z a lIZ.5
4IalO
I.CII
, 10
100
1000
~ a.l/loW
12a 18
....
~
.
10
. ..
III
~
..
'
....
Es
, ,
, ,,
L
....,
.~
..
.~,
Figure 6-33
10"
100 ..
,.
:M.2
-..
Z4a30
11.3.
3Oa37.1
12.3
' '
:JIIa4B
lUO
4Z a 5ZJl
"'allO
5.41
5.111
.;",'oi 1.21'1"
i .' 3.'4
I, I,
..
I,
Ii
1In.
1000
Duration of 81a'st Pressure, T (msec) .

Peak blast p:essure capacity for tempered glass panes, alb
= 1. 25, e = 5lS'md 314
in,
.
'
6-89
..
18a ZZJI
II ' - '
71.0
I'
4Ale
'"-'"a
....
...
Ql
.a
12 a 111
..
Q.
..
.
.
..
~~
to
BlIooIl
1"--0..
I. . . Un.l
tOO
alb 1.50'
t
114 1ft:
..
..-.
,
10
Is fln.1
8e.1
12 all'
1.70
lIa%7
1':1
:lh 31
:u3
:ilia
,...,
""
........
....-.
.....
....a.
....,
CD
..
..
.
':J
.,
31.....
,.11:1 .
GaA
Clan
0.,.
. 08
..
'-
11.
..
CD
...a
....11.--
0,1 .
1
\00
10
'100
...
..
.....
"
"
I
...,
~
10
.
.
1000
,.
'
511. in.
..
.-
..
b a .1....1
.
12 a la,
8lpol)
10.'
.
I
\
I
~.....
10
- .....
'"
'.
,
\00
laa%7
4.18
24a38
JDa41
1'4
2.57
3Ial4
'.71
GaG
1.21
72
1.02
1000
Duration at Blast Pressure. T (msec)

Figure 6-34
Peak blas pressure capacity for tempered glass panes, alb = 1.50. e = 1/4 and 5/16 in.
6-90
100
..
alb
t
'.
UG
311 In.
t..
b UnJ
B~l
t2. tl
ttlJl
10
-~.
'"
.'".
'"
-..
~
""
tl.27
tl.8I
:M
4JllI
:sa
a.M
a
.an
.....
3.tO
,2.14
,..,
tAl
t.
10
~",IOO
100
1000 .
..
..
..
'"a
alb
,.eO
t 1/2 ....
..
"-
b linJ
(poll
t2. t.
211.1
ttl. 27
" ..
10
"
I
I
I'
z.'3Il
as
:II1x 4&
1..12
~.M
.a
!it
2.9
. . . 72
I
1
Figure 6-35
I
10
. 100
Ouration ot Blast Pressure,
r (msec)
Peak bias, pressure capacity for tempered glass panes, alb
6-91
1000
= 1.50, r = J/8 and 112 iii.
100
. .
.",
. 1.50
t SIIln.
..
N' ....
~
10
III lin.)
8 (. .,
12.18
41..
18. %7
1...
:M
10.1
..
~
..
....,
31.154
4.74
U7
Go
..n
a.a
.'
.....
30.41
So1
CD
.
...
'2
'"
'...
-.".
I.
1
..
10
1000
100
III (IRJ
12.1.
...
.1A
CD
.... ...
.;<
".
do
.
10
~i:'o...
~:M
...
..
1 %7
"
:M
..
,
,
,
:lOa.
,.
I !
8.14
42aa
41.72
B.oB
4.oB
alii 1.50 .
t
I
10
Duration
Figure 6-'-36
Peak blast pressure capacity for tempered glass panes, alb' 1.50.
6-92'
311, In..
I I I
1000
100
or 8Iast,Pressure, T (msec)
t
...
111A
38.154
..
%7.3
518 and 3/~ in.
100
.",
1.~
1'. In
.
j
.a.
....,
.-
It
(II1II
11lLl
12.21
I.GII
.-.
-'
,.
~~
..
'.
e-,
",",'
. 1 31..
z.se
201.42
ZJIZ
311. u.s
1.11
3"" a
OM
ca.1I,
42.73JI
"'~
'-
..."
.-
'-
lL
..
. ... - ,
..-.
.."
'"
---
10
..
.' .
O. 1
'"a
lL
100
,
,:.
..
r
10
"
- .
.1000
100
. '.75,'
.",
;, 11111n.
;
..
.!
. .
"
. -
-~
.-
.~
,0
. , r.n
,
,
,
II
100
{poll
12 _ 21
8.87
24_42
:II.IZ.I
z.zz
311_13
1.13
42.~
1.2l1
1000
Duration ot Blast Pressure, T (rn s e c)

Figure 6-31
Peak bias. pressure capacity for tempered glass panes, alb = 1. 75. t = 114 and 5/16 in.
6-93.
"
10
I... Un.!
.1'_ 31 ..
~ ......
, ........ ....
-.
10
..
.. .
- -
..
. ;'.
.
,
- ..
,
.
-
"
2.lIO
100
.", 1.78
318In.
,
"
~"'.(lnJ
II c.l
12121
11.1
10
--
~ ......:
"
'
Q.
,,
CD
..
..
..
"
..
Q.
"
11
UO
~Ica
20M
I"IU
,sa
HI
,,,.
ca .. 73.5
_.
"
10
'100
- ,
I
'1000
-.;.
100
tI I 31.1
on.
CD
'.78
112In.
""a
~ I.
CL
12 I 2'
~
,"'-
10
I I
I I
:MIca
I'll
I
!
Figure 6-38
Peak bias, pressure capacity for tempered glass ~,!,es, alb = 1. is.
<
~.
",
.;.
, 10,0.
3.82
1M
1000
6-94'
5.10
311113
42 I 73.5
..
10
10.3
'30 I 52.5
",
D,":Iration ot Slast Pressur,e', r. (msec)'
23.1
-,
I
I III i '
,
.
1
II l..u
tI I 31.1
I
,
(lnJ
= 3/8 andll/2 in.
2.311
, .
100
alb 1.7&
t ;511 In.
1:.
--.a:
"
lL
100
"
'"a.,'
18.5
~'4Z
.21
3lh II2.ll
5.18
:ahB3
4.1.
Gx71ll
U7
.-
, 10
l-
.,",
'
....
. ,
.,....
.
:>
"
....,.
.,...
--
..
CD
iB x 31.8
,}!i~
- ..
.-'
"
37.1
..
,~ -
10
B (poil
12 x 21
'I
~....;
Un.)
100
1000
..
alb'. 1.7S
"
31....
CD
It x lIftJ
'poi~
.12'x 21
IIoU
1. x 31.5
24.2
0-
1';,100,;
~~
lL
10
3D x II2.ll
."
...
0
.
t
1
..
..
...
3IxB3
5Jll1
4Z x 72.5
.47
..
..
"
100
..
10
a0
Duration of 81ast Pressure, T (rns e c)

Figure 6-39
Peak blast pressure capacity for tempered glass panes, alb; l. 75. r F 5/8 and ll4 in.
.. ,
695
10
., .
'.
..
"
L72
..
I
d.
13.a
~x.2
..
. ..
100
,......, 2.00
1/4
1ft.
;.
"
'.
.
to
,
~
b;'. (IoU
II (pol'
4.113
12x24
,
......
a.
....,
'.
'
..-...
..... ~ ...
'J
1~
...
0.17
"
Go
CD
.xlO
1.12
41 . . .
.....
.."
.....
"
'"".
2.Z7
12
CD
..
lIx:ll
24
.
0.1..
1
.
.
J,
,,
to
... .
'
'"
-.
1.00
1000
r ,
Go
100
2.00
,..... 1r1181n.
.,
"
10
..
bx
..
1~
..
..
."'
(1ft.)
x 24
II lpoIl
8.011
i"-~
Figure 6-40
10
100
Duration ot Blast Pressure, T (msec)

Peak blast pressure capacity for tempered glas. panes, alb
6-96
I I I
111 x 31
3.10
24x.
2.Z7
31x72
31h80
1.78
1.53
42.114
1.11 .
1000
=2.00. e =1/4 and 5/16 in.

.....--.;
..
tOO
..
,-
.~
.." -2.00
t :WIn.
..
..
..
.
:-
'.
.. .
It'
"
(1".1
12. :101
10
s-
...
"
I-
"
"....
0.
.,
10
..
--
"a
.".,~
QI
""a.
....
I:D
a.-
..
,l.
",
10
~~~
~
<,
"
2.00
.t/2 ....
..
. ..
.'
..
<
"
..
- ..
..
'\
..
<
.1. . . .
I.zI
24
31,. eo
3.:11
.72
42 ....
ZJI4
,
-.
I"
:
,
I
I
10
100.
Peak blast pressure capacity for tempered glass panes, a/b = 2.00.
6-97
2JlZ
,
1000
Duretion of Blast Pressure, T (msec)

Figur-e 6-'11
2IIl.I
.'
.. ,
......
12.2It
.-- ...
rm
CIIoII
,. . . lin.)
<
til
..
0.
Z.1lI
1000
100
100
:101
~
QI
, 31'
"
~,.
"
...
,
".
= lI8 and liZ in.
100
.""
1
,
...
~ .....
10
...
.
....
.
1I
CL
100
--
:;..
100
.... C&I
314111;'
,',
~,,.
.,
......,
.,
12824
'j
"
21.7
t 31
I .
. ,
.~
'I
..
,
.
"
Durc~ion ot 8lcs~
'"
j
"
"
--.
,- ..
100
1000.
Pressure, T ,
(msec)
.
Peak blast pressure capacity for tempered glass panes. a/b = 2.00, t = 5/8 and JI+in.
"' ..
-.
6-98
..
42884
.'-
. '7.82
30
31711,
I.
12,2
248.
10
..
Figure 6-42
z.oo
I ,
1'00..
1000
~ ....
10
"
1'-0...
2.11
<II
--,
3.n
,
10
1.:14
n
ca,,14...._.
..'
"
I.:M
24
; ...
."",.
CL
14.11
.{.
'"a
-"'''31
-,
.."
11lioii
3U
<II
b (1nJ
,12.24
,-
0-
!118m;'
z.oo
..
~ ~~
,
--..
,,
, ;
1.44
4.ll1
,
20
10
11Ao1.U
t.
....
,
'
1"li
'.,
b lin...
- .
.,
3.77
,\
" ,-
(psil
12.31
"
.'
1''- in.
'I'
l-
1.715 '
1'.&4
"2A.n
l.eM
0.780
30.90..
.'
..
0.\
.......
~
CD
.,
..
0:
V1
0,0\
"
100
\0
1000
"
0:
Q.
I-
V1
<C
15
'\\"" ...
::.:
<C
\0
Q.
I'\.
I
i
,
i
!
I I'\~
,.
<.::1 ;;.
1\
I
I
I , I
1
\
,I
.1
I I ! >1
I:,
,. ,.
!.:
I
!
,';
[,
II
I ,I
i;: I
..
I'
i Iii,
10
.Ipail
1,1,1
ii I
"
.
12.,31
6.70
,
I~
'
I
!
!,
"
i :{i
."
:I I
-
,I
I,
.~, '~!
BLAST PRESSURE, T (rnsec)
I,, il
.,;
I,
I,
I
.. ,
I ,_
,
I
II
24",72
!,
!i
1,1
30.,90
r- .
. ,1000
'
Peak bl.., pres~ur~ c.p.~ity for t.mp~r.d gi.ss pon'.s: 'oJb'~3.cio. e 1/4 >.nd'm6 in.
6-99
1.75
iii
i ! ! !-
,
2.9B
I 50&
I,
'
100
_.
' 'l
,
,<
b.IJift.)
.
!' 1 I'!
! .'.
"
.. ,
, ' I
.. .
' I
I
I
,,
II '''~lli'il
ki,l'
I !I
'
I
'
" 1
I " I III '
II
DURATION of
Figure 6-43
0,.'
~k
"
I', 1:11'
.............L . 'itl! Iii
..
,,
..
.,
in.
T'
,
3.00,
t. 511.
"
: 'j"
I IJ I
,lAo
"
..
"
..J
CD
1,18
.,
20
-,
\0
.!
,
.......
........
li-3/lin.
.J
..
,.
b.".
I,
..
.,
. ..
\'\.
"
I T I
' a/b-100
BI..I
Un.)
..
t2x 3e
lUO
,,
<;
'0.-
...
r-
..
...
\0
35
"
\0
..
..
, ,
I
~
<,
,
,
11
,
..
-,
I
.
t2"~ 3e
t7;3
l-
.
.
I',
,
:
I
I
1, I I
,
II x 5!t
7.69
:lh 72
4.33
30.90
2.71
:I
I,
"
10.0
.,
10
DURATION of BLAST PRES~URE. T
Figure
~-41l
1000
(msec)
Peak blast pressure capacity for tempered glass panes. 'alb 3.00, t = 3/8 and 1/2 in.
, "'"
-. . .
. .
.;.,
6-100 ", ,
'. 1 "
. 'i..
..
.
"
'.
BI. .I
..
..... ....;""
..
!"
t ...
b (In.)
3l1'- 9O
I I I I I
..
I'
~ !'-o'
..
alb 3.(0
t 1/2 in.
:z.at
1000
..
..
:-..... ~ ....
,24x72
.
I
.'.
..
4.40
..
..
.-e-
I
.
II~IW
...
-,.. ~
..
..
..
,
60
....... .....:
-~
,
loIb'.i~
t .'5/1 in.
b X-I lin..1
M""
rr.7
18~ 54
12.3
....
81"';1
12 x 31
'
::::~
10
"-
24 '.72
~ ~
..
..
....
.-
311.90
La.
.
.
.
10
60
-. .
100
1000
. I
TI
l....
"'-
'.
b 11...1
B 1".;1
12.38
11.54
,11.1
,Z4 ~ 72
10.2
30 ,x 90
" 8.51
~ t--.. jo... !-.

I~~
I"
'.
'" .
, 10
..
"
I
I
II
' I
I Iii ill
Ir
,I I
.:i I
I
1
,t'
' 1.
"
i i ! III
.1
I
1
, ,
. I ,I
10
,I
'11
I .
I, ,.1.1'
,
-r
!
I
I .
'i.
I
I
, ,,
,
I
I
I
I':
i '
II i
I I
I. IoIb 3.00
I
3/0. in.
.
I I
I
I I
"
100
1000
. DURATION of 8l:AST P.RES.SURE,T Jmse<;)

Figure 6-45
Peak blast pressure capacity for tempered glass panes, a/b

./
"
6-101 '
= 3.00. t = 5/8 and
- "" ...
3/4- in,
20
"loIbU.~1
in.l
t 1/4
"
\0
..
I"~
..
1(' Un.1
IIli
,
!' . ,
.....
..
..
-,
"
""
-.
:L51
12.41
: ' I
I'
t'--
B IIlIiI
11.72
1.51
2. . . .
OJICIO
'
..
:11,.,20
, 0.020
..
'
..
.'
0.1
I
20
\0
.,
\00
\000
.
,
\0
IaIb4.00
I I II
t
.~
!I..
' I
,,
;" I';;
I'
I;
I,
<;
Ili~
"
".
\
..
! ! I[
10
I
I
I'll
I I I!; ,
I I ij Ii I
!
..... _,
I
I
,
,
"
..
..
I
I
II
i I
'
b HR.)
!' I:. '~ I,
: "I I
I: ! i !
"
'
: ill
" , I
! -: I'
II
!
I I I !I !
..
2.71
IIIII
I
I
!I I
I
ii' I
II ,I
..
1.51
:11,.,20
1.01
2 98
1,000
\00
DURATION ot BLAST PRESSURE, T (msec) ,

Figure 6-46
Peak bl.., pressure capadty for tempered gl..s panes, alb. 4.00. ,
6-102
B (Illil
12.41 .. 8.25
11.72
"", 1111
II~"
, I
"";'-
511. i....
1/4 and $/16 in.
20
..
to
I I 1I
.
-,
...
I\\.
...
,.. ~'
, ,
,
Q:
, ,1 \:'
24._
30.120
1.50
',
.
..
-.
/"I"
to
4,11
,
18.72
a:I
'.
-,
,,
..
.- .
:--... i'-o
=:l
9.24
.j
.
;
Vi
V)
'
-.
-,
..
B (poil
.,
,
'.
~ ..........
......
,bIlIHn.)
<;
I.' ;
..
12 x 048
,x
,.
~,.
r- r--.~
r.
alb 4.00
t3II1n.
..
100
1000
Q:
0lV)
-J
35
a:I
::.::
.
w
<,,,,",
,.,
I~
\0
.'
I ,I!;
, ,
,~ .'-I
0-
I I I I
"
....
I","!.
<I"
,.
"
...........
1',..
I' I
! I
-II 'I,
I'
!! i
~
i"
I'i: iii,r
,.. !
Ii! I
18
lit
72
30 x 120
"'.
,,1000
100'
DURATION
of BLAST
PRESSURE,T
(msec).
'.
~ .
' ._
,; .. ~ '.
Peak blast pressure capacity for tempered glass panes. a/b = 4,00,
6-103
B (poil
15.21
I I I iT
; I ' : II
'
II
:
;.
, i
(1... 1
12... .-
1;-:
, I
. I '.
,' ,
.",
'I [, 111111'
Figure 6-47
I -,
'!o-
,. ," 1
t ..
I I[ -
Illlll
. ,II ..
. I
I..
alb 4.00
-t 1/2 in.:
l/8 and 1/2 in.
7.17
2.58
II
i
I II
I:
B Iil
i ' II!
,1,1,
I'
12 . . .
III
1'1
,!';
,'\~
\. "I, "
r I",
I,
~f~\ ,~~
c, i'I' 'I' ~',N-++~-W~~ I'
, I;,' ,','
".
~-
",
',,'"
'I
Ii'
Vi
III
..
i i
'
I
~
ell
.s
'0::
l Ili I
:J
V)
V)
W
0::
e,
.....
V)
<
..J
100
ell
::.::
<
w
...
l1.
I'
, I
,
,
10
:
5
) .. 1
,I
i
I
I
i
, ,
I, I
I : ! 'I!
I
. 'I
"
' ,
' ,
........
I
I
i :'
,
,
I
i
., i , 'I
,
j
,,
BI . .1
12 . . .
:17,.
,
i
,
i
i
i
'
i i' !
"B" 72
II! '
I ! i'
I, .l I
, ::i
b Ii,,-)
.,
iii
I ;! :, II
t.
, I.' !-!
, ~.I
'
I ,
,I
,i I I ! i III
,, i ' I
in..,
I, I
i,
:! I'i
: 1.1 I "
,......
I
!
111.9
lI
24'. ge
' 9.0.
: ,, ! ! I
' 'I
! ~
..
5.08
30 x 120
10
1000
100
OU&ATlON of BLAST PRESSURE, r (msec)'

Figure 6-48
'
' I 'I:
I i' iii !i I
1 '1I
! . . . . .
,I
-,3/.
aIb4.00"
,
.
I :
I , !
III
,
I
'
100,0
ii
, II
I I; I
I
!
I
! : i .;
I
I, Ii'
II!
I
I 'j 1'1
100
,I
I~I
I
"I'
, ,
311.120
, I
"
n.' '
, I
10
'
,
I
I' j
II
! II
......-...
"I I
.......
.1
,I
Ji 72
Peak blast pressure capacity for tempered glass pan;';,; alb

.'
6 -104
.. 't '.
".~;
~ 4,00,
t; 5'/8 and 3i4 in:
'
..
~~tl;h
~r
llJlHlttHhl1
::ii
!I;:
r-r
,
-;
I' I
I 1
. I
! :iil":
"1.:::'-:
,I
...
1000
a,
""
'"
r-
r717:T.:;;rU'J":'I'
:1:';, "'-I
,r-~XT1:'-n7";- ~+'+t::--r:1
,..-:p,
<l:
~-.
"'il! 1':'1'''1,''01 ~.;.
VI:7fXV
II:
l..J
, ..
r71YV;
'~
,,-1.---
~--'I"j:::t:t:
_
-~ =L-f~,I~-
_.:-.,.
, _-'-0.---&'--'--'"
- --"~
II"
WIA1'
II;
'1"
~
t/),
-~
l")
co
;'
,'" '';11
I II j'r. I 1 I l I [I '
dl!
if
, ~:\+I-H-Ihj.,
,--,:.:.:J-"hh
:a
', "
,:ll--.. -
-+:.;j+-l': ~+
-.--
t/)
:e
0
'z
0
Z
- _ ..;...-I'--I-.:t--I.-~--.-. -.,.-.
100 I~"~~~.~""
ot...
- ---,-----n";-
--I-
I"
"1
.,
""
l/l
.... -V.. ...-I...,

.. -: 1-: 1 1
I ..
l: ~:'h::I~+44M+~+j+
. _ J...1_'_'_',,"_
100
1000
, 10,000
~D= NO\IDI~IOIlAL LOAD=t 14X la6'rlWtl4

Figure 6-49
Nondil:lcnsional static
I~ad-s(rcss rcl~tions~i'~s'for ~~mpIY'~pporl~d'(c~pcrcd glass (af(~r'M~orc).
100,000
"'" -. '
"
'~--,
,.,n.,... "
',.' . '"
,.,
.,~,',.-
,.",
",.
~q
-+,
(/)
.(/)
uJ
:.c
u
I
I-
;;
: :;
~
t :
~
,/
10Im~.
~r
--'-'
.,
--1
.. I
~rl-
..
:. ..1
I
.'
.
JJ
16'
1:1;
,..,-"
... '
L t
-.
.-
.. I . L:of':'L:"
._ ..
I-
'-
'",
.....
uJ
-'
U.
-01
=I=t
,-.-,-,1--
."
'"
a:
,'I],/)'
"
... -..,-
:::.,._-
_1_t--t_I_J-~--I-I-
uJ
+++..H+1
~-'W-l-+l~-W-l. I+..c...+ -I+I-I..
_._1
uJ
IZ
,~
uJ
xl ..
It'v
'/
1/
'--:;fv
i'l
... :ill+L kb
~~.~~,,-
-,1-
I;
,.
t:
", ..::, 1
...,.
, 1'
..;"'' 1 I::.1: ,..
__ ... I'~-... ,_,..1,.
.100 .
1000'
., . , .
'
10,000
lw = /IDIlDlMENSl<lllAL
lOAl)= t 14X 1uG r(b'tl 4
,
.
Figure 6-50
,'''p:'
"I':
rrr
.. ;:.:
-: .. !:'J
\0
:-1- 0
:::.
... ,
--
... -
. 100,000
,.'
"
,.
Ncndimcnsional SIalic load-er ..er dcf1~ction rcl.tionshipsfor simply

..."supported tempered glass (.fter Moore). ~
"
A edge clearance
B bite
e . face clearance
,
"
,'.
Figure '6-51
Edge. f3.ce. and bite requirements,
,
.."
"',
,-
6-107
Figure 6-52
Distribution of lateral load rransrnitted by glass pane
6-108
to
the window frame.
TM 5-1300;NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
Table 6-6
Static Design Strength r u (psi), for Tempered Glass* [a - long

dimension of glass pane (in.); b
short dimensio~.. of glass, pane
(in.)]
,
,.
c
ASPECT RATIO - 1.00

Glasa
Static
o ign
Strength (pai) for,'. Window Thickness, t, of
Size,
3/4 in.
12><12
141
120
103
90.1
79.2
64.S
16%16:
20_
17_
151
132
11_
17x17
18.18
19x19
103
91.6
82.2
20x20
' '/8 in.
'11_ in.
3/S , i n .
49.3
32.2
28.3
.70.1
62.5
56.1
.43.7
39.0
35.0
25.5
23.1
21.0
15.1
14.1
13.5
50.7
46.0
. 31.6
19.2
12.9
11.0
17.7
12.7
12.6
25<25
74.2
67.3
61.3
56.1
51.5
.u .5
10.0
9.20
8.52
7.91
7.43
14z14
ISzl'
21x21
22z22
23x23
24x24
87.7
40.3
74.7
-42.8
36.9
1/4 in.
27.5
23.9
21.1
18.7
16.7
lax!3
56.1
28.6
26.4
24.4
41,9
38.3
35.2
32 .
16. :3
15.1
22.7
21.2
14.3
13.8
26x26'
43.9
30.0
19.7
13.4
9.39
40.7
37.9
27.9
26.2
18.5
17 ,4
8.80
8.26
29x29
30:1:30
35.3
24.6
23.2
21.9
32x32
33.0
30.9
29.0
12.9
12.8
12.6
. 12.6
12.0
20.8
14.2
11.3
6.71
33x33
34%34
27,4
26.0
19.7
13.8
..10.6 .
18.7
13.5
10.0 .
35.35
24.8
.17.8
13.2
9.50
36:1:36
17 .0
12.8
9,OS
37s37
38x3a
23.6
22.S
. 16,2
21.5
15.4
12.7
12.7
8.63
8.24
39x39
40%40
41:1::41
42%42
43x.3
44x44
4Sx4S
46%46
47x47
48x48
49x49
SOx50
51%51
52][52
53x53
54x54
55x55
56x56
57][57
58%58
59%59
60x60
20.5
19.7
18.8
18.1
17 .3
16.7
16.0
.15.4
14.9
14.5
14.2
14.0
13.7
13.'
13.3
13.1
12.9
12.8
12.7
12.7
,12.6
12.6
14.8
14.4
14.1
13.8
13.5
13.2
13.0
12.9
12.8
. 12.7
12._
12.6
12.4'
11.9
11.'
11.1
10.7
10.3
9.99
'9.66
9.38
9.11
. 16.4
15.4
14.6
12._
12.'
11.9
.11.4
, 10.9
. 10.4
. 9.99
' ,9.59
9.24
8.91
8.'9
8.30
8.02
,7.76
7.54
7.33
.. '. 7.13
'6.94
6.76
6.59 6;40
6.22
7.88
7.57
.7.30
7.04
6.80
6.'6
6.32
6.08
'.86
5.65
5.45
< 5.27
5.09
4.92
. 76
4.61
4.47
4.33
4.20
4.08
3.97
3.85
20.2
- 17.6
15.5
14.2
13.~
7.00
'6.22
5.86
7.39
7.04
5.53
5.22
4.94
,
-
4.69
4.4'
4.23
4.04
3.86
3.69
5~24
5.01
4.79
4.58
4-.39 ;
4.21
4.05
3.90 '
. 3.75
3.62
3.49
, 3,.37
. 3.25
3.15
3.04
2.95
2.85
2.77
2.68
2.60
2.53
2'-45
2.38
2.32
- 6.62
5.77
5.50
12.1
7,78
6-.39
. ,6.07
12.7
, 12.6
11.8
10.9
10.1
27<27
28.28
31:1:31
lIZ in.
b
(in. )
--
3.53
3.39
3.2'
3.12
3.00
2.89
2.78
2.68
-2.'8
2.49
2.41 I
2.33
'2.25
2.18.
!, 2.11
I
2.05
" 1.99
1. 93
, 1. 87
1.82
1.77
1.72
.'
"
Panes to the right and below the stepped dividing line behave
according to large deflection plate theory.
(continued)
6-109
'';1
TK
5-13~0/NAVFAC,P-397/A~R~8~22
Table 6-6
...
. Static Design Strerigth r u (psi); fo~ Tempered Glass* [a - long

dimension of glass pane (in.); b - short dimension of glass pane
(iri.)] (Continued)
ASPECT RATIO - 1.25
Static Design Strength
Glasa
Size,
3/4 in.
b x
(in. )
s/a in.
(psi) for II
1/2 in.
Window thickness, t, of
3/8 in.
--
1/4 in.
5/16 in.
12x15
13x16.25
154
131
105
89.5
65.5
37.5
32.0
20.S
55.8
14x11.5
113
.98.5
,77 .2
48.1
27.6
41.9
36.8
24.0
15.8
14.2
12.3
67.2
59.1
13.0
10.2
.' 32.6
21.1
19,0
12.0
9.86
29.1
17 .2
11.1
9.18
10.3
9.72
9.54
8.69.
15x18.75
16x20
17x21.25
18x22.5
86.6
'76.1
-, 52.4
68.4
46.1
'.
-,
..
19x23.75
20x25
21x26.25
61.4
.41.9
26.1
55.4
37.8
50.3
.34.3
23.6
21.4
15.8
14 .6
13.6
22%27.5
.'
45.8
31.3
19.7
12.8
18.2
17.0
12.0
23x28.75
41.9
28.6
24:1:30
38.5
26.3
25x31.25
35.5
26x32.5
21x33.75
32.8
30 .
24.2
.. 22,4
20.8
28.3
' 19.5
29x36.25
30x37.5
31x38.75
32x40
33x41.25
34x42.5
35x43.75
36x45
37x46.25
26.4
24.6
23.1
21.7
20.4
19.4
18.4
17 .4
16.4
28x35
38x47.5
39x48.75
40x50
41x51.25
42x52.5
43x53.75
44x55
15.9
14.9
10.2
9.98
9.79
9.77
9.71
9.65
14.9
14 .2
" 13.6
12.8
12.3
11.7
11.2
10.7
10.3
10.1
16.8
13.1
12.7
9.80
16.1
12.3
9.79
15.5
14.8
14.3
13.8
13.4
13.0
11.8
11.4
10.6
10.3
' 10.2
12.6
12.3
10.0
9.87
18.5
17.6
15.6
11.0
9.80
7.95
9.70
9.49
8: 77
7.30
6.75
6.27
.8.14
7.57
.7.07
5.45
5.12
5.83
6.63
4.81
4.54
4.314.09
3.90
3.71
3.53
6,23
5.87 '
5.54
9.22
5.25
8.71
8.24
7.81
7.41
4. 98 ~
4.74
4.52
4.32
9".78
9.75
9.71
9.66
. 9.47
9.06 .
7.05
6.72
6.42
6.13
5.87
5.63
5.40
4.14
3.97
.8.68
9.93
11.1
9.96
9.79
9.78
11.3
10.7
'14.1
13.4
15.4
13.5
11.9
3.36
3.20
3.66
3.51
3.37
3.24
3.06
2.92
2.80
2.68 ;
2.57
2.47,
2.37
5.19
3.11
2.28
8.32
5.00
3.00
2.19
7.99
7.67
7.37
7.11
4.81
4".64
4.49
4.34
4.21
4.08
3.96
2.89
2.78
2.68
2.59
2.50
2.42
2.34
2.11
3.82
"
45x56.25
46x57.5
47x58.75
48x60
49x61. 25
SOx62.5
11.9
. 9.80
S1:ll:63.7S
10.6
52x65
53x66.25
10.3
9.79
9.78
' 9.77
9.74
9.70
10.2
9.67
11.5
11.2
10.9
6.85
6.61
6.38
2.03
1. 96
1. 89
1.83
1.77'
1.71
* Panes to the right and below 'the stepped dividing line behave
(continued)
6-110
TH 5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR',88-22.,
Table 6-6
Static Design Strength r u (psi), for Tempered Glass* [a-- long

(in.i) 1 (Continued)
,' '
-ir .,'
'
ASPECT RATIO - 1.50

Gla
"
Static D ign Strength (p,ai ) for Window thicknDsa. t, of
--
Size,
b x-a
12x18
123
105
13][19 .5
14x21 -
90.2
78.6
15x22.5
Ih24
17x25.5
61.2
54.6
49.0 .
-,
20x30
. 2lx31. 5
22%33
44.2 "
40.1 .
36.5
83.8
. 52.3
44.5
71.4
61. 6~
33.4
29.4
'
23.2
33.4
20.8
30.2
27.4
15.6
14.2
30.7
21.0
13.1
25%37,5
28.3
19.3
12.4
26:1:39
26.2
27x40.5
24.3
22.6
21.0
19.7
24:11:36
28x42
29:1:43.5.
30:1:45
."'
.
31x46.5
32:':48
33:1:49.5
34:1:51
35:1:52.5
36:1:54
37:1:55.5
,
38:1:57
..
17.9
11.7
16.6
11.0
15.4 : I
10.4
14.4 -~
9.89
13.4
9.42 \
12.8
12.2
11.6 ;
11.1
10.6
10.2
9.78
9.42.
9.21
39:1:58.5~
18.4
17.3
16.2
15.3 '-' ~
14.4
13.6 ;.
13.0
12.5
12.0 -
40:1:60 ,
41:1:61.5
42:1:63
43:1:64.5
44:1:66
45:1:67.5
46:1:69 .!
47:1:70.5"
11.6
11.2 "
10.8 .
10.4 ;
10.1
9.71
9.42 .
9.25
9.01
8.82
8.60 .
8.35
8.12
7.90
7.69 ..
7.62
.9. O~
7.5~
.'
..1
"
:/-
18.8
17.1
22.8
33.4
.-
.-.'
29.9 .
16.3
11.9
13.9
12.3
10.5
9.43
11.1
10.0
8.88
8.26
>
9.31
8.85
8.84
8.14
8.02
7.90
7.83
7.81
7.78
7.62.
7.80
7.77
6.45
11.4
10.6
9.86 v .
8.98
8.611
8.24
1.86
,. -
7.85
7.85
7.84
7.83
7.82
7.72
7.62
7.28
6.90
6.55
6.22
5.92,
"
"
.
.'
7.91
7.88
'7.85.'
7.77 "
7.69
7.62
7.35 .
7.06
9.32
..
--
1/4 in .
5/16 in ..
25.5
22.0
16.8
14.9
13.3
12.3
.-
8.0S
8.02 -,
7.99
7.96 '
7.93
6.78
'
9.16
8.91
8.65
8.34 "
19.2
26.0
41.8
37.3
24.9
23x34.5
3/8 in.
...
38.4
,
","
53.6
47.2
69.1 -
18x27
19%28,5 __
1/2 in.
5/8- in.
3/4-1n.
(in. )
48:1:72
..
7.03
7.77
5.95-
7.63
5.50
7.19
6.69
5.10
6.24
5.83
5.47
4.42
4.14
3.88
5.13
4.83
4.55
4.30 .
4.07
3.85
3.66
3.47
3.33
3.64
3.43
3.27
3.13
3.00
2.87
2.74
2.61
2,50
4.74
5.64
'5.38
5.13
4.91'
4'.70
4.50'
4.31
4.14
3.21
3.09
2.98
2.88
2.77
2.66
2.56
2.47
2.39
2.29
2.19
2.10
2.02
1. 94
1. 86
1. 79
3.97
2.38
1. 73
* Panes to the right and below the stepped dividing line behave'
accOl;ding .lO0 large deflection plate theory.
..
(continued)
6-111.
TH
5~1300/NAVFAC'
Table 6-6
P-397/AFR 88-22
Static Design Strength r u (psi), for Tempered Class* [a

long
dimension of glass pane (in.) ;'" b.- short dimension of glass pane
(in.) J (Continued)
ASPECT RATIO 1.75

Glaaa
Static Desisn Strensth (pail tor
II
Size,
b :II: II
3/_ in.
3/. in.
1/2 in,'
5/8 in.
Window thickness, t, of --
. .
:~
5/16 in.
'1/_ in.
(in. )
12%21
10.
13x22.75
14x24.5
15%26.25
92.6
79.9
69.6
63.2
54.5
. 47.5
16x28
61.2
17x29.15
l8x31. 5'
19x33.25
20x35
54.2
48.3
41.7
37.0
14.2
33.0
46.3
39 ....
34.a
2.
2. ~
22 .
14.4
10.2
12.3
8,91
19.5
10.6
9.46
8'.01
7.32
26.0 (
23.0
20.6
14.9
18.5
1.,7
17.0
8.52
6.83
1.85
. 3.
....
13.2
11.8
10 .
~.'3
7.30
5.76
1t3.4
29.6
3',1
26.7
21::Jl:36.75
3~.~
22x3 . ~
23x40.25
32.4
2".2
22.1
29.6
20.2 .
24:1::42
27.2
18.6
25x43.75
26x45.5
25.1
11.1
10.7
7.11
5.70
23.2
15.8 -.
14.7
13.6
12.7
11.9
11.1
10.4
.1
. ~2
6.24
5.69
21.~
'.'7
9.37
. 3
8.38
5.98
~.21
8.01
7.66 .
7.35
5.82
5.74
5.73 _
4.98
4.70
4.43
4.35
4,05
3.79
3.56
3.3.
3.17
7.11
6.89
. 7
6.45 ,
6.24
6.04.
5.87
5.80.
5.74
5.71
.
5.70
...
4.17
3.94
3.73
3.54
3.37
3.21
3,0.
2,'3
2 .2
3.00
2 . ~
2.72
2.60
2.49
2.37
2.2.
2.1.
2.06
5.72.'--:
5.70
5.69
5.70
4.71
4.50
4.30
4.12
2.7L
2 .1
1.97
1.89
1.81
1.74
27:11:47.25
20,0
. 18.6
17.4
1. 3
15.3
28x49
29x50.75
30%52.5
3b54.25
32%56
14.4
33%57.75
34%59.5
35%61.25
36%63
37%64.75
38x66.5
39%68.25
40%70
4b71.75
12,.
12.1
11.4
10,.
10.3
9.91
9.52
42x73.5
43%75.25
44%77
45x78.75
9.15
8.81
8.50
8.24
13.~
'.'3
9.46
9.02
8.62
. 30
8.00
7.73 .
7.47
7.26 .
7.07
6.90
. 6.73
..
~~
1~.1
13.8 .
12.6
11 .s
'.71
.,3.
7.87
7.43
5.73
. 12
5.8"
5.70
5.73
5.57
5.27
5.71
5.66
5.45
6.49
~ .7
~,.3
5.44
5.26
~,O'
4.93
2:~1
2.42
...
5.00
4.67
* Panes to the right and below the stepped dividing line behave
(continued)'"
6-112;' "
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR' 88-22
Table 6-6
Static Des~gn Strength r u (psi), for Tempered Glass* [a - long

dimension of glass pane (in.); b
short dimension of glass pane
(in.)] (Continued)
.,
ASPECT RATIO 2 00
Static D igD Strenath
GtalSS
Size,
b x .i.
(in. )
3/4 in.
..
13:1:26
lIIx28
lSx30
16x32
tor a Window thickns, .. , of ,--
.1/~ in.
'/8 in.
. 3/8 in .
1/4 in.
5/16 in.
"
".
12x24
(poi)
97:6 .
83.1,
71.7
41:'
66.6
56.1
48.9
35.4
30.'
26.6
23.4
23.8
20.3
17.'
15.2
13.3
13.0
11.0
. . 7.81
9.'2
8.31
7.43
6.87
6.29
'.81
6.72
6.26
5.86
'.'1
5.19
5.40
5.03
9.0S
62 .4
_42.6
".9
37.'
17x34
48.6
11.9
43.4
33.2
29.6
20.7
18x36
19x38
10.6
38.9
26.6
18.'
16.6
20x40
35.1.
2~.O
14.9
31.9
21.7
13.6
8."
7.85
22x44
29.0
19.8
12 .
7.25
4.90
4.42
23x46
26.6
11.3
6.73
4.64
4.39
24x48
25x50
24.4
22.'
18.1
16.6
10.4
. 55
4.37
1'.3
4.47
4.32
26x52
20.8.
9."
8.84
6.39
6.08
4.40
4.24
27x5'"
19.3
28x56
17 .9
Zix42
14.2
16 7'- ~
29x58
0-
15.6
14.6'
13.7
12.9.
30z60
31x62
32x64
33x66
._
.. ,
-.
9.98
9.36
8.80.
'8.23
7.73
7.27
6.86
6.57
6.32 .6.08
13.2
12.2 .
11 .
10.7
12.2
11.5
10.8
10.3
8.31
7.91
7.'3
5.87 .;:
5.66
5.47
1,18
5,29
38x76
39;1:78
9.73
6.86
5.12
9.24
6~62
40x80
8.78
6.42
6.23
34x68
35x70
36x72
37x74
4lx82
4231:84
8.37
8.03
'6.05
9. '"
S.79 .
4.71
4.56
'.53
4.39
4.01
4.38
3.141
'.07
4.86
4.37
4.67
'.'8
4.52
4.2' .'
'.08
. 3.8'
3.'0 .
3.28
3.09 .
2.93
2.18
.7
4,41
3,64
3.44
2.6'
2.'1
3.26
3.11
2.97
2.39
2.28
4,96-
4.40
4.39
4.38
4.37
4.81
4.34
2.72
4.67
4.60
4.30
2.60
2.50
4.25
2.84 -
4.46
5.29
4.31'
..
2.18
2.08
1,98
1.89
1'.80
, I
(continued)
6-113
88~22
,..-l . .
Table 6-6

dimension of glass pane'(in.);' b - short dimension of gla~s pane
(in.j 1. (Continued)
.
AsPECT RATIO 3.00
Glasa
Size,
Static Design'Strength
bx
'/4 in:
II
5/8 in.
(psi) ,for
1/2 in.
a Window thickness,:
~,'
of .;,-
5/16 in.
1/4 in .. .
19.8
10.8
7.53
16,9
14.5
12.7
9.18
7.92
6.41
5.57
4,94
4.42
'/8 in.
(in. )
81.1
69.1
59.6
55.4
47.2
40.7
15:1:45 .
16x48
51.9
17ir:51
18x54
40.4
36.1
35.4t31.2 .
27,6
19x57
32.4
29.2
26.5
12x36
13x39
14x42
34.5
29.4
25.4
22.1
19.4
17.2
9.86 .
6.90
6.06
5.43
24.6
15.'
8.79
4.92
3.61
22.1
13,8
12,4
11.3
7.89
7.12
6.46
4.48
4.10 .
'.29
19.9
18.1
2.80
24.1
16.5
10.3
5.88
3.77
3.48
22.1
20.3
15.1
9.40
5.44
3.22
2.61
2.40'
13;8
~.63.
5.06
3.00
2.29
12.8
11.8
7.95
1.35 .'
>
18.7
17.3
16.0
29x87 .
14.9
13.9
30x90
13.0
8.86
31x93
12.2
8.'0
32x96
11 .
7.79
33x99
34x102
10.7"
10.1
J.32 .
4.72
6.90.
4.48
20x60
21x63
22:11:66
23][69 '
24x72
2SxlS
26x78
21x81
28z84
45,6
10.9
10.2
9.48
4.71
. 4.40
2.82
2.66'
3.98
3.01
2.15
6.82
4.13
2.51
2.08
2.01
6,34
3.88
3.6.5
2.'8
2.26
1.95
1. 89
- 3.44
2.14
1. 83
'.25
2.08
1.80
3.08
2.03
2.93
2.80
1.97
1. 78
1. 16
1.77
. 5.91
11.1
5':56 .
5.26
4.98
1.92
according to large deflection plate. theory.
', -
6-114
,
,
~
, .1:
'.
TN 5-1300/NAV,AC P-397/AFR.88-22
Table 6-6

(in:) 1 (Continued)
ASPECT RATIO 4.00

Glasa
Static Destan Stransth (pai) for a Window thickness,
Size,
b x e.
3/4 in.
t,
of --
1
"
.5/8 in.
1/2,1n.
3/8 in.
5/16 in.
1/4 in.
(in. )
12x48
13%52
75.7
51.7
32.2
64.5
44.0
27.5
Hz56
. 55.6
38.0
33.1
29.1
23.1
20.6.
18.1
16.1
14.3
12.9
15x60
48.5
16z64
42.6
17:1:68
37.7
18z72
19x76'
33.7
30.2
25.8
23.0.
20.6
18.5
15.7
10.1
&.57
7.02
13.6
5.16.
11.8
7.39
6.43
10.4
5.66
3.99 '
9.20
8.20
5.01
3.56
4.49
7.36
4.05
3,19
2.87 '
5.99
4.52 '
20x80
21.3
18.6
11.6
6.65
3.67
2.60
21%84
24.1
10.5
6.03
22.5'
23x92
20.6
14.1"
9.59
8.77
5.49
5.03
3.34
3.06
2.37
22><88
16.9
15.4
2.81
2.02
24x96'
18.9
12.9
8.05
17 .5
11.9
7.42
2.59
2.39
16.1
11.0
6.86
4.63
4.28
3:97
1,88
25x100
26xl04
2.23
1.66
27xl08
28x112
29x116
15.0
13.9
13.0
12.1
10.2
9.49
8.85
6.36
3.70
2.09
5.92
5.52
3.'5
1:96
3.22
8.21'
5.15
3,02
1,84
1,75
1.57
I.U
I.U
30x120
2.18
1.16
1,34
* Panes to the right andbelow,the stepped-dividing line behave'according to large deflection plate theory.
6-115
TK 5-l300/NAVFAC' P-397/AFR 88-22
..
.
..t
Table 6-7 Minimum Delign Thicknell. Olelrencel. and Bite Requirement.
Glass
Thickness
(Nominal)
in
mm
5/32
-,
4.0
3/16
5.0
1/4
6.0
3/8
10.0
\ MA"
Minimum
Edge
Clearance
(in)
Actual Glals
Thickness For
Design, t
(in)
1/2
1/8 '
0.180
3/16
1/2
1/8.
0.219
1/4
1/2
1/8
0.355
51.16,
"
1/2
12.0
5/8
16.0
3/4
19.0
3/16
0f49
,.
..
"CO
Minimum
Face
'Clearance
(in)
"B"
Nominal
Bite
(in)
0.469
3/8
0.59"
3/8
1/2
3/16,
1/2
1/4
.,
1/4
1/2
'
0.719
3/8
1/2
"
.'
6-116
5/16
TN , S-1300/NAVFAC
P-397/AFR
:
.. 88-22
Table 6-8
Maximum (bIt) Ratio for Linear Plate Behavior Under Blast Load and
Coefficients for Resistance and Deflection and Fundamental Period
of Simply Supported Glass Platas Based on Small Deflection Theory
(No Tensile ~embrane Behevior)
C
-
.
.'
Design Coefficients .
,
Aspect
Ratici,
alb
Maximum
(bIt)
Ratio ..
' Fundamental
Period of
Vibration,
,
CT
5.79 x 104
'Design
Deflection,
\C
D
2,58 x 10. 4
59.0
4.42 x 104
2.72 x 10. 4
6.30 x 10. 3
1.4
63.9
'3.68 x' 104
'2.83 x 10- 4
7.21 x 10- 3
1.5
66.2
2.88 x 10- 4
7.60 x 10- 3
1.6
67.9
3.22 x 104
2.91 x 10- 4
7.99 x 10- 3
1.8
71.3
. 2.91 x 104
2:98 x 10- 4 .
8.65 x 10- 3
2.0
74.7
'2.72 x 104
3'.02 x 10- 4
9.23 x 10- 3
3.0
84.3
2.32x 104
3: 12 x' 10- 4
10.12 x 10- 3
4.0
89,4
2.24 x"10 4
3.15 x 10- 4
10.36 x 10- 3
<Xl
89.4
2.24 x 104
3.15 x 10- 4
10.44 x 10- 3
1.0
53.6
1.2
-,
.'
..
Design
Re~1st~nce,
Cr
3.36 x 104
6-117
5.21 X 10. 3
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFa 88-22
.'
'
Table 6-9
Coefficients 'for' Frame Loading' , ,"

<-
alb
CR
Cx
Cy
1.00
0.065
0.495
0.495
1.10
0.070,
0.516
,0.516
1.20
0.074
0.535
0.533
1.30
0.079
0.,554
0.551
1.40
0,.083
0,.570
0.562
1. 50
0.085
0.581
0.574
1.60
0.0~6
0.590
' 0.583
1. 70
0.088
0.600 , ',0.591
1.80
0.090
0.609
0.600
1. 90
0.091
0.616
0.607
2.00
0:092
0.623
0.614
3.00
0.093 '
0.644
0.655
4.00
0.094
0.687
0.685
, ,
TK S-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88,22
Table 6-10
Statisti~al
Acceptance
.a~dRejection
Coefficients
Number of
Window Assemblies
n.
,
.'
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
"'12
.
.
"
,. ,
'
13
14
15
16
,17
18
19
, .20
.>
'.
"
...
Coefficient
B
4.14 ,
3.05
2.78
2.65
.546
.871
1.14 .
1.27
2.56
2.50
2.46
2.42
2.39, '
1.36 .
1.42
1.48
1.49
1.52
,.
2.37 '
2.35
2.33
2.32
2.31 ,.
2.30
2.28
2.27
2.27
2.26
22
23
, 24
25
2.25
2.24
2.24
2.23
2.22
30
2.19
40
2.17
50
2.14
21
"
,U
. ,.Rejection
Accept!,nce
Coefficient
6-119
1. 54
1. 57,'
1. 58
1. 60
1. 61
1. 62
1.64,
1.65.
1.65,
1.66
1.67
1.68
1.68
1.69,
1. 70
;
.
"
1.72
.. 1. 75
..
..
1.77
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
6-120-
TN 5-1300/NAVFAC P~397/AFR 88~22
6-121'
TH
5-1~OO/NAVFAC
P~397/AFR:8822
r,
. ,
Fundamental Period of Vibration. Tn for Monolithic Temp~re'd 'Glass

(Continued)
Table 6-11
A.p.c~ R.ti~
Fund~nt.l
Gla..
Dimenaiona
(in. )
12
13
18
14
21
22.5
24
25.5
27
28.5
30
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26 '
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
"4546
47
46
19.5
t31.5
33
34.5
36
37.5
, 39
40.5
.42
43,5
45
46.5-
48
49.5
51
52.5
54
55.5
57
58.5
60
61.5
63
64.5
66
61.5
69
10.5
72
1.~O
Period of Vibration (ma.c) for Window

Thickn t. of ~-
"
3/4 In.
--1.59
5/8 in:
3/16 In. "-
3/8 in.
---'
1/4 in.
---
2.86
3,22
3.78
2.62
3.31
3.80
".38
5.84
3.00
5.03
6.56
2.82
3.4Z
3.19
3.57
".33
4.89
S.U'
5.12
6.46
7.32
8.70
3.86
4.33
8.09
7.23
9.37
3.98
:4.41
4.82
5.3.
6.10
6.76
1.93
10. 3
8.65
5.89
7.46
9.40 -
11.2
12.1
9.63
10.5
11.3
12.1
13.0
6.416
8.18
8.94
10.2
10.9
13.0
14.1.
13.8
15.1
1.86
2.16.
2.48
4.86
5.34 .:
1.92
2.26
1/2 in.
--2.43
5.83
6.35
7.06
6.89
7.46
8.04
8.34
9.02
9,73
11. 9
8.65
10.5
11.2
12.6
9.28
9.93
10.6
11.3
12.0'
12.8
13.5
14.3
15.0
15.7
16.4
17.2
17.9
18.6
19.4
20.2
21.0
21.1
22.4.
24.5
7.69
12.0
12.7
13.4 .
14.1
14.9
15.6
16.4
17 .2
18.0
18.7
20.5
21.4
22.3
23.2,
24.2
25.1
26.0
26.9
21.8,
9.11
10.4
11.1
~
13.4
14.2
14.9
16.6
17.5
18.4
19.3.20.2
6.61
7.79
12.4
14.6
16.2
15.5
17.3
16.5
15.1 ;
17 .6
18.4
19.6
16.0
16.9
18.6
17.8 '.
20.8
21.9
23.1.
24.2
25.4
19.3
20.2
21.1
22.1
23.2' ,
24.3'
25.3'
20.7
21.9
19.7
18.5
22.1
22.9
23.8
24.5
26.2
27.1
28.0
29.0
30.0
31.1
5.09
5.83
13.3
H.2
21.2
25.3
4.36
5.12
26.4
27.5
28.6
29.7
30.8
32.0,
33.1
34.3
35.5 .
36.7
...
"
23.1
24.3
25:5
26:7
27.8
29.0
30.3
26.6
27.8
28.9
30.2
31.3
32.5
33.7
34.9
36.1.
31.4
38.7
40.0
41.3
42.6
31.5
32.8
34.1
.,
35,4
36.7
38.1
39:4
40.8
42.2
43.6
45.0
4~6 .4
.
6-122
-'
TN 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR88-22'
6-123 .
TK 5-l300/NAVFAC P-3'97/AFB.' 88-22
-,
Table 6-11
Fundamental Period of Vibration, Tn' for Monolithic Tempered Glass

(Continued)
Aap.c~ R.~io ~
Gla.,
Fund.m.nt.l Pariod ot Vibr.iion (ms.c) for Window

thiekn.... t. of --
Dimension.
(in. )
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
, 22:
23
24
25;
26'
27
28
29
30
31
32
,33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
'41
'42
24
26
,28
30
32
34
' 36
38
' 40
' 42
44
46
48
50
52
54
56
58
60
62
64
' 66
.68
70
72
74
76
78
80
82
84
2.00
3/4 In.
--1.78
2.09
2.43
2.78
3.17
3.58
4.01
4.47
" 4.95
5.46
5.99
6.55
7.13
7.73
8.37
9.02
9,70
. 10.4
., 11.1
11.9
12.7
13.5
U.3
15.2
16.0
16.9
17.9
18.8
19.8
20.8
' 21.7
'/8 in.
' 2.16
2.53
2.94
3.37
3.83
4.33
4.85
5.41
1/2
~n.
2.73
3.21
3.72
... 27
... 86-
6.61
7.25
7.92
5.48
6-:15
6.85
7.59
'8.37
9 :18
10,0
8.63
. 10.9
5.99
9.36
10.1
10.9
11,7
11.9
12.8
13.8
14.8
12.6-
15.8
13.5
. 14.4
15.3
16.3
17.3
18.3
19.2
20.3
21.3
22.3
23,4
24.5
' 25.6
16.8
17.8
18.9
20.0
21.11
22,1
24.0
25.2
26.5
27.7
29.0
30.3
31.5
6-124
3/8 in.
3.61
4.24
4.91
5.64
: 6.42
1.24
8.12
9.05
10.0
11.09
' 12.0
.:'1.3.0
14.1
15.2
16.2
. ~ 17.9
. 19.1
20.3
21.6
22.9
24.1
25.3
26.6-
27.8
28,9
. 30.1
31.2
32.4
33.5
34.7
35.8
S/16 in.
4.89
5.74
6,66
7.63
8:'61
9.64
10.7
11.8
. , 13.3
14,5
15.7
17.0
18,3
19.5
20.1
21,9
23.0
. 24.1
25,3
26.4
21,7
29.1
30.5
32.0
33.5
35.0
36.5
37.9
39.4
40.9
42.4
'~/4
in.
--S.85
6.82
.. 7.84
8.89
9.96
11.4
12.7
13.9
15,2
16.4
"17 .6
18.8
19.9
21.1
22.2 .
23.5
2".9
26.4'
27.9
29.3
30.8
32.3
33.8
35.3
36,8
38,4
40.0
41.6
43.2
.... 9
46.6
TN
5~1300/NAVFAC
P-397/AFR.88-22
Table 6-11 Fundamental Period of Vibratior.., Tt:\' for Monolithic Tempered Class
. .;:,
..:r.,:'''' '.,' (Continued)I, ' ..
"
"
Aapect RAtio 3.00
rund~t.a1 Period of Vibrat.ion
. Gi....
DiiDensiOn.
; (in.)
12'
13"
14'
'15'
,16,
.17.
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
~/~
in.
36'
1"2.02"
,:: 424548
2.37
2.75
3'.16
3:60.
4.06
.~.~ 39
51
54
.57
60
63
66
6'9
72
75
78
81
84
.87
:90
93
96
. "99
102
4.55
5.07
5.,"Z,
6.19
6.80
7.43
8.09
8.78
9.49
10.2
11:0
11.'8
12.6
13.5
14.4
15.3
16.2
,./8 In.
2:4.
2.87,
3:33
3.83
4.35
4.91
5.51
6.14
6.80
7.50
8.23
8.99
9.79
10.6
11:5
12:4
13.3
H.3
13:3
16.3
17 .4
.. 18.5 .
19.7
Thick~.~ !
__ 1J:~
in.
!- . of--
3/~ ~n.
"
'3'.10
3.64
4.22
. 84
5.51
6.22
.4;10
6.98,
9:2.2
7.77
8,61.
10.3
11.4
12.6
13.8
15:0
16.3
17.6
9.50
10.4
11.4
12.4
13:5
14.6
15.7
16.9
18.1
19.3
20.6
21.9
23.2 24.6
6-125
(m-oc')
for Window
.'
, ~(~6
.~!' .;
5'.55'
~:81'
":51
5.58
6.40'
7.28
8.22
7.55'
8.67
9:87
. 11.1
12.4
13.7
15.1
19.0
20.4
21.8
23:'3
24.8
26.9
28.6
30.3
32.0
9'.02 .
10.3
11.6
13.1
.14.5
-16.4
18.1
-19.8
,8:,
20.1
2i.7
23.5
25.3
27.1
28.9
30.8
32.8
34. ,.
36 :5
40 .
6.64
7,.79
16.6
~38.4
1/. In.
21.6
,23.4
"25.3
...
27.2
29.1
31.0
32.9
34.9
36.8
'38.7
40.5
42.3
44.1
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/APR 88-22
Fundamental Period of Vibration. Tn' for Monolithic

(Continued)
Table 6-11
T~mpered
Aapect Ratio' 4.00 .

Fund~nt.l Period'of Vibration ems.c) for Window
~lcltn ~. t, of -:-
Gla
Dimension.
(in. )
12
13
14
1S
16
17
18
1.
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
2.
30
,t.
3/4 in.
5/8
in.
1/,4 in.
S. 7S"
6.87
S.77
6.14
7.82
8.07
9.36
6,'63
8.98
10.7
7.54
10.2
11.S
12.2
12.9
14 ..3
15.9
17 .4
15.3
. 3/8 In;
4',24
4.98
2.09
""2:;T
3.21
2.46
2.97
3.77
2.8S
3.4S
3.96
4 . .51
4.37
S.02
S.H
S.09
6.~4
,_
'5/16 Jin~
1/2 in.
48
S2
S6
60
64
68
3.72
4.20
72
4.71
5.70
76
80
84
88
'2
.6
100
104
.108
5.25
6.35
8.05
10.6
5.82
1.04
8.92
11.8 .
6.41
7.76
9,83
7.04
8.52
10.8
7.69
9.31
11.8
8.37
'.09
12.8
13.'
'112
11.4
12.2
10.1
11.0
11.9
12.8
13.8
13.1
14.3
15.6
16.'
18.3
19.8
21.'3
35.8
18.8
22.9
24.5
26;2
30.7
14.8
32.8
35.0
38.2
116
120
3.27
9.83
10.6
13.1
lS.8
7.22,- .
15.1
16.3
17.5
20~
6-126 ' '
8.S1
9.S.
13.7,
17.0
'18.'
'20.8
1'.1 .
22.8
20.8
24.8
22.8
24.7'
26.6
28.6
26.'
2'.1
31.3
33.S
40.6
cl
Glass
TH 5-l300/NA;VFAC P-397/AFR.8Sc22
Table 6-12
Effective Elastic Static Resistance, reff

.,
A~p.ect
Glus
12
13
3/4
in.
5/8" 1~.
,1/2 in.
3/8 in.
50.3
175,
140.
119.
87.7
13
74.7._
42.8.
14
14
151.~
103.,
36.9
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
15
16
17
18
1.
.20
21
22
23
24
25
26,
27
28
131~
115.
90.1
79.2
102.
70.1
64.5
56.1
49.3 ,
43.7
39.0
35.0
29',
35.3
24.6
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
30
31
,.32.
'.33'
~" 34
35
36
37
38\
39
40.
41
41
42
43
42
43
32
"
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
5'
60
"
45
46
47
48.
49.
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
Glaaa Thickness. t. of
(in; )
-12
"
Effeclive Elaatio Static Resistance (psi) for
Dimenaiona
b
Ratio - 1
- .'
206.
91.6
82.2 .
7.1t.2 :
.,
62.5
. 56.1
50.7
67.3
6L3 .
56.1 '.'
46.0
41.9
38.3
51.5
47.5
35.2
2'2.7
32.4.
21.2
40.7
23.0
27.9
18.6
17.3
37.9
26.2
43.9
33.0
30.9 :
of.
23,'2
.,.
29.0 ."1
27.4
26.0
24.8
23.6.
22.5
21.5
19.4
18.5
17.6.
16.8
16.1
15.4
14.8
14.2
13.6 ,
13.2 .
12.8
12." . ~
12.1 ' ..
11.7
11.4
11. 2
10.9
10.7
10.5
10.4' .
10.3
10.2
21.9.
20.8
18.5
17.5
16.6
15.7
14.9 :
14.2
13.5
13.0
12.6
12.1
11.7 ..
11.4
11.1
10.'8
10.5
10.4
10.3
10.2
9.96
9.56
9.19
8.84
8.52
8.21 .7.92
- 7 :64
7.40
7.10
27. 5.
32.2 .
28.3
25.5
23.1
21.0
' 26.4
15.1 ,
'13.9
24.4
;,n:
.19.1
21.1_
17.5 ..'
15.5
13.8 <
12.6., - .
16 .
28.6
:~~'i
1/4
23. 9,~
18.0
.31.6
5/16 in.
16.3
14.2
12.1
11.6,
10.7
10.3
9.75
11'.7. ;.
11.0
10.4
10.2
9.51
8.76
7.93
.7.20"
6.57
12.9
12.2
8.71
8.01
5.56
11.5
7.39
16.2
11.0
10.5 .
6.83 :
6.33
5.1'
4.87
15.1
10.3
5.89..
4,25
14 ..2
10.2
9.61
5.53
5.22
,. .95 :
4.68 ...
4.42 :
4.18
3.96
3.75
3.57
3.39
3.24
3.09
2.96
2.83
2.70
2.59
2.48
2.38
2.29
2.20
2.11
2.04
1. 96
1.90
1. 83
1.77
1. 72
1. 66
1.61
1.56
1.52
3.98
13.4,.
12.8
12.2
11.7 .r
11.3
10.9
10.5
10.4
10.3
10.1
9.59
9.12
8.69
8.29
7.92
7.57 .
7.24 ...
6.93
6:64
6.37
6.11
5.87
5.67
5.48
5.30
5.14
4.99
4.85
4.70
4.55
.,
6-127
9.00
8.45
7.9.5
7.49
7.06
6.67
6.31
5.98
5.70
5.45
5.22
5.02
4.83
4.6,3
4.43
4.2.5
4.08
3.92
3.77
3.63
3.50
3.37
3.26
3.15
3.05
2.95
'2.85
2.76
2.67
"
6.01
4.55
..
3.74
3.51
3.31
3.14
2.98
2.82
2,.67
2;54
2.42
2.30
2.19
2.09
2.,00
1. 92
1. 84
1.77
1. 70
1.64
1. 58
1.52
1. 47
1.42
1.38
1. 33
1.29
1.25
1.21
1.17
1.14
1.11
P-397/AF~
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC
88-22
"
Table 6-12
Effective Elastic Static Resistance, reff (Continued)

A.pact Ratio
Effective EI tic Static R.ii.tance

of'
Gl... Thickn... '.
Gl ...
Dimenaions
(ln~)
12
13
1.
15
16
17
18
.5
46
47
'8
1/2 in'.
3/8 in.
154.
105.
65,S
37.5
131.
113.
89.5
77.2
55.8
32.0
17.5
27.6
18.15
98.5
67.2
48,1
41.9
20
86.6
59.1
36.8
2'.0
21.1
11.9
8.91
21.25
76.7
68.4
52.4
32.6
19.0
10.8
8.36"
46.7
41.9
37.8
3'.3
31.3
28.6
26.3
29.1
17.2
9.79
26.1
23.6
15.8
8.99
14,6
21.4
13.6
11.6
10.8
8.50
8.19 .
8.07
8.12'
7.86
7.49
6.73
6.11
27.5
28.75
30
31.25
32.5
55.4
50.3
45.8
41.9 ~
38.5 . ~
35.5
24.2
33.75
22.'
20.8
35
28.3
36.25
37.5
26.'
U.S
18.4
24.6
23.1
19.7
18.2
."
17 .0
15.9 .
14.9
14,1
13.4
11.7 .
11.0
10.'
5/16 in.
10.1
9.40
8.89
8.53
8.25
8.14
. 15.2
15.8
14,2
11.0;
5.57
5.09
5.79
4,00
5.37
3.73
3.49
3,28
3.09
4.99
4.65' ! .
".34 :
21. 7
9.91
9.41
42.5
14.9
14.2
8.99
6.15
'3.75
.5
46.25
18.5
17.6
16.8
13.6
12.0
11.5
8.70
8.'5
8.25
6.35
3.43
5.99
3.26
3.10
47.5
48.75
16.1
11.0
10.6
8.16
8.09
10.1
9.72
7.98
7.81
7.66
50
51.25
52.5
53.75
55
56.25
57.5
58.75
60
"5051
61.25
62.5
63.75
52
53
65
66.25
15.5
14.8
".3
13.8
13.'
9.34
9.01
8.78
8.57
8.38
11.8
11.'
11.0
10.6
10.3
9.93
9.60
8.24
8.17
8.11
8.06
7.93
9.29
9.02
8.82
7.80
7.68
7.43
7.06
4.57
4.34
4.14
3.96
6.72
6.'2
3.79
3.63
5.63 1
3.36
3.23
6.14
5.88
5.39
5.18
4.97
4.78
6-128
3.49
3.12
3.01
2.90
2.80
1.41t
6.81
6.27
20.4
19.4
5.66
5.35
5.07
'.81
13.5
9,84
7.79
8.0'
7.82
7.62 .
7.21
41~2S
1/4 in.
20.5
17 .9
17.'
16.'
15.6
'0
. 61.'
32.8
30.'
38.7,5
32
33
3.
35
36
37
38
39
'0
41
.2
'3
5/8 in.
22.5
23.75
25
26.25
19
for
3/. in:
15
16.25
20
21
22
23
2.
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
(pd)
"
...
~.25
4.07
3.84
3.62
2.96
..
2.82
2.69
2.57
2.45 '
2.34
2.25
2.16
2.07
1.98
1.90
1.83
1.76
1.69
. 1. 63 :
1.57
4.68
4.31
2.92.
2.16
2.61
2.47
2.34
2.22
2.12
2.01
1.91
1.82
1.74
1.66
1.59
1.52
1.46
1.40
1. 34
1.29
1.25
1.20
1.16
1.12
..
.'$
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
Effective Elastic Static
Table 6-12
Resista~ce,
",'';:'"
..
':eff (Continued)
,Aspect Ratio 1. 50
Effective Elastic Static ReaistanJ.
Glasa Thicknes., t, of
Gla.a
Dimensions
(in,;')
12
13.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
3/4 in.
. e.
'-.18
19.5
21.
22.5
24
25.5
27
5/8 in . .
123.
83.8
105.
71.4
61.6
90.2
112 in.
52.3
404.5
38.4
33.4
3/8
(psi)
25.5
22.0
1/4 in .
5/16 in.
in.~
29.9
for
...
,.'
16.3
13.9
12.3
11.1
.s
10.1
~.
11.9
10.5
9.43
7.86
69.1
53.6
47.2
61.2
41.8
54.6
37.3
33.4
23.2
49.0
20.8
14.9
13.3
12.3
30
44.2
30.2
18.8
11.4
6.71
.6.23
31.5
40.1-
21.4
17.1
10.6
6.37
5.91
24 ..9
9.86
9:32
5.36
22.8
15.6
14.23
6.16
6.35
30.7
28.3
21.0
13.1
7.99
6.21
19.3
7.56
5.94
39
26.2
17.9
12.4
11.7
7.13
5.51
40.5
24.3
16.6
11.0
6.75
5.06
3.:47'
42
22.6.
15.4
10.4
6.46
4.68
3.21
21,0
19,1
14.4
13.4
9.89
9.42'
6.28
6.33
4.35
4.05
3.78
3.54
2.99
6.18
2.79
2.6l.
3.32
2.33
78.6
28.5.
33
34.5
36
37',5
-43. 5~
36.5
33.4
29.4
26.0
19,2
16.8
45
46.5
48
18.4
12.8
9.16
-11.3
12.2
7.90
6.32
49.5
16.2
7.57
51
52.5
54
15.3
11.6
11.1
14.4
10.6
13:6
13.0
12.5 '.'
12.0
10 :2
9.78
6.11
5.92
5.59
5.24
11:6
8.03
11.2
10.8
7.78
7.52
10.4
7.26
7".02
6.79
6.57
6.45
6.33
55.5
57
58'.5
60
61.5
63
64.5
66
67.5
69 .
70.5
72'
10.1
9.71
9.42
9:25
8.12
9.42
9.21 ,
7.24
,.
6.90\
6.66
6.46
6.32
6.20
6.22
6.33
6.36
6.20
6.05
7;16
6.56,
7.83"
7.24
6.25
6.30,
4.86
.,
4.44
4,06
3.75
2~45
3.12"
2.21
2.93
2.10
2.77
2.00
2.62
2.49
1. 90
1.81
2.38
1.72
2.28
3.98
3.78
3.60
3.43
2.18
2.09
1. 64
1. 57
1. 49
1.42
1. 36
1. 30
1.25
1.20
1. 15
5.91
3.27
3.13
2.99
2.86
6-129
9.31
4.94
4.67
4.42
4.19
5.65
5.39
5:14
,.
2.01
1.92
1. 84
1.77
1. 70
1. 63
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
,,1
Table 6-12
'.
,~.
,~'"

,
'Aspect Ratio - 1.75.
Dimensions
(in. ),
12
21
13
22~75'
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
2.
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
24.5
26.25
28
29.75 ..
31.5
33
34
35
36
37
3.
39
'0
41
..
'2
43
45
33.25
35
36,75
38;5
40,25
.2
43.75
45;5
47:25
.9
50:75
52.5
54.25
,56
,57.75
,59.5
61.25
63
64 . .7 5
66.5
68.25
70
'71.75.
73.5
75.25
77
: 78: 75
~.
"
Effective
Elastic Static- Resistance (psi) for
Glasa Thickness, <. of
Glass
'I'
Ln r-
5/8 in.
109.
74.2
92.6
79.9
63.2
54.5
47.5
69.6
61.2
54.'2
48.3
41.7
37.0
33.0
29.6
26.7
24.2
22.1
43.4'
39.1
35.5
32.4'
29.6
27.2
25.1
23.2
21.5
20.0
18.6
17 .4
16.3
15.3
14.4
13.5
12.8
12.1
11.4
10.8
10.3
9.91
9.52
9.15
8.81
8.50
8.24
20.2
':
18.6
17.1
15.8
14.7
13.6
12.7
11.9
11.1
10 .
9.93
9.46
9.02
8.62
8.30
8.00
7.73
7.47
7.26
6.51
6.29
6.07
5.86
1/2 fn;----- 3/8 in ..
--_.
46.3
39.4
34.0
29.6
...
26.5
22,6
~i
19.5
17 .0
26.0.
14.9
23.1
20.6
18.5
16.7
15.1
13.2
11.7
10.67' .
..
9.11
13.6\
12.6
11.6
10.7
9.97
9.37
8.83
8.38'
8.01
7.66
7.35
7.11
6.27
6.00
5.74
"5.51
5.30
5.10
4.97
4.85
4.75
4.70
4.67
4.64
5/16 "in.
,.
8.96
6.36
7.87
7.43
7.11
6.17
5.82
5.52
5.23 .
5.02
'.86
'.73
4.68
4.64
4.56
4.46
4.36
4.18
4.01
3.86
3.72
3.53
3.36
3.20
3.05
8.91~~
7.32+'
7.85
1.30
6.27
5.79
5.65
5:19
4.89
'"
'.
6':20'
4.70
4,64
...
,..50'
,.. air
. 4.84
,.;
.. ,
8.01.
5.05
.,
1/. ~~.
9.46
8.52
4.70
4.65
4.54
4.41
4.19
3.96
3.77
3.53
3.30
3.09
2.90
2.73
2.58
2.44
2.32
2.21
2.11
2.02
1.93
1.85
1.78
1.71
"1
10.2'
14.4
12.3
10.6
5.38
,'' '
"!' ./
4.02';
3.79'::
3:5i
3.24
3.00
2:78'
2.60
2.'3
2.29
2.16
2.05
1. 94.
1'.85{
1. 76
1.67
1.59
1.51
1.44
1. 38
1.32'
1;26
1.2'0 ~
,.'i..
,
,-
,'-
6-130
.1
TN S-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
Table 6-12
Effective Elastic Static Resistance. reff (Continued)

Aspect Ratio - 2.00
..
."
..
Effective Elastie Static R istance (pili ) tor
Gla..
Gla
Dimenstons
~lckn
t, ot
(in. )
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
0,
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
44
46
48
50
52
54
56
58
60
62
64
66
68
70
3/4 'in.
s/8.in::- t. 1/2 In.
.,3/8 in.
97.6
..83.1
66.6
56.7
U.S
35.4
23.8
20.3
71-.7
48.9
42.6
30.S
26.6
17.5
15.2
.62 .4
54.9
37.5
48.6
33.2
23.4
20.7
43.4
38.9
35.1
31.9
.29.0
29.6
18.5
26.6
16.6
5/16 in.
13.0
6.87
6.29
13.4
7.43
5.81
11.9
10.6
6.72
6.26
4.98
;5.86
5.12
4.19
4.12
3.74
24.0
,14,9
21.7
19.8
;'13.6
1.85
12.4
7.25
4.40
3.59
3.48
3.42
26.6
18.1
11.3
6.73
16.6
15.3
1'1.2
13.2
12.2
10.4
6.39
6.08
5.79
5.15
3.92
3.75
17.9
4.54
9.49
8.56
24.4
22.5
19.3
9.05
7.81
11,0
9.52
8.31
,. .11
20.6
1/4 ,In .
16.7
15.6
10.7
14.6
9.98
13.1
12.9
12.2
11. S
9.36
8.80
72
10.8
74
76
78
80
82
84
10.3
9.73
9.24
8.78
8.37
8.03
7.53
7.18
"6.86
6.62
6.42
6.23
6.05
11.4
8.31
7.91
9.56
8.84
8.23
7.13
4.85
4.58
7.27
6.86
6.57
.6.32
6.08
4.36
,4.15
"3.99
3.86
3.74
5.87
5.66
5.07
.4.84
4.64
4.46
4:30
4.14
4.02
6-131
3.64
3.56
3.49
3.45
3.41
3;36
3.30
3.25
3.93
3.33
3.24
3.62
3.04
3.51
3.45
3.40
2.81
2.61
3:32
2.42
3.25
3.10
2.21'
2.14
2.02
.2.90
1.91
2.12
2,56
2.41
2.28
2.17
2.06
1.97
1. 88
1. 80
1.61
1.72
1. 63
1.56
1. 48
1. 41
1. 34
1.28
P~397/AFR
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC
88-22
"
Table 6-12
"
,';

Aspect Ratio - 3.00
GlasB
Effective Elasiic'Static Resistance

Glas's Thickn'ea., t' of
DimeI:lSions
(in. )
12
13
14
15
1.
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
2.
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
3.
'39
42
45
48
51
54
57
.0
.3
"
3/4 in.
81.1
69.1
59.'
51. 9
45.'
5/8 in.'
.55 -,4
47 ..2
olI0.7
19.4
40:4
'27.6
3'.1
24.'
22.1
17.2
:'15.3
13.8
19.9
"12.4
32.4
29.2
26,S
18.1
211. 1
"16,5
22.1
15.1
72
20.3
13.8
18.7
17.3,
".0
14.9
13.9
13.0
12.2
11.4
10.7
10.1
12.8
11.8
10.9
10.2
9.48
8.86
8.30
7.79
7.32
'.90
102
25.4
22:1
35.4
96
99
34" 5
29.4
31.2
.9
' 75
78
81
84
87
90
93
1/2 in.
11,3 .
10.3
9.40
8.63
7.9S
:7.3S
".82
'.34
3/8 in.
1/4 in.
---
10.8
9.18
14.5
12.7
,11.1
9.8' '
7.92
'.90
5.57
6.06
4.42
3.98
3.61
8.79
1.89
1.12
6.46
5.88
5.4'1
5.0'
4.71"
4 . 0
s.n
5."
5.2.
4.98
4.72
4.48
3.11
2.93
2.78
2,'4
6-132
5/1. in.
"19.8
16.9
'4.13
3.88
3.65
(ps~~ for
3.44
.,
5.43
4.92
7.53
6.41
4.94
4.48
4.10
3.77
3.48
3.08
'.2.84
2.64
2.45
2."
2.49,
'2.34
2.18
2.04
'1.91
.1.83
1.7.
1.70
1.63
1.92
'1.82
1.74
1."
1.58
1.51
1.47
1.43
1.41
1.39
3.15
2.86
2.25
2,08
.' "
r-;
.,
.,
..
.,'
'/
"
t ,
"
"
',I .":"
Tabl~:6-l2
R~sistance.
Effective ElasticStatic
.~
Aspect ~a~i~ - ~.OO
,. ,
reff (Continued)
,.
','
Glass
Dimensions
r , '( if!.. )
."
,
,.
.~
12
13
48;
52
56
.60
64
14
15
16 .
17
18
., ;68
72
. 76'
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
80
84
BB
92
96
100
104
108
112
116
120
'I.
"
3/4
---.
---,'
75 , 7
51.7
64",5
44 .0
55,6
48,5
38,0
33,1
42.6
37.7
33.1
25,8,
23.0
30',2
27,3 .
.2"..1
20,6
18,9
17,5
16,1
15,0
13,9
13,0
12,1
14 .3
<::~
14.1,
12.9
11,9
11,0
10,2
9,49
8,85
8,27
"
10.5
9.59
8,77.
-8.05
7,42
6,86
6,36
5,92
5,52
5,15
.1.
7.02
8;57
5.99
7.. 39
6.43
5.16
4:52
J..
I,
<':
4,63
4,28
3,97'
; 3.70..
13,.'
;.
3,22
3,02
".: ~
5.66
3.99'
5.01
3.56
4.49
4.05
3.67 .
3.19
2.87
3.34
"2.54
2.30
'3.06
2.10
2.81
2.52
j 2,32' ,
2,15
,2,00.
1:88
1. 76
1,66
1. 94
1. 79
.,
"
.c ~
,
., '
6-133"
~,.~
1. 67
1,56
1.46
1,38
1,30
1.23
..
,,'J'f
, ..
. e
"
e' ..r
10.1
15.7
7.36
6.65
6.03
5.49
5.03
12.9
Ill. 6'
in.
1/4'" in:
18.5
10;"4
.9.20
8.20,
16.1
'5/16
'in.
13.6
11. 8
~~J. '~"
'20.6
15.4
"
27~5
23.7
18.'6:
16",9
-,
.; ;22-,5
3/B
in;
32,2
"
29,1
I!": .:
.i /2
l
5/if in.
in,
:! ':
~I
~J.
Effective Eiasti~ Static Resistance " (pst> for

Glasa Thickness, t, of ,--
. t , '. '
~ 1~~~
TM 5-l300/NAVFAC
P-397/AFR.88~2
UNDERGROUND STRUCTURES
6-33. Introduction
Underground structures are not usually used for production and handling of
explosives since access for both personnel and explosives is more difficult
than for an aboveground structure. However, an explosion may result in severe
hazards from which an aboveground structure can not provide adequate protection and a buried structure will be required. An example might be a manned
control building at a test site which must be located very close to a highhazard operation involving a relatively large quantity of explosives.
There is limited test data available to predict the pressures acting on an
underground structure. What test data that is available was developed for use
in the design of protective structures to resist the effects of an attack with
conventional weapons. The results of this data and the design procedures
developed from it are given in the technical'manual, "Fundamentals of Protective Design for Conventional Weapons," TM 58551. The data presented may be
expanded to include the design of structures subjected to accidental explosions. The pertinent sections
are briefly .summarized
.
. ':-..... .below.
,
.-;
A typical underground structure used to resist conventional weapons attack is'

shown in Figure 6;.)3. The burste, slab pie,"~nts' a weapon 'from penetrating
through the soil and detonating adjacent to the structure. A bur's cer slab' is
not mandatory, but if it is not used the structure will have ,to be, buried much
deeper. The burster slab must extend far'enough beyond the edge of the
building to form at least a 45 degree angle with the bottom edge of the '
building. It may have to be extended further, though, if it is possible' for a
bomb to penetrate at a very shallow angle, travel beneath th 7 burster slab' and
detonate adjacent to the "structure .(see F;gure 6-53). Sand is used as
backfill because materials with high volume.of air,fi1led voids and low
relative densities are poo~ transmitters of ground shock. In addition, sand
resists penetration better than soil.
6-34, Design Loads for Underground Structures
6- 34.1. General
The pressure-time relationships for roof panels and exterior walls are
determined separately. For the roof panel, an overhead burst produces the
most critical loading while for an exterior wall a sideburst is critical. A
general description of the procedure for determining the peak pressures and
their durations is given below. For a more detailed description,. including
the required equations, see TM 5-855-1.
The magnitUde of the ground shock is affected by:
1.
The size of the explosive charge and its distance from the structure;
2.
The mechanical properties of the soil, rock, and/or concrete

between the detonation point and the structure; and
3.
The depth of penetration at the time of detonation.

6-134
'I
,e
TH'5-i300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

The ~tres~es and ground m~tjo~s'are gr~atly:enh~nc~d'as'the deptfi,of the
explosion
increases.
To
account, .for \ this effect -a coupling
factor
is used:
<"
."
.,
. -'
.
-,."
.
The,coupl~ng ,factor i~,defined as the ratio of ~he,grou~d shock magnitude from
a near' surface' burs tl to that of a,fu'il y buried burst. A single coupling
factor applies to"all ground shock p;'ramete~s and depends on the dep th of the
~
expio'sion' and whether de"tonation occurs in 'soil, Jconcrete or air.'

, "
,
','
6-34.2: Roof Loads
A typical roof load (shown in Figure 6-54) consists of a free-field pressure

Po and a reflected pressure Pro The r~flected pressure oc~~rs 'whed the free-field pressure impinges on the roof panel and' is instantly increased to a
higher pressure. The amount of increase is a func~iori of the pressure 'in the
free-field wave and the angle formed between the rigid surface and the plane
of the pres~ure' fro~t. However, TM 5-855-1 "suggests that an average reflection' factor' of L 5 is reasonable.
"
:
" '
The. p re ssure s on the roof 0' 'ari'u~derground~structure~ are"bot uniform across
the 'pane L, 'especially if the' i1e'pth: of' the explosion' is sh;;llow ... However , in
order' to use a sirigle-degfee'~of-freedom 'analysis", a uniform Lo ad is required
an,:i"h'ence an average uriiform pressure 'must be de t e rmi.ne d . TM '5- 855 -1 presents'
figures that give,the ratio peak pressure; at the center of a roof panel to
the average pres sure across chevent t re panel. This ratio' is a: function of the
support conditions and aspect ratio of the panel and 'the height of the burst
above tl)e roof.
.,
For 'the, inos,t severe roof load the expl.os Lve is po's Lt.i.oned directly over the
center of the panel. The 'averag~ free:fleld and~average reflected pressures'
are c;'ibulatedas described above.' The &iration of the pressure pulse als'o '
varie~ across th~ roof;panel ahd a' fictitfous averag~ duration to must be~ .
determined: TM 5~855ct recommends calculating the "duration of the peak free-field pressure pul.se at 'a 'point located one quarter of the way' along the short
span and at the center of the long span, This duration is then used as tne
average duration of the entire panel. The peak free-field pressure and
impuls~are calculated using equations given in TM 5:855-1.
The duration is
found by' as'sumfng a triangular pressur'e"time r e I'a t Lorish i.p ," The duration of
the 'average reflected pre ssure t r is 'given ih TM '5-855-1 as a function of,
eirher:the thickness of the structural element or the distance to the nearest
free edge '0'[ the structure. Tlie smaller cif"tlie two' numbers should'be used in
anal~sis.
!
. ' ;'i
.~.
6-34':3, Wall: Loads
"
The design loads on an exterior wall are determined using the procedures
described in Section 6-34.2 for roof loads. However, in addition to the
pressure wave traveling directly from "the explosion, the wall may be subject
to ""pressure wave' reflected' off the 'ground surface or burster, slab and/or"a
pressure' wave,r'eflected'offl 1,a lower rock-Layer 'or 'water table.
.: ~
...,.~
The parameters of'each wave (average reflected pressure, average free-field

pres sur e., durations and -t Lme .of arrival~)Iare determined separately using
pr ocedure s very similar to those de'sc r-LbediLn Section' 6-34.2.. The total
pres sur-e- t Ime history is 'equal, to the superposition of the three' waves as
shown in Figure '6-55.'-" The' 'superposition 'results in a very complicated load
shape. The response charts ,of Chapter 3 are 'not, applicable for such a shape,
6-135
therefore the, load must be idealized. The, actual load is transformed into a
triangular load having the same total impulse (area under the' actual load
curve equal to the sum of the areas of the, direct 'and reflected waves)., The
maximum pressure of the idealil,iid Load is equal to the ~axiinum pres~ure,' of the'
actual load neglecting the short reflected peaks. The duration is then
established as a func t Loniof the total impulse and maximum pressure (Figure, 6 7
55). For an exact solution, the actual load curve is used ,in a single'
degree-of-freedom computer program analysis or numerical analysis as, given in
Section 3-19.2.
6-35. 'Structural D~sign
6-35.'1.
Wall and Roof Slabs
J
. "
~.
'I,
The struct~ral design' of underground sEructures is very similar to the design

of aboveground structures as described in Chapter 4. , The effect of the' soil
is to modify the response of the structural compon~nts. The dead load of the
soil,reduces the ,resistance, available to resist blast. At the same time a
portion of the soil acts with the structural elements to increase the natural
period of ,vibration. ,'in the case of a wall, i t is' ass~ed ,that ,the ma~s !'If, .~'
two" (2) "feet of, soil acts with the mass of the wall. Whereas for a roof, t.ha . .
entire'mass of the soil' supported
the' roof", or a depth of soil 'eq~ai,to,
quarter of the roof span (shoFt span' for a two-,way'panel), whicheve.r i~,
,',
smaller, . is. added to the mass,of
the
roof.
'
'
.
;;pe
by
...
'
The dynamic response of underground structures must obviously be limited to

comparatively small deformations to prevent collapse of the structure due to
earth loads. A protective ~tructure,subje~ted to ~onventional weapons att~ck
should be designed for a duc tLl.Lt.y ratio of 5.0, :a/ recommended by TM 5~-8,55:i.
This ratio may be increased, to 10 if special provisions are taken. A maximum
deflection ~orresp~':':ciing to' '~" s;'pport rotatio~ of one (1)' degree or 'a ductility, ratio of 10.0 is permitted 'f~r 'underground structures subjected,toaccidental explosions.
, ,
Spalling is the ejection of material from the back face of, a slab or beam. It
results from high-intensity, close-in explosions. ,.Fr~gment shields or backing
plates, as shown in Figure 6-56, are of some value in protecting ,personnel and
equipment. These steel plates must. be, securely' anchored to the inside face of
the concrete member. Te s t s have sh~~ th":t the shock of a deep penetr at Lng ,:',
detonation to be enough to cause inadequate welds to fail over a large area,
adding the whole steel plate to the concrete spall. A strongly attached plate
adds about 10 percent to the perforation resistance of a concrete.~lab .. For a
further discussion of backing plates, see Chapter 4,
"
6-35.2. Burster Slab
For protective structures, a burster slab, prevents a weapon from, penetrating through the soil and detonating adjacent .to the structure., Its, thickness and
length may have to be determined by a trial and error procedure in order'to
limit pressures on the structure to a given -vaLue .
However-, 'the minimum
dimensions ,are shown in Figure 6,-53. The minimum ,reinforcement is 0.1 percent
in each face, in each direction or a total of 0.4 pe rcenr; .Ln the design-of
structures subject to accidental exp10s~ons, the ground floor slab of the
donor building serves a purpose similar to that of a burster slab. The floor, '..
slab helps tO,prevent fr",gment, penetration and to attenuate the load.
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
6-36. Structure Motions

6-36.1. Shock Spectra
TM 5-855-1 gives equations for acceleration, velocity and displacements for
underground structures. These simplified methods take into account the
attenuation' of the pressure wave 'as. it transverses the structure.
For a
sideburst, the vertical acceieration, velocity and displacements are 20

percent of the horiz~ntal valu~s. The horizontal motions are'~niform over the
entire floor while vertical motion~'at the leading edge are twice those at
~;'
m.i.dsp an .
Once the peak in-structure acceleration, velocity and displacements have been
determined an in-structure shock spectra can be d~veloped using the principles
of Chapter 2 of this manual.
6-36,2. Shock Isolation Systems'
Chapter 1 presents the upper limits of the shock environment that personnel
and equipment can tolerate. If. the:shock environment exceeds. human tolerances
and/or equipment "fragility le;'els'), thEm "shock, isolation -sys tems are required
to..'p'fotect personnel and sensitive equipment. Using cthe shock'spectra
developed as described above. shock ~s'olation systems' are designed as outlined
in',_Sections 6-43 through 6-49.,
,"
-,
'
'I
~
-, -, , ,
6-137
.-, -.
~,,~
"t.>
.,.'
<0
'
BURSTER SLAB
: :!~
~
~
Of
...
. .
v,
. .it
'
"
" " . ' : to.
. '. ':,,::/::
:'
.". :" .', :.~',
...
- ".
,"
"
...
DIREC.T WAVE FOR :.:::: '.i.:<:-.

ROOF LOADING
" .. :
.: . AJ
/7
'.::.'.:'::"'//
, :i
-
~
'<D
".,. ::E
. 1-i
"10
'10
.'..
:-.: .:<>//
. .... 'X//
.'
'.
. ~ :::",
'"
.'
,Z
,~
SAND FILL
'",
....
w
....
CD
~-.
'.~ ..
(MIN.1
WATER TABLE OR.

ROCK LAYER
.,
""
,..:
.,
c-
"
.'
:.:
.. .I.
Figure 6-53
or
..-
Geometr-y.of a buried structure

"
'.
t,o
TIME (ms),
-
.....
".p. .
Figure 6-54
Typical roof panel load
6-139
, 'Tn''-):
':.Jfi_ -1;"tT~:t:ot~"V'T,r-.'.""r~~:"1TI"
IT'"
1'.1 r'I"".':''':'~}'''' ,_., 'Tt,M.....' "
I-Ii~.
" , ._~"
;'/.'
..',' ' .:.~ '>
."
TOTAL PRESSURE - TIME

LOAD ON WALL.
_. EQUIVALENT
TRIANGULAR
;
.
LOAD
(Pra_v.<1~d
DIRECT
WAVE
PRESSURE WAVE REFLECTED

FROM THE SURFACE.
.,
0-
'",
.....
.l:0
-w
0-
(lbavg1d
."-
a:
en
en
w
a:
a..
PRESSURE WAVE REFLECTED

FROM LAYER .
(Pravg)s
.:J
'-'
(f'oavgls
(IPoavgl,
Ird
Irs
..!.U
IrM
t~e .1
TIME (ms)
Figure 6-55 Contribution of three pressure waves on a wall
I .. .
"
"
,~
J f!
. ,.
;~
"
. ,
'
"
'
..
'G'
.. -
1'1,
.'
..
-,
'
... ...
e ,
'
. .. .,
, 4:..'
SCAB PLATE
'.
'G
'
;J
SHEAR STUDS
..
..,
"
'.'
..
RETENTION OF SCAB MATERIAL
"
Figure 6-56
6-141
Spall plate
.-
'f.
'
EARTH-COVERED ARCH-TYPE MAGAZINES

6-37. General
Certain types of earth-covered concrete-arch and steel-arch magazines have
been approved and standardized for use by the Department of Defense Explosives
Safety Board. These magazines provide definite advantages over other types of
magazines.
1.
Among these advantages are':
Less real estate'per magazine 1s
req~iredbecause
of the decreased
intermagazine separations permitted when approved magazines are used.
2. An almost infinite number of storage situations exists because

magazines can be designed to any length.
3.
Because of the reduced separation distances, less roads, fences,
utilities, etc. I are required.
Unlike the other structures discussed elsewhere in this manual, an earthcovered magazine is not designed to resist the damaging effects of its
exploding contents. It is accepted that the magazine will be demolished if an
internal explosion occurs. During such an incident, the inside of a largespan arch might experience initial blast pressures considerably in excess of
10,000 psi. Less'than 100 psi could lift the arch completely out of the
ground; therefore, the major portion of the protection is provided by the
receiver magazines rather than the donor magazine.
Earth-covered magazines are utilized primarily to prevent propagation of
explosion. These structures may also be used for operating buildings and can
provide personnel protection.
In such cases;" separation distances greater
than those required to prevent propagation ,of explosions will'be necessary.

In' addition, a specfal evaluation of the' structure is requir~d. This evaluation must include the leakage of blast pressures into the protected area, the
strength and attachment of easily damaged or lightly supported accessories
which may become hazardous debris, the transmission of shock to personnel
through the walls or floors, and overall movement of the magazines.
6-38. Description of Earth-Covered Arch-Type Magazines
A typical earth-covered arch-type magazine used for storing explosives has the
following features:
1.
A semicircular or oval arch constructed of reinforced concrete or
corrugated steel used to form roof and sides.
2.
A reinforced concrete floor slab, sloped for drainage.
3.
A reinforced concrete rear wall.
4.
A reinforced concrete headwall that extends at least 2-1/2 feet
above the crown of the arch.
5.
Reinforced concrete wingwalls on either side of the headwall.
wingwalls may slope to the ground or may adjoin wingwalls from adjacent
6-142
The
5-l300/~AVFAC
TM
P-397/AFR 88-22
magazines. The wingwalls m/!-y beeither. monolithic or separated by expansion

joints from the headwall.
6..
Heavy steel doors in the headwall (either manuallyoperated and/or
motorized)" :
.-
7.
An optional gravity ventilation system.
8.
Earth cover over the top, sides and rear of the structure.
This
. cover must be at least 2 feet thick at the crown of the arch. The earth above.
the structure (within the spring line of each arch and between the head and
rear,walls) is sloped for drainage while .beyond the outline of the structure
the earth is sloped.2 horizontal to 1 vertical.
9.
.,
Its own built-in lightning protection and grounding systems .

.,
Atypical earth-covered.steel arch magazine is illustrated in Figure 6-51 .

. I.
6-39 .. Separation Distances.of Standard Magazines"

. -I
"',
Numerous full scale tests of standard magazines.have been performed over a

period of several years. As a result magazine separation formulae have been
established, which
will~prevent
magazine-to-magazine propagation of exp Lo-
sions . . All possible .right angle arrangements have been'considered, i.e.,

side- to-side, rear to ":' rear ,tfront- to-rear:,! etc.
.The standard, magazines, which.
are at least equivalent in strength to those. tested, are listed in the 000
Standard, "000 Ammunition and Explosives Safety Standards, 6055.:9-STD." The
required separationdis~ances,.as a function of~the quantity of explosives
stored in the structure are also given in' the DoD Standard. A possible
magazine arrangement is shown in Figure 6-58.
6-40. Design
",
Protection of magazines adjacent to a donor magazine is accomplisheq by

combining thefollowing. fact~rs:
1. The intensity of the pressure front moving from the donor
magazine to receiver magazines diminishes rapidly as the distance traveled
increases.
..
"'
.2. The earth cove rtove r-.andraround the'donor magazine provides
some confinement ~ndtends.to'directionalizethe explosive force both upward

and outward. from the:door .end:of the magazine.
3. The earth around and over r ece tve r-magaaines resists fragment
penetrations and provides mass to the arch to resist the bl'ast pressures.
4. The arch of receiver magazines is capable of resisting blast

loads considerably in excess of the dead loads normally imposed on it .
. Design of presently used magazines is essentially conventional except for two
features, which are doors and arch. The doors are designed to withstand the
dynamic forces from an explosion in a nearby magazine if the siting is in
accordance with Figure 6-58. However, they provide almost no resistance to
the effects of an explosion within the magazine. Also, the capacity of the
TM 5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR'SS-22
doors to resist elastic rebound and,negative phase pressures may be less than
their capacity to resist positive phase pressures. Therefore, where personnel
are concerned, all doors should be analyzed 'to determine their ultimate
capacity to resist all the loadings involved. The arches used for the
standard earth-covered magazines are the same as those used in the test
structures to establish the required separation distances. These arches have
not been dynamically designed, for the blast loads and' may be in excess of that
required.
6-41. Construction
"
"
" ,
Effectiveness of earth'covered magazines is largely determined by the quality

of construction. A few of the construction details that, could be sources for
problems in this type of structure are discussed below.
Moisture proofing of any earth-covered structure is usually difficult. This
difficulty is increased with'a steel-arch structure because of the many lineal
feet of joints available for introducing moisture. For example, a large 26by SO-foot magazine contains approximately 1,050 ,feet of edges, Asealant
tape must be used that will not deteriorate or excessively deform under 'any
an~icipated environmental or structural condition:
".", -
.:
-,
Earthfill material s'houLd be clean', cohesive, and free from large stones', A
minimum earth cover of two feet must be maintained.
Surface preparation of
the fill is usually required to prevent erosion'of the,2-foot'cover;
,.
Restricting granular size of material'reduces,throw9ut'.of.~ragmentsin case of'
an accidental explosion and creates a'more uniform energy absorbent over the'0'
top of the magazine,
,
,"
Lightning protection is rather easily obtained in a steel-arch structure,

sections of steel-arch plate must be interconnected so that they become
All
electrically continuous.
In a concretearch magazine, the reinforcing steel
must be interconnected.
In effect, a ."cage" .Ls created about the magazine
contents, Probably the most critical point for lightning protection is the
optional ventilator stack which projects above the.surrounding earth cover,
.,; l
6-42. Non-Standard Magazines
,',
~l'
.,
Non-standard earth-covered magazines, that is magazines not listed in 000

Standard 6055.9-STO may also be used. for 'explosive storage. However, if a
"nonvs t.anda rd" earth-covered magaz-ine o'r an aboveground magazine is used the'-'
separation distances must be increased.' The OoO:Standard 6055,9-STO includes
the increased separation distances, as well. as other criteria, for non standard" earth-covered and aboveground magazines.
II
'
"
6-I44
12"
,,,"
VARIABLE
~k~F.
r:
CONCRETE
W-.c; 'MAlL
'~
'-
RE~i
--
CONCRETE
REAA WAi,.L
\.
-;0.
STEEL .00<-,
.. -
.'"
. .. ....REINF. CONCRETE
..
"
HEAOWAU..
fOElNF'
"""CRETE
WING WAlL
. PLAN
AIR TERMINAL
VENTI LATOR
.,
2'~O" MIN.
EARTH FILL
SLOPE EARTH FILL
STEEL~
. CoNcRETE
:~
SLAB
SLOPE
.. -'r-
SECTION
EAA;TH FILL
COftRUGATEO
STfEL AR04
_ :_.: .
Figure 6-57
f"~,
c .
Typical earth-covered steel-arch magazine
1----. 1
1----"
rr---
II
II
I- ___ ...JJ__
II
U
..._-,_..11
"
on
"
1----11-
1----.1' .
I-----U
f---- ...JJ
II
il
II
----n
----11
.
I'
..
II
LL____
II
I
D'2.0 Wl/ .
rr----
----I
II
___ ...JJ
I.
rr---
I
.
D. 1.25 WI!,
HEADWALL
-----
REAR WALL
EDGE OF EARTH COVER
-----
EDGE OF ARCH .
CHARGE WEIGHT
Figure 6-58
Ninimum separation distances 'of standard magazines

6-146
~8-22
BLAST VALVES
6-43. General
.~,
6-43.1. Applications
A prime concerp of blast resistant structures is to ,restrict the flow of high
pressures into or out of a s cruc ture. For donor structures pres sur ea.Ye Leased
may have t~ be restricted in order to limit pressures acting ,on adjacent
structures to .coLerabl e levels. ,Also, pressures leaking into acceptor
structures m;'st be ,limited' to' p~event pressure buildup beyond acceptable,
leveis.' In' either case openings may have to be completely sealed to prevent
the diffusion of' ccncemtnent;s .
.'
The simplest, most economical way of limiting leakage pressure into or out of
a protective structure is to restrict the numberand size of air intake and
exhaust openings. In a donor structure the leakage pressures may be further
reduced by venting them through a stack. The stack increases the distance
from the point of release of the pressure to ~he accepto~ struc~ure thereby
attenuating the blast loading. Methods for predicting the pressures leaking
out of' a building and 'the pressure buildup within a building are discussed in
Chapter 2. If the leakage pressure can not be reduced to acceptable levels or
if contaminants are released during an explosion, thE openings must be sealed
with either blast valves or other protective closure device. ,
Blast valves may be either remote-actuated (closed mechanically by remote
sensors) or, blast-actuated (c Los ed by the pressure wave itself).. Both types
can be non-latching or latching. A non-latching valve will open under
negative pr~ssures." A latching valve is one that can only be reopened
manually. In addition, a blast-actuated valve can be double-acting. , A
double-acting valve will seal against the positive blast pressure, move in the
opposite direction to seal against negative pressures and then reopen when
pressures return to normal.
6-43.2. Remote-Actuated valves

Remote-actuated val~es are dependent on extern~l sensing devices which trigger
the closure mechanism and close the, valve before arrival of the blast wave.
Actuating devices have been developed that are sensitive to the blast pressure
of an explosion and react electrically to trigger protective closure systems.
Other actuating devices sensitive to flash and thermal radiation are also
available .. The pressure sensing device is placed on a circumference at a
predetermined radius from the valve (closer to ground zero) in order to
compensate for time delays of electrical and mecha~ical control equipment and
to permit valve closure before the blast arrives. Thermal sensors are
designed to det~ct the characteristic pulse emitted by an explosion to prevent
actuation by other sources such as lightning, fires, etc., wh1chmay occur
with flash sensors. Remote-actuated valves present problems of protection
against multibursts and button-up time for combustion-type equipment installed
within the structure. In addition to problems of hardenability of the exposed
sensor and suitability for multiburst operation, i t is often necessary for
sensors to initiate reopening of the valves as soon as dangerous pressures
have subsided. In general, remote-actuated valves-can not ,close fast enough
to be effective during an H. E. explosion.
6-147
6-43.3. Blast-Actuated Valves

Self-acting blast-actuated valves, which close under the action of the blast'
pressure, overcome some of the disadvantages described above and present other
factors to be considered. Since the valves are closed by pressure, they are
not dependent upon sensing devices for operation. They can be automatically
reopened after passage of the positive phase or latched closed during the
negative phase if this is required. Double-acting valves automatically seal
the opening during the negative phase.-
Since blast-actuated valves'are closed
by the blast,' there is an inherent leakage problem to be considered due to the

finite closing' time. Although this is in the order of milliseconds for most
valves, sufficient'flow to cause damage may pass the port openings for certain
valve designs and pressure levels. Effectiveness of closing at both' high- and
low-pressure ranges must be checked. The amount of blast entering depends on
the closing time of the valve which, in turn, depends on the mass of the
moving parts, disk'diameter, and the distribution of pressures on both faces
of the disk.
Ideally, a blast~'actuated valve should possess the folloWing characteristics:
instantaneous closure or no leakage beyond the valve during and after closure,
no rebound of moving parts, equal efficiency at all pressures below the design
pressure, operational and structural reliability, minimum of moving parts,
low-pressure drop through the valve at normal ventilation or combustion air
flows, multiple detonation capability, durability, and easy maintenance.
Although instantaneous closure is not physically possible, the closing time
can be reduced sufficiently to reduce the leakage to insignificant values.
This may be accomplished by increasing the activating pressure-force-to-- '
moving-mass ratio, decreasing the length of travel, permitting no deceleration
during closure; and other methods.
6-43.4. Plenums
Blast valves, especially blast-actuated valves, will allow some pressure
leakage. While the leakage pressure may not significantly increase the
ambient pressure at some distance from the valve, there might be a "jetting
effect" causing very high pressures in the immediate vicinity. A plenum may
be used to protect against these high pressures. Two examples of plenUms are,
a plenum chamber and a plenum constructed of hardened duct work. A plenum
chamber is a room where pressures attenuate by expansion. A hardened duct
work plenum reduces the'pressures by increasing the distance traveled (similar
to the stack discussed in Section 6-43.1). For a donor structure, a plenum
would only be necessary if contaminants are released during an explosion and
the air must be filtered beforebeing,vented to the exterior. In that case, a
plenum would be used to lower the pressures and, prevent damage to the filters.
A plenum in an 'acceptor structure would be used to prevent high leakage
pressures from directly entering the building's air duct system and possibly
causing local failure of the system.
Plenum'chambers should be designed to avoid a buildUp of interior pressure
which would impede closIng of the valve. The ratio of the area of the chamber
cross section to that of the valve outlet should be preferably greater than
4:1 so as to'diffuse leakage flow as quickly as possibYe.' A chamber which has
the prescribed necessary volume but has little change in area would act like a
6-148

tunnel wherein entering pressures would encounter little, attenuation in the
length provided.
6-43.5. Fragment Protection
To ensure ,that blast valves function properly', they must be protected from
fragments ,that may pe~forate.the valves or j~ them in an open position .. One
of several methods of accomplishing the required protection is by' offsetting
the opening from the blast valve by means of a blast-resistant duct or tunnel
which would prevent the propagation of fragments to the blast valve. Another
method is to enclose ~he blast valve in a concrete chimney. Other methods
include using a debris pit or steel shields or debris cover attached directly
to the blast valves.
6-44. TyPes of Blast Valves
6-44.1. General
~.
Various types of blast valves have been developed and many of them are
available commercially from suppliers both here and overseas (see Table 6-13).
For present designs, air flow rates from about 300 cfm to 35.060 cfm can be
obtained. Some valve designs are available in more than one size and can be
either blast or remote-actuated. The pressure loss across the valve at the
rated air flow is, in most cases, less than one inch of water.
The maximum incident pressure capability of available valves is above 50 psi
and generally at least 100 psi. For ~helter purposes, these valves may be
overdesigned since the protection level for many shelters will be less than 50
psi. Except for cost factors, using a 100-psi valve for a 10-psi shelter
design should not necessarily present technical problems since a valve must
operate at all pressures below the maximum design level.
The best type of actuation (blast or remote) depends partly on the.design
pressure as previously discussed with regard to reaction time and operational
considerations. For long arrival times (low pressure). a remote-actuated
device can close the valve before the blast arrival whereas leakage may occur
for a blast-actuated valve. At a high pressure (short arrival time) ,the
closing time for the remote-actuated valve may be. longer than the arrival
time.
6-44.2. Blast Shield
~.
If it can be assumed that the ventilation system can be closed off during a
hazardous operation and kept closed until there is no danger of further blast"
a relatively simple structural closure (blast shield) , such as a steel plate'
can be utilized. ,This type of closure is especially useful for,an exterior
opening which would only be opened periodically, such as maintenance facilities where the release of toxic fumes from within the structure is required.
6-44.3. Sand Filter,
.1
In shelters where normal operational air requirements are small, sand filters
are useful in the attenuation of leakage pressures. With this type of filter
the pressures continue to increase throughout the positive phase. Thus this
6-149
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

filter is good only for loads with a relatively short duration.
300-cfm sand filter is shown in Figure 6-59.
~ketch
of a
6-44.4. Blast Resistant Louvers

The blast resistant louver shown in Figure 6-60 is blast actuated and has a
rated flow of 600 cfm at less than'l inch water (gage) pressure drop. If a
larger volume of air is required the louvers can be set into a frame and used
in series (see Figure 6-61). Louvers can be used in acceptor structures'

subject up to 50 psi. A major drawback of 'the louvers is that there'may be as
much as 40:percent leakage across the valve, especially at lower pressures.
6-44.5. Poppet Valves
6-44.5.1. Applications
A poppet valve has many advantages. It has f~w moving. parts which might need
repair. It can be blast or remote-actuated, latching, non-latching, or
double-acting and is available in sizes from 600 to 5.000 cfm. A blastactuated poppet valve has a very fast closing time. approximately 20 milliseconds, making it the only valve that reacts fast enough to be used in a
containment c e l l . '
.
A typical blast-actuated poppet valve is shown in Figure 6-62:' The valve'
consists of an actuating plate, a valve seat, a backing plate that supports
the actuating plate. and a spring which holds the valve open during normal
operations. The normal air flow is around the actuating plate. A blast load
will compress'the spring and move the actuating plate against the valve seat
thereby sealing the opening. As the blast pressure moves the actuating plate,
some pressure will flow around the plate while it is closing.
The leakage pressures can be completely prevented by using a valve similar to
the one schematically illustrated in Figure 6-63. In this valve the normal
air flow is around the actuating plate through a length of duct. When the
valve is subjected to a blast load, the pressure starts moving the actuating
plate while at the same time flowing through the duct. The length of the duct
must be long enough to ensure that the time it takes the blast pressures to
flow through the duct (delay path) will be longer than the time required for
the actuating plate to seal the valve. As an alternate to the long'duct. an
expansion chamber may be used to delay the blast.
6-44.5.2
Recommended Specification for Poppet Valves
Presented below is an example specification for the design, testing and

construction of a poppet valve,'but it may be adapted for other types of blast
valves. This example specification is presented using the Construction
Specification Institute (CSI) format'and shall contain as a minimum the
following:
1.
APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS: Except as otherwise stated herein all
materials and work furnished in accordance with this specification shall
comply with the following codes and standards.'
1.1
Federal Specification (Fed. Spec.)
6-150
TM 5-l300/NAVFAC P-39!/AFR 88-22
Paint, Alkyd Resin; Exterior

Trim, Deep Colors
TT-P-37D
TT-P-645A
Prime~, Paint Zinc Chromate

, Alkyd Type
'. .l
~aint,
TT-P-86G
Red- Lead-Base,
R~ady
Mixed
,
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1.2
.'
,-
',~
'.
.
1.3
Pipe, Steel Black, and HotDipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded

and Seamless
A 53-8la
D 2000-80
Rubber Products in Automotive

Applications, Classification
System For
"
Magnetic Particle Examination
E-709-80
,
American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC)

Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of
; Structural Steel for Build~ngs
(Eighth.Edition) with commentary
.- .
~.4
American Iron and Steel

304 l7-7th
1.5
Americap Welding Society (AWS)

D.l.l Structural Welding Code(latest edition)
I~stitute
(AISI)
2.
SUBMITTALS: The f.oll~wing information shall be submitted for
approval. Materials shall not be delivered to the site until approved shop
drawings have been returned to the Contr~ctor. Partial submittals, or
submittals for less than the whole of any system made up of interdependent
components .will_not be accepted. -Submittals for manufactured items shall be
manufacturer's descriptive literature, shop drawings, and catalog cuts that
include the manufacturer's dimensions, capacity, specification reference, and
all other info~ation necessary to establish contract, compliance .
. ':l:
i
2.,1
Qualifications: The. Contractor shall submit for approval,
data to suppor,t the quali.fi"ations ,of .the manufacturer, and installer. A list
of previously,successfully completed jobs of a similar nature, indicating the
name and addr~ss'of the owner of the installation shall be included with the
information .
Manufacturer's Data: Before.executing any fabrication work,
.2.2
a completely marked and coordinated package, of documents sufficient to assure
full compliance with the drawings and .specifications shall be submitted. The
submittal shall include a complete technical evaluation of the capacity of
each valve as described below. The drawings shall include: detailed fabrication and equipment drawings; . assembly showing the complete installation,
including methods for supporting the valves, subframes and frames; a listing
6-151
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
.'
of all materials and material specifications; surface finishes; fabrication,

assembly and installation tolerances; locking devices and locking device
release mechanisms; and a detailed sequence for installation of valves and
frames in conjunction with other phases of construction. Structural fabrication drawings shall conform to the requirements of AISC and welding shall
conform to AWS. Assembly and installation shall be based on field established
conditions and shall be fully coordinated'with architectural, structural, and
mechanical systems. All aspects of any work developed in connection with the
development of these valves shall be fully documented and become the property
of the Government.
1
2.2.1 Standard Compliance: Where equipment or materials are
specified to conform to requirements of the standards of organizations such as
ANSI, NFPA, UL, etc., which use a label or listing as a method of indicating
compliance, proof of such conformance shall be submitted for approval. The
label or ~isting of the specified organization will be acceptable evidence.
In lieu'of the label or listing, the Contractor shall submit a notarized
certificate from a nationally recognized testing organization adequately
equipped and competent to perform such services, and approved by ,the Contracting Officer stating that the ~tems have been tested with the specified
organization's methods and that the item conforms to the specified organization's standards.
2.3
Preliminary Hydraulic Characteristics: Prior to Construction, submit with shop drawings an estimate of the hydraulic characteristics
of each valve, under actual operating conditions. -Ra t Lngs shall be based on
tests or test data. All necessary corrections and adjustments shall be
clearly identified. Corrections shall be established for actual altitude and
air flow directions as shown on the drawings as well as hydraulic effects
produced by mounting and/or connection of the valve.
2.4
Tests and Test Reports: Except as noted otherwise, the
testing requirements for materials stated herein or incorporated in referenced
documents, will be waived, provided certified cop i.es ' of reports of tests from
approved :laboratories performed on previously manufactured 'materials are
submitted and approved. ' Test reports shall be accompanied by notarized
certificates from the manufacturer certifying that the previously tested
material is of ..the same type, quality and'manufacture as that furnished for
this project.
2.5
Blast pressure analysis calculations and/or results of
approved tests shall be submitted, for both the blast valve and subframe, for
approval and shall conform to the requirement of the paragraph entitled, BLAST
VALVE TESTS. The calculations 'arid/or test <results' shall include all' components of 'the valves and subframe.subjected to the 'blast pressures. Calculations are not required for the frame embedded in the concrete. This'frame
shall conform to that shown on the drawings. However, the fabrications of the
blast valve and associated sub frame and embedded frame shall be the responsibility of the blast valve manufacturer. This manufacturer shall also be
responsible for installation of this equipment.
2.6
Qualification of Welders:' Before assigning any welder to
work covered by this section of the specification, the Contractor shall submit
the names of the welders to be employed on the work together with certifica6-152 '
TK 5-l300/NAVFAC P"397/AFR
88~22
tion that' each of these welders has passed the qualification test using
procedures covered in AWS Standard Dl.l.
"
2,.7 . Operational and Maintenance Manual: Operation and maintenance manuals shall be furnished by the Contractor. Complete manuals shall be
furnished prior to the time of installation. The manual shall have a table of
contents and shall be assembledto conform to the table of contents with tab
sheets placed before instructions covering the subj ect ..
.',
2.8
Shop Test Reports: The Contractor shall furnish copies of.
shOF inspection and test results. of fabrication welding.
3.
MATERIALS:
Structural. steel' pipe used for> blast valv~ construction

3.1
shall conform to ASTM A 53 seamless pipe.
3.2
All structural steel plate components of the valve shall
consist of stainless steel and shall conform to AISI 304.
3.3 . Spring type' components shall consist of stainless steel and
conform to AISI 17-7th, Condition C.
3.4
Blast Seal. Material: Seals for blast valves; shall conform to
ASTM D 2000.
4.
BLAST VALVE'REQUIREMENTS: All blast valves shall be poppet type
and shall have the following characteristics.
-.
4.1
Pressure.,capacity: Each valve shall be capable of withstanding a sustained blast pressure of 100 psi as well as the impact force produced
by the closing of the valve. The ,valve shall be designed to.sustain elastic
deformation when subjected to the above loads. The blast valve shall be
capable of closing under a force of 15 pounds.
4.2
Temperature Capacity: Each valve shall be capable of
satisfactory operation over a temperature range of 35" to 300" F.
4.3
Valve Actuation: Each valve shall be actuated by the blast
overpressure. The valve shall be in the _closed position 20 milliseconds after
the onset of the b l ast front. The blast pressures are given. on the drawings.
;
",
..
4.4
Valve,Parameters:A minimum.of 12-inch-diameter blast valve
shall be used, After-the valve is closed by the blast overpressure, it'shall
remain in the c Los edjpos Lt Lon until manually opened. This shall require that
the valve be equipped-with aclocking,device which shall.be' i~cated at the
exterior side of the :vaive. A release mechanism for ,the locking devices shall
be provided which shall be operated from a position immediately adjacent to
the interior of the valve. -Any penetration ..through the valve or the structure
must be capable of being sealed against blast leakage through the penetration.
The air flow capacity of the valves shall be 1500 SCFM (1710 ACFM) for the
supply and return valves and 880 SCFM (1000 ACFM) for the exhaust valve.
Total actual pressure drop across the valve with air movement in either
direction shall not exceed one 'inch of water (gage). The valve and its
operating.parts shall be designed for a 20-year life and shall have-an.
operating frequency of 10,000.
6-153
TM 5-l300/NAVFAC' P-397/AFR 88-22
4.5
Blast Seals: Blast seals shall be provided between the face
of each valve and sub frame and between the sub frame and the'frame to provide a
pressure tight condition. Seals shall be adjustable. and easily replaceable.
The seal shall be designed,to be leakproof with a pressure differential across
the seal of 100 psi.
4.5.1 Blast ,Seal Material: Seal material, shall conform to
ASTM D 2000. Four sets of blast seals sha~l be furnished with each valve, .
Three sets of the seals shall be packaged for long term storage.
4.5.2 Adhesive: Adhesive for.blast,sealslshall be as
recommended by the manufacturer of the seals. Sufficient adhesive shall be
provided for installation of the packaged seals at a later date;
"
4.6
Field Removal: Blast, valves shall have the capabilities of
being completely field removed and disassembled.
5.
FABRICATION:
5.1
Qualification of Manufacturer: The manufacture and installation of
blast valves and frames shall be performed by the blast valve manufacturer who'
shall be fully responsible for valve operation. The manufacturer shall have
complete f ac i Ld t Les , equipment and technical personnel forthe.design,
fabrication,
installation and
testi~g
of complete
b~ast
valve assemblies.
5.2 ,General: The drawings indicate the location of the blast valves in
the structure. The manufacturer shall carefully investigate the drawings and
finished conditions affecting his work and shall design the units to meet the
job condition and the dynamic loads. The blast valves shall'be .complete with
gaskets, fasteners, anchors, mechanical operators, and all other equipment and
accessories 'as required for complete installation.
".',
5.3
Metalwork: Except as modified herein, fabrication .ahal I be at a
"
minimum, in accordance with the AISC Specification for the Design, Fabrication
and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings. Welding of steel shall be in
accordance with the requirements for AWS Specification Dl.l.. ,A welding'"
sequence to reduce distortion and locked-up stresses to a minimum shall be
used. All welded units shall be stress relieved. All-welded -member s shall be
post weld straightened free of twist and wind. Fabricated steel' shall be well
formed to shape and size, with sharp lines and angles. 'Exposed welds' shall be
ground smooth. Exposed surface of work, in place, shall have a smooth finish.
Where tight fits are required joints shall be milled.to,a close fit. Corner
joint shall'be coped or mitered, well formed; and in true alignment. .Pe rmanent connections 'foL all assemblies and.components, except those requiring'
removal for installation and maintenance, shall be welded. Each' valve and,
subframe shall be removable from the embedded 'frame.
, .
:5.3.1 Machining: Pa r ts : and assemblies shall be machine finished'

wherever necessary to insure proper fit of the parts and the'satisfactory
performance of the valves.
5'.3.2 Weld Details: The types of edge preparation used for welds
shall be chosen by the manufacturer to be the 'most suitable for the joint and
position of welding. Where required, all groove welds shall be complete
penetration welds with complete joint fusion. Groove weld edge preparations:
6-154
TK 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
shall be accurately and neatly made. All full penetration groove joints shall
be back-chipped and back welded where both sides are ac ce s s fb Le . Where both
sides are not accessible, backing strips 'not'exposed to view may be left 'in
place unless removal is required for clearance. Backing strip not removed
shall be made con 7inuous by weldi?g ends and junctions.
" of welds
.
5.3.3 Weld'Tests: Inspection and .
tests
shall be!,s
specified in AWS Specification 01.1. All welding' shall be subjected to normal
,
I
,;'
continuous inspection.
,,'
'
5.3.3.1
Nondestructive dye penetratortesting shall be
performed for all welding'in accordance with, Method B of ASTM E lb5 or ASTM E
709, Allowable defects shall-conform to' AWS Specification 01.1.
5.3.3.2
Penetration Welds: AIr full or partial penetration corners, tees and inaccessible butt joints shall be subjected to 100
percent ultrasonic examination, All penetration joints shall be' considered to
be tension joints. All tests shall be performed by a testing laboratory
approved by the Contracting Officer. The testing laboratory shall be responsible for interpretation of the testing, which shall be certified and submitted in a written report for each test. In addition to the weld examination
performed by the 'Corrt r ac t or ....the Contracting Officer reserves the right to
perform independent examination of any welds at any time. The cost of all
Government reexamination wi~l be borne by the Goyernment.
5.3.3.3
Correction of Defective Welds: Welds containing
defects exceeding the allowable 'which have been 'revealed by the above testing
shall be chipped'or ground'out'f6r full depth and rewelded. ',This correction
of the defected weld area and'retest shall be at the Contractor's expense .
.
'
5.4
Metal Cleaning and Painting:
,
5.4.1 Cleaning: Except as modified herein, surfaces shall be

cleaned to bare metal by an approved blasting process. Any surface that may
be damaged by blasting shall be cleaned to bare 'metal by powered wire brushing
or other mechanical means. Cleaned surfaces which become contaminated with
rust, dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminants shall be washed with solvents
until thoroughly clean.
,
5.4.2 Pretreatment: Except as modified herein, immediately after
cleaning, steel surfaces shall be given a crystalline phosphate base coating;
the phosphate base coating shall be'applied only to blast cleaned, ~are metal
surfaces.
",
5.4.3 Priming: Treated surfaces'shall be primed as soon as

practicable after the pretreatment coating has dried. Except as modified
herein, the primer shall be a coat of zinc chromate primer conforming to Fed.
Spec. TT-P-645, or a coat of red lead p~int, Type I or Type III conforming to
Fed. Spec. TT-P-86G, applied to a minimum dry film thickness of 1.0 mil.
Surfaces that"will be concealed after construction and will require no
overpainting for appearance may be primed with a coat of asphalt varnish,
applied to a minimum dry film thickness of L 0 mil. Damage to' primed surfaces
shall be repaired with the primer.
6-155
TK 5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR
~8-22
. 5.4.4 Painting: Shop painting shall be provided for all metalwork,
except for non-ferrous metals'and corros~on resistant metals and surfaces to
be embedded in concrete. Surfaces to be welded shall not be coated within

three inches of the weld, prior to welding. All machined surfaces in contact
with outer surfaces and bearing surfaces shall not be painted. These surfaces
shall be corrosion protected by the application of a corrosion preventive
compound. Surfaces to receive adhesives for.gaskets shall not.be painted.
Surfaces shall' be thoroughly dry andcl"an when the paint is applied. No
painting shall
be
done
in
freezing
or
wet weather except under cover; the
temperature shall be above 45' F but not over 90' F. Paint shall be applied
in a workmanlike manner and all joints and crevices shall be coated thoroughly. Surfaces which will be concealed or inaccessible after assembly shall be
painted prior to assembly. Paint shal~ 9onform to Fed. Spec. TT-P37D.
6.
BlAST VALVE TESTS: .
6.1
Response Tests: The following static and dynamic response
shall be performed to demonstrate the b l ast; resistant capabilities of the
blast value design. These tests shall be witnessed by the Contracting
Officer.
6.1.1 Closure Time Test: Prior to shipment to the site, the
Contractor shall perform a.test to demonstrate that the closure of the blast
valve will not exceed the 20 milliseconds specified. A suggested method for
recording the valve closure is with the use of a high speed camera.
6.1,2 Static Pressure Test: Prior to shipment to the site,
the Contractor shall perform .a pneumatic test to demonstrate the static
capacity of the blast valve design,. The valve must sustain the pressure of
100 psi for a minimum of two hours. The total pressure'loss during that
period shall not exceed 1 psi.
6.1.3 Dynamic Pressure Test: Prior to shipment to the site,
the Contractor shall perform ~ test to demonstrate ,the dynamic capacity of the
blast valve design. This test shall simulate the combined effects of impact
forces produced by. the valve closure system and the blast load. This test may.
be replaced by design analyses which demonstrate that the head and frame of
the valve shall have the capability to resist the stresses produced by the'
above forces. The blast load as indicated on the drawings shall be used for
this analysis.
6.1. 4 Blast Tests: ,'If the effects, of one or more of the
above blast valve tests have been demonstrated by prior'blast valve tests on
similar valves, then the results of these tests shall be submitted for review;
and the above test performances may not be required.
6.2
Test: After installation, a trip test shall be performed
and demonstrated to the operating personnel.
6.3
Hydraulic Characteristics: Prior to shipment to the site:
the Contrac.tor shall perform a final test. to establish the hydraulic characteristics of each valve and provide the nece s s ary cor r ec t Lons and adjustments
as stated previously.
6-156 .
e
r
.' .
"'''W/-W~~\\VJ/7f1i,~,
....
2 FT. DIA. STEEL PIPE
STEEL ARCH.
....vo,
."
-..l
2 IN. THICK
PEA GRAVEL ...... '." , ..... " .-. ] [
3/16 IN.:MESH: :." ::;:SAN[).'~~>::
WIRE SCREEN
.. '" ",:' '.', .':.
r<l
.
'.
'.
.......",.
..,.
PERFORATED .. '
0 _. -. ~
STEEL PLATES .' ..- . '.', ."" ',_ .... '. ---+L'
..
:9 '.
=0
o
1/2 IN. f6 STEEL

PIPES, I FT. O.C.
SECTION A-A
'0.f8~;1
,..'
'(Ja'o t,
;,~:.~~,~~L::,~i.~~~l~L~~,.
,[(.JI ,UlJ,.'l..J!'.'! ~
"oto.,
3':
GRAVEL
SUMP
.'7
I 12JN.P
STEEL
PIPE
10'-0"
L.
A
Figure 6-59
SHELTER
Sketch of 300 cfm sand filter
REINFORCED
CONCRETE
(FLOOR MUST
SUPPORT II TONS
OF SAND)
J'--- 9
01
CLOSED
LATCH;CLOSED POSITION
LIFT MANUALLY TO OPEN
O'
'",
....
<.n
ex>
. ."
".:-
-[J
1':1
0
LS .""
Il-r
L-
rr"J
PROTECTED
SIDE
I--
l-.
I-- BLAST
0
. FLOW
0
o
TWO LOUVER OPENINGS ,

I
15 in. x 3'2 in. , 52'2 sq. in. EACH
Figure 6-60
I '-
SEAT SPONGE RUBBER
L.~.
OPEN
CLEAT. OPEN POSITION
TILTS AUTOMATICALLY TO CLOSE
Blast-actuated louver
Figure 6-61
Arrangement of multiple foJvers for a large volume of air

6-159
.'
BACKING
. PLATE
.. .
ACTUATING:
PLATE.(CLOSED .
. POSITION) '~--t-.:....c....-.:_-.:..
'
!r'---ACTUATING PLATE
(OPEN POSITION)
+-BLAST
SPRING
NORMAL
VENTI LATION
:.:'~ :::.'.
-,' :
-..
.', . '::,.:"> ;....

. ~".
" ~'::. <4.
Fi gure 6-62
VALVE SEAT
Typi ca 1, bla s t-e c tue ted poppet valve
6-160
rr:- - - VALVE
(OPEN POSITION)
ON-r__~~_
LENGTH DEPENDS
CLOSING. TIME
.'.:
l-
en
. ...
".
. Cl
:-'~~.':"'~ ";, ":"
.'
' ...
:3
lD
.:
;.' " ",
:~ '.~'.~
EC~~~~~N
'..
.;
I;:~:I (ALTERNATE
TO USING
....,,'..".'.
'. ~ ttl- [;l-n' .~:.
.... .
..
'.:.
"
. . ... ~
." '
'
LONG DUCT)
'
':. L..:-"':"""----
.,: ;.:', -:':'.'; : "

; -, . ..
",
:.
.'
.'
"
",
VALVE---(CLOSED POSITION)
NORMAL
VENTILATION
Figur~ ?~63
6-161
Tjme delay path
'.
)( (t)
MASS
.,
I ,
OASHPOT---4-r~
I
I
, :':--ISOLATOR
.J
y (t)
~:
, ..
..
,
Figure 6-64
Idealized model
6-162 "
of
shock isolated mass
TK 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR
Blast Valves
Table 6-13
Blast
Characteristics
Air
Type
Name of' Valve
(Actuated)
U.S. Army
Chemical Corps
Cloaing Locking Flow

Pressure Time
Mech- Rate.
(ma'
(pai)
100
Ye.
300
Blast
50
Y..
600
100
Y..
600
50
50
Y..
1,200
50
Y.~.
2,50,0
20
Y..
5,000 Shock tube
E191Rl
12"0
Office of
Tested
(ofm)
Blast
M-l
U.S. Army
Chemical Corps
ani.ma
Field
Shock tuba
end
field
Blut
end
16"0
Civil
Defense
"
Remote
24"0
Blast and
Remote
Office of Corps
of Enginee~~
.
,
Bureau of Yards
and Docks ~
Remote
Field
500
2,200
Y..
to
30,000
2,250
Temet USA, Inc.
Blast
100
20
Y..
Shock tub.
to
3,100
4"0
150
0
Jearn end
Plat
280
8"0
600
Field
1',750
14"0
.-.1
Technical
Remote
Facilities
1'8-107 A2
American Machine
Foundry
Luwa
Ne. Naval
Civil
Brechenridge
Engineer-
Bayles-Denny
Blast
100
Blast
15 to
160
No
Blast
4 to 20
100
No
600
No
180
No
125
No
'00
Blast
5 to 100
ins Lab
5 to 104
Stephenson
Artes Machinery
(Sand Filtered)
Blast
"
Suffield
Experimental
Stations
35,000
100
Unknown
6-163
80
450 Shock tube
Compressed
Air
Field
88~22
SHOCK ISOLATION SYSTEMS

6-45. Introduction
Previous sections have presented methods for the prediction of blast and
fragment effects associated with the detonation of explosives and the design
or analysis of structures to withstand these .effects. .In the design of
shelters, an important part of the design process is to insure the survival of
personnel and equipment. It is possible that the structure could withstand
the air blast and ground shock effects but the contents be so severely damaged
by structure motions that the facility could not accomplish its lntended
function. A similar problem is in the design of shelter type structures that
houses sensitive explosives.
Th~se
explosives must be
protecte~
from struc-
ture motions since these motions could result in initiation of the explosive.
This section deals with the protection of Vulnerable c9mpohents from structure
motions due to air blast and ground shock.
6-46. Objectives
The objective of shock isolation ..in protective design applications is to
reduce the magnitude of motions 'transmitted by a Vibrating structure to
personnel or shock sensitive equipment. These motions must be attenuated to
levels tolerable ~o personnel and to be various pieces of equipment used in
the facility. A second consideration in some cases is to reduce the magnitude
of motions transmitted by Vibrating equipment to its supports. These latter
motions can be significant for equipment mounted on shock isolated platforms.
The general functional objectives of a
1.
s~ock i~olation
system are:
Reduce input motions to acceptable levels.
2.
Minimize rattle space requirements ,consistent with system effectiveness and cost.
3.
Minimize coupling. of horizontal and vertical motions.
4.
Accommodate a
5.
Limit the number of cycles of motion of the isolated body.
6.
Support the system under normal 'operating conditions without

obj ectionable motions ..
7.
Maintain constant attitude under normal operating conditions.
8.
Accommodate changes in load and'load distributio~.
9.
Maintain system vibration characteristics over long periods of

time.
~pectrum
of inputs of uncertain waveforms.
10.
Interface properly with other components or parts.
11.
Require minimum maintenance
6-164
TM 5~1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR'88-22
6-47. Structure Motions

Ground shock results from the energy which is imparted'to the, ground by an'
explosion. Some of this' energy is transmitted through the air in the form of
air-blast-induced ground shock and some is t r ansmf t t e dvt.hrough the ground' as
direct-induced ground shock. 'Both of these forms of ground'shock when,
imparted to a structure will cause the structure to move' in both a vertical
and horizontal direction.
Movement' of the structure imparts' motions to items
attached to the structure's interior.'
Motion of interior items-is'obtained
from a response spectrum. This is a plot giving the maximum responses (in
terms of displacement, velocity, and acceleration) of all possible linear
single-degree-of-freedom systems which may be attached to the structure due ,to
a given input motion. Therefore, having the spectra for the structure ,and ,
given input motion, the maximum response of any item within the structure is
obtained based on' the natural' frequency of the item. 'Methods for preparing
response' shock spectra are presented in Chapter 2 'of' this' manual.,'
. t
"
I.
In addition to motion of the structure as a whole, the exterior walls and roof
respond to the direct application ,of the' blast' load. Methods for calculating
the response of these elements are ,given in Chapter 3 of this manual using the,
parameters given in ,Chapter 4 and S'for concrete and steel, respectively. '
Maximum displacements, velocities, and accelerations of these elements 'can be
determined in a straightforward manner.
These quantfties:can' be' used to
determine effects on items attached or located near walls or roofs.

6-48. Shock Tolerance of Personnel ana
Equipment'~
The requirement for shock isolation is based upon the shock tolerance of
personnel and/or critical items of equipment, contained within the protective '"
structure. If the predicted shock input exceeds the shock tolerance of
personnel, a shock isolation system is required. If ,the shock input exceeds
the shock tolerance of equipment"the,equipment can either be:ruggedized to
increase its~shock tolerance or it can be shock isolated. There 'are practical
limits to ruggedization and the costs 'may exceed those of an isolation system.
If the. input does not exceed the shock tolerance of the equipment,it 'can be
hardmounted to the structure.
6-48.1. Personnel
The effects of structural motions on personnel depend on the magnitude,

duration, frequency, and direction of the motion, as well as their position at
the time of the loading. The shock tolerance of personnel is presented in
Chapter I of this manual.
6-48.2. Equipment
In many cases, the need for shock isolation of equipment must be established
before detailed characteristics of the system components are established.
Further, because of the constraints of procurement procedures, shock isolation
systems
ment to
minimum
data is
must be 'designed and built prior to specific knowledge of the equipbe installed.L,In such instances, the choice lies between specifying
acceptable shock tolerances for the new equipment or using whatever
available' for, similar types .o f equipment.
.
6-165-
TM 5-l300/NAVFAC P-J97/AFR 88-22 .

The most practical means of determining the shock tolerance of a particular
item of equipment is by testing. However, even experimental data can be of
questionable value if the test input motion characteristics differ greatly
from those that would actually be experienced by the equipment. Since testing
of equipment may not be practical in many cases due to the amount of time
allotted from the inception of a project to its completion, procurement
procedures, and cost limitations, it is often necessary to rely on data
obtained from shock tests of similar items.' The shock capacity of various
types of equipment is presented in Chapter 1 of this manual.
6-49,. Shock Isolation Principles
6-49.1., Gene,ralConcepts
,.
A full. ,treatment of the problem, of shock isolation systems is not possible in

this manual. The following discussion p rovf.desven introduction to the subject
and presents some of the important characteristics of shock isolation systems.
In general, the analytical treatment of shock isolation systems is based upon
the principles of dynamic analysis presented in Chapter 3. In most cases, the
actual system can be represented by a,simplified mathematical model consisting
of a rigid mass connected bya spring and dash pot as shown in Figure 6-64.
The figure represents the simplest case, that of a single-degree-of-freedom
system restrained to move in only one direction. Actually, an isolation
system would have at least six degrees of freedom, i.e., three displacements
and three rotations. Under certain conditions, these six modes can be
uncoupled and the system analyzed as six single-degree-of-freedom systems.
The single-degree-of-freedom system shown in Figure 6-64 can be used to
illustrate,the importance of some of the parameters affecting the effectiveness .of shock isolation systems in general. The isolator is represented by
the linear spring and viscous damping device enclosed within the dotted
square. The suspended mass is taken to be a rigid body. It is assumed that
the base of the .system is subjected to a periodic sinusoidal motion whose
frequency is f. The undamped natural frequency of the system is f n_ and is
given by:
"
;.
386.4 K]
1/2
6-62
,
where
fn
natural frequency of vibration
unit stiffness of spring
weight supported by spring
When the frequency of the disturbing motion f is 'small compared to the natural
frequency f n of the single-degree-of-freedom system, the displacement of the
mass is approximately equal to the displacement of the base. When the
frequency of the base motion is several times that of the system, 'the motion.
of the mass is a small fraction of the base motion. When the ratio 9f
frequencies become large (20 to 30). the system can not respond to the base
6-166
motio~'to_any
significant' degree. At 'frequency ,ratios near ,one, large motions

of the mass are possible and the magnitude is strongly affec eed by the amount
of damping in the ,system:
+,
~,
One ,obvious shock isolation:approach, is to use a low, frequency suspension

system,so that the ratio of frequencies is ,always large .. ' However, low
frequency ,(referred to as soft) systems possess 'the undesirable characteristic
of larger static' and dynamic' displacements and greater probability 'of coupling
between modes of vibration. ' Although soft systems may be acceptable 'under, ,
some condd t Lons-jr the .obvLous- constraint that will preclude their use is a.
limit on the 'relative motion between the, suspended mass and,its supports or
'adjacent parts of the facility . .This relative motion 'determines the:amount of
rattle space that must be provided to avoid impact between the mass and other'
fixed or moving parts of the facility.
.
- : . (>;'
! .
. -
r -: :
'.1
The acceleration .of 'the 'mass -Ls a func t t orrof the forces applied to the mass
by the spring and damping ,devices. In the case of a linear undamped 'spring,
the force is'a function of the relative displacement between the mass ,and 'its
support: ; '-In 'viscous damping devices,' -rhe .damping force is a function of the
percent.damping and the relative velocity between the mass and its 'supports.
Acceleration limits for the' 'critical ':items will 'impose restraints' on jsprLng
s t Lff'ne's s and' theaniount of, damping rLn the isolation 'system.' In practice, a '
compromise combination of spring'stiffness'and damping is
.necessary~to
minimize 'input,motions .to the mass for a ,specified "a I LowabLe rattle space or:
to minimize the:rattle"space required .f'o r 'specified allowable motions of ,the,
......
",
mass .:
'.
-,
'
The need to -avo Ld resonance (ratio of the ,frequency of the' base motion to the
nacura L'tf'requency of the isolation, system equal .t o one)" is obvious. The
structural motions ,resulting-from an explosion 'are not steady-state sinusoidal
in nature. .However , these motions ;are-of an oscillatory type and the dis- .
placement-frequency relationships discussed above are applicable .
. . -:
A more'detailed'discussion'of'the effects of load duration, nonlinear springs,
damping,' and system 'frequency on response can be obtained from publications
listed inthe.bibliography .
. :,"
:.
""1,
I':
The'basic,objective in'shock isolation is to select a combination'of isolation

system properties which will reduce the input motions to the desired level.
In design, it is a straightforward process. System properties are assumed and
an analysis .Ls performed to determine Ltsvresponse to the'input motions. If
the shock.tolerance and.rattle space criteria are not satisfied, the 'system,
must be altered and the analysis repeated until the criteria"are satisfied.
6-49:2. Single-Mass Dynamic Systems
'r l
"
..
A single. mass ,system can have 'six degrees of freedom, -that is, ttanslation in
three orthogonal axes ,and three rotations. The system can'also be classifi~d
as coupled or uncoupled.
-.'
'.
. j .
fl
A, coupled system is' one in which forces o r-vd Lsp Lac emerrts in one mode will
affect or 'cause, a response in another mode. ,For example, a vertical' displacement of a single rigid mass might also cause rotation of the mass, 'An
uncoupled 'system; on the other hand; is onewhere forces or displacements in
one,mode do not:generate a'response,in anofher,mode. If ,the 'system is
TH 5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88 c22

completely uncoupled, base translations in anyone of the three orthogonal
directions will cause translations of the mass in that direction only.
'Similarly, a pure rotation of the base about anyone of the three orthogonal
principal inertia axes with their origin through the mass center, will cause
only pure rotations of the body about that axis. The principal inertia axes
are those about.which the products of inertia vanish. The principal elastic
axes of a resilient element (isolator) are those axes for which an unc~n"'
strainedelement.will experience a displacement collinear with the direction
of, the applied force. If the principal elastic axes and the principal inertia
axes of the shock,isolation system' coincide with the origin or point of
intersection of both sets of axes at the center of gravity 'of the mass, the
modes of vibration are uncoupled. Such a system is a'l so vre fe r red to asa
balanced system.
In Figure 6-65, if all the springs have tlie same elastic stiffness, the
elastic center will .be Loca t e'd at point A, ,which, in this case, is, at the
center of. the individual springs. If the, suspended mass, -Ls of uniform
density, its ,center o f gravity is also located at A, and the system is
uncoupled for motion input through the springs: Some systems may ,be ,uncoupled'
only -fo r motions in a par.t Lcul ar direction., "If point, B in Figure 6 - 65 is the -, ,
center of gravityof the mass, a horizontal motion ,in the direction parallel
to the X-axis of the structure would cause only a horizontal motion of the
mass. A vertical motion ofthe structure would'cause both ,a vertical and
rotational ,motion of the mass .. In this case, the vertical and rotational
modes are coupled. If the center of gravity were located cat point C"then.
vertical, horizontal and rotational modes are coupled. If the characteristics;
of the mass and shock isolation system are such that the modes of vibration
can,pe uncoupled, the system can be analyzed aS,a,series of independent'
single-degree-of - freedom, systems. The response of. each -of these systems .can : r
be determined on. the basis of, input motions' and isolator proper t Ie s in a ' .
direction parallel, to or about one of t.herpr LncIpal inertia axes .. ,The
response in each one of these modes can be summeq in various ways.to obtain
the total response of the system. The sum of the maximum responses would
neglect differences in phasing and should represent an upper limit;of "the
actual mO,tions.' It is, recommended that the square root, or'the sum of the,
squares of the maximums (root mean square values) be used to represent,a,'
realistic maximum response since it is unlikely that response will occur
simultaneously in all modes. Superposition of modal response is appropriate
for elastic systems' only.
, . . ,
A dynand cal LyibaLance d shock :~olation system, offers advantages other than a
simplification of the computation effort .. ' A balanced system results .Ln
reduced motions during oscillation. As a result o~ the absence of coupling,of
modes in a balanced system and the usually.small, if any, rotational inputs to
the system in protective construction applications, rotational motions of the
shock isolated mass will be minimized. This is particularly important for
large masses where.small angles of rotation can result in large displacements
at locations :far from the center of gravity.
'
Because of the advantages of a dynamically balanced system, various,approaches
are taken to minimize coupling of modes. One criterion is that frequencies in
the six modes should be separated sufficiently to avoid resonance ,between
modes. Because of the importance of minimizing rotational modes of response,
it is suggeste~ that extremely,low stiffnesses in these modes should be
avoided . . For .tihe . analysis of multiple degrees of,.freedom, .s LngIe -mas s sys cems
6-168
where the various modes of response are coupled, the modal method of analysis
or numerical integration techniques can be utilized. The modal method of
analysis requires solution of simultaneous equations of motion to determine
characteristic shapes and frequencies of each mode and is limited to the
elastic case. The numerical techniques dO'not require predictionof'mode
shapes and frequencies and will handle both elastic and inelastic response.
If the dynamic system is also a multiple mass system, the above methods can be
utilized to an~lyze the system. While an in-depth discussion is beyond the
scope~of this,manual, a complete discussion of these methods can be found in
publications .listed in the bibliography .
.'
6-49.3 .. Shock Isolation Arrangements

.'
6-49.3.1: Individual versus Group'Mounting'
-,
The two, basic approaches to shock isolation in protective construction are to

provide individually tailored systems for each component and to group together
two or:more items on a.common platforrn. i In the latter case, the" system is
selected to satisfy the requirements'of the most critical:item. In some
cases,'where the shock tolerance of the various items differs greatly,a
combination of the,two approaches may"be the :most effective solution. :
Although the relative location or size of some items may 'make individual
mounts' the more practical approach in certain cases, group mounting will
generally be as reliable and the least costly solution. '

Where personnel must be protected, 'a platform is the most'practical solution.
Except for extremely sensitive'equipment;.ihe shock tolerance of the 'personnel
will govern the: .das i gn of, the sys t em- . The combination of personnel and
equipment on the same platform will permit'the personnel'to move freely
(however cautiously) between items of equipment. Where personnel are ,not
required to be mobile, but rather may be able ,to remain seated while operating
the'equipment during' hazardous periods, the. shock tolerance of the personnel
are greatly increased. This increased tolerance will reduce ,the shock
isolat"ion requirements while 'at the same time affording a higher degree of
protection for personnel since they are protected from the unknown consequences .of falling.
There are several advantages of 'group mounted systems. A group mounted system
is less sensitive to variations in weights of individual items of equipment
because of the larger combined weight of all items and the platform. With a
number of items there is a greater flexibility of controlling the center of
gravity of the total mass. Lnvfac t , ballast 'may be 'added t o . the' platform to
align the center, of gravity with the princ"ipal axis to form a balanced system.
A gzoupuaount.ed system generally requires -Les s "rattle space than several
independently mounteditems. Also, the interconnections betweencomponents is
greatly simplified if they are all mounted on a single platfor~. Finally, an
important advantage of group' systems is cost . . Individual mounts will require
a large number of isolator units. Although larger. more costly, units are
required for the group mounting system, fewer units are required and the cost
per pound of supported load will be 'much lower,
,."
6-169

6-49.3.2. Platform Characteristics
A platform for group mounted systems offers great flexibility in controlling
the center of gravity of the supported masses ,to produce a balanced system
where modes ;of, vibration are uncoupled. Ballast may be securely anchored' to
the platform at locations which would.inove the center of gravity of the total
mass to coincide with the elastic center of the isolation system. The ,.
determination of the weight and location of;this ballast can be' greatly
s Lmp Lf.f Led vby uncoupling the effect of adding weight in the x and y directions
of the principle elastic axes. This uncoupling can be accomplished b~. ,
locating the ballast symmetrically about the x axis when moving the location
of the center of gravity in the y direction. In this manner, the location of
the center of gravity may be altered independently about the elastic center in
the x and y directions. If for practicalreasons the ballast cannot be' "
located symmetrically about a principle axis, then the two directions must be
considered simultaneously.
Providing additional ballast in excess of that required to balance the platform provides .for future changes in equipment. or the addition of new equipment
without actually changing the isolation system. The springs will not require
replacement nor will the structural members of the platform ,need to be increased in size. Additional equipment is placed on the platform and ballast
is removed and/or relocated to balance the new equipment arrangement. To provide for future equipment changes,it is suggested that additional ballast
equal to 25 percent of the weight of the equipment and the. required ballast be
distributed on the platform. The location of this ballast must not change the
center of gravity of the existing balanced..system. If future needs have been
established, the platform and isolators would be. designed for. the future
equipment. However, ballast would be provided to compensate for the weight of
the future equipment and balance the. system for the, existing equipment.
The stiffness of the platform must be. large enough to insure that the platform
and associated group mounted equipment ..can be treated as a rigid body.. This
criterion is usually satisfied if the lowest natural frequency of any member ,
ofthe .platform is at least five (5) times the natural frequency of the spring
mass system. When large, heavy items of equipment are involved, platforms
','
meeting this stiffness ,criteria may not be.practical. In such cases, the
platform equipment configuration should be treated'as .a.multi-mass system.
6-49.3.3. Isolator Arrangements
There are.many ways to support a shock isolated item .. Some desirable features
have been discussed previously in connection with dynamically .bal anced
systems. The isolators may be positioned in many ways. The more important
factors affecting the selection of an isolator arrangement are:.
1.
The size, weight,'shape and. location' of the' center of gravityof.

the
~uspended
mass;
, 1.
2.
3.
The direction and magnitude of the input motions;

Rotation of the lines of action of the devices should be small
over the full range of displacements of the system to avoid system
nonlinearities;
6-170 .
TH 5-i300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

4.
Coupling of modes should be minimized;
5.
Static and dynamic instability must be prevented;
6.
It is desirable in most cases, and necessary in some, that the

system return to its nominal position;
7.
Space available for the isolation ,system; and type of isolation

devices used.
Some of the more common isolator arrangements are shown in Figures 6-67 and 668. The systems 'shown are assumed to have the same arrangements of isolators
in a plane through the center of gravity (e.g. ).. and perpendicular to the
surface of the page. The dynamically'balanced system (intersection 'of the
elastic axes and the principal inertia axes located,at point A) shown in
Figure 6-65, is probably the least common of 'all suspension systems.
6-49.3.4. Base-Mounted Isolation Systems
In Figure 6-66a, the mass is supported on ',.four , (4) isolators. These isolators
must provide horizontal, vertical 'and rotationalstiffnesses in order for the
system to be stable under all possible motions. There will be coupling
between horizontal displacements and rotations about horizontal axes.
This
arrangement and that shown in Figure 6-66b are appropriate' in those cases
where there are no convenient supports for horizontal i~ol~tors ..
The arrangement of Figure 6-66b is preferred since the line of action of the
isolators can be directed towards the e.g. of the mass to allow decoupling of
some modes. As in the case of Figure 6-66a, the isolators must possess'
adequate stiffnessin axial and lateral directions to insure'stability under
static and dynamic conditions.
In Figure 6-66c, the'isolators are oriented parallel to the three orthogonal
system axes. This arrangement provides system stability even when the
isolators possess only axial stiffness. If the e.g. of the suspended mass is
located as shown, decoupling of modes is possible. While. the lines.of action
of the isolators pass through the e.g. under static conditions, response of
the system to base motions will obviously alter its geometry. :When the line
of action of the isolators is changed due tO'displacement ,of the mass ..relative
to its supports, coupling of the modes of vibration will be introduced. The
degree of coupling is affected by the'magnitude of the displacements and the
length ,of the isolators. Consequently" isolator properties and arrangement
should be selected so as to minimize the effects of displacements.
6 -49.3.'5. Overhead Pendulum Systems Using,Platforms
Two arrangements of overhead,pendulum shock isolation devices using platforms
to support the sensitive components are shown in Figure 6-67. In both cases,
the center of gravity of the suspended maas Ls relatively Lov . These types 'of
suspension systems have been used ,extensively in protective structures for
various ,conditions including individual small and large items,.multiple items
of various sizes as 'well as a combination of personnel and equipment supported
on various sized platforms. The overhead pendulum system normally uses swivel
joints at the points of attachment so that the system may swing freely.
Horizontal input motions cause the pendulum to swing. Gravity provides the
i
6-171
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22.

horizontal restoring force or stiffness. This force is a function of the
total weight of the suspended mass. The natural frequency of vibration of the
pendulum is a function of the length of the pendulum and is. given by:
1
fn -
386.4]
_
_
1/2
[
6-63
-.
where
natural frequency of vibration

length of pendulum.
'Each pendulum arm includes an isolator which sstablishes the stiffness of the
system in the vertical direction. These .isoiators can introduce nonlineari~
ties and coupling between the pendulum andvertical spring modes. The system
is linear for small angular displacements, that is, when the angular change e
of the pendulum arm from the vertical position is approximately equal to the
sine of the angle (9 - sin 9). The system can be considered uncoupled if the
pendulum frequency is not near 'one half. of' the vertical spring frequency. , If
the pendulum frequency is in the vicinity of one half the vertical frequency,
the interchange of energy between the modes can lead .to pendulum motions
greatly exceeding those predicted by linear assumptions.. .
In a shock spectra maximum displacements occur at low frequencies, maximum
velocities at intermediate frequencies, and maximum accelerations at high
frequencies ... Since most pendulum systems have low. natural .frequencies, they
are displacement sensitive. These systems attain maximum displacements and
minimum accelerations. Consequently, they will normally require greater
rattle:space than other systems while at the same time providing.maximum
protection against horizontal accelerations at minimum costs. It should be
realized that for explosions, 'maximum displacements are comparatively small
and can be accommodated. One of the main advantages of overhead pendulum
systems is that they do not require horizontal stiffness elements. Their
attractiveness is greatly diminished in those cases requiring horizontal
damping because .of large motions.
The swivel joint attaching the pendulum arm to the platform determines the
location of the horizontal elastic axis of the system. Figure 6-58b illustrates two ways of varying the point of attachment of the pendulum arm.to the
platform. The horizontal elastic axis'is raised to coincide with the center
of gravity of, the suspended mass at the .equilibrium position and help minimize
coupling between modes of response. At the left side of the platform the'
isolator is contained in a housing rigidly attached to the platform. At the
right side, a structural member is rigidly attached to the platform and the
isolator is included in the pendulum arm. In addition to supporting personnel
and equipment, overhead pendulum systems can.be used to shock-isolate building
utilities. Individual utility runs may be isolated or several different
utilities may be supported on a single platform. A single platform may cover
an entire room and all building services may be supported. They would include
a hung ceiling; lighting fixtures, utility piping, HVAC ducts, electrical
cables.and process piping. Of course, flexible connections. must be used when
connecting the.services to the building or equipment.
6-172
TK 5"1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

6"50. Shock Isolation Devices
A fundamental element of every shock isolation system is some sort of energy
storage or'energy dissipative device. These devices 'must 'be capable of
supporting the ,items to be isolated under static arid dynamic conditions and,
at the same time, prevent transmission of any harmful 'shock loads to the
items. In most cases, the isolator must have elastic force-displacement
characteristics so that the,system,will return to a nominal equilibrium'
position after the dynamic loads have been applied. The desirable features of
these devices include:
'
1.,
. The dynamic force-displacement relationship of the isolator should

be'predictable for all directions'in which it'is required to
provide stiffness."
2.
3.
..
The isolator should have' low mass in order to'minimize transmission of high frequency motions to the'supported mass.
The frequency of the isolator should'remain constant with changes'
in load, that is, its, stiffness should vary in"direct proportion
'to the load 'it supports.' This allows 'the system, to' remain dynamically balanced throughout changes in the position of the supported
mass.
4.
The static position of the isolator should be adjustable so that

the' system can be, leveled and returned to its nominal position
should the suspended load change.
5.
The isolator should have high

low cost,
reliabili~y,
long service life and
The various types of isolators used in most protective construction applications possess these characteristics in-varying degrees. Any real' isolator has
some mass, and in some applications, the mass can be quite large and must be
considered in the final analysis.' Nonlinear force-displacement characteristics are often accepted to gain some other advantage. In energy dissipative
systems, it, may be necessary to provide other means of , restoring the system to
its original position. In general:.. most devices are some' compromise combination of' the desirable features which best suit the particular design situa,
tion. .t '
The inclusion of energy dissipative (damping) devices in the isolation system
offers .s eve raL significant advant.age s;" that is ,'damping can:
1.
Reduce the severity of output motion response;

"
,2;
, Reduce the effect 'of coupling between modes, thus' reducing' rattle
t ' space requirements;
"
'.
..
'3..
Restore, the system to an equilibrium position more quickly,;"

"
,4. " Decrease' the, sensitivity of the system to var Let Lons in input
motions.
6-173
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

Damping can be provided internally in some isolation devices such as in liquid
springs, but must be added externally in others such as those systems using
helical coil springs. Different types of damping offer advantages and
disadvantages which must be evaluated in the design process. A damping device
may be effective in attenuating low frequency components,of input motions but
can increase the severity of high, frequency components. Also" a damping
device could prevent the system from returning to its nominal equilibrium
position., Thus, ca~e must be exercised in either designing a system employing
isolator. devices possessing inherent damping charac~eristics or adding damping
devices; 'if the isolation system is to perform properly.
There are numerous types of isolators'~hich can be used to accomplish the
shock isolating function. In the design ,of protective structures for explosions, the induced building motions are not.usu~lly severe and the maximum
building displacements are relatively small. As a result, shock'isolation
systems using helical coil springs (Figure 6-68) are by far the most common
system employed. The reasons for "the extensive use of helical springs should
be 'obvious from the discussion below. Other shock isolation devices which may
also be used are presented, in less detail, ~elow.
.
It should be noted that the protective design engineer does not furnish the
design for the shock isolator. The engineer designs the shock isolation
system to be used but ,does not design the isolators,,(in most cases, a helical
coil spring). Rather, specifications are furnished which define the desired
characteristics of the isolator. For a helical spring, the specifications may
include some or all of the following: maximum load, maximum static deflection,
maximum dynamic ~eflection, spring stiffness, maximum height, maximum, diameter, and fac~ors of safety regarding allo~able stresses and bottoming of the
spring. It must be realized that as the number of specified parameters
increase, the options available to the spring manufacturer are decreased.
6-50.2. Helical Coil Springs
A helical' coil spring is fabricated from bar stock or wire which is'coiled,"
into a helical form. Figure 6-68 illustrates several spring mounts .
.
(.,
The helical coil spring has numerous advantages and comparatively few.disadvantages. The advantages are that the spring is not strain,rate sensitive,
self, restoring after an applied load has been removed, resists both axial and
lateral loads, linear spring rate and' requires little or no maintenance. For
most applications, ,the coil spring usually ,requires a larger space compared to
other available shock isolators; and the spring cannot be adjusted ,to compensate for changes in loading conditions. If the weight of the supported object
is changed, it ~s,necessary to either change the spring or add additional'
springs. For most purposes, the helical coil spring can be considered to have
zero damping. ' If damping is required, it must be provided by external means.
Helical coil springs may be used in either compression or extension. The
extension ~prings' are not subject to buckling and may offer a more convenient
attachment arrangement. However, extension spring attachments are usually
more costly and cause large stress concentrations at the point of attachment.
For shock isolation applications, coil springs are generally used in compression. Buckling which can be a problem with compression springs, can be
overcome by,proper design or ,through the use of guides,which are added either
6-174,
TM 5-l300/NAVFAC, PC397/AFR,88-22,
internally or externally. to the coils. 'The discussion below will be concerned

primarily. with compression springs unless otherwise stated.
Helical coil springs may be mounted in two ways, the ends are either clamped
or hinged. In most shock isolation applications, the spring ends are clamped
since thismethod greatly increases. the force required. to buckle the spring.
If space is at a: premium, the.energy. storage capacity may be, increased.by.
ne s t Lng. the springs'. (placing' one or more springs inside the.outermost spring) ..
When nesting spr.ings;li.it is advisable to alternate the direction of coils to'
prevent the springs from becoming entangled.'
Although permanent set may-be acceptable in some instances;' it is normally
required that the system return to its original position after being-loaded.
This can be accomplished in various ways, but the most common approach in the
case' of helical .coil spr Lngs t Ls to prevent .LneLas t Lc 'action' of the spring .
.; : c :
.1.
Helical coil springs are capable of resisting lateral load: While it'is
possible, to use ,springs ,in this application, carel should be ,exercised. There
are possible arrangements which avoid subjecting the -sp r Lngs to this. type of'
loading.;,",
''','.
.
q-
While the actual
d~sign
j'
of the helical coil spring is done by the manufactur-'
e r , the: engineer must be .ce r caLn that the springs he is:l specifying can
actually be, obtained' and .the space he has ,allocated for, the springs are
sufficient. Therefore, preliminary spring sizes must be obtained by the
engineer ,to suit his intended application. I t is suggested that avaLLabLemanufacturer-.';s data be used for this purpose.
.'
t.,
"
,.
6-50.3. Torsion Springs

Torsion springs provide resistance to torque applied to the spring~ ~In.shock
isolation applications, the torque is usually the result of a load applied to
a torsion lever. which is part of the torsion spring system. ' A typical .torsion
spring 'shock isolation system is illustrated in Figure 6- 69 ..
,. ; . '
Since the axis of a torsion spring
is.normar~to,the
direction of displacement,
it can be ,used advantageously when space in the'direction of displacement is

limited. Torsion springs have linear spring rates, are not strain-rate
sensitive, are self-restoring, and require little or no maintenance. ~orsion'
springs can.not be'adjusted to compensate for changes in weight of shock
isolation equipment, and damping must be ,provided by external means. The
axial length of some types may preclude their use when space is limited.
.
There are three basic types of. torsion springs; (1) torsion bars, (2) helical
torsion springs, and .(3) flat torsionsprings. The type to be used will
depend upon the space available and the capacity required. The torsion bar is
normally used for light to heavy loads, the helical torsion spring for light
to moderate loads, and the flat' torsion .sp r Lng for 'light loads . The, torsion
bar is ,the -rype most, commonly; found in protective structure' applications and
is most. commonly used where large . loads ,must be supported.
,'..
,
6-50.4. Pneumatic,Springs
_I
.~
.,
..
"
"
. -: i'J
Pneumatic springs,' are springs' whose actionis due to the resiliency'of

compressed air. They,.are used ina manner similar to coil.springs.. The two'
6-175
.. '.
TM.5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
basic types are the'pneumatic cylinder with single or compound air chambers,
and the pneumatic bellows. The pneumatic cylinder is shown schematically in
Figure 6-70.
Pneumatic.springs have the advantage of being. adjustable to compensate for
load changes. The spring rate can be made approximately linear over one range)
of deflection but will be highly nonlinear over another. They' are quite
versatile due to the variety of. system characteristics which:can be obtained '.'
by regulation cif the. air flow'. between the cylinder chamber and the reservoir
tank. Some of the possible variations include:
' , , ."
1. :.Velocity-sensitive damping by a variable orifice between chamber
,.l.'.
2.
.. 3.
and reservoir;
..
Displacement-sensitive' damping by a variable orifice controlled by

differential pressure between chamber and reservoir; .
A nearly 'constant height maintained under slowly changing static
' .. load by increasing or decreasing the system' aii content using an
external air supply and a displacement-sensitive servo-system
controlling inlet and exhaust valves;
,
, -.
,,
A constant height under widely varying temperatures achieved"by
. the same system described, for maintaining a.icons t ant; height.
"
The disadvantages of pneumatic springs include higher cost and more 'fragile
construction. They have a limited life span in comparison to mechanical
springs and must be maintained. Also these springs provide resistance for
axial loads only.
6-50.5. Liquid Springs
A liquid spring consists of a cylinder, piston rod', and a .ht gh pressure seal
around the piston rod. ,The cylinder is completely filled with a liquid, and
as the piston is pushed into the cylinder, it compresses the liquid to very
high pressures. The configurations of 'liquid springs' are divided into thre'e
ma] or classes according to the method of loading. .. The' classes are simple
compression, simple tension and compound compression-tension. Although they
are loaded .in different .ways, all three types function as a result, of compression of the liquid in the cylinders. Schematics of the tension and compression types are shown in Figure 6-71. The compound spring is merely a more
complex mechanical 'combination of the two basic types. The tension type is
the more common. in protective construction applications. The cylinders are
often fitted with ported heads to guide the piston and provide damping.
Damping can also be provided through the ,addition of drag plates to ,the .piston
rods.
Liquid springs 'are very compact devices with high,nearly linear, spring
rates. They 'can be adjusted tocompensate:for.-load changes, areself"restoring and can absorb larger'amounts of energy. They are highly sensitive to ,'".
changes in temperature and. fluid' volume changes. Because' liquid' springs
normally operate at high pressures, high quality, close'tolerance seals are
required around the'piston. Friction between the seal and piston provides
appreciable damping and increases the spring rate f~om 2 to,5percent. Liquid
springs are high pressure vessels requiring high 'quality materials and pre6-176
TH 5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR88-22
cisiim. machine work,. and as a result, they are expensive.' 'However, they are
difficult to equal as' compact energy absorption devices.
6-50.6. Other Devices'
The helical, torsion, pneumatic and liquid springs are the more common types
of isolators for larger masses. There are other devices especially suited for
particular applications. and .smallerloads. Some' of these isolators are
discussed 'below.
6-50.6.2. Belleville Springs
Be Ll.evf l.l,e. 'springs, also, called Belleville washers or coned-disc springs, are
essentially spring steel washers which have been formed into a slightly
conical shape. A typical Belleville" spring is illustrated in Figure 6"72.
The main advantage of Belleville springs over other types of springs is the
ability to support'large loads at small',deflections with minimum space
requirements in the direction of loading, They are useful in applications
requiring limited shock attenuation and as back up systems to reduce shock in
the event of bottoming'of coil springs. They are relatively inexpensive and
readily avai Lab Ie-dn capacities up to 60,000' pounds .. Changes 'in 'loading
conditions are accommodated by the addition or removal of units..
"
..
6-50.6.3. Flat Springs

A flat spring is simply a steel beam or plate whose physical dimensions and
support conditions are varied to' provide the desired force displacement
relationship. The two basic configurations' are .rhe simple spring with one,
element and leaf springs with multiple' elements. Flat springs normarly
require only a limited' amount of space' in' the direction of displacement and
provide li~ear~ non-strain-rate sensitive and self-restoring,spring. They'
require little .or no maintenance. Single',element flat springs, 'can be considered to have no damping while leaf springs will exhibit some damping due to
the friction between individual' elements.
6-50.6.4. Solid Elastomer Springs
Solid elastomer spr~ngs,are made from rubberlike materials. They are often
called shock mounts because of their wide use in shock isolation applications.
They are normally used in medium to light duty applications and represent an.
economical .so Lut.Lon .co the isolation of small items of equipment. " However,
these springs 'will allow only small displacements. These springs are' fabricated' from a wide variety of natural and synthetic -rubbers and compounds and.
in numerous sizes ,and shapes. to satisfy a wide range 'of applications. ;. Because
of the range in capacity and.characteristics of colIlIliercially available units;'
only'in unusual cases is it necessary to design a unit.
In most applications, the solid elastomer spring will require little space and
exhibits good weight" to energy storage ratios.' Use of these spr Ings vrequt res
consideration of the operating environment. The desirable properties of some
elast9mers can be"significantly 'degraded'when exposed to low or high temperatures, sunlight; ozone, water.or petroleum pr'cduc t s .
6-177
rn ~-!3QO/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
The response of elastomeric springs .is nonlinear in most applications because

of the nonlinear stress-strain properties of elastomers'. ,.The springs are,'
self-damping because of the viscoel~stic properties of the elastomers. They
are almost always. in compression because of bonding limitations .' These
springs will only. permit comparatively small displacements.
'
'.,
6-51. Hardmounted Systems

Some.item~ 'of equipment.do not require shock isolation .because the predicted.
motions at their point of attachment to the supporting ,structure does ,not ,

exceed their shock tolerance. Those items can normally be har dmount ed.rco the.
supporting structure. A hardmount is a method of attachment which has not
been specifically designed to provide a significant reduction in the input
motions to the equipment. Since all methods of attachment exhibit some flexibility, there is no precise division between shock isolators and hardmounts. "
Both types of devices will modify input motions. to some degree. , However,' the'
modification of input motions produced by hardmounts will generally be small
while shock isolators can greatly affect these motions.
In contrast "to shock isolation systems, hardmount.ed rsys cems will normally
exhibit natural frequencies much higher than those corresponding to, .the .lower
modes 'of vibration of 'the supporting structure. Although this characteristic
offers .the advantage of' reduced rattlespace, it also provides for the more
efficient transmission of higher. frequency: components' .of .che support, structure, '
motion to the attached item. Thus, it would appear that a more.exact structural analysis is required for hardmounted systems in order to include higher
modes of vibration. In practice, the need for exact analyses 'is at least
'
partially offset by higher factors of safety in mount design and equipment
shock tolerance. However, such an approach can lead to unrealistic attachment'
designs. A more practical approach is to ,choose,'or design, attachments'which
limits the funda~enta~ frequency of the hardmounted system. A lower frequency
system provides some attenuation of higher frequency'input moti9ns, .and reduces the possibility of resonance' with high frequency. motions resulting from
stress wave reflections within structural' elements.- Although the choice of a
natural frequency ~ill depend on the properties of the supporting'structure
and the..har dmourrted 'equipment,' fundamental frequencies in the range of 10 to
1000 cycles per second are reasonable for most applications. The approach,~'
chosen for hardmount design is normally a combination of higher safety factors
and the use of lower frequency systems. The design will be based upon'
considerations of cost, importance of the item supported, the size and weight
of the item, ,and the consequence' of failure of the .attachment. system,c.
.;.
The use of, shock spectra.to define the 'input motions of hardmount systems is
considered adequate for final design of all' simple hardmount systems of a noncritical nature. ' It is also 'considered adequate for preliminary design. of
critical systems 'and those whose representation as a single degree of freedom
system is questionable. However, it is recommended that the final design be'
performed using a more exact dynamic analysis wherever practical.
6-52. Attachments
6-52.10 Introduction
"
In a shelter type structure subjected.to air blast and ground shock effects,
all interior contents must be firmly'attached to thestructure'. This attach6-178
,"
, r,
TK 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

ment insures that the building contents will not be dislodged and become a
source of injury to personnel or damage to critical equipment. The building
contents would include not only equipment which is either shock isolated or
hardmounted (attached directly to structure) but also the building utilities
as well as interior partitions and hung ceilings. The building utilities
would include all piping (such as process, potable water, sanitary, fire protection, etc.), HVAC ducts, electrical cables, light fixtures and electrical
receptacles.
6-52.2. Design Loads

An object subjected to a shock loading produces an inertial force which acts
through its center of gravity. The m~gnitude of this force is given by:
F - Wa
where
F
W
a ~
inertial force
Weight of object
acceleration in g's
Accelerations. may be ,imparted to the object in one or more directions producing inertial forces.in the. respective directions. These inerti~l forces
are resisted by the reactions developed at,the object's supports'. 'All inertial forces are assumed to be acting on'the object concurrently.! The support
reactions are obtainedby'cons1dering the static equilibrium of the system.
6-179
y
.
,.
1/ / , /
1/
:~
>
:
1/
:
1/ .... ..
.... .
L'
;.:,
"
J7
_,I
...
~
~
;.
1/
/
eC -
.1/
~'.".
. """YVy
A'S
1/ L..u.... .;
1/
........ 1/1/
1/
:=
.
'
1/
,
., .
.'
'
:
. :~
...... 1/
-""',,.,,- ,
.'
~ "
Figure 6-65
///
Shock isolation system
6-180
xP.
:
"
EQUIPMENT
C.G.
HARD
ELASTIC
~ ELe:MENTS~
STRUCTURE
(0 )
EQUIPMENT
C.G.
( b) ,
r.
EQUIPMENT
1
PIVOT;ED JOINTS
. HORIZONTAL
(TYp..)
ISOLAT;:
,.
C.G.
FLOOR
PLAT ORM
b'?"'/.'l77.,L,.-7'7":""""'''7''''"''?'''7'''TT7''7';,..,J-;~7''7';''7" r;
VERTICAL
( C)
ISOLATOR
Figure 6-66
Bas e-rnoun ted isolation systems conf.t qur-a t ton
6-181
HARD STRUCTURE
"-'il~>...>...>-:....>...>,;w....>..:.....:....::..~~~-'
SWIVEL
JOINTS
ISOLATOR
EQUIPMENT
e.G.
(a) ,
/
L1NKA GE---..
SWIVE L
JOINT
"""'l
..
ISOLATOR
: i"~
SWIVEL JOINT
....J .....
BASE FIXED
ISOLA TOR
HARD STRUCTURE
C.G.
"
STRUCTURAL
EXTENSION
EQUIPMENT
....
FLOOR ~-..:i"--
PLATFORM
.-
,...
( b)
Figure 6-67 Overhead pendulum shock isolation systems using platforms

6182
CENTER OF GRAVITY MOUNT PREVENTS

ROCKING
UNDER SHOCK
VERTICAL
SHOCK MOUNT
r
HORIZONTAL SHOCK MOUNT

I'
"
'"
,~;"Figure
,.
"
6-68' Helical ccmp re s s i on spr i nq mounts

t
6-183
"
BALL JOINTS
SUPPORT STRUT AND

DAMPER ASSEMBLY.
PLATFORM
TORSION
LEVER
TORSION SPRING
SIDE
VIEW
TORSION SPRING
FRONT VIEW
Figure 6-69 Typical torsion spring 'shock isolation system
6-184
v,
V
V
A/
SURGE TANK
Ps.V s
CYLINDER
CHAMBER
PC I Vc
x},'
..
, .'
.'
,,
...
~ .Pi:'V2
';I
/SURGE TANKL
~1,VS
,..
"
....
A.)
.
..'1
AI./'
Figure 6-70
SURGE TANKr
I
PI,V S
PI ,VI
Sc~~maticCof singlea~Jdouble actirig'pneumatic cylinders

6-185
"
SEAL (TYP.)
FLUID
FLUID
.
PISTON ROD
~,
..,,
CYLINDER, ,
.Io )
CYLINDER-':
....
..
"",
PISTON ROD
"
COMPRESSIQN
(b) TENSION
"
, .
~."
-.
.~ . >.:~~
."'
6-186
.. ,
I'
ty~
I
I
~
0
(Q) SERIES
(b) PARALLEL
.I
(e) PARALLEL-SERIES
Figure 6-72 Belleville springs
6-187
TK 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
APPENDIX 6A
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC.P-397/AFR'88 c22
Problem 6A-I
Masonry Wall Design
Problem: Design a reinforced masonry wall for an exterior blast load.

Procedure: ;;
Step 1. .
Establish design parameters:'
'L'
\
~a.
r;
b.
Structural configuration including geometry, support,condi-
tions and type of wall (i.e. reusable or non-reusable).

\
"
'"
Step 2.
. Select masonry unit s Lzer and the size ",md type of reinforcement.
Assume the distance between the tension and compression reinforcement (d c)' Also determine the static design stresses. for the
masonry unit and the reinforcement (Section 6,8.1) . . The average
yield stress of reinforcement is increased 10 percent.
Step 3.
Calculate the dynamic designstress of the reinforcement, using

the static stresses from Step 2 and the dynamic increase factors
from Section 6-8 ..2,(For joint' reinforced masonry construction the
~r
j"
compressive strength of the concrete may be ignored.
e.
6-8.3) ..
See Section
-,
Step 4.
leFor the' size and type'of reinforcement selected in Step 2,

calculate the area of reinforcement per unit width of thewall.
Using the value of d c from Step 2, the dynamic design strength
; from Step 3 and. the area of reinforcement from above, determine
! the ultimate. moment capacity of the wall (Eq. 6-2) .
Step 5.
. , Determine the ultimate resistance of .the wall using the ultimate

,moment 'capacity of Step 4 and the equations of ~able 3-1 (if the
wall is'a one~way spanning element) or Table 3-2 or 3-3 (if the
wall spans two directions).
Step 6.
From Table 6-3. find the moment of inertia of the net section In'
Calculate .t.he moment of inertia" of the cracked section I c' using
Equation 6-7 and the value'of d c 'from Step 2.' Determine the
average moment of inertia, using the values of I g and I c from
c.above and Equation 6"6."
'
..
Step 7'.
Calculate the modulus of elasti'city of, the masonry unit Em from

-, Equation 6 -1 and the masonry unit strength of Step" 2.
,', t
Step 8,
If the wall spans one direction only, use the average moment of
inertia from Step 6, the modulus of elasticity from Step' 7 and the
equations from Table 3-8, to find the equivalent elastic stiffness. For a two-way spanning wall, use the methods of Section 313 to calculate the equivalent elastic stiffness.
GA-l .
TK 5-l300/NAVFACP-397/AFR 88-22
Step
9.
Determine the equivalent elastic. deflection using the ultimate

resistance (Step 5), the equivalent stiffness (Step 8) and
Equation 3-36.
'..
Step 10.
Find the load-mass factor KLM, for the elastic, elasto-plastic and
plastic ranges from Table 3-12 or 3-13.
Average the values'of
KLM for the elastic and elasto-plastic ranges .. Average that value
with the KLM for the plastic range to find the value of KLM to be
used for the element. Calculate the unit mass of the masonry unit
and multiply the unit mass by KLM to obtain the effective unit
mass of thewall.
Step 11.
Calculate the natural period of vibration from Equation 3-60, the

effective mass from Step 10 and the equivalen~ stiffness from Step
8.
Step' 12.
Determine response .chart parameters:

.,
a.
Peak dynamic loading P (Step 1).
b.
Ultimate resistance r u(Step.5).
c.
Duration of load'T (Step 1)'.
d.
Natural period of vibration ~N (Step 11).
! '}. ,
Calculate the ratio of ultimate resistance to peak dynamic loading

(rufP) and duration of load to natural period (T/T N). Using these
r at Lo's, and the appropriate figures (Figs.-3-54 through 3-266)
determine the ductility ratio .x,./X E. .'
Step 13.
Compute the maximum deflection x,. by multiplying. the,.ductility

ratio by the elastic deflection of Step 9." From 'Table 3-5. (for a
one-way spanning wall. For a two-way spanning wall use Table 3-6)
and the value of x,. , find the. maximum support rotation. ,Find the'
maximum r ot at Lon. permitted from Table. 6-2 and compare with the
rotation calculated above. If rotationis larger than that
permitted, repeat steps 1 through 13.
Step 14.
Determine the ultimate shear'stress at dc/2 from the support.

Using Equation 6-4 or 6-5, compute the area of shear reinforcement
required for the above shear stress.
Step 15.
Using x,./XE and T/T N (both values from step 12) find. the rebound
resistance from Figure 3-268. With rebound resistance and the
equations of Table 3-9, 3-10 or 3-11, 'calculate the rebound shear.
Then compute the area of anchor reinforcing required using the
rebound shear from above and the dynamic strength of 'the rein'forcement from step 3.
.
.'
6A-2
TK 5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR '88-22
Example GA-l
Required:
Masonry Wall Design
Design a joint reinforced masonry wall supported by steel columns

for an exterior blast load.;.'
Solution:
Step 1.'
Given:
Pressur~"time
a.
loading (Fig. GA-l) .
Wa!l spans in 'one direction only, i~' rigidl~ s~pported at

both ends, and has a clear span between ,colUmns of 150
inches. 'The wall is part of a reusable ~tructure.
b.
.".
Step 2.
Use 12" ,wide hollow concrete masonry units and ladder type
reinforcing with No. 8 Gage side rods and No. 9 Gage cross rods
16" o .c . Ass.:mie: dc - 10" for this ,tYP.e o'f reinforcing. For hollow
concset~ m~sonry units the static c~mpressive,stress (f'm) is 1350
P~~'~';,F0F. joint~~einforcement the yield stress of '70,000 psi is
'incr'eased 10 percent to.'17, 000 psi.'
,,'
Step 3.
Calculate .
dynamic
design stresses
!
'.+
,
So"
.'..
-i
'of
the reinforcement:
Dynamic 'Inc!~~se factors

~.' ' ','v
.r
b.
"
flex~r~: 1.17'
shear:
....
",
1. 00,,;
,
.'
Dynamic strengths
ftexure f dy
shear
Step 4.
"
1.17 X 77;000
f dy -,l.O'X 77,000
90,090 psi
77, 000 psi
Determine the ultimate moment capacity of the wall.

a.
Calculate the area of, reinforcement per unit width of the

wall.
Use one layer of reinforcement between every masonry unit
joint, therefore 8 inches o.c.
As - 0.0206/8 - 0.0026 in 2/in
b.
Ultimate moment capacity (Eq. 6-2).
,Mu -
As f dy dc - 0.0026 X 90,090 X 10 - 2342 in-lbs/in
6A-3
TN 5-1300/NAVFAC:P-397/AFR 88-22
,.,"
'-"1 1 .'~
,
Figure 6A-l,.
"
"
'
"
100,0
TIME
"
(MS)
',r
1
.if; ..
(0)
-, '
'
'
.
. ' ,1,
COMMERCIALL Y,
AVAILABLE
'
REBOUND ANCHOR
'..'vIELDED TO .COLUMN
EACH COURSE,'
SUPPORT
LADDER ,TYPE
REINFORCING
" "~ADD'L'
SHEAR REINF,
FILL '\JITHCO'NCRETE
.L-~~~~~~~~rr=;~~~~CO~LU!:1N
'.t
CMU
,.
(e)
t .
-r .
"
'I
\'
.'-; ,
'"
e-r
6A-4 ,. "
'
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFB. 88-22

Step 5.
Calculate.ultimate resistance (Table 31)
- 8(2342 +, 2342)
- 1.66 psi
Step 6.
Find the average moment of inertia.

a.
Moment of inertia of net section (Table 63).

For a 12 inch unit
b.
Moment of inertia of cracked section (Eq. 6-7).

I c - 0.005 X' d c 3
~\
- 0.005 X 10 3)( 12
- 5.0
c.
in4/in
:.
Average moment of inertia (Eq. 66).
- (83.3 + 5.0) / 2
- 44.2 in4/in
Step 7.
Compute modulus of elasticity of the masonry unit (Eq. 61).

~
- 1000 f'm
- 1000 X 1350
- 1.35 X 10 6 psi
Step 8.
Determine the equivalent elastic stiffness (Table 3-8).
KE - (307 ~Ia) / L4
(307 X 1.35 X 10 6 X 44.2) / 150 4
- 36.19 psi/in
TN 5-1300/NAVFAC, P-397/AFR;ft8-22'
Step 9.
Calculate the equivalent elastic 'deflection. (Eq. 3-36).'
Step 10.
0.046 'in
-,
"e
Calculate the effective unit mass of the wall.

a.
Find the average load-mass factor,K LM (Table 3-12)

Elastic KLM - 0.77
Elasto-plastic KLM- 0.78
I .
Plastic KLM
0.66
- , '1'
For limited plastic deflections
. ' :.
...
'
KLM - [(0.77 + 0.78)/2 + 0.66]/2 - 0.72
b.
I.
Determine the unit mass of wall.

Using Table 6-1
:..
[(16 X 12) -2(4.25 X 9)J
w- - - - - - - -_ _
X 150 pcf
0.627 psi
16
-e
\.1:
c.
0.627
m- - ---...,.-------.,. - 1622.7 psi-ms 2 / in
g
32.2 X 12 x 10- 6
,
Calculate effective unit mass.
-0.72 X 1622.7
1168.3 psi-ms 2/in
Step 11.
,
Determine the natural period of vibration (Eq. 3-60).
.,
TN - 2"
(me / KE) 1/
- 2" (1168.3/36.19)1/2
- 35.7 ms
"
'-
".
'
6A-6 ~.:
TK 5-l300/NAvFA:C P-397;1AFR 88-22

Step 12.
Determine the response-' of the wa11.a.
Calculate design chart parameter~;

T/T N - 100.0/35.7 - 2.80
ru/P - 1.66/2.0 - 0.83
b.
From Figure 3-54

,>,
Step 13.
'
Check support rotation.

a.
Compute maximum deflection.

Xm .." IXE
- 8.0 X 0.046
- 0.368 in
b.
Calculate support rotation (Table 3-5)

tan- l(2Xm/L)
-e
tan- l(2 X 0.368/150)

0.28
.. r,'_
.c
, c. ". 'Coinijare' rotation 'with c rLt e r'La..
.-
From Table 6-2
e
Step 14.
,.
0.5" >0.28
O. K:
Design shear reinforcement.

a.
Calculate shear force d c/2 from support.
ru (L-d c)
2
1. 66 (150-10)
2
- 116.2 lb/in
6A-7 :
-,
TN 5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/APa 8822
b.
Find net area of section from Table 6-1,

An
- 2b X Face thickness/b,
-
c.
2 X 8 X 1. 5/8
Compute ultimate shear stress (Eq ; 6-3)

V
- Vu/An
','
116.2
--3.0
d.
38.73 psi
"
,.
.Ju
t,' ,
Find area of shear reinforcement required (Eq. '6-4)

Assume s - 4".
,
, tfy
38.73 X 8 X 4
0.85 X ,77,.000
- 0.0189 in 2
Use No. 8 Gage
Use 3 legs of No. 8 gage wire at

Step 15.
~"
Design rebound anchor ties.

a.
Find rebound resistance ,force.

T/T N -
2.8
Xm/XE - 8.0
From Figure 3-268
r-/r u - 0.47
r
- 0.47 X 1.66
- 0.78 psi
:.
6A-8 .
o.c. between each cross rod.
TK'5"1300!NAVFAC'P-397/AFR!88-22
Calc~late rebo~nd shear at support:
b.
I ,
Co
r ' L.
Vr -
.'r,'r
J'.
:.! .
"
.'
0.78 X 150
.;'
- 58.5 lb/in
2
c.
Required' area of anchor reinforcing

A~
'.
rV
58;5
f dy
90,090
0.00065 ' in 2/in

l" ."",
y
Use one anchor be tweerr-eve ry masonry unit joint, therefore 8" o .c.
....
0.00065 X 8,
"
, .
s.
.....
e...:
0.0052 in 2/anchor
.,
,"
"'.1
.~
Use
:-
-.'i::
.'
'.;'~
diameter triangular ties,
3/l6~
.'
.,'
...
... .
~
'}
..
"
...
"
:.'
i." _
.,~.
'.
,"
1..
'.
~
"
"
..:
t .
-~
'IL"
.'
.~,~?~~'
" I
,"
'i"
... 'i
.. ,
5 ,"
.': ,
..
'.
6A-9
TIl 5-l300/NAVFAC'P-397/AFR':88-22,
Problem 6A-2 Design of Prestressed'Recast Element

Problem:
Design a prestressed recast element for a given blast load.
Procedure:
Step 1.

a.
b.
Material strength.
c.
Span
d.
Static loads.
. ,e.
Step 2.
.,
J:
le~gth.
Deflection crit;eria;
Select a standard recast section from the'PCI Design Handbook or

Also sele~t a ~tandard strand ~attern.
manu~a~~urer's catalogs ..
Step'3.
Determine dynamic increase factors for concrete and reinforcement

from paragraph 6-12. Increase the static des'ign stress of the
reinforcing bars and 'welded wire fabric 10 percent for the average
yield stress. Calculate the dynamic design design stresses using
the above DIF and the static stresses.
Step 4.
From Chapter 4 and a unit weight of concrete equal to 150 pcf,

calculate the modulus of elasticity for concrete. With the above
modulus for concrete and those for reiriforcing bars and prestressing tendons, calculate the modular ratio.
NOTE: If the section has a flange (e.g. a single or double tee section)
it 'must be designed according to the principles of Chapter 4. The
flange is.a one-way, non-prestressed slab spanning between webs.
Thecritical section is usually a cantilever.
Step 5.
Calculate the properties of the section:

'a ,
Gross area.
b.
Gross moment of inertia.
c.
Unit weight.
d.
Distance from extreme compression fiber to the centroid of

the prestressing tendon, ~.
e.
Area of prestressing tendons.
f.
Prestressed reinforcement ratio (Eq. 6-23).
6A-IO
TM 5 c1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88022
Step 6.
Given the type-of prestressing tendon, determine Y

p.
Using the
dynamic concrete stress from step 3, calculate B

Using Equation
6-27, ,6-28 or 6-29 and the values of yp and
from above,
calculate the average stress in the prestressing tendon. .
Bi
Step 7.:
With the reinforcement ratio from step 5e, the average stress in
the prestressing tendon and the value of Bl from step 6, and the
dynamic strength of materials from step 3, check that 'reinforcement ratios are less than the maximum permitted by Equation 6-30
or 6-31.
Step 8.
,Using the area of reinforcement and the:val~e of,dpc from step 5,

the dynamic stresses of step 3, and the average stress in the
'prestressing tendon'from step 6, calculate the,moment capacity of
the element (eqs .. 6-20 and 6-21).
\.
Step 9.
:t,
',With the equatiLons co f I'ab Le 3-1 ,and the moment. capacity o'f step 8,
i
calculate the ultimate unit resistance.
As recast buildings are
only subject to'low blast pressures, the st~tic loads become '
significant'. To determine ,the resistance available' to resist the
blast load, subtract ,the static dead and live loads from the
ultimate 'unit r e s i.s t ance ;,
Step 10.
Calculate the moment of inertia of,the cracked section Ie' using

Equation 6-33. the modular ratio from step 4 and the area of
'... prestressing tendons, the value of d p and the prestressed r e i.nforcement ratio from step 5. Using this value of I c and,the gross
moment ofinertia..of'step' 5b, find the average moment of inertia
. from' Equation 6 - 32.,
.~.
Step 11.
Using the equations of Table 3-'8, the modulus of elasticity for

concrete from step 4 and the average moment of inertia from step
10, calculate the'elastic stiffness of the section .
.-'
Step 12.
Determine the lo~d-mass' factorK LM, in the elastic range for the
'appropriate Loadf.ng.rcond t tion from Table, 3-12. Also, calculate
the unit mass of the section and multiply it by KLM to obtain the
effective unit mass of the' 'element.
'
Step 13.
With Equation 3-60,- the 'effective mass from step 12 and the
e~astic
stiffness from step II, calculate the natural period of
, vibration TN' of the section.'

Step 14.
a.
Duration of load T (step 1).
b.
Natural period of vibration TN (step 13).
~J
... !
( _
"
Calculate the ratio T/TN.andusing this ratio, determine'the

dynamic load factor DLF from Figures 3-49 through 3-53. Section
must remain elastic, and hence the, actual resistance obtained.by
the element (which is equal to the peak dynamic load from step 1
multipl~ed by the DLF) must be less than the resistance available.
6A-11
TIl 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR88-22

If the section does not r~main' elasti2 steps' i,through'~4'must be
,repeated.
NOTE: For bilinear loads, calculate the ratio of the'peak dynamic load'p
to the resistance available. Using P/r u and the value of T/T N
calculated above, ente~ the appropriate response chart ,(Figs. 3-6~
.tihr ough 3-266) and f Lndvche ductility .r at Lo ~/XE'
For the
section to remain elastic the ductility ratio must be less than or
equal to one.
,Step 15.
Calculate the deflection" of the element ~ by "adding' the dead and

,live loads ,(step '1), and the resistanc~ obtained by' the structure
.. (step 14) and dividing by the elastic stiffness (step 11). Using
the deflection and the' equations of. Table 3-5. determine the
support rotation. Compare the. rotation with deflection 'criteria
of step Ie. If comparison is satisfactory continue with step 16.
If comparison is .no c satisfactory, repeat steps ,I through 15;
,
Step 16.
Calculate the elastic deflection Xm' ,from Equation 3-36, using the
ultimate resistance of step 9 and the elastic stiffness .of step
11: Then calculate the ductility ratio ~/XE.using the'value of
~ from step 15.
With the ductility ratio and the ratio:,T/T N from
step 14, enter Figure 3-268 and find the percentage of rebound.
Extrapolate if necessary.
_
Step 17.
Find the required rebound resistance by multiplying the ultimate

unit resistance by the ratio from step 16 and ,subtracting- the dead
load. In no case should che required rebound resistance be less
than half the resistance ava t LabLe during 'the loading phas e , With
equations of Table 3-1 and the required rebound resistance, find
the required -rebound moment capacity.
Step 18.
..
;
Step 19.
.'
Calculate an approximate value of d- and the.'amount of concrete

strength available for rebound (Eq. 6-35). Assume a depth of the
equivalent rectangular stress block and, by a trial and error
method, using Equation 6-34 find the area of rebound reinforcement
required. Check 'that,theamount'of 'reinforcement does 'not exceed
the maximum permitted by Equation 6-36 or 6-37.
Calculate the shear stress at ~ away from the support. Also
'.
calculate the allowable shear'stress on an unreinforced web. using
the dynamic design stress, (step 16). Design the shear'reinforcement.
':
:.:.
Step 20.
Calculate the shear at the support Vd from the equations of Table

3-9 and the value of the total'load. Calculate the maximum
allowable direct shear using the dynamic concrete strength.
Compare the allowable shear with Yd'
size of-the section must be increased.
If Vd is greater than the
,-
Step 21.
Check if ,section 'is adequate for service loads using the PCI
Design Handbook'andthe ACI Code.
6A-12
?' .
"
'
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC P-31l7/AFB."88~22
Example 6A-2
Required:
Design of a Prestressed B.eeast B.oo! Pariel
Desigri a prestressed recast roof subject to an overhead blast

load. Use a double tee section.
Solution:
Step 1.
Given:
a.
Pressure-time loading (Fig 6A-2).,
b.
Material strengths
"
Concrete:
f' c - ' 5000 psi";
'Prestressing Steel: f pu, -,270,000 psi

fpy/f pu - 0.85
Welded Wire Fab,dc:"
f y .. 65,.000 P'sJ
,Reinforcing Bars
c.
f y - 60,000 psi
Spa~
d.
length is 40 ft. - 480 in.

,
I
"
Live ,load iS,15 psf
e.
Maximum ductility ratio < 1.0
Maximum support rotation < 2

Step 2.
Select a double tee ,section and strand pattern.
Try 8DT24 (Fig. 6A2)

Section properties from PCI Design Handbook:
A - 401 in2
I
Yt - 6.85 in
- 20,,985 in2
..
e' - ~'-
\,"
'
--
W - 418 lb/ft.
~
Try strand pattern 48~S."two 1/2 incn diameter ;traight'str'ands in

each tee.
"
'. ,
.' !
Area of each strand,~' 0
\S3
in 2.
e - 14.15 in
6A-13
TM S.1300/NAVFAC P397/AFR 8822
Figure 6A-2
"Vi
c,
1.1 ps:
TIME
(1'15)
43,9
(0.)
PRESSURE-TIME LOADING
8'-0'
I
2' J
2 4'
I 5;: I
\oIELDED \oIIRE"\
FABRIC
*!
f-_
e
""
. .
\--.- !-------- 1-- ... ~.\.

.~
..'"
tL
.tI.
,.
."
CENTROID OF
PRESTRESSING
STEEL
..
"
..
"
:- f-
I.-
4'-0#
DOUBLE TEE SECTION

(b)
CENTROID
OF SECTION
3 3//
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88"22

Step 3.
Determine design stresses.

a.
Dynamic increase factors:

Concrete flexure:
1.19' '
r'
Concrete diagonal tension:
1.00
'Concrete direct shear:
1.10
J..
'1.00 '
Prestressing Steel:
Welding Wire' Fabric:
1.10
-!
'):...
'J
1.17
1;'_
! .'_
Reinforcing Steel shear:

b.
'J
:. I" ' .
. ~ ~ ,~
Reinforcing Steel flexure:

l
....
1.00
Dynamic strengths.
Concrete
flexure:
f'dc - 1.19 X 5,000 - 5950 psi
- diagonal tension: f'dc - 1;0 oX 5,000
~'5000
psi
f'dc- 1.1 ~c5,OOO -'5500 1psi
direct shear:
Prestressing Steel:
f dy - 1.0 X 270,000 - 270,000 psi
Welded Wire Fabric:
f dy - L10 x.i :10 X 65,000 - 78,650 psi
Reinforcing Bars
Step 4.
- flexure:
f dy'- 1.17 X: 1.10 X' 60,000 '- 77,220 psi
shear:
f dy - 1. O:X 1.10 X .60,000 - 66,000 psi
Calculate modulus of elasticity,'and modular ratio'.

a.
Concrete
_ 33w 1.5 (f' )1/2
c
_ 33(150)1.5(5000)1/2
i
4.29 X 10 6 psi
6A-15
.,
TH
51300~AVFAC
b.
P-397/AFR 88-22.
Steel
,.
Es - 29.0 X 10 6 psi
n -
Es
29.0 X 10 6
Ec
4.29 X 10 6
---
- 6.76
NOTE: The flange is designed in accordance with the. principles of

Chapter 4. Considering the flange a one-way non-prestressed slab,
the cantilever portion was found to be critical. In order to
remain elastic the flange thickness must be increased to 3 inches.
The reinforcement is. two layers of we~ded wire fabric; 6 X 6 W1.4 X W2.0 in the top and 6 X 6 - W1.4 X W1.4 in the bottom.
"
Step 5.
.'
Calculate the section properties of the double tee with a 3 inch

flange ..
a.
new A - 497 in 2
b.
new Yt - 6.43 in
new I g - 25180 in4
X 150,pcf/12~
c.
w,- 497
d.
~ -J.85 +14'.15 - 22.0 in
- 43.1 1b/in
,.
Aps - 4 X 0.153 - 0.612 in 2

f.
. Prestressed reinforcement ratio (Eq. 6-23)

Pp -
Step 6.
~s/b~
- 0.612/(96 X 22.0) - 0.000290
Determine the average stress in the prestressing tendon.

0.85
so
0.40
a;
f py /f pu -
b.
8 1 - 0.85 - 0.05(5950-4000)/1000 _ 0.7525
c.
Average stress (Eq. 6-27)
y -
f,. -f,+ 0.40 (0.000290 X 270,000)

- 270,000 [ 1 (.7525) (5950)
fps
- 268,111 psi
6A-16.
TK 5-1300/NAVFAC p C397/AFR88-22
Step 7.
Check maximum reinforcement ratio (Eq. 6-30),

ppfps/f"dc~:
0;.36 Bl
c
ppfps /f'dc
0.0131
0.000290 X 268,111/5950.,
. ~:0.2709~> 0.0131
Step 8.
O.K.
Calculate moment capacity of beam.

From Equation 6-21
~sfps
0.34 in
0.85f'dC b.
0;.85 X 5950 X
c - a/B l ... 0.3{>/0.. 7525
-.
96!~
... :,0,.45 < 3 ..0 in thick flange
Hence the neutral axis is within the flange and 'the section can be
analyzed as a rectangular section. If the neutral axis had
extended into the web, a strain compatibility analysis would be
required.
. J
From Equation 6-20

;
r ,.'
l\, - ~sfps(~ - a/2)

- 0.612 X 268.111 (22.0 - 0.34/2)
l\, - 3582 k- in
,
Step 9.
Find the resistance available to resist blast load.

roo
a.
Find the ultimate resistance (Table 3-1) .

.J
r u - 8l\,/L 2
- 8 X 3582/480 2
- 0.124 k/in
- 124 lbs/in
b.
Resistance available for blast load

'
.i."-;..
..
"
.., I"
ravail - r u - DL - LL
'
- 124 - 43,1 , (15 psf X 8 ft/12)
v....
"
vr
~:
- 124 - 43.1.- 10.0

- 70.9 lb/in
:
,~
'.
"
TM'5-1300/NAVFAC
Step 10,
~-397/AFR,
88-22
Determine the average moment of inertia,

a,
Moment of inertia of cracked section (Eq,

I c - ~s~2 [lC(p )1/2
- 6,76 X 0,612(22,0)2
b,
'6~33);
i
[1-(0,00029)1/2]
1970 in4
Average moment of inertia '(Eq" 6-32)

Ia -
{Ig + I c)/2
,'
(25180 + 1970)/2-'- 13575 in4

Step 11,
Using equations of Table 3-8, ,'calculate the e1asi:'icstiffness.

384 X 4,29 X 10 6 X 13575
',' " 5
480 4
84,25 1b/in/in
Step 12,
Calculate the effective mass

a,
Load-mass factor (Table 3-12)

In the elastic range
KU{ -
b.
0.78
Unit mass
m - wig - 43.1/(32.2 X 12)
- 0.1116 1b_s 2/in2
- 11.16 X 10 4 1b-ms 2/in2
c.
Effective mass
me -
KU{
0.78 X 11.16 X 10 4
>, ",
- 8.70 X 10 4 1b-ms 2/in2

Step 13,
Calculate the natural period of vibration (Eq. 3-60).

TN - 2" (me / KE)1/2
- 2" (8.70 X 10 4/84.25)1/2
6A-18 ,
-, 201. 9 ms
TM 5-l300/NAVFAC P~397/AFR 88~22
Step 14.
Determine response of beam.

T - duration of load - 43.9 ms (step'lal
TN - natural period - 201.9 ms (step 13)
.:r,
T/TN - 43.9/201.9 - 0.217

From Figure 3-49, DLF - 0.65
Actual resistance obtained r - DLF X P
rav~il' -
P - peak dynamic load

1.1 psi -(step la)
0;;.
r - 0.65-X '(1.1 X'96)

. - 68.4 lb/in < 70.9 lb/in'(raval.l'
Step 15.
step 9)
Check rotation.
a.
Total load on beam - (DLF X p) + DL + LL

68.4 + 43.1 + 10.0
- 121.5 lb/in
b.
Maximum deflection:
~
- (121.5 lb/in)/K E
121.5/84.25
- 1.44 in
c.
Support rotation (Table 3- 5).....
e-
tan-l(2~/L)
tan- l(2 X 1.44/480)
- 0.34
Step 16.
< 2
O.K.
Calculate percent of rebound;

a.'
Calculate. elastic deflection (Eq. 3-36)

XE - ru/KE
." ,.124/84.25
- 1.47 in
6A:-19
O.K.
TH
88-22
. . 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR
.
.
b.
Calculate ductility ratio.

j.I
,I'
x,./XE
- 1.44/1.47 .:
0.98
c.
...
I'
Find percent of rebound from Figure 3-268.

x,./XE - 0.98 and.T/T N - .0.216
_.
j,
~,
..
/0.
r-/r - 1.0
so. 100 percent rebound,
Step 17.
Determine required rebound moment capacity.

a.
.Required rebound resistance
I'
'
I.'
- r- - DL >
rreq
-
6~.4
.. "
,-
ravai1/2
- 43.1
- 25.3 1b/in
35.4 > 25.3 1b/in
ravai1/2 - 70.9/2
Use 35.4 1b/in or considering a single tee

- 17.7 1b/in
b.
"
Required moment capacity (Table 3.-1).
Mu- -
rreq-
L2/8
- 17.7 X 480 2/8
MuStep 18.
~ 509,760 in-1b/stem
Determine rebound reinforcement.

a.
Approximate value of <!-.

h - cover - t wi r e ~ ttie
'.
- 25 - 0.625. - .0.135 - 0.375 '-0.5/2

- 23.62 in
b.
Rebound concrete strength

f - 0.47f'dc
0.47 X 5950.
6A-20 .
2796.5 psi
c.
Requ~red
reboun4 reinforcement
Assume a - 2.0 in
As- - Mu-/[fdy(d- - a/2)
(Eq. 6-34)
- 509,760/[77;220(23.62 - 2.0/2)
- 0.29 in 2
a -
(0.47f'dc)b
0.29 X 77,220
- 2.1 in
O.K.
2.0 in
2796.5 X 3.75
Use 2 No.4 bars in each stem
As
d.
- 0.40 in 2
Check maximum reinforcement (Eq. ,6-36).'

0.47f'dCB1.[
f dy
87,000 - 0..378. n f'dC]
.
bd"
. (87.000 - 0.378nf'dc+ fdy)
87,000-0.378
X6.76
2796.5 XO.7525.,[ _ _-'--X
-5950
---77,220
(87.000-0.378.X 6.76 X 5950 + 77,220)
X (3.75 X 23.62)
- 1.16 in 2 > 0.40 1n 2
Step 19.
O.K.
Design the shear reinforcement.

Calculate shear at distance
Vu
':"
from support.
r(L/2 ~ ~)/bw~
r - 121.5 lblin (total load on beam, step. '15a)

Vu
b.
- 121.5 (480/2 - 22.0)/(2 X 4.75 X 22.0)
Maximum allowable shear stress.

10 (f c,)1/2
- 10 X (5000)1/ 2
- 707 psi > 127 psi
6A-21
O.K. '
- 127 psi
TN 5-1300/NAVFAC.P-397/AFR 88-22
c.
Allowable shear stress on unreinforced web.

V
c - 1.9(f c)1/2 + 2500p p S 2.28(f c)1/2

0.612
- 1.9(5000)1/2 + 2500
142 psi
'(2 X 4.75 X 22)
2.28(f c)1/2 - 2.28(5000)1/2
O.K.
161 psi> 142 psi

d.
Excess shear.
l
'.'
-15 psi
use "c
so,
e.
Shear reinforcement.
Assume i/3 closed ties
.j
Ay - 2 X 0.11 - 0.22 in 2
.22 X 0.85 X 66,000

\, Ss -
142 X4.75
,.
- 18.3 in
f.
Check maximum spacing and minimum required reinforcement.

s
~/2
- 22.0/2 - 11.0 in.
0.0015bs s
Ay S
- 0.0015 X 4.75 X 11.0
- 0.08 in 2
> 0.22 in 2
Shear reinforcement is thus #3 ties at 11 inches in both

"
~tems.
'.
Step 20.
. Check direct shear.

a.
Calculate shear at the support (Table 3'9)

Vd
rL/2
- 121. 5 X 480/2
- 29160 1bs
6A-22
TH 5-l300/NAVFAC"P-397/AFR
88-22
:.
.
"
'.', . ~
Calculate allol"able direct shear.
b.
Vd S 0.18 f' c bd
~
- 0.18 X 5,500 X (2 X 4.75) X 22.0

- 206,910 lbs > 29,160 lbs
Step 21.
,...
O.K.
'.'
Check section for conventional loads.
This section as designed for blast loads is shoWn in Figure 6A-3.

Using the PCl Design Handbook and the latest ACl code, the section
must be checked to make sure it is adequate for service loads.
..
figure 6A-3
'vI'vIF 6x6 .
. 'vilA x 'vI2,O
2 -
IIA
',i-.
3'
'vI'vIF ' 6x6

'vilA x 'vilA
~
, 113
..
..
0 @lJ'
22'
,.112',
PRESTRESSING
STRANDS
6A-23
TN 5-1300/NAVPAC P-397/AFR S8-22

Problem6A-3
Problem:
De81sn of \lindows
Determine the 'minimum thickness of glazing to resist a given blast

load, and the design loads for' the framing.
Procedure:
Step 1.

a.
b.
Dimensions of pane(s);
c.
Type of glazing.
Step 2.
Calculate aspect ratio of pane. '
Step 3.
With the parameters of Steps 1 and 2, enter Figures 6-28 to 6-42

to determine which one applies. Using the peak pressure of the
dynamic load, its duration and the dimensions of the pane,
determine the minimum,required glazing thickness.
NOTE: If given window geometry differs from chart parameters, .interpo1ation as outlined in Section, 6-28.4 may be required.
Step 4.
Find the static ultimate resista~ce r u of the glazing from Table

6-6 for the given aspect ratio, the short dimension and the
thickness of the glazing' (interpolate if required).
Step 5.
From Table 6-9 and the aspect ratio determine the design coefficients CR, Cx and Cy for the windo~ frame loading. With these
coefficients, the dimensions of the pane from step Ib, the static
ultimate resistance of step 4 and Equation 6'-55," calculate the
uplift force in each corner., Then using Equations 6-53 and 6-54
calculate the design loads along the long 'and short spans of the
pane. Finally from Table 6-11, determine the fundamental period,
TN' and check for rebound requirements in accordance with Section
630.4
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC',P-397/AFR' 88~22
Example 6A-3 . Des ign of Windows'"
-'
..
Find the minimum glazing thickness and. the design loads on,the
frame of a non-openab1e window consisting of four equal size panes
i"
of glass.
Required:
Solution:
Given:
Step 1.
a.
Pressure-time.1oading (Fig. 6A-4)
IJ.
! - ..
1, :,
b.
Each pane is 37.5 inches long,by 30'inches high ...
c.
The glazing is heat-treated tempered glass meeting Federal

Specification DO-G-1403B and ANSI Z97.1-1984.
Figure 6A-4
, ,,.,,
1"',;'
,.
"V1
0.
'-'
Q::
:::>
V')
V')
Ck:
c, .,
500
TIME
Step 2.
'.'
Calculate. aspect ratio.
(f'\s)
'.
'
alb - 37.5/30 - 1.25 "

"
l"
,.
.,
6A-25' .... '
...
TH 5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR '88-22 . ,

Step 3.
,Determine minimum' glazingthickness.

a.
.. For
.
..
alb - 1. 25 and tempered glass USe 'Figure 6- 33 .
'
b.
Step 4.
From Figure 6-33, t - 3/4 inch.
Find static ultimate resistance r u (Table 6-6).

ru
- 24.6 psi
The window' frame must be designed 'to safely~ support', without undue
deflections, a static uniform load of 24.6 psi applied normal to
both the glazing and the .exposedframe members.
Step 5.
Compute design loads on the window frame.

Note:
a.
The exposed surface width of the frame is 2 inches.

Determine design coefficients from Table 6-9, interpolating
for alb - 1.25.
CR - 0.077
Cx - 0.545
Cy - 0.543
b.
Calculate the unit shear aiong the-iong span of the frame

(Eq. 6-53).
0.545 X 24.6 X 30 sin ("x/37.5) + 24.6*2

- 402 sin("x/372.5) + 49.2 lb/in
c.
Calculate the unit shear along the short span of the frame
(Eq.
6-54).
Vy - Cyrub sin("y/b)
- 0.543 X 24.6 X 30 sin("y/30) + 24.6*2
- 400 sin("y/l8) +49.2 lb/in
6A-26 .
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88"22

d.
Calculate the uplift force at the corners of the panes (Eq.

6-55).
R - -CRr ub 2
0.077 X 24.6 X 30 2
1705 lbs.
Distribution of the design load of the pane on the frame is
sbowndn Figure 6-52.
"
e.
From Table 6-U, TN - 8.74 msec, T/T N - 1000/8.74 -- U4

Since',T/T& ,- 'U4
'10, design for rebound is not necessary.
",
..
"
'
.
., .
,
6A-27
'
TIl S-1300/NAVFAC.P-397/AFR88722
Problem 6A-4.Design of Shock I!,olation Sy:stem.

Problem:
Design an overhead pendulum shock isolation ,system using a

platform for a given loading.
Step 1.
Establi~h
a.
.' .
r'
c.
Structural configuration.
Magnitude and location of loads on platform.
Shock spectra fo~ h~ri~ontal and:vertic~~motion..
d.
Maximum. allowable motion.
b.
Step 2.
design parameters:
.' iCompute membe r sizes of platform.
-1;'
'.'
1,:..
,. ,' '
,.l.
Step 3.
Compute cencer of.. gravity of the loadsr(live',anddead) on platform.
Step 4.
Compute the elastic center of the spring supporting system.
Step 5.
Determine the required weight and location of ballast to balance

the system (i.e. to move the center of gravity of loads to
coincide with the elastic center of the spring supporting system).
Step
Compute the total weight of the isolation system. Additional

ballast equal to 25% of the weight of the equipment and ballast
from Step 5 is added to provide for future changes in equipment.
Also determine the equivalent uniform load equal to the total load
divided by the area of the platform.
6.
Step 7.
Determine the natural frequency of the individual members of the

platform (Using the equivalent uniform load computed in Step 6).
The natural frequency is
9.87
EIg
27T
wL4
f -
for a simply supported beam with a uniform load.

Step 8.
Using the shock spectrum for vertical motion, determine the

required frequency of the system that will reduce the input
accelerations to the maximum allowable. In addition, determine
the displacement at this frequency.
Step 9.
Verify rigid body motion of the platform.

The natural frequency of the individual members of the platform
should be at least 5 times greater than the natural frequency of
the system for rigid body motion of the platform to occur.
To increase the frequency of the individual members, increase
member sizes, and repeat Steps 3 through 7.
Step 10.
Determine the natural frequency for horizontal motion

action) of the platform where
6A-28
(pendulum
TK 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

1/21r
fhorizontal'motio~
(386.4/L)1/2
(6-56)
where L is the suspended length.

Step 11.
Verify that dynamic coupling will not occur between vertical and
horizontal motions. According to Section 6-47.3.2 dynamic
coupling will not occur if
fhorizontal motion < 1/2 fvertical motion
Step 12.
From the shock spectra for horizontal motion, determine the

maximum dynamic displacement, velocity and acceleration using the
frequency computed in St~P. 10.
Verify that the maximum acceleration is less than the allowable.
Step 13.
Compute the load in each spring.

Total Load
Load in each spring - -----------------
Step 14.
Determine stiffness of springs to produce the required frequency

of the system. Compute the static and maximum displacement.
Using the static displacement andth~ load in.each spring from
Step 13, calculate the required springs~iffness K from,
load in each spring
K----~----
static displacement
Or using the vertical frequency from step 8, and the mass on each
spring the stiffness can be calculated from'
2
K - [21r fvertl m
,.
~.
In addition, compute the travel of the spring according to Section

6-48.2, i.e.
Maximum displacement
travel 0.85
6A-29
'.

Example 6A-4' Design Shock
Isola~ion
System
Required:
Design an overhead pendulum shock. isolation system using a

platform for a given loading.'
Step 1.
Given:
a.
"
Structural configuration shown in Figure 6A-Sa and Figure

6A-Sb.
Figure ,6A-5
~S'vIIVEl
CTYP,)
..
17.4'
JOINT
,-
SPRING
CTYP,)
,
.
(0.)
PLATFORM
ELEVATION
SECONDARY MEMBERSCTYP,)
, .
P,)
, CTY
<I
P,RIMARY MEMBER
, SPRING CTYP,)
,----
10~8'
./I2,4'
~:~;
)..,.-
I
.
I ,
I~
I~ ~
/,
I~
I~ ~
I- 13.1' --l- 14.1' ---I--:- 16.1' ---1

(b) PLATFORM' (PLAN) ,
,"
6A-30, ,
2,4'
b.
Magnitude and location of loads on platform (Figure 6A-6)

Equipment:
4960 Ibs .
4960 Ibs.
4960 Ibs.
El
E2
E3
Floor panel -
5.5 psf (covers the whole area of platform)
Crating
7.2 psf
Live load
- 150 psf
Figure 6A-S
:C.8'
PLATFORM (PLAN)
FLOOR PANEL
GRATING FOR
SUPPORT OF
BALLAST
SECTION
c.
Shock spectra for hori~ontal and vertical motions are given

in Figure 6A-7a and 6A-5b, respectively.
d.
Maximum
allowable acceleration
Vertical Motion
Hori~ontal
0.50g
Motion - 0.75g
6A-31
TN S-1300/NAVPAC P:397/APa 88-22

. ".'
o
o
o
o....
....
r-,
en
Q
to
>U
C
ill
ill
L
:J
:J
CJ)
a-
on
u,
....
o
o
o
....
o
o
....
....o
6A-32
00
ill
u,
Maximum Velocity,
inches/sec
~
~
o
o
00
o
o
o
., .
~
o
o
o
,~.
,'
'
ZZ-88 ~IAV/L6~cI.:iVAAVN/001-~ H.L
o
o
o
TM 5-l300/NAVFAC p C397/AFR 88,:22 .

Step 2.
Member sizes
Design Loads:
Dead load - 20 psf (assume)
Live Load - 150 psf
Primary Member (a):
(See Fig. 6A-5a).
"
, w - i70 X (7.05,+ 8.05)

Maximum Bending momept '- (wL2)/8
2567 lbs/ft.
(at center)
(2567 X 10.8 2) 1 8
.:""
- 37427 lb. -ft.

Using allowable 'stress design,
Allowable bending stress
- 0.66 y
(for compact shapes 'AISC) .
. Maxi~um Bending Moment
so, Required Sx ,-
Allowable Bending Stress'

(37427 X 12) 1 (0.66 X 36,000)
- 18.9 in 3
Try section'WlO X 21',
Sx - 2l."in 3 > 18.9 in 3
O.K.
Check deflection:
L'
Maximum allowable deflection _

360
Maximum deflection'
'
10.8 X 12,
I
360
(5WL4) 1 384EI
(at center)
.'
For WlO X 21,
L- 107 in 3
5 X (2567/12) X' (10.8,X 12)4

Maximum deflection
384 X 29,000 X 10 3 X 107
- 0.25 in < 0.36 in.O.K.
so, Use WlO X 21 for all primary members.
6A-34 ;
TH '-1300/NAVFAC
P~397/AFR.88-22
Secondary, Member, (b): See Fig. 6A-5a.

w -'170'(1.0 + 1.2)
374 lb/ft:, ..
Maximum Bertding moment -' (wL2) / 8
'(at center)
. ,
(374 X 16.1 2)/8 - 12118 lb.-ft.

Using allo~able stress d~sign,
Allowable bending stress" 0.66 F y (for 'compact shapes, AISC).'

" 12118 X 12
so,
- 6.'12 in 3
Requited Sx , 0.66 X 36,000
TrY'~ection
W8 x 13,
Sx - 9.90 in 3
>
6.12 in 3
O.K.
Check deflection:
Maximum allowable deflection-
1360
16.1 X 12
360' .'
0.54'in.
For W8 X 13,
1.- 39.6 i~4
5WL4
Maximum deflection 384 EI.
5 X (374/12) X (16.1 X 12)4
384 X 29,000 X 10 3 X 39.6 .
- 0.49 < 0.54
so,
NOTE:
Step 3.
Use W8 X 13 for all
s~condary
. O.K.
members.
Members should be checked for concentrated equipment loads.

Find center of gravity of the loads on the platform (see Figure
6A-8) .
6A-35 ".
TIl 5-1300/NAVFAC'P c397/AFR 88-22
Item
Weight WI
(lbs.)
A1A2 ... A6
B1B2 .B6
.'
X
: (ft.)
W1X
Y
(ft. ) .
."
W1Y
(lb. ft.)
:(lb: ft.)
226.8
0.0
5.4
"'(.':{I
,226.8.__
13 .1
5.4
2971:1
0: 0_;.-
1224.7
1224.7
C1 C2 . ,C6
226.8
27.2
5 ..4 :...
12 , .. 06
226.8
43.3
5..4
A1B1C101
562.9
21.65
6169.0,: ,
t1
1224'.7
..
,
,9820 ..4,
1224 ..7
10.8' '.,12187.0
6079.3
..
A2B2C 2D2
562.9
21.65
8'.4'
12187.0
A3 B3 C3 D3
562.9
21. 65
6.4
12187.0
A4 B4C4D4
562.9
21.65
4.4
12187.0
2476.8
A5B5C5D5
562.9
21. 65
2.4
12187.0,
1351.0
A6B6C6D6
562.9
21.65
0.0
12187.0
4728.4
"
. , 3602.6
0.0
,
E1
4960.0
5.9
E2
'4960.0
E3
-,
"
,
,
1.0,
29264.0
4960.0
20.3
i.o
100688.0
4960.0
4960.0
34'.8,
1.0
172608.0
4960.0
A1D10 2A2
748.2
21.65
9.6
16199.0
7183.0
A5D5D6A6
748.2
21.65
1.2
16199;0
897:8
A2 Gl l G12A5
259.2
3.0
5.4
D2D5G14G15
259.2
4,0
5.':4
,
Floor Panel
2572.0.
21. 65
,
23}51.4
:E
"
.-
,.
1400.0
10368.0
1400.0
55684.0
13889.0
493870.0
62786.7
>
5,4
..
:E'
777.6
i,
'1
'.'!"
1J
6A-36
Figure 6A-8
GRATING
y, , ,
'"""."",
.
,, ,
cccc///ccccc~
',F,
'
" I ' "<
f,CC/CC~
,"57.,57
~
.
t-
.1
c: / /
?I""'7nDl~ 2,0
2.4',
/////fS,SSSS',>j4D
20'
7' ; } / "
, 2,' 0'
'"o
>
W
"'"
2.4'
:il
...'"w,
o
~...
o
o
W
'"
"'"
$
co
co
,
'"
'"
TH 5-l3()O/NAVFAC P-397/AFR,,88-22
Center of gravity of loads (dead + live) - (Xl' 'Yl)
23751.4
-
20.8 ft.
;1'
.'
"
62786,.7'
'23751.4
, .-
2.64 ft.
-'
Elastic center of the spring s'upport"~y.sfem:
Step 4.
,1
, .'
Figure 6A-9
.,
r-
S2
10,8'
S6! ,0 .
S4
Sa
1-:11--'
I~
S3
S5:'
Sl
~
13.1' ~ 14.1 r ~'16,1' ~,
,
"
S7'
. 2.4'
1~;
2.4'
NOTE: All springs helve -the 'SOMe

s'tiffness
..,'
,...'.
6A-38
I/~~.
'.
TN 5-1300/NAVPAC P~397/APR 88-22
Spring
No.
Force
(W)
(ft; ),
(ft.' )
Sl
S2
S3
t ,
.'
p,
,p
S4
"
..
'
10. S '
S6
27.2
10.S
S7
43.3
10.SP
43.3P
~
10.S
"
"
SP
I:
27. 2P"
I j..'.
'.
43.3
,
13.1P
27 .2P ,
27.2
I:
10.SP
.,
13 .1P
S5
Ss
':'
13.,1
'
'-' -'.
c.,
WY
10.S
.. 13.1'
, ,
"
WX
,\,
10.SP
43.3P
10.SP
l67.2P
43.2P
-to.
Elastic center of spring support system- '(X~,Y~ ) .
.'-' ,.
20.9 ft.
, I
I .'
"
43.2P
5.4 ft.
SP
"
Step 5.
. " J.
Find the weight and loca:tfon'~f ballast to balance the system

(relocate the e.g.' of the pi~tform t~ coiricid;'with the elastic
center of the isolation sys t'ein) '. i
'
a.
For the x-direction - Try placing ballast at x - 30.3 ft.,

i.e. 4 feet from the right edge of the platform. The
ballast is placed symketrically about the x axis of the
elastic center'so as-not to affect the location of the
center of gravity in the y direction.
6A-39

Weight of ballast - WBX
'.
EWlX + 39. 3WBX - Xii [ EW l + WBX]

493870 + 39.3Wax - 20.9(23751.4 + WBX)
Wax
b.
2534.3/18.4
- 137.7 Ibs. '
For the y direction - Try placing ballast at y _ 9 ..6 feet.

i.e.
1.2 feet from the top of the platform. The ballast
is placed symmetrically ~bout the y axis of the,elastic
center so as not to affect the location of the center of
gravity in the x direction.
Weight of ballast -WBY
EWlY + :9.6W By -
Ys [
EW l + WBy] ,
62786.7 + 9.6WBy - :5.4(2375.. 1 + WBY)

WBY - 65470.9/4.2
c.
- 15588.3 1bs.
Total ballast:
WB - WBX + WBY - 137.7 + 15588.3 - 15726 1bs.
Step 6.
Total load on the platform and equivalent uniform load.

a.
Total load.
Dead Load:
Floor panel Members
Grating
~
L -
2572 Ibs.
4284.6
2014.8
8871.4 1bs.
Live Load:
Equipment - 14880 Lbs .
'Ballast
. -, 15726
Additional Ballast - 0.25 (30606) '7651. 6
Personnel (5 @ 150 lb.) r >. 750
,
,
Total
'
,_.
3~,007.
5 Ibs.
8871.4 +,)9007.5
-, 47878.91bs.
6A-40
TH5 c1300/NAVFAC.
Equivalent uniform load
b.
P-397/AFR~'88-22
.,
i ,t
. 47878.9
10. 8X 43.3
.-
- 102.4 psf S
'./
;:
.170
psf
~,
O.K.
Preliminary design 'of platform members'.is O;K. However, members

supporting ballastmust be checked as their actuaL,load"may be
higher than the equivalent uniform load.
,
Step 7.
Natural frequency of the individual members of the platform.,

r; r
For a simply supported, member with a uniform load,

9.87
Natural frequency f n
211'
Primary Members
(a):
A portion of the adjacent slab acts with
the beam. Add 20% of the msss of'the 'slsb on each side of the
beam to 'the, actual mass of the beam.
10110 X 21
I -
107 in 3.
10.8 X 12
j ..
0'
- 6.04 feet
-rg - 386:.:4" in/sec 2
,
w:
"
. E- 29000, X 10 3 psi.
~.
..,'..
.c
(Use equivalent uniform load);
,
...
.'
;'
w - 102.4 X.6.04
\..
,.;'
-, ("l
.: ..': - 51'.54) lb/in

tn,,)"
',t
I . . . . . ,j
618.5 Ib/ft
6A-41
. i
',0'
c< ~', ,','
TN 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 8822
9.87 . [ 29000 X 10 3 X 107 X 386.4 ]

fn -
2'1l'
~.
51.54 X (29.6)4
- 14.3 cps
Secondary Members (b):
Since the spacing of the secondary beams is
less than 1/4 of the length of the beams the total mass of the slab aet
with the beam.
.,.
102.4 X 2.2
' ..
-<
- 225.3: lb/ft
18.78 lb/in
E
- 29000 X 10 3 psi
- 386.4 in/see 2
9.87 ['29,000 X 10 3 X 39.6 X 386.4
fn -
'18.78 X (193.2)~
2'1l'
- 6.5 cps
Step 8.
Required frequency of system to l'imit motions.

To limit the maximum acceleration of 'the system to 0.5g or less,
choose the frequency of the system from Figure 6A-7b as
f - 1 cps
which' produces a maximum acceleration of 0.4g and a maximum
dynamic displacement of 4.7 inches.
Step 9.
Verification of rigid body motion of, platform ..

findividual member>
5 X fsystem
From Step 8.,

fsystem
1 cps
6A-42.
TM5-l300/NAVFAC:P~397/AFR88-22
.1
From Step 7 .
14.2 cps> 5 cps
fprimary member
O.K..
".
fsecondary member'- 6.5 cps> 5 cps
O.K.
Therefore, platform is in 'rigid body motion.

Step 10.
Natural frequency of platform for horizontal motion (i.e. pendulum

type action).
. =1
'
Assume the center of gravity of supported mass is located at the

top of the platform so that the length of the pendu1~ arm is 17:4
feet.
,i
Frequency of platform for horizontal motion'

f
1/2w (386.4/L)1/2
0.22 cps
Step 11.
(6-56)
Check for dynamic coupling of vertical and horizontal motion.

From Step 8.,
fvertica1 motion
From Step 10.,
1 cps,
f "
i:
fhorizonta1 motion - 0.22 cps
<
1/2 fvertica1 motion - 0.5 cps
Dynamic coupling will not occur.

Step.12.
Maximum dynamic disp1acement"ve10city and acceleration for

horizontal motion.
From shock spectra for horizontal motion, (Fig.6A-7a) for f - 0.22
cps,
Maximum acceleration - 0.007g< 0.75g

Maximum velocity - 0.9 in/sec.
.....
,.-
O.K.
,
, Maximum dynamf c displacement - 1.3 in.

The maximum dynamic displacement is the required "rattle space" or
the minimum horizontal clearance' between the platform and the
structure or anything attached to the structure.
6A~43
TH5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22 '

Step 13.
Load in each spring.
. :
Total Load,
Load in each spring - - - - _
, Number of Springs
.'
47878.9
..- ,.,'
'
n-
8 ,
Step 14.
D~sign
a.
5985 Ibs.
the springs.
:. I
Static displacement
From Step 8 .
For a maximum acceleration of O.48g the maximum dynamic
displacement - 4.7 in.
.se , Static
b.
d1splacem~rt
- 4.7/.0 .48
_ ':
Stiffness of spring - 4.7/0.48

Load in each spring
.' .'
K--------Static displacement
5985
"
- 611.2
Ib/in
.'
9.79
or
K -
Kc.
,(2fT X lcps)2(5985/386~.4)
611.5 lb/in
Maximum travel of spring.

Maximum displacement - (static + dynamic) displacement
- 9.79 + 4.7
- 14,49 in
6A-44', .
"
TK5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

From Section 6-48.2
maximum displacement
Travel of spring 0.85
14.49
0.85
17.0 in.
Thus the vertical rattle space (clearance) is 17.0 inches.
6A-45
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
APPENDIX 6B
LIST OF SYMBOLS
TH' S-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22 '

acceleration' (in,/ms 2),
(1)'
(2)
depth of equivalent rectangular stress block (in,)

long span of a panel (in:)
(3)
area (in. 2)
area'of diagonal'bars at: the support within 'a 'width b (in. 2):
. t:;
"
door area (in. 2)

area of gross section (in 2)
t:
r,
~.
....
'.__~
.:
net' area 'of section (in. 2)

area of openings (ft 2)
fO,.
',;;.:
~,
area of prestressed reinforcement (in. 2)

area of tension reinforcement within a width b (in. 2)
. "
"
area of compression reinforcement within a width b (in. 2)

area of rebound reinforcement (in. 2)
..
area of flexural reinforcement within a width b in the horl. '

zontal direction on each, face (in 2 ) *
area of flexural reinforcement within a width b in the vertical direction on each face (in2,)~. '
total area of stirrups or lacing reinforcement in tension
within a distance, Ss or sl and a width b s or b l (in. 2 ),
J
J.
I"
area of sector I and II, respectively (in. 2 )

,.
(1)
r.
. (2)
(3)
'~.'
,;
. '.
width of compression face of flexural member (in.)

'width of concrete 'strip in which the direct shear
stresses at the supports are resisted by diagonal bars
(in.)
~,
short span of a panel (in.)
width of concrete strip in which the diagonal,tension stresses

are resisted by stirrups of area Av (in.)
are resisted by lacing of area Av(in.)
'e
(1)
(2)
constant defined in paragraph.

peak blast overpressure capacity
;':' ...: .- .
l .
shear coefficient
f .'
"
See note at end of symnbols
6B-l.
- d
,.
TIl 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

c
(1)
(2)
(3)
distance from the resultant applied load to the axis of

I'.,,
rotation (in.)
damping coefficient
distance from extreme compression fiber to neutral axis
(in. )
distance"from,the resultant applied load to the axis of

rotation for sectors I and II, respectively' (in.)
critical damping
shear coefficient fo rc.u'l t Imate shear stress of one-way elements
(1)
(2)
drag coefficient
coefficient for center deflection of glass
"
drag pressure (psi)

"
post-failure fragment coefficient (lb2-ms4/in. 8)

shear coefficient for ultimate shear stress in horizontal
"
leakage pressure' coefficient
,
;maximum shear coefficient
,.
"
,
, coefficient for effective, resistance of glass

peak reflected pressure coefficient at angle of incidence a
dilatational velocity of concrete (ft/sec)
shear coefficient for ultimate support shear for one-way
elements
shear coefficient for ultimate support shear in horizontal
.
direction for two-way el'ements*
shear coefficient for ultimate support shear in vertical
'
direction for two-way elements* ,
coefficient for period of vibration for glass
C' u
'Xu
(psi-ms 2/in. 2 )
Xm
(psi-ms 2/in. 2 )
See note at end of symnbo1s
68-2
shear coefficient for ultimate. shear stress in vertical

shear coefficient for the ultimate shear along the long side
of window frame
shear coefficient for the ultimate shear along the short side
of window frame
..
impulse coefficient at deflection Xl (psi-ms 2/in. 2)

(2) '.parameter defined in figure,
(3)
(1)
"
Xm
(psi-ms 2/in. 2)

distance from extreme compression fiber. to centroid of tension
reinforcement (in.)
'distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of compression reinforcement (in.)
d'
c ,.
distance between the centroids of the compression and tension

reinforcement -(in.) .
I.-
diameter of steel core(in,)

distance from support and equal to distance dor. d c (in.)
inside diameter of-cylindrical explosive 'container (in.)
distance between'center lines of adjacent lacing bends measured normal to flexural reinforcement (in.)
j.l
! ..,'
.'~
'
distance' from extreme compression fiber to centroid of prestressed reinforcement (in.)

diameter of cylindrical portion of primary fragment (in.)
(1)
(2)
(3)

location of shock front for maximum stress (ft)
minimum magazine separation distance (ft)
nominal diameter of reinforcing bar (in.)

. equivalent loaded width of structure for non-planar wave front
(ft)
;
',I;'
DIF
DLF
dynamic load factor
TK
5-~300/NAVFACP-397/AFR
88-22
base of natural logarithms and equal to2.7l828."

distance from centroid of section to centroid of prestressed reinforcement (in.)
(1)
(2)
(2E)1/2
Gurney Energy Constant (ft/sec),
modulus ofLelasticity
Ec
Es
(1) unit external force (psi)

(2) frequency of vibration (cps)
. ,.,
~
, .
f' c
static ultimate compressive strength of concrete at 28 days

(psi)
,dynamic ultimate compressive strength of concrete (psi)
f'dc
f' elm
"
,'.'
"
f ds
dynamic design stress for reinforcement (psi)
f du
dynamic ultimate stress of reinforcement (psi):
f dy
dynamic yield stress of ,reinforcement (psi)
f' m
static ultimate compressive strength of
fn
natural frequency .of vibration (cps)
f ps
average stress in the prestressed reinforcement at ultimate

load (psi)
'
f pu
specified tensile strength of prestressing tendon (psi)
f py
yield stress of prestressing tendon corresponding to a 1

percent elongation (psi)
fs
static design stress for reinforcement (a, function of f y' f u &

<p (psi)
f se
effective stress in prestressed reinforcement after allowances

for all prestress losses (psi)
masonry~units
(psi)
.I
fu
fy
(1)
(2)
(3)
total external Iorce (lbs)

function of C2 & Cl.for bilinear triangular load
1M 5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
force in the
rein~orcing
bars (lbs)
equivalent external fo rc s- (lbs)

g
(1)
(2)
variable defined in table 4-3

,
acceleration due to gravity (ft/sec 2)
shear .mo du Lus (psi)
(1)
(2)
h'
clear height between floor slab and roof ,slab
(1)
(2)

height of masonry wall
span ,height (in,)

,edge(s) in vertical direction (f t ).
Hc
Hc
Hs
ILr
i
i-
unit negative, i;'puls'e (psi-ms)
ia
sum of scaled unit blast impulse capacity of receiver panel

and scaled unit blast impulse attenuated through ioncrete and
sand in a composite element (psi-ms/lb l/ 3)
,
ib
ib
scaled unit blast impulse (psi-ms/lb l/ 3)
i bt
total scaled unit blast impulse capacity of composite element

(psi-ms/lb l/ 3)
i ba
scaled unit blast impulse ca~acity of receiver panel of

composite element (psi-ms/lb 13 )
i bd

element (psiCms/lb l / 3)
,
r
ie
ir
i r
is
6B-5
TK 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

i

moment of inertia (in. 4)
average of gross and cracked moments of .inertia of width b

(in. 4 )
.
moment of inertia of cracked concrete section of width b
(in. 4)
moment of inertia of gross concrete section of width b (in. 4)
mass moment 'of inertia (lb-ms 2-in.)
moment of inertia of net section of masonry unit (in. 4
j
ratio of distance between centroids of compression'and tension

forces to the depth d
(1)
(2)
unit stiffness (psi-in for slabs) (lb/in/in for

beams) (lb/in for springs)
elastic unit stiffness (psi/in for slabs) (lb/in/in for beams)

elasto-plastic unit stiffness (psi-in for slabs) (psi for
beams)
equivalent elastic unit stiffness (psi-in for slabs) (psi for
beams) equivalent spring constant
load factor
- ;
load-mass factor
load-mass factor in the post-ultimate'range
mass factor .
resistance factor
factor defined in paragraph

kinetic energy
1

spacing of same type of lacing bar' (in.)
68-6
TK
(1)
(2)
5~1300/NAVFAC
P-397/AFR 88-22
span length (in ..) *

.,
distance between reflecting ~urface(~)and/or free
edge(s) in horizontal direction (ft)

,embedment length of reinforcing bars (in. )
length of shaft (in.)
i .
wave length of positive pressure phase (ft)

wave length of negative pressure phase (ft)
wave length of positive.pressure phase at points band d,
respectively (ft)
total length of sector of element normal to axis of rotation
(in. )
m
unit mass (psi-ms 2/in.)

average. of the effective elastic and plastic.unit masses (psims2/in. )
effective uni/mass (psi-ms 2/in.)
effective unit mass in the ultimate range (psi'ms 2/in.)
(1)
(2)
unit.bending moment (in-lbs/in.)

total mass (lb-ms 2/in.)
effective total mass (lb-ms 2/in.)

ultimate unit resisting moment (in-lbs/in.)
ultimate unit rebound moment (in-lbs/in.)
(in.-lbs)
fragment distribution parameter
equivalent total mass (lb-ms 2/in.)
ultimate unit negative moment capacity in horizontal direction
(in.-lbs/in.)*
, '
. '
ultimate unit positive moment capacity in horizontal direction
(in. -lbs/in.) *
6B-7
... .
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

ultimate unit negative moment capacity at supports (in. . lbs/in.)
,
Mp
.'
ultimate unit positive moment capacity at midspan (in. lbs/in. )

ultimate unit negative moment capacity in vertical direction
(in. -lbs/in.)*
ultimate unit positive moment capacity in vertical direction
(in. -lbs/in.)*
(1)
(2)
(3)
N
modular-ratio
number of glass pane tests

reinforcement ratio equal to (As/bd) or (As/bdc)
p'
reinforcement. ratio equal to (A"s/bd) or (A's/bdc)

strength
prestressed reinforcement ratio equal to
~s/bdp
Pm
Pmo
peak mean pressure in a partially vented chamber (psi)

reinforcement ratio in horizontal direction on each face *
reinforcement ratio equal to PH + Pv
Pv
reinforcement ratio in vertical direction on each face *
p(x)
(1)
(2)
pressure (psi)
concentrated load (lbs)

interior pressure within structure (psi) ..
peak pressure (psi)
6B-8 '
Pr
Pr
88~22
peak negative normal reflected ,pressure (psi)
'r.
Pra
peak reflected pressure at angle of :incidence a' (psi)
Ps
positive incident pressure (psi),
Psb' Ps e
positive incident pressure at points, band e, respectively

(psi)
Ps o
Ps o -
peak negative incident pressure

,
A"
'.
,,
, ,
Psob,Psod,Psoe
peak positive incident pressure at'points b, d, and e, respectively (psi)
P(F)
probabili ty of failure of glass pane

1
..1.
q
..: i; '.'
,.',' 'dynamic- pressure, at 'points band
'e ,
respectively (psi)

.... ,
peak dynamic pressure at points band e, respectively (psi)

r
(1)
(2)

radius 'of spherical TNT (density equals 95 lb/ft 3 charge
(ft
unit rebound resistance (psi, for panels) '(lb/in for beams)
b.r
change in unit resistance (psi, for panels) (lb/in for beams)
rd
radius from center. of impulse load to,center of door rotation

(in. )
re
elastic unit 'resistance (psi" for panels) (lb/in for beams)
rep
elasto-p1astic unit resistance (psi, for panels) (lb/in for

beams)"
rs
radius of shaft .(,in.)
ru
ultimate 'unit resistance (psi, for panels) (lb/in for beams)
r up
post-ultimate unit resistant (psi)
r1
radius of hemispherrca1 portion of.primary fragment (in.)
(1)
(2)
'.'.
'
total internal resistance (lbs)

slant distance (ft)
68-9
distance traveled by primary fragment (ft)

uplift force at corners' of window. frame
(lb~)
..,.'

normal distance (ft)
equivalent total, .internal .resistance (lbs)
ground distance (ft)
total internal resistance of sectors I and II, respectively
(lbs)
'"
s

spacing of stirrups in the direction parallel to the longitudinal reinforcement (in.)
spacing of lacing .in the direction parallel to the longitudinal reinforcement (in.)
height of front wall or one-half its width, whichever is

smaller (ft)
strain energy
time (ms)
At
time increment (m?)

any .time (ms)
time of arrival of blast wave. at points b, e , and f, respec. tively (ms)
(1) clearing time for reflected pressures (ms)
(2) container thickness of explosive charges (in.)
rise time (ms)
time to resch maximum elastic
defl~ction,
,time at which maximum deflection occurs (ms)

duration of positive phase of ,blast pressure .(ms)
68-10
TK 5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22'
tr
fictitious reflected press~re' duration (ms)
tu
time at which ultimate dliflecti'on occurs (ms)
ty
time', to,; 'reach yield (ms)
tA

~
;,. ~
'. ,.
tl
time at' which partial failure occurs (ms)
(1)
(2)
duration 'of equivalent triangular.' loading function (ms)

thickness of masonry wall
.'
"
Tc
thickness of concrete section (in.)
Tc
scaled thickness of concrete section (ft/lb l /.3 ) ,
Tg
thickness of glass (in.)
Ti
angular impulse load (lb-ms-in.)
TN
Tr
rise time (ms) ,
Ts
thickness of sand fil,l (in :),;
Ts
scaled thickness of sand fill (ft/lb l/3)
particle velocity (ft/ms)
Uu
ultimate flexural or anchorage bond stress .(psi)
shock front velocity, (ft/ms) -
Us
strain,energy
velocity (in./ms)
va
instantaneous velocity at .any-tLme (in.-/ms)
vb
boundary velocity for primary'fragments (ft/sec)
ultimate shear stress permitted on an unreinforced web (psi)
"
.'
',"'
- .
....
=j
vf
maximum post-failure fragment velocity (in./ms)
vf(avg. )
average post-failure fragment velocity (in./ms)
vi
velocity at incipient failure deflection (in./ms)
Vo
initial velocity of primary fragment (ft/sec)
vr
residual velocity of primary fragment after perforation

(ft/sec)
.',
j'
,~
'~
v.' .
6B-11
TH 5-1300/NAVFAC' P,.397/AFB. 88-22
striking velocity of primary fragment (ft/sec)

ultimate shear stress;(psi)
ultimate shear stress at distance de from the. horizontal
support(psi) *
.'.
ultimate shear stress at distance de from the vertical support
(psi) *
volume of pa~tia11y.vented.chamber(ft3).
ultimate direct shear capacity of the concrete of width b
(lbs)
V dH
shear ati d!stance.de from the. ve r t Lca Lesuppor t; ona unit width
(lbs ./in.)
i
"
. shear at distance de from the horizontal
support on a unit
width (lbs/in.) *
, .'
volume of structure (ft 3).
:'"
.I
'1.'.
",
shear at the support (lb/in, for panels). (lbs.for 'beam)

shear at the vertical support ~n a unit width (lbs/in.)*
shear at the n~rizonta1 support on a:unitwidth (lbs/in.)*
total shear on a width b (lbs)
..'
.'
unit shear. along the long side of window frame' (lb/in.)

unit shear along the short side;of .window~ framec 01bs/in.)
w
unit weight (psi, for panels) (lb/in for beam) .
Wc
weight density of concrete. (lbs/ft 3)
weight density:of.sand,(lbs/ft 3)
(1)
(2)
charge weight (lbs)

weight (lbs)
, I' .
total weight of explosive containers (lbs)

.1
: [
"
weight of primary fragment (oz)

total weight of steel core (lbs)
:
tota1.weight of plates land 2,. respectively (lbs).

1
width of structure (ft)

-c',
* See note at end of symnbo1s
68-12
,,
... 1
TK S-1300/NAVFAC P:.397/AFR 88-22
work done
x
yield'line location in horizontal direction (in.)*
deflection (in.)
-
any deflection '(in.)
lateral deflection to which a masonry wall develops no resistance (in.)

elastic deflection (in.) ,
maximum penetration into concrete of armor-piercing fragments
(in. )
X'f
maximum penetration into concrete of fragments other than

(1)
(2)
maximum penetration into sand of. armor-piercing fragments (in.)

static deflection

equivalent elastic deflection (in.).
(1)
(2)

deflection at maximum ultimate resistance of masonry
wall (in.)
yield line location in vertical direction (in.)*
Yt
distance from the' top of-section to centroid (in.)
scaled slant distance (ft/lb l/3)

scaled normal distance (ft/lb l/3)
scaled ground distance (ft/lb l/ 3)
(1)
(2)
(3)
angle formed by the plane of stirrups; lacing, or diagonal reinforcement and the plane of the longitudinal
reinforcement (deg)
6B-13
TK 5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22.
(1)
coefficient for determining elastic and elasto-plastic
(2)
particular support .r'o t a t Lon angle,(deg)rejection coefficient
resistances
(3)
factor equal to 0.85 for concrete strengths up to 4000 psi and

is reduced by 0.05 for each 1,000 psi in excess-of 4,000 psi
~oefficient
for determining elastic and elasto-plastic deflec-
tions
factor for type of prestressing tendon
unit strain in mortar (in./in.)
. support rotation angle (deg).

angular acceleration (rad/ms 2)

horizontal rotation angle (deg) *
.increase in support rotation angle after partial failure (deg)
ductility factor
- .'
......
Poisson's ratio
~o
effective perimeter of reinforcing. bars (in.)

summation of moments-(in.-lbs)
, .
sum of the ultimate unit resisting. moments acting along the
negative yield lines (in.-lbs)
~
.~.
sum of the ultimate unit resisting moments acting along the

positive yield lines (in.-lbs)
maximum shear stress in the shaft,(psi)
( 1)
(2)
capacity reduction
bar diameter (in.)
fac~or
,.
,-
.~
"'(x)
assumed
shap~
function for distributed. loads free edge
'angular velocity (rad./ms)

'.
simple support
6B-14
.-
~.
III/II
fixed support
either fixed, restrained,; or simple support
Note.
walls.
When roof slabs or other horizontal elements are under consideration,
6B-15
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22
APPENDIX 6C
BIBLIOGRAPHY
TK 5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR'SS-22
Mas.onry:
1.
2.
3.
4.
'. '
"
'.
.~
Design of Masonry Structures to Resist the Effects of HE Exp1osions~

prepared by Ammann (, W)1itney, , Consulting E..ngineers;. New. York,' ,NY, for.
Picatinny Arsenal. Dover;' NJ, 1976.", .
".
',:'
Gabrielsen. G.. Wilton, C., and Kaplan. K. Response of Arching',Walls" "
and Debris from Interior Walls Caused'by Blast LoadingiURS,'7030-n.:.URS
Research Company, San,Mateo;CA: .. February'1976.
, .
McDowell, E., McKee, K.. , and Sevin, "E.,. :'Arching Action Theory'of Masonry
~ , Journal. of the Structural Division. ASCE, Vol.' 82,
No. ST.2.
March 1 9 5 6 . " <'
,
,
. . . . . .'
Wilton. C. and Gabrielsen, B. Shock Tunnel Tests of'Pre-Loaded and
Arched Wall Panels. URS 7030-10, URS Researg~. Company, San: Mateo , CA.
June 1973.
'.
.'
,~".
Precast Concrete
_",
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10,
11,
12.
13.
14.
15,
"
J,
"\ . '
','
PCI Design Handbook Precast', Prestressed-~Concrete, Pres.tres~ed Concrete
Institute, :Chicago. IL, 1978..

,..., . '...
, ,
PCI Manual for Structural Design of Architectura1 Precast Concrete .....
Prestrel!se.d Concrete Institute. Chicago; I L . ,
, -. ,
,
PCI Manual on Design of ConneCtions tor Precast Prestressed 'Concrete.:
Prestressed Concrete Instit,:,te; Chicago'; ..IL.
'.""
,....
..
Lin, T. 'Y~.,Design of Prestressed ConCrete.Structures, Johp W~ley (,
Sons, New, York. NY . July 1955.'
; , -". : .
Pre ~ Engineered: Buildings
.~
American National Standard Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and ~ .
Structures;.ANSI.A58.1-1982, Ameri~an National Standards Institute. New
York. NY. March 1982.
,
,;
.Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members.
American, Iron and Steel 'Institute. New York . NY. 1968 ..
Specification for the Design, "Fabrication 'and Erection of Structural.
Steel for Buildings. Manual of 'Stee1 Construction., American Lns t i tutie of.
Steel. Construction, New York, NY. 1969.
'
Uniform'Iitiilding Code <1979 Edition)'. International. Conference of ,,;',
Building Officials, Whittier, .CA. 19}9. , : .
... ','.
"
Healey, J" J,. "et a1., Design of Steel Structures to Resist the Effects
of HE Explosions, Technical Report 4837. Picatinny Arsenal, Dover . -NJ,
August ,1975. :'. "
"
.., .. ,..
,
.
Stie a , W. ' et a1.:. B1a~t Capacity Evaluat-ion 'of Pr~'-Engineered- Buildt'ng,
Contractor Report ARLCDCR79004, U. S. Army Armament Research and
Development Command, Dover. NJ, March 1979.'
'.::'
"
Stea, W.< et al., -Nonlinear Analysis of Frame Structures to -Blast
Overpressures, by Ammann (, Whitney, Consulting Engineers, New Yo~k. ~~
Contractor Report ARLCD-CR-77.0.08, U. S., Army Armament. Research and
Development Command. Dover,
May 1977.
.
,
Tseng, G., et.a1., Design Charts for Cold-Formed Steel Panels and'WideFlange Beams Subjected to Blast Loads, Technica~ Report 4838, PicatinnyArsenal... Dove r, NJ, August 1975.
".' ..
"
&i.
16.
"l
;:.'
Suppressive Shielding
17,
Final- Report -'Application of Suppressive Structure Concepts to Chemical~<
Agent -Munitions Demilitarization System (CAMDS), Report EA-FR-2B02,.

Edgewood Arsenal, Aberdeen Proving Ground, MD, June 27, 1973.
6C-I
"
TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR'88-22
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
Shields Operational for Ammunition Operations. Criteria for Design of.

and Tests for Acceptance, MIL STD 398, U.. S. Government Printing
Office, Washington', D. C., November 5 ,_~ 1976.
.,
.!_
Study of Suppressive Structures Applications to an' 81 mm Automated.
Assembly Facility, Report EA 1002, Edgewood Arsenal~'Aberdeen Proving
Ground; MD, April 16, 1973.
I,.
Suppressive Shielding, AAI Corporation~ C6ckeysville~. MD, DAAA15-75-C c '
0120, U. S. Army Armament Re seerchrand Development Command, Chemical
Systems Laboratory, ,Aberdeen Proving 'Ground; MD, April 1977.
,. .
Suppressive Shields Structural Design' and:Analysis 'Handbook,' HNDM 11l0~ "
1-2, U. S. Army Co~ps of Engineers, Huntsville Division, Huntsville. AL,:
November 1977..
.
i ,". r: '. -,
System Safety Program Reguirements~\ MIL, STD," 882A, U. S. Gover,nmep.t > '"
Printing Office, Washington, D. C., June 28, 1977.
~,f:
Baker, W. E., et al., Design Study of a Suppressive Structure for a Melt
Loading Operation, EM-CR-76043, Report NO,'9; Edgewood Arsenal, Aberdeen
Proving Ground, MD, December 1975,
Baker, W.'E.'and Oldham, G. A,."Estimates of Blowdown of Ouasi-Static
Pressures in Vented Chambers, EM-CR-76029, Edgewood Arsenal;. ,Aberdeen
Proving Ground, MD, November 1975,,:'
,
Baker, W. E, and Westine, P. S:, Methods of Predicting Blast Loads"
Inside and o'utside' Suppressive' Structures', 'EM,CR'- 76026, -Re po r.t; No..' 5',,:, ;'"
Edgewood Arsenal, Aberdeen Proving Ground, ' MD; 1975,
" ' . -:
Cox, P. A. 'et al. Analysis and,Evaluation of Suppressive Shields,t
Edgewood Arsenal Contractor Report ARCFL-CR-'77028', Report No.. '10', . ' ; " , '
Contract No, DAAA15-75-C-0083, 'Edgewood Arsenal,' Aberdeen Proving
Ground, MD; January 1978...
" , 'J_ :
,:1;
Dutton, S. R.' and Katsanis, D. 'Computer-Aided Design of' Suppressive,
Shields, EM-CR-76080, AAI Corporation, Baltimore, MD, Report for'; . , "
Edgewood Arsenal, Aberdeen,Proving.Ground,MD, June 1976.' "
Esparza, E. D., Estimating External Blast Loads from 'Suppressive c'"
Structures,'. Edgewood Arsenal Contract Report EM-CR-76030, Report ,No~
3:, Edgewood Arsenal .. Aberdeen Proving Ground"MD, November 1975. _.
Esparza, E. D., Baker, W. E., and Oldham, 'G.' A., Blast Pressures ,Inside'
and Outside' Suppressive Structures, Edgewood.Arsenal Contractor Report:
EM-CR-76042, Report No.8, Edgewood Arsenal, ~berdeen Proving Ground,.'
MD, December 1975.
'"
. . . :,
Gregory,F: H., Blast Loading' Calculations and Structural. Response ..",
Analyses of the 1/4-Scale Category I Suppressive Shield, BRL Report No.,
2003, U. ,'S. Army Ballistic Research Laboratory, Aberdeen Proving Ground,.
MD, August' 1977.
,.
Hubich, H. O. and Kachinski, R. L., ExpYosive Waste Removal Systems'for
Suppressive Shields, EdgewQodArsenal Contractor Report No. EM-CR76002,
"
Edgewood Arsenal, Aberdeen 'Proving Ground,' MD, August,..1975.
Jezek, B. W.~ Suppressive Shielding for Hazardous Munitions Production
Operations, Technical Report No. ARCSI.;-TR-77020,. U. S. Army Armament
Research .and Development Command, Chemical Systems Laboratory, Aberdeen'
Proving Ground, MD, April"1977.
'._ ,
1 _ .'
Kachinski, R. L., et al., Technical Feasibl:-I'fty of Suppressive.:Shi'elds'
for Improved Hawk Launch Sites, Edgewood Arsenal Contractor Report No.
EM-CR-76057. Edgewood Arsenal, Aberdeen Proving'Ground, MD, February
1976.
Katsanis, D. J .. Safety Approval of Suppressive Shields, Edgewood';'
Arsenal Technical Report No.' EM-TR-76088, Edgewood Arsenal', Aberdeen
Proving Ground, MD,' Augus t 1976.
."
..
t
,r
i ,
33.
34.
6C-2
35.
Katsanis, D.J. and Jezek,B. W., Suppressive Shielding of 'Hazardous

Ammunition Production.Operations, Technical Report No. EM-TR-760l5,
Edgewood Arsenal, Abe rdeenvPr ovfng Ground, MD, December 1975.'.
36.
Kingery, C.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
48.
49.
N., Coulter, G'., and Pearson, R.', Venting of'Pressure
through Perforated Plates. Technical Report No. ARBRL-TR-02105, U. sG

Army Ballistic Research' Labor atory , Aberdeen Proving Ground, 'MD,
September 1978.
Kf.nge ry-, C. N., Pearson, R., and Coulter, G., Shock Wave Attenuation !u
Perforated,Plates with Various Hole Sizes, BRL'Memorandum Report No.
2757, U. S Army Materiel Development and Readiness Command, Alexandria~
VA; June 1977.
' ..
Kingery, C. N., Schumacher;.R., and Ewing, W., Internal Pressure from
Explosions in Suppressive Shields, BRL Memorandum Report No.. ARBRL-MR02848, U. S. Army Armament Research'and Development Command, Aberdeen
Proving Ground, MD, June . 1 9 7 8 ; '
,
.
Koger, D. M and McKown,G. L., Category 5 Suooressive Shield Test Report
No. EM-TR-76001, Edgewood Arsenal, Aberdeen Proving Ground,.MD, October
1975.
' ,
Kusher, A. S., et al., Recommended Design and Analysis Procedures for
Suppressive Shield Structures, Technical Report No. NSWCjWOL/TR76112,
Naval Surface Weapons Center, White Oak Laboratory, White Oak,. Silver.
Spring, MD, March 1977:
Nelson, K. P. Spherical Shields for the Containment of Explosions,
Edgewood Arsenal Technical Report No. EM-TR-76096, Edgewood Arsenal,
Aberdeen Proving Ground, MD, March .1977.
Nelson, K. P., The Economics of Applying Suppressive Shielding to the~
M483Al Improved ConventiomH Munitions Loading. Assembling, 'and Packing
Facility, Technical Report No. EM-TR~76087, Edgewood Arsenal, Aberdeen
Proving Ground, MD, January 1977. .
Oertel, F. H., Evaluation'of Simple Models for the Attenuation of Shock
Waves by Vented Plates ,. BRLReport No. 1906, U.. S. Army Ballistic
Research Laboratory, Aberdeen Proving Ground, MD, August 1976.
Pei, R., A Design Aid and Cost Estimate Model for Suppressive Shielding
Structures, Department of.Safety Engineering USAMC Intern Training ..
Center, Report No. YTC-02-'08- 76 -413, Red River Army Depot , Texarkana,
TX, December ,1975.
..,
Ricchiazzi, A. J. and Barb, J .. C., Test Results for 608 Gram Fragments
against Category I Suppressive Structures, BRL Memorandum Report No.
2592, U. S. Army.Ballistic Research Laboratory, Aberdeen' Proving 'Ground,
MD, February 1976.
Schroeder, F. J., et al., Engineering Design Guidelines, Drawings and
Specifications for Support Engineering of Suppressive Shields, Edgewood
Arsenal Contractor Report No. EM-CR-76097, Edgewood Arsenal, Aberdeen
Proving Ground, MD, December 1976.
Schumacher, R. N., 'Air Blast and Structural Response Testing of a
Prototype Category III Suppressive'Shield, BRL Memorandum Report No.
2701; U. S., Army Ballistic' Research Laboratory, Aberdeen'Proving Ground,
MD, November 1976.
.
Schumacher, R. N. and Ewing,'W. 0., Blast Attenuation Outside CubicalEnclosures Made Up of Selected Suppressive Structures Panel Configurations, BRLMemorandum Repor e. No ..2537. U. S .. Army 'Ballistic Research
Laboratory, Aberdeen Proving Ground, MD, September 1975.
Schumacher,. R'. N., Kingery, C. N., and Ewing,' W. 0:, Air Blast and
Structural Response' Testing of a 1/4~Scale Category I Suppressive'
GC-3
50.
Shield, 'BRL Mem,?r.andum Report No. 2623. U. S. Army Ballistic Research

Laboratory, Aberdeen Proving Ground, MD, May 1976.,
Spencer, A. F. and McKivrigan, J .. L., Preliminary Design Procedures for
Suooressive Shields, Technical Report No. EM-TR-76089, Edgewood Arsenal,
Aberdeen Proving Grpund, MD, December 1976~
51.
W'estine,. P.
52.
53.
S.'
and Baker, W..
K., Energy Solutions for Predicting
Deformations in Blast-Loaded Structures, Edgewood Arsenal Contractor

Report No. EM-CR-76027, Report No.6, Edgewood Arsenal, Aberdeen Proving
Ground, MD, November 1975.
Westine, P. S. and Cox, P. A., Additional Energy Solutions for
Predicting Structural Deformations, Edgewood Arsenal Contractor Report
No. EM-CR-76031, Report No.4, Edgewood Arsenal, Aberdeen Proving
Ground, MD. November 1975.
Westine, P. S. and Kineke, J .. H., "Prediction of Constrained Secondary
Fragment Velocities," The Shock and Vibration Bulletin, Part 2, Isolation and Damping, Impact, Blast, Bulletin 48, September 1978.
Blast Resistant Windows
54.
55.
56.
57.
58.
59.
60.
Federal Specification Glass., Plate. Sheet. Figured (Float, Flat. for

Glazing. Corrugated. Mirrors and Other Uses). General Service Administration, Federal Specification DD-G-451d, Washington, D. C., 1977,
Glass: Plate (Float). Sheet. Figured, and Spandrel (Heat Strengthened
and Fully Tempered). General Service Administration, Federal Specification DD-G-1403B, Washington, D.. C., 1972.
A Method for Improving the Shatter Resistance of Window Glass, U. S.
Army Picatinny Arsenal, National Bomb Data. Center, General Info,mation
Bulletin 73-9, Dover, NJ, November ..1973. ,
PPG Glass Thickness Recommendations to Meet Architect's Specified 1.Minute Wind Load, PPG Lndus t r Les , Pi~tsburgh', PA, March 1981.
Safety Performance Specifications and Methods ofTest for Safety Glazing
Material Used in Buildings, American National Standards Institute, ANSI
297.1,-.1975, New York, NY, 1975.
Structural Performance of Glass in Exterior Windows. Curtain Walls, and
Doors under the Influence of Uniform Static'Loads by Destructive Method,
American Society for Testing Materials, ASTM Standard (draft). Draft of
Proposed Standard by ASTM Committee E06.51, Philadelphia, PA, October
1982.
. _
Anians, D., Experimental Study of Edge Displacements of Laterally Loaded
Window Glass Plates, Institute for Disaster Research, Texas Technical
61.
62.
63.
64.
65.
66.
University, Lubbock, TX, June 1980.

Beason, W. L., A Failure Prediction Model for Window Glass, Texas
Technical, University, NSF/RA 800231, Lubbock, TX, May 1980.
Beason, W. L., TAMU Glass Failure Prediction Model. Preliminary Report,
Texas.A!ili University, College 'Station, TX, March 1982.
Beason, W. L... and 'Morgan, J. R., A Glass Failure Prediction Model,
submittedfor publication in the:Journal of the Structural Division,
American Society of Civil Engineers.
Levy, S., Bending OD Rectangular Plates with Large Deflections" NACA
Technical Note No .. 845.1942.
.
.
Meyers, G. E., Interim Design Procedure.for Blast-Hardened Window Panes,
567h Shock and Vibration Bulletin, Monterey, CA, October 1985.
Meyers, G. E., A Review of Adaptable Methodology for Development of a
Design Procedure for Blast Hardened Windows, Naval Civil Engineering.
Laboratory, Special Report, Port Hueneme, CA, August 1982.
6C-4 "

67.
68.
69.
70.
71.
Moore, D:' M.,' Propo'sed Method for Determining the Thickness of Glass in
Solar Collector Panels, Jet Propulsion Laboratory, Publication 8034',
Pasadena, CA, March 1980.
'
,
Moore, D. M., Thickness Sizing of Glass Plates Subjected to 'Pressure
Loads, FSA Task Report No. 5101-291. Pasadena, CA, August 1982.
'I'Lmo shenko , S. and Woinowsky-Kiiegei, S ... Theory of Pl'ates' and Shells,
McGraw-Hill Book Company, New York, NY. 1959. .
.J"
Vallabha~, C. V. G. and Wang. B./Y., Nonlinear Analysit of Rectangular
Glass Plates.by Finite Difference' Method, Texas Techni~al Un{versity,
Institute for Disaster Research, Lubbock, TX, June ,1981.
Weissman, S., et
a~ ..
'Blast Capacity Evaluation of 'Glass Windows and
Aluminum Window Frames', U. S. Army Armameiit 'Research and Development

Command, ARLCOCR-780~6, Dover, NJ, June 1978 ..
Underground Structures'
72.
73.
Fundamentals of Protective Des"igr(for, Conventional Weapons, TM 5-8551;prepared by U. S~ 'Army Engineer'Waterways Experimental Station,
Vicksburg, MS, November '1983' (Draft).
..
,..
Arya, et 'aI., Blast Capacity Evaluation of Bela'w-Ground Structures. "by'
Ammann & Whitney, Consulting Engineers, New York, NY. Contractor Report
ARLCO-CR-77006. U. S. Army Armament Research and Development'Command,
Dover, NJ, May 1977.
Eart~- Covered "Arch- Type .Hagaz ine
74.
75.
76.
77.
..,
,~
DoD Ammunition'and Explosives Safety Standards, Department of DefenseStandard, 6055.9-STD

'
Flathou,'W. J . et aI., Blast Loading and Response of Underground"
Concrete-Arch Pr~tective Structures WT-1420. U. S. Waterways Experiment
Statiori~,jackson, MS, Operation Plumbbob, Project 3.1, Chief, Defense'
Atomic Support Agency', Washington; D. C.
'.
Sound, A: R., Summary Report of Earth-Covered, Steel'Arch Magazine
Tests, Technical Progress Report No. 401, U. S. Naval 'Weapon Center ...
China Lake, CA, July 1965.
Weals: F. j H., Te'sts' to Deterihine' Separation Distances' of Earth- Covered
Magazines, U. S. Nayal Weap0I! Cerrte r , China Lake, CA, Anna Lsj of' the New
York Aca?emy of Sciences; Conference on Pr~vention of and Protection
against Acc'idental Explosion of Munitions; Fuels and Other Hazardous'

Moistures, Volume 152, Art. '1, October 1968.
'/
78.
79.
80.
Investigations Concerning' Feasibility of Vartous Designs for a Blast

Closure Device, by American Machine and Foundry Co., Chicago, IL, under
Contract No. NBy-13030, for U. S. Navy, Bureau of Yards and Docks,
Washington, D. C.
Shock Tube Test of Mosler Safe Company Blast Valve, BRL Information";
Memorandum No. 20, Explosion Kinetics Branch. Ballistic Research',
Laboratories', 'Aberdeen Proving Ground, MD, August 1959',.
Shock Tube Test of Mosler Safe Company Blast Valve, Phase II, BRL,
Information Memorandum No. 25, Explosion Kinetics Branch, Ballistic
Research Laboratories, Aberdeen Proving Ground, MD, August 1959 . .
6C-5
1M 5-l300jNAVFAC P-397/AFR88-22
81.
82.
83.
84.
Study of Blast-Closure Devices, AFSWC-TDR-62-l0, by American Machine and

Foundry Co; ,Chicago, IL for Air Force Special Weapons Center, Kirtland
Air Force Base, NM, February 1962.
'
Allen, F. C. et al., Test and Evaluation of Anti-Blast Valves for
Protective Ventilating'Systems, WT'1460, Operation Plumbbob, Project
31.5, available from the Office of Technical Services, Department.of
Commerce, Washington, D. C.' , , '
"
Bayles, J., J., ,Development of the B-D Blast-Closure Valve, Technical
Note No." N-546, U. S. Naval Civil Engineering Labo r a t ory , J::ort Hueneme,
CA, 'December 1963.
Bergman, S. and Staffors,' B., Blast Tests on Rapid-Closing Anti-Blast
Valves, Royal Swedish Fortification Admiriistration, Stockholm, Sweden,
November 1963.
85.
86.
87.
88.
. ,
-'
Breckenridge, T. A., Preliminary Development and Tests of a Blast-,

Closure Valve, Technical Note No. N-460, U. S. Naval Civil Engineering
Laboratory, Port Hueneme, CA, September 1962.
Chapler, R: So., Evaluation of Four Blast Closure Valves, Technical
Report R 347, DASA-13.l54, U. S. Naval Civil Engineering Laboratory,
Port Hueneme, CA, January 1965 (Official Use Only).
Cohen, E.,', Blast Vulnerability of Deep Underground Facilities as
Affected by Access and Ventilation Openings, Ammann & Whitney, Consulting Engineers, New York, NY, Proceedings of the Second Protective
'
Construction Symposium, R-34l, Volume I, The RAND Corporation, Santa
Monica, CA, 1959.
Cohen, E. and Weissman, S". Blast Closure Systems, Ammann & Whitney,
Consulting Engineers, New York, NY, Proceedings of the Symposium on

Protective Structures for Civil Populations, Subcommittee on Protective
Structures, Advisory Committee on Civil Defense, National Academy of
Sciences and National Research Council, April 1965.
'
"
M.
and Cohen, E., Review of Blast Closure Systems, ~ann
&
89.
Hassman,
90.
Whitney, Consulting Engineers, New. York, NY, 29th Symposium on Shock,

Vibration and Associated Environments, Part III, Bulletin No. '29,. u. S.
Naval Research Laboratory, Washington, D. July'196l, available from the
Office of Technical Services, Department of, Commerce, Washington,'D. C.
Hellberg, E. N., Performance of the Swedish Rapid-Closing Anti-Blast
Valve, Technical Note No. 439, Task Y-F 008.10-11, U. S. Naval Civil
Engineering Laboratory, Port Huenem~, CA, MaY,1962.
Jones, W. A., e t; al., A Simple Blast Valve', Suffield Tecbnd c a I' Note No.
113, Suffield Experimental Station, Ralston, Alberta, Canada, Defense
91.
Research Board, Department of National Defense, Canada, DRB Project No.
D89-l6-0l-09, February 1963.

92.
.'
93.
94.
Ort, F. G. and Mears, M. D., Development of the Closure. Protective
Shelter, Anti-Blast, 600 cfm, E19Rl, Technical Report CWLR-2269,

Chemical Warfare Laboratories, ~. S. Army Chemical Center, Edgewood, MD,
January 1959.
.
Stephenson, J. M., Preliminary Tests of the Stephenson Valve, 2nd
Report, Technical Note No. N-6l9. U. S. Naval Civil Engineering
Laboratory, Port Hueneme, CA, July 1964.
Stephenson, J, M., Test of German 'Sand-Type Filter, Technical Report
R263, U. S. Naval Civil ~ngineering Laboratory, Port Hueneme, CA,
November 1963.
Shock Isolation Systems,
6C-6
-e
TK,5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

95.
96.
97.
98.
99.
100.
101.
102.
103.
104.
A Guide for the Design of Shock Isolation Systems for Underground

Protective Structures AFSWC TDR 62-64, Air Force Special Weapons Center,
Kirtland AFB, NM, December 1962.
Handbook of Mechanical Spring Design, Associated Spring Corporation,
Bristol, CT, 1964.
Study of Shock Isolation for Hardened Structures, Department of the
Army, Office of the Chief of Engineers, Washington, D. C. AD 639 303,
June 1966.
Crawford, R. E. Higgins, C~ J., and Bultmann; E.H., A Guide for the
Design of Shock Isolation Systems for Ballistic Missile Defense Facilities, TR S-23, U.S.' Army Construction Engineering Research Laboratory,
Champaign, IL; August 1973.
Harris, C.M. and Crede, C.E., Shock and Vibration Handbook, McGraw-Hill
Book Company, New York, NY, 1961.
Hirsch, A.E., Man's Response to Shock Motions, David Taylor Model Basin
Report 1797. Washington, D.C. AD 4 36809, January 1964.
Platus, David L., et al., Investigation of Optimum Passive Shock
Isolation Systems, AFWL-TR-72-l48, 'Air Force Weapons Laboratory,
Kirtland Air Force Base, NM, November 1972.
Saffell, H.R., Development of Standard Design Specifications and
Techniques for Shock Isolation Systems, Document No. SAF-37, Vol. I,
U.S. Army Engineer Division, Huntsville, AL, August 1971.
Shigley, J.E., Mechanical Engineering Design, McGraw-Hill Book Company,
New York, NY, 1963.
.
Veletnor, A.
Design Procedures for Shock Isolation System for Under-
ground Protective Structures, RTD-TDR-63-3096, Vol. III,.Air Force

Weapons Laboratory, Kirtland Air Force Base, NM, January'1964.
6C-7
By Order of the Secretaries of the Army, the Navy and the Air Force:
Official:
CARL E. VUONO
General, United States Army
Chief of Staff
THOMAS F. SIKORA
Brigadier General, United States Army
The Adjutant General
Official:
D.E.BOTTORFF
Rear Admiml, United States Navy
.Commander, Naval Facilities Engineering Command
Official:
MERRILL A. McPEAK
General, USAF
Chief of Staff
EDWARD A. PARDINI, Colonel, USAF

Director of Information Management
DISTRIBUTION:
e-
U.S. Gowrnment Printing omce: 1993- 342-074172270

TM 5 1300

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Judul Asli

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

TM 5 1300

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

ARMY TM 5-1300

NAVY NAVFAC P-397

UApproved for public release; distribution is unlimited"

DEPARTMENTS OF THE ARMY, THE NAVY, AND THE AIR FORCE

TN 5-1300/HAVPAC P-397/APR 88-22

"8TRUCTlJRB8 TO RBSIST 'l'IIB EFFECTS OF ACCIDEH'I'AL EXPLOSIONS"

The design procedures provide

basis for quantitative

protection against propagation of explosions, damage tC) facilities, and loss

of life. Nevertheless, in a work of this magnitude it is expected that there

STRUCTURES TO RESIST THE EPFECTS OP ACCIDENTAL EXPLOSIONS

"Approved for public release; 'distribut'i:on is unlimited"

'This manual supersedes TM 5-1300INAVFAC P397IAFM 8822, dated 15 Jun~ 1969,

TH 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

CHAPTER 2. BLAST. FRAGMENT. AND SHOCK LOADS

TH S-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

CHAPTER 4. REINFORCED CONCRETE DESIGN

TH 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

TN 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

Prediction of Concrete Spalling . .

CHAPTER 5. STRUCTURAL STEEL DESIGN

Economy of Design of Protective 'Structures in the Inelastic Range

TK 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88"22

TK 5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88 c22

Dynamic Design Stresses for Connections . . . . .

CHAPTER 6. SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS IN EXPLOSIVE FACILITY DESIGN

TH 5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

LIST OF' TABLES

Specific Weight and Gurney Energy Constant for Various Explosives

Coefficient, Co. for various shapes

Steel Toughness . . '.'. . _. . . . . . . .

2-12 ' Coefficient of Friction for Concrete Foundation and Underlying

Heat of Detonation and Heat of Combustion . .

TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR' 88-22

Dynamic Design Stresses for Design of Reinforced Concrete E1e-

Static Design Stresses for Materials

TM 5-l300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

TM 5-1300/NAVFAC P-397/AFR 88-22

Free-field pressure-time variation

Peak incident pressure versus peak dynamic pressure, density of

Peak incident pressure versus the ratio of normal reflected

Negative.phase shock wave parameters for a spherical TNT explosion

Variation of reflected pressure as a function of angle of in-

Variation of scaled reflected impulse as a function of angle of

Pressure-time variation for air burst

sion on the surface at sea level

in free air at sea level

Blast loading categories

in free air at sea level

Peak positive incident pressure and scaled impulse for an explo.

sion on the surface at sea level

sion on the surface at sea level

Peak positive incident pressure and scaled impulse for an explo-

sion on the surface at sea level

positive'incident pressure, and

scaled impulse for an explo-

scaled impulsefor an explo2-72

scaled impulse for anexplo2-73

scaled impulse for an explo2-78

Peak positive incident pressure and scaled impulse for an explo2.-83

scaled impulse for an explo-

sion on the surface at sea level

scaled impulse for an,explo-